Samsung Electroménager Climatiser Plusieurs Pièces MH052FJEA - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels
Samsung Electroménager Climatiser Plusieurs Pièces MH052FJEA - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels
SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM
- Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung
- Revenir à l'accueil
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
COMMANDER un produit SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM
Liste des manuels APPLEListe des produits Sony Liste des produits Dell Liste des Manuels Samsung Listes des Manuels Konica Minolta
Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo 3D UE32D6300SS
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE32A437T2D
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV PDP PS50A466 PS50A466P2M
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LED UE46EH5300W
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LED UE37C6000UE37C6000RW
Samsung Informatique Moniteur LCD 770TFT
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 51" cерия 5 Full HD PS51E530 PS51E530A3W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE46EH5000W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE46D5000PW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 26" серия 4 HD LED UE26EH4000UE26EH4000W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 42" Серия 4 HD PS42C431A2 PS42C431A2W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 46" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE46EH5300 UE46EH5300W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные PS42A410C3 Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 40" серия 6 SMART TV 3D Full HD LED UE40ES6100 UE40ES6100W Russe
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE40B651LE40B651T3W
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE40B651LE40B651T3W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE55B7000WW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UE40ES7500S Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 40" серия 6 SMART TV 3D Full HD LED UE40ES6100 UE40ES6100W Russe4
Samsung Мобильные телефоны Мобильные телефоны C3510 TVGT-C3510T Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные PS42B430P2W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UE46D7000LS Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D LED телевизор 40" Серия 7 3D SMART TV Full HD UE40D7000L UE40D7000LS Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры 37" FULL HD LED телевизор серии 5 UE37EH5007KUE37EH5007K Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 32" Серия 5 Full HD UE32C5000Q UE32C5000QW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 46" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE46EH5307 UE46EH5307K Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры ЖК телевизор 40" Серия 5 Full HD LE40C530F1 LE40C530F1W Russe
Samsung Мобильные телефоны Смартфоны Samsung S6012 GT-S5830I Russe
Samsung Мобильные телефоны Смартфоны GT-S5830I Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры LE40C530F1W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UA55D6600WR Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 43" cерия 4 HD PS43E450PS43E450A1W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 32" серия 5 Full HD LED UE32EH5040 UE32EH5040W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 40" Серия 6 Full HD UE40C6000R UE40C6000RW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры LE32B450C4W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UA40C7000WR Russe
Samsung Бытовая техника Настенное крепление Настенная сплит-система "Стандарт" AQ07RLAQ07RLN Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UA40C5000QR Russe
TV Audio / Vidéo 3D 40", UE40D6200WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV UE40D6200TS
Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 32" Серия 4 HD UE32C4000P UE32C4000PW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D LED телевизор 40" Серия 6 3D SMART TV Full HD UE40D6100S UE40D6100SW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 55" серия 8 3D SMART TV Full HD LED UE55ES8007 UE55ES8007U Russe
Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 40" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE40EH5307 UE40EH5307K
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D LED телевизор 46" Серия 8 3D SMART TV Full HD UE46D8000Y UE46D8000YS Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 65" серия 8 SMART TV 3D Full HD LED UE65ES8007 UE65ES8007U Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE32D5000PW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Плазма 51" Серия 8 3D SMART TV Full HD PS51D8000F PS51D8000FS Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 40" серия 5 Full HD LED UE40EH5047 UE40EH5047K Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 40" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE40ES5537 UE40ES5537K Russe
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1EW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50Q96HD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C5100QW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B7020WW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PH-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ09UGFN-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-12-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-essentiel-Samsung-ES80-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF1702NHWG-YLE-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-U100-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E570-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5720RS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-R200-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A457C1D-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS08FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-France-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-UE40B7000WW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-300-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Monitors-2493HM-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-Exhibit-4G-Android-Smartphone-SGH-T759-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6500VQ-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerators-26-CU-FT-FRENCH-DOOR-REFRIGERATOR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-QX510-NP-QX510-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q35-NP-Q35T007-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9201NA-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9301NA-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-francais-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5150-gold-Open-market-GT-S5150-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-Neo-Forte-EHS-Hybride-NH022NHXEA-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels
Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels
Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-1674-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3100-gris-Open-market-GT-S3100-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000-UE32C4000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T23A350-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B350F1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-BD-P1600A-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-C6930W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26C4000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R719NP-R719-XA01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-Basic-Kit-64-GoMZ-7PC064B-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Samsung-Smart-Camera-NX210-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC8850-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-gril-niche-380-mm-23-L-FG87SST-FG87SST-XEF-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBSL-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBWQ-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Feature-Phone-GT-E1175T-Anglais-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C530-LE46C530F1W-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Nexus-GT-I9250-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-550-noir-Open-market-GT-I5500-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-WB100-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E430D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-Double-Dock-USB-Bluetooth-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YH-820MW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22B150N-Manuels
Samsung-Stockage-informatique-Graveur-DVD-Slim-External-8X-DVD-Writer-SE-208AB-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0S-Manuels
24ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6250FX-Samsung-Manuels
32-UE32D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6200TS-Samsung-Manuels
35-35ppm-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Samsung-Manuels
Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung
Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4000NW-Samsung
N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R730-Red-Gloss-NP-R730-JS01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-SGH-I320-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV510-NP-RV510-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7ANP300E7A-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D7000LS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1150-rouge-Open-market-GT-E1150-Manuels
Samsung-Téléphone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT08FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Style-Open-market-SGH-F480-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S03FR-Manuels
Samsung-RV511-NP-RV511-A06MA-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R590-Crystal-NP-R590-JS01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R530E-NP-R530-JT50FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C630-LE32C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-S850-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6530WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D6530WS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-City-blanc-Orange-GT-S5260P-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-2012-PS43E450A1R-43-inch-HD-Ready-Plasma-TV-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-Aspirateur-Robot-2-murs-Virtuel-Noir-SR8895-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2530-Open-market-GT-E2530-Manuels
Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405W-Manuels
Samsung-I9300-GT-I9300-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Mono-Multi-function-SCX-3405FW-Hong-Kong-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Samsung-GALAXY-S-III-GALAXY-S3-GT-I9300-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Music-GT-S6010-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Mounted-Fridge-Freezer-SR365TSS-Nouvelle-Zelande-Manuels
Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Loader-Top-Load-Washing-Machine-WA10W9-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Belgique-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-LCD-LED-S22C200BW-Hong-Kong-Manuels
Samsung-Camaras-Alta-definicion-Videocamara-HD-F80HMX-F80SP-Espagne-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-Sprzet-komputerowy-i-Drukarki-Notebooki-NP-R710-AS04PL-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-Informatica-LCD-2043SW-Portugues-Portugais-Bresil-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu-ray-HT-E3550-English-Anglais-Manuels
Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ES90-14.2MP-Digital-Camera-FIND-A-PRODUCT-SAMSUNG-ES90-English-Anglais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X1B-NP900X1B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0CFR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT50QMSW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46EH6030W-Manuels
Samsung-Home-Appliance-Side-by-Side-RSA1STMG-Arabe-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS59D6900DS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7C-NP700Z7C-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-Side-By-Side-RS6178UGDSR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-S730-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E590-Manuels
20ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6220FX-Samsung-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5100P-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT0BFR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF5FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C520-Hello-Kitty-Open-marketS-GH-C520-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-Player-mini-2GT-C3310-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A06FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5C-NP700Z5C-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-Z360-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A856-LE46A856S1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B620T2WXXC-LE40B620R3W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A568-LE40A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18FAN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D6200TS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-NL22B-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0BFR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A568-LE46A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-65-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE65ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-C6625-gris-Open-market-GT-C6625-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B8000WW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Corby-Pro-rouge-Open-market-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-SBS-A-507-L-Blanc-RSA1TWP-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D430DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A626-LE40A626A3M-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-GT-C3310-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3520-GT-C3520-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrig%C3%A9rateur-SBS-A-510-L-Inox-RSH5TERS-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-mono-23L-SILVER-ME82V-Manuels*
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D503F7W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-RSA1DTMG-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-6900-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-C5530-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B300BL-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-D4200-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730C-NP-R730-JB03FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-R-mix-YP-R1JCP-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-P2470HD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J770-Open-market-SGH-J770-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-DVD-5.1-HT-D350WXZF-serie-3HT-D350-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-6200FX-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-Smart-Camera-WB850F-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A456-PS50A456P2D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6570WS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-22-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T22A300-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-S2-YP-S2QB-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-24ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-2580N-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3710ND-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5003BW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P2500-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F700-SMX-F700BP-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R710-NP-R710-ASS1FR-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL101-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A566P1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46D550K1W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH026FWEA-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV07PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B850-PS50B850Y1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37D5000ZF-UE37D5000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH300WHXES-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40ES5700S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-60-UE60D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE60D8000YS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D403E2W-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST500-SAMSUNG-ST500-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-27-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T27A300-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1170-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40R86BD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C350-LE22C350D1W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J700-SGH-J700G-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-Gril-23L-SILVER-GS89F-1SPGS89F-1SP-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B5B-NP400B5B-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-12-5-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B2B-NP400B2B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-RC-RC730-NP-RC730-S05FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-3405W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-RC-RC530-NP-RC530-S03FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5-ANP300E5A-S08FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Lecteur-blu-ray-BD-D6900WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3DBD-D6900-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A568-LE37A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-24-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T24A350-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-G600-Open-market-SGH-G600-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E650-ZF-Double-Dock-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUXDA-E650-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-QF20BP-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-PL90-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C550-LE32C550J1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE23R86BD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450E1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A436T1D-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1151-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-P3YP-P3JCB-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique%20Multifonction-Monochrome-24ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4824FN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1A-3G-XE700T1A-H01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-F250-Open-market-SGH-F250-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730-NP-R730-JA05FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X3C-NP900X3C-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4.0-Blanc-8GoYP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D470DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-MM-D470D-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Solid-B2100-rouge-Open-market-GT-B2100-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U3B-NP530U3B-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Chat-335-gris-Open-market-GT-S3350-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B530P7W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF0702NBE-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D6750WWXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C7700-UE55C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E8300-ZF-Enregistreur-Blu-Ray-320-Go-SMART-HUB-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH893-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX100-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-365-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-305E5A-NP305E5A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-2-Gamme-Professionnelle-200A5B-NP200B5B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Samsung-Q3YP-Q3CB-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B3310bleu-Open-market-GT-B3310-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600B-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E250-Open-market-SGH-E250-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B350H-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S0BFR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES7000S-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-NP900X4D-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7CH-NP700Z7C-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z3A-NP700Z3A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-SUR40-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6510WS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-300V3A-NP300V3A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC10-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2160-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R720E-NP-R720-JS03FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT07FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-JS02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D5720RS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP550P5C-NP550P5C-T04FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D8000YS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV515-NP-RV515-S04FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3DUE46ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-2MP-Ecran-3-hVGA-Smart-Camera-Samsung-WB150F-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG40EA590LS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E8200-ZF-Barre-de-son-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-HT-E8200-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-CE117PPT-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-TV-UN50ES6350F-Coree-du-Sud-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-19ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4200-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-32-32ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-770ND-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-320-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9000-RW8-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels
Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels
Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels
Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels
Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels
Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels
Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels
Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels
Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels
Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels
SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels
Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels
Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels
Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels
Samsung-910MP-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels
Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels
Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels
Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels
Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels
Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels
Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels
Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels
Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels
Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels
Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels
Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels
Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel
Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels
Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels
Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels
Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels
Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels
Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels
Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels
Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels
Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels
Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels
Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels
Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels
17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels
40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels
CLX-3185FW Manuels
Galaxy Ace GT-S5830
Galaxy S II GT-I9100
Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16
Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16
Galaxy YGT-S5360
LE32C350 LE32C350D1W
LE40C630 LE40C630K1W
MM-C330D
MM-D330D
Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels
N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels
N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels
RSH5UEPN
SGH-F490
Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000
Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000
Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels
T23A550 T23A550
UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS
UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels
Wave 575 GT-S5750E
Wave II GT-S8530
16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung
16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung
samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels
Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels
| PRODUITS SAMSUNG : |
| Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S |
| Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide |
| Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
| Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S |
| Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 |
| Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets |
| Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes |
| Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S |
| Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360° |
| Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
| Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
| Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung |
| Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
| Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir |
| Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800 |
| G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100 |
| Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet |
| Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
| Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir |
| Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB |
| Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830 |
| Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes |
| Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes |
| Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique) |
| Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire |
| Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
| Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
| Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
| Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace |
| Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
| Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir |
| Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note |
| Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
| Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret |
| Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830 |
| Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830 |
| Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100 |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA |
| QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 |
| QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED |
| Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste |
| Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD |
| Samsung B5722 Double SIM |
| Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles |
| Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310 |
| Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB |
| Samsung batterie IA-BP420E |
| Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST |
| Samsung batterie SLB-10A |
| Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS |
| Samsung BD-E5300 |
| Samsung BD-E5500 3D |
| Samsung BD-E6100 3D |
| Samsung BD-E8300 3D |
| Samsung BD-ES5000 |
| Samsung BD-ES6000 3D |
| Samsung C3050 Stratus |
| Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1" |
| Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung |
| Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100 |
| Samsung CB20A12 |
| Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir |
| Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB |
| Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir |
| Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB |
| Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
| Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
| Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
| Samsung CLP-C300A |
| Samsung CLP-K300A |
| Samsung CLP-M300A |
| Samsung CLP-Y300A |
| Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi |
| Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0 |
| Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet |
| Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
| Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
| Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
| Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire |
| Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series |
| Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX |
| Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170 |
| Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 |
| Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile |
| Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel |
| Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose |
| Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi |
| Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui |
| Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi |
| Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui |
| Samsung E1150 - Silver |
| Samsung ES90 Noir |
| Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir |
| Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir |
| Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir |
| Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
| Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S |
| Samsung EX1 |
| Samsung Flash SEF15A |
| Samsung Flash SEF20A |
| Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android) |
| Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android) |
| Samsung Galaxy Note |
| Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc |
| Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue |
| Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc |
| Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir |
| Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre |
| Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet |
| Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi |
| Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android) |
| Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android) |
| Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir |
| Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB |
| Samsung HMX-F80 Noir |
| Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir |
| Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir |
| Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
| Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
| Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" |
| Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
| Samsung HT-D330 |
| Samsung HT-D350 |
| Samsung HT-D4500 |
| Samsung HT-D5000 3D |
| Samsung HT-E4200 3D |
| Samsung HT-E4500 3D |
| Samsung HT-E5200 3D |
| Samsung HT-E5530 3D |
| Samsung HT-ES4200 3D |
| Samsung HT-ES6200 3D |
| Samsung HT-ES8200 3D |
| Samsung HW-E350 |
| Samsung HW-E450 |
| Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android) |
| Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1" |
| Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX |
| Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220 |
| Samsung kit HDMI |
| Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm |
| Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm |
| Samsung LE32E420 |
| Samsung LE40D503 |
| Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500 |
| Samsung ML-2010D3 |
| Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi |
| Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
| Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
| Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
| Samsung MLT-D1052S |
| Samsung MLT-D1082S |
| Samsung MLT-D1092S |
| Samsung MM-D430D |
| Samsung MM-E320 |
| Samsung MV800 Noir |
| Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir |
| Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED |
| Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED |
| Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED |
| Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS |
| Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8 |
| Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200 |
| Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100 |
| Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
| Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
| Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED |
| Samsung PL210 Noir |
| Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go |
| Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal |
| Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante |
| Samsung PS43E450 |
| Samsung PS43E490 3D |
| Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung PS51E450 |
| Samsung PS51E490 3D |
| Samsung PS51E530 |
| Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go |
| Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go |
| Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED |
| Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes |
| Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display |
| Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED |
| Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED |
| Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D |
| Samsung S23B350H 23" LED |
| Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED |
| Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED |
| Samsung S27B350H 27" LED |
| Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions |
| Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
| Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions |
| Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi |
| Samsung SCX-4200A |
| Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
| Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi |
| Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
| Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0 |
| Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0 |
| Samsung SLB07A pour ST50 |
| Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000 |
| Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi |
| Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi |
| Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi |
| Samsung ST65 Noir |
| Samsung ST65 Rouge |
| Samsung ST66 Noir |
| Samsung ST77 Blanc |
| Samsung ST77 Noir |
| Samsung ST77 Rouge |
| Samsung ST77 Violet |
| Samsung ST88 Noir |
| Samsung station d'accueil |
| Samsung station d'accueil HD2 |
| Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
| Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR |
| Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED |
| Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED |
| Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D |
| Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX |
| Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir |
| Samsung UE19ES4000 LED |
| Samsung UE22ES5000 LED |
| Samsung UE22ES5410 LED |
| Samsung UE26EH4000 LED |
| Samsung UE26EH4500 LED |
| Samsung UE32EH4000 LED |
| Samsung UE32EH5000 LED |
| Samsung UE32ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
| Samsung UE37ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE40D5000 LED |
| Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE40EH5000 LED |
| Samsung UE40ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE46EH5000 LED |
| Samsung UE46ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
| Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise |
| Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron |
| Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose |
| Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10 |
| Samsung Wave 575 |
| Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi |
| Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi |
| Samsung WB690 Noir |
| Samsung WB700 Noir |
| Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS |
| Samsung WMN250M accroche murale |
| Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD |
| Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go |
| Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose |
| Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go |
| Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
| Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
| Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go |
| T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York |
| Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan |
| Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan |
| Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir |
| Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir |
| Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta |
| Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta |
| Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners |
| Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune |
| Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune |
| Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir |
| We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0 |
| We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0 |
| Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
| Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche |
| Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire |
| Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
| Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire |
| Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc |
| Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir
Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U
Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B
SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung E2550
Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur
Samsung ES30 Noir
Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D423
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE40D550
Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir
Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB
SAMSUNG ME106V-SX
Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction
SAMSUNG ME82V-SX
SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S
Samsung PL170 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43D450
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS59D530
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SC4340 noir ébène
Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19D4010 LED
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32D5000 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D5710 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB750 Noir
Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
http://www.samsung.com/us/support/owners/product/RF266AEBP
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP400B5B-S02FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/BD-C8500/XEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100405125800515/01960B-BD-C8200_8500-XEF-FRA-0323.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/MM-D470D/ZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120103150428464/AH68-02345F-MM-D470D-FRA-20120103.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP200B5B-A01FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300V3A-A01FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000ZBESFR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809172648710/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120716_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120611165201603/GT-P3110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120608_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000RWASFR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201203/20120329200748757/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.1_120126_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216180827802/GT-N7000_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.1_111104_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809173956440/GT-P7510_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120809_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111205085630494/GT-P7510_UM_Orange_Honeycomb_Fre_Rev.1.0_111202_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120713085451049/GT-P7510_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P7510FKAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Orange_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120629_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120517111406195/GT-I9070P_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.0_120510_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120424154452484/GT-P3100_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120424_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201209/20120917105131603/GT-P3100_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120801_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P5110TSAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120810190309322/GT-P5110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120808_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120614144504602/GT-P5110_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120614_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I5800DKABOG-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/uk/support/model/NP-R519-FA06UK-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201008/20100809184447671/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100722_cms.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201009/20100907222536765/GT-I5800_QSG_Open_Eng_Rev.1.1_100907a_cms.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525183942011/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_UK_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525175249448/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201105/20110530173657729/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Froyo_Fre_Rev.1.1_110527_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9001HKDFTM-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111212155049797/GT-I9001_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.3_111212_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LF22TOWHBDN/EN-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201211/20121102145205481/BN68-03899A-04.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP550P5C-T04FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE32D5720RSXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110517143435031/[UD5700-XN]BN68-03506F-03L04-0427.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9000RWYSFR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55D8000YSXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128101809663/02_FRA_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128101809663/01_ENG_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120314192959318/[UD8000-XN]BN68-03442T-00L04-0804.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120405165711377/2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE46ES6710SXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120405165711377/2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121110095845360/02-XTDVBEUE-FRA-1109.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121110095845360/01-XTDVBEUE-ENG-1109.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_FRA-0424.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_ENG-0424.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-RV515-S04FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/CD/201104/20110408115840622/DoC160-RV515-RV415-Scala2-15-14-AMD.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026202221731/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026202221731/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP900X4D-A01FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP350E7C-S0BFR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121022141232121/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121022141232121/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120518170921365/EN/english.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/DR/201205/20120521130845677/FR/french.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/ML-2160/SEE-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120322160533913/BN68-03304C-00.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120622172918410/BN46-00030A-Fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120622172918410/BN46-00030A-Eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55C7700WSXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502130400267/02230C-01-BD-E8900-ZF-0413.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502130543045/Smart_Hub-FRA-0309.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502133933796/AllShare-FRA-0221.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100426150918218/7Series_Power_consumption_LED_TV.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201005/20100529095515140/BN68-02590B-03L04-0518.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP700G7A-S01FR
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP305E5A-A01FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026193501356/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090428183905421/YPP3J-COMMON-ENGLISH3.0.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200904/20090407081834937/YPP3J-02154C-XEF-QG1.0-NOCD.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090428183905421/YPP3J-EUROPE-FRENCH3.0.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201005/20100504091945781/GT-E1151_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100311.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100324124741578/BN68-02592F-01L04_0316.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200805/20080520175711468_BN68-01409H-01L02-0429.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200805/20080530182204609_Pearl-France-01409H-Eng-0530.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LT24A350EW/EN-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300E5A-S08FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE22C350D1WXZF-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40R86BDX/XEC-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200703/20070322190622750_BN68-01169B-01L08-0313.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE40ES5700SXZF-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LT22A300EW/EN-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-U600HBAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200803/20080318192114953_SGH-U600_Eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200903/20090312154510796/SGH-U600_French_090311_Rev1.3.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090410095951906/SGH-U600_UG_090311_Rev1.3.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP305V5A-S02FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120420172612547/WB850F-CE_DoC_in_French.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/AQ18FAN-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200703/20070308174715062_FORTE_DB98-27531A_IB_F.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40B620R3WXXC-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200909/20090925093818484/BN68-02098D-01Eng-0909.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-Z360ZSAFTM-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200801/20080108134949406_SGH-Z360_UG_ORA_Fre_Rev.1.1_061123.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/EK-GC100ZWAXEF-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP900X4D-A02FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP700Z7C-S02FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-RC710-S02FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-E590NSAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200706/20070627104827281_SGH-E590_UG_Eng_Rev.1.1_070622.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/RS6178UGDSR/EF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120316175747467/DA99-01779L.pdf
https://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300E7A-S0CFR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/RT50QMSW1/XEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121119193716527/DA99-01906C_v0.6.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE46EH6030WXZF-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/sg/support/model/GT-I9300RWDXSP-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121117090011154/GT-I9300_UM_EU_Jellybean_Eng_Rev.1.1_121113_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121122102418917/GT-I9300_UM_SEA_Jellybean_Chi_Rev.1.1_121116_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201102/20110228142459539/DJ68-00558R_0.0.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-S5260RWPFTM
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE32C630K1WXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201003/20100322135354718/BN68-02802A-00Eng_0310.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-R530-JT50FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-R590-JS01FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-F480ESAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026124954559/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200805/20080509152035250_SGH-F480_UG_Fre_Rev.1.0_080509.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200911/20091118083418500/SGH-F480i_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_090527.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026124954559/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100415162800953/UPD_Guide_EN.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100329103902500/BN68-02655A-00L06-0304.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100324125247750/BN68-02655D-00L04-0304.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55D6300SSXZF
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111208190112921/Web_GSDVBEUA_FRE.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201106/20110630112704040/FR/french.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111208190112921/Web_GSDVBEUA_FRE.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/YH-820MW/ELS
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200508/20050829114410765_YH820-ELS-FRE0[1].0.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201106/20110630112704040/FR/french.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120718221859806/WB100_WB101_French.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216102348708/SX5DVBEU1A-ENG.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121009090604327/Win8_Manual_chs.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/sg/support/model/XE500T1C-H01SG-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/DP700A3D-A01FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121129094347177/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111208190558077/Web_GSDVBEUA-RUS.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE55ES8007UXRU-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE32D5000PWXMS
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128102909679/26_RUS_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE46D7000LSXBY
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200911/20091102085239468/BN68-01978J-02Rus_1027.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE46EH5300WXRU-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200805/20080520230647453_Carnelian_P410_W.Europ-0516.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_RUS-0424.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100325101925437/BN68-02692E-00L04-0304.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/PS42C431A2WXRU-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/UE46D5000PWXMS-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128135824882/UX9DVBEU1A_RUS.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201101/20110105125332353/Maldives_EUR_AQV09P_IBIM_32436A_F_12.28.10.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40C630K1WXZF-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/PS63B680T6WXXC-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200910/20091027091933953/BN68-02333J-02L09_1022_CMS.pdf
FRANÇAIS02_ dispositifs
Pour la future référence facile écrivez le modèle et le numéro
de série. Vous trouverez votre modèle et numéro à côté droit
du climatiseur.
Modèle #
Numéro de série #
dispositifs de votre nouveau
climatiseur
• Design fin et élégant
Le design extrêmement fin et compact de ce climatiseur lui permettra de s’intégrer aisément
dans tous les types d’intérieur.
•
La fonction produit l’hydrogène (H) et oxygène(O2) pour attaquer les contaminants
indésirables d’air tels que les bactéries, le pollen,et l’odeur. Elle vous fait respirer mieux
comme si vous restiez autour des chutes d’eau, de la vague d’océan, des fleuves et des
montagnes.
• 2 sorties d’air
L’appareil possède deux sorties d’air séparées : une pour la réfrigération et l’autre pour le
chauffage. L’air chaud sortant de la sortie d’air inférieure se propage uniformément à travers
la pièce.L’air est ainsi frais ou chaud dans tous les coins de la pièce.
• Système efficace de coût
Votre nouveau climatiseur fournit non seulement la force maximum de refroidissement en
été, mais peut également être une méthode efficace de chauffage en hiver avec le système
avancé de « Pompe à Chaleur ». Cette technologie est jusqu’à 300% plus efficace que
le chauffage électrique, ainsi vous pouvez plus loin réduire son coût de fonctionnement.
Maintenant, satisfaites les besoins pendant toute l’année avec un climatiseur.information de sûreté _03
FRANÇAIS
information de sûreté
Pour empêcher la décharge électrique, débranchez le courant avant d’entretenir, nettoyer, et installer l’unité.
INFORMATION DE SÛRETÉ
Avant d’employer votre nouveau climatiseur, veuillez lire ce manuel complètement pour vous assurer que
vous savez comment opérer sans risque efficacement les dispositifs et les fonctions étendus de votre
nouvel appareil.
Puisque les consignes d’utilisation suivantes couvrent de divers modèles, les caractéristiques de votre
climatiseur peuvent différer légèrement de ceux décrits dans ce manuel. Si vous avez des questions,
appelez au téléphone votre centre de contact plus proche ou trouvez l’aide et l’information en ligne à
www.samsung.com.
Ce que les icônes et signes dans ce manuel d’utilisateur veulent dire:
AVERTISSEMENT
Risque de mort ou de blessures sérieuses.
ATTENTION
Risque potentiel de blessures ou de dommages matériels.
ATTENTION
Pour réduire le risque de feu, d’explosion, de décharge électrique, ou de
blessures en utilisant votre climatiseur, suivez ces consignes de sûreté de base :
NE PAS essayer.
NE PAS démonter.
NE PAS toucher.
Suivez les directions soigneusement.
Débranchez la fiche électrique de la prise murale.
Assurez-vous que la machine est mise à la terre pour empêcher la décharge électrique.
Appelez au téléphone le centre de contact pour l’aide.
Consignes recommandées ou information utile pour l’usage.
Ces signes d’avertissement sont ici pour empêcher des dommages à vous et à d’autres.
Veuillez les suivre soigneusement.
Après avoir lu cette section, maintenez-la dans un endroit sûr pour la future référence.
SIGNES D’AVERTISSEMENT GRAVE
Ne coupez pas la fiche électrique et ne reliez pas à un câble électrique différent.
N’essayez jamais de rallonger le câble électrique.
• Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique.
Ne tirez pas le câble électrique et ne touchez pas la fiche électrique avec les
mains humides.
• Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique.
N’utilisez jamais une fiche électrique endommagée, un câble électrique, ou
un douille de jack détaché.
• Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique.
04_ information de sûreté
information de sûreté
SIGNES D’AVERTISSEMENT GRAVE
Ne placez pas le climatiseur près des substances dangereuses ou de
l’équipement qui libère les flammes libres afin d’éviter des incendies, des
explosions ou des dommages.
• Risque potentiel de risque d’incendie ou d’explosion.
Ne pulvérisez pas les gaz inflammables tels que l’insecticide près du climatiseur.
• Risque potentiel de décharge électrique, de feu ou de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité.
Ne bloquez pas ou ne placez pas les articles devant le climatiseur. Ne faites pas
un pas, n’accrochez pas sur, ou ne placez pas les articles lourds sur le climatiseur.
• Risque potentiel de blessures.
N’insérez rien tel que des doigts ou des branches dans les passages de climatiseur.
• Eloignez les enfants du climatiseur. Risque potentiel de blessures.
N’installez pas le climatiseur dans les secteurs exposés à la fuite de gaz
inflammable ou au risque potentiel de fuite de gaz.
• Risque potentiel de risque d’incendie ou d’explosion.
N’installez pas l’unité extérieure à un endroit instable tel que le haut mur
externe d’un appartement ou d’un bâtiment et sur un extérieur de terrasse
pour éviter de tomber.
• Si l’unité extérieure tombe, elle peut causer des blessures ou la perte de propriété.
Consultez l’endroit de l’achat ou un centre de contact pour démonter ou
réinstaller le climatiseur.
• Risque potentiel de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité, de fuite de l’eau, de décharge
électrique, ou de feu.
Ne reliez pas le climatiseur à l’appareillage de chauffage ou n’essayez pas
de le démonter, transformer ou réparer par vous-même.
• Risque potentiel de défaut de fonctionnement, de décharge électrique ou de feu. Si les
réparations sont nécessaires, consultez le centre de contact.
Consultez l’endroit de l’achat ou un centre de contact pour installer le climatiseur.
• L’installation inexacte porte un risque de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité, de fuite de
l’eau, de décharge électrique ou de feu.
• Pour l’installation dans des secteurs spéciaux, tels qu’un complexe d’usine ou un
secteur côtier salin, consultez l’endroit de l’achat ou un centre de contact pour les détails
spécifiques d’installation.
Installez le climatiseur avec le support solidement attaché à l’utilisation
pendant une période prolongée.
• Si le climatiseur tombe, il peut causer des blessures ou la perte depropriété.
Assurez-vous que le climatiseur est installé conformément aux récentes
normes nationales de sûreté.
Employez un disjoncteur nominal seulement.
• N’employez jamais les fils d’acier ou les fils de cuivre comme disjoncteur. Il peut causer le
feu, le défaut de fonctionnement d’unité.
Employez une source d’énergie exclusive pour le climatiseur.
• Risque potentiel de décharge électrique ou de feu.
Ne mettez pas l’effort anormal sur le câble électrique ou ne placez pas les
objets lourds là-dessus.
Ne pliez pas le câble électrique excessivement.
• Risque potentiel du feu ou de décharge électrique.information de sûreté _05
FRANÇAIS
Si le climatiseur devient humide, coupez le courant immédiatement et
appelez votre centre de contact plus proche.
• Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique.
Installez un disjoncteur exclusif de circuit et un disjoucteur exclusif de courtcircuit pour le climatiseur.
• Risque potentiel de décharge électrique ou de feu.
Si le câble ou la corde électrique est endommagé, le fabricant, un technicien
qualifié de service doit la remplacer pour éviter un risque potentiel.
Déconnectez le climatiseur de l’alimentation d’énergie avant qu’elle soit
réparée ou démontée.
Employez un réceptacle qui a une borne au sol. Le réceptacle doit être
employé exclusivement pour le climatiseur.
• La mise à terre incorrecte peut causer la décharge électrique ou le feu.
Assurez-vous que la mise à terre appropriée a été établi en installant le
climatiseur. Ne reliez pas le câble de masse de l’unité à une pipe de gaz, à
une conduite d’eau ou à une ligne téléphonique.
• Risque potentiel de décharge électrique.
SIGNES D’ATTENTION
Assurez-vous que aucune eau entre dans le climatiseur.
• Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique.
N’installez pas le climatiseur près des appareils de chauffage pour éviter des
dommages.
Arrêtez le climatiseur à l’aide de la télécommande ou de l’accessoire de
commande (si fourni). Ne débranchez pas pour éteindre l’unité (à moins qu’il
y a un danger immédiat).
N’ouvrez pas le gril avant lors du fonctionnement.
• Risque potentiel de décharge électrique ou de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité.
L’air frais ne devrait pas couler directement sur des personnes, des animaux
de compagnie, et des plantes.
• Il est nocif à votre santé, animaux de compagnie, et plantes.
Ne fonctionnez pas le climatiseur pendant une période prolongée dans une
chambre avec la porte fermée ou avec bébés, vieilles ou handicapées.
• En cas d’application résidentielle, rafraîchissez l’air dans la chambre (de l’air externe pour
empêcher le manque de l’oxygène), afin de garantir au moins 1-2 renouvellement/h. Pour
l’application différente l’air de renouvellement doit être garantie selon UNI 10339.
N’employez pas le climatiseur comme instrument de refroidissement de
précision pour la nourriture, les animaux de compagnie, les plantes,les
produits de beauté ou les machines.
• Risque potentiel de perte de propriété.
Ne buvez pas l’eau du climatiseur.
• Risque potentiel de risque sanitaire.
Ne donnez pas le choc excessif au climatiseur.
• Risque potentiel de feu ou de défaut de fonctionnement d’unité.
N’exposez pas le filtre de la poussière à la lumière du soleil directe tout en
séchant.
• La lumière du soleil directe forte peut déformer le filtre de la poussière.
Ne pulvérisez pas l’eau directement sur le climatiseur ou n’employez pas le
benzène, le diluant ou l’alcool pour nettoyer la surface de l’unité.
• Risque potentiel de décharge électrique ou de feu.
• Risque potentiel de dommages au climatiseur.06_ information de sûreté
information de sûreté
SIGNES D’ATTENTION
Ne placez pas les récipients avec le liquide ou d’autres objets sur l’unité.
Ne touchez pas la pipe reliée au climatiseur.
• Risque potentiel de blessures ou de brûlure.
Le climatiseur se compose de pièces mobiles. Éloignez les enfants de l’unité
pour éviter des dommages physiques.
Vérifiez des dommages sur la livraison. Si endommagé, n’installez pas le
climatiseur et appelez l’endroit de l’achat immédiatement.
Assurez-vous que la tension et la fréquence du système électrique sont
compatibles avec le climatiseur.
Insérez le filtre de la poussière avant d’opérer le climatiseur.
• S’il n’y a aucun filtre de la poussière à l’intérieur du climatiseur, la poussière accumulée
peut raccourcir la vie du climatiseur et causer la perte de l’électricité.
Maintenez les températures d’intérieur stables et pas extrêmement froides,
particulièrement où il y a des enfants, vieilles ou handicapées.
Nettoyez le climatiseur après que le ventilateur intérieur cesse le
fonctionnement.
• Risque potentiel de dommages ou de décharge électrique.
Nettoyez le filtre de la poussière toutes les 2 semaines. Nettoyez le filtre plus
fréquemment si le climatiseur est actionné dans des secteurs poussiéreux.
Inspectez l’état, les raccordements électriques, les pipes et la caisse externe
du climatiseur régulièrement par un technician qualifié de service.
N’ouvrez pas les portes et les fenêtres dans la chambre étant refroidie lors
du fonctionnement à moins que nécessaire.
Ne bloquez pas les passages de climatiseur. Si les objets bloquent la
circulation d’air, ça peut causer le défaut de fonctionnement d’unité ou
l’exécution faible.
Les matériaux d’emballage et les batteries utilisées de la télécommande
(optional) doivent être disposés selon les normes nationales.
Le réfrigérant utilisé dans le climatiseur doit être traité comme perte
de produit chimique. Disposez le réfrigérant conformément aux norms
nationales.
Faites un technicien qualifié de service installer le climatiseur et executer
une opération d’essai.
Installez le climatiseur loin de l’exposition directe à la lumière du soleil, à
l’appareillage de chauffage, et aux endroits humides.
• Accrochez un rideau pour amplifier l’efficacité de refroidissement et pour éviter le risque
de décharge électrique.
Reliez fermement la tuyauterie souple de vidange au climatiseur pour un
drainage approprié de l’eau.
• Si ce n’est pas drainé bien, l’eau condensée à partir de l’unité d’intérieur peut déborder
et fuir dans la salle.
Installez l’unité extérieure où le bruit de fonctionnement normal et la
vibration résiduelle (paramètres subjectifs) ne dérangeront pas votre voisin
et est bien aéré sans l’obstacle.
• Risque potentiel de défaut de fonctionnement.information de sûreté _07
FRANÇAIS
Installez une pipe dont longueur est conforme à la limite minimum et
maximum prescrite dans le manuel d’installation.
• avec la longueur différente d’indiqué, la performance et la fiabilité de système soit réduit
rigoureusement.
Si une panne de la source d’énergie se produit tandis que le climatiseur
fonctionne, coupez la source d’énergie immédiatement.
En nettoyant l’unité extérieure, touchez les ailerons de radiateur d’échangeur
de chaleur avec soin extrême.
• Porter les gants épais peut protéger vos mains.
Assurez-vous qu’il n’y a aucun obstacle sous l’unité d’intérieur.
• Risque potentiel de feu ou de perte de propriété.
Assurez-vous que les enfants prennent des précautions contre l’accès au
climatiseur et ils ne jouent pas avec l’unité.
La puissance et le courant maximum d’entrée et la puissance et le courant
d’entrée sont mesurés selon les règles données dans l’IEC/ISO.
Assurez à employer la télécommande sans fil jusqu’à une distance environ
de 7m de la sonde de télécommande du climatiseur.
• Le climatiseur peut ne pas fonctionner au delà de la distance de 7m.
Assurez-vous que la couverture ou aucun obstacle n’est près du climatiseur.
Permettez l’espace suffisant pour la circulation d’air.
• La ventilation insuffisante peut avoir comme conséquence l’exécution faible.
Des batteries devraient être enlevées de la télécommande sans fil et être
maintenues séparées si inutilisées pour la longue période.
Si l’échec ou le dommage se produit dans les conditions d’une utilisation
inexacte non suivis du manuel d’installation, les dépenses de réparation ne
seront pas couverte par la garantie produit.
• Risque potentiel de défaut de fonctionnement, décharge électrique ou feu si des
réparations ou les installations sont essayées par un technicien non-qualifié de service.
Assurez des commutateurs marche/arrêt et de protection sont correctement
installés.
N’employez pas le climatiseur si endommagé. Si les problèmes se
produisent, arrêtez immédiatement l’opération et démontez la prise de
l’alimentation d’énergie.
Si le climatiseur ne sera pas employé pendant une période prolongée (par
exemple, au-delà de plusieurs mois), débranchez le courant du mur..
Appelez l’endroit de l’achat ou un centre de contact si les réparations sont
necessaries
• Risque potentiel de feu ou de décharge électrique si le démontage ou les réparations
sont essayés par un technician non-qualifié de service.
Si vous sentez le plastique brûlant, entendez les bruits étranges,ou voyez la
fumée venir à partir de l’unité, débranchez le climatiseur immédiatement et
appelez un centre de contact.
• Risque potentiel defeu ou de décharge électrique.08_ contenus
UTILISATION DES FONCTIONS
AVANCÉES
20
20 Réglage de temporisateur
20 On timer
21 Off timer
22 Combinaison de l’On timer et l’Off timer
23 Utilisation de la fonction
NETTOYGE ET MAINTIEN DU
CLIMATISEUR
25
24 Nettoyage de l’extérieur
24 Nettoyage du filtre
24 Filtre à air
25 Filtre d’Anti-allergie
26 Remplacement du filtre
26 Filtre de désodorisation
26 Entretien du climatiseur
ANNEXE
28
27 Dépannage
28 Gamme d’opération
contenus
VISIONNEMENT DE VOTRE
CLIMATISEUR AVANT L’EMPLOI
09
09 Contrôle de l’unité intérieure
09 Pièces principales
10 Indicateur de modes et boutons de contrôle
11 Démontage du panneau frontal
11 Visualisation du bouton d’alimentation et des
parties situées sous le panneau
11 Contrôle de l’unité extérieure
12 Contrôle de la télécommande
13 Affichage de télécommande
13 Utilisation de la télécommande
13 Installation des batteries
OPÉRATION DE LA FONCTION DE BASE
14
14 Allumer et éteindre le climatiseur
14 Sélectionnement de la mode d’opération
14 Auto
15 Frais
16 Sec
17 Ventilateur
18 Chauffage
19 Ajustement de la direction de circulation d’air
19 Circulation d’air verticale
19 Circulation d’air horizontale contenus _09
FRANÇAIS
visionnement de votre
climatiseur avant l’emploi
Félicitations sur l’achat du climatiseur. Nous espérons que vous apprécierez les dispositifs de votre
climatiseur et resterez frais ou chaud avec l’efficacité optimale.
Veuillez lire le manuel d’utilisateur pour commencer et pour faire la meilleure utilisation du climatiseur.
CONTRÔLE DE L’UNITÉ INTÉRIEURE
Déballez soigneusement votre climatiseur, et vérifiez l’unité pour vous assurer qu’il n’est pas endommagé.
Pièces principales
Votre climatiseur peut légèrement sembler différent de l’illustration montrée ci-dessus selon
votre modèle.
Entrée d’air
Indicateur de modes et
boutons de contrôle
Sortie d’air
(Réfrégiration/chauffage)
Sortie d’air
(chauffage)
Levier des lames
d’aération
Levier des lames
d’aération10_ visionnement
visionnement de votre
climatiseur avant l’emploi
VÉRIFICATION DE L’UNITÉ INTÉRIEURE
Indicateur de modes et boutons de contrôle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A chaque fois que vous appuyez sur un bouton, un “bip” retenti vous indiquant ainsi que l’appareil
fonctionne correctement.
INDICATEUR
L’icone s’éclaire lorsque est opérant.
INDICATEUR MODE
VENTILATION
Cet icône s’éclaire lorsque l’appareil fonctionne en mode
ventilation.
INDICATEUR TIMER
L’icone timer (minuteur) s’éclaire lorsque la fonction minuteur
On/Off est activée.
INDICATEUR DE
DÉGIVRAGE
Cet icône s’éclaire lorsque l’appareil commence à dégivrer.
BOUTON
D’ALIMENTATION
Appuyez sur On/Off. Le climatiseur fonctionnera en mode Auto.
INDICATEUR
POWER
L’icône power (en état de marche) s’éclaire lorsque l’appareil est
en marche.
CAPTEUR DE LA
TÉLÉCOMMANDE
Dirigez la télécommande en direction de ce capteur situé sur le
climatiseur.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 visionnement _11
FRANÇAIS
DÉMONTAGE DU PANNEAU FRONTAL
Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et tirez-le vers vous-même. Décrochez la ficelle de sécurité et
soulevez le panneau frontal.
Visualisation du bouton d’alimentation et des parties situées
sous le panneau
Localisez le bouton Power parmi les autres indicateurs de modes. Ouvrez le panneau frontal afin
de visualiser le capteur de température et l’interrupteur Air flow Le capteur de température est
localisé sur la partie haute et gauche du climatiseur, juste au dessus de l’emplacement du filtre
anti-allergie/désodorisant. L’interrupteur Air flow est situé dans le coin haut et droit du climatiseur.
Vous avez la possibilité de faire fonctionner le climatiseur en mode Auto en appuyant sur le
bouton Power.
Lorsque vous placez l’interrupteur Air flow sur Auto, la sortie d’air s’ouvre que vous soyez
en mode réfrigération, chauffage ou ventilation. Cependant, en mode silence, la sortie d’air
inférieure se ferme, en mode réfrigération, elle se ferme dans l’heure. Lorsque vous placez
l’interrupteur Air flow sur Off, la sortie d’air inférieure se ferme.
Le capteur de température ambiante mesure la température ambiante de la pièce.
VÉRIFICATION DE L’UNITÉ EXTÉRIEURE
Entrée d’air (dos)
Valve de raccordement
(à l’intérieur)
Sortie d’air
���� ��
���� ��
���� ��
Utilisation de l’interrupteur
Air flow
Bouton Power
Capteur de température ambiante
L’aspect et le design sont sujets à modification selon le modèle.12_ visionnement
visionnement de votre
climatiseur avant l’emploi
VÉRIFICATION DE LA TÉLÉCOMMANDE
Vous pouvez activer le climatiseur à l’aide de la télécommande . En utilisant la télécommande, dirigez-la
toujours directement au climatiseur.
Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton, un signal sonore court retentira et un
indicateur de transmission apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande.
Affichage de
télécommande
Power
Allumer/ éteindre le climatiseur.
Mode
Régler une des 5 modes
d’opération. (voir les pages 14~18
pour des consignes )
Fonction de
temporisateur
Haut/Bas
Augmenter/Diminuer le temps.
Régler/Annuler
Configurer/Annuler la
temporisation en cours.
Marche/Arrêt
Réglez l’état Marche/Arrêt de
temporisateur.
Température
Diminuez/augmentez la
température de 1˚C.
Vitesse de ventillateur
Ajustez combien d’air traverse
le climatiseur avec les 4 vitesses
différentes de ventilateur telles
qu’Auto/Bas/Moyen/Haut.
Fonction
Marche/Arrêt
Emit hydrogen(H) and oxygen(O2)
in the air to remove polluted
substances such harmful
particles.
Émettez l’hydrogéne(H) et
l’oxygéne(O2) dans l’air pour
enlever les substances polluées
comme des particules nocives.
Mode Nettoyage
Réglez une des 3 types
d’opération .
Oscillation d’air
Activez/Déactivez le movement
de lame de circulation d’air
automatiquement en haut et
en bas. visionnement _13
FRANÇAIS
Affichage de télécommande
Indicateur
d’oscillation d’air
Indicateur de
mode d’opération
Indicateur de
batterie basse
Régler l’indicateur
de la température
Indicateur
Indicateur de
temporisateur
Marche/Arrêt
Installation des batteries
1. Glissez la couverture,
sur le dos de la
télécommande, vers le
bas pour ouvrir.
2. Installez deux batteries
AAA.
Vérifiez et assortissez
les signes “+” et “-” en
conséquence. Assurezvous que vous avez
installé les batteries dans
la position correcte.
3. Fermez la couverture en
la glissant de nouveau à
son position originale.
Vous devriez entendre
le bruit de clic quand la
couverture est bloquée
correctement.
Indicateur de vitesse
de ventillateur
Utilisation de la télécommande
• Dirigez la télécommande vers la sonde de télécommande de l’unité.
• Quand vous appuyez correctement sur le bouton sur la télécommande, vous entendrez le
bruit de signal sonore à partir de l’unité.
• Le signal ne peut être bien reçu des lampes fluorescentes de modèle d’éclairage
électronique, comme les lampes fluorescentes d’inverseur sont dans le meme espace.
• Si d’autres produits électriques fonctionnent par la télécommande, appelez votre centre
de contact plus proche.
Indicateur de transmission14_ opération
opération de la fonction de base
ALLUMER ET ÉTEINDRE LE CLIMATISEUR
Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande.
Vous entendrez le bruit de sonnerie et le panneau avant seront soulevés
vers le haut quand le climatiseur est correctement allumé. L’indicateur.
s’allume et s’éteint également.
Quand vous éteignez le climatiseur,l’indicateur, s’allume et
s’éteint , alors le panneau avant reviendra à sa position fermée.
Allumez/éteignez votre climatiseur sans télécommande.
Vous pouvez opérer votre climatiseur en appuyant sur le bouton Power au indicateur de mode du
climatiseur.
SÉLECTIONNEMENT DE LA MODE D’OPÉRATION
Auto
En mode Auto, le climatiseur règle automatiquement la température et la vitesse de ventilateur
selon la temperature ambiante détectée par le senseur de température ambiante.
1. Allumez le climatiseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande.
2. Réglez la mode d’opération.
Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande jusqu’à ce
que l’indicateur de la mode Auto et de vitesse du ventilateur
Auto apparaissent sur l’affichage de télécommande.
Le climatiseur réglera automatiquement la température et
la vitesse de ventilateur pour se refroidir ou chauffer selon
la température ambiante courante.
Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode, la mode
changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat.
3. Réglez la température.
Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature ou sur
la télécommande pour diminuer ou augmenter la
température désirée.
Vous pouvez régler la Température désirée entre la
gamme de 18˚C~30˚C.
Vous pouvez diminuer ou augmenter la température par 1˚C.
• Quand le climatiseur fonctionne déjà en une autre mode, appuyez sur le bouton Mode
jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de la mode Auto apparaisse sur l’affichage de télécommande.
• Quand vous employez la télécommande, assurez-vous que l’indicateur correct qui
s’assortit à votre choix apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande.
• La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.) opération _15
FRANÇAIS
Frais
En mode Cool le climatiseur refroidira votre pièce. Vous pouvez ajuster la température et la
vitesse de ventilateur pour sentir plus frais dans la saison chaude.
1. Allumez le climatiseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande.
2. Réglez la mode d’opération.
Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande
jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de la mode Cool apparaisse
sur l’affichage de télécommande.
Le climatiseur fonctionne en mode Cool et abaissera la
température dans votre chambre.
Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode, la mode
changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat.
3. Réglez la température.
Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature ou sur
la télécommande pour diminuer ou augmenter la
température désirée.
Vous pouvez régler la température désirée entre la
gamme de 18˚C~30˚C.
Vous pouvez diminuer ou augmenter la température par 1˚C.
4. Réglez la vitesse de ventilateur.
Appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed sur la télécommande
pour régler la vitesse désirée de ventilateur.
Si la température ambiante atteint la valeur désirée,
leclimatiseur coupera le refroidissement pendant un
moment et le ventilateur fonctionne.
Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed, la
vitesse de ventilateur changera par ordre d’Auto, Bas,
Moyen et Haut.
• Quand vous employez la télécommande, assurez-vous que l’indicateur correct qui
s’assortit à votre choix apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande.
• La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.)
• Si les températures extérieures courantes sont beaucoup plus hautes que la température
d’intérieur choisie, cela peut prendre du temps d’apporter la température intérieure à la
fraîcheur désirée.16_ opération
operation de la fonction de base
SÉLECTIONNEMENT DE LA MODE D’OPÉRATION
Sec
Le climatiseur en mode sec agit comme un déshumidificateur en enlevant l’humidité de l’air
d’intérieur. La mode Sec fait l’air se sentir rafraîchissant dans un climat humide.
1. Allumez le climatiseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande.
2. Réglez la mode d’opération.
Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande
jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de la mode Dry apparaisse sur
l’affichage de télécommande.
Le climatiseur fonctionne en mode Dry et ajuste
automatiquement la vitesse de ventilateur à Auto.
Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode, la mode
changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat.
3. Réglez la température.
Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature ou sur
la télécommande pour diminuer ou augmenter la
température désirée.
Vous pouvez régler la température désirée entre la
gamme de 18˚C~30˚C.
Vous pouvez diminuer ou augmenter la température par
1˚C.
• Quand vous employez la télécommande, assurez-vous que l’indicateur correct qui
s’assortit à votre choix apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande.
• La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.) opération _17
FRANÇAIS
Ventilateur
La mode de ventilateur peut être choisie pour aérer votre pièce. La mode de ventilateur sera utile
de rafraîchir l’air dans votre chambre.
1. Allumez le climatiseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande.
2. Réglez la mode d’opération.
Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande
jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de mode Fan apparaisse
sur l’affichage de télécommande.
Le climatiseur fonctionne en mode Ventilateur et ajuste
automatiquement la température selon la température
ambiante courante.
Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode , la mode
changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat.
3. Réglez la vitesse de ventilateur.
Appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed sur la télécommande
pour régler la vitesse désirée de ventilateur.
Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed, la
vitesse de ventilateur changera par ordre de Bas,
Moyen et Haute.
• Quand vous employez la télécommande, assurez-vous que l’indicateur correct qui
s’assortit à votre choix apparaît sur l’affichage de télécommande.
• La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.)18_ opération
opération de la fonction de base
SÉLECTIONNEMENT DE LA MODE D’OPÉRATION
Chauffage
Le climatiseur chauffe comme se refroidit. Chauffez votre pièce avec cet appareil souple dans le
froid de l’hiver.
1. Allumez le climatiseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton Power sur la télécommande.
2. Réglez la mode d’opération.
Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande
jusqu’à ce que l’indicateur de mode Heat apparaisse sur
l’affichage de télécommande.
Le climatiseur fonctionne en mode Heat et chauffe votre
pièce.
Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Mode, la mode
changera par ordre d’Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan et Heat.
3. Réglez la température.
Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature ou sur
la télécommande pour diminuer ou augmenter la
température désirée.
Vous pouvez régler la température désirée entre la
gamme de 18˚C~30˚C..
Vous pouvez diminuer ou augmenter la température par 1˚C.
4. Réglez la vitesse de ventilateur.
Appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed sur la télécommande
pour régler la vitesse désirée de ventilateur.
Si la température ambiante atteint la valeur désirée, le
chauffage s’arrêtera pendant un moment.
• Quand vous appuyez sur le bouton Fan Speed, la
vitesse de ventilateur changera par ordre d’Auto, Bas,
Moyen et Haute.
• Le ventilateur peut ne pas fonctionner pendant
environ les minutes 3~5 au début pour empêcher tous
les souffles froids tandis que le climatiseur réchauffe.
• La circulation d’air peut être ajustée manuellement. (voir la page19 pour des instructions.)
• Puisque le climatiseur chauffe la pièce en prenant l’énergie calorifique de l’air extérieur,
la capacité de chauffage peut diminuer quand les températures extérieures sont
extrêmement basses. Si vous vous sentez le climatiseur chauffe insuffisamment,
l’utilisation d’un appareil de chauffage additionnel en combination avec le climatiseur est
recommandé. opération _19
FRANÇAIS
AJUSTEMENT DELA DIRECTION DE CIRCULATION D’AIR
La circulation d’air peut être dirigée vers votre position désirée.
Circulation d’air verticale
Des lames de circulation se déplacent en haut et en bas.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton Air swing sur la télécommande.
L’indicateur d’oscillation d’air sera allumé et le nombre de voyants de signalisation se
déplacent en haut et en bas.
Les lames de circulation d’air se déplacent en haut et en bas sans interruption pour circuler l’air.
Pour maintenir la direction de circulation d’air dans une position constante, appuyez sur le
bouton Air swing sur latélécommande encore.
La direction du flux d’air vertical est ajustable lorsque le climatiseur refroidi la pièce.
Circulation d’air horizontale
Assurez-vous qu’une des goupilles de lame sortent des lames de circulation d’air ne sont pas cassés.
1. Déplacez le levier de goupille de lame à gauche ou à droit afin de maintenir la direction de
circulation d’air dans une position constante que vous préférez.
Afin d’éviter tout risque de blessure, déplacez les lames d’aération une fois le mode Air
Swing arrêté.
Lorsque le climatiseur refroidi la pièce, dirigez les lames d’aération vers le haut. Si le
climatiseur fonctionne en mode réfrigération pour une période prolongée avec les lames
dirigées vers le bas, la différence de température peut créer de l’humidité et engendrer des
électrocutions ou un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
Cooling/Heating
Heating
ATTENTION20_ utilisation des functions avancées
utilisation des fonctions avancées
RÉGLAGE DE TEMPORISATEUR
Cette fonction avançée de temporisateur vous permet d’allumer/éteindre votre climatiseur automatiquement meme
lorsque vous êtes parti. Réglez simplement l’heure et votre climatiseur s’allume/ s’éteigne automatiquement.
On timer
Cette fonction vous permet d’allumer le climatiseur automatiquement dans le gammne de temps
de 24 heures. Le temporisateur Allumé est disponible tandis que votreclimatiseur est allumé/éteint.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton On sur la télécommande.
L’indicateur d’On timer clignote sur l’affichage de
télécommande.
2. Réglez l’heure où vous voulez que le climatiseur s’allume
automatiquement.
Appuyez sur le bouton Up ou Down sur la
télécommande pour changer la configuration de temps
tandis que l’indicateur d’On timer clignote. Vous pouvez
régler l’heure jusqu’à 24 heures, augmentant en l’unité
de 30 minutes pour les 3 premières heures et en l’unité
horaire après les 3 premières heures.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande
à l’activer.
L’affichage de télécommande montrera le heure(s) que vous avez réglé.
Le climatiseur fonctionnera automatiquement au temps préglé et alors l’indicateur d’On timer
disparaît. Si l’On timer n’est pas réglé dans 10 secondes, le climatiseur finira le réglage.
4. Réglez la mode d’opération.
Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande
jusqu’à ce que la mode désirée apparaisse sur l’affichage
de télécommande.
Le climatiseur fonctionnera en mode que vous réglez.
La fonction On timer est disponible dans la mode Auto/
Cool/Dry/Fan/Heat.
• La température peut également être ajustée. (voir l’étape 3 à la page 15 pour des instructions.)
• Après l’installation tandis que l’unité est éteinte, approximativement après 10 seconds,
tout les autres indicateurs diaparaitront excepté l’indicateur On timer et le temps restant.
• Le réglage du temps vous permet de changer en appuyant sur le bouton On. Appuyez
sur le bouton Up ou Down pour changer la configuration de temps et puis appuyez sur
le bouton Set/Cancel à l’activer. utilisation des functions avancées _21
FRANÇAIS
Pour déactiver l’On timer
1. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande.
L’On timer que vous réglez sera annulé et l’indicateur d’On timer disparaîtra.
Off timer
Cette fonction vous permet d’éteindre le climatiseur automatiquement dans la gamme de temps
de 24 heures. L’Off timer est fonctionnel quand l’unité fonctionne.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton Off sur la télécommande.
L’indicateur d’Off timer clignote sur l’affichage de
télécommande.
2. Réglez l’heure où vous voulez éteindre le climatiseur
automatiquement.
Appuyez sur le bouton Up ou Down sur la
télécommande pour changer la configuration de temps
tandis qu l’indicateur d’Off timer clignote. Vous pouvez
régler l’heure jusqu’à 24 heures, augmentant en l’unité
de 30 minutes pour les 3 premières heures et en l’unité
horaire après les 3 premières heures.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande
à l’activer.
L’affichage de télécommande montrera le(s) heure(s) que vous avez réglé.
Le climatiseur fonctionnera automatiquement au temps réglé et alors l’indicateur d’Off timer
disparaît. Si l’Off timer n’est pas réglé dans 10 secondes, le climatiseur finira le réglage.
• Le réglage du temps vous permet de changer en appuyant sur le bouton Off. Appuyez
sur le bouton Up ou Down pour changer la configuration de temps et puis appuyez sur
le bouton Set/Cancel à l’activer.
• Vous pouvez combiner la fonction Off timer avec sur la fonction On timer pour allumer et
éteindre ensuite le climatiseur au temps désiré. (voir la page 23 pour des instructions.)
Pour déactiver l’Off timer
1. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande.
L’Off timer que vous avez réglé sera annulé et l’indicateur d’Off timer disparaîtra.
La fonction Off timer est disponible dans la mode Auto/Cool/Dry/Fan/Heat.22_ utilisation des functions avancées
utilisation des fonctions avancées
RÉGLAGE DE TEMPORISATEUR
Combinaison de l’On timer et l’Off timer
Vous pouvez combiner the On timer et Off timer ensemble pour un usage plus commode de la
fonction de temporisateur.
1. Réglez l’On timer.
Appuyez sur le bouton On.
Réglez l’heure avec le bouton Up et Down.
Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel pour activer l’On timer.
Voir la page 21 pour plus d’instructions en détail à
propos de la configuration d’On timer.
2. Réglez l’Off timer.
Appuyez sur le bouton Off.
Réglez l’heure avec le bouton Up et Down.
Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel pour activer l’Off timer.
Quand vous réglez l’heure, il y a deux options possibles:
L’On timer est plus court que l’ Off timer
Le climatiseur s’allumera et puis s’éteindra
automatiquement. La configuration devrait être faite
tandis que le climatiseur est éteint.
Par exemple, si l’On timer est réglé à 3 heures
et l’Off timer à 5 heures, le climatiseur s’éteindra
automatiquement 3 heures après le temps réglé et
fonctionne alors pendant des 2 heures suivantes avant
de s’éteindre automatiquement.
L’On timer est plus long que l’ Off timer
Le climatiseur s’éteindra et puis s’allumera
automatiquement. La configuration devrait être faite
tandis que le climatiseur fonctionne.
Par exemple, si l’On timer est réglé à 3 heures
et l’Off timer à 1 heure, le climatiseur s’éteindra
automatiquement une heure après le temps réglé
et reste éteint pendant 2 heures avant de s’allumer
automatiquement.
Voir la page 22 pour plus d’instructions en détail à propos de la configuration de l”Off timer.
Pour déactiver la combinaison de temporisateur
1. Appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande.
Tous les deux temporisateur On timer et Off timer seront annulés et les indicateurs
disparaîtront. utilisation des functions avancées _23
FRANÇAIS
UTILISATION DE LA FONCTION
MPI, l’ion de micro plasma, la zone produit de l’hydrogène (H) et de l’oxygène (O2
) pour enlever une
substance et une décomposition polluée de telles particules nocives. Il vous fait à respirer mieux comme
si vous restiez autour des chutes d’eau, de la vague de mer, des fleuves et des montagnes. L’indicateur
sur l’unité intérieure s’allume et s’éteigne continument quand la fonction est activée.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton On/Off sur la
télécommande tandis ue le climatiseur est éteint.
Lindicateur apparaîtra sur l’affichage de
télécommande.
Le climatiseur produit de MPI en mode Auto.
2. Réglez le type d’opération.
Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton Clean Mode
tandis que le climatiseur est éteint, le type d’opération
changera par ordre d’ Auto, Silence et Rapid.
Auto : ajuste la vitesse de ventilateur
automatiquement.
Silence : fonctionne à une vitesse minimum de
ventilateur tranquillement.
Rapid : fonctionne à une vitesse maximum de
ventilateur pour nettoyer et épurer l’air
efficacement et rapidement.
Le bouton Clean Mode ne fonctionnera pas tandis que le climatiseur est allumé.
Quand vous activez la fonction tandis que le climatiseur est allumé,la fonction
sera réglée automatiquement à Auto.
Pour déactiver la mode
1. Appuyez sur le bouton On/Off sur la télécommande.
La mode que vous réglez sera annulé et la lumière bleue s’éteindra.24_ utilisation des functions avancées
nettoyage et maintien du
climatiseur
NETTOYAGE DE L’EXTÉRIEUR
1. Essuyez la surface de l’unité avec un tissu légèrement humide ou sec
une fois nécessaire.
N’employez pas le benzène, le diluant ou le Clorox
TM
.
Ils peuvent endommager la surface du filtre à air et peuvent créer un
risque du feu.
NETTOYAGE DU FILTRE
En nettoyant le filtre, veillez à débrancher le courant à partir de l’unité. Aucun outil spécial n’est nécessaire
pour la nettoyer.
Filtre à Air
La mousse lavable base sur le filtre à air capture des particules grands de l’air. Le filtre est
nettoyé avec un vide ou lavage à la main. L’indicateur de nettoyage du filtre s’éclaire lorsque le
filtre nécessite d’être nettoyé.
1. Ouvrir le panneau frontal.
Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et
tirez-le vers vous-même. Décrochez la ficelle
de sécurité et soulevez le panneau frontal.
2. Saisissez la poignée et pressez
légèrement le filtre à air vers le
bas afin de le courber. Tirez le
filtre à air vers vous et soulevezle afin de le retirer.
3. Nettoyez le filtre à air avec un aspirateur ou une brosse molle. Si la poussière est trop lourde,
alors rincez-le avec de l’eau courant et séchez-le dans un secteur aéré.
• Pour les meilleures conditions, répétez toutes les deux semaines.
• Si le filtre à air sèche dans un secteur confiné (ou humide), les odeurs peuvent se
produire. S’il se produit, nettoyez de nouveau et séchez-le dans un secteur bien-aéré.
4. Insérez le dos de filtre à air à air dans son position originale.
5. Refermer le panneau frontal.
Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et placez sa partie inférieure en premier, puis
poussez le panneau.
6. Appuyez sur le bouton Filter Reset situé sur la télécommande.
ATTENTION
���� ��
���� �� utilisation des functions avancées _25
FRANÇAIS
nettoyage et maintien du
climatiseur
NETTOYAGE DU FILTRE
Filtre d’anti-allergie
La mousse lavable basé sur le filtre d’anti-allergie mène à la réduction en allergènes qui
prospèrent en air pollué.
1. Ouvrir le panneau frontal.
Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et
tirez-le vers vous-même. Décrochez la ficelle
de sécurité et soulevez le panneau frontal.
2. Saisissez la poignée et pressez légèrement le filtre à air vers le bas afin de le courber. Tirez le
filtre à air vers vous et soulevez-le afin de le retirer.
3. Tirez et faite coulissez le filtre d’anti-allergie pour le retirer.
4. Nettoyez le filtre d’anti-allergie avec un aspirateur
ou une brosse molle. Alors rincez-le avec de l’eau
courante et séchez-le dans un secteur aéré.
5. Installez le dos de filtre d’anti-allergie en position.
6. Refermer le panneau frontal.
Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et placez sa partie inférieure en premier, puis
poussez le panneau.
Nettoyez le filtre d’anti-allergie tous les 3 mois. La limite de nettoyage peut différer sur
l’utilisation et les conditions environnementales. 26_ utilisation des functions avancées
REMPLACEMENT DU FILTRE
Le filter de rechange peut être acheté du magasin de detail au détail ou être commandé du revendeur où
vous avez acheté l’unité. Si vous ne pouvez pas trouver un, veuillez appelez un centre de contact.
Filtre de désodorisation
Le filtre de désodorisation absorbe efficacement la fumée de cigarette, l’odeur des animaux de
compagne et d’autres odeurs désagréables.
Le nettoyage de filtre de désodorisation est simple, juste enlevez le vieux filtre et installez un
neuf.
1. Ouvrir le panneau frontal.
Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal
et tirez-le vers vous-même. Décrochez la
ficelle de sécurité et soulevez le panneau
frontal.
2. Saisissez la poignée et pressez légèrement le filtre à air vers le bas afin de le courber. Tirez le
filtre à air vers vous et soulevez-le afin de le retirer.
3. Tirez et faite coulissez le filtre désodorisant pour le retirer.
4. Installez le dos de nouveau filtre de désodorisation en position.
5. Refermer le panneau frontal.
Saisissez la partie haute du panneau frontal et placez sa partie inférieure en premier, puis
poussez le panneau.
• La synchronisation de remplacement du filtre de désodorisation diffère selon l’utilisation et
les conditions environnementales.
• Même si des filtres de désodorisation et d’anti-allergie sont installés dans une position
inversée, elle n’affectera pas son système de filtration.
ENTRETIEN DU CLIMATISEUR
Si le climatiseur n’est pas utilisé pendant une période prolongée, séchez-le complètement et déconnecter-le
du mur. De l’humidité restant dans les composants peut endommager l’appareil.
1. Avant de stocker le climatiseur, faite-le fonctionner en mode ventilation pendant trois ou
quatre heures afin de le sécher complètement.
2. Après une période de stockage, séchez les composants internes du climatiseur une nouvelle
fois à l’aide du mode ventilation pendant trois ou quatre heures afin d’éliminer les mauvaises
odeurs crées par l’humidité.nettoyage et maintien _27
FRANÇAIS
annexe
DÉPANNAGE
Référez-vous au diagramme suivant si le climatiseur fonctionne anormalement. Ceci peut sauver le temps et
les dépenses inutiles.
PROBLÈME SOLUTION
Le climatiseur ne
fonctionne pas juste après
qu’il a été remis en marche.
• En raison du mécanisme protecteur, l’appareil ne commence pas à
fonctionner immédiatement pour garder l’unité à partir de la surcharge.
Le climatiseur commencera en 3 minutes.
Le climatiseur ne
fonctionne pas du tout.
• Vérifiez si la prise de courant est correctement reliée. Insérez la prise de
courant dans la prise murale correctement.
• Vérifiez si le disjoncteur est coupé.
• Vérifiez s’il y a une panne de courant.
• Vérifiez votre fusible. Assurez-vous qu’il n’est pas cassé.
La température ne
change pas.
• Vérifiez si vous choisissiez la mode Fan.
Appuyez sur le bouton Mode sur la télécommande pour choisir une autre
mode.
L’air frais(tiéde) ne sort
pas du climatiseur.
• Vérifiez si la température réglé est supérieure (inférieur) à la température
courante. Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature sur la télécommande pour
changer la température réglée. Appuyez sur le bouton Temperature ou
pour diminuer ou augmenter la température.
• Vérifiez si le filtre à air est bloqué par la saleté. Nettoyez le filtre à air toutes
les deux semaines.
• Vérifiez si le climatiseur juste a été allumé. Si oui, attendez 3minutes.
La vitesse de ventilateur
ne change pas.
• Vérifiez si vous choisissiez la mode Auto ou Dry.
Le climatiseur ajuste automatiquement la vitesse de ventilateur à en mode
Auto/Dry.
La fonction de
temporisateur n’est pas
réglée.
• Vérifiez si vous appuyez sur le bouton Set/Cancel sur la télécommande
après que vous ayez réglé l’heure.
Les odeurs imprègnent
dans la chambre lors du
fonctionnement.
• Vérifiez si l’appareil fonctionne dans un secteur fumeux ou s’il y a une
odeur entrant de l’extérieur. Opérez le climatiseur en mode Fan ou ouvrez
les fenêtres pour aérer la pièce.
Le climatiseur fait un
bruit de bouillonnement.
• Un bruit de bouillonnement peut être entendu quand le refrigerant circule
par le compresseur. Laissez le climatiseur fonctionner en mode choisi.
L’eau s’égoutte des
lames de circulation d’air.
• Vérifiez si le climatiseur s’était refroidi pendant une période prolongée avec
les lames de circulation d’air dirigées vers le bas. La condensation peut se
produire en raison de la différence dans la température.
La télécommande ne
fonctionne pas.
• Vérifiez si vos batteries sont épuisées.
• Assurez-vous que des batteries sont correctement installées.
• Assurez-vous que rien ne bloque votre sonde de télécommande.
• Vérifiez s’il y a les appareillages forts d’éclairage près du climatiseur. La
lumière forte qui vient des ampoules fluorescentes ou des signes au néon
peut interrompre les vagues électriques.28_ annexe
GAMMES D’OPÉRATION
La table ci-dessous indique la gamme de la température et des humidités avec lesquelles le climatiseur
peuvent être opérées. Référez-vous à la table pour l’usage efficace.
MODE CONDTIONS D’OPÉRATION SI EN DEHORS DES CONDITIONS
COOL
Température intérieure :
16°C~32°C - Un dispositif de sécurité arrêtera continûment
le fonctionnement de système ;
- La condensation peut se produire sur l’unité
d’intérieur avec le risque de laisser de l’eau sur
le plancher ;
Humidité intérieure : au-dessous
de 80%
Température extérieure :
-5°C~43°C
HEAT
Température intérieure: audessous de 27°C - Un dispositif de sécurité arrêtera continûment
Température extérieure : le fonctionnement de système ;
-15°C~24°C
DRY
Température intérieure :
16°C~32°C - Un dispositif de sécurité arrêtera continûment
le fonctionnement de système ;
- La condensation peut se produire sur l’unité
d’intérieur avec le risque de laisser de l’eau sur
le plancher ;
Humidité intérieure : au-dessous
de 80%
Température extérieure :
-5°C~43°C
POWER SUPPLY
Tension nominale monophasé
limite minimum et maximum
220V-240V~50Hz
198V min.-264V max.
• N’importe quels dommages se produisent hors de la condition indiquée ne peuvent pas être
couverte par la garantie de produit.Si le système fonctionne continument en dehors de des
conditions, son performace et fiabilité seront compromis.
• Si la température extérieure est aussi basse que 0°C, la capacité de chauffage peut chuter selon la
condition de fonctionnement.annexe _29
FRANÇAIS
BN68-03043A-00
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.
Country Customer Care Centre Web Site
ArMeNIA 0-800-05-555 -
AUSTrIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at
AzerBAIjAN 088-55-55-555 -
BelArUS 810-800-500-55-500 -
BelGIUM 02-201-24-18
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
CzeCH
800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
DeNMArK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com/dk
ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com
FINlAND 030 - 6227 5 15 www.samsung.com/fi
FrANCe 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com/fr
GerMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864 € 0,14/Min) www.samsung.com/de
GEOrGIA 8-800-555-555 -
HUNGArY 06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu
eIre 0818 717100 www.samsung.com/ie
ITAlIA 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/it
KAzAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 -
KYrGYzSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com
lATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com
lITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com
lUXeMBUrG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu
MOldOvA 00-800-500-55-500 -
NeTHerlANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl
NOrWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com/no
POlANd
0 801 1SAMSUNG(172678)
022-607-93-33
www.samsung.com/pl
POrTUGAl 80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt
rUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.com
SlOvAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/sk
SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) www.samsung.com/es
SWEdEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/se
SWITZErlANd 0848 - SAMSUNG(7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/(French)
TADjIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com
U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk
UKrAINe 0-800-502-000
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
UzBeKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com
LCD TV
user manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Model Serial No.
LCD TV user manual
BN68-03043A-Cover.indd 1 2010-04-26 �� 9:28:28Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance.
Product design and specifications may be changed without notice.
❑ License
TruSurround HD, SrS and symbol are trademarks of SrS labs, Inc. TruSurround HD technology is
incorporated under license from SrS labs, Inc.
Manufactured under license from dolby laboratories. dolby and the double-d symbol are trademarks of
Dolby laboratories.
❑ Digital TV Notice
1. Functionalities related to digital Tv(dvB) are only available in countries/areas where dvB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AvC) digital
terrestrial signals are broadcasted or where you are able to access to a compatible dvB-C(MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC) cableTv service. Please check with your local dealer the possibility to receive dvB-T or dvB-C signal.
2. DVB-T is the DVB european consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVBC is that for the broadcast transmission of digital Tv over cable. However, some differentiated features like EPG (Electric
Programme Guide), vOd (video on demand) and so on, are not included in this specification. So, they cannot be workable at
this moment.
3. Although this TV set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards, as of [August, 2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T
digital terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed.
4. Depending on the countries/areas where this TV set is used some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for such a
service and you may be required to agree to terms and conditions of their business.
5. Some digital Tv functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and dvB-C might not work correctly with some
cable service providers.
6. For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre.
❑ Precautions When Displaying a Still Image
A still image may cause permanent damage to the TV screen
● Do not display a still image and partially still on the lCD panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention.
This image retention is also known as “screen burn”. To avoid such image retention, reduce the degree of brightness and
contrast of the screen when displaying a still image.
● Watching the lCd Tv in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the
left, right and centre of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen. Playing a dvd or
a game console may cause a similar effect to the screen. Damages caused by the above effect are not
covered by the Warranty.
● displaying still images from video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after-images. To
prevent this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ when displaying still images.
© 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. All rights reserved.
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:23English - 1
❑ Symbol
N O T
Note One-Touch Button TOOlS Button Press
GENERAL INFORMATION
■ viewing the Control Panel ....................................................2
■ Accessories .........................................................................3
■ viewing the Connection Panel..............................................4
■ remote Control ....................................................................6
■ Installing Batteries in the remote Control ............................6
OPERATION
■ Viewing the menus ...............................................................7
■ Placing Your Television in Standby Mode.............................8
■ Plug & Play Feature..............................................................8
■ Viewing the Display ..............................................................9
CHANNEL CONTROL
■ Configuring the Channel Menu.............................................9
■ Managing Channels ...........................................................12
PICTURE CONTROL
■ Configuring the Picture Menu.............................................14
■ Using Your Tv as a Computer (PC) display.......................16
■ Setting up the Tv with your PC ..........................................17
SOUND CONTROL
■ Configuring the Sound Menu..............................................18
■ Selecting the Sound Mode .................................................19
SETUP
■ Configuring the Setup Menu...............................................20
INPUT / SUPPORT
■ Configuring the Input Menu ................................................23
■ Configuring the Support Menu............................................23
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE
■ Teletext Feature..................................................................25
■ How to Adjust the Stand (19inch model only).....................26
■ How to Adjust the Angle of the Tv (19inch model only)......26
■ Installing VeSA Compliant Mounting Devices
(19inch model only)............................................................27
■ Using the decoration Covers (19inch model only).............27
■ Installing the Stand.............................................................28
■ Installing the Wall Mount Kit ...............................................28
■ Using the Anti-Theft Kensington lock ................................28
■ Securing the Installation Space..........................................29
■ Securing the Tv to the Wall................................................29
■ Troubleshooting..................................................................30
■ Specifications .....................................................................33
CONTENTS
English
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:23English - 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
¦ Viewing the Control Panel
N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
N You can use a button by pressing the side panel buttons.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE: Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use this button as you would use the
ENTERE button on the remote control.
2 MENU: Press to see an on-screen menu of your Tv’s features.
3Y: Press to increase or decrease the volume.
In the on-screen menu, use the Y buttons as you would use the ◄ and ► buttons on the remote control.
4Z: Press to change channels. In the on-screen menu, use the Z buttons as you would use the ▼ and ▲ buttons
on the remote control.
5 P (POWER): Press to turn the Tv on and off.
6 REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR: Aim the remote control towards this spot on the Tv.
7 POWER INDICATOR: Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in stand-by mode.
8 SPEAKERS
BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:23English - 3
¦ Accessories
remote Control &
Batteries (AAA x 2)
Power Cord
Cover-Bottom
(22 inch model only)
Cleaning Cloth
(M4 X l16)
Wall Mount kit
(19 inch model only)
Decoration Cover
(19 inch model only)
Stand Screw X 4
(22 inch model only)
● Owner’s Instructions ● Warranty card ● Safety Guide
N Please make sure the following items are included with your lCd Tv. If any items are missing, contact your dealer.
N Warranty card / Safety Guide (Not available in all locations)
N The items colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:24English - 4
¦ Viewing the Connection Panel
N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
N Whenever you connect an external device to your Tv, make sure that power on the unit is turned off.
N When connecting an external device, match the colour of the connection terminal to the cable.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
– Connects to a Digital Audio component such as a Home theatre receiver.
N When the HdMI IN jacks are connected, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the Tv outputs 2 channel audio
only. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the Optical jack on the dvd / Blu-ray player or Cable / Satellite Box
directly to an Amplifier or Home Theatre, not the Tv.
2 SERVICE
– Connector for software upgrades.
3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC]
– Connects to the HdMI jack of a device with an HdMI output.
N No additional Audio connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection.
N What is HdMI?
HdMI(High-definition Multimedia Interface), is an interface that enables the transmission of digital audio and video signals
using a single cable.
The difference between HdMI and dvI is that the HdMI device is smaller in size, has the HdCP (High Bandwidth digital
Copy Protection) coding feature installed, and supports multi - channel digital audio.
N Use the HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] jack for dvI connection to an external device. Use a dvI to HdMI cable or dvI-HdMI
adapter (DVI to HDMI) for video connection and the HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] jacks for audio. When using an HdMI / dvI
cable connection, you must use the HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] jack.
HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO]
– Connect to the audio output jack on your PC.
– DVI audio outputs for external devices.
HDMI / PC IN [PC]
– Connect to the video output jack on your PC.
N If your PC supports an HdMI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] terminal.
N If your PC supports a dvI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO] terminal.
4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
– Connect rCA cable to an appropriate external A/V device such as VCr, DVD or Camcorder.
– Connect rCA audio cables to [R-AUDIO-L] on your set and the other ends to corresponding audio out connectors on the
A/V device.
6
7
1 2 3 4
0 9 8
5
[TV Rear Panel]
Power Input
BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:24English - 5
5 ANT IN
– Connects to an antenna or cable TV system.
6 COMMON INTERFACE Slot
When not inserting ‘CI CArd’ in some channels, ‘Scrambled Signal’ is displayed on the screen.
The pairing information containing a telephone number, CI CArD ID, Host ID and other information will be displayed in
about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider.
When the channel information configuration has finished, the message ‘Updating Completed’ is displayed, indicating that
the channel list is now updated.
N You must obtain a CI CArD from a local cable service provider. remove the CI CArD by carefully pulling it out with your
hands since dropping the CI CArD may cause damage to it.
N Insert the CI-Card in the direction marked on it.
N The place of the COMMON INTERFACE Slot may be different depending on its model.
N CAM is not supported in some countries and regions, check with your authorized dealer.
7 KENSINGTON LOCK (depending on the model)
– The Kensington lock (optional) is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place. If you want to
use a locking device, contact the dealer where you purchased the Tv.
N The location of the Kensington lock may be different depending on its model.
8 Headphones jack
– Headphone may be connected to the headphone output on your set. While the head phone is connected, the sound from
the built-in speakers will be disabled.
9 COMPONENT IN
– Connect component video cables (optional) to component connector (PR, PB, Y) on the rear of your set and the other ends
to corresponding component video out connectors on the DTV or DVD.
– If you wish to connect both the Set-Top Box and DTV (or DVD), you should connect the Set-Top Box to the DTV (or DVD)
and connect the dTv (or dvd) to component connector (PR, PB, Y) on your set.
– The PR, PB and Y connectors on your component devices (DTV or DVD) are sometimes labelled Y, B-Y and r-Y or Y, Cb
and Cr.
– Connect rCA audio cables (optional) to [R-AUDIO-L] on the rear of your set and the other ends to corresponding audio
out connectors on the DTV or DVD.
0 EXT (RGB)
Connector
Input Output
Video Audio (l / r) rGB Video + Audio (l / r)
EXT O O O Only Tv or dTv output is available.
– Inputs or outputs for external devices, such as VCr, DVD, video game device or video disc players.
BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:25English - 6
¦ Remote Control
N You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV.
N The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light.
N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
1 POWER : Television Standby
button.
2 NUMERIC BUTTONS : Press to
change the channel.
3 FAV.CH : Used to display
Favourites Channel lists on the
screen.
4Y : Press to increase or
decrease the volume.
5 SOURCE : Press to display and
select the available video sources.
6 INFO : Press to display information
on the TV screen.
7 TOOLS : Use to quickly select
frequently used functions.
8 CH LIST : displays the Channel list
on screen.
9 COLOURS BUTTONS : Use these
buttons in the Channel list menus
etc.
! TV : Selects the Tv mode directly.
@ PRE-CH : enables you to return
to the previous channel you were
watching.
# MUTEM: Press to temporarily cut
off the sound.
$ P : Press to change
channels.
% MENU : displays the main onscreen menu
^ GUIDE : Electronic Programme Guide
(EPG) display
& RETURN : returns to the previous menu
* UP▲ / DOWN▼ / LEFT◄ / RIGHT► /
ENTERE : Use to select on-screen
menu items and change menu values.
( EXIT : Press to exit the menu.
) SUBT. : digital subtitle display
a AD : Audio description selection.
Teletext Functions
5 0 : Teletext mode selection (lIST /
FlOF)
6 5 : Teletext reveal
7 4 : Teletext size selection
8 8 : Teletext store
9 Fastext topic selection
0/ : Alternately select Teletext,
Double, or Mix.
! :: Exit from the Teletext display
@ 1 : Teletext sub page
$ 2 : Teletext next page
3 : Teletext previous page
% 6 : Teletext index
& 9 : Teletext hold
( 7 : Teletext cancel
¦ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
1. lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure.
2. Install two AAA size batteries.
N Make sure to match the ‘+’ and ‘–’ ends of the batteries with the diagram inside the
compartment.
3. replace the cover.
N remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using the
remote control for a long time.
N If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following:
● Is the Tv power on?
● Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed?
● Are the batteries drained?
● Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged?
● Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby?
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:25English - 7
OPERATION
¦ Viewing the menus
Before using the TV, follow the steps below to learn how to navigate the menu in order to select
and adjust different functions.
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed on the screen. Its left side has icons: Picture, Sound,
Channel , Setup, Input, Application, Support.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons.
Press the ◄ or ► button to access the icon’s sub-menu.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to items in the menu.
Press the ENTERE button to enter items in the menu.
4. Press the ▲/▼/◄/► button to change the selected items.
N Press the RETURN button to return to the previous menu.
5. Press the EXIT button to exit from the menu.
Using the remote control buttons
Button Operations Button Operations
MENUm Display the main on-screen menu.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Move the cursor and select an item.
Select the currently selected item.
Confirm the setting.
RUTURNR return to the previous menu.
EXITe exit the on-screen menu.
Example: Setting the TV’s Brightness in the Picture Menu
Adjusting the Brightness to 80
1. Press the MENU button to display the menu.
2. Press the ENTERE button to select Picture.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Brightness.
4. Press the ENTERE button.
5. Press the ◄ or ► button until the brightness becomes 80.
6. Press the ENTERE button.
N Press the EXIT button to exit from the menu.
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Picture
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Picture
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45 ►
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture reset
Picture
U Move L Adjust E enter R return
Brightness 45
U Move L Adjust E enter R return
Brightness 80
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Picture
BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:25English - 8
¦ Placing Your Television in Standby Mode
Your set can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. The standby mode can be useful when you
wish to interrupt viewing temporarily (during a meal, for example).
1. Press the POWERP button on the remote control.
N The screen is turned off and a standby indicator appears on your set.
2. To switch your set back on, simply press the POWERP button again.
N Do not leave your set in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on holiday, for example). It is best to
unplug the set from the mains and aerial.
¦ Plug & Play Feature
When the Tv is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently.
1. Press the POWER button on the remote control. The message You can set the menu
language. is displayed.
2. Select the appropriate language by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE
button to confirm your choice.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Store Demo or Home Use, then the ENTERE button.
N We recommend setting the Tv to Home Use mode for the best picture in your home environment.
N Store Demo mode is only intended for use in retail environments.
N If the unit is accidentally set to Store Demo mode and you want to return to Home Use (Standard): Press the volume
button on the Tv. When the volume OSd is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds.
4. Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate country by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to
confirm your choice.
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Air or Cable, then press the ENTERE button.
N Air: Air antenna signal.
Cable: Cable antenna signal.
6. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the channel source to memorize. Press the ENTERE button to select Start.
N Digital & Analogue: digital and Analogue channels.
Digital: digital channels.
Analogue: Analogue channels.
N When setting the antenna source to Cable, a step appears allowing you to set a value for the digital channel search. For
more information, refer to Channel → Auto Store.
N The channel search will start and end automatically.
N Press the ENTERE button at any time to interrupt the memorization process.
N After all the available channels are stored, the message Set the Clock Mode. is displayed.
7. Press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Auto, then Press the ENTERE button.
N If you select Manual, Set current date and time is displayed.
N If you have received a digital signal, the time will be set automatically. If not, select Manual to set the clock. (refer to page
20)
8. The connection method to provide the best quality Hd is offered. After confirming the method, press the ENTERE button.
9. The message Enjoy your TV! is displayed. When you have finished, press the ENTERE button.
If you want to reset this feature...
1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button.
2. Press the ENTERE button again to select Plug & Play.
3. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The default PIN number of a new Tv set is 0-0-0-0.
N If you want to change PIN number, use the Change PIN function. (refer to page 22)
N The Plug & Play feature is only available in the TV mode.
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu language : English ►
E enter
BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:26English - 9
¦ Viewing the Display
The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video settings.
O Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
Press the INFO button on the remote control. The TV will display the channel, the type of
sound, and the status of certain picture and sound settings.
● ▲, ▼: You can view other channel’s information. If you want to move to the currently
selected channel, press ENTERE button.
● ◄, ►: You can view the desired program’s information at the current channel.
N Press the INFO button once more or wait approximately 10 seconds and the display
disappears automatically.
CHANNEL CONTROL
¦ Configuring the Channel Menu
❑ Country
N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
Analogue Channel
You can change the country for analogue channels.
Digital Channel
You can change the country for digital channels.
❑ Auto Store
You can scan for the frequency ranges available to you (and availability depends on your
country). Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or desired programme numbers.
N If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears.
Air / Cable
Antenna source to memorize
● Digital & Analogue: digital and Analogue channels.
● Digital: digital channels.
● Analogue: Analogue channels.
When selecting ‘Cable → Digital & Analogue’ or ‘Cable → Digital’
Provide a value to scan for cable channels.
● Search Mode → Full / Network / Quick
N Quick
– Network ID: displays the network identification code.
– Frequency: displays the frequency for the channel. (differs in each country)
– Modulation: displays available modulation values.
– Symbol Rate: displays available symbol rates.
N Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations and stores them in the TV’s memory.
N If you want to stop Auto Store, press the ENTERE button.
The Stop Auto Store? message will be displayed.
Select Yes by pressing the ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTERE button.
Country ►
Auto Store
Manual Store
Cable Search Option
Now & Next Guide
Full Guide
default Guide : Full Guide
Channel
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
life On venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ¦ INFO
BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:26English - 10
❑ Manual Store
N Scans for a channel manually and stores it in the TV’s memory.
N If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears.
Digital Channel
Manual store for digital channels.
N Digital Channel is only available in DTV mode.
● Channel: Set the Channel number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons.
● Frequency: Set the frequency using the number buttons.
● Bandwidth: Set the bandwidth using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons.
N When it has finished, channels are updated in the channel list.
Analogue Channel
Manual store for analogue channel.
● Programme (Programme number to be assigned to a channel): Sets the programme number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9)
buttons.
● Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Sets the colour system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.
● Sound System → BG / DK / I / L: Sets the sound system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.
● Channel (When you know the number of the channel to be stored): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select C (Air channel) or
S (Cable channel). Press the ► button, then press the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons to select the required number.
N You can also select the channel number directly by pressing the number (0~9) buttons.
N If there is abnormal sound or no sound, reselect the sound standard required.
● Search (When you do not know the channel numbers): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to start the search. The tuner scans the
frequency range until the first channel or the channel that you selected is received on the screen.
● Store (When you store the channel and associated programme number): Set to OK by pressing the ENTERE button.
N Channel mode
– P (Programme mode): When completing tuning, the broadcasting stations in your area have been assigned to position
numbers from P00 to P99. You can select a channel by entering the position number in this mode.
– C (Air channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number to each air broadcasting station in this
mode.
– S (Cable channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number for each cable channel in this mode.
❑ Cable Search Option (depending on the country)
Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for cable network searches.
● Frequency (Start ~ Stop): displays the frequency for the channel.
● Modulation: displays available modulation values.
● Symbol Rate: displays available symbol rates.
❑ Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by the broadcasters. Programme entries may appear blank or out
of date as a result of the information broadcast on a given channel. The display will dynamically update as soon as new information
becomes available.
N For detailed procedures on using Now & Next Guide and Full Guide, refer to the descriptions on page 11.
O You can also display the guide menu simply by pressing the GUIDE button. (To configure the Default Guide, refer to the
descriptions.)
Now & Next Guide
For the six channels indicated in the left-hand column, displays the Current programme and the Next programme information.
Full Guide
displays the programme information as time ordered One hour segments. Two hours of programme information is displayed which
may be scrolled forwards or backwards in time.
BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:26English - 11
❑ Default Guide → Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
You can decide whether to display either the Now & Next Guide or the Full Guide when the GUIDE button on the remote control
is pressed.
❑ Channel List
For detailed procedures on using the Channel List, refer to the ‘Managing Channels’ instructions.
O You can select these options by simply pressing the CH LIST button on the remote control.
❑ Channel Mode
When press the P >/< button, Channels will be switched within the selected channel list.
Added Ch.
Channels will be switched within the memorized channel list.
Favourite Ch.
Channels will be switched within the favourite channel list.
❑ Fine Tune
If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the channel, as this is done automatically during the search and store
operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, you may have to fine tune the channel manually.
N Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk ‘*’ on the right-hand side of the channel number in the
channel banner.
N To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button and then press the ENTERE button.
N Only Analogue Tv channels can be fine tuned.
Using the Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
To... Then...
Watch a programme in the EPG list Select a programme by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button.
exit the guide Press the blue button
If the next programme is selected, it is scheduled with the clock icon displayed. If the ENTERE button is pressed again, press
the ◄, ► button to select Cancel Schedules, the scheduling is cancelled with the clock icon gone.
View programme information Select a programme of your choice by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button.
Then press the INFO button when the programme of your choice is
highlighted. The programme title is on the upper part of the screen
centre.
Please click on INFO button for detailed information. Channel Number, running Time, Status Bar, Parental level, video Quality
Information (HD / SD), Sound Modes, Subtitle or Teletext, languages of Subtitle or Teletext and brief summary of the highlighted
programme are included on the detailed information. ‘...’ will be appeared if the summary is long.
Toggle between the Now & Next Guide and
Full Guide
Press the red button repeatedly.
In Full Guide
Scrolls backwards quickly (24 hours).
Scrolls forwards quickly (24 hours).
Press the green button repeatedly.
Press the yellow button repeatedly.
Full Guide
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Aujourd’hui 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
No Information
Freshmen O..
Watch
INFO Information ■ Now/Next ■ +24 Hours ■ Exit
Now & Next Guide
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Now Next
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
.
Kisstory
No Information
No Information.
No Information
Street Hypn..
Watch
INFO Information ■ Full Guide ■ Exit
BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:26English - 12
¦ Managing Channels
Using this menu, you can Add / Delete or set Favourite channels and use the programme guide
for digital broadcasts.
All Channels
Shows all currently available channels.
Added Channels
Shows all added channels.
Favourites
Shows all favourite channels.
O To select the Favourites channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button on the remote control.
Programmed
Shows all current reserved programmes.
N Select a channel in the All Channels, Added Channels or Favourites screen by pressing the ▲ / ▼ buttons, and pressing
the ENTERE button. Then you can watch the selected channel.
N Using the Colour buttons with the Channel List
– red (Channel Type): Toggle between your TV, Radio, Data / Other and All.
– Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number.
– Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists. You can perform the add / delete, add to Favourites / delete from
Favourites, or lock / unlock function for multiple channels at the same time. Select the required channels and press the
yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time. The c mark appears to the left of the selected channels.
– TOOLS (Tools): displays the Delete (or Add), Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite), Lock (or Unlock),
Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Sort, Edit Channel Number, Select All (or Deselect All), Auto Store menu. (The
Options menus may differ depending on the situation.)
N Channel Status Display Icons
● A : An analogue channel.
● c: A channel selected by pressing the yellow button.
● * : A channel set as a Favourite.
● ( : A programme currently being broadcast.
● \ : A locked channel.
● ) : A reserved programme
Channel List Option Menu (in All Channels / Added Channels / Favourites)
N Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu.
N Option menu items may differ depending on the channel status.
Add / Delete
You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want.
N All deleted channels will be shown on All Channels menu.
N A gray-coloured channel indicates the channel has been deleted.
N The Add menu only appears for deleted channels.
N You can also delete a channel from the Added Channels or Favourites menu in the
same manner.
Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite
You can set channels you watch frequently as favourites.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the add to (or delete from) Favourite by selecting Tools
→ Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite).
N The ‘ ’ symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a favourite.
N All favourite channels will be shown on Favourites menu.
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Added Channels
All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Added Channels
All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools
Delete
Add to Favourite
Lock
Timer Viewing
Edit Channel Name
Sort
▼
BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 13
Lock / Unlock
You can lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. This function is available only when the Child Lock is
set to On. (see page 22)
N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
N The default PIN number of a new Tv set is 0-0-0-0. You can change the PIN, by selecting Change PIN from the menu.
N The ‘\’ symbol will be displayed and the channel will be locked.
Timer Viewing
If you reserve a programme you want to watch, the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel list;
even when you are watching another channel. To reserve a programme, set the current time first. (See page 20)
N Only memorized channels can be reserved.
N You can set the channel, day, month, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
N reserving a programme will be shown in the Programmed menu.
N Digital Programme Guide and Viewing Reservation
When a digital channel is selected, and you press the ► button, the Programme Guide for the channel appears. You can
reserve a programme according to the procedures described above.
Edit Channel Name (analogue channels only)
Channels can labelled so that their call letters appear whenever the channel is selected.
N The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned and cannot be labelled.
Edit Channel Number (digital channels only)
You can also edit the channel number by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
Sort (analogue channels only)
This operation allows you to change the programme numbers of the stored channels. This operation may be necessary after using
the auto store.
Select All / Deselect All
● Select All: You can select all the channels in the channel list.
● Deselect All: You can deselect all the selected channels.
N You can only select Deselect All when there is a selected channel.
Auto Store
N For further details on setting up options, refer to page 9.
N If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears.
Channel List Option Menu (in Programmed )
You can view, modify or delete a reservation.
N Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu.
Change Info
Select to change a viewing reservation.
Cancel Schedules
Select to cancel a viewing reservation.
Information
Select to view a viewing reservation. (You can also change the reservation information.)
Select All
Select all reserved programmes.
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer
20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife
Programmed All ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools E Information
Change Info
Cancel Schedules
Information
Select All
BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 14
PICTURE CONTROL
¦ Configuring the Picture Menu
❑ Mode
You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the picture mode by
selecting Tools → Picture Mode.
Dynamic
Selects the picture for high-definition in a bright room.
Standard
Selects the picture for the optimum display in a normal environment.
Movie
Selects the picture for viewing movies in a dark room.
❑ Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)
Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality.
● Backlight: Adjusts the brightness of lCd back light.
● Contrast: Adjusts the contrast level of the picture.
● Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level of the picture
● Sharpness: Adjusts the edge definition of the picture.
● Colour: Adjusts colour saturation of the picture.
● Tint (G/R): Adjusts the colour tint of the picture.
N Select a picture mode to be adjusted first. The adjusted values are saved for each picture mode.
N When you make changes to Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour or Tint (G/R), the OSd will be adjusted
accordingly.
N In analogue TV, Ext., AV modes of the PAl system, you cannot use the Tint (G/R) Function.
N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Backlight, Contrast and Brightness.
N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV.
N The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the brightness level of the picture is reduced, which will
reduce the overall running cost.
❑ Advanced Settings
Samsung’s new Tvs allow you to make even more precise picture settings than previous models. See below to adjust detailed
picture settings.
N Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mode.
N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Gamma and White Balance from among the Advanced Settings items.
Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest
You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth.
Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High
You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided.
Gamma
You can adjust the Primary Colour (red, Green, Blue) Intensity.
Colour Space
Colour Space is a colour matrix composed of red, green and blue colours. Select your favourite Colour Space to experience the
most natural colour.
● Native: Native Colour Space offers deep and rich colour tone.
● Auto: Auto Colour Space automatically adjusts to the most natural colour tone based on programme sources.
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Picture
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Advanced Settings ►
Picture Options
Picture reset
Picture
BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 15
White Balance
You can adjust the colour temperature for more natural picture colours.
● R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: You can adjust the Colour ‘temperature’ in the light areas by
changing the values of r, G, B. recommended for advanced users only.
● Reset: The previously adjusted white balance will be reset to the factory defaults.
Flesh Tone
You can emphasize the pink ‘flesh tone’ in the picture.
N Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen.
Edge Enhancement → Off / On
You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture.
❑ Picture Options
N In PC mode, you can only make changes to the Colour Tone and Size from among the items in Picture Options.
Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2
You can select the most comfortable colour tone to your eyes.
N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV.
N Warm1 or Warm2 is only activated when the picture mode is Movie.
Size
You can select the picture size which best corresponds to your viewing requirements.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the size by selecting Tools → Picture Size.
● Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratio.
● 16:9: Adjusts the picture size to 16:9 appropriate for dvds or wide broadcasting.
● Wide Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture more than 4:3.
● Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide picture (in the vertical direction) to fit the screen size.
● 4:3: This is the default setting for a video movie or normal broadcasting.
● Screen Fit: Use the function to see the full image without any cut-off when HdMI (720p / 1080i) or Component (1080i) signals
are input.
N Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary.
N The items available may differ depending on the selected mode.
N In PC Mode, only 16:9 and 4:3 mode can be adjusted.
N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV.
N Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours.
N Wide Zoom: Press the ► button to Select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the
picture up / down. Then press the ENTERE button.
N Zoom: Press the ► button to Select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the picture
up and down. Then press the ENTERE button. Press the ► button to Select Size, then press the ENTERE button. Press
the ▲ or ▼ button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction. Then press the ENTERE button.
N After selecting Screen Fit in HdMI (1080i) or Component (1080i) mode: Select Position by pressing the ◄ or ► button. Use the
▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture.
Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select Reset, then press the ENTEREbutton. You can initialize the setting.
N If you use the Screen Fit function with HdMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the Overscan
function.
Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3
When setting the picture size to Auto Wide in a 16:9 wide Tv, you can determine the picture size you want to see the 4:3 WSS
(Wide Screen Service) image or nothing. Each individual European country requires different picture size so this function is
intended for users to select it.
● 16:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode.
● Wide Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture more than 4:3.
● Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture vertically on screen.
● 4:3: Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode.
N This function is available in Auto Wide mode.
N This function is not available in PC, Component or HDMI mode.
BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 16
Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto
If the broadcast signal received by your Tv is weak, you can activate the digital Noise reduction feature to help reduce any static
and ghosting that may appear on the screen.
N When the signal is weak, select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed.
HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low
You can directly select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth.
N This function is active only when the external input connects to HDMI (rGB signals).
Film Mode → Off / Auto
The Tv can be set to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality.
N Film Mode is supported in TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i / 1080i) and HDMI(480i / 1080i).
❑ Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel
resets all picture settings to the default values.
N Select a picture mode to be reset. The reset is performed for each picture mode.
● Reset Picture Mode: Current picture values return to default settings.
¦ Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display
Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)
The Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. The actual screens on your PC will probably be different,
depending upon your particular version of Windows and your particular video card. However, even if your actual screens look
different, the same basic set-up information will apply in almost all cases. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung
Dealer.)
1. First, click on ‘Control Panel’ on the Windows start menu.
2. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Appearance and Themes’ and a display dialog-box will appear.
3. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘display’ and a display dialogbox will appear.
4. Navigate to the ‘Settings’ tab on the display dialog-box.
The correct size setting (resolution): Optimum-1360 x 768 pixels
If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value is ‘60’ or ‘60 Hz’. Otherwise, just click
‘OK’ and exit the dialog box.
BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:27English - 17
Display Modes
Both screen position and size will vary depending on the type of PC monitor and its resolution. The resolutions in the table are
recommended.
D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input
Mode resolution
Horizontal Frequency
(KHz)
Vertical Frequency
(Hz)
Pixel Clock Frequency
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H / V)
IBM 640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 +/-
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/-
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-
VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 -/+
1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 -/+
1280 x 720 56.456 74.777 95.750 -/+
VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/-
640 x 480 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/-
640 x 480 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/-
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/-
1024 x 768 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/-
1024 x 768 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 +/+
VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 -/+
N When using an HdMI/dvI cable connection, you must use the HDMI (DVI) jack.
N The interlace mode is not supported.
N The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected.
N Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG is not supported.
¦ Setting up the TV with your PC
N Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode.
❑ Auto Adjustment
Auto Adjustment allows the PC screen of set to self-adjust to the incoming PC video signal.
The values of fine, coarse and position are adjusted automatically.
N This function does not work in dvI-HdMI mode.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the Auto Adjustment
by selecting Tools → Auto Adjustment.
❑ Screen
Coarse / Fine
The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise. If the noise is
not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Fine-tune again. After the noise has
been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned on the centre of screen.
PC Position
Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the Tv screen. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjusting the vertical-Position. Press
the ◄ or ► button to adjust the Horizontal-Position.
Image Reset
You can replace all image settings with the factory default values.
Brightness: : 45
Sharpness : 50
Auto Adjustment ►
Screen
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture reset
Picture
BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 18
SOUND CONTROL
¦ Configuring the Sound Menu
❑ Mode → Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom
You can select a sound mode to suit your personal preferences.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also configure the sound
mode by selecting Tools → Sound Mode.
Standard
Selects the normal sound mode.
Music
emphasizes music over voices.
Movie
Provides the best sound for movies.
Clear Voice
emphasizes voice over other sounds.
Custom
recalls your customized sound settings.
❑ Equalizer
The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preferences.
Mode
You can select a sound mode to suit your personal preferences.
Balance
Controls the balance between the right and left speakers.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustment)
To adjust the level of different bandwidth frequencies
Reset
resets the equalizer settings to the default values.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On
SrS TruSurround HD is a patented SrS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multichannel content over two
speakers. TruSurround delivers a compelling, virtual surround sound experience through any two-speaker playback system,
including internal television speakers. It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats.
❑ Audio Language (digital channels only)
You can change the default value for audio languages. Displays the language information for the incoming stream.
N You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast.
N While viewing a digital channel, this function can be selected.
❑ Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (digital channels only)
When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed
difference between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the Tv Speaker function.
N The Audio Format appears according to the broadcasting signal.
N While viewing a digital channel, this function can be selected.
Mode : Custom ►
equalizer
SrS TruSurround Hd : Off
Audio language : - - -
Audio Format : - - -
Audio Description
Auto volume : Off
Sound
BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 19
❑ Audio Description (digital channels only)
This is an auxiliary audio function that provides an additional audio track for visually challenged persons. This function handles the
Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description), when it is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. Users can turn the
Audio description On or Off and control the volume.
O Press the AD button on the remote control to select Off or On.
Audio Description → Off / On
Turn the audio description function on or off.
Volume
You can adjust the audio description volume.
N Volume is active when Audio Description is set to On.
❑ Auto Volume → Off / On
each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is
changed. This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the sound output when the
modulation signal is high or by raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low.
❑ Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker
If you want to hear the sound through separate speakers, cancel the internal amplifier.
N The volume and MUTE buttons do not operate when the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker.
N If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select menu, the sound settings will be limited.
❑ Sound Reset → Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel
You can restore the Sound settings to the factory defaults.
¦ Selecting the Sound Mode
You can set the sound mode in the Tools menu. When you set to Dual l ll, the current sound mode is displayed on the screen.
Audio Type Dual 1 / 2 Default
A2 Stereo
Mono MONO
Automatic change
Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Stereo
Mono MONO
Automatic change
Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
N If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching occurs, then switch to the mono.
N This function is only activated in stereo sound signal. It is deactivated in mono sound signal.
N This function is only available in TV mode.
BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 20
SETUP
¦ Configuring the Setup Menu
❑ Menu Language
You can set the menu language.
❑ Time
Clock
Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the Tv.
N The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button.
N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again.
● Clock Mode
You can set up the current time manually or automatically.
– Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast.
– Manual: Set the current time to a manually specified time.
N Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time may not be set correctly. If this occurs, set the time
manually.
N The Antenna or cable must be connected in order to set the time automatically.
● Clock Set
You can set the current time manually.
N Set up this item when you have set Clock Mode to Manual.
N You can set the day, month, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
The sleep timer automatically shuts off the Tv after a preset time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes).
N The TV automatically switches to standby mode when the timer reaches 0.
N To cancel the Sleep Timer function, select Off.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the sleep timer by selecting Tools → Sleep Timer.
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
Three different on / off timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first.
● On Time: Set the hour, minute, and activate / inactivate. (To activate the timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to Activate.)
● Off Time: Set the hour, minute, and activate / inactivate. (To activate the timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to Activate.)
● Volume: Select the desired turn on volume level.
● Antenna: Select Air or Cable.
● Channel: Select the desired channel.
● Repeat: Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual.
N When Manual is selected, press the ► button to select the desired day of the week. Press the ENTERE button over the
desired day and the c mark will appear.
N You can set the hour, minute and channel by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
N Auto Power Off
When you set the timer On, the television will eventually turn off, if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the Tv was
turned on by the timer. This function is only available in timer On mode and prevents overheating, which may occur if a Tv is
on for too long time.
Plug & Play
Menu Language : English ►
Time
Broadcast
Security
General
Setup
BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 21
❑ Broadcast
Subtitle
You can activate and deactivate the subtitles. Use this menu to set the Subtitle Mode. Normal under the menu is the basic subtitle
and Hard of hearing is the subtitle for a hearing-impaired person.
● Subtitle → Off / On : Switches subtitles on or off.
● Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing: Sets the subtitle mode.
● Subtitle Language: Set the subtitle language.
N If the programme you are watching does not support the Hard of hearing function, Normal automatically activates even
though Hard of hearing mode is selected.
N english is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast.
O You can select these options simply by pressing the SUBT. button on the remote control.
Digital Text → Disable / Enable (UK only)
If the programme is broadcast with digital text, this feature is enabled.
N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group)
An International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the
MPEG system which includes data-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video
files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including
vOd (video-On-demand), ITv (Interactive Tv), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-education, tele-conferencing, digital libraries
and network games.
Teletext Language
You can set the Teletext language by selecting the language type.
N english is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast.
Preference
● Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language /
Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language
Using this feature, users can select one of the languages. The language selected here is the default when the user selects a
channel.
If you change the language setting, the Subtitle language, Audio language, and the Teletext language of the language
menu are automatically changed to the selected language.
The Subtitle language, Audio language, and the Teletext language of the language menu show a list of languages
supported by the current channel and the selection is highlighted. If you change this language setting, the new selection is
only valid for the current channel. The changed setting does not change the setting of the Primary Subtitle language, Primary
Audio language, or the Primary Teletext language of the Preference menu.
Common Interface
● CI Menu
This enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card.
● Application Info.
This contains information on CAM inserted in the CI slot and displays it.
N The Application Info inserting is about the ‘CI CArd’. You can install the CAM anytime whether the Tv is ON or OFF.
1. Purchase the CI CAM module by visiting your nearest dealer or by phone.
2. Insert the ‘CI CArd’ into the CAM in the direction of the arrow until it fits.
3. Insert the CAM with the ‘CI CArD’ installed into the common interface slot.
(Insert the CAM in the direction of the arrow, right up to the end so that it is parallel with the slot.)
4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel.
N CAM is not supported in some countries and regions, check with your authorized dealer.
BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 22
❑ Security
N Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
N The default PIN number of a new Tv set is 0-0-0-0. You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu.
Child Lock → Off / On
This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme by muting out video
and audio.
N You can lock some channels in Channel list. (refer to page 13)
N Child Lock is available only in TV mode.
Parental Lock
This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme by a 4-digit PIN
(Personal Identification Number) code that is defined by the user.
N The Parental lock item differs depending on the country.
N When the Parental lock is set, the ‘\’ symbol is displayed.
N Allow All: Press to unlock all Tv ratings.
Block All: Press to lock all Tv ratings.
Change PIN
You can change your personal ID number that is required to set up the TV.
N If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the PIN to 0-0-0-0:
POWER(Off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER(On).
❑ General
Game Mode → Off / On
When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by
selecting the game menu.
N To disconnect the game console and connect another external device, cancel game mode in the setup menu.
N If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly.
N Game Mode is not available in regular TV and PC mode.
N If Game Mode is On:
– Picture mode is automatically changed to Standard and users cannot change the mode.
– Sound mode is automatically changed to Custom and users cannot change the mode. Adjust the sound using the
equalizer.
– The reset Sound function is activated. Selecting the reset function after setting the equalizer resets the equalizer
settings to the factory defaults.
Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off / Auto
This feature adjusts the brightness of the Tv in order to reduce power consumption. When watching Tv at night, set the
Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption.
If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off and you can only hear the sound. Press any button to get out of Picture Off.
N In the Tools menu, Picture Off function is not supported.
T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the energy Saving option by selecting Tools →
Energy Saving.
Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High
A melody sound can be set to come on when the Tv is powered On or Off.
N The Melody does not play
– When no sound is output from the Tv because the MUTE button has been pressed.
– When no sound is output from the Tv because the (–) Volume button has been pressed.
– When the Tv is turned off by Sleep Timer function.
BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:28English - 23
INPUT / SUPPORT
¦ Configuring the Input Menu
❑ Source List
Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD / Blu-ray players / Satellite
receivers (Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input source of your choice.
O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to vi7ew an external signal source. TV
mode can be selected by pressing the TV button.
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI/DVI
N You can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV. In the
Source List, connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the top. Inputs that are not
connected will be sorted to the bottom.
N Ext. and PC always stay activated.
N TOOLS (Tools): displays the Edit Name and Information menus.
❑ Edit Name
Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray
/ HD DVD / DMA
N When connecting an HdMI/dvI cable to the HDMI (DVI) port, you should set the HDMI/DVI mode to DVI or DVI PC in the
Edit Name of the Input mode. In this case, a separate sound connection is required.
¦ Configuring the Support Menu
❑ Self Diagnosis
Picture Test
If you think you have a picture problem, perform the picture test. Check the colour pattern on
the screen to see if the problem still exists.
● Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern, select Yes.
There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s call centre for assistance.
● No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No. There may be a problem with your
external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to
the external device’s user manual.
Sound Test
If you think you have a sound problem, please perform the sound test. You can check the
sound by playing a built-in melody sound through the Tv. ‘does the problem still exist with this sound test?’ appears on the screen.
N If you hear no sound from the Tv’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV speaker
in the Sound menu.
N The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing
the MUTE button.
● Yes: If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all, select Yes. There may be a problem with
the TV. Contact Samsung’s call centre for assistance.
● No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check
your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external device’s user manual.
Signal Information (digital channels only)
Unlike analogue channels, which can vary in reception quality from ‘snowy’ to clear, digital (HdTv) channels have either perfect
reception quality or you will not receive them at all. So, unlike analogue channels, you cannot fine tune a digital channel. You can,
however, adjust your antenna to improve the reception of available digital channels.
N If the signal strength meter indicates that the signal is weak, physically adjust your antenna to increase the signal strength.
Continue to adjust the antenna until you find the best position with the strongest signal.
Source List
edit Name
Input
Self Diagnosis ►
Software Upgrade
HD Connection Guide
Contact Samsung
Support
BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:29English - 24
❑ Software Upgrade
To keep your product up-to-date with new digital Television features then software upgrades
are periodically broadcast as part of the normal Television signal. It will automatically detect
these signals and display the software upgrade banner. You are given the option to install the
upgrade.
BY USB
Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade into Tv. Please be careful to not
disconnect the power or remove the USB drive while upgrades are being applied. The TV will
turn off and turn on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. Please check the
firmware version after the update is completed. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to
their default (factory) settings.
We recommend you write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade.
BY Channel
Upgrades the software using the broadcasting signal.
N If the function is selected during the software transmission period, this function searches for available software and downloads
the software.
N The time required to download the software is determined by the signal status.
Standby Mode Upgrade
To continue software upgrade with master power on, Select On by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. 45 minutes after entering standby
mode, a manual upgrade is automatically conducted. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be on
slightly for the lCD product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is completed.
Alternative Software
To display the software version information.
❑ HD Connection Guide
This menu presents the connection method that provides the optimal quality for the HD TV.
refer to this information when connecting external devices to the TV.
❑ Contact Samsung
view this information when your Tv does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software.
You can view the information regarding the call centre, product and software file download method.
TV Rear Panel
USB Drive
BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:29English - 25
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE
¦ Teletext Feature
Most television stations provide written information services via Teletext. The index page of the Teletext service gives you
information on how to use the service. In addition, you can select various options to suit your requirements by using the remote
control buttons.
N For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or
some pages may not be displayed.
N You can change Teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
1 0(mode)
Press to select the Teletext mode
(lIST/FlOF). If you press it in the lIST
mode, it switches into the list save
mode. In the list save mode, you can
save Teletext page into list using the
8(store) button.
2 5(reveal)
Used to display the hidden text (answers
to quiz games, for example). To display
normal screen, press it again.
3 4(size)
Press to display the double-size letters
in the upper half of the screen. For
lower half of the screen, press it again.
To display normal screen, press it once
again.
4 8(store)
Used to store the Teletext pages.
5 Colour buttons (red/green/yellow/
blue)
If the FASTeXT system is used by a
broadcasting company, the different
topics covered on a Teletext page are
colour-coded and can be selected by
pressing the coloured buttons. Press
one of them corresponding to the
required. The page is displayed with
other coloured information that can be
selected in the same way. To display
the previous or next page, press the
corresponding coloured button.
6/(Teletext on/mix)
Press to activate Teletext mode after
selecting the channel providing the
Teletext service. Press it twice to overlap
the Teletext with the current broadcasting
screen.
7 :(exit)
exit from the Teletext display.
8 1(sub-page)
Used to display the available sub-page.
9 2(page up)
Used to display the next Teletext page.
0 3(page down)
Used to display the previous Teletext
page.
! 9 (hold)
Used to hold the display on a given
page if the selected page is linked with
several secondary pages which follow on
automatically. To resume, press it again.
@ 6(index)
Used to display the index (contents)
page at any time while you are viewing
Teletext.
# 7(cancel)
Used to display the broadcast when
searching for a page.
The Teletext pages are organized according to six categories:
Part Contents
A Selected page number.
B Broadcasting channel identity.
C Current page number or search indications.
D Date and time.
E Text.
F Status information.
FASTeXT information.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:29English - 26
N Teletext information is often divided between several pages displayed in sequence, which can be accessed by:
– entering the page number
– Selecting a title in a list
– Selecting a coloured heading (FASTeXT system)
N Teletext level supported by the TV is version 2.5 which is capable of displaying additional graphics or text.
N depending upon the transmission, blank side panels can occur when displaying Teletext.
N In these cases, additional graphics or text is not transmitted.
N Older Tv’s which do not support version 2.5 are not capable of displaying any additional graphics or text, regardless of the
Teletext transmission.
O Press the TV button to exit from the Teletext display.
N Teletext 16:9, picture is 16:9
¦ How to Adjust the Stand (19inch model only)
1. Place the front of the Tv onto a soft cloth or cushion on a table as in Figure 1.
– Align the TV bottom along the table edge.
2. Press on the center of the Tv back. Adjust the stand as in Figure 2 while pressing the button on the back of the stand.
3. Place the Tv on the table so that the Tv sits safely on the table.
¦ How to Adjust the Angle of the TV (19inch model only)
N When you adjust the stand, press the button on the back of the stand.
1. Figure 1 shows the adjustment angle (-2°~14°) when you use the lCD on its stand.
N excessive tilting can turn the lCD TV over which may cause damage.
2. Figure 2 shows the adjustment angle (14°~80°) when you convert the lCD from stand-based use to wall-mount.
3. Figure 3 shows the adjustment angle (0°~10°) when you mount the lCD TV to a wall.
N You will hear a “Click” sound when changing the angle from 1 to 2 or 3 to 2.
1 2
1 Angle adjustment when using
the TV on its stand.
2 Angle adjustment when
converting from Stand to Wall
mount (1→3, 3→1)
3 Angle adjustment when LCD
TV is wall-mounted
BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:30English - 27
¦ Installing VESA Compliant Mounting Devices (19inch model only)
1. Place the Tv face down on a soft cloth or cushion on a table.
2. Adjust the stand, pressing the button on the back of the stand.
3. Align the mounting interface pad (not supplied) with the holes in the stand bottom and secure it with the four screws that come
with the arm-type base, wall mount hanger or other bases (not supplied).
¦ Using the Decoration Covers (19inch model only)
1. When installing the Tv on the wall without using the stand, insert decoration covers into the holes as described in the picture
1.
2. After inserting the decoration covers, fasten them with 4 screws as described in the picture 2.
1 2
Button
Mounting pad
(Sold separately)
1 2
BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:30English - 28
¦ Installing the Stand
1. Attach your lCD TV to the stand.
N Two or more people should carry the TV.
N Make sure to distinguish between the front and back of the stand when assembling
them.
N To make sure the Tv is installed on the stand at a proper level, do not apply excess
downward pressure to the upper left of right sides of the TV.
2. Fasten two screws at position 1 and then fasten two screw at position 2.
N Stand the product up and fasten the screws. If you fasten the screws with the lCD TV
placed down, it may lean to one side.
¦ Installing the Wall Mount Kit
Wall mount items (sold separately) allow you to mount the Tv on the wall.
For detailed information on installing the wall mount, see the instructions provided with the
Wall Mount items. Contact a technician for assistance when installing the wall mounted
bracket.
Samsung electronics is not responsible for any damage to the product or injury to yourself or
others if you elect to install the TV on your own.
do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your Tv is turned on. It may result in personal
injury due to electric shock.
¦ Using the Anti-Theft Kensington Lock
The Kensington lock is not supplied by Samsung. It is a device used to physically fix the
system when using it in a public place. The appearance and locking method may differ
from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. refer to the manual provided with the
Kensington lock for additional information on proper use.
N Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the Tv. A kensington slot is beside the “K” icon.
To lock the product, follow these steps:
1. Wrap the Kensington lock cable around a large, stationary object such as desk or chair.
2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock attached through the looped end of the
Kensington
3. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the product (1).
4. lock the lock.
N These are general instructions. For exact instructions, see the User manual supplied
with the locking device.
N The locking device has to be purchased separately.
N The location of the Kensington slot may be different depending on the TV model.
1
BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:31English - 29
¦ Securing the Installation Space
Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation.
Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product.
Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept.
N When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only.
Ҟ If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the
product falling.
Ҟ If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in
the internal temperature of the product due to poor ventilation.
N The appearance may differ depending on the product.
When installing the product with a stand When installing the product with a wall-mount
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦ Securing the TV to the Wall
Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the Tv may cause the Tv to fall. In particular, ensure your children do
not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death.
Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device
for safety purposes, as follows.
To avoid the TV from falling:
1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the
screws have been firmly installed onto the wall.
N You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall.
N Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied, please purchase
these additionally.
2. remove the screws from the centre back of the Tv, put the screws into the clamps, and
then fasten the screws onto the TV again.
N Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please purchase the
screws of the following specifications.
N Screw Specifications
– For a 17 ~ 29 Inch lCd Tv: M4 X l15
– For a 32 ~ 40 Inch lCd Tv: M6 X l15
3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the Tv and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong
string and then tie the string tightly.
N Install the Tv near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards.
N It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or
lower than the clamps fixed on the Tv.
N Untie the string before moving the TV.
4. verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any
sign of fatigue for failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections,
contact a professional installer.
Wall
Wall
BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:32English - 30
¦ Troubleshooting
If you have any questions of Tv, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit ‘www.samsung.com’
site, then click on Support or contact Call Centre on list of last page.
Issue Solution
Picture Quality
First of all, please perform the Picture Test to confirm that your Tv is properly displaying
test image.
● Go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test
If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal.
Tv image does not look as good
as it did in the store.
● If you have an analogue Cable/Set top box, upgrade to an Box. Use HDMI or
Component cables to deliver HD picture quality.
● Cable/Satellite subscriber : Try Hd(High definition) stations from channel line up.
● Antenna connection: Try Hd stations after performing Auto programme.
N Many HD channels are upscaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents.
● Adjust Cable/Set top box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p.
● Confirm that you are watching the TV at the minimum distance recomended based on
the size and definition of the signal you are displaying.
Picture is distorted : macroblock,
small block, dots, pixelization
● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving
pictures such as sports and action movies.
● low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue.
● Mobile phones used close to the TV (cca up to 1m) may cause noise in picture on
analog and digital TV.
Wrong or missing colour with
Component connection.
● Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose
connections may cause colour problems or the screen will be blank.
Poor colour or brightness. ● Adjust Picture options in the TV menu. (Picture mode, Colour, Brightness,
Sharpness)
● Adjust Energy Saving option in Setup menu.
● Try picture reset to view the default picture setting. (Go to MENU - Picture - Picture
Reset)
Dotted line on the edge of screen. ● If picture size is set to Screen Fit, change to 16:9.
● Change cable/set top box resolution.
Picture is black and white with Av
(Composite) input only.
● Connect video cable(Yellow) to Green jack of component input 1 of the Tv.
Picture freezes or is distorted
when changing channels or
picture is delayed.
● If connected with cable box, please try to reset cable box. (reconnect AC cord and wait
until cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes.)
● Set output resolution of cable box to 1080i or 720p.
Sound Quality
First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your Tv audio is properly
operating.
● Go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test
If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal.
No sound or sound is too low at
maximum volume.
● Please check the volume of external device connected to your Tv then, adjust the Tv
volume accordingly.
Picture is good but no sound. ● Set the Speaker Select option to TV speaker in the sound menu.
● Make sure audio cables from an external device are connected to correct audio input
jacks on the Tv.
● Check connected device’s audio output option. (ex: You may need to change your
cable box’ audio option to HDMI when you have HDMI connected to your TV.)
● If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required.
● Deactivate SrS function if you are setting the volume over 30 value.
● remove plug from headphone jack. (if available on your Tv)
Noise from speaker. ● Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input.
● For Antenna/Cable connection, check signal strength. low signal level may cause
sound distortion.
BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:32English - 31
Issue Solution
No Picture, No video
TV won’t turn on. ● Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the Tv.
● Make sure the wall outlet is working.
● Try pressing the POWER button on the Tv to make sure the remote is working
properly. If the TV turns on, it may be caused by remote Control. To fix the remote
problem, refer to ‘remote control does not work’ below.
TV turns off automatically. ● Check if the Sleep Timer is set to On in the Setup menu.
● If connected the Tv to your PC, check your PC power settings.
● Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the Tv.
● If there is no signal for about 10 ~ 15 minutes with Antenna/Cable connection, the TV
will turn off.
No picture/Video. ● Check cable connections.(remove and reconnect all cables of Tv and external devices)
● Set your external device’s (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video output to match
the connections to the Tv input. For example, external device’s output: HdMI, Tv’s
input: HdMI.
● Make sure your connected device is powered on.
● Make sure to select the Tv’s correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the TV
remote.
rF(Cable/Antenna) Connection
Cannot receive all channels. ● Make sure Antenna cable is connected securely.
● Please try Plug & Play to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU -
Setup - Plug & Play and wait for all avaiable channels are stored.
● Verify Antenna is positioned correctly.
Picture is distorted: macroblock,
small block, dots, pixelization
● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving
pictures such as sports and action movies.
● low signal level can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue.
PC Connection
‘Not Supported Mode’ message. ● Set your PC’s output resolution and frequency so it matches the resolutions supported
by the TV.
PC is always shown on source list
even if not connected.
● This is normal; PC is always shown on the source list even though a PC is not
connected.
video is OK but there is no audio
with HDMI connection.
● Check the audio output setting on your PC.
BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:32English - 32
Issue Solution
Others
Picture is not shown in full screen. ● Black bars on each side will be shown on Hd channels when displaying upscaled Sd
(4:3) contents.
● Black bars on Top & Bottom will be shown on movies that have aspect ratios different
from your TV.
● Adjust picture size option on your external device or TV to full screen.
remote control does not work. ● replace the remote control batteries with correct polarity (+ -).
● Clean the transmission window located on the top of the remote.
● Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away.
Can not control TV power or
volume with Cable/Set top box
remote control.
● Programme the Cable/Set top box remote control to operate the Tv. refer to Cable/Sat
user manual for SAMSUNG TV code.
‘Not Supported Mode’ message. ● Check the supported resolution of the Tv and adjust the external device’s output
resolution accordingly. refer to resolution settings in this manual.
Plastic smell from Tv. ● This smell is normal and will dissipate over time.
TV Signal Information is
unavailable in the Self Diagnostic
Test menu.
● This function is only available with digital channels with an Antenna (rF/Coax)
connection.
TV is tilted to right or left side. ● remove the stand base from TV and reassemble.
Can not assemble stand base. ● Make sure Tv is placed on flat surface. If can not remove screws from Tv, please use
magnetized screw driver.
Channel menu is grey out.
(unavailable)
● Channel menu is only available when TV source is selected.
Your settings are lost after 30
minutes or every time TV is
turned off.
● If TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30
minutes. Please change from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Plug &
Play procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, go to MENU → Setup
→ Plug & Play → ENTERE.
Intermittent loss of audio or video. ● Check cable connections and reconnect.
● Can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible
enough for long term use. If wall mounting, we recommend using cables with 90
degree connectors.
You may see small particles if you
look closely at the edge of the
bezel surrounding the TV screen.
● This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.
‘Scramble signal’ or ‘Weak Signal/
No Signal’ with CAM CArD(CI).
● Check that CAM has CI Card installed into the common interface slot.
● Pull out CAM from the Tv and insert into the slot again.
When turned off and 45 minutes
later, TV is turned on itself.
● It is normal, the Tv operate OTA (Over The Air) function itself to upgrade firmware
downloaded during watching.
recurrent picture/sound issue. ● Check and change signal/source.
N This TFT lCD panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However, there
may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product.
BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:32English - 33
¦ Specifications
Model Name LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431
Screen Size
(Diagonal) 19 inch 22 inch
PC Resolution
(Optimum) 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz
Sound
(Output) 3W x 2 3W x 2
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Body
With stand
477 x 65 x 327 mm
477 x 180 x 362 mm
558 x 75 x 384 mm
558 x 216 x 426 mm
Weight
With Stand 5 kg 7 kg
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
10% to 80%, non-condensing
-20°C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F)
5% to 95%, non-condensing
Stand Swivel
left / right 0˚
N design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
N This device is a Class B digital apparatus.
N For the power supply and Power Cons
BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:33les figures et illustrations contenues dans ce mode d’emploi sont fournies pour référence uniquement. elles peuvent différer de
l’aspect réel du produit. la conception et les spécifications du produit sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis.
❑ Licence
TruSurround HD, SrS et le symbole sont des marques de SrS labs, Inc. la technologie
TruSurround HD est incorporée sous licence de SrS labs, Inc.
Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby laboratories. Dolby et le symbole du double D sont des marques déposées
de Dolby laboratories.
❑ Notifications pour le téléviseur numérique
1. les fonctions relatives au téléviseur numérique (DVB) ne sont disponibles que dans les pays ou régions où des signaux
terrestres numériques de type dvB-T (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AvC) sont diffusés ou dans lesquels vous avez accès à un service
de télévision par câble compatible dvB-C (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AAC). Consultez votre distributeur local pour connaître les
possibilités de réception des signaux DVB-T ou DVB-C.
2. DVB-T est la norme du consortium européen pour la diffusion de signaux terrestres de télévision numérique. la norme DVBC est quant à elle prévue pour la diffusion des signaux de télévision numérique par câble. Certaines fonctions particulières,
telles que le guide électronique des programmes (Electric Program Guide - EPG), la vidéo à la demande (video on demand
- vOd), etc., ne sont toutefois pas incluses dans cette spécification. Elles ne seront par conséquent pas traitées pour l'instant.
3. Bien que ce téléviseur soit conforme aux dernières normes dvB-T et dvB-C (août 2008), il n'est pas garanti qu'il soit
compatible avec les futures diffusions de signaux numériques terrestres DVB-T et par câble DVB-C.
4. en fonction du pays ou de la région où vous vous trouvez, certains opérateurs de télévision par câble peuvent facturer des
frais supplémentaires pour un tel service. Vous devrez aussi peut-être accepter les termes et conditions de ces sociétés.
5. Il se peut que certaines fonctions de TV numérique ne soient pas disponibles dans certains pays ou certaines régions et que
la réception des signaux DVB-C ne soit pas correcte avec tous les opérateurs.
6. Pour plus d'informations, contactez votre service client Samsung.
❑ Précautions à prendre lors de l'affichage d'une image fixe
Une image fixe peut occasionner des dommages irrémédiables à l'écran du téléviseur.
● N'affichez pas d'image fixe ou partiellement fixe sur l'écran lCd pendant plus de 2 heures car cela pourrait provoquer
une rémanence de l'image à l'écran. Cette rémanence de l'image est également appelée "brûlure de l'écran". Pour l'éviter,
réduisez la luminosité et le contraste de l'écran lorsque vous affichez une image fixe.
● l'affichage sur l'écran lCd du téléviseur d'images au format 4:3 pendant une période prolongée peut laisser
des traces de bordures à gauche, à droite et au centre de l'écran, dues à la différence d'émission de lumière
sur celui-ci. la lecture d'un dvd ou l'utilisation d'une console de jeu peut avoir un effet similaire sur l'écran.
les dommages occasionnés par l'effet précité ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.
● l'affichage d'images fixes de jeux vidéo et d'ordinateurs pendant une période excessive peut produire des rémanences. Pour
éviter cela, réduisez la "luminosité" et le "contraste" lors de l'affichage d'images fixes.
© 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. Tous droits réservés.
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:33❑ Symboles
N O T
remarque Bouton tactile Bouton TOOlS Appuyez sur
INFORMATIONS GÉNÉRALES
■ Présentation du panneau de commande..............................2
■ Accessoires ..........................................................................3
■ Présentation du panneau de branchement ..........................4
■ Télécommande.....................................................................6
■ Insertion des piles dans la télécommande ...........................6
FONCTIONNEMENT
■ Affichage des menus............................................................7
■ Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur ...............................8
■ Fonction Plug & Play ............................................................8
■ visualisation de l’affichage ...................................................9
CONTRÔLE DES CHAÎNES
■ Configuration du menu des chaînes.....................................9
■ Gestion des chaînes ..........................................................12
CONTRÔLE D'IMAGE
■ Configuration du menu Image ............................................14
■ Utilisation de votre téléviseur comme écran
d'ordinateur (PC) ................................................................16
■ Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC ..............................17
CONTRÔLE DU SON
■ Configuration du menu Sound............................................18
■ Sélection du mode son.......................................................19
CONFIGURATION
■ Configuration du menu Configuration.................................20
ENTRÉE / ASSISTANCE
■ Configuration du menu Input ..............................................23
■ Configuration du menu Support..........................................23
RECOMMANDATION D'UTILISATION
■ Fonction Télétexte..............................................................25
■ Comment ajuster le socle
(modèle 19 pouces uniquement)........................................26
■ Comment ajuster le socle du téléviseur
(modèle 19 pouces uniquement)........................................26
■ Installer des systèmes de montage conformes vESA
(modèles 19 pouces uniquement). .....................................27
■ Utiliser le couvercle de décoration
(modèle 19 pouces uniquement)........................................27
■ Montage du socle ...............................................................28
■ Installation du kit de montage mural...................................28
■ Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington .............................28
■ Sécurisation de l'emplacement d'installation......................29
■ Fixation du téléviseur au mur .............................................29
■ Dépannage.........................................................................30
■ Caractéristiques..................................................................33
CONTENU
Français
Français - 1
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:33INFORMATIONS GÉNÉRALES
¦ Présentation du panneau de commande
N la couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
N Vous pouvez utiliser un bouton en appuyant sur les boutons du panneau latéral.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCEE: Bascule entre toutes les sources d'entrée disponibles. dans le menu à l'écran, utilisez ce bouton de la même
façon que le bouton ENTERE de la télécommande.
2 MENU : Permet d'afficher un menu à l'écran des fonctions du téléviseur.
3Y : Permet d'augmenter ou de baisser le volume.
dans le menu à l'écran, utilisez les boutons Y de la même façon que les boutons ◄ et ► de la télécommande.
4Z: Permet de changer de chaîne. dans le menu à l'écran, utilisez les boutons Z de la même façon que les
boutons ▼ et ▲ de la télécommande.
5 P (ALIMENTATION) : Permet d'allumer et d'éteindre le téléviseur.
6 CAPTEUR DE LA TÉLÉCOMMANDE : dirigez la télécommande vers ce point du téléviseur.
7 TÉMOIN D'ALIMENTATION : Clignote et s'éteint lorsqu'il est sous tension et s'allume en mode veille.
8 HAUT-PARLEURS
Français - 2
BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:33Français - 3
¦ Accessoires
Télécommande et piles
(2 x AAA)
Cordon d’alimentation Couvercle-Fond Chiffon de nettoyage
(M4 X l16)
Kit de montage mural
(modèle 19 pouces uniquement)
Couvercle décoratif
(modèle 19 pouces uniquement)
Vis de pied X 4
(modèle 22 pouces uniquement)
● Instructions d’utilisation ● Carte de garantie ● Manuel de sécurité
N vérifiez que les éléments suivants sont fournis avec votre téléviseur lCd. S'il manque des éléments, contactez votre
revendeur.
N Carte de garantie / Manuel de sécurité (non disponible pour tous les pays)
N la couleur et la forme des éléments peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:34Français - 4
¦ Présentation du panneau de branchement
N la couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
N lorsque vous branchez un périphérique externe sur votre téléviseur, assurez-vous que celui-ci est éteint.
N lorsque vous branchez un périphérique externe, faites correspondre les couleurs de la borne de connexion et du câble.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
– Pour raccorder un composant audio numérique tel qu'un récepteur home cinéma.
N lorsque les prises HDMI IN sont connectées, la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) du téléviseur produit uniquement
un signal audio 2 voies. Pour écouter du son canal 5,1, branchez la prise optique du lecteur dvd / Blu-ray ou du
décodeur câble/décodeur satellite directement sur un amplificateur ou sur un système home cinéma, et non sur le
téléviseur.
2 SERVICE
– Connecteur pour mises à niveau logicielles.
3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC]
– Pour raccorder la fiche HdMI d'un périphérique équipé d'une sortie HdMI.
N Aucune connexion audio supplémentaire n’est requise pour une connexion HDMI - HDMI.
N Qu’est-ce que HdMI ?
HdMI (High-definition Multimedia Interface) est une interface qui permet la transmission des signaux audio et vidéo
numériques à l’aide d’un seul câble.
la différence entre HdMI et dvI est que le périphérique HdMI est plus petit, dispose de la fonction de codage HdCP
(High Bandwidth digital Copy Protection) et prend en charge le son numérique multicanal.
N Utilisez un câble ou un adaptateur DVI-HDMI pour la connexion vidéo et les prises PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] pour le son.
lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la prise HDMI IN 1 (DVI)
HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO]
– Pour raccorder la fiche de sortie audio de votre PC.
– Sorties audio DVI pour périphériques externes.
HDMI / PC IN [PC]
– Pour raccorder la fiche de sortie vidéo de votre PC.
N Si votre PC dispose d’une prise dvI, vous pouvez la relier à la borne HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)].
N Si votre PC dispose d’une prise dvI, vous pouvez la relier à la borne HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO].
4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
– Branchez un câble rCA à un périphérique externe audio/vidéo approprié tel qu'un magnétoscope, un lecteur dvd ou un
caméscope.
– Branchez les câbles audio rCA sur la prise [R-AUDIO-L] du téléviseur et leur autre extrémité sur les prises de sortie
audio correspondantes du périphérique audio/vidéo.
6
7
1 2 3 4
0 9 8
5
Français - 4
[Panneau arrière du téléviseur]
Entrée de
l'alimentation
BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:34Français - 5
5 ANT IN
– Pour raccorder une antenne ou un système de câblodiffusion.
6 emplacement COMMON INTERFACE
– Si vous n'insérez pas la carte d'interface commune (CI CArd) dans certains canaux, le message "Scrambled Signal"
s'affiche.
– les informations de pairage contenant un numéro de téléphone, l'Id de la CI CArd, l'Id de l'hôte et d'autres informations
s'afficheront dans 2 ou 3 minutes. Si un message d'erreur s'affiche, contactez votre fournisseur de service.
– lorsque la configuration des informations sur les chaînes est terminée, le message "Updating Completed" s'affiche,
indiquant que la liste des chaînes est à jour.
N vous devez vous procurer une CI CArd auprès d'un fournisseur local de câblodiffusion. Extrayez la CI CArd en la tirant
délicatement. Une chute pourrait l'endommager.
N Insérez la CI-Card dans le sens indiqué sur celle-ci.
N l'emplacement de la fente COMMON INTERFACE peut varier en fonction du modèle.
N Il se peut que le module CAM ne soit pas pris en charge dans certains pays ou régions. vérifiez auprès de votre
revendeur agréé.
7 Verrou KENSINGTON (en fonction du modèle)
– le verrou Kensington (en option) est un dispositif permettant de fixer physiquement le système en cas d'utilisation dans
un lieu public. Si vous désirez utiliser un dispositif de verrouillage, contactez le revendeur auquel vous avez acheté le
téléviseur.
N l'emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modèle.
8 Prise du casque
– le casque peut être branché à la sortie casque sur votre téléviseur. lorsque le casque est branché, le son des hautparleurs intégrés est désactivé.
9 COMPONENT IN
– Branchez les câbles vidéo de composant (en option) aux connecteurs de composant (PR, PB, Y) à l'arrière du téléviseur
et les autres extrémités aux connecteurs de sortie vidéo de composant correspondants sur le récepteur DTV ou le lecteur
DVD.
– Si vous souhaitez brancher à la fois le boîtier décodeur et le récepteur dTv (ou lecteur dvd), vous devez brancher
le boîtier décodeur au récepteur dTv (ou au lecteur dvd), puis le récepteur dTv (ou lecteur dvd) au connecteur de
composant (PR, PB, Y) du téléviseur.
– les connecteurs PR, PB et Y de vos composants (récepteur DTV ou lecteur DVD) sont parfois désignés par les lettres Y,
B-Y et r-Y ou Y, Cb et Cr.
– Branchez les câbles audio rCA (en option) sur la prise [R-AUDIO-L] à l'arrière du téléviseur et leur autre extrémité sur
les prises de sortie audio correspondantes du récepteur DTV ou du lecteur DVD.
0 EXT (RGB)
Connecteur
entrée Sortie
Vidéo Audio (G / D) rVB Vidéo + Audio (G / D)
EXT O O O Seule la sortie TV ou DTV est disponible.
– entrées ou sorties pour périphériques externes tels que des magnétoscopes, des lecteurs DVD, des consoles de jeux
vidéo ou des lecteurs de vidéodisques.
Français - 5
BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:34Français - 6
¦ Télécommande
N vous pouvez utiliser la télécommande jusqu'à une distance maximale d'environ 7 m du téléviseur.
N Une lumière intense peut affecter le bon fonctionnement de la télécommande.
N la couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
1 POWER : Bouton de mise en veille
du téléviseur.
2 TOUCHES NUMÉRIQUES :
Permettent de changer de chaîne.
3 FAV.CH : Permet d’afficher la liste
des chaînes favorites sur l’écran du
téléviseur.
4Y : Permet d'augmenter ou
de baisser le volume.
5 SOURCE : Permet d'afficher et
de sélectionner les sources vidéo
disponibles.
6 INFO : Permet d'afficher des
informations sur l'écran du
téléviseur.
7 TOOLS : Permet de sélectionner
rapidement les fonctions
fréquemment utilisées.
8 CH LIST : Affiche la liste des
chaînes.
9 BOUTONS DE COULEUR : Utilisez
ces boutons dans les menus de
Liste des chaînes, etc.
! TV : Sélectionne directement le
mode TV.
@ PRE-CH : Vous permet de revenir
à la chaîne que vous regardiez
précédemment.
# MUTEM : Vous permet de couper
le son temporairement.
$ P : Permet de changer de
chaîne.
% MENU : Affiche le menu principal à
l'écran.
^ GUIDE : Affichage du guide électronique
des programmes (EPG).
& RETURN : revient au menu précédent
* HAUT▲ / BAS▼ / GAUCHE◄ /
DROITE► / ENTERE : Permettent
de sélectionner des options de menu
à l'écran et de modifier des valeurs de
menu.
( EXIT : Permet de quitter le menu.
) SUBT. : Affichage numérique des soustitres.
a AD : Sélection de la description audio.
Fonctions télétexte.
5 0 : Sélection du mode Télétexte (lIST/
FlOF).
6 5 : Activation du télétexte.
7 4 : Sélection de la taille du télétexte.
8 8 : Mémorisation du télétexte.
9 Sélection des rubriques Fastext
0/ : Sélection alternative de
Teletext, Double ou Mix.
! :: fermer l'affichage du télétexte.
@ 1 : Page secondaire du télétexte.
$ 2 : Page de télétexte suivante
3 : Page de télétexte précédente.
% 6 : Index du télétexte
& 9 : Pause du télétexte.
( 7 : Annulation du télétexte.
¦ Insertion des piles dans la télécommande
1. Soulevez le couvercle au dos de la télécommande comme illustré dans la figure.
2. Placez-y deux piles AAA.
N Assurez-vous que les pôles "+" et "–" des piles correspondent au schéma situé à
l'intérieur du compartiment.
3. replacez le couvercle.
N retirez les piles et stockez-les dans un endroit frais et sec si vous n'utilisez pas la
télécommande pendant longtemps.
N Si la télécommande ne fonctionne pas, vérifiez les points suivants :
● le téléviseur est-il sous tension ?
● les bornes + et - des piles ne sont-elles pas inversées ?
● les piles sont-elles déchargées ?
● le cordon d'alimentation est-il débranché ou y a-t-il une panne de courant ?
● Une lampe fluorescente ou néon est-elle allumée à proximité ?
Français - 6
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:34Français - 7
FONCTIONNEMENT
¦ Affichage des menus
Avant d'utiliser le téléviseur, procédez comme suit pour apprendre à naviguer dans le menu
afin de sélectionner et de régler les différentes fonctions.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU.
le menu principal s'affiche à l'écran. Son côté gauche contient des icônes : Image, Son,
Canal, Conf., Entrée, Application, Assistance.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner l'une des icônes.
Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour accéder au sous-menu de l'icône.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer des options dans le menu.
Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour entrer des options dans le menu.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲/▼/◄/► pour modifier les options sélectionnées.
N Appuyez sur le bouton RETURN pour revenir au menu précédent.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu.
Utilisation des boutons de télécommande
Bouton Opération Bouton Opération
MENUm Afficher le menu principal à l'écran.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Déplacer le curseur pour sélectionner un
élément.
Choisir l'élément sélectionné.
Confirmer un paramétrage.
RUTURNR revenir au menu précédent.
EXITe Fermer le menu affiché à l'écran.
Exemple : configuration de la luminosité du téléviseur dans le menu Image
Réglage de la luminosité sur 80
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU pour afficher le menu.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Image.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour régler la Luminosité.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► jusqu'à ce que la luminosité soit réglée sur 80.
6. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu.
Français - 7
Mode : Standard ►
rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50
Image
Mode : Standard ►
rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50
Image
rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
Luminosité : 45 ►
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50
Paramètres avancés
Options d'image
réinitialisation de l'image
Image
U Déplacer L régler E entrer R retour
luminosité 45
U Déplacer L régler E entrer R retour
luminosité 80
Mode : Standard ►
rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50
Image
BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35Français - 8
¦ Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur
Vous pouvez mettre votre téléviseur en mode Veille afin de réduire la consommation électrique. le mode veille peut être utile si
vous souhaitez éteindre votre téléviseur temporairement (pendant un repas par exemple).
1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWERP de la télécommande.
N l'écran s'éteint et un voyant de veille apparaît sur votre téléviseur.
2. Pour rallumer le téléviseur, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton POWERP.
N Ne laissez pas le téléviseur en mode Veille pendant de longues périodes (lorsque vous êtes en vacances par exemple). Il
est conseillé de débrancher le téléviseur du secteur et de l'antenne.
¦ Fonction Plug & Play
lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, des réglages de base s'effectuent l'un
après l'autre de manière automatique.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER de la télécommande. le message You can set the menu
language. s’affiche.
2. Sélectionnez la langue appropriée en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le
bouton ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Enr. démo ou Util. domicile, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Nous recommandons de régler le téléviseur sur le mode Util. domicile pour une meilleure qualité d'image dans votre
environnement personnel.
N Enr. démo n'est prévu que pour un usage en magasin.
N Si l'unité est accidentellement réglée sur le mode Enr. démo et que vous souhaitez revenir au mode Util. domicile
(Standard) : Appuyez sur le bouton volume du téléviseur. lorsque l'affichage écran du volume apparaît, appuyez
pendant 5 secondes sur le bouton MENU du téléviseur.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Sélectionnez le pays approprié en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Hertzien ou Câble, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Hertzien: Hertzien signal d'antenne.
Câble: Câble signal d'antenne.
6. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner la source de chaîne à mémoriser. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour
sélectionner Démarrer.
N Numérique et Analogique : Chaînes numériques et analogiques.
Numérique : Chaînes numériques.
Analogique : Chaînes analogiques.
N lors du réglage de la source d'antenne sur Câble, une fenêtre s'affiche, qui vous permet de définir une valeur pour la
recherche de chaîne numérique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à Canal → Mémorisation Auto.
N la recherche de chaînes démarre et se termine automatiquement.
N Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE à tout moment pour interrompre la mémorisation.
N Une fois toutes les chaînes disponibles mémorisées, le message Définit le mode Horloge s'affiche.
7. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Auto., puis appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE.
N Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, Définit la date et l'heure s'affiche.
N Si vous recevez un signal numérique, l'heure se règle automatiquement. Sinon, sélectionnez Manuel pour régler l'horloge
(voir page 20).
8. la méthode de connexion pour l'obtention de la meilleure qualité Hd est proposée. Après avoir confirmé la méthode, appuyez
sur le bouton ENTERE.
9. le message Profitez de votre téléviseur. s'affiche. lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Si vous souhaitez réinitialiser cette fonction...
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU pour afficher le menu. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Conf., puis sur le
bouton ENTERE.
2. Appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner Plug & Play.
3. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. le code PIN par défaut d'un nouveau téléviseur est 0-0-0-0.
N Si vous voulez modifier le code PIN, utilisez la fonction Modifier PIN. (voir page 22).
N la fonction Plug & Play est uniquement disponible en mode TV.
Français - 8
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu language : English ►
E enter
BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35Français - 9
¦ Visualisation de l’affichage
l’affichage identifie la chaîne en cours et l’état de certains paramètres audio et vidéo.
O Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher les informations.
Appuyez sur le bouton INFO de la télécommande. la télévision affiche la chaîne, le type
de son et l’état de certains paramètres de son et d’image.
● ▲, ▼: vous pouvez afficher des informations relatives à une autre chaîne. Pour
accéder à la chaîne actuellement sélectionnée, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
● ◄, ►: vous pouvez afficher les informations relatives au programme souhaité de la
chaîne actuelle.
N Appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton INFO ou attendez environ 10 secondes pour que
l’affichage disparaisse automatiquement.
CONTRÔLE DES CHAÎNES
¦ Configuration du menu des chaînes
❑ Pays
N l'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
Canal analogique
Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes analogiques.
Canal numérique
Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes numériques.
❑ Mémorisation Auto
Vous pouvez chercher les plages de fréquence disponibles par balayage (leur disponibilité dépend de votre pays). Il est possible
que les numéros de programme attribués automatiquement ne correspondent pas aux numéros de programme souhaités ou réels.
N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche.
Hertzien / Câble
Source d'antenne à mémoriser
● Numérique et Analogique : Chaînes numériques et analogiques.
● Numérique : Chaînes numériques.
● Analogique : Chaînes analogiques.
Lors de la sélection de ‘Câble → Numérique et Analogique’ ou de ‘Câble → Numérique’
Fournissez une valeur à rechercher pour les chaînes câblées.
● Mode Rech. → Complet / Réseau / Rapide
N Rapide
– Network ID : affiche le code d'identification du réseau.
– Fréquence : affiche la fréquence correspondant au canal (varie d'un pays à l'autre).
– Modulation : affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
– Taux de symbole : affiche les débits de symboles disponibles.
N Cherche toutes les chaînes avec des stations de diffusion actives et les enregistre dans la mémoire du téléviseur.
N Pour arrêter la mémorisation automatique, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
le message Arrêter le programme automatique ? s'affiche.
Sélectionnez Oui en appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Français - 9
Pays ►
Mémorisation Auto
Mémorisation Manuelle
Option de recherche du câble
Guide Now & Next
Guide Complet
Par défaut : Guide Complet
Canal
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
life On venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ¦ INFO
BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35Français - 10
❑ Mémorisation Manuelle
N Permet de chercher manuellement une chaîne et de l'enregistrer dans la mémoire du téléviseur.
N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche.
Canal numérique
Enregistrement manuel de chaînes numériques.
N Canal numérique est uniquement disponible en mode DTV.
● Canal : Sélectionnez le numéro de chaîne à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des chiffres (0~9).
● Fréquence : Sélectionnez la fréquence à l'aide des chiffres.
● Bande passante : Sélectionnez la bande passante à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des chiffres (0~9).
N Au terme de la recherche, les chaînes de la liste sont mises à jour.
Canal analogique
Enregistrement manuel de chaînes analogiques.
● Programme (numéro de programme à attribuer à une chaîne) : Sélectionnez le numéro de chaîne à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼
ou des touches numériques (0~9).
● Système de Couleur → Auto. / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43 : Sélectionnez le système de couleurs à l'aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼.
● Système Sonore → BG / DK / I / L: Sélectionnez le système audio à l'aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼.
● Canal (si vous connaissez le numéro de la chaîne à mémoriser) : Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner
C (chaîne hertzienne) ou S (chaîne câblée). Appuyez sur le bouton ►, puis sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ ou un chiffre (0~9) pour
sélectionner le numéro de votre choix.
N vous pouvez également sélectionner le numéro de chaîne directement en appuyant sur les touches numériques (0~9).
N Si aucun son ne sort ou si le son produit est anormal, sélectionnez de nouveau la norme son requise.
● Recherche (lorsque vous ne connaissez pas les numéros de chaîne) : Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour lancer la
recherche. le syntoniseur balaie la plage de fréquences jusqu'à ce que vous receviez la première chaîne ou la chaîne que
vous avez sélectionnée à l'écran.
● Enr. (permet de mémoriser la chaîne et le numéro de programme correspondant) : Sélectionnez OK en appuyant sur le
bouton ENTERE.
N Mode des chaînes
– P (Mode Programme) : à la fin du réglage, des numéros de position compris entre P00 et P99 sont attribués aux stations
de radiodiffusion de votre région. dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner un chaîne en saisissant son numéro de
position.
– C (Mode chaîne hertzienne) : dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant le numéro attribué à
chacune des stations de télédiffusion.
– S (Mode chaîne câblée) : dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant le numéro attribué à
chacune des chaînes câblées.
❑ Option de recherche du câble (en fonction du pays)
Définit des options supplémentaires telles que la fréquence et le débit de symboles pour les recherches sur réseau câblé.
● Fréquence (Début ~ Fin) : affiche la fréquence correspondant au canal.
● Modulation : affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
● Taux de symbole : affiche les débits de symboles disponibles.
❑ Guide Now & Next / Guide Complet
les informations relatives au guide électronique des programmes (EPG) sont fournies par les diffuseurs. des entrées de
programmes peuvent être vides ou ne pas être à jour en raison des informations diffusées sur un canal donné. l'affichage est
automatiquement actualisé dès que de nouvelles informations sont disponibles.
N Pour obtenir plus de détails sur les procédures d'utilisation du Guide Now & Next et Guide Complet, reportez-vous aux
descriptions de la page 11.
O vous pouvez aussi afficher le guide en appuyant simplement sur le bouton GUIDE (pour configurer Par défaut, reportez-vous
aux descriptions).
Guide Now & Next
Pour les six canaux indiqués dans la colonne de gauche, les informations relatives au programme actuel et au programme suivant
sont affichées.
Guide Complet
Affiche le programme heure par heure. deux heures de programme sont affichées et vous pouvez faire défiler le programme en
avançant ou en remontant dans le temps.
Français - 10
BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35Français - 11
❑ Par défaut → Guide Now & Next / Guide Complet
vous pouvez choisir d'afficher le Guide Now & Next ou le Guide Complet lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton GUIDE de la
télécommande.
❑ Liste des chaînes
Pour obtenir plus de détails sur les procédures d'utilisation de la Liste des chaînes, reportez-vous aux instructions de Managing
Channels.
O Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton CH LIST de la télécommande.
❑ Mode Canal
Appuyez sur le bouton P >/<. l’ordre des chaînes affichées change.
Chaînes ajoutées
l’ordre des chaînes change dans la liste des chaînes mémorisées.
Favoris
l’ordre des chaînes change dans la liste des chaînes favorites.
❑ Réglage fin
Si la réception est claire, vous n'avez pas besoin d'effectuer une syntonisation fine du canal, car cette opération s'effectue
automatiquement pendant la recherche et la mémorisation. Si le signal est faible ou distordu, vous pouvez être amené à effectuer
manuellement une syntonisation fine du canal.
N les canaux finement syntonisés qui ont été mémorisés sont repérés par un astérisque "*" placé à droite de leur numéro dans
la bannière des canaux.
N Pour rétablir la syntonisation fine, sélectionnez Réin. à l'aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N la syntonisation fine n'est possible que pour des chaînes analogiques.
Utilisation du Guide Now & Next / Guide Complet
Pour… Alors…
regarder un programme de la liste du guide
électronique des programmes
Sélectionnez un programme à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Quitter le guide Appuyez sur le bouton bleu.
Si le programme suivant est sélectionné, il est planifié avec l'icône de l'horloge affichée. Si vous appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton
ENTERE puis sur ◄, ► pour sélectionner Annuler progr., la programmation est annulée et l'icône de l'horloge disparaît.
Voir les informations relatives aux programmes Sélectionnez un programme à l'aide des boutons ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton INFO lorsque le programme de votre choix
apparaît en surbrillance.
le titre du programme se trouve dans la partie supérieure du centre de
l'écran.
Cliquez sur le bouton INFO pour obtenir des informations détaillées. Numéro de canal, temps de fonctionnement du programme,
barre d'état, niveau de contrôle parental, informations sur la qualité vidéo (Hd/Sd), modes son, sous-titres ou télétexte, langue des
sous-titres ou du télétexte et bref résumé du programme en surbrillance font partie des informations détaillées. “...” s'affiche si le
résumé est long.
Choisissez entre Guide Now & Next et
Guide complet
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur le bouton rouge.
Dans le guide complet
reculer rapidement (24 heures).
Avancer rapidement (24 heures).
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur le bouton vert.
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur le bouton jaune.
Guide Complet
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jui
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Aujourd’hui 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
No Information
Freshmen O..
Regarder
INFO Information ■ Main/Aprés ■ +24 Heure ■ Quitter
Guide Now & Next
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jui
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Maintenant Suivant
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
.
Kisstory
No Information
No Information.
No Information
Street Hypn..
Regarder
INFO Information ■ Guide Complet ■ Quitter
BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35¦ Gestion des chaînes
Ce menu permet d'ajouter/supprimer ou définir des chaînes favorites et d'utiliser le guide des
programmes pour les émissions numériques.
Tous les canaux
Affiche toutes les chaînes actuellement disponibles.
Chaînes ajoutées
Affiche toutes les chaînes ajoutées.
Favoris
Affiche toutes les chaînes favorites.
O Pour sélectionner les chaînes favorites que vous avez configurées, appuyez sur le bouton FAV.CH de la télécommande.
Programmé
Affiche tous les programmes actuellement réservés.
N Sélectionnez une chaîne dans l'écran Tous les canaux, Chaînes ajoutées ou Favoris en appuyant sur les boutons ▲ / ▼,
puis sur le bouton ENTERE. vous pouvez alors regarder la chaîne sélectionnée.
N Utilisation des boutons de couleur dans la liste des chaînes
– rouge (Type de canal) : permet de basculer entre TV, Radio, Donn/autre et Tous.
– Vert (Zoom) : Agrandit ou réduit un numéro de chaîne.
– jaune (Sélect.) : Sélectionne plusieurs listes de chaînes. vous pouvez appliquer les fonctions d'ajout/suppression,
d'ajout / suppression de favoris ou de verrouillage / déverrouillage à plusieurs chaînes à la fois. Sélectionnez les chaînes
voulues, puis appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour traiter toutes les chaînes sélectionnées à la fois. la marque c s'affiche
à gauche des chaînes sélectionnées.
– TOOLS (Outils) : affiche le menu Supprimer (ou Ajouter), Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris), Verrouil.
(ou Déverr.), Rappel de prog., Modif. Nom Canal, Tri des canaux, Modif. numéro chaîne, Sélectionner tout, (ou
Désélec. Tout), Mémorisation Auto. (les menus Options peuvent varier en fonction de la situation.)
N Icônes d'état des chaînes
● A : Chaîne analogique.
● c : Chaîne sélectionnée en appuyant sur le bouton jaune.
● : Chaîne définie comme favorite.
● ( : Programme en cours de diffusion.
● \ : Chaîne verrouillée.
● ) : Programme réservé.
Menu d'options de la liste des chaînes (dans Tous les canaux / Chaînes ajoutées / Favoris)
N Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu d'options.
N les éléments du menu Options peuvent varier selon l'état de la chaîne.
Ajouter / Supprimer
vous pouvez supprimer ou ajouter une chaîne afin d'afficher les chaînes de votre choix.
N Toutes les chaînes supprimées apparaîtront dans le menu Tous les canaux.
N Une chaîne grisée est une chaîne qui a été supprimée.
N le menu Ajouter s'affiche uniquement pour les chaînes supprimées.
N vous pouvez également ajouter une chaîne du menu Chaînes ajoutées ou Favoris de la
même manière.
Ajouter aux favoris / Supprimer des favoris
vous pouvez définir comme favorites les chaînes que vous regardez souvent.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. vous pouvez également définir l'ajout aux (ou la suppression
des) favoris en sélectionnant Outils → Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris).
N le symbole " " s’affiche et la chaîne est définie comme favorite.
N Toutes les chaînes favorites apparaîtront dans le menu Favoris.
Français - 12
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Chaînes ajoutées Tous ■ Type de Canal ■ Zoom ■ Sélectionnez T utils
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Chaînes ajoutées
Tous ■ Type de Canal ■ Zoom ■ Sélection T Outils
Supp.
Ajouter aux favoris
Verrouil.
Rappel de prog.
Modifi. nom de chaîne
Tri des canaux
▼
BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:35 Verrouil. / Déverr.
vous pouvez verrouiller une chaîne afin qu'elle ne puisse pas être sélectionnée ni visualisée. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si
l'option Verr Parental est définie sur Marche (Voir page 22).
N l'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
N le code PIN par défaut d'un nouveau téléviseur est 0-0-0-0. vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN
dans le menu.
N le symbole "\" s'affiche et la chaîne est verrouillée.
Rappel de prog.
Si vous réservez un programme que vous souhaitez regarder, la chaîne bascule automatiquement vers la chaîne réservée dans
la liste de chaînes, même si vous êtes en train de regarder une autre chaîne. Pour réserver un programme, réglez d'abord l'heure
actuelle (Voir page 20).
N Il n'est possible de réserver que des chaînes mémorisées.
N vous pouvez régler directement la chaîne, le jour, le mois, l'heure et les minutes à l'aide des touches numériques de la
télécommande.
N les programmes réservés apparaissent dans le menu Programme.
N Guide des programmes numérique et affichage des réservations
Quand une chaîne numérique est sélectionnée et que vous appuyez sur le bouton ►, le Guide des programmes de la chaîne
s'affiche. vous pouvez réserver un programme en suivant les procédures décrites ci-dessus.
Modifi. nom de chaîne (chaînes analogiques uniquement)
vous pouvez attribuer aux chaînes un libellé qui s'affiche chaque fois que vous les sélectionnez.
N les noms des chaînes numériques leur sont automatiquement attribués ; vous ne pouvez pas les modifier.
Modif. numéro chaîne (chaînes numériques uniquement)
vous pouvez également modifier le numéro de chaîne à l'aide du pavé numérique de la télécommande.
Tri des canaux (chaînes analogiques uniquement)
Cette opération permet de changer les numéros de programme des chaînes mémorisées. Cette opération peut s'avérer
nécessaire après l'utilisation de la mémorisation automatique.
Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout
● Sélectionner Tout: vous pouvez sélectionner toutes les chaînes de la liste des chaînes.
● Désélec. Tout: vous pouvez désélectionner toutes les chaînes sélectionnées.
N la fonction Désélec. Tout n'est disponible que si au moins une chaîne est sélectionnée.
Mémorisation Auto
N Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des options, reportez-vous à la page 9.
N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verr Parental, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche.
Menu d'options de la liste des chaînes (dans Programmé)
vous pouvez voir, modifier ou supprimer une réservation.
N Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu d'options.
Infos modif.
Permet de modifier une réservation.
Annuler progr.
Permet d'annuler une réservation.
Information
Permet de visualiser une réservation (et d'en modifier les informations).
Sélectionner tout
Permet de sélectionner tous les programmes réservés.
Français - 13
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer
20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife
Programmé Tous ■ Zoom ■ Sélection T Outils E Information
Infos modif.
Annuler progr.
Information
Sélectionner tout
BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36CONTRÔLE D'IMAGE
¦ Configuration du menu Image
❑ Mode
vous pouvez sélectionner le type d'image correspondant le mieux à vos besoins d'affichage.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également
définir le mode d'image en sélectionnant Outils → Mde d'image.
Dynamique
Sélectionne l'image pour un affichage haute définition dans une pièce lumineuse.
Standard
Sélectionne l'image pour un affichage optimal dans un environnement normal.
Cinéma
Sélectionne l'image pour le visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre.
❑ Rétroéclairage / Contraste / Luminosité / Netteté / Couleur / Teinte (V/R)
votre téléviseur offre de plusieurs options de paramétrage qui permettent de contrôler la
qualité d'image.
● Rétroéclairage : règle la luminosité du rétroéclairage de l'écran lCd.
● Contraste : règle le niveau de contraste de l'image.
● Luminosité : règle le niveau de luminosité de l'image.
● Netteté : règle la définition des bords de l'image.
● Couleur : règle la saturation de couleur de l'image.
● Teinte (V/R) : Ajuste la teinte de couleur de l'image.
N Sélectionnez un mode d'image à ajuster. les valeurs ajustées sont enregistrées pour tous les modes d'image.
N lorsque vous modifiez les paramètres Rétroéclairage, Contraste, Luminosité, Netteté, Couleur ou Teinte (V/R), l'affichage
à l'écran change en conséquence.
N Dans les modes analogiques TV, Ext., AV du système PAl, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction Teinte (V/R).
N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les options Rétroéclairage, Contraste et Luminosité.
N vous pouvez régler et Mémoriser des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur.
N vous pouvez réduire sensiblement l'énergie consommée en cours d'utilisation en baissant le niveau de luminosité de l'image,
de façon à diminuer le coût de fonctionnement général.
❑ Paramètres avancés
les nouveaux téléviseurs Samsung permettent d'effectuer des réglages d'image encore plus précis que les modèles précédents.
le réglage des paramètres détaillés de l'image est expliqué ci-dessous.
N Paramètres avancés est disponible dans les modes Standard et Cinéma.
N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Gamma et Balance blancs parmi les options de menu
Paramètres avancés.
Nuance de noir → Arrêt / Sombre / Plus sombre / Le plus sombre
vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l'écran.
Contraste Dynam. → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé
vous pouvez régler le contraste de l'écran pour obtenir un résultat optimal.
Gamma
vous pouvez régler l'intensité des couleurs primaires (rouge, vert, bleu).
Espace couleur
espace couleur de Couleur est une matrice de couleurs composée de rouge, de vert et de bleu. Sélectionnez votre espace de
couleur préféré et appréciez la couleur la plus naturelle.
● Natif : offre une nuance de couleur profonde et riche.
● Auto. : règle automatiquement la nuance de couleur la plus naturelle sur la base des sources de programme.
Français - 14
Mode : Standard ►
rétroéclairage : 7
Contraste : 95
luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50
Image
Couleur : 50
Teinte (v / r) : v50 / r50
Paramètres avancés ►
Options d'image
réinitialisation de l'image
Image
BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36 Balance blancs
Vous pouvez régler la température des Couleur pour que celles-ci soient plus naturelles.
● Aj. Rouge / Aj. Vert / Aj. Bleu / Regl. Rouge / Regl. vert / Regl. bleu : vous pouvez régler la température de couleur des
zones claires en modifiant les valeurs r, G et B. recommandé pour les utilisateurs avancés uniquement.
● Réinit. : les valeurs par défaut de l'équilibrage du blanc réglé précédemment sont rétablies.
Carnation
vous pouvez accentuer le "ton chair" de l'image.
N la modification des valeurs de réglage actualise l'affichage à l'écran.
Netteté des contours → Arrêt / Marche
vous pouvez faire ressortir les contours des objets dans l'image.
❑ Options d'image
N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Nuance Coul. et Taille parmi les options du menu
Options d'image.
Nuance Coul. → Froide / Normal / Chaude1 / Chaude2
vous pouvez sélectionner la nuance de couleur la plus agréable à l'œil.
N vous pouvez régler et enregistrer des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur.
N Chaude1 ou Chaude2 ne sont activées que si le mode d'image est Cinéma.
Taille
vous pouvez sélectionner la taille d'image qui correspond le mieux à vos besoins d'affichage.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. vous pouvez également définir la taille en sélectionnant Outils
→ Format de l’image.
● 16/9 auto : règle automatiquement la taille de l'image sur le format 16:9.
● 16:9 : règle la taille de l'image sur 16:9 de façon appropriée pour les dvd ou la diffusion au format cinémascope.
● Zoom large : agrandit l'image à une taille supérieure à 4:3.
● Zoom : agrandit l'image en 16:9 (dans le sens vertical) pour l'adapter à la taille de l'écran.
● 4:3 : paramètre par défaut pour un film vidéo ou une diffusion normale.
● Adapter écran : Permet de voir l'intégralité de l'image sans coupure lors de l'entrée de signaux HdMI (720p / 1080i) ou
Composant (1080i).
N les options de taille de l'image peuvent varier en fonction de la source d'entrée.
N les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode sélectionné.
N En mode PC, seuls les modes 16:9 et 4:3 peuvent être réglés.
N vous pouvez régler et enregistrer des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur.
N Une rémanence temporaire peut se produire si vous affichez une image statique pendant plus de deux heures sur l'écran du
téléviseur.
N Zoom large : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le
bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l'image vers le haut ou vers le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Zoom : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton
▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l'image vers le haut et vers le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton
► pour sélectionner Taille, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour augmenter ou
réduire la hauteur de l'image. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Après avoir sélectionné l'option Adapter écran en mode HDMI (1080i) ou Component (1080i), sélectionnez Position à l'aide
du bouton ◄ ou ►. Utilisez le bouton ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► pour déplacer l'image.
Réinit. : Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Réinit., puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Vous pouvez
initialiser le réglage.
N Si vous utilisez la fonction Adapter écran avec l'entrée HdMI 720p, une ligne sera coupée en haut, en bas, à gauche et à
droite, comme avec la fonction Overscan.
Mode écran → 16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3
lorsque vous réglez la taille de l'image sur 16/9 auto sur un téléviseur 16:9, vous pouvez déterminer la taille d'affichage d'une
image 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service/service d'écran large) ou choisir de ne rien afficher pour ce format. Chaque pays européen
impose une taille d'image différente ; cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs de sélectionner la leur.
● 16:9 : règle l'image en mode large, c'est-à-dire en 16:9.
● Zoom large : agrandit l'image à une taille supérieure à 4:3.
● Zoom : agrandit la taille de l'image sur l'écran dans le sens vertical.
● 4:3 : règle l'image en mode normal, c'est-à-dire en 4:3.
N Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'en mode 16/9 auto.
N Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en mode PC, Composant ou HDMI.
Français - 15
BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36 NR numérique → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto.
Si le signal de radiodiffusion reçu est faible, vous pouvez activer la fonction Digital Noise reduction pour faciliter la réduction
d'images fantômes ou statiques qui peuvent apparaître à l'écran.
N lorsque le signal est faible, sélectionnez une autre option jusqu'à obtention de la meilleure image possible.
Niv. noir HDMI → Normal / Bas
vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l'écran.
N Cette fonction n'est active que si l'entrée externe se connecte à HdMI (signaux rvB).
Mode Film → Arrêt / Auto.
vous pouvez régler le téléviseur de sorte qu'il détecte et traite automatiquement les signaux de cinéma de toutes les sources et
adapte l'image pour obtenir une qualité optimale.
N Mode Film n'est prise en charge que dans TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i / 1080i) et HDMI(480i / 1080i).
❑ Réinitialisation de l'image → Réinitial. mode image / Annuler
rétablit tous les paramètres des images aux valeurs par défaut.
N Sélectionnez un mode d'image à rétablir. la réinitialisation est effectuée pour chaque mode d'image.
● Réinitial. mode image : rétablit les paramètres par défaut pour les valeurs de l'image actuelle.
¦ Utilisation de votre téléviseur comme écran d'ordinateur (PC)
Configuration de votre logiciel PC (instructions basées sur Windows XP)
les paramètres d'affichage Windows indiqués ci-dessous sont valables pour ordinateur standard. les affichages écran sur
votre PC seront probablement différents, en fonction de votre version de Windows et votre carte vidéo. Cependant, même si les
affichages réels diffèrent, les mêmes informations de configuration de base s'appliquent dans la plupart des cas. dans le cas
contraire, contactez le fabricant de votre ordinateur ou votre revendeur Samsung.
1. dans le menu démarrer de Windows, cliquez sur "Panneau de configuration".
2. dans le Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur "Apparence et thèmes". Une boîte de dialogue s'affiche.
3. Cliquez sur "Affichage". Une nouvelle boîte de dialogue s'affiche.
4. Cliquez sur l'onglet "Paramètres".
réglage correct de la taille (résolution) - Optimal : 1360 x 768 pixels.
S’il existe une option de fréquence verticale sur votre boîte de dialogue des paramètres d’affichage, la valeur correcte est "60"
ou "60 Hz". Sinon, cliquez simplement sur "OK" pour quitter la boîte de dialogue.
Français - 16
BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36Modes d'affichage
la taille et la position de l'écran varient en fonction du type de moniteur du PC et de sa résolution. les résolutions indiquées dans le
tableau sont recommandées.
Entrée D-Secondaire et HDMI/DVI
Mode Résolution
Fréquence horizontale
(kHz)
Fréquence verticale
(Hz)
Fréquence d'horloge pixels
(MHz)
Polarité
synchronisée
(H/V)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
N lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la prise HDMI (DVI).
N le mode entrelacé n'est pas pris en charge.
N le téléviseur peut fonctionner de façon anormale si le format vidéo sélectionné n'est pas standard.
N les modes Séparé et Composite sont pris en charge. le format SOG (SvSv) n'est pas pris en charge.
¦ Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC
N Préréglage: Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode PC.
❑ Réglage Automatique
le réglage automatique permet l'ajustement automatique de l'écran du PC affiché sur le
téléviseur en fonction du signal vidéo entrant du PC. les valeurs des options de réglage fin, de
réglage de base et de position sont ajustées automatiquement.
N Cette fonction ne s'applique pas en mode dvI-HdMI.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également
définir le réglage automatique en sélectionnant Outils → Réglage Automatique.
❑ Ecran
Regl. Base / Regl. Prec
lorsque vous réglez la qualité de l'image, l'objectif est d'éliminer ou de réduire les parasites visuels. Si vous ne pouvez pas
éliminer ces parasites par une syntonisation fine, réglez la fréquence (Regl. Base) au mieux, puis effectuez de nouveau une
syntonisation fine. Une fois les parasites réduits, effectuez un nouveau réglage de l'image pour l'aligner au centre de l'écran.
Position du PC
réglez la position d'affichage du PC si elle ne convient pas pour l'écran du téléviseur. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour régler
la position verticale. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour régler la position horizontale.
Réinitialiser Image
vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs par défaut de tous les paramètres d'image.
Français - 17
luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Réglage Automatique ►
ecran
Paramètres avancés
Options d'image
réinitialisation de l'image
Image
BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36CONTRÔLE DU SON
¦ Configuration du menu Sound
❑ Mode → Standard / Musique / Cinéma / Voix claire / Personnel
vous pouvez sélectionner un mode son conforme à vos préférences.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également
configurer le mode son en sélectionnant Outils → Mode Son.
Standard
Sélectionne le mode son normal.
Musique
Accentue la musique par rapport aux voix.
Cinéma
Offre le meilleur son pour les films.
Voix claire
Accentue les voix par rapport aux autres sons.
Personnel
rétablit vos paramètres de son personnalisés.
❑ Egaliseur
vous pouvez régler les paramètres du son en fonction de vos préférences.
Mode
vous pouvez sélectionner un mode son conforme à vos préférences.
Balance
définit la balance entre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (réglage de la bande passante)
Permet de régler le niveau de fréquences de la bande passante.
Réinit.
rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l'égaliseur.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Arrêt / Marche
le SrS TruSurround Hd est une technologie SrS brevetée qui remédie au problème de la lecture de contenu multicanal 5.1 sur
deux haut-parleurs. le TruSurround produit un son surround virtuel excellent au moyen de n'importe quel système de lecture à
deux haut-parleurs, dont les haut-parleurs internes du téléviseur. Il est totalement compatible avec tous les formats multicanal.
❑ Langue audio (Chaînes numériques.)
vous pouvez modifier la langue par défaut des sous-titres et de l'audio. Affiche les informations relatives à la langue pour le flux
entrant.
N Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue uniquement parmi les langues en cours de diffusion.
N Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée pendant que vous regardez une chaîne numérique.
❑ Format Audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (Chaînes numériques.)
lorsque le son est émis à la fois par le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio, un effet d'écho peut se produire en raison
de la différence de vitesse de décodage entre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction TV
Speaker (haut-parleur du téléviseur).
N le format audio s'affiche en fonction du signal diffusé.
N Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée pendant que vous regardez une chaîne numérique.
Français - 18
Mode : Personnel ►
egaliseur
SrS TruSurround Hd : Arrêt
langue audio : - - -
Format Audio : - - -
Description audio
volume auto : Arrêt
Son
BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36❑ Description audio (Chaînes numériques.)
Il s'agit d'une fonction audio auxiliaire qui fournit une piste audio supplémentaire à l'intention des personnes malvoyantes. Cette
fonction traite le flux audio relatif à la description audio (Ad) lorsqu'il est envoyé avec le son principal par le radiodiffuseur. les
utilisateurs peuvent activer ou désactiver la description audio et régler le volume.
O Appuyez sur le bouton AD de la télécommande pour sélectionner Arrêt ou Marche.
Description audio → Arrêt / Marche
Active ou désactive la fonction de description audio.
Volume
Permet d'ajuster le volume de la description audio.
N Volume est actif lorsque Description audio est défini sur Marche .
❑ Volume auto → Arrêt / Marche
Chaque station de télédiffusion possède ses propres conditions de signal. Il n'est donc pas facile de régler le volume chaque fois
que vous changez de chaîne. Cette fonction permet de régler automatiquement le volume du canal désiré en réduisant la sortie
son lorsque le signal de modulation est puissant ou en l'augmentant lorsque le signal est faible.
❑ Sélection Haut-parleur → Ht-parl ext / Haut-parleur TV
Pour entendre le son par l'intermédiaire d'enceintes séparées, désactivez l'amplificateur interne.
N les boutons de volume et MUTE ne fonctionnent pas lorsque la fonction Sélection Haut-parleur est réglée sur Ht-parl ext.
N Si vous sélectionnez Ht-parl ext dans le menu Sélection Haut-parleur, les paramètres de son sont limités.
❑ Réinitialisation du son → Réinitial. tout / Réinitial. mode son / Annuler
vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs par défaut des paramètres audio.
¦ Sélection du mode son
vous pouvez configurer le mode son dans le menu Outils. lorsque vous définissez Dual l ll, le mode son actuel est affiché à
l'écran.
Type d'audio Dual 1 / 2 Par défaut
Stéréo A2
Mono MONO
Changement automatique
Stéréo STEREO ↔ MONO
Double DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Stéréo
Mono MONO
Changement automatique
Stéréo MONO ↔ STEREO
Double
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
N Si le signal stéréo est faible et qu'une commutation automatique se produit, passez alors en Mono.
N Cette fonction n'est activée qu'en son stéréo. Elle est désactivée en mode mono.
N Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'en mode Tv.
Français - 19
BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:36CONFIGURATION
¦ Configuration du menu Configuration
❑ Langue des menus
Permet de définir la langue des menus.
❑ Horloge
Horloge
le réglage de l'horloge est nécessaire pour utiliser les différentes fonctions de minuterie de la
télévision.
N l'heure actuelle s'affiche chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton INFO.
N Si vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation, vous devez régler de nouveau l'horloge.
● Mode Horloge
l'heure en cours peut être réglée manuellement ou automatiquement.
– Auto. : définit l'heure en cours automatiquement en utilisant l'heure de la transmission numérique.
– Manuel : définit l'heure en cours d'après l'heure entrée manuellement.
N En fonction de la station de diffusion et du signal diffusé, il se peut que l'heure ne soit pas réglée correctement. Si cela se
produit, réglez l'heure manuellement.
N Pour que l'heure soit réglée automatiquement, l'antenne ou le câble doit être connecté.
● Réglage Horloge
vous pouvez définir l'heure en cours manuellement.
N Activez cette option lorsque Mode Horloge est défini sur Manuel.
N vous pouvez régler directement le jour, le mois, l'année, l'heure et la minute en appuyant sur les touches numériques de
la télécommande.
Veille → Arrêt / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
la minuterie de mise en veille éteint automatiquement la télévision après une durée préréglée (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 ou 180
minutes).
N le téléviseur passe automatiquement en mode veille lorsque la minuterie atteint 0.
N Pour annuler la fonction Veille, sélectionnez Arrêt.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également régler la minuterie de mise en veille en
sélectionnant Outils → Veille.
Minuteur 1 / Minuteur 2 / Minuteur 3
vous pouvez effectuer trois paramétrages différent de la minuterie de marche/arrêt. vous devez d'abord régler l'horloge.
● Période d'activation : Sélectionnez l'heure, la minute et l'action activer/désactiver (Pour activer le minuteur selon les réglages
définis, choisissez Activer.)
● Période de désactivation : Sélectionnez l'heure, la minute et l'action activer/désactiver (Pour activer le minuteur selon les
réglages définis, choisissez Activer.)
● Volume : Sélectionnez le niveau de volume à la mise sous tension.
● Antenne : Sélectionnez Hertzien ou Câble.
● Canal : Sélectionnez la chaîne désirée.
● Répétition : Sélectionnez Une fois, Ts jours, Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel.
N lorsque Manuel est sélectionné, appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner le jour de la semaine. Appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE sur le jour de votre choix. le symbole c s'affiche alors.
N vous pouvez régler l'heure, la minute et la chaîne directement à l'aide des touches numériques de la télécommande.
N Mise hors tension automatique
lorsque vous réglez la minuterie sur Marche, le téléviseur s'éteint si aucune commande n'est utilisée dans les 3 heures qui
suivent la mise sous tension par le minuteur. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque la minuterie est réglée sur
Marche ; elle permet d'éviter toute surchauffe occasionnée par une utilisation prolongée du téléviseur.
Français - 20
Plug & Play
Langue des menus: Français ►
Horloge
Diffuser
Sécurité
Général
Configuration
BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37❑ Diffuser
Sous-titres
vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les sous-titres. Utilisez ce menu pour définir le mode des sous-titres. Normal sélectionne les
sous-titres de base ; Malentendants sélectionne les sous-titres pour personnes malentendantes.
● Sous-titres → Arrêt / Marche: Active/désactive les sous-titres.
● Mode → Normal / Malentendants: Sélectionne le mode de la fonction Sous-titres.
● Langue des sous-titres: définit la langue des sous-titres
N Si le programme visionné n'offre pas de fonction Malentendants, le mode Normal est automatiquement activé, même si le
mode Malentendants est sélectionné.
N l'anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n'est pas diffusée.
O Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton SUBT. de la télécommande.
■ Texte numérique → Désactiver / Activer (Royaume-Uni uniquement)
Si le programme est diffusé avec du texte numérique, cette fonction est activée.
N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group)
Norme internationale pour les systèmes de codage des données utilisés avec le multimédia et l'hypermédia. Niveau supérieur
à celui du système MPEG, qui inclut de l'hypermédia à liaison de données tel que des images fixes, le service de caractères,
l'animation, les fichiers graphiques et vidéo et les données multimédia. MHEG est une technologie d'interaction de l'utilisateur
en cours d'utilisation appliquée à divers domaines, dont la vidéo à la demande (vOd), la télévision interactive (ITv), le
commerce électronique, la téléformation, la téléconférence, les bibliothèques numériques et les jeux en réseau.
■ Langue du télétexte
Vous pouvez Sélectionne la langue du télétexte par type de langue.
N l'anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n'est pas diffusée.
■ Préférence
● Première Langue Audio / Deuxième Langue Audio / Langue princ. sous-titres / Langue sec. sous-titres /
Première Langue Télétexte / Deuxième Langue Télétexte
Cette fonction permet de sélectionner une des langues disponibles. la langue sélectionnée ici est la langue par défaut de la
chaîne sélectionnée.
Si vous changez la langue, les options Subtitle language, Audio language et Teletext language du menu language sont
automatiquement modifiées en conséquence.
les options Subtitle language, Audio language et Teletext language du menu language présentent une liste des langues
prises en charge par la chaîne actuelle et la langue sélectionnée est affichée en surbrillance. Si vous modifiez le paramètre de
la langue, la nouvelle sélection n'est valable que pour la chaîne actuelle. le nouveau paramétrage n'affecte pas le réglage des
options Primary Subtitle language, Primary Audio language ou Primary Teletext language du menu Preference.
■ Interface commune
● CI Menu
Permet à l'utilisateur d'opérer une sélection dans le menu du module CAM.
Sélectionnez le menu CI Menu le menu PC Card.
● Infos sur l’application
Contient des informations sur le module CAM inséré dans la fente CI et les affiche.
N les informations sur l'application concernent la CI CArd. vous pouvez installer le module CAM que le téléviseur soit
allumé ou Arrêt
1. Achetez le module CI CAM chez le revendeur le plus proche ou par téléphone.
2. Insérez la CI CArd dans le module CAM, dans le sens indiqué par la flèche, jusqu'à ce qu'elle se loge en place.
3. Insérez le module CAM avec la CI CArd installée dans la fente de l'interface commune.
(Insérez le module CAM dans le sens indiqué par la flèche, à fond, de façon à ce qu'il soit parallèle à la fente.)
4. vérifiez si une image est visible sur une chaîne à signal brouillé.
N Il se peut que le module CAM ne soit pas pris en charge dans certains pays ou régions. vérifiez auprès de votre
revendeur agréé.
Français - 21
BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37❑ Sécurité
l'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche avant l'écran de configuration. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est 0-0-0-0. vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN
dans le menu.
■ Verrouillage Canal → Arrêt / Marche
Cette fonction permet d'empêcher que des utilisateurs non autorisés, tels que des enfants, regardent des programmes
inappropriés, en désactivant la vidéo et l'audio.
N vous pouvez verrouiller certaines chaînes dans la liste des chaînes. (voir page 13).
N Verrouillage Canal est uniquement disponible en mode TV.
■ Verrouillage parental
Cette fonction permet d'empêcher certains utilisateurs, par exemple des enfants, de regarder des émissions inappropriées, en les
protégeant à l'aide d’un code de 4 chiffres défini par l'utilisateur.
N l’option Verrouillage parental diffère en fonction du les pays.
N lorsque le Verrouillage parental est activé, le symbole ‘\’ s’affiche.
N Autor.tout : appuyez sur ce bouton pour déverrouiller toutes les évaluations Tv.
Bloq. tout : appuyez sur ce bouton pour verrouiller tous les classements Tv.
■ Modifier PIN
vous pouvez modifier le code personnel demandé pour pouvoir configurer le téléviseur.
N Si vous avez oublié le code, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l'ordre suivant, ce qui remet le code à
0-0-0-0 : POWER (Arrêt) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Marche).
❑ Général
■ Mode Jeu → Arrêt / Marche
En reliant le téléviseur à une console de jeu telle que PlayStation™ ou Xbox™, vous pouvez profiter d'une expérience de jeu plus
réaliste en sélectionnant le menu de jeu.
N Pour déconnecter la console de jeu et connecter un autre périphérique externe, annulez le mode Jeu dans le menu de configuration.
N Si vous affichez le menu du téléviseur en mode "Mode Jeu", l'écran vacille légèrement.
N Mode Jeu n'est pas disponible en mode TV et PC normal.
N Si le Mode Jeu est activé :
– le mode Picture bascule automatiquement sur Standard et les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas changer de mode.
– le mode Sound bascule automatiquement sur Personnel et les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas changer de mode. réglez le
son à l'aide de l'égaliseur.
N la fonction régler du menu Son est activée. Sélectionner la fonction reset après avoir réglé l’égaliseur rétablit ses
paramètres par défaut.
■ Mode éco. → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Image désactivée / Auto.
Cette fonction règle la luminosité du téléviseur afin de réduire la consommation d'énergie. lorsque vous regardez la télévision le
soir, réglez l'option du mode Mode éco. sur Elevé pour reposer vos yeux et réduire la consommation d'énergie.
Si vous sélectionnez Image désactivée, l’écran s’éteint. Seul le son est émis. Appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton pour désactiver
la fonction Image désactivée.
N la function Image désactivée n’est pas prise en charge dans le menu Tools.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. vous pouvez également définir l'option d'économie d'énergie en
sélectionnant Outils → Mode éco..
■ Mélodie → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé
Il est possible de programmer la lecture d'une mélodie lors de la mise sous tension ou hors tension du téléviseur.
N Aucune mélodie n'est lue dans les cas suivants :
– Aucun son n'est émis par le téléviseur parce que le bouton MUTE a été actionné.
– Aucun son n'est émis par le téléviseur parce que le bouton (–) Volume a été actionné.
– lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension par la fonction de veille.
Français - 22
BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37Français - 23
ENTRÉE / ASSISTANCE
¦ Configuration du menu Input
❑ Liste Source
Permet de sélectionner le téléviseur ou d'autres sources d'entrée externes telles que des
lecteurs dvd/Blu-ray ou des récepteurs satellite (boîtiers décodeurs) connectées au téléviseur.
Permet de sélectionner la source d'entrée de votre choix.
O Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande pour afficher une source de signal
externe. Une pression sur le bouton TV sélectionne le mode TV.
TV / Ext. / AV / Composant / PC / HDMI/DVI
N Vous ne pouvez sélectionner que des périphériques externes connectés au téléviseur.
Dans Liste Source, les entrées connectées s'affichent en surbrillance en début de liste.
les entrées non connectées s'affichent en bas de liste.
N les options Ext. et PC sont toujours activées.
N TOOLS (Outils) : Affiche les menus Modif. Nom et Information.
❑ Modif. Nom
Nommez le périphérique connecté aux prises d'entrée pour faciliter la sélection de source d'entrée.
Magnétoscope / DVD / Décodeur Câble / Décodeur satellite / Décodeur PVR / Récepteur AV / Jeu / Caméscope / PC / DVI /
DVI PC / TV / IPTV/ Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Si vous connectez un câble HDMI/DVI au port HDMI (DVI), vous devez régler le mode HDMI/DVI sur DVI ou DVI PC dans le
champ Modif. Nom du mode Entrée. Dans ce cas, une connexion audio séparée est indispensable.
¦ Configuration du menu Support
❑ Diagnostic automatique
Test de l’image
Si vous pensez que l'image n'est pas optimale, exécutez le test d'image. vérifiez la mire de
couleur à l'écran pour voir si le problème persiste.
● Oui : si la mire de couleur n'apparaît pas où si elle est parasitée, sélectionnez Oui. Il se
peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. demandez de l'aide au centre d'appel de Samsung.
● Non: si la mire de couleur s'affiche correctement, sélectionnez Non. Il se peut que
l'équipement externe soit défaillant. vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste,
reportez-vous au mode d'emploi du périphérique externe.
Test du son
Si vous pensez que le son n'est pas optimal, exécutez le test du son. vous pouvez contrôler le
son en diffusant une mélodie préenregistrée sur le téléviseur. le message "le problème persiste-t-il pour ce test du son?" s'affiche
à l'écran.
N Si les haut-parleurs du téléviseur restent muets, avant d'effectuer le test du son, vérifiez que l'option Sélection Haut-parleur
est réglée sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Sound.
N la mélodie est diffusée pendant le test, même si l'option Sélection Haut-parleurt est réglée sur Ht-parl ext ou si le son a été
désactivé en appuyant sur le bouton MUTE.
● Oui : si, pendant le test du son, vous n'entendez du son que d'un haut-parleur ou pas de son du tout, sélectionnez Oui. Il se
peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. demandez de l'aide au centre d'appel de Samsung.
● Non : Si vous entendez du son des haut-parleurs, sélectionnez Non. Il se peut que l'équipement externe soit défaillant.
vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi du périphérique externe.
Informations de signal (chaînes numériques uniquement)
À l'inverse des chaînes analogiques, dont la qualité de réception peut varier de "neigeuse" à claire, les chaînes numériques
(HdTv) présentent une qualité de réception parfaite ou bien vous ne les recevez pas. Contrairement aux chaînes analogiques,
vous ne pouvez donc pas syntoniser une chaîne numérique. vous avez toutefois la possibilité de régler votre antenne pour
améliorer la réception des chaînes numériques disponibles.
N Si l'indicateur d'intensité du signal indique que celui-ci est faible, réglez physiquement votre antenne afin d'en augmenter
l'intensité. Continuez à régler l'antenne jusqu'à ce que trouver la position offrant le signal le plus puissant.
Diagnostic automatique ►
Mise à niveau du logiciel
Guide de connexion HD
Contacter Samsung
Assistance
Liste Source
Modif. Nom
entrée
BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37Français - 24
❑ Mise à niveau du logiciel
Pour garder le produit à jour avec les nouvelles fonctions de télévision numérique, des mises
à jour logicielles sont régulièrement diffusées via le signal de télévision normal. le téléviseur
détecte automatiquement ces signaux et affiche la bannière de mise à jour logicielle. vous
avez le choix d'installer ou non la mise à jour.
USB
Insérez dans le téléviseur un lecteur USB contenant la mise à niveau du microprogramme.
veillez à ne pas couper l'alimentation ni retirer le lecteur USB pendant l'application des
mises à niveau. Une fois la mise à niveau du micrologiciel terminée, le téléviseur se met
automatiquement hors puis sous tension. vérifiez la version du micrologiciel une fois les mises
à jour terminées. lorsque le logiciel est mis à niveau, les paramètres vidéo et audio définis reprennent leur valeur par défaut
(usine).
Il est recommandé de noter les paramétrages afin de pouvoir les rétablir facilement après la mise à niveau.
Canal
Mise à niveau du logiciel à l'aide du signal de diffusion.
N Si elle est sélectionnée pendant la période de transmission du logiciel, cette fonction recherche le logiciel disponible et le
télécharge.
N le temps nécessaire au téléchargement du logiciel dépend de l'état du signal.
Mise à niveau en mode veille
Pour poursuivre la mise à jour du logiciel en gardant le téléviseur sous tension, sélectionnez ON en appuyant sur le bouton
▲ ou ▼. Une mise à jour manuelle a lieu automatiquement 45 minutes après que l'entrée en mode veille. Étant donné que la mise
sous tension s'effectue de façon interne, il se peut que l'écran lCd s'allume légèrement. Ce phénomène peut se produire pendant
plus d'une heure, jusqu'à ce que la mise à jour logiciel soit terminée.
Autre logiciel
Affiche des informations sur la version du logiciel.
❑ Guide de connexion HD
Ce menu indique la méthode de connexion offrant la qualité optimale pour le téléviseur haute définition.
Consultez ces informations lors de la connexion de périphériques externes au téléviseur.
❑ Contacter Samsung
Consultez ces informations si le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas correctement ou si vous voulez mettre à niveau le logiciel.
vous pouvez consulter les informations concernant le centre d'appel, le produit et la méthode de téléchargement du logiciel.
Français - 24
Panneau arrière du téléviseur
Lecteur USB
BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37Français - 25
RECOMMANDATION D'UTILISATION
¦ Fonction Télétexte
la plupart des chaînes de télévision offrent des services d'informations écrites via le télétexte. la page d'index du télétexte
contient des instructions sur l'utilisation du service. vous pouvez, en outre, sélectionner différentes options à l'aide des touches de
la télécommande.
N Pour que les informations du télétexte s'affichent correctement, la réception des chaînes doit être stable. Autrement, des
informations pourraient manquer ou certaines pages ne pas s'afficher.
N Vous pouvez changer de page de télétexte en appuyant sur les touches numériques de la télécommande.
1 0(mode)
Permet de sélectionner le mode
Télétexte (lIST/FlOF). Si vous appuyez
sur cette touche en mode lISTe, vous
basculez en mode d'enregistrement
de liste. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez
enregistrer une page de télétexte dans
une liste à l'aide du bouton
8 (mémoriser).
2 5(révéler)
Permet d'afficher le texte masqué
(par exemple, les réponses à un
questionnaire). Pour rétablir le mode
d'affichage normal, appuyez de
nouveaux dessus.
3 4(taille)
Permet d'afficher la moitié supérieure
de l'écran en caractères deux fois plus
grands. Pour afficher la moitié inférieure
de l'écran, appuyez de nouveau sur
cette touche. Pour rétablir le mode
d'affichage normal, appuyez dessus une
fois de plus.
4 8(mémoriser)
Permet d'enregistrer les pages de
télétexte.
5 Boutons de couleur (rouge/vert/jaune/
bleu)
Si une société de télédiffusion utilise
le système FASTEXT, les différentes
rubriques d'une page de télétexte
sont associées à un code couleur
qui permet de les sélectionner à
l'aide des touches de couleur de
la télécommande. Appuyez sur la
touche dont la couleur correspond
à celle de la rubrique souhaitée. la
page affiche d'autres informations en
couleur que vous pouvez sélectionner
de la même manière. Pour afficher la
page précédente ou la page suivante,
appuyez sur la touche de couleur
correspondante.
6/(télétexte actif/mixte)
Permet d'activer le mode Télétexte après
avoir choisi la chaîne diffusant le service
télétexte. Appuyez deux fois sur cette
touche pour superposer le télétexte à
l'émission en cours de diffusion.
7 :(quitter)
Quitte l'affichage du télétexte.
8 1(page secondaire)
Permet d'afficher une page secondaire.
9 2(page suivante)
Permet d'afficher la page de télétexte
suivante.
0 3(page précédente)
Permet d'afficher la page de télétexte
précédente.
! 9 (verrouiller)
Permet de bloquer l'affichage sur une
page précise, si celle-ci est reliée à
plusieurs pages secondaires qui défilent
automatiquement. Pour reprendre
l'affichage de celles-ci, appuyez de
nouveau sur cette touche.
@ 6(index)
Permet d'afficher la page d'index du
télétexte (sommaire) à tout moment.
# 7(annuler)
Permet d'afficher le programme lors de la
recherche d'une page.
les pages de télétexte sont organisées en six catégories :
Catégorie Contenu
A Numéro de la page sélectionnée.
B Identité de la chaîne émettrice.
C Numéro de la page actuelle ou indications de recherche.
D Date et heure.
E Texte.
F Informations sur l'état.
Informations FASTeXT.
Français - 25
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:37Français - 26
N les informations du télétexte sont souvent réparties sur plusieurs pages qui s'affichent successivement. Ces pages sont
accessibles en :
– entrant le numéro de page ;
– sélectionnant un titre dans une liste ;
– sélectionnant un titre de couleur (système FASTEXT).
N le téléviseur prend en charge le niveau de télétexte 2.5 qui peut afficher des graphiques ou textes supplémentaires.
N En fonction de la transmission, des panneaux latéraux vides peuvent apparaître lors de l'affichage du télétexte.
N Dans ce cas, les graphiques ou textes supplémentaires ne sont pas transmis.
N les téléviseurs plus anciens qui ne prennent pas en charge la version 2.5 ne peuvent pas afficher les graphiques et textes
supplémentaires, indépendamment de la transmission télétexte.
O Appuyez sur le bouton TV pour quitter l'affichage du télétexte.
N Télétexte 16:9 - Format d'image 16:9
¦ Comment ajuster le socle (modèle 19 pouces uniquement)
1. Placez l'avant du téléviseur sur un tissu doux ou un coussin sur une table comme indiqué à la figure1.
– Alignez le bas du téléviseur sur le bord de la table.
2. Appuyez au milieu de l'arrière du téléviseur. réglez le socle comme indiqué à la figure 2 tout en appuyant sur le bouton à
l'arrière du socle.
3. Placez le téléviseur en tout sécurité sur la table.
¦ Comment ajuster le socle du téléviseur (modèle 19 pouces uniquement)
N Quand vous ajustez le socle, appuyez sur le bouton qui se trouve à l'arrière.
1. la figure 1 indique l'angle de réglage (-2°~14°) quand vous utilisez l'écran lCd sur son socle.
N Une inclinaison excessive peut faire se retourner votre téléviseur lCd, ce qui peut l'endommager.
2. la figure 2 indique l'angle de réglage (14°~80°) quand vous convertissez l'écran lCd d'une utilisation sur socle à une
murale.
3. la figure 3 indique l'angle de réglage (-0°~10°) quand vous accrochez l'écran lCd à un mur.
N vous entendrez un "clic" en changeant l'angle de 1 à 2 ou de 3 à 2.
Français - 26
1 2
1 Réglage de l'angle en utilisant
le téléviseur sur son socle.
2 Réglage de l'angle en passant
d'une utilisation sur socle à un
montage mural (1→3, 3→1)
3 Réglage de l'angle quand le
téléviseur LCD est monté au mur
BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:38Français - 27
¦ Installer des systèmes de montage conformes VESA (modèles 19 pouces uniquement).
1. Placez l'avant du téléviseur vers le bas sur un tissu doux ou un coussin sur une table.
2. Ajustez le socle en appuyant sur le bouton qui se trouve à l'arrière.
3. Alignez le tampon d'interface de montage (non fourni) avec les trous au pied du socle et fixez-le avec les 4 vis livrées avec la
base de type bras, le crochet du support mural ou d'autres bases (non fournies).
¦ Utiliser le couvercle de décoration (modèle 19 pouces uniquement)
1. Quand vous installez le téléviseur sur le mur en utilisant le socle, insérez les couvercles de décoration dans les trous comme
indiqué à l'image 1.
2. Après avoir inséré les couvercles de décoration, fixez-les avec 4 vis comme indiqué à l'image 2.
1 2
1 2
Bouton
Tampon de
montage
(vendu séparément)
BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:38Français - 28
¦ Montage du socle
1. Fixez le téléviseur lCD sur le socle.
N le téléviseur doit être porté par au moins deux personnes.
N veillez à bien faire la distinction entre l'avant et l'arrière du socle lors de l'assemblage.
N Pour être certain d'installer le téléviseur sur son socle au niveau approprié, n'exercez
pas de pression vers le bas excessive sur ses côtés supérieurs gauche et droit.
2. Insérez deux vis dans l'emplacement 1, puis deux autres dans l'emplacement 2.
N redressez le produit et serrez les vis. Si vous serrez les vis tandis que le téléviseur
lCd est couché, il se peut qu'il penche d'un côté.
¦ Installation du kit de montage mural
des éléments de montage mural (vendus séparément) permettent de fixer le téléviseur au
mur.
Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du support mural, reportez-vous aux instructions
fournies avec les éléments de montage mural. Faites appel à un technicien pour vous aider à
installer le support mural.
Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable d'un endommagement du produit
ou d'une blessure si vous choisissez d'effectuer vous-même l'installation murale.
N'installez pas le kit de montage mural lorsque le téléviseur est sous tension. Cela
pourrait entraîner une blessure par choc électrique.
¦ Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington
l’antivol Kensington est un dispositif utilisé pour fixer physiquement le système
lorsqu’il est utilisé dans un endroit public. l’aspect et la méthode de verrouillage
peuvent différer de l’illustration en fonction du fabricant. Consultez le manuel
fourni avec le verrou Kensington pour obtenir des instructions d’utilisation.
N Une icône “K” est présente à l’arrière du téléviseur. Un verrou Kensington se trouve à
côté de l’icône “K”.
Pour vérouiller l’appareil, procédez comme suit :
1. Enroulez le câble de verrouillage Kensington autour d’un objet large et fixe tel qu’un
bureau ou une chaise.
2. Glissez le bout du câble auquel est attaché le verrou dans la boucle du câble de
verrouillage Kensington.
3. Insérez le dispositif de verrouillage dans la fente Kensington de l’appareil (1).
4. Fermez le verrou.
N Ces instructions sont d’ordre général. Pour de plus amples informations, consultez le
manuel d’utilisation fourni avec le dispositif de verrouillage.
N le dispositif de verrouillage est vendu séparément.
N l’emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modèle.
1
BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:38Français - 29
¦ Sécurisation de l'emplacement d'installation
respectez les distances requises entre le produit et d'autres objets (p. ex. murs) pour assurer une ventilation adéquate.
le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait provoquer un incendie ou un problème avec le produit en raison de l'augmentation de la
température interne de ce dernier.
Installez le produit de manière à respecter les distances requises indiquées sur la figure.
N En cas d'utilisation d'un support ou de montage mural, n'utilisez que des pièces Samsung Electronics.
Ҟ l'emploi de pièces d'un autre fabricant risque d'entraîner des problèmes avec le produit ou d'occasionner des blessures
dues à la chute du produit.
Ҟ l'emploi de pièces d'un autre fabricant risque d'entraîner un problème avec le produit ou de provoquer un incendie en
raison de l'augmentation de la température interne du produit due à une ventilation insuffisante.
N l'aspect peut varier en fonction du produit.
Installation du produit sur un support Montage mural du produit
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦ Fixation du téléviseur au mur
Attention : Si vous tirez ou poussez le téléviseur ou si vous grimpez dessus, il risque de tomber. Veillez en
particulier, à ce que vos enfants ne se suspendent pas au téléviseur, ni ne le déséquilibrent, car cela pourrait le
faire basculer et occasionner des blessures graves pouvant entraîner la mort. respectez toutes les précautions
de sécurité indiquées dans la brochure relative à la sécurité. Pour une stabilité accrue, installez le dispositif
antichute comme indiqué ci-après.
Pour éviter toute chute du téléviseur :
1. Glissez les vis dans les colliers, puis fixez-les solidement au mur. Assurez-vous que les
vis sont solidement fixées au mur.
N en fonction du type de mur, il est possible que vous ayez besoin de matériel
supplémentaire, tel que des chevilles.
N les colliers, vis et chaînettes n'étant pas fournis, vous devez les acheter
séparément.
2. retirez les vis situées sur la partie centrale arrière du téléviseur, glissez-les dans les
colliers, puis fixez-les de nouveau sur le téléviseur.
N Il est possible que les vis ne soient pas fournies avec le produit. Dans ce cas,
achetez des vis présentant les caractéristiques suivantes.
N Caractéristiques des vis
– Pour un téléviseur lCd 17 à 29 pouces : M4 X l15
– Pour un téléviseur lCd 32 à 40 pouces : M6 X l15
3. reliez les bagues fixées au téléviseur et celles fixées sur le mur à l'aide de chaînettes,
puis attachez-les fermement.
N Placez le téléviseur à proximité du mur afin qu'il ne bascule pas vers l'arrière.
N Il est recommandé de placer la chaînette de façon à ce que les colliers fixés au mur
soient placés à même hauteur ou plus bas que ceux fixés au téléviseur.
N détachez la chaînette avant de déplacer le téléviseur.
4. vérifiez que toutes les connexions sont fixées correctement. vérifiez régulièrement que
les connexions ne présentent aucun signe d'usure. Si vous avez un doute quant à la
sécurité des connexions, contactez un installateur professionnel.
Mur
Mur
BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39Français - 30
¦ Dépannage
Si vous avez des questions relatives au téléviseur, commencez par consulter la liste ci-dessous. Si aucune de ces astuces de
dépannage ne s'applique à votre problème, rendez-vous sur le site ‘www.samsung.com’, puis cliquez sur Support ou contactez le
centre d'appel dont les coordonnées figurent sur la dernière page.
Problème Solution
Qualité de l'image
Exécutez tout d'abord le Test de l'image pour vérifier que votre téléviseur affiche correctement
l'image de test.
● Accédez à MENU - Assistance - Diagnostic automatique - Test de l'image
Si l'image de test s'affiche correctement, sa qualité médiocre peut être due à la source ou au signal.
la qualité de l'image sur le
téléviseur n'est pas aussi
bonne que dans le magasin.
● Si vous êtes équipé d'un décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur analogique, procédez à une mise à
niveau. Utilisez les câbles HdMI ou Composant pour fournir une qualité d'image Hd.
● Abonné câble/satellite : essayez les chaînes Hd (High definition) à partir de l'alignement des canaux.
● Connexion de l'antenne: essayez les chaînes Hd après avoir exécuté une mémorisation
automatique.
N de nombreuses chaînes Hd sont mises à niveaux par rapport à du contenu
SD (Standard Definition).
● réglez la résolution de sortie vidéo du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur sur 1080i ou 720p.
● veillez à respecter la distance minimale recommandée entre vous et le téléviseur (distance
basée sur la taille et la définition du signal affiché).
l'image est déformée :
macrobloc, petit bloc, points,
pixelisation
● la compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en
particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action.
● Un niveau de signal faible ou une mauvaise qualité peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit pas
d'un problème lié au téléviseur.
● Utiliser un téléphone portable à proximité d’un téléviseur (jusqu’à 1 m environ) peut être
source de parasites visuels sur les téléviseurs analogiques et numériques.
Couleur incorrecte ou
manquante avec la
connexion Composant.
● Vérifiez que les câbles Composant sont raccordés aux prises appropriées. Des
raccordements desserrés ou incorrects peuvent engendrer des problèmes au niveau de la
couleur ou de l'écran (vide).
luminosité ou couleur
médiocre.
● réglez les options Image dans le menu du téléviseur (mode Image, Couleur, Luminosité,
Netteté).
● réglez l'option Mode éco. dans le menu Configuration.
● Essayez de réinitialiser l'image pour afficher son paramètre par défaut
(accédez à MENU - Image - Réinitialisation de l'image).
ligne pointillée sur le bord
de l'écran.
● Si la taille de l'image est réglée sur Adapter à l'écran, remplacez la valeur par 16:9.
● Changez la résolution du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur.
l'image est en noir et
blanc avec l'entrée Av
(Composite) uniquement.
● raccordez le câble vidéo (jaune) à la prise verte de l'entrée Composant 1 du téléviseur.
l'image se fige ou est
déformée lorsque vous
changez de chaînes ou l'image
s'affiche avec un décalage.
● en cas de raccordement avec le décodeur câble, essayez de réinitialiser ce dernier
(rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation secteur et patientez jusqu'au démarrage du décodeur
câble. Cette opération peut durer jusqu'à 20 minutes).
● réglez la résolution de sortie du décodeur câble sur 1080i ou 720p.
Qualité sonore
Exécutez tout d'abord le Test du son pour vérifier que le système audio de votre téléviseur
fonctionne correctement.
● Accédez à MENU - Assistance - Diagnostic automatique - Test du son
Si le système audio fonctionne correctement, le problème lié au son peut provenir de la source ou du signal.
Aucun son ou son trop faible
lorsque le niveau du volume
est au maximum.
● vérifiez le volume du périphérique externe connecté à votre téléviseur, puis réglez le volume
du téléviseur en conséquence.
Image correcte mais
absence de son.
● réglez l'option Sélection Haut-parleur sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Sound.
● vérifiez que les câbles audio d'un périphérique externe sont raccordés aux prises d'entrée
audio appropriées du téléviseur.
● vérifiez l'option de sortie audio du périphérique connecté (par exemple : il se peut que vous deviez
remplacer l'option audio de votre décodeur câble par HdMI si vous utilisez la connexion HdMI).
● Si vous utilisez un câble DVI-HDMI, un câble audio distinct est requis.
● désactivez la fonction SrS si le réglage du volume est supérieur à 30.
● retirez la fiche de la prise pour casque (si disponible sur votre téléviseur).
Bruit émis par le
haut-parleur.
● vérifiez le raccordement des câbles. vérifiez qu'aucun câble vidéo n'est raccordé à une entrée audio.
● Pour la connexion de l'antenne/du câble, vérifiez l'intensité du signal. Un niveau de signal
faible peut provoquer une distorsion sonore.
BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39Français - 31
Problème Solution
Aucune image, aucune
vidéo
le téléviseur ne s'allume
pas.
● vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise murale
et sur le téléviseur.
● Vérifiez que la prise murale est opérationnelle.
● Essayez d'appuyer sur le bouton POWER du téléviseur pour vérifier que la télécommande
fonctionne correctement. Si le téléviseur s'allume, la télécommande peut être à l'origine de
cette mise sous tension. Pour résoudre le problème lié à la télécommande, reportez-vous au
problème ‘la télécommande ne fonctionne pas’ ci-après.
le téléviseur s'éteint
automatiquement.
● Vérifiez que la fonction Veille est réglée sur Marche dans le menu Configuration.
● Si vous connectez le téléviseur à votre PC, vérifiez les paramètres d'alimentation de votre
PC.
● vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise murale
et sur le téléviseur.
● En l'absence de signal pendant environ 10 à 15 minutes avec la connexion Antenne/câble,
le téléviseur s'éteint.
Aucune image/vidéo. ● Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles (retirez tous les câbles du téléviseur et des
périphériques externes et rebranchez-les).
● réglez la sortie vidéo de votre périphérique externe (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur, dvd,
Blu-ray, etc.) pour faire correspondre les connexions à l'entrée du téléviseur. Par exemple,
sortie du périphérique externe : HdMI, entrée du téléviseur : HdMI.
● Vérifiez que votre périphérique connecté est sous tension.
● veillez à sélectionner la source appropriée du téléviseur en appuyant sur le bouton
SOURCE de la télécommande.
Connexion rF
(câble/antenne)
Impossible de recevoir
toutes les chaînes.
● vérifiez que le câble de l'antenne est raccordé correctement.
● essayez la fonction Plug & Play pour ajouter des chaînes disponibles à la liste
correspondante. Accédez à MENU - Configuration - Plug & Play et attendez que toutes les
chaînes disponibles soient mémorisées.
● vérifiez que l'antenne est positionnée correctement.
l'image est déformée :
macrobloc, petit bloc, points,
pixelisation
● la compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en
particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action.
● Un niveau de signal faible peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit pas d'un problème lié au
téléviseur.
Connexion PC
Message ‘Mode non pris en
charge’.
● réglez la fréquence et la résolution de sortie de votre PC de sorte à ce qu'il corresponde
aux résolutions prises en charge par le téléviseur.
le PC apparaît toujours
dans la liste source même
s'il n'est pas connecté.
● C'est normal ; le PC apparaît toujours dans la liste source même s'il n'est pas connecté.
la vidéo fonctionne
correctement mais le
système audio n'existe pas
avec une connexion HDMI.
● vérifiez le paramètre de sortie audio de votre PC.
BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39Français - 32
Problème Solution
Autres
l'image ne s'affiche pas en
plein écran.
● des barres noires s'affichent de chaque côté des chaînes Hd lors de l'affichage du contenu
Sd étendu (4:3).
● des barres noires s'affichent en haut et en bas des films dont le format est différent de celui
de votre téléviseur.
● réglez l'option de la taille de l'image sur votre périphérique externe ou le téléviseur en plein
écran.
la télécommande ne
fonctionne pas.
● replacez les piles de la télécommande en respectant la polarité (+ -).
● Nettoyez la lentille de la télécommande située en haut de la télécommande.
● Essayez de diriger directement la télécommande vers le téléviseur dans un rayon de 1,5 à
1,8 m.
Impossible de contrôler
l'alimentation ou le volume
du téléviseur avec la
télécommande du décodeur
câble/boîtier décodeur.
● Programmez la télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur pour faire fonctionner le
téléviseur. Consultez le manuel de l'utilisateur relatif au câble/satellite pour obtenir le code
du téléviseur SAMSUNG.
Message ‘Mode non pris en
charge’.
● Vérifiez la résolution prise en charge du téléviseur et réglez la résolution de sortie du
périphérique externe en conséquence. reportez-vous aux paramètres de résolution
indiqués dans ce manuel.
Odeur de plastique émise
par le téléviseur.
● Cette odeur est normale et s'atténuera au fur et à mesure.
Intensité du signal
du téléviseur n'est pas
disponible dans le menu
de test du diagnostic
automatique.
● Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'avec des chaînes numériques avec connexion d'antenne
(rF/coaxial).
le téléviseur penche vers la
droite ou la gauche.
● retirez la base du support du téléviseur et réassemblez-la.
Impossible d'assembler la
base du support.
● veillez à placer le téléviseur sur une surface plane. Si vous ne parvenez pas à retirer les vis
du téléviseur, utilisez un tournevis aimanté.
le menu des chaînes est
grisé (non disponible).
● le menu Canal n’est disponible que si la source du téléviseur est sélectionnée.
vos paramètres sont perdus
après 30 minutes ou à
chaque mise hors tension
du téléviseur.
● Si le téléviseur est en mode Enr. démo, les paramètres de l'image et audio sont rétablis
toutes les 30 minutes. remplacez le mode Enr. démo par le mode Util. domicile dans la
procédure Plug & Play. Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode TV,
accédez à MENU → Configuration → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
Perte intermittente du signal
audio ou vidéo.
● Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles ; raccordez-les au besoin.
● Cette perte peut être provoquée par l'utilisation de câbles trop rigides ou épais. veillez à
ce que les câbles soient suffisamment souples pour une utilisation à long terme. En cas
d'installation murale, nous vous recommandons d'utiliser des câbles avec des connecteurs
de 90 degrés.
Il se peut que vous voyiez
de petites particules si vous
regardez de près le bord du
cadre de l'écran du téléviseur.
● elles font partie de la conception du produit et ne constituent pas un défaut.
‘Signal brouillé’ ou ‘Aucun
signal/signal faible’ avec la
carte d’interface (CI) CArD
du CAM.
● vérifiez que la carte d'interface commune CICArd est installée dans le CAM dans la fente
de l'interface commune.
● Tirez le CAM du téléviseur et insérez-le de nouveau dans la fente.
45 minutes après sa mise
hors tension, le téléviseur
s'allume.
● Cela est normal car le téléviseur utilise la fonction de liaison radio (OTA) pour mettre à
niveau le microprogramme téléchargé pendant son utilisation.
Problème récurrent lié à
l'image/au son.
● Vérifiez et changez le signal/la source.
N Ce téléviseur lCd TFT est équipé d'un écran constitué de sous-pixels dont la fabrication nécessite une technologie
sophistiquée. Il se peut toutefois que des points clairs ou sombres apparaissent à l'écran. Ceux-ci n'ont aucune incidence sur
les performances du produit.
BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39Français - 33
¦ Caractéristiques
Nom du modèle LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431
Taille de l'écran
(diagonale) 19 pouces 22 pouces
Résolution du PC
(optimale) 1360 x 768 à 60 Hz 1360 x 768 à 60 Hz
Son
(Sortie) 3 W X 2 3 W X 2
Dimensions (LxPxH)
Corps
Avec socle
477 x 65 x 327 mm
477 x 180 x 362 mm
558 x 75 x 384 mm
558 x 216 x 426 mm
Poids
Avec socle 5 kg 7 kg
Considérations environnementales
Température de fonctionnement
Humidité en cours de fonctionnement
Température de stockage
Humidité sur le lieu de stockage
10°C à 40°C (50°F à 104°F)
10 % à 80 %, sans condensation
-20°C à 45°C (-4°F à 113°F)
5 % à 95 %, sans condensation
Socle orientable
Gauche / droite 0˚
N la conception et les spécifications peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
N Ce périphérique est un appareil numérique de classe B.
N Concernant l'alimentation et la consommation électrique, reportez-vous à l'étiquette apposée sur le produit.
BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:39las figuras y las ilustraciones de este Manual del usuario se proporcionan como referencia solamente y pueden ser diferentes
del aspecto real del producto. El diseño y las especificaciones del producto están sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso.
❑ Licencia
TruSurround HD, SrS y el símbolo son marcas registradas de SrS labs, Inc. la tecnología
TruSurround HD está incorporada bajo licencia de SrS labs, Inc.
Fabricado bajo licencia de dolby laboratories. dolby y el símbolo de la doble d son marcas comerciales de
Dolby laboratories.
❑ Nota sobre la TV digital
1. las funciones relacionadas con la Tv digital (dvB) sólo están disponibles en países o regiones donde se emitan señales
terrestres digitales dvB-T (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AvC) o donde se tenga acceso a servicios de televisión por cable compatibles
con dvB-C (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AAC). Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor para conocer si puede recibir señales dvB-T o
DVB-C.
2. DVB-T es una norma del consorcio europeo para la transmisión de la televisión digital terrestre y DVB-C lo es para la
transmisión de la televisión digital por cable. Sin embargo, en esta especificación no se incluyen algunas funciones
diferenciadas, como EPG (Guía electrónica de programas), vOd (vídeo a la carta) y otras. Por ello, en estos momentos aún
no están disponibles.
3. Este equipo de televisión cumple las más actuales normas de dvB-T y dvB-C, de [agosto de 2008], pero no se garantiza la
compatibilidad con futuras emisiones de televisión digital terrestre DVB-T y por cable DVB-C.
4. Según los países o regiones donde se utilice este equipo de Tv, algunos proveedores de la televisión por cable pueden
cobrar un pago adicional por este servicio y pueden exigir al usuario su aceptación de los términos y condiciones de su
empresa.
5. Algunas funciones de televisión digital pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países o regiones y dvB-C o puede no
funcionar correctamente con algunos proveedores del servicio de cable.
6. Para obtener más información, póngase en contacto con su centro de atención al cliente de SAMSUNG.
❑ Precauciones al mostrar en la pantalla una imagen fija
la imagen fija puede causar daños permanentes en la pantalla del televisor.
● No muestre una imagen fija ni parcialmente fija en la pantalla lCd durante más de 2 horas, ya que se podría producir una
retención de la imagen en la pantalla. Este fenómeno de retención de imágenes también se denomina “quemadura de
pantalla”. Para evitar que se produzca esa persistencia de la imagen, reduzca el nivel de brillo y de contraste de la pantalla
cuando muestre imágenes fijas.
● El uso del televisor lCd en formato 4:3 durante un tiempo prolongado puede dejar rastros de bordes en las
partes izquierda, derecha y central de la pantalla debido a las diferencias en la emisión lumínica de la
pantalla. reproducir un dvd o una videoconsola puede causar un efecto similar en la pantalla. la garantía
no cubre estos daños.
● ver imágenes fijas de videojuegos y PC durante más tiempo del indicado puede producir imágenes fantasma parciales. Para
evitar este efecto, reduzca el ‘brillo’ y el ‘contraste’ cuando vea imágenes fijas.
© 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. reservados todos los derechos.
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:40Español - 1
❑ Símbolo
N O T
Nota
Botón de una
pulsación
Botón TOOlS Pulsar
INFORMACIÓN GENERAL
■ Aspecto general del panel de control ...................................2
■ Accesorios............................................................................3
■ Aspecto general del panel de conexiones............................4
■ Mando a distancia ................................................................6
■ Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia ..................6
FUNCIONAMIENTO
■ visualización de los menús ..................................................7
■ Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera........................8
■ Función Plug & Play .............................................................8
■ Visualización de la pantalla ..................................................9
CONTROL DE LOS CANALES
■ Configuración del menú de canales .....................................9
■ Gestión de los canales ......................................................12
CONTROL DE LA IMAGEN
■ Configuración del menú de imagen....................................14
■ Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC)....16
■ Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador .................................17
CONTROL DEL SONIDO
■ Configuración del menú de sonido.....................................18
■ Selección del modo de sonido............................................19
CONFIGURACIÓN
■ Configuración del menú de configuración ..........................20
ENTRADA / ASISTENCIA TÉCNICA
■ Configuración del menú de entrada ...................................23
■ Configuración del menú de ayuda......................................23
RECOMENDACIONES DE USO
■ Función de teletexto ...........................................................25
■ Cómo ajustar el soporte (sólo para el modelo de 19
pulgadas)............................................................................26
■ Cómo ajustar el ángulo del televisor
(sólo el modelo de 19 pulgadas) ........................................26
■ Instalación de dispositivos de montaje que cumplen las
normas vESA (sólo el modelo de 19 pulgadas).................27
■ Uso de las cubiertas decorativas
(sólo para el modelo de 19 pulgadas)................................27
■ Instalación del soporte........................................................28
■ Instalación del equipo de montaje en la pared...................28
■ Uso del bloqueo Kensington antirrobos..............................28
■ Seguridad en el espacio de instalación..............................29
■ Fijación del televisor a la pared..........................................29
■ Solución de problemas.......................................................30
■ Especificaciones.................................................................33
CONTENIDO
Español
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:40Español - 2
INFORMACIÓN GENERAL
¦ Aspecto general del panel de control
N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo.
N Puede usar un botón si pulsa los botones del panel lateral.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCE E: Cambia entre todas las fuentes de entrada disponibles. En el menú en pantalla, utilice este botón de igual
modo que el botón ENTERE del mando a distancia.
2 MENU: Púlselo para ver un menú en pantalla con las opciones del televisor.
3Y: Púlselos para subir o bajar el volumen.
En el menú en pantalla, utilice estos botones Y de igual modo que los botones ◄ y ► del mando a distancia.
4Z: Permiten cambiar de canal. En el menú en pantalla, utilice estos botones Z de igual modo que los botones
▼ y ▲ del mando a distancia.
5 P (ENCENDIDO): Púlselo para encender o apagar el Tv.
6 SENSOR DEL MANDO A DISTANCIA: El mando a distancia debe dirigirse hacia este punto del televisor.
7 INDICADOR DE ALIMENTACIÓN: Parpadea y se apaga cuando se enciende el aparato y se ilumina en el modo en espera.
8 ALTAVOCES
BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:40Español - 3
¦ Accesorios
Mando a distancia y
2 pilas AAA
Cable de alimentación
Cubierta del orificio inferior
(sólo modelos de 22 pulgadas)
Paño de limpieza
(M4 X l16)
equipo de montaje mural
(sólo modelos de 19 pulgadas)
Cubierta decorativa
(sólo modelos de 19 pulgadas)
Tornillos del soporte x 4
(sólo modelos de 22 pulgadas)
● Owner’s Instructions ● Warranty card ● Safety Guide
N Asegúrese de que los siguientes elementos se incluyen con el televisor de pantalla lCd. Si falta alguno, póngase en contacto
con su distribuidor.
N Tarjeta de garantía/Guía de seguridad (no disponible en todos los lugares)
N El color y la forma de los componentes pueden variar según el modelo.
BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:41Español - 4
¦ Aspecto general del panel de conexiones
N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo.
N Cada vez que conecte un dispositivo externo al televisor, compruebe que la unidad esté desconectada de la alimentación.
N Cuando conecte un dispositivo externo, debe hacer coincidir los colores del terminal de conexión y del cable.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
– Se conecta a un componente de audio digital como un receptor del sistema Home Cinema.
N Cuando los terminales HdMI IN están conectados, el terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) del televisor genera
sólo 2 salidas de canales de audio. Para escuchar el audio de 5.1 canales, conecte el terminal Optical del reproductor
de dvd/Blu-ray o del decodificador de cable/satélite directamente a un amplificador o a un sistema Home Cinema, no al
televisor.
2 SERVICE
– Conector para la actualización del software.
3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC]
– Se conecta al terminal HDMI de un dispositivo con una salida HDMI.
N No se necesita conexión de audio adicional para una conexión de HDMI a HDMI.
N ¿Qué es HdMI?
HdMI, o interfaz multimedia de alta definición, es una interfaz que permite la transmisión de señales digitales de audio y
de vídeo mediante un solo cable.
la diferencia entre los dispositivos HdMI y dvI es que el HdMI es más pequeño, tiene instalada la función de
codificación HdCP (protección alta de la copia digital del ancho de banda) y es compatible con el sonido digital de varios
canales.
N Use el terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] para la conexión de DVI a un dispositivo externo. Use un cable de DVI a
HdMI o un adaptador dvI-HdMI (de dvI a HdMI) para la conexión de vídeo y los terminales HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] para
el audio. Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)].
HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO]
– Permite conectar al terminal de salida de audio del PC.
– Salidas de audio DVI para dispositivos externos.
HDMI / PC IN [PC]
– Se conecta al terminal de salida de vídeo del PC.
N Si el ordenador admite una conexión HDMI, se puede conectar ésta al terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)].
N Si el ordenador admite una conexión DVI, se puede conectar ésta al terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO].
4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
– Conecte el cable rCA a un dispositivo A/v externo adecuado, como, por ejemplo, un vídeo, un dvd o una cámara de
vídeo.
– Conecte los cables de sonido rCA al terminal [R-AUDIO-L] del aparato y los otros extremos a los conectores de salida
de sonido correspondientes en el dispositivo A/V.
6
7
1 2 3 4
0 9 8
5
[Panel posterior del TV]
Entrada de
alimentación
BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:42Español - 5
5 ANT IN
– Se conecta a un sistema de televisión por cable o antena.
6 ranura COMMON INTERFACE
– Si no se inserta una ‘TArJETA CI’ con algunos canales, en la pantalla aparece ‘Señal codificada’.
– En 2 o 3 minutos aparecerá en la pantalla la información del enlace que contiene un número telefónico, un identificador
de TArJETA CI, un identificador del sistema y demás información. Si aparece un mensaje de error, póngase en contacto
con su proveedor de servicios.
– Si ha terminado la configuración de la información del canal, aparecerá el mensaje ‘Actualiz. completa’, que indica que la
lista de canales ya se ha actualizado.
N debe obtener una TArJETA CI en un proveedor local de servicios. Para retirar la TArJETA CI, extráigala
cuidadosamente con los dedos, puesto que si cae al suelo se puede dañar.
N Inserte la tarjeta CI en la dirección marcada sobre ella.
N la ubicación de la ranura COMMON INTERFACE puede variar según los modelos.
N El módulo CAM no se admite en algunos países o zonas; consulte a su distribuidor local.
7 BLOQUEO KENSINGTON (según el modelo)
– El bloqueo Kensington (opcional) es un dispositivo que se utiliza para fijar físicamente el sistema cuando se utiliza en un
sitio público. Si desea usar un dispositivo de bloqueo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor donde adquirió el televisor.
N la ubicación del Bloqueo Kensington puede variar según los modelos.
8 Terminal de los auriculares
– los auriculares pueden estar conectados a la salida de auriculares del aparato. Cuando los auriculares están
conectados, se desactivará el sonido de los altavoces incorporados.
9 COMPONENT IN
– Conecte los cables de vídeo de componentes (opcionales) al conector de componentes (PR, PB, Y) de la parte posterior
del equipo y los otros extremos a los conectores de salida de vídeo de los componentes correspondientes en el dTv o
DVD.
– Si desea conectar tanto el decodificador como el dTv (o dvd), deberá conectar el decodificador al dTv (o dvd) y
conectar el dTv (o dvd) al conector de componentes (PR, PB, Y) de su aparato.
– los conectores PR, PB e Y de los dispositivos de componentes (dTv o dvd) algunas veces están etiquetados como Y,
B-Y y r-Y o Y, Cb y Cr.
– Conecte los cables de audio rCA (opcionales) al terminal [R-AUDIO-L] de la parte posterior del aparato y los otros
extremos a los conectores de salida de audio correspondientes en el DTV o DVD.
0 EXT (RGB)
Conector
entrada Salida
vídeo Audio (I / D) rGB vídeo + Audio (I / d)
EXT O O O Sólo está disponible la salida de Tv o dTv.
– Terminales de entrada o salida para dispositivos externos, como aparatos de vídeo, reproductores de dvd, consolas de
videojuegos o reproductores de videodiscos.
BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:42Español - 6
¦ Mando a distancia
N Puede utilizar el mando a una distancia del televisor de hasta 7 metros.
N El exceso de luz puede influir en el rendimiento del mando a distancia.
N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo.
1 POWER: Botón de suspensión del
televisor.
2 BOTONES NUMÉRICOS:
Permiten cambiar de canal.
3 FAV.CH : Se usa para mostrar las
listas de canales favoritos en la
pantalla.
4Y : Púlselos para subir o
bajar el volumen.
5 SOURCE : Púlselo para mostrar
y seleccionar las fuentes de vídeo
disponibles.
6 INFO : Púlselo para mostrar
información en la pantalla.
7 TOOLS: Se usa para seleccionar
rápidamente las funciones que se
usan con mayor frecuencia.
8 CH LIST : Muestra la lista de
canales en la pantalla.
9 BOTONES DE COLORES: Use
estos botones en la Lista de
canales, menús, etc.
! TV: Selecciona directamente el
modo TV.
@ PRE-CH : Permite volver al
canal que se ha estado viendo
anteriormente.
# MUTEM: Púlselo para cortar
temporalmente el sonido.
$ P : Permiten cambiar de
canal.
% MENU : Muestra el menú principal
en pantalla.
^ GUIDE : visualización de la Guía
electrónica de programas (EPG).
& RETURN : vuelve al menú anterior
* ARRIBA▲ / ABAJO▼ / IZQUIERDA◄
/ DERECHA► / ENTERE: Úselo para
seleccionar los elementos del menú
en la pantalla y cambiar los valores del
menú.
( EXIT: Púlselo para salir del menú.
) SUBT. : visualización de subtítulos
digitales
a AD: Selección de la descripción de
audio.
Funciones de teletexto
5 0 : Selección del modo de teletexto
(lIST/FlOF)
6 5 : Mostrar el teletexto
7 4 : Selección del tamaño del teletexto
8 8 : Guardar teletexto
9 Selección de tema de Fastext
0/ : Selecciona alternativamente
Teletext, Double o Mix.
! :: Sale de la pantalla de teletexto
@ 1 : Página secundaria del teletexto
$ 2 : Página siguiente del teletexto
3 : Página anterior del teletexto
% 6 : Índice del teletexto
& 9 : retener teletexto
( 7 : Cancelar teletexto
¦ Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia
1. levante la tapa de la parte posterior del mando a distancia, como se muestra en la ilustración.
2. Inserte dos pilas de tamaño AAA.
N respete los extremos ‘+’ y ‘–’ de las pilas que se indican en el diagrama del interior del
compartimiento.
3. Vuelva a poner la tapa.
N Saque las pilas y guárdelas en un lugar fresco y seco si no va a utilizar el mando a
distancia durante un período de tiempo prolongado.
N Si el mando a distancia no funciona, haga estas comprobaciones:
● ¿Está encendido el televisor?
● ¿Están intercambiados los polos positivos y negativos de las pilas?
● ¿Se han agotado las pilas?
● ¿Ha habido un corte de luz o el cable está desenchufado?
● ¿Hay un fluorescente o un neón a poca distancia?
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:42Español - 7
FUNCIONAMIENTO
¦ Visualización de los menús
Antes de usar el televisor, siga estos pasos para saber cómo desplazarse por el menú, con el
fin de seleccionar y ajustar las diferentes funciones.
1. Pulse el botón MENU.
Aparece el menú principal en la pantalla. Hay iconos en el lado izquierdo: Imagen,
Sonido, Canal, Configuración, Entrada, Aplicación, Asistencia técnica.
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar uno de los iconos.
Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para acceder al submenú del icono.
3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para ir a los elementos del menú.
Pulse el botón ENTERE para acceder a los elementos del menú.
4. Pulse el botón ▲/▼/◄/► para cambiar los elementos seleccionados.
N Pulse el botón RETURN para volver al menú anterior.
5. Pulse el botón EXIT para salir del menú.
Uso de los botones del mando a distancia
Botón Operaciones Botón Operaciones
MENUm Mostrar el menú principal en pantalla.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Mover el cursor y seleccionar un
elemento.
elegir el elemento seleccionado.
Confirmar la configuración.
RUTURNR volver al menú anterior.
EXITe Salir del menú en pantalla.
Ejemplo: Configuración del brillo del televisor en el menú Picture
Ajuste del brillo a 80
1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el menú.
2. Pulse de nuevo el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Imagen.
3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Brillo.
4. Pulse el botón ENTERE.
5. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► hasta que el brillo llegue a 80.
6. Pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Pulse el botón EXIT para salir del menú.
Modo : Estándar ►
luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50
Imagen
Modo : Estándar ►
luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50
Imagen
luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45 ►
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50
Configuración avanzada
Opciones de imagen
reinicio de la imagen
Imagen
U Mover L Ajustar E entrar R Volver
Brillo 45
U Mover L Ajustar E entrar R Volver
Brillo 80
Modo : Estándar ►
luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50
Imagen
BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:43Español - 8
¦ Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera
El aparato puede ponerse en modo de espera para reducir el consumo eléctrico. El modo de espera es muy útil si desea
interrumpir la visualización momentáneamente (durante la comida, por ejemplo).
1. Pulse el botón POWERP del mando a distancia.
N la pantalla se apaga y aparece un indicador de modo de espera en el equipo.
2. Para volver a encenderlo, sólo tiene que volver a pulsar el botón POWERP.
N No deje el aparato en modo de espera durante períodos largos de tiempo (cuando está de vacaciones, por ejemplo). lo
mejor es desenchufar el aparato de la red eléctrica y de la antena.
¦ Función Plug & Play
Cuando el televisor se enciende por primera vez, los valores se inician correlativamente de
forma automática.
1. Pulse el botón POWER del mando a distancia. Aparece el mensaje
You can set the menu language..
2. Seleccione el idioma con los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la
elección.
3. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Demo tienda o Uso doméstico y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Es recomendable configurar el televisor en el modo Uso doméstico para obtener la mejor imagen en un entorno
doméstico.
N Demo tienda sólo es necesario en los entornos comerciales.
N Si accidentalmente se configura la unidad en el modo Demo tienda y se desea volver a Uso doméstico (Estándar):
Pulse el botón del volumen del televisor. Cuando se muestra la OSd del volumen, mantenga pulsado el botón MENU del
televisor durante 5 segundos.
4. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Seleccione el país pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulse el botón ENTERE para confirmar la
elección.
5. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aérea o Cable y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Aérea: señal de la antena Aérea.
Cable: señal de la antena de Cable.
6. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la fuente de canal que desea memorizar. Pulse el botón ENTERE para
seleccionar Empezar.
N Digital y Analógico: Canales digitales y analógicos.
Digital: Canales digitales.
Analógico: Canales analógicos.
N Al configurar la fuente de antena en Cable, se muestra un paso para permitirle configurar un valor para la búsqueda de
canales digitales. Para obtener más información, consulte Canal → Guardado automático.
N la búsqueda de canales se iniciará y terminará automáticamente.
N Pulse el botón ENTERE en cualquier momento para interrumpir el proceso de memorización.
N Una vez memorizados todos los canales disponibles, se muestra el mensaje Configurar el modo del reloj..
7. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Auto y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Si se selecciona Manual, Configura la fecha y la hora actuales se muestra.
N Si ha recibido una señal digital, se ajustará la hora automáticamente. En caso negativo, seleccione Manual para ajustar
el reloj. (consulte la página 20)
8. Se ofrece el método de conexión para proporcionar alta definición de la mejor calidad. después de confirmar el método, pulse
el botón ENTERE.
9. Aparecerá el mensaje Disfrute de su televisor. Cuando termine, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Si desea reiniciar esta función...
1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el menú. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Configuración y, a continuación, pulse el
botón ENTERE.
2. Pulse de nuevo el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play.
3. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0.
N Si desea cambiar el número PIN, utilice la función Cambiar PIN. (consulte la página 22)
N la función Plug & Play está disponible sólo en el modo Tv.
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu language : English ►
E enter
BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:43Español - 9
¦ Visualización de la pantalla
la pantalla identifica el canal actual y el estado de algunos ajustes de audio-vídeo.
O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información.
Pulse el botón INFO del mando a distancia. El televisor mostrará el canal, el tipo de
sonido y el estado de ciertos ajustes de imagen y sonido.
● ▲, ▼: Puede ver otra información del canal. Si desea ir al canal actualmente
seleccionado, pulse el botón ENTERE.
● ◄, ►: Puede ver la información de programas del canal actual.
N Pulse el botón INFO otra vez o espere unos 10 segundos; la información
desaparecerá automáticamente.
CONTROL DE LOS CANALES
¦ Configuración del menú de canales
❑ País
N Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4
dígitos.
Canal analógico
Se puede cambiar el país de los canales analógicos.
Canal digital
Se puede cambiar el país de los canales digitales.
❑ Guardado automático
Se puede explorar los rangos de frecuencia disponibles (la disponibilidad depende del país). Puede que los números de programa
asignados automáticamente no correspondan a los números de programa reales o deseados.
N Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Segur. niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN.
Aérea / Cable
Fuente de antena que guardar
● Digital y Analógico: Canales digitales y analógicos.
● Digital: Canales digitales.
● Analógico: Canales analógicos.
Al seleccionar ‘Cable → Digital y Analógico’ o ‘Cable → Digital’
Proporcione un valor para explorar los canales de cable.
● M. Búsqueda → Completa / Red / Rápida
N Rápida
– ID red: Muestra el código de identificación de la red.
– Frecuencia: Muestra la frecuencia del canal. (Es diferente en cada país)
– Modulación: Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles.
– Velocidad símbolos: Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles.
N Busca todos los canales de las emisoras activas y los memoriza en el televisor.
N Si desea detener el guardado automático, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Aparece el mensaje ¿Detener programación automática?.
Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Sí y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
País ►
Guardado automático
Guardado manual
Opción de búsqueda de cable
Guía actual y próxima
Guía completa
Guía predeterminada : Guía completa
Canal
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
life On venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ¦ INFO
BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:43Español - 10
❑ Guardado manual
N Busca un canal manualmente y lo memoriza en el televisor.
N Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Segur. niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN.
Canal digital
Almacenamiento manual de canales digitales.
N Canal digital sólo está disponible en el modo de Tv digital.
● Canal: Establezca el número del canal con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9).
● Frecuencia: Establezca la frecuencia con los botones numéricos.
● Ancho de banda: Establezca el ancho de banda con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9).
N Una vez finalizada, la lista de canales se actualiza automáticamente.
Canal analógico
Almacenamiento manual de canales analógicos.
● Programa (número de programa que asignar a un canal): Establezca el número del programa con los botones ▲, ▼ o
numéricos (0~9).
● Sistema de color→ Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: Establezca el sistema del color con los botones ▲ o ▼.
● Sistema de sonido → BG / DK / I / L: Establezca el sistema del sonido con los botones ▲ o ▼.
● Canal (si conoce el número de canal que desea guardar): Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar C (canal aéreo) o
S (canal por cable). Pulse el botón ► y después ▲, ▼ o los botones numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar el número que desee.
N También puede seleccionar el número de canal directamente pulsando los botones numéricos (0~9).
N Si se produce un sonido anormal o no se produce sonido, vuelva a seleccionar el estándar de sonido adecuado.
● Buscar (si no se conoce el número de los canales): Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para iniciar la búsqueda. El sintonizador
explora el rango de frecuencia hasta que se recibe en la pantalla el primer canal o el canal que se ha seleccionado.
● Guardar (cuando guarde el canal y el número de programa asociado): Establezca OK pulsando el botón ENTERE.
N Modo de canal
– P (modo de programa): Al finalizar la sintonización, las estaciones de emisión de su zona se habrán asignado a los
números de posición comprendidos entre P00 y P99. Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número de posición en
este modo.
– C (modo de canal aéreo): Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada emisora aérea en este
modo.
– S (modo de canal por cable): Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada canal por cable en
este modo.
❑ Opción de búsqueda de cable (según el país)
Establece opciones adicionales de búsqueda, como la frecuencia y la velocidad de símbolo para la búsqueda de red por cable.
● Frecuencia (Empezar ~ Stop): Muestra la frecuencia del canal.
● Modulación: Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles.
● Velocidad símbolos: Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles.
❑ Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa
la información de la Guía electrónica de programas (EPG) la proporcionan las emisoras. las entradas de los programas
pueden aparecer vacías u obsoletas, según la información proporcionada por un canal determinado. la pantalla se actualiza
dinámicamente tan pronto como hay nueva información disponible.
N Para obtener una descripción detallada sobre el uso de Guía actual y próxima y Guía completa, consulte la página 11.
O También puede ver el menú de la guía pulsando el botón GUIDE. (Para configurar la Guía predeterminada, siga las
instrucciones.)
Guía actual y próxima
Se muestra la información del programa actual y siguiente de los seis canales señalados en la columna izquierda.
Guía completa
Muestra la información de los programas ordenados por hora en segmentos de una hora. Muestra la información de dos horas de
programa que se puede desplazar adelante o atrás en el tiempo.
BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:43Español - 11
❑ Guía predeterminada → Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa
Puede decidir que se muestre la Guía actual y próxima o la Guía completa cuando se pulsa el botón GUIDE del mando a
distancia.
❑ Lista de canales
Para obtener una descripción detallada sobre el uso de la Lista de canales, consulte las instrucciones de 'Gestión de los
canales'.
O Puede seleccionar estas opciones simplemente pulsando el botón CH LIST del mando a distancia.
❑ Modo Canal
Cuando se pulsa el botón P >/< se cambian los canales en la lista de canales seleccionados.
Canales añadidos
los canales se cambian en la lista de canales memorizados.
Canales favoritos
los canales se cambian en la lista de canales favoritos.
❑ Sintonización fina
Si la recepción es clara, no tiene que realizar la sintonización fina del canal, ya que esta operación se hace de forma automática
durante la búsqueda y la memorización. Si la señal es débil o está distorsionada, puede que deba realizar manualmente la
sintonización fina del canal.
N los canales que se han ajustado con sintonización fina se marcan con un asterisco ‘*’ a la derecha del número de canal en la
banda del canal.
N Para reiniciar la sintonía fina, seleccione Rest. pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼ y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Sólo puede ajustarse la sintonización de los canales de televisión analógicos.
Uso de Guía actual y próxima / Guía completa
Para... Debe...
ver un programa en la lista EPG Seleccionar una posición pulsando los botones ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Salir de la guía Pulsar el botón azul
Si el programa siguiente está seleccionado, se concreta con un icono de reloj. Si se vuelve a pulsar el botón ENTERE y se pulsa
los botones ◄, ► para seleccionar la Cancelar progr., la programación se cancela y el icono del reloj desaparece.
Ver información de los programas Seleccionar un programa pulsando los botones ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
A continuación pulse el botón INFO cuando se resalte el programa
deseado.
El título del programa se muestra en la parte superior del centro de la
pantalla.
Pulse el botón INFO para obtener información detallada. En la información detallada se incluye el número del canal, la hora de
ejecución, la barra de estado, el nivel del control paterno, la información de calidad del vídeo (Hd/Sd), los modos de sonido,
subtítulos o teletexto, los idiomas de los subtítulos o del teletexto y un resumen breve del programa seleccionado. ‘...’ se muestra si
el resumen es largo.
Intercambiar entre Guía actual y próxima o
Guía completa
Pulsar el botón rojo varias veces.
En Guía completa
desplazarse rápidamente hacia atrás (24 horas).
desplazarse rápidamente hacia adelante (24 horas).
Pulsar el botón verde varias veces.
Pulsar el botón amarillo varias veces.
Guía completa
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Hoy 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
No information
Freshmen O.
Ver
INFO Información ■ actual/próxima ■ +24 Horas ■ Salir
Guía actual y próxima
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Mar 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Actual Siguiente
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Kisstory
No information
No information
No information
Street Hypn..
Ver
INFO Información ■ Guía completa ■ Salir
BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:44Español - 12
¦ Gestión de los canales
Con este menú puede agregar y borrar los canales o configurarlos como favoritos y usar la
guía de programas de las emisoras digitales.
Todos los canales
Muestra todos los canales disponibles actualmente.
Canales añadidos
Muestra todos los canales añadidos.
Favoritos
Muestra todos los canales favoritos.
O Para seleccionar los canales favoritos que ha configurado, pulse el botón FAV.CH del mando a distancia.
Programado
Muestra todos los programas actualmente reservados.
N Seleccione un canal en las pantallas Todos los canales, Canales añadidos o Favoritos con los botones ▲ / ▼ y pulse el
botón ENTERE. A continuación puede ver el canal seleccionado.
N Uso de los botones de colores en la lista de canales
– rojo (Tipo de canal): Cambiar entre TV, Radio, Datos / Otr y Todos.
– Verde (Zoom): Aumenta o reduce un número de canal.
– Amarillo (Selección ): Selecciona varias listas de canales. Puede realizar las funciones de añadir, borrar, añadir a
favoritos, borrar de favoritos, bloquear o desbloquear con varios canales al mismo tiempo. Seleccione los canales que
desee y pulse el botón amarillo para configurar los canales seleccionados al mismo tiempo. Aparece la marca c a la
izquierda de los canales seleccionados.
– TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los menús Borrar (o Añadir), Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos), Bloquear
(o Desbloquear), Visual. con temp, Modificac. nombre canal, Ordenar,Modificac. número canal, Seleccionar
todos, (o Deselecc. todos), Guardado automático. (los menús de las opciones pueden cambiar, dependiendo de la
situación.)
N Iconos de la pantalla de estado del canal
● A : Canal analógico.
● c: Canal seleccionado al pulsar el botón amarillo.
● : Canal configurado como favorito.
● ( : Programa que se está emitiendo.
● \ : Canal bloqueado.
● ) : Programa reservado
Menú de opciones de la lista de canales (en Todos los canales / Canales añadidos / Favoritos)
N Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú de opciones.
N los elementos del menú de opciones pueden variar según el estado del canal.
Añadir / Borrar
Puede suprimir o añadir un canal para que se muestren los canales que desee.
N Todos los canales borrados se mostrarán en el menú Todos los canales.
N Un canal de color gris quiere decir que se ha suprimido.
N El menú Añadir sólo aparece con los canales borrados.
N También puede borrar un canal en los menús Canales añadidos o Favoritos de la
misma manera.
Añadir a Favoritos / Borrar de Favoritos
Puede configurar como favoritos los canales que vea con más frecuencia.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede establecer el
canal favorito que añadir o suprimir si selecciona Herramientas → Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos).
N Se mostrará el símbolo ‘ ’ y el canal se configurará como favorito.
N Todos los canales seleccionados se mostrarán en el menú Favoritos.
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canales añadidos Todos ■ Tipo de canal ■ Zoom ■ Selección T Herramientas
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canales añadidos Todos ■ Tipo de canal ■ Zoom ■ Selección T Herramientas
Borrar
Añadir a Favoritos
Bloquear
Visualiz. con temporiz.
Modificac. nombre canal
Ordenar
▼
BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:44Español - 13
Bloquear / Desbloquear
Se puede bloquear un canal para que no se pueda seleccionar ni visualizar. Está función está disponible sólo cuando Segur. niños
está configurado como Act.. (consulte la página 22)
N Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos.
N El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Change PIN en el
menú.
N Se muestra el símbolo ‘\’ y el canal queda bloqueado.
Visualiz. con temporiz.
Si reserva un programa que desea ver, el canal se cambia automáticamente al canal reservado en la lista de canales aunque esté
viendo otro canal. Para reservar un programa, en primer lugar debe configurar la hora actual. (Consulte la página 20)
N Sólo se pueden reservar los canales memorizados.
N Puede ajustar el canal, el día, el mes, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a
distancia.
N la reserva de un programa se muestra en el menú Programa.
N Guía de programas digitales y reserva de visualización
Si se ha seleccionado un canal digital y se pulsa el botón ► aparece la guía de programas del canal. Se puede reservar un
programa mediante el procedimiento descrito anteriormente.
Modificac. nombre canal (sólo canales analógicos)
los canales se pueden etiquetar con el propósito de que al seleccionar éstos se pueda ver su nombre.
N los nombres de los canales digitales se asignan automáticamente y no se pueden etiquetar.
Modificac. número canal (sólo canales digitales)
También puede editar el número del canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia.
Ordenar (sólo canales analógicos)
Esta operación permite cambiar los números de programa de los canales memorizados. Puede que sea necesario realizarla
después de la memorización automática.
Seleccionar todos / Deseleccionar todo
● Seleccionar todos: Puede seleccionar todos los canales de la lista.
● Deseleccionar todo: Puede anular la selección de todos los canales.
N Sólo se puede seleccionar Deseleccionar todo si hay canales seleccionados.
Guardado automático
N Si desea más detalles sobre las opciones de configuración, consulte la página 9.
N Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Segur. niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN.
Menú de opciones de la lista de canales (en Programmed)
Se puede ver, cambiar o borrar una reserva.
N Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú de opciones.
Cambiar información
Selecciónelo para cambiar la reserva de visualización.
Cancelar progr.
Selecciónelo para cancelar la reserva de visualización.
Información
Selecciónelo para ver una reserva de visualización. (También se puede cambiar la
información de reserva.)
Seleccionar todos
Seleccionar todos los programas reservados.
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer
20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife
Programado Todos ■ Zoom ■ Selección T Herramientas E Información
Cambiar información
Cancelar progr.
Información
Seleccionar todos
BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:44Español - 14
CONTROL DE LA IMAGEN
¦ Configuración del menú de imagen
❑ Modo
Puede seleccionar el tipo de imagen que mejor cumpla sus requisitos de visualización.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el
modo de la imagen seleccionando Herramientas → Modo imagen.
Dinámico
Selecciona la alta definición en la imagen, en una habitación luminosa.
Estándar
Selecciona la visualización óptima de la imagen, en un entorno normal.
Película
Selecciona la visualización para ver películas en una sala oscura.
❑ Luz de fondo / Contraste / Brillo / Nitidez / Color / Matiz (V/R)
El televisor tiene varias opciones de configuración que permiten controlar la calidad de la
imagen.
● Luz de fondo: Ajusta el brillo de la luz de fondo de la pantalla lCd.
● Contraste: Ajusta el nivel del contraste de la imagen.
● Brillo: Ajusta el nivel del brillo de la imagen.
● Nitidez: Ajusta la definición de los bordes de la imagen.
● Color: Ajusta la saturación del color de la imagen.
● Matiz (V/R): Ajusta el matiz del color de la imagen.
N Seleccione el modo de imagen que desee ajustar en primer lugar. los valores ajustados se guardan para cada modo de
imagen.
N Cuando se cambian Luz de fondo, Contraste, Brillo, Nitidez, Color o Matiz (V/R), la presentación en la pantalla OSd se
ajusta consecuentemente.
N en los modos analógicos TV, Ext., AV del sistema PAl no se puede utilizar la función Matiz (V/R).
N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden realizar cambios en las opciones Luz de fondo, Contraste y Brillo.
N la configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar.
N la energía consumida durante el uso se puede reducir significativamente si se disminuye el nivel del brillo de la imagen, lo
cual reduce el costo total de funcionamiento.
❑ Configuración avanzada
los nuevos televisores Samsung permiten una configuración más precisa aun de la imagen que los modelos anteriores. Consulte
más adelante cómo realizar una configuración detallada.
N Configuración avanzada está disponible en los modos Estándar o Película.
N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden cambiar Gamma y Balance de blanco entre los elementos de Configuración avanzada.
Tono del negro → Des. / Oscuro / Más oscuro / El más oscuro
Se puede seleccionar el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta.
Contraste dinám. → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto
Se puede ajustar el contraste de la pantalla para conseguir un contraste óptimo.
Gamma
Se puede ajustar la intensidad de los colores primarios (rojo, verde, azul).
Gama de colores
la gama de colores es una matriz compuesta por los colores rojo, verde y azul. Seleccione su gama favorita de color y disfrute de
unos colores auténticamente naturales.
● Original: Proporciona tonos de color profundos y ricos.
● Auto: Ajusta automáticamente al tono de color más natural de acuerdo con las fuentes del programa.
Modo : Estándar ►
luz de fondo : 7
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50
Imagen
Color : 50
Matiz (v/r) : v50 / r50
Configuración avanzada ►
Opciones de imagen
reinicio de la imagen
Imagen
BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 15
Balance de blanco
Se puede ajustar la temperatura del color para conseguir colores más naturales.
● Rojo - / Verde - / Azul - / Rojo + / Verde + / Azul +: Puede ajustar la ‘temperatura’ del color en las áreas claras si cambia los
valores de r, G, B. Sólo se recomienda para los usuarios avanzados.
● Rest.: El balance de blanco anteriormente ajustado se restablecerá con los valores predefinidos de fábrica.
Tono de piel Tono piel
Permite acentuar el ‘Tono de piel Tono piel’ rosado de las imágenes.
N Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada.
Mejora del borde → Des. / Act.
Permite acentuar los bordes de los objetos en las imágenes.
❑ Opciones de imagen
N En el modo PC sólo se pueden hacer cambios en los elementos Tono color y Tamaño del menú Opciones de imagen.
Tono color → Frío / Normal / Cálido1 / Cálido2
Puede seleccionar el tono de color que le resulte más cómodo para la vista.
N la configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar.
N Cálido1 o Cálido2 sólo están disponibles cuando el modo de imagen es Película.
Tamaño
Puede seleccionar el tamaño de imagen que mejor se adapte a sus requisitos de visualización.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el tamaño seleccionando Herramientas
→ Tamaño de imagen.
● Ancho auto.: Ajusta automáticamente el tamaño de la imagen a la relación de aspecto de la pantalla 16:9.
● 16:9: Ajusta el tamaño de la imagen a 16:9, adecuado para ver los dvd o las emisiones en formato ancho.
● Zoom ancho: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más que 4:3.
● Zoom: Amplía la imagen ancha de 16:9 (en sentido vertical) para que la imagen ocupe el tamaño de la pantalla.
● 4:3: Es la configuración predeterminada para una película de vídeo o una emisión normal.
● Ajuste en pantalla Ajuste pantalla: Use la función para ver la imagen completa sin cortes cuando la entrada de la señal sea
HDMI (720p / 1080i) o Componente (1080i).
N Según la fuente de entrada, las opciones de tamaño de la imagen pueden variar.
N las opciones disponibles pueden diferir según el modelo seleccionado.
N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden ajustar los modos 16:9 y 4:3.
N la configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar.
N Puede producirse una retención temporal de imagen cuando se ve una imagen estática durante más de dos horas.
N Zoom ancho: Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones
▲ o ▼ para desplazar la imagen hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Zoom: Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones
▲ o ▼ para desplazar la imagen hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse el botón ► para
seleccionar Tamaño y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Utilice los botones ▲ o ▼ para ampliar o reducir el tamaño
de la imagen en dirección vertical. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Después de seleccionar Ajuste en pantalla Ajuste pantalla en los modos HdMI (1080i) o Component (1080i): Seleccione
Posición con los botones ◄ o ►. Use los botones ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► para mover la imagen.
Rest.: Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Rest. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Puede inicializar la
configuración.
N Si se usa la función Ajuste en pantalla Ajuste pantalla con la entrada HDMI 720p, en los laterales superior, inferior,
izquierdo y derecho de la pantalla se cortará 1 línea como en la función de sobreexploración.
Modo Pantalla → 16:9 / Zoom ancho / Zoom / 4:3
Cuando se configura el tamaño de la imagen como Ancho auto. en un televisor panorámico 16:9, se puede determinar el tamaño
de la imagen para ver una imagen en pantalla panorámica 4:3 WSS o ninguna. Cada país europeo exige un tamaño de imagen
diferente, de modo que esta función está concebida con la intención de que los usuarios la seleccionen.
● 16:9: Ajusta la imagen al modo panorámico 16:9.
● Zoom ancho: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más que 4:3.
● Zoom: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen verticalmente en la pantalla.
● 4:3: Ajusta la imagen al modo normal 4:3.
N Esta función está disponible en el modo Ancho auto..
N Esta función no está disponible en los modos PC, Componente o HDMI.
BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 16
Digital NR → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Auto
Si la señal de emisión que recibe el televisor es débil, puede activarse la función digital Noise reduction para reducir la estática y
las imágenes superpuestas que pueden aparecer en la pantalla.
N Cuando la señal sea débil, seleccione alguna de las otras opciones hasta que se vea una imagen de mejor calidad.
N.neg HDMI → Normal / Bajo
Se puede seleccionar directamente el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta.
N Esta función sólo está activa cuando se conecta la entrada externa a HdMI (señales rGB).
Modo de película → Des. / Auto
El televisor se puede configurar para que perciba y procese automáticamente las señales de película de todas las fuentes y ajuste
la mejor calidad de imagen.
N Modo de película es compatible con TV, AV, COMPONENT(480i/1080i) y HDMI(480i/1080i).
❑ Reinicio de la imagen → Rest. modo imagen / Cancelar
restablece todos los ajustes predeterminados.
N Seleccione un modo de imagen que desee restaurar. la restauración se realiza en cada modo de imagen.
● Rest. modo imagen: los valores actuales de la imagen vuelven a la configuración predeterminada.
¦ Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC)
Configuración del software del PC (basado en Windows XP)
A continuación se muestra la configuración de pantalla de Windows para un ordenador típico. Probablemente la pantalla real de
su PC sea distinta, según la versión concreta de Windows y de la tarjeta de vídeo que tenga. Aunque las pantallas reales sean
diferentes, la información de configuración básica que se aplica en casi todos los casos es la misma. (En caso contrario, póngase
en contacto con el fabricante del ordenador o con el distribuidor de Samsung.)
1. Primero, haga clic en ‘Panel de control’ en el menú Inicio de Windows.
2. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Apariencia y temas’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo.
3. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Pantalla’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo.
4. Seleccione la ficha ‘Configuración’ en el cuadro de diálogo.
Configuración correcta del tamaño (resolución): óptima 1360 x 768 píxeles
Si existe una opción de frecuencia vertical en el cuadro de diálogo de configuración de la pantalla, el valor correcto es ‘60’ o
‘60 Hz’. En caso contrario, haga clic en ‘OK’ y salga del cuadro de diálogo.
BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 17
Modos de pantalla
Tanto la posición en la pantalla como el tamaño varían dependiendo del tipo de monitor del PC y de su resolución. Se recomiendan las
resoluciones de la tabla.
Entradas D-Sub y HDMI/DVI
Modo Resolución
Frecuencia horizontal
(KHz)
Frecuencia vertical
(Hz)
Frecuencia de reloj de
píxeles (MHz)
Polaridad
sincr. (H/V)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
N Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI (DVI).
N No se admite el modo entrelazado.
N El aparato puede funcionar incorrectamente si se selecciona un formato de vídeo que no sea estándar.
N los modos Independiente y Compuesto no se admiten. SOG no se admite.
¦ Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador
N Preselección: Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar el modo PC.
❑ Ajuste automático
Esta función permite que la pantalla de PC del equipo se ajuste automáticamente a la señal de
vídeo del PC. los valores fino, grueso y posición se ajustan automáticamente.
N esta función no se puede utilizar en modo DVI-HDMI.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar esta
opción seleccionando Herramientas → Ajuste automático.
❑ Pantalla
Grueso / Fino
el objetivo del ajuste de la calidad de imagen es eliminar o reducir las interferencias. Si el ruido
no se elimina mediante la sintonización fina, ajuste la frecuencia lo mejor que pueda (Grueso) y vuelva a realizar la sintonización
fina. después de reducir el ruido, vuelva a ajustar la imagen para que quede alineada en el centro de la pantalla.
Posición de PC
Ajuste la posición de la pantalla del PC si no se acopla a la pantalla del Tv. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para ajustar la posición
vertical. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para ajustar la posición horizontal.
Restablecer imagen
Puede recuperar todos los ajustes de imagen predeterminados de fábrica.
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Ajuste automático ►
Pantalla
Configuración avanzada
Opciones de imagen
reinicio de la imagen
Imagen
BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 18
CONTROL DEL SONIDO
¦ Configuración del menú de sonido
❑ Modo → Estándar / Música / Película / Voz clara / Personal
Se puede seleccionar el modo de sonido que se ajuste mejor a las preferencias personales.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede configurar el
modo de sonido seleccionando Herramientas → Modo de sonido.
Estándar
Selecciona el modo de sonido normal.
Música
refuerza la música por encima de las voces.
Película
Ofrece el mejor sonido para películas.
Voz clara
refuerza la voz sobre otros sonidos.
Personal
Mantiene los valores personalizados del sonido.
❑ Ecualizador
Es posible ajustar los parámetros del sonido según las preferencias personales.
Modo
Se puede seleccionar el modo de sonido que se ajuste mejor a las preferencias personales.
Balance
Ajusta el balance entre los altavoces izquierdo y derecho.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (ajuste de ancho de banda)
Para ajustar el nivel de las diferentes frecuencias de ancho de banda
Rest.
restablece todos los ajustes predeterminados del ecualizador.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Des. / Act.
SrS TruSurround Hd es una tecnología SrS patentada que solventa el problema de reproducir contenido multicanal 5.1 en dos
altavoces. TruSurround proporciona una experiencia de sonido virtual convincente a través de cualquier sistema de reproducción
con dos altavoces, incluso con los altavoces internos del televisor. es totalmente compatible con todos los formatos multicanal.
❑ Idioma de audio (sólo canales digitales)
Se pueden cambiar los valores predeterminados para los idiomas del audio. Muestra la información del idioma para el flujo de
entrada.
N Sólo se puede seleccionar uno de los idiomas que ofrece la emisora.
N Cuando se visualiza un canal digital se puede seleccionar esta opción.
❑ Formato audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (sólo canales digitales)
Cuando el sonido se emite desde un altavoz principal y un receptor de audio, se puede originar un sonido de eco debido a las
diferencias en la velocidad de decodificación entre el altavoz principal y el receptor de audio. En tales casos, use la función
Altavoz de TV.
N El formato de audio aparece según el tipo de señal de emisión.
N Cuando se visualiza un canal digital se puede seleccionar esta opción.
Modo : Personal ►
ecualizador
SrS TruSurround Hd : des.
Idioma de audio : - - -
Formato audio : - - -
Descripción de audio
volumen automático : des.
Sonido
BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 19
❑ Descripción de audio (sólo canales digitales)
es una función auxiliar de audio que proporciona una pista de audio adicional para personas con problemas de vista. esta función
maneja el flujo de audio de Ad (descripción de audio) cuando se envía desde el emisor con el audio principal. los usuarios
pueden activar o desactivar la descripción de audio y controlar el volumen.
O Pulse el botón AD del mando a distancia para seleccionar Des. o Act..
Descripción de audio → Des. / Act.
Activa o desactiva la función de descripción del audio.
Volumen
Se puede ajustar el volumen de la descripción de audio.
N Volumen está activo cuando Descripción de audio se configura como Act..
❑ Volumen automático → Des. / Act.
Cada emisora tiene sus propias condiciones de señal y resulta incómodo ajustar el volumen cada vez que se cambia de canal.
Esta función permite ajustar automáticamente el volumen de un canal disminuyendo la salida de sonido cuando la señal de
modulación es alta o aumentando la salida de sonido cuando la señal de modulación es baja.
❑ Seleccionar altavoz → Altavoz externo / Altavoz de TV
Si desea usar unos altavoces independientes, cancele el amplificador interno.
N los botones del volumen y MUTE no funcionan cuando Seleccionar altavoz está configurado como Altavoz externo.
N Si se selecciona Altavoz externo en el menú Seleccionar altavoz se limita la configuración del sonido.
❑ Reinicio del sonido → Restablecer todo / Rest. m. sonido / Cancelar
Puede restaurar la configuración del sonido con los valores predeterminados de fábrica.
¦ Selección del modo de sonido
Puede definir el modo de sonido en el menú Herramientas. Cuando se configura Dual l ll, el modo de sonido actual se muestra
en la pantalla.
Tipo de audio Dual 1 / 2 Predeterminado
A2 estéreo
Mono MONO
Cambio automático
estéreo ESTÉREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
estéreo
Mono MONO
Cambio automático
estéreo MONO ↔ ESTÉREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
N Si la señal de estéreo es débil y el modo cambia de forma automática, cambie a mono.
N Esta función sólo está activa en la señal de sonido estéreo. Está desactivada en la señal de sonido monoaural.
N Esta función sólo está disponible en el modo Tv.
BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:45Español - 20
CONFIGURACIÓN
¦ Configuración del menú de configuración
❑ Idioma del menú
Se puede configurar el idioma de los menús.
❑ Hora
Reloj
Para usar las diferentes funciones del temporizador del televisor es necesario configurar el
reloj.
N la hora actual aparecerá siempre que se pulse el botón INFO.
N Si desconecta el cable de alimentación, debe configurar el reloj de nuevo.
● Modo de reloj
Se puede configurar la hora actual manual o automáticamente.
– Auto: Configure la hora automáticamente mediante la información de la hora de la emisión digital.
– Manual: Configure la hora actual manualmente.
N Según la emisora y la señal, la hora automática no se puede ajustar correctamente. En tal caso, debe hacerlo
manualmente.
N la antena y el cable se deben conectar para ajustar la hora automáticamente.
● Ajustar hora
Puede ajustar la hora actual manualmente.
N Establezca este elemento cuando configure Modo de reloj como Manual.
N Puede ajustar el día, el mes, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a
distancia.
Temp. desc. → Des. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
El temporizador de desconexión apaga automáticamente el televisor después de un período prefijado (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 y 180
minutos).
N Cuando el temporizador llega a 0, el televisor pasa al modo de espera de forma automática.
N Para cancelar la función Temp. desc. seleccione Des..
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el temporizador seleccionando
Herramientas → Temp. desc..
Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3
la activación y desactivación del temporizador se puede configurar de tres maneras. debe ajustar el reloj en primer lugar.
● Hora encendido: Puede configurar la hora y los minutos y activar o desactivar el temporizador. (Para activar el temporizador
con la configuración elegida, establézcalo en Activar.)
● Hora apagado: Puede configurar la hora y los minutos y activar o desactivar el temporizador. (Para activar el temporizador
con la configuración elegida, establézcalo en Activar.)
● Volumen: Seleccione el nivel de volumen deseado.
● Antena: Selecc. Aérea o Cable.
● Canal: Permite seleccionar el canal deseado.
● Repetir: Seleccione Una vez, Cada día, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sáb, Sáb~Dom o Manual.
N Con Manual seleccionado, pulse el botón ► para seleccionar el día de la semana. Pulse el botón ENTERE sobre el
día deseado y aparecerá la marcac.
N Puede ajustar la hora, los minutos y el canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia.
N Apagado automático
Si activa el temporizador, el televisor se apagará si no se pulsa ningún botón durante 3 horas, después de que el
temporizador lo haya puesto en marcha. Esta función sólo está disponible si el temporizador está activado y evita el
recalentamiento que se puede producir si el televisor está encendido durante demasiado tiempo.
Plug & Play
Idioma del menú : Español ►
Hora
emisión
Seguridad
General
Configuración
BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 21
❑ Emisión
Subtítulos
Se pueden activar o desactivar los subtítulos. Use este menú para configurar el modo de subtítulo. Normal es la opción básica y
Duro de oído es la opción para personas con problemas de audición.
● Subtítulos → Des. / Act.: Activa o desactiva los subtítulos.
● Modo → Normal / Duro de oído: Establece el modo de los subtítulos.
● Idioma de los subtítulos: Establece el idioma de los subtítulos.
N Si el programa que se está viendo no admite la opción Duro de oído, automáticamente se activa Normal aunque se
seleccione Duro de oído.
N El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas.
O Puede seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón SUBT del mando a distancia.
Texto digital → Inhabilitar / Habilitar (sólo RU)
Si el programa se emite con texto digital, esta opción está activada.
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group-Grupo de expertos para la codificación de la
información hipermedia y multimedia)
Es una norma internacional para los sistemas de codificación de datos que se utilizan en hipermedia y multimedia. Es un
nivel superior al sistema MPEG que incluye hipermedia vinculado a datos, como imágenes fijas, servicios de caracteres,
animaciones, gráficos y archivos de vídeo así como datos multimedia. MHEG es una tecnología de interacción de tiempo de
ejecución del usuario que se aplica en varios campos, como vOd (vídeo a la carta), ITv (televisión interactiva), EC (comercio
electrónico), educación a distancia, teleconferencias, bibliotecas digitales y juegos de red.
Idioma del teletexto
Se puede configurar el idioma del teletexto seleccionando el tipo de idioma.
N El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas.
Preferencia
● Idioma principal audio / Idioma secundario audio / Idioma princ. subtítulos / Idioma sec. subtítulos /
Idioma principal del teletexto / Idioma secundario del teletexto
Con esta función los usuarios pueden seleccionar uno de los idiomas. El idioma seleccionado aquí se convierte en el
predeterminado cuando se selecciona un canal.
Si se cambia la configuración del idioma, las opciones de idioma de los subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto del menú de
idioma se cambian automáticamente al idioma seleccionado.
las opciones de idioma de los subtítulos, del audio y del teletexto, del menú de idioma, muestran una lista de los idiomas
admitidos en el canal actual y la selección se resalta. Si cambia la configuración del idioma, ésta sólo es válida en el canal
actual. los cambios de configuración no afectan a las opciones de idioma principal de los subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto
del menú de preferencias.
Interfaz común
● Menú CI
Permite al usuario realizar selecciones en el menú CAM proporcionado. Seleccione el menú CI según el menú de la tarjeta
PC.
● Info. sobre la aplicación
la interfaz común contiene y muestra información acerca del CAM insertado en la ranura CI.
N la información de la aplicación insertada se refiere a la TArJETA CI. la instalación del CAM puede efectuarse con el
televisor encendido o apagado.
1. Puede adquirir el módulo del CAM de CI por teléfono o en el distribuidor más cercano a su domicilio.
2. Inserte la TArjeTA CI en el CAM siguiendo la dirección de la flecha hasta que encaje.
3. Inserte el CAM con la TArJETA CI instalada en la ranura para interfaz común.
(Inserte el CAM, siguiendo la dirección de la flecha, hasta el fondo, de modo que quede paralelo a la ranura.)
4. Compruebe si se ven imágenes en un canal de señal codificada.
N El módulo CAM no se admite en algunos países o zonas; consulte a su distribuidor local.
BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 22
❑ Emisión
Antes de que se muestre la pantalla de configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción del código PIN. Escriba su código
PIN de 4 dígitos.
el código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es 0-0-0-0. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN en el menú.
Segur. niños → Des. / Act.
Esta función permite bloquear el vídeo y el audio para evitar que los usuarios no autorizados (por ejemplo, los niños) puedan ver
programas poco recomendables.
N Se pueden bloquear algunos canales en la lista de canales. (Consulte la página 13.)
N Segur. niños sólo está disponible en el modo Tv.
Bloqueo paterno
Con esta función se puede impedir por medio de un código PIN (número de identificación personal) de 4 dígitos definido por el
usuario que personas no autorizadas, como los niños, vean programas inadecuados.
N el elemento Bloqueo paterno difiere según el país.
N Una vez establecido Bloqueo paterno, se muestra el símbolo ‘\’.
N Perm. todo: Se pulsa para desbloquear todos los programas de televisión.
Bloq. todo: Se pulsa para bloquear todos los programas de televisión.
Cambiar PIN
Se puede cambiar el número Id personal necesario para configurar el televisor.
N Si ha olvidado el código PIN, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en la siguiente secuencia para reiniciar el PIN a
0-0-0-0 : POWER (Des.) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Act.).
❑ General
Modo Juego → Des. / Act.
Cuando se conecta una videoconsola como PlayStation™ o Xbox™, se puede experimentar una sensación más realista al
seleccionar el menú de juegos.
N Para desconectar la videoconsola y conectar otro dispositivo externo, cancele el modo de juegos en el menú de
configuración.
N Si visualiza el menú de Tv en el Modo Juego la pantalla tiembla ligeramente.
N Modo Juego no está disponible en los modos normales de TV y PC.
N Si Modo Juego está activado:
– El modo de imagen se cambia automáticamente a Estándar y los usuarios no pueden cambiar el modo.
– El modo de sonido se cambia automáticamente a Personal y los usuarios no pueden cambiar el modo. Ajuste el sonido
con el ecualizador.
N la función para establecer el sonido está activada. Si selecciona la función de restablecer el sonido después de configurar el
ecualizador, la configuración de éste recupera los parámetros predeterminados de fábrica.
Ahorro energía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Imagen desact. / Auto
Esta función ajusta el brillo del televisor, lo cual reduce el consumo de energía. Si desea ver la televisión por la noche, ajuste la
opción del modo Ahorro energía en Modo; sus ojos se lo agradecerán y, además, reducirá el consumo de energía.
Si se selecciona Imagen desact., la pantalla se apaga y sólo se puede oír el sonido. Pulse cualquier botón para salir de
Imagen desact..
N En el menú Tools, la función Imagen desact. no se admite..
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar esta opción seleccionando
Herramientas→ Ahorro energía.
Melodía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto
Se puede establecer un sonido de melodía que se oiga cuando el televisor se encienda o se apague.
N la melodía no se reproduce
– Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha activado el botón MUTE.
– Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha pulsado el botón del volumen (–).
– Cuando la función de temporizador ha apagado el televisor.
BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 23
ENTRADA / ASISTENCIA TÉCNICA
¦ Configuración del menú de entrada
❑ Fuentes
Úselo para seleccionar Tv u otras fuentes de entrada externas como reproductores de dvd/
Blu-ray o receptores de cable y satélite (decodificadores), conectados al televisor. Permite
seleccionar la fuente de entrada que se prefiera.
O Pulse el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia para ver una fuente de señal externa. el
modo TV se puede seleccionar pulsando el botón TV.
TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI/DVI
N Puede elegir solamente los dispositivos externos que estén conectados al televisor. En
Fuentes, las entradas conectadas se resaltan y se ordenan en la parte superior. las
entradas que no están conectadas se ordenan en la parte inferior.
N Ext. y PC siempre permanecen activados.
N TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los menús Editar nombre e Información.
❑ Editar nombre
dé un nombre al dispositivo conectado en las tomas de entrada; de esta manera será más fácil seleccionar el dispositivo de
entrada.
Vídeo / DVD / Cable STB / Satélite STB / PVR STB / Receptor AV / Juego / Videocámara / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV /
Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Cuando se conecta un cable HDMI/DVI al puerto HDMI (DVI), se debe establecer el modo HDMI/DVI como DVI o
DVI PC en Editar nombre del modo Entrada. en este caso, se necesita una conexión de sonido independiente.
¦ Configuración del menú de ayuda
❑ Autodiagnóstico
Prueba de imagen
Si cree que tiene un problema con la imagen, efectúe la prueba de imagen. Compruebe el
patrón del color en la pantalla para ver si persiste el problema.
● Sí: Si el patrón de prueba no aparece o si hay ruido en el patrón de prueba, seleccione Sí.
Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el centro de servicio
de Samsung.
● No: Si el patrón de prueba se muestra correctamente, seleccione No. Puede haber un
problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si persiste el problema,
consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo externo.
Prueba de sonido
Si cree que tiene un problema con el sonido, efectúe la prueba de sonido. Compruebe
el sonido reproduciendo una melodía en el televisor. En la pantalla se muestra ‘¿El problema aún existe con esta prueba de
sonido?’.
N Si no oye sonido en los altavoces del televisor, antes de realizar la prueba de sonido, asegúrese de que Seleccionar altavoz
esté configurado como Altavoz de TV en el menú de sonido.
N la melodía se oirá durante la prueba aunque Seleccionar altavoz esté establecido como Altavoz externo o se haya
silenciado el sonido con el botón MUTE.
● Sí: Si durante la prueba de sonido sólo oye sonido desde un altavoz o no oye ningún sonido, seleccione Sí. Puede haber un
problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el centro de servicio de Samsung.
● No: Si oye sonido desde los altavoces, seleccione No. Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las
conexiones. Si persiste el problema, consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo externo.
Información de señal (sólo canales digitales)
A diferencia de los canales analógicos, en los que puede variar la calidad de la recepción desde 'con nieve' hasta nítida, los
canales digitales (HdTv) tienen una calidad de recepción perfecta o no hay recepción. Por ello, a diferencia de los canales
analógicos, no se puede realizar una sintonización fina de un canal digital. Se puede, no obstante, ajustar la antena para mejorar
la recepción de los canales digitales disponibles.
N Si el medidor de la intensidad de la señal indica que ésta es débil, mueva la antena para aumentar la intensidad de la señal.
Siga ajustando la antena hasta que encuentre la mejor posición para recibir la señal más fuerte.
Autodiagnóstico ►
Software superior
Guía de conexión Hd
Contacto con Samsung
Asistencia técnica
Fuentes
editar nombre
entrada
BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 24
❑ Software superior
Para mantener el producto actualizado con las nuevas funciones de la televisión digital
se envían periódicamente actualizaciones de software como parte de la señal normal
de televisión. Automáticamente se detectan estas señales y se muestra una pantalla de
actualización del software. Se presenta la opción de instalar la actualización.
POR USB
Inserte una unidad USB que contenga la actualización del firmware en el televisor. No
desconecte la alimentación ni extraiga la unidad USB mientras se aplican las actualizaciones.
El televisor se apagará y se encenderá automáticamente después de completar la
actualización del firmware. después de realizar la actualización compruebe la versión del
firmware. Cuando se actualiza el software, la configuración de vídeo y audio que se haya
efectuado vuelve a la configuración predeterminada (de fábrica).
Es aconsejable anotar la configuración para recuperarla fácilmente después de la actualización.
Por canal
Actualiza el software a través de una señal de emisión.
N Si selecciona esta función durante la fase de transmisión del software, busca el software disponible y lo descarga.
N el tiempo necesario para la descarga del software lo determina el estado de la señal.
Modo suspensión
Para continuar con la actualización del software con el conmutador de encendido principal activado, actívelo pulsando los
botones ▲ o ▼. 45 minutos después de haber entrado en el modo de suspensión, se inicia automáticamente una actualización
manual. dado que la alimentación de la unidad está activada internamente, la pantalla lCd puede encenderse ligeramente. Este
fenómeno puede durar 1 hora mientras la actualización del software se completa.
Software alternativo
Para mostrar la información de la versión del software.
❑ Guía de conexión HD
Este menú presenta el método de conexión que ofrece una calidad óptima para la televisión de alta definición.
Consulte esta información cuando conecte dispositivos externos al TV.
❑ Contacto con Samsung
Consulte esta información si el televisor no funciona adecuadamente o si desea actualizar el software.
Puede ver la información relacionada con el centro de servicio, el producto y el método de descarga de archivos de software.
Panel posterior del TV
Unidad USB
BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:46Español - 25
RECOMENDACIONES DE USO
¦ Función de teletexto
la mayoría de los canales de televisión proporcionan servicios de información escrita mediante el teletexto. la página de índice
de dicho servicio proporciona información sobre el uso de éste. Asimismo, se pueden seleccionar diversas opciones mediante el
mando a distancia para ajustar el servicio a las necesidades del usuario.
N Para que la información del teletexto se visualice correctamente, la recepción del canal debe ser estable. En caso contrario,
puede perderse información o algunas páginas pueden no visualizarse.
N Puede cambiar páginas de teletexto pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia.
1 0(modo)
Se utiliza para seleccionar el modo
de teletexto (lIST/FlOF). Si lo pulsa
en el modo lIST, cambia al modo de
guardar lista. en dicho modo se puede
guardar la página de teletexto en la lista
mediante el botón 8 (guardar).
2 5(mostrar)
Se usa para mostrar el texto oculto
(respuestas a juegos, por ejemplo).
Púlselo de nuevo para volver a la
presentación normal.
3 4(tamaño)
Se utiliza para mostrar caracteres de
doble tamaño en la parte superior de la
pantalla. Si desea mostrarlos también
en la parte inferior, vuelva a pulsar el
botón. Púlselo de nuevo una vez para
volver a la presentación normal.
4 8(guardar)
Se utiliza para guardar las páginas del
teletexto.
5 Botones de colores (rojo/verde/
amarillo/azul)
Si una emisora utiliza el sistema
FASTeXT, los distintos temas
cubiertos en una página de teletexto
se codificarán en color y podrá
seleccionarlos pulsando los botones
de color. Pulse el correspondiente al
tema deseado. la página muestra otra
información con código de color que se
puede seleccionar de la misma forma.
Pulse el botón del color correspondiente
para ver la página anterior o la
siguiente.
6 /(activar teletexto/mezcla)
Se utiliza para activar el modo de
teletexto tras seleccionar el canal que
proporciona el servicio. Pulse dos veces
para superponer el teletexto a la pantalla
de emisión actual.
7 :(salir)
Sale de la visualización de teletexto.
8 1(página secundaria)
Se utiliza para mostrar la página
secundaria disponible.
9 2(avanzar página)
Se utiliza para mostrar la siguiente
página de teletexto.
0 3(retroceder página)
Se utiliza para mostrar la página anterior
de teletexto.
! 9 (retener)
Se utiliza para retener la presentación
en una página determinada si ésta está
enlazada con varias páginas secundarias
que se muestran automáticamente. Para
reanudar, vuelva a pulsar el botón.
@ 6(índice)
Se utiliza para mostrar la página de
índice (contenido) en cualquier momento
durante la visualización de teletexto.
# 7(cancelar)
Se utiliza para visualizar la emisión
cuando se busca una página.
las páginas de teletexto se organizan en seis categorías:
Parte Contenido
A Número de página seleccionado.
B Identidad del canal.
C Número de página actual o indicaciones de la búsqueda.
D Fecha y hora.
E Texto.
F Información de estado.
Información FASTeXT.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:47Español - 26
N la información de teletexto se suele dividir en varias páginas que aparecen en secuencia y a las que se puede acceder:
– Introduciendo el número de página.
– Seleccionando un título de la lista.
– Seleccionando un encabezado de color (sistema FASTeXT).
N El nivel de teletexto que admite el televisor es la versión 2.5, capaz de mostrar texto o gráficos adicionales.
N Según la transmisión, puede haber paneles laterales en blanco al mostrar el teletexto.
N En estos casos, el texto o los gráficos adicionales no se transmiten.
N los televisores más antiguos que no admiten la versión 2.5 no son capaces de mostrar texto o gráficos adicionales,
independientemente de la transmisión de teletexto.
O Pulse el botón TV para salir de la visualización de teletexto.
N Con el teletexto 16:9, la imagen es 16:9
¦ Cómo ajustar el soporte (sólo para el modelo de 19 pulgadas)
1. Coloque el televisor encima de una mesa con el frontal apoyado sobre un paño suave o un cojín como se muestra en la
ilustración 1.
– Alinee la parte inferior del televisor con el borde de la mesa.
2. Presione sobre el centro de la parte posterior del televisor. Ajuste el soporte como se muestra en la ilustración 2, mientras
presiona el botón de la parte posterior del soporte.
3. Coloque el televisor sobre la mesa de modo que se asiente con seguridad sobre ésta.
¦ Cómo ajustar el ángulo del televisor (sólo el modelo de 19 pulgadas)
N Para ajustar el soporte, presione el botón de la parte posterior del soporte.
1. la figura 1 muestra el ángulo de ajuste (-2°~14°) cuando se utiliza el lCd sobre el soporte.
N Una inclinación excesiva podría provocar la caída del Tv lCd y dañarlo.
2. la figura 2 muestra el ángulo de ajuste (14°~80°) cuando se pasa de un sistema de uso del lCd basado en un soporte al
montaje mural.
3. la figura 3 muestra el ángulo de ajuste (0°~10°) cuando se monta el Tv lCd en una pared.
N Oirá un “clic” cuando se cambia el ángulo de 1 a 2 y de 3 a 2.
1 2
1 Ajuste del ángulo cuando se
usa el televisor en el soporte.
2 Ajuste del ángulo cuando se
pasa de soporte al montaje mural
(1→3, 3→1)
3 Ajuste del ángulo cuando el TV
LCD se monta en la pared.
BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:47Español - 27
¦ Instalación de dispositivos de montaje que cumplen las normas VESA (sólo el modelo de 19 pulgadas)
1. Coloque el televisor cara abajo sobre un paño suave o un cojín encima de una mesa.
2. Ajuste el soporte presionando el botón de la parte posterior del soporte.
3. Alinee la protección de la interfaz de montaje (no suministrada) con los orificios de la parte inferior del soporte y asegúrela
con cuatro tornillos en la base de tipo brazo, soporte de montaje mural u otros tipos de bases (no suministrados).
¦ Uso de las cubiertas decorativas (sólo para el modelo de 19 pulgadas)
1. Cuando instale el televisor en la pared sin utilizar el soporte, inserte las cubiertas decorativas en los orificios, como se
muestra en la ilustración 1.
2. después de insertar las cubiertas decorativas, asegúrelas con 4 tornillos como se muestra en la ilustración 2.
1 2
Botón
Protección de montaje
(se vende por separado)
1 2
BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:48Español - 28
¦ Instalación del soporte
1. Monte el TV de pantalla lCD en el soporte.
N Se necesitan dos o más personas para trasladar el televisor.
N Para realizar el montaje debe tener en cuenta cuál es la parte frontal y cuál la
posterior del soporte.
N Para asegurar que el televisor esté instalado sobre el soporte al nivel adecuado, no
ejerza una excesiva presión sobre la parte superior del lateral izquierdo o derecho del
televisor.
2. Atornille dos tornillos en la posición 1 y otros dos en la posición2.
N levante el producto y apriete los tornillos. Si aprieta los tornillos sin levantar el
televisor, éste puede inclinarse hacia uno de los lados.
¦ Instalación del equipo de montaje en la pared
los elementos del montaje en la pared (se venden por separado) permiten instalar el
televisor en una pared.
Si desea más información sobre la instalación de los componentes para montaje en la pared,
consulte las instrucciones que se facilitan con dichos elementos. Si necesita ayuda con la
instalación del soporte mural, póngase en contacto con un técnico.
Samsung electronics no se hace responsable de los daños causados al producto o al usuario
si éste ha efectuado la instalación del televisor.
No instale el equipo de montaje mural mientras el televisor está encendido. Se podría
producir una descarga eléctrica con riesgo de causar lesiones personales.
¦ Uso del bloqueo Kensington antirrobos
El bloqueo Kensington es un dispositivo que se utiliza para fijar
físicamente el sistema cuando se utiliza en un sitio público. El aspecto
y el método de bloqueo pueden ser diferentes a los que se muestran
en la ilustración según el fabricante. Consulte el manual proporcionado
con el bloqueo Kensington para utilizarlo correctamente.
N Busque el icono “K” en la parte posterior del televisor. Junto al icono “K” hay una
ranura Kensington.
Siga estos pasos para bloquear el producto:
1. Enrolle el cable del bloqueo Kensington en un objeto estático voluminoso, como una
mesa o una silla.
2. Deslice el extremo del cable que tiene el cierre a través del extremo enrollado del cable
de bloqueo Kensington.
3. Inserte el dispositivo de bloqueo en la ranura Kensington del producto (1).
4. Cierre el bloqueo.
N Estas instrucciones son de carácter general. Para obtener instrucciones más exactas,
consulte el manual del usuario proporcionado con el dispositivo de bloqueo.
N el dispositivo de bloqueo debe adquirirse por separado.
N la ubicación del bloqueo Kensington puede variar según los modelos.
1
BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:49Español - 29
¦ Seguridad en el espacio de instalación
Mantenga la distancia requerida entre el producto y otros objetos (por ejemplo, paredes) para asegurar la ventilación adecuada.
En caso contrario, se podría producir un incendio por un incremento de la temperatura interna del producto.
Instale el producto a la distancia requerida como se muestra en la ilustración.
N Cuando utilice un soporte o un montaje mural, use sólo las piezas proporcionadas por Samsung electronics.
Ҟ Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría caer con
el riesgo de cuasar lesiones personales.
Ҟ Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría incendiar
por el incremento de la temperatura interior debido a una mala ventilación.
N El aspecto puede variar según el producto.
Instalación del producto sobre un soporte Instalación del producto en un montaje mural
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦ Fijación del televisor a la pared
Precaución: Tirar del televisor, empujarlo o colgarse de él puede provocar su caída. En especial, procure que los
niños no se cuelguen del televisor ni lo desestabilicen; éste podría caerse sobre ellos y causarles lesiones graves
o incluso la muerte. Siga las precauciones de seguridad del folleto de seguridad incluido con el producto. Para
mejorar la estabilidad instale un dispositivo antivuelco, como se explica a continuación.
Para impedir que el televisor se caiga:
1. Apriete firmemente las grapas sobre la pared con los tornillos. Asegúrese de que los
tornillos estén bien afirmados en la pared.
N Según el tipo de pared quizás necesite algún material adicional para el anclaje.
N las grapas, los tornillos y la cadena no se suministran con el producto; deberá
adquirirlos por separado.
2. Quite los tornillos de la parte central posterior del televisor y con ellos monte las grapas
en el televisor.
N Quizás con el televisor no vayan incluidos los tornillos. En tal caso debe adquirirlos
por separado con estas especificaciones.
N Especificaciones de los tornillos
– Televisores lCd de 17-29 pulgadas: M4 x l15
– Televisores lCd de 32-40 pulgadas: M6 x l15
3. Monte una cadena fuerte entre las grapas del televisor y de la pared de manera que
quede bien tensada.
N Instale el televisor cerca de la pared para evitar que caiga hacia atrás.
N las grapas de la pared han de estar a la misma o a menor altura que las grapas
del televisor.
N Cuando desee mover el televisor deberá aflojar la cadena.
4. Compruebe que todas las conexiones estén bien aseguradas. Compruébelas
periódicamente para detectar cualquier signo de fatiga o de fallo. Si tiene dudas sobre
la seguridad de la instalación, póngase en contacto con un instalador profesional.
Pared
Pared
BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:49Español - 30
¦ Solución de problemas
Si tiene algún problema con el televisor, consulte esta lista en primer lugar. Si ninguno de los consejos funciona, visite ‘www.
samsung.com’ y haga clic en Support o llame al centro de atención al cliente que encontrará en la lista de la última página.
Problema Solución
Calidad de la imagen
en primer lugar, ejecute Prueba de imagen para confirmar que el televisor muestra
correctamente la imagen de prueba.
● Vaya a MENU - Asistencia técnica - Autodiagnóstico - Prueba de imagen
Si la imagen de la prueba se muestra correctamente, la imagen deficiente puede provenir
de la fuente o la señal.
la imagen del televisor no se ve
tan bien como en la tienda.
● Si tiene un receptor de cable/decodificador analógico, cambie a un decodificador. Utilice
cables HDMI o de componentes para conseguir la mejor calidad de imagen de alta definición.
● Suscriptor de cable/satélite: Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (Hd) de la oferta
de canales.
● Conexión de antena: Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (Hd) después de ejecutar
la programación automática.
N Muchos canales de alta definición (Hd) mejoran los contenidos Sd (definición estándar).
● Ajuste la resolución de la salida de vídeo del receptor de cable/decodificador en 1080i o 720p.
● Compruebe que está viendo la televisión a la distancia mínima recomendada según el
tamaño y la definición de la señal que está visualizando.
la imagen se ve distorsionada:
macrobloques, microbloques,
puntos, pixelización
● la compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas
especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las
películas de acción.
● Un nivel de señal débil o de mala calidad puede causar imágenes distorsionadas.
No es un problema del televisor.
● los teléfonos móviles que se utilizan cerca del televisor (aproximadamente a 1 metro)
pueden causar interferencias en la imagen del televisor digital y analógico.
Color de mala calidad o no
hay color en la conexión de
componentes.
● Compruebe que los cables de los componentes estén conectados en los terminales
correctos. las conexiones incorrectas o sueltas pueden originar problemas en el color
o que la pantalla se quede en blanco.
Color o brillo de mala calidad. ● Ajuste las opciones de Imagen en el menú del Tv (modo Imagen, Color, Brillo,
Nitidez)
● Ajuste la opción Ahorro energía en el menú Configuración.
● Intente reiniciar la imagen para ver la configuración de imagen predeterminada. (Vaya
a MENU - Imagen - Reinicio de la imagen)
línea de puntos en el borde la
pantalla.
● Si el tamaño de la imagen está establecido en Ajuste pantalla, cámbielo a 16:9.
● Cambie la resolución del receptor de cable/decodificador.
la imagen se ve sólo en blanco y
negro en la entrada AV (compuesto).
● Conecte el cable de vídeo (amarillo) en el terminal verde de la entrada 1 de
componentes del televisor.
Imágenes congeladas o
distorsionadas al cambiar de canal o
retraso en la aparición de la imagen.
● Si se ha conectado un decodificador de cable, intente reiniciarlo. (Vuelva a conectar el cable
de alimentación y espere a que el decodificador se reinicie. Puede tardar hasta 20 minutos.)
● establezca la resolución de salida del decodificador de cable en 1080i o 720p.
Calidad del sonido
en primer lugar, ejecute Prueba de sonido para confirmar que el audio del televisor
funciona correctamente.
● Vaya a MENU - Asistencia técnica - Autodiagnóstico - Prueba de sonido
Si el audio es correcto, el problema del sonido puede provenir de la fuente o la señal.
No se percibe ningún sonido, o muy
bajo, con el volumen al máximo.
● Compruebe el volumen del dispositivo externo conectado al televisor y ajuste el
volumen del televisor según sea más conveniente.
la imagen es buena pero no hay
sonido.
● establezca la opción Seleccionar altavoz en Altavoz de TV en el menú de sonido.
● Compruebe que los cables de audio del dispositivo externo estén conectados a los
terminales de entrada de audio correctos del televisor.
● Compruebe la opción de salida de audio del dispositivo conectado. (Por ejemplo,
quizás deba cambiar la opción de audio del decodificador de cable a HdMI si tiene
conectado HDMI al televisor.)
● Si se utiliza un cable DVI a HDMI, se necesita un cable de audio independiente.
● Desactive la función SrS si va a ajustar el volumen a un valor superior a 30.
● Desconecte el terminal de los auriculares (si es posible en su televisor)
Se oye ruido en el altavoz. ● Compruebe las conexiones de los cables Compruebe que el cable de vídeo no esté
conectado en una entrada de audio.
● en la conexión de antena/cable, compruebe la intensidad de la señal. Un nivel de
señal débil puede causar sonido distorsionado.
BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:50Español - 31
Problema Solución
No hay imagen, ni vídeo
el televisor no se enciende. ● Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared
y en el televisor.
● Compruebe que la toma de la pared funciona.
● Pulse el botón POWER del televisor para asegurarse de que el mando a distancia
funciona adecuadamente. Si el televisor se enciende, puede ser debido al mando a
distancia. Para solucionar el problema del mando a distancia, consulte 'El mando a
distancia no funciona' a continuación.
el televisor se apaga
automáticamente.
● Compruebe si Temp. de desc. está establecido como Act. en el menú
Configuración.
● Si el televisor está conectado a un PC, compruebe la configuración de la alimentación
de éste.
● Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared
y en el televisor.
● Si no hay señal durante unos de 10~15 minutos en la conexión de antena/cable, el
televisor se apagará.
No hay imagen/vídeo. ● Compruebe las conexiones de los cables (desconecte y vuelva a conectar todos los
cables del televisor y de los dispositivos externos).
● Establezca la salida de vídeo de los dispositivos externos (receptor de cable/
decodificador, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) de modo que coincida con las conexiones de la
entrada de Tv. Por ejemplo, salida del dispositivo externo: HdMI, entrada del Tv:
HDMI.
● Compruebe que el dispositivo externo esté encendido.
● Asegúrese de seleccionar la fuente correcta del Tv pulsando el botón SOURCE del
mando a distancia del televisor.
Conexión rF (cable/antena)
No se reciben todos los canales. ● Compruebe que el cable de antena esté firmemente conectado.
● ejecute Plug & Play para añadir los canales disponibles a la lista de canales. Vaya
a MENU - Configuración - Plug & Play y espere hasta que se guarden todos los
canales disponibles.
● Compruebe la posición de la antena.
la imagen se ve distorsionada:
macrobloques, microbloques,
puntos, pixelización
● la compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas
especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las
películas de acción.
● Un nivel de señal débil puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No es un problema del
televisor.
Conexión del PC
Mensaje ‘Modo no compatible’. ● Establezca la frecuencia y la resolución de salida del PC de modo que coincida con la
resolución admitida por el televisor.
El PC siempre aparece en la
lista de fuentes aunque no esté
conectado.
● Esto es normal; el PC siempre aparece en la lista de fuentes aunque no esté
conectado.
El vídeo es correcto pero no se
oye el audio con una conexión
HDMI.
● Compruebe la configuración de la salida de audio del PC.
BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:50Español - 32
Problema Solución
Otros
la imagen no se muestra en
pantalla completa.
● en cada lado se muestran barras negras en los canales de alta definición cuando se
muestran contenidos Sd mejorados (4:3).
● Barras negras en las partes inferior y superior cuando se ven películas que tienen
diferentes formatos que el televisor.
● Ajuste la opción del tamaño de imagen del dispositivo externo o del televisor al modo
de pantalla completa.
el mando a distancia no funciona. ● Sustituya la pilas del mando a distancia con la polaridad correcta (+ -).
● limpie la ventana de transmisión que se encuentra en la parte superior del mando a
distancia.
● Apunte con el mando a distancia directamente al televisor desde una distancia de 1,5
-2 metros.
No se puede controlar la
alimentación o el volumen
del televisor con el mando a
distancia del receptor de cable/
decodificador.
● Programe el mando a distancia del receptor de cable/decodificador para que haga
funcionar el televisor. Consulte el manual del decodificador de cable/satélite para
conocer el código del TV SAMSUNG.
Mensaje ‘Modo no compatible’. ● Compruebe la resolución admitida del televisor y ajuste consecuentemente la
resolución de salida del dispositivo externo. Consulte la configuración de la resolución
en este manual.
Olor a plástico en el televisor. ● este olor es normal y desaparece con el tiempo.
la Información de señal del
televisor no está disponible
en el menú de prueba de
autodiagnóstico.
● Esta función sólo está disponible en los canales digitales con las conexiones de
antena (rF/coaxial).
El televisor está inclinado hacia la
izquierda o hacia la derecha.
● retire la base del soporte de televisor y vuelva a montarla.
No se puede montar la base del
soporte.
● Compruebe que el televisor esté instalado sobre una superficie plana. Si no puede
quitar los tornillos del televisor, utilice un destornillador magnetizado.
El menú del canal se ve de color
gris (no disponible).
● El menú Canal sólo está disponible cuando está seleccionada la fuente Tv.
la configuración se pierde
después de 30 minutos o cada
vez que se apaga el televisor.
● Si el televisor está en el modo Demo tienda, la configuración del audio y la imagen
se restablecerá cada 30 minutos. debe cambiar el modo Demo tienda al modo
Uso doméstico en el procedimiento Plug & Play. Pulse el botón SOURCE para
seleccionar TV, vaya a MENU → Configuración → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
Pérdida intermitente del audio o
del vídeo.
● Compruebe las conexiones de los cables y vuelva a conectarlos.
● Se puede deber a que los cables son demasiado rígidos o gruesos. debe asegurarse
de que los cables sean lo suficientemente flexibles para un largo periodo de uso. en
un montaje mural, es aconsejable utilizar cables con conectores de 90 grados.
Puede ver pequeñas partículas si
mira de cerca el borde biselado
de la pantalla del televisor.
● esto es una particularidad del diseño del producto y no es un defecto.
‘Señal codificada’ o
‘Sin señal/Señal débil’ con
TArjeTA (CI) en CAM.
● Compruebe que el CAM tenga la tarjeta CI instalada en la ranura para interfaz común.
● retire el CAM del televisor e insértelo de nuevo en la ranura.
el televisor se enciende por su
cuenta cuando lleva 45 minutos
apagado.
● Esto es normal, ya que el televisor ejecuta la función OTA (en el aire) por sí solo a fin
de actualizar el firmware descargado mientras se veía la televisión.
Problema de imagen/sonido
recurrente.
● Compruebe y cambie la señal/fuente.
N El panel lCd TFT utiliza un panel que consta de píxeles de ínfimo tamaño que requieren de una tecnología altamente
sofisticada para su fabricación. No obstante, puede que existan unos cuantos píxeles brillantes u oscuros en la pantalla.
Estos píxeles no influirán en el rendimiento del aparato.
BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:50Español - 33
¦ Especificaciones
Nombre del modelo LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431
Tamaño de pantalla
(Diagonal) 19 pulg 22 pulg
Resolución de PC
(Óptima) 1360 x 768 a 60Hz 1360 x 768 a 60Hz
Sonido
(Salida) 3W X 2 3W X 2
Dimensiones (AnxPrxAl)
Cuerpo principal
Con el soporte
477 x 65 x 327 mm
477 x 180 x 362 mm
558 x 75 x 384 mm
558 x 216 x 426 mm
Peso
Con el soporte 5 kg 7 kg
Consideraciones medioambientales
Temperatura de funcionamiento
Humedad de funcionamiento
Temperatura de almacenamiento
Humedad de almacenamiento
10 °C a 40 °C (50 °F a 104 °F)
10% al 80%, sin condensación
-20 °C a 45 °C (-4 °F a 113 °F)
5% al 95%, sin condensación
Soporte giratorio
izquierda/derecha 0˚
N El diseño y las especificaciones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso.
N este dispositivo es un aparato digital de la Clase B.
N Para conocer la fuente de alimentación y el consumo de energía, consulte la etiqueta adherida al producto.
BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:50As imagens e ilustrações neste manual do utilizador servem apenas de referência e podem ser diferentes do produto real.
O design e as especificações do produto podem ser alterados sem aviso prévio.
❑ Licença
TruSurround HD, SrS e símbolo são marcas comerciais da SrS labs, Inc. A tecnologia
TruSurround HD está incorporada na licença da SrS labs, Inc.
Fabricado sob a licença da dolby laboratories. dolby e o símbolo de duplo d são marcas comerciais da
Dolby laboratories.
❑ Aviso sobre a televisão digital
1. As funcionalidades relacionadas com a televisão digital (dvB) apenas estão disponíveis em países/áreas onde os sinais
digitais terrestres dvB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AvC) sejam transmitidos, ou onde consiga aceder a um serviço de televisão por
cabo compatível com dvB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC). Confirme com o seu representante local a possibilidade de receber
sinal DVB-T ou DVB-C.
2. DVB-T é a norma de consórcio europeia DVB para a transmissão de televisão digital terrestre e DVB-C é a norma para a
transmissão de televisão digital por cabo. Existem, contudo, algumas funções diferenciadas como o EPG (Guia electrónico de
programação), vOd (vídeo a pedido), entre outras, que não estão incluídas nesta especificação. Por esse motivo, não são
suportadas de momento.
3. Embora este televisor cumpra as mais recentes normas dvB-T e dvB-C [Agosto de 2008], não é possível garantir a
compatibilidade com as futuras transmissões digitais terrestres DVB-T e transmissões digitais por cabo DVB-C.
4. dependendo do país/área onde este televisor é utilizado, alguns fornecedores de televisão por cabo podem cobrar uma taxa
adicional por esses serviços e poderá ser necessário concordar com os termos e condições dos seus negócios.
5. Algumas funções da televisão digital podem estar indisponíveis em alguns países ou regiões e o dvB-C poderá não funcionar
correctamente com alguns fornecedores de serviços por cabo.
6. Para mais informações, contacte o centro local de assistência ao cliente da SAMSUNG.
❑ Precauções a ter ao ver imagens fixas
Uma imagem fixa pode danificar permanentemente o ecrã do televisor
● Uma imagem fixa e parcialmente fixa não deve permanecer no painel lCd durante mais do que 2 horas pois pode provocar
uma retenção de imagem no ecrã. Esta retenção de imagem também é conhecida como “queimadura de ecrã”. Para evitar a
retenção de imagem, diminua o grau de brilho e de contraste do ecrã ao visualizar uma imagem fixa.
● A utilização do televisor lCd no formato 4:3 durante um longo período de tempo pode deixar vestígios de
margens na parte esquerda, direita e central do ecrã, devido a diferenças de emissão de luz. reproduzir um
dvd ou ligar uma consola de jogos pode causar efeitos semelhantes no ecrã. Os danos causados pelo
efeito acima mencionado não são cobertos pela garantia.
● A visualização de imagens fixas de jogos de vídeo ou de PC durante um longo período de tempo pode produzir pós-imagens
parciais. Para evitar este efeito, reduza o ‘brilho’ e o ‘contraste’ quando visualizar imagens fixas.
© 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. Todos os direitos reservados.
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:51Português - 1
❑ Símbolo
N O T
Nota Tecla rápida Botão TOOlS Carregue
INFORMAÇÃO GERAL
■ Apresentação do painel de controlo.....................................2
■ Acessórios............................................................................3
■ Apresentação do painel de ligação ......................................4
■ Telecomando ........................................................................6
■ Colocar pilhas no telecomando ............................................6
FUNCIONAMENTO
■ Aceder aos menus................................................................7
■ definir o televisor para modo de espera...............................8
■ Função Plug & Play..............................................................8
■ Visualização no ecrã ............................................................9
CONTROLO DOS CANAIS
■ Configurar o menu Canais....................................................9
■ Gerir canais .......................................................................12
CONTROLO DA IMAGEM
■ Configurar o menu Imagem................................................14
■ Utilizar o televisor como monitor de computador (PC).......16
■ Configurar o televisor com o PC.........................................17
CONTROLO DO SOM
■ Configurar o menu Som .....................................................18
■ Seleccionar o modo de Som ..............................................19
CONFIGURAÇÃO
■ definir o menu Configurar ..................................................20
ENTRADA / SUPORTE
■ Configurar o menu de Entrada ...........................................23
■ Configurar o menu Suporte ................................................23
RECOMENDAÇÕES PARA A UTILIZAÇÃO
■ Funcionalidade de teletexto................................................25
■ Como ajustar a base (apenas para os modelos de 19 polegadas)....26
■ Como ajustar o ângulo do televisor
(apenas para os modelos de 19 polegadas)......................26
■ Instalar Dispositivos de Montagem de acordo com os
padrões vESA (apenas para modelos de 19 polegadas)...27
■ Utilizar as tampas decorativas
(apenas para modelos de 19 polegadas)...........................27
■ Instalar a base....................................................................28
■ Instalar o kit de montagem na parede................................28
■ Utilizar o Bloqueio anti-roubo Kensington ..........................28
■ Manter um espaço de instalação seguro............................29
■ Fixar o televisor à parede...................................................29
■ resolução de problemas....................................................30
■ Características técnicas .....................................................33
CONTEúDO
Português
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:51Português - 2
INFORMAÇÃO GERAL
¦ Apresentação do painel de controlo
N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo.
N Pode utilizar um botão, carregando num dos botões do painel lateral.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCE E: alterna entre todas as fontes de entrada disponíveis. No menu no ecrã, utilize este botão tal como utiliza o
botão ENTERE do telecomando.
2 MENU: carregue para ver o menu das funções do televisor no ecrã.
3Y: carregue para aumentar ou diminuir o volume.
No menu no ecrã, utilize os botões Y tal como utiliza os botões ◄ e ► do telecomando.
4Z: carregue para mudar de canal. No menu no ecrã, utilize os botões Z tal como utiliza os botões
▼ e ▲ do telecomando.
5 P (Ligar/Desligar): Carregue para ligar e desligar o televisor.
6 SENSOR DO TELECOMANDO: aponte o telecomando para este ponto no televisor.
7 INDICADOR DE CORRENTE: pisca e apaga-se quando o aparelho está ligado, e acende-se quando está no modo de
espera.
8 ALTIFALANTES
BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:51Português - 3
¦ Acessórios
Telecomando e pilhas
(2 pilhas AAA)
Cabo de alimentação
Tampa da parte inferior
(apenas nos modelos de 22
polegadas)
Pano de limpeza
(M4 X l16)
Kit de montagem na parede
(apenas nos modelos de 19 polegadas)
Tampa decorativa
(apenas nos modelos de 19 polegadas)
4 parafusos para a base
(apenas nos modelos de 22 polegadas)
● Owner’s Instructions ● Warranty card ● Safety Guide
N verifique se os seguintes acessórios estão incluídos no televisor lCd. Se faltar algum dos acessórios, contacte o revendedor.
N Cartão de garantia / Manual de segurança (não estão disponíveis em todos os locais)
N A cor e a forma dos acessórios podem variar consoante o modelo.
BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:52Português - 4
¦ Apresentação do painel de ligação
N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo.
N Antes de ligar um dispositivo externo ao televisor, este tem de estar desligado.
N Quando ligar um dispositivo externo, faça a correspondência de cores entre o terminal e o respectivo cabo.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
– estabelece a ligação com um componente de Áudio Digital, tal como um receptor Home theatre.
N Quando as tomadas HdMI IN estiverem ligadas, a tomada DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) do televisor disponibiliza
apenas som de 2 canais. Se quiser ouvir áudio de 5.1 canais, ligue a tomada Óptica ao leitor de dvd / Blu-ray ou da box
de Televisão por cabo/ Satélite directamente a um Amplificador ou Home Theatre e não ao televisor.
2 SERVICE
– Conector para actualizações de software.
3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC]
– Estabelece a ligação à tomada HdMI de um dispositivo com uma saída HdMI.
N Não é necessária nenhuma ligação Áudio adicional para uma ligação HdMI a HdMI.
N O que é HdMI?
HdMI (High-definition Multimedia Interface - Interface multimédia de alta definição) é uma interface que permite a
transmissão de sinais de áudio e vídeo digital através de um único cabo.
HdMI e dvI diferem pois o dispositivo HdMI é mais pequeno, tem a função de codificação HdCP (High Bandwidth digital
Copy Protection - Protecção de banda larga para conteúdos digitais) instalada e suporta som digital multi-canal.
N Utilize a tomada HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] para a ligação DVI a um dispositivo externo. Utilize um cabo DVI para HDMI
ou um adaptador de dvI-HdMI (dvI para HdMI) para uma ligação de vídeo e as tomadas HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] para
áudio. Quando utilizar uma ligação de cabo HdMI / dvI, tem de utilizar a tomada HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)].
HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO]
– ligar à tomada de saída de áudio no PC.
– Saídas de áudio dvI para dispositivos externos.
HDMI / PC IN [PC]
– ligar à tomada de saída de áudio e de vídeo no PC.
N Se o seu PC suportar uma ligação HdMI, pode ligar ao terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)].
N Se o seu PC suportar uma ligação HdMI, pode ligar ao terminal HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO].
4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
– ligar um cabo rCA a um dispositivo de A/V externo adequado, como por exemplo, um videogravador, um leitor de DVD
ou uma câmara de vídeo.
– ligar os cabos de áudio rCA a [R-AUDIO-L] no televisor e as outras extremidades aos conectores de saída de áudio
correspondentes no dispositivo A/V.
6
7
1 2 3 4
0 9 8
5
[Painel posterior do televisor]
Entrada de
energia
BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:53Português - 5
5 ANT IN
– estabelece a ligação com uma antena ou sistema de televisão por cabo.
6 ranhura COMMON INTERFACE
– Ao não introduzir o "CI CArd" em determinados canais, a mensagem "Sinal codificado" é apresentada no ecrã.
– As informações de associação incluindo um número de telefone, Id do CI CArd, Id do anfitrião e outras informações
são apresentadas cerca de 2 a 3 minutos depois. Se for apresentada uma mensagem de erro, contacte o seu fornecedor
de serviços.
– Assim que concluir a configuração das informações dos canais, a mensagem "Actualização concluída" é apresentada,
indicando que a lista de canais já está actualizada.
N Tem de solicitar um CI CArD ao fornecedor de serviços por cabo local. retire o CI CArD puxando-o com cuidado para
não o deixar cair e danificá-lo.
N Introduza o CI Card na direcção indicada.
N A localização da ranhura COMMON INTERFACE pode ser diferente consoante o modelo.
N Uma vez que CAM não é suportado nalguns países e regiões, verifique esta situação junto do seu revendedor
autorizado.
7 DISPOSITIVO DE BLOQUEIO KENSINGTON (consoante o modelo)
– O dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington (opcional) serve para fixar fisicamente o sistema quando utilizado em locais
públicos. Se quiser utilizar um dispositivo de bloqueio, contacte o revendedor onde adquiriu o televisor.
N A localização do dispositivo de Bloqueio Kensington pode ser diferente consoante o modelo.
8 Tomada de auscultadores
– Pode ligar auscultadores à saída de auscultadores no seu equipamento. Quando os auscultadores estão ligados, o som
dos altifalantes incorporados é desactivado.
9 COMPONENT IN
– ligar os cabos de vídeo de componente (opcionais) ao conector de componente (PR, PB, Y) na parte de trás do televisor,
e as outras extremidades aos conectores correspondentes de saída de vídeo no dTv ou no leitor de dvd.
– Para ligar o Set-Top Box e o dTv (ou o leitor de dvd), deve ligar o Set-Top Box ao dTv (ou ao leitor de dvd) e o dTv
(ou o leitor de dvd) ao conector de componente (PR, PB, Y) no televisor.
– Os conectores PR, PB e Y dos dispositivos para componentes (dTv ou leitor de dvd) são por vezes identificados como Y,
B-Y e r-Y ou Y, Cb e Cr.
– ligar os cabos de áudio rCA (opcionais) a [R-AUDIO-L] na parte de trás do televisor, e as outras extremidades aos
conectores correspondentes de saída de áudio no dTv ou no leitor de dvd.
0 EXT (RGB)
Conector
entrada Saída
vídeo Áudio (e / D) rGB vídeo + Áudio (E / d)
EXT O O O Apenas está disponível a saída Tv ou dTv.
– Entradas ou saídas para dispositivos externos, tais como videogravadores, consolas de jogos ou leitores de dvd.
BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:53Português - 6
¦ Telecomando
N Pode utilizar o telecomando até aproximadamente 7 metros de distância do televisor.
N O funcionamento do telecomando pode ser afectado por luzes fortes.
N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo.
1 POWER : botão Standby do
televisor.
2 BOTÕES NUMÉRICOS : carregue
para mudar de canal.
3 FAV.CH : Utilizado para mostrar a
lista de canais favoritos no ecrã.
4Y : carregue para aumentar
ou diminuir o volume.
5 SOURCE : carregue para
seleccionar as fontes de vídeo
disponíveis.
6 INFO : carregue para apresentar
informações no ecrã do televisor.
7 TOOLS : utilize para seleccionar
funções frequentemente utilizadas.
8 CH LIST : apresenta a lista de
canais no ecrã
9 BOTÕES COLORIDOS : utilize nos
menus da Lista canais, etc.
! TV : selecciona o modo Tv
directamente.
@ PRE-CH : permite-lhe regressar ao
canal estava a ver anteriormente.
# MUTEM: carregue para tirar o som
ao televisor.
$ P : carregue para mudar
de canal.
% MENU : apresenta o menu principal
no ecrã.
^ GUIDE : visualização do Guia de
programação electrónico (EPG)
& RETURN : volta ao menu anterior
* PARA CIMA▲ / PARA BAIXO▼ /
ESQUERDA◄ / DIREITA► / ENTERE
: utilize para seleccionar as opções de
menu no ecrã e alterar os respectivos
valores.
( EXIT : carregue para sair do menu.
) SUBT. : visualização de legendas
digitais
a AD : Selecção da descrição áudio.
Funções de teletexto
5 0 : selecção do modo de Teletexto
(lIST / FlOF)
6 5 : mostrar teletexto
7 4 : selecção de tamanho de teletexto
8 8 : memorizar teletexto
9 Selecção de tópicos Fastext
0/ : seleccionar alternadamente
Teletexto, Dobragem, ou Sobreposto.
! :: sair da visualização de teletexto
@ 1 : página secundária de teletexto
$ 2 : página seguinte do teletexto
3 : página anterior do teletexto
% 6 : índice do teletexto
& 9 : modo de espera de teletexto
( 7 : cancelar teletexto
¦ Colocar pilhas no telecomando
1. levante a tampa na parte de trás do telecomando tal como apresentado na figura.
2. Coloque duas pilhas de tamanho AAA.
N Faça corresponder os pólos ‘+’ e ‘–’ das pilhas com o diagrama existente no
compartimento.
3. Volte a colocar a tampa.
N Se não tencionar utilizar o telecomando durante muito tempo, retire as pilhas e guardeas num local fresco e seco.
N Se o telecomando não funcionar, verifique os itens abaixo:
● O televisor está ligado?
● Os pólos + e - das pilhas estão invertidos?
● As pilhas estão gastas?
● Houve um corte de energia ou o cabo de alimentação está desligado?
● Há alguma lâmpada fluorescente especial ou luz de néon por perto?
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:53Português - 7
FUNCIONAMENTO
¦ Aceder aos menus
Antes de utilizar o televisor, siga os passos seguintes para saber como navegar no menu e
seleccionar ou ajustar diferentes funções.
1. Carregue no botão MENU.
O menu principal aparece no ecrã. No lado esquerdo estão alguns ícones: Imagem, Som,
Canal, Configurar, Entrada., Aplicação, Assistência.
2. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dos ícones.
Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para aceder aos ícones do menu secundário.
3. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para percorrer as opções do menu.
Carregue no botão ENTERE para introduzir opções no menu.
4. Carregue nos botões ▲/▼/◄/► para alterar as opções seleccionadas.
N Carregue no botão RETURN para voltar ao menu anterior.
5. Carregue no botão EXIT para sair do menu.
Utilizar os botões do telecomando
Botão Acção Botão Acção
MENUm Mostrar o menu principal no ecrã.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Movimentar o cursor e seleccionar uma
opção.
Seleccionar a opção actualmente
seleccionada.
Confirmar a definição.
RUTURNR Voltar ao menu anterior.
EXITe Sair do menu no ecrã.
Exemplo: Definir o brilho do televisor no menu Imagem
Ajustar o brilho para 80
1. Carregue no botão MENU para visualizar o menu.
2. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Imagem.
3. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Brilho.
4. Carregue no botão ENTERE.
5. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► até o nível de brilho ser 80.
6. Carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Carregue no botão EXIT para sair do menu.
Modo : Standard ►
retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50
Imagem
Modo : Standard ►
retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50
Imagem
retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45 ►
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50
definições avançadas
Opções de imagem
reposição de imagem
Imagem
U Mover L Ajustar E enter R Voltar
Brilho 45
U Mover L Ajustar E enter R Voltar
Brilho 80
Modo : Standard ►
retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50
Imagem
BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:54Português - 8
¦ Definir o televisor para modo de espera
Pode definir o seu televisor para o modo de espera, para reduzir o consumo de energia. O modo de espera é útil quando precisa
e interromper a visualização temporariamente (por exemplo, durante a refeição).
1. Carregue no botão POWERP no telecomando.
N O ecrã apaga-se e aparece o indicador luminoso do modo de espera no televisor.
2. Para voltar a ligar o televisor, basta carregar no botão POWERP novamente.
N Não deixe o televisor em modo de espera durante longos períodos de tempo (por exemplo, quando vai de férias).
Aconselha-se que desligue o televisor da corrente eléctrica e da antena.
¦ Função Plug & Play
Quando ligar o televisor pela primeira vez, as definições básicas são utilizadas de forma
automática e subsequente.
1. Carregue no botão POWER no telecomando. Aparece a mensagem You can set the
menu language..
2. Seleccione o idioma apropriado carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão
ENTERE para confirmar a escolha.
3. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Demo Loja ou Uso Doméstico e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
N recomendamos a configuração do televisor para o modo Uso Doméstico de modo a usufruir da melhor imagem em sua
casa.
N Demo Loja destina-se apenas para locais de venda a retalho.
N Se o televisor for acidentalmente configurado para o modo Demo Loja e quiser voltar ao modo Uso Doméstico
(Standard): carregue no botão de volume no televisor. Quando aparecer o OSd de volume, carregue sem largar o botão
MENU no televisor durante 5 segundos.
4. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Seleccione o país apropriado carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão ENTERE
para confirmar a escolha.
5. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Antena ou Cabo e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
N Antena: Sinal de Antena.
Cabo: Sinal de Cabo.
6. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a fonte do canal a memorizar. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar
Iniciar.
N Digital e Analógico: canais digitais e analógicos.
Digital: canais digitais.
Analógico: canais analógicos.
N Ao definir a fonte de antena para Cabo, pode definir um valor para a procura de canais digitais. Para mais informações,
consulte Canal→ Memor. auto..
N A procura de canais começa e termina automaticamente.
N Carregue no botão ENTERE a qualquer altura para interromper o processo de memorização.
N depois de todos os canais disponíveis terem sido memorizados, a mensagem Ajustar o Modo Relógio é apresentada.
7. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Auto. e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
N Se seleccionar Manual, Ajustar data e hora actuais é apresentado.
N Se receber um sinal digital, a hora será definida automaticamente. Se esta não for apresentada, seleccione Manual para
acertar o relógio. (consulte a página 20)
8. O método de ligação para oferecer a melhor qualidade Hd é fornecido. depois de confirmar o método, carregue no botão
ENTERE.
9. A Mensag. Desfrute do seu televisor. é apresentada. Quando tiver terminado, carregue no botão ENTERE.
Se quiser repor esta função...
1. Carregue no botão MENU para visualizar o menu. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Configurar e em seguida
no botão ENTERE.
2. Carregue novamente no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play.
3. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é 0-0-0-0.
N Se quiser alterar o número PIN, utilize a função Alterar PIN. (consulte a página 22)
N A função Plug & Play só está disponível no modo Tv.
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu language : English ►
E enter
BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:54Português - 9
¦ Visualização no ecrã
A visualização no ecrã identifica o canal actual e o estado de determinadas definições de
áudio-vídeo.
O Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar as informações.
Carregue no botão INFO no telecomando. O canal, o tipo de som e o estado de
determinadas definições de imagem e som são apresentados no televisor.
● ▲, ▼: pode visualizar outras informações do canal. Se quer passar para o canal
actualmente seleccionado, carregue no botão ENTERE.
● ◄, ►: pode visualizar as informações do programa pretendido no canal actual.
N Carregue novamente no botão INFO ou espere aproximadamente 10 segundos e o
ecrã desaparece automaticamente.
CONTROLO DOS CANAIS
¦ Configurar o menu Canais
❑ País
N É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4
dígitos.
Canal analógico
Pode alterar o país nos canais analógicos.
Canal digital
Pode alterar o país nos canais digitais.
❑ Memor. auto.
Pode procurar os intervalos de frequência disponíveis (a disponibilidade depende do país em que se encontra). Os números de
programas atribuídos automaticamente podem não corresponder aos números de programas existentes ou pretendidos.
N Se o canal estiver bloqueado utilizando a função Canal bloqueado a janela para a introdução do PIN é apresentada.
Antena / Cabo
Fonte de antena a memorizar
● Digital e Analógico: canais digitais e analógicos.
● Digital: canais digitais.
● Analógico: canais analógicos.
Ao seleccionar ‘Cabo→ Digital e Analógico’ ou ‘Cabo→ Digital’
Indique um valor para procurar canais de cabo.
● Modo de procura → Completa / Rede / Rápida
N Rápida
– ID de rede: apresenta o código de identificação de rede.
– Frequência: apresenta a frequência para o canal. (difere de país para país)
– Modulação: apresenta os valores de modulação disponíveis.
– Taxa de símbolos: apresenta as taxas de símbolos disponíveis.
N Procura todos os canais com estações de transmissão activas e guarda-os na memória do televisor.
N Se pretende parar a Memorização automática, carregue no botão ENTERE.
A mensagem Parar a programação automática? será apresentada.
Seleccione Sim carregando nos botões ◄ ou ► e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
País ►
Memor. auto.
Memor. manual
Opção de Procura por Cabo
Guia act. e posterior
Guia completo
Guia predef. : Guia completo
Canal
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
life On venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ¦ INFO
BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:54Português - 10
❑ Memor. manual
N Procura o canal manualmente e guarda-o na memória do televisor.
N Se o canal estiver bloqueado utilizando a função Canal bloqueado a janela para a introdução do PIN é apresentada.
Canal digital
Memorização manual dos canais digitais.
N Canal digital só está disponível no modo dTv.
● Canal: defina o número do canal utilizando o botão ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9).
● Frequência: defina a frequência utilizando os botões numéricos.
● Largura banda: defina a banda utilizando o botão ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9).
N Quando concluído, os canais são actualizados na lista de canais.
Canal analógico
Memorização manual dos canais analógicos.
● Programa (Número do programa a ser atribuído a um canal): define o número do programa utilizando os botões ▲,▼ ou
numéricos (0~9).
● Sistema cores → Auto. / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: define os valores do sistema de cores utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼.
● Sistema som → BG / DK / I / L: define os valores do sistema de som utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼.
● Canal(Se souber o número do canal a memorizar): carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar C (Canal de antena) ou
S (Canal de cabo). Carregue no botão ► e em seguida, nos botões ▲, ▼ ou numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar o número
pretendido.
N Também pode seleccionar o número do canal directamente ao carregar nos botões numéricos (0~9).
N Se não ouvir som ou se este não estiver em condições, volte a seleccionar o padrão de som pretendido.
● Busca (Se não souber os números dos canais): carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para iniciar a procura. O sintonizador procura a
amplitude de frequências até aparecer no ecrã o primeiro canal, ou o canal seleccionado.
● Memorizar (Quando memoriza o canal e o número do programa associado): defina para OK carregando no botão
ENTERE.
N Canal Modo
– P (Modo de programa): ao concluir a sintonização, já terão sido atribuídos números de posição (de P00 a P99) às
estações emissoras da sua área. Pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número da posição neste modo.
– C (Modo de canal de antena): pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada estação emissora
neste modo.
– S (Modo de canal de cabo): pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada canal de cabo neste
modo.
❑ Opção de Procura por Cabo (dependendo do país)
define opções de procura adicionais, como a frequência e a taxa de símbolos, para procuras de rede por cabo.
● Frequência (Iniciar ~ Parar): apresenta a frequência para o canal.
● Modulação: apresenta os valores de modulação disponíveis.
● Taxa de símbolos: apresenta as taxas de símbolos disponíveis.
❑ Guia act. e posterior / Guia completo
As informações do EPG (Guia de programação electrónico) são fornecidas pelas estações emissoras. Pode haver entradas de
programas em branco ou desactualizadas em consequência da transmissão de informações de um determinado canal. O ecrã é
actualizado de forma dinâmica à medida que novas informações ficam disponíveis.
N Para procedimentos detalhados sobre a utilização de Guia act. e posterior e Guia completo, consulte as descrições na
página 11.
O Também pode aceder ao menu do guia carregando no botão GUIDE. (Para configurar o Guia predef., consulte as
descrições.)
Guia act. e posterior
Mostra informações sobre o programa actual e o posterior em relação aos seis canais indicados na coluna do lado esquerdo.
Guia completo
Apresenta as informações sobre os programas de hora em hora. São apresentadas informações de duas horas de programação,
que pode percorrer para a frente ou para trás no tempo.
BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:54Português - 11
❑ Guia predef. → Guia act. e posterior / Guia completo
Pode decidir entre apresentar o Guia act. e posterior ou o Guia completo ao carregar no botão GUIDE do telecomando.
❑ Lista canais
Para procedimentos detalhados sobre a utilização de Lista canais,consulte as instruções de ‘Gerir canais’.
O Pode seleccionar estas opções ao carregar no botão CH LIST no telecomando.
❑ Modo Canal
Quando carrega no botão P >/<, os canais são alterados de acordo com a lista de canais seleccionados.
Canais adicionados
os canais alternam de acordo com a lista de canais memorizados.
Canais favoritos
os canais alternam de acordo com a lista de canais favoritos.
❑ Sintonia fina
Se a recepção for nítida, não precisa de fazer a sintonização fina do canal, uma vez que é feita automaticamente durante a
procura e memorização. No entanto, se o sinal for fraco ou estiver distorcido, pode ser necessário fazer uma sintonização fina
manual dos canais.
N Os canais memorizados onde foi efectuada a sintonização fina estão marcados com um asterisco ‘*’ no lado direito do
número do canal na banda de canais.
N Para repor a sintonização fina, seleccione Reiniciar carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼ e em seguida no botão ENTERE.
N A sintonização fina apenas pode ser utilizada nos canais analógicos.
Utilizar o Guia act. e posterior / Guia completo
Para... Escolha...
ver um programa da lista EPG Seleccionar um programa carregando nos botões ▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Sair do guia Carregar no botão azul
Se seleccionar o programa seguinte, este fica agendado com o ícone de relógio visível. Se carregar de novo no botão ENTERE,
carregue nos botões ◄, ► para seleccionar Cancelar planos. Os agendamentos são cancelados e o ícone do relógio desaparece.
Ver as informações dos programas Seleccionar um programa à sua escolha, carregando nos botões
▲, ▼, ◄, ►.
Carregue depois no botão INFO quando o programa que escolheu estiver
realçado.
O nome do programa é apresentado na parte de superior do centro do ecrã.
Carregue no botão INFO para obter informações detalhadas. Nas informações detalhadas estão incluídos aspectos como o Número
do canal, duração do programa, Barra de estado, Autoridade parental, Informação sobre a qualidade de vídeo (Hd / Sd), Modos
de som, legendas ou Teletexto, Idiomas das legendas ou do teletexto, e um breve resumo sobre o programa realçado. ‘...’ é
apresentado se o resumo for demasiado longo.
Alternar entre Guia act. e posterior e
Guia completo
Carregar várias vezes no botão vermelho.
No Guia completo
Andar rapidamente para trás (24 horas).
Andar rapidamente para a frente (24 horas).
Carregar várias vezes no botão verde.
Carregar várias vezes no botão amarelo.
Guia completo
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Ter 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Hoje 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
No Information
Freshmen O..
Ver
INFO Informação ■ Act./Post ■ +24 Horas ■ Sair
Guia act. e posterior
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Ter 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Agora Seguinte
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Street Hypn..
Ver
INFO Informação ■ Guia completo ■ Sair
BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:55Português - 12
¦ Gerir canais
Ao utilizar este menu, pode Adicionar / Eliminar ou definir os canais Favoritos e utilizar o guia
de programas para transmissões digitais.
Todos os canais
Mostra todos os canais disponíveis.
Canais adicionados
Mostra todos os canais adicionados.
Favoritos
Mostra todos os canais favoritos.
O Para seleccionar os canais definidos como Favoritos, carregue no botão FAV.CH do telecomando.
Programado
Mostra todos os programas actualmente reservados.
N Seleccione um canal no ecrã Todos os canais, Canais adicionados ou Favoritos carregando nos botões ▲ / ▼ e em
seguida no botão ENTERE. Pode então ver o canal seleccionado.
N Utilizar os botões coloridos com a Lista de canais
– Vermelho (Canal Tipo): Alternar entre TV, Rádio, Dados / Outros e Todas.
– Verde (Zoom): Aumenta ou diminui o número de um canal.
– Amarelo (Selecionar): selecciona várias listas de canais. Pode executar as funções adicionar / eliminar, adicionar aos
Favoritos / eliminar dos Favoritos ou bloquear / desbloquear para vários canais ao mesmo tempo. Seleccione os canais
pretendidos e carregue ao mesmo tempo no botão amarelo para definir todos os canais seleccionados. A marca c é
apresentada à esquerda dos canais seleccionados.
– TOOLS (Ferramentas): Apresenta o menu Apagar (ou Adicionar), Adicionar aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos
favoritos), Bloquear (ou Desbloq.), Visual. Temporizador, Editar nome, Ordenar, Edição do Canal nº, Selec. Todos
(ou Anular selecção), Memor. auto.. (O menu Opções pode variar consoante a situação.)
N Ícones do ecrã sobre o estado do canal
● A : um canal analógico.
● c : um canal seleccionado ao carregar no botão amarelo.
● * : um canal definido como Favorito.
● ( : um programa que está a ser transmitido.
● \ : um canal bloqueado.
● ) : um programa reservado
Menu Opções de lista de canais (em Todos os canais / Canais adicionados / Favoritos)
N Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu de opções.
N O menu de opções pode variar dependendo do estado do canal.
Adicionar / Apagar
Pode eliminar ou adicionar um canal a ser apresentado nos canais pretendidos.
N Todos os canais eliminados são apresentados no menu Todos os canais.
N Um canal a cinzento indica que este foi eliminado.
N O menu Adicionar só é apresentado para canais eliminados.
N Também pode, do mesmo modo, eliminar um canal do menu Canais adicionados ou
Favoritos.
Adicionar aos favoritos / Apagar dos favoritos
Pode definir os canais que vê frequentemente como favoritos.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir a função adicionar aos (ou eliminar
dos) Favoritos, seleccionando Ferramentas→ Adicionar aos favoritos(ou Apagar dos favoritos).
N O símbolo ‘ ’ é apresentado e o canal é definido como favorito.
N Todos os canais favoritos são apresentados no menu Favoritos.
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canais adicionados Todos ■ Canal Tipo ■ Zoom ■ Selecionar T Ferramentas
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Canais adicionados Todos ■ Canal Tipo ■ Zoom ■ Selecionar T Ferramentas
Apagar
Adicionar aos favoritos
Bloquear
Visual. Temporizador
Editar nome de canal
Ordenar
▼
BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:55Português - 13
Bloquear / Desbloq.
Pode bloquear um canal para que o mesmo não seja nem seleccionado nem visualizado. Esta função está disponível apenas
quando Bloq. crianças está definido para Lig.. (consulte a página 22)
N É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos.
N O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é 0-0-0-0. Pode alterar o PIN, seleccionando a opção Alterar PIN no menu.
N O símbolo “\” é apresentado e o canal é bloqueado.
Visual. Temporizador
Se reservar um programa que queira assistir, o televisor muda automaticamente para o canal da lista onde tinha reservado
o programa, mesmo que esteja a visualizar outro canal. Para reservar um programa, defina em primeiro lugar a hora actual.
(Consulte a página 20)
N Apenas canais memorizados podem ser reservados.
N Pode definir directamente o canal, o dia, o mês, o ano, a hora e o minuto, ao carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
N A reserva de um programa é apresentada no menu Programa.
N Guia de programas digitais e Reservas de visualização
Se carregar no botão ►, quando seleccionar um canal digital, o Guia de programas desse canal é apresentado. Pode
reservar um programa se seguir os procedimentos descritos acima.
Editar nome de canal (apenas canais analógicos)
Os canais podem ser etiquetados de modo a que as letras que os definem sejam apresentadas quando os mesmos são
seleccionados.
N Os nomes dos canais digitais são atribuídos automaticamente e não podem ser etiquetados.
Edição do Canal nº (apenas canais digitais)
Pode também editar o número do canal se carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
Ordenar (apenas canais analógicos)
Esta operação permite alterar os números de programa dos canais memorizados. Esta operação pode ser necessária depois de
utilizar a memorização automática.
Selec. Todos / Anular selecção
● Selec. Todos: pode seleccionar todos os canais da lista de canais.
● Anular selecção: pode retirar a selecção a todos os canais anteriormente seleccionados.
N Apenas pode seleccionar Anular selecção quando existe um canal seleccionado.
Memor. auto.
N Para mais informações sobre a configuração das opções, consulte a página 9.
N Se o canal estiver bloqueado utilizando a função Canal bloqueado a janela para a introdução do PIN é apresentada.
Menu de opções de lista de canais (em Programado)
Pode visualizar, modificar ou eliminar uma reserva.
N Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu de opções.
Alterar informações
Seleccione esta opção para alterar uma reserva em visualização.
Cancelar planos
Seleccione esta opção para cancelar uma reserva em visualização.
Informação
Seleccione esta opção para visualizar uma reserva em visualização. (Também pode alterar as
informações de reserva.)
Selec. Todos
Seleccione todos os programas reservados.
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer
20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife
Programado Todos ■ Zoom ■ Selecionar T Ferramentas E Informação
Alterar informações
Cancelar planos
Informação
Selec. Todos
BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:55Português - 14
CONTROLO DA IMAGEM
¦ Configurar o menu Imagem
❑ Modo
Pode seleccionar o tipo de imagem que melhor se adeqúe aos seus requisitos de visualização.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o
modo de imagem ao seleccionar Ferramentas → Imagem Modo.
Dinâmico
Selecciona a imagem para que seja exibida com alta definição numa sala clara.
Standard
Selecciona a imagem para que seja exibida em condições ideais num ambiente normal.
Filme
Selecciona a imagem para a visualização de filmes numa sala escura.
❑ Retroiluminação / Retroiluminação / Brilho / Nitidez / Cor / Matiz (Vd/Vm)
O televisor tem várias opções de definição que permitem controlar a qualidade da imagem.
● Retroiluminação: ajusta o brilho da retro-iluminação do lCd.
● Contraste: ajusta o nível de contraste da imagem.
● Brilho: ajusta o nível de brilho da imagem
● Nitidez: ajusta a definição das extremidades da imagem.
● Cor: ajusta a saturação da cor da imagem.
● Matiz (Vd/Vm): ajusta a matiz da cor da imagem.
N Seleccione o modo de imagem a ser ajustado em primeiro lugar. Os valores de ajuste são gravados para cada modo de
imagem.
N Quando faz alterações a Retroiluminação, Contraste, Brilho, Nitidez, Cor ou Matiz (Vd/Vm), o OSd ajusta-se em
conformidade.
N Nos modos TV, Ext., AV analógicos do sistema PAl, não pode utilizar a função Matiz (Vd/Vm).
N No modo PC, apenas pode fazer alterações a Retroiluminação, Contraste e Brilho.
N As definições podem ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor.
N O consumo de energia durante a utilização pode ser reduzido de forma significativa se o nível de brilho da imagem for
reduzido, o que significa uma redução no custo geral de funcionamento.
❑ Definições avançadas
O novo televisor da Samsung permite-lhe definir de modo mais preciso as imagens do que os modelos anteriores. veja abaixo
como ajustar as definições detalhadas das imagens.
N Definições avançadas está disponível no modo Standard ou Filme.
N No modo PC, apenas pode fazer alterações a Gama e Equilíb. branco de entre as opções Definições avançadas.
Tonalidade de preto → Deslig. / Escuro / Mais escuro / Muito escuro
Pode seleccionar o nível de preto no ecrã para ajustar a intensidade.
Contraste dinâm. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto
Pode ajustar o contraste do ecrã até obter o contraste ideal.
Gama
Pode ajustar a intensidade das Cores primárias (vermelho, verde, azul).
Matriz de cores
A Matriz de cores é um esquema de cores composto por vermelho, verde e azul. Seleccione a sua Matriz de cores favorita para
obter uma cor mais natural.
● Nativo: a Matriz de cores nativa fornece uma tonalidade mais rica e profunda.
● Auto.: a Matriz de cores automática ajusta automaticamente a tonalidade de cor mais natural com base em fontes de
programa.
Modo : Standard ►
retroiluminação : 7
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50
Imagem
Cor : 50
Matiz (vd/vm) : vd50 / vm50
Definições avançadas ►
Opções de imagem
reposição de imagem
Imagem
BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:56Português - 15
Equilíb. branco
Pode ajustar a temperatura da cor de modo a obter imagens com cores mais naturais.
● Vrm-Offset / Verde-Offset / Azul-Offset / Vrm-Gain / Verde-Gain / Azul-Gain: Pode ajustar a "temperatura" da cor nas
áreas claras alternando os valores r (vermelho), G (verde) e B (azul). recomendado apenas para utilizadores avançados.
● Reiniciar: o equilíbrio do branco ajustado anteriormente volta às predefinições.
Tom de pele
Pode realçar o tom de pele na imagem.
N Se alterar os valores de ajuste, será efectuada a actualização do ecrã.
Melhor. extremid. → Deslig. / Lig.
Pode realçar os limites dos objectos na imagem.
❑ Opções de imagem
N No modo PC, apenas pode efectuar alterações a Tonalidade e Tamanho de entre as opções em Opções de imagem”.
Tonalidade → CoresFr / Normal / C. quentes1 / C. quentes2
Pode seleccionar a tonalidade mais confortável para si.
N As definições podem ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor.
N C. quentes1 ou C. quentes2 apenas estão activados quando o modo de imagem é Filme.
Tamanho
Pode seleccionar o tamanho de imagem que melhor se adeqúe aos seus requisitos de visualização.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o tamanho ao seleccionar
Ferramentas → Imagem Tamanho.
● Wide Automático: ajusta automaticamente o tamanho da imagem para o formato 16:9.
● 16:9: ajusta o tamanho da imagem para 16:9, apropriado para dvd ou transmissão em banda larga.
● Zoom amplo: aumenta o tamanho da imagem para mais de 4:3.
● Zoom: amplia a imagem de formato 16:9 (na direcção vertical) para se ajustar ao tamanho do ecrã.
● 4:3: esta é a predefinição para um filme de vídeo ou para uma transmissão normal.
● Ajustar ao ecrã: Utilize esta função para ver a imagem inteira sem cortes durante a recepção dos sinais
HDMI (720p / 1080i) ou Componente (1080i).
N As opções de tamanho da imagem podem variar consoante a fonte de entrada.
N As opções disponíveis podem variar consoante o modo seleccionado.
N No modo PC, apenas os modos 16:9 e 4:3 podem ser ajustados.
N As definições podem ser ajustadas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor.
N Pode ocorrer uma retenção temporária da imagem ao visualizar uma imagem fixa por um período superior a duas horas.
N Zoom amplo: carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição em seguida carregue no botão ENTERE. carregue nos
botões ▲ ou ▼ para mover a imagem para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Zoom: carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição em seguida carregue no botão ENTERE. carregue nos botões
▲ ou ▼ para deslocar a imagem para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão
► para seleccionar Tamanho e em seguida no botão ENTERE. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para ampliar ou reduzir o
tamanho da imagem na vertical. em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Depois de seleccionar Ajustar ao ecrã nos modos HdMI (1080i) ou Componente (1080i): seleccione Posição carregando
nos botões ◄ ou ►. Utilize os botões ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► para mover a imagem.
Reiniciar: carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Reiniciar e em seguida no botão ENTERE. Pode inicializar a
definição.
N Se utilizar a função Ajustar ao ecrã com uma entrada HdMI 720p, é cortada uma linha na parte de cima, na parte de baixo, à
esquerda e à direita como na função de Procura.
Modo de ecrã → 16:9 / Zoom amplo / Zoom / 4:3
Ao definir o tamanho da imagem para Wide Automático num televisor panorâmico 16:9, pode determinar o tamanho que
pretende ver imagem 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) ou nenhuma. Cada país europeu requer um tamanho de imagem diferente
pelo que esta função permite aos utilizadores seleccionar o tamanho.
● 16:9: define a imagem para o modo panorâmico 16:9.
● Zoom amplo: aumenta o tamanho da imagem para mais de 4:3.
● Zoom: aumenta o tamanho da imagem na vertical.
● 4:3: define a imagem para o modo normal 4:3.
N Esta função está disponível no modo Wide Automático.
N Esta função não está disponível nos modos PC, Componente ou HDMI.
BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:56Português - 16
NR Digital → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto / Auto.
Se o sinal de transmissão recebido pelo seu televisor for fraco, pode activar a função de redução do ruído digital para ajudar a
diminuir os efeitos da electricidade estática ou de fantasma que possam aparecer no ecrã.
N Se o sinal for fraco, seleccione uma das outras opções até que apareça no ecrã a melhor imagem.
Nv.pr.HDMI → Normal / Baixo
Pode seleccionar directamente o nível de preto no ecrã para ajustar a intensidade.
N Esta função apenas está activa quando ligar a entrada externa a HdMI (sinais rGB).
Modo Filme → Deslig. / Auto.
O televisor pode ser definido para detectar e processar automaticamente sinais de filme de todas as fontes, e ajustar a imagem a
uma qualidade ideal.
N Modo Filme é suportado em TV, AV, COMPONENTE(480i / 1080i) e HDMI(480i / 1080i).
❑ Reposição de imagem → Repor modo de imagem / Cancelar
repõe os valores predefinidos das definições de imagem.
N Seleccione o modo de imagem a ser reposto. A reposição é feita para cada modo de imagem.
● Repor modo de imagem: Os valores actuais da imagem voltam para a predefinição de fábrica.
¦ Utilizar o televisor como monitor de computador (PC)
Configurar o software do PC (com base em Windows XP)
As definições de visualização do Windows num computador normal são apresentadas abaixo. Os ecrãs que aparecem no monitor
do seu PC são provavelmente diferentes, dependendo da sua versão do Windows e da placa de vídeo. Contudo, mesmo que
os ecrãs sejam diferentes, em quase todos os casos, aplicam-se as mesmas informações de configuração básicas. (Se tal não
acontecer, contacte o fabricante do computador ou um revendedor Samsung.)
1. Em primeiro lugar, clique em "Painel de controlo" no menu Iniciar do Windows.
2. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em "Aspecto e Temas" e surgirá uma janela de diálogo.
3. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em ‘"visualização" e surgirá uma janela de diálogo.
4. Navegue pelo separador "definições" na janela de diálogo de visualização.
definição de tamanho correcta (resolução): óptima - 1360 x 768 pixels
Se existir uma opção de frequência vertical na janela de diálogo das definições da visualização, o valor correcto é "60" ou "60
Hz". Se não for o caso, basta clicar em ‘"OK" e sair da caixa de diálogo.
BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:56Português - 17
Modos de visualização
A posição e o tamanho do ecrã variam de acordo com o tipo de monitor do PC e a respectiva resolução. recomendam-se as
resoluções apresentadas na tabela.
Entrada D-Sub e HDMI/DVI
Modo Resolução
Frequência horizontal
(KHz)
Frequência vertical
(Hz)
Frequência do relógio em
pixels (MHz)
Polaridade de
sincronização
(H/V)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
N Quando utilizar uma ligação de cabo HdMI/dvI, tem de utilizar a tomada HDMI (DVI).
N O modo entrelaçado não é suportado.
N O aparelho pode não funcionar correctamente se for seleccionado um formato de vídeo não padrão.
N São suportados os modos Separado e Composto. SOG não é suportado.
¦ Configurar o televisor com o PC
N Predefinição: carregue no botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo PC.
❑ Ajuste auto.
O Ajuste automático permite que o monitor do PC se ajuste automaticamente ao sinal de vídeo
recebido de um PC. Os valores fino, grosso e posição são ajustados automaticamente.
N Esta função não está disponível no modo dvI-HdMI.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o
Ajuste automático ao seleccionar Ferramentas → Ajuste auto..
❑ Ecrã
Grosso / Fino
O objectivo do ajuste da qualidade da imagem é o de remover ou reduzir o ruído da imagem.
Se não conseguir retirar o ruído fazendo apenas a sintonização fina, ajuste a frequência o melhor possível (Grosso) e volte a
fazer a sintonização fina. depois de reduzido o ruído, volte a ajustar a imagem de forma a ficar alinhada no centro do ecrã.
Posição do PC
Pode ajustar a posição do ecrã do PC se esta não se ajustar por completo ao televisor. Carregue nos botões ▲ ou ▼ para ajustar
a Posição vertical. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para ajustar a Posição horizontal.
Repor imagem
Pode substituir todas as definições da imagem pelos valores predefinidos.
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Ajuste auto. ►
ecrã
definições avançadas
Opções de imagem
reposição de imagem
Imagem
BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:56Português - 18
CONTROLO DO SOM
¦ Configurar o menu Som
❑ Modo → Standard / Música / Filme / Voz nítida / Personal.
Pode seleccionar o modo de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode
configurar o modo de som se seleccionar Ferramentas → Modo Som.
Standard
Selecciona o modo de som normal.
Música
dá ênfase à música em detrimento das vozes.
Filme
Proporciona a melhor qualidade de som para filmes.
Voz nítida
dá ênfase à voz, em detrimento de outros sons.
Personal.
Memoriza as suas definições de som.
❑ Equalizador
Pode ajustar as definições de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais.
Modo
Pode seleccionar o modo de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais.
Balanço
Controla o equilíbrio entre os altifalantes esquerdo e direito.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Ajuste de banda larga)
Para ajustar o nível de diferentes frequências de largura de banda
Reiniciar
repõe os valores predefinidos do equalizador.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Deslig. / Lig.
TruSurround Hd é uma tecnologia patenteada da SrS que permite reproduzir conteúdos 5.1 multi-canais apenas com dois
altifalantes. A tecnologia TruSurround proporciona um excelente som surround virtual, através de qualquer sistema de reprodução
com dois altifalantes, incluindo os altifalantes internos de televisores. É totalmente compatível com todos os formatos multi-canal.
❑ Idioma de áudio (apenas canais digitais)
Pode alterar o valor predefinido dos idiomas de áudio. Apresenta as informações do idioma da transmissão a ser recebida.
N Apenas pode seleccionar de entre os idiomas disponíveis pela transmissão.
N Quando estiver a ver um canal digital, pode seleccionar esta função.
❑ Formato áudio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (apenas canal digital)
Se o som for emitido tanto pelo altifalante principal como pelo receptor de áudio, pode ouvir-se um eco devido à diferença na
velocidade de descodificação entre o altifalante principal e o receptor de áudio. Neste caso, utilize a função Altifalante do televisor.
N O Formato de áudio é apresentado consoante o sinal de transmissão.
N Quando estiver a ver um canal digital, pode seleccionar esta função.
Modo : Personal. ►
equalizador
SrS TruSurround Hd : deslig.
Idioma de áudio : - - -
Formato áudio : - - -
descrição áudio
volume auto. : deslig.
Som
BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 19
❑ Descrição áudio (apenas canais digitais)
Esta é uma função auxiliar de áudio que fornece uma faixa de áudio adicional para pessoas com deficiências visuais. Esta função
gere o Fluxo de áudio para o Ad (descrição de áudio), quando é enviado pelo transmissor juntamente com o Áudio principal. Os
utilizadores podem ligar ou desligar a descrição de áudio e regular o volume.
O Carregue no botão AD no telecomando para seleccionar Deslig. ou Lig..
Descrição áudio → Deslig. / Lig.
ligue e desligue a função de descrição de áudio.
Volume
Pode regular o volume da descrição de áudio.
N Volume está activo quando Descrição áudio está definido Lig..
❑ Volume auto. → Deslig. / Lig.
Cada estação emissora tem condições de sinal específicas e, por isso, não é fácil regular o volume sempre que muda de canal.
Esta função permite regular automaticamente o volume do canal pretendido, baixando o som quando o sinal de modulação está
alto, ou aumentando o som quando o sinal de modulação está baixo.
❑ Seleccionar Altifalante → Altifalante Exter. / Altifalante do tv.
Se quiser ouvir som através de altifalantes separados, cancele o amplificador interno.
N Os botões de volume e MUTE não funcionam Seleccionar Altifalante está definido para Altifalante Exter..
N Se seleccionar Altifalante Exter.1 no menu Seleccionar Altifalante, as definições de som são limitadas.
❑ Reposição de som → Repor tudo / Repor modo de som / Cancelar
Pode repor as definições de Som predefinidas.
¦ Seleccionar o modo de Som
Pode configurar o modo de som no menu Ferramentas. Quando define para Dual l ll, é apresentado no ecrã o modo de som
actual.
Tipo de áudio Dual 1 / 2 Predefinido
estéreo A2
Mono MONO
Mudança automática
estéreo ESTÉREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
estéreo
Mono MONO
Mudança automática
estéreo MONO ↔ ESTÉREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
N Se o sinal de estéreo for fraco e ocorrer uma mudança automática, mude para o modo mono.
N Está função apenas está activa no sinal de som estéreo. Está desactivada no sinal de som mono.
N Esta função apenas está disponível no modo Tv.
BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 20
CONFIGURAÇÃO
¦ Definir o menu Configurar
❑ Idioma do Menu
Pode definir o idioma do menu.
❑ Tempo
Relógio
Tem de acertar o relógio de modo a que possa utilizar todas as funcionalidades do
temporizador do televisor.
N A hora actual é apresentada sempre que carregar no botão INFO.
N Se desligar o cabo de alimentação, tem de acertar novamente o relógio.
● Modo Relógio
Pode definir a hora actual de forma manual ou automática.
– Auto.: defina automaticamente a hora actual, utilizando a hora da transmissão digital.
– Manual: defina manualmente a hora actual para uma hora específica.
N Consoante a estação de transmissão e o sinal, a hora actual pode não ser acertada correctamente. Se tal acontecer,
acerte a hora manualmente.
N A antena ou cabo devem estar ligados para que a hora seja acertada automaticamente.
● Ajuste o Relógio
Pode definir manualmente a hora actual.
N Configure esta opção ao ter definido Modo Relógio para Manual.
N Pode definir directamente o dia, o mês, o ano, a hora e o minuto, ao carregar nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
Temporizador → Deslig. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
O temporizador desliga automaticamente o televisor após o tempo predefinido (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 e 180 minutos).
N O televisor passa automaticamente para o modo de espera quando o temporizador atinge o 0.
N Para cancelar a função Temporizador, seleccione Deslig..
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o temporizador ao seleccionar
Ferramentas → Temporizador.
Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3
Pode configurar três definições diferentes para ligar/desligar através do temporizador. Em primeiro lugar, deve acertar o relógio.
● Ligar à hora definida: defina a hora, o minuto e activar / desactivar. (Para activar o temporizador com a definição escolhida,
defina para Activate.)
● Desligar à hora definida: defina a hora, o minuto e activar / desactivar. (Para activar o temporizador com a definição
escolhida, defina para Activate.)
● Volume: seleccione o nível do volume para quando o televisor é ligado.
● Antena: Seleccione Antena ou Cabo.
● Canal: seleccione o canal pretendido.
● Repetir: Seleccione Uma vez, Diaria., Seg~Sex, Seg~Sáb, Sáb~Dom, ou Manual.
N Quando Manual está seleccionado, carregue no botão ► para seleccionar o dia da semana pretendido. Carregue no
botão ENTERE sobre o dia pretendido e será apresentada a marca c.
N Pode acertar as horas, os minutos e o canal carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
N Desligar automaticamente
Quando o programar o temporizador para ligado, o televisor acabará por se desligar se não carregar em nenhum comando
durante 3 horas depois de o temporizador ter ligado o televisor. Esta função apenas está disponível no modo ligado do
temporizador e permite evitar sobreaquecimentos, que podem ocorrer se o televisor permanecer ligado durante muito tempo.
Plug & Play
Idioma do Menu : Português ►
Tempo
Transmissão
Segurança
Geral
Configurar
BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 21
❑ Transmissão
Legenda
Pode activar e desactivar as legendas. Utilize este menu para definir o modo de legendas. Normal no menu refere-se às
legendas normais e Surdos são as legendas para pessoas com deficiências auditivas.
● Legenda → Deslig./ Lig.: activa ou desactiva as legendas.
● Modo → Normal / Surdos: define o modo de legenda.
● Idioma das legendas: define o idioma da legenda.
N Se o programa que estiver a ver não suportar a função Surdos, a opção Normal é automaticamente activada, mesmo que o
modo Surdos esteja seleccionado.
N O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja disponível na transmissão.
O Para seleccionar estas opções basta carregar no botão SUBT. do telecomando.
Texto digital → Desactivar / Activar (Apenas Reino Unido)
Se o programa for transmitido com texto digital, esta função é activada.
N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group)
É uma norma internacional para sistemas de codificação de dados utilizada em multimédia e hipermédia. Funciona a um nível
mais elevado do que o sistema MPEG, incluindo hipermédia de ligação de dados, como imagens fixas, serviço de caracteres,
animação, gráficos e ficheiros de vídeo, bem como dados multimédia. MHEG é uma tecnologia de interacção com o utilizador
em tempo de execução e está a ser aplicada a diversos campos, incluindo vOd (video-On- demand), ITv (Interactive Tv),
eC (electronic Commerce), tele-educação, teleconferência, bibliotecas digitais e jogos em rede.
Idioma do teletexto
Pode definir o idioma do Teletexto seleccionando o idioma.
N O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja disponível na transmissão.
Preferência
● Idioma principal / Idioma secundário / Idioma princ. Legendas / Idioma secund. Legendas / Idioma principal do
teletexto / Idioma secund. Teletexto
Ao utilizar esta funcionalidade, os utilizadores podem seleccionar um dos idiomas. O idioma seleccionado aqui é o predefinido
para quando o utilizador selecciona um canal.
Se alterar a definição de idioma, o Idioma das legendas, o Idioma de áudio e o Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma mudam
automaticamente para o idioma seleccionado.
O Idioma de áudio, o Idioma das legendas e o Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma apresentam uma lista de idiomas
suportados pelo canal actual e a selecção é realçada. Se alterar esta definição, a nova selecção só é válida para o canal
actual. A definição alterada não muda a definição do Idioma principal, do Idioma principal das legendas, nem do Idioma
principal do teletexto no menu Preferência.
Interface comum
● Menu CI
Permite ao utilizador seleccionar a partir do menu fornecido pelo CAM.
Seleccione o Menu CI com base no menu PC Card.
● Informação sobre aplicações
Contém informações sobre o CAM introduzido na ranhura CI e apresenta-as no ecrã.
N Os dados apresentados em neste menu referem-se ao CI CArd. Pode instalar o CAM em qualquer altura,
independentemente de o televisor estar ligado ou desligado.
1. Adquira o módulo CI CAM no revendedor mais próximo ou por telefone.
2. Introduza o CI CArD no CAM na direcção da seta até ficar encaixado.
3. Introduza o CAM, com o CI CArD colocado, na ranhura da interface comum.
(Introduza completamente o CAM na direcção da seta, de modo a ficar paralelo à ranhura.)
4. Verifique se consegue ver uma imagem num canal de sinal codificado.
N Uma vez que CAM não é suportado nalguns países e regiões, verifique esta situação junto do seu revendedor
autorizado.
BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 22
❑ Segurança
Antes de a janela de configuração ser apresentada, surge o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4
dígitos.
O número PIN predefinido de um novo televisor é 0-0-0-0. Pode alterar o PIN seleccionando Alterar PIN no menu.
Bloq. crianças → Deslig. / Lig.
esta função impede que utilizadores não autorizados, como crianças, vejam programas não apropriados, cortando a imagem e o
som.
N Pode bloquear canais da lista de canais. (consulte a página 13)
N Bloq. crianças só está disponível no modo Tv.
Bloqueio para crianças
esta função impede que que utilizadores não autorizados, como crianças, assistam a programas não apropriados através de um
código PIN (número de identificação pessoal) de 4 dígitos definido pelo utilizador.
N O item de Bloqueio para crianças varia consoante o país.
N Quando o Bloqueio para crianças está activado, o símbolo ‘\’ é apresentado.
N Perm. Tudo: carregue para desbloquear as classificações do televisor.
Bloq. Tudo: carregue para bloquear as classificações do televisor.
Alterar PIN
Pode alterar o seu número de identificação pessoal necessário para configurar o televisor.
N Caso se esqueça do código PIN, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela seguinte sequência, repondo o PIN para 0-0-0-0:
POWER (deslig.) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (lig.).
❑ Geral
Modo Jogo → Deslig. / Lig.
Ao ligar uma consola de jogos como a PlayStation™ ou Xbox™, pode tirar partido de uma experiência de jogo mais realista
seleccionando o menu jogo.
N Para desligar a consola de jogos e ligar outro dispositivo externo, cancele o modo jogo no menu de configuração.
N Se visualizar o menu TV no Modo Jogo o ecrã treme ligeiramente.
N Modo Jogo não está disponível nos modos TV e PC.
N Se o Modo Jogo estiver ligado:
– o modo Imagem muda automaticamente para Standard e os utilizadores não podem alterá-lo.
– o modo Som muda automaticamente para Personal. e os utilizadores não podem alterá-lo. regule o som utilizando o
equalizador.
N A função reset Sound é activada. Se seleccionar a função reset depois de definir o equalizador, repõe os valores de fábrica.
Poupança energ. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto / Imagem Desligada / Auto.
Esta função ajusta o brilho do televisor para reduzir o consumo de energia. Quando estiver a ver televisão à noite, defina o modo
Poupança energ. para Alto, de forma a reduzir a fadiga ocular, bem como o consumo de energia.
Se seleccionar Imagem Desligada, o ecrã desliga-se e apenas conseguirá ouvir o som. Carregue em qualquer botão para sair da
função Imagem Desligada.
N No menu Tools, a função Imagem Desligada não é suportada.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir o modo Poupança de energia ao
seleccionar Ferramentas → Poupança energ..
Melodia → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto
O som da melodia pode ser definido para quando o televisor é ligado ou desligado.
N A Melodia não toca
– Quando o televisor não emite som porque carregou no botão MUTE.
– Quando o televisor não emite som porque carregou no botão (–) do Volume.
– Quando o televisor é desligado pela função Temporizador.
BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 23
ENTRADA / SUPORTE
¦ Configurar o menu de Entrada
❑ Lista de fontes
Utilize para seleccionar o televisor ou outras fontes de entrada externas como leitores de DVD/Blu-ray/receptores de satélite (SetTop Box) ligadas ao televisor. Utilize para seleccionar a sua fonte de entrada preferida.
O Carregue no botão SOURCE do telecomando para ver uma fonte de sinal externo. O
modo TV pode ser seleccionado carregando no botão TV.
TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI(DVI)
N Pode escolher apenas os dispositivos externos que estão ligados ao televisor. Em Lista
de fontes, as entradas ligadas são realçadas e ordenadas no topo. As entradas que não
estejam ligadas serão ordenadas na parte de baixo.
N Ext. e PC permanecem sempre activados.
N TOOLS (Ferramentas): apresenta os menus Editar nome e Informação.
❑ Editar nome
Atribua um nome ao dispositivo ligado às tomadas de entrada para facilitar a selecção da fonte de entrada.
VCR / DVD / STB Cabo / Satélite STB / STB PVR / Receptor AV / Jogos / Câmara de Vídeo / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV /
Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Quando ligar um cabo HdMI/dvI à porta HDMI (DVI), deve definir o modo HDMI/DVI para DVI ou DVI PC em
Editar nome do modo de Entrada. Neste caso, é necessário uma ligação de som separada.
¦ Configurar o menu Suporte
❑ Auto-diagnóstico
Teste de imagem
Caso tenha algum problema com a qualidade da imagem, execute o teste de imagem.
verifique o padrão de cores no ecrã para ver se o problema persiste.
● Sim: se o padrão de teste não aparecer ou se houver interferências no mesmo,
seleccione Sim. Pode haver algum problema com o televisor. Contacte o centro de
atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência.
● Não: se o padrão de teste for visualizado correctamente, seleccione Não. Pode haver
algum problema com o equipamento externo. verifique as ligações. Se o problema
persistir, consulte o manual do utilizador do dispositivo externo.
Teste de som
Caso tenha algum problema com o som, execute o teste de som. Pode verificar o som ao
reproduzir uma melodia através do televisor. A mensagem "O problema do teste de som persiste?" é apresentada no ecrã.
N Se não ouvir som a partir dos altifalantes do televisor, antes de executar um teste de som, certifique-se de que
Seleccionar Altifalante está definido para Altifalante do tv. no menu Som.
N A melodia será ouvida durante o teste se Seleccionar Altifalante estiver definido para “Altifalante Exter. ou, se não houver
som, ao carregar no botão MUTE.
● Sim: se durante o teste de som apenas conseguir ouvir som de um altifalante ou de nenhum, seleccione Sim. Pode haver
algum problema com o televisor. Contacte o centro de atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência.
● Não: se conseguir ouvir som a partir dos altifalantes, seleccione Não. Pode haver algum problema com o equipamento
externo. verifique as ligações. Se o problema persistir, consulte o manual do utilizador do dispositivo externo.
Informações sobre o sinal (apenas canais digitais)
Ao contrário dos canais analógicos, cuja qualidade de recepção pode variar entre "com interferências" a "clara", os canais
digitais (HdTv) ou têm qualidade de recepção perfeita, ou então não têm qualquer recepção. Por isso, ao contrário dos canais
analógicos, não pode fazer a sintonização fina aos canais digitais. Pode, contudo, ajustar a antena para melhorar a recepção dos
canais digitais disponíveis.
N Se o medidor da intensidade do sinal indicar que o sinal é fraco, ajuste fisicamente a antena para aumentar a intensidade do
sinal. Continue a ajustar a antena até encontrar a melhor posição com o sinal mais forte.
Auto-diagnóstico ►
Actualização do software
Guia de ligação HD
Contactar a Samsung
Assistência
Lista de fontes
editar nome
entrada
BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:57Português - 24
❑ Actualização do software
Para manter o produto actualizado com novas funções da Televisão digital, são transmitidas
periodicamente actualizações de software como parte do sinal de televisão normal. O televisor
detecta automaticamente estes sinais e apresenta a faixa de actualização do software. Tem a
opção de instalar, ou não, a actualização.
Por USB
Introduza no televisor a unidade USB que contém a actualização do firmware. Tenha cuidado
para não desligar a corrente ou retirar a unidade USB enquanto as actualizações estiverem
a ser executadas. O televisor desliga-se e volta a ligar automaticamente após terminar a
actualização do firmware. verifique a versão de firmware depois de concluída a actualização.
Quando o software é actualizado, as definições de áudio e de vídeo que fez voltam às predefinições (de fábrica).
recomenda-se que anote as suas definições para que possa facilmente repô-las depois da actualização.
Por um canal
Actualiza o software através do sinal de transmissão.
N Se a função for seleccionada durante o período de transmissão de software, esta função procura software disponível e
transfere-o.
N O tempo necessário para a transferência do software é determinado pelo estado do sinal.
Actual. no Modo de Espera
Para continuar a actualizar o software com o interruptor de corrente principal ligado, seleccione ligado, carregando nos botões
▲ ou ▼. 45 minutos depois de entrar no modo de espera, uma actualização manual é iniciada automaticamente. dado que o
aparelho está ligado internamente, o lCd pode ficar aceso durante algum tempo. Este fenómeno pode persistir durante mais de 1
hora até a actualização do software ficar concluída.
Software Alternativo
Para visualizar as informações da versão de software.
❑ Guia de ligação HD
este menu apresenta o método de ligação que proporciona a melhor qualidade para um televisor HD.
Consulte esta informação quando ligar dispositivos externos ao televisor.
❑ Contactar a Samsung
leia esta informação quando o televisor não funcionar correctamente ou caso queira actualizar o software.
Esta informação ser-lhe-á útil no que diz respeito ao centro de atendimento e aos métodos de transferência de ficheiros de
software e produtos.
Painel posterior do televisor
USB Drive
BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:58Português - 25
RECOMENDAÇÕES PARA A UTILIZAÇÃO
¦ Funcionalidade de teletexto
A maioria das estações de televisão fornece serviços de informação por escrito através da função de Teletexto. A página de índice
do serviço de teletexto fornece informações sobre como utilizar o serviço. Além disso, pode seleccionar várias opções de acordo
com os seus requisitos, utilizando os botões do telecomando.
N Para que as informações de teletexto sejam apresentadas correctamente, é preciso que a recepção dos canais se processe
em boas condições. Caso contrário, podem faltar informações ou podem não aparecer algumas páginas.
N Pode mudar as páginas do teletexto com os botões numéricos do telecomando.
1 0(modo)
Carregue neste botão para seleccionar
o modo de Teletexto (lIST/FlOF). Se
carregar no modo lIST, muda para o
modo de lista de memorização. No
modo de lista de memorização, pode
guardar a página de teletexto na lista
utilizando o botão 8(guardar).
2 5(mostrar)
Utilizado para visualizar o texto oculto
(respostas a jogos de perguntas e
respostas, por exemplo). Para ver o
ecrã normal, carregue novamente no
botão.
3 4(tamanho)
Carregue neste botão para visualizar
as letras com o dobro do tamanho na
metade superior do ecrã. Para que seja
apresentada a metade inferior do ecrã,
carregue novamente. Para visualizar o
ecrã normal, carregue novamente no
botão.
4 8(guardar)
Utilizado para guardar as páginas de
teletexto.
5 Botões coloridos (vermelho/verde/
amarelo/azul)
Se a estação emissora utilizar o
sistema FASTeXT, os diferentes tópicos
apresentados na página de teletexto
aparecem codificados com cores e
podem ser seleccionados ao carregar
nos botões coloridas. Carregue num
dos botões que corresponda à cor
pretendida. A página inclui outras
informações a cores que podem ser
seleccionadas da mesma forma. Para
visualizar a página anterior ou a página
seguinte, carregue no botão colorido
correspondente.
6/(activar teletexto/sobrepor)
Carregue para activar o modo de
Teletexto depois de seleccionar o canal
com o serviço de teletexto. Carregue
duas vezes para sobrepor o ecrã de
transmissão actual ao teletexto.
7 :(sair)
Para sair da apresentação de teletexto.
8 1(página secundária)
Utilizado para visualizar a página
secundária disponível.
9 2(página para cima)
Utilizado para ver a página seguinte do
teletexto.
0 3(página abaixo)
Utilizado para ver a página anterior do
teletexto.
! 9 (modo de espera)
Utilizado para manter o ecrã numa
determinada página, se esta estiver
ligada a várias páginas secundárias
que aparecem automaticamente em
sequência. Para continuar, carregue
novamente neste botão.
@ 6(índice)
Utilizado para ver a página de índice
(conteúdos) a qualquer momento,
enquanto está a visualizar o teletexto.
# 7(cancelar)
Utilizado para ver a emissão enquanto
procura uma página.
As páginas do teletexto estão divididas em seis categorias:
Parte Conteúdo
A Número da página seleccionada.
B Nome da estação emissora.
C Número da página actual ou indicações da procura.
D Data e hora.
E Texto.
F Informações sobre o estado.
Informações FASTeXT.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:58Português - 26
N As informações de teletexto estão muitas vezes divididas em várias páginas apresentadas em sequência e às quais pode
aceder:
– introduzindo o número da página
– seleccionando um título numa lista
– seleccionando um título a cores (sistema FASTEXT)
N O nível de teletexto suportado pelo televisor é a versão 2.5 que permite também a visualização de gráficos ou textos
adicionais.
N Dependendo da transmissão, painéis laterais em branco podem ocorrer ao visualizar o teletexto.
N Nestes casos, gráficos ou textos adicionais não são transmitidos.
N Os televisores mais antigos que não suportam a versão 2.5 não permitem a visualização de gráficos ou textos adicionais,
independentemente da transmissão de teletexto.
O Carregue no botão TV para sair do teletexto.
N Teletexto 16:9, imagem 16:9
¦ Como ajustar a base (apenas para os modelos de 19 polegadas)
1. Coloque a parte frontal do televisor em cima de um pano ou almofada macios sobre uma mesa como indicado na Figura 1.
– Alinhe a parte inferior do televisor na extremidade da mesa.
2. Carregue no centro da parte de trás do televisor. Ajuste a base como indicado na Figura 2 enquanto carrega no botão na
parte de trás da base.
3. Coloque o televisor em cima da mesa de modo a que este se apoie na mesma com segurança.
¦ Como ajustar o ângulo do televisor (apenas para os modelos de 19 polegadas)
N Ao ajustar a base, carregue no botão na parte de trás da mesma.
1. A figura 1 apresenta o ângulo de ajuste (-2°~14°) quando utiliza o lCD sobre a sua base.
N Uma inclinação excessiva pode fazer com que o televisor lCd caia e se danifique.
2. A figura 2 apresenta o ângulo de ajuste (14°~80°) quando converte o lCD da utilização da base para montagem na parede.
3. A figura 3 apresenta o ângulo de ajuste (-2°~14°) quando monta o televisor lCD numa parede.
N Ouvirá um "clique" ao alterar o ângulo de 1 para 2 e ou de 3 para 2.
1 2
1 Ajuste de ângulo ao utilizar o
televisor sobre a base do mesmo.
2 Ajuste de ângulo ao converter
a base para montagem na parede
(1→3, 3→1)
3 Ajuste de ângulo quando o
televisor LCD está montado na
parede
BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:59Português - 27
¦ Instalar Dispositivos de Montagem de acordo com os padrões VESA (apenas para modelos de 19 polegadas)
1. Coloque o televisor com a parte frontal para baixo em cima de um pano ou almofada macios sobre uma mesa.
2. Ajuste a base, carregando no botão na parte de trás da mesma.
3. Alinhe o painel de interface de montagem (não fornecido) com os orifícios na parte inferior da base e fixe-a com os quatro
parafusos fornecidos com a base tipo braço, suporte para pendurar na parede ou outras bases (não fornecido).
¦ Utilizar as tampas decorativas (apenas para modelos de 19 polegadas)
1. Ao montar o televisor na parede sem utilizar a base, introduza as tampas decorativas nos orifícios como indicado na imagem
1.
2. depois de introduzir as tampas decorativas, fixe-as com os 4 parafusos como indicado na imagem 2.
1 2
Botão
Painel de montagem
(Vendido em separado)
1 2
BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:56:59Português - 28
¦ Instalar a base
1. Coloque o televisor lCD na base.
N São necessárias duas ou mais pessoas para pegar no televisor.
N Certifique-se de que distingue a parte da frente da parte de trás da base quando está
a montá-la.
N Para se assegurar que o televisor está colocado na base a um nível apropriado, não
aplique demasiada pressão na parte superior esquerda ou direita do televisor.
2. Atarraxe dois parafusos na posição 1 e os outros dois na posição 2.
N Coloque o produto de pé e aperte os parafusos. Se apertar os parafusos com o
televisor lCd deitado, este pode ficar inclinado.
¦ Instalar o kit de montagem na parede
Os acessórios de montagem na parede (vendidos em separado) permitem montar o televisor
na parede.
Para saber mais sobre como instalar o kit de montagem na parede, consulte as instruções
que acompanham os respectivos acessórios. Contacte um técnico para obter assistência na
instalação do suporte de montagem na parede.
Se a instalação for feita pelo cliente, a Samsung electronics não se responsabiliza por
quaisquer danos no produto nem por ferimentos sofridos pelo cliente ou por outras pessoas.
Não instale o kit de montagem na parede com o televisor ligado. Pode resultar em
ferimentos devido a choques eléctricos.
¦ Utilizar o Bloqueio anti-roubo Kensington
O dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington serve para fixar fisicamente o
sistema quando o utilizar num local público. O aspecto e o método
de bloqueio podem ser diferentes da ilustração, consoante o
fabricante. Consulte o manual fornecido com o dispositivo de bloqueio
Kensington para uma utilização correcta.
N localize o ícone “K” na parte de trás do televisor. Existe uma ranhura Kensington ao
lado do ícone “K”.
Quando bloquear o produto, siga estes passos:
1. Prenda o cabo do dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington à volta de um objecto grande e
pesado, como uma mesa ou cadeira.
2. Faça deslizar a extremidade do cabo com a peça de bloqueio através da outra
extremidade em arco do dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington.
3. Insira o dispositivo de bloqueio na ranhura Kensington do produto (1).
4. Feche o dispositivo de bloqueio.
N Estas são as instruções gerais. Para instruções mais precisas, consulte o Manual do
utilizador fornecido com o dispositivo de bloqueio.
N dispositivo de bloqueio tem de ser adquirido separadamente.
N localização do dispositivo de bloqueio Kensington pode variar consoante o modelo.
1
BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:00Português - 29
¦ Manter um espaço de instalação seguro
Mantenha as distâncias recomendadas, entre o produto e outros objectos (por exemplo, uma parede) para garantir a ventilação
adequada.
Caso contrário, pode provocar um incêndio ou danificar o produto devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do mesmo.
Instale o produto de modo a que as distâncias recomendadas, assinaladas na figura seguinte, sejam respeitadas.
N Se utilizar uma base ou suporte para montagem na parede, utilize apenas as peças fornecidas pela Samsung electronics.
Ҟ O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou ferimentos graves em caso
de queda do produto.
Ҟ O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou provocar um incêndio
devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do produto por ventilação inadequada.
N O aspecto exterior pode ser diferente, dependendo do produto.
Se instalar o produto com uma base Se instalar o produto com um suporte para montagem na parede
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦ Fixar o televisor à parede
Atenção: puxar, empurrar, ou subir para cima do televisor pode provocar a queda do mesmo. em especial,
certifique-se de que as crianças não se penduram ou desestabilizam o televisor, o que poderia provocar a
queda do mesmo e resultar em acidentes graves ou morte. Siga todas as precauções de segurança fornecidas
no Folheto de segurança incluído. Para estabilidade adicional, instale o dispositivo anti-queda por razões de
segurança, como descrito em seguida.
Para evitar a queda do televisor:
1. Introduza os parafusos nos grampos e aparafuse-os com firmeza à parede. verifique se
os parafusos foram aparafusados com firmeza à parede.
N Pode necessitar de material adicional, tal como um suporte, consoante o tipo de
parede.
N Uma vez que os grampos, parafusos e fios não são fornecidos, adquira-os em
separado.
2. retire os parafusos da parte posterior central do televisor, introduza os parafusos nos
grampos e aparafuse os parafusos ao televisor novamente.
N Os parafusos podem não ser fornecidos com o produto. Se for esse o caso,
adquira os parafusos com as seguintes especificações.
N Especificações dos parafusos
– Para um lCd entre 17 e 29 polegadas: M4 X l15
– Para um lCd entre 32 e 40 polegadas: M6 X l15
3. ligue os grampos fixados ao televisor e os grampos fixados à parede com um fio forte,
depois aperte-o muito bem.
N Instale o televisor perto da parede de forma a não cair para trás.
N É mais seguro ligar o fio de modo a que os grampos fixados à parede estejam ao
mesmo nível ou abaixo dos grampos fixados ao televisor.
N desaperte o fio antes de transportar o televisor.
4. verifique se todas as ligações estão devidamente presas. verifique regularmente as
ligações para evitar qualquer sinal de gasto ou falha. Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre a
segurança das suas ligações, contacte um instalador profissional.
Parede
Parede
BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:01Português - 30
¦ Resolução de problemas
Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre o televisor, consulte primeiro esta lista. Se nenhuma destas sugestões para resolução de problemas
se aplicar, consulte o site ‘www.samsung.com’ e, em seguida, clique em Assistência ou contacte o Centro de atendimento na lista
da última página.
Problema Solução
Qualidade de imagem
Primeiro, execute oTeste de imagempara confirmar se o televisor está a apresentar
correctamente a imagem de teste.
● vá para o MENU - Assistência - Auto-diagnóstico - Teste de imagem
Se a imagem de teste for apresentada correctamente, a imagem de má qualidade pode ser
provocada pela fonte ou sinal.
A imagem do televisor não parece
ser de tão boa qualidade como
na loja.
● Se tiver uma caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box analógica actualize-a. Utilize
cabos HDMI ou de Componente para obter uma qualidade de imagem HD.
● Subscritor de cabo/satélite: Tente estações Hd (Alta definição) a partir de canais codificados.
● ligação de antena: Tente estações Hd após executar o Programa automático.
N vários canais Hd são actualizados a partir de conteúdos Sd (definição standard).
● Ajuste a resolução de saída de vídeo da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para
1080i ou 720p.
● Certifique-se de que está a ver televisão à distância mínima recomendada, com base
no tamanho e na definição do sinal que está a visualizar.
A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, bloco pequeno, pontos,
pixelização
● A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem,
especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de acção.
● Um nível de sinal baixo ou uma má qualidade pode causar distorção de imagem. Não
é um problema do televisor.
● A utilização de telemóveis na proximidade do televisor (até cerca de 1 m) pode causar
ruído na imagem, tanto na televisão analógica, como na digital.
Cor errada ou inexistente com a
ligação de Componente.
● Certifique-se de que os cabos de Componente estão ligados às tomadas correctas. As ligações
incorrectas ou soltas podem provocar problemas na cor ou o ecrã pode ficar em branco.
Cor ou brilho fracos. ● Ajuste as opções de Imagem no menu do televisor. (ModoImagem, Cor, Brilho, Nitidez)
● Ajuste a opção de Poupança energ. no menu Configurar.
● Tente a reposição de imagem para visualizar as predefinições da imagem.
(vá para MENU - Imagem - Reposição de imagem)
linha pontilhada na extremidade
do ecrã.
● Se o tamanho da imagem estiver definido para Ajustar ao ecrã, altere o mesmo para 16:9.
● Altere a resolução da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box.
A imagem é a preto e branco
apenas com entrada AV
(Composto).
● ligue o cabo de vídeo (amarelo) à tomada verde da entrada de componente 1 do
televisor.
A imagem fica bloqueada
ou distorcida quando muda
de canais ou a imagem está
atrasada.
● Se estiver ligado a uma caixa de televisão por cabo, tente reiniciar a caixa de televisão
por cabo. (ligue novamente o cabo de CA e espere até que a caixa de televisão cabo
reinicie. Pode demorar até 20 minutos.)
● defina a resolução de saída da caixa de televisão por cabo para 1080i ou 720p.
Qualidade do som
Primeiro, execute o Teste de som para confirmar se o áudio do televisor está a funcionar
correctamente.
● vá para o MENU - Assistência - Auto-diagnóstico - Teste de som
Se o áudio estiver a funcionar correctamente, o problema de som pode ser provocado pela
fonte ou sinal.
Não se ouve som ou o som é
demasiado baixo mesmo com o
volume no máximo.
● Verifique o volume do dispositivo externo ligado ao televisor e, em seguida, ajuste o
volume do mesmo.
A imagem é boa, mas não tem
som.
● Defina a opção Seleccionar Altifalante para Altifalante do tv. no menu do som.
● Certifique-se de que os cabos de áudio do dispositivo externo estão ligados às
tomadas de entrada de áudio correctas no televisor.
● verifique a opção de s aída de áudio do dispositivo ligado. (ex: Pode ser necessário
alterar a opção de áudio da caixa de televisão por cabo para HdMI quando tiver o
cabo HDMI ligado ao televisor.)
● Se estiver a utilizar um cabo dvI para HdMI, é necessário um cabo de áudio suplementar.
● Desactive a função SrS se definir o volume acima do valor 30.
● remova a ficha da tomada dos auscultadores. (se disponível no televisor)
ruído nos auscultadores. ● verifique as ligações dos cabos. Certifique-se de que um cabo de vídeo não está
ligado à entrada de áudio.
● Para ligações antena/cabo, verifique a intensidade do sinal. Um nível de sinal baixo
pode causar distorção de imagem.
BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:01Português - 31
Problema Solução
Sem imagem, sem vídeo
O televisor não liga. ● Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada
de parede e ao televisor.
● verifique se a tomada de parede está a funcionar devidamente.
● Tente carregar no botão POWER no televisor para ter a certeza de que o telecomando
está a funcionar correctamente. Se o televisor ligar, o problema pode ser causado pelo
telecomando. Para resolver o problema do telecomando, consulte ‘O telecomando não
funciona’ abaixo.
O televisor desliga-se
automaticamente.
● Verifique se o Temporizador está definido para Lig. no menu Configurar.
● Se ligar o televisor ao PC, verifique as definições de alimentação do PC.
● Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada
de parede e ao televisor.
● Se não houver qualquer sinal durante 10 a 15 minutos com a ligação por antena/cabo,
o televisor desliga-se.
Sem imagem/vídeo. ● Verifique as ligações dos cabos (remova e ligue novamente todos os cabos do
televisor e dispositivos externos)
● defina a saída de vídeo do dispositivo externo (cabo/set top box, dvd, Blu-ray,
etc.) para corresponder às ligações de entrada do televisor. Por exemplo, saída do
dispositivo externo: HdMI, entrada do televisor: HdMI.
● Certifique-se de que o dispositivo está ligado.
● Certifique-se de que selecciona a fonte correcta do televisor, carregando no botão
SOURCE do telecomando.
ligação rF (cabo/antena)
Impossível receber todos os
canais.
● Certifique-se de que o cabo de antena está correctamente ligado.
● Tente Plug & Play para adicionar canais disponíveis à lista de canais.
vá para MENU - Configurar - Plug & Play e aguarde até que todos os canais
disponíveis sejam memorizados.
● verifique se a antena está na posição correcta.
A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, bloco pequeno, pontos,
pixelização
● A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem,
especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de
acção.
● Um nível de sinal baixo pode causar distorção de imagem. Não é um problema do
televisor.
ligação ao PC
Mensagem ‘Função Não
disponível’.
● defina a resolução de saída do computador e frequência para que corresponda às
resoluções suportadas pelo televisor.
O computador é sempre
apresentado na lista de fontes
mesmo que não esteja ligado.
● Isto é normal; o computador é sempre apresentado na lista de fontes mesmo que um
computador não esteja ligado.
O vídeo está a funcionar
correctamente, mas não há áudio
com ligação HDMI.
● verifique as definições da saída de áudio no seu computador.
BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:01Português - 32
Problema Solução
Outros
A imagem não é apresentada em
ecrã inteiro.
● Serão apresentadas barras pretas em ambos os lados nos canais HD sempre que
forem apresentados conteúdos Sd (4:3) actualizados.
● Serão apresentadas barras pretas na parte superior e inferior dos filmes que tenham
um formato diferente do seu televisor.
● Ajuste a opção de tamanho da imagem no seu dispositivo externo ou televisor para
ecrã inteiro.
O telecomando não funciona. ● Substitua as pilhas do telecomando com o tipo de polaridade correcto (+ -).
● limpe a janela de transmissão localizada na parte de cima do telecomando.
● Tente apontar o telecomando directamente para o televisor a 5-6 pés (1,5 m a 1,8 m)
de distância.
Não é possível controlar o
volume e a energia do televisor
com o telecomando da caixa de
televisão por cabo/set top box.
● Programe o telecomando da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para funcionar
com o televisor. Consulte o manual do utilizador cabo/satélite para identificar o código
do televisor SAMSUNG.
Mensagem ‘Função Não
disponível’.
● verifique a resolução suportada pelo televisor e ajuste a resolução de saída do
dispositivo externo em conformidade. Consulte as definições de resolução neste
manual.
Cheiro a plástico proveniente do
televisor.
● este cheiro é normal e dissipa-se com o passar do tempo.
TV Informações sobre o sinal
não se encontra disponível no
menu Auto-diagnóstico.
● Esta função encontra-se apenas disponível para canais digitais com uma ligação de
antena (rF/coaxial).
O televisor está inclinado para a
esquerda ou para a direita.
● remova a base do suporte do televisor e monte novamente.
Não é possível montar a base do
suporte.
● Certifique-se de que o televisor se encontra sobre uma superfície plana. Se
não conseguir retirar os parafusos do televisor, utilize uma chave de parafusos
magnetizada.
O menu do canal está a cinzento.
(indisponível)
● O menu Canal só está disponível quando a fonte de Tv está seleccionada.
Perde as suas definições após
30 minutos ou sempre que o
televisor for desligado.
● Se o televisor estiver no modo Demo Loja, as definições de áudio e imagem são
repostas a cada 30 minutos. Altere o modo Demo Loja para o modo Uso Doméstico
no procedimento Plug & Play. Prima o botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo TV,
vá até MENU → Configurar → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
Perda intermitente de áudio ou
vídeo.
● Verifique as ligações dos cabos e ligue novamente.
● Pode ser devido à utilização de cabos excessivamente rígidos ou finos. Certifique-se
de que os cabos são suficientemente flexíveis para uma utilização a longo prazo. Para
montagem na parede, recomenda-se a utilização de cabos com conectores de 90
graus.
Pode ver pequenas partículas se
olhar de perto para a extremidade
da moldura em volta do ecrã do
televisor.
● Tal faz parte do design do produto e não constitui um defeito.
‘Sinal codificado’ ou ‘Sem sinal/
Sinal fraco’ com CAM CArD (CI).
● Verifique se o CAM tem o CI CArD colocado na ranhura da interface comum.
● retire o CAM do televisor e introduza-o na ranhura novamente.
Quando desligado e após 45
minutos, o televisor liga-se.
● É normal, o televisor utiliza a função OTA (Over The Air) para actualizar o firmware
transferido enquanto vê televisão.
Problema imagem/som
recorrente.
● Verifique e altere o sinal/fonte.
N O lCd TFT utiliza um painel composto por pixels secundários que requerem tecnologia sofisticada para serem reproduzidos.
No entanto, podem existir alguns pixels claros ou escuros no ecrã. estes pixels não afectam o desempenho do produto.
BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:02Português - 33
¦ Características técnicas
Nome do modelo LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431
Tamanho do Ecrã
(Diagonal) 19 " 22 "
Resolução do PC
(Ideal) 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz
Som
(Saída) 3W X 2 3W X 2
Dimensões (LxAxP)
Caixa
Com base
477 x 65 x 327 mm
477 x 180 x 362 mm
558 x 75 x 384 mm
558 x 216 x 426 mm
Peso
Com base 5 kg 7 kg
Considerações ambientais
Temperatura de funcionamento
Humidade de funcionamento
Temperatura de armazenamento
Humidade de armazenamento
10°C a 40°C (50°F a 104°F)
10% a 80%, sem condensação
-20°C a 45°C (-4°F a 113°F)
5% a 95%, sem condensação
Base rotativa
esquerda / Direita 0˚
N O design e as características técnicas estão sujeitos a alterações sem aviso prévio.
N Trata-se de um aparelho digital de Classe B.
N Para informações sobre a fonte de alimentação e o consumo de energia, veja a etiqueta colada ao produto.
BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:02Slike in ilustracije v tem uporabniškem priročniku so samo za referenco: dejanski izdelek je lahko videti drugačen.
Obliko in tehnične lastnosti lahko spremenimo brez predhodnega obvestila.
❑ Licenca
TruSurround HD, SrS in simbol so blagovne znamke podjetja SrS labs, Inc. Tehnologija TruSurround HD
je vgrajena pod licenco podjetja SrS labs, Inc.
Izdelano pod licenco podjetja dolby laboratories. dolby in simbol dd sta blagovni znamki podjetja dolby
laboratories.
❑ Obvestilo o digitalni televiziji
1. Funkcije, ki so povezane z digitalnim televizijskim signalom (dvB), so na voljo samo v državah/na območjih, kjer se oddajajo
digitalni prizemni signali (MPEG2 in MPEG4 AvC), ali kjer je mogoč dostop do združljive storitve kabelske televizije dvB-C
(MPEG2 in MPEG4 AAC). Pri lokalnem trgovcu preverite, ali imate dostop do signala dvB-T ali dvB-C.
2. dvB-T je standard dvB evropskega konzorcija za oddajanje digitalne prizemne televizije, dvB-C pa je standard za oddajanje
digitalne televizije prek kabla. v tej specifikaciji pa niso vključene nekatere funkcije, kot so EPG (elektronski programski
vodnik), vOd (video na zahtevo) itd. Torej jih zaenkrat še ni mogoče uporabljati.
3. Čeprav je televizor v skladu z najnovejšima standardoma dvB-T in dvB-C [avgust 2008], ni mogoče jamčiti združljivosti s
prihodnjimi sistemi digitalne prizemne televizije in digitalne kabelske televizije.
4. Nekateri ponudniki kabelske televizije morda takšno storitev dodatno zaračunavajo in se boste zato morda morali strinjati z
določbami in pogoji njihovega poslovanja. To je odvisno od države/območja, kjer uporabljate televizor.
5. v nekaterih državah ali regijah nekatere funkcije digitalne televizije morda niso na voljo in digitalna kabelska televizija morda
ne bo delovala pravilno pri nekaterih ponudnikih kabelskih storitev.
6. Za dodatne informacije se obrnite na lokalni center SAMSUNG za pomoč strankam.
❑ Varnostni ukrepi pri prikazu mirujoče slike
Mirujoča slika lahko trajno poškoduje televizijski zaslon
● Mirujoče in delno mirujoče slike ne prikazujte na zaslonu lCd dlje kot 2 uri, saj lahko povzroči zadrževanje slike na zaslonu.
Tako zadrževanje slike se imenuje tudi “ožig zaslona”. da bi se izognili takemu zadrževanju slike, pri prikazovanju mirujoče
slike zmanjšajte stopnjo svetlosti in kontrasta zaslona.
● dolgotrajno gledanje slike z razmerjem stranic 4:3 na televizorju lCd lahko na levi in desni strani ter na
sredini zaslona povzroči sledi okvirja zaradi različnega svetlobnega oddajanja na zaslonu. Predvajanje dvdja ali uporaba igralne konzole ima lahko podobne učinke. Garancija ne vključuje poškodb, ki so nastale na
tak način.
● Če je na zaslonu dlje časa prikazana mirujoča računalniška slika ali slika iz video igrice, to lahko povzroči delni prikaz
zakasnele slike. Ta učinek preprečite tako, da pri prikazovanju mirujočih slih zmanjšate svetlost in kontrast.
© 2010 Samsung electronics Co., ltd. All rights reserved.
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:02Slovenščina - 1
❑ Simbol
N O T
Opomba Gumb na dotik Gumb TOOlS Pritisnite
SPLOŠNE INFORMACIJE
■ Ogled nadzorne plošče.........................................................2
■ Dodatna oprema...................................................................3
■ Ogled plošče s priključki.......................................................4
■ daljinski upravljalnik .............................................................6
■ vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik..............................6
UPRAVLJANJE
■ Ogled menijev.......................................................................7
■ Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti............................8
■ Funkcija Plug & Play.............................................................8
■ Ogled prikaza .......................................................................9
UPRAVLJANJE KANALOV
■ Konfiguriranje menija Channel .............................................9
■ Upravljanje kanalov ...........................................................12
UPRAVLJANJE SLIKE
■ Konfiguriranje menija Picture..............................................14
■ Uporaba televizorja kot računalniškega zaslona ................16
■ Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom ................................17
UPRAVLJANJE ZVOKA
■ Konfiguriranje menija Sound ..............................................18
■ Izbira zvočnega načina.......................................................19
NASTAVITEV
■ Konfiguriranje menija Setup ...............................................20
VHOD / PODPORA
■ Konfiguriranje menija Input.................................................23
■ Konfiguriranje menija Support ............................................23
PRIPOROČILA ZA UPORABO
■ Funkcija teleteksta..............................................................25
■ Nastavitev stojala (samo 19-palčni model).........................26
■ Nastavitev kota televizorja (samo 19-palčni model)...........26
■ Namestitev naprav, skladnih s standardom vESA
(samo 19-palčni model)......................................................27
■ Uporaba okrasnih pokrovov (samo 19-palčni model).........27
■ Namestitev stojala ..............................................................28
■ Namestitev kompleta za pritrditev na steno........................28
■ Uporaba ključavnice Kensington proti kraji.........................28
■ Zaščita prostora za namestitev...........................................29
■ Pritrditev televizorja na steno .............................................29
■ Odpravljanje težav..............................................................30
■ Specifikacije........................................................................33
VSEBINA
Slovenščina
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:03Slovenščina - 2
SPLOŠNE INFORMACIJE
¦ Ogled nadzorne plošče
N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela.
N Gumb lahko uporabite tako, da pritisnete gumbe na stranski plošči.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCE E: Za preklapljanje med vsemi razpoložljivimi vhodnimi viri. Ta gumb v meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte kot gumb
ENTERE na daljinskem upravljalniku.
2 MENU: Pritisnite za ogled menija na zaslonu s funkcijami televizorja.
3Y: Pritisnite za znižanje ali zvišanje glasnosti.
Na meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte gumba Y, kot uporabljate gumba ◄ in ► na daljinskem upravljalniku.
4Z: Pritisnite za menjavo kanalov. Na meniju na zaslonu uporabljajte gumba Z, kot uporabljate gumba ▼ in ▲ na
daljinskem upravljalniku.
5 P (Napajanje): Pritisnite za vklop in izklop televizorja.
6 SENZOR DALJINSKEGA UPRAVLJALNIKA: daljinski upravljalnik usmerite proti tej točki na televizorju.
7 INDIKATOR NAPAJANJA: Utripa in se izklopi, ko je napajanje vklopljeno, in začne svetiti v stanju pripravljenosti.
8 ZVOČNIKA
BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:03Slovenščina - 3
¦ Dodatna oprema
daljinski upravljalnik in bateriji
(AAA x 2)
Napajalni kabel
Pokrov za podstavek
(samo 22-palčni model)
Čistilna krpa
(M4 X l16)
Oprema za pritrditev na steno
(samo 19-palčni model)
Okrasni pokrov
(samo 19-palčni model)
vijak za stojalo x 4
(samo 22-palčni model)
● Uporabnikova navodila ● Garancijska kartica ● varnostni priročnik
N Preverite, ali so televizorju lCd priloženi naslednji predmeti. Če kateri predmet manjka, se obrnite na prodajalca.
N Garancijska kartica, varnostni priročnik (ni na voljo na vseh lokacijah)
N Barva in oblika predmetov sta odvisni od modela.
BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:04Slovenščina - 4
¦ Ogled plošče s priključki
N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela.
N vsakič ko na televizor priključite zunanjo napravo, mora biti napajanje enote izklopljeno.
N Ko priključujete zunanjo napravo, mora biti barva priključka enaka barvi kabla.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
– Za povezavo z digitalno avdio komponento, kot je sprejemnik domačega kina.
N Če so povezane vtičnice HdMI IN, potem vtičnica DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) na televizorju omogoča samo izhod
2-kanalnega zvoka. Za 5.1-kanalni zvok povežite optično vtičnico na predvajalniku dvd/Blu-ray ali kabelskem/satelitskem
sprejemniku neposredno z ojačevalnikom ali domačim kinom in ne s televizorjem.
2 SERVICE
– Spojnik za nadgradnjo programske opreme.
3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC]
– Za povezavo z vtičnico HdMI naprave z izhodom HdMI.
N za povezavo med HDMI in HDMI ne potrebujete dodatne avdio povezave.
N Kaj je HdMI?
vmesnik HdMI (High-definition Multimedia Interface) omogoča prenos digitalnih avdio in video signalov prek enega kabla.
HdMI in dvI se razlikujeta v tem, da je naprava HdMI manjša, da ima vgrajeno funkcijo kodiranja HdCP (zaščita pred
kopiranjem za širokopasovno digitalno vsebino) in da podpira večkanalni digitalni avdio.
N vtičnico HDMI / PC IN [HDMI(DVI)] uporabite za povezavo dvI z zunanjo napravo. U Za video povezavo uporabite kabel
za povezavo vrat DVI in HDMI ali adapter DVI-HDMI (povezava vrat DVI in HDMI), za avdio povezavo pa uporabite
vtičnico HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO]. Če uporabljate kabel HdMI/dvI, uporabite vtičnico HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)].
HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO]
– Za povezavo z vtičnico za avdio izhod na računalniku.
– Avdio izhodi DVI za zunanje naprave.
HDMI / PC IN [PC]
– Za povezavo z vtičnico za video izhod na računalniku.
N Če vaš računalnik podpira povezavo HdMI, ga lahko povežete s priključkom HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)].
N Če vaš računalnik podpira povezavo dvI, ga lahko povežete s priključkom HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO].
4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
– Priključite kabel rCA na ustrezno zunanjo napravo A/v, kot je videorekorder, predvajalnik dvd ali videokamera.
– Priključite avdio kabla rCA na [R-AUDIO-L] na televizorju in druga konca na ustrezne spojnike avdio izhoda na napravi
A/V.
6
7
1 2 3 4
0 9 8
5
[Hrbtna plošča televizorja]
Vhod za
napajanje
BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:04Slovenščina - 5
5 ANT IN
– Za povezavo z antenskim ali kabelskim televizijskim sistemom.
6 reža za SPLOŠNI VMESNIK
– Če pri nekaterih kanalih ni vstavljena ‘kartica za splošni vmesnik’, se na zaslonu prikaže sporočilo ‘Scrambled Signal’.
– v 2–3 minutah se prikažejo informacije o združitvi s telefonsko številko, Id-jem kartice za splošni vmesnik, Id-jem
gostitelja in druge informacije. Če se prikaže sporočilo o napaki, se obrnite na ponudnika storitev.
– Ko je konfiguracija informacij o kanalih končana, se prikaže sporočilo ‘Updating Completed’, kar pomeni, da je seznam
kanalov posodobljen.
N Kartico za splošni vmesnik dobite pri lokalnem ponudniku kabelske televizije. Kartico za splošni vmesnik odstranite tako,
da jo previdno izvlečete z rokami, saj se pri padcu lahko poškoduje.
N Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v smeri, ki je označena na njej.
N Kje se nahaja reža COMMON INTERFACE, je odvisno od modela.
N CAM ni podprt v nekaterih državah in regijah. Preverite pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu.
7 KLJUČAVNICA KENSINGTON (odvisno od modela)
– Ključavnica Kensington (izbirno) je naprava, ki se uporablja za fizično pritrditev sistema pri uporabi na javnem mestu. Če
želite uporabljati napravo za zaklepanje, se obrnite na trgovca, pri katerem ste kupili televizor.
N Kam se namesti ključavnico Kensington, je odvisno od modela.
8 Vtič za slušalke
– Slušalke lahko priključite na izhod za slušalke na televizorju. Ko so priključene slušalke, je zvok iz vgrajenih zvočnikov
onemogočen.
9 COMPONENT IN
– Priključite komponentne video kable (izbirno) na spojnik komponente (PR, PB, Y) na hrbtni strani televizorja in druge konce
na ustrezne spojnike video izhoda komponente na dTv ali predvajalniku dvd.
– Če želite priključiti tako sprejemnik kot dTv (ali predvajalnik dvd), priključite sprejemnik na dTv (ali predvajalnik dvd)
ter dTv (ali predvajalnik dvd) priključite na spojnik komponente (PR, PB, Y) na televizorju.
– Spojniki PR, PB in Y na komponentnih napravah (dTv ali predvajalnik dvd) imajo včasih oznako Y, B-Y in r-Y ali Y, Cb in
Cr.
– Priključite avdio kabla rCA (izbirno) na [R-AUDIO-L] na hrbtni strani televizorja in druga konca na ustrezne spojnike
avdio izhoda na dTv ali predvajalniku dvd.
0 EXT (RGB)
Spojnik
Input Izhod
Video Avdio (l / D) rGB Video + avdio (l / D)
EXT O O O Na voljo je samo izhod televizorja ali DTV.
– vhodi oziroma izhodi za zunanje naprave, kot so videorekorder, predvajalnik dvd, video igralna naprava ali predvajalnik
video plošč.
BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:04Slovenščina - 6
¦ Daljinski upravljalnik
N daljinski upravljalnik lahko uporabljate do oddaljenosti približno 7 m od televizorja.
N Na delovanje daljinskega upravljalnika lahko vpliva močna svetloba.
N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela.
1 POWER: Gumb za televizor v
stanju pripravljenosti.
2 ŠTEVILSKI GUMBI : Pritisnite za
menjavo kanala.
3 FAV.CH: Za prikaz seznamov
priljubljenih kanalov na zaslonu.
4Y: Pritisnite za znižanje ali
zvišanje glasnosti.
5 SOURCE: Pritisnite za prikaz in
izberite video vire, ki so na voljo.
6 INFO : Pritisnite za prikaz informacij
na televizijskem zaslonu.
7 TOOLS: Za hitro izbiro pogosto
uporabljenih funkcij.
8 CH LIST: Za prikaz seznama
kanalov na zaslonu
9 BARVNI GUMBI: Te gumbe
uporabljajte v menijih Channel list
itd.
! TV : Za neposredno izbiro načina
televizorja.
@ PRE-CH: za vrnitev na prej gledani
kanal.
# MUTEM: Pritisnite za začasen
izklop zvoka.
$ P : Pritisnite za menjavo
kanalov.
% MENU: Za prikaz glavnega menija
na zaslonu.
^ GUIDE: Prikaz elektronskega
programskega vodnika (EPG)
& RETURN: Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni
* NAVZGOR▲ / NAVZDOL▼ / LEVO◄
/ DESNO► / ENTERE: Uporabite za
izbiranje elementov menija na zaslonu in
spreminjanje vrednosti menija.
( EXIT: Pritisnite za izhod iz menija.
) SUBT. : Prikaz digitalnih podnapisov
a AD: Izbira zvočnega opisa.
Funkcije teleteksta
5 0: za izbiro načina teleteksta (lIST/
FlOF)
6 5: za prikaz teleteksta
7 4: za izbiro velikosti teleteksta
8 8: za shranjevanje teleteksta
9 za izbiro teme Fastext
0/: izmenična izbira možnosti
Teletext, Double ali Mix.
! :: za izhod iz teleteksta
@ 1 : podstran teleteksta
$ 2 : naslednja stran teleteksta
3 : prejšnja stran teleteksta
% 6 : za kazalo teleteksta
& 9 : za zadržanje strani teleteksta
( 7 : Za preklic teleteksta
¦ Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik
1. Odprite pokrovček na hrbtni strani daljinskega upravljalnika, kot je prikazano na sliki.
2. Vstavite dve bateriji AAA.
N Poskrbite, da sta pola ‘+’ in ‘–’ baterije usmerjena skladno s prikazom v predelu za
baterije.
3. Pokrovček namestite nazaj.
N Če daljinskega upravljalnika ne boste uporabljali dalj časa, odstranite baterije in jih
shranite na hladnem in suhem mestu.
N Če daljinski upravljalnik ne deluje, preverite naslednje:
● Ali je televizor vklopljen?
● Ali so poli baterij ‘plus’ in ‘minus’ zamenjani?
● Ali sta bateriji prazni?
● Ali je prišlo do izpada napajanja oziroma je napajalni kabel izključen?
● Ali je v bližini posebna fluorescentna luč ali neonska tabla?
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:05Slovenščina - 7
UPRAVLJANJE
¦ Ogled menijev
Pred uporabo televizorja sledite spodnjim korakom, da se naučite krmariti po meniju in izbrati in
prilagoditi različne funkcije.
1. Pritisnite gumb MENU.
Na zaslonu se prikaže glavni meni. Na levi strani so ikone: Picture, Sound, Channel ,
Setup, Input, Application, Support.
2. Za izbiro ene od ikon pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼.
Za dostop do podmenija ikone pritiskajte gumb ◄ ali ►.
3. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼ za pomik na menijske elemente.
za odprtje elementov v meniju pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
4. Pritiskajte gumb ▲/▼/◄/►, da spremenite izbrane elemente.
N Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni pritisnite gumb RETURN.
5. Pritisnite gumb EXIT za izhod iz menija.
Uporaba gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku
Gumb Delovanje Gumb Delovanje
MENUm Za prikaz glavnega menija na zaslonu.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
Za premikanje kazalca in izbiro elementa.
za izbiro trenutno izbranega elementa.
za potrditev nastavitve.
RUTURNR Za vrnitev v prejšnji meni.
EXITe za izhod iz menija na zaslonu.
Primer: nastavitev svetlosti televizorja v slikovnem meniju
Nastavitev svetlosti na 80
1. Za prikaz menija pritisnite gumb MENU.
2. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Picture.
3. S pritiskom gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Brightness.
4. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
5. Pritiskajte gumb ◄ ali ►, da svetlost nastavite na 80.
6. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Pritisnite gumb EXIT za izhod iz menija.
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Picture
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Picture
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45 ►
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Napredne nastavitve
Picture Options
Picture reset
Picture
U Move L Adjust E enter R return
Brightness 45
U Move L Adjust E enter R return
Brightness 80
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Picture
BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:05Slovenščina - 8
¦ Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti
Televizor lahko preklopite v stanje pripravljenosti in s tem zmanjšate porabo energije. Stanje pripravljenosti je uporabno, če želite
začasno prekiniti gledanje (na primer med jedjo).
1. Pritisnite gumb POWERP na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Zaslon se izklopi in na televizorju začne svetiti indikator stanja pripravljenosti.
2. Za ponoven vklop televizorja enostavno znova pritisnite gumb POWERP.
N Televizorja ne puščajte v stanju pripravljenosti dlje časa (na primer, ko greste na dopust). Priporočamo tudi, da izključite
napajanje in anteno.
¦ Funkcija Plug & Play
Pri prvem vklopu televizorja se samodejno prikažejo osnovne nastavitve.
1. Pritisnite gumb POWER na daljinskem upravljalniku. Prikaže se sporočilo You can set the
menu language..
2. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezen jezik. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
3. Z gumbom ◄ ali ► izberite Store Demo ali Home Use, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Priporočamo, da televizor nastavite na način Home Use, saj to zagotavlja najboljšo
sliko v domačem okolju.
N Store Demo je namenjen samo uporabi v trgovinah.
N Če je naprava po pomoti nastavljena na način Store Demo in se želite vrniti na Home Use (Standard): Na Tv-ju pritisnite
gumb za glasnost. Ko je na zaslonu prikaz glasnosti, 5 sekund držite pritisnjen gumb MENU na televizorju.
4. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezno državo. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb
ENTERE.
5. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼, da izberete Air ali Cable, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Air: Air kot vrsta signala antene.
Cable: Cable kot vrsta signala antene.
6. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali▼ izberite kanal, ki ga želite shraniti. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Start.
N Digital & Analogue: digitalni in analogni kanali.
Digital: digitalni kanali.
Analogue: analogni kanali.
N Ko vir antene nastavljate na Cable, pridete do koraka, pri katerem lahko nastavite vrednost za iskanje digitalnih kanalov.
Za več informacij si oglejte Channel → Auto Store.
N Iskanje kanalov se bo samodejno začelo in končalo.
N Če želite shranjevanje kadar koli prekiniti, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Ko so shranjeni vsi kanali, ki so na voljo, se prikaže sporočilo Set the Clock Mode..
7. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite Auto, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Če izberete Manual, se prikaže Set current date and time.
N Če ste prejeli digitalni signal, se bo čas samodejno nastavil. Če se ne, izberite Manual, da nastavite uro. (Oglejte si 20.
stran.)
8. Na voljo je način povezave za najboljšo kakovost visoke ločljivosti. Ko potrdite način, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
9. Prikaže se sporočilo Enjoy your TV!. Ko končate, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Za ponastavitev te funkcije ...
1. Za prikaz menija pritisnite gumb MENU. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Setup, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
2. znova pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Plug & Play.
3. vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je 0-0-0-0.
N Če želite spremeniti številko PIN, uporabite funkcijo Change PIN. (Oglejte si 22. stran.)
N Funkcija Plug & Play je na voljo samo v načinu televizorja.
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu language : English ►
E enter
BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:05Slovenščina - 9
¦ Ogled prikaza
Prikaz označuje trenutni kanal in stanje določenih zvočnih in slikovnih nastavitev.
O za ogled informacij pritisnite gumb INFO.
Pritisnite gumb INFO na daljinskem upravljalniku. Na televizorju se bodo prikazali kanal,
vrsta zvoka in stanje določenih slikovnih in zvočnih nastavitev.
● ▲, ▼: Za ogled drugih informacij o kanalu. Če se želite pomakniti na trenutno izbran
kanal, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
● ◄, ►: Ogledate si lahko informacije o želeni oddaji na trenutnem kanalu.
N znova pritisnite gumb INFO ali počakajte približno 10 sekund, da prikaz samodejno
izgine.
UPRAVLJANJE KANALOV
¦ Konfiguriranje menija Channel
❑ Country
N Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
Analogue Channel
Spremenite lahko državo analognih kanalov.
Digital Channel
Spremenite lahko državo digitalnih kanalov.
❑ Auto Store
Poiščete lahko razpoložljive frekvenčne razpone (razpoložljivost je odvisna od države).
Samodejno dodeljene številke programov mogoče ne ustrezajo dejanskim ali želenim številkam programov.
N Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos PIN-a.
Air / Cable
Vir antene za shranjevanje
● Digital & Analogue: digitalni in analogni kanali.
● Digital: digitalni kanali.
● Analogue: analogni kanali.
Če izberete ‘Cable → Digital & Analogue’ ali ‘Cable → Digital’
vnesite vrednost za iskanje kabelskih kanalov.
● Search Mode → Full / Network / Quick
N Quick
– Network ID: za prikaz identifikacijske kode omrežja.
– Frequency: za prikaz frekvence kanala. (razlikuje se od države do države.)
– Modulation: za prikaz vrednosti modulacije, ki so na voljo.
– Symbol Rate: za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.
N Poišče vse kanale aktivnih televizijskih postaj in jih shrani v pomnilnik televizorja.
N Če želite ustaviti izvajanje funkcije Auto Store, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Prikaže se sporočilo Stop Auto Store?.
S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Yes, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Country ►
Auto Store
Manual Store
Cable Search Option
Now & Next Guide
Full Guide
default Guide : Full Guide
Channel
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
life On venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ¦ INFO
BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:06Slovenščina - 10
❑ Manual Store
N ročno poišče kanal in ga shrani v pomnilnik televizorja.
N Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos PIN-a.
Digital Channel
ročno shranjevanje digitalnih kanalov.
N Digital Channel je na voljo samo v načinu dTv.
● Channel: Z gumboma ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko kanala.
● Frequency: s številskimi gumbi nastavite frekvenco.
● Bandwidth: Z gumboma ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite pasovno širino.
N Ko se iskanje dokonča, so posodobljeni kanali v seznamu kanalov.
Analogue Channel
ročno shranjevanje analognega kanala.
● Programme (številka programa, ki naj bo dodeljena kanalu): z gumbom ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko
programa.
● Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost barvnega sistema.
● Sound System → BG / DK / I / L: z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost zvočnega sistema.
● Channel (če poznate številko kanala za shranjevanje): S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite C (običajna antena) ali
S (kabelski kanal). Pritisnite gumb ► in nato s pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼ ali številskih gumbov (0~9) izberite želeno številko.
N Številko kanala lahko izberete tudi neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov (0~9).
N Če ni zvoka ali le-ta ni normalen, znova izberite zahtevani zvočni standard.
● Search (če ne poznate številk kanalov): za začetek iskanja pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼. Kanalnik pregleda frekvenčni razpon,
dokler se na zaslonu ne prikaže prvi kanal ali izbrani kanal.
● Store (če shranite kanal in z njim povezano številko programa): Nastavite na OK s pritiskanjem gumba ENTERE.
N Kanalni način
– P (programski način): Po končani naravnavi so oddajnim postajam na vašem območju dodeljene številke položajev od
P00 do P99. Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom številke položaja v tem načinu.
– C (način zunanje antene): Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom dodeljene številke za posamezno oddajno postajo v tem načinu.
– S (način kabelskega kanala): Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom dodeljene številke za vsak kabelski kanal v tem načinu.
❑ Cable Search Option (odvisno od države)
Za nastavitev dodatnih možnosti iskanja za kabelsko omrežje, kot sta frekvenca in hitrost simbolov.
● Frequency (Start ~ Stop): za prikaz frekvence kanala.
● Modulation: za prikaz vrednosti modulacije, ki so na voljo.
● Symbol Rate: za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.
❑ Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
Informacije EPG (elektronski programski vodnik) posredujejo izdajatelji televizijskega programa. Informacije o programu so lahko
zastarele ali jih ni, kar je posledica oddajanja informacij določene televizijske postaje. Zaslon se bo dinamično posodobil takoj, ko
bodo na voljo nove informacije.
N Za podrobne postopke uporabe funkcij Now & Next Guide in Full Guide si oglejte opise na 11. strani.
O Meni vodnika lahko prikažete tudi enostavno s pritiskom gumba GUIDE. (Za konfiguriranje funkcije Default Guide si oglejte
opise.)
Now & Next Guide
Za šest kanalov, ki so navedeni v levem stolpcu, prikaže informacije o trenutnem in naslednjem programu.
Full Guide
Informacije o programu so prikazane za eno uro. Prikazane so informacije o dveh urah programa, po katerih se lahko pomikate
naprej ali nazaj glede na čas.
BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:06Slovenščina - 11
❑ Default Guide → Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
Odločite se lahko, ali želite prikazati Now & Next Guide ali Full Guide, ko pritisnete gumb GUIDE na daljinskem upravljalniku.
❑ Channel List
Za podrobne postopke uporabe možnosti Channel List si oglejte navodila ‘Upravljanje kanalov’.
O Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba CH LIST na daljinskem upravljalniku.
❑ Channel Mode
Ko pritisnete gumb P >/<, preklopite med kanali, ki so na seznamu izbranih kanalov.
Added Ch.
preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu shranjenih kanalov.
Favourite Ch.
preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu priljubljenih kanalov.
❑ Fine Tune
Če je sprejem jasen, fina naravnava kanala ni potrebna, ker se samodejno izvede med iskanjem in shranjevanjem. Če je signal
šibak ali popačen, boste kanal mogoče morali ročno fino naravnati.
N Shranjeni fino naravnani kanali so označeni z zvezdico ‘*’ na desni strani številke kanala na traku s kanalom.
N Če želite ponastaviti fino naravnavo, izberite Reset s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Fino naravnavo je mogoče uporabiti samo pri analognih Tv-kanalih.
Uporaba Now & Next Guide / Full Guide
Za ... Storite naslednje ...
Gledanje programa s seznama EPG S pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼, ◄, ► izberite program.
Izhod iz vodnika Pritisnite modri gumb
Če je izbran naslednji program, je dodan na razpored s prikazano ikono ure. Če znova pritisnete gumb ENTERE, s pritiskanjem
gumbov ◄, ► izberite Cancel Schedules. določanje razporeda se prekliče in ikona ure izgine.
Ogled informacij o programu S pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼, ◄, ► izberite želeni program.
Ko je označen želeni program, pritisnite gumb INFO.
Naslov programa je na zgornjem osrednjem delu zaslona.
Za podrobne informacije kliknite gumb INFO. Podrobne informacije vključujejo številko kanala, čas predvajanja, informacije o
statusni vrstici, starševskem nadzoru, kakovosti videa (Hd/Sd), zvočnih načinih, podnaslovih ali teletekstu, jeziku podnaslovov ali
teleteksta ter kratek povzetek označenega programa. “...” se prikaže, če je povzetek dolg.
Preklapljanje med možnostima Now & Next Guide
in Full Guide
Pritiskajte rdeči gumb.
v možnosti Full Guide
Hiter pomik nazaj (24 ur).
Hiter pomik naprej (24 ur).
Pritiskajte zeleni gumb.
Pritiskajte rumeni gumb.
Now & Next Guide
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Now Next
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Street Hypn..
Watch
INFO Information ■ Full Guide ■ Exit
Full Guide
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
No Information
Freshmen O..
Watch
INFO Information ■ Now / Next ■ +24 Hours ■ Exit
BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:06Slovenščina - 12
¦ Upravljanje kanalov
S tem menijem lahko dodate/izbrišete ali nastavite priljubljene kanale in uporabljate programski
vodnik za digitalne prenose.
All Channels
Prikaže vse trenutno razpoložljive kanale.
Added Channels
Prikaz vseh dodanih kanalov.
Favourites
Prikaz vseh priljubljenih kanalov.
O Če želite izbrati priljubljene kanale, ki ste jih nastavili, pritisnite gumb FAV.CH na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Programmed
Prikaz trenutno rezerviranih oddaj.
N Izberite kanal na zaslonu All Channels, Added Channels ali Favourites s pritiskanjem gumba ▲/▼ in pritiskom gumba
ENTERE. Nato lahko gledate izbrani kanal.
N Uporaba barvnih gumbov skupaj z možnostjo Channel List
– rdeči (Channel Type): Preklapljanje med možnostmi TV, Radio, Data / Other in All.
– zeleni (Zoom): Povečanje ali pomanjšanje številke kanala.
– rumeni (Select): Izbira več seznamov kanalov. Istočasno lahko dodate/izbrišete več kanalov, jih dodate priljubljenim/
izbrišete izmed priljubljenih ali jih zaklenete/odklenete. Če želite istočasno nastaviti vse izbrane kanale, izberite želene
kanale in pritisnite rumeni gumb. levo od izbranih kanalov se prikaže znak c.
– TOOLS (Tools): Za prikaz menija Delete (ali Add), Add to Favourite (ali Delete from Favourite), Lock (ali Unlock),
Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Sort, Edit Channel Number, Select All (ali Deselect All), Auto Store. (Meniji
možnosti so lahko drugačni, odvisno od okoliščin.)
N Ikone stanja kanala
● A : analogni kanal.
● c: kanal, izbran s pritiskom rumenega gumba.
● : kanal, ki je nastavljen kot priljubljeni.
● ( : oddaja, ki se trenutno predvaja.
● \ : zaklenjen kanal.
● ) : rezervirana oddaja.
Meni z možnostmi seznama kanalov (v možnosti All Channels/Added Channels/Favourites)
N Če želite uporabljati meni z možnostmi, pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
N Elementi menija z možnostmi se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od stanja kanala.
Add/Delete
lahko izbrišete ali dodate kanal, da prikažete želene kanale.
N vsi izbrisani kanali bodo prikazani v meniju All Channels.
N Če je kanal obarvan sivo, to pomeni, da je bil izbrisan.
N Meni Add se prikaže samo pri izbrisanih kanalih.
N Na enak način lahko izbrišete kanal v meniju Added Channels ali Favourite.
Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite
Kanale, ki jih pogosto gledate, lahko nastavite kot priljubljene.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Nastavite lahko tudi dodajanje (ali
brisanje izmed) priljubljenih, tako, da izberete Tools → Add to Favourite (ali Delete from
Favourite).
N Prikazan bo simbol ‘ ’ in kanal bo nastavljen kot priljubljeni.
N vsi izbrisani kanali bodo prikazani v meniju Favourite.
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Added Channels
All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Added Channels
All ■ Channel Type ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools
Delete
Add to Favourite
Lock
Timer Viewing
Edit Channel Name
Sort
▼
BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:07Slovenščina - 13
Lock/Unlock
Kanal lahko zaklenete, tako da ga ni mogoče izbrati in gledati. Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, če je možnost Child Lock nastavljena
na On. (Oglejte si 22. stran.)
N Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
N Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je 0-0-0-0. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN.
N Prikazan bo simbol ‘\’ in kanal bo zaklenjen.
Timer Viewing
Če rezervirate oddajo, ki si jo želite ogledati, se kanal na seznamu kanalov samodejno preklopi v rezerviranega, tudi če gledate
drug kanal. Če želite rezervirati oddajo, najprej nastavite trenutni čas. (Oglejte si 20. stran.)
N rezervirati je mogoče samo shranjene kanale.
N Kanal, dan, mesec, leto, uro in minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem
upravljalniku.
N rezerviranje programa bo prikazano v meniju Programmed.
N Programski vodnik za digitalne kanale in rezerviranje oddaj
Če je izbran digitalni kanal in pritisnete gumb ►, se prikaže programski vodnik za ta kanal. Oddajo lahko rezervirate po zgoraj
opisanih postopkih.
Edit Channel Name (samo pri analognih kanalih)
Kanale lahko označite, tako da se vsakič, ko izberete določen kanal, prikaže njegovo ime.
N digitalnim kanalom so imena samodejno dodeljena in jih ni mogoče določiti.
Edit Channel Number (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Urejate lahko tudi številke kanalov, in sicer s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Sort (samo pri analognih kanalih)
Ta postopek omogoča spreminjanje številk programov shranjenih kanalov. To postopek boste mogoče morali izvesti po uporabi
funkcije samodejnega shranjevanja.
Select All/Deselect All
● Select All: izberete lahko vse kanale na seznamu kanalov.
● Deselect All: prekličete lahko izbor vseh izbranih kanalov.
N Možnost Deselect All lahko izberete samo, če je kateri kanal izbran.
Auto Store
N Za podrobnosti o nastavitvah možnosti si oglejte 9. stran.
N Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos PIN-a.
Meni z možnostmi seznama kanalov (v možnosti Programmed)
rezervacijo si lahko ogledate, jo spremenite ali izbrišete.
N Če želite uporabljati meni z možnostmi, pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
Change Info
za spremembo rezervacije oddaje.
Cancel Schedules
Za preklic rezervacije oddaje.
Information
Za ogled rezervacije oddaje. (lahko tudi spremenite podatke o rezervaciji.)
Select All
za izbiro vseh rezerviranih oddaj.
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer
20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife
Programmed All ■ Zoom ■ Select T Tools E Information
Change Info
Cancel Schedules
Information
Select All
BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:07Slovenščina - 14
UPRAVLJANJE SLIKE
¦ Konfiguriranje menija Picture
❑ Mode
Izberete lahko vrsto slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Slikovni način lahko nastavite tudi z
izbiro možnosti Tools → Picture Mode.
Dynamic
Za izbiro slike za visoko ločljivost v svetlem prostoru.
Standard
Za izbiro slike za optimalen prikaz v normalnem okolju.
Movie
Za izbiro slike za gledanje filmov v temnem prostoru.
❑ Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)
Televizor ima več možnosti nastavitev za nadzor kakovosti slike.
● Backlight: za prilagoditev svetlosti osvetlitve lCd-ja.
● Contrast: za prilagoditev ravni kontrasta slike.
● Brightness: za prilagoditev ravni svetlosti slike.
● Sharpness: za prilagoditev nastavitve robov slike.
● Colour: za prilagoditev nasičenosti barv slike.
● Tint (G/R): za prilagoditev barvnega odtenka slike.
N Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite najprej prilagoditi. Prilagojene vrednosti se shranijo za vse slikovne načine.
N Če spremenite možnosti Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour ali Tint (G/R), se prikaz na zaslonu ustrezno
prilagodi.
N v analognih načinih sistema PAl TV, Ext., AV funkcije Tint (G/R) ni mogoče uporabljati.
N v načinu računalnika je mogoče spreminjati samo možnosti Backlight, Contrast in Brightness.
N Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod televizorja.
N Količino porabljene energije lahko opazno zmanjšate, če znižate raven svetlosti slike, s čimer boste tudi znižali celotne tekoče
stroške.
❑ Napredne nastavitve
Novi Samsungov televizor omogoča še natančnejše slikovne nastavitve kot prejšnji modeli. Če želite prilagoditi podrobne slikovne
nastavitve, si oglejte spodnje besedilo.
N Advanced Settings je na voljo v načinu Standard ali Movie.
N v načinu računalnika je med elementi Advanced Settings mogoče spreminjati samo možnosti Gamma in White Balance.
Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest
Na zaslonu lahko izberete raven črne in tako prilagodite globino zaslona.
Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High
Prilagodite lahko kontrast zaslona, tako da je optimalen.
Gamma
Nastavite lahko intenzivnost primarnih barv (rdeče, zelene, modre).
Colour Space
Barvni prostor je barvna matrika, ki je sestavljena iz rdeče, zelene in modre barve. Izberite najljubši barvni prostor za prikaz
najnaravnejših barv.
● Native: nastavitev naravnega barvnega prostora omogoča globoke in bogate barvne tone.
● Auto: samodejni barvni prostor se samodejno prilagodi na najnaravnejši barvni ton glede na programske vire.
Mode : Standard ►
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Picture
Colour : 50
Tint (G / r) : G50 / r50
Advanced Settings ►
Picture Options
Picture reset
Picture
BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:07Slovenščina - 15
White Balance
Prilagodite lahko barvno temperaturo za naravnejše barve slike.
● R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Prilagodite lahko barvno ‘temperaturo’ na svetlih območjih, tako,
da spremenite vrednosti r, G in B. Priporočljivo samo za napredne uporabnike.
● Reset: predhodno prilagojena izravnava belin bo ponastavljena na tovarniške vrednosti.
Flesh Tone
Poudarite lahko rožnati ton slike.
N Če spremenite vrednost nastavitve, se osveži prilagojeni zaslon.
Edge Enhancement → Off / On
Poudarite lahko robove predmetov na sliki.
❑ Picture Options
N v načinu računalnika je med elementi Picture Options mogoče spreminjati samo Colour Tone in Size .
Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2
Izberete lahko barvni ton, ki je najudobnejši za vaše oči.
N Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod televizorja.
N Warm1 ali Warm2 je aktivna samo, če je slikovni način nastavljen na Movie.
Size
Izberete lahko velikost slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. velikost lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Picture Size.
● Auto Wide: velikost slike se samodejno prilagodi razmerju stranic 16:9.
● 16:9: velikost slike prilagodi razmerju stranic 16:9, ki je primerno za dvd-je in širokozaslonsko oddajanje.
● Wide Zoom: povečava slike nad 4:3.
● Zoom: povečava slike, široke 16:9, da jo prilagodi velikosti zaslona (v navpični smeri).
● 4:3: privzeta nastavitev za video film in običajno oddajanje.
● Screen Fit: to funkcijo uporabite za ogled celotne slike brez prirezovanja pri vhodnem signalu HdMI (720p/1080i) ali
Component (1080i).
N Možnosti velikosti slike se lahko razlikujejo glede na vhodni vir.
N razpoložljivi elementi se lahko razlikujejo glede na izbrani način.
N v načinu računalnika je mogoče prilagajati samo načina 16:9 in 4:3.
N Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so povezane na vhod televizorja.
N Če je na televizorju več kot dve uri prikazana negibna slika, se lahko pojavi začasno zadržanje slike.
N Wide Zoom: S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼
pomaknite sliko navzgor/navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Zoom: S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ pomaknite
sliko navzgor ali navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Size, nato pritisnite gumb
ENTERE. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼, da povečate ali zmanjšate velikost slike v navpični smeri. Nato pritisnite gumb
ENTERE.
N Po izbiri možnosti Screen Fit v načinu HdMI (1080i) ali Component (1080i): s pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Position.
Z gumbom ▲, ▼, ◄ ali ► pomaknite sliko.
Reset: S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Reset, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Nastavitev lahko inicializirate.
N Če funkcijo Screen Fit uporabite pri vhodu HdMI 720p, bo odrezana po 1 vrstica zgoraj, spodaj, levo in desno, kot pri funkciji
zmanjšanja prevelike slike.
Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3
Ko pri širokozaslonskem televizorju 16:9 velikost slike nastavite na Auto Wide, lahko določite velikost za sliko 4:3 WSS ali pa ne
določite teh nastavitev. v posameznih evropskih državah so zahtevane različne velikosti slike, zato to funkcijo izbere uporabnik.
● 16:9: nastavitev slike na široki način 16:9.
● Wide Zoom: povečava slike nad 4:3.
● Zoom: navpična povečava slike na zaslonu.
● 4:3: nastavitev slike na običajni način 4:3.
N Ta funkcija je na voljo v načinu Auto Wide.
N Funkcija ni na voljo v načinih PC, Component in HDMI.
BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:07Slovenščina - 16
Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto
Če je sprejeti televizijski signal šibak, lahko aktivirate funkcijo digitalnega odpravljanja šumov za zmanjšanje statičnih motenj in
odsevov na zaslonu.
N Če je signal šibak, izberite eno od ostalih možnosti, tako da je slika prikazana z največjo kakovostjo.
HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low
Neposredno lahko na izberete raven črne na zaslonu, da prilagodite globino zaslona.
N Funkcija je aktivna samo, kadar je zunanji vhod povezan s HdMI (signali rGB).
Film Mode → Off / Auto
Televizor lahko nastavite tako, da samodejno zazna in obdela filmske signale iz vseh virov in prilagodi sliko na optimalno kakovost.
N Film Mode je podprta v načinih TV, AV, COMPONENT (480i/1080i) in HDMI (480i/1080i).
❑ Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel
Ponastavitev vseh slikovnih nastavitev na privzete vrednosti.
N Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite ponastaviti. Ponastavitev se izvede za vse slikovne načine.
● Reset Picture Mode: trenutne slikovne vrednosti se vrnejo na privzete nastavitve.
¦ Uporaba televizorja kot računalniškega zaslona
Nastavitev programske opreme računalnika (v okolju Windows XP)
Spodaj so prikazane nastavitve zaslona za tipični računalnik v OS Windows. dejanski prikazi na računalniškem zaslonu bodo
najbrž drugačni, odvisno od različice operacijskega sistema Windows in grafične kartice. Četudi se dejanski prikazi razlikujejo,
v večini primerov veljajo iste osnovne nastavitvene informacije. (Sicer se obrnite na proizvajalca računalnika ali Samsungovega
prodajalca.)
1. Najprej kliknite možnost ‘Nadzorna plošča’ v meniju Start v OS Windows.
2. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘videz in teme’ in prikazalo se bo pogovorno okno zaslona.
3. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘Zaslon’ in prikazalo se bo pogovorno okno zaslona.
4. Pomaknite se na zavihek ‘Nastavitve’ v pogovornem oknu zaslona.
Pravilna nastavitev velikosti (ločljivost): Optimalno – 1360 x 768 slikovnih pik
Če je v pogovornem oknu nastavitev zaslona na voljo možnost za navpično frekvenco, je njena ustrezna vrednost ‘60’ ali
‘60 Hz’. Sicer samo kliknite ‘v redu’ in zaprite pogovorno okno.
BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 17
Načini zaslona
Položaj in velikost zaslona se razlikujeta glede na vrsto računalniškega monitorja in njegovo ločljivost. Priporočene so ločljivosti v
tabeli.
Vhod D-Sub in HDMI/DVI
Mode Ločljivost
Vodoravna frekvenca
(kHz)
Navpična frekvenca
(Hz)
Točkovna ura (MHz)
Polariteta
sinhr. (V/N)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
N Če uporabljate kabel HdMI/dvI, uporabite vtičnico HDMI (DVI).
N Način prepletanja ni podprt.
N Če izberete nestandardno obliko video zapisa, televizor morda ne bo deloval pravilno.
N Podprta sta načina za ločeno in kompozitno. SOG ni podrt.
¦ Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom
N Prednastavitev: Pritisnite gumb SOURCE, da izberete način računalnika.
❑ Auto Adjustment
Samodejna prilagoditev omogoča računalniškemu zaslonu, da se samodejno prilagodi
vhodnemu video signalu računalnika. vrednosti za fino, grobo in položaj se samodejno
prilagodijo.
N Ta funkcija ne deluje v načinu dvI-HdMI.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Samodejno prilagoditev lahko nastavite
tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Auto Adjustment.
❑ Screen
Coarse/Fine
Namen prilagajanja kakovosti slike je odstraniti ali zmanjšati šum slike. Če šum ni odstranjen s fino naravnavo, čim bolje nastavite
frekvenco (Coarse) in znova fino naravnajte. Po zmanjšanju šumov znova nastavite sliko tako, da bo poravnana na sredino
zaslona.
PC Position
nastavite položaj računalniškega zaslona, če se ta ne prilega televizijskemu zaslonu. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ prilagodite
navpični položaj. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► prilagodite vodoravni položaj.
Image Reset
vse slikovne nastavitve lahko zamenjate s tovarniškimi vrednostmi.
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Auto Adjustment ►
Screen
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture reset
Picture
BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 18
UPRAVLJANJE ZVOKA
¦ Konfiguriranje menija Sound
❑ Mode → Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom
Izberete lahko zvočni način, ki vam najbolj ustreza.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Zvočni način lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro
možnosti Tools → Sound Mode.
Standard
Za izbiro običajnega zvočnega načina.
Music
Glasba je bolj poudarjena kot glasovi.
Movie
Za najboljši zvok za filme.
Clear Voice
Glas je bolj poudarjen kot drugi zvoki.
Custom
Za priklic zvočnih nastavitev po meri.
❑ Equalizer
Zvočne nastavitve lahko prilagodite, kot vam najbolj ustreza.
Mode
Izberete lahko zvočni način, ki vam najbolj ustreza.
Balance
Nadzor ravnovesja med desnim in levim zvočnikom.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (nastavitev pasovne širine)
Nastavitev ravni frekvenc različnih pasovnih širin.
Reset
Ponastavitev nastavitev izenačevalnika na privzete vrednosti.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On
SrS TruSurround Hd je patentirana tehnologija SrS za predvajanje 5.1-večkanalne vsebine preko dveh zvočnikov. TruSurround
proizvaja odličen, navidezni prostorski na katerem koli sistemu z dvema zvočnikoma, tudi prek notranjih zvočnikov televizorja.
Tehnologija je popolnoma združljiva z vsemi večkanalnimi oblikami zapisa.
❑ Audio Language (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Spremenite lahko privzeto vrednost za jezik avdia. Prikaže informacije o jeziku za dohodni tok.
N Izbirate lahko samo med jeziki, ki so dejansko oddajani.
N To funkcijo je mogoče izbrati pri gledanju digitalnega kanala.
❑ Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Pri istočasnem oddajanju zvoka iz glavnega zvočnika in avdio sprejemnika lahko pride do odmeva zaradi različne hitrosti
odkodiranja za glavni zvočnik in avdio sprejemnik. v tem primeru uporabite funkcijo zvočnika televizorja.
N Možnost Audio Format je prikazana v skladu z oddajanim signalom.
N To funkcijo je mogoče izbrati pri gledanju digitalnega kanala.
Mode : Custom ►
equalizer
SrS TruSurround Hd : Off
Audio language : - - -
Audio Format : - - -
Audio Description
Auto volume : Off
Sound
BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 19
❑ Audio Description (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
To je dodatna funkcija za zvok, ki omogoča dodatne zvočne posnetke za slabovidne. Ta funkcija je namenjena zvočnemu toku
za Ad (Audio description), če jo oddajnik pošlje skupaj z glavnim zvokom. Uporabniki lahko zvočni opis vklopijo in izklopijo ter
upravljajo glasnost.
O S pritiskom gumba AD na daljinskem upravljalniku izberite Off ali On.
Audio Description → Off / On
vklop ali izklop funkcije zvočnega opisa.
Volume
Prilagodite lahko glasnost zvočnega opisa.
N Volume je aktivna, če je možnost Audio Description nastavljena na On.
❑ Auto Volume → Off / On
Stanje signalov posameznih postaj se razlikuje, zato ni enostavno prilagajati glasnosti ob vsaki zamenjavi kanala. Ta funkcija
omogoča samodejno prilagajanje glasnosti želenega kanala z znižanjem glasnosti v primeru visokega modulacijskega signala ali
zvišanjem glasnosti v primeru nizkega modulacijskega signala.
❑ Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker
Če želite slišati zvok iz ločenih zvočnikov, izklopite notranji ojačevalnik.
N Gumba za glasnost in gumb MUTE ne delujejo, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker.
N Če izberete External Speaker v meniju Speaker Select, bodo zvočne nastavitve omejene.
❑ Sound Reset → Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel
Zvočne nastavitve lahko obnovite na tovarniške vrednosti.
¦ Izbira zvočnega načina
Način zvoka lahko nastavite v meniju Tools. Če nastavite na Dual l ll, se na zaslonu prikaže trenutni zvočni način.
Vrsta zvoka Dual 1/2 Privzeto
A2 Stereo
Mono MONO
Samodejen preklop
Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Stereo
Mono MONO
Samodejen preklop
Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
N Če je stereo signal šibak in pride do samodejnega preklopa, preklopite na Mono.
N Ta funkcija je aktivirana samo v stereo zvočnem signalu. v mono zvočnem signalu je deaktivirana.
N Ta funkcija je na voljo samo v načinu televizorja.
BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 20
NASTAVITEV
¦ Konfiguriranje menija Setup
❑ Menu Language
Nastavite lahko jezik menija.
❑ Time
Clock
Uro morate nastaviti, da lahko uporabljate različne funkcije časovnika televizorja.
N Ob vsakem pritisku gumba INFO se bo prikazal trenutni čas.
N Če izključite napajalni kabel, morate uro znova nastaviti.
● Clock Mode
Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno ali samodejno.
– Auto: samodejna nastavitev trenutnega časa z uporabo digitalno oddajanega časa.
– Manual: ročna nastavitev trenutnega časa.
N Samodejni čas morda ne bo pravilen, odvisno od oddajne postaje in signala. v tem primeru čas nastavite ročno.
N da je mogoča samodejna nastavitev časa, mora biti povezana antena ali kabel.
● Clock Set
Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno.
N Ta element nastavite, če ste možnost Clock Mode nastavili na Manual.
N dan, mesec, leto, uro in minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
Izklopni časovnik samodejno izklopi televizor po prednastavljenem času (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 in 180 minut).
N Ko časovnik doseže 0, se televizor samodejno preklopi v stanje pripravljenosti.
N Če želite preklicati delovanje funkcije Sleep Timer, izberite Off.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Izklopni časovnik lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools →
Sleep Timer.
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
Opravite lahko tri različne nastavitve vklopa/izklopa časovnika. Najprej morate nastaviti uro.
● On Time: nastavitev ure, minut in aktiviranje/deaktiviranje. (Če želite aktivirati časovnik z izbrano nastavitvijo, nastavite na
možnost Activate.)
● Off Time: nastavitev ure, minut in aktiviranje/deaktiviranje. (Če želite aktivirati časovnik z izbrano nastavitvijo, nastavite na
možnost Activate.)
● Volume: Izberite želeno raven glasnosti.
● Antenna: izberite Air ali Cable.
● Channel: za izbiro želenega kanala.
● Repeat: Izberite Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun ali Manual.
N Če je izbrana možnost Manual, s pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite želeni dan v tednu. Za želeni dan pritisnite gumb
ENTERE in prikazala se bo oznaka c.
N Uro, minute in kanal lahko nastavite s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Samodejni izklop
Če vklopite časovnik, se bo televizor izklopil, če tri ure potem, ko je časovnik vklopil televizor, ni bila pritisnjena nobena
kontrola. Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, ko je vklopljen časovnik, in preprečuje pregrevanje, do katerega lahko pride, če je
televizor predolgo vklopljen.
Plug & Play
Menu Language : English ►
Time
Broadcast
Security
General
Setup
BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:08Slovenščina - 21
❑ Broadcast
Subtitle
Aktivirate in deaktivirate lahko podnapise. S tem menijem nastavite način podnapisov. Menijska možnost Normal predstavlja
osnovne podnapise, Hard of hearing pa podnapise za osebe z okvaro sluha.
● Subtitle → Off / On
vklop ali izklop podnapisov.
● Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing
nastavitev načina podnapisov.
● Subtitle Language
nastavitev jezika podnapisov.
N Če program, ki ga gledate, ne podpira funkcije Hard of hearing, se samodejno vklopi način Normal, čeprav je izbran način
Hard of hearing.
N Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina.
O Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba SUBT. na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Digital Text → Disable / Enable (samo v VB)
Ta funkcija je omogočena, če je program oddajan z digitalnim besedilom.
N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group)
Mednarodni standard za sisteme za kodiranje podatkov, ki se uporablja za večpredstavnost in hiperpredstavnost. Je na višjem
nivoju kot sistem MPEG in vključuje hiperpredstavnost s povezanimi podatki, kot so slike, znakovne storitve, animacije, grafike
in video datoteke ter večpredstavnostne podatke. MHEG je tehnologija, ki omogoča sodelovanje uporabnika med delovanjem,
in se uporablja na različnih področjih, kot so vOd (video na zahtevo), ITv (interaktivna Tv), EC (elektronsko poslovanje),
teleizobraževanje, telekonference, digitalne knjižnice in omrežne igre.
Teletext Language
Nastavite lahko jezik teleteksta, in sicer tako, da izberete vrsto jezika.
N Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina.
Preference
● Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language /
Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language
S to funkcijo lahko uporabnik izbere enega od jezikov. Tukaj izbrani jezik je privzeti jezik, ko uporabnik izbere kanal.
Če spremenite nastavitev jezika, se možnosti menija language Subtitle language, Audio language in Teletext language
samodejno spremenijo v izbrani jezik.
Možnosti menija language Subtitle language, Audio language in Teletext language prikazujejo seznam jezikov, ki jih podpira
trenutni kanal; označen je izbor. Če spremenite to nastavitev jezika, nov izbor velja samo za trenutni kanal. S spremembo
nastavitve se ne spremenijo nastavitve menija Preference: Primary Subtitle language, Primary Audio language in Primary
Teletext language.
Common Interface
● CI Menu
Uporabniku omogoča, da lahko izbira iz menija, ki ga omogoča CAM. Meni splošnega vmesnika izberite glede na računalniško
kartico.
● Application Info.
Prikaže informacije o CAM-u, ki je vstavljen v režo za splošni vmesnik.
N Informacije o aplikaciji se nanašajo na kartico splošnega vmesnika. CAM lahko namestite kadar koli, ne glede na to, ali je
televizor vKlOPlJEN ali IZKlOPlJEN.
1. Modul CI CAM kupite pri najbližjem prodajalcu ali po telefonu.
2. Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v CAM v smeri puščici, da se zaskoči na mestu.
3. CAM z nameščeno kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v režo za splošni vmesnik.
(CAM vstavite v smeri puščice do konca, tako da je vzporeden z režo.)
4. Preverite, ali na kanalu z motenim signalom vidite sliko.
N CAM ni podprt v nekaterih državah in regijah. Preverite pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu.
BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:09Slovenščina - 22
❑ Security
Preden se prikaže nastavitveni zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos kode PIN. vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je 0-0-0-0. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN.
Child Lock → Off / On
Ta funkcija preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa nepooblaščenim uporabnikom (na primer otrokom) tako, da prepreči
predvajanje slike in zvoka.
N Zaklenete lahko nekatere kanale na seznamu kanalov. (Oglejte si 13 stran.)
N Child Lock je na voljo samo v načinu televizorja.
Parental Lock
Ta funkcija nepooblaščenim uporabnikom, na primer otrokom, preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa, in sicer s 4- mestno
kodo PIN (osebna identifikacijska številka), ki jo določi uporabnik.
N element Parental Lock se razlikuje od države do države.
N Ko je vklopljena funkcija starševskega nadzora Parental Lock, je prikazan znak ‘\’.
N Allow All: pritisnite, da odklenete vse oznake televizorja.
Block All: pritisnite, da zaklenete vse oznake televizorja.
Change PIN
Spremenite lahko osebno identifikacijsko številko, ki je potrebna za nastavitev televizorja.
N Če PIN pozabite, pritisnite gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku v naslednjem zaporedju, s čimer PIN ponastavite na 0-0-0-0:
POWER (Izklop) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (vklop).
❑ General
Game Mode → Off / On
Pri povezavi z igralno konzolo, kot je PlayStation™ ali Xbox™, lahko uživate v bolj realistični izkušnji tako, da izberete meni iger.
N Če želite izključiti igralno konzolo in priključiti drugo zunanjo napravo, v nastavitvenem meniju prekličite način iger.
N Če meni televizorja prikažete v načinu Game Mode, se zaslon rahlo trese.
N Game Mode ni na voljo v običajnem načinu TV in PC.
N Če je možnost Game Mode vklopljena:
– slikovni način se samodejno spremeni v Standard in uporabniki ne morejo spremeniti načina.
– zvočni način se samodejno spremeni v Custom in uporabniki ne morejo spremeniti načina. Z izenačevalnikom prilagodite
zvok.
N Aktivira se funkcija ponastavitve zvoka. Če po nastavitvi izenačevalnika izberete funkcijo ponastavitve, se nastavitve
izenečevalnika ponastavijo na tovarniške vrednosti.
Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off / Auto
Ta funkcija prilagodi svetlost televizorja, tako da se zmanjša poraba energije. Če televizor gledate ponoči, nastavite možnost
načina Energy Saving na High, da zmanjšate utrujanje oči in tudi porabo energije.
Če izberete Picture Off, se izklopi slika in predvaja se samo zvok. Za izklop funkcije Picture Off pritisnite kateri koli gumb.
N V meniju Tools funkcija Picture Off ni podprta.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Možnost varčevanja energije lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools →
Energy Saving.
Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High
Nastavite lahko, da se ob vklopu ali izklopu televizorja predvaja melodija.
N Melodija se ne predvaja
– Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb MUTE.
– Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb za glasnost (–).
– Ko se televizor izklopi s funkcijo izklopnega časovnika.
BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:09Slovenščina - 23
VHOD / PODPORA
¦ Konfiguriranje menija Input
❑ Source List
Za izbiro televizorja ali drugih zunanjih vhodnih virov, ki so povezani s televizorjem, na primer
predvajalnikov dvd/Blu-ray/satelitskih sprejemnikov. Uporabite za izbiro želenega vhodnega
vira.
O Če si želite ogledati zunanji signalni vir, pritisnite gumb SOURCE na daljinskem
upravljalniku. Način Tv lahko izberete s pritiskom gumba TV.
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI/DVI
N Izberete lahko samo zunanje naprave, ki so povezane s televizorjem. Na seznamu Source
List se bodo povezani vhodi označili in pomaknili na vrh. Nepovezani vhodi pa se bodo
pomaknili na dno.
N Možnosti Ext. in PC sta vedno aktivirani.
N TOOLS (Tools): prikaz menijev Edit Name in Information.
❑ Edit Name
Poimenujte napravo, ki je priključena na vhodne vtičnice, da boste lažje izbrali vhodne vire.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray
/ HD DVD / DMA
N Po priklopu kabla HdMI/dvI na vrata HDMI (DVI) nastavite način HDMI/DVI na DVI ali DVI PC v možnosti Edit Name načina
Input. v tem primeru je potrebna ločena avdio povezava.
¦ Konfiguriranje menija Support
❑ Self Diagnosis
Picture Test
Če menite, da imate težave s sliko, izvedite preskus slike. Oglejte si barvni vzorec na zaslonu,
da preverite, ali težava še vedno obstaja.
● Yes: Če se poskusni vzorec ne prikaže ali pa je na njem šum, izberite Yes. vzrok težave je
morda televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center.
● No: Če je poskusni vzorec pravilno prikazan, izberite No. vzrok težave je morda zunanja
oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za
zunanjo napravo.
Sound Test
Če menite, da imate težave z zvokom, izvedite preskus zvoka. Zvok lahko preverite s
predvajanjem vgrajene melodije prek televizorja. Na zaslonu se prikaže ‘does the problem still
exist with this sound test?’.
N Če iz zvočnikov televizorja ne prihaja zvok, pred izvedbo preskusa zvoka preverite, ali je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena
na TV speaker v meniju zvoka.
N Med preskusom se melodija predvaja tudi, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker ali če je bil zvok
izklopljen s pritiskom gumba MUTE.
● Yes: Če med preskusom zvoka slišite zvok samo iz enega zvočnika ali pa ga ne slišite, izberite Yes. vzrok težave je morda
televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center.
● No: če slišite zvok iz zvočnikov, izberite No. vzrok težave je morda zunanja oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste
odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za zunanjo napravo.
Signal Information (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Za razliko od analognih kanalov, pri katerih lahko kakovost sprejetega signala sega od ‘sneženja’ do jasne slike, je kakovost
sprejetih digitalnih kanalov (HdTv) popolna ali pa sploh ni slike. Zato digitalnega kanala ni mogoče fino naravnati, kot je to mogoče
pri analognem. lahko pa prilagodite anteno, da izboljšate sprejem digitalnih kanalov, ki so na voljo.
N Če merilnik jakosti signalov kaže, da je signal šibek, fizično prilagodite anteno, da povečate jakost signalov. Nadaljujte s
prilagajanjem antene, dokler ne najdete najboljšega položaja z najmočnejšim signalom.
Self Diagnosis ►
Software Upgrade
HD Connection Guide
Contact Samsung
Support
Source List
edit Name
Input
BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:09Slovenščina - 24
❑ Software Upgrade
da bi bil izdelek opremljen z najnovejšimi funkcijami digitalne televizije, so nadgradnje
programske opreme redno oddajane kot del običajnega televizijskega signala. Televizor
samodejno zazna take signale in prikaže obvestilo o nadgradnji programske opreme. Imate
možnost namestitve nadgradnje.
BY USB
Pogon USB, na katerem je nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme, vstavite v televizor.
Pazite, da med posodobitvijo ne odklopite napajanja ali odstranite pogona USB. Ko bo
nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme končana, se bo televizor samodejno izklopil in
znova vklopil. Po končani posodobitvi preverite različico vdelane programske opreme. Ko je
programska oprema nadgrajena, se uporabniške nastavitve videa in zvoka vrnejo na privzete
(tovarniške) vrednosti.
Priporočamo, da si zapišete vaše nastavitve, tako da jih boste po nadgradnji brez težav ponastavili.
BY Channel
Nadgradnja programske opreme z uporabo oddajnega signala.
N Če med časom prenosa programske opreme izberete to funkcijo, zaženete iskanje in prenos razpoložljive programske
opreme.
N Koliko časa se prenaša programska oprema, je odvisno od stanja signala.
Standby Mode Upgrade
Če želite nadaljevati nadgradnjo programske opreme z vklopljenim glavnim napajanjem, s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite On.
45 minut po preklopu v stanje pripravljenosti se samodejno izvede ročna nadgradnja. Ker je napajanje enote vklopljeno notranje,
lahko zaslon izdelka lCd rahlo sveti. Ta pojav lahko traja več kot 1 uro, dokler se nadgradnja programske opreme ne dokonča.
Alternative Software
Prikaz informacij o različici programske opreme.
❑ HD Connection Guide
Ta meni predstavlja način povezave za optimalno kakovost televizorja visoke ločljivosti.
Te informacije si oglejte, če na televizor povezujete zunanje naprave.
❑ Contact Samsung
Te informacije si oglejte, če televizor ne deluje pravilno ali če želite nadgraditi programsko opremo.
Ogledate si lahko informacije o klicnih centrih, izdelku in načinu prenosa datoteke s programsko opremo.
Hrbtna plošča televizorja
Pogon USB
BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:09Slovenščina - 25
PRIPOROČILA ZA UPORABO
¦ Funkcija teleteksta
večina televizijskih postaj nudi informacije v pisni obliki prek teleteksta. Na začetni stran teleteksta boste dobili informacije o tem,
kako uporabljati storitev. Poleg tega lahko z gumbi na daljinskem upravljalniku izbirate različne možnosti, ki bodo zadovoljile vaše
potrebe.
N Za pravilen prikaz informacij teleteksta mora biti sprejem kanala stabilen. Sicer lahko manjkajo informacije ali pa nekatere
strani ne morejo biti prikazane.
N Strani teleteksta lahko spremenite s pritiskom številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
1 0(način)
Pritisnite za izbiro načina teleteksta
(lIST/FlOF). Če ga pritisnete v načinu
lIST, bo preklopil v način list save. v
načinu list save lahko z gumbom 8
(shrani) shranite stran teleteksta na
seznam.
2 5(razkrij)
Uporabite za prikaz skritega besedila
(na primer odgovori na vprašanja iz
kviza). Za prikaz običajnega zaslona
pritisnite znova.
3 4(velikost)
Pritisnite za prikaz črk dvojne velikosti
na zgornji polovici zaslona. za spodnjo
polovico zaslona pritisnite znova. za
prikaz običajnega zaslona pritisnite še
enkrat.
4 8(shrani)
Uporabite za shranjevanje strani
teleteksta.
5 Barvni gumbi (rdeči/zeleni/rumeni/
modri)
Če televizijska postaja uporablja
sistem FASTEXT, so različne teme na
strani teleteksta označene z različnimi
barvami, izberete pa jih lahko s
pritiskom na barvne gumbe. Pritisnite
enega od njih, odvisno od vaših želja.
Prikaže se stran z ostalimi obarvanimi
informacijami, ki jih lahko izberete na isti
način. Za prikaz prejšnje ali naslednje
strani pritisnite ustrezni barvni gumb.
6/(teletekst vklopljen/mešano)
Ko ste izbrali kanal, ki omogoča storitev
teleteksta, pritisnite ta gumb, da aktivirate
teletekst. Pritisnite dvakrat, da teletekst
prekrijete s trenutno sliko.
7 :(izhod)
Izhod iz prikaza teleteksta.
8 1(podstran)
Za prikaz podstrani, ki je na voljo.
9 2(stran gor)
Za prikaz naslednje strani teleteksta.
0 3(stran dol)
Za prikaz prejšnje strani teleteksta.
! 9(zadrži)
Uporabite, da zadržite prikazano stran,
če je izbrana stran povezana z več
drugimi stranmi, ki sledijo samodejno. Za
nadaljevanje gumb znova pritisnite.
@ 6(kazalo)
Za prikaz strani s kazalom kadar koli, ko
gledate teletekst.
# 7(prekliči)
Za prikaz oddaje med iskanjem strani.
Strani teleteksta so organizirane v šestih kategorijah:
Del Vsebina
A Številka izbrane strani.
B Identiteta televizijskega kanala.
C Številka trenutne strani ali indikatorji iskanja.
D datum in čas.
E Besedilo.
F Informacije o stanju.
Informacije FASTeXT.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:10Slovenščina - 26
N Informacije teleteksta so pogosto razdeljene na več zaporednih strani, do katerih imate dostop z:
– vnosom številke strani
– Izbiro naslova na seznamu
– Izbiro obarvanega naslova (sistem FASTeXT)
N Televizor podira različico teleteksta 2.5, v kateri je mogoče prikazati dodatne grafike ali besedilo.
N Teletekst je lahko prikazan s praznimi deli strani, odvisno od prenosa.
N v teh primerih dodatne grafike ali besedilo ni oddajano.
N Starejši televizorji, ki ne podpirajo različice 2.5, ne morejo prikazati dodatnih grafik ali besedila, ne glede na to, ali se le-to
oddaja.
O Pritisnite gumb TV za izhod iz teleteksta.
N Pri teletekstu z razmerjem stranic 16:9 je prikazana slika z razmerjem stranic 16:9
¦ Nastavitev stojala (samo 19-palčni model)
1. Položite televizor s sprednjim delom na mehko tkanino ali blazino na mizi, kot je prikazano na sliki 1.
– Spodnji del televizorja poravnajte z robom mize.
2. Pritisnite na sredino hrbtnega dela televizorja. Nastavite stojalo, kot je prikazano na sliki 2, medtem ko držite pritisnjen gumb
na hrbtnem delu stojala.
3. Televizor pokonci in varno postavite na mizo.
¦ Nastavitev kota televizorja (samo 19-palčni model)
N Nastavite stojalo s pritiskanjem gumba na njegovi hrbtni strani.
1. Slika 1 prikazuje kot nastavitve (-2°–14°) pri uporabi lCd-ja na stojalu.
N S prekomernim nagibanjem lahko televizor lCd prevrnete in ga tako poškodujete.
2. Slika 2 prikazuje kot nastavitve (14°–80°) pri spreminjanju stojala lCd-ja v stenski nosilec.
3. Slika 3 prikazuje kot nastavitve (0°–10°) pri namestitvi televizorja lCd na steno.
N Ko kot spremenite iz 1 v 2 ali iz 3 v 2, zaslišite klik.
1 2
1 Nastavitev kota, če televizor
uporabljate na stojalu.
2 Nastavitev kota, če stojalo
spremenite v stenski nosilec
(1→3, 3→1)
3 Nastavitev kota, če je televizor
LCD pritrjen na steno
BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:10Slovenščina - 27
¦ Namestitev naprav, skladnih s standardom VESA (samo 19-palčni model)
1. Postavite navzdol obrnjen televizor na mehko blago ali blazino na mizi.
2. Nastavite stojalo s pritiskanjem gumba na njegovi hrbtni strani.
3. Poravnajte pritrjevalno podlogo (ni priložena) z odprtinami na spodnjem delu stojala in ga pritrdite s štirimi vijaki, priloženimi
podstavku v obliki roke, obešalu za pritrditev na steno ali drugim podstavkom (niso priloženi).
¦ Uporaba okrasnih pokrovov (samo 19-palčni model)
1. Če televizor namestite na steno, ne da bi uporabili stojalo, v odprtine vstavite okrasne pokrove, kot je prikazano na sliki 1.
2. vstavljene okrasne pokrove pritrdite s 4 vijaki, kot je prikazano na sliki 2.
1 2
Gumb
Pritrjevalna podloga
(naprodaj posebej)
1 2
BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:11Slovenščina - 28
¦ Namestitev stojala
1. Pritrdite televizor lCd na stojalo.
N Televizor naj nosita vsaj dve osebi.
N Pri sestavljanju bodite pozorni na sprednji in hrbtni del stojala.
N da bo televizor nameščen na stojalo na ustrezni višini, ne pritiskajte preveč na zgornjo
levo ali desno stran televizorja.
2. Privijte dva vijaka v položaj 1 in nato še dva vijaka v položaj 2.
N Izdelek postavite pokonci in privijte vijake. Če vijake privijete na ležečem televizorju
lCd, se le-ta lahko nagne v eno stran.
¦ Namestitev kompleta za pritrditev na steno
Z elementi za pritrditev na steno (naprodaj posebej) lahko televizor pritrdite na steno.
Za podrobne informacije o pritrditvi na steno si oglejte navodila, ki so priložena elementom
za pritrditev na steno. Če nameščate nosilec za pritrditev na steno, se za pomoč obrnite na
tehnika.
Samsung Electronics ne odgovarja za poškodovanje izdelka ali telesne poškodbe, če se
odločite, da boste sami namestiti televizor.
Kompleta za pritrditev na steno ne nameščajte, ko je televizor vklopljen. To lahko
povzroči telesne poškodbe zaradi električnega šoka.
¦ Uporaba ključavnice Kensington proti kraji
Ključavnica Kensington je naprava, ki se uporablja za fizično pritrditev
sistema, ko se ta uporablja na javnem mestu. videz in način zaklepanja
se lahko razlikujeta od slike, odvisno od proizvajalca. Za pravilno
uporabo si oglejte priročnik, ki je priložen ključavnici Kensington.
N Poiščite ikono “K” na hrbtni strani televizorja. reža Kensington je poleg ikone “K”.
Izdelek zaklenete po naslednjem postopku:
1. Kabel ključavnice Kensington ovijte okoli velikega, nepremičnega predmeta, kot je miza
ali stol.
2. Konec kabla, na katerem je zaklep, potisnite skozi zančni konec kabla ključavnice
Kensington.
3. vstavite napravo za zaklepanje v režo Kensington na izdelku (1).
4. Zaklenite zaklep.
N To so splošna navodila. Za natančna navodila so oglejte uporabniški priročnik, priložen
napravi za zaklepanje.
N Napravo za zaklep je treba kupiti posebej.
N Mesto namestitve ključavnice Kensington je odvisno od modela.
1
BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:12Slovenščina - 29
¦ Zaščita prostora za namestitev
Izdelek mora biti na zahtevani oddaljenosti od ostalih predmetov (npr. sten), da zagotovite ustrezno prezračevanje.
Sicer lahko pride do požara ali težave z izdelkom zaradi povišanja notranje temperature izdelka.
Izdelek namestite na zahtevani oddaljenosti, ki je navedena na sliki.
N Če želite uporabiti stojalo ali opremo za pritrditev na steno, uporabite samo dele, ki jih nudi podjetje Samsung Electronics.
Ҟ Čer uporabite dele drugih proizvajalcev, lahko pride do težav z izdelkom ali do telesne poškodbe zaradi padca izdelka.
Ҟ Če uporabite dele drugih proizvajalcev, lahko pride do težav z izdelkom ali do požara zaradi povišanja notranje
temperature izdelka, ki je posledica slabega prezračevanja.
N videz se lahko razlikuje glede na izdelek.
Namestitev izdelka s stojalom Namestitev izdelka z opremo za pritrditev na steno
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦ Pritrditev televizorja na steno
Pozor: Televizorja ni dovoljeno vleči, potiskati ali nanj plezati, saj lahko pade. Posebno bodite pozorni na to, da
se na televizor ne nagibajo ali ga premikajo otroci, saj se lahko prevrne, kar lahko povzroči težje poškodbe ali
smrt. Upoštevajte varnostne ukrepe, navedene na priloženem letaku z varnostnimi ukrepi. da zagotovite več
stabilnosti, namestite varnostni pripomoček za preprečevanje padcev, kot je opisano v nadaljevanju.
Da preprečite padec televizorja:
1. Namestite vijaka v objemki in ju trdno privijte na steno. Preverite, ali sta vijaka trdno
privita na steno.
N Morda boste potrebovali dodaten material, kot je sidrni vložek, odvisno od vrste
stene.
N Ker vijaka, objemki in vrvica, ki so potrebni za to, niso priloženi, jih kupite posebej.
2. Odstranite vijaka iz osrednjega dela hrbtne strani televizorja, namestite ju v objemki in
privijte nazaj na televizor.
N vijaka morda nista priložena izdelku. v tem primeru kupite vijaka z naslednjimi
specifikacijami.
N Specifikacije vijakov
– For a 17 ~ 29 Inch lCd Tv: M4 X l15
– For a 32 ~ 40 Inch lCd Tv: M6 X l15
3. Objemki, nameščeni na televizorju, in objemki, pritrjeni na steno, povežite z močno
vrvico in jo zavežite.
N Televizor namestite blizu stene, tako da ne more pasti nazaj.
N vrvico je varno privezati tako, da sta objemki na steni v višini objemk na televizorju
ali nižje.
N Preden televizor premaknete, odvežite vrvico.
4. Preverite, ali so vsi spoji trdni. redno preverjajte, ali so spoji poškodovani. Če niste
prepričani o varni namestitvi, se obrnite na strokovnjaka za namestitev.
Stena
Stena
BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:12Slovenščina - 30
¦ Odpravljanje težav
Če imate vprašanja glede televizorja, si najprej oglejte ta seznam. Če noben od nasvetov za odpravljanje težav ni ustrezen,
obiščite spletno mesto ‘www.samsung.com’ in nato kliknite Support ali pa pokličite klicni center, ki je na seznamu na zadnji strani.
Težava Rešitev
Kakovost slike
Najprej izvedite Picture Test, da preverite, ali televizor pravilno prikazuje preskusno sliko.
● Pojdite na MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture test
Če je preskusna slika pravilno prikazana, je slika morda slabe kakovosti zaradi vira ali signala.
Televizijska slika ni videti tako
dobro kot v trgovini.
● Če imate analogni kabelski/običajni sprejemnik, nadgradite na sprejemnik. Za sliko
visoke ločljivosti uporabite kabel HdMI ali komponentni kabel.
● Naročnik na kabelsko/satelitsko televizijo: Poskusite s postajami visoke ločljivosti (Hd
(High definition)) od kanala navzgor.
● Povezava antene: Izvedite samodejni program in nato poskusite s postajami visoke
ločljivosti.
N Številni kanali visoke ločljivosti prikazujejo izboljšano vsebino standardne ločljivosti.
● Prilagodite ločljivost video izhoda kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika na 1080i ali 720p.
● Prepričajte se, da televizijo gledate vsaj z minimalne razdalje, priporočene glede
velikosti in ločljivosti prikazanega signala.
Slika je popačena: veliki bloki,
majhni bloki, slikovne pike
● Pri stiskanju video vsebine lahko pride so popačenja slike, še posebej pri gibljivih
slikah, kot so pri športu ali akcijskih filmih.
● Slika je lahko popačena zaradi nizke stopnje signala ali slabe kakovosti. Ne gre za
okvaro televizorja.
● Mobilni telefoni, uporabljeni v bližini analognega ali digitalnega televizorja (do pribl. 1
m), lahko povzročijo šume na sliki.
Ko je povezana komponenta, je
barva napačna ali pa je ni.
● Preverite, ali so komponentni kabli priključeni na ustrezne vtičnice. Nepravilna ali slaba
povezava povezava lahko povzroči težave z barvami ali prazen zaslon.
Blede barve ali šibka svetlost. ● v meniju televizorja prilagodite možnosti Picture. (način Picture, Color, Brightness,
Sharpness)
● Prilagodite možnost Energy Saving v meniju Setup.
● Poskusite s ponastavitvijo slike, da si ogledate privzeto nastavitev slike. (Pojdite na
MENU - Picture - Picture Reset.)
Na robu zaslona je pikčasta črta. ● Če je velikost slike nastavljena na Screen Fit, jo spremenite na 16:9.
● Spremenite ločljivost kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika.
Samo pri vhodnem signalu AV
(kompozitnem) je slika črno-bela.
● Povežite video kabel (rumeni) na zelena vrata komponentnega vhoda 1 na televizorju.
Slika zmrzne ali je popačena pri
preklapljanju kanalov ali pa je
zakasnjena.
● Če je priključen kabelski sprejemnik, ga ponastavite. (Znova povežite kabel za izmenični
tok in počakajte, da se kabelski sprejemnik znova zažene. To lahko traja do 20 minut.)
● Nastavite ločljivost izhoda kabelskega sprejemnika na 1080i ali 720p.
Kakovost zvoka
Najprej izvedite Sound Test, da preverite, ali zvok televizorja pravilno deluje.
● Pojdite na MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test
Če je zvok v redu, težavo z zvokom morda povzroča vir ali signal.
Ni zvoka ali zvok je pri največji
glasnosti pretih.
● Preverite glasnost zunanje naprave, ki je povezana na televizor, nato ustrezno
prilagodite glasnost televizorja.
Slika je dobra, vendar ni zvoka. ● v meniju zvoka nastavite možnost Speaker Select na TV speaker.
● Prepričajte se, da so avdio kabli zunanje naprave priključeni na ustrezne avdio vtičnice
na televizorju.
● Preverite možnost avdio izhoda povezane naprave. (Npr.: če imate na televizor priključen
HdMI, je potrebno možnost zvoka kabelskega sprejemnika spremeniti na HdMI.)
● Če uporabljate kabel za povezavo vrat dvI in HdMI, potrebujete ločeni avdio kabel.
● Če je glasnost višja od vrednosti 30, izklopite funkcijo SrS.
● Izključite vtič iz vtičnice za slušalke. (Če je ta na televizorju.)
Iz zvočnika prihaja hrup. ● Preverite, ali so kabli ustrezno povezani. Preverite, ali je video kabel priključen na
avdio vhod.
● Pri povezavi antene/kabelske televizije preverite moč signala. Zaradi nizke stopnje
signala je lahko popačen zvok.
BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:13Slovenščina - 31
Težava Rešitev
Ni slike, ni videa
Televizorja ni mogoče vklopiti. ● Poskrbite, da je napajalni kabel za izmenični tok trdno priključen na stensko vtičnico in
televizor.
● Preverite, ali stenska vtičnica deluje.
● Pritisnite gumb POWER na televizorju, da preverite, ali daljinski upravljalnik deluje
pravilno. Če se televizor vklopi, je morda razlog daljinski upravljalnik. Za odpravo
težave z daljinskim upravljalnikom si oglejte spodnji razdelek ‘daljinski upravljalnik ne
deluje’.
Televizor se samodejno izklopi. ● Preverite, ali je možnost Sleep Timer nastavljena na On v meniju Setup.
● Če je televizija povezana z računalnikom, preverite nastavitve napajanja v računalniku.
● Poskrbite, da je napajalni kabel za izmenični tok trdno priključen na stensko vtičnico in
televizor.
● Če pri povezavi antene/kabelske televizije 10–15 minut ni signala, se televizor izklopi.
Ni slike/videa. ● Preverite povezavo kablov (izključite in znova priključite vse kable televizorja in
zunanjih naprav.)
● Nastavite video izhod zunanje naprave (kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika,
predvajalnika dvd, Blu-ray itd.) tako, da ustreza povezavam vhoda televizorja. Na
primer: izhod zunanje naprave: HdMI, izhod televizorja: HdMI.
● Preverite, ali se povezana naprava napaja.
● S pritiskom gumba SOURCE na daljinskem upravljalniku izberite ustrezen vir
televizorja.
Povezava rF
(kabelska televizija/antena)
Sprejem vseh signalov ni mogoč. ● Poskrbite, da je kabel antene ustrezno priključen.
● Poskusite z uporabo funkcije Plug & Play, da dodate razpoložljive kanale na seznam
kanalov. Pojdite na MENU - Setup - Plug & Play in počakajte, da se shranijo vsi
razpoložljivi kanali.
● Preverite, ali je antena ustrezno postavljena.
Slika je popačena: veliki bloki,
majhni bloki, slikovne pike
● Pri stiskanju video vsebine lahko pride so popačenja slike, še posebej pri gibljivih
slikah, kot so pri športu ali akcijskih filmih.
● Zaradi nizke stopnje signala je lahko popačena slika. Ne gre za okvaro televizorja.
Povezava računalnika
Sporočilo ‘Način ni podprt’. ● Nastavite ločljivost in frekvenco izhoda računalnika tako, da ustrezata ločljivostim, ki jih
podpira televizor.
računalnik je ves čas prikazan
na seznamu virov, tudi če ni
povezan.
● To je normalno, računalnik je prikazan na seznamu virov, tudi če ni povezan.
Pri povezavi HdMI je video v
redu, vendar ni zvoka.
● Preverite nastavitev avdio izhoda v računalniku.
BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:13Slovenščina - 32
Težava Rešitev
Drugo
Slika ni prikazana celozaslonsko. ● Na kanalih visoke ločljivosti je pri prikazu izboljšane vsebine standardne ločljivosti (4:3)
na obeh straneh zaslona črna obroba.
● Pri filmih z drugačnim razmerjem stranic slike, kot je razmerje na televizorju, je nad
sliko in pod njo prikazana črna obroba.
● Prilagodite možnost velikosti slike na zunanji napravi ali televizorju na celozaslonsko.
daljinski upravljalnik ne deluje. ● Znova namestite bateriji v daljinski upravljalnik tako, da je polariteta (+ -) pravilna.
● Očistite oddajno okno na zgornjem delu daljinskega upravljalnika.
● Poskusite z usmeritvijo daljinskega upravljalnika neposredno v televizor na
oddaljenosti 1,5–1,8 metra.
Z daljinskim upravljalnikom
kabelskega/običajnega
sprejemnika ne morem upravljati
napajanja ali glasnosti televizorja.
● daljinski upravljalnik kabelskega/običajnega sprejemnika Tv programirajte tako, da bo
z njim mogoče upravljati televizor. v uporabniškem priročniku kabelskega/satelitskega
sprejemnika poiščite kodo televizorja SAMSUNG.
Sporočilo ‘Način ni podprt’. ● Preverite, katere ločljivosti podpira televizor, in ustrezno prilagodite ločljivost izhoda
zunanje naprave. v tem priročniku si preberite o nastavitvah ločljivosti.
Televizor oddaja vonj po plastiki. ● Ta vonj je normalen in bo sčasoma izginil.
Možnost televizorja
Signal Information ni na
voljo v meniju preskusa
samodiagnostike.
● Ta funkcija je na voljo samo pri digitalnih kanalih s povezavo antene (rF/koaksialni
kabel).
Televizor je nagnjen desno ali
levo.
● Odstranite spodnji del stojala s televizorja in ga znova sestavite.
Spodnjega dela stojala ni mogoče
sestaviti.
● Zagotovite, da je televizor na ravni površini. Če ne uspete odstraniti vijakov s
televizorja, uporabite magnetizirani izvijač.
Meni kanalov je siv (ni na voljo). ● Meni Channel je na voljo samo, če je izbran vir televizorja.
Nastavitve se izbrišejo po 30
minutah ali ob vsakem izklopu
televizorja.
● Če je televizor v načinu Store Demo, se bodo nastavitve zvoka in slike ponastavile
vsakih 30 minut. Način Store Demo preklopite v način Home Use v postopku
Plug & Play. S pritiskanjem gumba SOURCE izberite način TV, nato pojdite na
MENU → Setup → Plug & Play → ENTERE.
Ponavljajoča se izguba avdio ali
video signala.
● Preverite, ali so kabli ustrezno povezani, in jih znova povežite.
● razlog so lahko premalo upogljivi ali predebeli kabli. Zagotovite, da so kabli dovolj
upogljivi za dolgotrajno uporabo. Pri stenski namestitvi priporočamo uporabo kablov z
90-stopinjskimi priključki.
Če od blizu pogledate rob okvirja
televizijskega zaslona, boste
morda videli delce.
● To je del zasnove izdelka in ni napaka.
Pri uporabi kartice CAM-a za
splošni vmesnik je prikazano
‘Kodiran signal’ ali ‘Šibek signal
ali ni signala’.
● Preverite, ali je v reži CAM-a za splošni vmesnik nameščena kartica za splošni
vmesnik.
● Izvlecite CAM iz televizorja in ga znova vstavite v režo.
Televizor se 45 minut po izklopu
znova vklopi.
● To je normalno. Televizor sam upravlja funkcijo OTA (Over The Air), da nadgradi
vgrajeno programsko opremo, ki se je prenesla med gledanjem.
Ponavljajoča se težava s sliko/
zvokom.
● Preverite in spremenite signal/vir.
N Ta plošča TFT lCd uporablja ploščo, ki je sestavljena iz osnovnih slikovnih pik, za izdelavo katerih je potrebna posebna
tehnologija. Kljub temu je lahko na zaslonu nekaj svetlih ali temnih slikovnih pik. Te svetlobne pike ne bodo vplivale na
delovanje izdelka.
BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:13Slovenščina - 33
¦ Specifikacije
Ime modela LE19C430, LE19C431 LE22C430, LE22C431
Velikost zaslona
(diagonala) 19 palcev 22 palcev
Ločljivost računalnika
(optimalno) 1360 x 768 pri 60Hz 1360 x 768 pri 60Hz
Zvok
(izhod) 3 W X 2 3 W X 2
Dimenzije (ŠxGxV)
Osrednji del
S stojalom
477 x 65 x 327 mm
477 x 180 x 362 mm
558 x 75 x 384 mm
558 x 216 x 426 mm
Teža
S stojalom 5 kg 7 kg
Okoljski vidiki
Delovna temperatura
delovna vlažnost
Temperatura shranjevanja
vlažnost pri shranjevanju
10 °C do 40 °C (50 °F do 104 °F)
10 % do 80 %, brez kondenzacije
-20 °C do 45 °C (-4 °F do 113 °F)
5 % do 95 %, brez kondenzacije
Vrtenje stojala
levo/desno 0˚
N Zasnovo in specifikacije lahko spremenimo brez obvestila.
N Naprava je digitalni aparat razreda B.
N Za napajanje in porabo energije si oglejte nalepko na izdelku.
BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:13Bu Kullanıcı Kılavuzundaki şekiller ve resimler yalnızca referans amaçlı verilmiştir ve gerçek ürünün görünümünden farklı olabilir.
Ürün tasarımı ve belirtimleri herhangi bir bildirim yapılmaksızın değiştirilebilir.
❑ License
TruSurround HD, SrS and symbol are trademarks of SrS labs, Inc. TruSurround HD technology is
incorporated under license from SrS labs, Inc.
Manufactured under license from dolby laboratories. dolby and the double-d symbol are trademarks of
Dolby laboratories.
❑ Dijital TV Uyarılar
1. digital Tv(dvB) ile ilgili olan işlevler, yalnız dvB-T (MPEG2 ve MPEG4 AvC) dijital yer üstü sinyallerinin yayınlandığı ya da
uyumlu bir dvB-C(MPEG2 ve MPEG4 AAC) kablolu Tv servisine erişiminizin olduğu ülkelerde/alanlarda kullanılabilir. lütfen
bölgenizdeki dvB-T ya da dvB-C sinyallerinin alınma olasılığı hakkında yerel bayiniz ile görüşünüz.
2. dvB-T; dijital yer üstü televizyonların yayını için bir dvB Avrupa Birliği standardıdır ve dvB-C ise, kablolu dijital Tv'lerin yayını
içindir Ancak, EPG (Elektrikli Program Kılavuzu), vOd (Talep üzerine video) ve diğerleri gibi bazı ayrıştırılmış özellikler, bu
spesifikasyona dahil edilmemiştir. Bu nedenle, şu anda desteklenmemektedirler.
3. Bu Tv seti [Ağustos, 2008] itibarıyla geçerli dvB-T ve dvB-C standartlarını karşılasa bile, gelecekteki dvB-T dijital karasal
yayın ve dvB-C dijital kablo yayınları ile uyumluluğu garanti edilemez.
4. Bu Tv setinin kullanıldığı ülkelere bağlı olarak bazı kablolu Tv sağlayıcıları, bu tür bir hizmet için ek ödeme talep edebilirler ve
onların koşullarına ve durumlarına uymanız gerekebilir.
5. Bazı dijital Tv fonksiyonları, bazı ülkelerde ya da bölgelerde kullanımda olmayabilir ve dvB-C, kablolu hizmet
sağlayıcılarından bazıları ile doğru şekilde çalışmayabilir.
6. daha fazla bilgi için lütfen yerel SAMSUNG müşteri hizmetleri merkeziniz ile iletişim kurun.
❑ Sabit Görüntünün Gösterilmesiyle ilgili Önlemler
Sabit görüntü Tv ekranında kalıcı hasara neden olabilir
● Ekranda görüntü takılmasına neden olabileceğinden lCd panelde tamamı veya bir bölümü sabit bir görüntüyü 2 saatten fazla
tutmayın. Bu görüntü takılmasına "ekran yanması" da denir. Bu tür bir görüntü takılmasını önlemek için hareketsiz bir görüntü
ekrandayken parlaklık ve kontrast değerlerini düşük bir seviyeye ayarlayın.
● lCd televizyonu uzun süre 4:3 formatında izlemek, farklı ışık emisyonundan dolayı ekranın solunda, sağında
ve ortasında çizgi şeklinde izler bırakabilir. dvd ya da oyun konsolunu oynatmak da ekranda benzer etkiye
yol açabilir. Yukarıdaki etkinin neden olduğu hasarlar Garanti kapsamında değildir.
● video oyunlarından ve bilgisayardan uzun süre durağan resimlerin görüntülenmesi kısmi görüntü izi oluşturabilir. Bu etkiyi
önlemek için, durağan görüntüleri görüntülerken 'parlaklık' ve 'kontrast' derecelerini azaltın.
© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., ltd. Tüm hakları saklıdır.
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:14Türkçe - 1
❑ Sembol
N O T
Not Tek Basmalı düğme TOOlS düğmesi Basın
GENEL BİLGİ
■ Kontrol Paneline Bakış .........................................................2
■ Aksesuarlar...........................................................................3
■ Bağlantı Paneline Bakış .......................................................4
■ Uzaktan Kumanda................................................................6
■ Uzaktan Kumandaya Pil Takma............................................6
ÇALIŞTIRMA
■ Menülere bakış.....................................................................7
■ Televizyonunuzun Bekleme Moduna Alınması .....................8
■ Plug & Play Özelliği ..............................................................8
■ Monitöre Bakış......................................................................9
KANAL KONTROLÜ
■ Kanal Menüsünü Yapılandırma ............................................9
■ Kanalları Yönetme .............................................................12
RESİM KONTROLÜ
■ resim Menüsünü Yapılandırma .........................................14
■ Tv'nizi Bilgisayar (PC) Ekranı Olarak Kullanma.................16
■ Tv'nizin PC'nizle Ayarlanması............................................17
SES KONTROLÜ
■ Ses Menüsünü Yapılandırma .............................................18
■ Ses Modunun Seçilmesi.....................................................19
KURULUM
■ Kurulum Menüsünün Yapılandırılması................................20
GİRİŞ / DESTEK
■ Giriş Menüsünü Yapılandırma ............................................23
■ destek Menüsünü Yapılandırma ........................................23
KULLANIM ÖNERİLERİ
■ Teletekst Özelliği.................................................................25
■ Standın Ayarlanması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)....................26
■ Tv Açısının Ayarlanması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)..............26
■ vESA Uyumlu Montaj Araçlarının Takılması
(yalnızca 19 inç modeli)......................................................27
■ dekoratif Kapakları Kullanma (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)......27
■ Standı Takma......................................................................28
■ duvara Montaj Kitinin Takılması .........................................28
■ Hırsıza Karşı Kensington Kilidini Kullanma ........................28
■ Kurulum Alanının Sabitlenmesi ..........................................29
■ Tv'yi duvara Sabitleme ......................................................29
■ Sorun Giderme ...................................................................30
■ Teknik Özellikler..................................................................33
İÇINDEKILER
Türkçe
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:14Türkçe - 2
GENEL BİLGİ
¦ Kontrol Paneline Bakış
N Ürünün rengi ve şekli, modele bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.
N düğmeleri yan panel düğmelerine basarak kullanabilirsiniz.
4
1
2
3
5
6
8 8 7
1 SOURCE E: Mevcut tüm giriş kaynakları arasında geçiş yapar. Ekran menüsünde, bu düğmeyi uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki
ENTERE düğmesini kullandığınız gibi kullanın.
2 MENU: Tv'nizin özellikler ekran menüsünü görmek için basın.
3Y : Ses seviyesini artırmak veya azaltmak için basın.
Ekran menüsünde, uzaktan kumandada ◄ ve ► düğmelerini kullandığınız gibi Y düğmelerini kullanın.
4ZZ: Kanalları değiştirmek için basın. Ekran menüsünde, uzaktan kumandada ▼ ve ▲ düğmelerini kullandığınız gibi
düğmelerini kullanın.
5 P (GÜÇ): Tv'yi açıp kapatmak için basın.
6 UZAKTAN KUMANDA SENSÖRÜ: Uzaktan kumandayı Tv üzerinde bu noktaya doğru tutun.
7 GÜÇ GÖSTERGESİ: Güç açıkken yanıp söner ve kapanır; bekleme modunda sürekli yanar.
8 HOPARLÖRLER
BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:15Türkçe - 3
¦ Aksesuarlar
Uzaktan Kumanda ve Piller
(AAA x 2)
Güç Kablosu
Kapak-Alt
(yalnızca 22 inç modeli)
Temizleme Bezi
(M4 X l16)
duvar Montaj kiti
(yalnızca 19 inç modeli)
Decoration Cover
(yalnızca 19 inç modeli)
Stand Screw X 4
(yalnızca 22 inç modeli)
● Kullanıcı Talimatları ● Garanti kartı ● Güvenlik Kılavuzu
N lCd Tv'nizle birlikte aşağıdaki öğelerin verildiğinden emin olun. Öğelerden herhangi biri eksikse bayinizle görüşün.
N Garanti kartı / Güvenlik Kılavuzu (Her yerde yoktur)
N Öğelerin rengi ve şekli, modele bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.
BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:16Türkçe - 4
6
7
1 2 3 4
0 9 8
5
¦ Bağlantı Paneline Bakış
N Ürünün rengi ve şekli, modele bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.
N Tv'nize harici bir cihaz bağladığınızda, birimdeki gücün kapatıldığından emin olun.
N Harici bir cihaza bağlarken, bağlantı terminalinin rengiyle kablonun rengini eşleştirin.
1 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
– Ev sineması alıcısı gibi bir dijital Ses bileşenine bağlanır.
N HdMI IN jakları bağlıyken Tv'deki DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jakı yalnızca 2 kanallı ses çıkışı verir. 5.1 kanal ses
duymak istiyorsanız, dvd/Blu-ray oynatıcısı veya Kablo/Uydu Kutusundaki Optik jakı doğrudan Amplifikatör veya Ev
Sinemasına bağlayın, Tv'ye bağlamayın.
2 SERVICE
– Yazılım yükseltmeleri için konektör.
3 HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI), AUDIO, PC]
– HdMI çıkışlı bir cihazın HdMI jakına bağlanır.
N HdMI - HdMI bağlantıları için ek Ses bağlantısı gerekmez.
N HdMI nedir?
HdMI(Yüksek Tanımlı Multimedya Arayüzü), dijital ses ve video sinyallerinin tek bir kablo kullanılarak iletilmesini sağlayan
bir arayüzdür.
HdMI ve dvI arasındaki fark, HdMI cihazının daha küçük olması, HdCP (High Bandwidth digital Copy Protection
– Yüksek Bant Genişliği dijital Kopyalama Koruma) kodlama özelliğinin yüklü olması ve çok kanallı dijital sesi
desteklemesidir.
N Harici bir cihaza dvI bağlantısı yapmak için HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] jakını kullanın. video bağlantısı için bir dvI
- HdMI kablosu ya da dvI - HdMI adaptörü kullanın, ses için ise HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO] jakları kullanın. HdMI / dvI kablo
bağlantısı kullanırken HDMI / PC IN [HDMI(DVI)] jakını kullanmalısınız.
HDMI / PC IN [AUDIO]
– PC’nizin üzerindeki ses çıkış jakına bağlayın.
– Harici cihazlar için dvI ses çıkışları.
HDMI / PC IN [PC]
– PC’nizin üzerindeki video çıkış jakına bağlayın.
N PC’niz bir HdMI bağlantısını destekliyorsa, bunu HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] terminaline bağlayabilirsiniz.
N PC’niz bir dvI bağlantısını destekliyorsa, bunu HDMI / PC IN [HDMI (DVI)] / [AUDIO] terminaline bağlayabilirsiniz.
4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
– rCA kablosunu vCr, dvd ya da Kamera gibi uygun bir harici cihaza bağlayın.
– rCA ses kablolarını cihazınızın [R-AUDIO-L] girişlerine takın ve kabloların diğer uçlarını A/v cihazınızın karşılık gelen ses
çıkış konektörlerine takın.
[TV Arka Paneli]
Güç Girişi
BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:16Türkçe - 5
5 ANT IN
– Bir antene ya da kablolu Tv sistemine bağlanır.
6 COMMON INTERFACE Yuvası
– Bazı kanallara 'CI KArTI' yerleştirilmediğinde, ekranda 'Karışmış Sinyal' görüntülenir.
– Bir telefon numarası, CI KArT Kimliği, Ana Makine Kimliği ve diğer bilgileri içeren eşleştirme bilgileri yaklaşık 2~3 dakika
içinde görüntülenecektir. Bir hata iletisi görüntülenirse, lütfen hizmet sağlayıcınızla görüşün.
– Kanal bilgileri yapılandırması tamamlandığında, kanal listesinin artık güncellendiğini belirten 'Güncelleme Tamamlandı'
mesajı görüntülenir.
N Yerel bir kablo hizmet sağlayıcısından bir CI KArTI edinmeniz gerekir. CI KArTI'nı düşürürseniz zarar görebileceğinden
elinizle dikkatlice çıkarın.
N CI-Kartı'nı, üzerinde belirtilen yönde yerleştirin.
N COMMON INTERFACE Yuvasının yeri, modeline bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.
N CAM bazı ülkelerde ve bölgelerde desteklenmez, yetkili satıcınızla görüşün.
4 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
– rCA kablosunu vCr, dvd ya da Kamera gibi uygun bir harici cihaza bağlayın.
– rCA ses kablolarını cihazınızın [R-AUDIO-L] girişlerine takın ve kabloların diğer uçlarını A/v cihazınızın karşılık gelen ses
çıkış konektörlerine takın.
7 KENSINGTON KİLİDİ (modele bağlıdır)
– Kensington kilidi, (isteğe bağlı) halka açık bir ortamda kullanıldığında sistemi fiziksel olarak sabitlemek için kullanılan bir
aygıttır. Bir kilitleme cihazı kullanmak isterseniz, Tv'yi satın aldığınız bayi ile görüşün.
8 Kulaklık jakı
– Kulaklık, cihazınızın kulaklık çıkışına takılabilir. Kulaklık takılıyken, dahili hoparlörlerden gelen ses kapatılacaktır.
N Kensington Kilidinin konumu, modeline bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.
9 COMPONENT IN
– Parça video kablolarını (isteğe bağlı) cihazınızın arkasındaki parça konektörüne (PR, PB, Y) takın ve kabloların diğer
uçlarını dTv ya da dvd'nin karşılık gelen parça video çıkış konektörlerine takın.
– Set Üstü cihazını ve dTv'yi (ya da dvd'yi) aynı anda bağlamak istiyorsanız, Set Üstü Cihazını dTv'ye (ya da dvd'ye) ve
dTv'yi (ya da dvd'yi) cihazınızdaki parça konektörüne (PR, PB, Y) bağlayın.
– Parça cihazlarınızdaki (dTv veya dvd) PR, PB ve Y konektörleri bazen Y, B-Y ve r-Y ya da Y, Cb ve Cr şeklinde
etiketlenebilir.
– rCA ses kablolarını (isteğe bağlı) cihazınızın arkasındaki [R-AUDIO-L] girişlerine takın ve kabloların diğer uçlarını A/v
cihazınızın karşılık gelen ses çıkış konektörlerine takın.
0 EXT (RGB)
Konektör
Giriş Çıkış
Video
Ses (Sol /
Sağ)
rGB video + Ses (Sol / Sağ)
EXT O O O Yalnızca Tv veya dTv çıkışı kullanılabilir.
– vCr, dvd, video oyun cihazları ya da video disk çalarlar gibi harici cihazlar için giriş ya da çıkış bağlantıları.
BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:16Türkçe - 6
¦ Uzaktan Kumanda
N Uzaktan kumandayı Tv'den en fazla 23 fit kadar uzakta kullanabilirsiniz.
N Uzaktan kumandanın performansı parlak ışıktan etkilenebilir.
N Ürünün rengi ve şekli, modele bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.
1 POWER: Televizyon Beklemede
düğmesidir.
2 SAYISAL DÜĞMELER: Kanalı
değiştirmek için basın.
3 FAV.CH: Ekranda Favori Kanal
listelerini görüntülemek için
kullanılır.
4Y : Ses seviyesini artırmak
veya azaltmak için basın.
5 SOURCE: Kullanılabilir video
kaynaklarını görüntülemek ve
seçmek için basın.
6 INFO : Tv ekranında bilgi
görüntülemek için basın.
7 TOOLS: Sık kullanılan işlevleri hızla
seçmek için kullanın.
8 CH LIST: Ekranda Kanal listesini
görüntüler
9 RENKLİ DÜĞMELER: Bu
düğmeleri Kanal Listesi
menülerinde vb. kullanın.
! TV: doğrudan Tv modunu seçer.
@ PRE-CH: Önceki izlediğiniz kanala
dönmenizi sağlar.
# MUTEM: Sesi geçici olarak
kesmek için basın.
$ P : Kanalları değiştirmek
için basın.
% MENU: Ana ekran menüsünü
görüntüler
^ GUIDE: Elektronik Program Kılavuzu
(EPG) ekranı
& RETURN: Önceki menüye geri döner
* YUKARI▲ / AŞAĞI▼ / SOL◄ / SAĞ►
/ ENTERE: Ekran üzerindeki menü
öğelerini seçmek ve menü değerlerini
değiştirmek için kullanın.
( EXIT: Menüden çıkmak için basın.
) SUBT. : dijital altyazı görünümü
a AD: Sesli Açıklama seçimi.
Teletekst İşlevleri
5 0: Teletekst modu seçimi (lIST /
FlOF)
6 5: Teletekst gösterimi
7 4: Teletekst boyutu seçimi
8 8: Teletekst hafızaya alma
9 Fastekst konu seçimi
0/: Alternatif olarak Teletekst, Çift
ya da Karışık seçin.
! :: Teletekst gösteriminden çıkış
@ 1: Teletekst alt sayfası
$ 2: Teletekst sonraki sayfa
3: Teletekst önceki sayfa
% 6: Teletekst dizini
& 9: Teletekst tutma
( 7: Teletekst iptal
¦ Uzaktan Kumandaya Pil Takma
1. resimde gösterildiği gibi uzaktan kumandanın arkasındaki kapağı kaldırın.
2. İki AAA boyutunda pil takın.
N Pil uçlarındaki '+' ve '–' işaretlerinin bölme içindeki şekille eşleşmesine dikkat edin.
3. Kapağı çıkarın.
N Uzaktan kumandayı uzunca bir süre kullanmayacaksanız, pilleri çıkarın ve serin, kuru bir
yerde saklayın.
N Uzaktan kumanda çalışmazsa, aşağıdakileri kontrol edin:
● Tv açık mı?
● Pillerin artı ve eksi uçları ters olarak mı takılmış?
● Piller bitmiş mi?
● Elektrik kesintisi veya güç kablosunun çıkması gibi bir durum var mı?
● Yakınlarda özel flüoresan lambası veya neon işareti var mı?
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
&
*
(
)
a
%
^
BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:17Türkçe - 7
ÇALIŞTIRMA
¦ Menülere bakış
Tv'yi kullanmadan önce, değişik fonksiyonları seçmek ve ayarlamak için menüde nasıl
dolaşılabileceğini öğrenmek amacıyla aşağıdaki adımları izleyin.
1. MENU düğmesine basın.
Ana menü ekranda görüntülenir. Solunda şu simgeler vardır: Görüntü, Ses, Kanal ,
Kurulum, Giriş, Uygulama, Destek.
2. Simgelerden birini seçmek için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basın.
Simgelerin alt menülerine gitmek için ◄ ya da ► düğmesine basın.
3. Öğeleri menüye taşımak için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine basın.
Menüye öğe girmek için ENTERE düğmesine basın.
4. Seçilmiş öğeleri değiştirmek için ▲/▼/◄/► düğmelerine basın.
N Önceki menüye dönmek için RETURN düğmesine basın.
5. Menüden çıkmak için EXIT düğmesine basın.
Uzaktan kumanda düğmelerinin kullanımı
Düğme İşlemler Düğme İşlemler
MENUm Ana ekran menüsünü görüntüler.
▲/▼/◄/►/
ENTERE
İşaretçiyi hareket ettirir ve bir öğe seçer.
Geçerli olarak seçili öğeyi seçer.
Ayarları onaylar.
RUTURNR Önceki menüye geri döner.
EXITe Ekran menüsünden çıkar.
Örnek: Resim Menüsünde TV'nin Parlaklığını ayarlama
Parlaklığı 80 olarak ayarlama
1. Menüyü görüntülemek için MENU düğmesine basın.
2. Görüntü öğesini seçmek için ENTERE düğmesine basın.
3. Parlaklık öğesini seçmek için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmelerine basın.
4. ENTERE düğmesine basın.
5. Parlaklık 80'e gelene kadar ◄ ya da ► düğmesine basın.
6. ENTERE düğmesine basın.
N Menüden çıkmak için EXIT düğmesine basın.
Modu : Standart ►
Arka Aydınlatma : 7
Kontrast : 95
Parlaklık : 45
Netlik : 50
renk : 50
Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50
Görüntü
Modu : Standart ►
Arka Aydınlatma : 7
Kontrast : 95
Parlaklık : 45
Netlik : 50
renk : 50
Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50
Görüntü
Arka Aydınlatma : 7
Kontrast : 95
Parlaklık : 45 ►
Netlik : 50
renk : 50
Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50
Gelişmiş Ayarlar
resim Seçenekleri
resim Sıfırlama
Görüntü
U Taşı L Ayarla E Giriş R Geri
Parlaklık 45
U Taşı L Ayarla E Giriş R Geri
Parlaklık 80
Modu : Standart ►
Arka Aydınlatma : 7
Kontrast : 95
Parlaklık : 45
Netlik : 50
renk : 50
Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50
Görüntü
BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:17Türkçe - 8
¦ Televizyonunuzun Bekleme Moduna Alınması
Cihazınız, güç tüketimini azaltmak için bekleme moduna alınabilir. Bekleme modu izlemeyi geçici olarak (örneğin yemek sırasında)
kesmek istediğinizde yararlı olur.
1. Uzaktan kumandadaki POWERP düğmesine basın.
N Ekrandaki görüntü kapanır ve cihazınızın üzerinde bir bekleme göstergesi yanar.
2. Ayarınızı eski durumuna getirmek için sadece POWERP yeniden basın.
N Cihazınızı uzun süre (örneğin, tatile gittiğinizde) bekleme modunda bırakmayın. Cihazı elektrik şebekesinden ve anten
bağlantılarından ayırmak en doğru işlemdir.
¦ Plug & Play Özelliği
Tv ilk kez açıldığında, temel ayarlar otomatik olarak başlar ve birbiri ardına devam eder.
1. Uzaktan kumandadaki POWER düğmesine basın. You can set the menu language.
mesajı görüntülenir.
2. ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak uygun dili seçin. Seçiminizi onaylamak için ENTERE
düğmesine basın.
3. ◄ veya ► düğmesine basarak Dükkan Demo veya Evde Kullanım seçimini yapın, ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.
N Ev ortamınızda en iyi resim için Tv'yi Evde Kullanım moduna ayarlamanızı öneririz.
N Dükkan Demo modu yalnızca satış ortamlarında kullanmak içindir.
N Cihaz kazara Dükkan Demo moduna ayarlanmışsa ve siz Evde Kullanım (Standart) moduna dönmek istiyorsanız:
Televizyon üzerindeki volume düğmesine basın. Ses OSd görüntülendiğinde televizyon üzerindeki MENU düğmesini 5
saniye boyunca basılı tutun.
4. ENTERE düğmesine basın. ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak uygun ülkeyi seçin. Seçiminizi onaylamak için ENTERE
düğmesine basın.
5. Dış Anten veya Kablo seçimini yapmak için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.
N Dış Anten: Dış Anten anten sinyalidir.
Kablo: Kablo anten sinyalidir.
6. ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak hafızaya alınacak kanal kaynağını seçin. Başlama öğesini seçmek için ENTERE düğmesine
basın.
N Dijital ve Analog: dijital ve Analog kanallardır.
Dijital: dijital kanallardır.
Analog: Analog kanallardır.
N Anten kaynağını Kablo olarak ayarladığınızda, dijital kanal araması için bir değer ayarlamanızı sağlayan bir adım belirir.
Daha fazla bilgi için, Kanal → Otomatik kayıtkısmına bakın.
N Kanal arama otomatik olarak başlatılır ve sonlandırılır.
N Kayda alma işlemini herhangi bir anda kesmek için ENTERE düğmesine basın.
N Kullanılabilir tüm kanallar hafızaya alındıktan sonra, Saat Modunu ayarlayın mesajı gösterilir.
7. ENTERE düğmesine basın. Oto seçimini yapmak için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine ve adından ENTERE düğmesine basın.
N Geçerli tarih ve zamanı ayarlayın, Manuel seçeneğini seçerseniz gösterilir.
N Bir dijital sinyal alırsanız, zaman otomatik olarak ayarlanacaktır. Almazsanız, saati ayarlamak için Manuel seçimini yapın.
(bkz. sayfa 20)
8. En iyi Hd kalitesini sunacak bağlantı yöntemi önerilmektedir. Yöntemi onayladıktan sonra ENTERE düğmesine basın.
9. TV'nizden keyif alın. mesajı görüntülenir. Bitirdiğinizde ENTERE düğmesine basın.
Bu özelliği sıfırlamak istiyorsanız...
1. Menüyü görüntülemek için MENU düğmesine basın. Kurulum seçimini yapmak için ▲ ya da ▼ düğmesine, ardından
ENTERE düğmesine basın.
2. Plug & Play seçimini yapmak için ENTERE düğmesine yeniden basın.
3. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin. Yeni bir Tv'nin varsayılan PIN numarası 0-0-0-0 dır.
N PIN numarasını değiştirmek istiyorsanız, PIN Değiştir işlevini kullanın. (bkz. sayfa 22)
N Plug & Play özelliği yalnızca Tv modunda kullanılabilir.
Plug & Play
You can set the menu language.
Menu language : English ►
E enter
BN68-03043A.indb 8 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:17Türkçe - 9
¦ Monitöre Bakış
Ekran, geçerli kanalı ve bazı belirli ses-video ayarlarının durumunu tanımlar.
O Bilgileri görüntülemek için INFO düğmesine basın.
Uzaktan kumandadaki INFO düğmesine basın. Tv; kanalı, sesin türünü ve belirli görüntü
ve ses ayarlarının durumunu görüntüleyecektir.
● ▲, ▼: diğer kanal bilgilerini görüntüleyebilirsiniz. Geçerli durumda seçili kanala
gitmek istediğinizde, ENTERE düğmesine basın.
● ◄, ►: Geçerli kanalda istenen programın bilgilerini görüntüleyebilirsiniz.
N INFO düğmesine bir kez daha basın veya yaklaşık 10 saniye bekleyin, ekran
otomatik olarak kaybolur.
KANAL KONTROLÜ
¦ Kanal Menüsünü Yapılandırma
❑ Ülke
N PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin.
Analog Kanal
Analog kanallar için ülkeyi değiştirebilirsiniz.
Dijital Kanal
dijital kanallar için ülkeyi değiştirebilirsiniz.
❑ Otomatik kayıt
Kullanabileceğiniz frekans aralıklarını tarayabilirsiniz (ve kullanılabilirlik ülkenize göre değişir). Otomatik olarak yerleştirilen program
numaraları, gerçek ya da istenen program numaralarına uymayabilir.
N Bir kanal Çocuk Kilidi işlevi kullanılarak kilitlenmişse, PIN giriş penceresi görünür.
Dış Anten / Kablo
Hafızaya alınacak anten kaynağıdır
● Dijital ve Analog: dijital ve Analog kanallardır.
● Dijital: dijital kanallardır.
● Analog: Analog kanallardır.
‘Kablo → Dijital ve Analog’ veya ‘Kablo → Dijital’
Kablo kanallarını taramak için bir değer girin.
● Arama Modu → Tam / Ağ / Hızlı
N Hızlı
– Network ID: Ağ kimliği kodunu görüntüler.
– Frekans: Kanalın frekansını görüntüler. (Her ülkede farklıdır)
– Modulation: Kullanılabilir modülasyon değerlerini görüntüler.
– Symbol Rate: Kullanılabilir sembol hızlarını görüntüler.
N Etkin yayın istasyonları olan tüm kanalları tarar ve bunları Tv'nin hafızasına kaydeder.
N Otomatik Kayıt işlemini durdurmak istiyorsanız, ENTERE düğmesine basın.
Otomatik Programlama Durdurulsun mu? mesajı görüntülenecektir.
◄ veya ► düğmesine basarak Evet seçimini yapın, sonra ENTERE düğmesine basın.
Ülke ►
Otomatik kayıt
Elden kayıt
Kablolu Arama Seçeneği
Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz.
Tam Kılavuz
varsayılan Kılavuz : Tam Kılavuz
Kanal
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
life On venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information ¦ INFO
BN68-03043A.indb 9 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:18Türkçe - 10
❑ Elden kayıt
N Bir kanalı elle tarar ve bunu Tv'nin hafızasına kaydeder.
N Bir kanal Çocuk Kilidi işlevi kullanılarak kilitlenmişse, PIN giriş penceresi görünür.
Dijital Kanal
dijital kanalların elle kaydedilmesi.
N Dijital Kanal sadece DTV modunda geçerlidir.
● Kanal: ▲, ▼ ya da sayı (0~9) düğmelerini kullanarak Kanal numarasını ayarlayın.
● Frekans: Sayı düğmelerini kullanarak frekansı ayarlayın.
● Bant genişliği: ▲, ▼ ya da sayı (0~9) düğmelerini kullanarak bant genişliğini ayarlayın.
N Tamamlandığında, kanal listesindeki kanallar güncellenir.
Analog Kanal
Analog kanalların elle kaydedilmesi.
● Program (Kanala atanacak program numarası): ▲, ▼ ya da sayı (0~9) düğmelerini kullanarak program numarasını ayarlar.
● Renk Sistemi → Oto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43: ▲ veya ▼ düğmesini kullanarak renk sistemi değerini ayarlar.
● Ses Sistemi → BG / DK / I / L: ▲ veya ▼ düğmesini kullanarak ses sistemi değerini ayarlar.
● Kanal (Kaydedilecek kanal numarasını biliyorsanız): ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak C (Karasal kanal) ya da S (Kablo kanalı)
seçimini yapın. ► düğmesine basın, ardından gerekli numarayı seçmek için ▲, ▼ ya da sayı (0~9) düğmelerine basın.
N Kanal numarasını, sayı (0~9) düğmelerine basarak da doğrudan seçebilirsiniz.
N Normal olmayan bir ses varsa veya ses yoksa, gerekli ses standardını yeniden seçin.
● Ara (Kanal numaralarını bilmediğinizde): Aramayı başlatmak için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Kanal ayarcısı ilk kanal ya da
sizin seçtiğiniz kanal ekranda görüntülenene kadar frekans aralığını tarar.
● Kayıt (Kanal ve ilgili program numarasını kaydettiğinizde): ENTERE düğmesine basarak Tamam olarak ayarlayın.
N Kanal modu
– P (Program modu): Ayarlama tamamlanırken, bölgenizdeki yayın istasyonları, P00 ile P99 arasındaki konum numaralarına
atanırlar. Bu modda iken konum numarasını girerek bir kanalı seçebilirsiniz.
– C (Karasal kanal modu): Bu modda iken, antenle alınan her bir istasyona atanmış numarayı girerek bir kanal
seçebilirsiniz.
– S (Kablo kanalı modu): Bu modda iken, kablo ile alınan her bir istasyona atanmış numarayı girerek bir kanal seçebilirsiniz.
❑ Kablolu Arama Seçeneği
Kablo Tv şebekesi araması için frekans ve simge hızı gibi ek arama seçeneklerini ayarlar.
● Frekans (Başlama ~ Durdurma): Kanalın frekansını görüntüler.
● Modulation: Kullanılabilir modülasyon değerlerini görüntüler.
● Symbol Rate: Kullanılabilir sembol hızlarını görüntüler.
❑ Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. / Tam Kılavuz
EPG (Elektronik Program Kılavuzu) bilgileri yayıncılar tarafından sağlanır. Herhangi bir kanalda bilgi yayını sebebiyle boş veya
güncelliğini yitirmiş program girişleri görünebilir. Yeni bilgiler gelir gelmez ekran dinamik şekilde güncellenir.
N Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. ve Tam Kılavuz kullanımı hakkındaki ayrıntılı prosedürler için sayfa 11'daki açıklamalara bakın.
O Kılavuz menüsünü görüntülemek için GUIDE düğmesine basmanız da yeterlidir. (Varsayılan Kılavuz öğesini yapılandırmak
için açıklamalara bakın.)
Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz.
Sol sütunda gösterilen altı kanal için, Geçerli program ve Sonraki program bilgileri görüntülenir.
Tam Kılavuz
Program bilgilerini zamana göre sıralanmış Bir saatlik dilimler şeklinde görüntüler. Zamana göre ileri ya da geri kaydırılabilen iki
saatlik program bilgileri görüntülenir.
BN68-03043A.indb 10 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:18Türkçe - 11
❑ Varsayılan Kılavuz → Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. / Tam Kılavuz
Uzaktan kumandadaki GUIDE düğmesi basıldığında Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. ya da Tam Kılavuz görüntülemeyi seçebilirsiniz.
❑ Kanal Listesi
Kanal Listesi kullanma hakkında ayrıntılı prosedürler için 'Kanalları Yönetme' talimatlarına bakın.
O Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki CH LIST düğmesine basarak bu seçenekleri belirleyebilirsiniz.
❑ Kanal Modu
P >/< düğmesine basıldığında, Kanallar seçilen kanal listesi dahilinde değişecektir.
Eklenen Kanallar
Kanallar kaydedilmiş kanal listesi içinde geçiş yapacaktır.
Favori Kanallar
Kanallar favori kanal listesi içinde geçiş yapacaktır.
❑ İnce Ayar
Alınan görüntü netse, arama ve kaydetme işlemi sırasında otomatik olarak yapılmış olduğu için kanalın ince ayarını yapmanıza
gerek yoktur. Ancak sinyal zayıf ya da bozuksa, kanalın ince ayarını elle yapmanız gerekebilir.
N İnce ayarlanan kanalların, kanal etiketindeki kanal numarasının sağ tarafında bir yıldız '*' işareti bulunur.
N İnce ayarı sıfırlamak için, ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak Sıfrl seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.
N Yalnızca Analog Tv kanallarında ince ayar yapılabilir.
Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. / Tam Kılavuz
Amaç... İşlem...
EPG listesindeki bir programı seyretmek ▲, ▼, ◄, ► düğmesine basarak bir program seçin.
Kılavuzdan çıkmak Mavi düğmeye basın
Sonraki program seçilirse, saat simgesi görüntülenerek program zamanlanır. ENTERE düğmesine tekrar basılırsa, ◄, ►
düğmesine basarak Prgrmlr Dğştrm seçeneğini seçin, saat simgesinin kaybolması ile zamanlama işlemi iptal edilir.
Program bilgilerini izlemek ▲, ▼, ◄, ► düğmesine basarak istediğiniz bir programı seçin.
Ardından istediğiniz program vurgulandığında INFO düğmesine basın.
Program başlığı, ekran merkezinin üst kısmındadır.
Ayrıntılı bilgi için INFO düğmesine basın. Ayrıntılı bilgi içinde Channel Number, running Time, Status Bar, Parental level, video
Quality Information (Hd / Sd), Sound Modes, Subtitle ya da Teletext, Subtitle veya Teletext dilleri ve vurgulanan programın kısa bir
özeti bulunur. “...” özet uzunsa görüntülenecektir.
Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz. ya da Tam Kılavuz
arasında geçiş yapmak.
Kırmızı düğmeye art arda basın.
Tam Kılavuz'da
Geriye hızlı hareket (24 saat).
İleriye hızlı hareket (24 saat).
Yeşil düğmeye art arda basın.
Sarı düğmeye art arda basın.
Tam Kılavuz
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Sal 1 Haz
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Bugün 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
No information
Freshmen O..
İzle
INFO Bilgi ■ Şimdi/Snr ■ +24 Saat ■ Çıkış
Şimdi ve Sonraki Klvz.
dTv Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Sal 1 Haz
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Şimdi İleri
Mint extra
loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
1 f tn
2 ITv Play
3 Kerrang!
4 Kiss
5 oneword
▼ 6 Smash Hits!
Kisstory
No information
No information
No information
Street Hypn..
İzle
INFO Bilgi ■ Tam Kılavuz ■ Çıkış
BN68-03043A.indb 11 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:18Türkçe - 12
¦ Kanalları Yönetme
Bu menüyü kullanarak Favori kanalları Ekleyebilir / Silebilir ya da ayarlayabilir ve dijital yayınlar
için program kılavuzunu kullanabilirsiniz.
Tüm Kanallar
O anda mevcut tüm kanalları gösterir.
Eklenen Kanallar
Tüm eklenmiş kanalları gösterir.
Sık Kullanılanlar
Tüm favori kanalları gösterir.
O Ayarladığınız favori kanalları seçmek için uzaktan kumandadaki FAV.CH düğmesine basın.
Programlandı
Tüm geçerli rezerv edilmiş kanalları gösterir.
N Tüm Kanallar, Eklenen Kanallar veya Sık Kullanılanlar ekranında ▲ / ▼ düğmelerine ve ENTERE düğmesine basarak
bir kanal seçin. Ardından seçilen kanalı izleyebilirsiniz.
N Kanal Listesinde Renk düğmelerinin kullanılması
– Kırmızı (Kanal Tipi): TV, Radyo, Veri / Diğer ve Tümü seçenekleri arasında geçiş yapın.
– Yeşil (zoom): Bir kanal numarasını büyütür ya da küçültür.
– Sarı (Seçim): Birden fazla kanal listesi seçer. Aynı anda birden fazla kanal için ekleme / silme, Favorilere ekleme /
Favorilerden silme ya da kilitleme / kilit açma işlevlerini gerçekleştirebilirsiniz. Tüm seçilmiş kanalları aynı anda ayarlamak
için gerekli kanalı seçin ve sarı düğmeye basın. Seçilen kanalların solunda c işareti görünür.
– TOOLS (Araçlar): Sil (veya Ekle), Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle (veya Sık Kullanılanlardan Sil), Kilit (veya Kilit aç),
Zamanlayıcıyla Seyretme, Kanal Adı Düzenleme, Sınıflama, Kanal Numarası Düzenleme, Tümünü Seç (veya Tüm
seçimleri kaldır), Otomatik kayıt menüsünü gösterir. (Seçenekler menüleri duruma göre değişebilir.)
N Kanal Durum Ekranı Simgeleri
● A : Bir analog kanal.
● c: Sarı düğmeye basılarak seçilen bir kanal.
● : Favori olarak ayarlanmış bir kanal.
● ( : Geçerli olarak yayınlanmakta olan bir kanal.
● \ : Kilitlenmiş bir kanal.
● ) : rezerv edilmiş bir program
Kanal Listesi Seçenek Menüsü (Tüm Kanallar / Eklenen Kanallar / Sık Kullanılanlar)
N Seçenek menüsünü kullanmak için TOOLS düğmesine basın.
N Seçenek menüsü öğeleri kanal durumuna göre değişebilir.
Ekle / Sil
İstediğiniz kanalları görüntülemek için bir kanalı silebilir ya da ekleyebilirsiniz.
N Silinen tüm kanallar Tüm Kanallar menüsünde gösterilecektir.
N Gri renkli bir kanal, kanalın silindiğini gösterir.
N Ekle menüsü yalnızca silinmiş kanallar için görünür.
N Ayrıca bir kanalı Eklenen Kanallar veya Sık Kullanılanlar menüsünde de aynı şekilde
silebilirsiniz.
Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle / Sık Kullanılanlardan Sil
Sık seyrettiğiniz kanalları favoriler olarak ayarlayabilirsiniz.
T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Ayrıca Favorilerde yapılan ekleme (ya da silme) işlemini
Araçlar → Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle (veya Sık Kullanılanlardan Sil) öğelerini seçerek de yapabilirsiniz.
N ' ' sembolü gösterilecek ve kanal bir favori olarak ayarlanacaktır.
N Tüm favori kanallar Sık Kullanılanlar menüsünde gösterilecektir.
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Eklenen Kanallar
Tümü ■ Kanal Tipi ■ Zoom ■ Seçim T Araçlar
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
Eklenen Kanallar
Tümü ■ Kanal Tipi ■ Zoom ■ Seçim T Araçlar
Sil
Sık Kullanılanlara Ekle
Kilit
Zamanlayıcıyla Seyretme
Kanal Adı Düzenleme
Sınıflama
▼
BN68-03043A.indb 12 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:19Türkçe - 13
Kilit / Kilit aç
Bir kanalı kilitleyebilirsiniz, böylece kanal seçilemez ve izlenemez. Bu işlev yalnızca Çocuk Kilidi öğesi Açık olarak ayarlandığında
kullanılabilir. (bkz. sayfa 22)
N PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin.
N Yeni bir Tv'nin varsayılan PIN numarası 0-0-0-0 dır. Menüden PIN Değiştir seçimini yaparak PIN'i değiştirebilirsiniz.
N '\' sembolü gösterilecek ve kanal kilitlenecektir.
Zamanlayıcıyla Seyretme
İzlemek istediğiniz bir programı rezerv ettiyseniz, başka bir kanal izliyor olsanız bile kanal otomatik olarak Kanal listesindeki rezerv
edilmiş kanala geçecektir. Bir programı rezerv etmek için önce geçerli zamanı ayarlayın. (Bkz. sayfa 20)
N Yalnızca hafızaya alınmış kanallar rezerv edilebilir.
N Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki numara düğmelerine basarak kanal, gün, ay, yıl, saat ve dakika ayarlarını doğrudan
yapabilirsiniz.
N Bir programın rezerv edilmesi Program menüsünde gösterilecektir.
N Dijital Program Kılavuzu ve İzleme Rezervasyonu
Bir dijital kanal seçildiğinde ve ► düğmesine bastığınızda kanalın Program Kılavuzu görünür. Yukarıda anlatılan prosedürlere
göre bir programı rezerve edebilirsiniz.
Kanal Adı Düzenleme (yalnızca analog kanallar)
Kanallar çağrı harfleri kanal seçildiğinde görünecek şekilde etiketlenebilir.
N dijital yayın kanallarının adları otomatik olarak atanır ve etiketlenemez.
Kanal Numarası Düzenleme (yalnızca dijital kanallar)
Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki numara düğmelerine basarak da kanal numarasını düzenleyebilirsiniz.
Sınıflama (yalnızca analog kanallar)
Bu işlem, kayıtlı kanalların program numarasını değiştirmenize olanak verir. Bu işlem otomatik kaydetme kullanıldıktan sonra
gerekli olabilir.
Tümünü Seç / Tüm seçimleri kaldır
● Tümünü Seç: Kanal listesindeki tüm kanalları seçebilirsiniz.
● Tüm seçimleri kaldır: Seçilmiş kanalların hepsini seçilmemiş konuma getirebilirsiniz.
N Ancak seçilmiş bir kanal olduğunda Tüm seçimleri kaldır seçimini yapabilirsiniz.
Otomatik kayıt
N Ayarlama seçenekleri hakkında daha fazla bilgi için sayfa 9'e bakın.
N Bir kanal Çocuk Kilidi işlevi kullanılarak kilitlenmişse, PIN giriş penceresi görünür.
Kanal Listesi Seçenek Menüsü (Programlandı menüsünde)
Bir rezervasyonu görüntüleyebilir, değiştirebilir ya da silebilirsiniz.
N Seçenek menüsünü kullanmak için TOOLS düğmesine basın.
Bilgileri Değiştirme
Bir izleme rezervasyonunu değiştirmek için seçin.
Programları Değiştirme
Bir izleme rezervasyonunu iptal etmek için seçin.
Bilgi
Bir izleme rezervasyonunu izlemek için seçin. (Ayrıca rezervasyon bilgisini de
değiştirebilirsiniz.)
Tümünü Seç
Tüm rezerv edilmiş programları seçin.
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 Tv1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 Tv3 The equalizer
20:59 2 Tv3 McMillan & Wife
Programlandı Tümü ■ Zoom ■ Seçim T Araçlar E Araçlar
Bilgileri Değiştirme
Prgrmlr Dğştrm
Bilgi
Tümünü Seç
BN68-03043A.indb 13 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:19Türkçe - 14
RESİM KONTROLÜ
¦ Resim Menüsünü Yapılandırma
❑ Modu
İzleme gereksinimlerinize en uygun resim türünü seçebilirsiniz.
T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Ayrıca Araçlar → Resim
Modu seçimini yaparak resim modunu da ayarlayabilirsiniz.
Dinamik
Aydınlık bir odada yüksek tanımlamalı görüntü için resim türünü seçer.
Standart
Normal bir odada en iyi görüntü için resim türünü seçer.
Sinema
Karanlık bir odada film izlemek için resim türünü seçer.
❑ Arka Aydınlatma / Kontrast / Parlaklık / Netlik / Renk / Ton (G/R)
Televizyonunuzda, resim kalitesini kontrol etmenizi sağlayacak çeşitli ayar seçenekleri
bulunmaktadır.
● Arka Aydınlatma: lCd arka aydınlatmanın parlaklığını ayarlar.
● Kontrast: resmin kontrast seviyesini ayarlar.
● Parlaklık: resmin parlaklık seviyesini ayarlar
● Netlik: resmin kenar tanımlamasını ayarlar.
● Renk: resmin renk doygunluğunu ayarlar.
● Ton (G/R): resmin renk tonunu ayarlar.
N Önce ayarlanacak bir resim modu seçin. Ayarlanan değerler her resim modu için kaydedilecektir.
N Arka Aydınlatma, Kontrast, Parlaklık, Netlik, Renk veya Ton (G/R) ayarlarında değişiklik yaptığınızda OSd de uygun
şekilde ayarlanacaktır.
N PAl sistemin analog TV, Ext., AV modlarında Ton (G/R) İşlevini kullanamazsınız.
N PC modunda, yalnızca Arka Aydınlatma, Kontrast ve Parlaklık ayarlarında değişiklik yapabilirsiniz.
N Ayarlar, Tv'nin bir girişine bağladığınız her harici cihaz için ayarlanabilir ve saklanabilir.
N resmin parlaklık düzeyi azaltılırsa kullanım süresince tüketilen enerji önemli ölçüde azaltılabilir ve bu, toplam çalışma
maliyetini düşürür.
❑ Gelişmiş Ayarlar
Samsung'un yeni Tv'leri önceki modellere göre daha hassas resim ayarları yapmanıza izin verir. Ayrıntılı resim ayarlarını yapmak
için aşağıya bakın.
N Gelişmiş Ayarlar menüsü, Standart veya Sinema modunda kullanılabilir.
N PC modunda Gelişmiş Ayarlar öğeleri arasından yalnızca Gamma ve Beyaz Dengesi ayarlarını değiştirebilirsiniz.
Siyah Tonu → Kpalı / Koyu / Daha Koyu / En Koyu
Ekran derinliğini ayarlamak için ekrandaki siyahlık düzeyini seçebilirsiniz.
Dinamik Kontrast → Kpalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek
En iyi kontrast sağlanacak şekilde ekran kontrastını ayarlayabilirsiniz.
Gamma
Ana renk (Kırmızı, Yeşil, Mavi) Yoğunluğunu ayarlayabilirsiniz.
Renk Alanı
renk Alanı kırmızı, yeşil ve mavi renklerden oluşan bir renk tablosudur. En doğal renkleri yaşamak için beğendiğiniz renk Alanı
seçimini yapın.
● Doğal: doğal renk Alanı, derinliği olan zengin bir renk tonu sunar.
● Oto: Oto renk Alanı, program kaynaklarına dayalı en doğal renk tonunu otomatik olarak ayarlar.
Modu : Standart ►
Arka Aydınlatma : 7
Kontrast : 95
Parlaklık : 45
Netlik : 50
renk : 50
Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50
Görüntü
renk : 50
Ton (G/r) : G50 / r50
Gelişmiş Ayarlar ►
resim Seçenekleri
resim Sıfırlama
Görüntü
BN68-03043A.indb 14 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:19Türkçe - 15
Beyaz Dengesi
daha doğal resim renkleri için renk sıcaklığını ayarlayabilirsiniz.
● R-Ofseti / G-Ofseti / G-Ofseti / R-Kazanımı / G-Kazanımı / B-Kazanımı: Açık alanlarda renk ‘sıcaklığını’ r, G, B değerleri
değiştirerek ayarlayabilirsiniz. Yalnızca ileri düzey kullanıcılar için önerilmektedir.
● Sıfrl: daha önce ayarlanmış beyaz dengesi fabrika ayarlarına dönecektir.
Ten Tonu
resimdeki pembe 'cilt tonu'nu vurgulayabilirsiniz.
N Ayar değerinin değiştirilmesi ayarlanmış ekranı yenileyecektir.
Kenar Geliştirme → Kpalı / Açık
resimdeki nesne sınırlarını vurgulayabilirsiniz.
❑ Resim Seçenekleri
N PC modunda Resim Seçenekleri öğeleri arasından yalnızca Renk Tonu ve Boyut ayarlarında değişiklik yapabilirsiniz.
Renk Tonu → Mavi / Normal / Kırmızı1 / Kırmızı2
Gözlerinize en uygun renk tonunu seçebilirsiniz.
N Ayarlar, Tv'nin bir girişine bağladığınız her harici cihaz için ayarlanabilir ve saklanabilir.
N Kırmızı1 ya da Kırmızı2 yalnızca resim modu Sinema olduğunda etkinleştirilir.
Boyut
İzleme gereksinimlerinize en uygun resim boyutunu seçebilirsiniz.
T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Boyutu ayrıca Araçlar → Resim Boyutu ayarı ile de
ayarlayabilirsiniz.
● Oto Geniş: resim boyutunu otomatik olarak 16:9 en-boy oranına ayarlar.
● 16:9: resim boyutunu, dvd'ler ya da geniş yayınlar için uygun 16:9 oranına getirir.
● Geniş Yknlştrm: resmin boyutunu 4:3'ten daha fazla büyütür.
● Zoom: 16:9 geniş resmi büyüterek (dikey yönde) ekran boyutuna sığdırır.
● 4:3: video filmleri ya da normal yayın için bu varsayılan ayardır.
● Ekrana Sığdır: HdMI (720p/1080i) veya Parça (1080i) sinyalleri girişi alınırken herhangi bir yerini kesmeden tam resmi
görmek için bu işlevi kullanın.
N Giriş kaynağına bağlı olarak, resim boyutu farklılık gösterebilir.
N Kullanılabilir öğeler, seçilen moda bağlı olarak farklı olabilir.
N PC Modunda, yalnızca 16:9 ve 4:3 modu ayarlanabilir.
N Ayarlar, Tv'nin bir girişine bağladığınız her harici cihaz için ayarlanabilir ve saklanabilir.
N Cihazda iki saatten fazla durağan bir görüntü izlediğinizde geçici görüntü takılması oluşabilir.
N Geniş Yknlştrm: ► düğmesine basarak Konum seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. resmi yukarı /
aşağı hareket ettirmek için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.
N Zoom: ► düğmesine basarak Konum seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. resmi yukarı ve aşağı
hareket ettirmek için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. ► düğmesine basarak Boyut
seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın. resim boyutunu dikey yönde büyütmek ya da küçültmek için
▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Ardından ENTERE düğmesine basın.
N HDMI(1080i) veya Component (1080i) modunda Ekrana Sığdır seçildikten sonra: ◄ veya ► düğmesine basarak Konum
seçeneğini belirleyin. resmi hareket ettirmek için ▲, ▼, ◄ veya ► düğmesini kullanın.
Sıfrl: ◄ veya ► düğmesine basarak Sıfrl seçeneğini seçin ve ardından ENTEREdüğmesine basın. Ayarları
başlatabilirsiniz.
N HdMI 720p girişiyle Ekrana Sığdır işlevini kullanırsanız, overscan işlevinde olduğu gibi 1 satır üstten, alttan, soldan ve sağdan
kesilir.
Ekran Modu → 16:9 / Geniş Yknlştrm / Zoom / 4:3
resim boyutunu 16:9 geniş açı Tv'de Oto Geniş ayarına getirirken, 4:3 WSS (Geniş Ekran Hizmeti) görüntü görmek istediğiniz
görüntü boyutuna karar verebilir ya da hiçbir şey yapmayabilirsiniz. Her Avrupa ülkesi farklı resim boyutu gerektirir, dolayısıyla bu
işlev kullanıcıların seçmesi için tasarlanmıştır.
● 16:9: resmi 16:9 geniş moduna ayarlar.
● Geniş Yknlştrm: resmin boyutunu 4:3'ten daha fazla büyütür.
● Zoom: resmin boyutunu ekranda dikey olarak büyütür.
● 4:3: resmi 4:3 normal moduna ayarlar.
N Bu işlev Oto Geniş modunda kullanılabilir.
N Bu işlev PC, Parça veya HDMI modunda kullanılamaz.
BN68-03043A.indb 15 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 16
Dijital azal → Kpalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek / Oto
Tv'nizin aldığı yayın sinyali zayıfsa, ekranda görülebilecek parazit ya da gölgeleri gidermek için dijital Gürültü Azaltma özelliği
kullanılabilir.
N Sinyal zayıfsa, en iyi resmi elde edinceye kadar diğer seçenekleri deneyin.
HDMI Siyahlık Düzeyi → Normal / Düşük
Ekran derinliğini ayarlamak için doğrudan ekrandaki siyahlık düzeyini seçebilirsiniz.
N Bu işlev yalnızca harici giriş HdMI'ya (rGB sinyalleri) bağlandığında etkindir.
Film modu → Kpalı / Oto
Tv, tüm kaynaklardan film sinyallerini otomatik olarak algılamak ve işlemek ve en iyi kalite için resmi ayarlamak üzere ayarlanabilir.
N Film modu Tv, Av, Parça (480i / 1080i) ve HdMI (480i / 1080i) tarafından desteklenir.
❑ Resim Sıfırlama → Resim Modunu Sıfırla / İptal
Tüm resim ayarlarını varsayılan değerlere sıfırlar.
N Sıfırlanacak bir resim modu seçin. Her resim modu için sıfırlama gerçekleştirilir.
● Resim Modunu Sıfırla: Mevcut resim değerleri varsayılan ayarlara döner.
¦ TV'nizi Bilgisayar (PC) Ekranı Olarak Kullanma
PC Yazılımınızın Ayarlanması (Windows XP'ye göre)
Tipik bir bilgisayarın Windows ekran ayarları aşağıda gösterilmektedir. Kullandığınız Windows'un sürümüne ve video kartınıza
bağlı olarak PC'nizin gerçek ekranı büyük olasılıkla bundan farklıdır. Ancak, sizin bilgisayarınızda açılan ekranlar farklı görünse de,
çoğu durumda aynı temel ayar bilgileri geçerli olacaktır. (değilse, bilgisayar üreticinize ya da Samsung Bayiine başvurun.)
1. İlk olarak Windows başlat menüsünden 'denetim Masası'nı tıklatın.
2. denetim masası penceresi göründüğünde, 'Görünüm ve Temalar' öğesini tıklatın, bir iletişim kutusu açılır.
3. denetim masası penceresi göründüğünde, 'Ekran'ı tıklatın, bir ekran iletişim kutusu açılır.
4. Ekran iletişim kutusunda 'Ayarlar' sekmesine gidin.
doğru boyut ayarı (çözünürlük): En iyi-1360 x 768 piksel
Ekran ayarları iletişim kutunuzda düşey frekans seçeneği varsa, doğru değer '60' ya da '60 Hz'dir. Yoksa, 'TAMAM' düğmesini
tıklatın ve iletişim kutusundan çıkın.
BN68-03043A.indb 16 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 17
Ekran Modları
PC monitörünün türüne ve çözünürlüğüne bağlı olarak hem ekran konumu hem de boyutu farklı olabilir. Tablodaki çözünürlükler
önerilmektedir.
D-Sub ve HDMI/DVI Girişi
Modu Çözünürlük Yatay Frekans (KHz)
Dikey Frekans
(Hz)
Piksel Saati Frekansı
(MHz)
Senkronizasyon
Polaritesi (Y/D)
IBM 640 x 350 31,469 70,086 25,175 +/-
720 x 400 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
MAC 640 x 480 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
832 x 624 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VeSA CVT 720 x 576 35,910 59,950 32,750 -/+
1280 x 720 44,772 59,855 74,500 -/+
1280 x 720 56,456 74,777 95,750 -/+
VeSA DMT 640 x 480 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
640 x 480 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
640 x 480 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
800 x 600 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
800 x 600 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
800 x 600 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
1024 x 768 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
1024 x 768 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
1024 x 768 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
1360 x 768 47,712 60,015 85,500 +/+
VeSA GTF 1280 x 720 52,500 70,000 89,040 -/+
N HdMI/dvI kablo bağlantısı kullanırken HDMI (DVI) jakını kullanmalısınız.
N Geçmeli tarama modu desteklenmemektedir.
N Standartlara uymayan bir video biçimi seçilirse cihaz normal olarak çalışmayabilir.
N Ayrı ve Kompozit modlar desteklenmektedir. SOG desteklenmemektedir.
¦ TV'nizin PC'nizle Ayarlanması
N Ön ayar: PC modunu seçmek için SOURCE düğmesine basın.
❑ Otomatik Ayarlama
Otomatik Ayarlama, cihazın PC ekranının, gelen PC video sinyaline göre kendini otomatik
olarak ayarlamasını sağlar. İnce, kaba ve konum değerleri otomatik olarak ayarlanır.
N Bu işlev dvI-HdMI modunda çalışmaz.
T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Otomatik Ayarlama
değerini ayrıca Araçlar → Otomatik Ayarlama öğesini seçerek de ayarlayabilirsiniz.
❑ Ekran
Kaba / İnce
resim kalitesi ayarının amacı, resimdeki parazitleri ortadan kaldırmak veya azaltmaktır.
Parazitleri yalnızca İnce ayarıyla ortadan kaldıramazsanız, frekans ayarlarını en iyi şekilde ayarlayın (Kaba) ve yeniden İnce ayar
işlemi yapın. Parazit azaldığında, görüntüyü ekranın ortasına gelecek şekilde yeniden ayarlayın.
PC Konumu
Tv ekranına sığmıyorsa, PC'nin ekran konumunu ayarlayın. dikey Konum ayarlaması için ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basın. Yatay
Konum ayarlaması için ◄ veya ► düğmesine basın.
Görüntü Sıfırla
Tüm görüntü ayarlarını, fabrika standart değerlerine getirebilirsiniz.
Parlaklık : 45
Netlik : 50
Otomatik Ayarlama ►
Ekran
Gelişmiş Ayarlar
resim Seçenekleri
resim Sıfırlama
Görüntü
BN68-03043A.indb 17 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 18
SES KONTROLÜ
¦ Ses Menüsünü Yapılandırma
❑ Modu → Standart / Müzik / Sinema / Sesi Netleştir / Kişisel
Kişisel tercihlerinize uygun bir ses modu seçebilirsiniz.
T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Ses modunu ayrıca
Araçlar → Ses Modu öğesini seçerek de yapılandırabilirsiniz.
Standart
Normal ses modunu seçer.
Müzik
Müziği diğer seslerin üstünde vurgular.
Sinema
Filmler için en iyi sesi sağlar.
Sesi Netleştir
İnsan sesini diğer seslerin üstünde vurgular.
Kişisel
Kişiselleştirilmiş ses ayarlarınızı geri çağırır.
❑ Ekolayzer
Ses ayarları kişisel tercihlerinize göre değiştirilebilir.
Modu
Kişisel tercihlerinize uygun bir ses modu seçebilirsiniz.
Balans
Sağ ve sol hoparlörler arasındaki dengeyi kontrol eder.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bant Genişliği Ayarı)
Farklı bant genişliği frekanslarının seviyelerini ayarlamak için
Sıfrl
Ekolayzır ayarlarını varsayılan değerlere sıfırlar.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Kpalı / Açık
SrS TruSurround Hd, 5.1 çok kanallı içeriği iki hoparlör üzerinden oynatma sorununu çözen patentli bir SrS teknolojisidir.
TruSurround özelliği, televizyonun içinde bulunan sabit televizyon hoparlörleri dahil olmak üzere, her tür iki hoparlörlü yeniden
oynatma sistemi üzerinden şaşırtıcı düzeyde gerçek surround ses deneyiminin elde edilmesini sağlar. Tüm çok kanallı formatlarla
tam uyumludur.
❑ Ses Dili (yalnızca dijital kanallar)
Ses dillerinin varsayılan ayarını değiştirebilirsiniz. Gelen akışın dil bilgilerini görüntüler.
N Yalnızca gerçekte yayınlanan diller arasından dil seçebilirsiniz.
N Bir dijital kanal izlerken bu işlev seçilebilir.
❑ Ses Biçimi → MPEG / Dolby dijital (yalnızca dijital kanallar)
Hem ana hoparlörden hem ses alıcısından ses verildiğinde, ana hoparlör ve ses alıcısı arasındaki şifre çözme hızı farkından dolayı
ses yankısı oluşabilir. Bu durumda, Tv Hoparlörü işlevini kullanın.
N Yayın sinyaline göre Ses Biçimi görüntülenir.
N Bir dijital kanal izlerken bu işlev seçilebilir.
Modu : Kişisel ►
Ekolayzer
SrS TruSurround Hd : Kpalı
Ses dili : - - -
Ses Biçimi : - - -
Sesli Açıklama
Oto ses ayar : Kpalı
Ses
BN68-03043A.indb 18 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 19
❑ Sesli Açıklama (yalnızca dijital kanallar)
Bu, görme özürlü kişilere ilave ses bandı kanalı sağlayan yardımcı bir ses işlevidir. Bu işlev Ad (Sesli Açıklama) için, yayıncıdan
gelen ana sesle birlikte gönderildiğinde Audio Stream'i kullanır. Kullanıcılar Sesli Açıklama değerini Açık veya Kpalı konumlarına
getirebilirler ve sesi kontrol edebilirler.
O Kapalı or Açık ayarına getirmek için uzaktan kumandadaki AD düğmesine basın.
Sesli Açıklama → Kpalı / Açık
Ses açıklaması işlevini açar ya da kapatır.
Düzey
Ses açıklama seviyesini ayarlayabilirsiniz.
N Düzey ayarı, Sesli Açıklama öğesi Açık olarak ayarlandığında etkindir.
❑ Oto ses ayar → Kpalı / Açık
Her yayın istasyonunun kendi sinyal koşulları vardır ve kanal her değiştiğinde ses seviyesini ayarlamak kolay değildir. Bu özellik
modülasyon sinyali yüksekse ses çıkışını düşürerek ya da modülasyon sinyali çok zayıfsa ses çıkışını yükselterek, istenen kanalın
ses düzeyini otomatik olarak ayarlamanızı sağlar.
❑ Hoparlörü Seçin → Harici Hoparlör / TV Hoparlörü
Sesi ayrı hoparlörlerden duymak istediğiniz takdirde dahili amplifikatörü iptal edin.
N Ses düğmeleri ve MUTE düğmeleri, Hoparlörü Seçin öğesi Harici Hoparlör olarak ayarlandığında çalışmaz.
N Hoparlörü Seçin menüsünde Harici Hoparlör seçimini yaptıysanız ses ayarları sınırlanacaktır.
❑ Ses Sıfırlama → Tümünü Sıfırla / Ses Modunu Sıfırla / İptal
Ses ayarlarını fabrika varsayılan değerlerine geri yükleyebilirsiniz.
¦ Ses Modunun Seçilmesi
Araçlar menüsünde ses modunu ayarlayabilirsiniz. Dual l ll konumuna ayarladığınızda geçerli ses modu ekranda
görüntülenecektir.
Ses Türü Çift 1 / 2 Varsayılan
A2 Stereo
Mono MONO
Otomatik değiştirme
Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO
Çift DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Stereo
Mono MONO
Otomatik değiştirme
Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO
Çift
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
N Stereo sinyali zayıfsa ve otomatik geçiş meydana geliyorsa mono moduna geçin.
N Bu işlev yalnızca stereo ses sinyalinde etkinleştirilir. Mono ses sinyalinde devre dışı bırakılır.
N Bu işlev sadece Tv modunda kullanılabilir.
BN68-03043A.indb 19 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:20Türkçe - 20
KURULUM
¦ Kurulum Menüsünün Yapılandırılması
❑ Menü Dili
Menü dilini ayarlayabilirsiniz.
❑ Zaman
Saat
Tv'nin çeşitli saat özelliklerini kullanabilmek için saatin ayarlanması gereklidir.
N INFO düğmesine her basışınızda geçerli zaman görüntülenecektir.
N Elektrik kablosunun bağlantısını keserseniz, saati yeniden ayarlamanız gerekir.
● Saat Modu
Geçerli saati elle ya da otomatik olarak ayarlayabilirsiniz.
– Oto: Geçerli saati, dijital yayından gelen saat ile otomatik olarak ayarlayın.
– Manuel: Geçerli saati belirli bir saate elle ayarlayın.
N Yayın istasyonuna ve sinyale bağlı olarak, otomatik saat doğru olarak ayarlanabilir. Bu durumda saati elle ayarlayın.
N Saati otomatik olarak ayarlamak için anten veya kablo bağlı olmalıdır.
● Saat Ayarı
Geçerli saati elle ayarlayabilirsiniz.
N Saat Modu öğesini Manuel olarak ayarladıysanız bu öğeyi ayarlayın.
N Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki sayı düğmelerine basarak gün, ay, yıl, saat ve dakika ayarlarını doğrudan yapabilirsiniz.
Kapanış Ayarı → Kpalı / 30 dak / 60 dak / 90 dak / 120 dak / 150 dak / 180 dak
Önceden ayarlanan zaman (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 ve 180 dakika) geçtiğinde uyku zamanlayıcısı Tv'yi otomatik olarak kapatır.
N Zamanlayıcı 0'a geldiği zaman Tv otomatik olarak bekleme moduna geçer.
N Kapanış Ayarı işlevini iptal etmek için Kpalı seçimini yapın.
T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Uyku zamanlayıcısını ayrıca Araçlar → Kapanış Ayarı
öğesini seçerek de ayarlayabilirsiniz.
Zamanlayıcı 1 / Zamanlayıcı 2 / Zamanlayıcı 3
Üç farklı açık/kapalı zamanlayıcı ayarı yapılabilir. Önce saati ayarlamanız gerekir.
● Açılış Zamanı: Saati, dakikayı ve etkinleştir/devre dışı bırak ayarını yapın. (Zamanlayıcıyı seçtiğiniz ayara göre etkinleştirmek
için Activate ayarına getirin.)
● Kapanış Zamanı: Saati, dakikayı ve etkinleştir/devre dışı bırak ayarını yapın. (Zamanlayıcıyı seçtiğiniz ayara göre
etkinleştirmek için Activate ayarına getirin.)
● Düzey: İstenen açma ses seviyesini seçin.
● Anten Tipi: Dış Anten veya Kablo seçimini yapın.
● Kanal: İstediğiniz kanalı seçin.
● Tekrarla: Bir Kez, Her gün, Pts~Cum, Pts~Cts, Cts~Paz veya Manuel seçimini yapın.
N Manuel seçildiğinde, haftanın istenilen gününü seçmek için ► düğmesine basın. İstenilen gün üstünde ENTERE
düğmesine basın, c işareti görünecektir.
N Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki numara düğmelerini kullanarak saat, dakika ve kanalı ayarlayabilirsiniz.
N Otomatik Kapanma
Zamanlayıcıyı Açık olarak ayarlandığınızda, zamanlayıcı tarafından açılmasından sonra 3 saat boyunca herhangi bir kumanda
kullanılmadığında televizyon kapatılır. Bu işlev yalnızca zamanlayıcı Açık modundayken kullanılabilir ve Tv'nin çok uzun süre
açık kalmasından kaynaklanabilecek aşırı ısınmayı önler.
Plug & Play
Menü Dili : Türkçe ►
zaman
Yayın
Güvenlik
Genel
Kurulum
BN68-03043A.indb 20 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:21Türkçe - 21
❑ Yayın
Altyazı
Altyazıları etkinleştirebilir veya devre dışı bırakabilirsiniz. Altyazı Modunu ayarlamak için bu menüyü kullanın. Menü altındaki
Normal, temel altyazı, İşitme engelli seçeneği ise işitme engelli kişilere yönelik altyazıdır.
● Altyazı → Kpalı / Açık: Altyazıları açar ya da kapatır.
● Modu → Normal / İşitme engelli: Altyazı modunu ayarlar.
● Altyazı Dili: Altyazı dilini ayarlar.
N Seyrettiğiniz program İşitme engelli fonksiyonunu desteklemiyorsa, İşitme engelli modu seçilse bile otomatik olarak Normal
etkinleşir.
N Seçilen dilin yayında kullanılabilir olmaması durumunda İngilizce varsayılan dildir.
O Uzaktan kumanda üzerindeki SUBT. düğmesine basarak da bu seçenekleri seçebilirsiniz.
Dijital Metin → Devre Dışı / Etkinleştir (Yalnızca İngiltere)
Program dijital metinle yayınlanırsa bu özellik etkinleştirilir.
N MHeG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding experts Group)
Çoklu ortam ve hiper ortamda kullanılan veri kodlama sistemlerinin Uluslararası bir standardıdır. Bu, hareketsiz görüntü,
karakter hizmeti, animasyon, grafik ve video dosyaları gibi veri birleştiren hiper ortam ve çoklu ortam verilerini içeren MPEG
sisteminden daha yüksek düzeydedir. MHEG, kullanıcı çalışma süresi etkileşim teknolojisi olup aralarında vOd (İsteğe Bağlı
video), ITv (Etkileşimli Tv), EC (Elektronik Ticaret), tele-eğitim, tele-konferans, dijital kitaplıklar ve ağ oyunlarının bulunduğu
çeşitli ortamlara uygulanır.
Teletekst Dili
dil türünü seçerek teletekst dilini ayarlayabilirsiniz.
N Seçilen dilin yayında kullanılabilir olmaması durumunda İngilizce varsayılan dildir.
Tercih
● Birinci Yayın Dili / İkinci Yayın Dili / Birinci Altyazı Dili / İkinci Altyazı Dili / Birinci Teletekst Dili / İkinci Teletekst Dili
Bu özelliği kullanarak kullanıcılar dillerden birini seçebilir. Kullanıcı bir kanal seçtiğinde, burada seçilen dil varsayılan olarak
kullanılır.
dil ayarını değiştirirseniz, language menüsünün Altyazı dili , Ses dili ve Teletekst dili ayarları otomatik olarak seçilen dile
geçer.
dil menüsünün Altyazı dili, Ses dili ve Teletekst dili öğeleri, geçerli kanalın desteklediği dillerin bir listesini gösterir ve seçim
vurgulanır. Bu dil ayarını değiştirirseniz, yeni seçim sadece o anki kanal için geçerlidir. değiştirilen ayar, Tercih menüsünün
Birinci Altyazı dili, Birinci Yayın dili veya Birinci Teletekst dili ayarını değiştirmez.
Genel Arayüz
● CI Menüsü
Bu, kullanıcının CAM sağlanan menüden seçim yapmasına olanak sağlar.
Menü PC Kartına göre CI Menüsü seçin.
● Uygulama Bilgisi.
Bu, CI'ya takılı CAM hakkındaki bilgileri içerir ve görüntüler.
N Uygulama Bilgisi ekleme CI KArTI hakkındadır. Tv Açık ya da Kpalı da olsa her an CAM öğesini yükleyebilirsiniz.
1. En yakın bayinizi ziyaret ederek veya telefonla arayarak CI CAM modülünü satın alın.
2. CI CArd'ı yerine oturana kadar CAM birimine ok yönünde yerleştirin.
3. CI CArd takılı olan CAM birimini genel arayüz yuvasına yerleştirin.
(CAM'ı yuvayla paralel olacak şekilde ucuna doğru ok yönünde yerleştirin.)
4. Karışmış sinyal kanalında bir resim görüp göremediğinizi kontrol edin.
N CAM bazı ülkelerde ve bölgelerde desteklenmez, yetkili satıcınızla görüşün.
BN68-03043A.indb 21 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:21Türkçe - 22
❑ Yayın
Kurulum penceresi görünmeden önce PIN numarası giriş ekranı görünür. 4 basamaklı PIN numaranızı girin.
Yeni bir Tv'nin varsayılan PIN numarası 0-0-0-0 dır. Menüden PIN Değiştir seçimini yaparak PIN'i değiştirebilirsiniz.
Çocuk Kilidi → Kpalı / Açık
Bu özellik çocuklar ve benzeri yetkisiz kullanıcıların uygunsuz programları izlemesini ses ve görüntüyü kapatarak önleyebilmenizi
sağlar.
N Kanal listesi içindeki bazı kanalları kilitleyebilirsiniz. (bkz. sayfa 13)
N Çocuk Kilidi yalnızca Tv modunda kullanılabilir.
Ebeveyn Kilidi
Bu özellik, kullanıcının belirlediği 4 haneli PIN (Kişisel Kimlik Belirleme Numarası) kodu sayesinde çocuklar gibi izin verilmeyen
kullanıcıların uygunsuz programları izlemesini engellemenizi sağlar.
N Ebeveyn Kilidi öğesi ülkeye göre değişir.
N Ebeveyn Kilidi ayarlandığında, ‘\’ sembolü gösterilir.
N Tmn İzn Vr: Tüm Tv derecelendirmelerinin kilidini kaldırmak için basın.
Tmn Engll: Tüm Tv derecelendirmelerini kilitlemek için basın.
PIN Değiştir
Tv'nin kurulumu için gereken kişisel kimlik numaranızı değiştirebilirsiniz.
N PIN kodunu unutursanız, PIN'in 0-0-0-0 olarak sıfırlanması için uzaktan kumanda düğmelerine aşağıdaki sırayla basın:
POWER (Kapalı) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Açık).
❑ Genel
Oyun Modu → Kpalı / Açık
PlayStation™ veya Xbox™ gibi bir oyun konsoluna bağlanıldığında, oyun menüsünü seçerek daha gerçekçi oyun deneyimi.
N Oyun konsoluyla bağlantıyı kesmek ve harici bir cihaza bağlanmak için, kurulum menüsüne girip oyun modunu iptal edin.
N Oyun Modu içindeyken Tv menüsünü görüntülerseniz ekran hafifçe sallanır.
N Oyun Modu, normal TV ve PC modunda kullanılamaz.
N Oyun Modu Açık ise:
– resim modu otomatik olarak Standart olarak değişir ve kullanıcılar modu değiştiremez.
– Ses modu otomatik olarak Kişisel olarak değişir ve kullanıcılar modu değiştiremez. Ekolayzırı kullanarak sesi ayarlayın.
N Sesi Sıfırla işlevi etkinleştirilir. Ekolayzırı ayarladıktan sonra Sıfırla işlevinin seçilmesi, ekolayzırı fabrika ayarlarına getirir.
Enrj. Tasarrufu → Kpalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek / Resim Kapalı / Oto
Bu özellik, güç tüketimini azaltmak için Tv'nin parlaklığını ayarlar. Gece Tv izlerken Enrj. Tasarrufu modu seçeneğini Yüksek
ayarına getirerek, gözlerinizin yorulmasını engelleyebilir ve güç tüketimini azaltabilirsiniz.
Resim Kapalı seçeneğini seçerseniz, ekran kapanır ve yalnızca sesi duyabilirsiniz. Resim Kapalı’dan çıkmak için herhangi bir
düğmeye basın.
N Tools menüsünde, Resim Kapalı işlevi desteklenmez..
T Araçlar menüsünü görüntülemek için TOOLS düğmesine basın. Enerji Tasarrufu seçeneğini ayrıca Araçlar→ Enrj. Tasarrufu
öğesini seçerek ayarlayabilirsiniz.
Melodi → Kpalı / Düşük / Orta / Yüksek
Tv Açıldığında veya Kapandığında bir melodi sesi çıkması sağlanabilir.
N Melodi aşağıdaki durumlarda çalışmaz
– MUTE düğmesine basıldığı için Tv'den hiç ses çıkışı olmadığında.
– (–) Ses düğmesine basıldığı için Tv'den hiç ses çıkışı olmadığında.
– Tv, Uyku Zamanlayıcısı işlevi yoluyla kapatıldığında.
BN68-03043A.indb 22 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:21Türkçe - 23
GİRİŞ / DESTEK
¦ Giriş Menüsünü Yapılandırma
❑ Kaynak Listesi
Tv'yi ya da dvd/Blu-ray oynatıcılar veya Uydu alıcıları (Set Üstü Kutu) gibi Tv'ye bağlanacak
diğer harici giriş kaynaklarını seçmek için kullanın. Tercih ettiğiniz giriş kaynağını seçmek için
kullanın.
O Bir harici sinyal kaynağını izlemek için uzaktan kumandadaki SOURCE düğmesine basın.
TV modu, TV düğmesine basılarak seçilebilir.
TV / Ext. / AV / Parça / PC / HDMI(DVI)
N Yalnızca Tv'ye bağlı harici aygıtları seçebilirsiniz. Kaynak Listesi listesinde bağlanan
girişler vurgulanacak ve üstte sıralanacaktır. Bağlanmamış girişler altta sıralanacaktır.
N Ext. ve PC her zaman etkin durumda kalır.
N TOOLS (Araçlar): İsim Değiştir ve Bilgi menülerini görüntüler.
❑ İsim Değiştir
Giriş kaynağı seçiminizi kolaylaştırmak için giriş jaklarına bağlı cihazlara isim verin.
Video / DVD / Kablolu Alıcı / Uydu Alıcısı / PVR Setüstü Kutusu / Receiver / Oyun / Video Kamera / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV /
IPTV / Blu- ray / HD DVD / DMA
N HDMI (DVI) bağlantı noktasına bir HdMI/dvI kablosu bağlandığında, Giriş modunun İsim Değiştir bölümünde
HDMI/DVI modunu DVI veya DVI PC olarak ayarlamanız gerekir. Bu durumda, ayrı bir ses bağlantısı gereklidir.
¦ Destek Menüsünü Yapılandırma
❑ Kendi Kendini Tanıma
Görüntü Testi
resim sorunu olduğunu düşünüyorsanız, resim testini gerçekleştirin. Sorunun devam edip
etmediğini görmek için ekrandaki renk desenini kontrol edin.
● Evet: Test deseni görünmüyorsa veya test deseninde parazit varsa, Evet öğesini seçin.
Tv'de bir sorun olabilir. Yardım almak için Samsung'un çağrı merkezine başvurun.
● Hayır: Test deseni düzgün olarak görüntülenirse, Hayır seçimini yapın. Harici
ekipmanınızda sorun olabilir. Bağlantılarınızı kontrol edin. Sorun devam ederse, harici
cihazın kullanıcı kılavuzuna bakın.
Ses Testi
Ses sorunu olduğunu düşünüyorsanız, ses testini gerçekleştirin. Tv'nizde yerleşik melodi sesini
çalarak sesi kontrol edebilirsiniz. Ekranda 'Bu ses testinde sorun hala devam ediyor mu?'
görünür.
N Ses testini gerçekleştirmeden önce Tv hoparlörlerinden ses işitmezseniz, Sound menüsündeki Hoparlör Seçimi değerinin
TV Hoparlörü olduğundan emin olun.
N Hoparlörü Seçin, Harici Hoparlör olarak ayarlansa veya MUTE düğmesine basılarak ses kapatılsa bile melodi test sırasında
duyulacaktır.
● Evet: Ses testi sırasında sesi tüm hoparlörlerden değil de yalnızca bir hoparlörden duyuyorsanız, Evet seçimini yapın. Tv'de
bir sorun olabilir. Yardım almak için Samsung'un çağrı merkezine başvurun.
● Hayır: Hoparlörlerden ses duyabiliyorsanız, Hayır seçimini yapın. Harici ekipmanınızda sorun olabilir. Bağlantılarınızı kontrol
edin. Sorun devam ederse, harici cihazın kullanıcı kılavuzuna bakın.
Sinyal Bilgileri (yalnızca dijital kanallar)
'Net olmayan'dan nete alış kalitesi değişebilen analog kanallardan farklı olarak, dijital (HdTv) kanallar mükemmel alım kalitesine
sahiptir veya hiç almazsınız. Analog kanallardan farklı olarak, bir dijital kanala ince ayar yapamazsınız. Ancak, kullanılabilir dijital
kanalların alımını artırmak için anteninizi ayarlayabilirsiniz.
N Sinyal gücü ölçer sinyalin zayıf olduğunu gösteriyorsa, sinyal gücünü artırmak için anteninizi fiziksel olarak ayarlayın. En güçlü
sinyale sahip en iyi konumu buluncaya kadar anteninizi ayarlamaya devam edin.
Kendi Kendini Tanıma ►
Yazılım Yükseltme
Hd Bağlantısı Kılavuzu
Samsung'a Başvurun
destek
Kaynak Listesi
İsim değiştir
Giriş
BN68-03043A.indb 23 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:21Türkçe - 24
❑ Yazılım Yükseltme
Ürününüzü yeni dijital Televizyon özelliklerine uygun şekilde güncel tutmak için, normal
Televizyon sinyalinin bir parçası olarak yazılım yükseltmeleri periyodik şekilde yayınlanır.
Bu sinyaller otomatik olarak algılanır ve yazılım yükseltme etiketi görüntülenir. Yükseltmeyi
yükleme seçeneği sunulur.
Çevrimiçi olarak
Bellenim yükseltmesini içeren bir USB sürücüsünü Tv'ye takın. Yükseltmeler uygulanırken
lütfen güç bağlantısını kesmemeye ya da USB sürücüsünü çıkarmamaya dikkat edin. Yerleşik
bellek yükseltmesinin tamamlanmasından sonra Tv otomatik olarak kapanıp açılacaktır.
Güncelleme tamamlandıktan sonra lütfen yerleşik bellek sürümünü kontrol edin. Yazılım
yükseltildiğinde yaptığınız görüntü ve ses ayarları varsayılan (fabrika) ayarlarına geri dönecektir.
Ayarlarınızı bir yere yazmanızı öneririz, bu sayede yükseltmeden sonra kolayca sıfırlayabilirsiniz.
Kanal yoluyla
Yazılımı yayın sinyalini kullanarak yükseltir.
N İşlev, yazılım iletimi süresinde seçilirse, bu fonksiyon mevcut yazılımı arar ve yazılımı indirir.
N Yazılımın indirilmesi için gereken süre siyal durumuna göre belirlenir.
Bekleme Modunda Yükseltme
Ana güç açıkken yazılım güncellemesine devam etmek isterseniz, ▲ veya ▼ düğmesine basarak On seçeneğini belirleyin.
Bekleme moduna girildikten 45 dakika sonra elle yükseltme otomatik olarak yürütülür. Cihazın gücü içerden açıldığı için, lCd
ürünün ekranı hafifçe açık olabilir. Yazılım yükseltmesi tamamlanıncaya kadar 1 saatten uzun süre bu durum devam edebilir.
Alternatif Yazılım
Yazılım sürümü bilgilerini göstermek için.
❑ HD Bağlantısı Kılavuzu
Bu menü, Hd Tv'de en yüksek kaliteye ulaşmak için gereken bağlantı yöntemini sunar.
Tv'ye harici cihazlar bağlarken buradaki bilgilere başvurun.
❑ Samsung'a Başvurun
Tv'niz doğru çalışmadığında ya da yazılım yükseltmesi istediğinizde bu bilgilere göz atın.
Çağrı merkezi, ürün ve yazılım dosyası indirme yöntemi konusundaki bilgilere göz atabilirsiniz.
TV Arka Paneli
USB Sürücü
BN68-03043A.indb 24 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:22Türkçe - 25
KULLANIM ÖNERİLERİ
¦ Teletekst Özelliği
Televizyon istasyonlarının çoğu, Teletekst aracılığı ile yazılı bilgi hizmeti sunar. Teletekst hizmetinin dizin sayfasında nasıl
kullanılacağıyla ilgili bilgiler bulunur. Ayrıca uzaktan kumanda düğmelerini kullanarak gereksinimlerine uygun seçenekleri
belirleyebilirsiniz.
N Teletekst bilgilerinin doğru görünmesi için kanal alışının düzenli olması gerekir. Aksi takdirde bilgiler eksik olabilir ya da bazı
sayfalar görüntülenmeyebilir.
N Uzaktan kumandanın sayısal tuşlarına basarak Teletekst sayfalarını değiştirebilirsiniz.
1 0(mod)
Teletekst modunu seçmek için basın
(lIST/FlOF). lIST modundayken
basarsanız, liste kaydetme moduna
geçer. liste kaydetme modunda,
8 (kaydet) düğmesini kullanarak
Teletekst sayfasını listeye
kaydedebilirsiniz.
2 5(göster)
Gizli metinleri (örneğin test oyunları
yanıtlarını) göstermek için kullanılır.
Normal ekranı görüntülemek için
yeniden basın.
3 4(boyut)
Ekranın üst yarısında çift boyutlu harfleri
görüntülemek için basın. Ekranın alt
yarısı için yeniden basın. Normal ekranı
görüntülemek için bir kez daha basın.
4 8(Kaydet)
Teletekst sayfalarını kaydetmek için
kullanılır.
5 Renk düğmeleri (kırmızı/yeşil/sarı/
mavi)
Yayın şirketi FASTEKST sistemini
kullanıyorsa, Teletekst sayfasında yer
alan çeşitli konuların renkleri farklıdır
ve bu konular renk düğmeleri basılarak
seçilebilir. İstediğiniz sayfaya karşılık
gelen renk düğmesine basın. Görünen
sayfa, aynı biçimde seçilebilecek diğer
renklere ayrılmış bilgiler içerir. Önceki
ya da sonraki sayfayı görüntülemek için
ilgili renk düğmesine basın.
6/(Teletekst açık/karışık)
Teletekst hizmeti sağlayan kanalı
seçtikten sonra Teletekst modunu
etkinleştirmek için bu düğmeye basın.
Teleteksti, normal yayın ekranının üzerine
bindirmek için iki kez basın.
7 :(çıkış)
Teletekst gösteriminden çıkış.
8 1(alt sayfa)
varsa alt sayfayı görüntülemek için
kullanılır.
9 2(sayfa yukarı)
Bir sonraki Teletekst sayfasını
görüntülemek için kullanılır.
0 3(sayfa aşağı)
Bir önceki Teletekst sayfasını
görüntülemek için kullanılır.
! 9 (tut)
Seçilen sayfada, otomatik olarak
takip eden başka sayfalar bağlıysa,
bulunduğunuz sayfayı tutmak için
kullanılır. devam ettirmek için yeniden
basın.
@ 6(dizin)
Teleteksti görüntülerken istediğiniz zaman
dizin (içindekiler) sayfasını görüntülemek
için kullanılır.
# 7(iptal)
Sayfa aranırken yayını göstermek için
kullanılır.
Teletekst sayfaları altı kategoriye göre düzenlenmiştir:
Bölüm İçindekiler
A Seçilen sayfa numarası.
B Yayın yapan kanalın adı.
C Geçerli sayfa numarası ya da arama göstergeleri.
D Tarih ve saat.
E Metin.
F Durum bilgileri.
FASTeKST bilgileri.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
7
BN68-03043A.indb 25 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:22Türkçe - 26
N Teletekst bilgileri çoğunlukla art arda sıralanmış birden çok sayfaya bölünmüştür ve bunlara:
– Sayfa numarasını girerek
– listeden bir konu seçerek
– renklere göre ayrılmış başlık seçerek (FASTEKST sistemi) erişilebilir
N Tv'nin desteklediği Teletekst düzeyi ek grafik ve metin de görüntüleyebilen sürüm 2.5'tir.
N Aktarıma bağlı olarak, Teletekst görüntülenirken boş yan paneller oluşabilir.
N Bu gibi durumlarda, ek grafik veya metin aktarılmaz.
N Sürüm 2.5'i desteklemeyen eski Tv'lerin Teletekst aktarımına bakılmaksızın ek grafik veya metin görüntüleme özelliği yoktur.
O Teletekst ekranından çıkmak için TV düğmesine basın.
N Teletekst 16:9, resim 16:9
¦ Standın Ayarlanması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)
1. Tv'nin ön tarafını Şekil 1'de gösterildiği gibi masada yumuşak bir bez veya minder üstüne yerleştirin.
– Tv'nin altını masa kenarıyla hizalayın.
2. Tv arkasının merkezine basın. Standın arkasındaki düğmeye basarken standı Şekil 2'deki gibi ayarlayın.
3. Tv'yi masaya güvenli bir şekilde yerleştirin.
¦ TV Açısının Ayarlanması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)
N Standı ayarlarken, standın arkasındaki düğmeye basın.
1. Şekil 1, lCd'yi standında kullanırkenki ayarlama açısını (-2°~14°) göstermektedir.
N Aşırı derecede eğildiğinde lCd Tv hasara neden olabilecek şekilde devrilebilir.
2. Şekil 2, lCd'yi standdan duvar montajına dönüştürdüğünüzdeki ayarlama açısını (14°~80°) göstermektedir.
3. Şekil 3, lCd Tv'yi duvara monte ettiğinizdeki ayarlama açısını (0°~10°) göstermektedir.
N Açıyı 1'den 2'ye veya 3'ten 2'ye değiştirirken bir "Tık" sesi duyarsınız.
1 2
1 TV'yi standında kullanırken açı
ayarlama.
2 Standdan Duvar Montajına
dönüştürürken açı ayarlama (1→
3, 3→1)
3 LCD TV duvara monte
edildiğinde açı ayarlama
BN68-03043A.indb 26 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:23Türkçe - 27
¦ VESA Uyumlu Montaj Araçlarının Takılması (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)
1. Tv'yi ön tarafı masa üzerindeki yumuşak bir bez veya mindere gelecek şekilde koyun.
2. Standın arkasındaki düğmeye basarak standı ayarlayın.
3. Montaj parçasıyla (birlikte verilmez), standın altındaki delikleri hizalayın ve kollu tip tabanlıkla, duvara monte edilen askı ya da
diğer tabanlıklarla (birlikte verilmez) birlikte gelen dört vidayla tutturun.
¦ Dekoratif Kapakları Kullanma (yalnızca 19 inç modeli)
1. Standı kullanmadan, Tv'yi duvara monte ederken, dekoratif kapakları resimde 1 görüldüğü gibi deliklere takın.
2. dekoratif kapakları taktıktan sonra, resim 2'de görüldüğü gibi 4 vidayı da kullanarak kapakları sıkın.
1 2
Düğme
Montaj parçası
(Ayrı olarak satılır)
1 2
BN68-03043A.indb 27 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:23Türkçe - 28
¦ Standı Takma
1. lCd Tv'nizi standa takın.
N Tv'yi iki veya daha fazla kişi taşımalıdır.
N Standı takarken standın önü ve arkasını karıştırmamaya dikkat edin.
N Tv'nin standa düzgün bir seviyede takıldığından emin olmak için, Tv'nin sağ kenarının
sol üstüne aşağı doğru aşırı güç uygulamayın.
2. 1 konumuna iki vidayı sıkıştırın ve sonra 2 konumuna iki vidayı sıkıştırın.
N Ürünü yukarı kaldırın ve vidaları sıkıştırın. lCd Tv aşağı yerleşmişken vidaları
sıkıştırırsanız bir tarafa eğilebilir.
¦ Duvara Montaj Kitinin Takılması
duvara montaj öğeleri (ayrı satılır) ile Tv'yi duvara monte edebilirsiniz.
duvara Montaj kitinin takılmasıyla ilgili daha fazla bilgi için, duvara Montaj öğeleriyle birlikte
verilen talimatlara bakın. duvara montaj braketini takarken yardım için bir teknisyenle
görüşün.
Samsung Electronics, Tv'yi kendiniz monte etmeyi seçtiğinizde kendinize ya da başkalarına
vereceğiniz hasarlardan sorumlu değildir.
duvara Montaj Kitinizi Tv'niz açıkken kurmayın. Elektrik çarpması sonucunda kişisel
yaralanmaya neden olabilir.
¦ Hırsıza Karşı Kensington Kilidini Kullanma
Kensington Kilidi, televizyonu halka açık bir ortamda kullanıyorsanız,
sistemi fiziksel olarak sabitlemek için kullanılan bir aygıttır. Üreticiye bağlı
olarak, görünüm ve kilitleme yöntemi resimde gösterilenden farklı olabilir.
doğru kullanım için Kensington Kilidiyle birlikte verilen kılavuza başvurun.
N lütfen Tv’nin arkasındaki “K” simgesini bulun. Kensington yuvası “K” simgesinin
yanındadır.
Ürünü kilitlemek için, aşağıdaki adımları izleyin:
1. Kensington kilidi kablosunu, masa veya sandalye gibi büyük ve sabit bir nesneye sarın.
2. Kilidin takılı olduğu kablo ucunu, Kensington kilidi kablosunun kıvrımlı ucuna doğru
kaydırın.
3. Kilitleme aygıtını, ürün üzerindeki Kensington kilidine takın (1).
4. Kilidi kilitleyin.
N Bunlar genel yönergelerdir. Kesin yönergeler için, kilitleme aygıtı ile birlikte sağlanan
Kullanıcı kılavuzuna bakın.
N Kilitleme cihazının ayrıca satın alınması gerekmektedir.
N Kensington Kilidinin konumu, modeline bağlı olarak farklılık gösterebilir.
<İsteğe bağlı>
1
BN68-03043A.indb 28 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:24Türkçe - 29
¦ Kurulum Alanının Sabitlenmesi
Uygun havalandırma için, ürün ve diğer nesneler (duvar gibi) arasında gerekli mesafeyi bırakın.
Buna dikkat edilmemesi ürünün dahili sıcaklığında gerçekleşecek artış nedeniyle yangına veya üründe bir soruna neden olabilir.
Ürünü şekilde gösterildiği mesafeyi bırakarak monte edin.
N Bir stand veya duvar montajı kullanırken, yalnızca Samsung Electronics tarafından sağlanan parçaları kullanın.
Ҟ Başka bir üretici tarafından sağlanan parçaların kullanılması, ürünün düşmesi nedeniyle üründe bir soruna veya
yaralanmaya neden olabilir.
Ҟ Başka bir üretici tarafından sağlanan parçaların kullanılması, yetersiz havalandırma nedeniyle ürünün dahili sıcaklığı
artacağından üründe bir soruna veya yangına neden olabilir.
N Görünüm ürüne bağlı olarak değişiklik gösterebilir.
Ürünü bir standla monte ederken Ürünü bir duvar montajıyla monte ederken
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
¦ TV'yi Duvara Sabitleme
Dikkat: Tv'yi çekme, itme veya üzerine çıkma Tv'yi düşürebilir. Özellikle çocuklarınızın Tv'ye asılmamasına
veya Tv'nin dengesini bozmamasına özen gösterin; böyle bir durumda, Tv devrilebilir ve ciddi yaralanmalara
veya ölüme neden olabilir. Güvenlik Notundaki tüm güvenlik önlemlerine uyun. Birimin daha dengeli durması için,
güvenlik amacıyla aşağıdaki talimatları uygulayarak düşmeyi önleyici cihazı takın.
TV'nin düşmesini önlemek için:
1. vidaları sıkıştırıcı parçalara yerleştirin ve duvara sıkı bir şekilde sabitleyin. vidaların,
duvara sağlam bir şekilde takıldıklarını onaylayın.
N duvar tipine bağlı olarak dübel gibi ek malzemelere ihtiyacınız olabilir.
N Gerekli sıkıştırıcı parçalar, vidalar ve bağ ürünle birlikte sağlanmadığı için, lütfen
bunları ayrı olarak satın alın.
2. Tv'nin arkasında ortadaki vidaları çıkarın, sıkıştırıcı parçaların içinden geçirin ve daha
sonra, yeniden Tv'ye takıp sıkıştırın.
N vidalar ürünle birlikte verilmemiş olabilir. Bu durumda, lütfen aşağıdaki özelliklere
uygun vidaları alın.
N vida Özellikleri
– For a 17 ~ 29 Inch lCd Tv: M4 X l15
– For a 32 ~ 40 Inch lCd Tv: M6 X l15
3. Tv'ye ve duvara sabitlenmiş sıkıştırıcı parçaları sağlam bir bağ ile birleştirin ve daha
sonra, bağı sıkı bir şekilde bağlayın.
N Tv'yi arkaya doğru düşmemesi için duvara yakın bir yere yerleştirin.
N Bağı, duvardaki sıkıştırıcı parçalar, Tv'ye sabitlenen sıkıştırıcı parçalarla aynı
hizada veya daha aşağıda olacak şekilde bağlayabilirsiniz.
N Tv'yi taşımadan önce bağı çözün.
4. Tüm bağlantıların uygun şekilde sabitlendiğini doğrulayın. Belirli aralıklarla bağlantılarda
yorgunluk belirtisi olup olmadığını kontrol edin. Bağlantılarınızın güvenliğiyle ilgili
herhangi bir şüpheniz varsa, bir kurulum uzmanıyla görüşün.
Duvar
Duvar
BN68-03043A.indb 29 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:25Türkçe - 30
¦ Sorun Giderme
Tv'ye ilişkin herhangi bir sorunuz varsa, öncelikle bu listeye başvurun. Bu sorun giderme ipuçlarının hiçbiri işe yaramazsa, lütfen
‘www.samsung.com’ sitesini ziyaret edin ve ardından destek düğmesini tıklatın veya son sayfa listesindeki Çağrı Merkezi ile
iletişime geçin.
Sorun Çözüm
Görüntü Kalitesi
Öncelikle, lütfen Tv'nizin test görüntüyü düzgün bir şekilde görüntülediğini onaylamak için,
Görüntü Testi işlemini gerçekleştirin.
● MENU - Destek - Kendi Kendini Tanıma - Görüntü Testi
Test görüntü düzgün bir şekilde görüntüleniyorsa, bozuk resmin nedeni kaynak veya sinyal
olabilir.
Tv görüntüsü mağazada olduğu
kadar iyi görünmüyor.
● Analog bir Kablo/Set üstü kutuya sahipseniz, Kutuya yükseltin. Hd resim kalitesi elde
etmek için HdMI veya Komponent kabloları kullanın.
● Kablolu Tv/Uydu aboneliği : Kanal hattındaki Hd (Yüksek Tanımlı) istasyonlarını deneyin.
● Anten bağlantısı: Otomatik program işlemi gerçekleştirdikten sonra Hd istasyonlarını
deneyin.
N Pek çok Hd kanalı Sd (Standart Tanımlı) içeriğinden daha yüksek kalitededir.
● Kablo/Set üstü kutu video çıkış çözünürlüğünü 1080i veya 720p olarak ayarlayın.
● Tv'yi görüntülemekte olduğunuz sinyalin boyutuna ve tanımına bağlı olarak önerilen
minimum mesafede izlediğinizi onaylayın.
resim bozuk : makroblok, küçük
blok, noktalar, piksellenme
● video içeriklerinin sıkıştırılması özellikle de spor programları ve aksiyon filmleri gibi
hızlı hareket eden görüntüler üzerinde resim bozulmasına yol açabilir.
● düşük sinyal düzeyi veya kötü kalite, resim bozulmasına yol açabilir. Bu Tv'yle ilgili bir
sorun değildir.
● Tv'yi (1m'e kadar cca) kapatmak için kullanılan cep telefonları analog veya dijital Tv
üzerindeki görüntüde parazite neden olabilir.
Komponent bağlantısında
yanlışlık veya kayıp renk.
● Komponent kablolarının doğru jaklara takıldığından emin olun. Yanlış veya gevşek
bağlantılar renk sorunlarına yol açabilir veya ekran boş olur.
Bozuk renk veya parlaklık. ● Tv menüsünde Görüntü seçeneklerini ayarlayın. (Görüntü modu, Renk, Parlaklık, Netlik)
● Kurulum menüsünde Enrj. Tasarrufu seçeneğini ayarlayın.
● varsayılan resim ayarını görüntülemek için resmi sıfırlamayı deneyin.
(MENU - Görüntü - Resim Sıfırlama bölümüne gidin)
Ekranın kenarında noktalı satır. ● resim boyutu Ekrana Sığdır olarak ayarlandıysa, 16:9 olarak değiştirin.
● Kablo/set üstü kutu çözünürlüğünü değiştirin.
resim yalnızca Av (Kompozit)
girişi sırasında siyah beyaz.
● video kablosunu (Sarı) Tv'nin 1 numaraları Yeşil komponent girişi jakına takın.
Kanallar değiştirilirken resim
donuyor veya bozuluyor ya da
resim gecikiyor.
● Kablo kutusuyla birlikte bağlandıysa, lütfen kablo kutusunu sıfırlamayı deneyin.
(AC kablosunu tekrar bağlayın ve kablo kutusu yeniden yükleninceye kadar bekleyin.
Bu 20 dakika kadar sürebilir)
● Kablo kutusunun çıkış çözünürlüğünü 1080i veya 720p olarak ayarlayın.
Ses Kalitesi
Öncelikle, lütfen Tv'nizin ses seviyesinin düzgün bir şekilde çalıştığını onaylamak için,
Ses Testi işlemini gerçekleştirin.
● MENU - Destek - Kendi Kendini Tanıma - Ses Testi
Ses seviyesi Tamamsa, ses sorunu kaynaktan veya sinyalden kaynaklanıyor olabilir.
Hiç ses yok veya maksimum ses
düzeyinde ses çok düşük.
● lütfen Tv'nize bağlı harici cihazın ses düzeyini kontrol edin ve ardından Tv ses
düzeyini uygun şekilde ayarlayın.
resim iyi ancak ses yok. ● Hoparlörü Seçin seçeneğini ses menüsünde TV Hoparlörü olarak ayarlayın.
● Harici cihazdaki ses kablolarının Tv'deki doğru ses giriş jaklarına bağlandığından emin olun.
● Bağlı cihazın ses çıkış seçeneğini kontrol edin. (örn: Tv'nize bağlı bir HdMI varsa,
kablo kutunuzun ses seçeneğini HdMI olarak ayarlamanız gerekebilir.
● dvI - HdMI kablosu kullanıyorsanız, ayrı bir ses kablosu gerekir.
● Ses seviyesini 30 değerinin üzerine ayarlıyorsanız, SrS işlevini devre dışı bırakın.
● Fişi kulaklık jakından çıkarın. (Tv'nizde mevcutsa)
Hoparlörden ses geliyor. ● Kablo bağlantılarını kontrol edin. Ses girişine bir video kablosu bağlanmadığından
emin olun.
● Anten/Kablo bağlantısı için, sinyal kuvvetini kontrol edin. düşük sinyal seviyesi ses
bozukluğuna yol açabilir.
BN68-03043A.indb 30 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:25Türkçe - 31
Sorun Çözüm
resim Yok, video Yok
Tv açılmıyor. ● AC güç kablosu fişinin duvardaki prize ve Tv'ye düzgün bir şekilde takıldığından emin
olun.
● Prizin çalıştığından emin olun.
● Uzaktan kumandanın düzgün bir şekilde çalıştığından emin olmak için, Tv'deki
POWER düğmesine basın. Tv açılırsa, bu durum Uzaktan Kumandadan kaynaklanıyor
olabilir. Uzaktan Kumanda sorununu çözmek için, aşağıdaki 'Uzaktan kumanda
çalışmıyor' bölümüne bakın.
Tv otomatik olarak kapanıyor. ● Kapanış Ayarı ayarının Kurulum menüsünde Açık olarak ayarlanıp ayarlanmadığını
kontrol edin.
● Tv, PC'nize bağlanmışsa PC güç ayarlarınızı kontrol edin.
● AC güç kablosu fişinin duvardaki prize ve Tv'ye düzgün bir şekilde takıldığından emin
olun.
● Anten/Kablo bağlantısından yaklaşık 10 ~ 15 dakika boyunca hiçbir sinyal alınmazsa,
Tv kapatılır.
resim/video yok. ● Kablo bağlantılarını kontrol edin (Tv'nin ve harici cihazların tüm kablolarını çıkarın ve
tekrar takın).
● Harici cihazınızın (Kablo/Set Üstü Kutu, dvd, Blu-ray vb.) video çıkışını Tv girişine
yapılan bağlantılarla eşleşecek şekilde ayarlayın. Örneğin, harici cihazın çıkışı: HdMI,
Tv'nin girişi: HdMI.
● Bağlanan cihazınızın açık olduğundan emin olun.
● Tv uzaktan kumandasının SOURCE düğmesine basarak Tv'nin doğru kaynağını
seçtiğinizden emin olun.
rF (Kablo/Anten) Bağlantısı
Tüm kanalları alamıyor. ● Anten kablosunun doğru bir şekilde bağlandığından emin olun.
● Kanal listesine mevcut kanalları eklemek için, lütfen Plug & Play işlemini
deneyin. MENU - Kurulum - Plug & Play bölümüne gidin ve mevcut tüm kanallar
kaydedilinceye kadar bekleyin.
● Antenin düzgün bir şekilde konumlandırıldığını onaylayın.
resim bozuk : makroblok, küçük
blok, noktaralar, piksellenme
● video içeriklerinin sıkıştırılması özellikle de spor programları ve aksiyon filmleri gibi
hızlı hareket eden görüntüler üzerinde resim bozulmasına yol açabilir.
● düşük sinyal resim bozukluğuna yol açabilir. Bu Tv'yle ilgili bir sorun değildir.
PC Bağlantısı
‘desteklenmeyen Mod’ mesajı. ● PC'nizin çıkış çözünürlüğünü ve frekansını Tv tarafından desteklenen çözünürlüklere
uygun olacak şekilde ayarlayın.
PC bağlı olmasa bile her zaman
kaynak listesinde gösterilir.
● Bu normaldir; PC, bir PC bağlı olmasa bile her zaman kaynak listesinde gösterilir.
HdMI bağlantısıyla video düzgün,
ancak hiç ses yok.
● PC'nizdeki ses çıkış ayarını kontrol edin.
BN68-03043A.indb 31 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:25Türkçe - 32
Sorun Çözüm
diğerleri
resim tam ekran olarak
görüntülenmiyor.
● Yüksek kalitede Sd (4:3) içerikleri görüntülenirken, Hd kanallarında her bir kenar
üzerinde siyah çubuklar görüntülenir.
● Tv'nizden farklı açı oranlarına sahip filmlerde Üst ve Alt kısımda siyah çubuklar
görüntülenir.
● Harici cihazınızdaki ve Tv'nizdeki resim boyutu seçeneğini tam ekran olarak ayarlayın.
Uzaktan kumanda çalışmıyor. ● Uzaktan kumanda pillerini doğru polaritede (+ -) olacak şekilde değiştirin.
● Uzaktan kumandanın üzerinde bulunan iletim penceresini temizleyin.
● Uzaktan kumandayı Tv'den 1,5-2 m uzaktayken kullanmayı deneyin.
Tv gücü veya ses düzeyi
Kablo/Set üstü kutusu uzaktan
kumandasıyla kontrol edilemiyor.
● Kablo/Set üstü kutusu uzaktan kumandasını Tv'yi çalıştıracak şekilde programlayın.
SAMSUNG Tv kodu için, Kablolu Tv/Uydu kullanıcı kılavuzuna bakın.
‘desteklenmeyen Mod’ mesajı. ● Tv'nin desteklenen çözünürlüğünü kontrol edin ve harici cihazın çıktı çözünürlüğünü
uygun şekilde ayarlayın. Bu kılavuzdaki çözünürlük ayarlarına bakın.
Tv'den gelen plastik kokusu. ● Bu koku normaldir ve zaman içinde geçecektir.
TV Sinyal Bilgileri, Self Diagnostic
Test menüsünde mevcut değil.
● Bu işlev yalnızca Anten (rF/Koaks) bağlantılı dijital kanallar için mevcuttur.
Tv sağ veya sol tarafa eğiliyor. ● Stand tabanını Tv'den çıkarın ve tekrar takın.
Stand tabanı takılamıyor. ● Tv'nin düzgün bir yüzeyde konumlandırıldığından emin olun. vidalar Tv'den
çıkarılamıyorsa, lütfen mıknatıslı tornavida kullanın.
Kanal menüsü gri. (mevcut değil) ● Kanal menüsü yalnızca Tv kaynağı seçili olduğunda mevcuttur.
Ayarlarınız her 30 dakikada
bir veya her Tv kapatıldığında
kaybolur.
● TV Dükkan Demo modundaysa, ses ve resim ayarlarını her 30 dakikada bir sıfırlar.
lütfen Dükkan Demo modunu, Plug & Play prosedüründeki Evde Kullanım moduyla
değiştirin. TV modunu seçmek için, SOURCE düğmesine basın, MENU → Kurulum →
Plug & Play → ENTERE bölümüne gidin.
Geçici ses veya görüntü kaybı. ● Kablo bağlantılarını kontrol edin ve tekrar bağlayın.
● Çık sıkı veya ince kablo kullanımı nedeniyle olabilir. Kabloların uzun süreli kullanım için
yeterince esnek olduğundan emin olun. duvar montajıysa, 90 derecelik konektörlere
sahip kablolar kullanmanızı öneririz.
Tv ekranını çevreleyen
çerçevenin kenarlarına yakından
baktığınızda küçük partiküller
görebilirsiniz.
● Bu ürün tasarımının bir parçasıdır ve kusur değildir.
CAM CArd(CI) ile ‘Karışmış
sinyal’ veya ‘Sinyal yok/Güçsüz
sinyal’.
● CAM'ın genel arayüz yuvasına takılı CI Kartı olduğundan emin olun.
● CAM'ı Tv'den çekin ve yuvaya tekrar takın.
Kapatıldıktan 45 dakika sonra, Tv
kendiliğinden açılıyor.
● Bu normaldir, Tv izleme sırasında yüklenen güvenlik duvarını güncellemek için
OTA (Over The Air) işlevini kendiliğinden çalıştırır.
Tekrarlanan resim/ses sorunu. ● Sinyali/kaynağı kontrol edin ve değiştirin.
N TFT lCd paneli, karmaşık bir üretim teknolojisi gerektiren iç piksellerden oluşan bir panel kullanmaktadır. Bununla birlikte,
ekranda birkaç parlak veya karanlık piksel bulunabilir. Bu piksellerin ürünün performansına olumsuz etkisi olmaz.
BN68-03043A.indb 32 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:25Türkçe - 33
¦ Teknik Özellikler
Model Adı LE19C430C4WXXC / LE19C431C4WXXC LE22C430C4WXXC / LE22C431C4WXXC
Ekran Boyutu
(Çapraz) 19 inches 22 inches
PC Çözünürlüğü
(en iyi) 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz 1360 x 768 @ 60Hz
Ses
(Çıkış) 3W X 2 3W X 2
Boyutlar (GxDxY)
Gövde
Standla
477 x 65 x 327 mm
477 x 180 x 362 mm
558 x 75 x 384 mm
558 x 216 x 426 mm
Ağırlık
Standla 5 kg 7 kg
Çevre Koşulları
Çalışma Sıcaklığı
Çalışma Nem Oranı
Saklama Sıcaklığı
Saklama Nem Oranı
10°C ile 40°C arası (50°F ile 104°F)
%10 ile %80 arası, yoğunlaşmayan
-20°C ile 45°C arası (-4°F ile 113°F)
%5 ile %95 arası, yoğunlaşmayan
Döner Stand
Sol / Sağ 0˚
N Tasarım ve özellikler önceden haber verilmeden değiştirilebilir.
N Bu cihaz, bir Sınıf B dijital cihaz aparatıdır.
N Güç kaynağı ve Güç Tüketimi için ürün üzerindeki etikete bakın.
BN68-03043A.indb 33 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:26Bu ürünün ortalama yaşam süresi 10 yıldır.
İmalatçı SAMSUNG ElECTrONICS CO., lTd.
416 Maetan-3 Dong, Yeongtong-Gu, Suwon City Gyeonggi-Do, Korea, 443-742
Tel: +82-2-2255-0114 / Fax: +82-2-2255-0117
Model code lVD eMC
lE19C430C4WXXC /
lE19C431C4WXXC
KTl(Korea Testing laboratory) CTK Co., ltd.
lE22C430C4WXXC /
lE22C431C4WXXC
KTl(Korea Testing laboratory) CTK Co., ltd.
NEMKO Korea Co.,ltd 296, Osan-ri, Mohyeon-Myeon, Cheoin-Gu, Yongin-Si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 449-582
Tel: + 82-31-322-2333 / Fax: +82-31-322-2332
KTl(Korea Testing laboratory) 222-13, Guro-3dong, Guro-gu, Seoul, 152-718, Korea
Tel: +82-2-860-1114 / Fax: +82-2-838-2675
dIGITAl EMC CO., lTd. 683-3, Yubang-dong, Yongin-Si, Kyunggi-do, Korea. 449-080
Tel: +82-31-321-2664 / Fax: +82-31-321-1664
CTK Co., ltd. 386-1, Ho-dong, Cheoin-gu, Yongin-si, Gyeonggi-do, 449-100, Korea
Tel: +82-31-339-9970 / Fax: +82-31-339-9855
Samsung electronics co., ltd. Suwon eMC test lab 416 Maetan-3 Dong, Yeongtong-Gu, Suwon-City Gyeonggi-Do, Korea,
443-742
Tel: +82-31-200-2185 / Fax: +82-31-200-2189
EEE Yönetmeliğine
Uygundur.
BN68-03043A.indb 34 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:26Bu sayfa bilerek boş
bırakılmıştır.
BN68-03043A.indb 35 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:26Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories
or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other
household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste
disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material
resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details
of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the
terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes
for disposal.
[English]
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable dans les pays de l’Union européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés
(chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. la mise au rebut incontrôlée des
déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres
déchets. vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. les particuliers sont
invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et
les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs
et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets
professionnels et commerciaux.
[Français]
Korrekte Entsorgung von Altgeräten (Elektroschrott)
(In den ländern der europäischen Union und anderen europäischen ländern mit einem separaten Sammelsystem)
die Kennzeichnung auf dem Produkt, Zubehörteilen bzw. auf der dazugehörigen dokumentation gibt an, dass das Produkt und Zubehörteile
(z. B. ladegerät, Kopfhörer, USB-Kabel) nach ihrer lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden dürfen.
Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät und Zubehörteile bitte getrennt von anderen Abfällen, um der Umwelt bzw. der menschlichen Gesundheit
nicht durch unkontrollierte Müllbeseitigung zu schaden. Helfen Sie mit, das Altgerät und Zubehörteile fachgerecht zu entsorgen, um die
nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von stofflichen ressourcen zu fördern. Private Nutzer wenden sich an den Händler, bei dem das Produkt
gekauft wurde, oder kontaktieren die zuständigen Behörden, um in Erfahrung zu bringen, wo Sie das Altgerät bzw. Zubehörteile für eine
umweltfreundliche Entsorgung abgeben können. Gewerbliche Nutzer wenden sich an ihren lieferanten und gehen nach den Bedingungen
des verkaufsvertrags vor. dieses Produkt und elektronische Zubehörteile dürfen nicht zusammen mit anderem Gewerbemüll entsorgt
werden.
[Deutsch]
Correcte verwijdering van dit product (elektrische & elektronische afvalapparatuur)
dit merkteken op het product, de accessoires of het informatiemateriaal duidt erop dat het product en zijn elektronische accessoires (bv.
lader, headset, USB-kabel) niet met ander huishoudelijk afval verwijderd mogen worden aan het einde van hun gebruiksduur. Om mogelijke
schade aan het milieu of de menselijke gezondheid door ongecontroleerde afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, moet u deze artikelen van
andere soorten afval scheiden en op een verantwoorde manier recyclen, zodat het duurzame hergebruik van materiaalbronnen wordt
bevorderd. Huishoudelijke gebruikers moeten contact opnemen met de winkel waar ze dit product hebben gekocht of met de gemeente
waar ze wonen om te vernemen waar en hoe ze deze artikelen milieuvriendelijk kunnen laten recyclen. Zakelijke gebruikers moeten
contact opnemen met hun leverancier en de algemene voorwaarden van de koopovereenkomst nalezen. dit product en zijn elektronische
accessoires mogen niet met ander bedrijfsafval voor verwijdering worden gemengd.
[Nederlands]
Corretto smaltimento del prodotto (rifiuti elettrici ed elettronici)
(Applicabile nell’Unione europea e in altri paesi europei con sistema di raccolta differenziata)
Il marchio riportato sul prodotto, sugli accessori o sulla documentazione indica che il prodotto e i relativi accessori elettronici (quali
caricabatterie, cuffia e cavo USB) non devono essere smaltiti con altri rifiuti domestici al termine del ciclo di vita. Per evitare eventuali danni
all’ambiente o alla salute causati dall’inopportuno smaltimento dei rifiuti, si invita l’utente a separare il prodotto e i suddetti accessori da altri
tipi di rifiuti e di riciclarli in maniera responsabile per favorire il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Gli utenti domestici sono invitati a
contattare il rivenditore presso il quale è stato acquistato il prodotto o l’ufficio locale preposto per tutte le informazioni relative alla raccolta
differenziata e al riciclaggio per questo tipo di materiali. Gli utenti aziendali sono invitati a contattare il proprio fornitore e verificare i termini
e le condizioni del contratto di acquisto. Questo prodotto e i relativi accessori elettronici non devono essere smaltiti unitamente ad altri rifiuti
commerciali.
[Italiano]
Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)
(Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en países europeos con sistemas de recogida selectiva de residuos)
la presencia de este símbolo en el producto, accesorios o material informativo que lo acompañan, indica que al finalizar su vida útil ni el
producto ni sus accesorios electrónicos (como el cargador, cascos, cable USB) deberán eliminarse junto con otros residuos domésticos.
Para evitar los posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana que representa la eliminación incontrolada de residuos, separe
estos productos de otros tipos de residuos y recíclelos correctamente. de esta forma se promueve la reutilización sostenible de recursos
materiales. los usuarios particulares pueden contactar con el establecimiento donde adquirieron el producto o con las autoridades locales
pertinentes para informarse sobre cómo y dónde pueden llevarlo para que sea sometido a un reciclaje ecológico y seguro. los usuarios
comerciales pueden contactar con su proveedor y consultar las condiciones del contrato de compra. este producto y sus accesorios
electrónicos no deben eliminarse junto a otros residuos comerciales.
[Español]
Eliminação Correcta Deste Produto (Resíduos de Equipamentos Eléctricos e Electrónicos)
esta marca apresentada no produto, nos acessórios ou na literatura – indica que o produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos (por exemplo,
o carregador, o auricular, o cabo USB) não deverão ser eliminados juntamente com os resíduos domésticos no final do seu período de
vida útil. Para impedir danos ao ambiente ou à saúde humana causados pela eliminação incontrolada de resíduos, deverá separar estes
equipamentos de outros tipos de resíduos e reciclá-los de forma responsável, para promover uma reutilização sustentável dos recursos
materiais. Os utilizadores domésticos deverão contactar o estabelecimento onde adquiriram este produto ou as entidades oficiais locais
para obterem informações sobre onde e de que forma podem entregar estes equipamentos para permitir efectuar uma reciclagem segura
em termos ambientais. Os utilizadores profissionais deverão contactar o seu fornecedor e consultar os termos e condições do contrato de
compra. Este produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos não deverão ser misturados com outros resíduos comerciais para eliminação.
[Português]
BN68-03043A.indb 1 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:26Ustrezno odstranjevanje tega izdelka (odpadna električna in elektronska oprema)
Oznaka na izdelku, dodatni opremi ali dokumentaciji pomeni, da izdelka in njegove elektronske dodatne opreme (npr. električni polnilnik,
slušalke, kabel USB) ob koncu dobe uporabe ni dovoljeno odvreči med gospodinjske odpadke. Te izdelke ločite od drugih vrst odpadkov
in jih odgovorno predajte v recikliranje ter tako spodbudite trajnostno vnovično uporabo materialnih virov. Tako boste preprečili morebitno
tveganje za okolje ali zdravje ljudi zaradi nenadzoro vanega odstranjevanja odpadkov. Uporabniki v gospodinjstvih naj se za podrobnosti
o tem, kam in kako lahko te izdelke predajo v okolju prijazno recikliranje, obrnejo na trgovino, kjer so izdelek kupili, ali na krajevni upravni
organ. Poslovni uporabniki naj se obrnejo na dobavitelja in preverijo pogoje kupne pogodbe. Tega izdelka in njegove elektronske dodatne
opreme pri odstranjevanju ni dovoljeno mešati z drugimi gospodarskimi odpadki.
[Slovenščina]
Korrekt avfallshantering av produkten (elektriska och elektroniska produkter)
denna markering på produkten, tillbehören och i manualen anger att produkten och de elektroniska tillbehören (t.ex. laddare, headset,
USB-kabel) inte bör sorteras tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall när de kasseras. Till förebyggande av skada på miljö och hälsa bör
dessa föremål hanteras separat för ändamålsenlig återvinning av beståndsdelarna. Hushållsanvändare bör kontakta den återförsäljare
som sålt produkten eller sin kommun för vidare information om var och hur produkten och tillbehören kan återvinnas på ett miljösäkert sätt.
Företagsanvändare bör kontakta leverantören samt verifiera angivna villkor i köpekontraktet. Produkten och de elektroniska tillbehören bör
inte hanteras tillsammans med annat kommersiellt avfall.
[Svenska]
Korrekt affaldsbortskaffelse af dette produkt (elektrisk & elektronisk udstyr)
Mærket på dette produkt, på tilbehør eller i den medfølgende dokumentation betyder, at produktet og elektronisk tilbehør hertil (f.eks.
oplader, hovedsæt, USB-ledning) ikke må bortskaffes sammen med almindeligt husholdningsaffald efter endt levetid. For at undgå skadelige
miljø- eller sundhedspåvirkninger på grund af ukontrolleret affaldsbortskaffelse skal ovennævnte bortskaffes særskilt fra andet affald og
indleveres behørigt til fremme for bæredygtig materialegenvinding. Forbrugere bedes kontakte forhandleren, hvor de har købt produktet,
eller kommunen for oplysning om, hvor og hvordan de kan indlevere ovennævnte med henblik på miljøforsvarlig genvinding. virksomheder
bedes kontakte leverandøren og læse betingelserne og vilkårene i købekontrakten. dette produkt og elektronisk tilbehør hertil bør ikke
bortskaffes sammen med andet erhvervsaffald.
[Dansk]
Korrekt avhending av dette produktet (Avfall fra elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr)
denne merkingen som vises på produktet, dets tilbehør eller dokumentasjon, indikerer at produktet eller det elektroniske tilbehøret (for
eksempel lader, headset, USB-kabel) ikke skal kastes sammen med annet husholdningsavfall ved slutten av levetiden. For å hindre
potensiell skade på miljøet eller helseskader grunnet ukontrollert avfallsavhending ber vi om at dette avfallet holdes adskilt fra andre
typer avfall og resirkuleres på ansvarlig måte for å fremme bærekraftig gjenbruk av materielle ressurser. Private forbrukere bør kontakte
enten forhandleren de kjøpte produktet av, eller lokale myndigheter, for detaljer om hvor og hvordan disse artiklene kan resirkuleres på
en miljøvennlig måte. Forretningsbrukere bør kontakte sin leverandør og undersøke vilkårene i kjøpskontrakten. dette produktet og det
elektroniske tilbehøret skal ikke blandes med annet kommersielt avfall som skal kastes.
[Norsk]
Tuotteen turvallinen hävittäminen (elektroniikka ja sähkölaitteet)
Oheinen merkintä tuotteessa, lisävarusteissa tai käyttöohjeessa merkitsee, että tuotetta tai lisävarusteina toimitettavia sähkölaitteita (esim.
laturia, kuulokkeita tai USB kaapelia) ei saa hävittää kotitalousjätteen mukana niiden käyttöiän päätyttyä. virheellisestä jätteenkäsittelystä
ympäristölle ja terveydelle aiheutuvien haittojen välttämiseksi tuote ja lisävarusteet on eroteltava muusta jätteestä ja kierrätettävä
kestävän kehityksen mukaista uusiokäyttöä varten. Kotikäyttäjät saavat lisätietoja tuotteen ja lisävarusteiden turvallisesta kierrätyksestä
ottamalla yhteyttä tuotteen myyneeseen jälleenmyyjään tai paikalliseen ympäristöviranomaiseen. Yrityskäyttäjien tulee ottaa yhteyttä
tavarantoimittajaan ja selvittää hankintasopimuksen ehdot. Tuotetta tai sen lisävarusteita ei saa hävittää muun kaupallisen jätteen seassa.
[Suomi]
A termék hulladékba helyezésének módszere(WEEE – Elektromos és elektronikus berendezések hulladékai)
Ez a jelzés a terméken, tartozékain vagy dokumentációján arra utal, hogy hasznos élettartama végén a terméket és elektronikus tartozékait
(pl. töltőegység, fejhallgató, USB kábel) nem szabad a háztartási hulladékkal együtt kidobni. A szabálytalan hulladékba helyezés által
okozott környezet- és egészségkárosodás megelőzése érdekében ezeket a tárgyakat különítse el a többi hulladéktól, és felelősségteljesen
gondoskodjon az újrahasznosításukról az anyagi erőforrások fenntartható újrafelhasználásának elősegítése érdekében. A háztartási
felhasználók a termék forgalmazójától vagy a helyi önkormányzati szervektől kérjenek tanácsot arra vonatkozóan, hová és hogyan vihetik
el az elhasznált termékeket a környezetvédelmi szempontból biztonságos újrahasznosítás céljából. Az üzleti felhasználók lépjenek
kapcsolatba beszállítójukkal, és vizsgálják meg az adásvételi szerződés feltételeit. Ezt a terméket és tartozékait nem szabad az egyéb
közületi hulladékkal együtt kezelni.
[Magyar]
Prawidłowe usuwanie produktu (zużyty sprzęt elektryczny i elektroniczny)
To oznaczenie umieszczone na produkcie, akcesoriach lub dokumentacji oznacza, że po zakończeniu eksploatacji nie należy tego produktu
ani jego akcesoriów (np. ładowarki, zestawu słuchawkowego, przewodu USB) wyrzucać wraz ze zwykłymi odpadami gospodarstwa
domowego. Aby uniknąć szkodliwego wpływu na środowisko naturalne i zdrowie ludzi wskutek niekontrolowanego usuwania odpadów,
prosimy o oddzielenie tych przedmiotów od odpadów innego typu oraz o odpowiedzialny recykling i praktykowanie ponownego
wykorzystania materiałów. W celu uzyskania informacji na temat miejsca i sposobu bezpiecznego dla środowiska recyklingu tych
przedmiotów, użytkownicy w gospodarstwach domowych powinni skontaktować się z punktem sprzedaży detalicznej, w którym dokonali
zakupu produktu, lub z organem władz lokalnych. Użytkownicy w firmach powinni skontaktować się ze swoim dostawcą i sprawdzić warunki
umowy zakupu. Produktu ani jego akcesoriów nie należy usuwać razem z innymi odpadami komercyjnymi.
[Polski]
BN68-03043A.indb 2 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27Σωστή Απόρριψη αυτού του Προϊόντος (Απόβλητα Ηλεκτρικού & Ηλεκτρονικού Εξοπλισμού)
(Ισχύει για την Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και για άλλες ευρωπαϊκές χώρες με χωριστά συστήματα συλλογής) Αυτό το σήμα που εμφανίζεται επάνω
στο προϊόν, στα εξαρτήματά του ή στα εγχειρίδια που το συνοδεύουν, υποδεικνύει ότι το προϊόν και τα ηλεκτρονικά του εξαρτήματα (π.χ.
φορτιστής, ακουστικά, καλώδιο USB) δεν θα πρέπει να ρίπτονται μαζί με τα υπόλοιπα οικιακά απορρίμματα μετά το τέλος του κύκλου ζωής
τους. Προκειμένου να αποφευχθούν ενδεχόμενες βλαβερές συνέπειες στο περιβάλλον ή την υγεία εξαιτίας της ανεξέλεγκτης διάθεσης
απορριμμάτων, σας παρακαλούμε να διαχωρίσετε αυτά τα προϊόντα από άλλους τύπους απορριμμάτων και να τα ανακυκλώσετε, ώστε
να βοηθήσετε στην βιώσιμη επαναχρησιμοποίηση των υλικών πόρων. Οι οικιακοί χρήστες θα πρέπει να έλθουν σε επικοινωνία είτε με
το κατάστημα απ’ όπου αγόρασαν αυτό το προϊόν, είτε με τις κατά τόπους υπηρεσίες, προκειμένου να πληροφορηθούν τις λεπτομέρειες
σχετικά με τον τόπο και τον τρόπο με τον οποίο μπορούν να δώσουν αυτά τα προϊόντα για ασφαλή προς το περιβάλλον ανακύκλωση.
Οι επιχειρήσεις-χρήστες θα πρέπει να έλθουν σε επαφή με τον προμηθευτή τους και να ελέγξουν τους όρους και τις προϋποθέσεις του
συμβολαίου αγοράς. Αυτό το προϊόν και τα ηλεκτρονικά του εξαρτήματα δεν θα πρέπει να αναμιγνύονται με άλλα συνηθισμένα απορρίμματα
προς διάθεση.
[Ελληνικά]
Правилно третиране на изделието след края на експлоатационния му живот
(Отпадъци, представляващи електрическо и електронно оборудване)(Важи за държавите на Европейския съюз и други европейски
държави със системи за разделно сметосъбиране)
Този знак, поставен върху изделието, негови принадлежности или печатни материали, означава, че продуктът и принадлежностите
(например зарядно устройство, слушалки, USB кабел) не бива да се изхвърлят заедно с другите битови отпадъци, когато изтече
експлоатационният му живот. Отделяйте тези устройства от другите видови отпадъци и ги предавайте за рециклиране. Спазвайки
това правило не излагате на опасност здравето на други хора и предпазвате околната среда от замърсяване, предизвикано от
безконтролно изхвърляне на отпадъци. Освен това, подобно отговорно поведение създава възможност за повторно (екологично
съобразно) използване на материалните ресурси. Домашните потребители трябва да се свържат с търговеца на дребно, от когото
са закупили изделието, или със съответната местна държавна агенция, за да получат подробни инструкции къде и кога могат
да занесат тези устройства за рециклиране, безопасно за околната среда. Корпоративните потребители следва да се свържат с
доставчика си и да проверят условията на договора за покупка. Това изделие и неговите електронни принадлежности не бива да се
сместват с другите отпадъци на търговското предприятие.
[Български]
Správná likvidace výrobku (Elektrický a elektronický odpad)
Toto označení na výrobku, jeho příslušenství nebo dokumentaci znamená, že výrobek a jeho elektronické příslušenství (například nabíječku,
náhlavní sadu, USB kabel) je po skončení životnosti zakázáno likvidovat jako běžný komunální odpad. Možným negativním dopadům na
životní prostředí nebo lidské zdraví způsobeným nekontrolovanou likvidací zabráníte oddělením zmíněných produktů od ostatních typů
odpadu a jejich zodpovědnou recyklací za účelem udržitelného využívání druhotných surovin. Uživatelé z řad domácností by si měli od
prodejce, u něhož produkt zakoupili, nebo u příslušného městského úřadu vyžádat informace, kde a jak mohou tyto výrobky odevzdat k
bezpečné ekologické recyklaci. Podnikoví uživatelé by měli kontaktovat dodavatele a zkontrolovat všechny podmínky kupní smlouvy. Tento
výrobek a jeho elektronické příslušenství nesmí být likvidován spolu s ostatním průmyslovým odpadem.
[Čeština]
Správna likvidácia tohoto výrobku (Elektrotechnický a elektronický odpad)
(Platné pre Európsku úniu a ostatné európske krajiny so systémom triedeného odpadu)
Toto označenie na výrobku, príslušenstve alebo v sprievodnej brožúre hovorí, že po skončení životnosti by produkt ani jeho elektronické
príslušenstvo (napr. nabíjačka, náhlavná súprava, USB kábel) nemali byť likvidované s ostatným domovým odpadom. Prípadnému
poškodeniu životného prostredia alebo ľudského zdravia môžete predísť tým, že budete tieto výrobky oddeľovať od ostatného odpadu a
vrátite ich na recykláciu. Používatelia v domácnostiach by pre podrobné informácie, ako ekologicky bezpečne naložiť s týmito výrobkami,
mali kontaktovať buď predajcu, ktorý im ich predal, alebo príslušný úrad v mieste ich bydliska. Priemyselní používatelia by mali kontaktovať
svojho dodávateľa a preveriť si podmienky kúpnej zmluvy. Tento výrobok a ani jeho elektronické príslušenstvo by nemali byť likvidované
spolu s ostatným priemyselným odpadom.
[Slovensky]
Cum se elimină corect acest produs (Deşeuri de echipamente electrice şi electronice)
(Aplicabil în ţările Uniunii Europene şi în alte ţări cu sisteme de colectare selectivă)
Acest simbol de pe produs, accesorii şi documentaţie indică faptul că produsul şi accesoriile sale electronice (încărcător, căşti, cablu USB)
nu trebuie eliminate împreună cu alte deşeuri menajere la finalul duratei lor de utilizare. dat fiind că eliminarea necontrolată a deşeurilor
poate dăuna mediului înconjurător sau sănătăţii umane, vă rugăm să separaţi aceste articole de alte tipuri de deşeuri şi să le reciclaţi în
mod responsabil, promovând astfel reutilizarea durabilă a resurselor materiale. Utilizatorii casnici trebuie să-l contacteze pe distribuitorul
care le-a vândut produsul sau să se intereseze la autorităţile locale unde şi cum pot să ducă aceste articole pentru a fi reciclate în mod
ecologic. Utilizatorii comerciali trebuie să-şi contacteze furnizorul şi să consulte termenii şi condiţiile din contractul de achiziţie. Acest produs
şi accesoriile sale electronice nu trebuie eliminate împreună cu alte deşeuri comerciale.
[Română]
Izstrādājuma pareiza likvidēšana (Attiecas uz nolietotām elektriskām un elektroniskām ierīcēm)
(Spēkā Eiropas Savienībā un pārējās Eiropas valstīs, kas izmanto atkritumu dalītu savākšanu)
Šis uz izstrādājuma un tā piederumiem vai pievienotajā dokumentācijā izvietotais marķējums norāda, ka izstrādājumu un tā elektroniskos
piederumus (piem., uzlādes ierīci, austiņas, USB kabeli) pēc ekspluatācijas laika beigām nedrīkst likvidēt kopā ar citiem sadzīves
atkritumiem. lai nepieļautu atkritumu nekontrolētas likvidēšanas radītu varbūtēju kaitējumu videi un cilvēku veselībai, lūdzam minētās ierīces
nošķirt no citiem atkritumiem un disciplinēti nodot pienācīgai pārstrādei, tā sekmējot materiālo resursu atkārtotu izmantošanu. lai uzzinātu,
kur un kā minētās ierīces iespējams nodot ekoloģiski drošai pārstrādei, mājsaimniecībām jāsazinās ar izstrādājuma pārdevēju vai savu
pašvaldību. Iestādēm un uzņēmumiem jāsazinās ar izstrādājuma piegādātāju un jāiepazīstas ar pirkuma līguma nosacījumiem. Izstrādājumu
un tā elektroniskos piederumus nedrīkst nodot likvidēšanai kopā ar citiem iestāžu un uzņēmumu atkritumiem.
[Latviešu]
BN68-03043A.indb 3 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27Tinkamas šio gaminio išmetimas (elektros ir elektroninės įrangos atliekos)
Šis ženklas, pateiktas ant gaminio, jo priedų ar dokumentacijoje, nurodo, kad gaminio ir jo elektroninių priedų (pvz., įkroviklio, ausinių,
USB kabelio) negalima išmesti kartu su kitomis buitinėmis atliekomis gaminio naudojimo laikui pasibaigus. Kad būtų išvengta galimos
nekontroliuojamo atliekų išmetimo žalos aplinkai arba žmonių sveikatai ir skatinamas aplinką tausojantis antrinių žaliavų panaudojimas,
atskirkite šiuos elementus nuo kitų rūšių atliekų ir atiduokite perdirbti. Informacijos kur ir kaip pristatyti šiuos elementus saugiai perdirbti,
privatūs vartotojai turėtų kreiptis į parduotuvę, kurioje šį gaminį pirko, arba į vietos valdžios institucijas. verslo vartotojai turėtų kreiptis
į savo tiekėją ir peržiūrėti pirkimo sutarties sąlygas. Tvarkant atliekas, šio gaminio ir jo elektroninių priedų negalima maišyti su kitomis
pramoninėmis atliekomis.
[Lietuvių kalba]
Õige viis toote kasutuselt kõrvaldamiseks (elektriliste ja elektrooniliste seadmete jäätmed)
Selline tähistus tootel või selle tarvikutel või dokumentidel näitab, et toodet ega selle elektroonilisi tarvikuid (nt laadija, peakomplekt, USBkaabel) ei tohi kasutusaja lõppemisel kõrvaldada koos muude olmejäätmetega. Selleks et vältida jäätmete kontrollimatu kõrvaldamisega
seotud võimaliku kahju tekitamist keskkonnale või inimeste tervisele ning edendada materiaalsete vahendite säästvat taaskasutust,
eraldage need esemed muudest jäätmetest ja suunake need vastutustundlikult taasringlusse. Kodukasutajad saavad teavet nende esemete
keskkonnaohutu ringlussevõtu kohta kas toote müüjalt või keskkonnaametist. Firmad peaksid võtma ühendust tarnijaga ning kontrollima
ostulepingu tingimusi ja sätteid. Toodet ega selle elektroonilisi tarvikuid ei tohi panna muude hävitamiseks mõeldud kaubandusjäätmete
hulka.
[Eesti]
BN68-03043A.indb 4 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the european Union and other european countries with separate battery return systems.)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium
or lead above the reference levels in eC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to
human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of
waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.
[English]
Elimination des batteries de ce produit
(Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis en
place.)
le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que les batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec
les autres déchets ménagers. l’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de
mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive Ce 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas
correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources
naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler via votre
système local de collecte gratuite des batteries.
[Français]
Korrekte Entsorgung der Batterien dieses Produkts
(In den ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen ländern mit einem separaten Altbatterie-rücknahmesystem)
die Kennzeichnung auf der Batterie bzw. auf der dazugehörigen dokumentation oder verpackung gibt an, dass die Batterie zu diesem
Produkt nach seiner lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden darf. Wenn die Batterie mit den
chemischen Symbolen Hg, Cd oder Pb gekennzeichnet ist, liegt der Quecksilber-, Cadmium- oder Blei-Gehalt der Batterie über den in der
EG-richtlinie 2006/66 festgelegten referenzwerten. Wenn Batterien nicht ordnungsgemäß entsorgt werden, können sie der menschlichen
Gesundheit bzw. der Umwelt schaden. Bitte helfen Sie, die natürlichen ressourcen zu schützen und die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung
von stofflichen ressourcen zu fördern, indem Sie die Batterien von anderen Abfällen getrennt über Ihr örtliches kostenloses Altbatterierücknahmesystem entsorgen.
[Deutsch]
Correcte behandeling van een gebruikte accu uit dit product
(van toepassing op de Europese Unie en andere Europese landen met afzonderlijke inzamelingssystemen voor accu’s en batterijen.)
dit merkteken op de accu, handleiding of verpakking geeft aan dat de accu in dit product aan het einde van de levensduur niet samen met
ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden weggegooid. de chemische symbolen Hg, Cd of Pb geven aan dat het kwik-, cadmium- of loodgehalte
in de accu hoger is dan de referentieniveaus in de richtlijn 2006/66/EC. Indien de gebruikte accu niet op de juiste wijze wordt behandeld,
kunnen deze stoffen schadelijk zijn voor de gezondheid van mensen of het milieu. Ter bescherming van de natuurlijke hulpbronnen en ter
bevordering van het hergebruik van materialen, verzoeken wij u afgedankte accu’s en batterijen te scheiden van andere soorten afval en
voor recycling aan te bieden bij het gratis inzamelingssysteem voor accu’s en batterijen in uw omgeving.
[Nederlands]
Corretto smaltimento delle batterie del prodotto
(Applicabile nei paesi dell’Unione europea e in altri paesi europei con sistemi di conferimento differenziato delle batterie.)
Il marchio riportato sulla batteria o sulla sua documentazione o confezione indica che le batterie di questo prodotto non devono essere
smaltite con altri rifiuti domestici al termine del ciclo di vita. dove raffigurati, i simboli chimici Hg, Cd o Pb indicano che la batteria contiene
mercurio, cadmio o piombo in quantità superiori ai livelli di riferimento della direttiva UE 2006/66. Se le batterie non vengono smaltite
correttamente, queste sostanze possono causare danni alla salute umana o all’ambiente. Per proteggere le risorse naturali e favorire il
riutilizzo dei materiali, separare le batterie dagli altri tipi di rifiuti e riciclarle utilizzando il sistema di conferimento gratuito previsto nella propria
area di residenza.
[Italiano]
Eliminación correcta de las baterías de este producto
(Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en otros países europeos con sistemas de recogida selectiva de baterías.)
la presencia de esta marca en las baterías, el manual o el paquete del producto indica que cuando haya finalizado la vida útil de las
baterías no deberán eliminarse junto con otros residuos domésticos. los símbolos químicos Hg, Cd o Pb, si aparecen, indican que la batería
contiene mercurio, cadmio o plomo en niveles superiores a los valores de referencia admitidos por la Directiva 2006/66 de la Unión europea.
Si las baterías no se desechan convenientemente, estas sustancias podrían provocar lesiones personales o dañar el medioambiente. Para
proteger los recursos naturales y promover el reciclaje, separe las baterías de los demás residuos y recíclelas mediante el sistema de
recogida gratuito de su localidad.
[Español]
Eliminação correcta das baterias existentes neste produto
(Aplicável na União Europeia e noutros países europeus com sistemas de recolha de baterias separados.)
esta marca, apresentada na bateria, manual ou embalagem, indica que as baterias existentes neste produto não devem ser eliminadas
juntamente com os resíduos domésticos indiferenciados no final do seu período de vida útil. Onde existentes, os símbolos químicos Hg, Cd
ou Pb indicam que a bateria contém mercúrio, cádmio ou chumbo acima dos níveis de referência indicados na directiva CE 2006/66. Se as
baterias não forem correctamente eliminadas, estas substâncias poderão ser prejudiciais para a saúde humana ou para o meio ambiente.
Para proteger os recursos naturais e promover a reutilização dos materiais, separe as baterias dos outros tipos de resíduos e recicle-as
através do sistema gratuito de recolha local de baterias.
[Português]
Ustrezno odstranjevanje baterij v tem izdelku
(Uporabno v EU in ostalih evropskih državah s sistemi ločenega odstranjevanja baterij)
Ta oznaka na bateriji, v navodilih ali na embalaži pomeni, da baterij ob izteku njihove življenjske dobe v tem izdelku ne smete odstraniti
skupaj z ostalimi gospodinjskimi odpadki. Oznake za kemijske elemente Hg, Cd ali Pb pomenijo, da baterija vsebuje živo srebro, kadmij ali
svinec v količinah, ki presegajo referenčne nivoje v direktivi EC 2006/66. Če te baterije niso ustrezno odstranjene, te snovi lahko škodujejo
zdravju ljudi oziroma okolju. Za zaščito naravnih virov in za vzpodbujanje ponovne uporabe materialov prosimo, ločite te baterije od ostalih
odpadkov in jih oddajte na predvidenih lokalnih zbirnih reciklažnih mestih.
[Slovenščina]
Korrekt avfallshantering av batterierna i denna produkt
(Gäller EU och andra europeiska länder med särskild batteriåtervinning.) denna markering på batteriet, i manualen eller på förpackningen
anger att batterierna i denna produkt inte bör slängas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall. de kemiska symbolerna Hg, Cd eller Pb
visar i förekommande fall att batterierna innehåller kvicksilver, kadmium eller bly i mängder överstigande de gränsvärden som anges i
EU-direktivet 2006/66. Om batterierna inte slängs på ett ansvarsfullt sätt kan dessa substanser utgöra en fara för hälsa eller miljö. Hjälp till
att skydda naturresurser och bidra till materialåtervinning genom att sortera batterierna separat från annat avfall och lämna in dem på en
återvinningsstation.
[Svenska]
BN68-03043A.indb 5 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27KKorrekt bortskaffelse af batterierne i dette produkt
(Gælder i EU og andre europæiske lande med særlige retursystemer for batterier).
Mærket på dette batteri, dokumentationen eller emballagen betyder, at batterierne i dette produkt efter endt levetid ikke må bortskaffes
sammen med andet husholdningsaffald. Mærkning med de kemiske symboler Hg, Cd eller Pb betyder, at batteriet indeholder kviksølv,
cadmium eller bly over grænseværdierne i EU-direktiv 2006/66. Hvis batterierne ikke bortskaffes korrekt, kan disse stoffer være skadelige
for menneskers helbred eller for miljøet. For at beskytte naturens ressourcer og fremme genbrug, skal batterier holdes adskilt fra andre typer
affald og genanvendes via dit lokale, gratis batteriretursystem.
[Dansk]
Korrekt avhending av batterier i dette produkt
(Kommer til anvendelse i den europeiske union og i andre europeiske land med separate systemer for retur av batterier.)
denne merkingen på batteriet, håndboken eller emballasjen angir at batteriene i dette produktet ikke skal kastes sammen med annet
husholdningsavfall ved slutten av sin levetid. der det er merket, angir de kjemiske symbolene Hg, Cd eller Pb at batteriet inneholder
kvikksølv, kadmium eller bly over referansenivåene i EF-direktiv 2006/66. Hvis batteriene ikke avhendes på riktig måte, kan disse stoffene
skade menneskers helse eller miljøet. For å beskytte naturressurser og for å fremme gjenbruk av materialer, ber vi deg adskille batterier fra
andre typer avfall og resirkulere dem ved å levere dem på din lokale, gratis mottaksstasjon.
[Norsk]
Tuotteen paristojen oikea hävittäminen
(Koskee Euroopan Unionia ja muita Euroopan maita, joissa on erillinen paristojen palautusjärjestelmä.)
Pariston, käyttöoppaan tai pakkauksen tämä merkintä tarkoittaa, että tämän tuotteen sisältämiä paristoja ei saa hävittää muun
kotitalousjätteen seassa, kun niiden käyttöikä on päättynyt. Kemiallinen symboli Hg, Cd tai Pb ilmaisee, että paristo sisältää elohopeaa,
kadmiumia tai lyijyä ylin EU: n direktiivien 2006/66 viiterajojen. Jos paristoja ei hävitetä oikein, nämä aineet voivat vahingoittaa ihmisten
terveyttä tai ympäristöä. Suojaa luonnonvaroja ja edistä materiaalien uusiokäyttöä - erottele paristot muusta jätteestä ja toimita ne
kierrätettäväksi paikalliseen maksuttomaan paristojen palautusjärjestelmään.
[Suomi]
A termékhez tartozó akkumulátorok megfelelő ártalmatlanítása
(Az Európai Unió területén és más, önálló akkumulátorleadó rendszerrel rendelkező európai országok területén alkalmazandó.)
Az akkumulátoron, a kézikönyvön vagy a csomagoláson szereplő jelzés arra utal, hogy hasznos élettartama végén a terméket nem
szabad egyéb háztartási hulladékkal együtt kidobni. Ahol szerepel a jelzés, a Hg, Cd vagy Pb kémiai elemjelölések arra utalnak, hogy
az akkumulátor az EK 2006/66. számú irányelvben rögzített referenciaszintet meghaladó mennyiségű higanyt, kadmiumot vagy ólmot
tartalmaz. Az akkumulátorok nem megfelelő kezelése esetén ezek az anyagok veszélyt jelenthetnek az egészségre vagy a környezetre.
A természeti erőforrások megóvása és az anyagok újrafelhasználásának ösztönzése érdekében kérjük, különítse el az akkumulátorokat a
többi hulladéktól és vigye vissza a helyi, ingyenes akkumulátorleadó helyre.
[Magyar]
Sposób poprawnego usuwania baterii, w które wyposażony jest niniejszy produkt
(dotyczy obszaru Unii Europejskiej oraz innych krajów europejskich posiadających oddzielne systemy zwrotu zużytych baterii.)
Niniejsze oznaczenie na baterii, instrukcji obsługi lub opakowaniu oznacza, że po upływie okresu użytkowania baterie, w które wyposażony
był dany produkt, nie mogą zostać usunięte wraz z innymi odpadami pochodzącymi z gospodarstw domowych. Przy zastosowaniu takiego
oznaczenia symbole chemiczne (Hg, Cd lub Pb) wskazują, że dana bateria zawiera rtęć, kadm lub ołów w ilości przewyższającej poziomy
odniesienia opisane w dyrektywie WE 2006/66. Jeśli baterie nie zostaną poprawnie zutylizowane, substancje te mogą powodować
zagrożenie dla zdrowia ludzkiego lub środowiska naturalnego. Aby chronić zasoby naturalne i promować ponowne wykorzystanie
materiałów, należy oddzielać baterie od innego typu odpadów i poddawać je utylizacji poprzez lokalny, bezpłatny system zwrotu baterii.
[Polski]
Σωστή απόρριψη των μπαταριών αυτού του προϊόντος
(Ισχύει στην Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και άλλες ευρωπαϊκές χώρες με συστήματα ξεχωριστής ανακύκλωσης μπαταριών.)
Αυτή η επισήμανση πάνω στη μπαταρία, το εγχειρίδιο ή τη συσκευασία υποδεικνύει ότι οι μπαταρίες αυτού του προϊόντος δεν πρέπει να
απορρίπτονται μαζί με άλλα οικιακά απορρίμματα στο τέλος του κύκλου ζωής τους. Όπου υπάρχουν, τα χημικά σύμβολα Hg, Cd ή Pb
υποδεικνύουν ότι η μπαταρία περιέχει υδράργυρο, κάδμιο ή μόλυβδο πάνω από τα επίπεδα αναφοράς της Ευρωπαϊκής Οδηγίας 2006/66.
Αν οι μπαταρίες δεν απορριφθούν σωστά, αυτές οι ουσίες ενδέχεται να προκαλέσουν βλαβερές συνέπειες στην ανθρώπινη υγεία ή το
περιβάλλον. Παρακαλούμε διαχωρίζετε τις μπαταρίες από άλλους τύπους απορριμμάτων και ανακυκλώνετέ τις μέσω του τοπικού σας,
δωρεάν συστήματος ανακύκλωσης μπαταριών, για την προστασία των φυσικών πόρων και την προώθηση της επαναχρησιμοποίησης
υλικών.
[Ελληνικά]
Правилно изхвърляне на батериите в този продукт
(Приложимо в Европейския съюз и други европейски държави със самостоятелни системи за връщане на батерии.)
Това обозначение върху батерията, ръководството или опаковката, показва, че батериите в този продукт не бива да се изхвърлят
с другите битови отпадъци в края на техния полезен живот. Където са маркирани, химическите символи Hg, Cd или Pb показват,
че батерията съдържа живак, кадмий или олово над контролните нива в Директива 2006/66 на ЕО. Ако батериите не се изхвърлят
правилно, тези вещества могат да предизвикат увреждане на човешкото здраве или на околната среда. За да предпазите
природните ресурси и за да съдействате за многократната употреба на материалните ресурси, моля отделяйте батериите от
другите видове отпадъчни продукти и ги рециклирайте посредством Вашата локална система за безплатно връщане на батерии.
[Български]
BN68-03043A.indb 6 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27Správná likvidace baterií v tomto výrobku
(Platí v Evropské unii a dalších evropských zemích s vlastními systémy zpětného odběru baterií.)
Tato značka na baterii, návodu nebo obalu znamená, že baterie v tomto výrobku nesmí být na konci své životnosti likvidovány společně s
jiným domovním odpadem. Případně vyznačené symboly chemikálií Hg, Cd nebo Pb upozorňují na to, že baterie obsahuje rtuť, kadmium
nebo olovo v množství překračujícím referenční úrovně stanovené směrnicí ES 2006/66. Pokud baterie nejsou správně zlikvidovány, mohou
tyto látky poškodit zdraví osob nebo životní prostředí. Pro ochranu přírodních zdrojů a pro podporu opakovaného využívání materiálů
oddělte, prosím, baterie od ostatních typů odpadu a nechte je recyklovat prostřednictvím místního bezplatného systému zpětného odběru
baterií.
[Čeština]
Správna likvidácia batérií v tomto výrobku
(Aplikovateľné v krajinách Európskej únie a v ostatných európskych krajinách, v ktorých existujú systémy separovaného zberu batérií.)
Toto označenie na batérii, príručke alebo balení hovorí, že batérie v tomto výrobku by sa po skončení ich životnosti nemali likvidovať spolu
s ostatným domovým odpadom. v prípade takéhoto označenia chemické symboly Hg, Cd alebo Pb znamenajú, že batéria obsahuje ortuť,
kadmium alebo olovo v množstve presahujúcom referenčné hodnoty smernice 2006/66/ES. Pri nevhodnej likvidácii batérií môžu tieto látky
poškodiť zdravie alebo životné prostredie. Za účelom ochrany prírodných zdrojov a podpory opätovného použitia materiálu batérie likvidujte
oddelene od iných typov odpadou a recyklujte ich prostredníctvom miestneho systému bezplatného zberu batérií.
[Slovensky]
Dispoziţii privind eliminarea corectă a bateriilor acestui produs
(aplicabile în Uniunea Europeană şi în alte ţări europene cu sisteme separate de colectare a bateriilor)
Acest marcaj de pe baterie, de pe manualul de utilizare sau de pe ambalaj indică faptul că bateriile acestui produs nu trebuie eliminate
împreună cu alte deşeuri menajere la sfârşitul ciclului lor de viaţă. dacă sunt marcate, simbolurile chimice Hg, Cd sau Pb indică faptul că
bateria conţine mercur, cadmiu sau plumb peste nivelurile de referinţă prevăzute în directiva CE 2006/66. În cazul în care bateriile nu sunt
eliminate corespunzător, aceste substanţe pot fi dăunătoare pentru sănătatea omului sau pentru mediu. În vederea protejării resurselor
naturale şi a promovării refolosirii materialelor, vă rugăm să separaţi bateriile de celelalte tipuri de deşeuri şi să le reciclaţi prin intermediul
sistemului gratuit de returnare a bateriilor la nivel local.
[Română]
Šī izstrādājuma bateriju pareiza utilizācija
(Piemērojama Eiropas Savienībā un citās Eiropas valstīs ar atsevišķām bateriju nodošanas sistēmām.)
Šis marķējums uz baterijas, rokasgrāmatā vai uz iepakojuma norāda, ka šī izstrādājuma bateriju pēc tās kalpošanas laika beigām nedrīkst
izmest ar citiem sadzīves atkritumiem. Ja uz baterijas ir atzīmēti ķīmiskie simboli, piem., Hg, Cd vai Pb, tie norāda, ka baterija satur
dzīvsudrabu, kadmiju vai svinu, kura saturs ir lielāks par EK direktīvā 2006/66 minētajiem lielumiem. Ja baterijas tiek nepareizi likvidētas, šīs
vielas var radīt kaitējumu cilvēku veselībai vai videi. lai aizsargātu dabas resursus un veicinātu materiālu otrreizēju izmantošanu, šķirojiet
baterijas atsevišķi no citiem atkritumu veidiem un nododiet tās otrreizējai pārstrādei, izmantojot bateriju vietējo bezmaksas nodošanas
sistēmu.
[Latviešu]
Tinkamas šio produkto akumuliatorių tvarkymas
(Taikoma Europos Sąjungoje ir kitose Europos šalyse, kuriose galioja atskiros akumuliatorių grąžinimo sistemos.)
Šis ženklas yra pateikiamas ant akumuliatoriaus, jo dokumentacijoje ar ant pakuotės nurodo, kad šio produkto akumuliatorių, pasibaigus
jų tarnavimo laikui, negalima išmesti kartu su kitomis buitinėmis atliekomis. Cheminiai simboliai Hg, Cd arba Pb rodo, kad akumuliatoriuje
yra gyvsidabrio, kadmio ar švino, kurio kiekis viršija normą, nurodytą ES direktyvoje 2006/66. Jei akumuliatoriai nebus tinkamai išmesti,
šios medžiagos gali sukelti žalos žmonių sveikatai ar aplinkai. Tam, kad būtų apsaugoti gamtos ištekliai ir skatinamas antrinių žaliavų
panaudojimas, pašome atskirti akumuliatorių nuo kitų rūšių atliekų ir atiduoti perdirbti vietinėje akumuliatorių grąžinimo sistemai.
[Lietuvių kalba]
Őige viis toote akude kasutusest kőrvaldamiseks
(rakendatav Euroopa liidus ja teistes Euroopa riikides, kus on kasutusel spetsiaalsed akude kogumissüsteemid).
Selline tähistus akul, dokumentidel vői pakendil näitab, et toote akusid ei tohi kasutusaja lőppemisel kőrvaldada koos muude
olmejäätmetega. Keemilised elemendid Hg, Cd, vői Pb näitavad, et aku elavhőbeda, kaadmiumi vői plii sisaldus on EÜ direktiivi 2006/66
sihttasemest suurem. Kui akusid ei kőrvaldata őigel viisil, vőib nende sisu pőhjustada tervise-vői keskkonnakahjustusi. Selleks, et kaitsta
loodusvarasid ja edendada materjalide taaskasutamist, eraldage akud muudest jäätmetest ja suunake need taaskasutusse kohaliku, tasuta
teenusena pakutava akude tagastussüsteemi abil.
[Eesti]
BN68-03043A.indb 7 2010-04-14 �� 4:57:27
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Model Serial No.
BN68-02333J BN68-02333J-02
Plasma TV
user manual
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD-WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.
Country Customer Care Centre Web Site
AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG(7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at
BELGIUM 02 201 2418
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
CZECH REPUBLIC 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz
DENMARK 8 - SAMSUNG(7267864) www.samsung.com/dk
EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/ie
FINLAND 30 - 6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi
FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www.samsung.com/fr
GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864 € 0,14/Min) www.samsung.de
HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu
ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/it
LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl
NORWAY 3 - SAMSUNG(7267864) www.samsung.com/no
POLAND
"0 801 1SAMSUNG(172678)
022-607-93-33"
www.samsung.com/pl
PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt
SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/sk
SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) www.samsung.com/es
SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/se
Switzerland 0848 - SAMSUNG(7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/(French)
U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 1 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:48English - 2
User Instructions
Screen Image retention
Do not display a still image (such as on a video game or when hooking up a PC to this PDP) on the plasma monitor panel for more
than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention. This image retention is also known as “screen burn”. To avoid such image
retention, reduce the degree of brightness and contrast of the screen when displaying a still image.
Height
The PDP can normally operate only under 2000m in height. It might abnormally function at a place over 2000m in height so do not
install and operate there.
Heat on the top of the PDP TV
The top side of the product may be hot after long period of use as heat dissipates from the panel through the vent hole in the upper
part of the product. This is normal and does not indicate any defect or operation failure of the product. However, children should be
prevented from touching the upper part of the product.
The product is making a ‘cracking’ noise.
A ‘cracking’ noise may occur when the product contracts or expands due to a change of surrounding environment such as
temperature or humidity. This is normal and not a defect of the unit.
Cell Defects
The PDP uses a panel consisting of 2,360,000(HD-level) to 6,221,000(FHD-level) pixels which require sophisticated technology to
produce. However, there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of
the product.
Avoid operating the TV at temperatures below 5°C(41°F)
A still image displayed too long may cause permanent damage to the PDP Panel.
Watching the PDP TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the left,
right and centre of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen. Playing a DVD or a
game console may cause similar effect to the screen. Damages caused by the above effect are not covered
by the Warranty.
Afterimage on the Screen.
Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial afterimages.
To prevent this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ when displaying still images.
Warranty
- Warranty does not cover any damage caused by image retention.
- Burn-in is not covered by the warranty.
Installation
Be sure to contact an authorized service centre, when installing your set in a location with heavy dust, high or low temperatures,
high humidity, chemical substance and where it operates continually such as the airport, the train station etc. Failure to do so may
cause a serious damage to your set.
Digital TV Notice
1. Functionalities related to Digital TV(DVB) are only available in countries/areas where DVB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AVC)
digital terrestrial signals are broadcasted or where you have access to a compatible DVB-C(MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC)
cable-TV service. Please check with your local dealer the possibility to receive DVB-T or DVB-C signal.
2. DVB-T is the DVB European consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVB-C
is that for the broadcast transmission of digital TV over cable.
However, some differentiated features like EPG (Electric Program Guide), VOD (Video on Demand) and so on, are not
included in this specification. So, they cannot be supported at this moment.
3. Although this TV set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards[August,2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T digital
terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed.
4. Some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for such a service and you may be required to agree to terms and
conditions of their business.
5. Some Digital TV functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and DVB-C might not work correctly with all
providers.
6. For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre.
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG
customer care centre. (See back cover for more informations.)
N Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance.
Product design and specifications may be changed without notice in order to enhance product performance.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 2 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:49English - 3
English
N O T
Symbol Press Note One-Touch Button TOOLS
Contents
Connecting and Preparing Your TV
■ Checking Parts ..........................................................................4
■ Using the Stand-Base ...............................................................4
■ Assembling the Cables..............................................................4
■ Viewing the Control Panel .........................................................5
■ Viewing the Connection Panel...................................................6
■ Remote Control .........................................................................8
■ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control .................................8
■ Using the Remote Control Backlight Buttons ............................9
■ Switching On and Off.................................................................9
■ Placing Your Television in Standby Mode..................................9
■ Viewing the Display ...................................................................9
■ Viewing the Menus ..................................................................10
■ Using the TOOLS Button ........................................................10
■ Plug & Play Feature ................................................................10
Channel Control
■ Storing Channels ................................................................... 11
■ Managing Channels ................................................................13
Picture Control
■ Changing the Picture Settings.................................................15
■ Setting up the TV with your PC ...............................................18
■ PC Display...............................................................................19
Sound Control
■ Changing the Sound Setting ...................................................20
■ Selecting the Sound Mode ......................................................21
Function Description
■ Setting the Time ......................................................................22
■ Configuring the Setup Menu....................................................23
■ Viewing the Picture in Picture (PIP).........................................25
Support / Input
■ Supported Program.................................................................26
■ Source List / Edit Name...........................................................27
Network
■ Network Connection ................................................................28
■ Network Setup.........................................................................30
Media Play
■ Connecting a USB Device.......................................................33
■ Using the Media Play Function................................................34
■ Sorting the Photo / Music / Movie List .....................................35
■ Photo / Music / Movie List Option Menu..................................36
■ Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play Option Menu................37
■ Viewing a Photo or Slide Show ...............................................38
■ Playing Music ..........................................................................39
■ Playing a Movie File ...............................................................40
■ Using the Setup Menu.............................................................41
Media Play-DLNA
■ Setting the DLNA Network.......................................................42
■ Installing the DLNA Application ...............................................42
■ Using the DLNA Application ....................................................43
■ Using the DLNA Function ........................................................44
About Anynet+
■ Connecting Anynet
+
Devices ...................................................45
■ Setting Up Anynet
+
.................................................................46
■ Switching between Anynet
+
Devices .......................................46
■ Recording ................................................................................47
■ Listening through a Receiver...................................................48
■ Troubleshooting for Anynet
+
...................................................48
Content Library
■ Activating the Content Library .................................................49
■ Using the Content Library........................................................50
Internet@TV
■ Getting Started with Internet@TV ...........................................51
■ Editing Snippets in the Dock ...................................................53
■ Using the Profile Widget..........................................................53
■ Using the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery..........................................54
■ Using the Yahoo!® Weather Widget........................................54
■ Using the Yahoo!® News Widget ............................................55
■ Using the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget.............................................55
■ Using the Yahoo!® Finance Widget.........................................56
■ Troubleshooting for internet@TV ...........................................56
■ Help Website ...........................................................................57
Internet@TV
■ Getting Started with Internet@TV ...........................................58
■ Setting up Internet@TV...........................................................58
■ Using the Internet@TV service ...............................................59
■ Troubleshooting for internet@TV ............................................60
■ Help Website ...........................................................................60
Home Network Centre
■ Home Network Centre.............................................................61
■ Setting Up the Home Network Centre .....................................62
■ Using the Message Function...................................................62
■ Using the Media Function........................................................63
Recommendations for Use
■ Teletext Feature.......................................................................64
■ Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA) .....................................65
■ Preparing before installing Wall- Mount...................................66
■ How to attach the Stand-Base.................................................66
■ Securing the TV to the Wall.....................................................67
■ Securing the Installation Space...............................................67
■ Troubleshooting.......................................................................68
■ Specifications ..........................................................................71
■ Software License.....................................................................72
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 3 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:49English - 4
Assembling the Cables
Enclose the cables in the Holder-Wire Cable so that the cables are not visible through the transparent
stand.
Using the Stand-Base
N Two or more people should carry the PDP. Never lay the PDP on the floor
because of possible damage to the screen. Always keep the PDP upright.
N The PDP can rotate 20 degrees in right and left directions.
-20° ~ 20°
Checking Parts
Owner’s
Instructions
Remote Control/
AAA Batteries (2ea)
Power Cord Cloth-Clean Holder-Wire Cable Holder-Ring (4ea)
(Refer to page 66)
Program CD
Screw (4ea)
(PS50B650 only)
(Refer to page 66)
Cover-Bottom
(PS50B650 only)
(Refer to page 66)
Cover-Bottom / Screws (2ea)
(PS58B680 / PS63B680 only)
(Refer to page 66)
Ferrite Core for
Headphone
Ferrite Core for
Power Cord
(PS58B680T6P/
PS63B680 only)
Ferrite Core for
Power Cord
Warranty Card/
Safety Guide Manual
(Not available in all
locations)
N Ferrite Core
The ferrite cores are used to shield the cables from interference.
When connecting a cable, open the ferrite core and clip it around the
cable near the plug.
Connecting and Preparing Your TV
(PS58B680T6P/
PS63B680 only)
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 4 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:51English - 5
Viewing the Control Panel
N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
Front Panel buttons
Touch each button to
operate.
(PS58B680 / PS63B680)
(PS50B650)
1 SOURCE
Toggles between all the available input sources
(TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI,
HDMI3, HDMI4, USB).
N In the on-screen menu, use this button as you would use
the ENTERE button on the remote control.
2 MENU
Press to see an on-screen menu of your TV’s features.
3 + –
Press to increase or decrease the volume. In the on-screen
menu, use the + – buttons as you would use the
◄ and ► buttons on the remote control.
4 CH
Press to change channels. In the on-screen menu, use the
CH buttons as you would use the ▲ and ▼ buttons on
the remote control. You can use CH button to turn on
the TV without the remote control.
5 POWER INDICATOR
Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in
stand-by mode.
6 (POWER)
Press to turn the TV on and off.
7 REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR
Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV.
8 SPEAKERS
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 5 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:52English - 6
Viewing the Connection Panel
N Whenever you connect an audio or video system to your set, ensure that all elements are switched off.
N When connecting an external device, match the colour of the connection terminal to the cable.
N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
1 LAN
Connect a LAN cable to this port to connect to the Network
2 POWER IN
Connect the supplied power cord.
3 COMPONENT IN
Audio (AUDIO L/R) and video (Y / PB / PR) inputs for
Component.
4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC)
Connect to the video and audio output jack on your PC.
5 EXT 1, EXT 2
Inputs or outputs for external devices, such as VCR, DVD,
video game device or video disc players.
N In EXT mode, DTV Out only supports MPEG SD Video
and Audio.
N In EXT Mode, Game mode is not available
Input/Output Specification
Connector
Input Output
Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R)
EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔
Only TV or DTV output
is available.
EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Output you can choose.
6 HEADPHONE
Connect a set of headphones if you wish to watch a television
program without disturbing other people in the room.
N Prolonged use of headphones at a high volume may
damage your hearing.
7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
8 SERVICE
Connector for service.
9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)
Connect RCA audio signals from the TV to an external source,
such as Audio equipment.
0 ANT IN
75Ω Coaxial connector for Aerial/Cable Network.
! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3
No additional Audio connection is needed for an HDMI to
HDMI connection.
- When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use
the HDMI IN 2 (DVI) jack.
N What is HDMI?
- High Definition Multimedia interface allows the
transmission of high definition digital video data and
multiple channels of digital audio.
- The HDMI/DVI terminal supports DVI connection to
an extended device with the appropriate cable (not
supplied). The difference between HDMI and DVI is
that the HDMI device is smaller in size, has the HDCP
(High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) coding feature
installed, and supports multi - channel digital audio.
DVI AUDIO IN
DVI audio outputs for external devices.
Supported modes for HDMI/DVI and Component
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O
Component O O O O O O O
TV Rear Panel
Cable Television
Network
or
or
2
3 4 5 7 9 !
0
6 8
1
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 6 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:53English - 7
1 COMMON INTERFACE Slot
Insert CI(CI+) (Common Interface) card into the slot.
(refer to page 23)
- When not inserting CI(CI+) CARD in some channels,
Scramble Signal is displayed on the screen.
- The pairing information containing a telephone number,
CI(CI+) CARD ID, Host ID, and other information will be
displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is
displayed, please contact your service provider.
- When the channel information configuration has finished,
the message Updating Completed is displayed,
indicating that the channel list is now updated.
- Depending on the model, a message requesting your
Parental Lock password may appear when the CI card is
reinserted.
- Depending on the model, even if the Parental Lock is set
to Allow All a message requesting your password may
appear for adult (18 years and above) programmes.
N Insert the CI(CI+)-Card in the direction marked on it.
N 'CI(CI+) CARD' is not supported in some countries,
regions, broadcasting stations check with your authorized
dealer.
N The CI+ function is only applicable to PS********P model.
If you have some problems, please contact to service
provider.
2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2
Connect a USB mass storage device to view photo files
(JPEG) and play audio files (MP3) or movie files. You can
connect to SAMSUNG's network wirelessly.USB 1(HDD)
jack is also used as the HDD jack. HDD (Hard disk drive) is
device which stores digitally encoded data.
3 HDMI IN 4
Connect to the HDMI jack of a device with HDMI output.
4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)
Video and audio inputs for external devices, such as a
camcorder or VCR.
N The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
TV Side Panel
3
4
1
2
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 7 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:54English - 8
Remote Control
You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV.
N The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light.
1 POWER button
(turns the TV on and off)
2 Selects the TV mode directly.
3 Number buttons for direct channel
access
4 Press to switch to your favorite
channels.
5 Temporary sound switch-off
6 Volume increase
Volume decrease
7 Available source selection
8 Use to see information on the current
broadcast
9 Use to quickly select frequently used
functions.
0 Use to select on-screen menu items
and change menu values.
! This function enables you to view
Internet@TV.
@ Use these buttons in the Channel list,
Media Play, and Internet@TV, etc.
$ Use to display Channel Lists on the
screen.
% Use these buttons in the Channel list,
Media Play and Anynet+, etc.
^ Press to backlight the buttons on the
remote. This function is convenient
for using at night or when the room is
dark. (Using the remote control with
the ON/OFF( ) light button set to On
will reduce the battery usage time.)
& Previous channel
* Next channel
Previous channel
( Displays the main on-screen menu
) Electronic Program Guide (EPG)
display
a Returns to the previous menu
b Exit the on-screen menu
c This function enables you to view
Media Play
d This function enables you to view
Content Library.
e Digital subtitle display
f Turn the audio description function on
or off.
Teletext Functions
2 Exit from the teletext display
(depending on the model)
7 Teletext mode selection (LIST/FLOF)
8 Teletext reveal
9 Teletext size
@ Fastext topic selection
# Teletext display/mix both
teletext information and the normal
broadcast
$ Teletext store
& Teletext sub page
* P :Teletext next page
P :Teletext previous page
( Teletext index
a Teletext hold
b Teletext cancel
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
1. Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure.
2. Install two AAA size batteries.
N Make sure to match the ‘+’ and ‘–’ ends of the batteries with the diagram inside
the compartment.
3. Close the cover.
N Remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using the
remote control for a long time.
N If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following
1. Is the TV power on?
2. Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed?
3. Are the batteries drained?
4. Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged?
5. Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby?
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 8 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:55English - 9
Using the Remote Control Backlight Buttons
Use this feature in dark surroundings and when you are unable to see the remote control buttons clearly.
1. Press the ON/OFF( ) light button
N When ON, the button backlight is turned on for a moment.
N Pressing a remote control button when the remote control is on turns the button backlight on for a moment.
Switching On and Off
The mains lead is attached to the rear of your set.
1. Plug the mains lead into an appropriate socket.
N The standby indicator lights up on your set.
2. Press the POWERP button on your set.
N You also can press the POWERP button or the TV button on the remote control to turn the TV on.
N The programme that you were watching last is reselected automatically.
3. Press the numeric button (0~9) or channel up / down (< / >) button on the remote control or < CH> button on your set.
N When you switch the set on for the very first time, you will be asked to choose language in which the menus are to be displayed.
4. To switch your set off, press the POWERP button again.
Placing Your Television in Standby Mode
Your set can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. The standby mode can be useful when you wish to
interrupt viewing temporarily (during a meal, for example).
1. Press the POWERP button on the remote control.
N The screen is turned off and a red standby indicator appears on your set.
2. To switch your set back on, simply press the POWERP, numeric buttons (0~9), TV button or channel up / down (< / >) button
again.
N Do not leave your set in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on holiday, for example). It is best to unplug
the set from the mains and aerial.
Viewing the Display
The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video settings.
O Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
Press the INFO button on the remote control. The TV will display the channel, the type of
sound, and the status of certain picture and sound settings.
• ▲, ▼: You can view other channel’s information. If you want to move to the currently
selected channel, press ENTERE button.
• ◄, ►: You can view the desired program’s information at the current channel.
N Press the INFO button once more or wait approximately 10 seconds and the display
disappears automatically.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 9 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:56English - 10
Viewing the Menus
1. With the power on, press the MENU button. The main menu appears on the
screen. The menu’s left side has icons: Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup, Input,
Application, Support.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons. Then press the ENTERE button
to access the icon’s sub-menu.
3. Press the EXIT button to exit.
N The on-screen menus disappear from the screen after about one minute.
Using the TOOLS Button
You can use the TOOLS button to select your frequently used functions quickly and easily. The Tools menu changes depending on
which external input mode you are viewing.
1. Press the TOOLS button. The Tools menu will appear.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a menu, then press the ENTERE button.
3. Press the ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE buttons to display, change, or use the selected
items. For a more detailed description of each function, refer to the corresponding page.
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), see page 46
• Picture Size, see page 16
• Picture Mode, see page 15
• Sound Mode, see page 20
• Sleep Timer, see page 22
• SRS TS HD, see page 20
• Energy Saving, see page 24
• Dual l ll, see page 21
• Add to Favourite (or Delete from Favourite), see page 14
• PIP, see page 25
• Auto Adjustment, see page 18
Plug & Play Feature
When the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently.
N The Screen Saver is activated if there is no remote control key input for longer than 1 minute while Plug & Play is running.
N The Screen Saver is activated if there is no operating signal for longer than 15 minutes.
N If you accidentally select the wrong country for your TV, the characters on the screen may be wrongly displayed.
1. Press the POWER button on the remote control. Select the OSD Language. menu
is automatically displayed. Select the appropriate language by pressing the ▲ or ▼
button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Store Demo or Home Use, then press the
ENTERE button.
N We recommend setting the TV to Home Use mode for the best picture in your
home environment.
N Store Demo mode is only intended for use in retail environments.
N If the unit is accidentally set to Store Demo mode and you want to return to Home Use (Standard): Press the Volume button on
the TV. When the volume OSD is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds.
3. Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate country by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm
your choice.
N After selecting the country in the Country menu, some models may proceed with an additional option to setup the pin number.
N When you input the PIN number, 0-0-0-0 is not available.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to memorize the channels of the selected connection, then press the ENTERE button.
• Air: Air antenna signal.
• Cable: Cable antenna signal.
Plug & Play
Select the OSD Language.
Language :
U Move E Enter
▲
Nederlands
English
Eesti
▼
Tools
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Picture Size : Auto Wide
Picture Mode : Standard
Sound Mode : Custom
Sleep Timer : Off
SRS TS HD : Off
Energy Saving : Off
Dual l ll : Mono
Add to Favourite
U Move E Enter e Exit
Mode : Standard
Cell Light : 4
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Advanced Settings
Picture
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 10 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:56English - 11
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the Antenna source to memorize. Press the ENTERE button to select Start.
• Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue channels.
• Digital: Digital channels.
• Analogue: Analogue channels.
N The channel search will start and end automatically.
N For more detailed description of selecting Cable mode, refer to page 11.
6. The message Set the Clock Mode. is displayed. Press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Auto, then Press
the ENTERE button.
N If you select Manual, Set current date and time is displayed. (For a more detailed description of Manual, refer to page 22)
N If you have received a digital signal, the time will be set automatically.
7. The brief instruction on How to get the best performance from your new HDTV is displayed. Press the ENTERE button.
N This menu is available HD Connection Guide in the Support menu.
N You can change previous or next page by pressing the ◄ / ► button.
8. The message Enjoy your TV. is displayed.
N If you want to view the TV immediately, select the Watch TV.
N If you want to view the See Product Guide, press the ENTERE button.
If you want to reset this feature...
1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup,
then press the ENTERE button.
2. Press the ENTERE button again to select Plug & Play.
3. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The default PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’.
N If you want to change PIN(Personal Identification Number), refer to page 24.
N The Plug & Play feature is only available in the TV mode.
Storing Channels
❑ Country
Digital Channel: You can change the country for digital channels.
Analogue Channel: You can change the country for analogue channels.
N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
❑ Auto Store
Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations (and availability depends on your
country) and stores them in the TV's memory.
You set the TV to memorize the channels of the selected connection.
• Air: Air antenna signal.
• Cable: Cable antenna signal.
You can select the antenna source to memorize.
• Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue channels.
• Digital: Digital channels.
• Analogue: Analogue channels.
N When selecting Cable,
• Search Mode: Displays the search mode. (Quick)
- Network ID: Displays the network identification code.
- Frequency: Displays the frequency for the channel.
- Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
- Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
• Search Mode: Displays the search mode.(Full, Network)
- Start Frequency: Displays the frequency start values.
- End Frequency: Displays the frequency stop values.
- Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
- Symbol Rate : Displays available symbol rates.
N If you want to stop Auto Store, press the ENTERE button.
The Stop Auto Store? message will be displayed.
Select Yes by pressing the ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTERE button.
Channel Control
Channel
Country ►
Auto Store
Manual Store
Cable Search Option
Full Guide
Mini Guide
Default Guide : Full Guide
Channel List
Setup
Plug & Play ►
Menu Language : English
Time
Broadcast
Security
Network
General
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 11 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:57English - 12
❑ Manual Store
Scans for a channel manually and stores it in the TV’s memory.
Digital Channel (Digital)
N Digital Channel is only available in DTV mode.
• Channel: Set the Channel number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons.
• Frequency: Set the frequency using the number (0~9) buttons.
• Bandwidth: Set the bandwidth using the ▲ or ▼ buttons.
N When it has finished, channels are updated in the channel list.
Analogue Channel
Manual store for analogue channel.
• Programme (Programme number to be assigned to a channel): Sets the programme number using the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9)
buttons.
• Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43: Sets the colour system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.
• Sound System → BG / DK / I / L : Sets the sound system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.
• Channel (When you know the number of the channel to be stored): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select C (Air channel) or S
(Cable channel). Press the ► button, then press the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons to select the required number.
N If there is abnormal sound or no sound, reselect the sound standard required.
• Search (When you do not know the channel numbers): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to start the search. The tuner scans the
frequency range until the first channel or the channel that you selected is received on the screen.
• Store (When you store the channel and associated programme number): Set to OK by pressing the ENTERE button.
N Channel mode
- C (Air channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number to each air broadcasting station in this mode.
- S (Cable channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number for each cable channel in this mode.
❑ Cable Search Option
You can set additional search options such as frequency and symbol rate for cable network searching. (Depending on the each
country)
• Freq.Start : Displays the frequency start values.
• Freq.Stop : Displays the frequency stop values.
• Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
• Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
N If the Freq.Start value is bigger than Freq.Stop value, the warning message is displayed.
❑ Full Guide / Mini Guide
The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by the broadcasters. Programme entries may appear blank or out
of date as a result of the information broadcast on a given channel. The display will dynamically update as soon as new information
becomes available.
• Full Guide: Displays the programme information as time ordered one hour segments. One hours of programme information is
displayed which may be scrolled forwards or backwards in time.
• Mini Guide: The information of each programme is displayed by each line on the current channel Mini Guide screen from the
current programme onwards according to the programme starting time order.
❑ Default Guide
Mini Guide / Full Guide
You can decide whether to display either the Mini Guide or the Full Guide when the
GUIDE button on the remote control is pressed.
O You can also display the guide menu simply by pressing the GUIDE button.
Continued...
Channel
Full Guide
Mini Guide
Default Guide : Full Guide ►
Channel List
Channel Mode : Added Ch.
Fine Tune
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 12 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:57English - 13
Using the Full / Mini Guide
▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►,
ENTER
Select a programme by pressing the ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE button.
RED Toggle between the Mini Guide or Full Guide.
GREEN Full Guide: Scroll backwards quickly (-24 hours).
YELLOW Full Guide: Scroll forwards quickly (+24 hours).
BLUE Exit the guide.
INFO INFO button for the detailed information.
❑ Channel Mode
When the press the P () button, Channels will be switched within the selected channel list.
Added Ch.: Channels will be switched within the memorized channel list.
Favourite Ch.: Channels will be switched within the favourite channel list.
❑ Fine Tune (Analogue channel only)
If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the channel, as this is done automatically during the search and store
operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, you may have to fine tune the channel manually.
N Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk * on the right-hand side of the channel number in the
channel banner.
N If you do not store the fine-tuned channel in memory, adjustments are not saved.
N To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset by pressing the ▼ button and then press the ENTERE button.
Managing Channels
Using this menu, you can Add / Delete or set Favourite channels and use the programme
guide for digital broadcasts.
N Select a channel in the All Channels, Added Channels, Favourites, or Programmed
screen by pressing the ▲ or ▼ buttons, and pressing the ENTERE button.
Then you can watch the selected channel.
• All Channels: Shows all currently available channels.
• Added Channels: Shows all added channels.
• Favourites: Shows all favourite channels.
• Programmed: Shows all current reserved programmes.
O Press the CH LIST button on the remote control to bring up the channel lists.
N Using the Colour buttons with the Channel List
- Red (Channel Type): Toggle among Air, Cable and Satellite.
- Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number.
- Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists.
- T TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Delete (or Add), Add to Favourite (or Delete from
Favourite), Lock (or Unlock), Timer Viewing, Edit Channel Name, Edit Channel
Number, Sort, Select All (or Deselect All), or Auto Store menu.
(The Tools menus may differ depending on the situation.)
N Channel Status Display Icons
A An Analogue channel. c A channel selected by pressing the
yellow button.
♥ A channel set as a Favourite. ( A programme currently being
broadcast.
\ A locked channel. ) A reserved programme
Channel
Mini Guide
Default Guide : Full Guide
Channel List
Channel Mode : Added Ch.
Fine Tune
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
All Channels
All Channel Type Zoom Select Page Tools
Mini Guide DTV Cable 900 f tn
Street Hypnosis
Booze Britain
2:00
2:30
▼ 5:00
Freshmen On Campus
Watch Information Page Full Guide Exit
Full Guide
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
900 f tn
901 ITV Play
902 Kerrang!
903 Kiss
903 oneword
▼ 903 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Watch Information Page Mini Guide +24 Hours Exit
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 13 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:58English - 14
❑ Channel List Tools Menu (in All Channels / Added Channels / Favourites)
N Press the TOOLS button to use the Tools menu.
N The Tools menu items may differ depending on the channel status.
Add / Delete
You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want.
N All deleted channels will be shown on All Channels menu.
N A gray-coloured channel indicates the channel has been deleted.
N The Add menu only appears for deleted channels.
N You can also delete a channel to the Added Channels or Favourites menu in the
same manner.
Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite
You can set channels you watch frequently as favourites.
T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu.
You can also add the favourite channel by selecting Tools → Add to Favourite
(or Delete from Favourite).
O To select the Favourite channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button on the
remote control.
N The “♥” symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a favourite.
N All favourite channels will be shown on Favourite menu.
Lock / Unlock
You can lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. This function is available only when the Child Lock is
set to On. (see page 24)
N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
N The default PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’. You can change the PIN, by selecting Change PIN from the menu.
N The “\” symbol will be displayed and the channel will be locked.
Timer Viewing
If you reserve a programme you want to watch, the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel List;
even when you are watching another channel. To reserve a programme set the current time first. (See page 22)
N Only memorized channels can be reserved.
N You can set the channel, month, day, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
N Reserving a programme will be shown on Programmed menu.
N Digital Programme Guide and Viewing Reservation
When a digital channel is selected, and you press the ► button, the Programme Guide for the channel appears.
You can reserve a programme according to the procedures described above.
Edit Channel Name (Analogue channel only)
Channels can be labeled so that their call letters appear whenever the channel is selected.
N The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned and cannot be labeled.
Edit Channel Number (Digital channel only)
You can also edit the channel number by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
Sort (Analogue channel only)
This operation allows you to change the programme numbers of the stored channels. This operation may be necessary after using
the auto store.
Select All / Deselect All
You can deselect or select all channels in the channel list.
N You can perform the Add / Delete, Add to Favourites / Delete from Favourites, or Lock / Unlock function for multiple channels at
the same time. Select the required channels and press the yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time.
N The c mark appears to the left of the selected channels.
N You can only select Deselect All when there is a selected channel.
Auto Store
N For further details on setting up options, refer to page 11.
N If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears.
❑ Channel List Tools Menu (in Programmed )
You can view, modify or delete a reservation.
N Press the TOOLS button to use the Tools menu.
• Change Info: Select to change a viewing reservation.
• Cancel Schedules: Select to cancel a viewing reservation.
• Information: Select to view a viewing reservation. (You can also change the reservation
information.)
• Select All / Deselect All: Select or deselect all reserved programmes.
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
All Channels
All Channel Type Zoom Select Page Tools
Delete
Add to Favourite
Lock
Timer Viewing
Edit Channel Name
Sort
▼
Programmed
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer
Change Info
Cancel Schedules
Information
Select All
All Zoom Select Tools Information
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 14 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:59English - 15
Changing the Picture Settings
❑ Mode
You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements.
Dynamic / Standard / Eco / Movie
T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu.
You can also set the picture mode by selecting Tools → Picture Mode.
❑ Cell Light / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)
Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality.
• Cell Light: Adjusts the pixel brightness.
• Contrast: Adjusts the contrast level.
• Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level.
• Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness.
• Colour: Adjusts the colour saturation of the picture using the bar on the screen.
• Tint (G/R): Adjusts the colour tint of the picture.
N When you make changes to Cell Light, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour or Tint (G/R), the OSD will be adjusted
accordingly.
N The adjusted values are saved for each picture mode.
N In Analogue TV, Ext., AV modes of the PAL system, you cannot use the Tint Function.
N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Cell Light, Contrast and Brightness.
N Each adjusted setting will be stored separately according to its input mode.
N The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced, and then this
will reduce the overall running cost.
❑ Advanced Settings
You can adjust the advanced settings for your screen including the colour and contrast.
N Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mode.
N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Dynamic Contrast, Gamma and
White Balance from among the Advanced Settings items.
Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest
You can enhance the picture depth by adjusting the black colour density.
Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High
You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided.
Gamma
You can adjust the primary colour (Red, Green, Blue) Intensity.
Colour Space
Colour Space is a colour matrix composed of red, green and blue colours. Select your favourite Colour Space to experience the
most natural colour.
• Auto: Automatically sets the colour range depending on the input video source.
• Native: Sets the colour range wider than the that of the input video source.
• Custom: Adjusts the colour range to suit your preference.
N Customizing the Colour Space
- Adjusts the Colour range to suit your preference. Colour is available when Colour Space is set to Custom.
- Colour → Red / Green / Blue / Yellow / Cyan / Magenta
- Red / Green / Blue: You can adjust the RGB values for the selected colour.
- Reset: Resets the colour space to the default values.
Picture Control
Continued...
Mode : Standard ►
Cell Light : 4
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Advanced Settings
Picture
Colour : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Advanced Settings ►
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 15 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:59English - 16
White Balance
You can adjust the colour temperature for more natural picture colours.
• R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen.
• Reset: Resets the default white balance.
Flesh Tone
You can adjust the flesh tone to be more or less red.
N Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen.
Edge Enhancement → Off / On
You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture.
xvYCC → Off / On
Setting the xvYCC mode to on increases detail and colour space when watching movies from an external device (i.e. DVD player).
N xvYCC is available when the picture mode is set to Movie, and the external input is set to HDMI or Component mode.
N This function may not be supported depending on your external device.
❑ Picture Options
You can customize the additional picture settings to suit your preference.
N In PC mode, you can only make changes to the Colour Tone, Size and Screen
Burn Protection from among the items in Picture Options.
Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2 / Warm3
You can select the most comfortable colour tone to your eyes.
N The adjusted values are stored according to the selected Picture mode.
N Warm1, Warm2, or Warm3 is only activated when the picture mode is Movie.
Size → Auto Wide / 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Screen Fit
You can select the picture size which best corresponds to your viewing requirements.
• Auto Wide: Sets the picture in Auto Wide format.
• 16:9: Sets the picture to the 16:9 aspect ratio.
• Wide Zoom: Select this menu to view 4:3 aspect ratio pictures over a 16:9 aspect ratio TV by stretching the 4:3 picture
vertically.
• Zoom: Stretches the 16:9 aspect ratio picture vertically.
• 4:3: Sets the picture to the 4:3 aspect ratio.
• Screen Fit: Displays the full native HD signal that cannot be viewed using a normal TV.
N Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary.
N The items available may differ depending on the selected mode.
N In PC Mode, only 16:9 and 4:3 mode can be adjusted.
N When Double ( , ) mode has been set in PIP, the Picture Size cannot be set.
N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV.
N Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours.
N Wide Zoom: Press the ► button to select Position, then press the ENTERE button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the screen up / down. Then press the ENTERE button.
N Zoom: Press the ► button to select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the
picture up and down. Then press the ENTERE button. Press the ► button to select Size, then press the ENTERE button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction. Then press the ENTERE button.
N After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) mode: Select Position by pressing
the ◄ or ►button. Use the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture.
N Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select Reset, then press the ENTERE button. You can initialize the setting.
N If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the overscan
function.
Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3
When setting the picture size to Auto Wide in a 16:9 wide TV, you can determine the picture size you want to see the 4:3 WSS
(Wide Screen Service) image or nothing. Each individual European country requires different picture size so this function is
intended for users to select it.
N This function is available in Auto Wide mode.
N This function is not available in PC, Component or HDMI mode.
Continued...
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Advanced Settings
Picture Options ►
Picture Reset
Picture
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 16 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:59English - 17
Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto
If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Reduction feature to help reduce any static
and ghosting that may appear on the screen.
N When the signal is weak, select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed.
HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low
You can directly select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth.
N This function is active only when the external input connects to HDMI (RGB signals).
1080 Full HD Motion Demo → Off / On
Samsung's new generation PDP panels deliver stunning Full HD motion clarity when viewing fast action sports, movies, and games.
N This function is not available in PC, Game or Media Play mode.
Film Mode
You can optimize the picture mode for watching movies.
• Off: Turn the Film Mode function off.
• Auto1: Automatically adjusts the picture for the best quality when watching a film.
• Auto2: Automatically optimizes the video text when watching a film.
• Cinema Smooth: Offers the ultimate cinema experience.
N Film mode is supported in TV, Video, Component(480i / 1080i) and HDMI(1080i).
Real 100Hz Demo → Off / On
You can get a clear distinction between Real 100Hz and 50Hz, especially when watching fast moving scenes. Therefore, when
seeing slow moving scenes, you will not be able to distinguish between Real 100Hz and 50Hz. Demo 100Hz works only with 50Hz
signal. Real 100Hz demo mode is provided for shop demonstration with special pictures.
Blue Only Mode → Off / On
This function is for AV device measurement experts. This function displays the blue signal only by removing the red and green
signals from the video signal so as to provide a Blue Filter effect that is used to adjust the Colour and Tint of video equipment such
as DVD players, Home Theaters, etc.
N Blue Only Mode is available when the picture mode is set to Movie or Standard.
Screen Burn Protection
To reduce the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with screen burn prevention technology. This technology enables you
to set picture movement up/down (Vertical) and side to side (Horizontal). The Time setting allows you to program the time between
movement of the picture in minutes.
• Pixel Shift: Using this function, you can minutely move pixels on the PDP in horizontal or vertical direction to minimize after
image on the screen.
N Optimum condition for pixel shift
Item TV/Ext./AV/Component/HDMI/PC
Horizontal 0~2 2
Vertical 0~4 4
Time (minute) 1~4 min 2 min
N The Pixel Shift value may differ depending on the monitor size (inches) and mode.
N This function is not available in the Screen Fit mode.
• Scrolling: This function helps remove after images on the screen by moving all the pixels on the PDP according to a pattern.
Use this function when there are remaining after images or symbols on the screen especially when you displayed a still image
on the screen for a long time.
• Side Grey: When you watch TV with the screen ratio of 4:3, the screen is prevented from any damage by adjusting the white
balance on both extreme left and right sides.
- Light: When you set the screen ratio to 4:3, it brightens the left and right sides.
- Dark: When you set the screen ratio to 4:3, it darkens the left and right sides.
Continued...
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 17 2009-10-21 �� 8:57:59English - 18
Setting up the TV with your PC
N Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode.
❑ Auto Adjustment
Auto Adjustment allows the PC screen of set to self-adjust to the incoming PC video
signal. The values of fine, coarse and position are adjusted automatically.
N This function does not work in DVI-HDMI mode.
T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu.
You can also set the auto adjustment by selecting Tools → Auto Adjustment.
❑ Screen
The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise. If the noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone,
then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Fine-tune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture
so that it is aligned on the center of screen.
Coarse
Adjusts the frequency when vertical noise appears on the screen.
Fine
Adjusts the screen to be clearer.
PC Position
Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjusting the Vertical-Position.
Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the Horizontal-Position.
Image Reset
You can replace all image settings with the factory default values.
❑ Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel
Resets all picture settings to the default values.
N Select a picture mode to be reset. The reset is performed for each picture mode.
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Auto Adjustment ►
Screen
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture Picture
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset ►
Picture
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 18 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:00English - 19
PC Display
❑ Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)
The Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. The actual
screens on your PC will probably be different, depending upon your particular version
of Windows and your particular video card. However, even if your actual screens
look different, the same basic set-up information will apply in almost all cases. (If not,
contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.)
1. First, click on ‘Control Panel’ on the Windows start menu.
2. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Appearance and Themes’ and a
display dialog-box will appear.
3. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Display’ and a display dialog-box
will appear.
4. Navigate to the ‘Settings’ tab on the display dialog-box.
The correct size setting (resolution)
Optimum: 1920 X 1080 pixels
If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct
value is ‘60’ or ‘60 Hz’. Otherwise, just click ‘OK’ and exit the dialog box.
❑ Display Modes
Both screen position and size will vary depending on the type of PC monitor and its resolution.
The resolutions in the table are recommended.
N When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2(DVI) jack.
N The interlace mode is not supported.
N The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected.
N Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG is not supported.
N Too long or low quality VGA cable can cause picture noise at high resolution modes (1920x1080).
D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input
Mode Resolution Horizontal Frequency (kHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H/V)
IBM
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / -
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / +
MAC
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / -
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / -
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / +
VESA CVT
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / +
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / +
1280 x 720
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / +
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / +
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / +
VESA DMT
640 x 480
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / -
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / -
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / -
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / +
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / +
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / +
1024 x 768
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / -
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / -
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / +
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 800
49.702 59.810 83.500 - / +
62.795 74.934 106.500 - / +
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 1024
63.981 60.020 108.000 + / +
79.976 75.025 135.000 + / +
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / +
1440 x 900
55.935 59.887 106.500 - / +
70.635 74.984 136.750 - / +
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / +
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / +
VESA GTF
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / +
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / -
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 19 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:00English - 20
Changing the Sound Setting
❑ Mode
You can select the type of special sound effect to be used when watching a given
broadcast.
Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom
T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu.
You can also configure the sound mode by selecting Tools → Sound Mode.
❑ Equalizer
The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preferences.
• Mode: You can select a sound mode to suit your personal preferences.
• Balance: Controls the balance between the right and left speakers.
• 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the level of different bandwidth frequencies
• Reset: Resets the equalizer settings to the default values.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On
SRS TruSurround HD is the combined technology of TruSurround and FOCUS, TruBass.
SRS TruSurround HD enables you to enjoy a virtual 5.1 Surround Sound effect over the TV's two speakers. This function provides
not only rich deep bass also improves high frequency resolution.
T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu.
You can also set the SRS TruSurround HD by selecting Tools → SRS TS HD.
TruSurround HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
TruSurround HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
N If the sound is abnormal while TV is playing music, please adjust the equalizer and SRS TruSurround HD (Off/On).
❑ Audio Language (Digital channel only)
You can change the default value for audio languages. Displays the language information for the incoming stream.
N You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast.
❑ Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (Digital channel only)
When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed
difference between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the TV Speaker function.
N You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
❑ Audio Description (Digital channel only)
This is an auxiliary audio function that provides an additional audio track for visually challenged persons. This function handles the
Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description), when it is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. Users can turn the
Audio Description On or Off and control the volume.
O You can select these options simply by pressing the AD button on the remote
control.
Audio Description → Off / On
Turn the audio description function on or off.
Volume
Adjusts the audio description volume.
N Volume is active when Audio Description is set to On.
Sound Control
Mode : Custom ►
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround HD : Off
Audio Language : ----
Audio Format : ----
Audio Description
Auto Volume : Off
Speaker Select : TV Speaker
Sound
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 20 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:00English - 21
❑ Auto Volume → Off / On
Each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is
changed. This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the sound output when the
modulation signal is high or by raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low.
❑ Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker
If you want to hear the sound through separate speakers, cancel the internal amplifier.
N The – +, M MUTE buttons do not operate when the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker.
N If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select menu, the sound settings will be limited.
TV's Internal Speakers Audio Out (Optical, L / R Out) to Sound System
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI
TV Speaker Speaker Output Sound Output
External Speaker Mute Sound Output
Video No Signal Mute Mute
❑ Sound Select
When the PIP feature is activated, you can listen to the sound of the sub (PIP) picture.
• Main: Listen to the sound of the main picture.
• Sub: Listen to the sound of the sub picture.
T Press the TOOLS button to to display Tools menu. You can also set the sound
of the sub picture by selecting Tools → PIP → Sound Select.
N You can select this option when PIP is set to On.
❑ Sound Reset
Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel: You can restore the Sound settings to the
factory defaults.
Selecting the Sound Mode
When you set to Dual l ll, the current sound mode is displayed on the screen.
Type of broadcast On-screen indication
NICAM
Stereo
Regular broadcast
(Standard audio)
Mono (Normal use)
Regular + NICAM Mono NICAM
Mono
(Normal)
NICAM-Stereo
NICAM
Stereo
Mono
(Normal)
NICAM Dual-I/II
NICAM
Dual-1
NICAM
Dual-2
Mono
(Normal)
A2
Stereo
Regular broadcast
(Standard audio)
Mono (Normal use)
Bilingual or DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II
Stereo Stereo
Mono
(Forced mono)
N If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching occurs, then switch to the mono.
N This function is only activated in stereo sound signal. It is deactivated in mono sound signal.
N This function is only available in TV mode.
T Press the TOOLS button to to display Tools menu.
You can also select the sound mode by selecting Tools → Dual l ll.
Speaker Select : TV Speaker
Sound Select : Main
Sound Reset ►
Sound
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 21 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 22
Function Description
Setting the Time
❑ Clock
Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the TV.
N The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button.
N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again.
Clock Mode
You can set up the current time manually or automatically.
• Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast.
• Manual: Set the current time to a manually specified time.
Clock Set
You can set the current time manually.
N Set up this item when you have set Clock Mode to Manual.
N You can set the Day, Month, Year, Hour, Minute directly by pressing the number
buttons on the remote control.
❑ Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min
/ 180 min
The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset time.
(30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes).
N The TV automatically switches to standby mode when the timer reaches 0.
N To cancel the Sleep Timer function, select Off.
T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu.
You can also set the sleep timer by selecting Tools → Sleep Timer.
❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
You can set the TV to turn on or off at a desired time.
• On Time: Sets the time for the TV to turn on.
• Off Time: Sets the time for the TV to turn off.
• Volume: Set the required volume level.
• Source : Selects TV or USB device.
N When you select the TV, you can set the Antenna and Channel.
- Antenna: Selects Air or Cable.
- Channel: Select the desired channel.
N When you select the USB, you can set the Contents.
- Contents: Selects the desired contents on the USB.
N If the folder containing a music file is not selected or there is no music file on the USB, Timer function does not operate correctly.
• Repeat : Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual.
N When Manual is selected, press the ► button to select the desired day of the week. Press the ENTERE button over the
desired day and the c mark will appear.
N The whole folder on the USB are supports English 64 character.
N You must set the clock first.
N You can set the hour, minute and programme by pressing the number buttons on the remote control.
N Auto Power Off
When you set the timer On, the television will eventually turn off, if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was turned on
by the timer. This function is only available in timer On mode and prevents overheating, which may occur if a TV is on for too long
time.
Time
Clock : -- : -- ►
Sleep Timer : Off
Timer 1 : Inactivated
Timer 2 : Inactivated
Timer 3 : Inactivated
U Move E Enter R Return
Setup
Plug & Play
Menu Language : English
Time ►
Broadcast
Security
Network
General
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 22 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 23
Configuring the Setup Menu
❑ Menu Language
You can set the menu language.
❑ Broadcast
Subtitle
You can activate and deactivate the subtitles. Use this menu to set the Subtitle Mode.
Normal under the menu is the basic subtitle and Hard of hearing is the subtitle for a
hearing-impaired person.
• Subtitle → Off / On: Switches subtitles off or on.
• Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing: Sets the subtitle mode.
• Subtitle Language: Set the subtitle language.
N If the programme you are watching does not support the Hard of hearing function,
Normal automatically activates even though Hard of hearing mode is selected.
N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the
broadcast.
O You can select these options simply by pressing the SUBT. button on the remote
control.
Digital Text → Disable / Enable
If the programme is broadcast with digital text, this feature is enabled.
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
An International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the
MPEG system which includes
data-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video files as well as multimedia data.
MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV
(Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-education,
tele-conferencing, digital libraries and network games.
Teletext Language
You can set the Teletext language by selecting the language type.
N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast.
Preference
• Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language /
Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language
Using this feature, users can select one of the languages. The language selected here is the default when the user selects a
channel.
If you change the language setting, the Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language of the Language menu
are automatically changed to the selected language.
The Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language of the Language menu show a list of languages supported
by the current channel and the selection is highlighted. If you change this language setting, the new selection is only valid for the
current channel. The changed setting does not change the setting of the Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language,
or the Primary Teletext Language of the Preference menu.
Common Interface
• Installing the CI(CI+) Card
1. Purchase the CI(CI+) CAM module by visiting your nearest dealer or by phone.
2. Insert the CI(CI+) CARD into the CAM in the direction of the arrow until it fits.
3. Insert the CAM with the CI(CI+) CARD installed into the common interface slot.
N Insert the CAM in the direction of the arrow, right up to the end so that it is
parallel with the slot.
4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel.
• CI(CI+) Menu
This enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu.
Select the CI(CI+) Menu based on the menu PC Card.
• Application Info.
This contains information on CAM inserted in the CI(CI+) slot and displays it.
The Application Info inserting is about the CI(CI+) CARD. You can install the CAM anytime whether the TV is ON or OFF.
N 'CI(CI+) CARD' is not supported in some countries, regions, broadcasting stations check with your authorized dealer.
Continued...
Setup
Plug & Play
Menu Language : English ►
Time
Broadcast
Security
Network
General
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 23 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 24
❑ Security
N Some models require selecting the set PIN number when operating Plug & Play.
Child Lock → Off / On
This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programmes by muting out video
and audio.
N Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
N The default PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’. You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu.
N You can lock some channels in Channel List. (refer to page 14)
N Child Lock is available only in TV mode.
Parental Lock
This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programmes by a 4-digit PIN
(Personal Identification Number) code that is defined by the user.
N The Parental Rating item differs depending on the country.
N Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
N The default PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’. You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu.
N When the parental ratings are set, the “\” symbol is displayed.
N Allow All / Block All: Press to unlock or lock all TV ratings.
Change PIN
You can change your personal ID number that is required to set up the TV.
N Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number
(The default PIN number : ‘0-0-0-0’).
N If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the PIN to ‘0-0-0-0’:
POWER (Off), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (On).
❑ General
Game Mode → Off / On
When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation
TM
or Xbox
TM
, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by
selecting the game menu.
• When the Game Mode is On
- Picture Mode is automatically changed to Standard and users cannot change the mode.
- Sound Mode is automatically changed to Custom and users cannot change the mode. Adjust the sound using the equalizer.
- The Reset in the Sound menu is activated. Reset function initializes the Equalizer settings to the factory default setting.
N Game Mode is not available in regular TV mode or Game Mode set to Off.
N If the picture is poor when external device is connected to TV, check if Game Mode is On.
N If you display the TV menu in Game mode, the screen shakes slightly.
N The mark appears on the screen which means that Game Mode is on with the selected source.
N This function supports only game function.
N Game mode is not available in PC mode.
BD Wise → Off / On
Wise is a function that enables you automatically to set the optimum condition all connected Samsung devices that support BD
Wise.
N This function is active only when an external device is connected to the TV via HDMI.
N When the BD Wise set to On, picture mode is automatically changed under the conditions
Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off
This feature adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. When watching TV at night, set the
Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption.
If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off and you can only hear the sound. Press any button to get out of Picture Off.
N In the Tools menu, Picture Off function is not supported.
T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu.
You can also set the Energy Saving option by selecting Tools → Energy Saving.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 24 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 25
Menu Transparency
You can set the transparency of the on-screen menu.
• Bright: Sets the on-screen menu to normal.
• Dark: changes the on-screen menu to opaque.
Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High
The TV power on / off melody sound can be adjusted.
N The Melody does not play
- When no sound is output from the TV because the M MUTE button has been pressed.
- When no sound is output from the TV because the – (Volume) button has been pressed.
- When the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function.
Light Effect (PS58B680/PS63B680 only)
You can turn on/off the blue LED on the front of TV according to the situation. Use it for saving power or when the LED dazzles your
eyes.
• Off: The blue LED is always off.
• In Standby: The blue LED lights while in Standby mode and it turns off when your TV is turned on.
• Watching TV: The blue LED lights when watching TV and it turns off when your TV is turned off.
• Always: The blue LED always lights.
N Set the Light Effect to Off to reduce the power consumption.
Viewing the Picture in Picture (PIP)
You can display a sub picture within the main picture of set programme me or video input. In
this way, you can watch the picture of set programme me or video input from any connected
equipment while watching the main picture.
N You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly unnatural when you use
the main screen to view a game or karaoke.
T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu. You can also configure PIP
related settings by selecting Tools → PIP.
❑ PIP → Off / On
You can activate or deactivate the PIP function.
Main picture Sub picture
Component
HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4
PC
TV
Size → / / /
You can select a size of the sub-picture.
N If main picture is in HDMI mode, Size is not available.
Position → / / /
You can select a position of the sub-picture.
N In Double ( , ) mode, Position cannot be selected.
Channel
You can select a channel of the sub-picture.
PIP
PIP : Off ►
Size :
Position :
Channel : ATV 1
E Enter R Return
General
Game Mode : Off
BD Wise : Off
Energy Saving : Off
Menu Transparency : Bright
Melody : Medium
PIP ►
U Move E Enter R Return
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 25 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 26
Supported Program
❑ Legal Notice
You can view legal notice and general disclaimer regarding third party contents and services.
General Disclaimer
This is full legal notice service regarding the Internet@TV.
N The General Disclaimer may differ depending on the country.
N You can move the previous or next page by pressing the ◄ or ► button.
❑ Product Guide
The Product Guide gives you information on the most important features of this TV.
N For more detailed information, select the desired item.
❑ Self Diagnosis
Picture Test
If you think you have a picture problem, perform the picture test. Check the colour pattern on the screen to see if the problem still
exists.
N Does the problem still exist with this test photo? appears on the screen.
If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern, select Yes.
If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No.
• Yes : There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance.
• No : There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists,
refer to the external device’s user manual.
Sound Test
If you think you have a sound problem, please perform the sound test.
You can check the sound by playing a built-in melody sound through the TV.
N Does the problem still exist with this sound test? appears on the screen.
If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all, select Yes.If you can hear sound from the
speakers, select No.
• Yes : There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance.
• No : There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer
to the external device’s user manual.
N If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV speaker
in the Sound menu.
N The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing
the M MUTE button.
Signal Information (Digital channels only)
You can adjust your antenna to improve the reception of available digital channels.
N If the signal strength meter indicates that the signal is weak, physically adjust your antenna to increase the signal strength.
Continue to adjust the antenna until you find the best position with the strongest signal.
Support / Input
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 26 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:01English - 27
Source List / Edit Name
❑ Source List
Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD players or Cable Box /
Satellite receivers (Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input source of
your choice.
TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB.
N You can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV. In the
Source List, connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the top. Inputs that
are not connected will be sorted to the bottom.
N Using the Colour buttons on the remote with the Source list
- Red (Refresh): Refreshes the connecting external devices.
- T TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Edit Name and Information menus.
O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view an external signal
source.
❑ Edit Name
You can name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV /
Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
N When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080@60Hz is connected to the HDMI IN 2(DVI) port, you should set the HDMI2/DVI
mode to PC in the Edit Name of the Input mode.
❑ Software Upgrade
To keep your product up-to-date with new Digital Television features then software upgrades are periodically broadcast as part of
the normal Television signal. It will automatically detect these signals and display the software upgrade banner. You are given the
option to install the upgrade.
By USB
Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade into TV. Please be careful to not disconnect the power or remove the USB drive
while upgrades are being applied. The TV will turn off and turn on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. Please
check the firmware version after the upgrades are complete. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made
will return to their default (factory) settings.
By Channel
Upgrades the software using the broadcasting signal.
N If the function is selected during the software transmission period, this function
searches for available software and downloads the software.
N The time required to download the software is determined by the signal status.
Standby Mode Upgrade
To continue software upgrade with master power on, Select On by pressing the ▲ or
▼ button. 45 minutes after entering standby mode, a manual upgrade is automatically
conducted. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be on
slightly for the product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the
software upgrade is completed.
Alternative Software
Show the previous version that would be replaced.
N If software was changed, existing software is displayed.
N You can change current software to alternative software by Alternative Software.
❑ HD Connection Guide
The brief instruction on how to get the best performance from your new HDTV is displayed. We offer the connection method for HD
devices.
N You can move the previous or next page by pressing the ◄ or ► button.
❑ Contact Samsung
You can know the Samsung Call center, website and information for product.
TV Side Panel
USB Drive
Source List
Edit Name
Input
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 27 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:02English - 28
Network
Network Connection
Network Connection is for DLNA, Contents Library-Internet download, Internet@TV and Home Network Centre.
❑ Network Connection - Cable
LAN Connection for a DHCP Environment
The procedures to set up the network using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) are described below.
Since an IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS are automatically allocated when DHCP is selected, you do not have to enter
them manually.
1. Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the external modem with a LAN Cable.
2. Connect the LAN port on the wall and the external modem with a Modem Cable.
N The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer.
N If the IP address allocation by the DHCP server has failed, turn the external modem off, turn it on again after at least 10 seconds
and then try again.
N For the connections between the external modem and the Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual of the corresponding
product.
N You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router).
N You cannot use a manual-connection-type ADSL modem because it does not support DHCP. You have to use an automaticconnection-type ADSL modem.
TV Rear Panel
The Modem Port
on the Wall
2 Modem Cable
External Modem
(ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV)
1 LAN Cable
You can connect the LAN port and the TV directly depending on your network status.
TV Rear Panel
LAN Cable
The LAN Port
on the Wall
You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router).
TV Rear Panel
The Modem Port
on the Wall
External Modem
(ADSL/VDSL/
Cable TV)
IP Sharer
LAN Cable
Modem Cable
LAN Cable
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 28 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:04English - 29
LAN Connection for Static IP Environment
The procedures to set up the network using a static IP address are described below. You have to manually enter the IP address,
subnet mask, gateway, and DNS that are provided by your Internet Service Provider (ISP).
1. Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the LAN port on the wall using the LAN cable.
N The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer.
N If you are using a static IP address, your ISP will inform you of the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS.
You must enter these values to complete the network settings. If you do not know the values, ask your network administrator.
N For the information on how to configure and connect a Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual for the corresponding product.
N You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router).
N If you use an IP Sharer (IP Router) that supports DHCP, you can set up the device as either DHCP or static IP.
N For the procedures to use a static IP address, ask your Internet Service Provider.
❑ Network Connection - Wireless
You can connect to the network wirelessly through a wireless IP sharer.
1. Connect the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ into the USB1(HDD) or USB2 terminal of the TV.
N You must use the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to use a wireless network.
N Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately. The WIS09ABGN Wireless LAN adapter is offered by select retailers,
Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts.com.
N To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer.
N If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network.
N Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter supports IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. When you play DLNA
video over IEEE 802.11B/G connection, the video may not be played smoothly.
N If the wireless IP sharer allows you to turn the Ping connection function on/off, turn it on.
N Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently
being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communications may fail.
Continued...
TV Rear Panel
1 LAN Cable
The LAN Port
on the Wall
TV Rear Panel
LAN Cable
IP Sharer
LAN Cable
The LAN Port
on the Wall
You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router).
TV Side Panel
Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter
LAN Cable
Wireless IP sharer
The LAN Port
on the Wall
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 29 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:06English - 30
N If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below, it will not work with the TV.
- When applying the security key for the AP (wireless IP sharer), only the following is supported.
1) Authentication Mode : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES
- When applying the security key for the Ad-hoc mode, only the following is supported.
1) Authentication Mode : SHARED, WPANONE
2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES
N If your AP supports WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or PIN
(Personal Indentification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode.
N If the device isn’t certified, it may not connect to the TV via the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’.
Network Setup
❑ Network Type
Select Cable or Wireless as the method to connect to the network.
N The menu is activated only if the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ is connected.
• Cable: Connect to network using a cable.
• Wireless: Connect to network wirelessly.
❑ Network Setup
Cable Network Setup (when Network Type is set to Cable)
N Please check if the LAN cable is connected.
• Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual
• Network Test: You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network.
N When unable to connect to a wired network
If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time
and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet
as the MAC address differs from that of the device (PC).
In this case, ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC (such as your TV)
to the Internet. If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password to connect to the Internet (network), your TV may not
be able to connect to the Internet. In this case, you have to enter your ID or password when connecting to the Internet using an
Internet Sharer (Router).
The internet connection may failure to a firewall problem. In this case, contact your Internet service provider. If you cannot
connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider, please contact a Samsung
Electronics.
Cable Network Setup-Auto
If you connect the LAN cable and it supports DHCP, the Internet Protocol (IP) Settings are automatically configured.
1. Set Network Type to Cable.
2. Select Cable Network Setup.
3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto.
N The Internet Protocol is set automatically.
4. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity.
Cable Network Setup-Manual
To connect the TV to the LAN using a static IP address, you must set up the Internet Protocol (IP).
N Please check if the LAN cable is connected. (See page 28)
1. Set Network Type to Cable.
2. Select Cable Network Setup.
3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual.
4. Set up IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS Server.
N Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually.
5. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity.
Setup
Broadcast
Security
Network ►
General
Continued...
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 30 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:06English - 31
Wireless Network Setup (when Network Type is set to Wireless)
N The menu is activated only if the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter is connected. (See page 29)
- Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual
- Network Test: You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network.
N When unable to connect to an AP
Your TV may fail to locate an AP that is configured as a private SSID type. In this case, please change the AP settings and try
again. If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the
first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to connect to the
Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device (PC).
In this case, ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC (such as your TV)
to the Internet. If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider,
please contact a Samsung Electronics.
• Select a network
- Access Point: You can select the IP sharer to use when using a wireless network.
N If a wireless network is not in the Select a network list, press the Red button.
N When the connection is made, you will be returned to the screen automatically.
N If you have selected an Access Point with a security authentication:
The Security Key input screen appears. Enter the security key and press the Blue
button on the remote control.
N If security encryption type is WEP, 0~9, A~F will be available when you input
security key.
Button Operations
▲/▼/◄/► Moves the selection up/down/left/right.
ENTER Enters (Inputs) the selected character.
Red button Switch between Upper- and Lower-Case Letters
Green button You can delete an already entered character.
Blue button Press this button to finish entering the security key.
❑ Connecting WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
If Security Key is already set: In access point list, select WPS.
N You can select PBC, PIN, Security Key.
• Connecting by using PBC: Select a PBC (Push Button Configuration). Press the
PBC button on the AP (access point) within 2minutes, and wait for connection.
• Connecting by using PIN: Select a PIN (Personal Identification Number).
N The message showing the PIN Code is displayed. Input the PIN Code at AP
device within 2minutes. Select OK and wait for connection.
N Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work
N When the connection is not established although tried again, reset the access
point. Please refer to a manual of each access point.
• Connecting by using Security Key: When selecting Security Key, the input
window is displayed. Input the security key and press Blue button.
N Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work.
Wireless Network Setup
Security Key
n Move Number EEnter R Return
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Number
Lowercase
Delete
Done
* *
Wireless Network Setup
Select a network
n Move EEnter R Return
Search
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Security Key
3/9
Press the PBC button on the access point.
Access Point Name : AP_3
Cancel
Press OK After input TV’s Pincode in the access
point’s setup.
Access Point Name : AP_3
PIN Code : 12345678
OK Cancel
Wireless Network Setup
Security Key
n Move Number EEnter R Return
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Number
Lowercase
Delete
Done
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 31 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:08English - 32
If Security Key is not set: When the security setting of AP that supports WPS
is NONE, you can select PBC, PIN, None Security. None Security is capable of
connecting to AP directly without using WPS function.
N Process of PBC, PIN is same as above. Refer to if Security Key is already set.
N Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work.
Ad-hoc: You can connect to a mobile device without an access point through
the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ by using a peer to peer network.
• How to connect to new Ad-hoc
1. Choose Select a network, then a device list is displayed.
2. While in the device list, press the Blue button on the remote or select Ad-hoc.
N The message The existing network system may have limited functionality. Do you want to change the network
connection? is displayed.
3. Input the generated Network Name(SSID) and Security Key into the device you want to connect.
• How to connect an existing Ad-hoc device
1. Choose Select a network, the device list is displayed.
2. Select the device you want in the Device list.
3. If security key was applied, input the security key again.
N If network doesn’t operate normally, please check the Network Name(SSID) and Security Key again.
If the Security Key is incorrect, it may be the reason for the malfunction.
Wireless Network Setup - Auto
If you want to connect AP, AP should support DHCP.
Only devices which support Ad-hoc mode can be connected without DHCP.
1. Set Network Type to Wireless.
2. Select Wireless Network Setup.
3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto.
N The Internet Protocol is set automatically.
4. Select a network through Select a network.
5. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity.
Wireless Network Setup - Manual
To connect the network wirelessly using a static IP address, you must set up the Internet Protocol (IP). (See page 29)
N For more detailed information of static IP address, refer to the user manual of your wireless IP sharer.
1. Set Network Type to Wireless.
2. Select Wireless Network Setup.
3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual.
4. Set up IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS Server.
N Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually.
5. Select a network through Select a network.
6. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity.
* *
Wireless Network Setup
Select a network
n Move EEnter R Return
Search
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Security Key
3/9
The existing network system may have limited
functionality. Do you want to change the network
connection?
Yes No
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 32 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:08English - 33
Connecting a USB Device
1. Press the POWER button to turn the TV on.
2. Connect a USB device containing photo, music and movie files to the USB jack on the side
of the TV.
N USB 1(HDD) jack is also used as the HDD jack. HDD (Hard disk drive) is device which
stores digitally encoded data.
N Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC is a Mass
Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash
Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported.)
N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported.
N The file system only supports FAT16/32 (The NTFS file system is not supported).
N Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated port, USB1 (HDD) port. However, if the connected device requires high power, the USB1
(HDD) may fail to support the device.)
N Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV.
N Please connect directly to the USB port of your TV. If you are using a separate cable connection, there may be a USB compatibility
problem.
N Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not
responsible for any data file damage or data loss.
N Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading.
N MSC supports MP3 and JPEG files, while a PTP device supports JPEG files only.
N The sequential JPEG format is supported.
N The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen.
N The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels.
N For unsupported or corrupted files, the Not Supported File Format message is displayed.
N If the number of photo files exceeds 4000 (or the number of music files exceeds 3000), any files exceeding the 4000 limit may not
be displayed in the Photo List (or Music List).
N MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played.
N DRM(Digital Rights Management) prevents illegal uses of digital media for copyright protection.
N When moving to a photo, loading may take a few seconds.
❑ Using the Remote Control Button in Media Play Menu
Button Operations
▲/▼/◄/► Move the cursor and select an item.
ENTERE
Select the currently selected item.
Play or pause the files while playing the Slide Sow, Music, or Movie files.
Play or pause the Slide Show, Music, or Movie file.
RETURN Return to the previous menu.
TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus.
Stop the current Slide Show, Music or Movie file.
Jump to previous group/Jump to next group.
INFO Show file information.
MEDIA.P Enter or Exit Media Play mode.
DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays
DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com
with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Media Play
TV Side Panel
USB Drive
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 33 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:08English - 34
Using the Media Play Function
This function enables you to view and listen to photo, music and movie files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device.
It might not work properly with unlicensed multimedia files.
❑ Entering the Media Play Menu
1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then
press the ENTERE button.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Media Play (USB & DLNA), then press the
ENTERE button.
O Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the Media Play
menu.
O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control repeatedly to select USB or
DLNA, then press the ENTERE button.
3. Press the Red button, then press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the corresponding
USB Memory Device (i.e. if connected through a hub). Press the ENTERE button.
N This function differs depending on the USB Memory Device/ DLNA device
connected to TV.
N The selected USB device name appears at the bottom left of the screen.
4. Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then
press the ENTERE button.
N To exit Media Play mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control.
N In this mode, you can enjoy movie clips contained on a Game, but you cannot
play the Game itself.
❑ Removing a USB Memory Device Safely
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
1. Press the TOOLS button in the Media Play file list screen, or while a Slide Show,
music, or movie file is being played.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Remove Safely, then press the ENTERE
button.
3. Remove the USB device from the TV.
❑ Screen Display
1. Current Sort Standard: This field shows the current standard for sorting files.
2. View Groups: The sorting group including the currently selected photo is highlighted.
3 Currently selected file: The currently selected file is highlighted.
4. Item Selection Information: Shows the number of photos that are selected by pressing the Yellow button.
5. Current Device: Shows the currently selected device name.
N Red (Device) button: Selects a connected device.
6. Help Items
• Green (Favourites Setting) button: Changes the Favourites Setting for the selected file. Press this button repeatedly until the
desired value appears.
• Yellow (Select) button: Selects file from the file list. Selected files are marked with a symbol c. Press the yellow button again
to cancel a file selection.
• TOOLS (Tools) button: Displays the option menus. (The Tools menu changes according to the current status.)
• R RETURN (Return) button: Return to previous menu.
Folder Preference Basic View Timeline Colour
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349.
JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
../ folder name/
Photo
USB Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
Movie
USB Device RReturn
Preference Basic View Timeline Color Folder
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
3
1
2
1File(s) Selected
4
5 6
Photo
USB Device Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return
c
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 34 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:12English - 35
Sorting the Photo / Music / Movie List
Basic View
Shows the folders on the USB memory device. If you select a folder and press the
ENTERE button, corresponding files (Photo / Music / Movie) contained in the
selected
folder are displayed.
N When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot set Favourites files.
Folder
Sorts the files by folder. If there are many folders in USB, the photos files are shown
in order in each folder. The file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are
shown in alphabetical order by name.
Preference → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
Sorts the files by preference (Favourites).
N Changing the Favourites Settings
Select the desired photo in the file list, then press the Green button repeatedly
until the desired setting appears.
N The stars are for grouping purposes only. For example, the 3 star setting does
not have any priority over the one star setting.
Timeline (Photo / Movie)
Sorts and displays the music or movie titles in symbol/number/alphabet/special
order.
Title (Music / Movie)
Sorts the music titles in symbol/number/alphabet/special order, and shows the
music file.
❑ Photo
Colour → Red / Yellow / Green / Blue / Magenta / Black / Gray / Unclassified
Sorts photos by colour. You can change the photo colour information.
N You should set the Use Colour View to on in the Setup menu before sorting photos by colour.
❑ Music
Artist
Sorts the music file by artist in symbol/number/alphabet/special order.
Mood → Energetic / Rhythmical / Sad / Exciting / Calm / Unclassified
Sorts music files by the mood. You can change the music mood information.
Genre
Sorts music files by the genre.
Folder Preference Basic View Title Artist
1
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
usermanual Heaven
NPKI
▶
1
▶
▶
▶
▶
../ folder name/
Music
USB Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder
▶
▶
Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
▶
▶ ◀
MOVIE_005
.avi
Preference Basic View Timeline Color Folder
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
Photo
USB Device Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 35 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:17English - 36
Photo / Music / Movie List Option Menu
1. Press the MEDIA.P button.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Photo, Music or Movie then press the ENTERE
button.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired file.
N Selecting Multiple Files
- Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired file. Then press the Yellow
button.
- Repeat the above operation to select multiple files.
- The mark c appears to the selected file.
4. Press the TOOLS button.
N The option menu changes according to the current status.
Play Current Group
Using this menu, you can play a SlideShow using only the photo files in the currently
selected sorting group.
Deselect All (When at least one file is selected)
You can deselect all files.
N The c mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden.
Information
The photo/ music/ movie file information is displayed. You can view the information
of files during a SlideShow using the same procedures.
O Press the INFO button to viewing the information.
Remove Safely
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
❑ Photo
Slide Show
Using this menu, you can play a SlideShow using the photo files on the USB
memory device.
Change Group (When the Sort key is the Colour)
You can change a selected photo file’s (or group of files) colour information in order to move it from one colour group to another.
N This does not change the actual colour of the photo.
N The group information of the current file is updated and the photos are moved to the new colour group.
N To change the information of multiple files, select the files you want by pressing the Yellow button.
❑ Music
Change Group (When the Sort key is Mood)
You can change the mood information of music files. The group information of the current file is updated and the file is moved to
the new group. To change the information of multiple files, select files by pressing the Yellow button.
Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Folder Preference Basic View Title Artist
1
1
▶
▶
../ folder name/
Sky
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
NPKI
usermanual Heaven
▶
NPKI
Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
Music
USB Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder
MOVIE_004
MOVIE_003 .avi
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_005
.avi
MOVIE_007
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_006
.avi
▶
▶
Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
Basic View Timeline Colour Folder Preference
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Change Group
Information
Remove Safely
Photo
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 36 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:21English - 37
Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play Option Menu
1. During a slide show (or when viewing a photo) or playing a music or movie, press
the TOOLS button to set the option.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option, then press the ENTERE
button.
Picture Setting / Sound Setting
You can select the picture and sound settings.
Information
The file information is displayed.
Remove Safely
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
❑ Slide Show Option Menu
Stop Slide Show / Start Slide Show
You can start or stop a SlideShow.
Slide Show Speed → Slow / Normal / Fast
You can select the slide show speed.
N This function is available only during a slide show.
N You can also change the speed of the Slide Show by pressing the π (REW) or
μ (FF) button during the Slide Show.
Slide Show Effect
You can select the screen transition effect used in the slideshow.
• None / Fade1 / Fade2 / Blind / Spiral / Checker / Linear / Stairs / Wipe /
Random
N This function is available only during a slide show.
Rotate
You can rotate photos saved on a USB memory device.
N Whenever you press the ◄ button, it rotates by 270˚, 180˚, 90˚, and 0˚.
N Whenever you press the ► button, it rotates by 90˚, 180˚, 270˚, and 0˚.
N The rotated file is not saved.
Zoom
You can magnify photos saved on a USB memory device. (x1 → x2 → x4)
N To move the enlarged photo image, press the ENTERE button, then press the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons. Note that when the
enlarged picture is smaller than the original screen size, the location change function doesn’t work.
N The enlarged file is not saved.
Background Music
You can select background music when watching a Slide Show.
N To use this feature, there must be music and photo files stored on the USB device.
N Loading music files is needed to change BGM mode. Play music files in music category to load.
❑ Music Play Option Menu
Repeat Mode → On / Off
You can play music files repeatedly.
❑ Movie Play Option Menu
Picture Size → Fit / Original
Play video at the screen size or original size.
Caption Setting
You can set the captions for the movie.
Tools
Tools
Stop Slide Show
Slide Show Speed : Normal
Slide Show Effect : Fade1
Rotate
Zoom
Background Music
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
U Move E Enter eExit
Tools
Repeat Mode ◄ On ►
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Remove Safely
U Move Adjust eExit
Tools
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Picture Size : Fit
Caption Setting
Information
Remove Safely
U Move Enter eExit
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 37 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:21English - 38
Viewing a Photo or Slide Show
❑ Viewing a Slide Show
N All files in the File List Section will be used for the Slide Show.
N During the slide show, files are displayed in order from the currently shown file.
N The Slide Show progresses in the order sorted in the File List Section.
N Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the Background
Music is set to On.
N While a photo list is displayed, press the ∂(Play)/ENTERE button on the
remote control to start slide show.
N SlideShow Control Buttons
ENTERE Play/Pause the Slide Show.
Play the Slide Show.
Pause the Slide Show.
Exit Slide Show and return to the photo list.
/ Change the SlideShow playing speed.
T TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo menus.
❑ Playing current group
1. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard.
3. Press the ▼ button to move to the Group List Section.
4. Select a group using the ◄ and ► buttons.
5. Press the ∂ (Play) button. A slideshow begins with the files of the selected
group.
Alternatively
1. Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the photos contained in
the desired group.
N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF) button.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button.
N Only the photos in the sorting group including the selected files will be used for the Slide Show.
❑ To perform a Slide Show with only the selected files
1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the File List Section.
3. Press the Yellow button.
4. Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos.
N The c mark appears to the left of the selected photo.
N If you select one file, the Slide Show will not be performed.
N To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All.
5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
N The selected files will be used for the Slide Show.
Alternatively
1. In the File List Section, press the Yellow buttons to select the desired photos.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Slide Show, then press the ENTERE button.
N The selected files will be used for the Slide Show.
▶
▶
Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_005
.avi
Basic View Timeline Colour Folder Preference
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Change Group
Information
Remove Safely
Photo
r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4
USB EPause lr Previous/Next T Tools R Return
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 38 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:25English - 39
Playing Music
❑ Playing a music file
1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a music file to be played.
3. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
N This menu only shows files with the MP3 file extension. Files with other
file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB
device.
N The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time.
N To adjust the music volume, press the volume button on the remote control.
To mute the sound, press the M MUTE button on the remote control.
N If the sound is odd when playing MP3 files, adjust the Equalizer and SRS TruSurround HD in the Sound menu. (An overmodulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.)
N The playing duration of a music file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if its playing time information is not found at the start of
the file.
N π (REW) or μ (FF) buttons do not function during play.
N Music Play Control Buttons
ENTERE Play/Pauses the music file. Exit play mode and return to the music list.
Play the music file
T TOOLS Run various functions from the Music menus.
Pause the music file
N Music function information icon
When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are repeated. Repeat Mode is On.
When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are played once. Repeat Mode is Off.
❑ Playing the music group
1. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard.
3. Press the ▼ or ENTERE button to move to the Group List Section.
4. Press the ∂ (Play) button. The files of the selected group will start playing.
Alternatively
1. Select a sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in the desired group.
N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF) button.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button.
N The music files in the sorting group including the selected file are played.
❑ Playing the selected music files
1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file.
3. Press the Yellow button.
4. Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files.
N The c appears to the left of the selected music file.
N To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All.
5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
N The selected files will be played.
r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55
r
1/3
When I Dream r
r
Geek In The Pink Heaven
USB EPause lr Previous/Next T Tools R Return
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 39 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:25English - 40
Playing a Movie File
❑ Playing a movie file
1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2. Pressing the ◄ or ► button to select a movie file to be played.
3. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
N The selected file is played.
N The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time.
N The playing duration of a movie file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if its
playing time information is not found at the start of the file.
N You can watch exciting gaming multimedia files, but the gaming function is
not supported.
N Supported caption formats
Name File Extension Programming Language
MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt string-based
SubViewer .sub string-based
Micro DVD .sub or .txt string-based
N Supported Video Formats
File extension Container Video Decoder Audio codec Resolution
*.avi AVI
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.mkv MKV
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.asf ASF
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080
*.mp4 MP4 (SMP4)
H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
XVID 1920x1080
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
*.vro
VRO
VOB
MPEG2 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG1 1920x1080
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG2 1920x1080
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
H.264 1920x1080
VC1 1920x1080
N Video Play Control Buttons
ENTERE Play/Pauses the movie file
Play the movie file
Pause the movie file
Exit play mode and return to the movie list.
T TOOLS Run various functions from the movie menus.
◄/► Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file.
▲/▼ Move to the first/last of the file.
▶
r
r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3
MOVIE_000.avi
USB EPause lr Jump T Tools R Return
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 40 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:25English - 41
❑ Playing the movie group
1. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard.
3. Press the ▼ or ENTERE button to move to the Group List Section.
4. Press the ∂ (Play) button. Only the files of the selected group will start playing.
Alternatively
1. Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in the desired group.
N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF) button.
2. Press the TOOLS button.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button.
N The movie files in the sorting group including the selected file are played.
❑ Playing the selected movie files
1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file.
3. Press the Yellow button.
N The c mark appears to the left of the selected movie file.
N To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All.
4. Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files.
5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
N Only the selected file is played.
❑ Playing movie continuously (Resume Play)
If you exit the playing movie function, the movie can be played later from the point where it was stopped.
1. Select the movie file you want to play continuously by pressing the ◄ or ► button to select it from the File List Section.
2. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
3. Select Play Continuously (Resume Play) by pressing the Blue button.
N The Movie will begin to play from where it was stopped.
N If Cont. Movie Play Help function is set On in the Setup menu, a pop-up message will appear when you resume play a
movie file.
Using the Setup Menu
Setup displays the user settings of the Media Play menu.
1. Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the Media Play menu.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option.
4 . Press the ◄ or ► button to select the option.
N To exit Media Play mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control.
Use Color View → On / Off
Select to view the color information in the Photo menu.
N If this is set to ON, the loading time increases for collecting the color information.
Music Repeat Mode → On / Off
Select to repeatedly play music files.
Cont. movie play help → On / Off
Select to display the help pop-up message for continuous movie playback.
Get the DivX® VOD registration code
Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web
site and register the registration code with a personal account, you can download
VOD registration file. If you play the VOD registration using Media Play, the
registration is completed. For more information on DivX® VOD, visit www.DivX.com.
Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code
When DivX® VOD is not registered, the registration deactivation code is displayed. If you execute this function when DivX® VOD is
registered, the current DivX® VOD registration is deactivated.
Screen Saver Run Time → 10 min / 20 min / 1 hour
Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears.
Information
Select to viewing the information of the connected device.
Remove Safely
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
Media Play
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
SETUP
Photo Music Movie Setup
USB eExit
Device
Setup
Move Adjust Return
Use Color View ◄ Off ►
Music Repeat Mode On
Cont. movie play help On
Get the DivX® VOD registration code
Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code
Screen Saver Run Time 10 min
Information
Remove Safely
USB Device
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 41 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:26English - 42
Setting the DLNA Network
DLNA allows you to watch pictures, musics and videos saved on your PC or on your TV through a network connection in Media Play
mode. This removes the need to copy them to a USB storage device and then connect the device to your TV. To use DLNA, the TV must
be connected to the network and the DLNA application must be installed on your PC.
❑ Network Connection Diagram-Cable
❑ Network Connection Diagram-Wireless
1. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Setting the Network’.
N You are recommended to locate both TV and PC in same subnet. The first 3 parts of the subnet address of the TV and the PC
IP addresses should be the same and only the last part (the host address) should be changed. (e.g. IP Address: 123.456.789.**)
2. Connect the PC to which the Samsung PC Share Manager program will be installed and the external modem using a LAN cable.
N You can connect the TV to the PC directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router).
Installing the DLNA Application
To play content on the PC on the TV, you have to first install the application. To use the DLNA function smoothly, use the program
in the CD-ROM supplied with the TV or use the Samsung PC Share Manager program corresponding to the TV model that can be
downloaded from the Samsung web site.
TV
External Modem
(ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV)
LAN
PC
LAN
Media Play-DLNA
TV
LAN
PC
or
1
TV Side Panel
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 42 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:27English - 43
Using the DLNA Application
Programme Screen Display
1. Menus: The following application menus are
provided : File, Share, Server, and Help.
2. Click to share the selected PC server folder.
3. Click to cancel sharing.
4. Click to refresh the PC folder and files.
5. Click to synchronize the share status.
6. The folders and files of the PC to be shared
are listed.
7. Folders shared by the user are listed.
8. PC server name shown on the device list of
the Media Play.
System Requirements
1. Insert the Programme CD supplied with this TV into your PC.
2. 30MB of free hard disk space is needed for the programme installation.
N If you share files, up to 30MB of hard disk drive space is required for each 100 files.
N If you cancel file sharing, the hard disk drive space used for the thumbnail information is also freed.
Supported Formats
• Image: JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS container. For detailed supported video formats, refer to
the ‘Playing a Movie File’ instructions.
Install the application
► ►
►
1. Run the Setup.exe file on the Programme CD supplied with the product.
N Alternatively, you can download the file from www.samsung.com.
2. Install the SAMSUNG PC Share Manager as shown in the figures.
3. When the installation is complete, the PC Share Manager icon appears on your Desktop.
N Double-click the icon to run the programme.
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 43 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:28English - 44
❑ Share
Sharing a Folder
You can share a folder from your PC to the TV.
Cancelling a Shared Folder
You can cancel a shared folder on your PC. Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane and select Unshare Folder.
Applying the Current Settings
Perform this when synchronization is necessary due to a new shared folder or cancelling a shared folder. The Set Changed State
menu applies changes to shared folders to the data saved with the PC share programme.
Since applying changes to the internal data is a time-consuming process, this function enables users to apply changes to the data
only when required. Until the Set Changed State menu is selected, the changed state of the shared folder is not applied to the
server. Changes to the shared folders are not applied to your PC until you select the Set Changed State menu.
Setting the Access Permission
To enable the TV to find your PC, the TV must be set to Set Device Policy in the Access Permission Settings window. In addition,
the PC server and the TV must be on the same subnet.
• Method: Select the Share menu and select Set Device Policy. Rejected items are represented in gray. You can change the
access permissions by using the Allow Accept / Deny button. To delete an item, select the item and select Delete Item.
❑ Server
Server
You can run or stop using your PC as a server.
Run DLNA Digital Media Server when Windows Starts
You can determine whether to start the PC server automatically when Windows starts.
Change server name
You can rename the PC server
Using the DLNA Function
❑ Using the DLNA Menu
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) enables content saved on a DLNA server
(usually your PC) connected to your TV or over a network to be played. Media Play
enables playing content saved on a USB memory device connected to the TV, while
DLNA enables playing content saved on a DLNA server (your PC) connected to your
TV or over the network. The procedures to use the content are the same as those for
Media Play (USB & DLNA).
1. Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the DLNA menu.
2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then
press the ENTERE button.
N To exit DLNA mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control.
N DLNA does not support the following functions.
- The Background Music and Background Music Setting functions.
- Sorting files by preference in the Photo, Music, and Movie folders.
- The Change Group function.
- The Copy / Delete function.
- The Remove Safely function.
- The REW/FF (π/μ) key functions while a movie is playing.
- Playing Movie Continuously (Resume Play) function.
N The Skip function may not work with some container such as asf and mkv.
N The Divx DRM, Multi-audio, embedded caption does not supported.
N Samsung PC Share manager should be permitted by the firewall program on your PC.
N The Skip (◄/► keys) or Pause function may not work while a movie is playing for the DLNA of other manufacturers, depending
on the corresponding content information.
N The playing time may not be displayed while a movie is playing.
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
Movie
USB Device Return
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 44 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:28English - 45
About Anynet+
Connecting Anynet
+
Devices
Anynet
+
is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote.
The Anynet
+
system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung device has this
feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it.
❑ To connect to a TV
1. Connect the HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an
HDMI cable.
❑ To connect to Home Theater
1. Connect the HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an
HDMI cable.
2. Connect the HDMI IN jack of the home theater and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable.
N Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home
Theater.
N When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio. You will only hear sound from the Home
Theater’s Front Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD player or Cable/Satellite Box (ie Anynet Device 1 or 2) directly to the Amplifier or Home Theater,
not the TV.
N Connect only one Home Theater.
N You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI 1.3 cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions.
N Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the Standby or On status.
N Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type.
N Anynet+ supports up to 3 devices simultaneously.
Anynet+
Device 1
Anynet+
Device 2
Anynet+
Device 3
TV
HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable
TV
Anynet+ Device 1
Anynet+ Device 2 Anynet+ Device 3
HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Home Theatre
Optical Cable
Anynet+
Device 4
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Anynet+ Device 4
HDMI 1.3 Cable
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 45 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:29English - 46
Setting Up Anynet
+
❑ Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) Setup
T Press the TOOLS button to display Tools menu.
You can also display Anynet+ menu by selecting Tools → Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) → Off / On
To use the Anynet
+
Function, Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) must be set to On.
N When the Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related
operations are deactivated.
Auto Turn Off → No / Yes
Setting an Anynet
+
Device to turn Off Automatically when the TV is Turned Off
N The active source on the TV remote must be set to TV to use the Anynet+ function.
N If you set Auto Turn Off to Yes, connected external devices are also turned off
when the TV is turned off. If an external device is still recording, it may or may not
turn off.
Switching between Anynet
+
Devices
1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Device List, then press the ENTERE button.
N Anynet+ devices connected to the TV are listed. If you cannot find a device you
want, press the red button to scan for devices.
N Only when you set Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) to On in the Setup menu, the Device List
menu appears.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select to a particular device and press the ENTERE
button. It is switched to the selected device.
N Switching to the selected devices may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the operation during the switching operation.
N The time required to scan for devices is determined by the number of connected devices.
N If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to
switch to an Anynet
+
device by using the TOOLS button.
❑ Anynet
+
Menu
The Anynet
+
menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet
+
devices connected to the TV.
Anynet
+
Menu Description
View TV Anynet
+
mode changes to TV broadcast mode.
Device List Shows the Anynet+ device list.
(device_name) MENU Shows the connected device menus. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the disc menu of the
DVD recorder will appear.
(device_name) INFO Shows the play menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the play menu
of the DVD recorder will appear.
Recording: (*recorder) Starts recording immediately using the recorder. (This is only available for devices that support the
recording function.)
(*recorder) Reserve Recording Enables reserving a recording for the recorder. (This is only available for devices that support the
recording reservation function.)
Stop Recording: (*recorder) Stops recording.
Receiver Sound is played through the receiver.
Continued...
Application
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ►
Content Library
Internet@TV
Home Network Centre
U Move EEnter R Return
Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) : On ▶
Auto Turn Off : Yes
U Move EEnter R Return
View TV
Device List
Recording : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver : On
Setup
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 46 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:30English - 47
❑ TV Remote Control Buttons Available in Anynet+
Mode
Device Type Operating Status Available Buttons
Anynet
+
Device
After switching to the device, when the
menu of the corresponding device is
displayed on the screen.
Numeric buttons
▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE buttons
Colour buttons / EXIT button
After switching to the device, while
playing a file
(Backward search) / (Forward search) (Stop) /
(Play) / (Pause)
Device with
builtin Tuner
After switching to the device, when you
are watching a TV programme
P / button
Audio Device When Receiver is activated = / button
M MUTE button
N The Anynet
+
function only works when the active source on the TV remote control is set to TV.
N The button works only while in the recordable state.
N You cannot control Anynet
+
devices using the buttons on the TV. You can control Anynet
+
devices only using the TV remote control.
N The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. In this case, reselect the Anynet+ device.
N The Anynet
+
functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products.
N The , operations may differ depending on the device.
N If more than one recording device is connected, they are displayed as (*recorder) and if only one recording device is connected, it
will be represented as (*device_name).
Recording
You can make a recording of a TV programme using a Samsung recorder.
1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Recording(recorder): then press the ENTERE
button. Recording begins.
N When there is more than one recording device
When multiple recording devices are connected, the recording devices are listed.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a recording device and press the ENTERE
button. Recording begins.
N When the recording device is not displayed
Select Device List and press the red button to search devices.
N Pressing the button will record whatever you are currently watching. If you are watching video from another device, the video
from the device is recorded.
N Before recording, check whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the recording device. To properly connect an antenna to
a recording device, refer to the recording device’s users manual.
U Move EEnter R Return
View TV
Device List
Recording : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver : On
Setup
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 47 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:30English - 48
Listening through a Receiver
You can listen to sound through a receiver instead of the TV speaker.
1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Receiver. Press the ◄ or ► button to select On or Off.
N If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list.
N The receiver will work when you have properly connected the Optical IN jack of the
receiver to the Optical Out jack of the TV.
N When the receiver (home theater) is set to On, you can hear sound output from the
TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV(air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1
channel sound to the Home theater receiver. When the source is a digital component
such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver.
N When using the Media Play feature, sound may not output properly through the receiver.
N When listening through the receiver, there are restrictions for using the audio-related (MTS, Preferred language) menus.
N If there is a power interruption to the TV when the Receiver is set to On (by disconnecting the power cord or a power failure), the
Speaker Select may be set to External Speaker when you turn the TV on again. (see page 21)
Troubleshooting for Anynet
+
Symptom Solution
Anynet+ does not work. • Check if the device is an Anynet
+
device. The Anynet
+
system supports Anynet
+
devices only.
• Connect only one receiver (home theater).
• Check if the Anynet
+
device power cord is properly connected.
• Check the Anynet
+
device’s Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3 cable connections.
• Check whether Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu.
• Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode.
• Check whether it is Anynet
+
exclusive remote control.
• Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels, Plug & Play, etc.)
• When connecting or removing the HDMI 1.3 cable, please make sure to search devices again
or turn your TV off and on again.
• Check if the Anynet
+
Function of Anynet+ device is set on.
I want to start Anynet+. • Check if the Anynet
+
device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet
+
Setup menu.
• Press the TV button on the TV remote control to switch to TV. Then press the TOOLS button
to show the Anynet
+
menu and select a menu you want.
I want to exit Anynet+. • Select View TV in the Anynet
+
menu.
• Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet
+
devices. (Note that the channel button operates only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+ device
is not connected.)
The message Connecting to
Anynet+ device...
appears on the screen.
• You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view
mode.
• Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is complete.
The Anynet+ device does not
play.
• You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play is in progress.
The connected device is not
displayed.
• Check whether or not the device supports Anynet
+
functions.
• Check whether or not the HDMI 1.3 cable is properly connected.
• Check whether Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet
+
setup menu.
• Search Anynet
+
devices again.
• You can connect an Anynet
+
device using the HDMI 1.3 cable only. Some HDMI cables may
not support Anynet
+
functions.
• If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable or power
cord or a power failure, please repeat the device scan.
The TV programme cannot be
recorded.
• Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected.
The TV sound is not output
through the receiver.
• Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver.
U Move EEnter R Return
View TV
Device List
Recording : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver : On
Setup
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 48 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:30English - 49
Activating the Content Library
The Content Library enables you to view or play the built-in contents on the TV or stored
on your USB device.
1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application,
then press the ENTERE button.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Content Library, then press the ENTERE
button. The Content Library main menu is displayed.
O Press the CONTENT button on the remote control to display the
Content Library main menu.
3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Gallery, Cooking, Children, Wellness,
Others, Content Management), then press the ENTERE button.
N The selected item will be run.
❑ Using the Remote Control Button in Content Library Menu
Button Operations
▲/▼/◄/► Move the cursor and select an item.
ENTERE Select the currently selected item.
RETURN Return to the previous menu.
EXIT Stop the current function and return to the Content Library main menu.
Colour Button Button that provide functions are described on the corresponding page.
You can control the volume of the played content.
CONTENT Enter or Exit Content Library mode.
N If you press the Volume or MMUTE button, no OSD is displayed, but the function operates accordingly.
N To return to TV mode, press the P button on the remote control.
N CONTENTS LIBRARY CONTAINS TEXT, GRAPHICS, IMAGES, MULTIMEDIA, AND OTHER MATERIALS FOR
INFORMATIONAL AND PROMOTIONAL PURPOSES ONLY. MATERIALS IN CONTENTS LIBRARY HAS BEEN
MODIFIED AND KEEPS BEING REVISED AND UPDATED. THE MATERIALS IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY MAY NOT
BE SUITABLE FOR ALL AUDIENCES.
N INFORMATION IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” ALTHOUGH THE INFORMATION PROVIDED
TO YOU IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY IS OBTAINED OR COMPLIED FROM SOURCES WE BELIEVE TO BE
RELIABLE, SAMSUNG CANNOT AND DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS OR
COMPLETENESS OF ANY INFORMATION OR DATA MADE AVAILABLE TO YOU FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD LIABLE, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION
WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR THE USE OF, THE CONTENTS LIBRARY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Content Library
Application
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Content Library
Internet@TV
Home Network Centre
< >
Cooking Children
Gallery
Gallery
Content Library
Wellness Others
Return Exit
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 49 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:31English - 50
Using the Content Library
❑ Gallery
This function plays a Slide Show with high resolution images and background music and produces various atmospheres. Using the
Gallery function of the TV, you can change your home atmosphere.
N Press INFO button to see the credit and detail information in English for the imagery (currently, the credit supports English only).
N You can pause the slide show by pressing the ENTERE button during a slide show.
N The copyrights of the Gallery contents and all issues related to them are reserved by Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc.
❑ Cooking
You can view various recipes that you can then easily follow step by step. Enjoy these contents which give you great ideas for
meals.
N The recipes introduced in the Cooking contents on the Samsung TV are based on recipes published by Anness Publishing.
N The copyrights of the Cooking contents and all issues related to them are reserved by Practical Pictures.
❑ Children
This is educational and interactive content that children can watch repeatedly. Enjoy existing stories, songs and plays with the
Boowa and Kwala characters.
N The copyrights of the Children contents and issues related to them are reserved by UpToTen.
❑ Wellness
This is beneficial health management content that provides stretching and massage exercises that can be enjoyed by the whole
family.
❑ Content Management
My contents
The use of contents is the same as in using the TV memory contents. Also, you can delete and play the each contents.
USB
You can download the contents onto a USB memory device and play them on your TV. The contents on the external USB device
are played directly.
N Content Library only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport
device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported.)
N Playing a game using an external USB memory device will allow you to save your game (depending on the game). Take care as
removing the USB memory device while saving data to the USB memory device may cause the data to be lost.
N Downloading New Contents
New content other than the built-in contents will be provided via the Samsung.com website free of charge.
When you download the paid contents, you need UDN number to download contents. Check the UDN number before
downloading a new content item.
1. Visit the www.samsung.com website.
2. Select a content item in the Contents Download page.
3. Download the contents onto the USB memory device.
4. Go to Content Library main menu by pressing CONTENT button or choosing Content Library
(Menu → Application → Content Library)
5. Plug the USB memory into USB port on the side of the TV.
6. You can see the content sub item which you downloaded.
7. Select a content item and press the enter button.
8. You can play the selected content item.
Setup
• Screen Saver Run Time → 10 min. / 20 min. / 40 min. / 1 hour
Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears.
• Save UDN (Unique Device Number)
The 18-digit number on the screen is the product code.
You can save the UDN to your USB memory.
N An NTFS format USB storage device does not support saving UDN.We recommend using a FAT format USB storage device.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 50 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:31English - 51
You can use various internet services containing useful information and entertaining content.
If you have some problems while using a widget service, please contact to content provider. In the widget, press the green button and
get information of contact or refer to help website for widget provider information.
N English may be only supported in widget service depending on region.
N This function may not be supported depending on your country.
Getting Started with Internet@TV
Internet@TV provides an integrated Internet and television experience powered by the Yahoo!® Widget Engine. You can monitor
financial stocks, share photos with friends and family, and track news and weather all through the Internet@TV service on your
television.
N If Network condition is unstable, this function may not work. Then, TV would be turned off automatically. Otherwise turn off the TV
using power button.
N You may experience slow operation or hesitation when using this function due to network conditions.
When running Internet@TV for the first time, the basic settings will proceed automatically.
N The first step is to set up your network. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Network Setup’.
N After your network is operational, the Internet@TV software guides you through a step-by-step setup wizard.
Internet@TV
All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or ther
intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content
or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly
authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create
derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY IS WITH YOU. THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND
SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE DEVICE AND ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER
EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG
DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE
MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE, CONTENT OR SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF THE DEVICE, OR ANY
CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access may be disabled at any time, without notice, and
Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are
transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of
this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption, disabling, removal of or suspension of any
content or service made available through this device. Samsung may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any
case and without notice or liability. Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question
or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers.
1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then press the ENTERE button.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Internet@TV, then press the ENTERE button.
N INTERNET@TV starts.
O Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to display the
Internet@TV menu.
3. The General Disclaimer is displayed on the screen. Select I accept or I do not
accept.
N For more information on the General Disclaimer, refer to the ‘Legal Notice’.
4. The ‘welcome screen’ is the starting point of the Internet@TV guided setup.
N If you select Exit Setup, this step is resumed when you press the INTERNET@
button.
N Select Let’s get started!
5. Choosing your location allows TV Widgets to use localized content.
N Select your country from the list provided.
6. Accepting the Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine Privacy Policy is required to use
Internet@TV.
N Select OK, I Accept.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 51 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:31English - 52
7. Accepting the Yahoo!® TV Widget System Terms of Service is required to use Internet@TV.
N Select OK, I Accept.
8. Enter your name to setup your profile. Each profile has its own list of widgets.
You can create a profile for each person who uses Internet@TV.
N Enter your name and select Save this name.
N For more information, refer to page ‘Using the Profile Widget'.
9. Internet@TV tests the network connection.
N If the test fails, configure your network again.
N For more information, refer to page ‘Network Setup’.
10. The guided setup is complete. A tutorial on how to use Internet@TV is next.
N Select Continue to view the tutorial.
N Select Exit setup to start using Internet@TV now.
N To run the tutorial again, select Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial.
11. Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to display the Internet@TV user interface.
❑ Screen display
Dock mode
1 A welcome banner is shown with your profile name in the top right corner.
N This banner disappears after a short delay.
2 The banner highlights two remote control shortcuts.
N If you press the blue button (Viewport) on your remote control, the
display is toggled between ‘Viewport mode’ and ‘Overlay mode’. In
Viewport mode, the TV or video plays in a scaled-down area with
graphics outside. In overlay mode, the graphics are displayed on top
of the TV or video.
N If you press the yellow button (Edit Snippet) on your remote control, a
help window is displayed and the snippet with focus can be edited.
3 Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to begin.
N The horizontal list at the bottom of your TV screen is called ‘the dock’.
N The items in the list are called ‘snippets’.
N A snippet is a shortcut which launches a TV Widget.
N A TV Widget is an Internet application designed to run on your TV.
N Move between snippets by pressing the ◄ or ► buttons on the remote control.
N Focus is located in the left most region (highlighted in blue).
N The dock slides snippets under that focal point.
N Launch a TV Widget by pressing the ENTERE button on the remote control when its snippet is in focus.
N When you add snippets, they form a stack which you can navigate by pressing the ▲ or ▼ buttons.
N Two special TV Widgets appear in the dock: the Profile Widget and the Gallery Widget. These cannot be deleted.
N The dock will slide off screen after a timeout period.
Sidebar mode
1 Focus on a snippet and press the ENTERE button to launch the TV
Widget sidebar. The TV Widget logo and Home ( ) are at the top of the
sidebar.
2 Current menu is displayed under the TV Widget logo.
N To return to a previous screen, select it and press the ENTERE
button.
N You can also press the RETURN button on the remote control.
3 Current selection is always highlighted in blue. The highlighted button has
focus and is activated when you press the ENTERE button.
4 When there is a lot of data, a page control is used.
N Current page and total pages are displayed.
N Move between pages by pressing ◄ or ► buttons.
5 The bottom toolbar includes color buttons that correspond to the red, green, yellow and blue buttons on the remote control.
• Red button: Close the widget.
• Green button: Change the widget’s setting.
• Yellow button: Manage your snippets.
• Blue button: Size video to fit, or make it full screen.
N Some buttons may not be available depending on widget.
.@# áëí space
a b c d e f g h i
j k l m n o p q r
s t u v w x y z 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 52 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:33English - 53
Editing Snippets in the Dock
1. Edit a snippet by focusing on it in the dock and pressing the yellow button.
2. The snippet moves to the Second position and its tile slides up to show the following help text:
• Delete (red button): Remove this TV Widget.
N Deleted widgets can be re-installed using the Widget Gallery.
• Move (blue button): Re-order the snippet. Press the ◄ or ► button to scroll. Press the yellow button to drop into the new
position.
• Done (yellow button): Exit the Edit Snippet menu.
Using the Profile Widget
The Profile Widget configures your user profile.You can set up multiple profiles, and each profile
maintains its own list of widgets.
The Switch Profile menu allows you to switch to a different user profile.
N At least two profiles must be registered. If you want to add a profile,
refer to ‘Administrative Controls’.
The Profile Settings menu allows you to customize and protect your profile.
• User profiles can be customized with a unique Name and an Avatar (a picture used to represent your
profile).
• Your profile’s Name and Avatar are displayed in the profile snippet in the dock.
• Profiles can be protected by Create Profile PIN.
N When setting the PIN for the first time, you can set a Security Question.
The Profile Settings menu can limit to widgets.
• If you forget your Profile PIN you can answer a Security Question that is associated with your
profile.
• A profile that has the Limit Profile indicator turned on will not allow new widgets to be installed.
N The Owner PIN must be set to use this function. To set the Owner PIN, refer to ‘Administrative Controls’.
The System Settings menu allows you to:
• Change your Location and set your Zip Code (US only) to tailor the content to your region.
• Repeat the Tutorial that was shown during guided setup.
• Restore Factory Settings to delete all widget configurations and information.
In the Administrative Controls menu you can:
• Set the Screen Saver timeout to avoid screen burn in.
• Create Owner PIN and set a Security Question to control other profiles.
• Create a new Profile which can be configured with a different set of widgets.
• Delete an existing profile.
From the Profile Widget you can Sign in to Yahoo!® using your Yahoo! ID.
• If you have a Yahoo! ID, you can access your personalized content using the Yahoo! TV Widgets.
• All Yahoo! TV Widgets that are installed are automatically signed-in with your profile’s Yahoo! ID.
• If you have no Yahoo! account, visit www.yahoo.com and create an account.
• You may fail to log in with an ID created on the Yahoo website in a country that does not support Internet@TV.
❑ About Profile widget
Press the green button.
You can view a brief description of the Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, and Privacy Policy.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 53 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:33English - 54
Using the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery
Use the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery to add more widgets to your TV.
View available TV Widgets in the following categories:
• Latest Widgets: Displays recently updated widgets.
• Yahoo!® Widgets: Displays widgets provided by Yahoo!®.
• Samsung Widgets: Displays widgets provided by Samsung.
• More Categories: Displays all widgets by category.
N To install a widget, navigate to the detail screen and select Add Widget to My Profile and press
the ENTERE button. The widget is installed and becomes available in the dock.
❑ Widget Gallery Settings
Press the green button.
About Yahoo! Widget Gallery...
You can view brief information for the Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, and
Privacy Policy.
In the Developer Settings menu You can make your own widget.
For more information on creating your own widget, visit our developer site at http://connectedtv.
yahoo.com/
Using the Yahoo!® Weather Widget
The Yahoo!® Weather Widget provides updates on your local and favorite weather locations. This
content dynamically changes with weather conditions.
• Press the green button on the remote control to display the Yahoo!® Weather Widget Settings
menu.
• From the Settings menu you can add or remove a city for which you want to view weather
information.
From the Settings menu:
• Add New City by entering the name of the city. Once the search results are displayed, select the
city you want and press the ENTERE button.
• Delete City by selecting the city you want to delete from the city list. Press the ENTERE button
and confirm the deletion.
• Changing the Temperature Indication Mode
You can change the temperature indication mode to Imperial or Metric. For example, Imperial will
show temperatures in Fahrenheit and Metric in Celsius.
❑ Create a snippet for a favorite city
• Select the city from the Yahoo!® Weather Widget’s home page and view the detailed weather information.
• Press the yellow button.
• Select the Add Snippet menu and press ENTERE to add the city as a snippet.
❑ Delete a snippet for a city
• Launch the snippet.
• Press the yellow button.
• Select the Delete Snippet menu and press ENTERE to remove the snippet.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 54 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:33English - 55
Using the Yahoo!® News Widget
The Yahoo!® News Widget provides the latest headline news for business, entertainment, politics,
sports, top stories, and many other categories.
Select a category, select a headline within the category, and view a dynamically updated news
summary.
Using the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget
The Flickr Widget can provide you access to your favorite photos from friends and family while
watching TV. Share your photos with your family on your big screen TV through a slideshow.
• Personalize the Flickr Widget by logging in with your Yahoo! ID.
• For detailed procedures on log in, refer to the ‘Using the Profile Widget’ instructions.
• For more information on Flickr, visit http://www.flickr.com.
N Your Photos shows photos you have registered with Flickr website.
To view Flickr photos in a slideshow:
• Select a thumbnail of a photo and press the ENTERE button to view the photo’s details.
• Select Start Slideshow and press the ENTERE button.
To control the slideshow display:
• Press the ENTERE button during a slideshow.
• The thumbnails of photos are displayed on the bottom of the screen.
N When the slideshow control is displayed, you can Pause, Play and Stop the slideshow.
N If you select the menu and press ENTERE, you can view information for the selected
photo.
• The Your Sets menu allows you to view photos you have classified in Flickr.
• The Explore menu allows you to explore photos featured by the Flickr website. You can view the photos updated daily.
• The Mark as Favorite or Remove From Favorite menu moves photos to your Favorite Photos set or removes photos from it.
• The Favorite Photos menu allows you to see the photos you have classified as favorites.
• The Your Contacts menu allows you to see updates from family and friends.
The Your Groups menu allows you to select your favorite groups from the Flickr website to share and enjoy photos with the Flickr
community of users.
To configure the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget Settings press the green button on the remote control.
• The Time Per Slide menu controls the speed of the slideshow.
• The Repeat menu will restart the slideshow at the beginning after the last photo is shown.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 55 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:34English - 56
Using the Yahoo!® Finance Widget
View stock information and the latest stock news with the Yahoo!® Finance Widget.
Press the green button to set up your stocks.
Use the Add New Symbol menu to enter the name of a new stock.
• Select the stock you want to add from the search results and select the Add Symbol menu and press
the ENTERE button.
N The selected stock is added to the My Stocks list.
• Use the Import Symbols From Yahoo!® menu to retrieve your Yahoo!® Finance portfolio.
- The Merge Symbols menu merges the symbols in the Yahoo!® Finance Widget with the
symbols from your portfolio.
- The Replace Symbols menu deletes the symbols in the Yahoo!® Finance Widget and replaces
them with the symbols from your portfolio.
• Use the Display Format menu to change the stock-price fluctuation transition to Value or
Percentage.
• Create a snippet for a favorite stock.
- Select the stock symbol from the Yahoo!® Finance Widget’s home page and view the detailed
finance information.
- Press the yellow button.
- Select the Add Snippet menu and press ENTERE to add the stock as a snippet.
• Delete a snippet
- Launch the snippet from the dock
- Press the yellow button.
- Select the Delete Snippet menu and press ENTERE to remove the snippet.
Troubleshooting for internet@TV
Problem Possible Solution
Some widget services do not
work.
• Check with that service provider.
• In the widget, press the green button and get contact information or refer to help website for
widget service provider information.
• Refer to Help website page.
Some widget contents only
have English. How can I change
the language?
• Widget content language may be different from widget user interface language. It depends on
service provider.
After factory reset, Yahoo
Widget service doesn’t work
and warning message is
displayed.
• After factory reset, turn off and on your TV. Then restart Internet@TV.
At the Flickr widget, I logged in
my account. But, I can’t view
my picture.
• Visit Yahoo Web site, and activate your Flickr account at your Yahoo! ID.
At the Profile widget, I did
change location, but the
previous setting still remains.
• Turn off and on your TV. Then restart Internet@TV.
• Now, you can enjoy widget services supported in changed location.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 56 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:34English - 57
Help Website
Country Website
Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Belgium www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Switzerland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N Approaching step may be changed later on.
N It can be different links for special countrie .
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 57 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:34English - 58
N This function may not be supported depending on your country.
N If you have some problems while using a widget service, please contact to service provider.
In the widget, press the green button and get contact information or refer to help website for service provider information.
N English may be only supported in widget service depending on region.
Getting Started with Internet@TV
Internet@TV provides SAMSUNG’s widget services through a network connection. Internet@TV contents can be changed depending
on contents provider. You can access various information such as YouTube, through the Internet@TV service.
N If a certain content's font provided by contents provider is not supported on TV, It may not be viewed normally.
N The configuration of Widgets and their provided services may differ according to the selected country. After changing country, turn
off and on the TV. Then you can use widget service supported changed country. If Country is set to Others, TV can’t recognize your
country. In this case, please select directly from the service country list.
N For more information on how how to configure your country, refer to the ‘Plug & Play Feature’ instructions.
N You may experience slow operation or hesitation when using this function due to network conditions.
N Before using Internet@TV, set up the network first. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Network
Setup’.
When running Internet@TV for the first time, the basic settings proceed automatically. It may take few minutes to update.
1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then press the ENTERE button.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Internet@TV, then press the ENTERE button.
O Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to display the Internet@
TV menu.
3. The User Agreement is displayed. Select Agree to accept the agreement.
4. The Statistics & Analysis is displayed. Select Agree to accept the agreement.
Setting up Internet@TV
You can check and use the menus regarding Single Sign On (SSO), system management and properties.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button.
❑ Single Sign On
You can use this menu when creating, deleting the account.
Using the Single Sign On, you can control your account including contents site’s account information.
You don’t need additional log in.
N Account is only for internet@TV.
Create Account
You can create account and be linked with desired service site.
N Account will be made less than 10.
N Character of Account should be limited to 10.
N If there is no service that needs log in, you can not create account.
Account Management
• Service Site: You can register log in information of service site (such as YouTube).
• Change Password: Change the password of your account.
• Delete: Delete the account.
N If you forget the password of account, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the
Internet@TV: POWER (off) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (On).
If you use this function, all accounts will be deleted.
Internet@TV
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 58 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:34English - 59
❑ System Setup
N Ticker Autorun, Ticker Duration may not be supported depending on country.
Change the Service Lock password
N The default password number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’.
N If you forget the password, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the password to ‘0-0-0-0’:
POWER (Off) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (On).
Service Duration
Select to set the service duration time before the screen saver appears.
Ticker Autorun → Off / On
Select to set ticker to run automatically or not when turning on the TV.
Ticker Duration
Select to set the service duration time before the screen saver appears.
❑ Properties
Display information of Internet@TV.
You can measure the speed of your Internet TV service using Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service.
Using the Internet@TV service
In a widget that provides multiple category menus, you can view the contents of the category menus using the ◄ and ► buttons.
Account Login
1. Press the Red button.
2. Select desired User account, then press the ENTERE button.
3. Input the password.
N When login succeeds, User account will be displayed on the screen.
N Before login, at least one and more account should be registered. If you want to create account, refer to ‘Setting up Internet@
TV’.
Using the Widget Gallery
You can use Run Service, Lock, Install Service at the existing widget and you can see description of the widget service that isn’t
installed.
On the Internet@TV, you can add and use various widgets provided by service provider. It may vary according to contents provider.
• Run Service: Runs the widget service.
• Lock: Set the service lock
• Install Service (or Delete Service): Install or delete widget service.
Using the YouTube Widget
You can watch the movie provided by YouTube.
If you have the account in YouTube, Register account information using Account
management. Then, you can use My Favourites category.
N The menu can be changed by web service.
N There may be inappropriate contents for child. In this case, use Lock function in
Widget Gallery.
Xz~*atppo
_z{*]lpo
Xz~*[z{wl}
Xz~*Ot~n~~po
_z{*Qlz}tp~
Xz~*Wtyvpo
Xz~*]p~{zxopo
Qpl}po
_zol <:B
^ppvtyr*U~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp}
atp~*E*C;
M}plvtyr*Yp~*Lwp}~*m*P8Xltw
atp~*E*C;
Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx
atp~*E*CE=A
Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 59 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:35English - 60
Troubleshooting for internet@TV
Problem Possible Solution
Some widget services do not work. Check with that service provider.
In the widget, press the green button and get contact information or refer to help website
for widget service provider information.
Refer to Help website page.
What is the advantage of single sign
on?
If you create account and register your login information of desired service, you can
access personalized content without additional login.
When a network error occurred, I can’t
use other menus except setting menu.
If network connection doesn’t work, your service might be limited.
Because all widgets except setting widget(Profile widget, Widget Gallery) need to connect
Internet.
Is there any possibility to show adult
movies on YouTube?
Basically, at the list on the menu it is filtered out. But by using search function, It can be
shown. In this case, using the Widget Gallery lock the widget service.
Help Website
Country Website
Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Belgium www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Switzerland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N Approaching step may be changed later on.
N It can be different links for special countries.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 60 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:35English - 61
Home Network Centre
About the Home Network Centre
The Home Network Centre connects the TV and mobile phones through a network. You can view call arrivals, text message contents,
and schedules set on the mobile phone on the TV using the Home Network Centre. In addition, you can play the media contents saved
on the mobile phones such as videos, photos and music by controlling them onto the TV via the network.
N If the device supports DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller) function, Home Network Centre function is available.
N This function is for compatibility with Samsung mobile phone which will be released later on. For more information, visit www.
samsung.com or contact Samsung call center. Other models will be added in the future. The mobile device may need additional
software installation. For details, refer to each user’s guide.
❑ Connecting to the Home Network Centre
For more information about the network settings, refer to ‘Network Setup’.
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Ad-hoc network
1. Connect the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ to the USB1(HDD) or USB2 port of the TV.
2. For more information on how to configure Ad-hoc network, refer to ‘Setting the Network’.
N For information on configuring the mobile phone’s network settings, refer to the mobile phone manual.
3. Set up the IP address, SSID and password for the mobile phone in the Ad-hoc Settings of the mobile phone using the Network
Name (SSID) and Security Key (password) displayed on the TV.
Connecting through a wire / wireless IP sharer
1. Connect the LAN port of the TV and the Wire/Wireless IP sharer using the LAN cable or connect the USB1(HDD) or USB2 port
of the TV and the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’.
N For the procedures to set up the wire/wireless sharer and the mobile phone, refer to the manual of the corresponding device.
Home Network Centre
TV Side Panel
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
Mobile phone
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
Wire/Wireless IP sharer
TV Side Panel
Mobile phone
or
or
LAN Cable
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
Mobile phone TV Side Panel
or
LAN Cable
Wire/Wireless IP sharer
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 61 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:38English - 62
Setting Up the Home Network Centre
❑ Message / Media
Shows a list of mobile phones which have been set up with this TV to use the
Message or Media function.
N Media function is available in other mobile devices which support DLNA DMC.
Allowed
Allows the mobile phone.
Denied
Blocks the mobile phone.
Delete
Deletes the mobile phone from the list.
N This function just deletes the name from the list. If the deleted mobile device
turns on or tries to connect to the TV, it may be shown on the list.
❑ Setup
Message → On / Off
You can determine whether to use the message function (the call arrivals, text
message contents, and schedules set on the mobile phone).
Media → On / Off
You can select whether to use the Media function that plays the contents (videos,
photos, music) from the mobile phone.
TV name
You can set the TV name so as to find it easily on the mobile device.
N If you selects User Input, you can type the TV name by OSK(On Screen
Keyboard).
Return Exit
Home Network Centre
111-1234-5671 : Allowed
111-1234-5672 : Allowed
111-1234-5673 : Denied
111-1234-5674 : Denied
Message
Media
Setup
Return Exit
Home Network Centre
Message : On
Media : On
TV name : TV
Message
Media
Setup
Using the Message Function
Using this function, you can view the call arrivals, text message contents and schedules
set on the mobile phone through the alarm window while watching TV.
N To disable this Message alarm window, set Message to Off in Setup of the Home
Network Centre.
N The alarm window appears for 20 seconds. If no key is pressed or if Cancel is
selected, it appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals.
N If OK is selected, or if OK is not selected while the message is displayed three
times, the message will be deleted. The message is not deleted from the mobile
phone.
N The simple alarm window can be displayed, while using some applications such as
Media Play, Contents Library, etc. In this case, to view the contents of the message,
switch to TV viewing mode.
N When the message of an unknown mobile phone is displayed, select the mobile phone in the Message item of the Home Network
Centre and select Denied to block the phone.
❑ Message View
If a new text message (SMS) arrives while you are watching TV, the alarm window appears. If you click the OK button, the contents
of the message are displayed.
N You can configure the viewing settings for the text message (SMS) contents on the mobile phone. For the procedures, refer to
the mobile phone manual.
N Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters.
❑ Call Arrival Alarm
If a call arrives while you are watching TV, the alarm window appears.
❑ Schedule Alarm
While you are watching TV, the alarm window appears to display the registered schedule.
N You can configure the viewing settings for the schedule contents on the mobile phone.
For the procedures, refer to the mobile phone manual.
N Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters.
husband
SMS
New message received
Doyou want to view
the details?
OK Cancel
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 62 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:41English - 63
Using the Media Function
An alarm window appears informing the user that the media contents (videos, photos,
music) sent from the mobile phone will be displayed on the TV.
The contents are played automatically 3 seconds after the alarm window appears.
If you press the RETURN or EXIT button when the alarm window appears,
the Media Contents are not played.
N To turn off the media contents transmission from the mobile phone, set Media to
Off in Setup of the Home Network Centre.
N The contents may not be played on the TV depending on their resolution and
format.
❑ Media play control buttons
Button Operations
◄/►
• Move the cursor and select an item.
• While playing a movie file: Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file.
ENTER
• Pressing the ENTERE button during play pauses the play.
• Pressing the ENTERE button during pause resumes the play.
RETURN Return to the previous menu.
TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus.
INFO Show file information.
EXIT Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode.
N The ENTERE and ◄/► buttons may not work depending on the type of media content.
N Using the mobile device, you can control playing media. For details, refer to each user’s guide.
Media will be played from “Unknown Device 13”
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 63 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:42English - 64
Continued...
Teletext Feature
Most television stations provide written information services via Teletext. The index page of the teletext service gives you information on
how to use the service. In addition, you can select various options to suit your requirements by using the remote control buttons.
N For teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some
pages may not be displayed.
1 : (exit)
Exit from the teletext display.
2 6 (index)
Used to display the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing teletext.
3 5 (reveal)
Used to display the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display
normal screen, press it again.
4 4 (size)
Press to display the double-size letters in the upper half of the screen. For lower half
of the screen, press it again. To display normal screen, press it once again.
5 / (teletext on/mix)
Press to activate teletext mode after selecting the channel providing the teletext
service. Press it twice to overlap the teletext with the current broadcasting screen.
6 8 (store)
Used to store the teletext pages.
7 1 (sub-page)
Used to display the available sub-page.
8 2 (page up)
Used to display the next teletext page.
9 3 (page down)
Used to display the previous teletext page.
0 0 (mode)
Press to select the teletext mode (LIST/FLOF). If you press it in the LIST mode, it
switches into the List save mode. In the List save mode, you can save teletext page
into list using the 8(store) button.
! 9 (hold)
Used to hold the display on a given page if the selected page is linked with several
secondary pages which follow on automatically. To resume, press it again.
@ 7 (cancel)
Used to display the broadcast when searching for a page.
# Colour buttons (red/green/yellow/blue)
If the FASTEXT system is used by a broadcasting company, the different topics
covered on a teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by pressing
the colour buttons. Press one of them corresponding to the required. The page is
displayed with other coloured information that can be selected in the same way. To
display the previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button.
N You can change teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
Recommendations for Use
1
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 64 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:42English - 65
The teletext pages are organized according to six categories:
Part Contents
A Selected page number.
B Broadcasting channel identity.
C Current page number or search indications.
D Date and time.
E Text.
F Status information.
FASTEXT information.
N Teletext information is often divided between several pages displayed in sequence,
which can be accessed by:
- Entering the page number
- Selecting a title in a list
- Selecting a coloured heading (FASTEXT system)
O Press the TV button to exit from the teletext display.
Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA)
Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor.
When attaching to other building materials, please contact your nearest dealer.
If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury.
Product Family inch VESA Spec. (A * B) Standard Screw Quantity
LCD-TV
19" ~22" 100 * 100
M4
4
23"~29" 200 * 100
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6
46"~55" 400 * 400
57"~70" 800 * 400 M8
80" ~ 1400 * 800
PDP-TV
42"~ 50" 400 * 400
M8 4
58"~ 63" 600 * 400
70" ~ 800 * 400
80" ~ 1400 * 800
N We provided the standard dimensions for wall mount kits as shown in the table above.
N When purchasing our wall mount kit, a detailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly are provided.
N Do not use screws longer than the standard dimension, as they may cause damage to the inside of the TV set.
N For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications, the length of the screws may differ depending on
their specifications.
N Do not use screws that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications.
Do not use fasten the screws too strongly, this may damage the product or cause the product to fall, leading to personal injury.
Samsung is not liable for these kinds of accidents.
N Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non-VESA or non-specified wall mount is used or the consumer
fails to follow the product installation instructions.
N Our 57” and 63” models do not comply with VESA Specifications. Therefore, you should use our dedicated wall mount kit for this
model.
N Do not exceed 15 degrees tilt when mounting this TV.
Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on.
It may result in personal injury due to electric shock.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 65 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:42English - 66
Preparing before installing Wall- Mount
1. Install Wall Mount with the torque range of 15kgf·cm or less. Make sure that parts can be damaged if the torque is out of the
specified range.
2. Accessory Kit contains Holder–Ring [②] for installing other company’s Wall-Mount on Samsung TV. (Case B)
N Screw down the hole [①] when installing wall-mount on the wall.
How to attach the Stand-Base
Warning
Firmly secure the stand to the TV before moving it, as the stand may fall and could
cause serious injury.
N Two or more people should carry the TV. Never lay the TV on the floor because of
possible damage to the screen. Always store the TV upright.
Using the screws for securing the stand base and the TV, firmly attach the TV to the
stand base.
(The exterior of the set may be different from the picture.)
When mounting your TV on a wall, install
the cover (➊) on the stand-base using two
screws.
(PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680)
Case A. Installing SAMSUNG Wall-Mount Case B. Installing other company’s Wall-Mount
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 66 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:45English - 67
Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do not hang
over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death. Follow all
safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device for safety
purposes, as follows.
❑ To avoid the TV from falling
1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall.
N You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall.
N Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied, please purchase these additionally.
2. Remove the screws from the center back of the TV, put the screws into the clamps, and then fasten the screws onto the TV again.
N Screws may not be supplied with the product.
3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong string and then tie the string tightly.
N Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards.
N It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or lower than the clamps fixed on the TV.
N Untie the string before moving the TV.
4. Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue for failure. If you have any doubt
about the security of your connections,contact a professional installer.
Securing the TV to the Wall
Securing the Installation Space
Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation.
Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product.
Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept.
N When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only.
- If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product
falling.
- If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in the
internal temperature of the product due to poor ventilation.
N The appearance may differ depending on the product.
When installing the product with a stand When installing the product with a wall-mount
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
경고 주의
경고 주의
Wall
Wall
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 67 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:46English - 68
Troubleshooting
If you have any questions of TV, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit ‘www.samsung.com’ site,
then click on Support or contact Call Center on list of last page.
N Firmware Upgrade can be as first possible solution.
Problem Possible Solution
Picture Quality
First of all, please perform the Picture Test to confirm that your TV is properly displaying test image.
* Go to MENU → Support → Self Diagnosis → Picture Test
If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal.
TV image does not look as good as it
did in the store.
• If you have an analog Cable/Set top box, upgrade to an Box.
Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD picture quality.
• Cable/Satellite subscriber : Try HD (High Definition) stations from channel line up.
• Antenna connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto program
N Many HD channels are upscaled from SD (Standard Definition) contents.
• Adjust Cable/Set top video output resolution to 1080i or 720p.
Picture is distorted: macroblock,small
block, dots,pixelization.
• Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving
pictures such as sports and action movies.
• Low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue.
Wrong or missing Colour with
Component connection.
• Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks.
Incorrect or loose connections may cause Colour problems or the screen will be blank.
Poor Colour or brightness.
• Adjust Picture options in the TV menu (Picture Mode, Colour, Brightness,
Sharpness).
• Adjust Energy Saving option in Setup menu.
• Try picture reset to view the default picture setting.
(Go to MENU → Picture → Picture Reset)
Dotted line on the edge of screen.
• If picture size is set to Just scan, change to 16:9.
• Change cable/Set top box resolution.
Picture is black and white with AV
(Composite) input only.
• Connect video cable (Yellow) to Green jack of component input 1 of the TV.
Picture freezes or is distorted when
changing channels or picture is
delayed.
• If connected with cable box, please try to reset cable box. (reconnect AC cord and
wait until cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes)
• Set output resolution of cable box to 1080i or 720p
Sound Quality
First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio is properly operating.
* Go to MENU → Support → Self Diagnosis → Sound Test
If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal.
No sound or sound is too low at
maximum volume.
• Please check the volume of device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) connected to
your TV.
Then, adjust the TV volume accordingly.
Picture is good but no sound.
• Set the Speaker Select option to TV speaker in the sound menu.
• Make sure audio cables from an external device are connected to correct audio input
jacks on the TV.
• Check connected device's audio output option.
Ex) You may need to change your cable box' audio option to HDMI when you have
HDMI connected to your TV.
• If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required.
• Deactivate SRS function if you are setting the volume over 30 value.
• Remove plug from headphone jack (if available on your TV).
Noise from speaker.
• Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input.
• For Antenna/Cable connection, check signal strength. Low signal level may cause
sound distortion.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 68 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:46English - 69
Problem Possible Solution
No Picture, No Video
TV won't turn on. • Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV.
• Make sure the wall outlet is working.
• Try pressing the Power button on the TV to make sure the remote is working properly.
If the TV turns on, it may be caused by Remote Control.
To fix the Remote problem, refer to "Remote control does not work" below.
TV turns off automatically.
• Check if the Sleep Timer is set to On in the Setup menu.
• If connected the TV to your PC, check your PC power settings.
• Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV.
• If there is no signal for about 10 ~ 15 minutes with Antenna/Cable connection, the TV
will turn off.
No picture/Video.
• Check cable connections. (remove and reconnect all cables of TV and external
devices)
• Set your external device's (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video output to
match the connections to the TV input. For example, external device's output : HDMI ,
TV's input : HDMI.
• Make sure your connected device is powered on.
• Make sure to select the TV's correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the
remote control.
• Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable.
RF (Cable/Antenna) Connection
Cannot receive all channels.
• Make sure Antenna cable is connected securely.
• Please try Plug & Play to add available channels to the channel list.
Go to MENU → Setup → Plug & Play and wait for all avaiable channels are stored.
• Verify Antenna is positioned correctly.
Picture is distorted : macroblock,small
block,dots,pixelization.
• Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving
pictures such as sports and action movies.
• Low signal level can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue.
PC Connection
“Not Supported Mode” message.
• Set your PC's output resolution and frequency so it matches the resolutions supported
by the TV.
PC is always shown on source list even
if not connected.
• This is normal; PC is always shown on the source list even though a PC is not
connected.
Video is OK but there is no audio with
HDMI connection.
• Check the audio output setting on your PC.
Network Connection
Wireless network connection failure.
• Samsung Wireless USB dongle is required to use wireless network.
• Make sure Network Type is set to Wireless.
• TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer (Router).
Others
Picture is not shown in full screen. • Black bars on each side will be shown on HD channels when displaying upscaled SD
(4:3) contents.
• Black bars on Top & Bottom will be shown on movies that have aspect ratios different
from your TV.
• Adjust picture size option on your external device or TV to full screen.
Remote control does not work.
• Replace the remote control batteries with correct polarity (+ -).
• Clean the transmission window located on the top of the remote.
• Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 69 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 70
Problem Possible Solution
Plasma TV is making humming noise.
• Plasma TVs typically make a soft humming sound. This is normal. It’s caused by the
electrical charges that are used to create the images on the screen.
• If the humming sound is loud, you may have set the brightness on the TV too high.
Try setting the brightness lower.
• You can also have loud humming if the back of your Plasma TV is too close to a wall
or other hard surface. Also try rerouting your connection cables.
• Improper installation of wall mount can create excessive noise.
Image Retention (Burn In) Issue.
• To minimize the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with screen burn
reduction technology. Pixel Shift technology enables you to set picture movement up/
down (Vertical Line) and side to side (Horizontal Dot).
Can not control TV power or volume
with Cable/Set top box remote control.
• Program the Cable/Set top remote control to operate the TV.
Refer to Cable/Sat user manual for SAMSUNG TV code.
“Not Supported Mode” message.
• Check the supported resolution of the TV and adjust the external device's output
resolution accordingly. Refer to resolution settings in this manual.
Can not turn off the Light Effect on the
front bezel (Below SAMSUNG Logo)
• Adjust the light effect option in the setup menu.
Options are : Off, In Standby, In Watching and Always
• Light Effect is not available on all models
Plastic smell from TV. • This smell is normal and will dissipate over time.
TV Signal Strength is unavailable in the
Self Diagnostic Test menu.
• This function is only available with digital channels with an Antenna (RF/Coax)
connection.
TV is tilted to right or left side. • Remove the stand base from TV and reassemble.
Can not assemble stand base.
• Make sure TV is placed on flat surface.
If can not remove screws from TV, please use magnetized screw driver.
Channel menu is grey out (unavailable). • Channel menu is only available when TV source is selected.
Your settings are lost after 30 minutes
or every time TV is turned off.
• If TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every
30 minutes.
Please change from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Plug & Play
procedure.
Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, go to MENU → Setup → Plug & Play
→ ENTER
Intermittent loss of audio or video.
• Check cable connections and reconnect.
• Can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables.
Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use.
If wall mounting, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors.
You may see small particles if you
look closely at the edge of the bezel
surrounding the TV screen.
• This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.
PIP menu is not available.
• PIP functionality is only available when you are watching an HDMI, PC or components
source.
‘Scramble signal’ or ‘No signal/Weak
signal’ with CAM CARD(CI/CI+)
• Check that CAM has CI(CI+) Card installed into the common interface slot.
• It is normal, the TV operate OTA(Over The Air) function itself to upgrade firmware
downloaded during watching.
Recurrent picture/sound issue • Check and change signal/source.
N Some of above pictures and functions are available at specific models only.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 70 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 71
Specifications
The descriptions and characteristics in this booklet are given for information purposes only and are subject to modification without
notice.
Model Name PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680
Screen Size (Diagonal) 50 inch 58 inch 63 inch
PC Resolution (Optimum) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Sound (Output) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2
Dimension (W x H x D)
Body
With stand
1240 x 756 x 74 mm
1240 x 817 x 290 mm
1401 x 848 x 74 mm
1401 x 917 x 335 mm
1531 x 932 x 74 mm
1531 x 957 x 390 mm
Weight
Body
With stand
33 kg
38 kg
39 kg
46 kg
53 kg
61 kg
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)
10% to 80%, non-condensing
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)
5% to 95%, non-condensing
N This device is a Class B digital apparatus.
N Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
N For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 71 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 72
Software License
This product uses parts of the software from the Independent JPEG Group. This product uses parts of the software owned by the
Freetype Project (www.freetype.org). This product uses some software programs which are distributed under the GPL/LGPL license. Accordingly,
the following GPL and LGPL software source codes that have been used in this product can be provided after asking to vdswmanager@samsung.com.
GPL software: Linux Kernel, Busybox, Binutils LGPL software: Glibc, ffmpeg, smpeg, libgphoto, libusb, SDL
❑ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to
make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most
of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we
speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want
it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect
your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain
responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example,
if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you
received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you
this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly
explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions
be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Some devices are
designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This
is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse
occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this
version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to
extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program
is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on generalpurpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it
effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms
and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
0. Definitions.
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “
recipients” may be individuals or organizations.
To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the
making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.
A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes
copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a
user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License.
If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
1. Source Code.
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any
nonsource form of a work.
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case
of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal
form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work
with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source
code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 72 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 73
specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code
interpreter used to run it.
The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an
executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not
include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in
performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files
associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work
is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other
parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from
running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License
acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered
works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered
works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running
those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright.
Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on
terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section
10 makes it unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under
article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of
such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to
the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim
any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’
legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously
and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
nonpermissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and
give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code
under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7.
This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License
will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of
how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such
permission if you have separately received it.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the
covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of
the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause
this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
machinereadable
Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price
no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding
Source from a network server at no charge.
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative
is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with
subsection 6b.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 73 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 74
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to
the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients
to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the
Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities,
provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of
what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy
these requirements.
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and
Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable portion
of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in
conveying the object code work.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for
personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether
a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a
particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular
user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer
product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
the only significant mode of use of the product. “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures,
authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product
from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the
modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object
code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction
in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term
(regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation
Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been
modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be
denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols
for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this
section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form),
and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its
conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this
License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part
may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the
additional permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any
part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may
place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright
permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by
the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
Notices displayed by works containing it; or
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program
as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further
restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under
this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further
restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of
theadditional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive
or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply
either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to
propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted
under the third paragraph of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally,
unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to
notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 74 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 75
copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the
first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation
prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses
for the same material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work
occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.
However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe
copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of
this License to do so.
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing
an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had
or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the You may not impose any further restrictions on the
exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other
charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim
in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any
portion of it.
11. Patents.
A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.
The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.
A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor
version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version.
For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements
of this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims,
to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the
following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a
patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent
license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available
for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily
accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of
the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License,
to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent
license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or
more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate,
modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of
the covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned
on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered
work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make
payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any
of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the
covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or
compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28
March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License,
they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously
your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For
example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the
Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms
of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General
Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 75 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 76
14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such
new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the
GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s
public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “
AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR
ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state theexclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
Copyright (C)
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for
more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see .
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Copyright (C) This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w’.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your
program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if
necessary.
For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see .The GNU General Public
License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider
it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public
License instead of this License. But first, please read .
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 76 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:47English - 77
❑ GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL)
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to
make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of
our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that
you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if
you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you
have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these
terms so they know their rights.
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and
authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously
to authors of previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the
manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The
systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.
Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially
in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the
freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict
development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents
applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render
the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
0. Definitions.
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “
recipients” may be individuals or organizations.
To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the
making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.
A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes
copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a
user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License.
If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
1. Source Code.
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any
nonsource form of a work.
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case
of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal
form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work
with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source
code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the
specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code
interpreter used to run it. The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate,
install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities.
However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are
used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes
interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 77 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 78
subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between
those subprograms and other parts of the work. The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate
automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same
work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from
running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License
acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered
works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered
works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running
those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright.
Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on
terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. Conveying under
any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it
unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under
article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of
such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to
the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim
any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’
legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously
and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
nonpermissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and
give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you
convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the
Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7.
This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License
will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of
how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such
permission if you have separately received it.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered
work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is
called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s
users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to
the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
machinereadable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price
no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding
Source from a network server at no charge.
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative
is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with
subsection 6b.
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to
the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients
to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the
Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities,
provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of
what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy
these requirements.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 78 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 79
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and
Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable portion
of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in
conveying the object code work.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for
personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether
a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a
particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular
user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer
product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
the only significant mode of use of the product. “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures,
authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product
from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the
modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object
code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction
in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term
(regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation
Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been
modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be
denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols
for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this
section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form),
and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its
conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this
License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part
may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the
additional permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any
part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may
place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright
permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by
the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
Notices displayed by works containing it; or
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program
as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further
restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under
this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further
restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must
place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the
applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated
as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to
propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted
under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular
copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license,
and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the
cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you
of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work)
from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights
under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your
rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under
section 10.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 79 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 80
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered
work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.
However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe
copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of
this License to do so.
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing
an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or
could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor
in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise
of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for
exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
11. Patents.
A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is
based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”. A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all
patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by
some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be
infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes
the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. Each contributor grants you a
non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for
sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs,
a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express
permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to
make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying
on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the
terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause
the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular
work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream
recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work
in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country
that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or
propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered
work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is
automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned
on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered
work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make
payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any
of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the
covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or
compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28
March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License,
they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously
your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For
example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the
Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms
of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General
Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such.
14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each
version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program
specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public
statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions
may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder
as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 80 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 81
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “
AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR
ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
❑ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
Copyright (C)
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see .
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Copyright (C) This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type
`show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your
program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if
necessary.
For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see .
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the
GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read .
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply
to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license
issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by
the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 81 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48English - 82
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform
with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in
a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual
message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product
includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines
from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot
simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
BN68-02333J-Eng.indb 82 2009-10-21 �� 8:58:48Français - 2
Instructions d’utilisation
Rémanence de l’image à l’écran
Ne figez pas d’images (telle qu’une image de jeu vidéo ou de PC branché à l’écran à plasma) sur l’écran du moniteur à plasma
pendant plus de deux heures car cela peut entraîner une rémanence de l’image à l’écran, également appelée “brûlure de l’écran”.
Pour éviter la rémanence, réduisez le niveau de contraste ou de luminosité de l’écran lorsque vous affichez une image fixe.
Hauteur
L’écran à plasma est normalement conçu pour être utilisé à une altitude inférieure à 2000m. Il peut fonctionner de façon anormale
au-dessus de 2000m d’altitude. Ne l’installez pas et ne le faites donc pas fonctionner dans ces conditions.
Chaleur diffusée sur la partie supérieure du téléviseur à plasma
Le dessus de l’appareil peut chauffer en cas d’utilisation prolongée, car la chaleur s’échappe du panneau par le trou d’aération
situé dans la partie supérieure du produit. Ce phénomène est normal et n’indique aucunement la présence d’un défaut ou d’un
dysfonctionnement. Il convient cependant d’empêcher les enfants de toucher à la partie supérieure de l’écran.
Le produit fait un bruit de “claquement”.
Ce bruit de “claquement” risque d’être perceptible lorsque le produit se contracte ou s’étend suite à un changement du milieu
ambiant, tel que la température ou l’humidité. Ce phénomène est normal et ne constitue pas un défaut.
Défauts de cellule
L’écran à plasma utilise un panneau constitué de 2 360 000 (niveau HD) à 6 221 000 (niveau FHD) pixels dont la fabrication fait
appel à une technologie avancée. Il se peut toutefois que quelques points clairs ou sombres apparaissent à l’écran. Ils n’ont
aucune incidence sur la performance du produit.
Evitez d’utiliser le téléviseur à plasma à des températures inférieures à 5°C (41°F).
Une image fixe affichée trop longtemps peut causer des dommages permanents à l’écran à plasma.
Visionner l’écran à plasma au format 4:3 de manière prolongée risque de laisser apparaître des traces de
bordures sur la gauche, sur la droite et au centre de l’écran. Ces traces sont dues à la différence de luminosité
sur l’écran. Lire un DVD ou un jeu vidéo sur console risque de provoquer un effet similaire sur l’écran. Les
dommages provoqués par l’effet susmentionné ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.
Rémanence de l’image à l’écran.
Une rémanence partielle de l’image peut éventuellement se produire si des images figées de jeux vidéo et d’un PC restent
affichées pendant un certain temps. Pour éviter cela, réduisez la “luminosité” et le “contraste” lors de l’affichage d’images fixes.
Garantie
- La garantie ne couvre pas les dommages causés par la rémanence.
- Les brûlures ne sont pas couvertes par la garantie.
Installation
Contacter un centre de service agréé si le téléviseur est destiné à une installation dans des endroits exposés à la poussière,
à des températures faibles ou élevées, à une forte humidité, à des substances chimiques et s’il a été prévu pour fonctionner
en permanence, comme dans des aéroports, des gares ferroviaires, etc. Le non-respect de ce qui précède peut gravement
endommager le téléviseur.
Notifications pour le téléviseur numérique
1. Les fonctions relatives à la télévision numérique (DVB) ne sont disponibles que dans les pays ou régions où des signaux
terrestres numériques de type DVB-T (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AVC) sont diffusés ou dans lesquels vous avez accès à un
service de télévision par câble compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AAC). Consultez votre distributeur local pour
connaître les possibilités de réception des signaux DVB-T ou DVB-C.
2. DVB-T est la norme du consortium européen pour la diffusion de signaux terrestres de télévision numérique. La norme
DVB-C est quant à elle prévue pour la diffusion des signaux de télévision numérique par câble. Certaines fonctions
particulières, telles que le guide électronique des programmes (Electric Program Guide - EPG), la vidéo à la demande
(Video on Demand - VOD), etc., ne sont toutefois pas incluses dans cette spécification. Elles ne sont, par conséquent, pas
prises en charge pour l’instant.
3. Bien que ce téléviseur soit conforme aux dernières normes DVB-T et DVB-C (août 2008), il n’est pas garanti qu’il soit
compatible avec les futures diffusions de signaux numériques terrestres DVB-T et par câble DVB-C.
4. Certains opérateurs de télévision par câble peuvent facturer des frais supplémentaires pour un tel service. Vous aurez
aussi éventuellement à accepter les termes et conditions de ces sociétés.
5. Il se peut que certaines fonctions de TV numérique ne soient pas disponibles dans certains pays ou certaines régions et
que la réception des signaux DVB-C ne soit pas correcte avec tous les opérateurs.
6. Pour plus d’informations, contactez votre service client Samsung.
Contactez SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
Pour tout commentaire ou toute question concernant un produit Samsung, contactez le service client de SAMSUNG. (Voir la
quatrième de couverture pour plus d’informations.)
N Les figures et illustrations contenues dans ce mode d’emploi sont fournies pour référence uniquement. Elles peuvent
différer de l’aspect réel du produit. La conception et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent être modifiées sans
avertissement afin d’améliorer ses performances.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:58:30 PMFrançais - 3
N O T
Symboles Appuyez sur Remarque Bouton tactile TOOLS
Sommaire
Branchement et installation de votre téléviseur
■ Vérification des pièces ..............................................................4
■ Utilisation de la base-support ....................................................4
■ Assemblage des câbles ............................................................4
■ Présentation du panneau de commande ..................................5
■ Présentation du panneau de branchement ...............................6
■ Télécommande..........................................................................8
■ Insertion des piles dans la télécommande ................................8
■ Utilisation des boutons rétroéclairés de la télécommande........9
■ Mise en marche et arrêt ............................................................9
■ Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur ....................................9
■ Visualisation de laffichage.........................................................9
■ Affichage des menus...............................................................10
■ Utilisation du bouton TOOLS ..................................................10
■ Fonction Plug & Play ...............................................................10
Gestion des canaux
■ Mémorisation des chaînes .................................................... 11
■ Gestion des chaînes................................................................13
Réglage de l’image
■ Changement des réglages de l’image.....................................15
■ Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC ...................................18
■ Ecran du PC............................................................................19
Réglage du son
■ Changement de la norme Son ................................................20
■ Sélection du mode son............................................................21
Description des Fonctions
■ Réglage de l’heure ..................................................................22
■ Réglage du menu Configuration..............................................23
■ Visualisation d’une image dans l’image...................................25
Assistance / Entrée
■ Programme pris en charge......................................................26
■ Liste Source / Modif. Nom.......................................................27
Réseau
■ Connexion Réseau..................................................................28
■ Configuration du réseau ..........................................................30
Media Play
■ Connexion d’un périphérique USB..........................................33
■ Utilisation de la fonction Media Play........................................34
■ Tri de la liste de fichiers photo / musical / film.........................35
■ Menu d’options de la liste des fichiers photo / musical / film...36
■ Menu d'options Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play ............37
■ Visualisation d’une photo ou d’un diaporama..........................38
■ Lecture de musique.................................................................39
■ Lecture d’un fichier film ..........................................................40
■ Utilisation du menu Configuration ...........................................41
Media Play-DLNA
■ Définition du réseau DLNA......................................................42
■ Installation de l’application DLNA............................................42
■ Utilisation de l’application DLNA..............................................43
■ Utilisation de la fonction DLNA................................................44
Anynet
+
■ Connexion de périphériques Anynet
+
......................................45
■ Configuration d’Anynet
+
..........................................................46
■ Commutation entre périphériques Anynet
+
..............................46
■ Enregistrement ........................................................................47
■ Ecoute via un récepteur ..........................................................48
■ Dépannage d’Anynet
+
.............................................................48
Bibliothèque de contenu
■ Activation de la Bibliothèque de contenu ................................49
■ Utilisation de la Bibliothèque de contenu ................................50
Internet@TV
■ Mise en route d’Internet@TV ..................................................51
■ Modification des snippets du dock ..........................................53
■ Utilisation du widget Profil .......................................................53
■ Utilisation de la galerie de widgets Yahoo!® ...........................54
■ Utilisation du widget Météo Yahoo!®.......................................54
■ Utilisation du widget Actualités Yahoo!® .................................55
■ Utilisation du widget Flickr Yahoo!® ........................................55
■ Utilisation du widget Finance Yahoo!®....................................56
■ Dépannage d’Internet@TV .....................................................56
■ Site Web d’assistance .............................................................57
Internet@TV
■ Mise en route d’Internet@TV ..................................................58
■ Configuration d’Internet@TV...................................................58
■ Utilisation du service Internet@TV..........................................59
■ Dépannage d’Internet@TV......................................................60
■ Site Web d’assistance .............................................................60
Centre de réseau domestique
■ Centre de réseau domestique .................................................61
■ Configuration du Centre de réseau domestique......................62
■ Utilisation de la fonction Message...........................................62
■ Utilisation de la fonction Media................................................63
Conseils d'utilisation
■ Fonction Télétexte...................................................................64
■ Caractéristiques du kit de fixation murale (VESA) ..................65
■ Préparation avant l’installation d’un kit de fixation murale.......66
■ Assemblage de la base-support..............................................66
■ Fixation du téléviseur au mur ..................................................67
■ Sécurisation de l’emplacement d’installation...........................67
■ Résolution des problèmes.......................................................68
■ Caractéristiques ......................................................................71
Français
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:58:31 PMFrançais - 4
Assemblage des câbles
Insérez les câbles dans le serre-câbles de telle manière qu’ils ne soient pas visibles à travers le pied
transparent.
Utilisation de la base-support
N L’écran à plasma doit être soulevé par au moins deux personnes. Ne posez
jamais l’écran à plasma sur le sol, car cela pourrait l’endommager. Conservez
toujours l’écran en position verticale.
N L’écran à plasma peut pivoter de 20 degrés vers la droite et la gauche.
-20° ~ 20°
Vérification des pièces
Manuel
d’utilisation
Télécommande /
Piles AAA (2ea)
Cordon d’alimentation Chiffon de
nettoyage
Serre-câbles Anneau de support
(4ea)
(Reportez-vous à la
page 66)
CD du programme
Vis (4ea) (PS50B650
uniquement)
(Reportez-vous à la
page 66)
Capot inférieur
(PS50B650
uniquement)
(Reportez-vous à la
page 66)
Capot inférieur / Vis (2ea)
(PS58B680 / PS63B680
uniquement)
(Reportez-vous à la
page 66)
Blindage
magnétique de
casque
Blindage
magnétique
pour cordon
d’alimentation
(PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680
uniquement)
Blindage
magnétique
pour cordon
d’alimentation
Carte de garantie /
Manuel de sécurité
(non disponible dans
tous les pays)
N Blindage magnétique
Le blindage magnétique sert à protéger les câbles des interférences.
Lors de la connexion d'un câble, ouvrez le blindage magnétique et
rabattez-le autour du câble près de la prise comme illustré.
Branchement et installation de votre téléviseur
(PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680 uniquement)
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:58:33 PMFrançais - 5
Présentation du panneau de commande
N La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
Boutons en façade
Touchez les boutons pour
les actionner.
(PS58B680 / PS63B680)
(PS50B650)
1 SOURCE
Affiche un menu de toutes les sources d’entrée disponibles
(TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Composant, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI,
HDMI3, HDMI4, USB).
N Dans le menu du téléviseur, ce bouton a la même fonction
que le bouton ENTERE de la télécommande.
2 MENU
Permet d’afficher le menu des fonctions de votre téléviseur
sur l’écran.
3 + –
Permet d’augmenter ou de baisser le volume. Dans le menu
à l’écran, utilisez les boutons + – de la même façon que
les boutons ◄ et ► de la télécommande.
4 CH
Permet de changer de chaîne. Dans le menu à l’écran,
utilisez les boutons CH de la même façon que les
boutons ▲ et ▼ de la télécommande. Le bouton CH
permet d’allumer le téléviseur sans votre télécommande.
5 TEMOIN D’ALIMENTATION
Clignote et s’éteint lorsqu’il est sous tension et s’allume en
mode veille.
6 (ALIMENTATION)
Permet d’allumer et d’éteindre letéléviseur.
7 CAPTEUR DE LA TELECOMMANDE
Dirigez la télécommande vers ce point du téléviseur.
8 HAUT-PARLEURS
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:58:34 PMFrançais - 6
Présentation du panneau de branchement
N En cas de branchement d’un système audio ou vidéo sur le téléviseur, vérifiez que tous les appareils sont éteints.
N Lorsque vous branchez un périphérique externe, faites correspondre les couleurs de la borne de connexion et du câble.
N La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
1 LAN
Branchez un câble réseau (LAN) sur ce port pour connecter
l’appareil au réseau.
2 POWER IN
Permet de raccorder le cordon d’alimentation fourni.
3 COMPONENT IN
Entrées audio (AUDIO L/R) et vidéo (Y/PB/PR) pour
composant.
4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC)
Permet de raccorder la prise de sortie vidéo et audio à votre
PC.
5 EXT 1, EXT 2
Entrées ou sorties pour périphériques externes tels que des
magnétoscopes, des lecteurs DVD, des consoles de jeux
vidéo ou des lecteurs de vidéodisques.
N En mode EXT, la sortie DTV prend uniquement en charge
les formats MPEG, SD Video et Audio.
N En mode EXT, le mode Jeu n’est pas disponible.
Spécifications entrée/sortie
Connecteur
Entrée Sortie
Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R)
EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔
Seule la sortie TV ou
DTV est disponible.
EXT 2 ✔ ✔
Sortie que vous pouvez
sélectionner..
6 HEADPHONE
Permet de brancher un casque si vous souhaitez regarder la
télévision sans déranger les autres personnes présentes dans
la pièce.
N L’utilisation prolongée d’un casque à un niveau sonore
élevé peut endommager l’ouïe.
7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
A connecter à un composant audio
8 SERVICE
Prise pour tests.
9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)
Permet de connecter les signaux audio RCA du téléviseur à
une source externe, telle qu’un équipement audio.
0 ANT IN
Connecteur coaxial 75Ω pour réseau câblé/hertzien.
! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3
Aucune connexion audio supplémentaire n’est nécessaire
pour une connexion HDMI - HDMI.
- Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/
DVI, vous devez utiliser la borne HDMI IN 2(DVI).
N Qu’est-ce que HDMI ?
- La technologie “High Definition Multimedia interface”
(interface multimédia haute définition) permet la
transmission de données vidéo numériques haute
définition et de plusieurs canaux de son numérique.
- Le terminal HDMI/DVI prend en charge la connexion
DVI vers un périphérique raccordé avec le câble
adéquat (non fourni). La différence entre HDMI et DVI
est que le périphérique HDMI est plus petit, dispose de
la fonction de codage HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital
Copy Protection) et prend en charge le son numérique
multicanal.
DVI AUDIO IN
Sorties audio DVI pour périphériques externes.
Modes pris en charge pour HDMI/DVI et Composant
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O
Composant O O O O O O O
Panneau arrière du téléviseur
Télévision câblée
Réseau
ou
ou
2
3 4 5 7 9 !
0
6 8
1
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:58:37 PMFrançais - 7
1 Logement de COMMON INTERFACE
Insérez la carte d’interface commune dans ce logement.
(Reportez-vous à la page 23)
- Si vous n'insérez pas la carte d'interface commune
CI(CI+) CARD dans certains canaux, le message
Scrambled Signal s'affiche.
- Les informations de pairage contenant un numéro de
téléphone, l'ID de la carte d'interface commune CI(CI+)
CARD, l'ID de l'hôte et d'autres informations s'afficheront
dans 2 ou 3 minutes. Si un message d’erreur s’affiche,
contactez votre prestataire de service.
- Lorsque la configuration des informations sur les canaux
est terminée, le message Mise à jour terminée s’affiche,
indiquant que la liste des chaînes est dorénavant mise à
jour.
- Selon le modèle, un message demandant le mot de
passe du Parental Lock peut s'afficher à l'insertion de la
carte CI.
- Selon le modèle, même si la fonction Parental Lock est
définie sur Allow All, un message demandant le mot de
passe peut s'afficher pour les programmes réservés aux
adultes (18 ans et plus).
N Insérez la carte d'interface commune CI(CI+) CARD dans
le sens indiqué sur celle-ci.
N La carte d'interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) n'est pas
prise en charge dans certains pays, dans dans certaines
régions ni par certaines stations de diffusion ; vérifiez
auprès de votre revendeur agréé.
N La fonction CI+ n'est applicable qu'au modèle
PS********P. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, contactez
le prestataire de service.
2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2
Connectez un périphérique de stockage de masse USB
pour afficher des fichiers photo (JPEG), écouter des fichiers
musicaux (MP3) et regarder des fichiers vidéo. Vous pouvez
vous connecter au réseau SAMSUNG sans fil. Le port USB
1 sert également au branchement des disques durs. Les
disques durs sont des périphériques permettant de stocker
les données numériques.
3 HDMI IN 4
A connecter à la prise HDMI d’un périphérique équipé d’une
sortie HDMI.
4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)
Entrées audio et vidéo pour périphériques externes, tels
qu’un caméscope ou un magnétoscope.
N La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle.
Panneau latéral du téléviseur
3
4
1
2
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:58:38 PMFrançais - 8
Télécommande
Vous pouvez utiliser la télécommande jusqu’à une distance maximale d’environ 7 m du téléviseur.
N Une lumière intense peut affecter le bon fonctionnement de la télécommande.
1 Bouton POWER (permet d’allumer et
d’éteindre le téléviseur)
2 Sélectionne directement le mode TV.
3 Touches numériques pour l’accès
direct aux chaînes.
4 Permet de basculer vers vos chaînes
préférées.
5 Suppression temporaire du son.
6 Augmentation du volume
Réduction du volume
7 Sélection de la source disponible
8 Affiche les informations relatives au
programme en cours.
9 Permet de sélectionner rapidement les
fonctions fréquemment utilisées.
0 Permettent de sélectionner des
options de menu à l’écran et de
modifier des valeurs de menu.
! Cette fonction permet d’afficher
Internet@TV.
@ Utilisez ces boutons dans la liste des
chaînes, Media Play, et Internet@TV,
etc.
$ Permet d’afficher les listes de chaînes
à l’écran.
% Utilisez ces boutons dans la liste des
chaînes, Media Play et Anynet
+
, etc.
^ Permet d’activer le rétroéclairage des
boutons de la télécommande. Cette
fonction est pratique la nuit ou lorsqu’il
fait sombre dans la pièce. (L’utilisation
de la télécommande avec le bouton
lumineux ON/OFF( ) réglé sur On
réduit la durée d’utilisation de la pile.)
& Chaîne précédente.
* Chaîne suivante
Chaîne précédente
( Affiche le menu principal à l’écran.
) Affichage EPG (Guide électronique
des programmes)
a Permet de revenir au menu précédent.
b Permet de quitter le menu à l’écran.
c Cette fonction permet d’afficher Media
Play.
d Cette fonction vous permet d’afficher
Bibliothèque de contenu.
e Affichage numérique des sous-titres.
f Sélection de Audio Description.
Fonctions télétexte
2 Permet de quitter l’affichage télétexte
(en fonction du modèle)
7 Sélection du mode Télétexte
(LIST/FLOF)
8 Activation du télétexte
9 Taille du télétexte
@ Sélection des rubriques Fastext
# Affichage télétexte / informations
relatives au télétexte et programme
normal
$ Mémorisation du télétexte
& Page secondaire du télétexte
* P :Page télétexte suivante
P :Page télétexte précédente
( Index du télétexte
a Pause télétexte
b Annulation du télétexte
Insertion des piles dans la télécommande
1. Soulevez le couvercle situé à l’arrière de la télécommande comme indiqué sur la figure.
2. Placez-y deux piles AAA.
N Assurez-vous que les pôles “+” et “–” des piles correspondent au schéma situé à
l’intérieur du compartiment.
3. Refermez le couvercle.
N Retirez les piles et stockez-les dans un endroit frais et sec si vous n’utilisez pas la
télécommande pendant longtemps.
N Si la télécommande ne fonctionne pas, vérifiez les points suivants
1. Le téléviseur est-il sous tension ?
2. Les bornes + et - des piles ne sont-elles pas inversées ?
3. Les piles sont-elles déchargées ?
4. Le cordon d’alimentation est-il débranché ou y a-t-il une panne de courant ?
5. Une lampe fluorescente ou néon est-elle allumée à proximité ?
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:58:39 PMFrançais - 9
Utilisation des boutons rétroéclairés de la télécommande
Utilisez cette fonctionnalité dans des environnements sombres lorsque vous ne parvenez pas à voir correctement les boutons
de la télécommande.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton lumineux ON/OFF( ).
N Lorsque la position ON est activée, les boutons s'éclairent pendant quelques instants.
N Une pression sur un bouton de la télécommande lorsque celle-ci est activée permet de rétroéclairer les boutons pendant
quelques instants.
Mise en marche et arrêt
Le câble relié au secteur est fixé à l’arrière du téléviseur/moniteur.
1. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation sur une prise secteur appropriée.
N Le voyant de veille s’allume sur le téléviseur.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton POWERP de votre téléviseur.
N Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le bouton POWERP ou sur le bouton TV de votre télécommande pour allumer le
téléviseur.
N Le dernier programme que vous avez regardé est automatiquement resélectionné.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton numérique (de 0 à 9) ou le bouton Chaîne suivante/précédente (< / >) de la télécommande ou sur le
bouton < CH> de votre téléviseur.
N Lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, vous devrez choisir la langue dans laquelle vous souhaitez que les
menus s’affichent.
4. Pour éteindre votre téléviseur, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton POWERP.
Mise en mode veille de votre téléviseur
Vous pouvez mettre votre téléviseur en mode veille afin de réduire la consommation électrique. Ce mode peut être utile si vous
souhaitez éteindre votre téléviseur temporairement (pendant un repas par exemple).
1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWERP de la télécommande.
N L’écran s’éteint et un voyant de veille rouge apparaît sur votre téléviseur.
2. Pour rallumer le téléviseur, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton POWERP, les boutons numériques (de 0 à 9), le bouton TV ou les
boutons Chaîne suivante/précédente (< / >).
N Ne laissez pas le téléviseur en mode veille pendant de longues périodes (lorsque vous êtes en vacances par exemple). Il est
conseillé de débrancher la prise d’alimentation secteur et de l’antenne.
Visualisation de laffichage
L’affichage identifie la chaîne en cours et l’état de certains paramètres audio et vidéo.
O Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher les informations.
Appuyez sur le bouton INFO de la télécommande. La télévision affiche la chaîne,
le type de son et l’état de certains paramètres de son et d’image.
• ▲, ▼: Vous pouvez afficher des informations relatives à une autre chaîne.
Pour accéder à la chaîne actuellement sélectionnée, appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE.
• ◄, ►: Vous pouvez afficher les informations relatives au programme souhaité de la
chaîne actuelle.
N Appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton INFO ou attendez environ 10 secondes
pour que l'affichage disparaisse automatiquement.
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information
E Watch
' Information
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:58:40 PMFrançais - 10
Affichage des menus
1. Une fois l’appareil allumé, appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Le menu principal apparaît
à l’écran. Plusieurs icônes s’affichent sur le côté gauche du menu : Image, Son,
Canal, Configuration, Entrée, Application, Assistance.
2. ENTERE Appuyez sur la touche ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner l’une des icônes.
Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE pour accéder au sous-menu de l’icône.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu.
N Les menus disparaissent de l’écran après environ une minute.
Utilisation du bouton TOOLS
Vous pouvez utiliser le bouton TOOLS pour sélectionner simplement et rapidement les fonctions que vous utilisez le plus souvent.
Le menu Outils change en fonction du mode d’entrée externe affiché.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Le menu Outils s’affiche.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner un menu, puis appuyez sur le
bouton ENTERE.
3. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE pour afficher, changer ou utiliser les
options de menu sélectionnés. Pour une description plus détaillée de chaque fonction,
reportez-vous à la page correspondante.
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), voir page 46
• Format de l’ image, voir page 16
• Mode Image, voir page 15
• Mode Son, voir page 20
• Veille, voir page 22
• SRS TS HD, voir page 20
• Mode éco., voir page 24
• Dual l ll, voir page 21
• Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris), voir page 14
• PIP, voir page 25
• Réglage Automatique, voir page 18
Fonction Plug & Play
Lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, des réglages de base s’effectuent l’un après l’autre de manière automatique.
N L’écran de veille est activé si aucune touche de la télécommande n’est actionnée pendant plus d’une minute lorsque le mode
Plug & Play est en cours d’exécution.
N L’écran de veille est activé si aucun signal de fonctionnement n’est reçu pendant plus de 15 minutes.
N Si vous sélectionnez par erreur un pays incorrect pour votre téléviseur, il se peut que les caractères affichés à l’écran soient incorrects.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER de la télécommande. Le menu Select the
OSD language s’affiche automatiquement. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Sélectionnez la langue appropriée en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur
le bouton ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Enr. démo ou Util. domicile, puis
appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Nous recommandons de régler le téléviseur sur le mode Util. domicile pour une meilleure qualité d’image dans votre
environnement personnel.
N Le mode Enr. démo n’est prévu que pour un usage en magasin.
N Si l’unité est accidentellement définie sur le mode Enr. démo et que vous souhaitez revenir au mode Util. domicile (standard) :
appuyez sur le bouton Volume du téléviseur. Lorsque l’affichage à l’écran du volume apparaît, appuyez pendant 5 secondes sur
le bouton MENU du téléviseur.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Sélectionnez le pays approprié en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼. Appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE pour confirmer votre choix.
N Après la sélection du pays dans le menu Country, certains modèles peuvent demander, en plus, le code PIN.
N Lors de l'entrée du code PIN, 0-0-0-0 n'est pas disponible.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour mémoriser les chaînes de la connexion sélectionnée, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
• Hertzien: signal d’antenne hertzien.
• Câblé: signal d’antenne câblé.
Plug & Play
Select the OSD Language.
Language :
U Move E Enter
▲
Nederlands
English
Eesti
▼
Outils
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
Format de l’ image : 16/9 auto
Mode Image : Standard
Mode Son : Personnel
Veille : Arrêt
SRS TS HD : Arrêt
Mode éco. : Arrêt
Dual l ll : Mono
Réglage Automatique
U Dépl. E Entrer e Quitter
Mode : Standard
Lum. Cellules : 4
Contraste : 95
Luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V/R) : V50 / R50
Paramètres avancés
Image
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:58:41 PMFrançais - 11
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner la source d’antenne à mémoriser. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour
sélectionner Démarrer.
• Numérique et Analogique: chaînes numériques et analogiques.
• Numérique: chaînes numériques.
• Analogique: chaînes analogiques.
N La recherche de chaînes démarre et se termine automatiquement.
N Pour une description plus détaillée de la sélection du mode Câble, Reportez-vous à la page 11.
6. Le message Définit le mode Horloge. s’affiche. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour
sélectionner Auto., puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, Définit la date et l’heure s’affiche. (Pour une description détaillée de l’option Manuel, Reportezvous à la page 22)
N Si vous avez reçu un signal numérique, l’heure sera automatiquement réglée.
7. Une brève instruction concernant la manière d’obtenir le meilleur de votre téléviseur HDTV s’affiche. Appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE.
N Ce menu est disponible dans le menu Assistance du Guide de connexion HD.
N Vous pouvez passer à la page précédente ou suivante en appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►.
8. Le message Profitez de votre visionnage s’affiche.
N Si vous souhaitez regarder la télévision immédiatement, sélectionnez Regarder la TV.
N Si vous souhaitez afficher Voir Guide Produit, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Si vous souhaitez réinitialiser cette fonction...
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU pour afficher le menu. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼
pour sélectionner Configuration, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE à nouveau pour sélectionner le mode Plug & Play.
3. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur
est ‘0-0-0-0’.
N Si vous souhaitez changer ce code PIN, reportez-vous à la page 24.
N La fonction Plug & Play est uniquement disponible en mode TV.
Mémorisation des chaînes
❑ Pays
Canal numérique: Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes numériques.
Canal analogique: Permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes analogiques.
N L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
❑ Mémorisation Auto
Cherche toutes les chaînes avec des stations de diffusion actives (et leur disponibilité
en fonction du pays) et les enregistre dans la mémoire du téléviseur.
Vous pouvez mémoriser les chaînes de la connexion sélectionnée.
• Hertzien: Signal d’antenne hertzien.
• Câble: Signal d’antenne câblé.
Vous pouvez sélectionner la source d’antenne à mémoriser.
• Numérique et Analogique: Chaînes numériques et analogiques.
• Numérique: Chaînes numériques.
• Analogique: Chaînes analogiques.
N Lors de la sélection de l’option Câble.
• Mode de recherche: Affiche le mode de recherche (Rapide)
- Network ID: Affiche le code d’identification du réseau.
- Fréquence: Affiche la fréquence correspondant au canal.
- Modulation: Affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
- Taux de symbole: Affiche les taux de symboles disponibles.
• Mode de recherche: Affiche le mode de recherche (Complet, Réseau)
- Fréq. début: Affiche les valeurs de début de la fréquence.
- Fréq. fin: Affiche les valeurs de fin de la fréquence.
- Modulation: Affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
- Taux de symbole: Affiche les taux de symboles disponibles.
N Si vous voulez arrêter la Mémorisation Auto, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Le message Arrêter le programme automatique ? s’affiche.
Sélectionnez Oui en appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Gestion des canaux
Canal
Pays ►
Mémorisation Auto
Mémorisation Manuelle
Option de recherche de câble
Guide Complet
Mini Guide
Par défaut : Guide Complet
Liste des chaînes
Configuration
Plug & Play ►
langue des menus : Français
Horloge
Diffuser
Sécurité
Réseau
Général
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:58:41 PMFrançais - 12
❑ Mémorisation Manuelle
Permet de chercher manuellement une chaîne et de l’enregistrer dans la mémoire du téléviseur.
Chaîne numérique (numérique)
N La fonction Canal numérique est uniquement disponible en mode DTV.
• Canal: Sélectionnez le numéro de canal à l’aide des boutons ▲, ▼ ou des touches numériques (de 0 à 9).
• Fréquence: Sélectionnez la fréquence à l’aide des touches numériques (de 0 à 9).
• Bande passante: Sélectionnez la bande passante à l’aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼.
N Au terme de la recherche, les chaînes de la liste sont mises à jour.
Chaîne analogique
Mémorisation manuelle de chaînes analogiques.
• Programme (numéro de programme à attribuer à une chaîne) : sélectionnez le numéro de chaîne à l’aide des boutons ▲, ▼
ou des touches numériques (de 0 à 9).
• Système de Couleur → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : Sélectionnez le système de couleurs à l’aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼.
• Système Sonore → BG / DK / I / L : Sélectionnez le système audio à l’aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼.
• Canal (Si vous connaissez le numéro de la chaîne à mémoriser): Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner C (chaîne
hertzienne) ou S (chaîne câblée). Appuyez sur le bouton ►, puis sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ ou une touche numérique (de 0 à 9)
pour sélectionner le numéro de votre choix.
N Si aucun son ne sort ou si le son produit est anormal, sélectionnez de nouveau la norme son requise.
• Recherche (lorsque vous ne connaissez pas les numéros de chaîne): Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour lancer la
recherche. Le syntoniseur balaie la plage de fréquences jusqu’à ce que vous receviez la première chaîne ou la chaîne que vous
avez sélectionnée à l’écran.
• Mémoriser (Permet de mémoriser la chaîne et le numéro de programme correspondant) : Sélectionnez OK en appuyant sur le
bouton ENTERE.
N Mode des canaux
- C (Mode chaîne hertzienne): Dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner un canal en saisissant le numéro attribué à chacune
des stations de télédiffusion.
- S (Mode chaîne câblée): Dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant le numéro attribué à chacune des
chaînes câblées.
❑ Option de recherche de câble
Vous pouvez configurer des options de recherche supplémentaires telles que la fréquence et le taux de symbole pour la recherche
de réseaux câblés (en fonction du pays).
• Fréq. début : Affiche les valeurs de début de la fréquence.
• Fréq. fin : Affiche les valeurs de fin de la fréquence.
• Modulation : Affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles.
• Taux de symbole : Affiche les taux de symboles disponibles.
N Si la valeur Fréq. début est supérieure à la valeur Fréq. fin, un message d’avertissement s’affiche.
❑ Guide Complet / Mini Guide
Les informations relatives au guide électronique des programmes (EPG) sont fournies par les diffuseurs. Des entrées de
programmes peuvent être vides ou ne pas être à jour en raison des informations diffusées sur un canal donné. L’affichage fera une
mise à jour automatique dès qu’une nouvelle information sera disponible.
• Guide Complet : Affiche les informations relatives au programme toutes les heures. Deux heures de programme sont affichées
et vous pouvez faire défiler le programme en avançant ou en remontant dans le temps.
• Mini Guide : Les informations de chaque programme sont affichées ligne par ligne sur l’écran du mini-guide de la chaîne
actuelle, en commençant par le programme en cours, dans l’ordre des heures de début des programmes.
❑ Par Défaut
Mini Guide / Guide complet
Vous pouvez choisir d’afficher soit le Mini Guide soit le Guide Complet lorsque vous
appuyez sur le bouton GUIDE de la télécommande.
O Vous pouvez aussi afficher le guide en appuyant tout simplement sur le bouton
GUIDE.
Suite...
Canal
Guide Complet
Mini Guide
Par défaut : Guide complet►
Liste des chaînes
Mode Canal : Chaînes ajoutées
Réglage fin
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:58:42 PMFrançais - 13
Utilisation du Guide complet / Mini-guide
▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►,
ENTERE Sélectionnez un programme en appuyant sur le bouton ▲/▼/◄/► ENTERE.
ROUGE Basculez entre le Guide Complet ou le Mini Guide.
VERT Guide Complet : Permet de reculer rapidement. (-24 heures)
JAUNE Guide Complet : Permet d’avancer rapidement. (+24 heures)
BLEU Quittez le guide.
INFO Le bouton INFO permet d’obtenir des informations détaillées.
❑ Mode Canal
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton P () l’ordre des chaînes affichées change dans la liste de chaînes sélectionnée.
Chaînes ajoutées: Les chaînes sont sélectionnées dans la liste des chaînes mémorisée.
Chaînes favorites: Les chaînes sont sélectionnées dans la liste des chaînes favorites.
❑ Réglage fin (Chaînes analogiques uniquement)
Si la réception est claire, vous n’avez pas besoin d’effectuer une syntonisation fine du canal, car cette opération s’effectue
automatiquement pendant la recherche et la mémorisation. Si le signal est faible ou déformé, vous pouvez être amené à effectuer
manuellement un réglage fin du canal.
N Les canaux réglés et mémorisés sont repérés par un astérisque * placé à droite de leur numéro dans la bannière des canaux.
N Si vous n’enregistrez pas les chaînes à synchronisation fine dans la mémoire, les réglages ne seront pas enregistrés.
N Pour rétablir la syntonisation fine, sélectionnez Réinit à l’aide du bouton ▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Gestion des chaînes
Ce menu permet d’ajouter/supprimer ou définir des chaînes favorites et d’utiliser le guide
des programmes pour les émissions numériques.
N Sélectionnez une chaîne dans l’écran Tous les canaux, Chaînes ajoutées, Favoris
ou Programmé en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
Vous pouvez alors regarder la chaîne sélectionnée.
• Tous les canaux : Affiche toutes les chaînes actuellement disponibles.
• Chaînes ajoutées : Affiche toutes les chaînes ajoutées.
• Favoris : Affiche toutes les chaînes favorites.
• Programmé : Affiche tous les programmes actuellement réservés.
O Appuyez sur le bouton CH LIST de la télécommande pour afficher les listes de
chaînes.
N Utilisation des boutons de couleur dans la liste des chaînes
- Rouge (Type de chaîne) : Permet de basculer entre TV, Radio, Données / Autres et Tout.
- Vert (Zoom) : Agrandit ou réduit un numéro de chaîne.
- Jaune (Sélectionner) : Sélectionne plusieurs listes de chaînes.
- T TOOLS (Outils): affiche le menu Supprimer (ou Ajouter), Ajouter aux favoris
(ou Supprimer des favoris), Verrouil. (ou Déverr.), Rappel de programme, Modif.
nom chaîne, Modif. numéro chaîne, Trier, Désélectionner tout, Sélectionner tout
ou Mémorisation Auto.
(Les menus Outils peuvent varier en fonction de la situation.)
N Icônes d’état des chaînes
A Chaîne analogique. c Chaîne sélectionnée en appuyant
sur le bouton jaune.
♥ Chaîne définie comme favorite. ( Programme en cours de diffusion.
\ Chaîne verrouillée. ) Programme réservé
Canal
Mini Guide
Par défaut : Guide comp.
Liste des chaînes
Mode Canal : Chaînes ajoutées
Réglage fin
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Tous les canaux
Tous Type de canal Zoom Sélect. Page Outils
Guide Complet
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
Aucune information détaillée.
Aujourd’hui 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
900 f tn
901 ITV Play
902 Kerrang!
903 Kiss
903 oneword
▼ 903 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
Aucune information
Aucune information
Aucune information
Freshmen O..
Mini Guide DTV Cable 900 f tn
Street Hypnosis
Booze Britain
2:00
2:30
▼ 5:00
Freshmen On Campus
Regarder Information Page Guide complet Quitter
Regarder Information Page Mini Guide +24 heures Quitter
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:58:42 PMFrançais - 14
❑ Menu d’outils de la liste des chaînes (dans Tous les canaux / Chaînes ajoutées / Favoris)
N Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu Outils.
N Les options du menu Outils peuvent varier selon l’état de la chaîne.
Ajouter / Supprimer
Vous pouvez supprimer ou ajouter une chaîne afin d’afficher les chaînes de votre choix.
N Toutes les chaînes supprimées apparaîtront dans le menu Tous les canaux.
N Une chaîne grisée est une chaîne qui a été supprimée.
N Le menu Ajouter apparaît uniquement pour les chaînes supprimées.
N Vous pouvez également ajouter une chaîne au menu Chaînes ajoutées ou Favoris.
Ajouter aux favoris / Supprimer des favoris
Vous pouvez définir comme favorites les chaînes que vous regardez souvent.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils.
Vous pouvez également définir une chaîne favorite en sélectionnant Outils →
Ajouter aux favoris (ou Supprimer des favoris).
O Pour sélectionner les chaînes favorites que vous avez configurées, appuyez sur le
bouton FAV.CH de la télécommande. control.
N Le symbole “♥” s’affiche et la chaîne est définie comme favorite.
N Toutes les chaînes favorites apparaîtront dans le menu Favoris.
Verrouil. / Déverr.
Vous pouvez verrouiller une chaîne afin qu’elle ne puisse pas être sélectionnée ni
visualisée. Cette fonction n’est disponible que si l’option Verrouillage Canal est définie sur
Marche. (voir page 24)
N L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
N Le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est ‘0-0-0-0’. Vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN
dans le menu.
N Le symbole “\” s’affiche et la chaîne est verrouillée.
Rappel de programme
Si vous réservez un programme que vous souhaitez regarder, la chaîne bascule automatiquement vers la chaîne réservée dans
la liste de chaînes, même si vous êtes en train de regarder une autre chaîne. Pour réserver un programme, réglez d’abord l’heure
actuelle. (voir page 22)
N Il n’est possible de réserver que des chaînes mémorisées.
N Vous pouvez régler directement la chaîne, le mois, le jour, l’heure et les minutes à l’aide des touches numériques de la télécommande.
N Tous les programmes réservés apparaîtront dans le menu Programmé.
N Guide des programmes numériques et affichage des réservations Quand une chaîne numérique est sélectionnée et que vous
appuyez sur le bouton ►, le Guide des programmes de la chaîne s’affiche. Vous pouvez réserver un programme en suivant les
procédures décrites ci-dessus.
Modif. nom chaîne (Chaînes analogiques uniquement)
Vous pouvez attribuer aux chaînes un libellé qui s’affiche chaque fois que vous les sélectionnez.
N Les noms des chaînes numériques leur sont automatiquement attribués ; vous ne pouvez pas les modifier.
Modif. numéro chaîne (Chaînes numériques uniquement)
Vous pouvez également modifier le numéro de chaîne à l’aide des touches numériques de la télécommande.
Tri des canaux (Chaînes analogiques uniquement)
Cette opération permet de changer les numéros de programme des chaînes mémorisées. Cette opération peut s’avérer nécessaire
après l’utilisation de la mémorisation automatique.
Désélectionner tout / Sélectionner tout
Vous pouvez sélectionner ou désélectionner toutes les chaînes de la liste des chaînes.
N Vous pouvez appliquer les fonctions d’ajout / suppression, d’ajout/suppression de favoris ou de verrouillage / déverrouillage à
plusieurs chaînes à la fois. Sélectionnez les chaînes voulues, puis appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour traiter toutes les chaînes
sélectionnées à la fois.
N La marque c s’affiche à gauche des chaînes sélectionnées.
N La fonction Désélectionner tout n’est disponible que si au moins une chaîne est sélectionnée.
Mémorisation Auto
N Pour plus d’informations sur le réglage des options, reportez-vous à la page 11.
N Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Canal, la fenêtre de
saisie du code PIN s’affiche.
❑ Menu d’outils de la liste des chaînes (dans Programmé)
Vous pouvez voir, modifier ou supprimer une réservation.
N Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour utiliser le menu Outils.
• Infos modif. : Permet de modifier une réservation.
• Annuler progr. : Permet d’annuler une réservation.
• Information : Permet de visualiser une réservation (et d’en changer les données).
• Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout : Permet de sélectionner ou de désélectionner
tous les programmes réservés.
Programmé
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer
Infos modif.
Annuler progr.
Information
Sélectionner tout
Tous Zoom Sélect. Outils Information
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Tous les canaux
Supprimer
Ajouter aux favoris
Verrouil.
Rappel de prog.
Modifi. nom de chaîne
Tri des canaux
▼
Tous Type de canal Zoom Sélect. Page Outils
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:58:43 PMFrançais - 15
Changement des réglages de l’image
❑ Mode
Vous pouvez sélectionner le type d’image correspondant le mieux à vos besoins d’affichage.
Dynamique / Standard / Econ. / Film
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils.
Vous pouvez également régler le mode d’image en sélectionnant Outils →
Mode d’image.
❑ Luminosité des cellules / Contraste / Luminosité / Netteté / Couleur /
Teinte (V/R)
Votre téléviseur offre plusieurs options de paramétrage qui permettent de contrôler la
qualité d’image.
• Luminosité des cellules : Règle la luminosité des pixels.
• Contraste : Règle le contraste de l’image.
• Luminosité : Règle la luminosité de l’image.
• Netteté : Règle la définition des bords de l’image.
• Couleur : Règle la saturation de couleur de l’image.
• Teinte (V/R) : Règle la teinte de l’image.
N Lorsque vous modifiez le paramètre Luminosité des cellules, Contraste, Luminosité, Netteté, Couleur ou Teinte (V/R),
l’affichage à l’écran change en conséquence.
N Les valeurs ajustées sont enregistrées pour tous les modes d’image.
N Dans les modes analogiques TV, Ext., AV du système PAL, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction Teinte.
N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Luminosité des cellules, Contraste et Luminosité.
N Chaque nouveau réglage est mémorisé séparément selon son mode d’entrée.
N L’énergie consommée pendant le fonctionnement peut être sensiblement réduite en baissant le niveau de luminosité de l’image.
Cela réduira le coût de fonctionnement général.
❑ Paramètres avancés
Vous pouvez régler les paramètres avancés de l’écran (couleur, contraste, etc.).
N L’option Paramètres avancés est disponible dans les modes Standard et Film.
N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les paramètres Contraste Dynam.,
Gamma et Balance blancs parmi les options du menu Paramètres avancés.
Nuance de noir → Arrêt / Sombre / Plus sombre / Le plus sombre
Vous pouvez améliorer la profondeur de l’image en réglant la densité du noir.
Contraste Dynam. → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé
Vous pouvez régler le contraste de l’écran pour obtenir un résultat optimal.
Gamma
Vous pouvez régler l’intensité des couleurs primaires (rouge, vert, bleu).
Espace couleur
Un espace de couleur est une matrice de couleurs composée de rouge, de vert et de bleu. Sélectionnez votre espace de couleur
préféré et appréciez la couleur la plus naturelle.
• Auto. : Définit automatiquement la gamme de couleurs en fonction de la source vidéo d’entrée.
• Natif : Définit une gamme de couleurs plus large en fonction de la source vidéo d’entrée.
• Personnel : Règle la gamme de couleurs en fonction de vos préférences.
N Personnalisation de l’espace de couleur
- Permet de régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction de vos préférences Couleur est disponible lorsque Espace couleur
est défini sur Personnel.
- Couleur → Rouge / Vert / Bleu / Jaune / Cyan / Magenta
- Rouge / Vert / Bleu : vous pouvez régler les valeurs RVB pour la couleur sélectionnée.
- Réinit. : Rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l’espace de couleur.
Réglage de l’image
Suite...
Mode : Standard ►
Lum. Cellules : 4
Contraste : 95
Luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V/R) : V50/R50
Paramètres avancés
Image
Couleur : 50
Teinte (V/R) : V50 / R50
Paramètres avancés ►
Options d’ image
Réinitialisation de l’ image
Image
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:58:44 PMFrançais - 16
Balance blancs
Vous pouvez régler la température des couleurs pour que celles-ci soient plus naturelles.
• Aj. Rouge / Aj. Vert / Aj. Bleu / Regl. Rouge / Regl. vert / Regl. bleu : la modification des valeurs de réglage actualise
l’affichage à l’écran.
• Réinit. : Rétablit la balance des blancs par défaut.
Carnation
Vous pouvez régler la densité de rouge de la carnation.
N La modification des valeurs de réglage actualise l’affichage à l’écran.
Netteté des contours → Arrêt / Marche
Vous pouvez faire ressortir les contours des objets dans l’image.
xvYCC → Arrêt / Marche
L’activation du mode xvYCC augmente les détails et l’espace de couleur lorsque vous regardez des films depuis un périphérique
externe (ex. : lecteur DVD).
N La fonction xvYCC est disponible lorsque le mode d’image est défini sur Cinéma et la sortie externe sur le mode HDMI ou
Composant.
N En fonction de votre périphérique externe, il se peut que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge.
❑ Options d’image
Vous pouvez personnaliser les réglages de l’image en fonction de vos préférences.
N En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les options Nuance Coul., Format et
Protection brûlure écran dans le menu Options d’image.
Nuance Coul. → Froide / Normal / Chaude1 / Chaude2 / Chaude3
Vous pouvez sélectionner la nuance de couleur la plus agréable à l’oeil.
N Les valeurs réglées sont mémorisées en fonction du mode Image sélectionné.
N L’option Chaude1, Chaude2 ou Chaude3 n’est activée que lorsque le mode
d’image est Film.
Format → 16/9 auto / 16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3 / Adapter à l’écran
Vous pouvez sélectionner le format d’image qui correspond le mieux à vos exigences d’affichage.
• 16/9 auto : Sélectionne 16:9 auto comme format d’image.
• 16:9 : Règle l’image en mode Large, c’est-à-dire en 16:9.
• Zoom large : Donnez à l’image une taille supérieure à 4:3.
• Zoom : Agrandit la taille de l’image sur l’écran dans le sens vertical.
• 4:3 : Règle l’image en mode Normal, c’est-à-dire en 4:3.
• Adapter à l’écran : Affiche le signal HD natif complet qu’un téléviseur normal ne peut pas afficher.
N Les options de format d’image peuvent varier en fonction de la source d’entrée.
N Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode sélectionné.
N En mode PC, seuls les modes 16:9 et 4:3 peuvent être réglés.
N Lorsque le mode PIP est réglé sur double ( , ), l’option Format de l’image est désactivée.
N Vous pouvez régler et enregistrer des paramètres pour chaque périphérique externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur.
N Une rémanence temporaire peut se produire si vous affichez une image statique pendant plus de deux heures sur l’écran du
téléviseur.
N Zoom large : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Zoom : Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Position, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le
bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour déplacer l’image vers le haut et vers le bas. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le
bouton ► pour sélectionner Format, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour augmenter
ou réduire la hauteur de l’image. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Après avoir sélectionné l’option Adapter à l’écran dans le mode HDMI (1080i / 1080p) ou Composant (1080i / 1080p) :
sélectionnez Position à l’aide du bouton ◄ ou ►. Utilisez le bouton ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► pour déplacer l’image.
N Réinit. : appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Réinit., puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Vous pouvez initialiser le réglage.
N Si vous utilisez la fonction Adapter à l’écran avec l’entrée HDMI 720p, une ligne sera coupée en haut, en bas, à gauche et
à droite, comme avec la fonction Overscan (Surbalayage).
Mode écran → 16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3
Lorsque vous réglez le format d’image sur 16:9 auto sur un téléviseur 16:9, vous pouvez déterminer le format d’affichage d’une
image 4:3 WSS, service d’écran large ou rien. Chaque pays européen emploie un format d’image cette fonction permet aux
utilisateurs de sélectionner le leur.
N Cette fonction n’est disponible qu’en mode 16:9 auto.
N Cette fonction n’est pas disponible en mode PC, Composant ni HDMI.
Suite...
Teinte (V/R) : V50 / R50
Paramètres avancés
Options d’ image ►
Réinitialisation de l’ image
Image
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:58:44 PMFrançais - 17
NR numérique → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto.
Si le signal de radiodiffusion reçu est faible, vous pouvez activer la fonction de réduction du bruit numérique (NR numérique) pour
faciliter la réduction d’images fantômes ou statiques qui peuvent apparaître à l’écran.
N Lorsque le signal est faible, sélectionnez une autre option jusqu’à obtention de la meilleure image possible.
Niv. noir HDMI → Normal / Bas
Vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l’écran.
N Cette fonction n’est active que si l’entrée externe se connecte à HDMI (signaux RVB).
1080 Full HD Motion Demo → Arrêt / Marche
La nouvelle génération d’écrans à plasma de Samsung’s offre des images animées Full HD étonnantes lorsque vous regardez du
sport, des films ou des jeux d’action.
N Cette fonction n’est pas disponible en mode PC, Jeu, ni Media Play.
Mode Film
Vous pouvez optimiser le mode d’image lorsque vous regardez des films.
• Arrêt : désactive la fonction Mode Film.
• Auto.1 : Fournit automatiquement la meilleure qualité d’image lorsque vous regardez un film.
• Auto.2 : Optimise automatiquement le texte vidéo lorsque vous regardez un film.
• Cinema Smooth : Offre une expérience cinéma ultime.
N Le mode Film est pris en charge avec les modes TV, Vidéo, Composant(480i / 1080i) et HDMI(1080i).
Démo 100 Hz réel → Arrêt / Marche
Vous pouvez clairement voir la différence entre 100Hz réel et 50 Hz, surtout lorsque vous regardez des scènes rapides. Lorsqu’une
image lente est affichée, vous ne serez pas en mesure de faire la distinction entre 100Hz réel et 50Hz. La fonction Démo 100 Hz
n’est disponible qu’avec un signal 50 Hz. Le mode Démo 100Hz réel est fourni pour des démonstrations en magasin avec des
images spéciales.
Mode bleu uniquement → Arrêt / Marche
Cette fonction est destinée aux spécialistes de mesure des appareils AV. Cette fonction affiche le signal bleu en supprimant
simplement les signaux rouge et vert du signal vidéo, de manière à fournir un effet Filtre bleu utilisé pour régler la couleur et la
teinte de l’équipement vidéo, tel que des lecteurs de DVD, systèmes de cinéma à domicile, etc.
N Mode bleu uniquement n’est disponible que si le mode d’image est réglé sur Film ou Standard.
Protection brûlure écran
Pour réduire le risque de brûlure d’écran, cet écran est équipé d’une technologie de prévention des brûlures qui permet de régler le
mouvement de l’image de bas en haut (vertical) et de gauche à droite (horizontal). Le réglage de l’horloge permet de programmer
en quelques minutes la durée séparant les mouvements de l’image.
• Modif. Pixel : Cette fonction permet de déplacer les pixels sur l’écran à plasma dans le sens vertical ou horizontal, afin d’éviter
une image résiduelle sur l’écran.
N Conditions optimales pour la modification des pixels
Option TV/Ext/AV/Composant/HDMI PC
Horizontal 0~2 2
Vertical 0~4 4
Horloge (minute) 1~4 min 2 min
N La valeur de Pixel Shift (Modif. Pixel) peut changer selon le mode et la taille du moniteur (pouces).
N Cette fonction n’est pas disponible en mode Adapter à l’écran.
• Défilement : Cette fonction contribue à supprimer les images résiduelles à l’écran en déplaçant tous les pixels sur l’écran à
plasma, selon un motif prédéfini. Utilisez cette fonction lorsque des images résiduelles ou des symboles apparaissent à l’écran,
en particulier lorsque vous affichez une image fixe à l’écran pendant une longue période.
• Gris de bord : Si vous regardez la télévision dans un rapport d’écran 4:3, l’écran est protégé contre tout dommage grâce à
l’ajustement de la balance des blancs sur les côtés gauche et droit.
- Clair : Si le rapport d’écran est défini sur 4:3, les bords gauche et droit sont éclaircis.
- Sombre : Si le rapport d’écran est défini sur 4:3, les bords gauche et droit sont assombris.
Suite...
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:58:44 PMFrançais - 18
Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC
N Préréglage : Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode PC.
❑ Réglage Automatique
Le réglage automatique permet l’ajustement automatique de l’écran du PC affiché sur le
téléviseur en fonction du signal vidéo entrant du PC. Les valeurs des options Regl. Prec,
Regl. Base et Position sont définies automatiquement.
N Cette fonction ne s’applique pas en mode DVI-HDMI.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils.
Vous pouvez également configurer l’option Réglage Automatique en
sélectionnant Outils → Réglage Automatique.
❑ Ecran
Lorsque vous réglez la qualité de l’image, l’objectif est d’éliminer ou de réduire les parasites visuels. Si vous ne pouvez pas éliminer
ces parasites par une syntonisation fine, réglez la fréquence (Regl. Base) au mieux, puis effectuez de nouveau une syntonisation
fine. Une fois les parasites réduits, effectuez un nouveau réglage de l’image pour l’aligner au centre de l’écran.
Regl. Base
Règle la fréquence lorsque du bruit vertical apparaît à l’écran.
Regl. Prec
Eclaircit l’écran.
Position du PC
Réglez la position d’affichage du PC si elle ne convient pas pour l’écran du téléviseur. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour régler la
position verticale. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour régler la position horizontale.
Réinitialiser Image
Vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs par défaut de tous les réglages d’image.
❑ Réinitialisation de l’image → Réinitial. mode image / Annuler
Rétablit toutes les valeurs par défaut des paramètres de l’image.
N Sélectionnez un mode d’image à rétablir. La fonction de réinitialisation est exécutée
pour chaque mode d’image.
Luminosité : 45
Netteté : 50
Réglage Automatique ►
Ecran
Paramètres avancés
Options d’ image
Réinitialisation de l’ image
Image Picture
Paramètres avancés
Options d’ image
Réinitialisation de l’ image ►
Image
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:58:44 PMFrançais - 19
Ecran du PC
❑ Configuration de votre logiciel PC (instructions basées sur Windows XP)
Les paramètres d’affichage Windows indiqués ci-dessous sont ceux d’un ordinateur
type. Les affichages à l’écran sur votre PC seront probablement différents, en
fonction de votre version de Windows et votre carte vidéo. Cependant, même si les
affichages diffèrent, les informations de configuration de base s’appliquent dans la
plupart des cas. Dans le cas contraire, contactez le fabricant de votre ordinateur ou
votre revendeur Samsung.
1. Cliquez sur “Panneau de configuration” dans le menu Démarrer de Windows.
2. Lorsque vous êtes sur l’écran du panneau de configuration, cliquez sur “Apparence
et thèmes”. Une boîte de dialogue apparaît.
3. Cliquez sur “Affichage”. Une boîte de dialogue vous propose des options d’affichage.
4. Sélectionnez l’onglet “Paramètres” dans la boîte de dialogue. Le réglage correct de la
taille (résolution)
optimal : 1920 X 1080 pixels
S’il existe une option de
fréquence verticale sur votre boîte de dialogue des paramètres d’affichage, la valeur
correcte est “60” ou “60 Hz”. Sinon, cliquez simplement sur “OK” pour quitter la boîte
de dialogue.
❑ Modes d’affichage
La taille et la position de l’écran varient en fonction du type d’écran et de sa résolution. Les résolutions indiquées dans le tableau
ci-dessous sont recommandées.
N Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la borne HDMI IN 2(DVI).
N Le mode entrelacé n’est pas pris en charge.
N Le téléviseur peut fonctionner de façon anormale si le format vidéo sélectionné n’est pas standard.
N Les modes Séparé et Composite sont pris en charge. SOG (SVSV) n’est pas pris en charge.
N Un câble VGA trop long ou de qualité médiocre peut être source de parasites visuels dans les modes haute résolution
(1920 x 1080).
Entrée D-Sub et HDMI/DVI
Mode Résolution
Fréquence horizontale
(KHz)
Fréquence verticale
(kHz)
Fréquence de l’horloge
pixels (MHhz)
Polarité synchronisée
(H/V)
IBM
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / -
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / +
MAC
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / -
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / -
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / +
VESA CVT
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / +
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / +
1280 x 720
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / +
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / +
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / +
VESA DMT
640 x 480
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / -
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / -
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / -
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / +
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / +
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / +
1024 x 768
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / -
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / -
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / +
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 800
49.702 59.810 83.500 - / +
62.795 74.934 106.500 - / +
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 1024
63.981 60.020 108.000 + / +
79.976 75.025 135.000 + / +
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / +
1440 x 900
55.935 59.887 106.500 - / +
70.635 74.984 136.750 - / +
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / +
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / +
VESA GTF
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / +
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / -
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:58:45 PMFrançais - 20
Changement de la norme Son
❑ Mode
Vous pouvez sélectionner le type d’effet sonore souhaité lorsque vous regardez un
programme donné.
Standard / Musique / Film / Voix claire / Personnel
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez
également régler le mode son en sélectionnant Outils → Mode son.
❑ Egaliseur
Vous pouvez régler les paramètres du son en fonction de vos préférences.
• Mode : vous pouvez sélectionner un mode son conforme à vos préférences.
• Balance : Définit la balance entre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche.
• 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (réglage de la bande passante) : Permet de régler le niveau de fréquences de la bande
passante.
• Réinit. : Rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l’égaliseur.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Arrêt / Marche
SRS TruSurround HD correspond à la technologie TruBass qui associe les fonctionnalités TruSurround et FOCUS.
SRS TruSurround HD permet de bénéficier du son Surround 5.1 virtuel au niveau des deux haut-parleurs du téléviseur. Cette
fonction offre des basses riches et améliore la résolution des hautes fréquences.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils.
Vous pouvez également définir l’option SRS TruSurround HD en sélectionnant
Outils → SRS TS HD.
TruSurround HD, SRS et le symbole sont des marques de SRS Labs, Inc.
La technologie TruSurround HD est incorporée sous licence de SRS Labs, Inc..
N Si le son est anormal lors de l’écoute de musique sur le téléviseur, réglez l’égaliseur et la fonction SRS TruSurround HD
(Arrêt / Marche).
❑ Langue audio (Chaînes numériques uniquement)
Vous pouvez modifier la langue par défaut des sous-titres et de l’audio. Affiche les informations relatives à la langue pour le flot
d’entrée.
N Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue uniquement parmi les langues en cours de diffusion.
❑ Format Audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (Chaînes numériques uniquement)
Lorsque le son est émis à la fois par le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio, un effet d’écho peut se produire en raison de la
différence de vitesse de décodage entre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction Haut-parleur
TV.
N Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue uniquement parmi les langues en cours de diffusion.
Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby et le symbole du double D sont des marques déposées de Dolby Laboratories.
❑ Description audio (Chaînes numériques uniquement)
Il s’agit d’une fonction audio auxiliaire qui fournit une piste audio supplémentaire à l’intention des personnes malvoyantes. Cette
fonction traite le flux audio relatif à la description audio (AD) lorsqu’il est envoyé avec le son principal par le radiodiffuseur. Les
utilisateurs peuvent activer ou désactiver la description audio et régler le volume.
O Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton AD de la
télécommande.
Description audio → Arrêt / Marche
Active ou désactive la fonction de description audio.
Volume
Règle le volume de la description audio.
N Volume est actif lorsque Description audio est défini sur Marche.
Réglage du son
Mode : Personnel ►
Egaliseur
SRS TruSurround HD : Arrêt
Langue audio : ----
Format Audio : ----
Description audio
Volume auto : Arrêt
Sélection Haut-parleur : Haut-parleur TV
Son
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:58:46 PMFrançais - 21
❑ Volume auto → Arrêt / Marche
Chaque station de télédiffusion possède ses propres conditions de signal. Il n’est donc pas facile de régler le volume chaque fois
que vous changez de chaîne. Cette fonction permet de régler automatiquement le volume du canal désiré en réduisant la sortie son
lorsque le signal de modulation est puissant ou en l’augmentant lorsque le signal est faible.
❑ Sélection du haut-parleur → Haut-parleur externe / Haut-parleur TV
Pour entendre le son par l’intermédiaire d’enceintes séparées, désactivez l’amplificateur interne.
N Les boutons – +, M MUTE ne fonctionnent pas lorsque la fonction Sélection du haut-parleur est définie sur Hautparleur externe.
N Si vous sélectionnez Haut-parleur externe dans le menu Sélection du haut-parleur, les réglages du son sont limités.
Haut-parleurs internes du téléviseur
Sortie audio (Optique, Sortie G/D) vers système
audio
TV / Ext. / AV / Composant / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Composant / PC / HDMI
Haut-parleur TV Sortie enceinte Sortie son
Haut-parleur externe Silence Sortie son
Absence de signal
vidéo
Silence Silence
❑ Sélection du son
Lorsque la fonction PIP est activée, vous pouvez écouter le son de l’image secondaire (l’image PIP).
• Principal : Active le son de l’image principale.
• Secondaire : Active le son de l’image secondaire.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez
également régler le mode sonore de l’image secondaire en sélectionnant
Outils → PIP → Sélection du son.
N Vous pouvez sélectionner cette option lorsque le mode PIP est réglé sur Marche.
❑ Réinitialisation du son
Réinitial. tout / Réinitial. mode son / Annuler : Vous pouvez rétablir les valeurs
par défaut des paramètres audio.
Sélection du mode son
Lorsque vous réglez cette option sur Dual l ll, le mode son actuel est affiché à l’écran.
Type de programme Indication à l’écran
NICAM
Stéréo
Programme normal
(Audio standard)
Mono (utilisation normale)
Normal + Mono NICAM NICAM
Mono
(Normal)
NICAM Stéréo
NICAM
Stereo
Mono
(Normal)
NICAM Dual-I/II
NICAM
Dual-1
NICAM
Dual-2
Mono
(Normal)
A2
Stéréo
Programme normal
(Audio standard)
Mono (utilisation normale)
Bilingue ou DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II
Stéréo Stéréo
Mono
(Mono forcé)
N Si le signal stéréo est faible et qu’une commutation automatique se produit, passez alors en Mono.
N Cette fonction n’est activée qu’en son stéréo. Elle est désactivée en mode mono.
N Cette fonction n’est disponible qu’en mode TV.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez
également sélectionner le mode son en sélectionnant Outils → Dual l ll.
Sélection Haut-parleur : Haut-parleur TV
Sélection du son : Principal
Réinitialisation du son ►
Son
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:58:46 PMFrançais - 22
Description des Fonctions
Réglage de l’heure
❑ Horloge
Le réglage de l’horloge est nécessaire pour utiliser les différentes fonctions de minuterie
de la télévision.
N L’heure actuelle s’affiche à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton INFO.
N Si vous débranchez le cordon d’alimentation, vous devez régler de nouveau l’horloge.
Mode Horloge
Vous pouvez régler l’heure actuelle manuellement ou automatiquement.
• Auto. : Règle automatiquement l’heure en fonction de signaux diffusés.
• Manuel : Permet de régler l’heure manuellement.
Réglage Horloge
Vous pouvez régler manuellement l’heure actuelle.
N Activez cette option lorsque Mode Horloge est défini sur Manuel.
N Vous pouvez régler directement les valeurs Jour, Mois, Année, Heure, Minute en
appuyant sur les touches numériques de la télécommande.
❑ Veille → Arrêt / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
La minuterie de mise en veille éteint automatiquement la télévision après une durée
préréglée (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 ou 180 minutes).
N Le téléviseur passe automatiquement en mode veille lorsque la minuterie atteint 0.
N Pour annuler la fonction Veille, sélectionnez Arrêt.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez
également régler la minuterie de mise en veille en sélectionnant Outils → Veille.
❑ Minuteur 1 / Minuteur 2 / Minuteur 3
Vous pouvez régler l’heure à laquelle vous souhaitez éteindre ou allumer le téléviseur.
• Période d’activation : Règle l’heure à laquelle vous souhaitez allumer le téléviseur.
• Période de désactivation : Règle l’heure à laquelle vous souhaitez éteindre le téléviseur.
• Volume : Règle le niveau du volume.
• Source : Sélectionne le téléviseur, USB le périphérique.
N Lorsque vous sélectionnez TV, vous pouvez régler l’Antenne et le Canal.
- Antenne : Permet de sélectionner l’option Hertzien ou Câble.
- Canal : Permet de sélectionner la chaîne de votre choix.
N Lorsque vous sélectionnez USB, vous pouvez régler le Contenu.
- Contenu : Sélectionne le contenu souhaité sur USB.
N Si le périphérique USB ne contient aucun fichier musical ou si le dossier contenant un fichier musical n'est pas sélectionné,
la fonction de veille ne fonctionne pas correctement.
• Répétition : Sélectionnez Une fois, Ts jours, Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel.
N Lorsque Manuel est sélectionné, appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner le jour de votre choix. Appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE sur le jour de votre choix. Le symbole c apparaît alors.
N TTout le dossier présent sur le périphérique USB prend en charge les caractères Anglais 64.
N Vous devez préalablement régler l’horloge.
N Vous pouvez régler l’heure, la minute et la chaîne directement à l’aide des touches numériques de la télécommande.
N Arrêt automatique
Lorsque vous réglez la minuterie sur Marche, le téléviseur s’éteint si aucune commande n’est utilisée dans les 3 heures qui suivent
la mise sous tension par le minuteur. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque la minuterie est réglée sur Marche, elle
permet d’éviter toute surchauffe occasionnée par une utilisation prolongée du téléviseur.
Horloge
Horloge : -- : -- ►
Veille : Arrêt
Minuteur 1 : Désactivé
Minuteur 2 : Désactivé
Minuteur 3 : Désactivé
U Dépl. E Entrer R Retour
Configuration
Plug & Play
langue des menus : Français
Horloge ►
Diffuser
Sécurité
Réseau
Général
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:58:46 PMFrançais - 23
Réglage du menu Configuration
❑ Langue des menus
Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue des menus.
❑ Diffuser
Sous-titres
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les sous-titres. Utilisez ce menu pour définir le
mode des sous-titres. Normal s’affiche sous le menu pour les sous-titres de base.
Malentendants correspond aux sous-titres destinés aux personnes malentendantes.
• Sous-titres → Arrêt / Marche : Active ou désactive les sous-titres.
• Mode → Normal / Malentendants : Définit le mode des sous-titres.
• Langue des sous-titres : Configure la langue des sous-titres.
N Si le programme visionné n’offre pas de fonction Malentendants, le mode Normal
est automatiquement activé même si le mode Malentendants est sélectionné.
N L’anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas diffusée.
O Vous pouvez sélectionner ces options en appuyant sur le bouton SUBT. de la
télécommande.
Texte numérique → Désactiver / Activer
Si le programme est diffusé avec du textebv numérique, cette fonction est activée.
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Norme internationale pour les systèmes de codage des données utilisés avec le multimédia et l’hypermédia. Niveau supérieur
à celui du système MPEG, qui inclut de l’hypermédia à liaison de données tel que des images fixes, le service de caractères,
l’animation, les fichiers graphiques et vidéo et les données multimédia. MHEG est une technologie d’interaction de l’utilisateur
en cours d’utilisation appliquée à divers domaines, dont la vidéo à la demande (VOD), la télévision interactive (ITV), le
commerce électronique, la téléformation, la téléconférence, les bibliothèques numériques et les jeux en réseau.
Langue du télétexte
Vous pouvez définir la langue du télétexte en sélectionnant le type de langue.
N L’anglais est la langue par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas diffusée.
Préférence
• Première Langue Audio / Deuxième Langue Audio / Langue princ. sous-titres / Langue sec. sous-titres / Première
Langue Télétexte / Deuxième Langue Télétexte
Cette fonction permet de sélectionner une langue. La langue sélectionnée ici est la langue par défaut lorsque l’utilisateur
sélectionne un canal.
Si vous changez la langue, les options Langue des sous-titres, Langue audio et Langue du télétexte du menu Langue sont
automatiquement modifiées en conséquence.
Ces options présentent une liste des langues prises en charge par la chaîne actuelle et la langue sélectionnée est affichée
en surbrillance. Si vous modifiez le paramètre de la langue, la nouvelle sélection n’est valable que pour la chaîne actuelle.
Le nouveau paramétrage n’affecte pas le réglage de l’option Langue princ. sous-titres, Première Langue Audio ou Première
Langue Télétexte du menu Préférence.
Interface commune
• Installation de la carte d’interface commune CI(CI+)
1. Achetez le module CI(CI+) CAM en vous rendant chez le revendeur le plus
proche ou par téléphone.
2. Insérez la carte d'interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) dans le CAM (module
d'accès commun) dans le sens indiqué par la flèche jusqu'à ce qu'elle se loge en
place.
3. Insérez le CAM avec la carte d'interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) installée
dans la fente de l'interface commune
N Insérez la CAM dans le sens indiqué par la flèche, tout droit à fond, pour qu'elle
soit parallèle à la fente.
4. Vérifiez si une image est visible sur un canal à signal brouillé.channel.
• CI(CI+) Menu
Permet à l’utilisateur d’opérer une sélection dans le menu du module CAM.
Sélectionnez le menu (CI(CI+) dans le menu PC Card.
• Infos sur l’application
Contient et affiche des informations sur le module CAM inséré dans le logement de l’interface commune.
Les informations sur l’application concernent la carte d’interface commune. Vous pouvez installer la CAM que le téléviseur soit
allumé ou éteint.
N La carte d'interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) n'est pas prise en charge dans certains pays, dans dans certaines régions ni par
certaines stations de diffusion ; vérifiez auprès de votre revendeur agréé.
Suite...
Configuration
Plug & Play
Langue des menus : Français ►
Horloge
Diffuser
Sécurité
Réseau
Général
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:58:47 PMFrançais - 24
❑ Sécurité
N Certains modèles exigent la sélection du code PIN défini pour autoriser l'utilisation de Plug & Play.
Verrouillage Canal → Arrêt / Marche
Cette fonction, qui bloque la vidéo et coupe le son, vous permet d’éviter toute utilisation non autorisée du téléviseur, par des
enfants par exemple, qui pourraient visionner des programmes qui ne leur sont pas destinés.
N Avant que l’écran de configuration s’affiche, l’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
N Le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est ‘0-0-0-0’. Vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN
dans le menu.
N Vous pouvez verrouiller certaines chaînes dans la liste des chaînes. (Reportez-vous à la page 14)
N Verrouillage Canal est disponible uniquement en mode TV.
Verrouillage parental
Cette fonction vous permet d’éviter toute utilisation non autorisée, par des enfants par exemple, qui pourraient visionner des
programmes ne leur étant pas destinés par un code PIN à chiffres (code d’identification personnelle) défini par l’utilisateur.
N L’option de classement parental diffère en fonction du pays.
N L’écran de saisie du code PIN s’affiche avant l’écran de configuration. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres.
N Le code PIN par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est ‘0-0-0-0’. Vous pouvez modifier le code PIN en sélectionnant Modifier PIN
dans le menu.
N Une fois le classement parental défini, le symbole “\” s’affiche.
N Autor.tout / Bloq. tout : permet de verrouiller ou de déverrouiller tous les classements TV.
Modifier PIN
Vous pouvez modifier le code personnel demandé pour pouvoir configurer le téléviseur.
N Avant que l’écran de configuration s’affiche, l’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. (Le
code PIN par défaut est ‘0-0-0-0’)
N Si vous avez oublié le code, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l’ordre suivant, ce qui rétablit le code ‘0-0-0-0’ :
POWER (Arrêt), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Marche).
❑ Général
Mode Jeu → Arrêt / Marche
En reliant le téléviseur à une console de jeu telle que PlayStation
TM
ou Xbox
TM
, vous pouvez profiter d’une expérience de jeu plus
réaliste en sélectionnant le menu de jeu.
• Lorsque le mode jeu est défini sur Marche
- le Mode Image est automatiquement défini sur Standard et ne peut pas être changé.
- le Mode Son est automatiquement défini sur Personnel et ne peut pas être changé. Réglez le son à l’aide de l’égaliseur.
- La fonction Réinit. du menu Son est activée. Elle rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l’égaliseur.
N le Mode Jeu n’est pas disponible en mode TV classique ou lorsqu’il est défini sur Arrêt.
N Si l’image est de mauvaise qualité alors qu’un périphérique externe est connecté au téléviseur, vérifiez l’état du Mode Jeu.
N Si vous affichez le menu TV en Mode Jeu, l’écran tremble légèrement.
N La marque s’affiche à l’écran. Elle signifie que le Mode Jeu est défini sur Marche avec la source sélectionnée.
N Cette fonction ne prend en charge que la fonction Jeu.
N le Mode Jeu n’est pas disponible en mode PC.
BD Wise → Arrêt / Marche
Wise est une fonction qui vous permet de régler automatiquement et de manière optimale tous les appareils Samsung connectés
compatibles avec BD Wise.
N Cette fonction n’est active que si un appareil externe est relié au téléviseur via la prise HDMI.
N Lorsque la fonction BD Wise est définie sur On, le mode d’image est réglé automatiquement.
Mode éco. → Arr. / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Image désactivée
Cette fonction règle la luminosité du téléviseur afin de réduire la consommation d’énergie. Lorsque vous regardez la télévision le
soir, réglez l’option du mode Mode éco. pour reposer vos yeux et réduire la consommation d’énergie.
Si vous sélectionnez Image désactivée, l’écran s’éteint. Seul le son est émis. Appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton pour désactiver la
fonction Image désactivée.
N La function Image désactivée n’est pas prise en charge dans le menu Outils.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:58:47 PMFrançais - 25
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez également
définir l’option Mode éco. en sélectionnant Outils → Mode éco.
Transparence du menu
Vous pouvez régler la transparence du menu sur écran.
• Lumineux : Règle le menu à l'écran sur normal.
• Sombre : Règle le menu à l'écran sur opaque.
Mélodie → Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé
Vous pouvez régler la mélodie diffusée lorsque vous allumez ou éteignez le téléviseur.
N Aucune mélodie n’est lue dans les cas suivants
- Aucun son n’est émis par le téléviseur car le bouton M MUTE a été enfoncé.
- Aucun son n’est émis par le téléviseur car le bouton – (Volume) a été enfoncé.
- Lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension par la fonction Veille.
Effet lumineux (PS58B680/PS63B680 uniquement)
Vous pouvez allumer/éteindre la LED bleue à l’avant de votre téléviseur en fonction de la situation. Utilisez cette fonction pour
économiser de l’énergie ou si l’intensité du voyant vous gêne.
• Arrêt : la LED bleue est toujours éteinte.
• En veille : La LED bleue est allumée en mode veille et éteinte quand le téléviseur est sous tension.
• En marche : La LED bleue est allumée quand vous regardez la télévision et éteinte quand le téléviseur est hors tension.
• Toujours : La LED bleue est toujours allumée.
Visualisation d’une image dans l’image
Vous pouvez afficher une image secondaire dans l’image principale du programme télévisé
ou de l’entrée vidéo. De cette manière, vous pouvez regarder ou surveiller le programme
télévisé ou l’entrée vidéo depuis n’importe quel équipement branché tout en regardant l’image
principale.
N Il est possible que l’image de la fenêtre PIP devienne légèrement anormale lorsque vous
utilisez l’écran principal pour jouer à un jeu ou faire un karaoké.
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils. Vous pouvez
également régler les paramètres de la fonction PIP en sélectionnant Outils →
PIP.
❑ PIP → Arrêt / Marche
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction PIP.
Image principale Image secondaire
Component
HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4
PC
TV
Format → / / /
Vous pouvez régler la taille de l’image secondaire.
N Si l’image principale est en mode HDMI, l’option Taille est accessible.
Position → / / /
Vous pouvez sélectionner la position de l’image secondaire.
N En mode Double ( , ), l’option Position est désactivée.
Canal
Vous pouvez sélectionner la chaîne affichée dans l’image secondaire.
PIP
PIP : Arrêt ►
Format :
Position :
Canal : ATV 1
E Entrer R Retour
Général
Mode Jeu : Arrêt
BD Wise : Arrêt
Mode éco. : Arrêt
Transparence du menu : Lumineux
Mélodie : Moyen
PIP ►
U Dépl. E Entrer R Retour
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:58:48 PMFrançais - 26
Programme pris en charge
❑ Avis juridique
Vous pouvez afficher l’avis juridique et l’avis de non-responsabilité relatif au contenu et aux services tiers.
Avis de non-responsabilité
Avis juridique complet relatif à Internet@TV.
N L’avis de non-responsabilité peut varier en fonction du pays.
N Vous pouvez passer à la page précédente ou suivante en appuyant sur le bouton ◄ ou ►.
❑ Guide Produit
Le Guide Produit vous donne des informations sur les fonctions les plus importantes de ce téléviseur.
N Pour plus d’informations, sélectionnez l’élément souhaité.
❑ Diagnostic automatique
Test de l’image
Si vous pensez que l’image n’est pas optimale, exécutez le test d’image. Vérifiez la mire de couleur à l’écran pour voir si le
problème persiste.
N Le message “Le problème persiste-t-il pour cette photo ?” s’affiche à l’écran.
Si la mire de couleur n’apparaît pas où si elle est parasitée, sélectionnez Oui.
Si la mire de couleur s’affiche correctement, sélectionnez Non.
• Oui : Il se peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. Demandez de l’aide au centre d’appel de Samsung.
• Non : Il se peut que l’équipement externe soit défaillant. Vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous au
mode d’emploi du périphérique externe.
Test du son
Si vous pensez que le son n’est pas optimal, exécutez le test du son.
Vous pouvez contrôler le son en diffusant une mélodie préenregistrée sur le téléviseur.
N Le message “Le problème persiste-t-il pour ce test du son ?” s’affiche à l’écran.
Si, pendant le test du son, vous n’entendez du son que d’un haut-parleur ou pas de son du tout, sélectionnez Oui.
Si vous entendez du son des haut-parleurs, sélectionnez Non.
• Oui : Il se peut que le téléviseur soit défaillant. Demandez de l’aide au centre d’appel de Samsung.
• Non : Il se peut que l’équipement externe soit défaillant. Vérifiez les connexions. Si le problème persiste, reportez-vous au
mode d’emploi du périphérique externe.
N Si les haut-parleurs du téléviseur restent muets, avant d’effectuer le test du son, vérifiez que l’option Sélection du haut-parleur
est réglée sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Son.
N La mélodie est diffusée pendant le test, même si l’option Sélection du haut-parleur est réglée sur Ht-parl ext ou si le son a été
désactivé en appuyant sur le bouton M MUTE.
Informations de signal (chaînes numériques uniquement)
Vous avez la possibilité de régler votre antenne pour améliorer la réception des chaînes numériques disponibles.
N Si l’indicateur d’intensité du signal indique que celui-ci est faible, réglez physiquement votre antenne afin d’en augmenter
l’intensité. Continuez à régler l’antenne jusqu’à ce que trouver la position offrant le signal le plus puissant.
Assistance / Entrée
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:58:48 PMFrançais - 27
Liste Source / Modif. Nom
❑ Liste Source
Permet de sélectionner le téléviseur ou d’autres sources d’entrée externes comme les
lecteurs DVD ou les décodeurs câble/récepteurs satellite (boîtiers décodeurs) connectés
au téléviseur. Permet de sélectionner la source d’entrée de votre choix.
TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Composant, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB.
N Vous ne pouvez sélectionner que les périphériques externes connectés au téléviseur.
Dans la liste des sources, les entrées connectées sont mises en surbrillance et
affichées en début de liste. Les entrées non connectées apparaissent dans le bas de la
liste
N Utilisation des boutons de couleur de la télécommande dans la liste des sources
- Rouge (Actualiser) : Actualise la liste des périphériques externes se connectant.
- T TOOLS (Outils): Affiche les menus Modif. Nom et Informations.
O Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande pour afficher une source de
signal externe.
❑ Modif. Nom
Vous pouvez nommer le périphérique connecté aux prises d’entrée pour faciliter la sélection de la source d’entrée.
VCR / DVD / Décodeur Câble / Décodeur satellite / Décodeur PVR / Récepteur AV / Jeu / Caméscope / PC / DVI / DVI
PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Lorsqu’un PC avec une résolution de 1920 x 1080 à 60 Hz est branché au port HDMI IN 2(DVI), vous devez régler le mode
HDMI2/DVI sur PC dans l’option Modif. Nom du mode d’entrée.
❑ Mise à niveau du logiciel
Pour garder le produit à jour avec les nouvelles fonctions de télévision numérique, des mises à jour logicielles sont régulièrement
diffusées via le signal de télévision normal. Le téléviseur détecte automatiquement ces signaux et affiche la bannière de mise à jour
logicielle. Vous avez le choix d’installer ou non la mise à jour.
USB
Insérez dans le téléviseur un lecteur USB contenant la mise à niveau du microprogramme.
Veillez à ne pas couper l’alimentation ni retirer le lecteur USB pendant l’application des
mises à niveau. Une fois la mise à niveau du micrologiciel terminée, le téléviseur se met
automatiquement hors puis sous tension. Vérifiez la version du micrologiciel une fois les
mises à niveau terminées. Lorsque le logiciel est mis à niveau, les paramètres vidéo et
audio définis reprennent leur valeur par défaut (d’usine).
Canal
Met à niveau le logiciel à l’aide du signal diffusé.
N Si elle est sélectionnée pendant la période de transmission du logiciel, cette fonction
recherche le logiciel disponible et le télécharge.
N Le temps nécessaire au téléchargement du logiciel dépend de l’état du signal.
Mise à niveau en mode veille
Pour poursuivre la mise à jour du logiciel en gardant le téléviseur sous tension, sélectionnez Marche en appuyant sur le bouton
▲ ou ▼. Une mise à jour manuelle a lieu automatiquement 45 minutes après l’entrée en mode veille. Etant donné que le courant
est activé de façon interne, l’écran peut s’allumer brièvement pour le produit. Le phénomène peut se poursuivre durant une heure
jusqu’à ce que la mise à jour logicielle soit terminée.
Autre logiciel
Remplace le logiciel actuel.
N Si le logiciel a été modifié, la version existante s’affiche.
N Vous pouvez passer à la version de sauvegarde du logiciel en sélectionnant “Autre logiciel”.
❑ Guide de connexion HD
Une brève instruction concernant la manière d’obtenir le meilleur de votre téléviseur HDTV s’affiche. Nous offrons le mode de
connexion des périphériques HD.
N Pour passer à la page précédente ou suivante, appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ►.
❑ Contacter Samsung
Vous pouvez accéder au centre d’appel et au site Web de Samsung, ainsi qu’à des informations sur le produit.
Panneau latéral du téléviseur
Lecteur USB
Liste Source
Modif. Nom
Entrée
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:58:48 PMFrançais - 28
Réseau
Connexion Réseau
DLNA, la fonction de téléchargement sur Internet de Content Library, Internet@TV et le Centre de réseau domestique nécessitent une
connexion réseau.
❑ Connexion réseau - Câble
Connexion LAN pour un environnement DHCP
Les procédures à suivre pour configurer le réseau à l’aide du protocole Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) sont décrites
ci-après. Etant donné qu’une adresse IP, un masque de sous-réseau, une passerelle et un serveur DNS sont automatiquement
attribués lorsque DHCP est sélectionné, vous ne devez pas les spécifier manuellement.
1. Raccordez le port LAN à l’arrière du téléviseur et le modem externe à l’aide d’un câble LAN.
2. Raccordez le port LAN mural et le modem externe à l’aide d’un câble modem.
N Les connecteurs (position et type de port) de l’appareil externe peuvent varier selon le fabricant.
N Si l’allocation de l’adresse IP par le serveur DHCP échoue, éteignez le modem externe, rallumez-le après au moins 10
secondes et réessayez.
N Pour la connexion entre le modem externe et le routeur (Sharer), reportez-vous à la documentation du produit
correspondant.
N Vous pouvez connecter le téléviseur directement au réseau LAN sans passer par un routeur.
N Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser un modem ADSL à connexion manuelle, car celui-ci ne prend pas en charge DHCP.
Vous devez utiliser un modem ADSL à connexion automatique.
Panneau arrière du téléviseur
Port modem
mural
2 Câble modem
Modem externe
(ADSL/VDSL/TV câblé)
1 Câble LAN
Selon votre réseau, vous pouvez raccorder directement le port LAN et le téléviseur.
Panneau arrière du téléviseur
Câble LAN
Port modem
mural
Vous pouvez connecter le LAN via un routeur.
Panneau arrière du téléviseur
Port modem
mural
Modem externe
(ADSL/VDSL/TV
Câblé)
Routeur IP
Câble LAN
Câble modem
Câble LAN
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:58:51 PMFrançais - 29
Connexion LAN pour environnement à IP statique
Les procédures à suivre pour configurer le réseau à l’aide d’une adresse IP statique sont décrites ci-après. Vous devez entrer
manuellement l’adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau, la passerelle et le serveur DNS fournis par votre fournisseur d’accès.
1. Raccordez le port LAN à l’arrière du téléviseur et le port LAN mural à l’aide d’un câble LAN.
N Les connecteurs (position et type de port) de l’appareil externe peuvent varier selon le fabricant.
N Si vous utilisez une adresse IP statique, votre fournisseur d’accès vous communiquera l’adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau,
la passerelle et le serveur DNS appropriés. Vous devez entrer ces valeurs pour effectuer la configuration réseau. Si vous ne
connaissez pas ces valeurs, consultez votre administrateur de réseau.
N Pour la configuration et le raccordement d’un routeur, reportez-vous à la documentation du produit correspondant.
N Vous pouvez connecter le téléviseur directement au réseau LAN sans passer par un routeur.
N Si vous utilisez un routeur IP prenant en charge le protocole DHCP, vous pouvez configurer l’appareil comme utilisant DHCP ou
une adresse IP statique.
N Pour les procédures à suivre si vous utilisez une adresse IP statique, consultez votre fournisseur d’accès.
❑ Connexion réseau - Sans fil
Vous pouvez vous connecter au réseau sans fil au travers d’un routeur IP sans fil.
1. Branchez l’adaptateur ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ sur le connecteur USB1(HDD) ou USB2 du téléviseur.
N L’adaptateur Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter doit obligatoirement être utilisé dans le cadre d’un réseau sans fil.
N L’adaptateur “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” est vendu séparément. L’adaptateur réseau sans fil “WIS09ABGN Wireless LAN”
est disponible auprès des détaillants, sur les sites de commerce électronique et sur Samsungparts.com.
N Pour utiliser un réseau sans fil, vous devez connecter le téléviseur à un routeur IP sans fil.
N Si ce routeur prend en charge le protocole DHCP, le téléviseur peut utiliser DHCP ou une adresse IP statique pour se connecter au
réseau sans fil.
N L’adaptateur Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter prend en charge les protocoles IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G et IEEE
802.11N. Si vous lisez une vidéo DLNA via une connexion IEEE 802.11B/G, des saccades risquent d’apparaître.
N Si le routeur IP sans fil vous permet d’activer / désactiver la fonction de connexion Ping, activez-la.
N Sélectionnez un canal inutilisé pour le routeur IP sans fil. Si le canal affecté au routeur IP sans fil est actuellement utilisé par un
autre périphérique dans le voisinage, il y aura des interférences et la communication peut échouer.
Suite...
Panneau arrière du téléviseur
1 Câble LAN
Port modem
mural
Panneau arrière du téléviseur
Câble LAN
Routeur IP
Câble LAN
Port modem
mural
Vous pouvez connecter le LAN via un routeur.
Panneau latéral du téléviseur
Adaptateur LAN sans fil
Samsung
Câble LAN
Routeur IP sans fil
Port modem
mural
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:58:54 PMFrançais - 30
N Si vous utilisez des paramètres de sécurité différents de ceux indiqués ci-dessous, le routeur ne fonctionnera pas avec le téléviseur.
- Pour la clé de sécurité du routeur IP, les options suivantes sont obligatoires.
1) Mode d’authentification : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Type de chiffrement : WEP, TKIP, AES
- Pour la clé de sécurité en mode ad hoc, les options suivantes sont obligatoires.
1) Mode d’authentification : SHARED, WPANONE
2) Type de chiffrement : WEP, TKIP, AES
N Si votre point d’accès prend en charge le WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), vous pouvez vous connecter au réseau via PBC (Push
Button Configuration) ou à l’aide d’un PIN (Personal Indentification Number). La fonction WPS configurera automatiquement le
SSID et la clé WPA dans ces deux modes.
N Si votre appareil n’est pas certifié, il risque de ne pas pouvoir se connecter au téléviseur via l’adaptateur “Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter”.
Configuration du réseau
❑ Type de réseau
Sélectionnez Câble ou Sans fil, selon la méthode à utiliser pour la connexion au
réseau.
N Le menu n’est disponible que si le Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter est connecté.
• Câble : Connexion au réseau par câble.
• Sans fil : Connexion sans fil.
❑ Configuration du réseau
Configuration internet (lorsque l’option Type de réseau est réglée sur Câble)
N Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement branché.
• Config. prot. Internet → Auto / Manuel
• Test réseau : Permet de tester ou vérifier la connexion réseau après la configuration du réseau.
N En cas d’impossibilité de se connecter à un réseau câblé
Si votre fournisseur d’accès a enregistré l’adresse MAC du périphérique utilisé pour se connecter la première fois à Internet et
qu’il authentifie cette adresse MAC chaque fois que vous vous connectez à Internet, votre téléviseur ne pourra pas se connecter
à Internet car l’adresse MAC différera de celle du périphérique (votre PC). Dans ce cas, demandez à votre fournisseur d’accès
la procédure à suivre pour connecter des périphériques autres que votre PC (p. ex. votre téléviseur) à Internet.
Si votre fournisseur d’accès exige un identifiant ou un mot de passe pour la connexion à Internet (réseau), votre téléviseur
ne pourra peut-être pas se connecter à Internet. Dans ce cas, vous devez entrer l’identifiant ou le mot de passe lors de la
connexion à Internet à l’aide d’un routeur. La connexion à Internet peut échouer à cause d’un problème de pare-feu. Dans ce
cas, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à Internet même en suivant les procédures
communiquées par votre fournisseur d’accès, contactez Samsung Electronics en appelant.
Configuration internet - Auto
Si vous connectez un câble LAN et que le réseau prend en charge DHCP, les paramètres IP (Internet Protocol) sont configurés
automatiquement.
1. Définissez l’option Type de réseau sur Câble.
2. Sélectionnez Configuration internet.
3. Définissez l’option Config. prot. Internet sur Auto.
N Le protocole Internet est configuré automatiquement.
4. Sélectionnez Test réseau pour vérifier la connexion au réseau.
Cable Network Setup-Manual
Pour connecter le téléviseur au LAN en utilisant une adresse IP statique, vous devez configurer les paramètres IP (Internet
Protocol).
N Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement branché. (voir page 28)
1. Définissez l’option Type de réseau sur Câble.
2. Sélectionnez Réseau câblé.
3. Définissez l’option Config. prot. Internet sur Manuel.
4. Configurez les paramètres Adresse IP, Masque de sous-réseau, Passerelle et Serveur DNS.
N Appuyez sur les boutons numériques de la télécommande lorsque vous paramétrez le réseau manuellement.
5. Sélectionnez Test réseau pour vérifier la connexion au réseau.
Configuration
Diffuser
Sécurité
Réseau ►
Général
Suite...
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:58:54 PMFrançais - 31
Configuration du réseau sans fil (lorsque Type de réseau est réglé sur Sans fil)
N Ce menu n’est disponible que si le Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter est connecté. (Voir page 29)
- Config. prot. Internet → Auto / Manuel
- Test réseau : Permet de tester ou vérifier la connexion réseau après la configuration du réseau.
N En cas d’impossibilité de se connecter à un point d’accès
Il se peut que votre téléviseur ne parvienne pas à localiser un point d’accès configuré comme SSID privé. Dans ce cas, modifiez
les paramètres de point d’accès et réessayez. Si votre fournisseur d’accès a enregistré l’adresse MAC du périphérique utilisé
pour se connecter la première fois à Internet et qu’il authentifie cette adresse MAC chaque fois que vous vous connectez à
Internet, votre téléviseur ne pourra pas se connecter à Internet car l’adresse MAC différera de celle du périphérique (votre PC).
Dans ce cas, demandez à votre fournisseur d’accès la procédure à suivre pour connecter des périphériques autres que votre
PC (p. ex. votre téléviseur) à Internet. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à Internet même en suivant les procédures
communiquées par votre fournisseur d’accès, contactez Samsung Electronics en appelant.
• Sélectionnez un réseau
- Point d’accès : Vous pouvez sélectionner le routeur à utiliser pour la connexion
au réseau sans fil.
N Si la liste de réseaux à sélectionner ne comporte pas de point d’accès sans fil,
appuyez sur le bouton rouge.
N Une fois la connexion effectuée, l’écran initial réapparaît.
N Si vous avez sélectionné un point d’accès exigeant une authentification : L’écran
de saisie de la clé de sécurité apparaît. Saisissez la clé de sécurité puis appuyez
sur le bouton bleu de la télécommande.
N Si le chiffrement est de type WEP, les caractères 0~9 et A~F seront disponibles lors de la saisie de la clé de sécurité.
Bouton Description
▲/▼/◄/► Déplace la sélection vers le haut / le bas / la gauche / la droite.
ENTER Entre le caractère sélectionné.
Bouton rouge Permet de basculer entre majuscules et minuscules.
Bouton vert Permet d’effacer un caractère déjà saisi.
Bouton bleu Permet de mettre fin à la saisie de la clé de sécurité.
❑ Connexion WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
Si la clé de sécurité est déjà définie : Dans la liste des points d’accès,
sélectionnez WPS.
N Vous avez le choix entre PBC, NIP et Code de sécurité.
• Connexion par PBC : Sélectionnez PBC (Push Button Configuration). Appuyez
sur le bouton PBC de votre point d’accès dans les 2 minutes et attendez que la
connexion s’établisse.
• Connexion par NIP : Sélectionnez NIP (Numéro d’Identification Personnel).
N Le message affichant le code NIP apparaît. Entrez le code NIP sur votre point
d’accès dans les 2 minutes. Sélectionnez OK et attendez que la connexion
s’établisse.
N Si cela ne fonctionne pas, réessayez.
N Si le problème de connexion persiste, réinitialisez le point d’accès. Pour plus
d’informations, consultez la documentation de votre point d’accès.
• Connexion par Code de sécurité :
Lorsque vous sélectionnez Code de sécurité, la fenêtre de saisie s’affiche.
Entrez la clé de sécurité et Appuyez sur le bouton bleu.
N Si cela ne fonctionne pas, réessayez.
Configuration du réseau sans fil
Sais. clé séc.
n Dépl. Numéro EEntrer R Retour
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Numéro
Minuscule
Delete
Done
* *
Configuration du réseau sans fil
Sélectionnez un réseau
n Dépl. EEntrer R Retour
Recherche
Ad hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Sais. clé séc.
3/9
Appuyez sur la touche PBC sur le point d’accès.
Nom du point d’accès : AP_3
Annuler
Appuyez sur OK après avoir entré le code NIP pour
configurer le point d’accès.
Nom du point d’accès : AP_3
NIP : 123 45678
OK Annuler
Configuration du réseau sans fil
Sais. clé séc.
n Dépl. Numéro EEntrer R Retour
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Numéro
Minuscule
Supprimer
Terminé
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:58:56 PMFrançais - 32
Si la clé de sécurité n’est pas définie : Si le réglage de sécurité du point d’accès
prenant en charge le WPS est défini sur AUCUN, vous pouvez sélectionner PBC,
NIP ou Aucune sécurité. Aucune sécurité autorise la connexion directe au point
d’accès sans faire appel à la fonction WPC.
N La marche à suivre pour les options PBC et NIP est identique à ce qui précède.
Consultez les pages précédentes si la Code de sécurité, est déjà définie.
N Si cela ne fonctionne pas, réessayez.
Ad hoc : Vous pouvez vous connecter à un périphérique mobile sans point
d’accès en utilisant une connexion réseau peer-to-peer à l’aide d’un adaptateur
USB sans fil.
• Comment établir une nouvelle connexion Ad hoc
1. Choisissez Sélectionnez un réseau ; Une liste de périphériques s’affiche.
2. Dans la liste des périphériques, appuyez sur le bouton bleu de la télécommande ou sélectionnez Ad hoc.
N Le message La fonctionnalité du système de réseau existant est peut-être restreinte. Souhaitez-vous changer la
connexion réseau? s’affiche.
3. Saisissez le Nom du réseau (SSID) généré puis le Code de sécurité dans le périphérique auquel vous souhaitez vous
connecter.
• Comment se connecter à un périphérique ad hoc existant
1. Choisissez Sélectionnez un réseau ; une liste de périphériques s’affiche.
2. Sélectionnez l’appareil de votre choix dans la liste.
3. Si une clé de sécurité est nécessaire, tapez-la.
N Si le réseau ne fonctionne pas correctement, revérifiez le Nom du réseau (SSID) et le Code de sécurité. Si le Code de
sécurité est incorrect, cela peut être la cause du problème.
Configuration du réseau sans fil - Auto
Si vous voulez vous connecter à un point d’accès, celui-ci doit prendre en charge le DHCP.
Seuls les appareils prenant en charge le mode ad hoc autorisent les connexions sans DHCP.
1. Définissez l’option Type de réseau sur Sans fil.
2. Sélectionnez Configuration du réseau sans fil.
3. Définissez l’option Config. prot. Internet sur Auto.
N Le protocole Internet est configuré automatiquement.
4. Sélectionnez un réseau via l’option Sélectionnez un réseau.
5. Sélectionnez Test réseau pour vérifier la connexion au réseau.
Configuration du réseau sans fil - Manuel
Pour connecter le réseau sans fil en utilisant une adresse IP statique, vous devez configurer les paramètres IP (Internet Protocol)
(voir page 29).
N Pour plus d’informations sur cette adresse IP statique, consultez le manuel d’utilisation de votre routeur IP sans fil.
1. Définissez l’option Type de réseau sur Sans fil.
2. Sélectionnez Configuration du réseau sans fil.
3. Définissez l’option Config. prot. Internet sur Manuel.
4. Configurez les paramètres Adresse IP, Masque de sous-réseau, Passerelle et Serveur DNS.
N Appuyez sur les boutons numériques de la télécommande lorsque vous paramétrez le réseau manuellement.
5. Sélectionnez un réseau sous l’option Select Access Point. (Sélec. point accès).
6. Sélectionnez Test réseau pour vérifier la connexion au réseau.
* *
Configuration du réseau sans fil
Sélectionnez un réseau
n Dépl. EEntrer R Retour
Recherche
Ad hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
NIP
Sais. clé séc.
3/9
La fonctionnalité du système de réseau existant
est peut-être restreinte. Souhaitez-vous changer la
connexion réseau?
Oui Non
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:58:57 PMFrançais - 33
Connexion d’un périphérique USB
1. Appuyez sur le bouton POWER pour allumer le téléviseur.
2. Connectez un périphérique USB contenant des photos ou des fichiers musicaux au port
USB sur le côté du téléviseur.
N Le port USB 1 (HDD) sert également au branchement des disques durs. Les disques durs
sont des périphériques permettant de stocker les données numériques.
N Media Play ne prend en charge que les périphériques de stockage de masse USB de
la classe MSC. La classe de stockage de masse MSC est dédiée aux périphériques de
transport de masse uniquement. Il s’agit notamment des clés USB, lecteurs de cartes Flash
et disques durs USB (les concentrateurs USB ne sont pas pris en charge).
N Le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) n’est pas pris en charge.
N Le système de fichiers ne prend en charge que le format FAT16/32 (le système de fichiers NTFS n’est pas pris en charge).
N Connectez un disque dur USB au port dédié, le port USB1 (HDD). Toutefois, si le périphérique connecté nécessite beaucoup de
puissance, USB1 (HDD) risque de ne pas le prendre en charge.
N Il est possible que certains types d’appareils photo numériques et de périphériques audio USB ne soient pas compatibles avec ce téléviseur.
N Connectez-vous directement au port USB de votre téléviseur. Si vous utilisez une connexion par câble séparée, un problème de
compatibilité USB risque de se poser.
N Avant de connecter l’appareil au téléviseur, sauvegardez vos fichiers afin d’éviter qu’ils ne soient endommagés ou que des données
ne soient perdues. SAMSUNG ne saurait, en aucun cas, être tenu responsable de la perte de données ou de l’endommagement
d’un fichier de données.
N Ne déconnectez pas le périphérique USB en cours de chargement.
N MSC prend en charge les fichiers MP3 et JPEG, alors qu’un périphérique PTP prend uniquement en charge les fichiers JPEG.
N Le format JPEG séquentiel est pris en charge.
N Plus la résolution de l’image est élevée, plus le temps d’affichage à l’écran sera long.
N La résolution JPEG maximale prise en charge est 15360 x 8640 pixels.
N Pour les fichiers non pris en charge ou endommagés, le message Format fichier non compatible s’affiche.
N Si le nombre de fichiers photo est supérieur à 4000 (ou à 3000 dans le cas des fichiers musicaux), il se peut que les fichiers situés
au-delà de cette limite ne soient pas affichés dans la liste des photos (ou dans la liste musicale).
N Les fichiers MP3 avec gestion des droits numériques (DRM) téléchargés à partir d’un site payant ne peuvent pas être lus.
N La gestion des droits numériques (DRM) empêche toute utilisation illégale de supports numériques en raison de la protection des
droits d’auteur.
N Si vous passez à une photo, son chargement peut prendre quelques secondes. A ce stade, l’icône de chargement apparaît.
❑ Utilisation du bouton Remote Control dans le menu Media Play
Bouton Description
▲/▼/◄/► Déplace le curseur pour sélectionner un élément.
ENTERE
Valide l’élément actuellement sélectionné.
Lance ou met en pause la lecture des fichiers pendant un diaporama ou la lecture de fichiers
musicaux.
Lance la lecture d’un diaporama ou d’un fichier musical, ou le met en pause.
RETURN Revient au menu précédent.
TOOLS Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus Photo, Musique et Film.
Arrête la lecture du diaporama ou du fichier musical en cours.
Passe au groupe précédent/suivant.
INFO Affiche des informations sur le fichier.
MEDIA.P Accéder au mode Media Play ou le quitter.
DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays
DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com
with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Media Play
Panneau latéral du
téléviseur
Lecteur USB
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:58:57 PMFrançais - 34
Utilisation de la fonction Media Play
Cette fonction vous permet de lire des photos ou de la musique enregistrées sur un périphérique de stockage de masse USB (MSC).
Il est se peut que le fonctionnement ne soit pas correct avec des fichiers multimédias sans licence.
❑ Accès au menu Media Play
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner
Application, puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Media Play (USB & DLNA),
puis appuyez sur ENTERE.
O Appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande pour afficher le menu
Media Play.
O Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande pour sélectionner USB
ou DLNA, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton rouge, puis sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner
l’unité de stockage USB correspondante (si elle est connectée par le biais d’un
concentrateur). Appuyez sur la touche ENTERE.
N Cette fonction diffère selon l’unité de stockage connectée au téléviseur.
N Le nom du périphérique USB sélectionné s’affiche dans le coin inférieur
gauche de l’écran.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner une icône (Photo, Music,
Movie, Setup), puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Pour quitter le mode Media Play, appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la
télécommande.
N Ce mode vous permet de regarder les films contenus dans un jeu (mais pas
de jouer).
❑ Retrait d’une unité de stockage USB en toute sécurité
Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique du téléviseur en toute sécurité.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS dans l’écran de la liste des fichiers Media Play
ou pendant la lecture d’un fichier musical ou d’un diaporama.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Retrait sécurisé, puis
appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
3. Retirez le périphérique USB du téléviseur.
❑ Affichage
1. Ordre de tri actuel : Ce champ affiche l’ordre de tri actuel des fichiers.
2. Afficher les groupes : Le groupe de tri contenant la photo actuellement sélectionnée est mis en surbrillance.
3. Fichier actuellement sélectionné : Le fichier actuellement sélectionné est mis en surbrillance.
4. Informations de sélection : Indique le nombre de photos sélectionnées en appuyant sur le bouton Jaune.
5. Périphérique actuel : Indique le nom du périphérique actuellement sélectionné.
N Bouton Rouge (Périph.) : Sélectionne un appareil connecté.
6. Options d’aide
• Bouton Vert (Réglage des favoris) : Modifie le réglage des favoris pour le fichier sélectionné. Appuyez plusieurs fois sur ce
bouton jusqu’à ce que la valeur souhaitée apparaisse.
• Bouton Jaune (Sélection) : Sélectionne le fichier dans la liste. Les fichiers sélectionnés sont marqués du symbole c.
Appuyez une nouvelle fois sur le bouton jaune pour annuler la sélection d’un fichier.
• Bouton TOOLS (Outils) : Affiche les menus d’options. (le menu Tools varie en fonction de l’état actuel).
• Bouton R RETURN (Retour) : Revient au menu précédent.
Dossier Préférence Aff. de base Date Couleur
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349.
JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Diaporama
Lire gp act.
Information
Retrait sécurisé
../ nom dossier /
Photo
USB Périph. Sélection T Tools R Dossier supérieur
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Libre
Movie
USB Périph. RRetour
Préférence Aff. de base Date Couleur Dossier
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
3
1
2
1 Fich. sél.
4
5 6
Photo
USB Périph.
Favoris Sélection T Outils R Retour
c
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:59:03 PMFrançais - 35
Tri de la liste de fichiers photo / musical / film
Aff. de base
Affiche les dossiers sur l’unité de stockage USB. Si vous sélectionnez un dossier et
appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE, les fichiers correspondant (photo / music / movie)
contenus dans le dossier sélectionné s’affichent.
N Lorsque le tri est effectué en fonction de Aff. de base, vous ne pouvez pas
définir les fichiers de favoris.
Dossier
Trie les fichiers par dossier. Si le périphérique USB contient de nombreux dossiers,
les fichiers photo sont affichés dans l’ordre dans chaque dossier. Le fichier
situé dans le dossier racine est affiché en premier, suivi des autres par ordre
alphabétique.
Préférence → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
Trie les fichiers par préférence (Favoris).
N Modification des réglages des favoris
Sélectionnez la photo de votre choix dans la liste des Fichiers, puis appuyez
plusieurs fois sur le bouton vert jusqu’à ce que le réglage voulu apparaisse.
N Les étoiles sont destinées au groupement uniquement. Par exemple, le réglage
de 3 étoiles n’a aucune priorité sur le réglage d’une étoile.
Erstellung (Photo / Movie)
Trie les fichiers musicaux ou vidéo par titre et les classe par symbole/ordre
alphabétique/ordre personnalisé.
Titel (Music / Movie)
Trie les fichiers musicaux par titre et les classe par symbole/numéro/ordre
alphabétique/ordre personnalisé.
❑ Photo
Couleur → Rouge / Jaune / Vert / Bleu / Magenta / Noir / Gris / Non classé
Trie les photos par couleur. Vous pouvez modifier les informations de couleur de la photo.
N Vous devez définir Affichage couleur sur Marche dans le menu Setup avant de trier les photos par couleur.
❑ Music
Artiste
Trie les fichiers musicaux par artiste et les classe par symbole/ordre alphabétique/ordre personnalisé.
Humeur → Energique / Rhytmique / Triste / Enivrante / Calme / Non classé
Trie les fichiers musicaux par humeur. Vous pouvez modifier les informations d’ambiance de la musique.
Genre
Trie les fichiers musicaux par genre.
Dossier Préférence Aff. de base Titre Artiste
1
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
usermanual Heaven
NPKI
▶
1
▶
▶
▶
▶
../ folder name/
Music
USB Périph. Sélection T Outils R Dossier supérieur
▶
▶
Préférence Aff. de base Date Titre Dossier
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
▶
▶ ◀
MOVIE_005
.avi
Préférence Aff. de base Date Couleur Dossier
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
Photo
USB Périph. Favoris Sélection T Outils R Retour
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:59:09 PMFrançais - 36
Menu d’options de la liste des fichiers photo / musical / film
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Photo, Music ou Movie, puis sur
le bouton ENTERE.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ►pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix.
N Sélection de plusieurs fichiers
- Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ►pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix.
Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton jaune.
- Répétez l’opération ci-dessus pour sélectionner fichiers photo.
- La marque cs’affiche à côté du fichier film sélectionné.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS.
N Le menu varie en fonction de l’état actuel.
Lire gp act.
Ce menu vous permet de lire un diaporama portant uniquement sur les fichiers
photo du groupe de tri sélectionné.
Désélec. Tout (lorsqu’au moins un fichier est sélectionné)
Vous pouvez désélectionner tous les fichiers.
N La marque c indiquant que le fichier correspondant est sélectionné est
masquée.
Information
Les informations relatives au fichier photo/musical/film sont affichées. Vous pouvez
appliquer les mêmes procédures pour afficher les informations des fichiers photo
pendant un diaporama.
O Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher les informations.
Retrait sécurisé
Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique du téléviseur en toute sécurité.
❑ Photo
Diaporama
Ce menu vous permet de lire un diaporama à l’aide des fichiers photo situés sur l’unité de stockage USB.
Changer gp (lorsque la clé de tri est Couleur)
Vous pouvez modifier les informations de couleur d’un fichier photo (ou d’un groupe de fichiers) sélectionné afin de le déplacer vers
un autre groupe de couleurs.
N Ceci ne modifie pas la couleur réelle de la photo.
N Les informations de groupe du fichier actuel sont mises à jour et les photos sont déplacées vers le nouveau groupe de couleurs.
N Pour modifier les informations de plusieurs fichiers, sélectionnez ceux de votre choix en appuyant sur le bouton jaune.
❑ Music
Change Group (lorsque la clé de tri est Mood)
Vous pouvez modifier les informations d’ambiance des fichiers musicaux. Les informations de groupe du fichier actuel sont mises à
jour et le fichier est déplacé vers le nouveau groupe. Pour modifier les informations de plusieurs fichiers, sélectionnez ceux de votre
choix en appuyant sur le bouton jaune.
Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Dossier Préférence Aff. de base Titre Artiste
1
1
▶
▶
../ folder name/
Sky
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
NPKI
usermanual Heaven
▶
NPKI
Lire gp act.
Information
Retrait sécurisé
Music
USB Périph. Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur
FILM_004
FILM_003 .avi
.avi
FILM_000
.avi
FILM_005
.avi
FILM_007
.avi
FILM_001.avi
1/5
FILM_006
.avi
▶
▶
Préférence Aff. de base Date Titre Dossier
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur
Lire gp act.
Information
Retrait sécurisé
Aff. de base Date Couleur Dossier Préférence
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Diaporama
Lire gp act.
Changer gp
Information
Retrait sécurisé
Photo
USB Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:59:14 PMFrançais - 37
Menu d’options Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play
1. Pendant un diaporama (ou l’affichage d’une photo), appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS
pour définir l’option.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner l’option, puis appuyez sur le
bouton ENTERE.
Réglage de l’image / Réglage du son
Vous pouvez sélectionner les réglages de l’image et du son.
Information
Les informations relatives au fichier sont affichées.
Retrait sécurisé
Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique du téléviseur en toute sécurité.
❑ Menu d’options du diaporama
Arrêter le diaporama / Lancer le diaporama
Vous pouvez lancer ou arrêter un diaporama.
Vit. diaporama → Lent / Normal / Rapide
Sélectionnez cette option pour modifier la vitesse de défilement du diaporama.
N Cette fonction est uniquement disponible au cours d’un diaporama.
N Vous pouvez également modifier la vitesse du diaporama en appuyant sur la
touche π (Retour arrière) ou μ (Avance rapide) pendant la lecture.
Effet du diaporama
Vous pouvez sélectionner l’effet de transition entre les écrans qui sera utilisé dans
le diaporama.
• Aucun / Fondu1 / Fondu2 / Masquer / Spirale / Damier / Linéaire / Escaliers /
Balayage / Aléatoire
N Cette fonction est uniquement disponible au cours d’un diaporama.
Rotat.
Vous pouvez faire pivoter les photos enregistrées sur une unité de stockage USB.
N Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton ◄, la photo pivote successivement à 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ et 0˚.
N Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton ►, la photo pivote successivement de 90˚, 180˚, 270˚, et 0˚.
N Le fichier pivoté n’est pas enregistré.
Zoom
Vous pouvez faire agrandir les photos enregistrées sur une unité de stockage USB. (x1 → x2 → x4)
N Pour déplacer l’image agrandie, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE, puis sur les boutons ▲/▼/◄/►. Notez que lorsque la taille
de l’image agrandie est inférieure à celle de l’écran, la fonction de déplacement est inopérante.
N Le fichier agrandi n’est pas enregistré.
Fond musical
Vous pouvez sélectionner le fond musical d’un diaporama.
N Pour utiliser cette fonction, de la musique et des photos doivent être stockées sur l’unité USB.
N Le changement du Mode mus. de fond exige le chargement de fichiers musicaux. Lisez des fichiers musicaux dans la catégorie
voulue.
❑ Menu d’options de lecture de musique
Mode rep. → Marche / Arrêt
Vous pouvez lire des fichiers musicaux en boucle.
❑ Menu d’options de lecture du film
Format de l’image → Ajustement / Original
Lit la vidéo à la taille de l’écran ou à sa taille d’origine.
Paramètres des sous-titres
Vous pouvez configurer les sous-titres du film.
Tools
Outils
Arrêter le diaporama
Vit. diaporama : Normal
Effet du diaporama : Fondu1
Pivoter
Zoom
Fond musical
Réglage de l’image
Réglage du son
Information
U Dépl. E Entrer eQuitter
Outils
Mode répét. ◄ Marche ►
Réglage de l’ image
Réglage du son
Information
Retrait sécurisé
U Dépl. Régler eQuitter
Outils
Réglage de l’ image
Réglage du son
Format de l’ image :Ajustement
Paramètres des sous-titres
Information
Retrait sécurisé
U Dépl. Entrer eQuitter
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:59:15 PMFrançais - 38
Visualisation d’une photo ou d’un diaporama
❑ Visualisation d’un diaporama
N Tous les fichiers de la section Liste de fichiers seront utilisés pour le diaporama.
N Durant le diaporama, les fichiers s’affichent dans l’ordre à partir du fichier à
l’écran.
N Le diaporama progresse dans l’ordre de tri choisi dans la section Liste de
fichiers.
N Des fichiers musicaux peuvent être lus automatiquement pendant le diaporama,
si l’option Fond musical est définie sur Marche.
N Lorsqu’une liste de photos est affichée, appuyez sur le bouton ∂(Lecture)/
ENTERE de la télécommande pour lancer le diaporama.
N Boutons de commande du diaporama
ENTERE Lance/interrompt la lecture du diaporama.
Lance la lecture du diaporama.
Interrompt la lecture du diaporama.
Permet de quitter le mode diaporama et de revenir à la liste
des photos.
/ Modifie la vitesse de lecture du diaporama.
T TOOLS Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus Photo.
❑ Lecture du groupe courant
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ pour accéder à la section Sort Key.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner un ordre de tri.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour accéder à Group List Section.
4. Sélectionnez un groupe à l’aide des boutons ◄ ou ►.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture). Un diaporama débute par les fichiers du
groupe sélectionné.
Ou
1. Sélectionnez une clé de tri puis, dans Section Liste de fichiers, sélectionnez les photos contenues dans le groupe de votre
choix.
N Pour passer au groupe précédent/suivant, appuyez sur le bouton π (Retour arrière) ou μ (Avance rapide).
2. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Lire gp act., puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Seules les photos du groupe contenant les fichiers sélectionnés seront utilisées pour le diaporama.
❑ Pour exécuter un diaporama avec uniquement les fichiers sélectionnés
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner la photo voulue dans la section Liste de fichiers.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton jaune.
4. Répétez l’opération ci-dessus pour sélectionner plusieurs photos.
N La marque c s’affiche à gauche des photos sélectionnées.
N Si vous sélectionnez un seul fichier, le diaporama ne s’exécute pas.
N Pour désélectionner tous les fichiers, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS, puis sélectionnez Désélec. Tout.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE.
N Les fichiers sélectionnés seront utilisés pour le diaporama.
Ou
1. Dans la section Liste de fichiers, appuyez sur les boutons jaunes pour sélectionner les photos de votre choix.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Diaporama, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Les fichiers sélectionnés seront utilisés pour le diaporama.
▶
▶
Préférence Aff. de base Date Titre Dossier
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur
FILM_003
.avi
FILM_000
.avi
FILM_004
.avi
FILM_001.avi
1/5
FILM_005
.avi
Aff. de base Date Couleur Dossier Préférence
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Diaporama
Lire gp act.
Changer gp
Information
Retrait sécurisé
Photo
r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4
USB
E Pause lr Préc/Suiv T Outils R Retour
USB Périph. Favoris Selection T Outils R Dossier supérieur
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:59:20 PMFrançais - 39
Lecture de musique
❑ Lecture d’un fichier musical
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner le fichier musical à lire.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE.
N Ce menu affiche uniquement les fichiers portant l’extension MP3. Les
fichiers portant d’autres extensions ne s’affichent pas, même s’ils sont
enregistrés sur le même périphérique USB.
N Le fichier sélectionné s’affiche en haut de l’écran, avec la durée de lecture.
N Pour régler le volume sonore, appuyez sur le bouton de volume de la
télécommande. Pour couper le son, appuyez sur le bouton MMUTE de la
télécommande.
N Si le son est déformé lors de la lecture de fichiers MP3, réglez les options Egaliseur et SRS TruSurround HD dans le menu
Sound. (un fichier MP3 surmodulé peut être à l’origine d’un problème sonore).
N La durée de lecture d’un fichier musical peut s’afficher sous la forme “00:00:00” si les informations relatives au temps de
lecture ne figurent pas au début du fichier.
N Les boutons π (Retour arrière) et μ (Avance rapide) ne fonctionnent pas durant la lecture.
N Boutons de commande de lecture
ENTERE Lance/interrompt la lecture du fichier
musical.
Quitte le mode de lecture et revient à la liste
musicale.
Lance la lecture du fichier musical.
T TOOLS
Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus
Musique.
Interrompt la lecture du fichier musical.
N Icône d’informations sur la fonction Musique
Tous les fichiers musicaux du dossier (ou le fichier sélectionné) sont répétés. Mode rep. est défini sur Marche.
Tous les fichiers musicaux du dossier (ou le fichier sélectionné) sont lus une seule fois. Mode rep. est défini sur Arrêt.
❑ Lecture du groupe de musiques
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ pour accéder à la section Sort Key.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner un ordre de tri.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ ou ENTERE pour accéder à Group List Section.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture). La lecture des fichiers du groupe sélectionné commence.
Ou
1. Sélectionnez une clé de tri, puis dans Section Liste de fichiers, sélectionnez les fichiers contenus dans le groupe de votre choix.
N Pour passer au groupe précédent/suivant, appuyez sur le bouton π (Retour arrière) ou μ (Avance rapide).
2. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Lire gp act., puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Tous les fichiers musicaux du groupe de tri, y compris le fichier sélectionné, sont lus.
❑ Lecture des fichiers musicaux sélectionnés
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner le fichier musical de votre choix.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton jaune.
4. Répétez l’opération ci-dessus pour sélectionner plusieurs fichiers musicaux.
N La marque c s’affiche à gauche du fichier musical sélectionné.
N Pour désélectionner tous les fichiers, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS, puis sélectionnez Désélec. Tout.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE.
N Les fichiers sélectionnés sont lus.
r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55
r
1/3
When I Dream r
r
Geek In The Pink Heaven
USB
E Pause lr Préc/Suiv T Outils R Retour
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:59:20 PMFrançais - 40
Lecture d’un fichier film
❑ Lecture d’un fichier film
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner un film à lire.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE.
N La lecture du fichier sélectionné commence.
N Le fichier sélectionné s’affiche en haut de l’écran, avec la durée de lecture.
N La durée de lecture d’un fichier film peut s’afficher sous la forme “00:00:00”
si les informations relatives au temps de lecture ne figurent pas au début du
fichier.
N Vous pouvez regarder des fichiers multimédias, mais la fonction jeu n’est pas prise en charge.
N Formats de sous-titres pris en charge
Nom Extension de fichier Langage de programmation
MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt chaînes
SubViewer .sub chaînes
Micro DVD .sub ou .txt chaînes
N Formats vidéo pris en charge
Extension de
fichier
Conteneur Décodeur vidéo Codec audio Résolution
*.avi AVI
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.mkv MKV
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.asf ASF
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080
*.mp4 MP4 (SMP4)
H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
XVID 1920x1080
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
*.vro
VRO
VOB
MPEG2 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG1 1920x1080
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG2 1920x1080
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
H.264 1920x1080
VC1 1920x1080
N Boutons de commande de lecture vidéo
ENTERE Lit/interrompt le fichier film.
Lit le fichier film.
Interrompt la lecture du fichier film.
Quitte le mode de lecture et revient à la liste des films.
T TOOLS Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus Film.
◄/► Avance ou recule dans le film en cours de lecture.
▲/▼ Affiche le premier/dernier fichier.
▶
r
r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3
MOVIE_000.avi
USB E Pause lr Passer T Outils R Retour
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:59:21 PMFrançais - 41
❑ Lecture du groupe de films
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ pour accéder à la section Sort Key.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner un ordre de tri.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ ou ENTERE pour accéder à Group List Section.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture). Seule la lecture des fichiers du groupe sélectionné commence.
Ou
1. Sélectionnez une clé de tri, puis dans Section Liste de fichiers, sélectionnez les fichiers contenus dans le groupe de votre choix.
N Pour passer au groupe précédent/suivant, appuyez sur le bouton π (Retour arrière) ou μ (Avance rapide)..
2. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Lire gp act., puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Tous les fichiers film du groupe de tri, y compris le fichier sélectionné, sont lus.
❑ Lecture des fichiers film sélectionnés
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour sélectionner Section Liste de fichiers.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner le fichier musical de votre choix.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton jaune.
N La marque c s’affiche à gauche du fichier film sélectionné.
N Pour désélectionner tous les fichiers, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS, puis sélectionnez Désélec. Tout.
4. Répétez l’opération ci-dessus pour sélectionner plusieurs fichiers film.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE.
N Seul le fichier sélectionné est lu.
❑ Lecture d’un film en continu (Reprise de la lecture)
Si vous quittez la fonction de lecture de film, il est possible de reprendre ultérieurement au point où vous l’avez arrêté.
1. Pour sélectionner le fichier film que vous souhaitez lire en continu, appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► dans File List Section.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ∂ (Lecture)/ENTERE.
3. Sélectionnez Lecture continue (Resume Play) en appuyant sur le bouton bleu.
N Le film reprend à l’endroit précis où vous aviez arrêté la lecture.
N Si la fonction Aide lecture continue a été réglée sur Marche dans le menu Setup, un message s’affiche lors de la lecture d’un
film que vous souhaitez lire en continu.
Utilisation du menu Configuration
Le menu Setup affiche les paramètres utilisateur du menu Media Play.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande pour afficher le menu Media Play.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Setup, puis sur le bouton
ENTERE.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner l’option de votre choix.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner l’option de votre choix.
N Pour quitter le mode Media Play, appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la
télécommande.
Affichage couleur → Mar. / Arr.
Vous pouvez choisir de trier les photos par couleur.
N Si cette option est définie sur Marche, le temps de chargement risque
d’augmenter lors de la collecte des informations de couleur des photos.
Mode répét. → Mar. / Arr.
Permet de répéter la lecture de fichiers musicaux.
Aide lecture continue → Mar. / Arr.
Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher le message d’aide relatif à la lecture continue
des films.
Obtenir code d’enr. de DivX® VOD
Affiche le code d’enregistrement autorisé pour le téléviseur. Si vous vous connectez au site Web DivX et enregistrez le code
d’enregistrement avec un compte personnel, vous pouvez télécharger le fichier d’enregistrement VOD.
Si vous lisez l’enregistrement VOD à l’aide de Media Play, l’enregistrement est terminé. Pour plus d’informations sur la VOD DivX®,
visitez le site www.DivX.com.
Obtenir code de désact. de DivX® VOD
Si DivX® VOD n’est pas enregistré, le code de désactivation de l’enregistrement s’affiche. Si vous exécutez cette fonction alors que
DivX® VOD est enregistré, l’enregistrement DivX® VOD en cours est désactivé.
Temps d’ex. éco. écran → 4 heures / 8 heures / 10 heures
Sélectionnez cette option pour définir le délai avant l’activation de l’écran de veille.
Information
Affiche les informations de l’appareil connecté.
Retrait sécurisé
Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique du téléviseur en toute sécurité.
Media Play
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Libre
SETUP
Photo Music Movie Setup
USB eQuitter
Périph.
Setup
Dépl. Régler Retour
Affichage couleur ◄ Arrêt ►
Mode répét. Marche
Aide lecture continue Marche
Obtenir code d’enr. de DivX® VOD
Obtenir code de désact. de DivX® VOD
Temps d’ex. éco. écran 10 min
Information
Retrait sécurisé
USB Périph.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:59:22 PMFrançais - 42
Définition du réseau DLNA
DLNA vous permet de visionner, sur votre téléviseur, des vidéos et des images enregistrées sur votre ordinateur via une connexion
réseau en mode Media. Pour utiliser DLNA, le téléviseur doit être connecté au réseau et l’application DLNA doit être installée sur votre
ordinateur.
❑ Diagramme représentant la connexion réseau - Câble
❑ Diagramme représentant la connexion réseau - Sans fil
1. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre réseau, reportez-vous à la section “Configuration du réseau”.
N Nous recommandons de placer le téléviseur et l’ordinateur sur le même sous-réseau. Les 3 premières parties de l’adresse de
sous-réseau du téléviseur et les adresses IP du PC doivent être les mêmes et seule la dernière partie (adresse de l’hôte) doit
être modifiée. (ex. adresse IP: 123.456.789.**)
2. Connectez l’ordinateur sur lequel le programme Samsung PC Share Manager sera installé au modem externe à l’aide d’un câble
réseau.
N Vous pouvez connecter directement le téléviseur à un ordinateur sans passer par un routeur.
Installation de l’application DLNA
Pour lire sur votre téléviseur du contenu stocké sur l’ordinateur, vous devez, dans un premier temps, installer l’application. Pour utiliser
correctement la fonction DLNA, utilisez le programme figurant dans le CD-ROM fourni avec le téléviseur ou le programme Samsung PC
Share Manager correspondant au modèle de téléviseur, que vous pouvez télécharger sur le site Web de Samsung
.
TV
Modem externe
(ADSL/VDSL/TV câblé)
LAN
PC
LAN
Media Play-DLNA
TV
LAN
PC
ou
1
Panneau latéral
du téléviseur
Adaptateur LAN
sans fil Samsung
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:59:23 PMFrançais - 43
Utilisation de l’application DLNA
Présentation de l’écran du programme
1. Menus: l’application s’accompagne des
menus suivants : Fichier, Partager, Serveur
et Aide.
2. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour partager le
dossier serveur sélectionné.
3. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler le
partage.
4. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour actualiser la liste
des fichiers et dossiers de l’ordinateur.
5. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour synchroniser l’état
de partage.
6. Les dossiers et fichiers à partager stockés
sur l’ordinateur sont répertoriés.
7. Les dossiers partagés par l’utilisateur sont
répertoriés.
8. Nom du serveur PC dans la liste d’appareils
de Media Play.
Configuration requise
1. Introduisez le CD du programme fourni avec le téléviseur dans le lecteur approprié de votre ordinateur.
2. L’installation du programme nécessite 30 Mo d’espace libre sur le disque dur.
N Si vous partagez des fichiers, jusqu’à 30 Mo d’espace disque est nécessaire par lot de 100 fichiers.
N Si vous annulez le partage de fichiers, l’espace disque utilisé pour les informations sur les miniatures est également libéré.
Formats pris en charge
• Image: JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS Conteneur. Pour de plus amples informations sur les
formats vidéo pris en charge, reportez-vous aux instructions de la rubrique “Lecture d’un fichier film”.
Installation de l’application
► ►
►
1. Exécutez le fichier Setup.exe situé sur le CD du programme fourni avec le téléviseur.
N Vous pouvez également télécharger ce fichier sur le site Web de Samsung à l’adresse www.samsung.com.
2. Installez l’application SAMSUNG PC Share Manager, comme illustré ci-dessous.
3. Une fois l’installation terminée, l’icône PC Share Manager apparaît sur votre Bureau.
N Double-cliquez sur cette icône pour exécuter le programme.
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:59:25 PMFrançais - 44
❑ Partager
Partage d’un dossier
Vous pouvez partager un dossier de votre ordinateur sur le téléviseur.
Annulation d’un dossier partagé
Vous pouvez annuler un dossier partagé sur votre ordinateur. Sélectionnez un dossier dans le volet Dossier partagé, puis cliquez
sur Annuler le partage.
Application des réglages actuelss
Effectuez cette opération lorsqu’une synchronisation s’avère nécessaire à la suite du partage d’un nouveau dossier ou de
l’annulation d’un partage. Le menu Définir l’état modifié applique les modifications apportées aux dossiers partagés aux données
enregistrées avec le programme de partage installé sur l’ordinateur. L’application des modifications aux données internes est une
procédure relativement longue. Aussi, cette fonction permet-elle aux utilisateurs de n’appliquer les modifications que lorsque cela
s’avère nécessaire. Tant que vous ne sélectionnez pas le menu Définir l’état modifié, l’état modifié du dossier partagé n’est pas
appliqué au serveur. Les modifications apportées aux dossiers partagés ne sont pas appliquées à l’ordinateur tant que vous n’avez
pas sélectionné le menu Définir l’état modifié.
Définition des permissions d’accès
Pour permettre au téléviseur de détecter votre ordinateur, le téléviseur doit être défini sur Définir la politique du périphérique dans
la fenêtre Paramètres de permission d’accès. De plus, le serveur et le téléviseur doivent se trouver sur le même sous-réseau.
• Procédure : sélectionnez le menu Partager, puis cliquez sur Définir la politique du périphérique. Les éléments rejetés
apparaissent en gris. Vous pouvez modifier les permissions d’accès en utilisant le bouton Allow Autoriser Accepter / Refuser.
Pour supprimer un élément, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer l’élément.
❑ Serveur
Serveur
Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur en tant que serveur ou annuler cette affectation.
Démarrer le serveur au démarrage de Windows
Vous pouvez indiquer si le serveur doit démarrer automatiquement au démarrage de Windows.
Modifier le nom du serveur
Vous pouvez renommer le serveur.
Utilisation de la fonction DLNA
❑ Utilisation du menu DLNA
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permet de lire du contenu enregistré sur un
serveur DLNA (généralement votre ordinateur) connecté à votre téléviseur ou sur un
réseau. Media play permet de lire du contenu enregistré sur une unité de stockage USB
connectée au téléviseur, tandis que DLNA permet de lire du contenu enregistré sur
un serveur DLNA (votre ordinateur) connecté à votre téléviseur ou sur le réseau. Les
procédures d’utilisation du contenu sont identiques à celles en usage pour Media play
(USB & DLNA).
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande pour afficher le menu DLNA.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner une icône (Photo, Music, Movie,
Setup), puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N Pour quitter le mode DLNA, appuyez sur le bouton MEDIA.P de la télécommande.
N DLNA ne prend pas en charge les fonctions suivantes.
- Musique de fond et Sélection musique de fond.
- Tri des fichiers par préférence dans les dossiers Photo, Musique et Film.
- Mod. info groupe.
- La fonction Copier / Supprimer.
- La fonction Retrait sécurisé.
- Le bouton π (Retour arrière) / μ(Avance rapide) fonctionne pendant la lecture d’un film.
- Fonction Lecture d’un film en continu (Resume Play).
N La fonction Skip peut ne pas fonctionner avec certains conteneurs tels que asf et mkv.
N Les sous-titres intégrés multi-audio Divx DRM ne sont pas pris en charge.
N Samsung PC Share Manager doit être autorisé par le pare-feu de l’ordinateur.
N Il se peut que la fonction Skip (touches ◄/►) ou Pause ne soit pas opérationnelle pendant la lecture d’un film pour le DLNA
d’autres fabricants. Cela dépend, en fait, des informations de contenu.
N Il se peut que la durée de lecture ne soit pas affichée lors de la lecture d’un film.
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Libre
Movie
USB Périph. Retour
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:59:26 PMFrançais - 45
Anynet
+
Connexion de périphériques Anynet
+
Anynet
+
est une fonction qui vous permet de contrôler tous les périphériques Samsung connectés compatibles Anynet
+
avec votre
télécommande Samsung. Le système Anynet
+
s’utilise uniquement avec des périphériques Samsung disposant de la fonction Anynet
+
.
Afin de vérifier que votre périphérique Samsung dispose de cette fonction, assurez-vous qu’il comporte le logo Anynet
+
.
❑ Connexion à un téléviseur
1. A l’aide du câble HDMI, reliez la prise HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ou 4) du téléviseur à la prise HDMI OUT du périphérique Anynet
+
correspondant.
❑ Connexion à un système home cinéma
1. A l’aide du câble HDMI, reliez la prise HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ou 4) du téléviseur à la prise HDMI OUT du périphérique Anynet
+
correspondant.
2. A l’aide du câble HDMI, reliez la prise HDMI IN du système home cinéma à la prise HDMI OUT du périphérique Anynet
+
correspondant.
N Connectez le câble optique entre la prise sortie audio numérique (optique) de votre téléviseur et l’entrée Digital Audio (audio
numérique) de votre système home cinéma.
N En suivant les instructions de connexion ci-avant, la prise optique alimente uniquement les périphériques audio 2 canaux. Vous
n’entendrez du son qu’au niveau des haut-parleurs avant gauche et droit et du caisson de basses de votre système home cinéma.
Pour écouter des chaînes audio 5.1, branchez la prise Sortie audio numérique (Optique) du lecteur DVD ou du décodeur câble/
récepteur satellite
(c.-à-d. appareil Anynet 1 ou 2) directement sur l’amplificateur ou sur un système home cinéma, et non sur le téléviseur.
N Ne connectez qu’un seul système home cinéma.
N Vous pouvez connecter un périphérique Anynet
+
à l’aide du câble HDMI 1.3. Certains câbles HDMI peuvent ne pas prendre en
charge les fonctions Anynet
+
.
N Anynet
+
fonctionne si le périphérique AV compatible Anynet
+
est en mode Standby (Veille) ou Marche.
N Anynet
+
prend en charge jusqu’à 12 périphériques AV. Vous pouvez connecter jusqu’à 3 périphériques du même type.
N Anynet
+
prend en charge jusqu’à 3 périphériques simultanément.
Périphérique
Anynet
+
1
Périphérique
Anynet
+
2
Périphérique
Anynet
+
3
Périphérique
Anynet
+
4
TV
Câble HDMI 1.3
Câble HDMI 1.3
Câble HDMI 1.3
Câble HDMI 1.3
TV
Périphérique Anynet
+
1
Périphérique Anynet
+
2 Périphérique Anynet
+
3
Câble HDMI 1.3
Câble HDMI 1.3
Câble HDMI 1.3
Câble HDMI 1.3
Home cinéma
Câble optique
Périphérique Anynet
+
4
Câble HDMI 1.3
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:59:27 PMFrançais - 46
Configuration d’Anynet
+
❑ Configuration d’ Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
T Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils.
Vous pouvez également afficher le menu Anynet
+
en sélectionnant Outils →
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) → Arrêt / Marche
Pour utiliser la fonction Anynet
+
, l’option Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) doit être réglée sur
Marche.
N Lorsque la fonction Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) est désactivée, toutes les activités
associées à Anynet
+
sont indisponibles.
Arrêt automatique → Non / Oui
Arrêt automatique d’un périphérique Anynet
+
lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension.
N La source active sur la télécommande du téléviseur doit être définie sur TV pour
pouvoir utiliser la fonction Anynet
+
.
N Si vous réglez Arrêt automatique sur Oui, les périphériques externes connectés
s’éteignent lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension. Toutefois, si un périphérique
externe est en train d’enregistrer, il peut ne pas s’éteindre.
Commutation entre périphériques Anynet
+
1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Liste d’appareils, puis appuyez sur
le bouton ENTERE.
N La liste des périphériques Anynet
+
connectés au téléviseur s’affiche. Si le
périphérique désiré est introuvable, appuyez sur le bouton rouge pour chercher des
périphériques.
N Le menu Liste des appareils n’apparaît que si Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) est réglé sur
Marche dans le menu Configuration.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner un périphérique, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Vous passez ainsi au
périphérique sélectionné.
N Le basculement vers le périphérique sélectionné peut prendre 2 minutes. Il est impossible d’annuler l’opération de basculement en
cours.
N Le temps de recherche nécessaire dépend du nombre de périphériques connectés.
N Si vous avez choisi un périphérique externe en appuyant sur le bouton SOURCE, il est impossible d’utiliser la fonction Anynet
+
.
Veillez à basculer vers un périphérique Anynet
+
externe au moyen du bouton TOOLS.
❑ Menu Anynet
+
Le menu Anynet
+
varie selon le type et l’état des périphériques Anynet
+
connectés au téléviseur.
Menu Anynet
+
Description
Voir télévision Le mode Anynet
+
change en mode de diffusion TV.
Liste d’appareils Affiche la liste des périphériques Anynet
+
.
(nom_périphérique) MENU Affiche les menus du périphérique connecté. Par exemple, si un graveur DVD est connecté, son
menu de disque s’affiche.
(nom_périphérique) INFO Affiche le menu de lecture du périphérique connecté. Par exemple, si un graveur DVD est
connecté, son menu de lecture s’affiche.
Enregistrement (*enregistreur) Démarre un enregistrement (ce menu ne fonctionne qu’avec un appareil capable d’enregistrer).
(*enregistreur) Réserver
l’enregistrement
Permet de réserver un enregistrement pour l’enregistreur (cette fonction n’est disponible que pour
les périphériques prenant en charge la fonction de réservation).
Arrêter Enr. : (*enregistreur) Arrête l’enregistrement.
Récepteur Le son est émis par l’intermédiaire du récepteur.
Suite...
Application
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)►
Bibliothèque de contenu
Internet@TV
Centre de réseau domestique
U Dépl. EEntrer R Retour
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) : Marche ▶
Arrêt automatique : Oui
U Dépl. EEntrer R Retour
Voir télévision
Liste d’appareils
Enregistrement : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Récepteur AV : Marche
Configuration
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:59:27 PMFrançais - 47
❑ Boutons de la télécommande du téléviseur disponibles en mode Anynet
+
Type de périphérique État de fonctionnement Boutons disponibles
Périphérique Anynet
+
Après basculement vers le
périphérique, lorsque son menu
s’affiche à l’écran.
Touches numériques
▲/▼ Boutons ◄/►/ENTERE
Boutons de couleur / Bouton EXIT
Après basculement vers le
périphérique, pendant la lecture d’un
fichier.
(Recherche vers l’arrière) / (Recherche vers l’avant)
(Arrêt) / (Lecture) / (Pause)
Périphérique à tuner
intégré
Après basculement vers le
périphérique, lorsque vous regardez un
programme télévisé.
Bouton P /
Périphérique audio Lorsque le récepteur est activé.
Bouton = /
Bouton M MUTE
N La fonction Anynet
+
est utilisable uniquement lorsque la source active sur la télécommande est définie sur TV.
N Le bouton ne fonctionne que lorsque l’appareil est dans un état où l’enregistrement est possible.
N Il est impossible de commander des périphériques Anynet
+
à l’aide des boutons situés sur le téléviseur. Les périphériques Anynet
+
ne peuvent être commandés qu’au moyen de la télécommande du téléviseur.
N Il se peut que la télécommande du téléviseur ne fonctionne pas dans certaines situations. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez de nouveau le
périphérique Anynet
+
.
N Les fonctions Anynet
+
n’opèrent pas sur des produits d’autres fabricants.
N Les opérations , peuvent varier en fonction du périphérique.
N Si plusieurs enregistreurs sont connectés, ils s’affichent sous la forme (*enregistreur) si un seul enregistreur est connecté, il
s’affiche sous la forme (*nom_périphérique).
Enregistrement
Vous pouvez enregistrer un programme télévisé à l’aide d’un enregistreur Samsung.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Enregistrement(enregistreur), puis
appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE L’enregistrement débute.
N S’il y a plusieurs périphériques d’enregistrement
Si plusieurs enregistreurs sont connectés, la liste de ces périphériques s’affiche.
Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner un périphérique d’enregistrement,
puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE L’enregistrement débute.
N Lorsque le périphérique d’enregistrement n’est pas affiché
sélectionnez Liste des appareils et appuyez sur le bouton rouge pour rechercher les périphériques.
N Le fait d’appuyer sur le bouton permet d’enregistrer ce que vous regardez. Si vous regardez une vidéo provenant d’un autre
périphérique, cette vidéo est enregistrée.
N Avant d’enregistrer, vérifiez la connexion de la prise d’antenne au périphérique d’enregistrement. Afin de connecter correctement
une antenne à un périphérique d’enregistrement, reportez-vous à la documentation de ce dernier.
U Dépl. EEntrer R Retour
Voir télévision
Liste d’appareils
Enregistrement : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Récepteur : Marche
Configuration
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:59:28 PMFrançais - 48
Ecoute via un récepteur
Vous pouvez écouter du son via un récepteur au lieu du haut-parleur du téléviseur.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Récepteur. Appuyez sur le bouton
▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Marche ou Arrêt.
N Si votre récepteur ne prend en charge que l’audio, il se peut qu’il ne figure pas dans la
liste des périphériques.
N Le récepteur fonctionnera lorsque vous aurez correctement raccordé la prise d’entrée
optique du récepteur à la prise de sortie optique du téléviseur.
N Lorsque le récepteur (home cinéma) est activé, vous pouvez écouter le son sortant de la prise optique du téléviseur. Lorsque le
téléviseur affiche un signal DTV(air), il envoie un son 5.1 au récepteur du home cinéma. Lorsque la source est un composant
numérique (ex. DVD) connecté au téléviseur via HDMI, seul un son 2 voies est diffusé par le récepteur du home cinéma.
N Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Media Play, le son peut ne pas être transmis correctement par le récepteur.
N Lors de l’écoute via le récepteur, des restrictions s’appliquent à l’utilisation des menus liés aux fonctions audio.
N Si une coupure de courant se produit alors que l’option Récepteur est définie sur Marche, il se peut que l’option Sélection du
haut-parleur soit définie sur Haut-parleur externe lorsque vous rallumez le téléviseur. (Voir page 21)
Dépannage d’Anynet
+
Symptôme Solution
Anynet
+
ne fonctionne pas. • Vérifiez si le périphérique est compatible Anynet
+
. Le système Anynet
+
ne prend en charge
que les périphériques compatibles Anynet
+
.
• Connexion à un seul récepteur (home cinéma).
• Vérifiez si le cordon d’alimentation du périphérique Anynet
+
est bien connecté.
• Vérifiez la connexion des câbles vidéo/audio/HDMI du périphérique Anynet
+
.
• Vérifiez qu’Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) est défini sur Marche dans le menu de configuration
d’Anynet
+
.
• Vérifiez si la télécommande du téléviseur est en mode TV.
• Vérifiez qu’il s’agit d’une télécommande exclusive Anynet
+
.
• Anynet
+
ne fonctionne pas dans toutes les conditions (recherche de chaînes, fonctionnement
de Media Play, Plug & Play, etc.).
• Lorsque vous branchez ou retirez le câble HDMI 1.3, veillez à relancer une recherche de
périphérique ou à éteindre et.
• Vérifiez si la fonction Anynet
+
du périphérique Anynet
+
est réglée sur Marche
Je veux démarrer Anynet
+
. • Assurez-vous que le périphérique Anynet
+
est bien connecté au téléviseur et assurez-vous
que la fonction Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) est réglée sur Marche dans le menu Configuration
d’Anynet
+
.
• Appuyez sur le bouton TV de la télécommande pour allumer le téléviseur. Appuyez ensuite sur
le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Anynet
+
et sélectionnez le menu de votre choix.
Je veux quitter
Anynet+
.
• Choisissez Voir télévision dans le menu Anynet
+
.
• Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande et choisissez un périphérique non
compatible Anynet
+
(remarque : le bouton de chaîne ne fonctionne que si aucun périphérique
Anynet
+
à tuner intégré n’est connecté).
Solution Le message
Connexion à
Anynet
+
apparaît à l’écran.
• Il est impossible d’employer la télécommande quand vous configurez Anynet
+
ou quand vous
passez à un mode de visualisation.
• La télécommande n’est utilisable qu’au terme de la configuration d’Anynet
+
ou du passage au
mode de visualisation.
La lecture ne démarre pas sur
le périphérique Anynet
+
.
• Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction de lecture quand une opération Plug & Play est en
cours.
Le périphérique connecté ne
s’affiche pas.
• Vérifiez si le périphérique est compatible ou non avec les fonctions Anynet
+
.
• Vérifiez si le câble HDMI 1.3 est correctement connecté.
• Vérifiez qu’Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) est défini sur Marche dans le menu de configuration
d’Anynet
+
.
• Lancez une nouvelle recherche de périphériques Anynet
+
.
• Vous pouvez connecter un périphérique Anynet
+
uniquement à l’aide du câble HDMI 1.3.
Certains câbles HDMI peuvent ne pas prendre en charge les fonctions Anynet
+
.
• En cas d’arrêt anormal résultant d’une déconnexion du câble HDMI ou du câble
d’alimentation, ou encore d’une panne de courant, effectuez une nouvelle recherche de
périphériques.
Impossible d’enregistrer le
programme TV.
• Vérifiez que la fiche d’antenne est correctement branchée sur le périphérique
d’enregistrement.
Le son du téléviseur ne sort pas
par le récepteur.
• Reliez le téléviseur au récepteur à l’aide du câble optique.
U Depl. EEntrer R Retour
Voir télévision
Liste d’appareils
Enregistrement : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Récepteur : Marche
Configuration
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:59:29 PMFrançais - 49
Activation de la Bibliothèque de contenu
La Bibliothèque de contenu vous permet de visionner ou de lire du contenu intégré sur le
téléviseur ou stocké sur votre unité USB.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner
Application, puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Bibliothèque de contenu, puis
appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Le menu principal de Bibliothèque de contenu
s’affiche.
O Appuyez sur le bouton CONTENT de la télécommande pour afficher le menu
principal Bibliothèque de contenu.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner une icône (Galerie, Cuisine,
Enfants, Bien-être, Autres, Gestion de contenu), puis appuyez sur le bouton
ENTERE.
N L’élément sélectionné est exécuté.
❑ Utilisation du bouton de la télécommande dans le menu Bibliothèque de contenu
Bouton Description
▲/▼/◄/► Déplace le curseur pour sélectionner un élément.
ENTERE Valide l’élément actuellement sélectionné.
RETURN Revient au menu précédent.
EXIT Arrête la fonction en cours et revient au menu principal Bibliothèque de contenu.
Boutons de
couleur
Les boutons qui donnent accès à des fonctions sont décrits sur la page
correspondante.
Vous pouvez régler le volume du contenu en cours de lecture.
CONTENT Permet d’entrer ou de quitter le mode Bibliothèque de contenu.
N Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Volume ou MMUTE, aucun OSD n’est affiché, mais la fonction est exécutée comme il se doit.
N Pour revenir en mode TV, appuyez sur le bouton P de la télécommande.
N LA CONTENTS LIBRARY CONTIENT DU TEXTE, DES GRAPHIQUES, DES IMAGES, DES FICHIERS MULTIMEDIA
ET AUTRES DOCUMENTS FOURNIS A TITRE PUREMENT INDICATIF ET PROMOTIONNEL. CES DONNEES ONT
ETE MODIFIEES ET SONT REGULIEREMENT REVISEES ET MISES A JOUR. CERTAINS DOCUMENTS DE LA
CONTENTS LIBRARY PEUVENT NE PAS S’APPLIQUER A TOUS LES UTILISATEURS.
N LES INFORMATIONS CONTENUES DANS LA CONTENTS LIBRARY SONT FOURNIES TELLES QUELLES. BIEN
QU’ELLES PROVIENNENT DE SOURCES REPUTEES FIABLES, SAMSUNG NE PEUT GARANTIR ET NE GARANTIT
PAS L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITE, L’ACTUALITE OU LE CARACTERE COMPLET DE TOUTE INFORMATION OU
DONNEES RENDUES DISPONIBLES A UN USAGE PARTICULIER.
EN AUCUN CAS, Y COMPRIS LA NEGLIGENCE, SAMSUNG NE POURRA ETRE TENUE RESPONSABLE, QUE
CE SOIT SUR BASE CONTRACTUELLE OU EN DOMMAGES ET INTERETS, POUR TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT,
INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, PARTICULIER OU CONSECUTIF, FRAIS D’AVOCAT, FRAIS EXPOSES OU TOUT AUTRE
DOMMAGE QUELCONQUE RESULTANT DE OU LIE A TOUTE INFORMATION CONTENUE DANS OU RESULTANT
DE L’UTILISATION DE LA CONTENTS LIBRARY, MEME SI ELLE A ETE AVERTIE DE LA POSSIBILITE DE TELS
DOMMAGES.
Bibliothèque de contenu
Application
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
Bibliothèque de contenu
Internet@TV
Centre de réseau domestique
< >
Cuisine Enfants
Galerie
Galerie
Bibliothèque de contenu
Bien-être Autres
Retour Quitter
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:59:30 PMFrançais - 50
Utilisation de la Bibliothèque de contenu
❑ Galerie
Cette fonction lance un diaporama contenant des images haute résolution et un fond musical.
La fonction Galerie du téléviseur vous permet de changer votre ambiance intérieure.
N Appuyez sur le bouton INFO pour afficher le nom de l’artiste et des informations détaillées en anglais sur chaque image
(actuellement, ces informations ne sont fournies qu’en anglais).
N Vous pouvez interrompre le diaporama en appuyant sur le bouton ENTERE pendant sa diffusion.
N Les droits d’auteur relatifs au contenu de la Gallery et tous les litiges qui en découlent sont du ressort de Timespace / JoongAng
M&B, Inc.
❑ Cuisine
Plusieurs recettes, faciles à réaliser, vous sont proposées. Inspirez-vous de ce contenu pour préparer de délicieux repas.
N Les recettes présentées dans la catégorie Cuisine du téléviseur Samsung s’inspirent de recettes publiées par Anness
Publishing.
N Les droits d’auteur relatifs à la catégorie Cuisine et tous les litiges qui en découlent sont du ressort de Practical Pictures.
❑ Enfants
Ce contenu éducatif et interactif fera le bonheur de vos enfants. Ils vivront des aventures inoubliables avec Boowa et Kwala, deux
personnages sympathiques.
N Les droits d’auteur relatifs à la catégorie Enfants et les litiges qui en découlent sont du ressort de UpToTen.
❑ Bien-être
Ce contenu de gestion de la santé propose des exercices d’étirement et un fond musical pour toute la famille.
❑ Gestion de contenu
Mon contenu
L’utilisation du contenu est identique à celle du contenu de la mémoire du téléviseur. Vous pouvez également supprimer et lire
chaque contenu.
USB
Vous pouvez télécharger du contenu sur une unité de stockage USB et le lire sur votre téléviseur. Le contenu du périphérique USB
externe est lu directement.
N Bibliothèque de contenu prend en charge les périphériques de stockage de masse USB de la classe MSC. Cette dernière
est dédiée aux périphériques de transport de masse uniquement. Il s’agit notamment des clés USB, lecteurs de cartes Flash et
disques durs USB (les concentrateurs USB ne sont pas pris en charge).
N Si vous exécutez un jeu à l’aide d’une unité de stockage USB externe, vous aurez la possibilité d’enregistrer votre partie
(cela dépend en fait du jeu). Nous attirons votre attention sur le fait que le retrait de l’unité de stockage USB alors que
l’enregistrement de données est en cours risque de provoquer une perte de données.
N Téléchargement de nouveau contenu
Vous pourrez vous procurer gratuitement du nouveau contenu par le biais du site Web www.samsung.com. Lorsque vous
téléchargez du contenu payant, vous avez besoin d’un numéro UDN (Unique Device Number). Vérifiez le numéro UDN avant de
télécharger du nouveau contenu.
1. Rendez-vous sur le site www.samsung.com
2. Sélectionnez un élément de contenu sur la page Téléchargement de contenu.
3. Téléchargez le contenu sur l’unité de stockage USB.
4. Accédez au menu principal Bibliothèque de contenu en appuyant sur le bouton CONTENT ou en sélectionnant
Bibliothèque de contenu (Menu → Application → Bibliothèque de contenu)
5. Introduisez l’unité USB dans le port USB situé sur le côté du téléviseur.
6. Vous pouvez regarder le sous-élément de contenu que vous avez téléchargé.
7. Sélectionnez du contenu et appuyez sur le bouton Enter.
8. Vous pouvez lire l’élément de contenu sélectionné.
Configuration
• Délai de l’écran de veille → 10min. / 20min. / 40min. / 1 heures
Sélectionne le délai avant l’activation de l’écran de veille.
• Enregistrer le numéro UDN (Unique Device Number)
Le numéro à 18 chiffres à l’écran représente le code du produit.
Vous pouvez enregistrer le numéro UDN sur votre unité USB.
N Un périphérique de stockage USB au format NTFS ne prend pas en charge l’enregistrement du numéro UDN.
Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser un périphérique de stockage USB utilisant le format FAT.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:59:30 PMFrançais - 51
Vous pouvez accéder à Internet afin d’afficher du contenu informatique ou ludique.
Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec le service d’un widget, contactez le propriétaire du contenu. Dans le widget, appuyez sur le
bouton vert et accédez aux informations de contact ou reportez-vous au site Web d’aide pour connaître les coordonnées du fournisseur
du widget.
N En fonction de votre pays, il se peut que seul l’anglais soit pris en charge dans le service du widget.
N Il se peut également que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge.
Mise en route d’Internet@TV
Internet@TV vous propose des services Internet et de télévision intégrés via le Widget Engine Yahoo!®. Avec le service Internet@TV
disponible sur votre téléviseur, gérez vos actions, partagez vos photos avec des amis et votre famille, suivez les actualités et la météo.
N Selon l’état du réseau, il se peut que cette fonction soit inopérante. Le téléviseur s’éteint alors automatiquement. Sinon, éteignez-le
au moyen du bouton d’alimentation.
N En fonction de l’état du réseau, cette fonction peut se révéler relativement lente ou instable.
Lors de la première exécution d’Internet@TV, des réglages de base s’effectuent de manière automatique.
N La première étape consiste à configurer votre réseau. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre réseau, reportez-vous à
la section “Configuration du réseau”.
N Une fois le réseau en service, l’assistant du logiciel Internet@TV vous guide tout au long de la procédure de configuration.
Internet@TV
Le contenu et les services accessibles grâce à cet équipement sont la propriété de tiers et sont protégés par des droits d’auteur, brevets, marques
et/ou autres législations applicables en matière de propriété intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services vous sont fournis uniquement pour un usage
privé et non-commercial. Vous n’êtes pas autorisé à utiliser le contenu ou les services dans des conditions qui n’ont pas été autorisées par le
propriétaire du contenu ou le fournisseur du service. Sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire du contenu ou du fournisseur du service concerné,
vous vous interdisez, notamment, de modifier, reproduire, re-publier, charger, afficher, transmettre, traduire, vendre, exploiter, distribuer ou créer des
œuvres dérivées à partir des contenus ou services fournis grâce à cet équipement, de quelque manière que ce soit.
LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES TIERS SONT FOURNIS EN L’éTAT. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO, LTD (« SAMSUNG ») NE GARANTIT
NI LE CONTENU NI LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS. SOUS RéSERVE DES LOIS IMPéRATIVES APPLICABLES, SAMSUNG EXCLUT
EXPRESSéMENT TOUTES GARANTIES APPLICABLES AU CONTENU ET AUX SERVICES TIERS. SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS
L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITé, L’OPPORTUNITé, LA LéGALITé OU L’EXHAUSTIVITé DU CONTENU OU DES SERVICES MIS à DISPOSITION
PAR LE BIAIS DE CET éQUIPEMENT. SAMSUNG NE SERAAUCUNEMENT RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS OU INDIRECTS
RéSULTANT DE OU LIéS à L’INFORMATION CONTENUE DANS LE CONTENU ET LES SERVICES OU à L’UTILISATION DE TOUTE
CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MêME OU TOUT AUTRE TIERS, MêME SI SAMSUNG A éTé INFORMé DE LA POSSIBILITé DE
SURVENANCE DE TELS DOMMAGES.
Les services tiers peuvent être résiliés ou interrompus à tout moment par les prestataires tiers. Samsung ne garantit pas que le contenu ou le
service soit disponible sur la durée. Le contenu et les services sont transmis par des tiers par le biais de réseaux et d’équipements de transmission
sur lesquels Samsung n’exerce aucun contrôle. Samsung exclut de manière expresse toute responsabilité en cas d’interruption ou de suspension
de tout contenu ou service mis à disposition grâce à cet équipement, sous réserve qu’une telle interruption ou suspension ne soit pas directement
imputable à Samsung. Samsung n’est pas davantage responsable du service clientèle associé aux contenu et services. Toute question ou
réclamation concernant le contenu ou les services fournis doit être adressée directement ou fournisseurs de contenus et de services concernés.
L’utilisation des services par des mineurs de moins de 18 ans est soumis au consentement exprès de leur parent ou tuteur avant d’accéder au
contenu et aux services mis à disposition grâce à cet équipement.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Application, puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Internet@TV, puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
N INTERNET@TV démarre.
O Appuyez sur le bouton INTERNET@ de la télécommande pour afficher le
menu Internet@TV.
3. le General Disclaimer s’affiche à l’écran. Sélectionnez I accept ou I do not
accept.
N Pour plus d’informations sur le General Disclaimer, reportez-vous à la section
‘Legal Notice’.
4. L’écran de bienvenue est le point de départ de la procédure de configuration
guidée d’Internet@TV.
N Si vous sélectionnez Exit Setup, vous pouvez reprendre cette étape en
appuyant sur le bouton INTERNET@.
N Sélectionnez Let’s get started!
5. Le choix de l’emplacement permet aux widgets TV d’utiliser du contenu localisé.
N Sélectionnez votre pays dans la liste proposée.
6. Vous devez accepter la politique de confidentialité du moteur de widgets TV Yahoo!® pour pouvoir vous servir d’Internet@TV.
N Cliquez sur OK, I Accept.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:59:31 PMFrançais - 52
7. Vous devez accepter les conditions de service du système de widgets TV Yahoo!® pour pouvoir vous servir d’Internet@TV.
N Cliquez sur OK, I Accept.
8. Saisissez votre nom pour configurer votre profil. Chaque profil possède sa propre
liste de widgets. Vous pouvez créer un profil pour chaque personne se servant
d’Internet@TV.
N Entrez votre nom et sélectionnez Save this name.
N Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la ‘Using the Profile Widget’.
9. Internet@TV teste la connexion réseau.
N En cas d’échec du test, reconfigurez votre réseau.
N Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la page ‘Network Setup’.
10. La configuration guidée est terminée. Un didacticiel portant sur l’utilisation
d’Internet@TV vous est ensuite proposé.
N Sélectionnez Continue pour consulter ce didacticiel.
N Choisissez Exit setup pour commencer à utiliser Internet@TV.
N Pour relancer le didacticiel, sélectionnez Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial.
11. Appuyez sur le bouton INTERNET@ de la télécommande pour afficher l’interface utilisateur Internet@TV.
❑ Affichage
Mode dock
1 Une bannière de bienvenue apparaît dans l’angle supérieur droit ; elle
indique le nom de votre profil.
N Cette bannière disparaît rapidement.
2 La bannière met en surbrillance deux raccourcis de la télécommande.
N Si vous appuyez sur le bouton bleu (Viewport) de la télécommande,
l’affichage passe du mode Viewport au mode de superposition. En
mode Viewport, la télévision ou la vidéo est affichée dans une zone
miniature, graphismes à l’extérieur. En mode de superposition, les
graphismes sont affichés par-dessus la télévision ou la vidéo.
N Si vous appuyez sur le bouton jaune (Edit Snippet) de votre
télécommande, une fenêtre d’aide s’affiche. Le snippet (raccourci)
sélectionné est alors modifiable.
3 Appuyez sur le bouton INTERNET@ de la télécommande.
N La liste horizontale au bas de votre écran de télévision s’appelle le ‘dock’.
N Les éléments de cette liste sont les ‘snippets’.
N Un snippet est un raccourci qui lance un widget TV.
N Un widget TV est une application Internet compatible avec votre téléviseur.
N Vous pouvez parcourir les snippets à l’aide des touches ◄ ou ► de la télécommande.
N La sélection se situe dans la zone la plus à gauche (surbrillance bleue).
N Le dock fait glisser les snippets sous cette zone de sélection.
N Pour lancer un widget TV, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE de la télécommande lorsque son snippet est sélectionné.
N Lorsque vous ajoutez des snippets, ils forment une liste que vous pouvez parcourir en appuyant sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼.
N Deux widgets TV spéciaux apparaissent dans le dock : le Profile Widget et le Gallery Widget. Ceux-ci ne peuvent pas être
supprimés.
N Le dock disparaîtra de l’écran après une période d’inactivité.
Mode volet
1 Sélectionnez un snippet et appuyez sur la touche ENTERE pour activer
le volet du widget TV. Le logo du widget TV et la maison ( )
apparaissent en haut du volet.
2 Le menu sélectionné est affiché sous le logo du widget TV.
N Pour revenir à un précédent écran, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur la
touche ENTERE.
N Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la touche RETURN de la
télécommande.
3 La sélection active est toujours en surbrillance bleue. La touche en
surbrillance est sélectionnée ; pour l’activer, appuyez sur la touche
ENTERE.
4 Lorsque les données sont nombreuses, un contrôle de page est utilisé.
N La page en cours et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués.
N Parcourez les pages en appuyant sur ◄ ou ►.
5 La barre d’outils inférieur comprend des boutons de couleur qui correspondent aux touches verte, rouge, jaune et bleu de la
télécommande.
• Bouton rouge : Ferme le widget.
• Bouton vert : Modifie les paramètres du widget.
• Bouton jaune : Gère vos widgets.
• Bouton bleu : Ajuste l’écran à la vidéo ou passe la vidéo en plein écran
N Il se peut que certains boutons ne soient pas disponibles selon le widget.
.@# áëí space
a b c d e f g h i
j k l m n o p q r
s t u v w x y z 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:59:32 PMFrançais - 53
Modification des snippets du dock
1. Pour modifier un snippet, sélectionnez-le dans le dock, puis appuyez sur la touche jaune.
2. Le snippet passe en deuxième position ; le texte d’aide suivant s’affiche alors :
• Supprimer (bouton rouge) : Remove this TV Widget.
N Vous pouvez réinstaller les widgets supprimés à l’aide de la galerie de widgets (Widget Gallery).
• Dépl. (bouton bleu) : Re-order the snippet. Appuyez sur ◄ ou ► pour parcourir les options. Appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour
accéder à la nouvelle position.
• Terminé (bouton jaune) : Exit the Edit Snippet menu.
Utilisation du widget Profil
Le widget Profil permet de configurer votre profil utilisateur. Vous pouvez paramétrer plusieurs profils,
chacun possédant sa propre liste de widgets.
Le menu Switch Profile vous permet de changer de profil.
N Au moins deux profils doivent être enregistrés. Si vous voulez ajouter un profil, reportez-vous à la
section ‘Contrôles d’administration’.
Le menu Profile Settings vous permet de personnaliser et de protéger votre profil.
• Les profils utilisateur peuvent être personnalisés au moyen d’un Nom unique et d’un Avatar (image
représentant votre profil).
• le Nom et l’avatar de votre profil sont affichés dans le snippet de profil, dans le dock.
• Vous pouvez protéger vos profils au moyen de l’option Create Profile PIN
N Lors du réglage du code PIN pour la première fois, vous pouvez définir une Security Question.
Le menu Profile Settings permet de limiter l’accès aux widgets.
• En cas d’oubli du code PIN de votre profil, il vous suffit de répondre à la question de sécurité
associée à votre profil.
• Si l’indicateur Limit Profile d’un profil est activé, aucun autre widget ne peut être installé.
N Le code PIN propriétaire doit être défini pour utiliser cette fonction. Pour définir le code PIN propriétaire, reportez-vous à la section
‘Contrôles d’administration’.
Le menu System Settings vous permet d’effectuer les opérations suivantes :
• Modifier votre emplacement géographique et de définir votre code postal (Etats-Unis uniquement) pour adapter le contenu à votre
région.
• Relancer didacticiel présenté lors de la configuration.
• Restaurer les paramètres d’usine pour supprimer toutes les configurations et informations relatives aux widgets.
Dans le menu Administrative Controls, vous pouvez effectuer les opérations suivantes :
• Définir le délai d’affichage de l’économiseur d’écran pour éviter de brûler l’écran.
• Créer un code PIN propriétaire et définir une question de sécurité pour contrôler d’autres profils.
• Créer un nouveau profil pouvant être configuré avec des widgets différents.
• Supprimer un profil existant.
Dans le widget Profil, vous pouvez vous connecter à Yahoo!® au moyen de votre ID Yahoo!.
• Si vous possédez un ID Yahoo!, vous pouvez accéder à votre contenu personnalisé avec les widgets TV Yahoo!.
• Tous les widgets TV Yahoo! installés sont automatiquement activés avec l’ID Yahoo! de votre profil.
• Si vous ne disposez d’aucun compte Yahoo!, visitez le site Web www.yahoo.com et créez un compte.
• La connexion à l’aide d’un ID créé sur le site Web Yahoo dans un pays ne prenant pas en charge Internet@TV peut échouer.
❑ A propos du widget Profil
Appuyez sur le bouton vert.
Vous pouvez afficher une brève description des éléments suivants : Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service et
Privacy Policy.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:59:33 PMFrançais - 54
Utilisation de la galerie de widgets Yahoo!®
Passez par la galerie de widgets Yahoo!® pour ajouter d’autres widgets à votre téléviseur.
Consultez les widgets TV disponibles dans les catégories suivantes.
• Latest Widgets : Affiche les widgets récemment mis à jour.
• Yahoo!® Widgets : Kffiche les widgets fournis par Yahoo!®.
• Samsung Widgets : Affiche les widgets fournis par Samsung.
• Catégories supplémentaires : Affiche tous les widgets par catégorie.
N Pour installer un widget, accédez à l’écran de détail, sélectionnez Add Widget to My Profile, puis
appuyez sur la touche ENTERE. Le widget est installé et est désormais disponible dans le dock.
❑ Réglage de la Widget Gallery
Appuyez sur le bouton vert.
About Yahoo! Widget Gallery...
Vous pouvez afficher de brèves informations concernant les éléments suivants : Widget Gallery,
Copyright Policy, Terms of Service et Privacy Policy.
Dans le menu Developer Settings, vous pouvez créer votre propre widget.
Pour plus d’informations sur la création d’un widget personnalisé, consultez notre site dédié aux
développeurs à l’adresse http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/
Utilisation du widget Météo Yahoo!®
Le widget Météo Yahoo!® fournit des informations météorologiques actualisées sur votre zone
géographique et sur vos emplacements préférés. Ce contenu évolue de façon dynamique en fonction
des conditions météorologiques.
• Appuyez sur le bouton vert de la télécommande pour afficher le menu Yahoo!® Weather Widget
Settings.
• Dans le menu Settings, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer la ville pour laquelle vous voulez
consulter la météo.
Dans le menu Settings:
• Add New City : ajoutez une ville en saisissant son nom. Une fois les résultats de la recherche
affichés, sélectionnez la ville voulue, puis appuyez sur la touche ENTERE.
• Delete City : supprimez une ville en sélectionnant son nom dans la liste des villes. Appuyez sur le
bouton ENTERE et confirmez la suppression.
• Modification du mode d’indication de la température.
Vous pouvez choisir le mode d’indication de la température : Imperial ou Metric. Imperial affiche
les températures en degrés Fahrenheit tandis que Metric les affiche en degrés Celsius.
❑ Créez un snippet pour la ville favorite.
• Sélectionnez la ville sur la page d’accueil du widget Météo Yahoo!® et consultez les informations météorologiques détaillées.
• Appuyez sur le bouton jaune.
• Sélectionnez le menu Add Snippet, puis appuyez sur ENTERE pour ajouter la ville en tant que snippet.
❑ Supprimez un snippet d’une ville.
• Lancez le snippet.
• Appuyez sur le bouton jaune.
• Sélectionnez le menu Delete Snippet, puis appuyez sur ENTERE pour supprimer le snippet.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:59:34 PMFrançais - 55
Utilisation du widget Actualités Yahoo!®
Le widget Actualités Yahoo!® vous propose les dernières actualités dans différents domaines :
économie, divertissement, politique, sport, people, etc.
Sélectionnez une catégorie et le titre qui vous intéresse, puis consultez un résumé constamment
actualisé des actualités correspondantes.
Utilisation du widget Flickr Yahoo!®
Le widget Flickr vous permet d’accéder aux photos favorites de votre famille et de vos amis tout
en regardant la télévision. Partagez vos photos avec votre famille en les présentant sous forme de
diaporama sur votre téléviseur grand écran.
• Personnalisez le widget Flickr en vous connectant avec votre ID Yahoo!
• Pour plus de détails sur les procédures de connexion, reportez-vous aux instructions de la section
Utilisation du widget Profil.
• Pour plus d’informations sur Flickr, visitez le site Web http://www.flickr.com.
N La catégorie Your Photos contient les photos que vous avez enregistrées sur le site Web Flickr.
Pour consulter les photos Flickr sous forme de diaporama :
• appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour afficher les détails de la photo.
• Sélectionnez Start Slideshow, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
Pour contrôler la lecture du diaporama :
• Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pendant le diaporama.
• Les miniatures des photos sont affichées au bas de l’écran.
N Lorsque les boutons de commande du diaporama sont affichés, vous pouvez
Interrompre, Lire et Arrêter le diaporama.
N Sélectionnez le menu et appuyez sur ENTERE pour afficher les informations de la photo sélectionnée.
• Le menu Your Sets vous permet d’afficher les photos que vous avez classées dans Flickr.
• Le menu Explore vous permet d’explorer les photos présentées par le site Web Flickr. Vous pouvez afficher les photos mises à
jour quotidiennement.
• Le menu Mark as Favorite ou Remove From Favorite déplace les photos dans votre jeu de photos favorites ou les en enlève.
• Le menu Favorite Photos vous permet d’afficher les photos que vous avez classées dans vos favoris.
• Le menu Your Contacts vous permet d’afficher les mises à jour effetuées par vos proches et amis.
Le menu Your Groups vous permet de sélectionner vos groupes favoris sur le site Web Flickr afin de partager et de regarder des
photos avec la communauté d’utilisateurs Flickr.
Pour configurer le widget Flickr Yahoo!®, appuyez sur le bouton vert de la télécommande.
• Le menu Time Per Slide permet de contrôler la vitesse du diaporama.
• Le menu Repeat relance le diaporama au début une fois la dernière photo affichée.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:59:34 PMFrançais - 56
Utilisation du widget Finance Yahoo!®
Consultez les dernières actualités et informations boursières grâce au widget Finance Yahoo!®.
Appuyez sur le bouton vert pour configurer vos actions. Utilisez le menu Add New Symbol pour saisir le
nom d’une nouvelle action.
• Dans les résultats de la recherche, sélectionnez l’action à ajouter, sélectionnez le menu Add
Symbol, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
N L’action sélectionnée est ajoutée à la liste My Stocks.
• Utilisez le menu Import Symbols From Yahoo!® pour récupérer votre portefeuille Yahoo!®
Finance.
- Le menu Merge Symbols fusionne les symboles du widget Finance Yahoo!® Widget avec ceux
de votre portefeuille.
- Le menu Replace Symbols supprime les symboles du widget Finance Yahoo!® Widget par
ceux de votre portefeuille.
• Utilisez le menu Display Format pour basculer la transition de fluctuation du cours des actions sur
Value ou Percentage.
• Créez un snippet pour votre action favorite.
- Sélectionnez le symbole de l’action sur la page d’accueil du widget Finance Yahoo!® et
consultez les informations financières détaillées.
- Appuyez sur le bouton jaune.
- Sélectionnez le menu Add Snippet, puis appuyez sur ENTERE pour ajouter l’action en tant que snippet.
• Suppression d’un Snippet
- Lancez le snippet à partir du dock.
- Appuyez sur le bouton jaune.
- Sélectionnez le menu Delete Snippet, puis appuyez sur ENTERE pour supprimer le snippet.
Dépannage d’Internet@TV
Problème Solution possible
Certains services du widget ne
fonctionnent pas.
• Contactez le prestataire de service.
• Dans le widget, appuyez sur le bouton vert et accédez aux informations de contact ou
reportez-vous au site Web d’aide pour connaître les coordonnées du fournisseur du widget.
• Reportez-vous au site Web d’aide.
Certains contenus de widget
sont uniquement en anglais.
Comment puis-je en modifier la
langue ?
• La langue du contenu des widgets peut être différente de celle de l’interface utilisateur des
widgets. Ce paramètre dépend du prestataire de service.
Après restauration des
paramètres d’usine, le
service de widget Yahoo ne
fonctionne plus et un message
d’avertissement s’affiche.
• Une fois la restauration des paramètres d’usine terminée, éteignez puis rallumez votre
téléviseur. Relancez ensuite Internet@TV.
Dans le widget Flickr, je me suis
connecté à mon compte, mais
je ne parviens pas à voir mon
image.
• Visitez le site Web Yahoo et activez votre compte Flickr avec votre ID Yahoo!.
Dans le widget Profil, j’ai
modifié mon emplacement mais
les paramètres précédents
restent actifs.
• Eteignez puis rallumez votre téléviseur. Relancez ensuite Internet@TV.
• Vous pouvez à présent profiter de tous les services de widget services pris en charge au
nouvel emplacement.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:59:35 PMFrançais - 57
Site Web d’assistance
Pays Site Web
Autriche www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Belgique
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
République
Tchèque
www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Danemark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finlande www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Allemagne www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Grèce www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hongrie www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Irlande www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italie www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Pays-Bas www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Norvège www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Pologne www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slovaquie www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Espagne www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suède www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suisse
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Royaume-Uni www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turquie www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonie www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lettonie www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lituanie www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Russie www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N La procédure d’accès est susceptible d’être modifiée à l’avenir.
N Les liens peuvent varier dans des pays spécifiques.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:59:35 PMFrançais - 58
N En fonction de votre pays, il se peut que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge.
N Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec le service d’un widget, contactez le propriétaire du contenu.
Dans le widget, appuyez sur le bouton vert et accédez aux informations de contact ou reportez-vous au site Web d’aide pour
connaître les coordonnées du fournisseur du widget.
N En fonction de votre pays, il se peut que seul l’anglais soit pris en charge dans le service du widget.
Mise en route d’Internet@TV
Internet@TV fournit les services de widget SAMSUNG via une connexion réseau. Le contenu d’Internet@TV peut varier en fonction du
fournisseur. Le service Internet@TV vous permet d’accéder à diverses informations telles que YouTube.
N Si la police d’un contenu émanant d’un fournisseur précis n’est pas prise en charge sur le téléviseur, ce contenu ne sera pas affiché
normalement.
N La configuration des widgets et les services associés peuvent varier en fonction du pays sélectionné. Lorsque vous avez changé de
pays, éteignez le téléviseur puis rallumez-le. Vous pouvez ensuite utiliser le service de widget adapté au nouveau pays. Si le pays
est réglé sur Others (Autres), le téléviseur ne peut pas reconnaître votre pays. Dans ce cas, effectuez directement la sélection dans
la liste de pays du service.
N Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration pour votre pays, reportez-vous aux instructions de la fonction Plug & Play.
N En fonction de l’état du réseau, cette fonction peut se révéler relativement lente ou instable.
N Avant d’utiliser Internet@TV, commencez par configurer le réseau. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre réseau,
reportez-vous à la section “Config. du réseau”.
Lors de la première exécution d’Internet@TV, des réglages de base s’effectuent de manière automatique. La mise à jour peut prendre
quelques minutes.
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Application, puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Internet@TV, puis sur le bouton ENTERE.
O Appuyez sur le bouton INTERNET@ de la télécommande pour afficher le menu
Internet@TV.
3. le Contrat d’utilisation s’affiche. Cliquez sur Accepter pour en accepter les
conditions.
4. Le message Statistiques & Analyse s’affiche. Cliquez sur Accepter pour en
accepter les conditions.
Configuration d’Internet@TV
Vous pouvez consulter et utiliser les menus relatifs à Single Sign On (SSO) (Ouverture de session unique), à la gestion du système et
aux propriétés. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Configuration puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE.
❑ Single Sign On
Vous pouvez utiliser ce menu lors de la création et de la suppression du compte.
Avec Single Sign On, vous pouvez gérer votre compte, y compris les informations de compte du site de contenu. Vous ne devez
pas ouvrir d’autre session.
N Le compte est réservé à internet@TV.
Créer compte
Vous pouvez créer un compte et vous connecter au site du service voulu.
N Vous ne pouvez pas créer plus de 10 comptes.
N Le nom du compte ne doit pas excéder 10 caractères.
N Si aucun service ne requiert de connexion, vous ne pouvez pas créer de compte.
Account Management
• Site du service : vous pouvez enregistrer les informations de connexion du site du service (comme YouTube).
• Modifier le mot de passe : permet de modifier le mot de passe du compte.
• Supprimer : permet de supprimer le compte.
N Si vous avez oublié le mot de passe du compte, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l’ordre suivant, de façon à
réinitialiser Internet@TV : POWER (arrêt) → M MUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (marche).
Si vous employez cette fonction, tous les comptes seront supprimés.
Internet@TV
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:59:35 PMFrançais - 59
❑ Installation du système
N Il se peut que les fonctions Exécution automatique du message déroulant et Durée du message déroulant ne soient pas
prises en charge dans votre pays.
Modification du mot de passe d’un service
N Le mot de passe par défaut d’un nouveau téléviseur est réglé sur 0-0-0-0.
N Si vous avez oublié le mot de passe, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l’ordre suivant, ce qui remet le mot de
passe à 0-0-0-0 : POWER (arrêt) → M MUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (marche).
Durée du service
Sélectionnez l’option voulue pour définir le délai avant l’activation de l’écran de veille.
Exécution automatique du message déroulant → Arrêt / Marche
Sélectionnez l’option voulue pour activer automatiquement ou non le message défilant lors de la mise en marche du téléviseur.
Durée du message déroulant
Sélectionnez l’option voulue pour définir le délai avant l’activation de l’écran de veille.
❑ Propriétés
Permet d’afficher des informations sur Internet@TV.
Vous pouvez déterminer la vitesse de votre service de télévision par Internet à l’aide de la section correspondante.
Utilisation du service Internet@TV
Dans un widget proposant des menus de catégories, vous pouvez visualiser le contenu de ces menus au moyen des boutons ◄ ou ►.
Connexion au compte
1. Appuyez sur le bouton rouge.
2. Sélectionnez le compte utilisateur voulu, puis appuyez sur ENTERE.
3. Saisissez le mot de passe.
N Une fois la connexion établie, le compte utilisateur s’affiche à l’écran.
N Pour que la connexion soit possible, au moins un compte doit être enregistré. Pour créer un compte, reportez-vous à la section
‘Configuration d’Internet@TV’.
Utilisation de la galerie des widgets
Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions Exécuter service, Verrouiller, Installer service dans un widget existant, et consulter la
description des services de widget qui ne sont pas installés.
Sur Internet@TV, vous pouvez ajouter et utiliser divers widgets fournis par votre fournisseur de service. La situation peut varier en
fonction du fournisseur de contenu.
• Exécuter service : permet d’exécuter le service du widget.
• Verrouiller : verrouille le service.
• Installer service (ou Supprimer service) : Permet d’installer ou de supprimer le service du widget.
Utilisation du widget YouTube
Vous pouvez regarder des vidéos diffusées via YouTube.
Si vous avez créé un compte sur YouTube, enregistrez les informations de votre
compte via la gestion des comptes. Vous pouvez ensuite utiliser la catégorie Mes
favoris.
N Le menu peut être modifié selon le service Web.
N Le contenu peut être inapproprié pour les enfants. Dans ce cas, utilisez la
fonction Verrouiller dans la Galerie de Widgets.
Xz~*atppo
_z{*]lpo
Xz~*[z{wl}
Xz~*Ot~n~~po
_z{*Qlz}tp~
Xz~*Wtyvpo
Xz~*]p~{zxopo
Qpl}po
_zol <:B
^ppvtyr*U~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp}
atp~*E*C;
M}plvtyr*Yp~*Lwp}~*m*P8Xltw
atp~*E*C;
Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx
atp~*E*CE=A
Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:59:36 PMFrançais - 60
Dépannage d’Internet@TV
Problème Solution possible
Certains services de widget ne
fonctionnent pas.
Contactez le fournisseur du service concerné.
Dans le widget, appuyez sur le bouton vert afin d’accéder aux informations de contact, ou
consultez le
site Web d’assistance pour trouver des informations sur le fournisseur du service.
Consultez à la page Web d’assistance.
Quel est l’avantage de l’ouverture de
session unique ?
Si vous créez un compte et enregistrez vos informations de connexion au service
désiré, vous pouvez accéder à du contenu personnalisé sans devoir ouvrir une session
supplémentaire.
Lorsqu’une erreur réseau se produit,
je ne peux plus utiliser que le menu
Paramètres.
Si votre connexion réseau ne fonctionne pas, il se peut que l’accès aux services soit
limité.
Toutes les fonctions ont en effet besoin d’une connexion à Internet, à l’exception du menu
Paramètres.
Peut-il arriver que des films destinés aux
adultes soient diffusés via YouTube ?
En principe, toutes les listes du menu sont filtrées. La fonction de recherche permet
toutefois d’afficher ce type de films. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez verrouiller le service de
widget à l’aide de la Galerie de Widgets.
Site Web d’assistance
Pays Site Web
Autriche www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Belgique
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
République
Tchèque
www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Danemark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finlande www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Allemagne www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Grèce www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hongrie www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Irlande www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italie www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Pays-Bas www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Norvège www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Pologne www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slovaquie www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Espagne www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suède www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suisse
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Royaume-Uni www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turquie www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonie www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lettonie www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lituanie www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Russie www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N La procédure d’accès est susceptible d’être modifiée à l’avenir.
N Les liens peuvent varier dans des pays spécifiques.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:59:36 PMFrançais - 61
Centre de réseau domestique
A propos du Centre de réseau domestique
le Centre de réseau domestique connecte les téléviseurs et téléphones portables par l’intermédiaire d’un réseau. Vous pouvez
afficher les appels reçus, le contenu des messages texte et les programmes définis sur le téléphone portable sur le téléviseur à l’aide
du Centre de réseau domestique. En outre, vous pouvez lire le contenu multimédia enregistré sur les téléphones portables (vidéos,
photos, musique, etc.) en l’important dans le téléviseur via le réseau.
N Le Centre de réseau domestique est disponible si l’appareil prend en charge la fonction DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller).
N Cette fonction permet la compatibilité avec les téléphones mobiles Samsung ultérieurs.
Pour plus d’informations, visitez www.samsung.com ou contactez le centre d’appel Samsung. Il peut être nécessaire d’installer des
logiciels supplémentaires sur l’appareil mobile. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous au manuel de celui-ci.
❑ Connexion au Centre de réseau domestique
Pour plus d’informations sur les paramètres réseau, reportez-vous à la section ‘Network Setup’.
Connexion par l’intermédiaire d’un réseau ad hoc Wi-Fi
1. Branchez l’adaptateur “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” sur le port USB1(HDD) ou USB2 du téléviseur.
2. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre réseau Ad-hoc, reportez-vous à la section ‘Network Setup’.
N Pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration des paramètres réseau du téléphone portable, reportez-vous au manuel
correspondant.
3. Configurez l’adresse IP, le SSID et le mot de passe du téléphone portable dans les paramètres ad hoc de ce dernier à l’aide des
valeurs Nom du réseau (SSID) et Code de sécurité affichés sur le téléviseur.
Connexion via un routeur câblé / sans fil
1. Connectez le routeur IP câblé/sans fil sur le port LAN du téléviseur au moyen du câble LAN ou raccordez le port USB1(HDD) ou
USB2 du téléviseur à l’adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung.
N Pour obtenir des informations sur les procédures de configuration du routeur câblé/sans fil et du téléphone portable,
reportez-vous au manuel de l’appareil correspondant.
Centre de réseau domestique
Panneau latéral
du téléviseur
Adaptateur
LAN sans fil
Samsung
Téléphone portable
Adaptateur
LAN sans fil
Samsung
Routeur IP câblé/sans fil
Panneau latéral du téléviseur
Téléphone
portable
ou
ou
Câble LAN
Adaptateur
LAN sans fil
Samsung
Panneau latéral du téléviseur
Téléphone
portable
ou
Câble LAN
Routeur IP câblé/sans fil
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:59:40 PMFrançais - 62
Configuration du Centre de réseau domestique
❑ Message / Media
Affiche la liste des téléphones mobiles configurés avec ce téléviseur pour utiliser la
fonction Message ou Media.
N La fonction Media est disponible sur d’autres appareils mobiles prenant en
charge la fonction DLNA DMC.
Autoriser
Autorise le téléphone portable.
Refuser
Bloque le téléphone portable.
Supprimer
Supprime le téléphone portable de la liste.
N Cette fonction efface simplement le nom de la liste. Si l’appareil mobile effacé
s’allume ou tente de se reconnecter au téléviseur, il est possible qu’il s’affiche à nouveau.
❑ Configuration
Message → Marche / Arrêt
Vous pouvez activer ou non l’utilisation de la fonction Message (appels reçus,
contenu des messages texte et programmes définis sur le téléphone portable).
Média → Marche / Arrêt
Vous pouvez choisir d’utiliser ou non la fonction média qui lit le contenu (vidéos,
photos, musique) du téléphone portable.
Nom TV
Vous pouvez donner un nom au téléviseur afin de le retrouver plus facilement sur le
téléphone portable.
N Si vous sélectionnez Entrée utilisateur, vous pouvez taper le nom du téléviseur à
l’aide de l’OSK (On Screen Keyboard, le clavier virtuel).
Retour Quitter
Centre de réseau domestique
111-1234-5671 : Autor.
111-1234-5672 : Autor.
111-1234-5673 : Refusé
111-1234-5674 : Refusé
Message
Média
Conf.
Retour Quitter
Centre de réseau domestique
Message : Marche
Média : Marche
Nom TV : TV
Message
Média
Conf.
Utilisation de la fonction Message
Cette fonction permet d’afficher les appels reçus, le contenu des messages texte et
les programmes définis sur le téléphone portable via la fenêtre d’alarme lorsque vous
regardez la télévision.
N Pour désactiver cette fenêtre d’alarme Message, définissez l’option Message sur
Arrêt dans le menu Configuration du Centre de réseau domestique.
N La fenêtre d’alarme s’affiche pendant 20 secondes. Si vous n’appuyez sur aucune
touche ou si vous sélectionnez Annuler, elle s’affiche trois fois au maximum à des
intervalles de 5 minutes.
N Si OK est sélectionné ou s’il ne l’est pas alors que le message est affiché trois fois,
le message est supprimé sans toutefois être supprimé du téléphone portable.
N La fenêtre d’alarme simple peut s’afficher durant l’utilisation de certaines
applications (Media Play, Content Library, etc.). Dans ce cas, pour afficher le
contenu du message, basculez vers le mode de consultation de la télévision.
N Lorsque le message d’un téléphone portable inconnu s’affiche, sélectionnez ce téléphone sous l’élément Message du Centre de
réseau domestique et sélectionnez Refuser pour le bloquer.
❑ Affichage du message
Si un nouveau message texte (SMS) arrive lorsque vous regardez la télévision, la fenêtre d’alarme s’affiche. Si vous cliquez sur le
bouton OK, le contenu du message s’affiche.
N Vous pouvez configurer les paramètres d’affichage du contenu des messages texte (SMS) sur le téléphone portable. Pour plus
d’informations, reportez-vous au manuel du téléphone portable.
N Certains caractères spéciaux peuvent s’afficher sous forme de caractères vides ou cassés.
❑ Alarme de réception d’appel
Si vous recevez un appel lorsque vous regardez la télévision, la fenêtre d’alarme s’affiche.
❑ Alarme des programmes
Lorsque vous regardez la télévision, la fenêtre d’alarme apparaît et affiche le programme enregistré.
N Vous pouvez configurer les paramètres d’affichage du contenu du programme sur le téléphone portable.
Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous au manuel de celui-ci.
N Certains caractères spéciaux peuvent s’afficher sous forme de caractères vides ou cassés..
husband
SMS
Nouveau message reçu
Voulez-vous afficher
les détails ?
OK Annuler
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:59:45 PMFrançais - 63
Utilisation de la fonction Media
Une fenêtre d’alarme informe l’utilisateur que le contenu multimédia (vidéos, photos,
musique) provenant du téléphone portable va s’afficher sur le téléviseur.
Le contenu est lu automatiquement 3 secondes après l’affichage de la fenêtre
d’alarme.
Si vous appuyez sur le bouton RETURN ou EXIT lorsque la fenêtre d’alarme s’affiche,
le contenu multimédia n’est pas lu.
N Pour désactiver la transmission du contenu multimédia en provenance
du téléphone portable, définissez l’option Média sur Arrêt dans le
menu Configuration du Centre de réseau domestique.
N En fonction de sa résolution et de son format, le contenu peut ne pas être lu sur
le téléviseur.
❑ Boutons de commande du lecteur multimédia
Bouton Description
◄ / ►
• Déplace le curseur et sélectionne un élément.
• Pendant la lecture d’un fichier film : avance ou recule dans le film.
ENTERE • Si vous appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pendant la lecture, celle-ci est suspendue.
• Si vous appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE en mode pause, la lecture reprend.
RETURN Revient au menu précédent.
TOOLS Exécute diverses fonctions dans les menus Photo, Musique et Film.
INFO Affiche des informations sur le fichier.
EXIT Arrête le mode Media Play et revient en mode télévision.
N Les boutons ENTERE et◄ / ► peuvent ne pas fonctionner selon le type de contenu multimédia.
N Il est possible de contrôler la lecture à l’aide de l’appareil mobile. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous au manuel de celui-ci.
Lecture des médias à partir de “Appareil inconnu 13”
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:59:45 PMFrançais - 64
Suite...
Fonction Télétexte
La plupart des chaînes de télévision proposent des services d’informations via le télétexte. La page d’index du télétexte contient des
instructions sur l’utilisation du service. Vous pouvez, en outre, sélectionner différentes options à l’aide des boutons de la télécommande
N Pour que l’affichage des informations de télétexte soit correct, la réception des chaînes doit être stable. Autrement, des informations
pourraient manquer ou certaines pages ne pas s’afficher.
1 : (quitter)
Permet de quitter l’affichage télétexte.
2 6 (index)
Permet d’afficher la page d’index du télétexte (sommaire).
3 5 (afficher)
Permet d’afficher le texte masqué (par exemple, les réponses à un questionnaire).
Appuyez à nouveau sur cette touche pour rétablir le mode d’affichage normal.
4 4 (format)
Permet d’afficher la moitié supérieure de l’écran en caractères deux fois plus grands.
Pour afficher la moitié inférieure de l’écran, appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche.
Appuyez à nouveau pour rétablir le mode d’affichage normal.
5 / (télétexte activé/mix)
Permet d’activer le mode télétexte après avoir choisi la chaîne diffusant le service
télétexte. Appuyez deux fois sur cette touche pour superposer le télétexte à l’émission
en cours de diffusion.
6 8 (mémoriser)
Permet d’enregistrer les pages de télétexte.
7 1 (page secondaire)
Permet d’afficher une page secondaire.
8 2 (page suivante)
Permet d’afficher la page de télétexte suivante.
9 3 (page précédente)
Permet d’afficher la page de télétexte précédente.
0 0 (mode)
Permet de sélectionner le mode Télétexte (LIST/FLOF).
Si vous appuyez sur cette touche en mode LISTE, vous accédez au mode
d’enregistrement de liste.Dans ce mode, vous pouvez enregistrer une page télétexte
dans une liste à l’aide du bouton 8 (mémoriser).
! 9 (maintenir)
Permet de bloquer l’affichage sur une page précise, si celle-ci est reliée à plusieurs
pages secondaires qui défilent automatiquement. Pour reprendre l’affichage des
autres pages, appuyez à nouveau sur cette touche.
@ 7 (annuler)
Permet d’afficher le programme lors de la recherche d’une page.
# Boutons de couleur (rouge/vert/jaune/bleu)
Si une société de télédiffusion utilise le système FASTEXT, les différentes rubriques
d’une page de télétexte sont associées à un code couleur qui permet de les
sélectionner à l’aide des touches de couleur de la télécommande. Appuyez sur la
touche dont la couleur correspond à celle de la rubrique souhaitée. La page affiche
d’autres informations en couleur que vous pouvez sélectionner de la même manière.
Pour afficher la page précédente ou suivante, appuyez sur la touche de couleur
correspondante.
N Vous pouvez changer de page de télétexte en appuyant sur les touches numériques de la télécommande.
Conseils d’utilisation
1
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:59:45 PMFrançais - 65
Les pages télétexte sont organisées en six catégories :
Catégorie Sommaire
A Numéro de la page sélectionnée.
B Identité de la chaîne émettrice.
C Numéro de la page actuelle ou indications de recherche.
D Date et heure.
E Texte.
F Informations d’état.
Informations FASTEXT.
N Les informations du télétexte sont souvent réparties sur plusieurs pages qui s’affichent
successivement. Ces pages sont accessibles en :
- Entrant le numéro de page.
- Sélectionnant un titre dans une liste.
- Sélectionnant un titre de couleur (système FASTEXT)
O Appuyez sur le bouton TV pour quitter l’affichage télétexte.
Caractéristiques du kit de fixation murale (VESA)
Installez votre fixation murale sur un mur solide perpendiculaire au sol.
Si vous souhaitez la fixer sur d’autres matériaux de construction, veuillez prendre contact avec votre revendeur le plus proche.
Si vous l’installez au plafond ou sur un mur non droit, elle peut tomber et occasionner des blessures corporelles graves.
Famille de produit pouce Caract. VESA (A * B) Standard Vis Quantité
TELEVISEUR
LCD
19" ~22" 100 * 100
M4
4
23"~29" 200 * 100
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6
46"~55" 400 * 400
57"~70" 800 * 400 M8
80" ~ 1400 * 800
TELEVISEUR
ECRAN A
PLASMA
42"~ 50" 400 * 400
M8 4
58"~ 63" 600 * 400
70" ~ 800 * 400
80" ~ 1400 * 800
N Nous avons fourni les dimensions standard pour tous les kits de fixation murale, comme indiqué dans le tableau ci-dessus.
N Un manuel d’installation détaillé et toutes les pièces nécessaires au montage sont fournis avec le kit de fixation murale.
N N’utilisez pas de vis plus longues que la dimension standard car elles pourraient endommager l’intérieur du téléviseur.
N Pour les fixations murales non conformes aux caractéristiques des vis VESA standard, la longueur des vis peut varier, selon leurs
caractéristiques.
N N’utilisez pas de vis non conformes aux caractéristiques des vis VESA standard. Ne serrez pas trop les vis : cela pourrait
endommager le produit ou provoquer sa chute, entraînant des blessures corporelles.
Samsung ne peut être tenue responsable de ce type d’accident.
N Samsung ne peut être tenue responsable de tout dommage au produit ou toute blessure corporelle dans le cas de l’utilisation d’une
fixation murale non-VESA ou non spécifiée, ni si l’utilisateur ne suit pas les instructions d’installation du produit.
N Nos modèles 57” et 63” ne sont pas conformes aux caractéristiques VESA. Vous devez par conséquent utiliser notre kit de fixation
murale approprié pour ce modèle.
N Lors du montage, l’inclinaison du téléviseur ne doit pas dépasser 15°.
N’installez pas le kit de fixation murale lorsque le téléviseur est sous
tension. Cela pourrait entraîner une blessure par choc électrique.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:59:46 PMFrançais - 66
Préparation avant l’installation d’un kit de fixation murale
1. Installez le kit de fixation murale avec un couple de serrage de 15 kg/cm ou moins. Certaines pièces peuvent être endommagées si
le couple est supérieur.
2. Le kit d’accessoires contient un Support – un Anneau [②] en vue d’installer un kit d’une marque autre que Samsung TV. (Cas B)
N Insérez la vis dans le trou [①] lors de l’installation de la fixation murale.
Assemblage de la base-support
Avertissement
Fixez fermement le socle au téléviseur avant de déplacer ce dernier. Il pourrait tomber
et provoquer de graves dommages.
N Le téléviseur doit être porté par au moins deux personnes. Ne posez jamais
le téléviseur sur le sol car cela pourrait l’endommager. Conservez toujours le
téléviseur en position verticale.
Fixez fermement la télévision à la base du support au moyen des vis prévues à cet
effet.
(L’aspect extérieur de votre écran peut différer de celui présenté à l’image.)
Si vous fixez le téléviseur au mur, fermez
le couvercle (➊) de la pièce de connexion
de la base-support à l’aide des deux vis.
(PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680)
Cas A. Installation d’un kit de fixation murale de SAMSUNG Cas B. Installation d’un kit de fixation murale d’un autre fabricant
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:59:49 PMFrançais - 67
Si vous tirez ou poussez le téléviseur ou si vous grimpez dessus, il risque de tomber. Veillez en particulier, à ce
que vos enfants ne se suspendent pas au téléviseur, ni ne le déséquilibrent, car cela pourrait le faire basculer
et occasionner des blessures graves pouvant entraîner la mort. Respectez toutes les précautions de sécurité
indiquées dans la brochure relative à la sécurité. Pour une stabilité accrue, installez le dispositif anti-chute comme
indiqué.
❑ Pour éviter toute chute du téléviseur
1. Placez les vis dans les colliers et fixez-les fermement au mur. Assurez-vous que les vis sont solidement fixées au mur.
N En fonction du type de mur, il est possible que vous ayez besoin de matériel supplémentaire, tel que des chevilles.
N Les colliers, vis et chaînettes n’étant pas fournis, vous devez les acheter séparément.
2. Retirez les vis situées sur la partie centrale arrière du téléviseur, placez les vis dans les colliers, puis fixez-les à nouveau sur le
téléviseur.
N Il se peut que les vis ne soient pas fournies avec le produit.
3. Reliez les colliers fixés au téléviseur et ceux fixés sur le mur à l’aide de chaînettes, puis attachez-les fermement.
N Placez le téléviseur à proximité du mur afin qu’il ne bascule pas vers l’arrière.
N Il est recommandé de placer la chaînette de façon à ce que les colliers fixés au mur soient placés à même hauteur ou plus bas
que ceux fixés au téléviseur.
N Détachez la chaînette avant de déplacer le téléviseur.
4. Vérifiez que toutes les connexions sont fixées correctement. Vérifiez régulièrement que les connexions ne présentent aucun signe
d’usure. Si vous avez un doute quant à la sécurité de vos connexions, contactez un installateur professionnel.
Fixation du téléviseur au mur
Sécurisation de l’emplacement d’installation
Respectez les distances requises entre le produit et d’autres objets (p. ex. murs) pour assurer une ventilation adéquate.
Le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait provoquer un incendie ou un problème avec le produit en raison de l’augmentation de la
température interne de ce dernier. Installez le produit de manière à respecter les distances requises indiquées sur la figure.
N En cas d’utilisation d’un support ou de montage mural, n’utilisez que des pièces Samsung Electronics.
- L’emploi de pièces d’un autre fabricant risque d’entraîner des problèmes avec le produit ou d’occasionner des blessures dues à
la chute du produit.
- L’emploi de pièces d’un autre fabricant risque d’entraîner un problème avec le produit ou de provoquer un incendie en raison de
l’augmentation de la température interne du produit due à une ventilation insuffisante.
N L’aspect peut varier en fonction du produit.
Installation du produit sur un support Montage mural du produit
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
경고 주의
경고 주의
mur
mur
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:59:50 PMFrançais - 68
Résolution des problèmes
Si vous avez des questions relatives au téléviseur, commencez par consulter la liste ci-dessous. Si aucune de ces astuces de
dépannage ne s'applique à votre problème, rendez-vous sur le site "www.samsung.com", puis cliquez sur Assistance ou contactez le
centre d'appels dont les coordonnées figurent sur la dernière page.
N La mise à niveau du microprogramme peut être considérée comme la première solution possible.
Problème Solution possible
Qualité de l'image
Exécutez tout d'abord le Test de l'image pour vérifier que votre téléviseur affiche correctement l'image de test.
* Accédez à MENU → Assistance → Diagnostic automatique → Test de l'image
Si l'image de test s'affiche correctement, sa qualité médiocre peut être due à la source ou au signal.
La qualité de l'image sur le téléviseur
n'est pas aussi bonne que dans le
magasin.
• Si vous êtes équipé d'un décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur analogique, procédez à une
mise à niveau.
Utilisez les câbles HDMI ou Composant pour fournir une qualité d'image HD.
• Abonné câble/satellite : essayez les chaînes HD (High Definition) à partir de
l'alignement des canaux.
• Connexion de l'antenne : essayez les chaînes HD après avoir exécuté une
mémorisation automatique.
N De nombreuses chaînes HD sont mises à niveau par rapport à du contenu
SD (Standard Definition).
• Réglez la résolution de sortie vidéo du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur sur 1080i ou
720p.
L'image est déformée : macrobloc, petit
bloc, points, pixelisation.
• La compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en
particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action.
• Un niveau de signal faible ou une mauvaise qualité peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit
pas d'un problème lié au téléviseur.
Couleur incorrecte ou manquante avec
la connexion Composant.
• Vérifiez que les câbles Composant sont raccordés aux prises appropriées.
Des raccordements desserrés ou incorrects peuvent engendrer des problèmes au
niveau de la couleur ou de l'écran (vide).
Luminosité ou couleur médiocre.
• Réglez les options Image dans le menu du téléviseur (Mode d'image, Couleur,
Luminosité, Netteté).
• Réglez l'option Mode éco. dans le menu Configuration.
• Essayez de réinitialiser l'image pour afficher son paramètre par défaut
(accédez à MENU → Image → Réinitialisation de l'image).
Ligne pointillée sur le bord de l'écran.
• Si la taille de l'image est réglée sur Adapter à l’écran, remplacez la valeur par 16:9.
• Changez la résolution du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur.
L'image est en noir et blanc avec
l'entrée AV (Composite) uniquement.
• Raccordez le câble vidéo (jaune) à la prise verte de l'entrée Composant 1 du
téléviseur.
L'image se fige ou est déformée
lorsque vous changez de chaînes ou
l'image s'affiche avec un décalage.
• En cas de raccordement avec le décodeur câble, essayez de réinitialiser ce dernier
(rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation secteur et patientez jusqu'au démarrage du
décodeur câble. Cette opération peut durer jusqu'à 20 minutes).
• Réglez la résolution de sortie du décodeur câble sur 1080i ou 720p.
Qualité sonore
Exécutez tout d'abord le Test du son pour vérifier que le système audio de votre téléviseur fonctionne correctement.
* Accédez à MENU → Assistance → Diagnostic automatique → Test du son
Si le système audio est OK, le problème lié au son peut provenir de la source ou du signal.
Aucun son ou son trop faible lorsque le
niveau du volume est au maximum.
• Vérifiez le volume du périphérique (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur, DVD, Blu-ray,
etc.) connecté à votre téléviseur.
Puis, réglez le volume du téléviseur en conséquence.
Image correcte mais absence de son.
• Réglez l'option Sélection Haut-parleur sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Son.
• Vérifiez que les câbles audio d'un périphérique externe sont raccordés aux prises
d'entrée audio appropriées du téléviseur.
• Vérifiez l'option de sortie audio du périphérique connecté.
Exemple : il se peut que vous deviez remplacer l'option audio de votre décodeur câble
par HDMI si vous utilisez la connexion HDMI.
• Si vous utilisez un câble DVI-HDMI, un câble audio distinct est requis.
• Désactivez la fonction SRS si le réglage du volume est supérieur à 30.
• Retirez la fiche de la prise pour casque (si disponible sur votre téléviseur).
Bruit émis par le haut-parleur.
• Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles. Vérifiez qu'aucun câble vidéo n'est raccordé à
une entrée audio.
• Pour la connexion de l'antenne/du câble, vérifiez l'intensité du signal. Un niveau de
signal faible peut provoquer une distorsion sonore.
Suite…
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:59:51 PMFrançais - 69
Problème Solution possible
Aucune image, aucune vidéo
Le téléviseur ne s'allume pas. • Vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise
murale et sur le téléviseur.
• Vérifiez que la prise murale est opérationnelle.
• Essayez d'appuyer sur le bouton d'alimentation du téléviseur pour vérifier que la
télécommande fonctionne correctement.
Si le téléviseur s'allume, la télécommande peut être à l'origine de cette mise sous
tension.
Pour résoudre le problème lié à la télécommande, reportez-vous au problème "La
télécommande ne fonctionne pas" ci-après.
Le téléviseur s'éteint automatiquement.
• Vérifiez que la fonction Veille est réglée sur Marche dans le menu Configuration.
• Si vous connectez le téléviseur à votre PC, vérifiez les paramètres d'alimentation de
votre PC.
• Vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation secteur est branché correctement dans la prise
murale et sur le téléviseur.
• En l'absence de signal pendant environ 10 à 15 minutes avec la connexion Antenne/
câble, le téléviseur s'éteint.
Aucune image/vidéo.
• Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles (retirez tous les câbles du téléviseur et des
périphériques externes et rebranchez-les).
• Réglez la sortie vidéo de votre périphérique externe (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur,
DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) pour faire correspondre les connexions à l'entrée du téléviseur. Par
exemple, sortie du périphérique externe : HDMI, entrée du téléviseur : HDMI.
• Vérifiez que votre périphérique connecté est sous tension.
• Veillez à sélectionner la source appropriée du téléviseur en appuyant sur le bouton
SOURCE de la télécommande.
• Redémarrez le périphérique connecté en reconnectant le câble d'alimentation du
périphérique.
Connexion RF (câble/antenne)
Impossible de recevoir toutes les
chaînes.
• Vérifiez que le câble de l'antenne est raccordé correctement.
• Essayez le fonction Plug & Play pour ajouter des chaînes disponibles à la liste
correspondante.
Accédez à MENU → Configuration → Plug & Play et attendez que toutes les
chaînes disponibles soient mémorisées.
• Vérifiez que l'antenne est positionnée correctement.
L'image est déformée : macrobloc, petit
bloc, points, pixelisation.
• La compression de contenus vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l'image, en
particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d'action.
• Un niveau de signal faible peut déformer l'image. Il ne s'agit pas d'un problème lié au
téléviseur.
Connexion PC
Message Non pris en charge.
• Réglez la fréquence et la résolution de sortie de votre PC de sorte à ce qu'il
corresponde aux résolutions prises en charge par le téléviseur.
Le PC apparaît toujours dans la liste
source même s'il n'est pas connecté.
• C'est normal ; le PC apparaît toujours dans la liste source même s'il n'est pas
connecté.
La vidéo fonctionne correctement mais
le système audio n'existe pas avec une
connexion HDMI.
• Vérifiez le paramètre de sortie audio de votre PC.
Connexion réseau
Echec de la connexion réseau sans fil.
• le dongle USB sans fil Samsung est requis pour utiliser le réseau sans fil.
• Vérifiez que Type de réseau est réglé sur Sans fil.
• Le téléviseur doit être connecté à un routeur IP sans fil.
Autres
L'image ne s'affiche pas en plein écran. • Des barres noires s'affichent de chaque côté des chaînes HD lors de l'affichage du
contenu SD mis à niveau (4:3).
• Des barres noires s'affichent en haut et en bas des films dont le format est différent de
celui de votre téléviseur.
• Réglez l'option de la taille de l'image sur votre périphérique externe ou le téléviseur en
plein écran.
La télécommande ne fonctionne pas.
• Replacez les piles de la télécommande en respectant la polarité (+ -).
• Nettoyez la lentille de la télécommande située en haut de la télécommande.
• Essayez de diriger directement la télécommande vers le téléviseur dans un rayon de
1,5 à 1,8 m.
Suite…
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:59:51 PMFrançais - 70
Problème Solution possible
Le téléviseur à écran plasma émet un
bourdonnement.
• Généralement, les téléviseurs à écran plasma émettent un léger bourdonnement.
C'est normal. Ce bruit résulte des charges électriques qui sont utilisées pour créer les
images sur l'écran.
• Si le bourdonnement est fort, il se peut que la luminosité que vous avez réglée soit
trop élevée. Essayez de réduire la luminosité.
• Le bourdonnement peut également être provoqué par une trop grande proximité entre
un mur ou une autre surface dure et l'arrière de votre téléviseur à écran plasma. Vous
pouvez également essayer de réacheminer vos câbles de connexion.
• Une installation incorrecte du support mural peut créer un bruit excessif.
Problème de rémanence de l'image
(brûlures).
• Pour réduire le risque de brûlure d'écran, cet écran est équipé d'une technologie de
réduction des brûlures. Cette fonction (Pixel Shift) permet de régler le mouvement de
l'image de bas en haut (ligne verticale) et de gauche à droite (point horizontal).
Impossible de contrôler l'alimentation
ou le volume du téléviseur avec la
télécommande du décodeur câble/
boîtier décodeur.
• Programmez la télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur pour faire
fonctionner le téléviseur.
Consultez le manuel de l'utilisateur relatif au câble/satellite pour obtenir le code du
téléviseur SAMSUNG.
Message Non pris en charge.
• Vérifiez la résolution prise en charge du téléviseur et réglez la résolution de sortie du
périphérique externe en conséquence. Reportez-vous aux paramètres de résolution
indiqués dans ce manuel.
Impossible de désactiver Light Effect
sur le cadre avant (en dessous du logo
SAMSUNG)
• Réglez l’option Effet lumineux dans le menu Configuration.
Les options sont les suivantes : Arrêt, En veille, En marche et Toujours.
• La fonction Effet lumineux n’est pas disponible sur tous les modèles.
Odeur de plastique émise par le
téléviseur.
• Cette odeur est normale et s'atténuera au fur et à mesure.
L'option Intensité du signal du
téléviseur n'est pas disponible dans le
menu de test d'autodiagnostic.
• Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'avec des chaînes numériques avec connexion
d'antenne (RF/coaxial).
Le téléviseur penche vers la droite ou
la gauche.
• Retirez la base du support du téléviseur et réassemblez-la.
Impossible d'assembler la base du
support.
• Veillez à placer le téléviseur sur une surface plane.
Si vous ne parvenez pas à retirer les vis du téléviseur, utilisez un tournevis aimanté.
Le menu des chaînes est grisé (non
disponible).
• Le menu Canal n'est disponible que si la source du téléviseur est sélectionnée.
Vos paramètres sont perdus après
30 minutes ou à chaque mise hors
tension du téléviseur.
• Si le téléviseur est en mode Enr. démo, les paramètres de l'image et audio sont
rétablis toutes les 30 minutes.
Remplacez le mode Enr. démo par le mode Util. domicile dans la procédure
Plug & Play.
Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode TV , accédez à MENU →
Configuration → Plug & Play → ENTER
Perte intermittente du signal audio ou
vidéo.
• Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles ; raccordez-les au besoin.
• Cette perte peut être provoquée par l'utilisation de câbles trop rigides ou épais.
Veillez à ce que les câbles soient suffisamment souples pour une utilisation à long
terme.
En cas d'installation murale, nous vous recommandons d'utiliser des câbles avec des
connecteurs de 90 degrés.
Il se peut que vous voyiez de petites
particules si vous regardez de près le
bord du cadre de l'écran du téléviseur.
• Elles font partie de la conception du produit et ne constituent pas un défaut.
Le menu PIP n'est pas disponible.
• La fonctionnalité PIP n'est disponible que lorsque vous regardez une source HDMI,
PC ou Composant.
"Signal brouillé" ou "Aucun signal/
signal faible" avec la carte d'interface
(CI/CI+) CARD du CAM.
• Vérifiez que la carte d'interface commune CI(CI+) CARD est installée dans le CAM
dans la fente de l'interface commune.
• Cela est normal car le téléviseur utilise la fonction de liaison radio (OTA) pour mettre à
niveau le microprogramme téléchargé pendant son utilisation.
Problème récurrent lié à l'image/au
son.
• Vérifiez et changez le signal/la source.
N Certaines des images et fonctions ci-dessus ne sont disponibles que pour des modèles spécifiques.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:59:52 PMFrançais - 71
Caractéristiques
Les descriptions et caractéristiques fournies dans ce manuel sont données à titre indicatif seulement et sont susceptibles d’être
modifiées sans préavis.
Nom du modèle PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680
Taille de l’écran (diagonale) 50 pouces 58 pouces 63 pouces
Résolution PC (optimale) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Son (Sortie) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2
Dimension (L x H x P)
Produit
Avec socle
1240 x 756 x 74 mm
1240 x 817 x 290 mm
1401 x 848 x 74 mm
1401 x 917 x 335 mm
1531 x 932 x 74 mm
1531 x 957 x 390 mm
Poids
Produit
Avec socle
33 kg
38 kg
39 kg
46 kg
53 kg
61 kg
Conditions ambiantes
Température de fonctionnement
Humidité au cours du fonctionnement
Température de stockage
Humidité de stockage
50 °F à 104 °F (10 °C à 40 °C)
10% à 80%, sans condensation
-4 °F à 113 °F (-20 °C à 45 °C)
5% à 95%, sans condensation
N Ce périphérique est un appareil numérique de classe B.
N La conception et les spécifications peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
N Pour les caractéristiques d’alimentation et de consommation électrique, reportez-vous à l’étiquette fixée au produit.
BN68-02333J-FRA.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:59:52 PMDeutsch - 2
Benutzerhinweise
Einbrennen von Standbildern
Zeigen Sie Standbilder (z. B. bei einem Videospiel oder bei Anschluss eines PC an diesen Plasmamonitor) niemals länger als
2 Stunden auf dem Plasmabildschirm an, da das Bild auf diese Weise einbrennen kann. Das Einbrennen von Standbildern wird
auch als „Bildkonservierung“ bezeichnet. Sie können das Einbrennen vermeiden, indem Sie die Helligkeit und den Kontrast des
Bildschirms beim Anzeigen von Standbildern verringern.
Höhe
Um normalen Betrieb zu gewährleisten, muss der Plasmabildschirm in einer Höhe unter 2000 m aufgestellt werden. Der Betrieb
des Monitors wird möglicherweise gestört, wenn er in mehr als 2000 m Höhe betrieben wird. Sie dürfen den Plasmabildschirm
deshalb nicht in einer Höhe von über 2000 m aufstellen und betreiben.
Wärmeentwicklung auf der Oberseite des Plasmabildschirms
Die Oberseite des Produkts kann nach längerem Betrieb warm werden, da die Wärme aus dem Monitor über die
Entlüftungsöffnung im oberen Teil des Geräts abgeführt wird. Dies ist normal und weist nicht auf einen Defekt oder eine
Fehlfunktion des Geräts hin. Allerdings sollten Kinder von dem oberen Teil des Geräts ferngehalten werden.
Das Gerät verursacht ein „knackendes“ Geräusch.
Ein „knackendes“ Geräusch entsteht, wenn das Gerätematerial sich aufgrund einer Änderung der Umgebung, wie z. B.
Temperaturschwankungen oder Änderung der Luftfeuchtigkeit, zusammenzieht oder ausdehnt. Das ist normal und stellt keinen
Defekt des Geräts dar.
Pixelfehler
Der Plasmabildschirm besitzt eine Bildfläche mit 2.360.000 (bei HD-Auflösung) bis 6.221.000 (bei Full-HD-Auflösung) Pixeln, für
dessen Herstellung hoch entwickelte Technologie eingesetzt wird. Allerdings können ein paar zu helle oder zu dunkle Pixel auf der
Bildfläche zu sehen sein. Diese Pixelfehler haben keinen Einfluss auf die Geräteleistung.
Vermeiden Sie den Betrieb des Plasmabildschirms bei Temperaturen unter 5° C.
Ein Standbild, dass zu lange angezeigt wird, kann zu einer bleibenden Beschädigung des Plasmabildschirms führen.
Der Betrieb des Plasmabildschirms im Format 4:3 für einen längeren Zeitraum kann links, rechts und in der
Mitte des Monitors Spuren der Bildränder hinterlassen, die durch die unterschiedliche Lichtemission auf dem
Monitor verursacht werden. Durch die Wiedergabe einer DVD oder der Betrieb einer Spielkonsole kann es
auf dem Bildschirm zu ähnlichen Effekten kommen. Schäden, die durch die o. g. Effekte verursacht wurden,
fallen nicht unter die Garantie.
Nachbilder auf dem Monitor
Das Anzeigen von Standbildern von Videospielen und PC-Anwendungen über einen bestimmten Zeitraum kann zu partiellen
Nachbildern führen. Um diesen Effekt zu verhindern, verringern Sie Helligkeit und Kontrast, wenn Sie Standbilder anzeigen möchten.
Garantie
- Durch diese Garantie nicht abgedeckt sind Schäden, die durch Einbrennen von Bildern entstehen.
- Das Einbrennen von Bildern wird von der Garantie nicht abgedeckt.
Installation
Wenden Sie sich an den autorisierten Kundendienst, wenn das Gerät an einem Ort mit hoher Konzentration an Staubpartikeln,
außergewöhnlich hoher oder geringer Raumtemperatur, extrem hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit, in unmittelbarer Nähe zu chemischen
Lösungsmitteln oder für den Dauerbetrieb, z.B. auf Bahn- oder Flughäfen, aufgestellt werden soll. Eine nicht fachgerechte
Aufstellung kann zu schweren Schäden am Gerät führen.
Hinweis zu Digitalfernsehgeräten
1. Die Funktionalitäten für Digital TV (DVB) stehen nur in Ländern/Regionen zur Verfügung, in denen digitale terrestrische
DVB-T-Signale (MPEG2 und MPEG4 AVC) gesendet werden oder in denen Sie Zugang zu einem kompatiblen
Kabelfernsehdienst mit DVB-C (MPEG2 und MPEG4 AAC) haben. Fragen Sie Ihren örtlichen Händler, wenn Sie
Informationen über die Verfügbarkeit von DVB-T oder DVB-C in Ihrer Gegend benötigen.
2. DVB-T ist der Standard des europäischen DVB-Konsortiums für die terrestrische Versorgung mit digitalem terrestrischem
Fernsehen, und DVB-C ist das Konsortium für die Versorgung mit digitalem Kabelfernsehen. Allerdings werden
manche Unterscheidungsmerkmale wie EPG (elektrische Programmzeitschrift), VOD (Video on Demand) usw. in dieser
Spezifikation nicht berücksichtigt. Deshalb können sie zum jetzigen Zeitpunkt noch nicht unterstützt werden.
3. Zwar hält dieses Fernsehgerät die aktuellen Standards der DVB-T- und DVB-CSpezifikationen [August 2008] ein, aber es
kann nicht garantiert werden, dass die Kompatibilität mit zukünftigen digitalen terrestrischen DVB-T- und DBV-C-Signalen
gewahrt bleibt.
4. Manche Kabelfernsehanbieter verlangen zusätzliche Gebühren für solch einen Dienst, und möglicherweise wird verlangt,
dass Sie den Vertragsbedingungen des Unternehmens zustimmen.
5. Manche Digitalfernsehfunktionen sind in einigen Ländern oder Regionen möglicherweise nicht verfügbar, und bei DVB-C
kann das Gerät möglicherweise nicht mit allen Anbietern störungsfrei zusammenarbeiten.
6. Für weitere Informationen setzen Sie sich bitte mit dem Samsung-Kundendienstzentrum in Verbindung.
Wenden Sie sich an SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
Bei Fragen oder Hinweisen zu Produkten von Samsung setzen Sie sich bitte mit dem SAMSUNG-Kundendienstzentrum in
Verbindung. (Siehe Abschnitt “Wenden Sie sich an Samsung”)
N Die Abbildungen und Illustrationen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Information und können vom tatsächlichen
Aussehen des Geräts abweichen. Technische Änderungen und Änderungen am Design des Geräts, insbesondere zur
Verbesserung der Leistungsfähigkeit des Geräts, sind jederzeit vorbehalten.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:37:36 PMDeutsch - 3
Deutsch
N O T
Symbol Drücken Hinweis Zielwahltaste TOOLS
Inhalt
Anschließen und Vorbereiten des Fernsehgeräts
■ Lieferumfang .............................................................................4
■ Standfuß verwenden .................................................................4
■ Verlegen der Kabel....................................................................4
■ Bedienfeld .................................................................................5
■ Anschlussfeld ............................................................................6
■ Fernbedienung ..........................................................................8
■ Batterien in die Fernbedienung einsetzen.................................8
■ Verwenden der Fernbedienung mit Tastenbeleuchtung ............9
■ Ein-und Ausschalten..................................................................9
■ Fernsehgerät in den Standby-Modus schalten..........................9
■ Anzeigen des Bildschirmmenüs ................................................9
■ Menüs anzeigen ......................................................................10
■ Verwenden der Taste TOOLS..................................................10
■ Plug & Play-Funktion...............................................................10
Kanalsteuerung
■ Speichern von Sendern .......................................................... 11
■ Verwalten von Sendern ...........................................................13
Bildeinstellungen
■ Ändern der Bildeinstellungen ..................................................15
■ Fernsehgerät mithilfe des PCs einstellen................................18
■ PC-Anzeige .............................................................................19
Toneinstellungen
■ Tonstandard wählen ................................................................20
■ Tonmodus wählen ...................................................................21
Funktionsbeschreibung
■ Einstellen der Uhrzeit ..............................................................22
■ Konfigurieren der Menüeinstellungen......................................23
■ Verwenden der Bild-in-Bild-Funktion (PIP)..............................25
Unterstützung / Eingang
■ Unterstütztes Programm .........................................................26
■ Quellen / Name bearbeiten .....................................................27
Netzwerks
■ Netzwerkverbindung................................................................28
■ Netzwerk einrichten.................................................................30
Media Play
■ Anschließen eines USB-Geräts...............................................33
■ Verwenden der Medienwiedergabefunktion ............................34
■ Sortieren der Foto- / Musik- / Filmliste ....................................35
■ Optionsmenü für Foto- / Musik- / Filmliste...............................36
■ Optionsmenü für Diashow / Musikwiedergabe / Filmwiedergabe .37
■ Anzeigen eines Fotos oder einer Diashow..............................38
■ Wiedergeben von Musik..........................................................39
■ Wiedergeben einer Filmdatei .................................................40
■ Verwenden des Menüs Einstellungen .....................................41
Media Play-DLNA
■ Einrichten des DLNA-Netzwerks .............................................42
■ Installieren der DLNA-Anwendung ..........................................42
■ Verwenden der DLNA-Anwendung .........................................43
■ Verwenden der DLNA-Funktion...............................................44
Informationen zu Anynet+
■ Anschließen von Anynet
+
-Geräten ..........................................45
■ Einrichten von Anynet
+
...........................................................46
■ Wechseln zwischen Anynet
+
-Geräten .....................................46
■ Aufnahme ................................................................................47
■ Tonwiedergabe mit einem Receiver ........................................48
■ Fehlerbehebung für Anynet
+
...................................................48
Content Library
■ Aktivieren der Content Library.................................................49
■ Verwenden der Bibliothek der Inhalte......................................50
Internet@TV
■ Erste Schritte mit Internet@TV................................................51
■ Bearbeiten von Snippets im Dock ...........................................53
■ Verwenden des Profil-Widget ..................................................53
■ Verwenden der Yahoo!®-Widget-Galerie ................................54
■ Verwenden des Wetter-Widget von Yahoo!® ..........................54
■ Verwenden des Nachrichten-Widget von Yahoo!®..................55
■ Verwenden des Flickr-Widget von Yahoo!® ............................55
■ Verwenden des Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!®..........................56
■ Fehlerbehebung für Internet@TV ...........................................56
■ Hilfe-Website ...........................................................................57
Internet@TV
■ Erste Schritte mit Internet@TV................................................58
■ Konfigurieren von Internet@TV...............................................58
■ Verwenden des Internet@TV-Dienstes ...................................59
■ Fehlerbehebung für Internet@TV............................................60
■ Hilfe-Website ...........................................................................60
Home-Network-Center
■ Home-Network-Center ............................................................61
■ Einrichten des Home-Network-Centers...................................62
■ Verwenden der Meldungsfunktion...........................................62
■ Verwenden der Medienfunktion...............................................63
Empfehlungen für den Betrieb
■ Videotextfunktion.....................................................................64
■ Spezifikation (VESA) der Wandhalterung................................65
■ Vorbereitung für die Befestigung der Wandhalterung an
der Wand.................................................................................66
■ Montieren des Standfußes ......................................................66
■ Befestigen des Fernsehgeräts an der Wand...........................67
■ Absichern des Einbaubereichs................................................67
■ Fehlerbehebung ......................................................................68
■ Technische Daten....................................................................71
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:37:37 PMDeutsch - 4
Verlegen der Kabel
Verstecken Sie die Kabel im Kabelschlauch, damit Sie durch den transparenten Standfuß hindurch
nicht zu sehen sind.
Standfuß verwenden
N Der PDP-Fernseher sollte von mindestens zwei Personen getragen werden.
Um Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, legen Sie den Plasmafernseher nie auf
den Fußboden. Der Plasmabildschirm muss sich immer in aufrechter Position
befinden.
N Der Plasmabildschirm kann um 20 Grad nach recht und links gedreht werden.
-20° ~ 20°
Lieferumfang
Bedienungsanleitung Fernbedienung /
AAA-Batterien
(2 Stück)
Netzkabel Reinigungstuch Kabelschlauch Haltering (4 Stück)
(finden Sie auf
Seite 66)
Software-CD
Schrauben (4 Stück)
(PS50B650 nur)
(finden Sie auf
Seite 66)
Untere Abdeckung
(PS50B650 nur)
(finden Sie auf
Seite 66)
Untere Abdeckung /
Schrauben (2 Stück)
(PS58B680 / PS63B680 nur)
(finden Sie auf Seite 66)
Ferritkern für
Netzkabel
Ferritkern für
Netzkabel
(PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680 nur)
Ferritkern für
Kopfhörerkabel
Garantiekarte/
Sicherheitshinweise
(Nicht überall
verfügbar)
N Ferritkern
Mit dem Ferritkern werden die Kabel vor Störungen geschützt. Wenn Sie
ein Kabel anschließen, öffnen Sie den Ferritkern und legen Sie ihn in der
Nähe des Steckers mit einem deutlich hörbaren Klicken um das Kabel
(siehe Abbildung).
Anschließen und Vorbereiten des Fernsehgeräts
(PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680 nur)
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:37:40 PMDeutsch - 5
Bedienfeld
N Form und Farbe des Geräts können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden.
Tasten auf der Vorderseite
Berühren Sie die verschiedenen
Tasten, um die gewünschten
Funktionen zu nutzen.
(PS58B680 / PS63B680)
(PS50B650)
1 SOURCE
Schaltet zwischen den verfügbaren Signalquellen um
(TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI,
HDMI3, HDMI4, USB).
N Im Bildschirmmenü können Sie diese Schaltfläche
genauso wie die ENTER -Taste auf der Fernbedienung
verwenden.
2 MENU
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um ein Bildschirmmenü zu den
Funktionen des Fernsehgeräts einzublenden
3 + –
Hiermit erhöhen oder verringern Sie die Lautstärke. Im
Bildschirmmenü können Sie die Schaltflächen + – wie
die Tasten ◄ und ► auf der Fernbedienung verwenden.
4 CH
Hiermit wechseln Sie den Sender. Im Bildschirmmenü können
Sie die CH -Schaltflächen wie die Tasten ▲ und ▼ auf
der Fernbedienung verwenden. Verwnden Sie die CH
-Taste verwenden, um das Fernsehgerät ohne Fernbedienung
anzuschalten.
5 BETRIEBSANZEIGE
Beim Einschalten des Fernsehgeräts blinkt die Netzleuchte
kurz und erlischt anschließend. Im Standbymodus leuchtet
die Anzeige permanent.
6 (POWER)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um das Fernsehgerät ein- und
auszuschalten.
7 FERNBEDIENUNGSSENSOR
Richten Sie die Fernbedienung auf diesen Sensor am
Fernsehgerät.
8 LAUTSPRECHER
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:37:41 PMDeutsch - 6
Anschlussfeld
N Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Fernseher und alle angeschlossenen Geräte ausgeschaltet sind, bevor Sie weitere Geräte anschließen.
N Achten Sie beim Anschließen eines externen Geräts auf die Farbcodierung: Stecker und Buchse müssen die gleiche Farbe aufweisen.
N Die Produktfarbe und -form können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden.
1 LAN
Schließen Sie ein Netzwerkkabel zur Verbindung mit dem
NetzwerK an diesen Anschluss an.
2 POWER IN
Anschluss für das Netzkabel.
3 COMPONENT IN
Audio- (L/R) UND Videoeingänge (Y / PB / PR) für
Komponentensignale.
4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC)
Anschließen an den Videound Audioausgang eines Computers.
5 EXT 1, EXT 2
Ein- und Ausgänge für externe Geräte wie z. B.
Videorecorder, DVD-Player, Spielekonsolen oder Video-DiscPlayer.
N Im EXT-Modus unterstützt DTV Out nur MPEG SD-Video
und Audio.
N Im EXT-Modus ist der Spielemodus nicht verfügbar.
Anschlussmöglichkeiten
Anschluss
Eingang Ausgang
Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R)
EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔
Nur TV- oder DTVAusgang verfügbar.
EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Ausgang frei wählbar.
6 KOPFHÖRER
Wenn Sie beim Fernsehen andere Personen im Zimmer nicht
stören möchten, können Sie Kopfhörer an das Fernsehgerät
anschließen.
N Das Verwenden von Kopfhörern bei hoher Lautstärke über
einen längeren Zeitraum kann zu Hörschäden führen.
7 DIGITALAUDIO-AUSGANG (OPTISCH)
Anschließen an ein digitales Audiogerät.
8 SERVICE
Anschluss für Servicezwecke.
9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)
Schließen Sie die Cinch- Audiosignale des Fernsehgeräts an
eine externe Quelle an, z. B. an ein Audiogerät.
0 ANT IN
Koaxialanschluss (75Ω) für Antenne/Kabelanschluss.
! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3
Beim Anschluss von Geräten über eine HDMI-Schnittstelle ist
keine zusätzliche Audioverbindung erforderlich.
- Eine Verbindung über HDMI/DVI-Kabel kann nur über
HDMI IN 2 (DVI) erfolgen.
N Was ist HDMI?
- Die hochauflösende Multimediaschnittstelle HDMI
ermöglicht die Übertragung von hochauflösenden digitalen
Videodaten und mehreren Kanälen mit Digitalaudio.
- Mit dem entsprechenden Kabel ermöglicht der HDMI/
DVI-Anschluss DVIVerbindungen zu einem erweiterten
Gerät (nicht mitgeliefert). Der Unterschied zwischen
HDMI und DVI besteht darin, dass ein Gerät mit HDMI
kleiner ist, mit dem Kopierschutz HDCP (High Bandwidth
Digital Copy Protection/ digitaler Kopierschutz)
ausgestattet ist und digitalen Mehrkanalton unterstützt.
DVI AUDIO IN
DVI-Audioausgänge für externe Geräte.
Unterstützte Modi für HDMI/DVI und Component
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O
Komponenteneingang O O O O O O O
Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts
Kabelfernsehen
Netzwerk
oder
oder
2
3 4 5 7 9 !
0
6 8
1
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:37:44 PMDeutsch - 7
1 COMMON INTERFACE-Steckplatz
Setzen Sie eine CI(CI+)-Karte (Common Interface) in den
Steckplatz ein. (finden Sie auf Seite 23)
- Ohne eingelegte CI(CI+)-Karte zeigt das Fernsehgerät
auf einigen Kanälen ein gestörtes Signal an.
- Die Verbindungsinformationen mit Telefonnummer,
Kennung der CI(CI+)-Karte, Hostkennung und anderen
Angaben wird in ungefähr 2 bis 3 Minuten angezeigt.
Wenn eine Fehlermeldung angezeigt wird, wenden Sie
sich bitte an Ihren Dienstanbieter.
- Wenn die Senderinformationskonfiguration
abgeschlossen ist, wird die Meldung angezeigt. Dies
bedeutet, dass die Senderliste jetzt aktualisiert ist.
- Wenn Sie die CI-Karte wieder einsetzen, wird, je nach
Modell, eine Meldung angezeigt, in der Sie das Kennwort
für die Parental Lock eingeben sollen.
- Selbst wenn die Parental Lock auf Allow All eingestellt
ist, wird bei manchen Modellen eine Meldung angezeigt,
damit Sie für Erwachsenenprogramme (ab 18 Jahren)
das Kennwort eingeben.
N Die Richtung, in der Sie die Karte einlegen müssen, ist
darauf mit einem Pfeil markiert.
N CI(CI+)-Karten werden in einigen Ländern, Regionen
und von manchen Sendern nicht unterstützt. Fragen Sie
diesbezüglich Ihren offiziellen Händler.
N Die CI+-Funktion steht nur im Modell PS********P zur
Verfügung.
Bei Problemen wenden Sie sich an den Dienstanbieter.
2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2
Schließen Sie ein USB-Massenspeichergerät an, um
Fotodateien (JPEG), Audiodateien (MP3) und Filmdateien
anzuzeigen bzw. abzuspielen. Sie können eine drahtlose
Verbindung zum SAMSUNG-Netzwerk herstellen. Der USB
1-Anschluss dient zugleich als Festplattenanschluss. Auf
der Festplatte (Festplattenlaufwerk) werden digitale Daten
gespeichert.
3 HDMI IN 4
Zum Anschließen an die HDMI-Buchse von Geräten mit
HDMI-Ausgang.
4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)
Video- und Audioeingänge für externe Geräte wie z. B.
Camcorder oder Videorecorder.
N Form und Farbe des Geräts können sich je nach Modell unterscheiden.
Seitenverkleidung des Fernsehgeräts
3
4
1
2
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:37:46 PMDeutsch - 8
Fernbedienung
Die Reichweite der Fernbedienung beträgt ca. 7 m.
N Die Leistungsfähigkeit der Fernbedienung kann durch starke Lichteinstrahlung beeinträchtigt werden.
1 POWER-Taste (Netztaste zum An- und
Ausschalten des Fernsehgeräts).
2 TV-Modus direkt aufrufen
3 Zifferntasten für direkte
Programmplatzeingabe.
4 Drücken Sie diese Taste, um zu Ihren
Favoriten zu wechseln.
5 Ton vorübergehend ausschalten.
6 Nächster Sender
Vorheriger Sender.
7 Verfügbare Signalquelle auswählen.
8 Anzeigen von Informationen zur
aktuellen Sendung.
9 Hiermit können Sie häufig verwendete
Funktionen schnell auswählen.
0 Auswählen von Optionen im
Bildschirmmenü und Ändern von
Menüwerten.
! Mit dieser Funktionen können Sie
Internetfernsehen Internet@TV
nutzen.
@ Verwenden Sie diese Tasten bei der
Arbeit mit der Senderliste, Media Play,
Internet@TV und usw.
$ Anzeigen von Senderlisten auf dem
Bildschirm.
% Verwenden Sie diese Tasten bei der
Arbeit mit der Senderliste, Media Play
und Anynet+.
^ Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die
Tastenbeleuchtung der Fernbedienung
zu aktivieren. Diese Funktion ist in
der Nacht oder in einem dunklen
Zimmer hilfreich. (Wenn Sie die
Fernbedienung mit angeschalteter
Hintergrundbeleuchtung ON/OFF
( ) verwenden, verkürzt dies die
Lebensdauer der Batterie.)
& Vorheriger Sender.
* Nächster Sender
Vorheriger Sender
( Bildschirmmenü anzeigen.
) EPG-Anzeige (Elektronischer
Programmführer).
a Zurück zum vorherigen Menü.
b Bildschirmmenü schließen.
c Mit dieser Funktionen können Sie
Media Play nutzen.
d Diese Funktion ermöglicht die Anzeige
der Content Library.
e Mit dieser Taste können Sie digitale
Untertitel anzeigen.
f Auswahl der Audio-Beschreibung.
Teletextfunktionen
2 Teletextanzeige beenden
(modellabhängig)
7 Teletext-Modus auswählen
(LIST/FLOF)
8 Teletext anzeigen
9 Teletextgrösse
@ Fastext-Thema auswählen
# Teletext anzeigen / Teletext und
Fernsehsendung zugleich anzeigen
$ Teletextseite speichern
& Untergeordnete Teletextseite
* P : Nächste Teletextseite
P : Vorige Teletextseite
( Teletext-Index
a Seite weiter anzeigen
(nicht umblättern)
b Teletext abbreche
Batterien in die Fernbedienung einsetzen
1. Heben Sie die Abdeckung auf der Rückseite der Fernbedienung an, wie in der
Abbildung dargestellt.
2. Legen Sie zwei AAA-Batterien ein.
N Achten Sie darauf, dass die Pole der Batterien wie im Batteriefach angezeigt
ausgerichtet sind.
3. Schließen Sie den Deckel.
N Wenn die Fernbedienung für einen längeren Zeitraum nicht verwendet wird,
nehmenSie die Batterien heraus, und lagern Sie sie an einem kühlen, trockenen Ort.
N Sollte die Fernbedienung nicht funktionieren, überprüfen Sie Folgendes :
1. Ist das Fernsehgerät eingeschaltet?
2. Wurden Plus- und Minuspol der Batterien vertauscht?
3. Sind die Batterien leer?
4. Liegt ein Stromausfall vor oder ist das Netzkabel des Fernsehgeräts nicht eingesteckt?
5. Befindet sich eine Leuchtstoffröhre oder ein Neonschild in der Nähe?
N Batterien und Akkus gehören nicht in den Hausmüll. Als Verbraucher sind Sie verpflichtet, alte Batterien und Akkus zur
umweltschonenden Entsorgung zurückzugeben. Sie können alte Batterien und Akkus bei den öffentlichen Sammelstellen in Ihrer
Gemeinde oder überall dort abgeben, wo Batterien und Akkus der betreffenden Art verkauft werden.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:37:47 PMDeutsch - 9
Verwenden der Fernbedienung mit Tastenbeleuchtung
Nutzen Sie dieses Feature in dunkler Umgebung, oder wenn Sie die Tasten der Fernbedienung nicht deutlich sehen können.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste ON/OFF ( ) für die Tastenbeleuchtung.
N Wenn die Hintergrundbeleuchtung angeschaltet (ON) ist, wird die Tastenbeleuchtung kurz angeschaltet.
N Sobald Sie eine Taste der angeschalteten Fernbedienung drücken, wird die Tastenbeleuchtung für eine kurze Zeit angeschaltet.
Ein-und Ausschalten
Das Netzkabel wird auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts angeschlossen.
1. Schließen Sie das Netzkabel an eine geeignete Netzsteckdose an.
N Am Gerät leuchtet die Standby-Anzeige auf.
2. Drücken Sie die POWER P am Gerät.
N Zum Einschalten des Fernsehgeräts können Sie auch die POWER P Zum Einschalten des Fernsehgeräts können Sie auch die
Netytaste P oder die TVTaste auf der Fernbedienung drücken. oder die TVTaste auf der Fernbedienung drücken.
N Der Sender, den Sie zuletzt gesehen haben, wird automatisch wieder aufgerufen.
3. Drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Zifferntasten (0-9) bzw. eine der Programmwahltasten (< / >), oder drücken Sie die Taste
< CH > am Gerät.
N Wenn Sie das Gerät zum ersten Mal einschalten, können Sie die Sprache auswählen, in der die Menüs angezeigt werden.
4. Zum Ausschalten des Fernsehgeräts drücken Sie erneut die Taste POWER P.
Fernsehgerät in den Standby-Modus schalten
Um den Stromverbrauchs zu senken, kann das Gerät in den Standby-Modus geschaltet werden. Der Standby-Modus ist nützlich, wenn
Sie das Gerät vorübergehend ausschalten möchten (z. B. während einer Mahlzeit).
1. Drücken Sie die POWER P auf der Fernbedienung.
N Der Bildschirm wird ausgeschaltet, und auf der Vorderseite des Fernsehgeräts leuchtet die rote Standby-Anzeige auf.
2. Drücken Sie einfach erneut die POWER P, eine Zifferntaste (0-9) bzw. die Taste TV oder die Programmwahltaste (< / >), um
das Gerät wieder einzuschalten.
N Der Standby-Modus ist nicht für längere Phasen der Abwesenheit gedacht (z. B. wenn Sie verreist sind). Ziehen Sie dann
sicherheitshalber den Netzstecker und das Antennenkabel.
Anzeigen des Bildschirmmenüs
Auf dem Bildschirm werden der aktuelle Kanal und bestimmte Audio/Video-Einstellungen
angezeigt.
O Drücken Sie die Taste INFO, um Informationen anzuzeigen.
Drücken Sie die Taste INFO auf der Fernbedienung. Auf dem Bildschirm werden der
Kanal, der Tonmodus sowie die Werte bestimmter Bild- und Toneinstellungen angezeigt.
• ▲, ▼: Sie können Informationen anderer Kanäle anzeigen. Wenn Sie zum
ausgewählten Sender wechseln möchten, drücken Sie auf die ENTERE-Taste.
• ◄, ►: Sie können die Informationen zum aktuellen Programm dieses Senders
anzeigen.
N Drücken Sie noch einmal auf die INFO-Taste und warten Sie ca. 10 Sekunden lang,
bis die Informationen automatisch angezeigt werden.
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information
E Watch
' Information
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:37:48 PMDeutsch - 10
Menüs anzeigen
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MENU bei angeschaltetem Gerät. Das Hauptmenü wird auf
dem Bildschirm angezeigt. Links im Menü sind Symbole zu sehen Bild, Ton, Sender,
Einstellungen, Eingang, Anwendung, Unterstützung.
2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ eines der Symbole aus. Drücken Sie dann die
Taste ENTERE, um in das Untermenü des Symbols zu wechseln.
3. Zum Beenden drücken Sie die Taste EXIT.
N Das Bildschirmmenü wird nach etwa einer Minute vom Bildschirm gelöscht.
Verwenden der Taste TOOLS
Sie können die Taste TOOLS verwenden, um häufig verwendete Funktionen schnell und einfach auszuwählen. Der Inhalt des Menüs
Extras hängt davon ab, welche externe Signalquelle Sie für die Anzeige verwenden.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. Das Menü Extras wird geöffnet.
2. Wählen Sie mit der Taste ▲ oder ▼ eine Menüoption aus, und drücken Sie dann die
Taste ENTERE.
3. Drücken Sie die Tasten ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE, um die markierten Elemente
anzuzeigen, zu ändern oder zu verwenden. Ausführliche Beschreibungen der einzelnen
Funktionen finden Sie auf der jeweiligen Seite.
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), siehe Seite 46
• Bildformat, siehe Seite 16
• Bildmodus, siehe Seite 15
• Ton Modus, siehe Seite 20
• Sleep-Timer, siehe Seite 22
• SRS TS HD, siehe Seite 20
• Energiesparmod., siehe Seite 24
• Dual l ll, siehe Seite 21
• Zu Favoriten hinzufügen (oder Aus Favoriten löschen), siehe Seite 14
• PIP, siehe Seite 25
• Autom. Einstellung:, siehe Seite 18
Plug & Play-Funktion
Wenn das Fernsehgerät zum ersten Mal eingeschaltet wird, werden automatisch die Grundeinstellungen vorgenommen.
N Der Bildschirmschoner wird aktiviert, wenn im Plug & Play Betrieb länger als 1 Minute keine Eingabe mit der Fernbedienung erfolgt.
N Der Bildschirmschoner wird aktiviert, wenn länger als 15 Minuten kein Betriebssignal anliegt.
N Wenn Sie versehentlich das falsche Land für Ihren Fernseher einstellen, werden die Zeichen auf dem Bildschirm möglicherweise
falsch angezeigt.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste POWER auf der Fernbedienung. Das Menü Select the OSD
Language. (Sprache des Bildschirmmenüs wählen) wird automatisch angezeigt.
Drücken Sie die ENTERE. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Sprache mit den Tasten
▲ oder ▼ aus. Bestätigen Sie Ihre Auswahl mit der Taste ENTERE.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Shop Demo oder
Privatgebrauch, und drücken Sie dann auf ENTERE.
N Wir empfehlen Ihnen, das Fernsehgerät im Modus Privatgebrauch zu
verwenden, um das optimale Bild für den Privatgebrauch zu erzielen.
N Der Modus Shop Demo ist nur geeignet, wenn das Gerät in einem Verkaufsbereich verwendet wird.
N Wenn das Gerät versehentlich auf den Modus “Shop Demo” eingestellt ist, und Sie möchten wieder zurück zu “Privatgebrauch”
wechseln : Drücken Sie die Lautstärketaste am Fernsehgerät. Wenn das Menü “Lautstärke” angezeigt wird, halten Sie die Taste
MENU am Fernsehgerät 5 Sekunden lang gedrückt.
3. Drücken Sie die taste ENTERE. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Land mit der Taste ▲ oder ▼ aus. Bestätigen Sie Ihre Auswahl mit
der Taste ENTERE.
N Nachdem Sie im Menü Country das Land eingestellt haben, werden Sie bei manchen Modellen anschließend aufgefordert, die
PIN-Nummer einzurichten.
N Die Ziffernkombination 0-0-0-0 dürfen Sie als PIN-Nummer nicht eingeben.
4. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲ oder ▼, um die Sender der gewählten Verbindung zu speichern, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
• Terrestrisch : Terrestrisches Antennensignal.
• Kabel : Kabelgebundenes Antennensignal.
Plug & Play
Select the OSD Language.
Language :
U Move E Enter
▲
Nederlands
English
Eesti
▼
Extras
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Bildformat : Auto Breit
Bildmodus : Standard
Ton Modus : Benutzerd.
Sleep-Timer : Aus
SRS TS HD : Aus
Energiesparmod. : Aus
Dual l ll : Mono
Zu Favoriten hinzufügen
U Navig. E Eingabe e Beenden
Modus : Standard
Zellhelligkeit : 4
Kontrast : 95
Helligkeit : 45
Schärfe : 50
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50
Erweiterte Einstellungen
Bild
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:37:49 PMDeutsch - 11
5. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ den Sendertyp zum Speichern aus. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um Start
auszuwählen.
• Digital und Analog : Digitale und analoge Kanäle.
• Digital : Digitale Kanäle.
• Analogue : Analoge Kanäle.
N Die Sendersuche wird automatisch gestartet und beendet.
N Eine genauere Beschreibung zur Auswahl des Kabelmodus, finden Sie auf Seite 11.
6. Die Meldung Uhrmodus einstellen. wird angezeigt. Drücken Sie die ENTERE-Taste. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten
▲ oder ▼ die Option Auto, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
N Wenn Sie Manuell wählen, wird Datum und Uhrzeit einstellen angezeigt. (Detailliertere Informationen, finden Sie auf Seite 22)
N Wenn Sie ein digitales Signal empfangen, wird die Zeit automatisch eingestellt.
7. Die kurze Einführung So erzielen Sie mit Ihrem HD-Fernsehgerät optimale Leistung wird angezeigt. Drücken Sie die Taste
ENTERE.
N Dieses Menü ist im HD-Anschlussplanim Menü Unterstützung verfügbar.
N Wechseln Sie zum vorherigen oder nächsten Zeichen, indem Sie die Taste ◄ / ► drücken.
8. Die Meldung Enjoy your TV. (Wir wünschen gute Unterhaltung!) wird angezeigt.
N Wählen Sie Fernsehen, wenn Sie sofort fernsehen möchten.
N Wenn Sie die Anleitung anzeigen möchten, drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE.
So setzen Sie diese Funktion zurück...
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MENU, um das Menü anzuzeigen. Drücken Sie die Taste
▲ oder ▼, um Einstellungen auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
2. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE erneut, um Plug & Play auszuwählen.
3. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein. Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen
Fernsehgeräts lautet ‘0-0-0-0’.
N Informationen zum Ändern der PIN erhalten finden Sie auf Seite 24.
N Die Plug & Play-Funktion gibt es nur im TV-Modus.
Speichern von Sendern
❑ Land
Digitaler Sender : Sie können das Land für digitale Sender ändern.
Analog Sender : Sie können das Land für die analogen Sender ändern.
N Der Eingabebildschirm für die PIN wird geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.
❑ Autom. speichern
Das Fernsehgerät durchsucht automatisch alle Kanäle mit aktiven Sendern (Anzahl ist
länderabhängig) und speichert sie im Speicher des Fernsehgeräts.
Sie können den Sender für die gewählte Verbindung speichern.
• Terrestrisch : Terrestrisches Antennensignal.
• Kabel : Kabelgebundenes Antennensignal.
Sie können das Antennensignal zum Speichern auswählen.
• Digital und Analog : Digitale und analoge Kanäle.
• Digital : Digitale Kanäle.
• Analog : Analoge Kanäle.
N Bei Auswahl von Kabel,
• Suchmodus : Anzeigen des Suchmodus. (Schnell)
- Network ID : Anzeigen der Netzwerkkennung.
- Frequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Frequenz des Senders an.
- Modulation : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Modulationswerte an.
- Symbolrate : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Symbolraten an.
• Suchmodus : Anzeigen des Suchmodus. (Voll, Netzwerk)
- Startfrequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Startfrequenz an.
- Endfrequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Stoppfrequenz an.
- Modulation : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Modulationswerte an.
- Symbolrate : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Symbolraten an.
N Wenn Sie Autom. speichern anhalten möchten, drücken Sie auf ENTERE.
Die Meldung Automatische Senderspeicherung beenden? wird angezeigt.
Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option JA, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
Kanalsteuerung
Sender
Land ►
Autom. speichern
Manuell speichern
Suchoptionen für Kabel
Ausführlich
Übersicht
Standard : Ausführlich
Senderliste
Einstellungen
Plug & Play ►
Menüsprache : Deutsch
Zeit
Sendungsoptionen
Sicherheit
Netzwerk
Allgemein
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:37:50 PMDeutsch - 12
❑ Manuell speichern
Hiermit wird ein Sender manuell gesucht und im Fernsehspeicher abgelegt.
Digitaler Sender (Digitaler)
N Digitalsender sind nur im DTV-Modus verfügbar.
• Sender : Stellen Sie die Sendernummer mit den Tasten ▲, ▼ oder einer Zifferntaste (0~9) ein.
• Frequenz : Einstellen der Frequenz mit Hilfe der Zifferntasten (0~9).
• Bandwidth: Einstellen der Bandbreite mit den Tasten ▲, ▼.
N Nach Abschluss des Suchlaufs werden die Kanäle in der Senderliste aktualisiert.
Analog Sender
Manuelles Speichern von analogen Kanälen.
• Programm (der Programmplatz, der dem Kanal zugewiesen werden soll) : Stellen Sie den Programmplatz mit den Tasten ▲, ▼
oder einer Zifferntaste (0~9) ein.
• Fernsehnorm → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : Einstellen der Fernsehnorm mithilfe der Tasten ▲ oder ▼.
• Tonsystem → BG / DK / I / L : Einstellen des Tonsystems mithilfe der Tasten ▲ oder ▼.
• Sender (Wenn Ihnen die Nummer des zu speichernden Senders bekannt ist) : Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option
C (Terrestrischer Sender) oder S (Kabelsender) aus. Drücken Sie die Taste ► und dann die Tasten ▲, ▼ oder eine Zifferntaste
(0~9), um die gewünschte Nummer auszuwählen.
N Falls kein oder nur schlechter Ton zu hören sein sollte, wählen Sie einen anderen Audiostandard aus..
• Suchlauf (Wenn Ihnen die Sendernummern nicht bekannt sind) Drücken Sie zum Starten des Suchlaufs die Taste ▲ oder ▼.
Der Tuner durchsucht den Frequenzbereich, bis der erste Sender bzw. der ausgewählte Sender empfangen wird.
• Sichern (Zum Speichern des Senders und des zugehörigen Programmplatzes) Wählen Sie zum Bestätigen Ihrer Auswahl mit
der Taste ENTERE die Option OK.
N Sendermodus
- C (Antennenempfangsmodus) : In diesem Modus können Sie Kanäle durch Eingabe der Nummer anwählen, die jedem
Antennensender zugeordnet ist.
- S (Kabelsendermodus) : In diesem Modus können Sie Sender durch Eingabe der Nummer wählen, die jedem Kabelsender
zugeordnet ist.
❑ Suchoptionen für Kabel
Hiermit können Sie (je nach Land) weitere Suchoptionen für die Sendersuche im Kabelnetz einstellen (z. B. Frequenz oder
Symbolrate).
• Startfrequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Startfrequenz an.
• Stoppfrequenz : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Stoppfrequenz an.
• Modulation : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Modulationswerte an.
• Symbolrate : Hiermit zeigen Sie die verfügbaren Symbolraten an.
N Wenn der Wert von Startfrequenz größer ist als der von Stoppfrequenz, wird eine Warnmeldung angezeigt.
❑ Ausführlich / Übersicht
Die Informationen des elektronischen Programmführers werden von den Sendern zur Verfügung gestellt. Es kann sein,
dass Programmeinträge leer oder veraltet sind. Dies ist auf die für einen bestimmten Sender übertragenen Informationen
zurückzuführen. Die Anzeige wird dynamisch aktualisiert, sobald neue Informationen verfügbar sind.
• Ausführlich : Hier werden die Programminformationen in einem Zeitplan mit einer Unterteilung von jeweils 1 Stunde angezeigt.
Es wird ein Zeitfenster von 2 Stunden mit Programminformationen angezeigt.
Dieses Fenster kann jedoch in der Zeit nach vorne oder nach hinten verschoben
werden.
• Übersicht : Die Informationen für die einzelnen Programme werden im Fenster
für den Mini-Programmführer in chronologischer Reihenfolge des Programmstarts
zeilenweise ab dem aktuell laufenden Programm angezeigt.
❑ Standard
Übersicht / Ausführlich
Mit der Taste GUIDE auf der Fernbedienung können Sie einstellen, ob der
ausführliche Programmführer oder die Übersicht angezeigt werden soll.
O Sie können das Programmführermenü auch durch Drücken der Taste GUIDE
aufrufen.
Fortsetzung...
Sender
Ausführlich
Übersicht
Standard : Ausführlich ►
Senderliste
Kanalmodus : Hinzugef. Sender
Feinabstimmung
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:37:51 PMDeutsch - 13
Verwenden von Ausführlichem Programmführers / Übersicht
▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►,
ENTER
Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE ein Programm aus.
ROT Schalten Sie zwischen dem Ausführlich und der Übersicht um.
GRÜN Ausführlich : Schnell zurückblättern. (-24 Std.)
GELB Ausführlich : Schnell weiterblättern. (+24 Std.)
BLAU Programmführer beenden.
INFO INFO-Taste, für detailliertere Informationen.
❑ Sendermodus
Durch Drücken der Taste P () wechseln Sie innerhalb der gewählten Senderliste zwischen den Sendern.
Hinzugef. Sender : Es wird nur zwischen Sendern der gespeicherten Senderliste gewechselt.
Favoriten : Es wird nur zwischen Sendern der Favoritenliste gewechselt.
❑ Feinabstimmung (nur analoge Kanäle)
Bei klarem Empfang ist keine Feinabstimmung nötig, da diese automatisch während der Sendersuche erfolgt. Falls das Signal
jedoch schwach oder das Bild verzerrt ist, müssen Sie unter Umständen eine manuelle Feinabstimmung durchführen.
N Feinabgestimmte Sender, die gespeichert wurden, werden mit einem Sternchen * rechts neben der Sendernummer im SenderBanner gekennzeichnet.
N Wenn Sie den feinabgestimmten Sender nicht speichern, werden Ihre Einstellungen nicht gesichert.
N Wählen Sie zum Zurücksetzen der Feinabstimmung die Option Reset. Drücken Sie dazu die Taste ▼ und dann die Taste
ENTERE.
Verwalten von Sendern
Mit diesem Menü können Sie Favoriten hinzufügen, löschen oder einstellen und den
Programmführer für Digitalsendungen verwenden.
N Wählen Sie im Fenster Alle Sender, Hinzugefügte Sender oder Favorit oder
Programm einen Sender. Drücken Sie hierzu die Tasten ▲ oder ▼ und dann die Taste
ENTERE. Nun können Sie den gewählten Sender ansehen.
• Alle Sender : Hiermit zeigen Sie alle verfügbaren Sender an.
• Hinzugefügte Sender : Hiermit zeigen Sie alle hinzugefügten Sender an.
• Favorit : Hiermit zeigen Sie alle Favoritensender an.
• Programm : Hiermit zeigen Sie alle vorgemerkten Programme an.
O Sie öffnen die Senderlisten durch Drücken der Taste CH LIST auf der
Fernbedienung.
N Verwenden der Farbtasten in Verbindung mit der Senderliste.
- Rot (Sendertyp) : Schalten Sie zwischen TV, Radio, Daten / Andere und Alle
um.
- Grün ( (Zoom) : Hiermit vergrößern oder verkleinern Sie die Sendernummer.
- Gelb (Wählen) : Hiermit wählen Sie mehrere Senderlisten aus.
- T TOOLS (Extras) : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Menüs Löschen (oder Hinzufügen), Zu
Favoriten hinzufügen (oder Aus Favoriten löschen), Sperren (oder Freigabe),
Timer-Wiedergabe, Name bearb., Programmplatz bearbeiten, Sort (Sortieren),
Alle abwählen, oder Alle wählen oder Autom. speichern an.
(Der Inhalt des Menüs Extras hängt von der jeweiligen Situation ab.)
N Symbole zur Anzeige des Senderstatus
A Ein analoger Sender. c Ein Sender, der durch Drücken der
gelben Taste gewählt wurde.
♥
Ein Sender, der als Favorit
eingestellt ist.
( Ein Programm, das gerade
gesendet wird.
\ Ein gesperrter Sender. ) Ein vorgemerktes Programm.
Sender
Übersicht
Standard : Ausführlich
Senderliste
Kanalmodus : Hinzugef. Sender
Feinabstimmung
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Alle Sender
Alle Sendertyp Zoom Wählen Seite Extras
Ausführlich
DTV - Kabel 900 f tn 2:10 Di 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
Keine detaillierten Information.
Heute 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
900 f tn
901 ITV Play
902 Kerrang!
903 Kiss
903 oneword
▼ 903 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
Keine Information
Keine Information
Keine Information
Freshmen O..
Übersicht DTV Cable 900 f tn
Street Hypnosis
Booze Britain
2:00
2:30
▼ 5:00
Freshmen On Campus
Ansehen Informationen Seite Ausführlich Beenden
Ansehen Informationen Seite Übersicht +24 Std. Beenden
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:37:52 PMDeutsch - 14
❑ Menü Extras für Senderlisten (in Alle Sender / Hinzugefügte Sender / Favorit)
N Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen.
N Der Inhalt des Menüs Extras hängt vom jeweiligen Senderstatus ab.
Hinzufügen / Löschen
Sie können Kanäle löschen oder hinzufügen, damit nur die gewünschten Kanäle angezeigt werden.
N Alle gelöschten Kanäle werden im Menü Alle Sender angezeigt.
N Wenn der Sender in grauer Farbe dargestellt wird, wurde er gelöscht.
N Das Menü Hinzufügen wird nur für gelöschte Kanäle angezeigt.
N Sie können einen Sender aus dem Menü Hinzugefügte Sender oder Favorit in
gleicher Weise löschen.
Zu Favoriten hinzufügen / Aus Favoriten löschen
Sie können Kanäle, die Sie häufig sehen, als Favorit festlegen.
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können
zudem einen Sender zu den Favoriten hinzufügen, indem Sie Extras → Zu
Favoriten hinzufügen (oder Aus Favoriten löschen).
O Durch Drücken der Taste FAV.CH auf der Fernbedienung können Sie die
eingerichteten Favoritenkanäle auswählen.
N Das Symbol “♥” wird angezeigt, und der Sender wird als Favorit festgelegt.
N Alle Favoritenkanäle werden im Menü Favorit angezeigt.
Sperren / Freigabe
Sie können einen Sender sperren, sodass er nicht ausgewählt und angezeigt werden kann.
Diese Funktion ist nur verfügbar, wenn die Kindersicherung aktiviert ist Ein. (siehe Seite 24)
N Der Eingabebildschirm für die PIN wird geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.
N Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet ‘0-0-0-0’. Sie können die PIN ändern, indem Sie im Menü den Befehl
PIN ändern wählen.
N Das Symbol “\” wird angezeigt, und der Sender wird gesperrt.
Timer-Wiedergabe
Wenn Sie ein Programm zum Anschauen vorgemerkt haben, wechselt das Fernsehgerät automatisch zum vorgemerkten Sender in
der Senderliste, auch wenn Sie gerade einen anderen Sender anschauen. Um ein Programm vorzumerken, müssen Sie zuerst die
Uhrzeit einstellen. (siehe Seite 22)
N Sie können nur gespeicherte Kanäle vormerken.
N Sie können Sender, Monat, Tag, Jahr, Stunde oder Minute auch direkt über die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung einstellen.
N Das Vormerken eines Programms wird im Menü Programm angezeigt.
N Digitaler Programmführer und Vormerken von Sendungen
Wenn Sie einen digitalen Sender gewählt haben und die Taste ► drücken, wird der Programmführer für diesen Sender
angezeigt. Gehen Sie in der oben beschriebenen Weise vor, wenn Sie ein Programm vormerken möchten.
Sendernamen bearbeiten (nur Analogsender)
Sie können Kanäle mit Beschriftungen versehen, sodass die ersten Buchstaben des Namens immer dann angezeigt werden, wenn
Sie den Sender wählen.
N Die Namen der digitalen Sender werden automatisch zugewiesen und können nicht geändert werden.
Programmplatz bearbeiten (nur Digitalkanal)
Sie können die Sendernummer auch mit den Zifferntasten der Fernbedienung einstellen.
Sortieren (nur Analogkanal)
Mit diesem Vorgang können Sie die Programmnummern gespeicherter Sender ändern. Das ist möglicherweise nach dem
automatischen Speichern von Sendern erforderlich.
Alle wählen / Alle abwählen
Sie können die Kanäle in der Senderliste auswählen oder die Auswahl aufheben.
N Sie können die Funktionen zum Hinzufügen / Löschen / Hinzufügen zu Favoriten / Löschen aus Favoriten oder Sperren /
Freigeben gleichzeitig verwenden. Markieren Sie die gewünschten Kanäle und drücken Sie die gelbe Taste, um alle markierten
Kanäle zugleich einzustellen.
N Links neben dem Namen des gewählten Senders wird das Symbol c angezeigt.
N Alle abwählen können Sie nur wählen, wenn mindestens ein Sender gewählt ist.
Automatisch speichern
N Weitere Informationen zum Einstellen der Optionen, finden Sie auf Seite 11.
N Wenn ein Sender mit der Funktion Kindersicherung gesperrt wurde, wird das
Eingabefenster für die PIN geöffnet.
❑ Menü Extras für Senderlisten (in Programm)
Mit dieser Menüoption können Sie eine Vormerkung anzeigen, ändern oder löschen.
N Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen.
• Info ändern : Wählen Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung zu ändern.
• Programmierung abbrechen : Wählen Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung zu stornieren.
• Informationen : Wählen Sie diese Option, um eine Vormerkung anzuzeigen.
(Sie können die Vormerkinformationen auch ändern).
• Alle wählen / Alle abwählen : Wählen oder abwählen aller vorgemerkten Programme.
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Alle Sender
Löschen
Zu Favoriten hinzufügen
Sperren
Timer-Wiedergabe
Sendernamen bearbeiten
Sortieren
▼
Programmiert
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer
Info ändern
Prog. Löschen
Informationen
Alle wählen
Alle Zoom Wählen Extras Informationen
Alle Sendertyp Zoom Wählen Seite Extras
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:37:53 PMDeutsch - 15
Ändern der Bildeinstellungen
❑ Modus
Sie können den Bildstandard auswählen, der für Ihre Sehgewohnheiten am besten
geeignet ist.
Dynamisch / Standard / Eco / Film
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den
Bildmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Bildmodus einstellen.
❑ Zellhelligkeit / Kontrast / Helligkeit / Schärfe / Farbe / Farbton (G/R)
Das Gerät verfügt über mehrere Einstellmöglichkeiten für die Bildqualität.
• Zellhelligkeit : Zum Anpassen der Pixelhelligkeit.
• Kontrast : Hiermit stellen Sie den Kontrast.
• Helligkeit : Hiermit stellen Sie die Helligkeit.
• Schärfe : Hiermit stellen Sie die Kantenauflösung.
• Farbe : Dient zum Anpassen der Farbsättigung des Bilds.
• Farbton (G/R) : Hiermit stellen Sie den Farbton ein.
N Wenn Sie Änderungen an Zellenhelligkeit, Kontrast, Helligkeit, Schärfe, Farbe oder Farbton (G/R) vornehmen, wird das
Bildschirmmenü entsprechend angepasst.
N Die eingestellten Werte werden auf jeden Bildmodus angewendet.
N Sie können die Funktion Farbton im Analog TV, Ext. oder AV Modus des PAL Systems nicht verwenden.
N Im PC Modus können Sie nur Zellhelligkeit, Kontrast und Helligkeit einstellen.
N Jede angepasste Einstellung wird je nach Eingabemodus separat gespeichert.
N Die im Betrieb verbrauchte Energiemenge geht deutlich zurück, wenn Sie die Helligkeit des Bildes reduzieren. Damit senken Sie
die Betriebskosten.
❑ Erweiterte Einstellungen
Sie können verschiedene erweiterte Einstellungen für Ihren Fernseher vornehmen,
unter anderem für Farbe und Kontrast.
N Erweiterte Einstellungen stehen in den Modi Standard oder Film zur Verfügung.
N Im PC Modus können von den Advanced Settings nur Optimalkontrast, Gamma
und Weißabgleich eingestellt werden.
Schwarzton → Aus / Dunkel / Dunkler / Dunkelst
Verbesserung der Bildtiefe durch Anpassen der schwarzen Farbdichte.
Optimalkontrast → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch
Sie können den Bildschirmkontrast so anpassen, dass ein optimaler Kontrast
gewährleistet ist.
Gamma
Sie können die Intensität der Primärfarben (Rot, Grün und Blau) einstellen.
Farbraum
Der Farbraum ist eine Farbmatrix bestehend aus den Farben Rot, Grün und Blau. Wählen Sie Ihren bevorzugten Farbraum, um die
Welt in den natürlichsten Farben zu erfahren.
• Auto : Automatische Anpassung des Farbbereichs an die Bildsignalquelle.
• Nativ : Hiermit stellen Sie einen Farbereich ein, der breiter als der des Eingangssignals ist.
• Benutzerd : Hiermit stellen Sie den Farbbereich wunschgemäß ein.
N Anpassen des Farbraums
- Hiermit stellen Sie den Farbbereich wunschgemäß ein. Die Option “Farbe” ist verfügbar, wenn der Farbraum als
benutzerdefiniert eingestellt ist.
- Farbe → Rot / Grün / Blau / Gelb / Zyan / Magenta
- Rot / Grün / Blau : Sie können die RGB-Werte der jeweils ausgewählten Farbe einstellen.
- Reset : Setzt den Farbraum auf die Standardwerte zurück.
Bildeinstellungen
Fortsetzung...
Modus : Standard ►
Zellhelligkeit : 4
Kontrast : 95
Helligkeit : 45
Schärfe : 50
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50
Erweiterte Einstellungen
Bild
Farbe : 50
Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50
Erweiterte Einstellungen ►
Bildoptionen
Bild zurücksetzen
Bild
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:37:54 PMDeutsch - 16
Weißabgleich
Um natürlichere Bildfarben zu erhalten, können Sie die Farbtemperatur anpassen.
• R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain : Wenn Sie den Wert anpassen, wird der Bildschirm aktualisiert und
neu angezeigt.
• Reset : Hiermit stellen Sie den Standard-Weißabgleich wieder ein.
Hautton
Hiermit reichern Sie den Farbton für Haut mit Rot an oder ab.
N Wenn Sie den Anpassungswert ändern, wird der angepasste Bildschirm aktualisiert.
Kantenglättung → Aus / Ein
Sie können die Objektbegrenzungen im Bild betonen.
xvYCC → Aus / Ein
Durch Aktivieren des xvYCC-Modus werden Detailgenauigkeit und Farbtiefe bei der Anzeige von Filmen von einem externen Gerät
(z. B. DVD-Player) verbessert.
N xvYCC ist verfügbar, wenn der Bildmodus auf Film und der externe Eingang auf HDMI oder Komp. eingestellt ist.
N Diese Funktion wird, je nach externem Gerät, möglicherweise nicht unterstützt.
❑ Bildoptionen
Die weiteren Bildeinstellungen können an Ihre Bedürfnisse angepasst werden.
N Im PC-Modus können von den Bildoptionen nur Farbtemp., Größe und Screen
Burn Protection (Bildschirm-Einbrennschutz) eingestellt werden.
Farbtemp. → Kalt / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2 / Warm3
Sie können den für Ihre Augen angenehmsten Farbton auswählen.
N Die eingestellten Werte werden entsprechend dem jeweils ausgewählten
Bildmodus gespeichert.
N Warm1, Warm2 oder Warm3 werden nur aktiviert, wenn der Bildmodus auf Film
eingestellt ist.
Größe → Autom. Breit / 16:9 / Breitenzoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Bildanpassung
Sie können ein Bildformat auswählen, das Ihren Sehgewohnheiten am besten entspricht.
• Autom. Breit : Hiermit stellen Sie das Bildformat auf automatische Breite ein.
• 16:9 : Stellt das Bildformat auf den Breitbildmodus 16:9 ein.
• Breitenzoom : Diese Option vergrößert das Bild auf mehr als 4:3. Verschieben Sie das Bild mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ nach
oben oder nach unten, nachdem Sie mit der Taste ◄ oder ► eine Auswahl getroffen haben.
• Zoom : Vergrößert das Bild vertikal.
• 4:3 : Stellt das Bildformat auf den Normalmodus 4:3 ein.
• Bildanpassung : Zeigt ein volles, natives HD-Signal an, das mit einem normalen Fernseher nicht angezeigt werden kann.
N Je nach Signalquelle können die Bildgrößenoptionen variieren.
N Die verfügbaren Elemente können in Abhängigkeit vom ausgewählten Modus variieren.
N Im PC Modus können nur die Modi 16:9 und 4:3 eingestellt werden.
N Wenn der Modus Doppel ( , ) im PIP-Modus eingestellt wurde, können Sie die Bildgröße nicht einstellen.
N Sie können die Einstellungen für jedes externe Gerät festlegen und speichern, das Sie an einen Eingang des Fernsehgeräts
angeschlossen haben.
N Es kann zu vorübergehender Bildkonservierung kommen, wenn Sie auf dem Gerät mehr als zwei Stunden lang ein
unbewegten Bild angezeigt haben.
N BreitZoom : Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Taste ► die Option Position, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
Mit der Taste ▲ oder ▼ können Sie das Bild nach oben oder nach unten verschieben. Drücken Sie dann die Taste
ENTERE.
N Zoom : Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Taste ► die Option Position, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Mit der
Taste ▲ oder ▼ können Sie das Bild nach oben oder nach unten verschieben. Drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Taste ► die Option Größe, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Drücken Sie die
Tasten ▲ oder ▼, um das Bild in vertikaler Richtung zu vergrößern oder zu verkleinern. Drücken Sie dann die Taste
ENTERE.
N Nach Auswahl von Bildschirmanpassung im Modus HDMI (1080i / 1080p) oder Component (1080i/1080p) : Wählen Sie
durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Position. Mit den Tasten ▲, ▼, ◄ oder ► können Sie das Bild verschieben.
N Reset : Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Reset, und drücken Sie dann die ENTERE-Taste. Sie können die
Einstellung initialisieren.
N Wenn Sie die Funktion Bildschirmanpassung zusammen mit einem HDMI 720p-Signal verwenden, wird eine Zeile wie bei
Overscan oben, unten, links und rechts abgeschnitten.
Fortsetzung...
Farbton (G/R) : G50/R50
Erweiterte Einstellungen
Bildoptionen ►
Bild zurücksetzen
Bild
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:37:54 PMDeutsch - 17
Bildschirmmodus → 16:9 / BreitZoom / Zoom / 4:3
Wenn Sie die Bildgröße bei einem Fernsehgerät im 16:9-Format auf Autom. Breit einstellen, können Sie bestimmen, dass das Bild
als 4:3 WSS (Breitbilddienst) oder gar nicht angezeigt werden soll. Da jedes europäische Land eine andere Bildgröße verwendet,
können die Benutzer sie damit einstellen.
N Diese Funktion ist im Modus Auto Breit verfügbar.
N Diese Funktion ist im Modus PC, Component oder HDMI nicht verfügbar.
Digitale RM → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch / Auto
Wenn das vom Fernsehgerät empfangene Sendesignal schwach ist, können Sie die digitale Rauschunterdrückung aktivieren, um
ggf. statische Bilder oder Doppelbilder auf dem Bildschirm zu verringern.
N Bei schwachem Signal wählen Sie diejenige der anderen Optionen, bei der das beste Bild angezeigt wird.
HDMI-Schwarzp. → Normal / Gering
Sie können direkt auf dem Bildschirm den Schwarzwert auswählen, um die Bildschirmtiefe anzupassen.
N Diese Funktion ist nur bei einer Verbindung des externen Eingangs mit HDMI (RGBSignal) aktiv.
1080 Full-HD Motion Demo → Aus / Ein
Die neue Generation der Samsung Plasmabildschirme bietet höchste Klarheit der Bewegungen bei Full HD - optimal für
Sportsendungen, Filme und Spiele mit schnellen Bewegungen.
N Diese Funktion ist im PC-, Soiele- oder Media Play-Modus nicht verfügbar.
Filmmodus
Hiermit optimieren Sie den Bildmodus für die Wiedergabe von Filmen.
• Aus : Deaktiviert den Filmmodus.
• Auto1 : Hiermit wird das Bild bei Filmanzeige automatisch auf die beste Qualität eingestellt.
• Auto2 : Automatische Optimierung von Teletext, wenn Sie einen Film sehen.
• Cinema Smooth : Ermöglicht das ultimative Kinoerlebnis.
N Der Film-Modus wird bei TV, Video, Component (480i / 1080i) und HDMI (480i / 1080i) unterstützt.
Real 100Hz Demo → Aus / Ein
Sie erkennen deutlich den Unterschied zwischen Real 100 Hz und 50 Hz, insbesondere bei Sendungen mit schnellen Bewegungen.
Deshalb können Sie, wenn Sie ein Bild mit langsamen Bewegungen betrachten, nicht zwischen Real 100 Hz und 50 Hz
unterscheiden. Demo 100 Hz funktioniert nur zusammen mit einem 50 Hz-Signal. Real 100 Hz wird zusammen mit speziellen
Bildern für Geschäftsdemos verwendet.
Blaumodus → Aus / Ein
Diese Funktion ist für Experten zum Ausmessen von AV-Geräten bestimmt. Mit dieser Funktion werden das rote und das grüne
Signal aus dem Videosignal entfernt, sodass nur das blaue Signal angezeigt wird. Damit wird ein Blaufilter erzeugt, mithilfe dessen
die Farbe und der Farbton von Videogeräten wie DVD-Playern, Heimkinosystemen usw. eingestellt werden können.
N Der Blaumodus ist verfügbar, wenn der Bildmodus auf Film oder Standard eingestellt ist.
Einbrennschutz
(Bildschirm-Einbrennschutz)Dieses Gerät ist mit Einbrennschutz-Technologie ausgestattet, um die Möglichkeit des Einbrennens
des Monitorbildes zu verringern. Diese Technologie ermöglicht das Einstellen von senkrechten (Vertikal) und seitlichen (Horizontal)
Bildbewegungen. Die Zeiteinstellung ermöglicht das Programmieren der Dauer zwischen Bildbewegungen in Minuten.
• Pixelabstand : Diese Funktion verschiebt Pixel auf dem Plasmabildschirm horizontal oder vertikal, um die Möglichkeit des
Einbrennens des Bildes zu minimieren.
N Optimale Einstellung für PixelShift
Komponente TV/Ext/AV/Component/HDMI PC
Horizontal 0~2 2
Vertikal 0~4 4
Zeit (Minuten) 1~4 Min 2 Min
N Der PixelShift-Wert kann in Abhängigkeit von der Monitorgröße (Zoll) und dem ausgewählten Modus variieren.
N Diese Funktion ist im Modus Bildschirmanpassung nicht verfügbar.
Fortsetzung...
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:37:54 PMDeutsch - 18
Fernsehgerät mithilfe des PCs einstellen
N Voreinstellung : Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE, um den Modus PC einzustellen.
❑ Autom. Einstellung
Die automatische Einstellung ermöglicht eine automatische Anpassung des PC-Monitors
an das eingehende PC-Videosignal. Die Werte für “Fein”, “Grob” und “position” werden
automatisch eingestellt.
N Diese Funktion ist im DVI-HDMI-Modus nicht verfügbar.
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können
die Autom. Einstellung auch durch Auswahl von Extras → Autom. Einstellung
durchführen.
❑ PC-Bildschirm
Durch das Einstellen der Bildqualität können Bildstörungen und Rauschen beseitigt oder verringert werden. Falls sich Bildrauschen
durch die Feinabstimmung allein nicht beheben lässt, stellen Sie zunächst die Frequenz möglichst genau ein (Grob). Führen
Sie dann erneut eine Feinabstimmung durch. Nachdem Sie das Bildrauschen durch die Grob- und Feinabstimmung des Bildes
verringert haben, stellen Sie die Position des Bildes so ein, dass es auf dem Bildschirm zentriert ist.
Grob
Hiermit stellen Sie die Frequenzein, wenn vertikales Rauschen im Bild vorhanden ist.
Fein
Hiermit stellen Sie den Bildschirm klarer ein.
PC-Position
Passen Sie die Position des PC-Bilds an, wenn es nicht auf den Fernsehbildschirm passt. Stellen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die
vertikale Position ein. Stellen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die horizontale Position ein.
Bild zurücksetzen
Sie können alle Bildeinstellungen auf die werkseitig eingestellten Ausgangswerte zurücksetzen.
• Bildlauf : Diese Funktion dient zum Entfernen von Nachbildern auf dem Bildschirm, indem alle Pixel des Plasmabildschirms
nach einem bestimmten Muster verschoben werden. Verwenden Sie diese Funktion, wenn Nachbilder oder -symbole auf dem
Bildschirm angezeigt werden. Diese können insbesondere dann auftreten, wenn auf dem Bildschirm über längere Zeit ein
Standbild angezeigt wurde.
• Seite grau : Sie verhindern bei Anzeige im Format 4:3 Beschädigungen des Bildschirms, indem Sie einen Weißabgleich an den
beiden linken Bildschirmrändern vornehmen.
- Hell : Bei Anzeige im Format 4:3 werden die beiden seitlichen Bildschirmränder aufgehellt.
- Dunkel : Bei Anzeige im Format 4:3 werden die beiden seitlichen Bildschirmränder abgedunkelt.
❑ Bild zurücksetzen → Bildmodus zurücksetzen / Abbrechen
Die Reset-Funktion wird für jeden Bildmodus durchgeführt.
N Setzt alle Bildeinstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.Wählen Sie zuerst einen
Bildmodus zum Zurücksetzen.
Helligkeit : 45
Schärfe : 50
Autom. Einstellung ►
PC-Bildschirm
Erweiterte Einstellungen
Bildoptionen
Bild zurücksetzen
Bild Picture
Erweiterte Einstellungen
Bildoptionen
Bild zurücksetzen ►
Bild
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:37:55 PMDeutsch - 19
PC-Anzeige
❑ Konfigurieren Ihrer PC-Software (unter Windows XP)
Im Folgenden sind die typischen Anzeigeeinstellungen für einen Windows-Computer
aufgeführt. Die von Ihrem PC angezeigten Fenster entsprechen je nach installierter
Windows-Version und verwendeter Grafikkarte möglicherweise nicht genau der
Abbildung. Trotzdem sind die hier beschriebenen grundlegenden Informationen in
fast allen Fällen anwendbar. (Wenden Sie sich andernfalls an den Computerhersteller
oder Samsung-Händler.)
1. Klicken Sie im Startmenü von Windows auf die Systemsteuerung.
2. Wenn das Fenster der Systemsteuerung angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf „Darstellung
und Designs”. Ein Dialogfeld wird geöffnet.
3. Wenn das Fenster der Systemsteuerung angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf „Anzeige“.
Anschließend wird ein Dialogfeld angezeigt.
4. Klicken Sie nun im Dialogfeld „Anzeige“ auf die Registerkarte „Einstellungen”. Stellen
Sie die Bildschirmauflösung auf folgenden Wert : 1920 x 1080 Pixel.
Wenn das Dialogfeld eine Option für die Bildschirmfrequenz enthält, muss als
Einstellung 60 oder 60 Hz ausgewählt werden.
Andernfalls klicken Sie einfach auf OK, um das Dialogfeld zu schließen.
❑ Anzeigemodi
Bildschirmposition und -größe hängen vom Typ des PC-Monitors und seiner Auflösung ab.
Bei den in der Tabelle angegebenen Auflösungen handelt es sich um die empfohlenen Auflösungen.
N Eine Verbindung über HDMI/DVI-Kabel kann nur über HDMI IN 2(DVI) erfolgen.
N Das Zeilensprungverfahren wird nicht unterstützt.
N Das Fernsehgerät funktioniert möglicherweise nicht ordnungsgemäß, wenn kein Standardmodus ausgewählt wird.
N Separate- und Composite-Modus werden unterstützt. SOG wird nicht unterstützt.
N Ein zu langes oder qualitativ geringwertiges VGA-Kabel kann in hochauflösenden Modi (1920 x 1080) zu Bildrauschen führen.
D-Sub- und HDMI/DVI-Eingang
Modus Auflösung
Horizontal
Frequenz
(kHz)
Vertikalfrequenz
(Hz)
Pixeltakt
Frequenz
(MHz)
SyncPolarität
(H x V)
IBM
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / -
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / +
MAC
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / -
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / -
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / +
VESA CVT
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / +
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / +
1280 x 720
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / +
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / +
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / +
VESA DMT
640 x 480
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / -
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / -
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / -
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / +
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / +
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / +
1024 x 768
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / -
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / -
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / +
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 800
49.702 59.810 83.500 - / +
62.795 74.934 106.500 - / +
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 1024
63.981 60.020 108.000 + / +
79.976 75.025 135.000 + / +
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / +
1440 x 900
55.935 59.887 106.500 - / +
70.635 74.984 136.750 - / +
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / +
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / +
VESA GTF
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / +
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / -
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:37:55 PMDeutsch - 20
Tonstandard wählen
❑ Modus
Stellen Sie den Audiomodus ein, der am besten zur jeweiligen Sendung passt.
Standard / Musik / Film / Klare Stimme / Benutzerd.
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können
den Tonmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Tonmodus konfigurieren.
❑ Equalizer
Sie können den Ton Ihrem persönlichen Geschmack anpassen.
• Modus : Sie können einen Audiomodus gemäß Ihrem persönlichen Geschmack
einstellen.
• Balance : Steuert die Balance zwischen dem linken und dem rechten Lautsprecher.
• 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandbreitenanpassung) : Zum Einstellen der unterschiedlichen Bandbreitenfrequenzen.
• Reset : Setzt die Equalizereinstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Aus / Ein
SRS TruSurround HD ist eine Kombination der Technologien von TruSurround und FOCUS TruBass.
Mit SRS TruSurround HD können Sie virtuelle 5.1 Surroundeffekte mit zwei Lautsprechern genießen. Diese Funktion sorgt nicht
nur für kräftige Bässe sondern sie verbessert auch die Widergabe hoher Frequenzen.
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen.
Sie können SRS TruSurround HD durch Auswahl von Extras → SRS TS HD auswählen.
TruSurround HD, SRS und das Symbol sind eingetragene Marken von SRS Labs, Inc.
Die TruSurround HD-Technologie wird unter Lizenz von SRS Labs, Inc. in das System integriert.
N Wenn der Ton beim Fernsehen gestört ist stellen Sie den Equalizer und SRS TruSurround HD (Aus/Ein) ein.
❑ Wiedergabesprache (nur Digitalkanal)
Sie können die Standardsprache für Audio ändern. Zeigt die Sprachinformationen für den eingehenden Audiostream an.
N Sie können nur Sprachen auswählen, die auch tatsächlich übertragen werden.
❑ Audioformat → MPEG / Dolby Digital (nur Digitalkanäle)
Wenn Sie für die Tonausgabe sowohl den Hauptlautsprecher als auch den Audioreceiver verwenden, kann es aufgrund der
Geschwindigkeitsunterschiede beim Dekodieren durch die beiden Systeme zu einem Echoeffekt kommen. Verwenden Sie in diesen
Fall die TV-Lautsprecher.
N Sie können nur Sprachen auswählen, die auch tatsächlich übertragen werden.
Hergestellt unter Lizenz der Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby und das Doppel-D-Symbol sind Warenzeichen von Dolby Laboratories.
❑ Audio für Sehgeschädigte (nur Digitalkanal)
Dies ist eine zusätzliche Audiofunktion, mit der für sehbehinderte Personen eine zusätzliche Tonspur wiedergegeben wird. Diese
Funktion verarbeitet den Audiostream für die AB (Audio-Beschreibung), sofern diese vom Sender zusammen mit dem Vordergrundton
übertragen wird. Der Benutzer kann die Audio-Beschreibung aktivieren oder deaktivieren und die Lautstärke einstellen.
O Sie können diese Optionen auswählen, indem Sie einfach die Taste AD auf der
Fernbedienung drücken.
Audio für Sehgeschädigte → Aus / Ein
Hiermit schalten Sie die Funktion für Audiobeschreibungen ein bzw. aus.
Lautstärke
Hiermit regeln Sie die Lautstärke der Audiobeschreibungen für Sehgeschädigte.
N Lautstärke ist aktiv, wenn Audio für Sehgeschädigte aktiviert (Ein) ist.
Toneinstellungen
Modus : Benutzerd. ►
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround HD : Aus
Wiedergabesprache : ----
Audioformat : ----
Audio für Sehgeschädigte
Auto. Lautst. : Aus
Lautsprecher auswählen: TV-Lautsprecher
Ton
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:37:56 PMDeutsch - 21
❑ Auto. Lautst. → Aus / Ein
Aufgrund unterschiedlicher Signalbedingungen unterscheiden sich Fernsehsender in der Lautstärke, so dass es erforderlich
sein kann, die Lautstärke beim Umschalten zwischen Sendern jedes Mal nachzuregeln. Mit der Funktion für automatische
Lautstärkeeinstellung wird die Lautstärke automatisch bei starkem Modulationssignal verringert und bei schwachem
Modulationssignal erhöht.
❑ Lautsprecher auswählen → Ext. Lautsprecher / TV-Lautsprecher
Wenn Sie den Ton über separate Lautsprecher hören möchten, deaktivieren Sie den internen Verstärker.
N Die Tasten – +, M MUTE funktionieren nicht, wenn Lautsprecher auswählen auf Ext. Lautsprecher geschaltet ist.
N Wenn Sie im Menü Lautsprecher auswählen die Option Ext. Lautsprecher wählen, werden die Audioeinstellungen
eingeschränkt.
Eingebauter Lautsprecher des Fernsehgeräts Audioausgang (Optisch, L/ R-Out) zum Soundsystem
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI
TV-Lautsprecher Lautsprecherausgang Audioausgang
Externer Lautsprecher Mute Audioausgang
Kein Videosignal Mute Mute
❑ Ton wählen
Wenn die PIP-Funktion aktiviert ist, können Sie den Ton des PIP-Bildes wiedergeben.
• Erster Tuner : Ton des Hauptbildes wiedergeben.
• Zweiter Tuner : Ton des PIP-Bildes wiedergeben.
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können den
Ton des PIP-Bilds durch Auswahl von Extras → PIP → Ton wählen einstellen.
N Diese Option können Sie auswählen, wenn PIP aktiviert (Ein) ist.
❑ Ton zurücksetzen
Alle zurücksetzen / Ton-Modus reset / Abbrechen : Sie können alle
Audioeinstellungen wieder auf die Werkseinstellungen zurücksetzen.
Tonmodus wählen
Wenn Sie Dual l ll einstellen, wird der aktuelle Tonwiedergabemodus auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt.
Art der Sendung Bildschirmanzeige
NICAM
Stereo
Standardsendung
(Standardtonwiedergabe)
Mono (normale Verwendung)
Standard und NICAM Mono NICAM
Mono
(Normal)
NICAM-Stereo
NICAM
Stereo
Mono
(Normal)
NICAM Dual-I/II
NICAM
Dual-1
NICAM
Dual-2
Mono
(Normal)
A2
Stereo
Standardsendung
(Standardtonwiedergabe)
Mono (normale Verwendung)
Zweisprachig oder Dual-I/II Dual I Dual II
Stereo Stereo
Mono
(erzwungen))
N Falls das Stereosignal schwach ist und automatisch umgeschaltet wird, sollten Sie zu mono wechseln.
N Diese Funktion ist nur bei einem Stereosignal aktiviert. Bei Monosignalen ist es deaktiviert.
N Diese Funktion ist nur im TV-Modus verfügbar.
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS , um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können
den Tonmodus durch Auswahl von Extras → Dual l ll auswählen.
Lautsprecher auswählen: TV-Lautsprecher
Ton wählen : Erster Tuner
Ton zurücksetzen ►
Ton
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:37:57 PMDeutsch - 22
Funktionsbeschreibung
Einstellen der Uhrzeit
❑ Uhr
Die Uhr muss eingestellt werden, damit Sie die verschiedenen Timerfunktionen des
Fernsehgeräts verwenden können.
N Jedes Mal, wenn Sie die Taste INFO drücken, wird die aktuelle Zeit angezeigt.
N Wenn Sie das Netzkabel ziehen, müssen Sie die Uhr erneut einstellen.
Uhr-Modus
Sie können die aktuelle Zeit manuell oder automatisch einstellen.
• Auto : Hiermit stellen Sie die Uhrzeit automatisch anhand der Zeit aus den digitalen
Übertragungen ein.
• Manual : Hiermit stellen Sie die aktuelle Zeit auf einen manuell eingestellten Wert ein.
Zeit einstellen
Sie können die aktuelle Zeit manuell einstellen.
N Konfigurieren Sie diese Option, nachdem Sie Uhr-Modus auf Manuell eingestellt
haben.
N Sie können Tag, Monat, Jahr, Stunde, Minute durch Drücken der Zifferntasten auf der
Fernbedienung direkt einstellen.
❑ Sleep-Timer → Aus / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min
/ 180 min
Der Sleep-Timer schaltet das Fernsehgerät automatisch nach einer eingestellten Zeit
(30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 Minuten) aus.
N Wenn die eingestellte Zeit abgelaufen ist, schaltet das Fernsehgerät automatisch in den Standby-Modus.
N Um die Sleep-Timer-Funktion abzubrechen, wählen Sie Aus.
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können
den Sleep-Timer durch Auswahl von Extras → Sleep-Timer einstellen.
❑ Zeit 1 / Zeit 2 / Zeit 3
Sie können den Fernseher so einstellen, dass er sich zu einer bestimmten Zeit automatisch anoder abschaltet.
• Anschaltzeit : Hiermit stellen Sie die Uhrzeit ein, zu der das Fernsehgerät angehen soll.
• Ausschaltzeit : Hiermit stellen Sie die Uhrzeit ein, zu der das Fernsehgerät ausgehen soll.
• Lautstärke : Einstellen der Lautstärke.
• Quelle : Wählen Sie TV, USB.
N Wenn Sie TV wählen, können Sie TV-Empfang und Sender einstellen.
- TV-Empfang : Wählen Sie Terrestrisch oder Kabel.
- Sender : Wählen Sie den gewünschten Senden.
N Wenn Sie USB wählen, können Sie den Inhalt einstellen.
- Inhalt : Auswählen der gewünschten Inhalte vom USB.
N Die Timerfunktion arbeitet nicht fehlerfrei, wenn es auf dem USB-Speicher keine Musikdatei gibt oder der Ordner mit der
Musikdatei nicht markiert ist.
• Wiederholmodus : Wählen Sie Einmal, Täglich, Mo~Fr, Mo~Sa, Sa~So oder Manuell.
N Wenn Sie Manuell gewählt haben, drücken Sie die Taste ►, um den gewünschten Wochentag einzustellen.
Wenn Sie die ENTERE-Taste drücken, nachdem Sie den gewünschten Tag gewählt haben, wird das Symbol c angezeigt.
N Der ganz Ordner auf dem USB-Speicher unterstützt 64 englisch Zeichen.
N Voraussetzung dafür ist, dass Sie die Uhr gestellt haben.
N Sie können die Stunden, Minuten und den Sender auch über die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung einstellen.
N Automatisch Ausschalten
Wenn Sie den Timer aktivieren, schaltet sich das Fernsehgerät drei Stunden nach dem Einschalten durch den Timer ab, wenn in
dieser Zeit keine Funktionen verwendet wurden Diese Funktion ist nur verfügbar, wenn der Timer aktiviert ist, und sie verhindert
Schäden durch Überhitzung, wenn das Fernsehgerät zu lange eingeschaltet ist.
Zeit
Uhr : -- : -- ►
Sleep-Timer : Aus
Timer 1 : Deaktiviert
Timer 2 : Deaktiviert
Timer 3 : Deaktiviert
U Navig. E Eingabe R Zurück
Einstellungen
Plug & Play
Menüsprache : Deutsch
Zeit ►
Sendungsoptionen
Sicherheit
Netzwerk
Allgemein
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:37:57 PMDeutsch - 23
Konfigurieren der Menüeinstellungen
❑ Menüsprache
Sie können die Menüsprache festlegen.
❑ Sendungsoptionen
Untertitel
Sie können Untertitel aktivieren und deaktivieren. Mit diesem Menü legen Sie den
Untertitelmodus fest. Die Option Normal im Menü ist die Basisoption für Untertitel, und
Schwerhörig ist für hörgeschädigte Personen bestimmt.
• Untertitel → Aus / Ein : Untertitel aktivieren oder deaktivieren.
• Modus → Normal / Schwerhörig : Hiermit können Sie den Untertitelmodus
festlegen.
• Untertitelsprache : Hiermit können Sie die Untertitelsprache festlegen.
N Wenn das Programm, das Sie gerade sehen, die Funktion Schwerhörig nicht
unterstützt, wird selbst bei der Einstellung Schwerhörig automatisch die
Einstellung Normal aktiviert.
N Englisch ist der Standardwert in Fällen, wo die ausgewählte Sprache für die
Sendung nicht verfügbar ist.
O Sie können diese Optionen auswählen, indem Sie einfach die Taste SUBT. auf
der Fernbedienung drücken.
Digitaltext → Deaktivieren / Aktivieren
Wenn das Programm mit Digitaltext gesendet wird, ist diese Funktion aktiviert.
N MHEG (Multimedia und Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Ein internationaler Standard für Datenkompressionssysteme für Multimediaund Hypermedia-Anwendungen. Dies ist ein
höheres Niveau als das MPEG-System, das solche datenverknüpfenden Hypertextmedien wie Standbilder, Zeichendienst,
Animations-, Grafik- und Videodateien sowie Multimediadateien umfasst. MHEG ist eine Technologie für Laufzeitinteraktion mit
dem Benutzer, und sie wird auf verschiedenen Gebieten verwendet, z. B. VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC
(Electronic Commerce), Teleweiterbildung, Telekonferenzen, digitale Bibliotheken und Netzwerkspiele.
Teletextsprache
Sie können die Teletextsprache durch Auswählen des Sprachtyps einstellen.
N Englisch ist der Standardwert in Fällen, wo die ausgewählte Sprache für die Sendung nicht verfügbar ist.
Voreinstellung
• Primäre Wiedergabesprache / Sekundäre Wiedergabesprache / Primäre Untertitelsprache / Sekundäre Untertitelsprache
/ Primäre Teletextsprache / Sekundäre Teletextsprache
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie eine der verfügbaren Sprachen wählen. Die hier gewählte Sprache ist die Standardsprache,
wenn der Benutzer einen Sender auswählt. Wenn Sie die Spracheinstellung ändern, werden die Untertitelsprache, die
Audiosprache und die Teletextsprache im Menü “Sprache” automatisch in die gewünschte Sprache geändert.
Mit den Untermenüs für die Untertitelsprache, Audiosprache und Teletextsprache
im Menü “Sprache” zeigen Sie eine Liste der vom aktuellen Sender unterstützten Sprachen an, und die aktuelle Auswahl wird
hervorgehoben. Wenn Sie die Spracheinstellung ändern, gilt die neue Auswahl nur für den aktuellen Sender. Die geänderte
Einstellung hat keinen Einfluss auf die Einstellung der Untertitelsprache, Audiosprache und Teletext-Sprache im Menü
„Voreinstellung“.
Common Interface
• Installieren der CI-Karte
1. Sie können das CI-CAM-Modul bei Ihrem nächsten Händler oder durch
telefonische Bestellung erwerben.
2. Schieben Sie die CI-Karte in Richtung des Pfeils in das CAM-Modul ein, bis sie
fest sitzt.
3. Schieben Sie das CAM-Modul mit installierter CI-Karte in den CI-Steckplatz.
N Schieben Sie das CAM-Modul parallel zum Steckplatz in Pfeilrichtung bis zum
Anschlag.
4. Kontrollieren Sie, ob Sie ein Bild sehen oder ein gestörtes Signal.
• CI(CI+)-Menü
Hiermit kann der Benutzer seine Auswahl in dem vom CAM-Modul bereitgestellten
Menü treffen. Wählen Sie das CI(CI+)-Menü ausgehend vom Menü PC-Karte.
• Anwendungsinformationen
Die folgenden Erklärungen gelten für den Fall, dass ein CAM-Modul in den CISteckplatz eingesetzt ist und angezeigt wird.
In den Anwendungsinformationen wird die CI-Karte beschrieben. Sie können das CAMModul unabhängig davon anschließen,
ob das Fernsehgerät angeschaltet ist oder nicht.
N CI(CI+)-Karten werden in einigen Ländern, Regionen und von manchen Sendern nicht unterstützt. Fragen Sie diesbezüglich
Ihren offiziellen Händler.
Fortsetzung...
Einstellungen
Plug & Play
Menüsprache : Deutsch ►
Zeit
Sendungsoptionen
Sicherheit
Netzwerk
Allgemein
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:37:58 PMDeutsch - 24
❑ Sicherheit
N Bei manchen Modellen müssen Sie für Plug & Play die PIN-Nummer eingeben.
Kindersicherung → Aus / Ein
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie nicht autorisierte Benutzer, z. B. Kinder, daran hindern, ungeeignete Programme anzuschauen,
indem das Bild blockiert und der Ton stummgeschaltet wird.
N Ehe das Einstellungsfenster angezeigt wird, wird das Fenster zur. Eingabe der PIN geöffnet.
Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN ein.
N Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet 0000. Sie können die PIN ändern, indem Sie im Menü den Befehl
PIN ändern wählen.
N Sie können einige der Kanäle in der Senderliste sperren. (finden Sie auf Seite 14)
N Die Kindersicherung ist nur im TV-Modus verfügbar.
Sicherungsstufe
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie nicht autorisierte Benutzer, z. B. Kinder, daran hindern, ungeeignete Programme anzuschauen.
Hierzu verwenden Sie eine benutzerdefinierte vierstellige PIN.
N Die angezeigte Sicherungsstufe hängt vom jeweiligen Land ab.
N Ehe das Einstellungsfenster angezeigt wird, wird das Fenster zur Eingabe der PIN geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN
ein.
N Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet ‘0-0-0-0’. Sie können die PIN ändern, indem Sie im Menü den Befehl
PIN ändern wählen.
N Nachdem die Sicherungsstufe eingestellt ist, wird das Symbol ““\”” angezeigt.
N Alle zul. / Keine zul. : Drücken Sie diese Taste, um alle Altersbeschränkungen zu aktivieren oder freizugeben.
PIN ändern
Sie können Ihre zum Einrichten des Fernsehgeräts benötigte persönliche Kennnummer ändern.
N Ehe das Einstellungsfenster angezeigt wird, wird das Fenster zur Eingabe der PIN geöffnet. Geben Sie nun Ihre vierstellige PIN
ein. (Die Standard-PIN lautet ‘0-0-0-0’.)
N Wenn Sie den PIN-Code vergessen haben, drücken Sie die Fernbedienungstasten in der angegebenen Reihenfolge, um die
PIN auf ‘0-0-0-0’ zurückzusetzen : POWER (Aus), M MUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Ein).
❑ Allgemein
Spielemodus → Aus / Ein
Wenn Sie eine Spielekonsole wie PlayStation
TM
oder Xbox
TM
anschließen, können Sie durch Auswählen des Spielemodus ein
realistischeres Spielerlebnis genießen.
• Bei aktiviertem Spielemodus
- Der Bildmodus wird automatisch auf Standard eingestellt und kann nicht geändert werden.
- Der Tonmodus wird automatisch als benutzerdefiniert eingestellt und kann nicht geändert werden. Passen Sie den Ton unter
Verwendung des Equalizers an.
- Die Reset-Funktion im Audiomenü ist aktiviert. Mit Hilfe der Reset-Funktion können die Einstellungen für den Equalizer auf
die Werkseinstellungen zurückgesetzt werden.
N Spielemodus ist im normalen TV-Modus nicht verfügbar, ode der Spielemodus ist deaktiviert.
N Kontrollieren Sie, ob der Spielemodus noch aktiviert ist, wenn die Bildqualität bei angeschlossenem externem Gerät
schlecht ist.
N Wenn Sie im Spielemodus das Fernsehmenü anzeigen, zittert das Bild leicht.
N Das Zeichen wird auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. Dies bedeutet, dass der Spielemodus für die gewählte Signalquelle
angeschaltet ist.
N Diese Funktion unterstützt nur den Spielemodus.
N Der Spielemodus ist im PC-Modus nicht verfügbar.
BD Wise → Aus / Ein
BD Wise ist eine Funktion, mit der Sie automatisch für alle angeschlossenen Geräte von Samsung, die BD Wise unterstützen, den
optimalen Zustand einstellen können.
N Diese Funktion ist nur aktiv, wenn ein externes Gerät über HDMI mit dem TV verbunden ist.
N Wenn BD Wise aktiviert ist (Ein), wird der Bildmodus automatisch an die jeweiligen Bedingungen angepasst.
Energiesparmod. → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch / Bild aus
Mit dieser Funktion stellen Sie die Helligkeit des Fernsehgeräts ein, um den Stromverbrauch zu senken. Wenn Sie nachts
fernsehen, stellen Sie Energiesparmod. auf Hoch ein, um sowohl die Augenermüdung als auch den Stromverbrauch zu senken.
Wenn Sie Bild aus wählen, wird der Bildschirm abgeschaltet und Sie können nur noch den Ton hören. Drücken Sie eine beliebige
Taste, um Bild aus zu beenden.
N Im Menü Extras wird die Funktion Bild aus nicht unterstützt.
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können zudem
die Energiesparoption durch Auswahl von Extras → Energiesparmod. anpassen.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:37:58 PMDeutsch - 25
Menütransparenz
Sie können die Transparenz des Bildschirmmenüs einstellen.
• Hell : Hiermit stellen Sie normale Transparenz ein.
• Dunkel : Hiermit stellen Sie das Bildschirmmenü als undurchsichtig ein.
Melodie → Aus / Gering / Mittel / Hoch
Sie können die Melodie auswählen, die beim Einund Ausschalten des Fernsehers abgespielt wird.
N Die Melodie wird nicht abgespielt.
- Das Fernsehgerät gibt keinen Ton aus, weil die M MUTE-Taste gedrückt wurde.
- Das Fernsehgerät gibt keinen – Ton aus, weil die Lautstärketaste gedrückt wurde.
- Das Fernsehgerät wurde vom Sleep-Timer ausgeschaltet.
Lichteffekt (nur PS58B680/PS63B680)
Sie können die blaue LED an der Vorderseite des Fernsehgeräts je nach Wunsch anbzw. abschalten. Schalten Sie sie ab, wenn
Sie Energie sparen möchten oder die LED Ihre Augen stört.
• Aus : Die blaue LED ist immer aus.
• Standby an : Die blaue LED leuchtet im Standby-Modus und wird beim Anschalten des Fernsehgeräts ausgeschaltet.
• TV Modus An : Die blaue LED leuchtet bei angeschaltetem Fernsehgerät und wird beim Ausschalten abgeschaltet.
• Immer : Die blaue LED leuchtet immer.
N Deaktivieren (Aus) Sie den Lichteffekt, um den Stromverbrauch zu reduzieren.
Verwenden der Bild-in-Bild-Funktion (PIP)
Sie können innerhalb des Hauptbildes (Fernsehsendung oder Video) ein PIP-Bild
einblenden. Dadurch können Sie gleichzeitig eine Fernsehsendung oder ein Video von einem
angeschlossenen Gerät im Auge behalten.
N Möglicherweise wirkt das Bild im PIP-Fenster leicht unnatürlich, wenn Sie den
Hauptbildschirm zum Anzeigen von Spielen oder für Karaoke verwenden.
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS um das Menü Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können die
PIP-Einstellungen durch Auswahl von Extras → PIP anpassen.
❑ PIP → Aus / Ein
Sie können die PIP-Funktion aktivieren oder deaktivieren.
Hauptbild Nebenbild
Komp.
HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4
PC
TV
Size → / / /
Sie können die Größe für das PIP-Bild auswählen.
N Wenn sich das Hauptbild im HDMI-Modus befindet, ist Größe nicht verfügbar.
Position → / / /
Sie können die Position für das PIP-Bild auswählen.
N Im Modus Doppel ( , ) kann Position nicht gewählt werden.
Sender
Sie können einen Sender für das PIP-Bild auswählen.
PIP
PIP : Aus ►
Größe :
Position :
Sender : ATV 1
E Eingabe R Zurück
Allgemein
Spielemodus : Aus
BD Wise : Aus
Energiesparmod : Aus
Menütransparenz : Hell
Melodie : Mittel
PIP ►
U Navig. E Eingabe R Zurück
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:37:59 PMDeutsch - 26
Unterstütztes Programm
❑ Rechtliche Hinweise
Lesen Sie die rechtlichen Hinweise und den allgemeinen Haftungsausschluss hinsichtlich der Inhalte und Dienste Dritter.
Haftungsausschluss
Diese rechtlichen Hinweise gelten für Internet@TV.
N Der Haftungsausschluss kann sich je nach Land unterscheiden.
N Mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► können Sie zur vorigen oder zur nächsten Seite wechseln.
❑ Produktdemo
Mit dieser Produktdemo erhalten Sie Informationen zu den wichtigsten Funktionen dieses Fernsehgeräts.
N Zeigt detaillierte Informationen an, wenn Sie das gewünschte Element wählen.
❑ Eigendiagnose
Bildtest
If Bei schlechter Bildqualität führen Sie einen Bildtest durch. Prüfen Sie das bunte Testbild auf dem Bildschirm um festzustellen, ob
das Problem weiterhin besteht.
N Die Meldung Besteht das Problem für dieses Bild weiterhin? wird angezeigt.
Wenn das Testbild nicht angezeigt wird oder wenn es verrauscht ist, wählen Sie Ja.
Wenn das Testbild fehlerlos angezeigt wird, wählen Sie Nein.
• Ja : Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit dem Fernsehgerät vor. Hilfe erhalten Sie beim Callcenter von Samsung.
• Nein : Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit einem externen Gerät vor. Bitte überprüfen Sie sämtliche Anschlüsse noch
einmal. Wenn das Problem weiterhin besteht, schlagen Sie im Benutzerhandbuch für das externe Gerät nach.
Audiotest
Bei schlechter Tonqualität führen Sie einen Audiotest durch.
Sie können die Tonqualität kontrollieren, indem Sie über den Fernseher eine im Gerät gespeicherte Melodie abspielen.
N Die Meldung Besteht das Problem für diesen Audiotest weiterhin? wird angezeigt.
Wenn Sie den Ton beim Test nur durch einen Lautsprecher oder gar nicht hören, wählen Sie Ja.
Wenn Sie den Ton über die Lautsprecher hören können, wählen Sie Nein.
• Ja : Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit dem Fernsehgerät vor. Hilfe erhalten Sie beim Callcenter von Samsung.
• Nein : Möglicherweise liegt ein Problem mit einem externen Gerät vor. Bitte überprüfen Sie sämtliche Anschlüsse noch
einmal. Wenn das Problem weiterhin besteht, schlagen Sie im Benutzerhandbuch für das externe Gerät nach.
N Wenn die Fernsehlautsprecher keinen Ton ausgeben, müssen Sie vor dem Audiotest sicherstellen, dass Lautsprecher
auswählen im Audiomenü auf TV-Lautsprecher eingestellt ist.
N Im Test ist auch dann eine Melodie zu hören, wenn Lautsprecher auswählen auf TV-Lautsprecher eingestellt ist, oder wenn
der Ton mit der Taste M MUTE stumm geschaltet wurde.
Signalinformation (nur Digitalkanäle)
Sie können Ihre Antenne so einstellen, dass der Empfang der verfügbaren Digitalkanäle besser wird.
N Wenn die Signalstärkeanzeige ein schwaches Signal anzeigt, verändern Sie die Position Ihre Antenne so, dass die Signalstärke
zunimmt. Machen Sie dies solange, bis Sie die optimale Ausrichtung mit dem stärksten Signal gefunden haben.
Unterstützung / Eingang
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:37:59 PMDeutsch - 27
Quellen / Name bearbeiten
❑ Quellen
Hiermit wählen Sie das Fernsehgerät oder andere externe Signaleingänge wie z. B.
DVD-Player oder Kabelbox/Satellitenreceiver (Set-Top-Box), die mit dem Fernsehgerät
verbunden sind. Stellen Sie die gewünschte Signalquelle ein.
TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB.
N Sie können nur solche externen Geräte wählen, die an das Fernsehgerät
angeschlossen sind. Bei den Quellen werden die angeschlossenen Signalquellen
hervorgehoben und am Anfang dargestellt. Nicht angeschlossene Signalquellen
werden am Ende der Liste dargestellt.
N Verwenden der Farbtasten auf der Fernbedienung in Verbindung mit der
Kanalliste.
- Aktualisieren : Aktualisieren der angeschlossenen externen Geräte.
- T TOOLS (Extras) : Anzeigen der Menüs Name bearb. und Information.
O Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE auf der Fernbedienung, um eine externe
Signalquelle anzuzeigen.
❑ Name bearb.
Vergeben Sie Namen für die an die Eingangsbuchsen angeschlossenen Geräte, um die Auswahl der Signalquelle zu vereinfachen.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV /
Blu- Ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Wenn ein PC mit einer Auflösung von 1920 x 1080 bei 60 Hz an den Anschluss HDMI IN 2 angeschlossen wird, sollten Sie in
Name bearb. im Modus Eingang den HDMI2/DVI Modus auf PC festlegen.
❑ Software-Update
Damit Ihr Produkt stets mit den neuesten Funktionen des Digitalfernsehens ausgerüstet ist, werden zusammen mit dem normalen
TV-Signal regelmäßig Softwareaktualisierungen übertragen. Das Gerät erkennt diese Signale automatisch und zeigt einen Hinweis
auf die Softwareaktualisierung an. Sie haben die Wahl, ob die Aktualisierung installiert werden soll.
PER USB
Legen Sie ein USB-Laufwerk mit dem gespeicherten Firmwareupgrade in das Fernsehgerät ein. Achten Sie beim Einspielen des
Upgrades darauf, die Stromversorgung nicht zu unterbrechen und das USBLaufwerk nicht zu entfernen. Das Fernsehgerät wird
automatisch ab- und wieder angeschaltet, sobald das Firmwareupgrade abgeschlossen ist. Kontrollieren Sie die Firmwareversion,
wenn das Upgrade abgeschlossen ist. Nachdem die Software aktualisiert wurde, sind die Videound Audioeinstellungen wieder auf
die werkseitigen Standardwerte zurückgesetzt.
PER Channel
Aktualisierung der Software über das Sendesignal.
N Wenn diese Funktion während der Zeit für Softwareübertragungen gewählt wird, sucht
sie nach verfügbarer Software und lädt sie herunter.
N Die zum Herunterladen der Software erforderliche Zeit hängt von der Signalqualität ab.
Update im Standby
Um die Softwareaktualisierung mit eingeschalteter Stromversorgung fortzusetzen, wählen
Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ Ein aus. 45 Minuten nach Beginn des Standbymodus wird
die manuelle Aktualisierung automatisch ausgeführt. Da intern die Stromversorgung für
das Gerät eingeschaltet ist, kann der Bildschirm leicht beleuchtet sein. Dieser Zustand kann etwas mehr als eine Stunde andauern,
bis die Softwareaktualisierung abgeschlossen ist.
Alternative Software
Ersetzten Sie die aktuelle Software durch eine Alternative.
N Wenn die Software geändert wurde, wird die vorhandene Software angezeigt.
N Sie können die aktuelle Software durch die alternative Software ersetzen, indem Sie Alternative Software wählen.
❑ HD-AnschlussplanDie kurze Einführung
“So erzielen Sie mit Ihrem HD-Fernsehgerät optimale Leistung” wird angezeigt. Wir bieten Anschlüsse für HD-Geräte an.
N Mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► können Sie zur vorigen oder zur nächsten Seite wechseln.
❑ Samsung kontaktieren
Wenden Sie sich an das Callcenter von Samsung oder suchen Sie auf der Website nach Informationen für das Gerät.
Seitenverkleidung des
Fernsehgeräts
USB-Laufwerk
Quellen
Name bearb.
Eingang
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:37:59 PMDeutsch - 28
Netzwerks
Netzwerkverbindung
Die Netzwerkverbindung wird für DLNA, Content Library-Internetdownload, Internet@TV und Home-Network-Center benötigt.
❑ Netzwerkverbindung – Kabel
LAN-Verbindung für eine DHCP-Umgebung
Die Verfahren zum Einrichten des Netzwerks mithilfe von (DHCP) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol werden nachfolgend
beschrieben. Da eine IP-Adresse sowie Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS automatisch zugeordnet werden, wenn Sie DHCP
wählen, müssen Sie diese Parameter nicht von Hand eingeben.
1. Verbinden Sie den LAN-Anschluss auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts über ein LAN-Kabel mit dem externen Modem.
2. Verbinden Sie den LAN-Anschluss an der Wand über ein Modemkabel mit dem externen Modem.
N Die Anschlüsse (also Position und Art des Anschlusses) des externen Geräts können sich je nach Hersteller unterscheiden.
N Wenn die Zuordnung der IP-Adresse durch den DHCP-Server fehlschlägt, müssen Sie das externe Modem aus und nach
frühestens 10 Sekunden wieder anschalten. Wiederholen Sie den Versuch danach.
N Informationen zur Verbindung zwischen dem externen Modem und dem Sharer (Router) finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des
entsprechenden Geräts.
N Sie können das Fernsehgerät direkt an das LAN anschließen, ohne vorher einen Sharer (Router) dazwischen zu schalten.
N Sie können kein ADSL-Modem für manuelle Verbindungen verwenden, da dieses DHCP nicht unterstützt. Sie müssen ein
ADSL-Modem für automatische Verbindungen verwenden.
Sie können den LAN-Anschluss und das Fernsehgerät je nach Netzwerkstatus direkt anschließen.
Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts
LAN-Kabel
LAN-Anschluss
an der Wand
Sie können die Netzwerkverbindung auch über einen Sharer (Router) herstellen.
Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts
Modemanschluss
an der Wand
Externes Modem
(ADSL/ VDSL/
Kabelfernsehen)
IP-Sharer
LAN-Kabel
Modem-Kabel
LAN-Kabel
Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts
Modemanschluss
an der Wand
2 Modem-Kabel
Externes Modem (ADSL/
VDSL/Kabelfernsehen)
1 LAN-Kabel
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:38:03 PMDeutsch - 29
LAN-Verbindung für eine Umgebung mit statischen IP-Adressen
Die Verfahren zum Einrichten des Netzwerks mithilfe einer statischen IP-Adresse werden nachfolgend beschrieben. Sie müssen die
Ihnen von Ihrem Internet-Provider genannte IP-Adresse, Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS manuell eingeben.
1. Verbinden Sie den LAN-Anschluss auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts über ein LAN-Kabel mit dem LAN-Anschluss in der Wand.
N Die Anschlüsse (also Position und Art des Anschlusses) des externen Geräts können sich je nach Hersteller unterscheiden.
N Wenn Sie eine statische IP-Adresse verwenden, teilt Ihr Internet-Provider Ihnen die IPAdresse, Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS
mit. Sie müssen diese Werte eingeben, um die Netzwerkeinstellungen abzuschließen. Falls Sie die Werte nicht kennen, fragen Sie
Ihren Netzwerkadministrator.
N Informationen zum Konfigurieren und Verbinden mit dem Sharer (Router) finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des entsprechenden
Geräts.
N Sie können das Fernsehgerät direkt an das LAN anschließen, ohne vorher einen Sharer dazwischen zu schalten.
N Wenn Sie einen IP-Sharer (IP-Router) verwenden, der DHCP unterstützt, können Sie das Gerät für DHCP oder statische IP
einrichten.
N Informationen über die Verfahren zum Einrichten mit einer statischen IP-Adresse erfragen Sie bei Ihrem Internet Service Provider.
❑ Netzwerkverbindung – Drahtlos
Sie können die Verbindung zum drahtlosen Netzwerk auch über einen drahtlosen IPSharer herstellen.
1. Schließen Sie den “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” an den USB1(HDD)- oder den USB2-Anschluss des Fernsehgeräts an.
N Sie müssen den Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter verwenden, wenn Sie mit einem Drahtlosnetzwerk arbeiten möchten.
N Der WLAN-Adapter von Samsung ist gesondert erhältlich. Der WLAN-Adapter WIS09ABGN wird bei Spezialanbietern,
Internetshops und bei Samsungparts.com angeboten.
N Wenn Sie mit einem Drahtlosnetzwerk arbeiten möchten, müssen Sie Ihr Fernsehgerät an einen drahtlosen IP-Sharer anschließen.
N Wenn der drahtlose IP-Sharer DHCP unterstützt, kann Ihr Fernsehgerät über DHCP oder über eine statische IP-Adresse mit dem
Drahtlosnetzwerk verbunden werden.
N Der WLAN-Adapter von Samsung unterstützt IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. Wenn Sie DLNA-Video
über die IEEE 802.11B/G-Verbindung anzeigen, wird das Videobild möglicherweise nicht ohne Unterbrechungen angezeigt.
N Wenn Ihr IP-Sharer eine deaktivierbare Funktion anbietet, um einen Verbindungstest mittels Ping durchzuführen, so aktivieren Sie
diese Funktion.
N Wählen Sie einen zurzeit unbenutzten Kanal für den drahtlosen IP-Sharer. Wenn der für den drahtlosen IP-Sharer eingestellte
Kanal von einem anderen Gerät in der Nähe belegt ist, führt dies zu Störungen und die Datenübertragung scheitert.
Fortsetzung...
Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts
1 LAN-Kabel
LAN-Anschluss
an der Wand
Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts
LAN-Kabel
IP-Sharer
LAN-Kabel
LAN-Anschluss
an der Wand
Sie können die Netzwerkverbindung auch über einen Sharer (Router) herstellen.
Seitenverkleidung
des Fernsehgeräts
WLAN-Adapter von
Samsung
LAN-Kabel
Drahtloser IP-Sharer
LAN-Anschluss
an der Wand
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:38:07 PMDeutsch - 30
N Wenn Sie ein anderes Sicherheitssystem als eines der nachfolgend angeführten verwenden, kann es nicht mit dem Fernsehgerät
zusammenarbeiten.
- Es werden nur folgende Sicherheitsschlüssel für den Zugangspunkt (drahtloser IP-Sharer) unterstützt.
1) Authentifizierungsmodus : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Verschlüsselungsmethode : WEP, TKIP, AES
- Es werden nur folgende Sicherheitsschlüssel für den Ad-Hoc-Modus unterstützt.
1) Authentifizierungsmodus : SHARED, WPANONE
2) Verschlüsselungsmethode : WEP, TKIP, AES
N Wenn Ihr Zugangspunkt WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) unterstützt, können Sie die Netzwerkverbindung mittels PBC (Push Button
Configuration) oder PIN (Personal Identification Number) herstellen. WPS konfiguriert den SSID- und WPA-Schlüssel in jedem
Modus automatisch.
N Wenn das Gerät nicht zertifiziert ist, kann es die Verbindung zum Fernseher möglicherweise nicht über den WLAN-Adapter von
Samsung herstellen.
Netzwerk einrichten
❑ Netzwerktyp
Wählen Sie den Kabelzugang oder den Funkzugang als Methode für die
Netzwerkverbindung.
N Dieses Menü wird nur aktiviert, wenn der Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter
angeschlossen ist.
• Cable : Anschließen mit einem Kabel.
• Drahtlos : Drahtlose Verbindung.
❑ Netzwerk einrichten
Kabelnetzwerk einrichten (wenn Netzwerktyp auf Kabel eingestellt ist)
N Überprüfen Sie, ob das Netzwerkkabel angeschlossen ist.
• IP-Konfiguration → Auto / Manuell
• Network Test : Sie können den Netzwerkverbindungsstatus nach dem Einrichten des Netzwerks testen bzw. bestätigen.
N Verbindung zum drahtgebundenen Netzwerk nicht möglich
Wenn Ihr Internet- Provider die MAC-Adresse des Geräts registriert hat, mit dem die erste Internetverbindung hergestellt
wurde und diese MAC-Adresse bei jeder Verbindung überprüft, besteht die Möglichkeit, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät keine
Internetverbindung herstellen kann, da dessen MAC-Adresse von der des Geräts abweicht. Fragen Sie in diesem Fall Ihren
Internetprovider, auf welche Weise die Verbindung durch andere Geräte als Ihren PC (z. B. Ihr Fernsehgerät) hergestellt werden
kann. Wenn Ihr Internet-Provider eine Kennung oder ein Kennwort erfordert, um die Verbindung zum Internet (Netzwerk)
herzustellen, kann Ihr Fernsehgerät möglicherweise keine Internetverbindung aufbauen. In diesem Fall müssen Sie Ihre
Kennung oder Ihr Kennwort eingeben, wenn die Verbindung mit dem Internet über den Internet-Sharer (Router) hergestellt
wird. Die Internetverbindung kann auch aufgrund von Problemen mit der Firewall fehlschlagen. Setzen Sie sich in diesem Fall
mit Ihrem Internetprovider in Verbindung. Wenn Sie selbst dann noch keine Internetverbindung aufbauen können, wenn Sie die
Anweisungen Ihres Internet-Providers eingehalten haben, setzen Sie sich mit Samsung Electronics in Verbindung.
Kabelnetzwerk einrichten - Auto
Wenn Sie das Netzwerkkabel anschließen und DHCP wird unterstützt, werden die Einstellungen für das Internetprotokoll (IP)
automatisch konfiguriert. Überprüfen Sie, ob das Netzwerkkabel angeschlossen ist.
1. Stellen Sie Netzwerktyp auf Kabel.
2. Wählen Sie Kabelnetzwerk einrichten.
3. Stellen Sie IP-Konfiguration auf Auto.
N Das Internetprotokoll wird automatisch eingestellt.
4. Wählen Sie Netzwerktest, um die Netzwerkverbindung zu überprüfen.
Kabelnetzwerk einrichten - Manuell
Wenn Sie das Fernsehgerät mittels einer statischen IP-Adresse mit dem LAN verbinden möchten, müssen Sie das Internetprotokoll
(IP) konfigurieren. Überprüfen Sie, ob das Netzwerkkabel angeschlossen ist.
N Überprüfen Sie, ob das Netzwerkkabel angeschlossen ist. (Siehe Seite 28)
1. Stellen Sie Netzwerktyp auf Kabel.
2. Wählen Sie Kabelnetz.
3. Stellen Sie IP-Konfiguration auf Manuell ein.
4. Geben Sie die Parameter für IP-Adresse, Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS-Server ein.
N Drücken Sie die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung, wenn Sie das Netzwerk manuell einstellen.
5. Wählen Sie Netzwerktest, um die Netzwerkverbindung zu überprüfen.
Einstellungen
Sendungsoptionen
Sicherheit
Netzwerk ►
Allgemein
Fortsetzung...
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:38:08 PMDeutsch - 31
Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten (wenn Netzwerktyp auf Drahtlos eingestellt ist)
N Dieses Menü wird nur aktiviert, wenn der WLAN-Adapter von Samsung angeschlossen ist. (Siehe Seite 29)
- IP-Konfiguration → Auto / Manuell
- Network Test : Sie können den Netzwerkverbindungsstatus nach dem Einrichten des Netzwerks testen bzw. bestätigen.
N Keine Verbindung mit einem Zugangspunkt
Möglicherweise kann Ihr Fernsehgerät keinen Zugangspunkt finden, der mit privater SSID konfiguriert ist. Ändern Sie in diesem
Fall die Einstellungen für den Zugangspunkt, und versuchen Sie es erneut. Wenn Ihr Internet-Provider die MAC-Adresse des
Geräts registriert hat, mit dem die erste Internetverbindung hergestellt wurde und diese MAC-Adresse bei jeder Verbindung
überprüft, besteht die Möglichkeit, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät keine Internetverbindung herstellen kann, da dessen MAC-Adresse
von der des Geräts abweicht. Fragen Sie in diesem Fall Ihren Internetprovider, auf welche Weise die Verbindung durch andere
Geräte als Ihren PC (z. B. Ihr Fernsehgerät) hergestellt werden kann. Wenn Sie selbst dann noch keine Internetverbindung
aufbauen können, wenn Sie die Anweisungen Ihres Internet-Providers eingehalten haben, setzen Sie sich unter 1-800-
SAMSUNG mit Samsung Electronics in Verbindung.
• Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk
- Zugangspunkt : Sie können wählen, welcher IP-Sharer verwendet werden soll, wenn Sie ein Drahtlosnetzwerk nutzen.
N Wenn in der Liste der Zugangspunkte kein drahtloser Zugangspunkt enthalten ist,
drücken Sie die rote Taste.
N Sobald die Verbindung aufgebaut ist, wird automatisch wieder das Fenster
angezeigt.
N Sie haben einen Zugangspunkt mit Authentifizierung gewählt : Der
Eingabebildschirm für den Sicherheitsschlüssel wird geöffnet. Geben Sie den
Sicherheitsschlüssel ein und drücken Sie die blaue Taste auf der Fernbedienung.
N Wenn Sie als Sicherheitsverschlüsselung WEP verwenden, können Sie bei der
Eingabe des Sicherheitsschlüssels die Zahlen von 0 bis 9 und die Buchstaben
von A bis F verwenden.
Taste Vorgang
▲/▼/◄/► Verschiebt die Markierung nach Oben / Unten / Links / Rechts
ENTER Eingabe des gewählten Zeichens.
Rote Taste Wechseln zwischen Groß- und Kleinschreibung.
Grüne Taste Löschen des gerade eingegebenen Zeichens.
Blaue Taste Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die Eingabe des Sicherheitsschlüssels zu beenden.
❑ Verbinden mit WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
Wenn der Sicherheitsschlüssel bereits eingestellt ist : Wählen Sie in der
Liste der Zugangspunkte WPS.
N Sie haben die Wahl zwischen PBC, PIN, Schlüssel.
• Anschließen mit PBC : Wählen Sie eine PBC (Push Button Configuration). Drücken
Sie innerhalb von 2 Minuten die PBC-Taste am Zugangspunkt und warten Sie bis
die Verbindung hergestellt ist.
• Anschließen mit PIN : Wählen Sie eine PIN (Persönliche Identifikationsnummer).
N Es wird eine Meldung mit dem PIN-Code angezeigt. Geben Sie am
Zugangspunkt innerhalb von 2 Minuten den PIN-Code ein. Wählen Sie OK und
warten Sie auf den Verbindungsaufbau.
N Wiederholen Sie den Versuch, wenn die Verbindung nicht hergestellt wird.
N Wenn die Netzwerkverbindung trotz des neuen Versuchs nicht aufgebaut
wird, setzen Sie den Zugangspunkt zurück. Schlagen Sie im Handbuch des
jeweiligen Zugangspunkts nach.
• Vwerbinden mit Security Key : Wenn Sie Security Key auswählen, wird das
Eingabefenster angezeigt. Geben Sie den Sicherheitsschlüssel ein, und drücken
Sie die blaue Taste.
N Wiederholen Sie den Versuch, wenn die Verbindung nicht hergestellt wird.
Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten
SicherSchl.
n Navig. Zahl EEingabe R Zurück
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Zahl
Klein
Löschen
Fertig
* *
Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten
Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk
n Navig. EEingabe R Zurück
Suchlauf
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
SicherSchl.
3/9
Drücken Sie die PBC-Taste am Zugangspunkt.
Name des Zugangspunkts : AP_3
Abbrechen
Drücken Sie auf OK, nachdem Sie beim Einrichten des
Zugangspunkts die PIN-Nummer des Fernsehers eingegeben haben.
Name des Zugangspunkts : AP_3
PIN-Nummer : 123 45678
OK Abbrechen
Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten
SicherSchl.
n Navig. Zahl EEingabe R Zurück
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Zahl
Klein
Löschen
Fertig
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:38:11 PMDeutsch - 32
Wenn der Sicherheitsschlüssel nicht eingestellt ist : Wenn die
Sicherheitseinstellung des Zugangspunkts, der WPS unterstützt, NONE
(KEIN) lautet, können Sie PBC, PIN, None Security (Keine Sicherheit)
wählen. Mit None Security (Keine Sicherheit) können Sie die Verbindung zum
Zugangspunkt direkt und ohne die WPC-Funktion herstellen.
N Der Prozess bei PBC und PIN entspricht dem oben beschriebenen. Siehe Wenn
der Security Key bereits eingestellt ist.
N Wiederholen Sie den Versuch, wenn die Verbindung nicht hergestellt wird.
Ad-hoc : Mit einem drahtlosen USB-Adapter können Sie die Verbindung zu
einem Mobilgerät mit Hilfe eines Peer-to-Peer-Netzwerks auch ohne Zugriffspunkt
herstellen.
• So stellen Sie eine Verbindung mit einem neuen Ad-hoc-Netzwerk her
1. Wählen Sie Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk, um die Geräteliste zu öffnen.
2. In der Geräteliste drücken Sie die blaue Taste auf der Fernbedienung, oder Sie wählen Ad-hoc.
N Die Meldung Möglicherweise ist das vorhandene Netzwerk funktional eingeschränkt. Möchten Sie die
Netzwerkverbindung wechseln? wird angezeigt.
3. Geben Sie den generierten Namen des Netzwerks (SSID) und den Schlüssel in das Gerät ein, mit dem Sie sich verbinden
möchten.
• So stellen Sie eine Verbindung mit einem vorhandenen Ad-hoc-Gerät her
1. Wählen Sie Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk, um die Geräteliste zu öffnen.
2. Wählen Sie eine Gerät aus der Geräteliste.
3. Wenn ein Sicherheitsschlüssel erforderlich ist, geben Sie diesen erneut ein.
N Wenn das Netzwerk nicht fehlerfrei arbeitet, kontrollieren Sie noch einmal den Network Name (SSID) und den Security
Key. Wenn der Security Key falsch ist, kann dies die Ursache für die Störung sein.
Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten - Auto
Wenn Sie eine Verbindung zu einem Zugangspunkt herstellen möchten, muss dieser DHCP unterstützen.
Nur Geräte, die den Adhoc- Modus unterstützen, können ohne DHCP angeschlossen werden.
1. Stellen Sie Netzwerktyp auf Drahtlos.
2. Wählen Sie Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten.
3. Stellen Sie IP-Konfiguration auf Auto.
N Das Internetprotokoll wird automatisch eingestellt.
4. Wählen Sie mit Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk ein Netzwerk aus.
5. Wählen Sie Netzwerktest, um die Netzwerkverbindung zu überprüfen.
Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten - Manuell
Wenn Sie die Netzwerkverbindung mittels einer statischen IP-Adresse herstellen möchten, müssen Sie das Internetprotokoll (IP)
konfigurieren. (Siehe Seite 29)
N Detailliertere Informationen zu statischen IP-Adressen erhalten Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des drahtlosen IP-Sharers.
1. Stellen Sie Netzwerktyp auf Drahtlos.
2. Wählen Sie Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten.
3. Stellen Sie IP-Konfiguration auf Manuell ein.
4. Geben Sie die Parameter für IP-Adresse, Teilnetzmaske, Gateway und DNS-Server ein.
N Drücken Sie die Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung, wenn Sie das Netzwerk manuell einstellen.
5. Wählen Sie über “Select Access Point (Zugangspunkt wählen)” einen Zugangspunkt.
6. Wählen Sie Netzwerktest, um die Netzwerkverbindung zu überprüfen.
* *
Drahtlos-Netzwerk einrichten
Wählen Sie ein Netzwerk
n Navig. EEingabe R Zurück
Suchlauf
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
SicherSchl.
3/9
Möglicherweise ist das vorhandene Netzwerk
funktional eingeschränkt. Möchten Sie die
Netzwerkverbindung wechseln?
Ja Nein
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:38:11 PMDeutsch - 33
Anschließen eines USB-Geräts
1. Drücken Sie zum Einschalten des Computers die POWER-Taste.
2. Schließen Sie ein USB-Gerät mit Foto- oder Musikdateien an die USB-Buchse seitlich am
Fernsehgerät an.
N Der USB 1(HDD)-Anschluss dient zugleich als Festplattenanschluss. Auf der Festplatte
(Festplattenlaufwerk) werden digitale Daten gespeichert.
N Media Play unterstützt ausschließlich USB-Massenspeichergeräte vom Typ MSC (Mass
Storage Class). MSC-Geräte sind Massenspeicher zur Übertragung von Daten.
Beispiele für MSC sind Thumb-Laufwerke und Flash Card-Lesegeräte sowie USB HDD
(USB-HUB wird nicht unterstützt).
N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) wird nicht unterstützt.
N Als Dateisystem wird ausschließlich FAT16/32 unterstützt. NTFS-Dateisysteme werden nicht unterstützt.
N Schließen Sie eine USB-Festplatte an den dafür reservierten Anschluss an: USB1 (HDD). Wenn das angeschlossene Gerät
allerdings eine hohe elektrische Leistung abfordert, kann USB1 (HDD) es möglicherweise nicht versorgen.
N Einige Typen von USB-Digitalkameras und -Audiogeräten sind eventuell nicht mit diesem Fernseher kompatibel.
N Schließen Sie diese direkt an den USB-Anschluss Ihres Fernsehgeräts an. Wenn Sie eine gesonderte Kabelverbindung verwenden,
können USB-Kompatibilitätsprobleme auftreten.
N Ehe Sie Ihr Gerät an das Fernsehgerät anschließen, sichern Sie Ihre Dateien, um eventuellem Datenverlust vorzubeugen.
SAMSUNG haftet nicht für Verlust und Beschädigung von Daten.
N Trennen Sie das USB-Gerät nicht, solange Daten geladen werden.
N MSC unterstützt MP3- und JPEG-Dateien, wogegen PTP-Geräte nur JPEG-Dateien unterstützen.
N Das sequentielle JPEG-Format wird unterstützt.
N Je höher die Auflösung des Bilds, desto länger dauert es, um es auf dem Bildschirm anzuzeigen.
N Die maximal unterstützte JPEG-Auflösung beträgt 15.360 x 8.640 Pixel.
N Bei nicht unterstützten oder beschädigten Dateien wird die Meldung Nicht unterstütztes Dateiformat angezeigt.
N Wenn mehr als 4000 Fotodateien (oder mehr als 3000 Musikdateien), vorhanden sind, werden die Dateien ab 4000 (3000)
möglicherweise nicht in der Fotoliste (oder Musikliste) angezeigt.
N MP3-Dateien mit DRM, die von einer nicht-lizenzfreien Site heruntergeladen worden sind, können nicht abgespielt werden.
N DRM(Digital Rights Management) verhindert illegale Verwendung von digitalen Medien zum Schutz der Urheberrechte.
N Wenn Sie zu einem anderen Foto wechseln, kann das Laden einige Sekunden dauern. In diesem Fall wird das Ladesymbol
angezeigt.
❑ Verwenden der Fernbedienungstasten im Menü Media Play
Taste Vorgang
▲/▼/◄/► Cursor bewegen und Elemente auswählen.
ENTERE
Markiertes Element auswählen.
Abspielen oder Anhalten der Dateien während der Wiedergabe von Diashows oder Musikdateien.
Abspielen oder Anhalten der Diashow oder Musikdatei.
RETURN Zurück zum vorherigen Menü.
TOOLS Ausführen verschiedener Funktionen aus dem Photound Musikmenü.
Anhalten der aktuellen Präsentation oder Musikdatei.
Wechsel zur vorherigen Gruppe/nächsten Gruppe.
INFO Anzeigen von Dateiinformationen.
MEDIA.P Starten oder beenden Sie den Media Play-Modus.
DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays
DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com
with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Media Play
Seitenverkleidung des
Fernsehgeräts
USB-Laufwerk
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:38:12 PMDeutsch - 34
Verwenden der Medienwiedergabefunktion
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie auf einem USB-Speichermedium (MSC) gespeicherte Fotound Musik anzeigen bzw. wiedergeben.
Möglicherweise treten bei lizenzfreien Multimediadateien weniger Probleme auf.
❑ Starten der Medienwiedergabefunktion
1. Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼
die Option Anwendung, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Media Play
(USB & DLNA), und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
O Drücken Sie die MEDIA.P-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das Media
Play-Menü anzuzeigen.
O Drücken Sie die SOURCE-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, und wählen Sie
USB oder DLNA. Drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
3. Drücken Sie zuerst die rote Taste und dann ▲ oder ▼, um das entsprechende
USBSpeichergerät auszuwählen (sofern es über einen Hub angeschlossen ist).
Drücken Sie die ENTERE.
N Diese Funktion hängt vom Typ des an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossenen
USBGeräts ab.
N Der Name des USB-Geräts wird links unten auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt.
4. Drücken Sie die Tasten ◄ oder ►, um ein Symbol (Photo, Music, Movie,
Setup) auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
N Um den Media Play-Modus zu beenden, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung
die Taste MEDIA.P.
N In diesem Modus können Sie zwar die Filme im Spiel wiedergeben, nicht aber
das eigentliche Spiel spielen.
❑ Sicheres Entfernen von USB-Geräten
Sie können das Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät entfernen.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS im Dateilistenfenster von Media Play oder
während eine Diashow bzw. Musikdatei wiedergegeben wird.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Sicher entfernen,
und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
3. Entfernen Sie das USB-Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät.
❑ Bildschirmanzeige
1. Aktuelle Sortierreihenfolge Dieses Feld zeigt die aktuell eingestellte Sortierreihenfolge.
2. Ausgewählte Datei Die Sortiergruppe mit dem ausgewählten Foto wird hervorgehoben.
3 Anzeigegruppen : Die ausgewählte Datei ist hervorgehoben.
4. Aktuelles Gerät : Zeigt den Namen des aktuell ausgewählten Geräts an.
5. Informationen zur Auswahl von Elementen : Zeigt die Anzahl der Fotos an, die durch Drücken der gelben Taste ausgewählt wurden.
N Rote Taste (Gerät) : Dient zur Auswahl eines angeschlossenen Geräts.
6. Aktuelles Gerät
• Grüne Taste (Favoritenstatus) : Ändert den Favoritenstatus der gewählten Datei. Drücken Sie diese Taste so oft, bis der
gewünschte Wert angezeigt wird.
• Gelbe Taste (Auswählen) : Hiermit wählen Sie eine Datei aus der Dateiliste aus. Die ausgewählten Dateien werden mit dem
Symbol c gekennzeichnet. Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste noch einmal, um die Auswahl einer Datei zu stornieren.
• TOOLS (Extras) : Hiermit zeigen Sie die Optionsmenüs an. (Der Inhalt der Extras richtet sich nach dem jeweiligen Status.)
• R RETURN (Zurück) : Zurück zum vorherigem Menü.
Ordner Benutzerdef. Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349.
JPG
▶
▶
Ordner 2
1
Ordner 1
1
Diashow
Gruppe abspielen
Informationen
Sicher entfernen
../ Ordnername/
Photo
USB Gerät Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Frei
Movie
USB Gerät RZurück
Voreinstellung Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe Ordner
Mrz.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mrz Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
3
1
2
1Datei(en) gew.
4
5 6
Photo
USB Gerät
Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Zurück
c
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:38:20 PMDeutsch - 35
Sortieren der Foto- / Musik- / Filmliste
Basisansicht
Zeigt die Ordner auf dem USB-Speichergerät an.
Wenn Sie einen Ordner auswählen und die Taste ENTERE drücken, werden nur
die Filmdateien im gewählten Ordner angezeigt.
N Bei Sortierung anhand der Basisansicht können Sie keine Favoritendateien
festlegen.
Ordner
Sortieren der Dateien nach Ordnern. Wenn es auf dem USB-Speicher viele Ordner
gibt, werden die Fotodateien nach Ordnern sortiert. Die Datei im Stammordner
erscheint als erste und die anderen werden nach Namen sortiert angezeigt.
Preference → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
Hiermit werden die Dateien nach den Vorlieben (Favoriten) sortiert.
N Ändern der Favoriteneinstellungen
Markieren Sie das gewünschte Foto in der Fotoliste und drücken Sie dann so oft
die grüne Taste, bis die gewünschte Einstellung angezeigt wird.
N Die Sterne dienen nur zum Gruppieren. So hat zum Beispiel ein Eintrag mit 3
Sternen keinerlei Priorität vor dem Eintrag mit einem Stern.
Zeitstrahl (Photo / Movie)
Hiermit werden die Filmtitel nach Symbol/Nummer/Anfangsbuchstabe/Spezial
sortiert.
Titel (Music / Movie)
Hiermit werden die Musikdateien nach Symbol/Nummer/Anfangsbuchstabe/Spezial
sortiert, und die Musikdatei wird gezeigt.
❑ Photo
Farbe → Rot / Gelb / Grün / Blau / Magenta / Schwarz / Grau / Jedes Alter
Hiermit werden die Fotos nach der Farbe sortiert. Sie können die Farbinformation des Fotos ändern.
N Aktivieren Sie Farbansicht verwenden im Setup-Menü, ehe Sie Fotos nach der Farbe sortieren.
❑ Music
Interpret
Hiermit werden die Musikdateien nach Symbol/Nummer/Anfangsbuchstabe/Spezial des Interpreten sortiert.
Stimmung → Dynamisch / Rhythmisch / Traurig / Aufregend / Ruhig / Jedes Alter
Hiermit sortieren Sie die Musikdateien nach der Stimmung. Sie können die Informationen zur Stimmung der Musik ändern.
Genre
Hiermit sortieren Sie die Musikdateien nach dem Genre.
Ordner Voreinstellung Basisansicht Titel Interpret
1
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
usermanual Heaven
NPKI
▶
1
▶
▶
▶
▶
../ Ordnername/
Music
USB Gerät Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber
▶
▶
Voreinstellung Basisansicht Erstellung Titel Ordner
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
▶
▶ ◀
MOVIE_005
.avi
Voreinstellung Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe Ordner
Mrz.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mrz Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
Photo
USB Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Zurück
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:38:28 PMDeutsch - 36
Optionsmenü für Foto- / Musik- / Filmliste
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MEDIA.P.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option Photo, Music oder
Movie, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
3. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Musikdatei.
N Wählen mehrerer Dateien
- Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Musikdatei. Drücken Sie
dann die gelbe Taste.
- Wiederholen Sie den obigen Vorgang, um mehrere Dateien auszuwählen.
- Links neben dem Namen der gewählten Datei wird das Symbol c angezeigt.
4. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS.
N Der Inhalt des Optionsmenüs richtet sich nach dem jeweiligen Status.
Gruppe abspielen
Mit diesem Menübefehl können Sie eine Diashow nur mit den Fotodateien aus der
aktuell ausgewählten Sortiergruppe ablaufen lassen.
Alle abwählen (Wenn mindestens eine Datei gewählt ist)
Sie können die Auswahl aller Dateien aufheben.
N Das Zeichen c zur Darstellung der entsprechenden Datei wird ausgeblendet.
Informationen
Die Informationen zur Foto-/Musik-/Filmdatei werden angezeigt. Sie können die
Informationen von Dateien mit den gleichen Verfahren auch während einer Diashow
anzeigen.
O Drücken Sie die Taste INFO, um Informationen anzuzeigen.
Sicher entfernen
Sie können das Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät entfernen.
❑ Photo
Diashow
Mit diesem Menübefehl können Sie eine Diashow mit den Fotodateien auf dem
USB-Speicher ablaufen lassen.
Grp. ändern (Beim Sortierungsschlüssel Farbe)
Sie können die Farbinformationen einer gewählten Fotodatei (oder Gruppe von Dateien) ändern, um sie von einer Farbgruppe in
eine andere zu verschieben.
N Damit verändern Sie die tatsächliche Farbe des Fotos aber nicht.
N Die Gruppeninformationen der aktuellen Datei werden aktualisiert und die Fotos werden in die neue Farbgruppe verschoben.
N Wenn Sie die Informationen für mehrere Dateien ändern möchten, wählen Sie die gewünschten Dateien und drücken Sie die
gelbe Taste.
❑ Music
Gruppe ändern (Beim Sortierungsschlüssel “Stimmung”)
Sie können die Informationen zur Stimmung der Musikdateien ändern. Die Gruppeninformationen der aktuellen Datei werden
aktualisiert und die Datei wird in die neue Gruppe verschoben. Wenn Sie die Informationen für mehrere Dateien ändern möchten,
wählen Sie die entsprechenden Dateien, und drücken Sie die gelbe Taste.
Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Ordner Benutzerdef. Basisansicht Titel Interpret
1
1
▶
▶
../ Ordnername/
Sky
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
NPKI
usermanual Heaven
▶
NPKI
Gruppe abspielen
Informationen
Sicher entfernen
Music
USB Gerät Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber
Movie_004
Movie_003 .avi
.avi
Movie_000
.avi
Movie_005
.avi
Movie_007
.avi
Movie_001.avi
1/5
Movie_006
.avi
▶
▶
Benutzerdef. Basisansicht Erstellung Titel Ordner
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber
Gruppe abspielen
Informationen
Sicher entfernen
Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe Ordner Benutzerdef.
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Ordner 2
1
Ordner 1
1
Diashow
Gruppe abspielen
Grp. ändern
Informationen
Sicher entfernen
Photo
USB Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:38:36 PMDeutsch - 37
Optionsmenü für Diashow / Musikwiedergabe / Filmwiedergabe
1. Während einer Diashow (oder beim Anzeigen eines Fotos) der bei der Wiedergabe
von Musik oder eines Films drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um die Option
einzustellen.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option, und drücken Sie dann
die Taste ENTERE.
Bildeinstellungen / Toneinstellungen
Sie können die Bild- und Toneinstellungen festlegen.
Informationen
Die Dateiinformationen werden angezeigt.
Sicher entfernen
Sie können das Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät entfernen.
❑ Menü der Optionen für Diashows
Diashow anhalten / Diashow starten
Hiermit können Sie eine Diashow starten oder anhalten.
Diashow-Geschw. → Langsam / Normal / Schnell
Sie können die Geschwindigkeit der Diashow festlegen.
N Diese Funktion ist nur während einer Diashow verfügbar.
N Wenn Sie die Tasten π (REW) oder μ (FF) während einer Diashow drücken,
können Sie auch deren Abspielgeschwindigkeit ändern.
Diashow-Effekt
Sie können den in der Diashow verwendeten Effekt bei Bildschirmübergängen
auswählen.
• Keine / Ausblend1 / Ausblend2 / Jalousie / Spirale / Schachbrett / Linear /
Treppe / Wischen / Zufall
N Diese Funktion ist nur während einer Diashow verfügbar.
Drehen
Sie können alle auf einem USB-Speichergerät gespeicherten Dateien drehen.
N Wenn Sie die Taste ◄ drücken, wird es nacheinander um 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ und 0˚ gedreht.
N Wenn Sie die Taste ► drücken, wird das Foto nacheinander um 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ und 0˚ gedreht.
N Die gedrehte Datei wird nicht gespeichert.
Zoom
Sie können alle auf einem USB-Speichergerät gespeicherten Fotos vergrößern. (x1 → x2 → x4)
N Um das vergrößerte Foto zu verschieben, drücken sie die Taste ENTERE und anschließend ▲/▼/◄/►. Beachten Sie, dass
die Funktion zum Verschieben deaktiviert ist, wenn das vergrößerte Bild kleiner als das ursprüngliche Fenster ist.
N Die vergrößerte Datei wird nicht gespeichert.
Hintergrundmusik
Sie können die Hintergrundmusik auswählen, während Sie eine Diashow anzeigen.
N Um diese Funktion zu verwenden, müssen auf dem UB-Speicher Musik- und Fotodateien gespeichert sein.
N Laden der Musikdateien erforderlich, um in den Hintergrundmusikmodus zu wechseln. Musikdateien aus der Kategorie
abspielen, die geladen werden soll.
❑ Menü der Optionen für die Musikwiedergabe
Wiederhol-M. → Ein / Aus
Sie können Musikdateien wiederholt abspielen.
❑ Menü der Optionen für Filmwiedergabe
Bildformat → Anpassung / Original
Abspielen des Videos im Originalformat oder angepasst an die Bildschirmgröße.
Einstellung für Text
Sie können die Beschriftungen für den Film wählen.
Tools
Extras
Diashow anhalten
Diashow-Geschw. : Normal
Diashow-Effekt : Ausblend1
Drehen
Zoom
Hintergrundmusik
Bildeinstellungen
Toneinstellungen
Informationen
U Navig. E Eingabe eBeenden
Extras
Wiederhol-Modus ◄ Ein ►
Bildeinstellungen
Toneinstellungen
Informationen
Sicher entfernen
U Navig. Einst. eBeenden
Extras
Bildeinstellungen
Toneinstellungen
Bildformat : Anpassung
Einstellung für Text
Informationen
Sicher entfernen
U Navig. Eingabe eBeenden
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:38:37 PMDeutsch - 38
Anzeigen eines Fotos oder einer Diashow
❑ Anzeigen von Diashows
N Alle Dateien in der Dateiliste werden für die Diashow verwendet.
N Die Bilder werden nacheinander, beginnend mit der aktuell angezeigten Datei
angezeigt.
N Die Diashow wird entsprechend der Sortierreihenfolge in der Dateiliste
ausgeführt.
N Musikdateien können während der Diashow automatisch abgespielt werden,
wenn Hintergrundmusik aktiviert (Ein) ist.
N Drücken Sie die Fernbedienungstaste∂(Play)/ENTERE, während die
Fotoliste angezeigtwird, um die Diashow zu starten.
N Diashow-Steuertasten
ENTERE Abspielen/Pause der Diashow.
Abspielen der Diashow.
Diashow anhalten.
Beenden Sie die Diashow und wechseln Sie wieder zur
Fotoliste.
/ Ändern der Abspielgeschwindigkeit der Diashow.
T TOOLS
Hiermit führen Sie verschiedene Funktionen aus den
Fotomenüs aus.
❑ Abspielen der aktuellen Gruppe
1. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲, um zum Abschnitt mit den Sortierschlüsseln zu
wechseln.
2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► das Sortierverfahren aus.
3. Drücken Sie die Taste ▼, um zum Abschnitt mit der Gruppenliste zu wechseln.
4. Drücken Sie die Tasten ◄ und ►, um eine Gruppe auszuwählen.
5. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe). Eine Diashow mit den Dateien der
gewählten Gruppe beginnt.
Alternative
1. Wählen Sie zuerst einen Sortierschlüssel und dann im Dateilistenabschnitt die Fotos aus der gewünschten Gruppe aus.
N Um zur vorherigen/nächsten Gruppe zu wechseln, drücken Sie die Taste π (REW) oder μ (FF).
2. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS.
3. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Gruppe abspielen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
N Nur die Fotos aus der Sortiergruppe mit den ausgewählten Dateien werden für die Diashow verwendet.
❑ So starten Sie eine Diashow nur mit den gewählten Dateien
1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen.
2. Wählen Sie das gewünschte Foto mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► aus der Dateiliste aus.
3. Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste.
4. Wiederholen Sie den obigen Vorgang, um mehrere Fotodateien auszuwählen.
N Links neben dem Namen der Fotodatei wird das Symbol c angezeigt.
N Wenn Sie nur eine Datei wählen, wird keine Diashow gestartet.
N Um die Auswahl sämtlicher Dateien aufzuheben, drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS und wählen Sie dann Alle abwählen.
5. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE .
N Die ausgewählten Dateien werden für die Diashow verwendet.
Alternative
1. Wählen Sie die gewünschten Fotos mit der gelben Taste aus der Dateiliste aus.
2. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS.
3. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Diashow, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE .
N Die ausgewählten Dateien werden für die Diashow verwendet.
▶
▶
Voreinstellung Basisansicht Erstellung Titel Ordner
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber
Movie_003
.avi
Movie_000
.avi
Movie_004
.avi
Movie_001.avi
1/5
Movie_005
.avi
Basisansicht Erstellung Farbe Ordner Voreinstellung
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Ordner 2
1
Ordner 1
1
Diashow
Gruppe abspielen
Grp. ändern
Informationen
Sicher entfernen
Photo
r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4
USB E Pause lr Zurück/Weiter T Extras R Zurück
USB Gerät Favoriten-Einst. Wählen T Extras R Ordner darüber
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:38:44 PMDeutsch - 39
Wiedergeben von Musik
❑ Wiedergeben einer Musikdatei
1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen.
2. Drücken Sie die Taste ◄ oder ► , um eine Musikdatei zu wählen, die abgespielt
werden soll.
3. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE .
N Dieses Menü zeigt nur Dateien mit der Dateinamenserweiterung MP3.
Dateien mit anderer Dateinamenserweiterung werden nicht angezeigt, auch
wenn sie auf dem gleichen USB-Gerät gespeichert wurden.
N Die ausgewählte Datei wird zusammen mit der Abspieldauer oben angezeigt.
N Um die Musiklautstärke anzupassen, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die
Lautstärketaste auf der Fernbedienung. Wenn Sie den Ton ausschalten möchten, drücken Sie die M MUTE-Taste auf der
Fernbedienung.
N Wenn der Ton beim Abspielen von MP3-Datei “schräg” ist stellen Sie im Tonmenü den Equalizer und SRS TruSurround HD
ein. (Bei übermodulierten MP3-Dateien kann es zu Tonproblemen kommen.)
N Die Abspieldauer einer Musikdatei wird möglicherweise als 00:00:00 angezeigt, wenn am Anfang der Datei keine
Informationen über die Abspieldauer gefunden werden.
N Die Tasten π (REW) oder μ (FF) sind bei der Wiedergabe funktionslos.
N Regler für Musikwiedergabe
ENTERE Wiedergabe/Pause einer Musikdatei.
Beenden des Wiedergabemodus und
Rückkehr zur Musikliste.
Spielen Sie die Musikdatei ab.
T TOOLS
Hiermit führen Sie verschiedene Funktionen
aus den Musikmenüs aus.
Hiermit wird die Musikdatei angehalten.
N Symbol für Informationen zur Musik-Funktion
Hiermit werden alle Musikdateien im Ordner (oder die markierte Datei) wiederholt abgespielt. Wiederhol-M. ist
aktiviert (Ein).
Hiermit werden alle Musikdateien im Ordner (oder die markierte Datei) einmal abgespielt. Wiederhol-M. ist
deaktiviert (Aus).
❑ Abspielen einer Musikgruppe
1. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲, um zum Abschnitt mit den Sortierschlüsseln zu wechseln.
2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► das Sortierverfahren aus.
3. Drücken Sie die Taste ▼ oder ENTERE, um zur Auswahl der Gruppenliste zu wechseln.
4. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe). Die Dateien der ausgewählten Gruppe werden nun abgespielt.
Alternative
1. Wählen Sie zuerst einen Sortierschlüssel und dann im Dateilistenabschnitt die Fotos aus der gewünschten Gruppe aus.
N Um zur vorherigen/nächsten Gruppe zu wechseln, drücken Sie die Taste π (REW) oder μ (FF).
2. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS.
3. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Gruppe abspielen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
N Die Musikdateien in der Sortiergruppe einschließlich der markierten Datei werden einmal abgespielt.
❑ Abspielen ausgewählter Musikdateien
1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen.
2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Musikdatei.
3. Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste.
4. Wiederholen Sie den obigen Vorgang, um mehrere Musikdateien auszuwählen.
N Links neben dem Namen der Musikdatei wird das Symbol c angezeigt.
N Um die Auswahl sämtlicher Dateien aufzuheben, drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS und wählen Sie dann Alle abwählen.
5. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE
N Die gewählten Dateien werden nun wiedergegeben.
r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55
r
1/3
When I Dream r
r
Geek In The Pink Heaven
USB E Pause lr Zurück/Weiter T Extras R Zurück
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:38:45 PMDeutsch - 40
Wiedergeben einer Filmdatei
❑ Wiedergeben einer Filmdatei
1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen.
2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► eine Filmdatei, die abgespielt werden soll.
3. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE .
N Die gewählte Datei wird wiedergegeben.
N Die ausgewählte Datei wird zusammen mit der Abspieldauer oben angezeigt.
N Die Abspieldauer einer Filmdatei wird möglicherweise als 00:00:00 angezeigt,
wenn am Anfang der Datei keine Informationen über die Abspieldauer
gefunden werden.
N Sie können spannende Multimediaspiele anzeigen, das Spielen selbst wird aber nicht unterstützt.
N Unterstützte Formate für Untertitel
Name Dateinamenserweiterung Programmiersprache
MPEG-4 Text mit Zeitverlauf .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt Stringbasiert
SubViewer .sub Stringbasiert
Micro DVD .sub oder .txt Stringbasiert
N Unterstützte Videoformate
Dateinamenserweiterung Container Videodecoder Audio-Codec Max Resolution Sti
*.avi AVI
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.mkv MKV
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.asf ASF
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080
*.mp4 MP4 (SMP4)
H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
XVID 1920x1080
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
*.vro
VRO
VOB
MPEG2 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG1 1920x1080
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG2 1920x1080
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
H.264 1920x1080
VC1 1920x1080
N Regler für Videowiedergabe
ENTERE Wiedergeben / Anhalten der Filmdatei.
Wiedergeben der Filmdatei.
Anhalten der Filmwiedergabe.
Beenden des Wiedergabemodus und Rückkehr zur Filmliste.
T TOOLS Hiermit führen Sie verschiedene Funktionen aus den Filmmenüs aus.
◄/► Schneller Vor- oder Rücklauf durch den Film in Schritten.
▲/▼ Wechseln zur ersten oder letzten Ansicht der aktuellen Datei.
▶
r
r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3
Movie_000.avi
USB E Pause lr Wechseln T Extras R Zurück
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:38:46 PMDeutsch - 41
❑ Abspielen einer Filmgruppe
1. Drücken Sie die Taste ▲, um zum Abschnitt mit den Sortierschlüsseln zu wechseln.
2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► das Sortierverfahren aus.
3. Drücken Sie die Taste ▼ oder ENTERE, um zur Auswahl der Gruppenliste zu wechseln.
4. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe). Nur die Dateien der gewählten Gruppe werden nun abgespielt.
Alternative
1. Wählen Sie zuerst einen Sortierschlüssel und dann im Dateilistenabschnitt die Fotos aus der gewünschten Gruppe aus.
N Um zur vorherigen/nächsten Gruppe zu wechseln, drücken Sie die Taste π (REW) oder μ (FF).
2. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS.
3. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Gruppe abspielen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
N Hiermit werden alle Filmdateien im Ordner (oder die markierte Datei) einmal abgespielt.
❑ Abspielen der ausgewählten Filmdateien
1. Drücken die Taste ▼, um den Dateilistenabschnitt zu wählen.
2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Musikdatei.
3. Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste.
N Links neben dem Namen der Filmdatei wird das Symbol c cangezeigt.
N Um die Auswahl sämtlicher Dateien aufzuheben, drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS und wählen Sie dann Alle abwählen.
4. Wiederholen Sie den obigen Vorgang, um mehrere Filmdateien auszuwählen.
5. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE .
N Nur die gewählte Datei wird wiedergegeben.
❑ Filmwiedergabe fortsetzen (Wiedergabe fortsetzen)
Wenn Sie die Filmwiedergabefunktion verlassen, kann der Film später von dem Punkt an abgespielt werden, an dem Sie
unterbrochen haben.
1. Wählen Sie den Film, dessen Wiedergabe Sie fortsetzen möchten. Drücken Sie dazu in der Dateiliste auf ◄ oder ►
2. Drücken Sie die Taste ∂ (Wiedergabe)/ENTERE .
3. Wählen Sie mit der blauen Taste die Funktion für Ununterbrochen abspielen..
N Die Filmwiedergabe wird dort fortgesetzt, wo Sie sie angehalten hatten.
N Wenn Hilfe zu Schleifenbetrieb im Setup-Menü aktiviert wurde (Ein), wird eine Meldung angezeigt, wenn Sie die Filmdatei
fortsetzen.
Verwenden des Menüs Einstellungen
Mit dem Setup zeigen Sie die im Media Play-Menü vorgenommenen
Benutzereinstellungen an.
1. Drücken Sie die MEDIA.P-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das Media Play-Menü
anzuzeigen.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ◄ oder ► die Option SETUP, und drücken
Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
3. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die gewünschte Option aus.
4 . Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄ oder ► die gewünschte Option aus.
N Um den Media Play-Modus zu beenden, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die
Taste MEDIA.P.
Farbansicht verwenden → Ein / Farbe
Hiermit werden die Fotos nach der Farbe sortiert.
N Ist diese Option aktiviert, so verlängert sich die Ladezeit, da die
Farbinformationen aus den Fotos ermittelt werden.
Musik Wiederholmodus → Ein / Aus
Hiermit können Sie Musikdateien wiederholt abspielen.
Hilfe zu Schleifenbetrieb → Ein / Aus
Hiermit öffnen Sie das Popupfenster mit Informationen zum Schleifenbetrieb.
Divx® VOD-Registrierungscode abrufen
Hiermit zeigen Sie den Registrierungscode für den Fernseher an. Wenn Sie eine Verbindung zur DivX-Website herstellen, und
den Registrierungscode für ein Privatkonto registrieren, können Sie VOD-Registrierungsdatei herunterladen. Wenn Sie die VODRegistrierung mit Media Play abspielen, wird die Registrierung abgeschlossen. Weitere Informationen zu DivX® VOD finden Sie
unter www.DivX.com.
Divx® VOD-Deaktivierungscode abrufen
Wenn DivX® VOD nicht registriert ist, wird der Deaktivierungscode für die Registrierung angezeigt. Wenn Sie diese Funktion
ausführen, wenn DivX® VOD registriert ist, wird die aktuelle DivX® VOD-Registrierung deaktiviert.
Laufzeit Bildschirmsch. → 2 Std. / 4 std. / 8 std.
Wählen Sie die Wartezeit bis zum Aktivieren des Bildschirmschoners.
Informationen
Hiermit zeigen Sie die Informationen zum angeschlossenen Gerät an.
Sicher entfernen
Sie können das Gerät sicher vom Fernsehgerät entfernen.
Media Play
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Frei
SETUP
Photo Music Movie Setup
USB Gerät eBeenden
Setup
Navig. Einst. Zurück
Farbansicht verwenden ◄ Aus ►
Musik Wiederholmodus Ein
Hilfe zu Schleifenbetrieb Ein
Divx® VOD-Registrierungscode abrufen
Divx® VOD-Deaktivierungscode abrufen
Laufzeit Bildschirmsch. 10 min
Informationen
Sicher entfernen
USB Gerät
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:38:47 PMDeutsch - 42
Einrichten des DLNA-Netzwerks
Mit DLNA können Sie Videos und Bilder, die auf Ihrem PC gespeichert sind, über eine Netzwerkverbindung im Media Play-Modus
anzeigen. Damit brauchen Sie die Dateien nicht mehr auf einen USB-Speicher zu kopieren, den Sie dann an Ihren Fernseher
anschließen. Damit Sie DLNA verwenden können, muss der Fernseher mit dem Netzwerk verbunden und die DLNA-Anwendung muss
auf Ihrem PC installiert sein.
❑ Netzwerkverbindungsdiagramm – Kabel
❑ Netzwerkverbindungsdiagramm – Drahtlos
1. Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren Ihres Netzwerks finden Sie unter “Einrichten des Netzwerks”.
N Wir empfehlen Ihnen, sowohl das Fernsehgerät als auch den PC in gleichem Teilnetz anzuordnen. Die ersten 3 Teile der
Teilnetzadresse des Fernsehgeräts und der IP-Adressen des PCs müssen übereinstimmen und nur der letzte Teil darf geändert
werden. (z.B.: IP-Adresse : 123.456.789.**)
2. Schließen Sie den PC, auf dem das Programm Samsung PC Share Manager installiert wird, über ein Netzwerkkabel an das
externe Modem an.
N Sie können das Fernsehgerät direkt an den PC anschließen, ohne vorher einen Sharer (Router) dazwischen zu schalten.
Installieren der DLNA-Anwendung
Damit die Inhalte vom PC auf dem Fernsehgerät abgespielt werden können, müssen Sie die Anwendung installieren. Um die DLNAFunktion problemlos nutzen zu können, verwenden Sie das Programm von der CD-ROM, die zusammen mit dem Fernsehgerät geliefert
wurde, oder verwenden Sie Samsung PC Share Manager für das Fernsehmodell. Diese Software können Sie von der
Samsung-Website herunterladen.
TV
Externes Modem
(ADSL/VDSL/Kabel TV)
LAN
PC
LAN
Media Play-DLNA
TV
LAN
PC
oder
1
Seitenverkleidung des
Fernsehgeräts
WLAN-Adapter von
Samsung
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:38:49 PMDeutsch - 43
Verwenden der DLNA-Anwendung
Layout des Programmfenster
1. Menüs : Folgende Anwendungsmenüs sind
verfügbar : Datei, Freigeben, Server und
Hilfe.
2. Klicken Sie, um den markierten Ordner auf
dem PC-Server freizugeben.
3. Klicken Sie erneut, um die Freigabe zu
beenden.
4. Klicken Sie, um die Ordner und Dateien auf
dem PC zu aktualisieren.
5. Klicken Sie, um den Freigabestatus zu
synchronisieren.
6. Auf dem PC werden die Ordner und Dateien
aufgeführt, die freigegeben werden sollen.
7. Es werden Ordner aufgelistet, die vom
Benutzer freigegeben wurden..
8. Name des PC-Servers aus der Geräteliste
von Media Play : Klicken Sie hier, um den
Namen zu ändern.
Systemanforderungen
1. Legen Sie die mit diesem Fernsehgerät gelieferte Programm-CD in den PC ein.
2. Zur Installation des Programms benötigen Sie 20 MB freien Platz auf der Festplatte.
N Bei Freigabe der Dateien reichen 20 MB Festplattenspeicher für jeweils etwa 100 Dateien.
N Wenn Sie die Dateifreigabe beenden, wird auch der Festplattenspeicher freigegeben, der ansonsten für die
Miniaturbildinformationen verwendet wird.
Unterstützte Formate
• Bild : JPEG-Bild (*.jpg, *.jpeg) Audio : MP3 (mp3) Video: MPEG1 (mpg, mpeg), MPEG2 PS/TS (mpg, mpeg, trp, ts, tp),
divx(mpg, mpeg, avi), MPEG4/H.264 (mpg, mpeg). Details zu den unterstützten Videoformaten erhalten Sie bei den
Anweisungen unter “Wiedergeben einer Filmdatei”.
Installieren Sie die Anwendung
► ►
►
1. Starten Sie die Datei SETUP.EXE, die auf der zusammen mit dem Gerät gelieferten Programm-CD gespeichert ist.
N Sie können die Datei allerdings auch von www.samsung.com herunterladen.
2. Installieren Sie den SAMSUNG PC Share Manager (siehe nachfolgende Abbildungen).
3. Nach Abschluss der Installation wird auf dem Desktop das Symbol für den PC Share Manager angezeigt.
N Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol, um das Programm zu starten.
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:38:50 PMDeutsch - 44
❑ Freigeben
Freigeben eines Ordners
Sie können einen Ordner auf dem PC für das Fernsehgerät freigeben.
Aufheben der Freigabe eines Ordners
Sie können die Freigabe eines Ordners auf Ihrem PC aufheben. Markieren Sie einen Ordner im Bereich Freigegebener Ordner
und klicken Sie dann auf Unshare Folder.
Übernehmen der aktuellen Einstellungen
Führen Sie diesen Vorgang aus, wenn aufgrund einer neuen Ordnerfreigabe oder der Aufhebung einer Ordnerfreigabe eine
Synchronisierung erforderlich ist. Mit dem Menü Neuen Status Einst. übernehmen Sie die Änderungen in den freigegebenen
Ordnern auf die Daten, die mit dem PC-Freigabeprogramm gespeichert wurden.
Da das Übernehmen der Änderungen an den internen Daten ein zeitraubender Vorgang ist, wird dem Benutzer mit dieser Funktion
die Möglichkeit geboten, die Änderungen an den Daten nur bei Bedarf zu übernehmen. Erst wenn der Befehl Neuen Status Einst.
gewählt wird, wird der geänderte Status des freigegebenen Ordners auf den Server übernommen.
Änderungen an den freigegebenen Ordnern werden erst auf Ihren PC übernommen, wenn Sie den Befehl Neuen Status Einst.
wählen.
Festlegen der Zugangsberechtigung
Damit Ihr Fernsehgerät den PC finden kann, muss das Fernsehgerät im Fenster mit den Einstellungen für die
Zugangsberechtigungen auf Geräterichtlinie einst. eingestellt werden. Zusätzlich müssen sich der PC-Server und das
Fernsehgerät im gleichen Teilnetz befinden.
• Vorgehensweise : Klicken Sie auf Freigeben und wählen Sie den Befehl Geräterichtlinie einst.. Nicht verfügbare
Elementewerden in Grau dargestellt. Sie können die Zugangsberechtigungen mit den Schaltflächen Akzeptiern / Ablehnen
Einst. Um ein Element zu löschen, wählen Sie Delete Item.
❑ Server
Server
Sie können Ihren PC als Server verwenden und den Serverstatus später wieder aufheben.
Server zusammen mit Windows starten
Sie können bestimmen, ob der PC-Server automatisch zusammen mit Windows gestartet werden soll.
Servernamen ändern
Sie können den PC-Server umbenennen.
Verwenden der DLNA-Funktion
❑ Verwenden des DLNA-Menüs
Durch DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) wird es möglich, Inhalte wiederzugeben,
die auf einem direkt oder über das Netzwerk an Ihr Fernsehgerät angeschlossenen
DLNA-Server (gewöhnlich Ihrem PC) gespeichert sind.
Mithilfe von Media play können Sie Inhalte von einem an das Fernsehgerät
angeschlossenen USB-Speicher wiedergeben, wogegen Sie mit DLNA Inhalte
von einem DLNA-Server (Ihrem PC) wiedergeben können, der direkt oder über
das Netzwerk an Ihr Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist. Die Vorgehensweisen zum
Verwenden der Inhalte stimmen mit denen bei Media play (USB & DLNA) überein.
1. Drücken Sie die MEDIA.P-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das DLNA-Menü anzuzeigen.
2. Drücken Sie die Tasten ◄ oder ► um ein Symbol (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup)
auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
N Um den DLNA-Modus zu beenden, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Taste MEDIA.P.
N DLNA unterstützt die folgenden Funktionen nicht.
- Hintergrundmusik und Einstellungen für Hintergrundmusik.
- Benutzerdefinierte Sortierung von Dateien im Foto-, Musik- und Filmordner.
- Die Funktion zum Ändern der Gruppe.
- Die Kopier- / Löschfunktion.
- Die Funktion zum sicheren Entfernen.
- Die Tasten REW/FF (π/μ) können Sie verwenden, wenn ein Film abgespielt wird.
- Funktion zum Fortsetzen der Filmwiedergabe (Wiedergabe fortsetzen).
N Bei manchen Containern wie ASF und MKV können Sie die Funktion zum Springen nicht verwenden.
N Divx DRM, Multi-Audio und eingebettete Beschriftung werden nicht unterstützt..
N Sie müssen Samsung PC Share Manager in der Firewall Ihres PCs freigeben.
N Die Funktionen zum Überspingen (Tasten ◄/►) oder die Pause-Funktion sind möglicherweise bei Verwendung der DLNASoftware anderer Hersteller nicht verfügbar. Dies hängt vom jeweiligen Inhalt ab.
N Die Wiedergabedauer wird beim Abspielen von Filmen möglicherweise nicht angezeigt.
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Frei
Movie
USB Gerät Zurück
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:38:51 PMDeutsch - 45
Informationen zu Anynet+
Anschließen von Anynet
+
-Geräten
Bei Anynet+
handelt es sich um eine Funktion, mit der Sie alle angeschlossenen Samsung-Geräte, die Anynet+
unterstützen, mit der
Fernbedienung für Ihr Samsung- Fernsehgerätsteuern können. Das Anynet+
-System unterstützt nur Anynet+
-fähige Samsung-Geräte.
Wenn Sie wissen möchten, ob Ihr Samsung-Gerät diese Funktion unterstützt, suchen Sie das Anynet+
-Logo auf Ihrem Gerät.
❑ Anschließen an ein Fernsehgerät
1. Verbinden Sie einen der Anschlüsse [HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2(DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] oder [HDMI IN 4] am Fernsehgerät mit dem HDMI
OUT-Anschluss am entsprechenden Anynet+
-Gerät. Verwenden Sie hierfür ein HDMI-Kabel.
❑ Anschluss an das Heimkinosystem
1. Verbinden Sie einen der Anschlüsse [HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2(DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] oder [HDMI IN 4] am Fernsehgerät mit dem HDMI
OUT-Anschluss am entsprechenden Anynet+
-Gerät. Verwenden Sie hierfür ein HDMI-Kabel.
2. Verbinden Sie den HDMI IN-Anschluss des Heimkinosystems mit dem HDMI OUTAnschluss des entsprechenden Anynet+
-Geräts.
Verwenden Sie hierfür ein HDMI-Kabel.
N Verbinden Sie den (optischen) digitalen Audioausgang am Fernsehgerät und den digitalen Audioeingang des Heimkinosystems
ausschließlich mit Hilfe des Glasfaserkabels.
N Bei obiger Vorgehensweise überträgt der optische Anschluss nur 2-Kanalaudio. Die Tonausgabe erfolgt also nur über den linken
und rechten Frontlautsprecher sowie den Subwoofer des Heimkinosystems. Wenn Sie 5.1-Kanalton wünschen, müssen Sie
den digitalen (optischen) Audioausgang des DVD-Players oder der Kabel-/Sat-Box (also Anynet-Gerät 1 oder 2) direkt an einen
Verstärker oder ein Heimkinosystem und nicht an das Fernsehgerät anschließen.
N Schließen Sie nur ein Heimkinosystem an.
N Sie können Anynet+
-Geräte mithilfe eines HDMI 1.3-Kabels verbinden. Einige HDMIKabel unterstützen möglicherweise keine
Anynet+
-Funktionen.
N Anynet+
arbeitet, wenn das AV-Gerät, das Anynet+
unterstützt, im Standby-Modus oder angeschaltet ist.
N Anynet+
unterstützt maximal 12 AV-Geräte. Beachten Sie, dass Sie maximal 3 Geräte des gleichen Typs anschließen können.
N Anynet + unterstützt maximal 3 Geräte gleichzeitig.
Anynet
+
-
Gerät 1
Anynet
+
-
Gerät 2
Anynet
+
-
Gerät 3
TV
HDMI 1.3-Kabel
HDMI 1.3-Kabel
HDMI 1.3-Kabel
TV
Anynet
+
- Gerät 1
Anynet
+
- Gerät 2 Anynet
+
- Gerät 3
HDMI 1.3-Kabel
HDMI 1.3-Kabel
HDMI 1.3-Kabel
HDMI 1.3-Kabel
Home Theatre
Optical Kabel
Anynet
+
-
Gerät 4
HDMI 1.3-Kabel
Anynet
+
- Gerät 4
HDMI 1.3-Kabel
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:38:53 PMDeutsch - 46
Einrichten von Anynet
+
❑ Einrichten von Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
T Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS, um das Menü. Extras anzuzeigen. Sie können das
Anynet+
-Menü auch durch Auswahl von Extras → Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) auswählen.
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) → Aus / Ein
amit Sie die Funktionen von Anynet+
nutzen können, muss Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
aktiviert (Ein) sein.
N Wenn die Funktion Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) deaktiviert wird, sind auch alle Vorgänge
in Verbindung mit Anynet+
deaktiviert.
Autom. Ausschalten → Nein / Ja
Automatisches Abschalten von Anynet+
Geraten durch Abschalten des Fernsehgerats.
N Automatisches Abschalten von Anynet+
-Geräten durch Abschalten des
FernsehgerätsDamit Sie Anynet+
verwenden können, muss die Geräteauswahl der
Fernbedienung auf TV eingestellt sein.
N Wenn Sie Autom. Ausschalten aktivieren (auf Ja setzen), werden auch die
angeschlossenen externen Geräte ausgeschaltet, wenn Sie das Fernsehgerät
ausschalten. Wenn das externe Gerät jedoch gerade aufnimmt, wird es
möglicherweise abgeschaltet oder auch nicht.
Wechseln zwischen Anynet
+
-Geräten
1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um Anynet
+
(HDMICEC) auszuwählen.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Geräteliste, und drücken
Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
N Nun werden die an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossenen Anynet+-Geräte aufgelistet.
Wenn Sie das gewünschte Gerät nicht finden, drücken Sie die rote Taste, um nach
Geräten zu suchen.
N Nur wenn Sie Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) im Menü Setup aktivieren *Ein, wird das Menü
Geräteliste angezeigt.
3. Wählen Sie ein bestimmtes Gerät durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Das System
wechselt zum ausgewählten Gerät.
N Das Umschalten zu den ausgewählten Geräten kann bis zu 2 Minuten dauern. Sie können diesen Vorgang während des
Umschaltens nicht abbrechen.
N Die zum Suchen nach Geräten erforderliche Zeit hängt von der Anzahl der angeschlossenen Geräte ab.
N Wenn Sie mit der Taste SOURCE eine externe Signalquelle eingestellt haben, können Sie die Anynet+
-Funktion nicht verwenden.
Achten Sie darauf, immer nur mit der Taste TOOLS zu einem Anynet+
-Gerät zu wechseln.
❑ Anynet
+
-Menü
Der Inhalt des Anynet+
-Menüs hängt vom Typ und Status der an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossenen Anynet+
-Geräte ab.
Anynet+-Menü Beschreibung
Fernsehen Wechsel vom Anynet+
-Modus zum Fernsehmodus.
Geräteliste Anzeige der Anynet+
-Geräteliste.
(Geräte_Name)-Menü Hiermit öffnen Sie die Menüs der angeschlossenen Geräte. Wenn z. B. ein DVD-Recorder
angeschlossen ist, wird das DVD-Menü des DVD-Recorders angezeigt.
(Geräte_Name).INFO Zeigt das Wiedergabemenü des angeschlossenen Geräts an. Wenn z. B. ein DVD-Recorder
angeschlossen ist, wird das Wiedergabemenü des DVD-Recorders angezeigt.
Aufnahme (*Aufnahmegerät) Startet ein Aufnahme. (Diese Menüption funktioniert nur bei aufnahmefähigen Geräten.)
(*Rekorder) Reserve Recording
(Aufnahme vormerken)
Hiermit können Sie eine Aufnahme mit dem Rekorder vormerken. (Diese Funktion ist nur für Geräte
mit Vormerkfunktion für Aufnahmen verfügbar.)
Aufnahme anhalten :
(*Aufnahmegerät)
Beenden der Aufnahme.
Receiver Die Tonausgabe erfolgt über den Receiver.
Fortsetzung...
Anwendung
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)►
Content Library
Internet@TV
Home-Network-Center
U Navig. EEingabe R Zurück
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) : Ein ▶
Autom. Ausschalten : Ja
U Navig. EEingabe R Zurück
Fernsehen
Geräteliste
Aufnahme : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Empfänger : Ein
Einstellungen
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:38:54 PMDeutsch - 47
❑ Im Anynet
+
-Modus verfügbare Tasten der TV-Fernbedienung
Gerätetyp Betriebsstatus Verfügbare Tasten
Anynet
+
-Gerät
Nach dem Wechseln zum Gerät wird
das Menü des entsprechenden Geräts
auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt.
Zifferntasten
▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE-Tasten
Farbtasten / EXIT-Taste
Nach dem Wechseln zum Gerät beim
Abspielen einer Datei
(Rückwärts suchen) / (Vorwärts suchen) (Stopp) /
(Wiedergabe) / (Pause)
Gerät mit eingebautem
Tuner
Nach dem Wechseln zum Gerät beim
Fernsehen
P / -Taste
Audiogerät Beim Aktivieren des Receivers = / -Taste
M MUTE-Taste
N Die Anynet
+
-Funktion ist nur nutzbar, wenn auf der Fernbedienung das Fernsehgerät als Empfänger eingestellt ist.
N Die -Taste ist nur im Aufnahmestatus belegt.
N Sie können Anynet
+
-Geräte nicht mit den Tasten an Ihrem Fernsehgerät bedienen. Sie können Anynet
+
-Geräte nur mit der TVFernbedienung steuern.
N Die TV-Fernbedienung funktioniert unter bestimmten Umständen nicht. Wählen Sie in diesem Fall erneut das Anynet
+
-Gerät.
N Die Anynet
+
-Funktionen sind für Geräte anderer Hersteller nicht verfügbar.
N Die / -Vorgänge können sich je nach Gerät unterscheiden.
N Bei Anschluss von mehr als einem Aufnahmegerät werden sie als (*Aufnahmegerät) angezeigt, bei Anschluss eines einzigen
Aufnahmegeräts erfolgt die Anzeige als (*Geräte_Name).
Aufnahme
Sie können Fernsehprogramme mit einem Samsung-Recorder aufnehmen.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) auszuwählen.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ Aufnehmen, und drücken Sie dann
die Taste ENTERE. Die Aufnahme beginnt.
N Bei mehr als einem Aufnahmegerät
Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ Aufnehmen, und drücken Sie
dann die Taste ENTERE. Die Aufnahme beginnt.
N Wenn das Aufnahmegerät nicht angezeigt wird
wählen Sie Geräteliste und drücken Sie die rote Taste, um nach Geräten zu suchen.
N Durch Drücken von wird die laufende Sendung aufgenommen. Wenn Sie Bilder aus einer anderen Signalquelle anzeigen, wird
das Videosignal aus dieser Quelle aufgenommen.
N Überprüfen Sie vor der Aufnahme, ob der Antennenstecker ordnungsgemäß am Aufnahmegerät angeschlossen ist. Informationen
zur richtigen Antennenverbindung mit dem Aufnahmegerät finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des Aufnahmegeräts.
U Navig. EEingabe R Zurück
Fernsehen
Geräteliste
Aufnahme : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Empfänger : Ein
Einstellungen
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:38:54 PMDeutsch - 48
Tonwiedergabe mit einem Receiver
Sie können die Tonwiedergabe über einen Receiver anstelle des TV-Lautsprechers laufen
lassen.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste TOOLS. Drücken Sie die Taste ENTERE, um Anynet+ (HDMICEC) auszuwählen.
2. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Receiver. Drücken Sie die Taste
◄ oder ►, um Ein oder Aus zu wählen.
N Wenn Ihr Receiver nur Audiosignale unterstützt, wird er in der Geräteliste
möglicherweise nicht angezeigt.
N Der Receiver kann eingesetzt werden, wenn Sie den optischen Eingang des Receivers
mit dem optischen Ausgang des Fernsehgeräts verbunden haben.
N Wenn der Receiver (Heimkinosystem) angeschaltet ist, können Sie den Ton so hören, wie er vom optischen Ausgang der
Fernsehgeräts zur Verfügung gestellt wird. Wenn das Fernsehgerät ein (terrestrisches) DTV-Signal anzeigt, überträgt das
Fernsehgerät 5.1-Kanalton an den Receiver des Heimkinosystems. Wenn es sich bei der Signalquelle um eine digitale Komponente
wie beispielsweise einen DVD-Player handelt, der über HDMI an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist, kann der Receiver des
Heimkinosystems nur 2-Kanalton wiedergeben.
N Bei Verwendung von Media Play wird der Ton über den Receiver möglicherweise nicht korrekt ausgegeben.
N Bei Betrieb über den Empfänger bestehen Einschränkungen hinsichtlich der PIP-Funktion und der Menüs für die Audfiofunktionen
(MTS, bevorzugte Sprache).
N Wenn es zu einer Unterbrechnung der Stromversorgung des Fernsehgeräts kommt, wenn der Empfänger angeschaltet (Ein)
ist (z. B. durch Herausziehen des Netzkabels oder einen Stromausfall), ist möglicherweise Lautsprecher auswählen auf Ext.
Lautsprecher gesetzt, wenn Sie das Fernsehgerät wieder anschalten. (siehe Seite 21)
Fehlerbehebung für Anynet
+
Symptom Lösung
Anynet
+
funktioniert nicht. • Überprüfen Sie, ob das Gerät Anynet
+
-tauglich ist. Das Anynet
+
-System unterstützt nur
Anynet
+
-fähige Geräte.
• Schließen Sie nur einen Receiver (Heimkinosystem) an.
• Prüfen Sie, ob das Netzkabel des Anynet
+
-Geräts richtig angeschlossen ist.
• Prüfen Sie die Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3-Kabelverbindungen des Anynet
+
-Geräts.
• Prüfen Sie, ob Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) im Setupmenü von Anynet
+
aktiviert ist Ein.
• Überprüfen Sie, ob die Fernbedienung im TV-Modus arbeitet.
• Prüfen Sie, ob es sich um eine ausschließlich für Anynet
+
geeignete Fernbedienung handelt.
• Anynet
+
funktioniert unter bestimmten Umständen nicht. (Kanalsuche, Bedienung von Media
Play, Plug&Play usw.)
• Stellen Sie nach dem Anschließen oder Entfernen des HDMI 1.3-Kabels sicher, dass die Geräte
wieder gesucht werden, oder schalten Sie das TV-Gerät aus und wieder ein.
• Überprüfen Sie, ob die Anynet
+
-Funktion des Anynet
+
-Geräts eingeschaltet ist.
Ich möchte Anynet
+
starten. • Prüfen Sie, ob das Anynet
+
-Gerät ordnungsgemäß an das Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist, und
kontrollieren Sie zudem, ob Anynet
+
(HDMICEC) im Setupmenü von Anynet+ aktiviert (Ein) ist.
• Drücken Sie die TV-Taste auf der TV-Fernbedienung, um zu TV zu wechseln. Drücken Sie
dann die TOOLS-Taste, um das Anynet
+
-Menü anzuzeigen und die gewünschte Menüoption
auszuwählen.
Ich möchte Anynet+ beenden. • Wählen Sie im Anynet
+
-Menü die Option Fernsehen.
• Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE auf der TV-Fernbedienung, und wählen Sie ein Gerät, bei dem
es sich nicht um ein Anynet
+
handelt. (Beachten Sie, dass die Kanaltaste nur funktioniert, wenn
kein in den Tuner integriertes Anynet
+
-Gerät angeschlossen ist.)
Die Meldung “Connecting
to Anynet
+
-Gerät (Verbinden
mit Anynet
+
-Gerät) wird
angezeigt.
• Sie können die Fernbedienung nicht verwenden, während Sie Anynet
+
konfigurieren oder in
einen anderen Anzeigemodus wechseln.
• Verwenden Sie die Fernbedienung, wenn das Konfigurieren von Anynet
+
oder das Ändern des
Anzeigemodus abgeschlossen ist.
Keine Wiedergabe mit dem
Anynet
+
- Gerät.
• Die Wiedergabefunktion kann nicht verwendet werden, wenn der Plug & Play-Vorgang läuft.
Das angeschlossene Gerät
wird nicht angezeigt.
• Prüfen Sie, ob das Gerät die Anynet
+
-Funktionen unterstützt.
• Prüfen Sie, ob das HDMI 1.3-Kabel ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wurde.
• Prüfen Sie, ob Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) im Setupmenü von Anynet+ aktiviert (Ein) wurde.
• Suchen Sie noch mal nach Anynet+-Geräten.
• Sie können Anynet
+
-Geräte nur mithilfe eines HDMI 1.3-Kabels verbinden. Einige HDMI-Kabel
unterstützen möglicherweise keine Anynet
+
-Funktionen.
• Wenn es durch eine Störung (z. B. Trennen des HDMI-Kabels, des Netzkabels oder
Stromausfall) zu einer Beendigung kommt, wiederholen Sie die Gerätesuche.
Das Fernsehprogramm kann
nicht aufgezeichnet werden.
• Prüfen Sie, ob der Antennenstecker des Aufnahmegeräts ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen ist.
Die Ausgabe des Fernsehtons
erfolgt über den Receiver.
• Schließen Sie das Glasfaserkabel an das Fernsehgerät und den Receiver an.
U Navig. EEingabe R Zurück
Fernsehen
Geräteliste
Aufnahme : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Empfänger : Ein
Einstellungen
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:38:55 PMDeutsch - 49
Aktivieren der Content Library
Mit der Content Library können Sie die Inhalte im Fernsehgerät oder auf dem USBSpeicher anzeigen und abspielen.
1. Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die
Option Anwendung, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Content Library, und
drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE. Das Hauptmenü der Content Library wird
angezeigt.
O Drücken Sie die CONTENT-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das Hauptmenü
der Content Library anzuzeigen.
3. Drücken Sie die Taste ◄ oder ►, um eines der Symbole (Galerie, Kochen, Kinder,
Wellness, Andere, Management der Inhalte) auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann
die Taste ENTERE.
N Das ausgewählte Element wird wiedergegeben.
❑ Verwenden der Fernbedienungstasten im Menü Content Library
Taste Vorgang
▲/▼/◄/► Cursor bewegen und Elemente auswählen.
ENTERE Markiertes Element auswählen.
RETURN Zurück zum vorherigen Menü.
EXIT Beenden Sie die aktuelle Funktion und kehren Sie zum Hauptmenü der Content Library zurück.
Farbtasten Die Schaltflächen für Funktionen werden auf den entsprechenden Seiten beschrieben.
Sie können die Lautstärke der wiedergegebenen Inhalte einstellen.
CONTENT Starten oder beenden Sie den Content Library Modus.
N Wenn Sie die Lautstärketaste oder MMUTE drücken, wird kein Bildschirmmenü angezeigt, aber die Funktion wird entsprechend
ausgeführt.
N Um in den TV-Modus zurückzuwechseln, drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Taste P .
N DIE CONTENT LIBRARY ENTHÄLT NUR TEXTE, GRAFIKEN, BILDER, MULTIMEDIA UND WEITERE MATERIALIEN
FÜR INFORMATIONS- UND SONSTIGE ZWECKE. DAS MATERIAL IN DER CONTENT LIBRARY WURDE GEÄNDERT
UND WIRD STÄNDIG ÜBERARBEITET UND AKTUALISIERT. DAS MATERIAL IN DER CONTENT LIBRARY IST
NICHT UNBEDINGT FÜR JEDES PUBLIKUM GEEIGNET.
N DIE INFORMATIONEN IN DER CONTENT LIBRARY WERDEN OHNE MÄNGELGEWÄHR ZUR VERFÜGUNG
GESTELLT. OBWOHL DIE IHNEN IN DER CONTENT LIBRARYOBWOHL DIE IHNEN IN DER CONTENT LIBRARY ZU
VERFÜGUNG GESTELLTEN INHALTE VON QUELLEN STAMMEN ODER ZUSAMMENGESTELLT WERDEN, DIE WIR
FÜR ZUVERLÄSSIG ERACHTEN, KANN UND WILL SAMSUNG KEINE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ÜBERNEHMEN FÜR
DIE RICHTIGKEIT, GÜLTIGKEIT, PÜNKTLICHKEIT, LEGALITÄT ODER VOLLSTÄNDIGKEIT DER INFORMATIONEN
ODER DATEN, DIE FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK ZUR VERFÜGUNG GESTELLT WERDEN.
UNTER KEINEN UMSTÄNDEN (AUCH NICHT BEI FAHRLÄSSIGKEIT) HAFTEN SAMSUNG ODER DER
RECHTEINHABER VERTRAGLICH ODER GESETZLICH FÜR DIREKTE ODER INDIREKTE SCHÄDEN, FÜR
NEBENSCHÄDEN UND FOLGESCHÄDEN,ANWALTSGE BÜHREN, AUSLAGEN UND SONSTIGE SCHÄDEN, DIE
ALS FOLGE VON ODER IM ZUSAMMENHANG MIT SOLCHEN INFORMATIONEN AUS DER CONTENT LIBRARY
ODER DEREN VERWENDUNG AUFTRETEN. DIES IST AUCH DANN DER FALL, WENN SAMSUNG AUF DIE
MÖGLICHKEIT SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE.
Content Library
Anwendung
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Content Library
Internet@TV
Home-Network-Center
< >
Kochen Kinder
Galerie
Galerie
Content Library
Wellness Andere
Zurück Beenden
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:38:56 PMDeutsch - 50
Verwenden der Bibliothek der Inhalte
❑ Galerie
Mit dieser Funktion starten Sie eine Diashow mit hochauflösenden Bildern und Hintergrundmusik. Mithilfe der Galeriefunktion Ihres
Fernsehgeräts können Sie die Atmosphäre Ihres Heims ändern.
N Wenn Sie auf die INFO-Taste drücken, werden der Name des Künstlers sowie genaue Informationen zu jedem Bild angezeigt
(zurzeit liegen Informationen nur auf Englisch vor).
N Sie können diese Diashow jederzeit durch Drücken der ENTERE-Taste anhalten.
N Das Urheberrecht für die Inhalte der Galerie sowie die weiteren entsprechenden Rechte sind Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc.
vorbehalten.
❑ Kochen
Hiermit öffnen Sie verschiedene Rezepte, die Sie dann schrittweise befolgen können. Freuen Sie sich auf diese Inhalte, denn so
erhalten Sie zahlreiche Anregungen für gutes Essen.
N Die Rezepte aus dem Abschnitt Kochen auf dem Samsung-Fernseher basieren auf den von Anness Publishing veröffentlichten
Rezepten.
N Das Urheberrecht für die Inhalte unter “Kochen” sowie die weiteren entsprechenden Rechte sind Practical Pictures vorbehalten.
❑ Kinder
Hierbei handelt sich um Lerninhalte und interaktive Inhalte, die Kinder regelmäßig schauen dürfen. Freuen Sie sich auf die
Geschichten, Songs und Spiele mit Boowa und Kwala.
N Das Urheberrecht für die Inhalte unter “Kinder” sowie die weiteren entsprechenden Rechte sind UpToTen vorbehalten.
❑ Wellness
Diese nützlichen Inhalte für die Gesundheitspflege umfassen Dehnübungen und Musik, die Ihrer ganzen Familie gut tun.
❑ Management der Inhalte
Eigene Inhalte
Die Verwendung der Inhalte erfolgt in gleicher Weise wie die der Inhalte im Fernsehgerät. Auch können Sie verschiedene Inhalte
löschen und widergeben.
USB
Sie können Inhalte auf einen USB-Speicher herunterladen und diese auf Ihrem Fernsehgerät abspielen. Der Inhalt des externen
USB-Geräts wird direkt abgespielt.
N Media Play unterstützt ausschließlich USB-Massenspeichergeräte vom Typ MSC (Mass Storage Class). MSC-Geräte sind
Massenspeicher zur Übertragung von Daten. Beispiele für MSC sind Thumb-Laufwerke und Flash Card-Lesegeräte sowie USB
HDD (USB-HUB wird nicht unterstützt).
N Wenn Sie ein Spiel mit einem externen SB-Speicher spielen, können Sie (je nach Spiel) Ihre Spieldaten speichern. Entfernen
Sie niemals den USB-Speicher, solange Daten gespeichert werden, da auf diese Weise Daten verloren gehen können.
N Herunterladen neuer Inhalte
Neue bzw. andere als die eingebauten Inhalte können Sie kostenlos über die Website Samsung.com beziehen. Wenn Sie
kostenpflichtige Inhalte herunterladen, benötigen Sie dafür die UDN-Nummer. Überprüfen Sie vor dem Herunterladen eines
neuen Inhaltselements die UDN-Nummer.
1. Wechseln Sie zur Website unter www.samsung.com.
2. Wählen Sie auf der Seite zum Herunterladen von Inhalten einen Inhaltsbereich aus.
3. Laden Sie den Inhalt auf den USB-Speicher.
4. Wechseln Sie zum Hauptmenü der Content Library. Drücken Sie dazu auf die CONTENT-Taste oder wählen Sie Content
Library (Menü → Anwendung → Content Library).
5. Stecken Sie den USB-Speicher in den USB-Anschluss seitlich am Fernsehgerät.
6. Sie können das Unterelement des Inhalts anzeigen, das Sie heruntergeladen haben.
7. Wählen Sie ein Inhaltselement aus und drücken Sie die Eingabetaste.
8. Sie können das gewählte Inhaltselement abspielen.
Einrichtung
• Laufzeit für Bildschirmschoner → 10min. / 20min. / 40min. / 1 Stunde
Wählen Sie die Wartezeit bis zum Aktivieren des Bildschirmschoners.
• UDN speichern (UDN = Eindeutige Gerätenummer)
Bei der angezeigten 18-stelligen Zahl handelt es sich um die Gerätenummer.
Sie können die USN auf Ihrem USB-Speicher ablegen.
N NTFS-formatierte USB-Speicher unterstützen keine Möglichkeiten, um UDN zu speichern. Wir empfehlen, ein USBSpeichergerät mit FAT-Formatierung zu verwenden.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:38:57 PMDeutsch - 51
Sie können verschiedene Internetdienste mit nützlichen Informationen und Unterhaltungsinhalten verwenden. Bei Problemen mit
einem Widget-Dienst wenden Sie sich an den Anbieter der Inhalte. Drücken Sie im Widget die grüne Taste, um Kontaktinformationen
abzurufen, oder lesen Sie auf der Hilfe-Website, um Informationen über Dienstanbieter zu erhalten.
N Je nach Region wird möglicherweise nur Englisch als Sprache des Widget unterstützt.
N Diese Funktion wird, je nach Land, möglicherweise nicht unterstützt.
Erste Schritte mit Internet@TV
Internet@TV ist ein integrierter Internet- und Fernsehspaß auf der Grundlage der Yahoo! ® Widget Engine. Mit dem Internet@
TV-Dienst Ihres Fernsehgeräts können Sie Aktienkurse im Auge behalten, Fotos mit Freunden und der Familie austauschen und
aktuelle Nachrichten oder Wetterinformationen abrufen.
N Je nach Netzwerkzustand ist diese Funktion möglicherweise nicht verfügbar. Dann wird das Fernsehgerät automatisch
abgeschaltet. Schalten Sie anderenfalls das Fernsehgerät mit der Netztaste aus.
N Aufgrund der Netzwerkbedingungen kann es bei dieser Funktion zu Verzögerungen oder Unterbrechungen kommen.
Wenn Sie Internet@TV erstmals starten, wird die Grundeinstellung automatisch durchgeführt.
N Zuerst müssen Sie Ihr Netzwerk einrichten. Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren Ihres Netzwerks finden Sie unter “Eingang
einrichten”.
N Sobald Ihr Netzwerk bereit ist, werden Sie von der Software für Internet@TV Schritt für Schritt durch einen Installationsassistenten
geführt.
Internet@TV
Alle über dieses Geräte abrufbaren Inhalte und Dienste gehören Dritten und sind durch gewerbliche Schutzrechte und insbesondere durch
Urheberrechte, Patentrechte und Marken geschützt. Die Inhalte und Dienste sind ausschließlich für Ihren persönlichen und nicht für den
kommerziellen Gebrauch bestimmt. Sie dürfen die Inhalte und die Dienste ohne die Einwilligung des Rechteinhabers nur in der autorisierten Weise
nutzen. Ungeachtet des Vorstehenden, dürfen Sie ohne die ausdrückliche Einwilligung des jeweiligen Rechteinhabers oder des Service-Providers,
die Inhalte oder Dienste weder verändern, kopieren, erneut veröffentlichen, hochladen, zum Abruf bereit halten, versenden, übertragen, übersetzen,
verkaufen, Bearbeitungen davon herstellen, verwerten oder verbreiten, unabhängig davon, in welcher Art und Weise oder über welches Medium der
Inhalt oder die Dienste mit Hilfe dieses Gerätes angezeigt werden.
DIE INHALTE UND DIENSTE WERDEN VON DRITTEN ZUR VERFÜGUNG GESTELLT. SAMSUNG ÜBERNIMMT WEDER AUSDRÜCKLICH
NOCH STILLSCHWEIGEND GEWÄHR FÜR DIE BEREITSTELLUNG DER INHALTE ODER DIENSTE. SAMSUNG SCHLIESST AUSDRÜCKLICH
JEDE STILLSCHWEIGENDE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG AUS UND INSBESONDERE JEDE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR DIE MARKTÜBLICHKEIT
ODER DIE EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK. SAMSUNG STEHT WEDER FÜR DIE FEHLERFREIHEIT, GÜLTIGKEIT,
ZEITGERECHTIGKEIT, RECHTMÄSSIGKEIT ODER VOLLSTÄNDIGKEIT DES INHALTS ODER DER DIENSTE EIN, DIE ÜBER DIESES
GERÄT ZUR VERFÜGUNG GESTELLT WERDEN; UNTER KEINEN UMSTÄNDEN UND INSBESONDERE AUCH NICHT IM FALLE DER
FAHRLÄSSIGKEIT, GLEICH OB AUS VERTRAG ODER DELIKT, HAFTET SAMSUNG FÜR UNMITTELBARE ODER MITTELBARE SCHÄDEN,
FOLGESCHÄDEN, ANWALTSGEBÜHREN, AUFWENDUNGEN ODER IRGENDWELCHE ANDEREN SCHÄDEN, DIE DURCH ODER IN
ZUSAMMENHANG MIT INFORMATIONEN ENTSTEHEN ODER DIE AUS DER BENUTZUNG DER INHALTE ODER DER DIENSTE DURCH SIE
ODER DRITTE ENTSTEHEN, SELBST WENN SAMSUNG AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT EINES SCHADENS HINGEWIESEN WORDEN IST.
Dienste Dritter können jederzeit beendet oder unterbrochen werden und Samsung steht weder dafür ein noch gewährleistet sie, dass Inhalte oder
Dienste über einen Zeitraum dauerhaft verfügbar bleiben. Inhalte und Dienste werden von Dritten über Netzwerke und Übertragungseinrichtungen
übertragen auf die Samsung keinen Zugriff hat. Bezüglich der Inhalte und Dienste, die durch diese Geräte zugänglich gemacht werden schließt
Samsung daher insbesondere jede Verantwortung und Haftung aus, die durch eine Unterbrechung oder Aussetzung eines Inhalts oder eines
Dienstes verursacht wird. Samsung ist für Kundendienst in Verbindung mit Inhalten oder Diensten weder verantwortlich noch haftbar. Alle
Anfragen und Fragen zu den Inhalten oder Diensten sind unmittelbar gegenüber dem jeweiligen Service-Provider für diese Inhalte oder Dienste
geltend zu machen. In jedem Falle haftet Samsung gegenüber seinen Kunden für eine leicht fahrlässige Verletzung wesentlicher Pflichten aus
dem Schuldverhältnis nur der Höhe nach begrenzt auf die bei Vertragsabschluss typischerweise vorhersehbaren Schäden. Darüber hinaus
übernimmt Samsung keine Haftung für eine leicht fahrlässige Verletzung nicht wesentlicher Pflichten aus dem Schuldverhältnis sowie für leichte
Fahrlässigkeit im Übrigen und für Ansprüche, die darauf beruhen, dass ein Mangel bereits bei Abschluss des Vertrages vorhanden war. Die
Haftungsbeschränkung schränkt eine gesetzlich zwingende Haftung nach dem Produkthaftungsgesetz oder eine Haftung für Garantien und eine
Haftung für schuldhaft verursachte Körperschäden nicht ein.
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MENU. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option “Application”, und drücken Sie dann
die Taste ENTERE.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Internet@TV, und
drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
N INTERNET@TV wird gestartet.
O Drücken Sie die Taste INTERNET@ auf der Fernbedienung, um das
INTERNET@TV-Menü anzuzeigen.
3. Der General Disclaimer wird auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. Wählen Sie I accept
oder I do not accept.
N Weitere Informationen zum General Disclaimer finden Sie unter ‘Legal Notice’.
4. Der Begrüßungsbildschirm ist der Einstieg in die geführte Einrichtung von
Internet@TV.
N Wenn Sie Exit Setup wählen, wird dieser Schritt noch einmal ausgeführt, wenn
Sie die Taste INTERNET@ drücken.
N Wählen Sie Let’s get started!
5. Anhand Ihrer Standortauswahl passen die TV-Widgets die Inhalte regional an.
N Wählen Sie Ihr Land aus der Liste aus.
6. Damit Sie Internet@TV nutzen können, müssen Sie die “Datenschutzrichtlinie für das Yahoo!® TV Widget System” akzeptieren.
N Wählen Sie OK, I Accept.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:38:58 PMDeutsch - 52
7. Damit Sie Internet@TV nutzen können, müssen Sie die “Nutzungsbedingungen für das Yahoo!® TV Widget System” akzeptieren.
N Wählen Sie OK, I Accept.
8. Geben Sie Ihren Namen ein, um Ihr Profil anzulegen. Jedes Profil verfügt über
eine eigene Widget-Liste. Sie können für jede Person, die Internet@TV nutzt, ein
eigenes Profil erstellen.
N Geben Sie Ihren Namen ein und wählen Sie Save this name.
N Weitere Informationen finden Sie auf Seite ‘Using the Profile Widget’.
9. Internet@TV testet die Netzwerkverbindung.
N Wenn der Test fehlschlägt, müssen Sie Ihr Netzwerk neu konfigurieren.
N Weitere Informationen finden Sie auf Seite ‘Setting the Network.’
10. Die geführte Einrichtung ist abgeschlossen. Anschließend wird eine Schulung zur
Verwendung von Internet@TV gestartet.
N Wählen Sie Continue, um die Schulung anzuzeigen.
N Wählen Sie Exit setup, um Internet@TV sofort zu nutzen.
N Um die Schulung noch einmal auszuführen, wählen Sie Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial.
11. PDrücken Sie die Taste INTERNET@ auf der Fernbedienung, um die Benutzerschnittstelle von Internet@TV anzuzeigen.
❑ Bildschirmmenüs
Verankerte Fenster
1 Nun wird das Begrüßungsfenster mit Ihrem Profilnamen in der oberen
rechten Ecke angezeigt.
N Warten Sie einen Augenblick, bis das Fenster geschlossen wird.
2 Im Begrüßungsbildschirm werden zwei Fernbedienungstasten
hervorgehoben.
N Wenn Sie auf Ihrer Fernbedienung die blaue Taste (Viewport)
drücken, wechelt die Anzeige zwischen Anzeigefenster und OverlayModus. Bei Verwendung des Anzeigefensters werden Fernseh-
und Videosignale in einem verkleinerten Anzeigefenster neben der
Grafikanzeige dargestellt. Im Overlay- Modus wird die Grafik oberhalb
des Fernseh- oder Videobilds angezeigt.
N Wenn Sie auf Ihrer Fernbedienung die gelbe Taste (Edit Snippet)
drücken, wird ein Hilfefenster angezeigt und das aktive Snippet kann
bearbeitet werden.
3 Drücken Sie zum Starten auf Ihrer Fernbedienung die Taste INTERNET@.
N Die horizontale Liste unten auf Ihrem Fernsehbildschirm wird als das Dock bezeichnet.
N Die Elemente dieser Liste sind die sog. Snippets.
N Bei einem Snippet handelt es sich um ein Element, das ein Fernseh-Widget startet.
N Ein Fernseh-Widget ist eine Internetanwendung, die auf Ihrem Fernseher laufen soll.
N Sie können über die Tasten ◄ oder ► auf der Fernbedienung zwischen den Snippets wechseln.
N Aktiviert ist der äußerst linke Bereich (blau hervorgehoben).
N Im Dock werden die Snippets unter diesen Brennpunkt verschoben.
N Sie starten ein Fernseh-Widget durch Drücken der ENTERE-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, wenn das zugehörige Snippet
aktiviert ist.
N Wenn Sie Snippets hinzufügen, werden diese als Stapel angezeigt, in dem Sie mit den Tasten ▲ und ▼ navigieren können.
N Es gibt im Dock zwei spezielle Fernseh-Widgets : das Profile Widget und das Gallery Widget. Diese beiden können nicht
gelöscht werden.
N Das Dock wird nach einer gewissen Zeit aus der Anzeige herausgeschoben.
Sidebar mode
1 Aktivieren Sie ein Snippet und drücken Sie die ENTERE-Taste, um die
Sidebar mit den Fernseh- Widgets zu öffnen. Das ( ) des FernsehWidget und das Home-Symbol befinden sich oben auf der Sidebar.
2 Das aktuelle Menü wird unterhalb vom Logo für das Fernseh-Widget
angezeigt.
N Wenn Sie zum vorherigen Bildschirm wechseln möchten, wählen Sie
diesen und drücken Sie anschließend auf ENTERE.
N YSie können aber auch die Taste RETURN auf der Fernbedienung
drücken.
3 CDie aktuelle Auswahl wird immer in blauer Farbe hervogehoben. Die
markierte Taste ist aktiviert und durch Drücken von ENTERE führen Sie
die entsprechende Funktion aus.
4 Wenn viele Daten vorhanden sind, gibt es eine Navigation.
N Es werden die aktuelle Seite und die Gesamtzahl der Seiten angezeigt.
N Wechseln Sie durch Drücken von ◄ oder ► von einer Seite zur anderen.
5 Auf der unteren Symbolleiste befinden sich Farbschaltflächen, die der roten, grünen, gelben und blauen Taste der
Fernbedienung entsprechen.
• Rote Taste : Widget schließen.
• Grüne Taste : Einstellungen des Widget ändern.
• Gelbe Taste : Snippets verwalten.
• Blaue Taste : Größe des Videos an das Fenster anpassen oder als Vollbild anzeigen.
N Je nach Widget sind manche Schaltflächen möglicherweise nicht verfügbar.
.@# áëí space
a b c d e f g h i
j k l m n o p q r
s t u v w x y z 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:39:00 PMDeutsch - 53
Bearbeiten von Snippets im Dock
1. Sie können ein Snippet bearbeiten, indem Sie es im Dock aktivieren und dann die gelbe Taste drücken.
2. Das Snippet wechselt dann an zweite Stelle und sein Feld bewegt sich nach oben, sodass der folgende Hilfetext angezeigt wird :
• Löschen (rote Taste) : Fernseh-Widget entfernen.
N Gelöschte Widgets können Sie mit Hilfe der Widget Gallery neu installieren.
• Verschieben (blaue Taste) : Snippets neu anordnen. Drücken Sie zum Blättern die Taste ◄ oder ►. Drücken Sie die gelbe
Taste, um das Widget an der neuen Stelle einzufügen.
• Fertig (gelbe Taste) : Schließen des Menüs Edit Snippet.
Verwenden des Profil-Widget
Mit dem Profil-Widget konfigurieren Sie Ihr Benutzerprofil. Sie können mehrere Profile einrichten, in
denen jeweils eine bestimmte Kombination von Widgets verwaltet wird.
Mit dem Menü Switch Profile können Sie zu einem anderen Benutzerprofil wechseln.
N Wenn Sie ein Profil hinzufügen möchten, schlagen Sie im Abschnitt ‘Administrative Controls’ nach.
Mit HIlfe des Menüs Profile Settings können Sie Profile individuell anpassen und schützen.
• Sie können Benutzerprofilen einen eindeutigen Namen und einen Avatar (ein Bild zur Darstellung
des Profils) zuordnen.
• Der Name und der Avatar des Profils werden im Profil-Snippet im Dock angezeigt.
• Sie können Profile mit Hilfe von Create Profile PIN schützen.
N Wenn Sie den PIN-Code erstmals festlegen, können Sie eine Sicherheitsfrage festlegen.
Mit Hilfe des Menüs für die Profileinstellungen können Sie den Zugriff auf Widgets einschränken.
• Wenn Sie Ihre Profile PIN vergessen, können Sie die Security Question beantworten, die mit Ihrem
Profil verbunden ist.
• Wenn Sie ein Profil beschränken, können Sie keine neuen Widgets installieren. Die Eigentümer-PIN
muss festgelegt sein, um diese Funktion verwenden zu können.
N Informationen zum Festlegen der Eigentümer-PIN finden Sie unter ‘Administrative Controls’.
Mit Hilfe des Menüs System Settings können Sie :
• Ihren Location und Ihre Zip Code (nur USA) einstellen, um die Inhalte an Ihre Region anzupassen.
• Die Schulung wiederholen, die bei der geführten Einrichtung angezeigt wurde.
• Die Option Restore Factory Settings verwenden, um alle Einstellungen und Informationen für das Widget zu löschen.
Mit Hilfe des Menüs Administrative Controls können Sie :
• Den Timeout für den Screen Saver einstellen, um das Einbrennen des Bildschirms zu verhindern.
• Eine Eigentümer-PIN und eine Security Question eingeben, um andere Profile zu kontrollieren.
• Ein neues Profile Create, das mit einer eigenen Kombination von Widgets ausgestattet werden kann.
• Ein vorhandenes Profil Remove.
Vom Profil-Widget aus können Sie sich mit Ihrer Yahoo!-Kennung bei Sign in to Yahoo!® anmelden.
• Wenn Sie über eine Yahoo!-Kennung verfügen, können Sie mit den Fernseh-Widgets von Yahoo! auf Ihre individuellen Inhalte
zugreifen.
• Wenn Sie sich mit Ihrer Yahoo!-Kennung anmelden, werden automatisch alle Fernseh-Widgets von Yahoo! installiert.
• Wenn Sie kein Yahoo!-Konto besitzen, besuchen Sie www.yahoo.com und legen Sie ein Konto an.
• Möglicherweise können Sie sich in einem Land, das Internet@TV nicht unterstützt, nicht mit einer auf der Yahoo-Website erstellten
Kennung anmelden.
❑ Informationen zum Profil-Widget
Drücken Sie die grüne Taste.
Sie können eine kurze Beschreibung des Profile Widget, der Copyright Policy und der Terms of Service sowie der Privacy
Policy anzeigen.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:39:00 PMDeutsch - 54
Verwenden der Yahoo!®-Widget-Galerie
Verwenden Sie die Yahoo!®-Widget-Galerie, um weitere Widgets zu Ihrem Fernsehgerät hinzuzufügen.
Zeigen Sie alle verfügbaren Fernseh-Widgets in den folgenden Kategorien an :
• Latest Widgets : Anzeigen der zuletzt hochgeladenen Widgets.
• Yahoo!® Widgets : Anzeigen der Widgets von Yahoo!®.
• Samsung Widgets : Anzeigen der Widgets von Samsung.
• More Categories : Anzeigen aller Widgets nach Kategorien.
N Um ein Widget zu installieren, navigieren Sie zum Detailfenster und wählen Sie Add Widget to
My Profile. Drücken Sie dann auf ENTERE. Das Widget wird installiert und steht im Dock zur
Verfügung.
❑ Einstellungen für die Widget Gallery
Drücken Sie die grüne Taste.
About Yahoo! Widget Gallery...
Sie können eine kurze Beschreibung der Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service
und der Privacy Policy anzeigen.
Mit Hilfe des Menüs für die Entwicklereinstellungen können Sie ein eigenes Widget erstellen.
Weitere Informationen zum Erstellen eigener Widgets finden Sie auf unserer Entwickerwebsite unter http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/
Verwenden des Wetter-Widget von Yahoo!®
Mit dem Wetter-Widget von Yahoo!® werden Sie über das Wetter bei Ihnen vor Ort und an
einigen bevorzugten Standorten auf dem Laufenden gehalten. Der Inhalt wechselt je nach den
Wetterbedingungen.
• Drücken Sie die grüne Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um das Einstellungsmenü des Wetter-Widget
von Yahoo!® anzuzeigen.
• Vom Einstellungsmenü aus können Sie Städte hinzufügen oder entfernen, für die Sie
Wetterinformationen anzeigen möchten.
Ausgehend vom Menü Settings haben Sie folgende Möglichkeiten :
• Add New City Geben Sie den Namen der Stadt ein. Nach Anzeige der Suchergebnisse wählen Sie
die gewünschte Stadt und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
• Delete City Wählen Sie die Stadt aus der Städteliste aus, die Sie entfernen möchten. Drücken Sie
die Taste ENTERE, um das Löschen zu bestätigen.
• Wechseln des Temperaturanzeigemodus.
Sie können den Temperaturanzeigemodus auf Imperial oder Metric einstellen. Bei Imperial werden
beispielsweise Temperaturen in Fahrenheit und bei Metric in Celsius angezeigt.
❑ Erstellen Sie ein Snippet für ihre bevorzugte Stadt
• Wählen Sie aus der Startseite des Wetter-Widget von Yahoo!® eine Stadt aus und zeigen Sie dafür detaillierte Wetterinformationen
an.
• Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste.
• Wählen Sie den Menübefehl Add Snippet und drücken Sie auf ENTERE, um diese Stadt als Snippet hinzuzufügen.
❑ Delete des Snippet einer Stadt
• Starten Sie das Snippet.
• Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste.
• Wählen Sie die Menüoption Delete Snippet und drücken Sie ENTERE, um das Snippet zu
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:39:01 PMDeutsch - 55
Verwenden des Nachrichten-Widget von Yahoo!®
Das News-Widget von Yahoo!® zeigt aktuelle Schlagzeilen aus den Bereichen Wirtschaft,
Unterhaltung, Politik, Sport, Top Stories und vielen anderen Kategorien an.
Wählen Sie eine Kategorie, innerhalb der Kategorie eine Überschrift und sehen Sie dann die dynamisch
erstellte Nachrichtenzusammenfassung.
Verwenden des Flickr-Widget von Yahoo!®
Mit dem Flickr-Widget erhalten Sie beim Fernsehen Zugriff auf die Fotos von Freunden und
Verwandten. Genießen Sie Ihre Fotos gemeinsam mit Ihrer Familie in einer Diashow auf Ihrem
Großbildschirm.
• Personalisieren Sie das Flickr-Widget durch Anmelden mit Ihrer Yahoo!-Kennung.
• Detaillierte Anweisungen zum Anmelden finden Sie unter “Verwenden des Profil-Widget”.
• Weitere Informationen zu Flickr erhalten Sie auf www.flickr.com.
N Mit Your Photos können Sie Fotos anzeigen, die Sie auf der Flickr-Website registriert haben.
So zeigen Sie Ihre Flickr-Fotos als Diashow an :
• Wählen Sie das Miniaturbild eines Fotos und drücken Sie auf die ENTERE -Taste, um die
Details zum Foto anzuzeigen.
• Wählen Sie den Befehl zum Starten der Diashow und drücken Sie auf die ENTERE-Taste.
So steuern Sie die Anzeige der Diashow :
• Drücken Sie während der Diashow auf die ENTERE-Taste.
• Die Miniaturbilder der Fotos werden am unteren Bildschirmrand angezeigt.
N Wenn die Diashow-Steuerung angezeigt wird, können Sie die Optionen Pause, Play und
Stop verwenden.
N Wenn Sie das Menü wählen und auf ENTERE drücken, werden Informationen zum markierten Foto angezeigt.
• Mit dem Menü Your Sets können Sie Fotos anzeigen, die Sie in Flickr klassifiziert haben.
• Mit dem Menü Explore können Sie in den Fotos auf der Flickr-Website navigieren. Sie können die täglich aktualisierten Fotos
anzeigen.
• Mit Mark as Favorite oder Remove From Favorite können Sie den Inhalt der bevorzugten Fotos verändern.
• Mit dem Befehl Favorite Photos zeigen Sie die Fotos an, die Sie als Favoriten klassifiziert haben.
• Mit der Option Your Contacts können Sie neue Fotos von Freunden und Verwandten anzeigen.
Mit Your Groups können Sie diejenigen Favoritengruppen von der Flickr-Website auswählen, deren Fotos Sie mit der FlickrCommunity teilen möchten.
Um die Einstellungen für das Flickr-Widget von Yahoo!® zu ändern, drücken Sie die grüne Taste Ihrer Fernbedienung.
• Mit Time Per Slide steuern Sie die Geschwindigkeit der Diashow.
• Mit dem Befehl Repeat starten Sie die Diashow von Anfang an neu, wenn das letzte Bild erreicht ist.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:39:02 PMDeutsch - 56
Verwenden des Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!®
Mit dem Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!® können Sie aktuellste Nachrichten und Börseninformationen
abrufen. Drücken Sie die grüne Taste, um Ihre eigenen Aktien einzurichten. Mit Add New Symbol
können Sie den Namen einer neuen Aktie eingeben.
• Wählen Sie aus der Liste der Suchergebnisse die Aktie aus, die Sie hinzufügen möchten. Wählen
Sie dann das Symbol zum Hinzufügen und drücken Sie die ENTERE-Taste, um sie hinzuzufügen.
N Die ausgewählte Aktie wird zur Liste My Stocks hinzugefügt.
• Mit dem Menübefehl Import Symbols From Yahoo!® können Sie Ihr Yahoo!® Finance Portfolio
abrufen.
- Mit dem Befehl Merge Symbols fügen Sie die Symbole auf dem Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!®
bei den Symbolen Ihres Portfolios ein.
- Mit Replace Symbols löschen Sie die Symbole im Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!® und ersetzen
sie durch die Symbole Ihres Portfolios.
• Verwenden Sie den Befehl Display Format, um die Anzeige der Aktienkurse auf Value oder
Percentage einzustellen.
• Erstellen Sie ein Snippet für Ihre bevorzugte Aktie.
- Wählen Sie das Aktiensymbol von der Homepage des Finanz-Widget von Yahoo!® und zeigen
Sie detaillierte Finanzinformationen an.
- Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste.
- Wählen Sie Add Snippet und drücken Sie auf ENTERE, um diese Aktie als Snippet hinzuzufügen.
• Löschen eines Snippet
- Starten Sie das Snippet aus dem Dock.
- Drücken Sie die gelbe Taste.
- Wählen Sie Delete Snippet und drücken Sie ENTERE, um das Snippet zu löschen.
Fehlerbehebung für Internet@TV
Problem Mögliche Lösung
Einige Widget- Dienste
funktionieren nicht.
• Wenden Sie sich an den entsprechenden Dienstanbieter.
• Drücken Sie im Widget die grüne Taste, um Kontaktinformationen abzurufen, oder lesen Sie
auf der Hilfe-Website, um Informationen über Anbieter von Widget-Diensten zu erhalten.
• Siehe Hilfe-Website.
Die Inhalte mancher Widgets
liegen nur in englischer
Sprache vor. Wie kann ich die
Sprache ändern?
• Die Sprache der Widget-Inhalte kann von der Sprache der Benutzerschnittstelle abweichen.
Das hängt vom jeweiligen Dienstanbieter ab.
Nach dem Zurücksetzen auf
die Werkseinstellungen ist
der Yahoo Widget-Dienst
nicht mehr verfügbar und eine
Warnmeldung wird angezeigt.
• Nach dem Zurücksetzen auf die Werkseinstellungen schalten Sie das Fernsehgerät aus und
wieder ein. Starten Sie dann Internet@TV neu.
Ich habe mich im Flickr-Widget
bei meinem Konto angemeldet,
kann aber meine Bilder nicht
sehen.
• Wechseln Sie auf die Yahoo-Website und aktivieren Sie Ihr Flickr-Konto unter Ihrer Yahoo!-
Kennung.
Obwohl ich im Profil-Widget
meinen Standort geändert
habe, gelten weiterhin die alten
Einstellungen.
• Schalten Sie Ihr Fernsehgerät aus und wieder ein. Starten Sie dann Internet@TV neu.
• Genießen Sie die Widget-Dienste für den geänderten Standort.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:39:02 PMDeutsch - 57
Hilfe-Website
Land Website
Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Belgium
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Switzerland
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N Der Zugriff kann später geändert werden.
N In einigen Ländern können die Links abweichen.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:39:03 PMDeutsch - 58
N Diese Funktion wird, je nach Land, möglicherweise nicht unterstützt.
N Bei Problemen mit einem Widget-Dienst wenden Sie sich an den Anbieter der Inhalte. Drücken Sie im Widget die grüne Taste, um
Kontaktinformationen abzurufen, oder lesen Sie auf der Hilfe-Website, um Informationen über Dienstanbieter zu erhalten.
N Je nach Region wird möglicherweise nur Englisch als Sprache des Widget unterstützt.
Erste Schritte mit Internet@TV
Mit Internet@TV erhalten Sie über eine Netzwerkverbindung Zugriff auf die Widget- Dienste von SAMSUNG. Die Inhalte von Internet@
TV richten sich nach dem Angebot der verschiedenen Anbieter. Sie erhalten mit Internet@TV Zugriff auf verschiedene Information wie z.
B. von YouTube.
N Wenn die Schriftart für die Inhalte eines bestimmten Anbieters von Ihrem Fernsehgerät nicht unterstützt wird, ist die Darstellung auf
der Anzeige möglicherweise gestört.
N Die Konfiguration von Widgets und deren Diensten kann sich je nach ausgewähltem Land unterscheiden. Nach dem Wechseln
des Landes schalten Sie das Fernsehgerät aus und wieder ein. Danach können Sie den Widget-Dienst des neuen Landes nutzen.
Wenn Sie das Land auf “Andere” einstellen, kann das Fernsehgerät Ihr Land nicht erkennen. Treffen Sie Ihre Wahl in diesem Fall
direkt aus der Liste der unterstützen Länder heraus.
N Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren für Ihr Land finden Sie unter “Plug-&-Play-Funktion”.
N Aufgrund der Netzwerkbedingungen kann es bei dieser Funktion zu Verzögerungen oder Unterbrechungen kommen.
N Ehe Sie Internet@TV verwenden, müssen Sie das Netzwerk einrichten. Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren Ihres Netzwerks
finden Sie unter “Eingang einrichten”.
Wenn Sie Internet@TV erstmals starten, werden die Grundeinstellungen automatisch durchgeführt. Es dauert eine Weile, bis die
Aktualisierung beendet ist.
1. Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die
Option Application (Anwendung), und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
2. Wählen Sie durch Drücken der Tasten ▲ oder ▼ die Option Internet@TV, und
drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
O Drücken Sie die Taste Internet@TV auf der Fernbedienung, um das Internet@TV -Menü anzuzeigen.
3. Die Benutzervereinbarung wird angezeigt. Wählen Sie Agree (Ich stimme zu), um der Vereinbarung zuzustimmen.
4. Die Statistiken und Analysen werden angezeigt. Wählen Sie Agree (Ich stimme zu), um der Vereinbarung zuzustimmen.
Konfigurieren von Internet@TV
Sie können die Menüs für Single Sign On (SSO), Systemmanagement und Eigenschaften verwenden. Drücken Sie die Taste
▲ oder ▼, um Setup (Konfigurieren) auszuwählen, und drücken Sie dann die Taste ENTERE.
❑ Single Sign On
Sie können dieses Menü verwenden, wenn Sie ein Konto erstellen oder löschen. Mit Hilfe von Single Sign On können Sie die
Informationen über Ihr Konto und das Konto für die Inhaltssite kontrollieren. Sie brauchen sich nicht noch einmal anzumelden.
N Das Konto gilt nur für internet@TV.
Create Account (Konto erstellen)
Sie können ein Konto erstellen und mit der gewünschten Dienstsite verbunden werden.
N Sie können maximal 10 Konten erstellen.
N Der Name des Kontos sollte maximal 10 Zeichen lang sein.
N Wenn es keinen Dienst gibt, für den eine Anmeldung erforderlich ist, können Sie kein Konto erstellen.
Kontenmanagement
• Service Site (Dienstsite) : Sie können die Anmeldeinformation der Dienstsite (wie YouTube) registrieren.
• Change Password (Kennwort ändern) : Ändern Sie das Kennwort Ihres Kontos.
• Delete (Löschen) : Löschen Sie das Konto.
N Um Internet@TV zurückzusetzen, falls Sie das Kennwort Ihres Kontos vergessen haben, drücken Sie die
Fernbedienungstasten in der folgenden Reihenfolge : POWER (Aus) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (Ein). Wenn Sie
diese Funktion verwenden, werden alle Konten gelöscht
Internet@TV
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:39:03 PMDeutsch - 59
❑ Systemkonfiguration
N Ticker Autorun (Ticker-Autostart), Ticker Duration (Ticker-Anzeigedauer) werden je nach Land möglicherweise nicht
unterstützt.
Kennwort der Dienstsperre ändern.
N Der Standard-PIN-Code eines neuen Fernsehgeräts lautet “0-0-0-0”.
N Wenn Sie das Kennwort vergessen haben, drücken Sie die Fernbedienungstasten in der folgenden Reihenfolge, um das
Kennwort auf “0-0-0-0” zurückzusetzen : POWER (Aus) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (Ein).
Service Duration (Dienstanzeigedauer)
Wählen Sie die Dienstanzeigedauer bis zum Aktivieren des Bildschirmschoners.
Ticker Autorun (Ticker-Autostart) → Aus / Ein
Legen Sie fest, ob der Ticker beim Einschalten des Fernsehers automatisch gestartet wird.
Ticker Duration (Tickeranzeigedauer)
Wählen Sie die Dienstanzeigedauer bis zum Aktivieren des Bildschirmschoners.
❑ Eigenschaften
Informationen zu Internet@TV anzeigen.
Sie können die Geschwindigkeit Ihres Internet TV-Dienstes mit Messen der Geschwindigkeit von Internet@TV messen.
Verwenden des Internet@TV-Dienstes
In einem Widget mit mehreren Kategorienmenüs können Sie den Inhalt der Kategorienmenüs mit Hilfe der Tasten ◄ und ► anzeigen.
Anmeldung beim Konto
1. Drücken Sie die rote Taste.
2. Wählen Sie das gewünschte User account (Benutzerkonto) und drücken Sie dann die ENTERE-Taste.
3. Geben Sie das Kennwort ein.
N Nach erfolgreicher Anmeldung wird das Benutzerkonto auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt.
N Vor dem Anmelden sollten Sie mindestens ein Konto registriert haben. Wenn Sie ein Konto erstellen möchten, lesen Sie nach
unter ‘Konfigurieren von Internet@TV’.
Verwenden der Widget-Galerie
Sie können für das vorhandene Widget Run Service (Dienst starten), Lock (Sperren), Install Service (Dienst installieren)
verwenden, und Sie können eine Beschreibung von Widget-Diensten anzeigen, die nicht installiert sind.
In Internet@TV können Sie verschiedene Widgets hinzufügen und nutzen, die Ihnen von Dienstanbietern zur Verfügung gestellt
werden. Welche Widgets dies sind, hängt von Ihrem Inhaltsanbieter ab.
• Run Service (Dienst starten) : Starten des Widget-Dienstes.
• Lock (Sperren) : Aktivieren der Dienstsperre.
• Install Service (Dienst installieren) (oder Delete Service (Dienst löschen)) : Installieren oder Löschen des Widget-Dienstes.
Verwenden des YouTube-Widget
Sie können Filme von YouTube sehen. Wenn Sie in YouTube ein Konto besitzen,
registrieren Sie die Kontoinformationen mit Hilfe des Kontenmanagement. Dann
können Sie die Kategorie “Eigene Favoriten” verwenden.
N Das Menü kann über einen Webdienst geändert werden.
N Es kann Inhalte geben, die für Kinder ungeeignet sind. In diesem Fall
verwenden Sie die Funktionen zum Lock (Sperren) in der Widget-Galerie.
Xz~*atppo
_z{*]lpo
Xz~*[z{wl}
Xz~*Ot~n~~po
_z{*Qlz}tp~
Xz~*Wtyvpo
Xz~*]p~{zxopo
Qpl}po
_zol <:B
^ppvtyr*U~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp}
atp~*E*C;
M}plvtyr*Yp~*Lwp}~*m*P8Xltw
atp~*E*C;
Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx
atp~*E*CE=A
Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:39:04 PMDeutsch - 60
Fehlerbehebung für Internet@TV
Problem Mögliche Lösung
Einige Widget-Dienste funktionieren nicht. Wenden Sie sich an den entsprechenden Dienstanbieter.
Drücken Sie im Widget die grüne Taste, um Kontaktinformationen abzurufen, oder
lesen Sie die Hilfe-Website, um Informationen über Dienstanbieter zu erhalten.
Siehe Hilfe-Website.
Worin besteht der Vorteil von Single Sign
On?
Wenn Sie ein Konto erstellen und Ihre Anmeldeinformationen registrieren, erhalten Sie
ohne weitere Anmeldung Zugriff auf individualisierte Inhalte.
Nach einem Netzwerkfehler kann ich keine
Menü außer “Einstellungen” verwenden.
Wenn Ihre Netzwerkverbindung nicht aktiv ist, sind Ihre Dienste möglicherweise nur
eingeschränkt funktionsfähig. Deshalb können Sie nur die Einstellungen verwenden,
um die Internetverbindung wieder zu reparieren.
Besteht die Möglichkeit, dass YouTubeInhalte für Erwachsene angezeigt werden?
Diese Inhalte werden eigentlich in der Menüliste herausgefiltert. Aber mit der
Suchfunktion können sie angezeigt werden. In diesem Fall verwenden Sie die SperrFunktion der Widget-Galerie, um den Dienst zu sperren.
Hilfe-Website
Land Website
Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Belgium
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Switzerland
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N Der Zugriff kann später geändert werden.
N In einigen Ländern können die Links abweichen.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:39:04 PMDeutsch - 61
Home-Network-Center
Informationen zum Home-Network-Center
Das Home-Network-Center verbindet Fernsehgeräte und Mobiltelefone über ein Netzwerk. Sie können die eingegangenen Anrufe,
Textnachrichten und Zeitpläne vom Mobiltelefon auf dem Fernseher anzeigen. Verwenden Sie hierfür das Home-Network-Center.
Außerdem können Sie die auf Mobiltelefonen gespeicherten Medieninhalte wie Videos, Photos und Musik abspielen, indem Sie sie über
das Netzwerk in den Fernseher importieren.
N Sofern das Gerät die DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller)-Funktion unterstützt, ist die Home-Network-Center-Funktion verfügbar.
N Diese Funktion soll die Kompatibilität mit einem Samsung-Mobiltelefon sicherstellen, das zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt auf den
Markt kommen soll. Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie unter www.samsung.com, oder wenden Sie sich an ein SamsungCallcenter. Auf dem Mobilgerät muss möglicherweise zusätzliche Software installiert werden. Weitere Informationen hierzu finden
Sie im jeweiligen Benutzerhandbuch.
❑ Verbinden mit dem Home-Network-Center
Weitere Informationen zu den Einstellungen für Ihr Netzwerk finden Sie unter ‘Eingang einrichten’.
Verbinden mit einem Ad-hoc-Netzwerk im WLAN
1. Schließen Sie den Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter an den USB1(HDD)- oder den USB2-Anschluss des Fernsehgeräts an.
2. Weitere Informationen zum Konfigurieren Ihres Ad-hoc-Netzwerks finden Sie unter Eingang einrichten.
N Informationen zum Konfigurieren der Netzeinstellungen des Mobiltelefons finden Sie im Handbuch für das Mobiltelefon.
3. Richten Sie die IP-Adresse, die SSID und das Kennwort für das Mobiltelefon mit Hilfe des Netzwerknamens (SSID) und des
Sicherheitsschlüssels (Kennwort) bei den Adhoc- Einstellungen für das Mobiltelefon ein, die auf dem Fernseher angezeigt
werden.
Verbindung über einen IP-Sharer (Kabel/drahtlos)
1. Schließen Sie den LAN-Anschluss des Fernsehgeräts mit dem LAN-Kabel an den IP-Sharer (Kabel/drahtlos) an, oder verbinden
Sie den USB1 (HDD) oder USB2- Anschluss des Fernsehgeräts TV mit dem Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter.
N Informationen zum Konfigurieren des Sharers (Kabel/drahtlos) und des Mobiltelefons finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des
entsprechenden Geräts.
Home-Network-Center
Seitenverkleidung
des Fernsehgeräts
WLAN-Adapter von
Samsung
Mobiltelefon
oder
WLAN-Adapter
von Samsung
drahtloser IP-Sharer
Seitenverkleidung
des Fernsehgeräts
Mobiltelefon
oder
LAN-Kabel
WLAN-Adapter
von Samsung
Seitenverkleidung
des Fernsehgeräts
Mobiltelefon
oder
LAN-Kabel
drahtloser IP-Sharer
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:39:09 PMDeutsch - 62
Einrichten des Home-Network-Centers
❑ Message / Medien
Hiermit zeigen Sie eine Liste der Mobiltelefone an, mit denen Sie die Nachrichten-
oder Medienfunktion in Verbindung mit diesem Fernsehgerät verwenden können.
N Die Medienfunktion steht auch in anderen Mobilgeräten zur Verfügung, sofern
diese DLNA DMC unterstützen.
Erlaubt
Hiermit lassen Sie das Mobiltelefon zu.
Verboten
Hiermit sperren Sie das Mobiltelefon.
Löschen
Hiermit löschen Sie das Mobiltelefon aus der Liste.Mit dieser Funktion wird aber nur der Name aus der Liste entfernt.
N Wenn das entfernte Mobilgerät wieder angeschaltet wird oder eine Verbindung zum Fernseher herstellen möchten, wird es
möglicherweise wieder in der Liste angezeigt.
❑ Setup
Message → Ein / Aus
Hiermit können Sie bestimmen, ob die Nachrichtenfunktion (eingehende Anrufe,
Textnachrichten und Zeitpläne auf dem Mobiltelefon) verwendet werden soll.
Medien → Ein / Aus
Hiermit können Sie wählen, ob die Medienfunktion zum Abspielen der Inhalte
(Videos, Fotos, Musik) vom Telefon verwendet werden soll.
TV-Name
Sie können den Namen des Fernsehers so festlegen, dass Sie ihn im Mobilgerät
einfach finden können.
N Wenn Sie Ben.-Eingabe wählen, können Sie den Namen des Fernsehers mit
der Bildschirmtastatur eingeben.
Zurück Beenden
Home-Network-Center
111-1234-5671 : Autor.
111-1234-5672 : Autor.
111-1234-5673 : Vrboten
111-1234-5674 : Vrboten
Message
Medien
Setup
Zurück Beenden
Home-Network-Center
Message : Ein
Medien : Ein
TV-Name : TV
Message
Medien
Setup
Verwenden der Meldungsfunktion
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie die eingegangenen Anrufe, Textnachrichten und Zeitpläne vom Mobiltelefon im Alarmfenster anzeigen,
während Sie das Fernsehgerät verwenden.
N Um dieses Alarmfenster für die Message zu deaktivieren, stellen Sie bei den
Einstellungen des Home-Network-Center die Option Message auf Aus.
N Das Alarmfenster erscheint für 20 Sekunden. Wenn Sie keine Taste drücken oder
Abbrechen wählen, wird das Fenster im Abstand von 5 Minuten bis zu dreimal
angezeigt.
N Wenn OK gewählt wird oder wenn OK während der Anzeige der Nachricht nicht
dreimal gewählt wird, wird die Nachricht gelöscht. Die Nachricht wird nicht vom
Mobiltelefon gelöscht.
N Das einfache Alarmfenster kann angezeigt werden, während Sie Anwendungen wie
Media Play oder Contents Library usw. verwenden.
N Um den Inhalt der Nachricht zu sehen, schalten Sie in diesem Fall auf
Fernsehmodus um.Wenn eine Nachricht von einem unbekannten Mobiltelefon
angezeigt wird, wählen Sie unter Message im Home-Network-Center das
Mobiltelefon und wählen Sie dann Verboten, um das Telefon zu sperren.
❑ Nachrichtenansicht
Wenn eine neue Textnachricht (SMS) ankommt, während Sie fernsehen, wird das Alarmfenster geöffnet. Wenn Sie auf OK klicken,
wird der Inhalt der Nachricht angezeigt.
N Sie können die Anzeigeeinstellungen für den Inhalt von Textnachrichten (SMS) auf dem Mobiltelefon konfigurieren.
Anweisungen finden im Handbuch des Mobiltelefons.
N Manche Sonderzeichen werden möglicherweise als Leerzeichen oder unlesbar angezeigt.
❑ Alarm bei eingehendem Anruf
Wenn ein Anruf eingeht, während Sie fernsehen, wird das Alarmfenster geöffnet.
❑ Kalenderalarm
Während Sie fernsehen, wird das Alarmfenster geöffnet, um den registrierten Kalender anzuzeigen.
N Sie können die Anzeigeeinstellungen für den Kalender auf dem Mobiltelefon konfigurieren.
Anweisungen finden im Handbuch des Mobiltelefons.
N Manche Sonderzeichen werden möglicherweise als Leerzeichen oder unlesbar angezeigt.
husband
SMS
Neue Nachricht
eingegangen
Details anzeigen?
OK Abbrechen
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:39:14 PMDeutsch - 63
Verwenden der Medienfunktion
Ein Alarmfenster wird geöffnet, in dem der Benutzer informiert wird, dass die vom
Mobiltelefon gesendeten Medieninhalte (Videos, Photos, Musik) auf dem Fernseher
angezeigt werden.
Der Inhalt wird automatisch 3 Sekunden nach dem Öffnen des Alarmfensters
angezeigt.
Wenn Sie bei geöffnetem Alarmfenster auf RETURN oder EXIT drücken, werden die
Medieninhalte nicht wiedergegeben.
N Um die Übertragung von Medieninhalten des Mobiltelefons zu deaktivieren,
müssen Sie im Home-Network-Center die Option Medien unter Setup
deaktivieren (Aus).
N Die Inhalte können je nach Auflösung und Format möglicherweise nicht auf dem Fernseher angezeigt werden.
❑ Regler für Musikwiedergabe
Taste Vorgang
◄/►
• Cursor bewegen und Elemente auswählen.
• Bei der Wiedergabe einer Filmdatei : Schneller Vor- oder Rücklauf durch den Film in
Schritten.
ENTER
• Durch Drücken der ENTERE-Taste während der Wiedergabe wird die Wiedergabe
unterbrochen.
• Durch Drücken der ENTERE-Taste während der Unterbrechung wird die Wiedergabe
fortgesetzt.
RETURN Zurück zum vorherigen Menü.
EXTRAS Ausführen verschiedener Funktionen aus dem Foto-, Musik- und Filmmenü.
INFO Anzeigen von Dateiinformationen.
EXIT Beenden des Modus Media Play und Rückkehr in den TV-Modus.
N Die Tasten ENTERE und ◄/► sind je nach Medieninhalt möglicherweise deaktiviert.
N Sie können die Medienwiedergabe mit dem Mobiltelefon steuern. Weitere Informationen hierzu finden Sie im jeweiligen
Benutzerhandbuch.
Medienwiedergabe aus “Unbekanntes Gerät 13”
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:39:15 PMDeutsch - 64
Fortsetzung...
Videotextfunktion
Die meisten Fernsehsender bieten über Videotext Informationen an. Auf der Videotext- Indexseite finden Sie Verwendungshinweise
zum Videotext. Darüber hinaus können Sie über die Tasten der Fernbedienung nach Bedarf verschiedene Optionen einstellen.
N Für die korrekte Anzeige von Videotextinformationen muss der Senderempfang einwandfrei sein. Andernfalls können Informationen
unvollständig sein oder einige Seiten nicht angezeigt werden.
1 : (exit)
Videotextanzeige beenden.
2 6 (index)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die Videotext-Indexseite (Inhaltsverzeichnis)
anzuzeigen.
3 5 (reveal)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um verborgenen Text anzuzeigen (z. B. Antworten bei
Quizsendungen). Drücken Sie die Taste erneut, um den Videotext auszublenden.
4 4 (size)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um Videotext in doppelt so großen Buchstaben in der
oberen Hälfte des Bildschirms anzuzeigen. Drücken Sie die Taste erneut, um
den Text in der unteren Hälfte des Bildschirms anzuzeigen. Zum Ausblenden des
Videotextes drücken Sie die Taste erneut.
5 / (teletext on/mix)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um den Videotextmodus zu aktivieren, nachdem Sie einen
Sender ausgewählt haben, der Videotext anbietet. Drücken Sie die Taste zweimal, um
die Videotextinformationen gleichzeitig mit der aktuellen Sendung auf dem Bildschirm
einzublenden.
6 8 (store)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um Videotextseiten zu speichern.
7 1 (sub-page)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um eine verfügbare untergeordnete Seite anzuzeigen.
8 2 (page up)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die nächste Videotextseite anzuzeigen.
9 3 (page down)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die vorherige Videotextseite anzuzeigen.
0 0 (mode)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um den Videotextmodus auszuwählen (LISTE/FLOF) Wenn
Sie diese Taste im Modus LIST (Liste) drücken, wird in den Listenspeichermodus
umgeschaltet. Im Listenspeichermodus können Sie mit der Taste 8(store)
Videotextseiten in einer Liste speichern.
! 9 (hold)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um bei einer angezeigten Seite, die mit weiteren,
untergeordnete Seiten verknüpft ist, das automatische Umblättern zu verhindern.
Drücken Sie zum Fortfahren die Taste erneut.
@ 7 (cancel)
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um beim Suchen nach einer Seite die Sendung anzuzeigen.
# Farbtasten (rot/grün/gelb/blau)
Wenn der Sender das FASTEXT-System verwendet, sind die verschiedenen Themen
auf den Videotextseiten farbig gekennzeichnet und können mit den Farbtasten auf
der Fernbedienung angewählt werden. Drücken Sie die Farbtaste, die dem Thema entspricht, das Sie anzeigen möchten. Die
Seite wird mit anderen farbig markierten Informationen angezeigt, die auf dieselbe Art ausgewählt werden können. Drücken Sie die
entsprechende Farbtaste, um die vorherige oder nächste Seite anzuzeigen.
N Sie können die Videotextseiten durch Drücken der Zifferntasten auf der Fernbedienung wechseln.
Empfehlungen für den Betrieb
1
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:39:15 PMDeutsch - 65
Die Videotextseiten sind in sechs Kategorien unterteilt :
Abschnitt Inhalt
A Gewählte Seitennummer
B Senderkennung
C Aktuelle Seitenzahl oder Suchhinweise
D Datum und Uhrzeit
E Text
F Statusinformationen
FASTEXT-Informationen.
N Videotextinformationen sind oft auf mehrere, aufeinander folgende Seiten verteilt, die
wie folgt aufgerufen werden können :
- Eingabe der Seitennummer
- Auswahl eines Titels in einer Liste
- Auswahl einer farbigen Überschrift (FASTEXT-System)
O Drücken Sie die Taste TV, um Videotext zu beenden.
Spezifikation (VESA) der Wandhalterung
Montieren Sie die Wandhalterung an einer soliden Wand, die senkrecht zum Boden steht.
Bei Installation auf anderen Trägermaterialien wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Fachhändler.
Bei Montage an einer Decke oder schrägen Wand kann es herunterfallen und zu Verletzungen kommen.
Produktfamilie Zoll
VESASpezifikation
(A * B)
Standard
Schraube
Menge
LCD-TV
19" ~22" 100 * 100
M4
4
23"~29" 200 * 100
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6
46"~55" 400 * 400
57"~70" 800 * 400 M8
80" ~ 1400 * 800
PDP-TV
42"~ 50" 400 * 400
M8 4
58"~ 63" 600 * 400
70" ~ 800 * 400
80" ~ 1400 * 800
N Die von uns empfohlenen Standardabmessungen der Wandhalterung finden Sie in der obigen Tabelle.
N Beim Kauf unserer Wandhalterung erhalten Sie ein detailliertes Installationshandbuch sowie alle für die Montage erforderlichen Teile.
N Verwenden Sie keine Schrauben, die länger sind als hier angegeben, da damit innen liegende Bauteile des Fernsehers beschädigt
werden können.
N Bei Wandhalterungen, die nicht der VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schrauben entsprechen, kann die Länge der Schrauben je
nach Spezifikation unterschiedlich sein.
N Verwenden Sie keine Schrauben, die nicht der VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schrauben entsprechen.
Ziehen Sie die Schrauben nicht zu fest an, weil Sie so das Produkt beschädigen könnten oder das Produkt dadurch herunterfallen
könnte, was zu Verletzungen führen kann.
N Samsung haftet nicht bei derartigen Unfällen.Samsung haftet nicht für Geräteschäden oder Verletzungen, wenn eine
Wandhalterung verwendet wird, die nicht dem VESAStandard entspricht oder nicht spezifiziert ist, oder wenn der Verbraucher die
Installationsanleitung für das Produkt nicht befolgt.
N Unsere 57- und 63-Zoll-Modelle entsprechen nicht der VESA-Spezifikation.
Verwenden Sie für dieses Modell deshalb unseren speziellen Wandmontagesatz.
N Bei der Montage dieses Fernsehgeräts dürfen Sie eine Neigung von 15 Grad nicht überschreiten.
Installieren Sie die Wandhalterung nicht bei angeschaltetem Fernsehgerät.
Sie könnten dabei einen Stromschlag erhalten und sich verletzen.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:39:16 PMDeutsch - 66
Vorbereitung für die Befestigung der Wandhalterung an der Wand
1. Befestigen Sie die Wandhalterung mit einem Anzugsmoment von maximal 15kgf·cm. Denken Sie daran, dass Bauteile bei einem
höheren Anzugsmoment beschädigt werden können.
2. Zum Zubehörsatz gehört ein Haltering [②] zum Befestigen der Wandhalterungen von Drittanbietern am Samsung-Fernseher.
(Fall B)
N Drehen Sie die Schrauben bis zum Anschlag in die Bohrung [①], wenn Sie die Wandhalterung an der Wand Anbringen.
Montieren des Standfußes
Achtung
Befestigen Sie den Standfuß sicher am Fernseher, ehe Sie ihn bewegen, denn das
Gerät könnte herunterfallen und Verletzungen verursachen.
N Der Fernseher sollte von mindestens zwei Personen getragen werden. Um
Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, legen Sie den Fernseher nie auf den Fußboden.
Der Fernseher muss sich immer in aufrechter Position befinden.
Verwenden Sie die mitgelieferten Schrauben, um das Fernsehgerät fest mit der
Bodenplatte zu verschrauben.
(Das Gehäuse Ihres Fernsehers entspricht möglicherweise nicht genau der
Abbildung.)
Bei Wandinstallation Ihres Fernsehgeräts
schließen Sie die Abdeckung (➊) am
Verbindungsteil des Standfußes mithilfe
der zwei Verblendschrauben.
(PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680)
Fall A : Installieren der SAMSUNG-Wandhalterung Fall B : Installieren der Wandhalterung eines anderen Anbieters
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:39:19 PMDeutsch - 67
Das Fernsehgerät kann hinfallen, wenn Sie daran ziehen, es schieben oder darauf klettern. Stellen Sie insbesondere
sicher, dass sich keine Kinder an das Gerät hängen oder es aus dem Gleichgewicht bringen. Anderenfalls könnte
das Gerät umkippen und schwere Verletzungen oder den Tod verursachen. Beachten Sie alle Anweisungen der
beigefügten Sicherheitshinweise. Noch mehr Stabilität erreichen Sie, wenn Sie den Kippschutz installieren. Gehen
Sie hierzu folgendermaßen vor.
❑ So verhindern Sie, dass das Fernsehgerät umkippt
1. Stecken Sie die Schrauben durch die Halterungen und befestigen Sie sie fest an der Wand. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die
Schrauben gut halten.
N Je nach Ausführung der Wand benötigen Sie zum Befestigen weiteres Material, wie z. B. einen Dübel.
N Da die benötigten Halterungen, Schrauben und das Band nicht zum Lieferumfang gehören, müssen Sie diese Teile gesondert
erwerben.
2. Entfernen Sie die Schrauben in der Mitte auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts. Setzen Sie diese Schrauben in die Halterungen ein
und befestigen Sie die Schrauben dann wieder am Fernsehgerät.
N Die Schrauben werden möglicherweise nicht zusammen mit dem Gerät geliefert.
3. Verbinden Sie die Halterungen an der Wand und die Halterung am Fernsehgerät mit einem festen Band miteinander und ziehen Sie
das Band dann fest.
N Stellen Sie das Fernsehgerät in der Nähe der Wand auf, damit es nicht nach hinten kippen kann.
N Es ist noch sicherer, wenn die Halterungen an der Wand niedriger als die Halterungen am Fernsehgerät sind.
N Lösen Sie das Band, ehe Sie den Fernsehapparat bewegen.
4. Kontrollieren Sie, ob alle Anschlüsse weiterhin fest verbunden sind. Prüfen Sie regelmäßig die Verbindungen auf Zeichen von
Ermüdung oder Versagen. Bei Zweifeln hinsichtlich der Sicherheit Ihrer Halterung wenden Sie sich an einen professionellen
Installationsbetrieb.
Befestigen des Fernsehgeräts an der Wand
Absichern des Einbaubereichs
Halten Sie die erforderlichen Abstände zwischen dem Gerät und anderen Objekten (z.B. Wänden) ein, um ausreichende Lüftung
sicherzustellen. Wenn Sie dies nicht tun, besteht die Gefahr, dass aufgrund eines Anstiegs der Temperatur im Innern des Geräts ein
Brand ausbricht oder andere Probleme mit dem Gerät auftreten. Stellen Sie das Gerät so auf, dass die in der Abbildung gezeigten
Mindestabstände eingehalten werden.
N Verwenden Sie nur Teile von Samsung Electronics, wenn Sie einen Standfuß oder eine Wandhalterung einsetzen.
- Wenn Sie Teile eines anderen Herstellers verwenden, kann es zu Problemen mit dem Gerät oder zu Verletzungen kommen, weil
das Gerät herunterfällt.
- Wenn Sie Teile eines anderen Herstellers verwenden, kann es zu Problemen mit dem Gerät oder zu einem Brand kommen, weil
die Innentemperatur aufgrund schlechter Belüftung des Geräts ansteigt.
N Das Aussehen kann sich je nach Gerät unterscheiden.
Aufstellen des Geräts mit dem Standfuß Installieren des Geräts mit einer Wandhalterung
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
경고 주의
경고 주의
wand
wand
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:39:21 PMDeutsch - 68
Fehlerbehebung
Bei Fragen zum Fernsehen schauen Sie zuerst in dieser Liste nach. Wenn keiner dieser Tipps zur Fehlerbehebung weiterhilft, öffnen
Sie die Website 'www.samsung.com' und klicken Sie dort auf "Support" oder wenden Sie sich an das in der Liste auf der letzten Seite
angegebene Callcenter.
N Als erste denkbare Lösung kommt ein Firmware-Upgrade in Frage.
Problem Mögliche Lösung
Bildqualität
Führen Sie zu allererst den Picture Test durch, um zu bestätigen, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät das Testbild korrekt anzeigt.
* Wechseln Sie zum MENÜ → Unterstützung → Eigendiagnose → Bildtest
Wenn das Testbild richtig angezeigt wird, kann das schlechte Bild durch die Signalquelle oder das Signal verursacht sein.
Das Fernsehbild sieht nicht so gut
wie im Geschäft aus.
• Wenn Sie einen analogen Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver verwenden, rüsten Sie diesen digital
auf.
Verwenden Sie HDMI- oder Komponentenkabel, um Bildqualität in HD zu ermöglichen.
• Kabel-/Satellitenanschluss : Probieren Sie HD-Sender (High Definition) aus der Kanalliste.
• Antennenanschluss Probieren Sie HD-Sender, nachdem Sie die Autoprogrammierung
durchgeführt haben.
N Viele HD-Kanäle senden aufbereitete SD-Inhalte (Standardauflösung).
• Stellen Sie den Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver auf eine Bildauflösung von 1080i oder 720p ein.
Das Bild ist verzerrt: Große und
kleine Blöcke, Punkte, Pixelfehler.
• Durch die Kompression der Videoinhaltse kann es zu Bildverzerrungen kommen,
insbesondere bei schnellen Bildern wie bei Sportsendungen und Actionfilmen.
• Ein niedriger Signalpegel oder schlechte Qualität kann Bildverzerrungen verursachen.
Das ist kein Problem des Fernsehgeräts.
Falsche oder fehlende Farbe bei
Komponentenanschluss.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, ob die Komponentenkabel mit den richtigen Anschlüssen
verbunden sind.
Falsche oder lose Kontakte können Farbprobleme verursachen oder dazu führen, dass
auf dem Bildschirm gar kein Bild angezeigt wird.
Schlechte Farbwiedergabe oder
Helligkeit.
• Stellen Sie die Bildoptionen im Fernsehmen[ ein (Picture Mode (Bildmodus), Farbe,
Helligkeit, Schärfe).
• Stellen Sie die Option Energiesparen-Option im Menü Einstellungen ein.
• Versuchen Sie, die Grundstellung für das Bild wieder herzustellen, damit die
Standardbildeinstellungen verwendet werden.
(Wechseln Sie zu MENÜ → Bild → Bild zurücksetzen)
Gepunktete Linie am
Bildschirmrand.
• Wenn die Bildgröße auf Bildanpassung eingestellt ist, ändern Sie dies in 16:9.
• Ändern Sie die Auflösung für den Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver.
Das Bild ist nur beim AV-Eingang
(Composite) schwarzweiß.
• Schließen Sie das Videokabel (Gelb) an die grüne Buchse von Komponenteneingang 1
des Fernsehgeräts an.
Beim Kanalwechsel friert das
Bild ein bzw. ist verzerrt, oder die
Bildanzeige erfolgt verzögert.
• Bei Anschluss an einen Kabelreceiver versuchen Sie, den Kabelreceiver zurückzusetzen.
(Schließen Sie das Netzkabel wieder an und warten Sie, bis der Kabelreceiver neu startet.
Dies kann bis zu 20 Minuten dauern)
• Stellen Sie die Bildauflösung des Kabelreceivers auf 1080i oder 720p ein.
Tonqualität
Führen Sie zu allererst den Audiotest durch, um zu bestätigen, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät den Ton korrekt ausgibt.
* Wechseln Sie zum MENÜ → Unterstützung → Eigendiagnose → Audiotest
Wenn der Ton OK ausgegeben wird, kann das Tonproblem möglicherweise durch die Signalquelle oder das Signal verursacht sein.
Kein Ton oder Ton zu leise bei
maximaler Lautstärke.
• Überprüfen Sie die Lautstärke des an Ihren Fernseher angeschlossenen Geräts (Kabel/
Satellitenreceiver, DVD-, Blu-ray-Player usw.).
Stellen Sie dann die Lautstärke des Fernsehgeräts entsprechend ein.
Bild ist gut, aber kein Ton.
• Stellen Sie die Option Lautsprecher auswählen im Audio-Menü auf TV-Lautsprecher
ein.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Audiokabel vom externen Gerät an die richtigen
Audioeingänge am Fernsehgerät angeschlossen sind.
• Überprüfen Sie, welcher Tonausgang am angeschlossenen Gerät eingestellt ist.
Z. B.: Sie müssen die Audioeinstellung Ihres Kabelreceivers möglicherweise in HDMI
ändern, wenn HDMI an Ihr Fernsehgerät angeschlossen ist.
• Wenn Sie ein DVI/HDMI-Kabel verwenden, ist ein separates Audiokabel erforderlich.
• Deaktivieren Sie die SRS-Funktion, wenn Sie die Lautstärke auf mehr als 30 einstellen.
• Ziehen Sie den Stecker aus der Kopfhörerbuchse (sofern an Ihrem Fernseher vorhanden).
Rauschen vom Lautsprecher.
• Überprüfen Sie die Kabelverbindungen. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass kein Videokabel an
einen Audioeingang angeschlossen ist.
• Überprüfen Sie die Signalstärke des Antennen-/Kabelanschlusses. Ein schwaches Signal
kann Verzerrungen verursachen.
Fortsetzung...
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:39:21 PMDeutsch - 69
Problem Mögliche Lösung
Kein Bild, kein Video
Der Fernseher kann nicht eingeschaltet
werden.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Netzkabel sicher mit der Wandsteckdose und dem
Fernsehgerät verbunden ist.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Netzsteckdose Strom liefert.
• Drücken Sie die Netztaste am Fernsehgerät, um zu prüfen, ob die Fernbedienung
richtig funktioniert.
Wenn das Fernsehgerät eingeschaltet wird, kann dies von der Fernbedienung
verursacht sein.
Um das Problem mit der Fernbedienung zu beheben, lesen Sie den Abschnitt 'Die
Fernbedienung funktioniert nicht' weiter unten.
Das Fernsehgerät schaltet sich
automatisch aus.
• Prüfen Sie im Menü Setup, ob der Sleep Timer eingeschaltet (Ein) ist.
• Wenn das Fernsehgerät an Ihren PC angeschlossen ist, überprüfen die
Energiespareinstellungen Ihres PCs.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Netzkabel sicher mit der Wandsteckdose und dem
Fernsehgerät verbunden ist.
• Wenn bei Antennen-/Kabelanschluss länger als 10 bis 15 Minuten kein Signal
empfangen wurde, wird das Fernsehgerät automatisch ausgeschaltet.
Kein Bild/Video.
• Überprüfen Sie die Kabelverbindungen. (Unterbrechen Sie kurzzeitig alle
Kabelverbindungen zwischen dem Fernsehgerät und den externen Geräten)
• Stellen Sie den Videoausgang Ihres externen Geräts (Kabel-/Satellitenreceiver, DVD-/
Blu-ray-Player) so ein, dass er zur Verbindung mit dem Fernsehgerät passt. Zum
Beispiel: Ausgang des externen Geräts: HDMI, also Fernseheingang: HDMI.
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass das angeschlossene Gerät angeschaltet ist.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die richtige Signalquelle für den Fernseher eingestellt ist.
Drücken Sie dazu die Taste SOURCE auf der Fernbedienung.
• Schießen Sie das Netzkabel an, um das angeschlossene Gerät neu zu starten.
HF-Anschluss (Terrestrisch/Kabel)
Es werden nicht alle Kanäle
empfangen.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Antennenkabel korrekt angeschlossen ist.
• Probieren Sie es mit Plug & Play um die verfügbaren Kanäle zur Kanalliste
hinzuzufügen.
Wechseln Sie zu MENÜ → Einstellungen → Plug & Play und warten Sie, bis alle
verfügbaren Kanäle gespeichert sind.
• Prüfen Sie, ob die Antenne korrekt angeordnet ist.
Das Bild ist verzerrt: Große und kleine
Blöcke, Punkte, Pixelfehler.
• Durch die Kompression der Videoinhalts kann es zu Bildverzerrungen kommen,
insbesondere bei schnellen Bildern wie bei Sportsendungen und Actionfilmen.
• Ein schwaches Signal kann Verzerrungen verursachen. Das ist kein Problem des
Fernsehgeräts.
PC-Verbindung
Meldung "Nicht unterstützter Modus"
• Stellen Sie die Ausgangsauflösung und Frequenz Ihres PCs so ein, dass sie zu den
vom Fernsehgerät unterstützten Auflösungen passen.
Der PC wird immer in der Liste der
Signalquellen angezeigt, auch wenn
keiner angeschlossen ist.
• Das ist normal. Der PC wird immer in der Liste der Signalquellen angezeigt, auch
wenn keiner angeschlossen ist.
Video ist bei HDMI-Anschluss in
Ordnung, aber es gibt keinen Ton.
• Prüfen Sie die Einstellungen des Audioausgangs für Ihren PC.
Netzwerkverbindung
Fehler der drahtlosen
Netzwerkverbindung.
• Es ist ein Drahtloser USB-Dongle von Samsung erforderlich, um das
Drahtlosnetzwerk zu verwenden.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass Netzwerktyp auf Drahtlos eingestellt ist.
• Das Fernsehgerät muss an einen drahtlosen IP-Sharer (Router) angeschlossen sein.
Weitere
Das Bild wird nicht als Vollbild
ausgegeben.
• Bei HD-Kanälen werden auf beiden Seiten schwarze Balken angezeigt, wenn Sie
aufbereitete SD-Inhalte (4:3) wiedergeben.
• Bei Filmen mit einem anderen Seitenverhältnis als am Fernsehgerät eingestellt
werden oben und unten schwarze Balken angezeigt.
• Stellen Sie die Bildgröße an Ihrem externen Gerät oder am Fernseher auf Vollbild
ein.
Die Fernbedienung funktioniert nicht.
• Ersetzen Sie die Batterien der Fernbedienung (richtige Polung beachten).
• Reinigen Sie das Sendefenster oben auf der Fernbedienung.
• Zeigen Sie mit der Fernbedienung aus 1,5 bis 2 m Enternung direkt auf das
Fernsehgerät.
Fortsetzung...
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:39:22 PMDeutsch - 70
Problem Mögliche Lösung
Der Plasmafernseher erzeugt ein
brummendes Geräusch
• Plasmafernseher erzeugen meistens einen leichten Brummton. Dies ist normal.
Das wird von den elektrischen Ladungen verursacht, mit denen die Bilder auf dem
Fernsehschirm erzeugt werden.
• Wenn der Brummton zu laut wird, haben Sie möglicherweise die Helligkeit des
Fernsehgeräts zu hoch eingestellt. Versuchen Sie, die Bildhelligkeit zu reduzieren.
• Das laute Brummen kann aber auch dadurch verursacht werden, dass die Rückseite
Ihres Plasmafernsehers zu nah an einer Wand oder einer anderen harten Fläche
steht. Versuchen Sie ebenfalls, Ihre Verbindungskabel anders zu verlegen.
• Auch unsachgemäße Installation der Wandhalterung kann zu übermäßigem Lärm
führen.
Bildkonservierung (Einbrennen).
• Dieses Gerät ist mit einer Technologie für den Einbrennschutz ausgestattet, um
die Möglichkeit des Einbrennens des angezeigten Bildes zu minimieren. Durch die
PixelShift-Technologie können Sie das Bild auf-/abwärts (Pixel vertikal) oder seitwärts
(Pixel horizontal) bewegen.
Die Lautstärke bzw. Leistung
des Fernsehers kann mit der
Fernbedienung des Kabel-/
Satellitenreceivers nicht reguliert
werden.
• Programmieren Sie die Fernbedienung des Kabel-/Satellitenreceivers so, dass sie das
Fernsehgerät anspricht.
Den Code für SAMSUNG TV finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung für Ihren Kabel-/
Satellitenreceiver.
Meldung "Nicht unterstützter Modus"
• Überprüfen Sie die unterstützte Auflösung des Fernsehgeräts und stellen Sie
die Ausgangsauflösung des externen Geräts dementsprechend ein. Weitere
Informationen erhalten Sie im Abschnitt zum Einstellen der Auflösung in diesem
Handbuch.
Der Lichteffekt vorn am Rahmen lässt
sich nicht ausschalten (unterhalb vom
SAMSUNG-Logo)
• Stellen Sie die Option für den Lichteffekt im Menü Einstellungen ein. Es gibt die
folgenden Optionen: Aus, Standby an, TV Modus An und Immer.
• Die Funktion Lichteffekt steht nicht bei allen Modellen zur Verfügung.
Plastikgeruch vom Fernsehen. • Dieser Geruch ist normal und verschwindet im Lauf der Zeit.
Die Option "Signalstärke" steht für das
Fernsehgerät im Menü "Selbsttest"
nicht zur Verfügung.
• Diese Funktion ist nur bei digitalen Kanälen mit Antennenanschluss (HF/Koax)
verfügbar.
Das Fernsehgerät ist zur rechten oder
linken Seite geneigt.
• Lösen Sie den Sockel des Standfußes vom Fernsehgerät und wiederholen Sie die
Montage.
Sockel des Standfußes kann nicht
montiert werden.
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihr Fernsehgerät auf einer ebenen Fläche steht.
Wenn Sie die Schrauben nicht vom Fernseher lösen können, verwenden Sie einen
magnetischen Schraubendreher.
Das Kanalmenü wird grau angezeigt (es
ist nicht verfügbar).
• Das Kanalmenü ist nur dann verfübgar, wenn eine TV-Signalquelle ausgewählt wurde.
Ihre Einstellungen gehen nach 30
Minuten oder bei jedem Abschalten des
Fernsehers verloren.
• Wenn das Fernsehgerät im Modus Store Demo läuft, werden die Ton- und
Bildeinstellungen alle 30 Minuten zurückgesetzt.
Wechseln Sie mit dem Plug & Play-Prozess vom Modus Shop Demo zu
Privatgebrauch.
Drücken Sie die Taste SOURCE, um den Modus TV zu aktivieren. Wechseln Sie zu
MENÜ → Einstellungen → Plug & Play → ENTER
Vorübergehender Ausfall von Bild oder
Ton.
• Überprüfen und korrigieren Sie ggf. die Kabelverbindungen.
• Kann durch Verwenden von übermäßig starren oder dicken Kabeln verursacht
werden. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Kabel für langfristigen Gebrauch flexibel
genug sind. Bei Wandmontage empfehlen wir, Kabel mit 90 Grad-Steckern zu
verwenden.
Sie erkennen möglicherweise kleine
Partikel, wenn Sie den Rahmen um
den Fernsehbildschirm herum genau
betrachten.
• Dies ist Teil des Produktdesigns und kein Defekt.
Das PIP-Menü ist nicht verfügbar.
• Die PIP-Funktion steht nur zur Verfügung, wenn Sie eine HDMI-, PC- oder
Komponentensignalquelle anzeigen.
'Verschlüsseltes Signal' oder ‘Kein
Signal/Schwaches Signal’ bei Einsatz
einer CAM-Karte (CI/CI+).
• Überprüfen Sie, ob das CAM-Modul mit installierter CI(CI+)-Karte in den CI-Steckplatz
(Common Interface) eingesetzt wurde.
• Das ist Normal. Das Fernsehgerät aktiviert die OTA-Funktion (Over-the-Air) Funktion
selbst, um die beim Fernsehen heruntergeladene Firmware zu aktualisieren.
Wiederholtes Bild-/Tonproblem. • Überprüfen und ändern Sie Signal/Signalquelle.
N Manche der obigen Abbildungen und Funktionen gibt es nur bei bestimmten Modellen.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:39:22 PMDeutsch - 71
Technische Daten
Die Beschreibungen und Eigenschaften in diesem Handbuch werden nur zu Informationszwecken herausgegeben und können ohne
vorherige Ankündigung geändert werden.
Modellname PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680
Bildgröße (Diagonal) 50 inch 58 inch 63 inch
PC-Auflösung (optimal) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Audio (Ausgang) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2
Abmessungen (BxHxT)
Gehäuse
Mit Fuß
1240 x 756 x 74 mm
1240 x 817 x 290 mm
1401 x 848 x 74 mm
1401 x 917 x 335 mm
1531 x 932 x 74 mm
1531 x 957 x 390 mm
Gewicht von
Gehäuse
Und Fuß
33 kg
38 kg
39 kg
46 kg
53 kg
61 kg
Umgebungsbedingungen
Betriebstemperatur
Luftfeuchtigkeit (bei Betrieb)
Lagerungstemperatur
Luftfeuchtigkeit (Lagerung)
50 °F bis 104 °F (10 °C bis 40 °C)
10% bis 80%, nicht kondensierend
-4 °F bis 113 °F (-20 °C bis 45 °C)
5% bis 95%, nicht kondensierend
N Dies ist ein digitales Gerät der Klasse B.
N Änderungen der technischen Daten und des Geräte-Designs vorbehalten.
N Die technischen Daten zur benötigten Netzspannung finden Sie auf dem Etikett am Produkt.
BN68-02333J-GER.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:39:22 PMNederlands - 2
Instructies voor gebruik
Beeldretentie
Geef een stilstaand beeld (bijvoorbeeld van een videospel of tijdens het aansluiten van een computer) niet langer dan twee uur op
het plasmascherm weer, omdat dit beeldretentie kan veroorzaken. Beeldretentie wordt ook wel inbranden genoemd. Verlaag bij de
weergave van een stilstaand beeld de helderheid en het contrast om beeldretentie te voorkomen.
Hoogte
Het plasmascherm blijft normaal functioneren tot op een hoogte van 2000 meter. Boven de 2000 meter functioneert het scherm
mogelijk niet correct. Installeer en gebruik het scherm niet op dergelijke plaatsen.
Warmte op de bovenkant van het plasmascherm
De bovenkant van het scherm kan na een lange gebruiksperiode erg warm worden omdat de warmte van het scherm zich door het
ventilatiegat aan de bovenkant van het toestel verspreidt. Dit is normaal en duidt niet op een defect of storing. Zorg dat kinderen de
bovenkant van het product niet kunnen aanraken.
Het product maakt een ‘krakend’ geluid
Het krakende geluid kan optreden als het product uitzet of krimpt door een verandering in de omgeving, zoals de temperatuur of
luchtvochtigheid. Dit is normaal en duidt niet op een defect.
Celdefecten
Het plasmascherm gebruikt een paneel dat bestaat uit 2.360.000 (HD-niveau) tot 6.221.000 (FHD-niveau) pixels, wat het gebruik
van geavanceerde productietechnologie vereist. Het scherm kan echter enkele heldere of donkere pixels bevatten. Deze pixels zijn
niet van invloed op de prestaties van het product.
Gebruik de tv niet bij een temperatuur van minder dan 5°C.
Als u een stilstaand beeld te lang op het scherm weergeeft, kan plasmascherm permanent beschadigd raken.
Als u gedurende langere tijd naar uw LCD-tv kijkt terwijl het beeld in 4:3-formaat wordt weergegeven,
kunnen aan de linker- en rechterkant en in het midden van het scherm randen achterblijven. Hetzelfde
effect kan optreden wanneer u een DVD afspeelt of een spelcomputer gebruikt. Schade ontstaan door het
bovengenoemde effect valt niet onder de garantie.
Nabeeld op het scherm.
De weergave van stilstaande beelden van computerspelletjes en andere computerbeelden kunnen na langere tijd gedeeltelijk een
nabeeld achterlaten. Om dit te voorkomen kunt u tijdens het weergeven van stilstaande beelden de helderheid en het contrast
verminderen.
Garantie
- De garantievoorwaarden gelden niet voor schade veroorzaakt door beeldretentie.
- Het inbranden van het scherm valt niet onder de garantievoorwaarden.
Installatie
Neem contact op met een erkend servicecentrum wanneer u het apparaat op een locatie installeert met veel stof, hoge of
lage temperaturen, een hoge luchtvochtigheid, chemische stoffen en waar het voortdurend in bedrijf is, zoals op het vliegveld
treinstation, enzovoort. Als u dat niet doet, kan het apparaat ernstige schade oplopen.
Opmerking digitale tv
1. Functionaliteit betreffende digitale tv (DVB) is alleen beschikbaar in landen of gebieden waar DVB-T-signalen (MPEG2 en
MPEG4 AVC) voor digitale televisie per zendmast worden uitgezonden of waar u toegang hebt tot een compatibele DVB-Cservice (MPEG2 en MPEG4 AAC) voor kabel-tv. Vraag aan uw plaatselijke aanbieder of u DVB-T- of DVB-C-signalen kunt
ontvangen.
2. DVB-T is de Europese DVB-consortiumstandaard voor de uitzending van digitale
televisie per zendmast en DVB-C voor de uitzending van digitale televisie over de kabel. Bepaalde speciale functies zoals
EPG (Electric Program Guide), VOD (Video on Demand) en dergelijke zijn echter niet bij deze specificatie inbegrepen. Om
die reden kunnen ze op dit moment niet worden ondersteund.
3. Hoewel dit televisietoestel aan de nieuwste DVB-T- en DVB-C-standaarden voldoet [augustus 2008], kan de compatibiliteit
met toekomstige digitale DVB-T-uitzendingen via de zendmast en digitale DVB-C-uitzendingen via de kabel niet worden
gegarandeerd.
4. Sommige aanbieders van kabeltelevisie kunnen voor een dergelijke service extra kosten in rekening brengen en u mogelijk
verplichten om met de voorwaarden en bepalingen van hun aanbieding akkoord te gaan.
5. Bepaalde functies van digitale televisie zijn mogelijk niet in alle landen en regio’s beschikbaar en DVB-C werkt mogelijk niet
bij alle aanbieders.
6. Neem voor meer informatie contact op met de klantenservice van Samsung.
Contact opnemen met SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
Wanneer u vragen of opmerkingen hebt met betrekking tot Samsung-producten,
neemt u contact op met de klantenservice van SAMSUNG. (Zie het hoofdstuk Contact opnemen met Samsung)
N De figuren en illustraties in deze gebruikershandleiding dienen alleen ter referentie en kunnen afwijken van het werkelijke
uiterlijk van het product. Het ontwerp en de specificaties kunnen zonder kennisgeving vooraf worden gewijzigd ter
verbetering van de prestaties van het product.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Alle rechten voorbehouden.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:47:41 PMNederlands - 3
Nederlands
N O T
Symbolen Indrukken Opmerking
Knop een keer
indrukken
TOOLS
Inhoud
Uw tv aansluiten en voorbereiden
■ Controleer de geleverde onderdelen.........................................4
■ Standaardvoet gebruiken ..........................................................4
■ De snoeren bij elkaar houden ...................................................4
■ Overzicht van het bedieningspaneel .........................................5
■ Overzicht van het aansluitpaneel ..............................................6
■ Afstandsbediening.....................................................................8
■ Batterijen in de afstandsbediening plaatsen..............................8
■ De knoppen voor achtergrondverlichting van
de afstandsbediening gebruiken ...............................................9
■ In- en uitschakelen ....................................................................9
■ De tv op stand-by zetten ...........................................................9
■ Het scherm bekijken..................................................................9
■ Weergave van de menu’s........................................................10
■ De toets TOOLS gebruiken ....................................................10
■ Plug & Play-functie ..................................................................10
Kanaalbeheer
■ Kanalen opslaan .................................................................... 11
■ Kanalen beheren .....................................................................13
Beeldbeheer
■ De beeldinstellingen aanpassen .............................................15
■ De tv instellen voor uw pc .......................................................18
■ Pc-scherm ...............................................................................19
Geluidsbeheer
■ De geluidsinstellingen wijzigen................................................20
■ De geluidsmodus selecteren ...................................................21
Beschrijving van de functies
■ Tijd instellen.............................................................................22
■ Het instellingenmenu gebruiken ..............................................23
■ Picture-in-Picture weergeven (PIP).........................................25
Ondersteuning / Invoer
■ Ondersteund programma ........................................................26
■ Bronlijst / Naam wijzigen .........................................................27
Netwerk
■ Netwerkverbinding...................................................................28
■ Netwerk instellen .....................................................................30
Media Play
■ Een USB-apparaat aansluiten.................................................33
■ De functie Media Play gebruiken.............................................34
■ De Foto sorteren / Muziek / Film Lijst......................................35
■ Foto / Muziek / Film Lijst Optie MENU ....................................36
■ Diashow / Muziek Afspelen / Film Afspelen Optie Menu .........37
■ Een foto of presentatie bekijken..............................................38
■ Muziek afspelen ......................................................................39
■ Een filmbestand afspelen ........................................................40
■ Het menu Setup gebruiken......................................................41
Media Play-DLNA
■ Het DLNA-netwerk instellen ....................................................42
■ De DLNA-toepassing installeren .............................................42
■ De DLNA-toepassing gebruiken..............................................43
■ De DLNA-functie gebruiken.....................................................44
Over Anynet+
■ Anynet+-apparaten aansluiten ................................................45
■ Anynet+ instellen ....................................................................46
■ Tussen Anynet+-apparaten schakelen ....................................46
■ Opnemen.................................................................................47
■ Luisteren via een ontvanger....................................................48
■ Problemen oplossen m.b.t. Anynet+........................................48
Content Library
■ De Content Library activeren...................................................49
■ De Content Library gebruiken .................................................50
Internet@TV
■ Aan de slag met Internet@TV.................................................51
■ Snippets in het dock bewerken ...............................................53
■ De Profile-widget gebruiken ....................................................53
■ De Yahoo!® Widget Gallery gebruiken....................................54
■ De Yahoo!® Weather-widget gebruiken ..................................54
■ De Yahoo!® News-widget gebruiken.......................................55
■ De Yahoo!® Flickr-widget gebruiken .......................................55
■ De Yahoo!® Finance-widget gebruiken...................................56
■ Problemen met Internet@TV oplossen ...................................56
■ Help-website............................................................................57
Internet@TV
■ Aan de slag met Internet@TV.................................................58
■ Internet@TV instellen..............................................................58
■ De Internet@TV-service gebruiken .........................................59
■ Problemen met Internet@TV oplossen ...................................60
■ Help-website............................................................................60
Thuisnetwerkcentrum
■ Thuisnetwerkcentrum..............................................................61
■ Het Thuisnetwerkcentrum instellen .........................................62
■ De Message-functie gebruiken................................................62
■ De Media-functie gebruiken ....................................................63
Aanbevelingen voor gebruik
■ Teletekstfunctie........................................................................64
■ Specificaties voor de wandbevestigingskit (VESA).................65
■ De montage van de wandbevestiging voorbereiden ...............66
■ De standaardvoet monteren....................................................66
■ De tv aan de wand bevestigen................................................67
■ Installatieruimte .......................................................................67
■ Problemen oplossen................................................................68
■ Specificaties ............................................................................71
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:47:41 PMNederlands - 4
De snoeren bij elkaar houden
Doe de snoerhouder om de kabels heen, zodat deze niet door de transparante voet heen
zichtbaar zijn.
Standaardvoet gebruiken
N Het plasmascherm moet door twee of meer personen worden getild. Leg het
plasmascherm nooit op de grond om eventuele beschadiging aan het scherm te
voorkomen. Houd het plasmascherm altijd recht.
N Het plasmascherm kan 20 graden naar links en naar rechts draaien.
-20° ~ 20°
Controleer de geleverde onderdelen
Gebruikershandleiding Afstandsbediening /
AAA-batterijen
(2 stuks)
Netsnoer Schoonmaakdoek Snoerhouder Houder - ring
(4 stuks)
(Zie pagina 66)
Programma-cd
schroeven (4 stuks)
(alleen PS50B650)
(Zie pagina 66)
Bodemkap
(alleen PS50B650)
(Zie pagina 66)
Bodemkap /schroeven
(2 stuks)
(alleen PS58B680 /
PS63B680)
(Zie pagina 66)
Ferrietkern voor
hoofdtelefoon
Ferrietkern voor
netsnoer (alleen
PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680)
Ferrietkern voor
netsnoer
Garantiekaart /
Veiligheidsvoorschriften
(niet beschikbaar
op alle locaties)
N Ferrietkern
De ferrietkern wordt gebruikt om de kabel af te schermen voor
interferentie. Open de ferrietkern bij het aansluiten van een kabel en klem
deze om de kabel bij de plug, zoals in de afbeelding wordt aangegeven.
Uw tv aansluiten en voorbereiden
(PS58B680T6P/
PS63B680 only)
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:47:45 PMNederlands - 5
Overzicht van het bedieningspaneel
N De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen variëren, afhankelijk van het
model.
Toetsen op het voorpaneel.
Raak de toetsen aan om deze
te bedienen.
(PS58B680 / PS63B680)
(PS50B650)
1 SOURCE
Schakelt tussen de beschikbare ingangsbronnen
(TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI,
HDMI3, HDMI4, USB).
N Gebruik deze toets in het schermmenu zoals u de toets
ENTERE op de afstandsbediening gebruikt.
2 MENU
Druk op deze toets om een schermmenu met de functies van
uw tv weer te geven.
3 + –
Druk op deze toetsen om het volume in te stellen. U kunt de
knoppen + – in het schermmenu op dezelfde manier
gebruiken als de toetsen ◄ en ► op de afstandsbediening.
4 CH
Druk op deze toetsen om het kanaal te wijzigen. U kunt de
knoppen CH in het schermmenu op dezelfde manier
gebruiken als de toetsen ▲ en ▼op de afstandsbediening.
U kunt de toets CH gebruiken om de tv in te
schakelen zonder de afstandsbediening.
5 STANDBY-INDICATOR
Als de stroom is ingeschakeld zal het lampje knipperen
en vervolgens uitgaan. In de stand-bymodus zal het
lampje branden.
6 (AAN/UIT)
Druk op deze toets om de tv in of uit te schakelen.
7 SENSOR VAN DE AFSTANDSBEDIENING
Richt de afstandsbediening op dit punt op de tv.
8 LUIDSPREKERS
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:47:45 PMNederlands - 6
Overzicht van het aansluitpaneel
N Wanneer u een audio- of videosysteem op uw tv aansluit, dient u alle apparaten uit te schakelen.
N Zorg er bij het aansluiten van een extern apparaat voor dat de kleuren van de aansluiting en de kabel overeenkomen.
N De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen, afhankelijk van het model, variëren.
1 LAN
Sluit een LAN-kabel aan op deze poort om verbinding met het
netwerk te maken.
2 POWER IN
Aansluiting voor het netsnoer.
3 COMPONENT IN
Audio-(AUDIO L/R) en
video-ingangen (Y / PB / PR)voor componenten.
4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC)
Aansluiting voor de video- en audio-uitvoer van de computer
5 EXT 1, EXT 2
Ingangen of uitgangen voor externe apparaten, zoals een
videorecorder, dvd-speler, spelcomputer of videodiscspeler.
N In de EXT-modus ondersteunt DTV Out alleen MPEG SDvideo en -audio.
N In de EXT-modus is Spelmodus niet beschikbaar.
Specificaties voor de invoer/uitvoer
Aansluiting
Invoer Uitvoer
Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R)
EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔
Alleen de TV- of DTVuitvoer is beschikbaar
EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Uitvoer naar keuze.
6 HEADPHONE
U kunt een hoofdtelefoon op de tv aansluiten als u naar een
programma wilt kijken zonder de andere aanwezigen in de
kamer te storen.
N Langdurig gebruik van een hoofdtelefoon met een hoog
volume kan het gehoor beschadigen.
7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Sluit een component voor digitale audio aan.
8 SERVICE
Aansluiting voor onderhoud.
9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)
RCA-audiosignalen van de tv aansluiten op een externe bron,
zoals geluidsapparatuur.
0 ANT IN
75Ω coaxiale aansluiting voor antenne of kabeltelevisienetwerk.
! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3
Voor een HDMI-naar-HDMI-verbinding is geen extra
audioaansluiting nodig.
- Bij gebruik van de HDMI/DVI-kabelverbinding, moet u de
HDMI IN 2(DVI)-aansluiting gebruiken.
N Wat is HDMI?
- Met HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
kunnen digitale videogegevens met een hoge definitie en
meerdere kanalen met digitale audio worden verzonden.
- De HDMI/DVI-uitgang ondersteunt een DVI-aansluiting
op externe apparatuur met een geschikte kabel (niet
meegeleverd). Het verschil tussen HDMI en DVI is dat
het HDMI-apparaat minder groot is, is voorzien van een
functie voor HDCP-codering (High Bandwidth Digital
Copy Protection) en digitale audio van meerdere kanalen
ondersteunt.
DVI AUDIO IN
DVI-audio-uitgangen voor externe apparaten.
Ondersteunde modi voor HDMI/DVI en Component
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O
Component O O O O O O O
TV Achterpaneel
Kabeltelevisienetwerk
of
of
2
3 4 5 7 9 !
0
6 8
1
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:47:48 PMNederlands - 7
1 COMMON INTERFACE-sleuf
Plaats een CI-kaart (Common Interface) in de sleuf.
(Zie pagina 23)
- Wanneer u bij sommige kanalen geen CI(CI+)-kaart hebt
geplaatst, wordt Scramble Signal (Vervormd signaal) op
het scherm weergegeven.
- De koppelingsgegevens met een telefoonnummer, de
id van de CI(CI+)-kaart, de host-id en andere informatie
worden over ongeveer 2-3 minuten weergegeven. Neem
contact op met uw serviceprovider als er een foutbericht
wordt weergegeven.
- Wanneer de kanaalgegevens zijn geconfigureerd, wordt
het bericht Update voltooid weergegeven, waarmee wordt
aangegeven dat de kanaallijst is bijgewerkt.
- Afhankelijk van het model kan u worden gevraagd naar
het wachtwoord voor Parental Lock wanneer de CI-kaart
opnieuw wordt geplaatst.
- Zelfs als Parental Lock is ingesteld op Allow All
kan, afhankelijk van het model, een bericht worden
weergegeven voor het wachtwoord voor programma's
voor volwassenen (18 jaar en ouder).
N Plaats de CI(CI+)-kaart in de richting zoals op de kaart
wordt aangegeven.
N CI-/CI+-kaart worden niet ondersteund in sommige
landen, regio's en zendstations. Controleer dit bij uw
geautoriseerde verkoper.
N De functie CI+is alleen van toepassing op het model
PS********P. Als u problemen ondervindt, neemt u contact
op met uw serviceprovider.
2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2
Sluit een USB-opslagapparaat aan voor het bekijken van
fotobestanden (JPEG) en het afspelen van audiobestanden
(MP3) of filmbestanden. U kunt draadloos verbinding maken
met het netwerk van SAMSUNG. De aansluiting USB 1 wordt
ook gebruikt als HDD-aansluiting. Een HDD (Hard Disk Drive
of vaste schijf) is een apparaat waarop digitaal gecodeerde
gegevens worden opgeslagen.
3 HDMI IN 4
Aansluiting voor de HDMI-ingang van een apparaat met
HDMI-uitvoer.
4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)
Video- en audio-ingangen voor externe apparaten, zoals een
camcorder of videorecorder.
N De vorm en kleur van het product kunnen, afhankelijk van het model, variëren.
TV Zijpaneel
3
4
1
2
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:47:50 PMNederlands - 8
Afstandsbediening
U kunt de afstandsbediening gebruiken tot op een afstand van ongeveer 23 meter vanaf de tv.
N Fel licht kan de werking van de afstandsbediening beïnvloeden.
1 Toets POWER
(de tv in- en uitschakelen).
2 Rechtstreeks de tv-modus selecteren.
3 Cijfertoetsen voor directe kanaalkeuze.
4 Opties in schermmenu’s selecteren en
menuwaarden wijzigen.
5 Geluid tijdelijk uitschakelen.
6 Volume verhogen
Volume verlagen
7 Beschikbare bron selecteren.
8 Informatie over de huidige uitzending
bekijken.
9 Snel veelgebruikte functies selecteren.
0 Informatie over de huidige uitzending
bekijken.
! Met deze functie kunt u Internet@TV
weergeven.
@ Gebruik deze toetsen in Kanalenlijst,
Media Play en Internet@TV
enzovoort.
$ Lijsten met kanalen op het scherm
weergeven.
% Gebruik deze toetsen in Kanalenlijst,
Media Play en Internet@TV
enzovoort.
^ Druk op deze toets om de knoppen
van de afstandsbediening te
verlichten. Deze functie is handig
wanneer het donker is in het vertrek.
(Als u de afstandsbediening gebruikt
terwijl de lichttoets AAN/UIT( ) is
ingeschakeld, wordt de levensduur van
de batterij verminderd.)
& Vorig kanaal.
* Volgend kanaal
Vorig kanaal.
( Het hoofdmenu weergeven.
) Elektronische programmagids (EPG)
weergeven.
a Terug naar het vorige menu.
b Het schermmenu afsluiten.
c Met deze functie kunt u MediaPlay
weergeven.
d Met deze functie kunt u de Content
Library weergeven.
e Digitale ondertiteling weergeven.
f Audiobeschrijving selectie.
Teletekstfuncties
2 Teletekstmodus verlaten
(afhankelijk van het model).
7 Teletekstmodus selecteren (LIST/
FLOF).
8 Teletekst opslaan.
9 Weergaveformaat teletekst.
@ Fastext-onderwerp selecteren.
# Teletekst weergeven/
teletekstinformatie en normale
uitzending tegelijk op scherm
weergeven.
$ Teletekst opslaan.
& Teletekst subpagina
* P : volgende teletekstpagina /
P : vorige teletekstpagina.
( Teletekstindex.
a Teletekst vastzetten.
b Teletekst uitschakelen.
Batterijen in de afstandsbediening plaatsen
1. Open het klepje achter op de afstandsbediening met een opwaartse beweging,
zoals aangegeven in de afbeelding.
2. Plaats twee AAA-batterijen.
N Zorg ervoor dat de ‘+’ en ‘-’ van de batterijen overeenkomen met de afbeelding in
het vakje.
3. Sluit het klepje.
N Verwijder de batterijen en bewaar deze op een koele, droge plaats indien u de
afstandsbediening langere tijd niet gebruikt.
N Controleer het volgende als de afstandsbediening niet werkt
1. Is de tv ingeschakeld?
2. Zijn de plus- en minpolen van de batterijen tegengesteld geplaatst?
3. Zijn de batterijen leeg?
4. Is er een stroomstoring of zit de stekker niet in het stopcontact?
5. Bevindt er zich vlakbij een speciaal fluorescerend licht of neonlicht?
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:47:51 PMNederlands - 9
De knoppen voor achtergrondverlichting van de afstandsbediening gebruiken
Deze functie is bedoeld voor donkere ruimtes waar u de knoppen van de afstandsbediening niet goed kunt zien.
1. Druk op de lichtknop ON/OFF( )
N In de stand AAN wordt de achtergrondverlichting van de knoppen even ingeschakeld.
N Wanneer de afstandsbediening is ingeschakeld, wordt de achtergrondverlichting even ingeschakeld als u op een knop van de
afstandsbediening drukt.
In- en uitschakelen
Het netsnoer is bevestigd aan de achterzijde van de tv.
1. Steek de stekker in een geschikt stopcontact.
N Het stand-bylampje op het apparaat brandt.
2. Druk op de toets POWERP op uw tv.
N U kunt ook op de toets POWERP of TV op uw afstandsbediening drukken om de tv in te schakelen.
N THet meest recente programma dat u hebt bekeken, wordt automatisch opnieuw geselecteerd.
3. Druk op de afstandsbediening op de cijfertoetsen (0~9) of de toetsen voor het volgende/vorige kanaal (< / >) of druk op uw tv op
< CH>.
N Wanneer u het apparaat voor de eerste keer inschakelt, wordt u gevraagd de taal voor de menu’s te kiezen.
4. Druk nogmaals op de toets POWERP om uw tv uit te schakelen.
De tv op stand-by zetten
U kunt de tv op stand-by zetten om het energieverbruik te verminderen. De stand-bymodus kan handig zijn als u even wilt stoppen met
kijken (bijvoorbeeld tijdens het eten).
1. Druk op de toets POWERP op de afstandsbediening.
N Het beeld wordt uitgeschakeld en er gaat een rood stand-bylampje branden op het apparaat.
2. Als u het toestel weer wilt inschakelen, drukt u nogmaals op de toets POWERP, de cijfertoetsen (0~9), de toets TV of de toetsen
voor het volgende / vorige kanaal (< / >).
N Laat de tv niet gedurende langere tijd op stand-by staan (zoals tijdens vakanties). Haal ook de stekker uit het stopcontact en
ontkoppel de antenne.
Het scherm bekijken
Op het scherm worden het huidige kanaal en de status van bepaalde audio-videoinstellingen
weergegeven.
O Druk op de toets INFO om de informatie weer te geven.
Druk op de INFO-knop op de afstandsbediening. Op het scherm worden het huidige
kanaal en de status van bepaalde audio-video-instellingen weergegeven.
• ▲, ▼: U kunt informatie over andere kanalen bekijken. Als u naar het huidige
geselecteerde kanaal wilt gaan, drukt u op de toets ENTERE.
• ◄, ►: U kunt informatie over het gewenste programma op het huidige kanaal
bekijken.
N Druk nogmaals op de toets INFO of wacht ongeveer 10 seconden.
De weergave verdwijnt dan automatisch.
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information
E Watch
' Information
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:47:52 PMNederlands - 10
Weergave van de menu’s
1. Schakel het apparaat in en druk op de toets MENU.
Het hoofdmenu verschijnt op het scherm. Aan de linkerkant van het menu worden
pictogrammen weergegeven : Beeld, Geluid, Kanaal, Instellingen, Invoer,
Toepassing, Ondersteuning.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om een van de pictogrammen te selecteren.
Druk op de toets ENTERE om het submenu van het pictogram weer te geven.
3. Druk op de toets EXIT om het menu te verlaten.
N De schermmenu’s verdwijnen na ongeveer één minuut uit beeld.
De toets TOOLS gebruiken
U kunt de toets TOOLS gebruiken om snel en eenvoudig uw meestgebruikte functies te selecteren. De opties in het menu Extra zijn
afhankelijk van de externe invoermodus die u weergeeft.
1. Druk op de toets TOOLS. Het menu Extra wordt weergegeven.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om een menu te selecteren en druk vervolgens op
de toets ENTERE.
3. Druk op de toetsen▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE om de geselecteerde items weer te geven,
te wijzigen of te gebruiken.
Zie de pagina over de desbetreffende functie voor meer informatie over de verschillende
functies.
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), zie pagina 46
• Beeldformaat, zie pagina 16
• Beeldmodus, zie pagina 15
• Geluidmodus, zie pagina 20
• Slaaptimer, zie pagina 22
• SRS TS HD, zie pagina 20
• Spaarstand, zie pagina 24
• Dual l ll, zie pagina 21
• Toevoegen aan Favoriet (Verwijderen uit Favorieten), zie pagina 14
• PIP, zie pagina 25
• Autom. afstellen, zie pagina 18
Plug & Play-functie
Wanneer u de tv voor het eerst inschakelt, worden er automatisch enkele basisinstellingen achter elkaar uitgevoerd.
N De screensaver wordt geactiveerd wanneer langer dan 1 minuut geen toetsen van de afstandsbediening worden gebruikt terwijl
Plug & Play is ingeschakeld.
N De screensaver wordt geactiveerd wanneer langer dan 15 minuten geen bedieningssignaal wordt uitgevoerd.
N Als u per ongeluk het verkeerde land voor uw tv selecteert, kunnen de tekens op het scherm onjuist worden weergegeven.
1. Druk op de toets POWER op de afstandsbediening. Het menu Select the OSD
Language. wordt automatisch weergegeven. Selecteer de gewenste taal door op de
toets ▲ of ▼ te drukken. Druk op de toets ENTERE om uw keuze te bevestigen.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Winkeldemo of Thuisgebruik te selecteren en druk
vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
N Wij raden aan om de tv in te stellen op de modus Thuisgebruik voor het beste
beeld in uw thuisomgeving.
N De modus Winkeldemo is alleen bedoeld voor gebruik in winkels.
N Wanneer het apparaat per ongeluk is ingesteld op de modus Winkeldemo en u de modus Thuisgebruik (standaard)
wilt herstellen, drukt u op de volumeknop op de tv. Wanneer het schermmenu voor het volume wordt weergegeven,
drukt u 5 seconden op de toets MENU op de tv.
3. Druk op de toets ENTERE. Selecteer het gewenste land door op de toets ▲ of ▼ e drukken. Druk op de toets ENTERE om uw
keuze te bevestigen.
N Na het selecteren van uw land in het menu Country moet u op sommige modellen vervolgend een pincode instellen.
N Bij het invoeren van de pincode is 0-0-0-0 niet beschikbaar.
4. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ m de kanalen voor de geselecteerde verbinding op te slaan en druk vervolgens op ENTERE.
• Ant : Antennesignaal.
• Kabel : Kabelantennesignaal.
Plug & Play
Select the OSD Language.
Language :
U Move E Enter
▲
Nederlands
English
Eesti
▼
Extra
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Beeldformaat : Auto-breed
Beeldmodus : Standaard
Geluidmodus : Aangepast
Slaaptimer : Uit
SRS TS HD : Uit
Spaarstand : Uit
Dual l ll : Mono
Toevoegen aan Favoriet
U Verpl E Enter e Sluiten
Modus : Standaard
Cel Helderheid : 4
Contrast : 95
Helderheid : 45
Scherpte : 50
Kleur : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Geavanceerde instellingen
Beeld
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:47:53 PMNederlands - 11
5. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om de antennebron te selecteren die u wilt opslaan. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Start te selecteren.
• Digitaal en Analoog: digitale en analoge kanalen.
• Digitaal: digitale kanalen.
• Analoog: analoge kanalen.
N Het zoeken van de kanalen start en eindigt automatisch.
N Zie het hoofdstuk Automatisch opslaan voor meer informatie over het selecteren van de modus Kabel., zie pagina 11.
6. Het bericht De modus Clock instellen. wordt weergegeven. Druk op de toets ENTERE Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Auto,
te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
N Als u Handm. selecteert, wordt Huidige datum en tijd instellen weergegeven. (Zie het hoofdstuk De tijd instellen voor meer
informatie, Zie pagina 22)
N Wanneer u een digitaal signaal hebt ontvangen, wordt de tijd automatisch ingesteld.
7. De beknopte instructie Hoe u uw nieuwe HDTV optimaal benut wordt weergegeven. Druk op de toets ENTERE.
N Dit menu is beschikbaar in de Handleiding HD-verbinding in het menu Ondersteuning.
N U kunt naar de volgende of vorige pagina gaan door op de toets ◄ / ► te drukken.
8. Het bericht Enjoy your TV (Veel kijkplezier). wordt weergegeven.
N Als u onmiddellijk tv wilt kijken, selecteert u Watch TV (Tv kijken).
N Als u de Producthandleiding wilt weergeven, druk u op ENTERE.
Als u deze functie wilt resetten...
1. Druk op de toets MENU om het menu weer te geven. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om
Instellingen, te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
2. Druk nogmaals op de toets ENTERE om Plug & Play te selecteren.
3. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in. De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel
is ‘0-0-0-0’.
N Zie het hoofdstuk Pincode wijzigen als u de pincode wilt wijzigen, Zie pagina 24.
N De functie Plug & Play is alleen beschikbaar in de modus TV.
Kanalen opslaan
❑ Land
Digitaal kanaal : U kunt het land voor digitale kanalen veranderen.
Analoog kanaal : U kunt het land voor analoge kanalen veranderen.
N Het invoerscherm voor de pincode verschijnt.Voer uw viercijferige pincode in.
❑ Automatisch opslaan
Zoekt naar alle kanalen met actieve uitzendstations (beschikbaarheid is afhankelijk
van uw land) en slaat deze op in het geheugen van de tv.
U kunt de kanalen van de geselecteerde verbinding opslaan in het geheugen van de tv.
• Ant : Antennesignaal.
• Kabel : Kabelantennesignaal.
U kunt de antennebron selecteren die uw wilt opslaan in het geheugen.
• Digitaal en Analoog : Digitale en analoge kanalen.
• Digitaal : Digitale kanalen.
• Analoog : Analoge kanalen.
N Wanneer u Kabel selecteert,
• Zoekmodus : Geeft de zoekmodus weer. (Snel)
- Netwerk-ID : Geeft de identificatiecode van het netwerk weer.
- Frequentie : Geeft de frequentie voor het kanaal weer..
- Modulatie : Geeft de beschikbare modulatiewaarden weer.
- Symboolsnelheid : Geeft de beschikbare symboolsnelheden weer.
• Zoekmodus : Geeft de zoekmodus weer. (Volledig, Netwerk)
- Startfrequentie : Geeft de waarden voor de startfrequentie weer.
- Stopfrequentie : Geeft de waarden voor de stopfrequentie weer.
- Modulatie : Geeft de beschikbare modulatiewaarden weer.
- Symboolfrequentie : Geeft de beschikbare symboolsnelheden weer.
N Als u Automatisch opslaan wilt stoppen, drukt u op de toets ENTERE Het bericht Autom. program. stoppen?
wordt weergegeven.
Selecteer Ja door op de toets ◄ of ► te drukken en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
Kanaalbeheer
Kanaal
Land ►
Automatisch opslaan
Handm. opslaan
Optie kabel zoeken
Volledige gids
Minigids
Standaardgids : Volledige gids
Kanalenlijst
Instellingen
Plug & Play ►
Taalkeuze : Nederlands
Tijd
Uitzenden
Beveiliging
Netwerk
Algemeen
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:47:53 PMNederlands - 12
❑ Handmatig opslaan
Handmatig een kanaal zoeken en opslaan in het tv-geheugen.
Digitaal kanaal (digitale)
N Digitaal kanaal is alleen beschikbaar in DTV-modus
• Kanaal : het kanaalnummer instellen met de pijltoetsen ▲, ▼ of de cijfertoetsen (0~9) .
• Frequentie : de frequentie instellen met cijfertoetsen (0~9).
• Bandbreedte : de bandbreedte instellen met de toetsen ▲ of ▼.
N Zodra dit is voltooid, worden de kanalen in de kanalenlijst bijgewerkt.
Analoog kanaal
Handmatig opslaan voor analoog kanaal.
• Programma (Programmanummer dat aan een kanaal wordt toegewezen) : het programmanummer instellen met de toetsen
▲, ▼ of met de cijfertoetsen (0~9).
• Kleursysteem → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : de waarde van het kleursysteem instellen met de toets ▲ of ▼.
• Geluidssysteem → BG / DK / I / L : De waarde van het geluidssysteem opgeven met de toetsen ▲ of ▼.
• Kanaal (als u het nummer weet van het kanaal dat u wilt opslaan) : Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om C (antennekanaal) of
S (kabelkanaal) te selecteren. Druk op de toets ► druk vervolgens op de toetsen ▲, ▼ of op de cijfertoetsen (0~9) om
het gewenste nummer te selecteren.
N Als er geen geluid is of als het geluid is vervormd, selecteert u nogmaals de gewenste geluidsstandaard.
• Zoeken (als u de kanaalnummers niet weet) : Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om met zoeken te beginnen. De tuner scant het
frequentiebereik totdat het eerste kanaal of het door u geselecteerde kanaal in beeld komt.
• Opslaan (als u het kanaal en het bijbehorende programmanummer opslaat) : Instellen op OK door de toets ENTERE in te
drukken.
N Kanaalmodus
- C (antennekanaalmodus) : in deze modus kunt u een kanaal selecteren door het nummer in te toetsen dat aan het zendstation
is toegewezen.
- S (kabelkanaalmodus) : in deze stand kunt u een kanaal selecteren door het nummer in te toetsen dat aan het kabelkanaal is
toegewezen.
❑ Optie kabel zoeken
U kunt aanvullende z oekopties voor het zoeken naar een kabelnetwerk instellen, zoals de frequentie en symboolsnelheid
(afhankelijk van het land).
• Startfrequentie : geeft de waarden voor de startfrequentie weer.
• Stopfrequentie : geeft de waarden voor de stopfrequentie weer.
• Modulatie: geeft de beschikbare modulatiewaarden weer.
• Symboolsnelheid: geeft de beschikbare symboolsnelheden weer.
N Als de waarde voor Startfrequentie hoger is dan voor Stopfrequentie, word het waarschuwingsbericht weergegeven.
❑ Volledige gids / Minigids
De EPG-gegevens (Electronic Programme Guide) wordt geleverd door de kabelaanbieders. Programmavermeldingen kunnen leeg
of verouderd zijn ten gevolge van de informatie die voor een bepaald kanaal wordt uitgezonden. De weergave wordt dynamisch
bijgewerkt zodra nieuwe informatie beschikbaar is.
• Volledige gids: hiermee geeft u de programma-informatie weer als segmenten die per uur zijn gesorteerd. Er wordt
programma-informatie voor twee uur weergegeven waarin u in tijd vooruit of achteruit kunt bladeren.
• Minigids: de informatie over elk programma wordt weergegeven door elke regel onder het scherm Mini Guide van het huidige
kanaal, vanaf het huidige programma en verder in volgorde van het begintijdstip van het programma.
❑ Standaardgids
Minigids / Volledig gids
U kunt besluiten of u de minigids of de volledige gids wilt weergeven wanneer u op de
toets GUIDE van de afstandsbediening drukt.
O U kunt het gidsmenu ook openen door op de toets GUIDE te drukken.
Wordt vervolgd...
Kanaal
Volledige gids
Minigids
Standaardgids : Volledige gids►
Kanalenlijst
Kanaalmodus : Toegev. kanalen
Fijnafstemming
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:47:54 PMNederlands - 13
Volledige gids/Minigids gebruiken
▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►,
ENTER E Selecteer een programma door op de toetsen ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE te drukken.
ROOD Schakelen tussen de Volledige gids en Minigids.
GROEN Volledige gids : Snel terugbladeren. (-24 uren).
GEEL Volledige gids : Snel vooruitbladeren. (+24 uren).
BLAUW De gids sluiten.
INFO De toets INFO voor gedetailleerde informatie.
❑ Modus Kanaal
Wanneer u op P () drukt, worden de kanalen in de geselecteerde kanaallijst omgeschakeld.
Toegev. kanalen : Kanalen in de opgeslagen lijst kanalen worden omgeschakeld.
Favoriete kanalen : Kanalen in de favoriete lijst kanalen worden omgeschakeld.
❑ Fijnafstemming (alleen analoge kanalen)
Als de ontvangst goed is, hoeft u het kanaal niet verder af te stellen omdat dat tijdens het zoeken en opslaan automatisch is
gebeurd. Is het signaal echter zwak of vervormd, dan kunt u het kanaal handmatig fijner afstemmen.
N Opgeslagen kanalen die handmatig fijner zijn afgesteld, zijn gemarkeerd met een asterisk * rechts van het kanaalnummer in de
kanaalbalk.
N Als u het fijner afgestemde kanaal niet opslaat in het geheugen, worden de aanpassingen niet opgeslagen.
N Wanneer u de fijnafstemming wilt resetten, selecteert u Reset door op de toets ▼ en vervolgens op de toets ENTERE
te drukken.
Kanalen beheren
Via dit menu kunt u kanalen toevoegen en verwijderen of voorkeurskanalen instellen en de
programmagids gebruiken voor digitale uitzendingen.
N Selecteer een kanaal in het scherm Alle kanalen, Toegevoegde kanalen,
Voorkeurskanalen of Geprogrammeerd door op de toetsen ▲ / ▼ en vervolgens op
de toets ENTERE te drukken. Vervolgens kunt u naar het geselecteerde
kanaal kijken.
• Alle kanalen : geeft alle kanalen weer die momenteel beschikbaar zijn.
• Toegevoegde kanalen : geeft alle toegevoegde kanalen weer.
• Voorkeurskanalen : geeft alle voorkeurskanalen weer.
• Geprogrammeerd : geeft alle programma’s weer die momenteel zijn gereserveerd.
O Druk op de afstandsbediening op CH LIST om de kanalenlijsten weer te geven.
N De gekleurde toetsen met de kanalenlijst gebruiken
- Rood (Type kanaal) : schakelen tussen TV, Radio, Data / Other (Gegevens /
Overige) en All (Alles).
- Groen (Zoom) : vergroot of verkleint een kanaalnummer.
- Geel (Selecteren) : meerdere kanaallijsten selecteren.
- TTOOLS (Extra) : geeft het menu Verwijderen (of Toevoegen), Toevoegen
als Favoriet (of Verw. uit Favorieten), Vergrend. (of Slot uit), Timerweergave,
Kanaalnaam wijzigen, Kanaalnummer wijzigen, Sorteren, Niets select.
(of Alles select.), of Automatisch opslaan.
(De optiemenu’s kunnen verschillen, afhankelijk van de situatie.)
N Weergavepictogrammen kanaalstatus
A Een analoog kanaal. c Selecteer een kanaal door op de
gele knop te drukken.
♥ Een kanaal als favoriet instellen. ( Een programma dat momenteel
wordt uitgezonden.
\ Een vergrendeld kanaal. ) Een gereserveerd programma.
Kanaal
Minigids
Standaardgids : Volledige gids
Kanalenlijst
Kanaalmodus : Toegev. kanalen
Fijnafstemming
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Alle kanalen
Alle Type kanaa Zoom Keuze Pagina Extra
Volledige gids
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
Geen gedetailleerde informatie.
Vandaag 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
900 f tn
901 ITV Play
902 Kerrang!
903 Kiss
903 oneword
▼ 903 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
Geen informatie
Geen informatie
Geen informatie
Freshmen O..
Minigids DTV Cable 900 f tn
Street Hypnosis
Booze Britain
2:00
2:30
▼ 5:00
Freshmen On Campus
Bekijken Informatie Pagina Volledige gids Sluiten
Bekijken Informatie Pagina Minigids Meer dan 24 uur Sluiten
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:47:55 PMNederlands - 14
❑ Optiemenu kanaallijst (in Alle kanalen / Toegevoegde kanalen / Voorkeurskanalen)
N Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven.
N De menuopties kunnen, afhankelijk van de kanaalstatus, verschillen.
Toevoegen / Verwijderen
U kunt een kanaal toevoegen of verwijderen om de door u gewenste kanalen weer te
geven.
N Alle verwijderde kanalen worden getoond op het menu Alle kanalen.
N Een grijs gekleurd kanaal geeft aan dat het kanaal is verwijderd.
N Het menu Toevoegen verschijnt alleen bij verwijderde kanalen.
N U kunt ook op dezelfde manier een kanaal verwijderen uit het menu Toegevoegde
kanalen of Voorkeurskanalen.
Toevoegen aan Voorkeurskanalen / Verwijderen uit Voorkeurskanalen
U kunt kanalen die u vaak bekijkt instellen als voorkeurskanaal.
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de
voorkeurskanalen ook instellen door Extra → Toevoegen aan Favoriet /
Verwijderen uit Favorieten te selecteren.
O Druk op de afstandsbediening op de toets FAV.CH om de voorkeurskanalen te
selecteren die u hebt ingesteld.
N Het symbool “♥” wordt weergegeven en het kanaal wordt ingesteld als voorkeurskanaal.
N Alle voorkeurskanalen worden weergegeven in het menu Voorkeurskanalen.
Vergrend. / Slot uit
U kunt een kanaal vergrendelen, zodat het kanaal niet geselecteerd en bekeken kan worden.
Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar wanneer Kinderslot is ingesteld op Aan. (Zie pagina 24)
N Het invoerscherm voor de pincode verschijnt. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in.
N De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is ‘0-0-0-0’. U kunt de pincode wijzigen door PIN wijzigen uit het menu te
selecteren.
N Het symbool “\” wordt weergegeven en het kanaal wordt vergrendeld.
Timerweergave
Wanneer u een programma dat u wilt bekijken, reserveert, schakelt het kanaal automatisch naar het gereserveerde kanaal in de
kanaallijst, zelfs wanneer u een naar een ander kanaal kijkt. Stel eerst de huidige tijd in om een programma te reserveren.
(Zie pagina 22)
N Alleen kanalen in het geheugen kunnen worden gereserveerd.
N U kunt het kanaal, de maand, de dag, het jaar, de uren en minuten ook rechtstreeks met de cijfertoetsen op de
afstandsbediening instellen.
N Een programma reserveren wordt getoond in het menu Geprogrammeerd.
N Digitale programmagids en kijkreserveringen
Wanneer er een digitaal kanaal is geselecteerd en u op de toets ► drukt, wordt de programmagids voor het kanaal
weergegeven. U kunt een programma reserveren volgens de hierboven beschreven procedures.
Kanaalnaam wijzigen (alleen analoog kanaal)
Kanalen kunnen worden voorzien van een aanduiding, zodat de corresponderende letters verschijnen wanneer het kanaal wordt
geselecteerd.
N De namen van de digitale zendkanalen worden automatisch toegewezen en kunnen niet worden voorzien van een aanduiding.
Kanaalnummer wijzigen (alleen digitaal kanaal)
U kunt het kanaalnummer ook wijzigen door op de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening te drukken.
Sorteren (alleen analoog kanaal)
Hiermee kunt u de programmanummers van de opgeslagen kanalen wijzigen. Deze bewerking kan nodig zijn na gebruik van de
functie kanalen automatisch opslaan.
Alles select. / Niets select.
U kunt alle kanalen in de kanalenlijst selecteren of deselecteren.
N U kunt de functies Toevoegen / Verwijderen, Toevoegen als Favoriet / Verw. uit Favorieten of Vergrendelen / Slot uit tegelijkertijd
voor meerdere kanalen uitvoeren. Selecteer de gewenste kanalen. Druk op de gele toets om alle geselecteerde kanalen
tegelijkertijd te selecteren.
N Het symbool c verschijnt links van de geselecteerde kanalen.
N U kunt alleen Niets select. kiezen wanneer er een kanaal is geselecteerd.
Automatisch opslaan
N zie pagina 11 voor meer informatie over het instellen van opties.
N Wanneer een kanaal is vergrendeld met de functie Kinderslot, wordt er een
venster weergegeven waarin u een pincode kunt opgeven.
❑ Optiemenu voor kanalenlijst (in Geprogrammeerd)
U kunt een reservering bekijken, bewerken of verwijderen.
N Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven.
• Info wijzigen: Selecteren om een reservering te bekijken.
• Progr. annuleren: Selecteren om een reservering te annuleren.
• Informatie: Selecteren om een reservering weer te geven. (U kunt de reserveringsinformatie ook wijzigen.)
• Alles select. / Niets select.: Alle gereserveerde programma’s selecteren of deselecteren.
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Alle kanalen
Verwijderen
Toevoegen als Favoriet
Vergrend.
Timerweergave
Kanaalnummer wijzigen
Sorteren
▼
Geprogrammeerd
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer
Info wijzigen
Progr. annuleren
Informatie
Alles select.
Alle Zoom Keuze Extra Informatie
Alle Type kanaa Zoom Keuze Pagina Extra
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:47:55 PMNederlands - 15
De beeldinstellingen aanpassen
❑ Modus
U kunt het beeld selecteren dat het beste overeenkomt met uw wensen.
Dynamisch / Standaard / Eco / Film
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de
beeldmodus ook instellen door Extra → Beeldmodus te selecteren.
❑ Cel Helderheid / Contrast / Helderheid / Scherpte / Kleur / Tint (G/R)
Uw tv heeft verschillende instelmogelijkheden waarmee u de beeldkwaliteit kunt beheren.
• Cel Helderheid : hiermee past u de pixelhelderheid aan.
• Contrast : hiermee past u het contrastniveau aan.
• Helderheid : hiermee past u de helderheid van het beeld aan.
• Scherpte : hiermee past u de randdefinitie van het beeld aan.
• Kleur : hiermee past u de kleurintensiteit van het beeld aan.
• Tint (G/R) : hiermee past u de tint van de kleur van het beeld aan.
N Wanneer u wijzigingen aanbrengt bij Cel Helderheid, Contrast, Helderheid, Scherpte, Kleur of Tint (G/R), wordt het
schermmenu dienovereenkomstig aangepast.
N De aangepaste waarden worden toegepast op elke beeldmodus.
N In de analoge modi TV, Ext., AV van het PAL-systeem kunt u de functie Tint niet gebruiken.
N In de modus PC kunt u alleen de opties Cel Helderheid, Contrast en Helderheid wijzigen.
N Elke aangepaste instelling wordt afzonderlijk opgeslagen voor de bijbehorende invoermodus.
N De hoeveelheid verbruikte energie kan sterk worden verminderd als de helderheid van het beeld wordt teruggebracht. Zo
worden de algemene verbruikskosten ook lager.
❑ Geavanceerde instellingen
U kunt de geavanceerde instellingen voor uw scherm wijzigen, waaronder de kleur en het contrast.
N Geavanceerde instellingen is alleen beschikbaar in de modi Standaard en Film.
N In de modus PC kunt u alleen wijzigingen aanbrengen in de opties Dynamisch
contrast, Gamma en Witbalans in Geavanceerde instellingen.
Zwarttinten → Uit / Donker / Donkerder / Donkerste
U kunt de beelddiepte aanpassen door de kleurverzadiging voor zwart aan te
passen.
Dynamisch → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog
U kunt het beeldcontrast aanpassen voor een optimaal contrast.
Gamma
U kunt de intensiteit van de primaire kleuren aanpassen (rood, groen, blauw).
Kleurruimte
Kleurruimte is een kleurenmatrix opgebouwd uit rood, groen en blauw. Selecteer de gewenste kleurruimte om een zo natuurgetrouw
mogelijke kleurweergave te verkrijgen.
• Auto: hiermee wordt automatisch het kleurbereik ingesteld op basis van de
video-ingangsbron.
• Eigen: selecteert een kleurbereik dat breder is dan het bereik van de invoervideobron.
• Aangepast: het kleurenschema aanpassen aan uw voorkeuren.
N Kleurruimte aanpassen
Hiermee kunt u de kleuren aanpassen aan uw voorkeuren. Kleur is beschikbaar als Kleurruimte is ingesteld op Aangepast.
- Kleur → Rood / Groen / Blauw / Geel / Cyaan / Magenta
- Rood / Groen / Blauw : de RGB-waarden voor de geselecteerde kleur aanpassen.
- Reset : standaardinstellingen van de kleurruimte resetten.
Beeldbeheer
Wordt vervolgd...
Modus : Standaard ►
Cel Helderheid : 4
Contrast : 95
Helderheid : 45
Scherpte : 50
Kleur : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Geavanceerde instellingen
Beeld
Kleur : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Geavanceerde instellingen ►
Afbeeldingsopties
Beeld resetten
Beeld
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:47:56 PMNederlands - 16
Witbalans
U kunt de kleurtemperatuur wijzigen voor natuurgetrouwere beeldkleuren.
• R-basis / G-basis / B-basis / R-niveau / G-niveau / B-niveau : als u de waarde van de aanpassing wijzigt, wordt het
aangepaste scherm vernieuwd.
• Reset : de standaard witbalans herstellen.
Huidkleur
U kunt de roodwaarde van de huidskleur aanpassen.
N Als u de waarde van de aanpassing wijzigt, wordt het aangepaste scherm vernieuwd.
Randverbetering → Uit / Aan
U kunt randen van objecten benadrukken in het beeld.
xvYCC → Uit / Aan
Door de xvYCC-modus in te stellen op Aan worden de details en kleurruimte vergroot wanneer u vanaf een extern apparaat (zoals
een dvd-speler) naar films kijkt.
N xvYCC is beschikbaar wanneer de beeldmodus is ingesteld op Film, en wanneer de externe input is ingesteld op de modus
HDMI of Component.
N Ova funkcija možda neće biti podržana u zavisnosti od externe apparaten.
❑ Afbeeldingsopties
U kunt de overige beeldinstellingen aanpassen aan uw voorkeuren.
N In de modus PC kunt u alleen wijzigingen aanbrengen in de opties Kleur tint,
Formaat en Inbrandbeveiliging in het menu Afbeeldingsopties.
Kleur tint → Koel / Normaal / Warm1 / Warm2 / Warm3
U kunt kiezen welke kleurtint u het prettigst vindt.
N De aangepaste waarden worden opgeslagen overeenkomstig de geselecteerde
beeldmodus.
N Warm1, Warm2, of Warm3 is alleen ingeschakeld in de beeldmodus Film.
Formaat → Auto-breed / 16:9 / Breedbeeldzoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Volledig
scherm
kunt het beeldformaat selecteren dat het beste overeenkomt met uw wensen.
• Auto-breed : Hiermee stelt u het beeld automatisch breed in.
• 16:9 : Stelt het beeld in op de 16:9 breedbeeldmodus.
• Breedbeeldzoom : Het beeld wordt vergroot en uitgerekt van 4:3- tot 16:9-formaat.
• Zoom : Hiermee vergroot u het beeld verticaal op het scherm.
• 4:3 : Stelt het beeld in op de 4:3 normale modus.
• Volledig scherm : het volledige eigen HD-signaal dat niet kan worden weergegeven op een normale tv.
N Afhankelijk van de ingangsbron kunnen de opties voor het beeldformaat variëren.
N De beschikbare onderdelen kunnen, afhankelijk van de geselecteerde modus, verschillen.
N In de modus PC kunt u alleen de modi 16:9 en 4:3 aanpassen.
N Wanneer de modus Dubbel ( , ) is ingesteld voor PIP, kan de waarde voor Beeldformaat niet worden ingesteld.
N De instellingen voor elk extern apparaat dat u hebt aangesloten op een ingang op de tv kunnen worden aangepast en
opgeslagen.
N Er kan tijdelijke beeldretentie optreden wanneer er langer dan twee uur een statisch beeld op de tv wordt weergegeven.
N Breedbeeldzoom : druk op de toets ► om Positie te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
Gebruik de toets ▲ of ▼ om het scherm naar boven of beneden te verplaatsen. Druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
N Zoom : druk op de toets ► om Positie te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
Gebruik de toets ▲ of ▼ om het beeld naar boven of beneden te verplaatsen. Druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
Druk op de toets ► om Formaat te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om
het beeldformaat in verticale richting te vergroten of te verkleinen. Druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
N Na het selecteren van Volledig scherm in de modus HDMI (1080i / 1080p) of Component (1080i / 1080p) : Selecteer
Positie door op de toets ◄ of ► te drukken. Gebruik de toetsen ▲, ▼, ◄ en ► om de afbeelding te verplaatsen.
N Reset : druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Reset te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. U kunt de instelling
initialiseren.
N Als u de functie Volledig scherm gebruikt met een ingangssignaal HDMI 720p, wordt 1 kaderlijn verwijderd aan de
bovenkant, onderkant, linkerkant en rechterkant, zoals in de functie Overscan.function.
Schermmodus → 16:9 / Breedbeeldzoom / Zoom / 4:3
Wanneer u het beeldformaat op een tv met een breedte van 16:9 instelt op Auto-breed, kunt u het gewenste beeldformaat instellen
op 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) of niet. Omdat er voor elk land in Europa een ander beeldformaat geldt, is deze functie bedoeld
om het juiste beeldformaat te kiezen.
N Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar in de modus Auto-breed.
Wordt vervolgd...
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Geavanceerde instellingen
Afbeeldingsopties ►
Beeld resetten
Beeld
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:47:56 PMNederlands - 17
N Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de modus PC, Component of HDMI.
Dig. ruisfilter → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog / Auto
Als het ontvangen signaal zwak is, kunt u de functie voor digitale ruisonderdrukking activeren om statische ruis en echobeelden te
reduceren die mogelijk op het scherm verschijnen.
N Als het signaal zwak is, selecteert u één van de andere opties totdat de afbeelding het best wordt weergegeven.
HDMI-zwartniveau → Normaal / Laag
U kunt direct het zwartniveau op het scherm selecteren om de schermdiepte aan te passen.
N Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar wanneer de externe ingang is verbonden met HDMI (RGB-signalen).
1080 Full HD Motion-demo → Aan / Uit
De nieuwe generatie PDP-panelen van Samsung hebben een prachtige Full HD motion-helderheid bij het bekijken van snelle
sportbeelden, films en games.
N Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de modus PC, Game of Media Play.
Filmmodus
U kunt de beeldmodus optimaliseren voor het weergeven van films.
• Uit : de functie Filmmodus uitschakelen.
• Auto1 : het beeld wordt automatisch aangepast aan de beste kwaliteit voor het weergeven van een film.
• Auto2 : optimaliseert automatisch de videotekst bij het weergeven van een film.
• Bioscoop : Geeft de ultieme bioscoopervaring.
N De filmmodus wordt ondersteund in TV, Video, Component (480i / 1080i) en HDMI(1080i).
Real 100Hz Demo → Uit / Aan
U kunt duidelijk verschil zien tussen Real 100Hz (Vloeiend 100 Hz) en 50 Hz, met name tijdens het kijken naar snelle scènes.
Bij langzame scènes ziet u geen verschil tussen Real 100Hz en 50 Hz. Demo 100Hz werkt alleen met een 50-Hz signaal.
De demomodus Real 100Hz (Vloeiend 100Hz) is bedoeld voor demonstraties in de winkel met speciale films.
Modus Alleen blauw → Uit / Aan
Deze functie is voor experts op het gebied van AV-apparaten. Deze functie geeft het blauwe signaal weer door het rode en groene
signaal uit het videosignaal te verwijderen, waardoor er een soort blauwfilter-effect ontstaat dat wordt gebruikt om de kleur en tint
van videoapparatuur zoals dvd-spelers en Home Theaters aan te passen.
N Modus Alleen blauw is beschikbaar wanneer de beeldmodus is ingesteld op Film of Standaard.
Inbrandbeveiliging
Om het risico van het inbranden van het scherm te verkleinen, is dit apparaat uitgerust met technologie voor inbrandpreventie.
Met deze technologie kunt u de beweging van het beeld op en neer (Verticaa) en van links naar rechts (Horizontaal) instellen.
Met de tijdsinstelling kunt u de tijd tussen het bewegen van het beeld programmeren in minuten.
• Pixelverschuiving : met deze functie worden iedere minuut de pixels op uw plasmascherm in horizontale of verticale richting
verschoven om de kans op inbranding van uw scherm te minimaliseren.
N Optimale instellingen voor pixelverschuiving
Onderdeel TV/Ext./AV/Component/HDMI/PC
Horizontaal 0~2 2
Verticaal 0~4 4
Tijd (minuten) 1~4 min 2 min
N De waarde voor Pixelverschuiving kan verschillen afhankelijk van het formaat (inches) en de modus van de monitor.
N Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de modus Volledig scherm.
• Schuiven : deze functie helpt ingebrande beelden op het scherm te verwijderen door de pixels op uw plasmascherm in een
bepaald patroon te verschuiven. Gebruik deze functie wanneer er beelden of symbolen op uw scherm achterblijven, vooral na
het langere tijd weergeven van een stilstaand beeld op uw scherm.
• Grijswaarden balken : wanneer u tv kijkt met de schermverhouding 4:3, wordt voorkomen dat het scherm beschadigd raakt
door de witbalans geheel links en rechts aan te passen.
Wordt vervolgd...
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:47:57 PMNederlands - 18
De tv instellen voor uw PC
N Vooraf instellen : druk op de toets SOURCE om de modus PC in te schakelen.
❑ Autom. afstellen
Via Autom. afstellen wordt het pc-scherm van de tv automatisch aangepast op het
binnenkomende pc-videosignaal. De waarden voor fijnheid, grofheid en positie worden
automatisch aangepast.
N Deze functie is niet beschikbaar in de DVI-HDMI-modus.
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt Autom.
afstellen ook instellen door Extra → Autom. afstellen te selecteren.
❑ Scherm
U past de beeldkwaliteit aan om beeldruis te verwijderen of te verminderen. Als de ruis niet verdwijnt door het kanaal nauwkeurig af
te stemmen, stel dan de frequentie zo goed mogelijk in (Grof) en voer opnieuw de instelling Fine-tune (Fijnfafstemming) uit. Stel het
beeld opnieuw in het midden van het scherm in nadat de ruis is verminderd.
Grof
Past de frequentie aan wanneer verticale ruis wordt weergegeven op het scherm.
Fijn
Past het scherm aan zodat dit helderder is.
Positie pc
De horizontale en verticale beeldpositie van de pc optimaliseren als deze niet gelijk is aan het tv-scherm. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼
om de verticale positie aan te passen. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om de horizontale positie aan te passen.
Beeld resetten
U kunt alle beeldinstellingen vervangen door fabrieksinstellingen.
- Licht : wanneer u de schermratio op 4:3 instelt, worden de linker- en rechterkant
helderder.
- Donker : wanneer u de schermratio op 4:3 instelt, worden de linker- en rechterkant
donkerder.
❑ Beeld resetten → Beeldmodus resetten / Annuleren
Herstelt de standaardwaarden van alle beeldinstellingen.
N Selecteer een beeldmodus om te resetten. Het resetten wordt voor elke beeldmodus
uitgevoerd.
Helderheid : 45
Scherpte : 50
Autom. afstellen ►
Scherm
Geavanceerde instellingen
Afbeeldingsopties
Beeld resetten
Beeld Picture
Geavanceerde instellingen
Afbeeldingsopties
Beeld resetten ►
Beeld
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:47:57 PMNederlands - 19
Pc-scherm
❑ Software configureren (gebaseerd op Windows XP)
Hieronder ziet u de Windows-beeldscherminstellingen voor een standaardcomputer.
De vensters op uw computer kunnen enigszins afwijken, afhankelijk van de versie
van Windows en de geïnstalleerde videokaart. Maar ook dan zijn in de meeste
gevallen dezelfde basisinstallatiegegevens van toepassing. (Neem contact op met
de computerfabrikant of Samsungleverancier als dit niet het geval is.)
1. Klik eerst op ‘Configuratiescherm’ in het menu Start van Windows.
2. Wanneer het venster configuratiescherm verschijnt, klikt u op ‘Beeldscherm’ om een
dialoogvenster voor het beeldscherm te openen.
3. Wanneer het Configuratiescherm verschijnt, klikt u op ‘Weergave’ om een
dialoogvenster voor het beeldscherm te openen.
4. Selecteer het tabblad ‘Instellingen’ in het dialoogvenster.
Geef de juiste resolutie voor de monitor op (resolutie)
Optimaal: 1920 X 1080. Als het dialoogvenster een optie bevat voor het instellen van
de verticale frequentie, is de juiste waarde ‘60’ of ‘60 Hz’. Klik anders op ‘OK’ om het
dialoogvenster te sluiten.
❑ Weergavemodi
Zowel de beeldpositie als de beeldgrootte varieert afhankelijk van het type monitor en de bijbehorende resolutie.
De resoluties in de tabel worden aangeraden
N Bij gebruik van de HDMI/DVI-kabelverbinding, moet u de HDMI IN 2(DVI) -aansluiting gebruiken.
N De interlacemodus wordt niet ondersteund.
N De tv werkt mogelijk niet normaal als een afwijkend videoformaat wordt geselecteerd.
N De modi Separate en Composite worden ondersteund. SOG wordt niet ondersteund.
N Een VGA-kabel die te lang of van lage kwaliteit is, kan ruis in het beeld veroorzaken bij hoge resoluties (1920x1080).
D-Sub- en HDMI/DVI-invoer
Modus Resolutie
Horizontaal Frequentie
(kHz)
Verticale frequentie
(Hz)
Pixelklok Frequentie (MHz) Sync-polariteit (H/V)
IBM
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / -
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / +
MAC
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / -
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / -
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / +
VESA CVT
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / +
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / +
1280 x 720
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / +
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / +
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / +
VESA DMT
640 x 480
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / -
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / -
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / -
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / +
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / +
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / +
1024 x 768
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / -
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / -
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / +
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 800
49.702 59.810 83.500 - / +
62.795 74.934 106.500 - / +
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 1024
63.981 60.020 108.000 + / +
79.976 75.025 135.000 + / +
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / +
1440 x 900
55.935 59.887 106.500 - / +
70.635 74.984 136.750 - / +
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / +
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / +
VESA GTF
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / +
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / -
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:47:58 PMNederlands - 20
De geluidsinstellingen wijzigen
❑ Modus
U kunt het geluidseffect selecteren dat het best overeenkomt met de beelden die u
bekijkt.
Standaard / Muziek / Film / Heldere spraak / Aangepast
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt het geluid
ook instellen door Extra → Geluidsmodus te selecteren.
❑ Toonregeling
U kunt de geluidsinstellingen aanpassen aan uw persoonlijke voorkeuren.
• Modus : u kunt een geluidsmodus selecteren die bij uw persoonlijke voorkeuren past.
• Balans : regelt de balans tussen de linker- en de rechterluidsprekers.
• 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (bandbreedte wijzigen) : het niveau van verschillende bandbreedtes aanpassen
• Reset : standaardinstellingen van de equalizer resetten.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Aan / Uit
SRS TruSurround HD is een technologie waarin TruSurround, FOCUS en TruBass wordt gecombineerd.
SRS TruSurround HD stelt u in staat om te genieten van een virtueel 5.1 Surround Sound via de twee luidsprekers van de tv. Deze
functie levert niet alleen een volle, diepe bas, maar verbetert tevens de resolutie van de hoge frequenties.
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt
SRS TruSurround HD ook instellen door Extra → SRS TS HD te selecteren.
TruSurround HD, SRS en het -symbool zijn handelsmerken van SRS Labs, Inc.
De TruSurround HD-technologie valt onder licentie van SRS Labs, Inc.
N Als bij het weergeven van muziek op de tv het geluid abnormaal klinkt, past u de toonregeling en SRS TruSurround HD
(Aan/Uit) aan.
❑ Gesproken taal (alleen digitaal kanaal)
U kunt de standaardwaarde voor de gesproken talen wijzigen. Hiermee geeft u de taalinformatie voor het inkomende signaal weer.
N U kunt alleen een taal selecteren uit de talen waarin wordt uitgezonden.
❑ Geluidsformaat → MPEG / Dolby Digital (alleen digitaal kanaal)
Wanneer de hoofdluidspreker en de audio-ontvanger beide geluid voortbrengen, kan er echo optreden omdat geluid in de
hoofdluidspreker en de audio-ontvanger niet op gelijke snelheid wordt gedecodeerd. Gebruik in dat geval de functie tv-luidspreker.
N U kunt alleen een taal selecteren uit de talen waarin wordt uitgezonden.
Geproduceerd onder licentie van Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby en double-D-symbool zijn handelsmerken van Dolby Laboratories.
❑ Audiobeschrijving (alleen digitaal kanaal)
Dit is een ondersteunende geluidsfunctie die een aanvullend geluidsspoor laat horen voor blinden en slechtzienden. Deze functie
verwerkt het geluidsspoor voor de audiobeschrijving, wanneer dat samen met het hoofdgeluid wordt uitgezonden. Gebruikers
kunnen de functie Audiobeschrijving of Uit zetten en het volume bepalen.
O U kunt deze opties selecteren door simpelweg op de toets AD van de
afstandsbediening te drukken.
Audiobeschrijving → Aan / Uit
De functie voor gesproken omschrijvingen in- of uitschakelen.
Volume
het volume voor gesproken omschrijving aanpassen.
N Volume is actief wanneer Audiobeschrijving is ingesteld op Aan.
Geluidsbeheer
Modus : Aangepast ►
Toonregeling
SRS TruSurround HD : Uit
Gesproken taal : ----
Geluidsformaat : ----
Audiobeschrijving
Auto Volume : Uit
Luidspreker selecteren : TV-luidspreker
Geluid
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:47:59 PMNederlands - 21
❑ Auto Volume → Uit / Aan
Elk zendstation kent andere signaalkenmerken, waardoor het lastig kan zijn het volume steeds opnieuw in te stellen wanneer
u van kanaal verandert. Met deze functie kunt u het volume van het gewenste kanaal automatisch laten instellen. Bij een hoog
modulatiesignaal wordt de geluidsweergave verlaagd en bij een laag modulatiesignaal wordt de geluidsweergave verhoogd.
❑ Luidspreker selecteren → Ext. luidspreker / TV-luidspreker
Indien u het geluid door aparte luidsprekers wilt horen, schakelt u de interne
versterker uit.
N De toetsen – +, MMUTE werken niet wanneer Luidspreker selecteren is ingesteld op Ext. luidspreker.
N Wanneer u Ext. luidspreker selecteert in het menu Luidspreker selecteren worden de geluidsinstellingen beperkt.
Interne luidsprekers tv
Audio-uitgang (optisch, L / R -uitgang) naar
geluidssysteem
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI
Tv-luidspreker Geluidsuitvoer Luidsprekers
Externe luidspreker Onderdrukken Luidsprekers
Geen videosignaal Onderdrukken Onderdrukken
❑ Geluid selecteren
Wanneer de PIP-functie is geactiveerd, kunt u naar het geluid bij het subbeeld (PIP) luisteren.
• Hoofd: Selecteert het geluid van het hoofdbeeld.
• Sub: Selecteert het geluid van het subbeeld.
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt het
geluid van het subbeeld ook instellen door Tools → PIP → Geluidskeuze te
selecteren.
N U kunt deze optie selecteren wanneer PIP is ingesteld op Aan.
❑ Geluid resetten
Alles resetten / Geluidsmodus resetten / Annuleren : U kunt de
fabrieksinstellingen voor de geluidsinstellingen herstellen.
De geluidsmodus selecteren
Wanneer u de optie Dual l ll instelt, wordt de huidige geluidsmodus op het scherm weergegeven.
Type uitzending Aanduiding op scherm
NICAM
Stereo
Normale uitzending
(Standaard audio)
Mono (normaal gebruik)
Normale en NICAM Mono NICAM
Mono
(Normaal)
NICAM-Stereo
NICAM
Stereo
Mono
(Normaal)
NICAM Dual-I/II
NICAM
Dual-1
NICAM
Dual-2
Mono
(Normaal)
A2
Stereo
Normale uitzending
(Standaard audio)
Mono (Normaal gebruik)
Tweetalig of DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II
Stereo Stereo
Mono
(Geforceerd mono)
N Wanneer het stereosignaal te zwak is en er automatische zenderverdringing optreedt, kunt u beter naar mono overschakelen.
N Deze functie wordt alleen geactiveerd in stereogeluidssignaal. Het wordt gedeactiveerd in monogeluidssignaal.
N Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar in de modus TV.
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de
geluidsmodus ook selecteren door Extra → Dual l ll te selecteren.
Luidspreker selecteren : TV-luidspreker
Geluidskeuze : Hoofdtuner
Geluid resetten ►
Geluid
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:47:59 PMNederlands - 22
Beschrijving van de functies
Tijd instellen
❑ Klok
Het is noodzakelijk de klok in te stellen om de verschillende functies van de tv te kunnen
gebruiken.
N De huidige tijd wordt telkens weergegeven wanneer u op de toets INFO drukt.
N Als u de voedingskabel hebt losgekoppeld,
moet u de klok opnieuw instellen.
Klokmodus
U kunt de huidige tijd handmatig of automatisch instellen.
• Auto: de huidige tijd wordt automatisch ingesteld op basis van de tijd van de digitale
uitzending.
• Handmatig: u kunt de huidige tijd handmatig
op een bepaalde tijd instellen.
Klok instellen
u kunt de huidige tijd handmatig instellen.
N Stel dit item in wanneer u Klokmodus hebt ingesteld op Handmatig.
N U kunt rechtstreeks waarden voor Dag, Maan, Jaar, Uur, Min opgeven via de
cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening.
❑ Slaaptimer → Uit / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min
/ 180 min
De functie slaaptimer schakelt automatisch uit na een van tevoren ingestelde tijd
(30, 60, 90, 120, 150 en 180 minuten).
N De tv schakelt automatisch over op stand-by wanneer de timer 0 bereikt.
N Als u de functie Slaaptimer wilt annuleren, selecteert u Uit.
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven.
U kunt de sleep timer ook instellen door Extra → Slaaptimer te selecteren.
❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
U kunt de tv op een gewenst tijdstip in- en uitschakelen.
• Inschakeltijd: Specifieke tijd waarop de tv moet worden ingeschakeld.
• Uitschakeltijd: Specifieke tijd waarop de tv moet worden uitgeschakeld.
• Volume: Het volumeniveau selecteren.
• Bron : Hiermee selecteert u een apparaat voor TV, USB.
N Wanneer u TV selecteert kunt u opties voor Antenne en Kanaal selecteren.
- Antenne: Ant of Kabel selecteren.
- Kanaal: Het gewenste kanaal selecteren.
N Wanneer u USB selecteert, kunt u de inhoud instellen.
- Inhoud: Hiermee kunt u de gewenste inhoud voor USB selecteren.
N Als het USB-station geen muziekbestanden bevat of de map met muziekbestanden niet is geselecteerd, werkt de timerfunctie
niet goed.
• Herhalen : Selecteer Eenmaal, Dagelijks, Ma~Vr, Ma~Za, Za~Zo of Handmatig.
N Wanneer Handmatig is geselecteerd, kunt u op de toets ► drukken om de gewenste dag te selecteren. Druk bij de gewenste
dag op de toets ENTERE zodat het pictogram c verschijnt.
N De hele map op de USB ondersteunt Engelse 64-bits tekens.
N U moet eerst de klok instellen.
N U kunt de uren en minuten ook rechtstreeks met de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening instellen.
N Automatisch uitschakelen
Als u de timer instelt op Aan, schakelt de televisie uiteindelijk uit wanneer binnen 3 uur na het automatisch inschakelen van het
toestel geen toets wordt ingedrukt. Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar in de timermodus Aan. Met deze functie wordt oververhitting
tegengegaan, wat kan gebeuren als het toestel te lang ingeschakeld blijft staan.
Tijd
Klok : -- : -- ►
Slaaptimer : Uit
Timer 1 : Uit
Timer 2 : Uit
Timer 3 : Uit
U Verpl. E Enter R Terug
Instellingen
Plug & Play
Taalkeuze : Nederlands
Tijd ►
Uitzenden
Beveiliging
Netwerk
Algemeen
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:48:00 PMNederlands - 23
Het instellingenmenu gebruiken
❑ Taalkeuze
U kunt de menutaal instellen.
❑ Uitzending
Ondertiteling
U kunt de ondertiteling in- en uitschakelen. Gebruik dit menu om de modus voor de
ondertiteling in te stellen. De optie Normaal is de basisinstelling voor ondertiteling en
de optie Slechthorenden is ondertiteling voor doven en slechthorenden.
• Ondertiteling → Uit / Aan : De ondertiteling in- of uitschakelen.
• Modus → Normaal / Slechthorenden : de ondertitelingsmodus instellen.
• Ondertitelingstaal : de ondertitelingstaal instellen.
N Wanneer u naar een programma kijkt dat de functie Slechthorenden niet
ondersteunt, wordt Normaal automatisch geactiveerd, zelfs wanneer de modus
Slechthorenden is geselecteerd.
N Engels is de standaardtaal als de geselecteerde taal niet beschikbaar is in de
uitzending.
O U kunt deze opties selecteren door simpelweg op de toets SUBT. van de
afstandsbediening te drukken.
Digitale tekst → Deactiveren / Activeren
Als het programma wordt uitgezonden met digitale tekst, is deze functie ingeschakeld.
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Een internationale standaard voor gegevenscoderingssystemen die in multimedia en hypermedia worden gebruikt. Gegevens
worden gecodeerd op een hoger niveau dan het MPEG-systeem, waaronder hypermedia voor gegevenskoppeling, zoals
stilstaande beelden, tekstservice, animatie, beeld- en videobestanden en multimediagegevens. MHEG is een technologie voor
interactie met de gebruiker tijdens runtime en wordt toegepast op verschillende gebieden, waaronder VOD (Video On Demand),
ITV (interactieve tv), EC (e-commerce), afstandsonderwijs, telefonische vergaderingen, digitale bibliotheken en netwerkspellen.
Teleteksttaal
Taal voor teletekst instellen door taaltype te selecteren.
N Engels is de standaardtaal als de geselecteerde taal niet beschikbaar is in de uitzending.
Voorkeur
• Eerste taal voor audio / Tweede taal voor audio / Eerste taal ondertitel / Tweede taal ondertitel / Eerste taal teletekst /
Tweede taal teletekst
Gebruikers kunnen met deze functie een van de talen selecteren. De geselecteerde taal wordt standaard gebruikt wanneer u
een kanaal selecteert.
Als u de taalinstelling wijzigt, worden de Ondertitelingstaal, Gesproken taal en Teleteksttaal in het menu Taalkeuze automatisch
gewijzigd in de geselecteerde taal.
Met Ondertitelingstaal, Gesproken taal en Teleteksttaal in het menu Taalkeuze geeft u een lijst weer met talen die door het
huidige kanaal worden ondersteund.
De geselecteerde taal is gemarkeerd. Als u deze taalinstelling wijzigt, is de nieuwe selectie alleen geldig voor het huidige
kanaal. De gewijzigde instelling is niet van invloed op de instellingen voor Eerste taal ondertitel, Eerste taal voor audio of Eerste
taal teletekst van het menu Voorkeur.
Algemene interface
• De CI(CI+)-kaart plaatsen
1. De CI CAM-module kunt u verkrijgen bij uw lokale leverancier of door deze
telefonisch te bestellen.
2. Steek de CI(CI+)-kaart in de CAM in de richting van de pijl op zijn plaats.
3. Plaats de CAM met de CI(CI+)-kaart in de sleuf voor de algemene interface.
N Duw de CAM in de richting van de pijl volledig in de sleuf.
4. Controleer of u een beeld op een kanaal met een vervormd signaal kunt
bekijken.
• CI(CI+)-menu
Hiermee kunt u het CAM-menu selecteren. Selecteer het CI(CI+)-menu op basis van
het menu PC-kaart.
• Toepassingsinfo
Met deze optie geeft u informatie over een CAM in de CI-sleuf weer.
Toepassingsinfo heeft betrekking op de CI(CI+)-kaart. U kunt de CAM altijd installeren, ongeacht of de tv is in- of uitgeschakeld.
N CI-/CI+-kaart worden niet ondersteund in sommige landen, regio's en zendstations. Controleer dit bij uw geautoriseerde
verkoper.
Wordt vervolgd....
Instellingen
Plug & Play
Taalkeuze : Nederlands ►
Tijd
Uitzenden
Beveiliging
Netwerk
Algemeen
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:48:00 PMNederlands - 24
❑ Beveiliging
N Op sommige modellen is de pincode vereist bij het uitvoeren van Plug & Play.
Kinderslot → Uit / Aan
Met deze functie kunt u door middel van het uitschakelen van beeld en geluid voorkomen dat ongeautoriseerde gebruikers, zoals
kinderen, ongepaste programma’s bekijken.
N Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor de pincode. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in.
N De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is ‘0-0-0-0’. U kunt de pincode wijzigen door in het menu de optie PIN wijzigen
te selecteren.
N U kunt sommige kanalen in de kanalenlijst vergrendelen. (Zie pagina 14)
N Kinderslot is alleen beschikbaar in de modus TV.
Kinderslot
Door een pincode (persoonlijk identificatienummer) van vier cijfers in te stellen kunt u met deze functie voorkomen dat
ongeautoriseerde gebruikers, zoals kinderen, ongeschikte programma’s bekijken.
N Het item Leeftijdsbeperking kan per land verschillen.
N Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor de pincode. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in.
N De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is ‘0-0-0-0’. U kunt de pincode wijzigen door in het menu de optie PIN wijzigen
te selecteren.
N Wanneer er een leeftijdsbeperking is ingesteld, wordt het symbool “\” weergegeven.
N Alles mag / Alles blok : druk hierop om alle leeftijdsbeperkingen te ontgrendelen of vergrendelen.
PIN wijzigen
U kunt de benodigde pincode voor het instellen van de tv wijzigen.
N Voordat het instellingsscherm verschijnt, ziet u het invoerscherm voor de pincode. Voer uw viercijferige pincode in.
(De standaard pincode : ‘0-0-0-0’)
N Als u de pincode bent vergeten, drukt u achtereenvolgens op de volgende toetsen van de afstandsbediening zodat de pincode
opnieuw wordt ingesteld op ‘0-0-0-0’ : POWER (Uit), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Aan).
❑ Algemeen
Spelmodus → Uit / Aan
Als u een spelcomputer aansluit, zoals een PlayStation
TM
of een Xbox
TM
, kunt u het menu Spelcomputer selecteren voor een
realistischere spelervaring.
• Wanneer de Spelmodus is ingesteld op Aan
- De beeldmodus Standaard wordt automatisch geselecteerd en kan niet worden gewijzigd.
- De geluidsmodus Aangepast wordt automatisch geselecteerd en kan niet worden gewijzigd. Pas het geluid aan met de
equalizer.
- De optie Reset in het menu Geluid wordt geactiveerd. De functie Reset herstelt de equalizerinstellingen naar de
fabrieksinstellingen.
N Spelmodus is niet beschikbaar in de normale TV-modus of Spelmodus is ingesteld op Uit.
N Als het beeld slecht is wanneer er een extern apparaat is aangesloten op de tv, controleer dan of de spelmodus is
ingeschakeld.
N Als u het menu TV weergeeft in de Spelmodus, zal het beeld een beetje trillen.
N De markering mark awordt weergegeven op het scherm. Dit betekent dat Spelmodus is ingeschakeld voor de
geselecteerde bron.
N Deze functie ondersteunt alleen de spelfunctie.
N Spelmodus is niet beschikbaar in de PC-modus.
BD Wise → Uit / Aan
Wise is een functie waarmee u automatisch de optimale conditie kunt instellen voor alle aangesloten Samsung-apparaten die BD
Wise ondersteunen.
N Deze functie is allee actief wanneer een extern apparaat via HDMI is aangesloten op de tv.
N Als BD Wise is ingesteld op Aan, wordt de beeldmodus automatisch aangepast aan de omstandigheden.
Spaarstand → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog / Beeld uit
Met deze functie kunt u de helderheid van de tv aanpassen om het energieverbruik te verminderen. Wanneer u ‘s avonds tv kijkt,
kunt u de modus Spaarstand op Hoog zetten. Zo kunt u voorkomen dat uw ogen vermoeid raken en tevens besparen op het
energieverbruik.
Als u de optie Beeld uit selecteert, wordt het scherm uitgeschakeld en hoort u slechts het geluid. Druk op een willekeurige toets om
Beeld uit ongedaan te maken.
N In het menu Extra wordt de functie Beeld uit niet ondersteund.
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt de optie
Spaarstand ook instellen door Extra → Spaarstand te selecteren.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:48:01 PMNederlands - 25
Transparantie menu
U kunt de transparantie van het schermmenu instellen.
• Helder : Stelt het schermmenu als normaal in.
• Donker : Maakt het schermmenu mat.
Melodie → Uit / Laag / Middel / Hoog
U kunt instellen dat er een melodie wordt afgespeeld bij het in- of uitschakelen van de tv.
N De melodie wordt niet afgespeeld
- Wanneer er geen geluid wordt weergegeven, omdat de toets M MUTEis ingedrukt.
- Wanneer de tv geen geluid weergeeft, omdat de toets – (Volume) is ingedrukt.
- Wanneer de tv door de functie Slaaptimer is uitgeschakeld.
Lichteffect (alleen PS58B680/PS63B680)
U kunt het blauwe lampje op de voorkant van de tv al naargelang de omstandigheden in of uit schakelen. Schakel het lampje uit om
energie te besparen of wanneer het lampje in uw ogen schijnt.
• Uit : Het blauwe lampje is altijd uit.
• Stand-bystand aan : Het blauwe lampje brandt in de stand-bystand en is uit wanneer uw tv is ingeschakeld.
• Tv kijken : Het blauwe lampje brandt wanneer u tv kijkt en is uit wanneer uw tv is uitgeschakeld.
• Altijd : Het blauwe lampje is altijd aan.
N Zet Lichteffect op Uit om minder stroom te verbruiken.
Picture-in-Picture weergeven (PIP)
Binnen het beeld van een tv-programma of het beeld dat afkomstig is van een extern apparaat,
zoals een videorecorder of dvd-speler, kunt u een subbeeld weergeven. Zodoende kunt u het
beeld van de ingestelde programma- of video-invoer vanaf elk aangesloten apparaat bekijken,
terwijl ook het hoofdbeeld wordt weergegeven.
N Het beeld in het PIP-venster kan er enigszins onnatuurlijk uitzien wanneer u het
hoofdscherm gebruikt voor een videospel of karaoke.
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt ook
instellingen voor PIP configureren door Extra → PIP te selecteren.
❑ PIP → Uit / Aan
U kunt de PIP-functie aan- of uitzetten.
Hoofdbeeld Subbeeld
Component
HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4
PC
TV
Formaat → / / /
U kunt het formaat voor het subbeeld selecteren.
N Als voor het hoofdbeeld de modus HDMI is ingeschakeld, is Formaat beschikbaar.
Positie → / / /
U kunt de positie van het subbeeld selecteren.
N In de modus Double (Dubbel) ( , ) kan Positie niet worden geselecteerd.
Kanaal
U kunt een kanaal voor het subbeeld selecteren.
PIP
PIP : Uit ►
Formaat :
Positie :
Kanaal : ATV 1
E Enter R Terug
Algemeen
Spelmodus : Uit
BD Wise : Uit
Spaarstand : Uit
Transparantie menu : Helder
Melodie : Middel
PIP ►
U Verpl. E Enter R Terug
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:48:01 PMNederlands - 26
Ondersteund programma
❑ Juridische informatie
U kunt de juridische informatie en algemene vrijwaring betreffende inhoud en services van derden weergeven.
Algemene vrijwaring
Dit is een volledige juridische kennisgeving met betrekking tot Internet@TV.
N De algemene vrijwaring kan per land verschillen.
N U kunt naar de vorige of volgende pagina bladeren door op de toets ◄ of ► te drukken.
❑ Producthandleiding
De producthandleiding bevat informatie over de belangrijkste functies van deze tv.
N Selecteer het gewenste item voor meer informatie.
❑ Zelfdiagnose
Het beeld testen
Als u denkt een probleem te hebben met het beeld voert u de beeldtest uit. Controleer het kleurenpatroon onder in het beeld om te
bepalen of het probleem nog aanwezig is.
N Het bericht Blijft het probleem zich voordoen in deze afbeelding? verschijnt op het scherm.
Als het testpatroon niet wordt weergegeven of als er ruis optreedt in het testpatroon kiest u Ja.
Als het testpatroon juist wordt weergegeven kiest u Nee.
• Ja : er kan een probleem zijn met de tv. Neem contact op met het callcenter van Samsung voor hulp.
• Nee : er kan een probleem zijn met uw externe apparatuur. Controleer de aansluitingen. Als het probleem zich blijft
voordoen, raadpleegt u de gebruikershandleiding van het externe apparaat.
Het geluid testen
Als u denkt een probleem te hebben met het geluid voert u de geluidstest uit.
U kunt het geluid controleren door via de tv een ingebouwde melodie af te spelen.
N Het bericht Blijft het probleem zich voordoen bij deze geluidstest? verschijnt op het scherm.
Als u tijdens de geluidstest alleen geluid hoort uit één luidspreker of helemaal geen geluid hoort, kiest u Ja. Als u geluid hoort uit
de luidsprekers, kiest u Nee.
• Ja : er kan een probleem zijn met de tv. Neem contact op met het callcenter van Samsung voor hulp.
• Nee : er kan een probleem zijn met uw externe apparatuur. Controleer de aansluitingen. Als het probleem zich blijft
voordoen, raadpleegt u de gebruikershandleiding van het externe apparaat.
N Als u geen geluid hoort via de luidsprekers van de tv controleert u voordat u de geluidstest uitvoert of Luidspreker selecteren
in het menu Geluid is ingesteld op TV-luidspreker.
N U kunt de melodie zelfs tijdens de test horen als Luidspreker selecteren is ingesteld op Ext. luidspreker of als het geluid is
gedempt doordat de toets M MUTE is ingedrukt.
Signaalinformatie (alleen digitale kanalen)
U kunt de antenne afstellen om de ontvangst van de beschikbare digitale kanalen te verbeteren.
N Als de signaalsterktemeter aangeeft dat het signaal zwak is, verstelt u uw antenne handmatig om de signaalsterkte te
versterken. Blijf de antenne bijstellen totdat u de positie met het sterkste signaal vindt.
Ondersteuning / Invoer
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:48:01 PMNederlands - 27
Bronlijst / Naam wijzigen
❑ Bronlijst
Hiermee kunt u de tv of andere externe ingangsbronnen selecteren die zijn aangesloten
op uw tv, zoals dvd-spelers, aftakdozen en satellietontvangers. Hiermee kunt u de
gewenste ingangsbron selecteren.
TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB.
N U kunt alleen de externe apparaten selecteren die zijn aangesloten op de tv. In de
Bronlijst worden aangesloten ingangen gemarkeerd en boven aan de lijst geplaatst.
Ingangen die niet zijn aangesloten, worden onder aan de lijst geplaatst.
N De kleurentoetsen op de afstandsbediening met de Bronlijst gebruiken
- Rood (Vernieuwen) : de aansluiting met de externe
apparaten vernieuwen.
- T TOOLS (Extra) : geeft de menu’s Naam wijzigen en Information (Informatie)
weer.
O Druk op de toets SOURCE op de afstandsbediening om een externe signaalbron
weer te geven.
❑ Naam wijzigen
U kunt het op de ingangen aangesloten apparaat een naam geven om de selectie van de ingangsbron te vereenvoudigen.
VCR / DVD / Kabel STB / Satelliet STB / PVR STB / AV-ontvanger / Spelcomputer / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC /
TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Wanneer een computer met een resolutie van 1920 x 1080 bij 60Hz is aangesloten op de HDMI IN 2 (DVI)-poort, moet u de
modus HDMI2/DVI in het menu Naam wijzigen in de modus Invoer instellen op PC.
❑ Software-upgrade
Er worden regelmatig software-upgrades verzonden met het normale televisiesignaal
om uw product bij te werken met de nieuwe mogelijkheden van digitale televisie. Deze signalen worden automatisch gedetecteerd,
waarna de balk voor software-upgrades wordt weergegeven. U krijgt de optie om de upgrade te installeren.
Via USB
Plaats een USB-geheugenschijf met de firmware-upgrade in de tv. Let op dat u tijdens het toevoegen van upgrades het apparaat
niet uitschakelt of de USB-geheugenschijf verwijdert. Nadat de firmware-upgrade is voltooid, wordt de tv automatisch in- en
uitgeschakeld. Controleer de firmwareversie nadat de upgrades zijn voltooid. Zodra de software is bijgewerkt, worden standaard
video- en audio-instellingen (fabrieksinstellingen) hersteld.
Via kanaal
Hiermee wordt de software bijgewerkt die gebruikmaakt van het uitzendsignaal.
N Als de functie tijdens de softwareoverdracht wordt geselecteerd, zoekt de functie naar
beschikbare software en downloadt het deze.
N De benodigde tijd voor het downloaden van de software wordt door de signaalstatus
bepaald.
Upgrade stand-bymodus
Selecteer Aan door op de toets ▲ of ▼ te drukken om de software-upgrade voort te zetten
terwijl de stroom is ingeschakeld. 45 minuten nadat de tv op stand-by is gezet, wordt
automatisch een handmatige upgrade uitgevoerd. Omdat de tv intern wordt ingeschakeld,
kan dit resulteren in vage beelden op de tv. Dit kan meer dan een uur duren totdat de software-upgrade is voltooid.
Alternatieve software
Huidige software vervangen door alternatief.
N Als de software is gewijzigd, wordt de huidige software weergegeven.
N U kunt de huidige software veranderen in alternatieve software via Alternatieve software.
❑ Handleiding HD-verbinding
Er worden beknopte instructies weergegeven hoe u de beste prestatie uit uw nieuwe HDTV haalt. We bieden u de
verbindingsmethode voor HD-apparaten.
N U kunt naar de vorige of volgende pagina bladeren door op de toets ◄ of ► te drukken.
❑ Contact opnemen met Samsung
U kunt contact opnemen met het callcenter van Samsung of de website van Samsung raadplegen voor meer informatie over het
product.
Zijpaneel TV
USB-station
Bronlijst
Naam wijzigen
Invoer
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:48:02 PMNederlands - 28
Netwerk
Netwerkverbinding
Netwerkverbinding is voor DLNA, Contents Library-Internetdownload, Internet@TV en Thuisnetwerkcentrum.
❑ Netwerkverbinding - Kabel
LAN-verbinding voor een DHCP-omgeving
Hieronder worden de procedures beschreven voor het instellen van een netwerk met Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
Aangezien er automatisch een
IP-adres, subnetmasker, gateway en DNS worden toegewezen wanneer DHCP wordt geselecteerd, hoeft u deze niet handmatig in
te voeren.
1. Sluit de LAN-poort aan op de achterkant van de tv en sluit het externe modem aan met een LAN-kabel.
2. Sluit de LAN-poort aan op de aansluiting in de wand en sluit het externe modem aan met een modemkabel.
N De terminals (de positie van de poort en het type) van het externe apparaat kunnen, afhankelijk van de fabrikant, verschillen.
N Wanneer het toewijzen van een IP-adres door de DHCP-server is mislukt, kunt u de externe modem na ten minste 10 seconden
uitschakelen en opnieuw inschakelen en het opnieuw proberen.
N Voor de verbinding tussen de externe modem en de sharer (router), zie de gebruikershandleiding van het corresponderende
product.
N U kunt de tv direct aansluiten op de LAN zonder deze via een sharer (router) aan te sluiten.
N U kun geen ADSL-modem gebruiken dat handmatig verbinding maakt, omdat deze DHCP niet ondersteunt. U dient een
ADSL-modem te gebruiken die automatisch verbinding maakt.
Achterpaneel van de tv
De modempoort in
de wand
2 Modemkabel
Externe modem
(ADSL/VDSL/Kabel-TV)
1 LAN-kabel
U kunt een directe aansluiting maken tussen de LAN-poort en de tv, afhankelijk van uw netwerkstatus.
Achterpaneel van de tv
LAN-kabel
De LAN-poort in
de wand
U kunt de LAN aansluiten via een verdeler (router).
Achterpaneel van de tv
De modempoort
in de wand
Externe modem (ADSL/
VDSL/Kabel-TV)
IP-verdeler
LAN-kabel
Modemkabel
LAN-kabel
Wordt vervolgd...
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:48:04 PMNederlands - 29
LAN-verbinding voor een omgeving met een statische IP
Hieronder worden de procedures beschreven voor het instellen van een netwerk met statische IP-adressen. U dient handmatig
het IP-adres, het subnetmasker, de gateway en de DNS in te voeren. Deze gegevens zijn door uw Internet Service Provider (ISP)
geleverd.
1. Gebruik een LAN-kabel om de LAN-poort aan de achterkant van de tv aan te sluiten op de LAN-poort aan de wand.
N De terminals (de positie van de poort en het type) van het externe apparaat kunnen, afhankelijk van de fabrikant, verschillen.
N Wanneer u een statisch IP adres gebruikt, stelt uw ISP u op de hoogte van het IP-adres, het subnetmasker, de gateway en de
DNS. U dient deze waarden in te voeren om de netwerkinstellingen te voltooien. Als u niet weet wat deze waarden zijn, kunt u ze
opvragen bij uw netwerkbeheerder.
N Voor informatie over het configureren en aansluiten van een verdeler (router),
zie de gebruikershandleiding voor het corresponderende product.
N U kunt de tv direct aansluiten op de LAN zonder deze via een sharer aan te sluiten.
N Wanneer u een IP-sharer (IP-router) gebruikt, die DHCP ondersteunt, kunt u het apparaat ofwel als DHCP of als statische IP
instellen.
N Voor de procedures voor het gebruiken van een statisch IP-adres, informeer bij uw Internet Service Provider.
❑ Netwerkverbinding - Draadloos
U kunt een draadloze netwerkverbinding maken via een draadloze IP-verdeler.
1. Sluit de ‘Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung’ aan op de USB1(HDD)- of USB2-aansluiting van de tv.
N U dient de draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung te gebruiken om een draadloos netwerk te gebruiken.
N De Samsung Wireless LAN-adapter wordt apart verkocht. De WIS09ABGN Wireless LAN Adapter is verkrijgbaar bij bepaalde
detailhandels, e-commercewebsites en bij Samsungparts.com.
N Om een draadloos netwerk te gebruiken, dient uw tv aangesloten te zijn op een draadloze IP-verdeler.
N Wanneer de draadloze IP-sharer DHCP ondersteunt, kan uw tv een DHCP-adres of een statisch IP-adres gebruiken om verbinding
te maken met het draadloze netwerk.
N De Samsung Wireless LAN-adapter ondersteunt IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. Wanneer u DLNAvideo over een IEEE 802.11B/G-verbinding afspeelt, wordt de video mogelijk niet vloeiend afgespeeld.
N Als u de pingverbinding kunt in- en uitschakelen met draadloze IP-sharer, schakelt u deze in.
N Selecteer een kanaal voor de draadloze IP-verdeler dat momenteel niet wordt gebruikt. Wanneer het voor de draadloze IP-sharer
ingestelde kanaal momenteel wordt gebruikt door een ander dichtbijzijnd apparaat, treedt er storing op en kan communicatie
mislukken.
Wordt vervolgd....
Achterpaneel van de tv
1 LAN-kabel
De LAN-poort in de
wand
Achterpaneel van de tv
LAN-kabel
IP-verdeler
LAN-kabel
De LAN-poort in de
wand
U kunt de LAN aansluiten via een verdeler (router).
Zijpaneel TV
Draadloze
LAN-adapter van Samsung
LAN-kabel
Draadloze IP-verdeler De LAN-poort
in de wand
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:48:07 PMNederlands - 30
N Wanneer u een ander veiligheidssysteem toepast dan de hieronder genoemde systemen, werkt dit niet bij de tv.
- Wanneer de veiligheidssleutel op de AP (draadloze IP-verdeler) wordt toegepast, wordt alleen het volgende ondersteund.
1) Verificatiemodus : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Type codering : WEP, TKIP, AES
- Wanneer de veiligheidssleutel voor de ad-hocmodus wordt toegepast, wordt alleen het volgende ondersteund.
1) Verificatiemodus : SHARED, WPANONE
2) Type codering : WEP, TKIP, AES
N Als uw AP WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup) ondersteunt, kunt u verbinding met het netwerk maken via PBC (Push Button
Configuration) of PIN (Personal Indentification Number). WPS zal in beide modi automatisch de SSID en WPA-sleutel configureren.
N Als het apparaat niet is gecertificeerd, kan het mogelijk geen verbinding met de tv maken via de ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’.
Netwerk instellen
❑ Type netwerk
Selecteer Kabel of Draadloos als verbindingsmethode met het netwerk.
N Het menu wordt alleen geactiveerd als de draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung
is aangesloten.
• Kabel : aansluiten op het netwerk met een kabel.
• Draadloos : draadloos op het netwerk aansluiten.
❑ Netwerk instellen
Kabelnetwerk instellen (wanneer Type netwerk is ingesteld op Kabel)
N Controleer of de LAN-kabel is aangesloten.
• Internetprotocol. → Auto / Handm.
• Netwerktest : U kunt na het instellen van het netwerk de status van de netwerkverbinding testen of bevestigingen.
N Wanneer er geen verbinding met een bekabeld netwerk kan worden gemaakt
Wanneer uw internetprovider het MAC-adres van het apparaat dat is gebruikt om voor de eerste keer verbinding met internet te
maken, heeft geregistreerd en het MAC-adres iedere keer dat u verbinding maakt met internet verifieert, kan uw tv wellicht geen
verbinding met internet maken aangezien het MAC-adres verschilt van het pc-adres. In dit geval kunt u bij uw internetprovider
informeren over de procedures om andere apparaten dan uw computer (zoals uw tv) op internet aan te sluiten. Wanneer uw
internetprovider een id of een wachtwoord vraagt om verbinding met internet (netwerk) te maken, kan uw tv wellicht geen
verbinding met internet maken. In dit geval dient u uw id of wachtwoord in te voeren bij het aansluiten op internet met behulp
van een verdeler (router). Mogelijk kunt u geen verbinding met internet maken vanwege een probleem met een firewall. Neem in
dit geval contact op met uw internetprovider. Wanneer u geen verbinding met internet kunt maken, zelfs als u de procedures van
uw internetprovider hebt gevolgd, kunt u contact opnemen met Samsung Electronics via het nummer 1-800-SAMSUNG.
Kabelnetwerk instellen - Auto
Wanneer u de LAN-kabel aansluit en DHCP wordt hierdoor ondersteund, worden de IP-instellingen automatisch geconfigureerd.
1. Stel Type netwerk in op Kabel.
2. Selecteer Kabelnetwerk instellen.
3. Stel Internetprotocol. in op Auto.
N Het Internet Protocol wordt automatisch ingesteld.
4. Selecteer Netwerktest om de netwerkconnectiviteit te controleren.
Kabelnetwerk instellen - Handm.
Als u de tv via een statisch IP-adres wilt aansluiten op de LAN, moet u het internetprotocol (IP) instellen.
N Controleer of de LAN-kabel is aangesloten. (Zie pagina 28)
1. Stel Type netwerk in op Kabel.
2. Selecteert een kabelnetwerk.
3. Stel Internetprotokol. in op Handmatig instellen.
4. Geef de instellingen voor IP-adres, Subnetmasker, Gateway en DNS-server op.
N Druk op de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening wanneer u het netwerk handmatig instelt.
5. Selecteer Netwerktest om de netwerkconnectiviteit te controleren.
Instellingen
Uitzenden
Beveiliging
Netwerk ►
Algemeen
Wordt vervolgd...
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:48:08 PMNederlands - 31
Draadloos netwerk instellen (wanneer Type netwerk is ingesteld als Draadloos)
N Het menu wordt alleen geactiveerd als de ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ is aangesloten (Zie pagina 29)
- Internetprotocol. → Auto / Handm.
- Netwerktest : u kunt na het instellen van het netwerk de status van de netwerkverbinding testen of bevestigingen
N Wanneer u geen verbinding met een AP kunt maken
Uw tv kan wellicht geen AP (toegangspunt) vinden dat geconfigureerd is als een privé-SSID-type. In dit geval kunt u de APinstellingen wijzigen en het opnieuw proberen. Wanneer uw internetprovider het MAC-adres van het apparaat dat is gebruikt
om voor de eerste keer verbinding met internet te maken, heeft geregistreerd en het MAC-adres iedere keer dat u verbinding
maakt met internet verifieert, kan uw tv wellicht geen verbinding met internet maken aangezien het MAC-adres verschilt van
het pc-adres. In dit geval kunt u bij uw internetprovider informeren over de procedures om andere apparaten dan uw computer
(zoals uw tv) op internet aan te sluiten. Wanneer u geen verbinding met internet kunt maken, zelfs als u de procedures van uw
internetprovider hebt gevolgd, kunt u contact opnemen met Samsung Electronics.
• Selecteer een netwerk
- Toegangspunt : U kunt de IP-sharer selecteren voor het gebruiken van een
draadloos netwerk.
N Wanneer een draadloos toegangspunt niet in de Access Point-lijst staat, kunt u
op de rode toets drukken.
N Wanneer de verbinding is gemaakt, keert u automatisch naar het scherm terug.
N Wanneer u een AP hebt geselecteerd met een beveiligingssverificatie :
het invoerscherm voor de beveiligingssleutel verschijnt. Voer de
beveiligingssleutel in en druk op de blauwe toets op de afstandsbediening.
N Als de beveiligingscodering van het type WEP is, zijn 0-9 en A-F beschikbaar voor het invoeren van de beveiligingssleutel.
Toets Effect
▲/▼/◄/►
Hiermee beweegt u de selectie omhoog, omlaag,
naar links of naar rechts.
ENTER Hiermee voert u het geselecteerde teken in.
De rode toets Hiermee wisselt u tussen hoofdletters en kleine letters.
De groene toets Hiermee wist u een ingevoerd teken.
De blauwe toets Druk op deze toets om de invoer van de beveiligingssleutel te voltooien.
❑ Verbinding met WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
Als Security Key al is ingesteld: Selecteer in de Access Point-lijst WPS.
N U kunt PBC, PIN, Bev.sleutel selecteren.
• Verbinding met behulp van PBC : Selecteer een PBC (Push Button Configuration).
Druk binnen 2 minuten op de PBC-toets op de AP (Access Point) en wacht tot er
verbinding is gemaakt.
• Verbinding met behulp van PIN : Selecteer een PIN (Personal Identification
Number).
N Het bericht met de pincode wordt weergegeven. Voer binnen 2 minuten de
pincode op het AP-apparaat in. Selecteer OK en wacht tot er verbinding is
gemaakt.
N Probeer het nogmaals als er geen verbinding is gemaakt.
N Wanneer er ook bij een nieuwe poging geen verbinding tot stand komt, reset
u het Access Point. Raadpleeg de handleiding van het desbetreffende Access
Point voor instructies.
• Verbinding met behulp van een Bev.sleutel : wanneer u Bev.sleutel selecteert,
wordt het invoervenster weergegeven.
Voer de beveiligingssleutel in en druk op de blauwe toets.
N Probeer het nogmaals als er geen verbinding is gemaakt.
Draadloos netwerk instellen
Bev. sleutel
n Verpl. Nummer EEnter R Terug
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Nummer
Kleine letter
Verwijderen
Gereed
* *
Draadloos netwerk instellen
Selecteer een netwerk
n Verpl. EEnter R Terug
Zoeken
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Bev. sleutel
3/9
Druk op de PBC-knop op het toegangspunt.
Naam toegangspunt : AP_3
Annuleren
Druk bij het instellen van het toegangspunt na het
invoeren van de tv-pincode op OK.
Naam toegangspunt : AP_3
Pincode : 123 45678
OK Annuleren
Draadloos netwerk instellen
Bev. sleutel
n Verpl. Nummer EEnter R Terug
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Nummer
Kleine letter
Verwijderen
Gereed
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:48:10 PMNederlands - 32
Als Security Key niet is ingesteld: Wanneer de beveiligingsinstelling van de AP die
WPS ondersteunt NONE is, kunt u PBC, PIN, None Security selecteren. Met None
Security kan er zonder gebruik van de WPC-functie direct met
de AP verbinding worden gemaakt.
N Het proces voor PBC, PIN is hetzelfde als bovenstaand. Raadpleeg dat als
Security Key al is ingesteld.
N Probeer het nogmaals als er geen verbinding is gemaakt.
Ad-hoc : U kunt via de draadloze USB-dongle zonder Access Point verbinding met
een mobiel apparaat maken door van een zogenaamd peer-to-peer-netwerk gebruik te
maken.
• Verbinding maken met een nieuw Ad-hoc-netwerk
1. Kies Selecteer een netwerk., waarna er een apparatenlijst wordt weergegeven..
2. Terwijl u in de apparatenlijst bent, drukt u op de blauwe toets op de afstandsbediening of selecteert u Ad-hoc.
N Het bericht Het aanwezige netwerksysteem heeft mogelijk beperkte functionaliteit. Wilt u de netwerkverbinding
wijzigen? wordt weergegeven.
3. Voer de gegenereerde Netwerknaam (SSID) en Bev.sleutel in op het apparaat waarmee u verbinding wilt maken.
• Verbinding maken met een bestaand Ad-hoc-apparaat
1. Kies Selecteer een netwerk., waarna er een apparatenlijst wordt weergegeven.
2. Selecteer in het gewenste apparaat in de lijst.
3. Als er een beveiligingssleutel was toegepast, voert u die nogmaals in.
N Als het netwerk niet normaal werkt, controleert u de Netwerknaam (SSID) en
Bev.sleutel. Als de Bev.sleutel onjuist is, kan dit de reden voor de storing zijn.
Draadloos netwerk instellen - Auto
Als u verbinding met een AP wilt maken, dient de AP DHCP te ondersteunen.
Alleen met apparaten die de ad-hocmodus ondersteunen kan zonder DHCP verbinding worden gemaakt.
1. Stel Type netwerk in op Draadloos.
2. Selecteer Draadloos netwerk instellen.
3. Stel Internetprotocol. in op Auto.
N Het Internet Protocol wordt automatisch ingesteld.
4. Selecteer een netwerk via Selecteer een netwerk.
5. Selecteer Netwerktest om de netwerkconnectiviteit te controleren.
Draadloos netwerk instellen - Handm.
Voor een draadloos netwerk met een statisch IP-adres moet u het internetprotocol (IP) instellen. (zie pagina 29).
N Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding bij uw IP-sharer voor meer informatie over een statisch IP-adres.
1. Stel Type netwerk in op Draadloos.
2. Selecteer Draadloos netwerk instellen.
3. Stel Internetprotocol. in op Handmatig.
4. Geef de instellingen voor IP-adres, Subnetmasker, Gateway en DNS-server op.
N Druk op de cijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening wanneer u het netwerk handmatig instelt.
5. . Selecteer een AP via Select Access Point.
6. Selecteer Netwerktest om de netwerkconnectiviteit te controleren.
* *
Draadloos netwerk instellen
Selecteer een netwerk
n Verpl. EEnter R Terug
Zoeken
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Bev. sleutel
3/9
Het aanwezige netwerksysteem heeft mogelijk
beperkte functionaliteit. Wilt u de netwerkverbinding
wijzigen?
Ja Nee
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:48:11 PMNederlands - 33
Een USB-apparaat aansluiten
1. Druk op de toets POWER om de tv in te schakelen.
2. Sluit een USB-apparaat met foto- en muziekbestanden aan op de USB-aansluiting aan de
zijkant van de tv.
N De USB 1 (HDD)-aansluiting wordt ook gebruikt als HDD-aansluiting. Een HDD
(Hard Disk Drive of vaste schijf) is een apparaat waarop digitaal gecodeerde
gegevens worden opgeslagen.
N Media Play ondersteunt alleen USB MSC-apparatuur. MSC staat voor Mass Storage Class,
een apparaat waarop grote hoeveelheden gegevens tegelijk kunnen worden opgeslagen
en getransporteerd. Voorbeelden van MSC’s zijn USB-sticks, Flash-kaartlezers en
USB-vaste schijven (USB-HUB’s worden niet ondersteund.)
N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) wordt niet ondersteund.
N Alleen het bestandssysteem FAT16/32 wordt ondersteund. Het bestandssysteem NTFS wordt niet ondersteund.
N Sluit een USB-vaste schijf op de daarvoor bestemde poort aan, de USB1 (HDD)-poort. Als het apparaat in kwestie echter meer
stroom nodig heeft, kan de USB1 (HDD) mogelijk onvoldoende ondersteuning voor het apparaat bieden.
N Bepaalde types digitale camera’s en geluidsapparatuur zijn mogelijk niet compatibel met dit toestel.
N Sluit het apparaat rechtstreeks aan op de USB-poort van uw tv. Als u een losse kabelverbinding gebruikt,
kunnen USB-compatibiliteitsproblemen optreden.
N Maak een back-up van uw bestanden voordat u het apparaat aansluit op de tv om beschadiging of verlies van uw gegevens te
voorkomen. SAMSUNG is niet verantwoordelijk voor beschadiging of verlies van gegevens.
N Verwijder het USB-apparaat niet terwijl gegevens worden geladen.
N MSC ondersteunt MP3- en JPEG-bestanden. Een PTP-apparaat ondersteunt alleen JPEG.
N De sequentiële JPEG-indeling wordt ondersteund.
N Hoe hoger de resolutie van het beeld, des te langer duurt het voordat het op het scherm wordt weergegeven.
N De maximaal ondersteunde JPEG-resolutie is 15360 x 8640 pixels.
N Bij bestanden die niet worden ondersteund of die zijn beschadigd wordt het bericht Geen ondersteund bestandstype
weergegeven.
N Als het aantal fotobestanden groter is dan 4000 (of het aantal muziekbestanden groter dan 3000) worden de bestanden boven de
limiet mogelijk niet vermeld in de fotolijst (of muzieklijst).
N MP3-bestanden met DRM die tegen betaling zijn gedownload worden niet afgespeeld.
N DRM (Digital Rights Management) voorkomt illegaal gebruik van digitale bestanden en beschermt het auteursrecht.
N Wanneer u een foto verplaatst kan het laden een paar seconden duren.
❑ De toetsen van de afstandsbediening gebruiken in het menu Media Play
Toets Effect
▲/▼/◄/► De cursor verplaatsen en een item markeren.
ENTERE
Het gemarkeerde item selecteren.
Een diashow of muziekbestanden afspelen of onderbreken.
De diashow of het muziekbestand afspelen of pauzeren.
RETURN Terug naar het vorige menu.
TOOLS Verschillende functies uit de menu’s Foto en Muziek uitvoeren.
De huidige diashow of het huidige muziekbestand stoppen.
Naar de voorgaande/volgende groep gaan.
INFO Bestandsgegevens weergeven.
MEDIA.P De modus Media Play openen of afsluiten.
DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays
DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com
with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Media Play
Zijpaneel TV
USB-station
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:48:11 PMNederlands - 34
De functie Media Play gebruiken
In deze modus kunt u foto- en muziekbestanden die op een USB MSC-apparaat zijn opgeslagen, bekijken en/of beluisteren.
Werkt mogelijk niet naar behoren met multimedia bestanden zonder licentie.
❑ Het menu Media Play openen
1. Druk op de MENU-knop. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Toepassing te selecteren
en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Media Play (USB & DLNA), te selecteren en druk
vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
O Druk op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening om het menu
Media Play te openen.
O Druk een aantal malen op de toets SOURCE op de afstandsbediening om
USB of DLNA, te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
3. Druk op de rode toets en druk vervolgens op de toets ▲ of ▼ om het
corresponderende USB-geheugenapparaat te selecteren (indien aangesloten via
een hub). Druk op de toets ENTERE.
N Deze werking van deze functie kan verschillen, afhankelijk van het
USB-geheugen apparaat dat op de tv is aangesloten.
N De naam van het geselecteerde USB-apparaat verschijnt linksonderaan
op het scherm.
4. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een pictogram (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup)
te selecteren en druk op de toets ENTERE.
N U kunt de modus Media Play afsluiten door te drukken op de toets MEDIA.P
op de afstandsbediening.
N In deze modus kunt u de filmclips van een spel weergeven, maar kunt u het
spel zelf niet spelen.
❑ Een USB-opslagapparaat veilig verwijderen
U kunt het apparaat veilig van de tv verwijderen.
1. Druk op TOOLS in het scherm met de Media Play-bestandenlijst, of op
het moment dat een diavoorstelling, muziekbestand of filmbestand wordt
afgespeeld.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Veilig verwijderen te selecteren en druk
vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
3. Verwijder het USB-apparaat van de tv.
❑ Schermweergave
1. Huidige sorteervolgorde : In dit veld is te zien hoe de bestanden worden gesorteerd.
2. Groepsweergave : De sorteergroep waarin de huidige geselecteerde foto is opgenomen is gemarkeerd.
3. Geselecteerd bestand : Het huidige geselecteerde bestand wordt gemarkeerd.
4. Informatie over de geselecteerde items : Geeft het aantal foto’s weer dat is geselecteerd door te drukken op de gele toets.
5. Huidig apparaat : Geeft de naam van het huidige geselecteerde apparaat weer.
N Rode toets (Apparaat) : hiermee selecteert u een aangesloten apparaat.
6. Help-items
• Groene toets (Voorkeursinstellingen) : Hiermee wijzigt u de voorkeursinstellingen voor het geselecteerde bestand.
Druk een aantal malen op deze toets totdat de gewenste waarde verschijnt.
• Gele toets (Keuze) : Hiermee selecteert u een bestand in de bestandenlijst. De geselecteerde bestanden worden gemarkeerd
met het symbool c. Druk nogmaals op de gele toets om de selectie van een bestand ongedaan te maken.
• TOOLS toets (Extra) : Hiermee opent u de optiemenu’s. (Het menu Extra verandert in overeenstemming met de status van
dat moment.)
• R RETURN toets (Terug) : Hiermee gaar u terug naar het vorige menu.
Map Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Kleur
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349.
JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Diashow
Huid. afsp.
Informatie
Veilig verwijderen
../ mapnaam/
Photo
USB Apparaat Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Vrij
Movie
USB Apparaat RTerug
Voorkeur Alg. weergave
Tijdslijn Kleur Map
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
3
1
2
1Ges. best.
4
5 6
Photo
USB Apparaat
Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Terug
c
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:48:18 PMNederlands - 35
De Foto sorteren / Muziek / Film Lijst
Alg. weergave
Hier ziet u de mappen in het USB-geheugen. Als u een map selecteert en op de
toets ENTERE drukt, worden alleen de fotobestanden in de geselecteerde map
weergegeven.
N Wanneer u volgens de Alg. weergave sorteert, kunt u geen favoriete bestanden
instellen.
Map
Hiermee worden de bestanden op map gesorteerd. Als er veel mappen in het
USB-geheugen staan, worden de fotobestanden per map weergegeven.
Het bestand in de basismap wordt als eerste weergegeven, gevolgd door de
andere, op naam en in alfabetische volgorde.
Preference → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
De bestanden worden op voorkeur (Favoriet) gesorteerd.
N De voorkeursinstelling wijzigen
Selecteer de gewenste foto in de fotolijst en druk een aantal keer op de groene
toets totdat de gewenste instelling verschijnt.
N De sterren zijn alleen voor groeperingsdoeleinden. Zo heeft bijvoorbeeld een
3-sterrenwaardering geen prioriteit boven een waardering met 1 ster.
Tijdslijn (Photo / Movie)
Hiermee worden de filmbestanden op titel gesorteerd in de volgorde symbool/cijfer/
letter/speciaal en weergegeven.
Titel (Music / Movie)
Hiermee worden de muziekbestanden gesorteerd in de volgorde symbool/cijfer/
letter/speciaal en weergegeven.
❑ Photo
Kleur → Rood / Geel / Groen / Blauw / Magenta / Zwart / Grijs / Niet gecl.
Hiermee worden foto’s op kleur gesorteerd. U kunt de kleurinfo van de foto zelf instellen.
N Alvorens foto’s op kleur te sorteren, dient u Kleurweergave gebruiken in het menu Inst. in te schakelen.
❑ Music
Artiest
Hiermee worden de muziekbestanden op artiest gesorteerd in de volgorde symbool/cijfer/letter/speciaal.
Stemming → Energiek / Ritmisch / Treurig / Spannend / Kalm / Niet gecl.
Hiermee worden de muziekbestanden op stemming gesorteerd. U kunt de stemmingsinfo van de muziek zelf instellen.
Genre
Hiermee worden de muziekbestanden op genre gesorteerd.
Map Voorkeur Alg. weergave Titel Artiest
1
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
usermanual Heaven
NPKI
▶
1
▶
▶
▶
▶
../ mapnaam/
Music
USB Apparaat Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map
▶
▶
Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Titel Map
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
▶
▶ ◀
MOVIE_005
.avi
Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Kleur Map
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
Photo
USB Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Terug
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:48:24 PMNederlands - 36
Foto / Muziek / Film Lijst Optie MENU
1. Druk op de toets MEDIA.P.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Photo, Music of Movie te selecteren en druk vervolgens
op de toets ENTERE.
3. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste bestand te selecteren.
N Keuze Multiplex Best.
- Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste bestand te selecteren.
Druk vervolgens op de gele toets.
- Herhaal deze procedure om meerdere filmbestanden te selecteren.
- Naast het geselecteerde filmbestand verschijnt het symbool c.
4. Druk op de toets TOOLS.
N Het optiemenu verandert in overeenstemming met de status van dat moment.
Huid. afsp.
Met dit menu kunt u een presentatie afspelen van de fotobestanden in de
geselecteerde sorteergroep.
Niets select. (wanneer ten minste één bestand is geselecteerd)
Hiermee kunt u de selectie van alle bestanden opheffen.
N Het symbool c van het desbetreffende bestand wordt verborgen.
Informatie
De bestandsinformatie van het foto-, muziek- of filmbestand wordt weergegeven.
Op dezelfde wijze kunt u de gegevens van fotobestanden tijdens een presentatie
bekijken.
O Druk op de toets INFO om de informatie weer te geven.
Veilig verwijderen
Hiermee kunt u het apparaat veilig van de TV verwijderen.
❑ Photo
Diashow
Via dit menu kunt u een presentatie afspelen van de fotobestanden in het
USB-geheugen.
Groep wzgn (wanneer de sortering Kleur is)
Hiermee kunt u de kleurinformatie van een geselecteerd fotobestand (of een groep bestanden) wijzigen om deze van de ene
kleurgroep naar de andere te verplaatsen.
N De kleur van de foto zelf wordt hiermee niet gewijzigd.
N De groepsinfo van het huidige bestand wordt bijgewerkt en de foto wordt naar de nieuwe kleurgroep verplaatst.
N U kunt de gegevens van meerdere bestanden wijzigen door met behulp van de gele toets de gewenste bestanden te selecteren.
❑ Music
Groep wijzigen (wanneer de sortering Mood is)
Hiermee kunt u de stemmingsinfo van muziekbestanden zelf instellen. De groepsinfo van het huidige bestand wordt bijgewerkt en
het bestand wordt naar de nieuwe groep verplaatst. U kunt de gegevens van meerdere bestanden wijzigen door met behulp van de
gele toets de gewenste bestanden te selecteren.
Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Map Voorkeur Alg. weergave Titel Artiest
1
1
▶
▶
../ mapnaam/
Sky
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
NPKI
usermanual Heaven
▶
NPKI
Huid. afsp.
Informatie
Veilig verwijderen
Music
USB Apparaat Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map
MOVIE_004
MOVIE_003 .avi
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_005
.avi
MOVIE_007
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_006
.avi
▶
▶
Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Titel Map
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map
Huid. afsp.
Informatie
Veilig verwijderen
Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Kleur Map Voorkeur
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Diashow
Huid. afsp.
Groep wzgn
Informatie
Veilig verwijderen
Photo
USB Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:48:30 PMNederlands - 37
Diashow / Muziek Afspelen / Film Afspelen Optie Menu
1. Druk tijdens een presentatie (of het bekijken van een foto) op de toets TOOLS
om een optie in te stellen.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om de optie te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de
toets ENTERE.
Afbeeldinginstallatie / Geluidsinstellingen
Hiermee kunt u de beeld- en geluidsinstellingen wijzigen.
Informatie
Hiermee kunt u de gegevens van het fotobestand weergeven.
Veilig verwijderen
Hiermee kunt u het apparaat veilig van de TV verwijderen.
❑ Opties voor de presentatie
Stop diashow / Begin diashow
Hiermee kunt u de presentatie starten of stoppen.
Snelh. Diashow → Langzaam / Normaal / Snel
Hiermee kunt u de snelheid van de presentatie bepalen.
N Deze functie is alleen tijdens een presentatie beschikbaar.
N U kunt de snelheid van de presentatie ook wijzigen door tijdens de presentatie
op de toets π (REW) of μ (FF) te drukken.
Effect presentatie
Hiermee kunt u het overgangseffect in de presentatie kiezen.
• Geen /Vervaag1 / Vervaag2 / Blind / Spiraal / Ruitjes / Lineair / Trap /
Vegen / Willekeur.
N Deze functie is alleen tijdens een presentatie beschikbaar.
Roteren
Hiermee kunt u foto’s in een USB-geheugen draaien.
N Wanneer u op de toets ◄ drukt, wordt het beeld 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ en 0˚ gedraaid.
N Wanneer u op de toets ► drukt, wordt het beeld 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ en 0˚ gedraaid.
N Het gedraaide bestand wordt niet opgeslagen.
Zoom
Hiermee kunt u foto’s in een USB-geheugen op het scherm vergroten. (x1 → x2 → x4)
N U kunt de ingezoomde foto verschuiven door op de toets ENTERE te drukken en vervolgens op de toetsen ▲/▼/◄/►.
Als de ingezoomde afbeelding kleiner is dan het oorspronkelijke beeldformaat, werkt de verschuivingsfunctie niet.
N Het ingezoomde bestand wordt niet opgeslagen.
Achtergr.kl.
Hiermee kunt u achtergrondmuziek instellen bij het weergeven van een presentatie.
N U kunt deze functie alleen gebruiken als er zich zowel muziek- als fotobestanden in het USB-geheugen bevinden.
N Voor het wijzigen van de BGM-modus moeten muziekbestanden worden geladen. Speel muziekbestanden in de categorie af om
ze te laden.
❑ Opties voor het afspelen van muziek
Herhalen → Aan / Uit
Hiermee kunt u muziekbestanden herhaald afspelen.
❑ Opties voor het afspelen van films
Beeldformaat → Passend / Oorspronkelijk
Hiermee kunt u video afspelen op volledig scherm of op het oorspronkelijke formaat.
Instelling ondertiteling
Hiermee kunt u de ondertiteling van de film instellen.
Tools
Extra
Stop diashow
Snelheid presentatie : Normaal
Effect presentatie : Vervagen1
Roteren
Zoom
Achtergr.kl.
Afbeeldinginstallatie
Geluidsinstellingen
Informatie
U Verpl. E Enter eSluiten
Extra
Herhalingsmodus ◄ Aan ►
Afbeeldinginstallatie
Geluidsinstellingen
Informatie
Veilig verwijderen
U Verpl. Instell. eSluiten
Extra
Afbeeldinginstallatie
Geluidsinstellingen
Beeldformaat : Passend
Instelling ondertiteling
Informatie
Veilig verwijderen
U Verpl. Enter eSluiten
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:48:31 PMNederlands - 38
Een foto of presentatie bekijken
❑ Een presentatie bekijken
N Alle bestanden in de Bestandenlijst worden voor de presentatie gebruikt.
N Tijdens de presentatie worden de bestanden in volgorde afgebeeld vanaf het
huidige bestand.
N De presentatie verloopt in de volgorde waarin de Bestandenlijst is gesorteerd.
N U kunt tijdens een presentatie automatisch muziekbestanden laten afspelen als
Achtergr.kl. op Aan is ingesteld.
N Druk op het moment dat een fotolijst wordt weergegeven op de toets
∂(Afspelen)/ENTERE op de afstandsbediening om de presentatie te starten.
N Bedieningstoetsen voor de presentatie
ENTERE De presentatie afspelen/pauzeren.
De presentatie afspelen.
De presentatie pauzeren.
De presentatie afsluiten en terugkeren naar de fotolijst.
/ De snelheid van de presentatie wijzigen.
T TOOLS Verschillende functies uit de fotomenu’s uitvoeren.
❑ Huidige groep afspelen
1. Druk op de toets ▲ om naar het gedeelte Sort te gaan.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een sorteermethode te selecteren.
3. Druk op de toets ▼ om naar het gedeelte Groepenlijst te gaan.
4. Selecteer een groep met de toetsen ◄ en ►.
5. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen). Er wordt een presentatie gestart met bestanden
uit de geselecteerde groep.
U kunt ook het volgende doen
1. Selecteer een sortering en vervolgens in het gedeelte Bestandenlijst de foto’s in
de gewenste groep.
N U kunt naar de voorgaande/volgende groep gaan door te drukken op de toets π (REW) of μ (FF).
2. Druk op de toets TOOLS.
3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Huid. afsp. te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
N Alleen de foto’s in de sorteergroep met de geselecteerde bestanden worden voor de presentatie gebruikt.
❑ Een presentatie uitvoeren met alleen de geselecteerde bestanden
1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om de gewenste foto in de bestandenlijst te selecteren.
3. Druk op de gele toets.
4. Herhaal deze procedure om meerdere foto’s te selecteren.
N Links naast de geselecteerde foto verschijnt het symbool c.
N Als u één bestand selecteert wordt er geen presentatie uitgevoerd.
N Als u de selectie van alle bestanden ongedaan wilt maken, drukt u op de toets TOOLS en selecteert u Niets select.
5. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE.
N De geselecteerde bestanden worden voor de presentatie gebruikt.
U kunt ook het volgende doen
1. Druk in de Bestandenlijst op de gele toetsen om de gewenste foto’s te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets TOOLS.
3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Diashow te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
N De geselecteerde bestanden worden voor de presentatie gebruikt.
▶
▶
Voorkeur Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Titel Map
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_005
.avi
Alg. weergave Tijdslijn Kleur Map Voorkeur
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Diashow
Huid. afsp.
Groep wzgn
Informatie
Veilig verwijderen
Photo
r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4
USB E Pauze lr Vorig / Volg T Extra R Terug
USB Apparaat Fav. inst. Keuze T Extra R Bovenste map
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:48:37 PMNederlands - 39
Muziek afspelen
❑ Een muziekbestand afspelen
1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste muziekbestand te selecteren.
3. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE.
N In dit menu ziet u alleen bestanden met de extensie MP3. Bestanden
met andere extensies worden niet weergeven, ook al staan ze wel op
het USB-apparaat.
N Het geselecteerde bestand wordt bovenaan weergegeven,
compleet met speelduur.
N U kunt het volume van de muziek instellen met de volumetoets op de
afstandsbediening. Als u het geluid wilt onderdrukken, drukt u op M MUTE op de afstandsbediening.
N Als het geluid bij het afspelen van MP3-bestanden ongewoon klinkt, past u de Toonregeling en SRS TruSurround HD in
het geluidsmenu aan. (Een overgemoduleerd MP3-bestand kan geluidsproblemen veroorzaken.)
N Het kan voorkomen dat de speelduur van een muziekbestand wordt weergegeven als ‘00:00:00’ als de informatie betreffende
de speelduur niet aan het begin van het bestand wordt aangetroffen.
N π (REW) of μ (FF) werken niet tijdens het afspelen.
N Toetsen voor het afspelen van muziek
ENTERE Het muziekbestand afspelen/pauzeren.
De afspeelmodus afsluiten en terugkeren naar
de muzieklijst.
Het muziekbestand afspelen.
T TOOLS
Verschillende functies uit de muziekmenu’s
uitvoeren.
Het muziekbestand pauzeren.
N Informatiepictogram muziekfunctie
Wanneer alle muziekbestanden in de map (of het geselecteerde bestand) worden herhaald.
Herhalingsmodus is Aan.
Wanneer alle muziekbestanden in de map (of het geselecteerde bestand) eenmaal worden afgespeeld.
Herhalingsmodus is Uit.
❑ De muziekgroep afspelen
1. Druk op de toets ▲ om naar het gedeelte Sort te gaan.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een sorteermethode te selecteren.
3. Druk op de toets ▼ of ENTERE om naar het gedeelte Groepenlijst te gaan.
4. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen). De bestanden van de geselecteerde groep worden afgespeeld.
U kunt ook het volgende doen
1. Selecteer een sortering en vervolgens in het gedeelte Bestandenlijst de bestanden in de gewenste groep.
N U kunt naar de voorgaande/volgende groep gaan door te drukken op de toets π (REW) of μ (FF).
2. Druk op de toets TOOLS.
3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Huid. afsp. te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
N De muziekbestanden in de sorteergroep waarin het geselecteerde bestand zich bevindt worden afgespeeld.
❑ De geselecteerde muziekbestanden afspelen
1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste muziekbestand te selecteren.
3. Druk op de gele toets.
4. Herhaal deze procedure om meerdere muziekbestanden te selecteren.
N Links naast het geselecteerde muziekbestand verschijnt het symbool c.
N Als u de selectie van alle bestanden ongedaan wilt maken, drukt u op de toets TOOLS en selecteert u Niets select.
5. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE.
N De geselecteerde bestanden wordt afgespeeld.
r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55
r
1/3
When I Dream r
r
Geek In The Pink Heaven
USB E Pauze lr Vorig / Volg T Extra R Terug
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:48:38 PMNederlands - 40
Een filmbestand afspelen
❑ Een filmbestand afspelen
1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste filmbestand te selecteren,
3. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE.
N Het geselecteerde bestand wordt afgespeeld.
N Het geselecteerde bestand wordt bovenaan weergegeven,
compleet met speelduur.
N Het kan voorkomen dat de speelduur van een filmbestand wordt
weergegeven als ‘00:00:00’ als de informatie betreffende de speelduur niet
aan het begin van het bestand wordt aangetroffen.
N U kunt spannende multimediabestanden van games bekijken, maar de gamefunctie wordt niet ondersteund.
N Ondersteunde ondertitelingsindelingen
Naam Bestandsextensie Programmeertaal
MPEG-4 op tijd gebaseerde tekst .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt op tekenreeks gebaseerd
SubViewer .sub op tekenreeks gebaseerd
Micro DVD .sub of .txt op tekenreeks gebaseerd
N Ondersteunde videobestandsindelingen
Bestandsextensie Houder Videodecoder Audiocodec Resolutie
*.avi AVI
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.mkv MKV
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.asf ASF
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080
*.mp4 MP4 (SMP4)
H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
XVID 1920x1080
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
*.vro
VRO
VOB
MPEG2 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG1 1920x1080
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG2 1920x1080
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
H.264 1920x1080
VC1 1920x1080
N Toetsen voor het afspelen van video
ENTERE Het filmbestand afspelen/onderbreken
Het filmbestand afspelen
Het filmbestand onderbreken
De afspeelmodus afsluiten en terugkeren naar de filmlijst.
T TOOLS Verschillende functies uit de filmmenu’s uitvoeren.
◄/► Vooruit of achteruit door het filmbestand springen.
▲/▼ Naar het begin/eind van het bestand gaan.
Wordt vervolgd...
▶
r
r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3
MOVIE_000.avi
USB E Pauze lr Springen T Extra R Terug
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:48:39 PMNederlands - 41
❑ De filmgroep afspelen
1. Druk op de toets ▲ om naar het gedeelte Sort te gaan.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een sorteermethode te selecteren.
3. Druk op de toets ▼ of ENTERE om naar het gedeelte Groepenlijst te gaan.
4. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen). Alleen de bestanden van de geselecteerde groep worden afgespeeld.
U kunt ook het volgende doen
1. Selecteer een sortering en vervolgens in het gedeelte Bestandenlijst de bestanden in de gewenste groep.
N U kunt naar de voorgaande/volgende groep gaan door te drukken op de toets π (REW) of μ (FF).
2. Druk op de toets TOOLS.
3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Huid. afsp. te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
N De filmbestanden in de sorteergroep waarin het geselecteerde bestand zich bevindt worden afgespeeld.
❑ De geselecteerde filmbestanden afspelen
1. Druk op de toets ▼ om het gedeelte Bestandenlijst te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om het gewenste muziekbestand te selecteren.
3. Druk op de gele toets.
N Links naast het geselecteerde filmbestand verschijnt het symbool c.
N Als u de selectie van alle bestanden ongedaan wilt maken, drukt u op de toets TOOLS en selecteert u Niets select.
4. Herhaal deze procedure om meerdere filmbestanden te selecteren.
5. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE.
N Alleen het geselecteerde bestand wordt afgespeeld.
❑ De film doorlopend afspelen (Resume Play)
Als u een film die wordt afgespeeld verlaat, kan deze later weer worden hervat op het punt waar deze was gestopt.
1. Selecteer het filmbestand dat u doorlopend wilt afspelen door het met de toets ◄ of ► in de Bestandenlijst te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets ∂ (Afspelen)/ENTERE.
3. Selecteer Doorlpnd. (Resume Play) door op de blauwe toets te drukken.
N De film wordt afgespeeld vanaf het punt waar deze was onderbroken.
N Als de functie Herinn. doorl. afsp. Film in het menu Setup is ingesteld op Aan, verschijnt er een pop-upbericht wanneer
het afspelen van een film wordt hervat.
Het menu Setup gebruiken
In Setup vindt u de gebruikersinstellingen van het menu Media Play.
1. Druk op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening om het menu Media Play
te openen.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om Setup te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de
toets ENTERE.
3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om de gewenste optie te selecteren.
4. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om de optie te selecteren.
N U kunt de modus Media Play afsluiten door te drukken op de toets MEDIA.P
op de afstandsbediening.
Kleurweergave gebruiken → Aan / Uit
Hiermee kunt u foto’s op kleur sorteren.
N Als deze optie is ingesteld op Aan, kan de laadtijd toenemen, doordat er
kleurinformatie van de foto’s wordt vergaard.
Herhalen → Aan / Uit
Hiermee kunt u muziekbestanden herhaald laten afspelen.
Herinn. doorl. afsp. Film → Aan / Uit
Hiermee kunt u de helptekst weergeven voor het voortgezet afspelen van een film.
De registratiecode voor DivX® VOD
Hiermee geeft u de geautoriseerde registratiecode voor de TV weer. Als u met de DivX-website verbinding maakt en de
registratiecode bij een persoonlijke account registreert, kunt u een VOD-registratiebestand downloaden. Als u de VOD-registratie
via Media Play afspeelt, is de registratie voltooid. Meer informatie over DivX® VOD vindt u op www.DivX.com.
De deactiveringscode voor DivX® VOD
Wanneer DivX® VOD niet is geregistreerd, wordt de registratiedeactivatiecode weergegeven.
Als u deze functie uitvoert wanneer DivX® VOD is geregistreerd, wordt de actuele DivX® VOD-registratie gedeactiveerd.
Uitvoertijd schermbev. → 10 min / 20 min / 1 uur
Hiermee kunt u de wachttijd instellen voor het inschakelen van de schermbeveiliging.
Informatie
Hiermee kunt u de informatie van het aangesloten apparaat weergeven.
Veilig verwijderen
Hiermee kunt u het apparaat veilig van de TV verwijderen.
Media Play
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Vrij
SETUP
Photo Music Movie Setup
USB Apparaat eSluiten
Setup
Verpl. Instell. Terug
Kleurweergave gebruiken ◄ Uit ►
Herhalen Aan
Help doorl. afsp. film Aan
De registratiecode voor DivX® VOD
De deactiveringscode voor DivX® VOD
Uitvoertijd schermbev. 10 min
Informatie
Veilig verwijderen
USB Apparaat
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:48:39 PMNederlands - 42
Het DLNA-netwerk instellen
Met DLNA kunt u video en foto’s die op uw pc zijn opgeslagen via een netwerkverbinding op uw tv bekijken in de Media Play. U hoeft
deze dan niet naar een USB-geheugen te kopiëren en dit op de tv aan te sluiten. Om DLNA te kunnen gebruiken moet de tv zijn
aangesloten op het netwerk en moet de DLNA-toepassing zijn geïnstalleerd op de pc.
❑ Netwerkverbindingsdiagram – met gebruik van kabels
❑ Netwerkverbindingsdiagram – draadloos
1. Raadpleeg ‘Het netwerk instellen’ voor meer informatie over het configureren van uw netwerk.
N Het wordt aanbevolen om de TV en de pc in hetzelfde subnet op te nemen. De eerste 3 delen van het subnetadres
en IP-adres van de TV en de pc moeten gelijk zijn en alleen het laatste deel (het hostadres) moet anders zijn
(bijvoorbeeld IP-adres : 123.456.789.**)
2. Verbind de pc waarop het programma Samsung PC Share Manager wordt geïnstalleerd door middel van een netwerkkabel met de
externe modem.
N U kunt de TV rechtstreeks op de pc aansluiten, zonder de verbinding door een verdeler (router) te laten lopen.
De DLNA-toepassing installeren
Voordat u het materiaal van de pc op de TV kunt afspelen, moet u de toepassing installeren. Om een goede werking van de
DLNA-functie te verzekeren, gebruikt u het programma op de cd-rom die met de tv is meegeleverd, of gebruikt u het programma
Samsung PC Share Manager dat met het tv-model correspondeert en dat van de website van Samsung kan worden gedownload.
Wordt vervolgd...
TV
Externe modem
(ADSL/VDSL/Kabel-TV)
LAN
PC
LAN
Media Play-DLNA
TV
LAN
PC
of
1
Zijpaneel TV
Draadloze
LAN-adapter van
Samsung
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:48:41 PMNederlands - 43
De DLNA-toepassing gebruiken
De indeling van het programmascherm
1. Menu’s : De toepassing kent de volgende
menu’s : Bestnd, Delen, Server en Help.
2. De geselecteerde pc-servermap delen.
3. Het delen opheffen
4. De pc-map en -bestanden vernieuwen.
5. De status van de gedeelde map
synchroniseren.
6. Overzicht van de mappen en bestanden op
de pc die worden gedeeld.
7. Overzicht van de mappen die door de
gebruiker worden gedeeld.
8. Pc-servernaam die wordt weergegeven in
de apparatenlijst van de Media Play :
klik om de naam te wijzigen.
Systeemvereisten
1. Plaats de programma-cd die bij de tv is geleverd in de pc.
2. Voor de installatie van het programma is 30MB aan schijfruimte vereist.
N Als u bestanden deel, is 30MB aan vasteschijfruimte nodig voor elke 100 bestanden.
N Als u de bestandsdeling opheft, wordt de vasteschijfruimte die wordt gebruikt voor de miniatuurafbeeldingen ook vrijgegeven.
Ondersteunde indelingen
• Afbeeldingen : JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS naam. Zie ‘Een filmbestand afspelen’ voor
uitgebreide aanwijzingen betreffende ondersteunde videobestandsindelingen.
De toepassing installeren
► ►
►
1. Start het bestand Setup.exe op de programma-cd die bij het product is geleverd.
N U kunt het bestand ook downloaden van www.samsung.com.
2. Installeer de SAMSUNG PC Share Manager zoals aangegeven in de onderstaande afbeeldingen.
3. Nadat de installatie is voltooid verschijnt het pictogram PC Share Manager op het PC.
N Dubbelklik op het pictogram om het programma uit te voeren.
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:48:42 PMNederlands - 44
❑ Delen
Een map delen
U kunt een map op uw pc delen met de tv.
Het delen van een map opheffen
U kunt het delen van een map op uw pc opheffen. Selecteer een map in het deelvenster map delen en klik op delen ongedaan
maken.
De huidige instellingen toepassen
Voer deze handeling uit wanneer dit nodig is in verband met het delen van een nieuwe map of het opheffen van het delen van een
map. Het menu Gewijzigde status inst. past de wijzigingen in de gedeelde mappen toe op de gegevens die zijn opgeslagen met het
programma PC share. Aangezien het toepassen van wijzigingen op de interne gegevens een tijdrovend proces is, stelt deze functie
de gebruiker in staat de wijzigingen alleen toe te passen op het moment dat dit nodig is. Zolang de optie Gewijzigde status inst. nog
niet is geselecteerd, wordt de gewijzigde toestand van de gedeelde map niet toegepast op de server. Wijzigingen in de gedeelde
mappen worden pas toegepast op de pc nadat u de optie Gewijzigde status inst. hebt geselecteerd.
Toegangsrechten instellen
Om de tv in staat te stellen de pc te vinden moet deze worden ingesteld op Beleid apparaat instellen in het venster Access
Permission Settings. Bovendien moeten de pc-server en de tv zich binnen hetzelfde subnet bevinden.
• Methode : Open het menu delen en kies Beleid apparaat instellen. Items die niet kunnen worden geselecteerd worden in grijs
weergegeven. U kunt de toegangsrechten wijzigen met de knoppen Allow Accepteren / Weigeren. U kunt een item verwijderen
door het te selecteren en op geselecteerd item verwijderen te klikken.
❑ Server
Server
U kent het gebruik van uw pc als server inschakelen en uitschakelen.
Server starten tijdens het opstarten van Windows
U kunt instellen of de server op de pc automatisch moet worden gestart tijdens het opstarten van Windows.
Servernaam wijzigen
U kunt de naam van de pc-server wijzigen.
De DLNA-functie gebruiken
❑ Het DLNA-menu gebruiken
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) maakt het mogelijk materiaal af te spelen dat is
opgeslagen op een DLNA-server (meestal uw PC) die rechtstreeks of via een netwerk
met uw tv is verbonden. Media Play maakt het om mogelijk materiaal in een
USB-geheugen dat op de televisie is aangesloten af te spelen, terwijl DLNA het
mogelijk maakt om materiaal af te spelen op een DLNA-server (uw pc) die rechtstreeks
of via een netwerk met uw televisie verbonden is. De procedure voor het gebruik van
het materiaal is dezelfde als bij Media Play (USB & DLNA).
1. Druk op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening om het DLNA-menu te openen.
2. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een van de pictogrammen (Photo, Music, Movie,
Setup) te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
N U kunt de modus DLNA afsluiten door te drukken op de toets MEDIA.P op de afstandsbediening.
N DLNA ondersteunt de volgende functies niet.
- De functies Achtergrondmuziek en Instellingen achtergrondmuziek.
- Bestanden sorteren op voorkeur in de mappen Foto, Muziek en Film.
- De functie Groep wzgn.
- Kopiëren / Verwijderen.
- De functie Veilig verwijderen.
- De functie van de knoppen REW/FF (π/μ) tijdens het afspelen van een film.
- De film doorlopend afspelen (Resume Play).
N De Skip-functie werkt mogelijk niet met bepaalde indelingen, zoals ASF en MKV.
N Divx DRM, Multi-audio en bijgevoegde ondertiteling wordt niet ondersteund.
N Samsung PC Share Manager moet door de pc-firewall worden toegestaan.
N De functie Skip (toetsen ◄/►) of Pause werkt mogelijk niet wanneer er een film wordt afgespeeld via de DLNA van een andere
fabrikant, afhankelijk van het betreffende materiaal.
N De speelduur wordt mogelijk niet weergegeven terwijl een film wordt afgespeeld.
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Vrij
Movie
USB Apparaat Terug
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:48:43 PMNederlands - 45
Over Anynet+
Anynet
+
-apparaten aansluiten
Anynet
+
is een functie waarmee u alle aangesloten Samsung-apparaten die Anynet
+
ondersteunen, kunt bedienen met de
afstandsbediening van de Samsung-tv. Het Anynet
+
-systeem kan alleen worden gebruikt met Samsung-apparaten die over Anynet
+
beschikken. Om u ervan te verzekeren dat uw Samsung-apparaat deze functie heeft, kunt u controleren of er een Anynet
+
-logo op het
apparaat zit.
❑ Op een tv aansluiten
1. Sluit de HDMI-kabel aan op een HDMI-aansluiting op de tv ([HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2 (DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] of [HDMI IN 4]) en op de
aansluiting HDMI OUT van het betreffende Anynet
+
-apparaat.
❑ Op de thuisbioscoop aansluiten
1. Sluit de HDMI-kabel aan op een HDMI-aansluiting op de tv ([HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2 (DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] of [HDMI IN 4]) en op de
aansluiting HDMI OUT van het betreffende Anynet
+
-apparaat.
2. Verbind de HDMI-kabel op de aansluiting HDMI IN van de thuisbioscoop en de uitgang HDMI OUT van het betreffende
Anynet
+
-apparaat.
N Verbind de optische kabel tussen de uitgang Digital Audio Out (Optical) op uw tv en de ingang Digital Audio van de thuisbioscoop.
N Wanneer de bovenstaande verbinding wordt gevolgd, voert de optische aansluiting slechts 2-kanaals audiosignaal uit. U hoort
alleen geluid uit de linker- en rechterluidspreker van de thuisbioscoop en de subwoofer. Voor een 5.1-kanaals audiosignaal, sluit
u de optische aansluiting van de dvd-speler of aftakdoos/satellietontvanger (Anynet
+
-apparaat 1 of 2) rechtstreeks aan op een
versterker of op de thuisbioscoop en niet op de tv.
N Alleen één thuisbioscoop aansluiten.
N U kunt een Anynet
+
-apparaat aansluiten met een HDMI 1.3-kabel.
Bepaalde HDMI-kabels ondersteunen mogelijk geen Anynet
+
-functies.
N Anynet
+
werkt wanneer het AV-apparaat dat Anynet
+
ondersteunt, op stand-by staat of is ingeschakeld.
N Anynet
+
ondersteunt maximaal 12 AV-apparaten. U kunt maximaal drie apparaten van hetzelfde type aansluiten.
N Anynet
+
ondersteunt hoogstens drie apparaten tegelijk.
Anynet
+
-
apparaat 1
Anynet
+
-
apparaat 2
Anynet
+
-
apparaat 3
TV
HDMI 1.3-kabel
HDMI 1.3-kabel
HDMI 1.3-kabel
Anynet
+
-
apparaat 4
HDMI 1.3-kabel
TV
Anynet
+
-apparaat 1
Anynet
+
-apparaat 2 Anynet
+
-apparaat 3
HDMI 1.3-kabel
HDMI 1.3-kabel
HDMI 1.3-kabel
HDMI 1.3-kabel
Thuisbioscoop
Optische kabel
Anynet
+
-apparaat 4
HDMI 1.3-kabel
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:48:44 PMNederlands - 46
Anynet
+
instellen
❑ Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) instellen
T Druk op de toets TOOLS om het menu Extra weer te geven. U kunt het
Anynet
+
-menu ook weergeven door Extra → Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) te selecteren.
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) → Uit / Aan
Als u de functie Anynet
+
wilt gebruiken, moet Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) zijn ingesteld
op Aan.
N Wanneer de functie Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) is uitgeschakeld, worden alle
bewerkingen betreffende Anynet
+
uitgeschakeld.
Automatisch uitschakelen → Nee / Ja
Een Anynet
+
-apparaat automatisch uitschakelen wanneer de tv wordt uitgeschakeld.
N De actieve bron op de afstandsbediening van de tv moet te worden ingesteld op TV
om de functie Anynet
+
te kunnen gebruiken.
N Wanneer u Automatisch uitschakelen instelt op Ja, worden de externe apparaten
die zijn aangesloten, ook uitgeschakeld wanneer de tv wordt uitgeschakeld.
Wanneer een extern apparaat nog opneemt, kan dit mogelijk wel of niet worden
uitgeschakeld.
Tussen Anynet
+
-apparaten schakelen
1. Druk op de toets TOOLS. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Apparatenlijst selecteren en druk vervolgens op de
toets ENTERE.
N De Anynet
+
-apparaten die op de tv zijn aangesloten, worden weergegeven.
Wanneer u het door u gewenste apparaat niet kunt vinden, kunt u op de rode knop
drukken om op apparaten te scannen.
N Alleen wanneer u in het in menu Instellingen de optie Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) instelt
op Aan, wordt het menu Apparatenlijst weergegeven.
3. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om een bepaald apparaat te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Er wordt naar het
geselecteerde apparaat overgeschakeld.
N Het kan twee minuten voordat naar de geselecteerde apparaten is overgeschakeld. U kunt de bewerking in de tussentijd
niet annuleren.
N De benodigde tijd voor het zoeken naar apparaten wordt bepaald door het aantal aangesloten apparaten.
N Als u een extern apparaat hebt geselecteerd door op de toets SOURCE te drukken, kunt u de functie Anynet
+
niet gebruiken.
Zorg ervoor dat u naar een extern Anynet
+
-apparaat schakelt via de toets TOOLS.
❑ Menu Anynet
+
Welke opties in het menu Anynet
+
worden weergegeven, is afhankelijk van het type en de status van de Anynet
+
-apparaten die op
de tv zijn aangesloten.
Menu Anynet
+
Beschrijving
Tv weergeven De modus Anynet
+
schakelt naar de tv-uitzendmodus.
Apparatenlijst Geeft de lijst met Anynet
+
-apparaten weer.
(apparaat_naam)Menu Toont de menu’s van het aangesloten apparaat. Wanneer er bijvoorbeeld een dvd-recorder is
aangesloten, verschijnt het diskmenu van de dvd-recorder.
(apparaat_naam) INFO Toont de afspeelmenu’s van het aangesloten apparaat. Wanneer er bijvoorbeeld een dvd-recorder
is aangesloten, verschijnt het afspeelmenu van de dvd-recorder.
Opnemen
(*recorder)
Starten van opname.
(Dit menu werkt alleen bij een apparaat dat opnemen ondersteunt.)
(*recorder)
Opname reserveren
Hiermee kunt een opname voor de recorder reserveren.
(Dit is alleen beschikbaar voor apparaten die de functie recording reservation ondersteunen).
Opname stoppen : (*recorder) Hiermee wordt het opnemen beëindigd.
Ontvangern Geluid wordt uitgevoerd via de ontvanger.
Wordt vervolgd...
Toepassing
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)►
Content Library
Internet@TV
Thuisnetwerkcentrum
U Verpl. EEnter R Terug
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) : Nee ▶
Automatisch uitschakelen : Ja
U Verpl. EEnter R Terug
Tv weergeven
Apparatenlijst
Opname : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver : Aan
Instellingen
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:48:45 PMNederlands - 47
❑ Beschikbare toetsen op afstandsbediening van de tv in de modus Anynet
+
Type apparaat Bedieningsstatus Beschikbare toetsen
Anynet
+
-apparaat
Nadat u naar het apparaat bent
geschakeld, wanneer het menu
van het betreffende apparaat wordt
weergegeven op het scherm.
Cijfertoetsen
▲/▼/ De toetsen ◄/►/ENTERE
kleurtoetsen /de toets EXIT
Nadat u naar het apparaat bent
geschakeld, terwijl u een bestand
afspeelt.
(Terugspoelen) / (Vooruitspoelen) (Stop) /
(Afspelen) / (Pauze)
Apparaat met
ingebouwde tuner
Nadat u naar het apparaat bent
overgeschakeld, wanneer u tv kijkt.
Toets P /
Audioapparaat Wanneer ontvanger is ingeschakeld.
Toets = /
Toets M MUTE
N De functie Anynet
+
werkt alleen wanneer de actieve bron op de afstandsbediening is ingesteld op tv.
N De toets werkt alleen wanneer opname mogelijk is.
N U kunt Anynet
+
-apparaten niet bedienen met de toetsen op de tv.
U kunt Anynet
+
-apparaten alleen bedienen met de afstandsbediening van de tv.
N De afstandsbediening van de tv werkt mogelijk niet in bepaalde omstandigheden. Selecteer in dat geval opnieuw het
Anynet
+
-apparaat.
N De Anynet
+
-functies werken niet bij producten van andere fabrikanten.
N De werking van de toetsen , is enigszins afhankelijk van het apparaat.
N Wanneer er meerdere opnameapparaten zijn aangesloten, worden deze weergegeven als (*recorder) en wanneer er slechts één
opnameapparaat is aangesloten, wordt deze weergegeven als (*apparaat_naam).
Opnemen
U kunt een tv-programma opnemen met een Samsung-recorder.
1. Druk op de toets TOOLS. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Opnemen (recorder) te selecteren en druk vervolgens op
de toets ENTERE. Het opnemen wordt gestart.
N Bij meerdere opnameapparaten
Wanneer er meerdere opnameapparaten zijn aangesloten, wordt een apparatenlijst
weergegeven. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om een opnameapparaat te selecteren en
druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE. Het opnemen wordt gestart.
N Wanneer het opnameapparaat niet wordt weergegeven
selecteert u Apparatenlijst en drukt u op de rode toets om apparaten te zoeken.
N Wanneer u op de toets drukt, wordt datgene waar u op dat moment naar kijkt, opgenomen. Wanneer u vanaf een ander
apparaat een video bekijkt, wordt de video van dat apparaat opgenomen.
N Controleer voor u begint met opnemen of de antenne correct is aangesloten op het opnameapparaat., Voor het correct aansluiten
van een antenne op een opnameapparaat kunt u de gebruikershandleiding van het opnameapparaat raadplegen.
U Verpl. EEnter R Terug
Tv weergeven
Apparatenlijst
Opname : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver : Aan
Instellingen
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:48:45 PMNederlands - 48
Luisteren via een ontvanger
U kunt geluid beluisteren via een ontvanger in plaats van de luidsprekers van de tv.
1. Druk op de toets TOOLS. Druk op de toets ENTERE om Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
te selecteren.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ voor het selecteren van Ontvanger. Druk op de toets ◄ of ►
om Aan of Uit te selecteren.
N Wanneer uw ontvanger alleen audio ondersteunt, verschijnt deze wellicht niet in de
apparatenlijst.
N De ontvanger werkt wanneer u de Optical IN-aansluiting van de ontvanger correct hebt
aangesloten op de Optical Out-aansluiting van de tv.
N Wanneer de ontvanger (thuisbioscoop) is ingesteld op Aan, hoort u alleen geluid via de Optical-aansluiting van de tv. Wanneer de
tv een DTV-signaal (antenne) weergeeft, verstuurt de tv een 5.1-kanaals geluidssignaal naar de ontvanger van de thuisbioscoop.
Wanneer de bron een digitaal onderdeel is, zoals een dvd en deze op de tv aangesloten is via HDMI, geeft de ontvanger van de
thuisbioscoop alleen een 2-kanaals signaal weer.
N Wanneer u de functie Media Play gebruikt, wordt het geluid mogelijk niet goed uitgevoerd via de ontvanger.
N Wanneer u via de ontvanger luistert, gelden er beperkingen voor het gebruik van de audiomenu’s.
N Wanneer de stroomvoorziening naar de tv wordt onderbroken en de Ontvanger is ingesteld op Aan is het mogelijk dat voor
Luidspreker selecteren de optie Ext. luidspreker is geselecteerd wanneer de tv opnieuw wordt ingeschakeld. (Zie pagina 21)
Problemen oplossen m.b.t. Anynet
+
Symptoom Oplossing
Anynet
+
werkt niet. • Controleer of het apparaat een Anynet
+
-apparaat is. Het Anynet
+
-systeem ondersteunt alleen
Anynet
+
apparaten.
• Sluit niet meer dan één ontvanger aan (thuisbioscoop).
• Controleer of het netsnoer van het Anynet
+
-apparaat correct is aangesloten.
• Controleer de video-/audio-/HDMI 1.3-kabelverbindingen van het Anynet
+
-apparaat.
• Controleer of Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) is ingesteld op Aan in het instellingenmenu Anynet
+
.
• Controleer of de afstandsbediening van de tv in de tv-modus staat.
• Controleer of het de exclusieve afstandsbediening van Anynet
+
is.
• In bepaalde situaties werkt Anynet
+
niet.
(Kanalen zoeken, Media Play uitvoeren, Plug & Play, enzovoort.)
• Wanneer u de HDMI 1.3-kabel aansluit of verwijdert, dient u opnieuw naar apparaten te
zoeken of uw televisie uit te schakelen en opnieuw in te schakelen.
• Controleer of de Anynet
+
-functie van het Anynet
+
-apparaat is ingeschakeld.
Ik wil Anynet
+
starten. • Controleer of het Anynet
+
-apparaat goed is aangesloten op de tv en controleer of
Anynet
+
(HDMICEC) is ingesteld op Aan in het instellingenmenu van Anynet
+
.
• Druk op de toets TV op de afstandsbediening van de tv om naar de tv te schakelen.
Druk vervolgens op de toets TOOLS om het menu Anynet
+
te openen en het gewenste
menu te selecteren.
Ik wil Anynet
+
verlaten. • Selecteer Tv weergeven in het menu Anynet
+
.
• Druk op de toets SOURCE op de afstandsbediening van de tv en selecteer een ander
apparaat dan een Anynet
+
-apparaat. (De kanaaltoets werkt alleen wanneer er geen
Anynet
+
-apparaat met een ingebouwde tuner is aangesloten.)
Het bericht Verbinden met
Anynet
+
-apparaat... wordt
weergegeven op het scherm.
• U kunt de afstandsbediening gebruiken voor het configureren van Anynet
+
of het schakelen
naar een weergavemodus.
• Gebruik de afstandsbediening wanneer u klaar bent met het instellen van Anynet
+
of met het
schakelen naar een weergavemodus.
Het Anynet
+
-apparaat speelt
niets af.
• U kunt de afspeelfunctie niet gebruiken wanneer Plug & Play actief is.
Het aangesloten apparaat wordt
niet weergegeven.
• Controleer of het apparaat Anynet
+
-functies ondersteunt.
• Controleer of de HDMI 1.3-kabel op de correcte manier is aangesloten.
• Controleer of Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) is ingesteld op Aan in het instellingenmenu van Anynet
+
.
• Zoek opnieuw naar Anynet
+
-apparaten.
• U kunt een Anynet
+
-apparaat alleen aansluiten met een HDMI 1.3-kabel. Het is mogelijk dat
bepaalde HDMI-kabels geen Anynet
+
-functies ondersteunen.
• Wanneer het wordt beëindigd door een bijzondere situatie, bijvoorbeeld wanneer de
HDMI-kabel of het netsnoer wordt losgekoppeld, of wanneer er een stroomstoring optreedt,
herhaalt u het scannen op apparaten.
Het televisieprogramma kan
niet worden opgenomen.
• Controleer of de antenneaansluiting op het apparaat voor opname correct is aangesloten.
Het geluid van de televisie
wordt niet uitgevoerd via de
ontvanger.
• Maak verbinding tussen de TV en de ontvanger met gebruik van de optische kabel.
U Verpl. EEnter R Terug
Tv weergeven
Apparatenlijst
Opname : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver : Aan
Instellingen
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:48:46 PMNederlands - 49
De Content Library activeren
Met de Content Library kunt u de geïntegreerde inhoud van tv of inhoud op een
USB-apparaat weergeven en afspelen.
1. Druk op de MENU-knop. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Toepassing te selecteren en
druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Content Library te selecteren en druk vervolgens op
de toets ENTERE. Het hoofdmenu van de Content Library wordt weergegeven.
O Druk op de toets CONTENT op de afstandsbediening om het hoofdmenu
Content Library weer te geven.
3. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om een pictogram te selecteren (Galerie, Koken,
Kinderen, Fitness, Overige, Inhoud beheren) en druk vervolgens op de
toets ENTERE.
N Het geselecteerde item wordt uitgevoerd.
❑ De afstandsbediening gebruiken in het menu Content Library
Toets Effect
▲/▼/◄/► De cursor verplaatsen en een item markeren.
ENTERE Het gemarkeerde item selecteren.
RETURN Terug naar het vorige menu.
EXIT
De huidige functie beëindigen en terugkeren naar het hoofdmenu van de
Content Library.
Gekleurde toetsen
Knoppen en corresponderende functies worden beschreven op de
betreffende pagina.
Hiermee kunt u het volume van de afgespeelde inhoud regelen.
CONTENT De modus Content Library openen of sluiten.
N Als u op de volumetoetsen of de toets MMUTE drukt, wordt er geen informatie weergegeven in het schermmenu,
maar werkt de functie wel gewoon.
N Druk op de toets P op de afstandsbediening om terug te keren naar de modus TV.
N DE CONTENT LIBRARY BEVAT TEKST, GRAFISCHE ELEMENTEN, AFBEELDINGEN, MULTIMEDIA EN ANDER
MATERIAAL, DAT UITSLUITEND IS BEDOELD VOOR INFORMATIEVE EN PROMOTIONELE DOELEINDEN. DE
INHOUD VAN DE CONTENT LIBRARY IS GEWIJZIGD EN WORDT VOORTDUREND HERZIEN EN BIJGEWERKT.
HET MATERIAAL IN DE CONTENT LIBRARY IS MOGELIJK NIET VOOR ELK PUBLIEK GESCHIKT.
N DE INFORMATIE IN DE CONTENT LIBRARY WORDT ALS ZODANIG, ZONDER VERDERE GARANTIES GELEVERD.
HOEWEL DE INFORMATIE IN DE CONTENTLIBRARY IS VERKREGEN VAN OF VOLDOET AAN BRONNEN
WAARVAN WIJ GELOVEN DAT ZE BETROUWBAAR ZIJN, KAN SAMSUNG GEEN ENKELE GARANTIE GEVEN
BETREFFENDE DE NAUWKEURIGHEID, GELDIGHEID, ACTUALITEIT, VOLLEDIGHEID OF GESCHIKTHEID VOOR
EEN BEPAALD DOEL VAN ENIGE INFORMATIE OF GEGEVENS DIE U TER BESCHIKKING ZIJN GESTELD.
IN GEEN ENKELE OMSTANDIGHEID, MET INBEGRIP VAN NALATIGHEID, ZAL SAMSUNG AANSPRAKELIJK
WORDEN GEHOUDEN, HETZIJ CONTRACTUEEL OF GERECHTELIJK, VOOR ENIGE DIRECTE, INDIRECTE,
INCIDENTELE, BIJZONDERE OFGEVOLGSCHADE, KOSTEN VOOR GERECHTELIJKE BIJSTAND, ONKOSTEN OF
WELKE ANDERE GELEDEN SCHADE DAN OOK VOORTKOMEND UIT, OF IN VERBAND MET, ENIGE INFORMATIE
IN, OF HET GEBRUIK VAN, DE CONTENT LIBRARY, ZELFS INDIEN ZIJ OP DE HOOGTE WAS GESTELD VAN DE
MOGELIJKHEID VAN DERGELIJKE SCHADE.
Content Library
Toepassing
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
Content Library
Internet@TV
Thuisnetwerkcentrum
< >
Koken Kindvr
Galerie
Galerie
Content Library
Fitness Overige
Sluiten Sluiten
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:48:47 PMNederlands - 50
De Content Library gebruiken
❑ Galerie
Met deze functie wordt een diapresentatie afgespeeld met hoge-resolutiebeelden en achtergrondmuziek.. Met de functie Galerie
van de tv kunt u de sfeer in huis wijzigen.
N Druk op de knop INFO om de naam van de artiest en gedetailleerde informatie in het Engels weer te geven voor elke afbeelding
(de informatie is momenteel alleen in het engels beschikbaar).
N U kunt de diavoorstelling onderbreken door tijdens de voorstelling op de toets ENTERE te drukken.
N Het copyright van de inhoud van de Galerie en alle bijbehorende zaken zijn voorbehouden aan Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc.
❑ Koken
U kunt diverse recepten bekijken die u stap voor stap kunt volgen. Deze inhoud geeft u leuke ideeën voor een maaltijd.
N De recepten in de categorie Koken van de Samsung-tv zijn gebaseerd op recepten gepubliceerd door Anness Publishing.
N Het copyright van de inhoud van de categorie Koken en alle bijbehorende zaken zijn voorbehouden aan Practical Pictures.
❑ Kinderen.
Dit is educatief en interactief materiaal dat kinderen herhaaldelijk kunnen bekijken. Geniet van de verhalen, liedjes en spelletjes met
de personages Boowa en Kwala.
N Het copyright van de inhoud van de categorie Kinderen en alle bijbehorende zaken zijn voorbehouden aan UpToTen.
❑ Fitness
Dit is nuttige informatie voor de gezondheid, met strek- en rekoefeningen op geluid voor het hele gezin.
❑ Inhoud beheren
Mijn inhoud
De inhoud wordt op dezelfde manier gebruikt als de inhoud in het geheugen van de tv. De inhoud van het externe USB-apparaat
wordt direct afgespeeld.
USB
U kunt inhoud opslaan op een USB-geheugen en afspelen op uw tv. De inhoud van een extern USB-geheugen wordt rechtstreeks
afgespeeld en gekopieerd naar het geïntegreerde Flash-geheugen in de tv.
N De Content Library ondersteunt USB MSC-apparaten. MSC staat voor Mass Storage Class, een apparaat waarop grote
hoeveelheden gegevens tegelijk kunnen worden opgeslagen en getransporteerd. Voorbeelden van MSC zijn pendrives en
geheugenkaartlezers. (USB HDD en HUB worden niet ondersteunt.)
N Wanneer u een game speelt vanaf een extern USB-geheugen kunt u uw prestaties opslaan (afhankelijk van de game).
Ga voorzichtig te werk bij het verwijderen van een USB-geheugenapparaat, want als u dat doet terwijl gegevens worden
opgeslagen kunnen gegevens verloren gaan.
N Nieuwe inhoud downloaden
Via de website samsung.com wordt nieuw materiaal gratis beschikbaar gesteld in aanvulling op het ingebouwde materiaal.
U hebt een UDN-nummer nodig om betaalde inhoud te kunnen downloaden. Controleer het UDN-nummer alvorens u een
nieuw item downloadt.
1. Ga naar de website www.samsung.com
2. Selecteer een item op de pagina Contents Download.
3. Download het materiaal naar het USB-geheugen.
4. Ga naar het hoofdmenu van de Content Library door op de toets CONTENT
te drukken of kies Content Library (Menu → Toepassing → Content Library)
5. Sluit het USB-geheugen aan op de USB-poort aan de zijkant van de tv.
6. Hier ziet u het subitem dat u hebt gedownload.
7. Selecteer een item en druk op de toets enter.
8. U kunt het geselecteerde item afspelen.
Instellingen
• Uitvoertijd schermbeveiliging → 10 min. / 20min. / 40 min. / 1 uur
Hiermee kunt u de wachttijd instellen voor het inschakelen van de schermbeveiliging.
• UDN bewaren (Unique Device Number)
Het 18-cijferige nummer op het scherm is de productcode.
U kunt het UDN opslaan op uw USB-geheugen.
N USB-opslagapparaten met het NTFS-bestandssysteem ondersteunen het opslaan van UDN niet.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:48:47 PMNederlands - 51
U kunt diverse internetdiensten gebruiken, zowel voor nuttige informatie en als voor amusement.
Als u problemen ondervindt bij het gebruik van een widget-service, neemt u contact op met de serviceprovider. Druk wanneer u in de
widget bent op de groene toets voor de contactgegevens, of bezoek de helpwebsite voor informatie over de widgetserviceprovider.
N Afhankelijk van de regio wordt Engels mogelijk niet in de widget-service ondersteund.
N Ova funkcija možda neće biti podržana u zavisnosti od zemlje.
Aan de slag met Internet@TV
Internet@TV biedt een ingebouwde internet- en televisiebeleving die wordt aangestuurd door de Yahoo!® Widget Engine. Hiermee kunt
u de koers van uw aandelen in de gaten houden, foto’s met vrienden en familie delen en het nieuws en de weersverwachting bekijken,
allemaal via de Internet@TV-service op de televisie.
N Als de netwerkomstandigheden instabiel zijn, werkt deze functie mogelijk niet. De tv wordt dan automatisch uitgeschakeld.
Als dit niet gebeurt, schakelt u de tv met behulp van de aan-uitknop uit.
N Vanwege netwerkomstandigheden kan het zijn dat u bij gebruik van deze functie soms een zekere traagheid ervaart.
Wanneer u Internet@TV voor het eerst uitvoert, worden automatisch de basisopties ingesteld.
N Als eerste moet u uw netwerk instellen. Raadpleeg ‘Netwerk instellen’ voor meer informatie over het configureren van uw netwerk.
N Wanneer uw netwerk functioneert, leidt de Internet@TV-software u door een stapsgewijze instelwizard.
Internet@TV
Alle inhoud en diensten die via dit apparaat beschikbaar zijn, zijn het eigendom van derde partijen en worden beschermd door auteursrecht,
handelsmerk en/of andere wetten betreffende intellectueel eigendom. Zulke inhoud en diensten worden uitsluitend geleverd voor persoonlijk,
niet-commercieel gebruik. Het is u niet toegestaan enige inhoud of diensten te gebruiken op een manier die niet is geautoriseerd door de eigenaar
van de inhoud of de leverancier van de diensten. Zonder het voorgaande te beperken, is het u zonder uitdrukkelijke toestemming van de eigenaar
van de inhoud of leverancier van de diensten, niet toegestaan om enige inhoud of diensten die via deze dienst beschikbaar zijn, te wijzigen,
te kopiëren, te reproduceren, opnieuw te publiceren, te uploaden, te plaatsen, door te geven, te vertalen, te verkopen, afgeleide werken te creëren,
te gebruiken of te verspreiden.
INHOUD EN DIENSTEN VAN DERDE PARTIJEN WORDEN ZONDER VERDERE GARANTIES GELEVERD. SAMSUNG GEEFT GEEN
GARANTIE VOOR DIENSTEN OF INFORMATIE ZOALS DEZE WORDEN GELEVERD, HETZIJ UITDRUKKELIJK OF IMPLICIET, VOOR
WELK DOEL DAN OOK. SAMSUNG WIJST NADRUKKELIJK ENIGE IMPLICIETE GARANTIE, WAARONDER, MAAR NIET BEPERKT TOT,
GARANTIES VAN VERKOOPBAARHEID OF GESCHIKTHEID VOOR EEN BEPAALD DOEL, VAN DE HAND. SAMSUNG GARANDEERT DE
NAUWKEURIGHEID, GELDIGHEID, TIJDIGHEID, WETTIGHEID OF VOLLEDIGHEID VAN INHOUD OF DIENSTEN DIE DOOR DIT APPARAAT
BESCHIKBAAR WORDEN GESTELD VOOR WELKE DOELEINDEN DAN OOK EN IN GEEN GEVAL, WAARONDER NALATIGHEID, IS
SAMSUNG AANSPRAKELIJK, HETZIJ CONTRACTUEEL OF DOOR ONRECHTMATIGHEID VOOR DIRECTE, INDIRECTE, INCIDENTELE,
SPECIALE SCHADE OF GEVOLGSCHADE, ADVOCATENKOSTEN OF OVERIGE KOSTEN VOORTVLOEIEND UIT OF VERBAND HOUDEND
MET INFORMATIE AFKOMSTIG VAN OF ALS GEVOLG VAN HET GEBRUIK VAN ENIGE INHOUD OF SERVICE DOOR U OF EEN ANDERE
DERDE, ZELFS INDIEN MEN OP DE HOOGTE IS GESTELD VAN DE MOGELIJKHEID VAN DERGELIJKE KOSTEN.
Diensten van derde partijen kunnen op elk moment worden stopgezet of onderbroken en Samsung verklaart en garandeert niet dat enige
inhoud of service gedurende een periode beschikbaar blijft. De inhoud en diensten worden verstuurd door derde partijen middels netwerken
en verzendingsmiddelen waar Samsung geen controle over heeft. Zonder de algemeenheid te van deze vrijwaring te beperken wijst Samsung
uitdrukkelijk alle verantwoordelijkheid of aansprakelijkheid van de hand voor enige onderbreking of opschorting van enige via dit apparaat
beschikbare inhoud of diensten. Samsung is verantwoordelijk noch aansprakelijk voor klantenservice met betrekking tot inhoud en diensten.
Vragen of verzoeken tot service met betrekking tot de inhoud of diensten moeten direct tot de respectievelijke leveranciers van de inhoud en diensten.
1. Druk op de toets MENU. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Application te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Internet@TV te selecteren en druk op de toets ENTERE.
O INTERNET@TV wordt gestart.
O Druk op de toets INTERNET@ op de afstandsbediening om het menu
Internet@TV te openen.
3. De General Disclaimer wordt op het scherm weergegeven. Selecteer I accept
of I do not accept.
N Zie de General Disclaimer, voor meer informatie over de ‘Legal Notice’.
4. Het ‘welkomstscherm’ is het beginpunt van het begeleid instellen van Internet@TV.
N Als u Exit Setup selecteert, wordt deze stap hervat wanneer u op de toets
INTERNET@ drukt.
N Selecteer Let’s get started!
5. Met het kiezen van uw locatie maakt u het gebruik van gelokaliseerd materiaal in
de tv-widgets mogelijk.
N Selecteer uw land in de lijst.
6. Om van Internet@TV gebruik te kunnen maken, is het nodig dat u akkoord gaat met de Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine Privacy
Policy.
N Selecteer OK, I Accept.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:48:48 PMNederlands - 52
7. Om van Internet@TV gebruik te kunnen maken, is het nodig dat u akkoord gaat met de Yahoo!® TV Widget System
Terms of Service.
N Selecteer OK, I Accept.
8. Voer uw naam in om uw profiel te maken. Elk profiel heeft een eigen lijst met
widgets. Voor elke persoon die van Internet@TV gebruikmaakt, kunt u een profiel
maken.
N Voer uw naam in en selecteer Save this name.
N Raadpleeg ‘De Profile-widget gebruiken’ voor meer informatie.
9. Internet@TV test de netwerkverbindin.
N Als de test mislukt, moet u het netwerk opnieuw configureren.
N Raadpleeg ‘Setting the Network’ voor meer informatie.
10. Het begeleid instellen is voltooid. Nu volgt er een tutorial over het gebruik van Internet@TV.
N Selecteer Continue om de tutorial weer te geven.
N Selecteer Exit setup als u nu direct van Internet@TV wilt gebruikmaken.
N U kunt het tutorial later weer opnieuw weergeven via Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial.
11. Druk op de toets INTERNET@ op de afstandsbediening om de gebruikersinterface van Internet@TV weer te geven.
❑ Schermweergave
Dock mode
1 Er wordt in de rechterbovenhoek een welkomstbericht met uw naam
weergegeven
N Dit bericht verdwijnt even later weer.
2 In het bericht worden twee sneltoetsen op de afstandsbediening getoond.
N Als u op de blauwe toets op de afstandsbediening drukt (Viewport)
wisselt de weergave tussen het ‘minischerm’ en de gewone weergave.
In het minischerm (Viewport-modus) wordt het tv-programma of de
video weergegeven in een verkleind gebied met plaatjes aan de
buitenkant. In de normale weergave (Overlay-modus) worden de
plaatjes over het tv-programma of de video heen weergegeven.
N Als u op de gele toets op de afstandsbediening drukt (Edit Snippet)
wordt er een helpvenster weergegeven en kan de geselecteerde snippet worden bewerkt.
3 Druk op de toets INTERNET@ op de afstandsbediening om te beginnen.
N De horizontale lijst onder aan het tv-scherm wordt het ‘dock’ genoemd.
N De items in de lijst heten ‘snippets’.
N Een snippet is een snelkoppeling naar een tv-widget.
N Een tv-widget is een internetapplicatie die speciaal voor de tv is ontworpen.
N Ga van de ene naar de andere snippet met behulp van de toetsen ◄ of ► op de afstandsbediening.
N De focus ligt op het meest linkse gebied (blauw gemarkeerd).
N De snippets in het dock worden onder dat focuspunt verschoven.
N Open een tv-widget door op ENTERE te drukken op de afstandsbediening wanneer de snippet ervan in het focuspunt staat.
N Wanneer u snippets toevoegt, vormen ze een stapel waarin u kunt navigeren met de toetsen ▲ of ▼.
N Er staan twee speciale tv-widgets in het dock : De Profile Widget en de Gallery Widget. Deze kunnen niet worden verwijderd.
N Na een bepaalde periode schuift het dock van het scherm.
Zijbalkmodus
1 Met een snippet in focus drukt u op de toets ENTERE om de
tv-widgetzijbalk te openen. Het tv-widgetlogo en Home ( ) worden
boven in de zijbalk weergegeven.
2 Het actuele menu wordt onder het tv-widgetlogo weergegeven.
N Als u naar een voorgaand scherm wilt terugkeren, selecteert u het en
drukt u op de toets ENTERE.
N U kunt tevens op de toets RETURN op de afstandsbediening drukken.
3 De actuele selectie is altijd blauw gemarkeerd. De focus ligt op de
gemarkeerde toets en deze wordt geactiveerd wanneer u op de toets
ENTERE drukt.
4 Wanneer er erg veel informatie is, wordt er een navigatie-element gebruikt.
N De actuele pagina en het totale aantal pagina’s worden weergegeven.
N U gaat van de ene naar de andere pagina met de toetsen ◄ of ►.
5 De onderste werkbalk bevat kleurentoetsen die overeenkomen met de rode, groene, gele en blauwe toets op de afstandsbediening.
• Rode toets : De widget sluiten.
• Groene toets : De instellingen van de widget veranderen.
• Gele toets : Uw snippets beheren.
• Blauwe toets : De video passend maken of op volledige schermgrootte zetten.
N Sommige knoppen zijn mogelijk niet beschikbaar, afhankelijk van de widget.
.@# áëí space
a b c d e f g h i
j k l m n o p q r
s t u v w x y z 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:48:50 PMNederlands - 53
Snippets in het dock bewerken
1. U kunt snippets bewerken door een te selecteren en op de gele toets te drukken.
2. De snippet wordt naar de tweede positie verplaatst en zijn tegel schuift omhoog zodat de volgende helptekst zichtbaar wordt :
• Delete (rode toets) : Deze tv-widget verwijderen.
N Verwijderde widgets kunnen via de Widget Gallery weer opnieuw worden geïnstalleerd.
• Move (blauwe toets) : De snippet een andere plaats geven. Druk op de toets ◄ of ► om te scrollen. Druk op de gele toets om
de snippet op de nieuwe positie te plaatsen.
• Done (gele toets) : Het menu Edit Snippet afsluiten.
De Profile-widget gebruiken
De Profile-widget configureert uw gebruikersprofiel. U kunt meerdere profielen instellen en elk profiel
heeft zijn eigen lijst met widgets.
Met behulp van het menu Switch Profile kunt u naar een ander gebruikersprofiel overschakelen.
N Er dienen ten minste twee profielen te zijn geregistreerd.
Voor het toevoegen van een profiel, zie ‘Administrative Controls’.
Met het menu Profile Settings kunt u uw profiel aanpassen en beveiligen.
• Gebruikersprofielen kunnen worden aangepast met een unieke Name en een Avatar
(een afbeelding die uw profiel representeert).
• De Name en Avatar van uw profiel worden weergegeven in de profielsnippet in het dock.
• Profielen kunnen worden beveiligd met behulp van Create Profile PIN.
N Wanneer u de pincode de eerste keer instelt, kunt u tevens een Security Question instellen.
Via het menu Profile Settings kan de toegang tot widgets worden beperkt.
• Mocht u uw Profile PIN vergeten, dan kunt u antwoord geven op een Security Question die aan uw
profiel is gekoppeld.
• Bij profielen waarbij de Limit Profile-indicator is ingeschakeld, kunnen geen nieuwe widgets worden
geïnstalleerd.
N Owner PIN moet zijn ingesteld als u deze functie wilt gebruiken. Voor het instellen van Owner PIN, zie ‘Administrative Controls’.
Met behulp van het menu System Settings kunt u het volgende doen :
• Uw Location wijzigen en uw Zip Code instellen (alleen voor de VS) om het materiaal aan uw land of regio aan te passen.
• Repeat Tutorial die tijdens het begeleid instellen werd weergegeven.
• Restore Factory Settings om alle widgetconfiguraties en -informatie te wissen.
In het menu Administrative Controls kunt u het volgende doen :
• De Screen Saver instellen om te voorkomen dat het beeld in het scherm brandt.
• Create Owner PIN en een Security Question instellen om andere profielen te beveiligen.
• Een nieuw Create Profile waarvoor een aparte reeks widgets kan worden ingesteld.
• Een bestaand profiel Verwijderen.
In de Profile-widget kunt u met uw Yahoo!-ID Sign in to Yahoo!®.
• Als u over een Yahoo!-ID beschikt, hebt u met behulp van de Yahoo!-tv-widgets toegang tot uw aangepaste materiaal.
• U wordt automatisch met de Yahoo!-ID van uw profiel bij alle automatisch geïnstalleerde Yahoo!-tv-widgets aangemeld.
• Als u nog niet over een Yahoo!-account beschikt, kunt u via www.yahoo.com een account maken.
• In landen waar Internet@TV niet wordt ondersteund, kunt u zich mogelijk niet aanmelden met een id die u op de Yahoo!-website
hebt ingesteld.
❑ Info over de Profile-widget
Druk op de groene toets.
Hiermee kunt u een korte beschrijving van de Profile Widget, het Copyright Policy, de Terms of Service en het Privacy Policy
weergeven.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:48:50 PMNederlands - 54
De Yahoo!® Widget Gallery gebruiken
Met de Yahoo!® Widget Gallery kunt u meer widgets aan uw tv toevoegen.
Bekijk de beschikbare tv-widgets in de volgende categorieën :
• Latest Widgets : Hier ziet u de onlangs bijgewerkte widgets.
• Yahoo!® Widgets : Hier ziet u widgets die door Yahoo!® worden geleverd.
• Samsung Widgets : Hier ziet u widgets die door Samsung worden geleverd.
• Meer Categorieën : Alle widgets weergeven op categorie.
N Als u een widget wilt installeren, gaat u naar het detailscherm, selecteert u Add Widget to My
Profile en drukt u op de toets ENTERE. De widget wordt geïnstalleerd en is vervolgens in het
dock beschikbaar.
❑ Instellingen van de Widget Gallery
Druk op de groene toets.
Info over Yahoo! Widget Gallery
Hiermee kunt u een korte beschrijving van de Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of
Service en het Privacy Policy weergeven.
In het menu Developer Settings kun u zelf widgets maken.
Bezoek voor meer informatie over het zelf widgets maken onze website voor ontwikkelaars op
http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/
De Yahoo!® Weather-widget gebruiken
De Yahoo!® Weather-widget geeft actuele informatie over het weer in uw woonplaats en in uw favoriete
andere locaties. De inhoud wordt steeds aan de veranderende weersomstandigheden aangepast.
• Druk op de groene toets op de afstandsbediening om het instellingenmenu Settings van de Yahoo!®
Weather-widget weer te geven.
• In het menu Settings kunt u steden waarvoor het weerbericht wordt weergegeven toevoegen en
verwijderen.
In het menu Settings kunt u het volgende doen :
• Add New City door de naam van de stad in te voeren. Wanneer de zoekresultaten worden
weergegeven, selecteert u de gewenste stad en drukt u op de toets ENTERE.
• Delete City door de gewenste stad in de lijst te selecteren. Druk op de toets ENTERE en bevestig
de verwijdering.
• De temperatuurindicatiemodus wijzigen. Hier kunt u de temperatuurindicatiemodus in Imperial of
Metric veranderen. Met Imperial wordt bijvoorbeeld de temperatuur in Fahrenheit weergegeven en
met Metric in graden Celsius.
❑ Een snippet voor een favoriete stad maken
• Selecteer de stad in de homepage van de Yahoo!® Weather-widget en bekijk de gedetailleerde weersverwachting.
• Druk op de gele toets.
• Selecteer het menu Add Snippet en druk op de toets ENTERE om de stad als snippet toe te voegen.
❑ Een snippet voor een stad Delete
• Open de snippet.
• Druk op de gele toets.
• Selecteer het menu Delete Snippet en druk op ENTERE om de snippet te verwijderen.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:48:51 PMNederlands - 55
De Yahoo!® News-widget gebruiken
De Yahoo!® News-widget geeft het laatste beknopte nieuws op het gebied van economie, amusement,
politiek, sport en vele andere categorieën.
Selecteer een categorie, een berichtkop in de categorie en bekijk een dynamisch bijgewerkte
nieuwssamenvatting.
De Yahoo!® Flickr-widget gebruiken
Met de Flickr-widget hebt u tijdens het tv-kijken toegang tot uw favoriete foto’s van vrienden en
familie. Deel de foto’s met de rest van het gezin via een presentatie op het grote tv-scherm.
• U kunt de Flickr-widget aanpassen door u aan te melden met uw Yahoo!-ID.
• Raadpleeg voor meer informatie het gedeelte ‘De Profile-widget gebruiken’.
• Meer informatie over Flickr vindt u op www.flickr.com.
N Your Photos toont foto’s die u op de Flickr-website hebt geregistreerd.
U kunt op de volgende wijze foto’s van Flickr in een presentatie weergeven :
• Selecteer een miniatuur van een foto en druk op de toets ENTERE om de gegevens van de
foto te bekijken.
• Selecteer Start Slideshow en druk op de toets ENTERE.
U kunt de presentatieweergave als volgt regelen :
• Druk tijdens een presentatie op de toets ENTERE.
• De miniaturen van de foto’s worden onder aan het scherm weergegeven.
N Wanneer de presentatiebediening wordt weergegeven kunt u de presentatie Pause, Play
en Stop.
N Als u het menu selecteert en op de toets ENTERE drukt, kunt u informatie over de geselecteerde foto weergeven.
• Met het menu Your Sets kunt u foto’s die u in Flickr hebt geclassificeerd, weergeven.
• Met het menu Explore kunt u foto’s bekijken die door de Flickr-website worden gepromoot. Tevens kunt u de dagelijks
bijgewerkte foto’s bekijken.
• Met het menu Mark as Favorite of Remove From Favorite voegt u foto’s aan uw reeks Favorite Photos toe of verwijdert u ze
daaruit.
• Met het menu Favorite Photos kunt u de foto’s weergeven die u als favoriet hebt geclassificeerd.
• Met het menu Your Contacts kunt u updates van familie en vrienden weergeven.
Met het menu Your Groups kunt u uw favoriete groepen op de Flickr-website selecteren en van foto’s van de Flickr-gemeenschap
genieten en foto’s daarmee delen
Als u de instellingen voor de Yahoo!® Flickr-widget wilt configureren, drukt u op de groene toets op de afstandsbediening.
• Met het menu Time Per Slide regelt u de snelheid van de presentatie.
• Met het menu Repeat stelt u in dat de presentatie na de laatste foto weer van voren af aan begint.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:48:51 PMNederlands - 56
De Yahoo!® Finance-widget gebruiken
Bekijk de aandelenkoersen en het laatste beursnieuws met de Yahoo!® Finance-widget.
Druk op de groene toets om uw aandelen in te stellen.
Voer met het menu Add New Symbol de naam van een nieuw aandeel in.
• Selecteer in de zoekresultaten het aandeel dat u wilt toevoegen, selecteer het menu Add Symbol en
druk op de toets ENTERE.
N Het geselecteerde aandeel verschijnt in de My Stocks-lijst.
• Met het menu Import Symbols From Yahoo!® kunt u uw Yahoo!® Finance-portefeuille oproepen.
- Met het menu Merge Symbols worden de symbolen van de Yahoo!® Finance-widget met de
symbolen van uw portefeuille gecombineerd.
- Met het menu Replace Symbols worden de symbolen van de Yahoo!® Finance-widget gewist
en vervangen door de symbolen van uw portefeuille.
• Gebruik het menu Display Format om de fluctuatie van de aandelenprijs weer te geven in Value of
Percentage.
• Een snippet voor een favoriet aandeel maken
- Selecteer de het symbool van het aandeel in de homepage van de Yahoo!® Finance-widget en
bekijk de gedetailleerde financiële informatie.
- Druk op de gele toets.
- Selecteer het menu Add Snippet en druk op de toets ENTERE om het aandeel als snippet toe te voegen.
• Een snippet Delete
- Open de snippet in het dock.
- Druk op de gele toets.
- Selecteer het menu Delete Snippet en druk op ENTERE om de snippet te verwijderen.
Problemen met Internet@TV oplossen
Probleem Mogelijke oplossing
Bepaalde widgetservices
werken niet.
• Controleer dit bij de serviceprovider.
• Druk wanneer u in de widget bent op de groene toets voor de contactgegevens, of bezoek de
helpwebsite voor informatie over de widgetserviceprovider.
• Raadpleeg de Help-websitepagina.
Sommige widgets hebben
alleen Engelstalig materiaal.
Hoe kan ik de taal wijzigen?
• De taal van het materiaal in de widget kan verschillen van de taal van de gebruikersinterface.
Dit is afhankelijk van de serviceprovider.
Na een reset naar de
fabrieksinstellingen
functioneert de
Yahoo!-widgetservice
niet meer en wordt er een
waarschuwingsbericht
weergegeven.
• Schakel de tv na een reset naar de fabrieksinstelingen uit en weer in. Start vervolgens
Internet@TV weer.
Ik heb me bij de Flickr-widget
bij mijn account aangemeld,
maak ik kan mijn foto niet zien.
• Ga naar de Yahoo!-website en activeer uw Flickr-account met uw Yahoo!-ID.
Ik heb bij de
Profile-widget de locatie
gewijzigd, maar de vorige
instelling is nog steeds actief.
• Schakel de tv uit en weer in. Start vervolgens Internet@TV weer.
• Nu kunt u de widget-services gebruiken die in de nieuwe locatie worden ondersteund.location.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:48:52 PMNederlands - 57
Help-website
Land Website
Oostenrijk www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
België
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Tsjechië www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Denemarken www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Frankrijk www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Duitsland www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Griekenland www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hongarije www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ierland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italië www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Nederland www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Noorwegen www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Polen www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slowakije www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Spanje www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Zweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Zwitserland
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Verenigd Koninkrijk www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turkije www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estland www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Letland www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Litouwen www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Rusland www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Oekraïne www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N De menustappen worden later mogelijk gewijzigd.
N De links kunnen voor bepaalde landen verschillen.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:48:52 PMNederlands - 58
N Ova funkcija možda neće biti podržana u zavisnosti od zemlje.
N Als u problemen ondervindt bij het gebruik van een widget-service, neemt u contact op met de serviceprovider. Druk wanneer u in de
widget bent op de groene toets voor de contactgegevens, of bezoek de helpwebsite voor informatie over de widgetserviceprovider.
N Afhankelijk van de regio wordt Engels mogelijk niet in de widget-service ondersteund.
Aan de slag met Internet@TV
Internet@TV geeft u via een netwerkverbinding toegang tot de widgetservices van SAMSUNG. Het materiaal dat via Internet@TV
beschikbaar is kan variëren, afhankelijk van de provider. Via de Internet@TV-service hebt u toegang tot diverse services, onder meer
YouTube.
N Als een bepaald lettertype in het materiaal niet door de tv wordt ondersteund, kan het desbetreffende materiaal mogelijk niet
normaal worden weergegeven.
N De configuratie van widgets en de geleverde services kunnen per land verschillen. Nadat u uw landselectie hebt gewijzigd, schakelt
u de tv uit en weer in. U kunt dan de widgetservice voor het ingestelde ondersteunde land gebruiken. Als het land op overige is
ingesteld, kan de tv uw land niet herkennen. Selecteer in dat geval rechtstreeks in de landenlijst van de service.
N Raadpleeg het gedeelte ‘Plug & Play-functie’ voor meer informatie over het instellen van uw land.
N Vanwege netwerkomstandigheden kan het zijn dat u bij gebruik van deze functie soms een zekere traagheid ervaart.
N Alvorens Internet@TV te kunnen gebruiken, dient u eerst het netwerk in te stellen. Raadpleeg ‘Het netwerk instellen’ voor meer
informatie over het configureren van uw netwerk.
Wanneer u Internet@TV voor het eerst uitvoert, worden automatisch de basisopties ingesteld. Het kan enkele minuten duren om deze
bij te werken.
1. Druk op de MENU-toets. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Application te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
2. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼ om Internet@TV te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
O Druk op de toets INTERNET@ op de afstandsbediening om het menu Internet@
TV te openen.
3. De gebruikersovereenkomst wordt weergegeven. Selecteer Agree om de
overeenkomst te aanvaarden.
4. De statistieken en analyse worden weergegeven. Selecteer Agree om de overeenkomst te aanvaarden.
Internet@TV instellen
U kunt de menu’s voor Single Sign On (SSO), systeembeheer en eigenschappen controleren en gebruiken. Druk op de toets ▲ of ▼
om Setup te selecteren en druk vervolgens op de toets ENTERE.
❑ Single Sign On
Met dit menu kunt u de account maken en verwijderen.
Met Single Sign On kunt u uw account en de accountinformatie van de contentsite beheren.
U hebt geen aanvullende aanmeldingsgegevens nodig.
N De account is alleen voor Internet@TV.
Create Account
Hiermee kunt u een account maken en aan de gewenste servicesite worden gekoppeld.
N U kunt niet meer dan 10 accounts maken.
N De accountnaam mag niet meer dan 10 tekens bevatten.
N Als er geen service is waarvoor het nodig is dat u zich aanmeldt, kunt u geen account maken.
Account Management
• Service Site : Hier kunt u de aanmeldgegevens van de servicesite registreren (bijvoorbeeld YouTube).
• Change Password : Hier kunt u het wachtwoord van uw account wijzigen.
• Delete : Hier kunt u de account verwijderen.
N Als u het wachtwoord van een account vergeet, drukt u de toetsen van de afstandsbediening in deze volgorde in om
Internet@TV te resetten : POWER (uit) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (aan).
Bij gebruik van deze functie worden alle accounts gewist.
Internet@TV
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:48:52 PMNederlands - 59
❑ System Setup
N Ticker Autorun en Ticker Duration worden mogelijk niet in alle landen ondersteund.
Change the Service Lock password
N De standaardpincode van een nieuw tv-toestel is 0-0-0-0.
N Als u de pincode bent vergeten, drukt u achtereenvolgens op de volgende toetsen van de afstandsbediening zodat de pincode
opnieuw wordt ingesteld op 0-0-0-0 : POWER (uit) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (aan).
Service Duration
Hiermee kunt u de wachttijd instellen voor het inschakelen van de schermbeveiliging.
Ticker Autorun → Aan / Uit
Stel hiermee in of de ticker bij het inschakelen van de tv automatisch wordt gestart.
Ticker Duration
Hiermee kunt u de wachttijd instellen voor het inschakelen van de schermbeveiliging.
❑ Properties
Informatie over Internet@TV weergeven.
U kunt de snelheid van uw Internet TV-service meten met behulp van de functie Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service.
De Internet@TV-service gebruiken
In een widget met meerdere categoriemenu’s kunt u de inhoud van de categoriemenu’s met de toetsen ◄ en ► weergeven.
Aanmelden bij een account
1. Druk op de rode toets.
2. Selecteer de gewenste User account en druk op de toets ENTERE.
3. Voer het wachtwoord in.
N Wanneer het aanmelden is gelukt, wordt de gebruikersaccount op het scherm weergegeven.
N Voordat u zich kunt aanmelden, moet er ten minste één account zijn geregistreerd. Informatie over het maken van een account
vindt u in het gedeelte ‘Internet@TV instellen’.
De Widget Gallery gebruiken
U kunt Run Service, Lock en Install Service bij de huidige widget gebruiken en u kunt de beschrijving zien van de widgetservice
die niet is geïnstal.eerd.
U kunt bij Internet@TV diverse widgets toevoegen en gebruiken die door de serviceprovider worden geleverd. Dit kan per provider
verschillen.
• Run Service : Hiermee wordt de widgetservice gestart.
• Lock : Hiermee wordt de service vergrendeld.
• Install Service (of Delete Service) : Hiermee wordt de widgetservice geïnstalleerd of verwijderd.
De YouTube-widget gebruiken
U kunt films van YouTube bekijken.
Als u over een YouTube-account beschikt, registreert u de accountinformatie met
behulp van Account Management. Vervolgens kunt u een My Favourites-categorie
gebruiken.
N Het menu kan via een webservice worden gewijzigd.
N Er kan materiaal tussen zitten dat niet geschikt is voor kinderen. Gebruik in dat
geval de Lock-functie in de Widget Gallery.
Xz~*atppo
_z{*]lpo
Xz~*[z{wl}
Xz~*Ot~n~~po
_z{*Qlz}tp~
Xz~*Wtyvpo
Xz~*]p~{zxopo
Qpl}po
_zol <:B
^ppvtyr*U~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp}
atp~*E*C;
M}plvtyr*Yp~*Lwp}~*m*P8Xltw
atp~*E*C;
Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx
atp~*E*CE=A
Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:48:53 PMNederlands - 60
Problemen met Internet@TV oplossen
Probleem Mogelijke oplossing
Bepaalde widgetservices werken niet. Controleer dit bij de serviceprovider.
Druk wanneer u in de widget bent op de groene toets voor de contactgegevens, of
bezoek de helpwebsite voor informatie over de serviceprovider.
Raadpleeg de Help-websitepagina.
Wat is het voordeel van Single Sign
On?
Als u een account maakt en uw aanmeldgegevens voor de gewenste service registreert,
hebt u toegang tot aangepast materiaal zonder dat u zich daarvoor extra moet
aanmelden.
Wanneer er een netwerkfout optreedt,
kan ik behalve het instellingenmenu
geen menu’s meer gebruiken.
Als de netwerkverbinding niet functioneert, is uw service wellicht beperkt.
Omdat alle widgets behalve instellingenwidgets (Profile widget, Widget Gallery)
verbinding moeten maken met het internet.
Is het mogelijk om pornofilms op
YouTube weer te geven?
Dit soort materiaal wordt bij de lijst in het menu weggefilterd. Toch kan het via de
zoekfunctie worden weergegeven. Gebruik in dat geval de Lock-functie in de Widget
Gallery om de widgetservice te vergrendelen.
Help-website
Land Website
Oostenrijk www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
België
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Tsjechië www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Denemarken www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Frankrijk www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Duitsland www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Griekenland www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hongarije www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ierland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italië www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Nederland www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Noorwegen www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Polen www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slowakije www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Spanje www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Zweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Zwitserland
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Verenigd Koninkrijk www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turkije www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estland www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Letland www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Litouwen www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Rusland www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Oekraïne www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N De menustappen worden later mogelijk gewijzigd.
N De links kunnen voor bepaalde landen verschillen.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:48:53 PMNederlands - 61
Thuisnetwerkcentrum
Informatie over het Thuisnetwerkcentrum
Met het Thuisnetwerkcentrum worden tv’s en mobiele telefoons via een netwerk met elkaar verbonden. Zo kunt u inkomende
oproepen, de inhoud van tekstberichten en de agenda van de mobiele telefoon via het Thuisnetwerkcentrum op de tv weergeven.
Bovendien kunt u de multimedia op de mobiele telefoon, zoals video’s, foto’s en muziek via het netwerk naar de tv importeren en deze
daar weergeven en afspelen.
N Als het apparaat DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller) ondersteunt, is de Thuisnetwerkcentrum-functie beschikbaar.
N Deze functie is voor compatibiliteit met mobiele telefoons van Samsung die binnenkort worden uitgebracht. Voor meer informatie
gaat u naar www.samsung.com of neemt u contact op met de klantenservice van Samsung. Het is mogelijk dat er extra software op
het mobiele apparaat moet worden geïnstalleerd. Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding van het apparaat voor meer informatie.
❑ Verbinding maken met het Thuisnetwerkcentrum
Raadpleeg ‘Netwerk instellen’ voor meer informatie over de netwerkinstellingen.
Verbinding maken met een Wi-Fi-ad-hocnetwerk
1. Sluit de ‘Draadloze LAN-adapter van Samsung’ aan op de USB1(HDD)- of USB2-aansluiting van de tv.
2. Raadpleeg ‘Netwerk instellen’ voor meer informatie over het configureren van een ad-hocnetwerk.
N Raadpleeg de handleiding van de mobiele telefoon voor informatie over het configureren van de netwerkinstellingen op de
telefoon.
3. Stel bij de ad-hocinstellingen van de mobiele telefoon het IP-adres, SSID en wachtwoord voor de mobiele telefoon in volgens de
Netwerknaam (SSID) en Beveiligingssleutel die op de tv worden weergegeven.
Verbinding maken via een bedrade/draadloze IP-
1. Sluit de bedrade/draadloze IP-verdeler met de LAN-kabel op de LAN-poort van de tv aan, of sluit de ‘Draadloze LAN-adapter
van Samsung’ op de USB1(HDD)- of USB2-poort van de tv aan.
N Raadpleeg de handleiding van het desbetreffende apparaat voor de procedures voor het instellen van de bedrade/draadloze
verdeler en de mobiele telefoon.
Thuisnetwerkcentrum
TV Zijpaneel
Draadloze
LAN-adapter van
Samsung
mobiele telefoon
of
Draadloze
LAN-adapter van
Samsung
Draadloze IP-verdeler
TV Zijpaneel
Mobiele telefoon
of
LAN-kabel
Draadloze
LAN-adapter van
Samsung
Mobiele telefoon TV Zijpaneel
of
LAN-kabel
Draadloze IP-verdeler
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:48:58 PMNederlands - 62
Het Thuisnetwerkcentrum instellen
❑ Bericht / Media
Hier ziet u een lijst met mobiele telefoons die voor deze tv zijn ingesteld en waarbij u
de bericht of media functie kunt gebruiken
N De functie Media is beschikbaar op andere mobiele apparaten die DLNA DMC
ondersteunen.
Toegestaan
De mobiele telefoon wordt toegestaan.
Gweigrd
De mobiele telefoon wordt geblokkeerd.
Verwijderen
Hiermee wordt de mobiele telefoon uit de lijst verwijderd.
N Deze functie wist alleen de namen uit de lijst. Als het gewiste mobiele apparaat
wordt ingeschakeld of probeert verbinding met de tv te maken, wordt het mogelijk weer in de lijst weergegeven.
❑ Instellingen
Bericht → Aan / Uit
Hier kunt u bepalen of de berichtenfunctie wordt gebruikt (binnengekomen
oproepen, de inhoud van tekstberichten en agendapunten op de telefoon).
Media → Aan / Uit
Hier kunt u instellen of de weergavefunctie voor
de multimedia (video’s, foto’s en muziek) op de mobiele telefoon wordt gebruikt.
Tv-naam
U kunt de tv-naam instellen, zodat u deze gemakkelijk op het mobiele apparaat
kunt vinden.
N Als u Gebrk Invoer selecteert, kunt u bij OSK(On Screen Keyboard) de tv-naam
invoeren.
Terug Sluiten
Thuisnetwerkcentrum
111-1234-5671 : Toegstn
111-1234-5672 : Toegstn
111-1234-5673 : Gweigrd
111-1234-5674 : Gweigrd
Bericht
Media
Instellingen
Terug Sluiten
Thuisnetwerkcentrum
Bericht : Aan
Media : Aan
Tv-naam : TV
Bericht
Media
Instellingen
De Message-functie gebruiken
Met deze functie kunt u tijdens het TV-kijken inkomende oproepen, de inhoud van
tekstberichten en de agenda van de mobiele telefoon via het alarmvenster weergeven.
N Als u dit Bericht-alarmvenster wilt uitschakelen, stelt u Bericht in op Uit bij
Instellingen van het Thuisnetwerkcentrum.
N Het alarmvenster wordt 20 seconden weergegeven. Als er gedurende die tijd niet op
een toets wordt gedrukt, of als Annuleren wordt geselecteerd, verschijnt het venster
tot drie keer met een tussentijd van 5 minuten.
N Als OK wordt geselecteerd, of als OK niet is geselecteerd terwijl het bericht drie keer
is weergegeven, wordt het bericht verwijderd. Het bericht wordt echter niet van de
mobiele telefoon verwijderd.
N Het eenvoudige alarmvenster kan worden weergegeven terwijl u bepaalde
applicaties zoals Media Play, Contents Library, enz. gebruikt. Schakel in dat geval
naar de tv-modus over om de inhoud van het bericht te bekijken.
N Wanneer er een bericht van een onbekende mobiele telefoon wordt weergegeven, selecteert u de mobiele telefoon bij Bericht in het
Thuisnetwerkcentrum en selecteert u Gweigrd om de telefoon te blokkeren.
❑ Berichtweergave
Als er een nieuw tekstbericht (SMS) binnenkomt terwijl u tv-kijkt, wordt het alarmvenster weergegeven. Als u op de OK-toets drukt,
wordt de inhoud van het bericht weergegeven.
N U kunt de weergave-instellingen voor de inhoud van tekstberichten (SMS) op de mobiele telefoon configureren.
Raadpleeg voor de juiste procedures de handleiding van de mobiele telefoon.
N Bepaalde speciale tekens worden mogelijk blanco of als kapotte tekens weergegeven.
❑ Alarm bij binnenkomende oproep
Als er een oproep binnenkomt terwijl u TV-kijkt, wordt het alarmvenster weergegeven.
❑ Agenda-alarm
Terwijl u TV-kijkt, verschijnt het alarmvenster met de geregistreerde agenda.
N U kunt de weergave-instellingen voor de inhoud van de agenda op de mobiele telefoon configureren.
N Raadpleeg voor de juiste procedures de handleiding van de mobiele telefoon.Bepaalde speciale tekens worden mogelijk blanco
of als kapotte tekens weergegeven.
husband
SMS
Nieuw bericht ontvangen
Wilt u de gegevens
bekijken?
OK Annuleren
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:49:02 PMNederlands - 63
De Media-functie gebruiken
Er verschijnt een alarmvenster waarin de gebruiker wordt geïnformeerd dat de
multimedia (foto’s, video’s en muziek) die van de telefoon is verzonden, op de TV
wordt weergegeven.
De multimedia wordt automatisch 3 seconden na het verschijnen van het
alarmvenster weergegeven of afgespeeld.
Als u bij het verschijnen van het alarmvenster op de toets RETURN of EXIT drukt
wordt de Media Contents niet afgespeeld of weergegeven.
N Als u het verzenden van multimedia-inhoud vanaf de mobiele
telefoon wilt uitschakelen, stelt u Media in op Uit in Instellingen in
het Thuisnetwerkcentrum.
N Afhankelijk van de resolutie en indeling kan bepaalde inhoud mogelijk niet op tv worden afgespeeld.
❑ Toetsen voor het weergeven van multimedia
Toets Effect
◄/►
• Beweeg de cursor en selecteer een item.
• Tijdens het afspelen van een film : Vooruit of achteruit door de film springen.
ENTER
• Als u op ENTERE drukt tijdens het afspelen, wordt het afspelen onderbroken.
• Als u op ENTERE drukt in de pauzemodus, wordt het afspelen hervat.
RETURN Terug naar het vorige menu.
TOOLS Verschillende functies uit de menu’s Photo, Music en Movie uitvoeren.
INFO Bestandsgegevens weergeven.
EXIT De modus Media Play afsluiten en terugkeren naar de TV-modus.
N De toetsen ENTERE en ◄/► werken mogelijk niet, afhankelijk van het type multimedia.
N Met behulp van het mobiele apparaat kunt u de afgespeelde multimedia bedienen. Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding van het
apparaat voor meer informatie.
Media wordt afgespeeld in “Obekend apparaat 13”
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:49:03 PMNederlands - 64
Wordt vervolgd...
Teletekstfunctie
De meeste televisiekanalen bieden tekstinformatiediensten via teletekst. Op de indexpagina van de teletekstdienst vindt u informatie
over het gebruik van de dienst. Ook kunt u naar wens verschillende opties selecteren met de toetsen op de afstandsbediening.
N Voor een juiste weergave van teletekstinformatie is een stabiele kanaalontvangst vereist. Anders kan bepaalde informatie ontbreken
of worden bepaalde pagina’s niet weergegeven.
1 : (sluiten)
De teletekstweergave verlaten.
2 6 (index)
Druk op deze toets voor weergave van de indexpagina (inhoudspagina) tijdens het
gebruik van teletekst.
3 5 (tonen)
Druk op deze toets om verborgen tekst weer te geven (bijvoorbeeld antwoorden
op quizvragen). Druk nogmaals op deze toets om terug te keren naar de normale
weergave.
4 4 (formaat)
Druk op deze toets om de tekst in de bovenste helft van het scherm op dubbel
formaat weer te geven. Druk nogmaals op deze toets om de tekst in de onderste helft
van het scherm op dubbel formaat weer te geven. Druk nogmaals op deze toets om
terug te keren naar de normale weergave.
5 / (teletekst aan/mix)
Druk op deze toets om teletekst te activeren nadat u het kanaal dat de teletekstdienst
aanbiedt, hebt geselecteerd. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om het huidige
televisiebeeld over de teletekstpagina heen weer te geven.
6 8 (opslaan)
Hiermee kunt u teletekstpagina’s opslaan.
7 1 (subpagina)
Druk op deze toets om de beschikbare subpagina’s weer te geven.
8 2 (volgende pagina)
Gebruikt voor het weergeven van de volgende teletekst pagina.
9 3 (vorige pagina)
Druk op deze toets om de vorige teletekstpagina weer te geven.
0 0 (modus)
Druk op deze toets om de teletekstmodus (LIST/FLOF) te selecteren. Als u in de
modus LIST op deze toets drukt, schakelt u over naar de modus Opslaan in lijst. In
deze modus kunt u met behulp van de toets 8(opslaan) teletekstpagina’s in een lijst
opslaan.
! 9 (vastzetten)
Druk op deze toets als u een roulerende pagina wilt vastzetten. Druk nogmaals op
deze toets om het rouleren te hervatten.
@ 7 (annuleren)
Druk op deze toets om naar een uitzending weer te geven wanneer u een pagina
zoekt.
# Gekleurde toetsen (rood/groen/geel/blauw)
Als een zendstation gebruikmaakt van het FASTEXT-systeem, worden de
verschillende onderwerpen op een teletekstpagina van een kleurcodering voorzien,
die u kunt selecteren met behulp van de gekleurde toetsen. Druk op de gewenste
toets. De pagina wordt weergegeven met aanvullende kleurcodegegevens, die op
dezelfde wijze kunnen worden geselecteerd. Om de vorige of volgende pagina weer
te geven drukt u op de toets met de overeenkomstige kleur.
N U kunt de teletekstpagina’s veranderen met decijfertoetsen op de afstandsbediening.
Aanbevelingen voor gebruik
1
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:49:03 PMNederlands - 65
De teletekstpagina’s zijn in zes categorieën verdeeld :
Onderdeel Inhoud
A Geselecteerd paginanummer.
B Aanduiding zendstation.
C Huidig paginanummer of zoekindicaties.
D Datum en tijd.
E Tekst.
F Statusinformatie.
FASTEXT-informatie.
N Teletekstinformatie is vaak verdeeld over verschillende pagina’s die achtereenvolgens
worden weergegeven. U kunt rechtstreeks naar deze pagina’s gaan door :
- Het paginanummer in te voeren;
- Een titel in een lijst te selecteren;
- Een gekleurde kop te selecteren (FASTEXT-systeem).
O Druk op de toets TV teletekstmodus verlaten.
Specificaties voor de wandbevestigingskit (VESA)
Installeer de wandbevestiging aan een massieve muur die loodrecht op de vloer staat.
Wanneer u de wandbevestiging aan andere bouwmaterialen wilt bevestigen, neemt u contact op met de dichtstbijzijnde dealer.
Als u de kit aan het plafond of een schuine wand bevestigt, kan de wandbevestiging vallen en ernstig letsel veroorzaken.
Productgroep inch VESA-specificaties (A * B) Standaard Quantity
Schroef
Aantal 100 * 100
M4
4
23"~29" 200 * 100
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6
46"~55" 400 * 400
57"~70" 800 * 400 M8
80" ~ 1400 * 800
PDP-TV
42"~ 50" 400 * 400
M8 4
58"~ 63" 600 * 400
70" ~ 800 * 400
80" ~ 1400 * 800
N We leveren standaardafmetingen voor wandbevestigingskits, zoals geïllustreerd in de voorgaande tabel.
N Wanneer u onze wandbevestigingskit aanschaft, zijn een gedetailleerde installatiegids en alle vereiste montageonderdelen daarbij
inbegrepen.
N Gebruik geen schroeven die langer zijn dan de standaardafmetingen, omdat anders de binnenkant van de tv beschadigd kan raken.
N Voor wandbevestigingen die niet voldoen aan de standaardspecificaties voor
VESA-schroeven, kan de lengte van de schroeven afhankelijk van de specificaties afwijken.
N Gebruik geen schroeven die niet voldoen aan de standaardspecificaties voor
VESA-schroeven. Draai de schroeven niet te vast. Dit kan ertoe leiden dat het product beschadigd raakt of valt, wat kan resulteren
in persoonlijk letsel.
Samsung kan niet aansprakelijk worden gesteld voor dergelijke ongevallen.
N Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor productschade of persoonlijk letsel wanneer een niet-VESA of niet-gespecificeerde
wandbevestiging is gebruikt of wanneer de consument de installatie-instructies voor het product niet in acht heeft genomen.
N Onze modellen van 57 en 63 inch voldoen niet aan de VESA-specificaties. Gebruik daarom voor dit model onze speciaal
samengestelde wandbevestigingskit.
N Kantel deze tv voor de bevestiging nooit meer dan 15 graden.
Installeer de wandbevestigingskit niet met de tv ingeschakeld.
Dit kan resulteren in persoonlijk letsel door elektrische schokken.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:49:04 PMNederlands - 66
De montage van de wandbevestiging voorbereiden
1. Plaats de wandbevestiging met een aandraaibereik van maximaal 15 kgf/cm. De onderdelen kunnen beschadigd raken als het
koppel buiten het opgegeven bereik valt.
2. De kit met accessoires bevat een houder en een ring [②]voor het bevestigen van wandbevestigingen van andere bedrijven op uw
Samsung-tv. (Situatie B).
N Draai de schroef [①] vast wanneer u de wandbevestiging aan de muur bevestigt.
De standaardvoet monteren
Waarschuwing
Bevestig de voet stevig aan de tv voordat u deze verplaatst. Als u dit niet doet kan de
voet kan vallen en ernstig letsel veroorzaken.
N De tv moet door twee of meer mensen worden gedragen. Leg de tv nooit op de
grond neer om eventuele beschadiging aan het scherm te voorkomen.
Zet de tv altijd rechtop.
Bevestig de tv met de schroeven stevig op de standaardvoet.
(Het uiterlijk van het scherm kan afwijken van het scherm in de afbeelding.)
Als u de tv aan een muur bevestigt, sluit u
het deksel (➊) op het verbindingsstuk van
de standaardvoet met twee schroeven.
(PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680)
Situatie A. De wandbevestiging van SAMSUNG installeren Situatie B. Een wandbevestiging van een ander bedrijf
installeren
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:49:07 PMNederlands - 67
Als u duwt of trekt aan de tv of op de tv klimt, kan deze vallen. Zie er met name op toe dat uw kinderen niet aan de
tv gaan hangen of deze uit balans brengen. De tv kan dan omvallen, hetgeen verwondingen kan veroorzaken of
zelfs fatale gevolgen kan hebben. Neem alle voorzorgsmaatregelen die in de bijgesloten veiligheidsfolder worden
genoemd. Om veiligheidsredenen is het raadzaam het valbeveiligingsmechanisme te installeren om de stabiliteit
van het toestel te verhogen.
❑ Voorkomen dat de tv valt
1. Plaats de schroeven in de beugels en bevestig deze stevig aan de wand. Controleer of de schroeven stevig in de wand zijn
gedraaid.
N Afhankelijk van het wandtype hebt u mogelijk aanvullend materiaal nodig om het geheel te verankeren.
N De benodigde beugels, schroeven en draad worden niet meegeleverd. Deze moeten apart worden aangeschaft.
2. Verwijder de schroeven in het midden aan de achterkant van de tv, steek de schroeven door de beugels en draai de schroeven
weer vast in de tv.
N Het is mogelijk dat de schroeven niet bij het product worden meegeleverd.
3. Verbind de beugels die aan de tv zijn bevestigd met een sterke draad aan de beugels die aan de wand zijn bevestigd en knoop de
draad stevig vast.
N Plaats de tv dicht bij de wand zodat deze niet achterover kan vallen.
N Het is veilig de draad zodanig aan te brengen dat de beugels die aan de wand zijn bevestigd zich boven de beugels op de tv of
op gelijke hoogte daarmee bevinden.
N Haal de draad los voordat u de tv verplaatst.
4. Controleer of alle bevestigingen goed zijn aangebracht. Controleer de bevestigingspunten regelmatig op tekenen van moeheid of
verzwakking. Neem in geval van twijfel over de veiligheid van de bevestiging contact op met een professionele installateur.
De tv aan de wand bevestigen
Installatieruimte
Bewaar de nodige afstand tussen het product en andere objecten (bijv. muren) zodat er een goede ventilatie mogelijk is.
Wanneer u dat niet doet, kunnen er door een stijging van de interne temperatuur brand of problemen bij het product ontstaan.
Plaats het product op zo’n manier dat de in de afbeelding aangegeven vereiste afstanden worden aangehouden.
N Bij gebruik van een voet of muurbevestiging mogen er alleen onderdelen worden gebruikt die door Samsung Electronics
zijn geleverd.
- Het gebruik van onderdelen van een andere fabrikant kan leiden tot problemen met het product of zelfs tot lichamelijk letsel
doordat het product valt.
- Het gebruik van onderdelen van een andere fabrikant kan leiden tot problemen met het product of zelfs tot brand vanwege een
door een slechte ventilatie gestegen interne temperatuur.
N Het uiterlijk van het product kan van het afgebeelde apparaat afwijken.
Bij installatie van het product met een voet Bij installatie van het product met een muurbevestiging
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
경고 주의
경고 주의
Wand
Wand
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:49:09 PMNederlands - 68
Problemen oplossen
Wanneer u vragen over deze televisie hebt, kunt u eerst deze lijst raadplegen. Wanneer geen van deze tips voor het oplossen van de
problemen van toepassing is, kunt u naar 'www.samsung.com' gaan en vervolgens op Ondersteuning klikken of contact opnemen met
het callcenter dat vermeld staat op de laatste pagina.
N Een firmware-upgrade kan de eerste mogelijke oplossing zijn.
Probleem Mogelijke oplossing
Beeldkwaliteit
Voer eerst Het beeld testen uit om te bevestigen dat uw televisie het testbeeld juist weergeeft.
* Ga naar MENU → Ondersteuning → Zelfdiagnose → Het beeld Testen
Wanneer het testbeeld juist wordt weergegeven, kan de slechte beeldkwaliteit worden veroorzaakt door de bron of het signaal.
Het televisiebeeld lijkt niet zo goed als
in de winkel.
• Wanneer u een analoge aftakdoos/Set-Top Box hebt, kunt u upgraden naar een SetTop Box.
Gebruik HDMI- of Componentkabels voor HD-beeldkwaliteit.
• Abonnee kabel/satelliet : Probeer HD-stations (High Definition) uit het
kanalenoverzicht uit.
• Aansluiting antenne : Probeer HD-stations uit na het uitvoeren van Auto Program
N Veel HD-kanalen zijn geüpgraded van SD-inhoud (Standard Definition).
• Wijzig de resolutie van de video-uitgang van de aftakdoos/Set top naar 1080i of 720p.
Het beeld is vervormd: macroblock,
small block, punten, pixelisatie.
• De compressie van video-inhoud kan beeldvervorming veroorzaken, vooral bij snel
bewegende beelden zoals bij sport en actiefilms.
• Een zwak signaal of slechte kwaliteit kan beeldvervorming veroorzaken. Dit is geen
defect van de tv.
Onjuiste kleur of ontbrekende kleur
met Component-verbinding.
• Zorg dat de Component-kabels op de juiste aansluitingen zijn aangesloten.
Onjuiste of te losse aansluitingen kunnen leiden tot kleurproblemen of tot een leeg
scherm.
Slechte kleurweergave of helderheid.
• Wijzig de beeld-opties in het tv-menu (modus Beeld, Kleur, Helderheid, Scherpte).
• Wijzig de optie Spaarstand in het menu Setup.
• Probeer het beeld te resetten om de standaardbeeldinstelling weer te geven.
(Ga naar MENU → Beeld → Beeld resetten)
Stippellijn op de rand van het scherm.
• Wanneer het beeldformaat is ingesteld op Volledig scherm, wijzigt u dit naar 16:9.
• Resolutie van de aftakdoos/Set-Top Box wijzigen.
Het beeld is zwart-wit met alleen
AV-invoer (Composite).
• Sluit de videokabel (geel) aan op de groene aansluiting van componentingang 1 van
de televisie.
Het beeld staat stil of is vervormd
wanneer het wijzigen van kanalen of
van het beeld wordt uitgesteld.
• Wanneer de tv is aangesloten met de aftakdoos kunt u proberen de aftakdoos te
resetten. (Sluit het AC-snoer opnieuw aan en wacht totdat de aftakdoos opnieuw
wordt opgestart. Dit kan circa 20 minuten duren)
• Stel de uitgangsresolutie van de aftakdoos in op 1080i of 720p.
Geluidskwaliteit
Voer eerst Het geluid testen uit om te bevestigen dat uw televisie goed werkt.
* Ga naar MENU → Ondersteuning → Zelfdiagnose → Het geluid testen
Als het geluid OK is, kan het geluidsprobleem worden veroorzaakt door de bron of het geluid.
Geen geluid of het geluid is te zwak bij
het maximale volume.
• Controleer het volume van het apparaat (aftak-/satellietdoos, DVD, Blu-ray enzovoort)
dat op uw televisie is aangesloten.
Vervolgens past u het televisievolume daaraan aan.
Het beeld is goed maar er is geen
geluid.
• Stel de optie Luidspreker selecteren in op TV-luidspreker in het geluidsmenu.
• Zorg dat de audiokabels van een extern apparaat op de juiste audio-ingangen van de
televisie zijn aangesloten.
• Controleer de optie voor audio-uitgangen van het aangesloten apparaat.
Bijvoorbeeld) U moet misschien de audio-optie van de aftakdoos instellen op HDMI
wanneer u HDMI hebt aangesloten op uw televisie.
• Wanneer u een een DVI-HDMI-kabel gebruikt, is een afzonderlijke audiokabel vereist.
• U moet de SRS-functie uitschakelen wanneer u het volume boven 30 instelt.
• Verwijder de plug van de hoofdtelefoonaansluiting (indien beschikbaar op uw
televisie).
Ruis van de luidspreker.
• Controleer de kabelaansluitingen. Controleer of een videokabel niet is aangesloten op
een audio-ingang.
• Controleer de signaalsterkte voor een antenne-/kabelaansluiting. Een zwak signaal
kan geluidsvervorming veroorzaken.
Wordt vervolgd...
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:49:09 PMNederlands - 69
Probleem Mogelijke oplossing
Geen beeld, geen video
De televisie kan niet worden
ingeschakeld.
• Controleer of de stekker op juiste wijze in het stopcontact is gestoken en op de
televisie is aangesloten.
• Controleer of het stopcontact werkt.
• Druk op de Aan/uit-knop op de televisie om te controleren of de afstandsbediening
juist werkt.
Als de televisie wordt ingeschakeld, kan de oorzaak van het probleem de
afstandsbediening zijn.
Voor het oplossen van het probleem met de afstandsbediening kunt u het gedeelte
'Afstandsbediening werkt niet' hieronder raadplegen.
De televisie wordt automatisch
uitgeschakeld.
• Controleer of de Slaaptimer is ingesteld op Aan in het menu Setup.
• Wanneer u de televisie op uw pc hebt aangesloten, moet u de instellingen voor de
stroomvoorziening van de pc controleren.
• Controleer of de stekker op juiste wijze in het stopcontact is gestoken en op de
televisie is aangesloten.
• Wanneer er gedurende 10 tot 15 minuten geen signaal is bij de antenne-/
kabelaansluiting wordt de televisie uitgeschakeld.
Geen beeld/video
• Controleer de kabelaansluitingen. (verwijder alle kabels uit de televisie en de externe
apparaten en sluit deze opnieuw aan)
• Stel de video-uitgang van het externe apparaat (aftakdoos, Set-Top Box, DVD, Blu-ray
enzovoort) in zodat deze overeenkomt met de aansluitingen van de tv-ingang. De
uitgang van het externe apparaat is bijvoorbeeld: HDMI en de ingang van de televisie:
HDMI.
• Controleer of het aangesloten apparaat is ingeschakeld.
• Zorg dat u de de juiste tv-bron selecteert door op de knop SOURCE op de
afstandsbediening te drukken.
• Start het aangesloten apparaat opnieuw op door het netsnoer van het apparaat
opnieuw aan te sluiten.
RF-aansluiting (kabel/antenne)
Kan niet alle kanalen ontvangen.
• Controleer of de antennekabel goed is aangesloten.
• Probeer Plug & Play om beschikbare kanalen aan de kanalenlijst toe te voegen.
Ga naar MENU → Setup → Plug & Play en wacht tot alle beschikbare kanalen zijn
opgeslagen.
• Controleer of de antenne juist is geplaatst.
Het beeld is vervormd: macroblock,
small block, punten, pixelisatie.
• De compressie van video-inhoud kan beeldvervorming veroorzaken, vooral bij snel
bewegende beelden zoals bij sport en actiefilms.
• Een zwak signaal kan geluidsvervorming veroorzaken. Dit is geen defect van de tv.
Pc-aansluiting
Melding Niet-ondersteunde modus.
• Stel de resolutie en frequentie van de pc-uitgang in zodat deze overeenkomen met de
resoluties die door de televisie worden ondersteund.
De pc wordt altijd weergegeven in de
bronlijst, ook wanneer deze niet is
aangesloten.
• Dit is normaal: de pc wordt altijd weergegeven in de bronlijst, zelfs wanneer een pc
niet is aangesloten.
Video is in orde, maar er is geen audio
bij een HDMI-aansluiting.
• Controleer de instelling voor audio-uitvoer op uw pc.
Netwerkverbinding
Fout bij verbinding draadloos netwerk.
• De Samsung Wireless USB dongle is vereist voor het gebruik van een draadloos
netwerk.
• Controleer of Type netwerk is ingesteld op Draadloos.
• De televisie moet worden aangesloten op een IP sharer (router).
Overig
Het beeld wordt niet in het volledige
scherm weergegeven.
• Er worden bij HD-kanalen zwarte balken aan weerskanten weergegeven wanneer
geüpgrade SD-inhoud (4:3) wordt weergegeven.
• Zwarte balken onder en boven in het scherm worden weergegeven bij films die
beeldformaten hebben die afwijken van die van uw televisie.
• Stel de optie voor beeldformaat op uw externe apparaat of televisie in op volledig
scherm.
Afstandsbediening werkt niet.
• Plaats de batterijen van de afstandsbediening opnieuw met de juiste polariteit (+ -).
• Reinig het transmissievenster dat zich boven op de afstandsbediening bevindt.
• Richt vanaf circa 1,5 tot 2 meter afstand de afstandsbediening direct naar de televisie.
Wordt vervolgd...
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:49:09 PMNederlands - 70
Probleem Mogelijke oplossing
Plasma-tv maakt zoemend geluid
• Plasma-tv's maken een zacht zoemend geluid. Dit is normaal. Dit wordt veroorzaakt
door de elektrische lading die wordt gebruikt om beelden op het scherm te maken.
• Als het zoemen luid is, is de helderheid van uw televisie mogelijk te hoog ingesteld.
Stel de helderheid lager in.
• Uw plasma-tv kan ook luid zoemen als de achterkant ervan te dicht bij een wand of
ander hard oppervlak staat. Sluit de verbindingskabels opnieuw aan.
• Onjuiste installatie van de muurbevestiging kan sterke ruis veroorzaken.
Beeldretentie (inbranden)
• Om het risico van het inbranden van het scherm te minimaliseren, is
dit apparaat voorzien van technologie voor inbrandvermindering. Met
pixelsverplaatsingstechnologie kunt u de beweging van het beeld op en neer (verticale
lijn) en van links naar rechts (punten horizontaal) instellen.
De tv kan niet aan/uit worden gezet en
het volume kan niet worden geregeld
met de afstandsbediening van de
aftakdoos/Set-Top box.
• Programmeer de afstandsbediening van de aftakdoos/Set-Top voor bediening van de tv.
Raadpleeg de gebruikershandleiding voor kabel/satelliet voor de SAMSUNG tv-code.
Melding Niet-ondersteunde modus.
• Controleer de ondersteunde resolutie van de tv en pas de uitgangsresolutie van
het externe apparaat daaraan aan. Raadpleeg voor resolutie-instellingen deze
handleiding.
Kan het lichteffect op de rand aan de
voorkant niet uitschakelen (onder het
SAMSUNG-logo).
• De optie Lichteffect in het menu Setup aanpassen.
De opties zijn: Uit, Standbystand aan, Kijkstand aan en Altijd.
• Lichteffect is niet bij alle modellen beschikbaar.
De televisie ruikt naar plastic. • Deze geur is normaal en verdwijnt na verloop van tijd.
De sterkte van het televisiesignaal
is niet beschikbaar in het menu
Zelfdiagnostische test.
• Deze functie is alleen beschikbaar bij digitale kanalen met een antenneaansluiting
(RF/Coax).
De televisie helt naar rechts of links. • Verwijder de standaardvoet van de televisie en monteer deze opnieuw.
De standaardvoet kan niet worden
gemonteerd.
• Zorg dat de televisie op een vlak oppervlak is geplaatst.
Wanneer u de schroeven niet uit de televisie kunt draaien, kunt u een magnetische
schroevendraaier gebruiken.
Het kanaalmenu wordt grijs
weergegeven (niet beschikbaar).
• Het kanaalmenu is alleen beschikbaar wanneer de tv-bron is geselecteerd.
Uw instellingen verdwijnen na 30
minuten of telkens wanneer de televisie
wordt uitgeschakeld.
• Als de tv zich in de modus Winkeldemo bevindt, worden elke 30 minuten de audio-
en beeldinstellingen gereset.
Wijzig de modus van Winkeldemo naar Thuisgebruik in de Plug & Play-procedure.
Druk de knop SOURCE in om de modus TV te selecteren, ga naar MENU → Setup
→ Plug & Play → ENTER
Audio-of videoverlies met tussenpozen.
• Controleer de kabelaansluitingen en sluit opnieuw aan.
• Dit kan worden veroorzaakt door overmatig dikke of stugge kabels.
Zorg dat de kabels flexibel genoeg zijn voor langetermijngebruik.
Bij wandmontage raden wij aan om kabels te gebruiken met 90-graden connectoren.
U ziet mogelijk kleine deeltjes als u
dichtbij de rand het televisiescherm
kijkt.
• Dit maakt deel uit van het productontwerp en is geen defect.
Het PIP-menu is niet beschikbaar.
• De PIP-functionaliteit is alleen beschikbaar wanneer u naar een HDMI-, pc- of
componentbron kijkt.
'Vervormd signaal' of 'Geen signaal/
zwak signaal' bij een CAM-kaart (CI/CI+)
• Controleer of bij CAM de CI(CI+)-kaart in de sleuf voor de algemene interface is
geïnstalleerd.
• Dit is normaal. De tv voert de OTA-functie (Over The Air) zelf uit om gedownloade
firmware te upgraden tijdens het kijken.
Terugkerende beeld-/geluidsproblemen • Controleer en wijzig signaal/bron.
N Enkele van de bovenstaande afbeeldingen en functies zijn alleen voor bepaalde modellen verkrijgbaar.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:49:10 PMNederlands - 71
Specificaties
De beschrijvingen en kenmerken in dit boekje zijn alleen bedoeld ter informatie en kunnenzonder voorafgaande kennisgeving worden
gewijzigd.
Modelnaam PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680
Schermformaat (diagonaal) 50 inch 58 inch 63 inch
Resolutie computer
(optimaal)
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Geluidsuitgang 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2
Afmetingen (B x H x D)
Behuizing
Met voet
1240 x 756 x 74 mm
1240 x 817 x 290 mm
1401 x 848 x 74 mm
1401 x 917 x 335 mm
1531 x 932 x 74 mm
1531 x 957 x 390 mm
Gewicht
Behuizing
Met voet
33 kg
38 kg
39 kg
46 kg
53 kg
61 kg
Omgevingsvereisten
Bedrijfstemperatuur
Luchtvochtigheid bij gebruik
Opslagtemperatuur
Luchtvochtigheid bij opslag
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C tot 40 °C)
10% to 80%, niet-condenserend
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C tot 45 °C)
5% to 95%, niet-condenserend
N Dit is een digitaal apparaat van klasse B.
N Vormgeving en specificaties kunnen zonder kennisgeving worden gewijzigd.
N Zie voor informatie over de stroomvoorziening en het energieverbruik het etiket op het product.
BN68-02333J-DUT.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:49:10 PMItaliano - 2
Istruzioni per l’utente
Ritenzione dell’immagine sullo schermo
Non visualizzare un’immagine fissa (come un gioco o lo sfondo di un PC collegato a questo PDP) sul pannello del monitor al
plasma per più di 2 ore poiché può verificarsi una ritenzione delle immagini. Il fenomeno di ritenzione dell’immagine è anche noto
come “bruciatura dello schermo”. Per evitare il fenomeno di ritenzione dell’immagine, ridurre il grado di luminosità e contrasto dello
schermo quando si visualizza un’immagine fissa.
Altitudine
Il PDP può funzionare regolarmente fino a 2000m di altitudine. Se utilizzato a un’altitudine superiore a 2000m di altezza si possono
verificare malfunzionamenti, pertanto se ne sconsiglia l’uso.
Calore sulla parte superiore del TV PDP
La parte superiore dell’apparecchio può risultare calda dopo un uso prolungato poiché il calore viene dissipato dal pannello
attraverso i fori di ventilazione presenti nella parte superiore. Ciò è una condizione normale e non indica alcun difetto o
malfunzionamento del prodotto. Tuttavia, si consiglia di impedire ai bambini di toccare la parte superiore del prodotto.
Il prodotto emette degli scricchiolii.
Uno scricchiolio può verificarsi per l’espansione e la contrazione del telaio a causa di variazioni ambientali quali la temperatura e
l’umidità. Ciò è normale e non rappresenta un difetto del prodotto.
Difetti delle celle
Il PDP usa un pannello composto da 2,360,000 (livello HD) a 6,221,000 (livello FHD) pixel che richiedono una speciale tecnologia
di produzione. Tuttavia, alcuni pixel potrebbero risultare più luminosi o più scuri. Questo fenomeno non ha alcun impatto sulle
prestazioni del prodotto.
Si sconsiglia di utilizzare il prodotto a temperature inferiori ai 5°C.
La visualizzazione di una immagine fissa per un lungo periodo di tempo può provocare un danno permanente al
pannello PDP.
La visione del TV PDP con un formato 4:3 per un periodo di tempo prolungato può lasciare traccia dei bordi
sulla parte sinistra, destra e centrale del video a causa delle differenti emissioni luminose dello schermo. La
riproduzione di un DVD o l’uso di una console per videogiochi può causare effetti analoghi sullo schermo.
Questo tipo di danni non è coperto dalla Garanzia.
Immagine residua sullo schermo.
La visualizzazione prolungata di immagini fisse da videogiochi e PC può causare immagini residue parziali. Per evitare questo
problema, ridurre la ‘luminosità’ e il ‘contrasto’ mentre si visualizzano immagini fisse.
Garanzia
- La Garanzia non copre i danni causati dalle immagini residue.
- La bruciatura dello scherno non è coperta dalla garanzia.
Installazione
Per l’installazione dell’apparecchio in luoghi estremamente polverosi o esposti a basse o alte temperature, elevata umidità o
sostanze chimiche, oppure laddove è richiesto un funzionamento continuativo del prodotto come per esempio in aeroporti, stazioni
ferroviarie, ecc. si consiglia di contattare un Centro di assistenza autorizzato. La mancata osservanza di questa indicazione può
causare seri danni all’apparecchio.
Avvertenza TV Digitale
1. Le funzioni relative alla televisione digitale (DVB) sono disponibili solo nelle nazioni o nelle aree in cui viene trasmesso il
segnale digitale terrestre DVB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AVC) o laddove si abbia accesso a un servizio TV via cavo compatibile
DVB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC).
Verificare con il rivenditore locale la possibilità di ricevere segnali DVB-T o DVB-C.
2. DVB-T è lo standard del consorzio europeo DVB per la trasmissione della televisione digitale terrestre mentre DVB-C è
lo standard per la trasmissione della televisione digitale via cavo. Tuttavia, alcune funzioni quali EPG (Electronic Program
Guide), VOD (Video on Demand) e altre non sono incluse in queste specifiche. Per questo motivo, al momento non sono
supportate.
3. Sebbene questo televisore rispetti i più recenti standard DVB-T e DVB-C [agosto 2008], la compatibilità con future
trasmissioni digitali terrestri DVB-T e digitali via cavo DVB-C non può essere garantita.
4. Alcuni fornitori di trasmissioni TV via cavo potrebbero applicare una tariffa aggiuntiva per tali servizi e richiedere all’utente
di accettare i termini e le condizioni della loro offerta.
5. Alcune funzioni della TV digitale potrebbero non essere disponibili in alcune nazioni o regioni e lo standard DVB-C
potrebbe non essere correttamente supportato da tutti i fornitori.
6. Per maggiori informazioni, contattare il locale centro assistenza clienti SAMSUNG.
Contatta SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
In caso di domande o commenti relativi ai prodotti Samsung, contattare il centro assistenza clienti SAMSUNG (Vedere retro di
copertina per maggiori informazioni.)
N Le figure e le illustrazioni presenti in questo Manuale dell’utente sono fornite unicamente a titolo di riferimento e possono
differire da quelle del prodotto attuale. Il design e le specifiche del prodotto possono variare senza preavviso allo scopo di
migliorare costantemente le prestazioni del prodotto.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tutti i diritti riservati.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:50:27 PMItaliano - 3
Italiano
N O T
Simbolo Premere Nota Tasto One-Touch TOOLS
Sommario
Connessione e preparazione del televisore
■ Verifica delle parti ......................................................................4
■ Uso della base a piedistallo.......................................................4
■ Assemblaggio dei cavi...............................................................4
■ Pannello di controllo ..................................................................5
■ Pannello dei collegamenti .........................................................6
■ Telecomando .............................................................................8
■ Installazione delle batterie nel telecomando .............................8
■ Uso dei tasti retroilluminati del telecomando.............................9
■ Accendere e spegnere ..............................................................9
■ Impostare il televisore in modalità Standby...............................9
■ Visualizzazione del display........................................................9
■ Visualizzazione dei menu........................................................10
■ Uso del tasto TOOLS .............................................................10
■ Funzioni Plug & Play ...............................................................10
Controllo dei canali
■ Memorizzazione dei canali .................................................... 11
■ Gestione dei canali..................................................................13
Controllo dell’immagine
■ Modifica delle impostazioni delle immagini .............................15
■ Configurazione del televisore con il PC...................................18
■ Schermo del PC ......................................................................19
Controllo dell’audio
■ Modifica dello standard audio..................................................20
■ Selezione della modalità audio................................................21
Descrizione delle funzioni
■ Impostazione dell’ora ..............................................................22
■ Configurazione del menu Impostazione ..................................23
■ Visione Picture-in-Picture (PIP)...............................................25
Supporto / Ingressi
■ Programmi supportati ..............................................................26
■ Elenco sorgenti / Modifica Nome.............................................27
Rete
■ Connessione di rete ................................................................28
■ Impostazione rete....................................................................30
Media Play
■ Collegamento di un dispositivo USB .......................................33
■ Uso della funzione Media Play ................................................34
■ Ordinamento Photo / Music / Movie List..................................35
■ Photo / Music / Movie List Option Menu..................................36
■ Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play Option Menu................37
■ Visualizzazione di una foto o di una proiezione di diapositive.38
■ Riproduzione di musica ...........................................................39
■ Riproduzione di un filmato .....................................................40
■ Utilizzo del menu Impostazione...............................................41
Media Play-DLNA
■ Impostazione della rete DLNA.................................................42
■ Installazione dell’applicazione DLNA.......................................42
■ Uso dell’applicazion DLNA......................................................43
■ Uso della funzione DLNA ........................................................44
Informazioni su Anynet+
■ Collegamento dei dispositivi Anynet+......................................45
■ Configurazione diAnynet+ .......................................................46
■ Passaggio da un dispositivo Anynet+ all’altro .........................46
■ Registrazione ..........................................................................47
■ Ascolto tramite il ricevitore ......................................................48
■ Risoluzione dei problemi con Anynet+ ...................................48
Content Library
■ Attivazione della modalità Content Library .............................49
■ Uso di Content Library.............................................................50
Internet@TV
■ Guida introduttiva di Internet@TV...........................................51
■ Modificare gli snippet nel dock ................................................53
■ Uso del widget Profile..............................................................53
■ Uso di Yahoo!® Widget Gallery...............................................54
■ Uso di Yahoo!® Weather Widget.............................................54
■ Uso del widget Yahoo!® News ................................................55
■ Uso del widget Yahoo!® Flickr.................................................55
■ Uso del widget Yahoo!® Finance ............................................56
■ Risoluzione dei problemi con internet@TV ............................56
■ Guida Sito web ........................................................................57
Internet@TV
■ Guida introduttiva di Internet@TV...........................................58
■ Configurazione di Internet@TV...............................................58
■ Uso del servizio Internet@TV..................................................59
■ Risoluzione dei problemi di internet@TV ................................60
■ Guida Sito web ........................................................................60
Centro rete dom
■ Centro rete dom ......................................................................61
■ Configurazione di Centro rete dom .........................................62
■ Uso della funzione Messaggio ................................................62
■ Uso della funzione Media ........................................................63
Consigli per l’uso
■ Funzione Teletext ....................................................................64
■ Specifiche del kit di supporto a parete (VESA) .......................65
■ Preparazione per l’installazione del kit di montaggio
a parete ...................................................................................66
■ Come assemblare la base a piedistallo...................................66
■ Fissaggio del televisore alla parete .........................................67
■ Messa in sicurezza della posizione di installazione ................67
■ Risoluzione dei problemi .........................................................68
■ Specifiche................................................................................71
■ Schema blocco........................................................................72
Questo apparecchio è fabbricato in conformità al
D.M.28.08.95 n.548 ed in particolare a quanto specificato nell
Art.2, comma 1. Questo apparecchio è fabbricato nella U.E.
in conformità al D.M.28.08.95 n.548 Art.2, comma 1 ed al
D.M.26.03.92 Art.1
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:50:28 PMItaliano - 4
Assemblaggio dei cavi
Inserire i cavi nel fermacavo in modo che non siano visibili attraverso il piedistallo trasparente.
Uso della base a piedistallo
N In caso di spostamento, il PDP deve essere sorretto da due o più persone. Non
lasciare mai il PDP appoggiato al pavimento in quanto ciò potrebbe danneggiare
lo schermo. Mantenere sempre il PDP in posizione eretta.
N Il PDP è in grado di ruotare di 20 gradi verso destra e verso sinistra.
-20° ~ 20°
Verifica delle parti
Manuale dell'utente Telecomando /
Batterie AAA (2ea)
Cavo di alimentazione Panno per la
pulizia
Ferma cavo Anello di ritenuta
(4ea)
(vedere a pag. 66)
CD del programma
Viti (4ea)
(PS50B650 solo)
(vedere a pag. 66)
Copertura-Fondo
(PS50B650 solo)
(vedere a pag. 66)
Copertura-Fondo / Viti (2ea)
(PS58B680 / PS63B680 solo)
(vedere a pag. 66)
Nucleo in ferrite
per il cavo delle
cuffie
Nucleo in ferrite
per cavo di
alimentazione
(PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680 solo)
Nucleo in ferrite
per cavo di
alimentazione
Scheda di garanzia/
Guida alla sicurezza
(Non disponibile in
tutte le località)
N Nucleo in ferrite
Il nucleo in ferrite viene utilizzato per schermare il cavo dalle interferenze.
Quando si collega un cavo, aprire il nucleo in ferrite e agganciarlo intorno
al cavo vicino alla spina, come mostrato in figura.
Connessione e preparazione del televisore
(PS58B680T6P/
PS63B680 solo)
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:50:30 PMItaliano - 5
Pannello di controllo
N La forma e il colore del prodotto possono variare in base al modello.
Tasti del pannello frontale
Toccare i tasti per attivare le
relative funzioni.
(PS58B680 / PS63B680)
(PS50B650)
1 SOURCE
Alterna tra tutte le sorgenti di ingressi disponibili
(TV, Est1, Est2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI,
HDMI3, HDMI4, USB).
N Nel menu a video, utilizzare questo tasto come si usa il
tasto ENTERE del telecomando.
2 MENU
Premere per visualizzare il menu a video con le funzioni del
televisore.
3 + –
Premere per aumentare o diminuire il volume. Nel menu a
video, utilizzare i tasti + – così come si usano i tasti
◄ e ► del telecomando.
4 CH
Premere per cambiare canale. Nel menu a video, utilizzare
i tasti g CH così come si usano i tasti ▲ e ▼ del
telecomando. E’ possibile usare il tasto g CH per
accendere il televisore senza il telecomando.
5 SPIA DI ACCENSIONE
Lampeggia e si spegne quando l’alimentazione è attiva, si
accende in modalità standby.
6 (POWER)
Premere per accendere e spegnere il televisore.
7 SENSORE DEL TELECOMANDO
Puntare il telecomando in direzione di questo punto sul
televisore.
8 ALTOPARLANTI
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:50:30 PMItaliano - 6
Pannello dei collegamenti
N Nel collegare un sistema audio o video all’apparecchio, accertarsi che tutti gli elementi siano spenti.
N Nel collegare un dispositivo esterno, far combaciare il colore del terminale di collegamento a quello del cavo.
N La forma e il colore del prodotto possono variare in base al modello.
1 LAN
Inserire un cavo LAN in questa porta per effettuare il
collegamento in rete
2 POWER IN
Collegare il cavo di alimentazione.
3 COMPONENT IN
Ingressi Audio (AUDIO L/R) e video (Y / PB / PR) per
Component.
4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC)
Collegare alla porta di uscita video e audio del PC.
5 EXT 1, EXT 2
Ingressi e uscite di dispositivi esterni quali videoregistratori,
DVD, console di gioco o lettori di dischi video.
N In modalità Est, l’uscita DTV supporta solo Video e Audio
SD MPEG.
N In modalità Est, Modalità gioco non è disponibile.
Specifiche Ingressi/Uscite
Connettore
Ingresso Uscita
Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R)
EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔
Solo l’uscita TV o DTV
è disponibile.
EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Uscita da selezionare.
6 HEADPHONE
Collegare delle cuffie per guardare un programma televisivo
senza disturbare altre persone nella stessa stanza.
N L’uso prolungato delle cuffie ad alto volume può causare
danni all’udito.
7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Collegare a un componente audio digitale.
8 SERVICE
Connettore di servizio.
9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)
Collegare segnali audio RCA dal televisore a una sorgente
esterna, come ad esempio un componente audio.
0 ANT IN
Connettore coassiale da 75Ω per rete via antenna/cavo.
! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3
Non è necessario un ulteriore collegamento audio per la
connessione HDMI-HDMI.
- In caso di uso di un cavo di connessione HDMI/DVI è
necessario usare il jack HDMI IN 2(DVI).
N Che cosa significa HDMI?
- High Definition Multimedia Interface permette la
trasmissione di dati video digitali ad alta definizione e
audio digitale multicanale.
- Il terminale HDMI/DVI supporta il collegamento DVI
a una periferica estesa con un cavo appropriato
(non fornito). La differenza tra HDMI e DVI è che il
dispositivo HDMI è di dimensioni più piccole, dispone
della funzione di codifica HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital
Copy Protection) installata, e supporta audio digitale
multicanale.
DVI AUDIO IN
Uscite audio DVI per dispositivi esterni.
Modalità supportate per HDMI/DVI e Component
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O
Component O O O O O O O
TV Pannello posteriore
Televisione via
cavo Rete
o
o
2
3 4 5 7 9 !
0
6 8
1
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:50:33 PMItaliano - 7
1 Alloggiamento COMMON INTERFACE
Inserire una scheda CI(CI+) (Common Interface)
nell’alloggiamento.
(vedere a pag. 23)
- Se per alcuni canali non si inserisce la SCHEDA CI(CI+),
il messaggio Segnale criptato viene visualizzato sullo
schermo.
- Nell’arco di 2~3 minuti vengono visualizzate le
informazioni di pairing che contengono un numero
telefonico, l’ID della SCHEDA CI(CI+), l’ID host e altri dati.
Se viene visualizzato un messaggio di errore, contattare il
fornitore del servizio.
- Una volta completata la configurazione delle informazioni
relative al canale, viene visualizzato il messaggio
Completato aggiornamento, a indicare che l’elenco dei
canali è stato aggiornato.
- A seconda del modello, al reinserimento della scheda CI
potrebbe essere richiesta la password per la funzione
Parental Lock.
- A seconda del modello, anche se la funzione Parental
Lock è impostata su Allow All, potrebbe essere richiesta
la password per la visione di programmi per adulti (dai 18
anni in su).
N Inserire la scheda CI(CI+) nella direzione indicata sulla
scheda stessa.
N La ‘SCHEDA CI (CI+)' non è supportata in alcune nazioni,
regioni e da alcune stazioni emittenti; controllare con il
rivenditore autorizzato di zona.
N La funzione CI+ è applicabile solo al modello PS********P.
In caso di problemi, contattare il fornitore del servizio.
2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2
Collegare un dispositivo MSC USB per visualizzare foto
(JPEG) e riprodurre file audio (MP3) o filmati. E’ possibile
connettersi a una rete SAMSUNG in modalità wireless. Il
jack USB 1 è anche usato come jack per HDD. HDD (Hard
Disk Drive) è un dispositivo che memorizza digitalmente dati
codificati.
3 HDMI IN 4
Collegare a un jack HDMI di un dispositivo con uscita HDMI.
4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)
Ingressi video e audio per dispositivi esterni, come una
telecamera o un videoregistratore.
N La forma e il colore del prodotto possono variare in base al modello.
TV Pannello laterale
3
4
1
2
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:50:34 PMItaliano - 8
Telecomando
Il telecomando è utilizzabile fino a una distanza di 23 metri dal televisore.
N Una illuminazione troppo intensa può avere conseguenze sulle prestazioni del telecomando.
Installazione delle batterie nel telecomando
1. Sollevare il coperchio sul retro del telecomando come mostrato in figura.
2. Inserire due batterie tipo AAA.
N Fare corrispondere i poli ‘+’ e ‘–’ delle batterie con lo schema riportato all’interno
del vano.
3. Chiudere il coperchio.
N Se si prevede di non utilizzare il telecomando per un periodo di tempo prolungato,
rimuovere le batterie e riporle in un luogo asciutto e fresco.
N Se il telecomando non funziona, effettuare il seguente controllo
1. Il televisore è acceso?
2. I poli + e - delle batterie sono invertiti?
3. Le batterie sono esaurite?
4. Si è verificata una interruzione di corrente o il cavo di alimentazione è
scollegato?
5. È presente una luce a fluorescenza speciale o un neon nelle vicinanze?
1 Pulsante POWER
(accende e spegne il televisore).
2 Seleziona direttamente la modalità TV.
3 Tasti numerici per selezionare
direttamente i canali.
4 Premere per passare ai canali
preferiti.
5 Disattivazione temporanea dell’audio.
6 Aumento volume
diminuzione volume
7 Selezione della sorgente disponibile.
8 Consente di vedere le informazioni
sull’emittente corrente.
9 Per selezionare rapidamente le
funzioni più frequentemente utilizzate.
0 Per selezionare le voci dei menu a
schermo e modificarne i valori.
! Questa funzione consente di guardare
Internet@TV.
@ Usare questi tasti in Elenco canali,
Media Play e, ecc Internet@TV.
$ Per visualizzare l’elenco dei canali
sullo schermo.
% Usare questi tasti in Elenco canali,
Media Play e Anynet+.
^ Premere per attivare la
retroilluminazione dei tasti del
telecomando. Questa funzione
consente una migliore visibilità dei tasti
in condizioni di scarsa illuminazione.
(Usando il telecomando con il tasto di
illuminazione dei tasti ON/OFF
( ) impostato su On, si riduce la
durata delle batterie.)
& Canale precedentel.
* Canale successivo
Canale precedente
( Visualizza il menu a video principale.
) Visualizzazione della Guida elettronica
ai programmi (EPG).
a Torna al menu precedente.
b Esce dal menu a video.
c Questa funzione consente di
visualizzare Media Play.
d Questa funzione permette la visione di
Content Library.
e Visualizzazione sottotitoli digitali.
f Selezione descrizione audio (AD).
Funzioni Teletext
2 Esce dalla visualizzazione Teletext (in
base al modello)
7 Selezione della modalità Teletext
(LIST/FLOF)
8 Mostra Teletex
9 Dimensione Teletext
@ Selezione dell’argomento Fastext
# Visualizzazione Teletext/sovrapporre
le informazioni Teletext con la normale
trasmissione
$ Negozio Teletext
& Pagina secondaria Teletext
* P : Pagina successiva Teletext
P : Pagina precedente Teletext
( Indice Teletext
a Mantieni Teletext
b Annulla Teletext
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:50:35 PMItaliano - 9
Uso dei tasti retroilluminati del telecomando
Utilizzare questa funzione in un ambiente poco illuminato o in caso di difficoltà a vedere chiaramente i tasti.
1. Premere il tasto luminoso ON/OFF( )
N In modalità ON, il tasto si retroillumina per un istante.
N Premendo un tasto sul telecomando quando quest’ultimo è ON attiva la retroilluminazione del tasto per un istante.
Accendere e spegnere
Il cavo di rete è collegato sul retro dell’apparecchio.
1. Inserire la spina di alimentazione in una presa idonea.
N La spia di standby si accende sull’apparecchio.
2. Premere il pulsante POWER P sul prodotto.
N E’ possibile accendere il televisore anche premendo il pulsante POWER P o il pulsante TV sul telecomando.
N Verrà visualizzato l’ultimo programma selezionato al precedente spegnimento.
3. Premere i tasti numerici (0~9) o il pulsante canale precedente / successivo (< / >) sul telecomando o < CH> sul televisore.
N Accendendo il televisore la prima volta, verrà richiesto di impostare la lingua con la quale si desidera visualizzare i menu.
4. Per spegnere l’apparecchio, premere nuovamente il pulsante POWER P.
Impostare il televisore in modalità Standby
Per ridurre il consumo energetico è possibile impostare il televisore in modalità standby. La modalità standby può essere utile quando si
desidera interrompere temporaneamente la visione (durante una cena ad esempio).
1. Premere il pulsante POWER P del telecomando.
N Lo schermo viene spento e sull’apparecchio si accende una spia rossa di standby.
2. Per riaccendere il televisore, premere semplicemente POWER P, uno dei tasti numerici (0~9), il pulsante TV o nuovamente il
pulsante canale precedente / successivo (< / >).
N Non lasciare il televisore in modalità standby per lunghi periodi di tempo (partendo per le vacanze ad esempio). E’ consigliabile
scollegare il cavo di alimentazione e il cavo dell’antenna dalle prese a muro.
Visualizzazione del display
Il display identifica il canale corrente e lo stato di determinate impostazioni audio e video.
O Premere il tasto INFO per visualizzare le informazioni.
Premere INFO sul telecomando. Il televisore visualizzerà il canale, il tipo di audio e lo
stato di determinate impostazioni immagine e audio.
• ▲, ▼: E' possibile visualizzare altre informazioni relative al canale. Se si desidera
spostarsi sul canale selezionato, premere ENTERE.
• ◄, ►: E' possibile visualizzare le informazioni del programma desiderato sul canale
corrente.
N Premere nuovamente INFO o attendere 10 secondi finché il display scomparirà
automaticamente.
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information
E Watch
' Information
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:50:36 PMItaliano - 10
Visualizzazione dei menu
1. A televisore acceso, premere il pulsante MENU. Il menu principale viene visualizzato
a schermo. Sul lato sinistro del menu compaiono alcune icone : Immagine, Suono,
Canale , Impostazione, Ingressi, Applicazione, Supporto.
2. Premere il pulsante ▲ o ▼ per selezionare una delle icone. Quindi premere il
pulsante ENTERE per accedere al menu secondario dell’icona.
3. Per uscire, premere EXIT.
N Dopo circa un minuto il menu scompare dallo schermo.
Uso del tasto TOOLS
Il tasto TOOLS può essere usato per selezionare in modo rapido e facile le funzioni usate più frequentemente. Il menu Strumenti varia
in base alla modalità di ingresso esterno visualizzata.
1. Premere il tasto TOOLS. Verrà visualizzato il menu Strumenti.
2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare un menu, quindi premere ENTERE
3. Premere i tasti ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE per visualizzare, cambiare o usare le voci
selezionate. Per una descrizione più dettagliata di ogni funzione vedere la pagina
corrispondente.
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), vedere pag. 46
• Formato immagine, vedere pag. 16
• Modalità immagine, vedere pag. 15
• Modalità audio, vedere pag. 20
• Timer stand-by, vedere pag. 22
• SRS TS HD, vedere pag. 20
• Risp. energia, vedere pag. 24
• Dual l ll, vedere pag. 21
• Aggiungi a Preferiti (o Elimina da Preferiti), vedere pag. 14
• PIP, vedere pag. 25
• Regolazione auto, vedere pag. 18
Funzioni Plug & Play
Se il televisore viene acceso per la prima volta, alcune impostazioni di base vengono visualizzate automaticamente e in sequenza.
N Il salvaschermo si attiva qualora non si prema alcun pulsante sul telecomando per più di 1 minuto durante l’esecuzione di
Plug & Play.
N Il salvaschermo si attiva qualora non via sia alcun segnale operativo per più di 15 minuti.
N Se durante l’impostazione del televisore si seleziona la nazione errata, i caratteri sullo schermo potrebbero essere visualizzati in
modo non corretto.
1. Premere il pulsante POWER del telecomando. Il menu Select the OSD Language.
ENTERE viene automaticamente visualizzato. Selezionare la lingua desiderata
premendo il pulsante ▲ o ▼. PremereENTERE per confermare la scelta.
2. Premere ◄ o ► per selezionare Demo Negozio o Uso dom, quindi
premereENTERE.
N Si consiglia di impostare la modalità TV su Uso dom. per ottenere la migliore
qualità dell’immagine in un ambiente domestico.
N La modalità Demo Negozio è intesa solo per un uso commerciale del prodotto.
N Se l’unità è stata accidentalmente impostata sulla modalità Demo Negozio e si desidera tornare alla modalità Uso dom.
(Standard) : Premere il tasto Volume del televisore. Quando il menu OSD Volume viene visualizzato, tenere premuto il pulsante
MENU del televisore per 5 secondi.
3. Premere tasti ENTERE. Selezionare la nazione desiderata premendo il pulsante ▲ o ▼. Premere ENTERE per confermare la
scelta.
N Dopo aver selezionato il paese nel menu Country, alcuni modelli potrebbero richiedere un'opzione aggiuntiva per
l'impostazione del pin.
N All'inserimento del codice PIN, 0-0-0-0 non è disponibile.
4. Premere ▲ o ▼ per memorizzare i canali della connessione selezionata, quindi premere ENTERE
• Antenna : Segnale antenna via etere.
• Cavo : Segnale antenna via cavo.
Plug & Play
Select the OSD Language.
Language :
U Move E Enter
▲
Nederlands
English
Eesti
▼
Strumenti
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Formato immagine : Automatico
Modalità immagine : Standard
Modalità audio : Personalizza
Timer stand-by : Off
SRS TS HD : Off
Risp. energia : Off
Dual l ll : Mono
Aggiungi a Preferiti
U Sposta E Conf. e Esci
Modalità : Standard
Luce cella : 4
Contrasto : 95
Luminosità : 45
Nitidezza : 50
Colore : 50
Tinta (V/R) : V50/R50
Impostazioni avanzate
Immagine
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:50:37 PMItaliano - 11
5. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare la sorgente Antenna da memorizzare. Premere ENTERE per selezionare Avvio.
• Digitale e Analogico : Canali digitali e analogici.
• Digitale : Canali digitali.
• Analogico : Canali analogici.
N La ricerca dei canali inizia e termina in modo automatico.
N Per una descrizione più dettagliata della selezione della modalità Cavo, vedere a pag. 11.
6. Viene visualizzato il messaggio Imposta modalità Orologio. Premere ENTERE. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Auto, quindi
Premere ENTERE.
N Selezionando Manuale, viene visualizzato Imposta data e orario correnti.
(Per una descrizione più dettagliata dell’opzione Manuale, vedere il capitolo Orario, vedere a pag. 22).
N Ricevendo un segnale digitale, l’orario verrà impostato automaticamente.
7. Viene visualizzata la breve introduzione Ottenere le prestazioni migliori dal nuovo HDTV. Premere ENTERE.
N Questo menu è disponibile Guida per la connessione HD nel menu Supporto.
N E’ possibile passare alla pagina precedente o successiva premendo il tasto ◄ / ►.
8. Viene visualizzato il messaggio Buon divertimento.
N Se si desidera guardare un programma TV, selezionare Guarda TV.
N Premere ENTERE per selezionare Ved Guida prodotto.
Per reimpostare questa funzione...
1. Premere MENU per visualizzare il menu. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Impostazione,
quindi premere ENTERE.
2. Premere nuovamente ENTEREper selezionare Plug & Play.
3. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre. Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è ‘0-0-0-0’.
N Per cambiare il PIN, vedere il capitolo Cambiare il PIN, vedere a pag. 24.
N La funzione Plug & Play è disponibile solo in modalità TV.
Memorizzazione dei canali
❑ Nazione
Canale digitale : Funzione per la modifica del paese per i canali digitali.
Canale analogico : Funzione per la modifica del paese per i canali analogici.
N Comparirà la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il 4 PIN a quattro cifre.
❑ Memorizzazione auto
Esegue la scansione di tutti i canali con stazioni di trasmissione attive (la disponibilità
dipende dalla nazione) e li memorizza nella memoria del televisore.
E’ possibile impostare il televisore per memorizzare i canali della connessione
selezionata.
• Antenna : Segnale antenna via etere.
• Cavo : Segnale antenna via cavo.
E’ possibile selezionare il tipo di antenna da memorizzare.
• Digitale e Analogico : Canali digitali e analogici.
• Digitale : Canali digitali.
• Analogico : Canali analogici.
N Selezionando Cavo,
• Modalità ricerca : Visualizza la modalità di ricerca. (Rapida)
- Network ID : Visualizza il codice di identificazione del network.
- Frequenza : Visualizza la frequenza del canale.
- Modulazione : Visualizza i valori di modulazione disponibili.
- Symbol Rate : Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili.
• Modalità ricerca : Visualizza la modalità di ricerca. (Completa, Rete)
- Frequenza inizio : Visualizza i valori iniziali di frequenza.
- Frequenza fine : Visualizza i valori finali di frequenza.
- Modulazione : Visualizza i valori di modulazione disponibili.
- Symbol Rate : Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili.
N Per interrompere la funzione Memorizzazione auto, premere ENTERE.
Verrà visualizzato il messaggio Interrompere Memorizzazione auto?.
Selezionare Sì premendo ◄ o ►, quindi premere ENTERE.
Controllo dei canali
Canale
Nazione ►
Memorizzazione auto
Memorizzazione manuale
Opzione ricerca via cavo
Guida Completa
Mini Guida
Guida Predefinita : Guida Completa
Elenco canali
Impostazione
Plug & Play ►
Lingua menu : Italiano
Ora
Trasmissione
Sicurezza
Rete
Generale
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:50:37 PMItaliano - 12
❑ Memorizzazione manuale
Esegue la scansione manuale di un canale e lo memorizza nella memoria TV.
Canale digitale (Digitale)
N Canale digitale è disponibile solo in modalità DTV.
• Canale : Impostare il numero del Canale mediante i tasti ▲, ▼ o i tasti numerici (0~9).
• Frequenza : Impostare la frequenza utilizzando i tasti numerici (0~9).
• Larg. di banda : Impostare la Larghezza di banda utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼.
N Al termine, i canali vengono aggiornati nell’elenco dei canali.
Canali analogici
Memorizzazione manuale dei canali analogici.
• Programma (Numero di programma da assegnare a un canale) : Impostare il numero del programma mediante i tasti ▲, ▼ o i
tasti numerici (0~9).
• Sistema colore → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43 : Impostare il sistema colore utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼.
• Sistema audio → BG / DK / I / L : Impostare il sistema audio utilizzando i tasti ▲ o ▼.
• Canale (Quando si conosce il numero del canale da memorizzare) : Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare C (Antenna) o S (Cavo).
Premere ►, quindi▲, ▼ o un tasto numerico (0~9) per selezionare il numero desiderato.
N Se l’audio è anomalo o assente, riselezionare lo standard audio richiesto.
• Ricerca (Quando non si conosce il numero del canale) : Premere il pulsante ▲ o ▼ per avviare la ricerca. Il sintonizzatore
effettua la scansione della gamma di frequenza fino a quando appare il primo canale o il canale selezionato.
• Memorizza (Quando si memorizza il canale e il numero di programma corrispondente) : Impostare su OK premendo
ENTERE.
N Modalità Canale
- C (modalità Antenna) : È possibile selezionare un canale immettendo in questa modalità il numero assegnato a ciascuna
emittente.
- S (Modalità Cavo) : E’ possibile selezionare un canale immettendo in questa modalità il numero assegnato a ciascun canale
via cavo.
❑ Opzione ricerca via cavo
E’ possibile impostare ulteriori opzioni come ad esempio la frequenza e il symbol rate per la ricerca della rete via cavo (in base alla
nazione).
• Frequenza inizio : Visualizza i valori iniziali di frequenza.
• Frequenza arresto : Visualizza i valori finali di frequenza.
• Modulazione : Visualizza i valori di modulazione disponibili.
• Symbol Rate : Visualizza i valori di symbol rate disponibili.
N Se il valore di Frequenza inizio è maggiore del valore Frequenza arresto, verrà visualizzato un messaggio di avviso.
❑ Guida Completa / Mini Guida
Le informazioni EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) sono fornite dall’emittente. Le voci relative ai programmi potrebbero risultare
vuote o non aggiornate, a seconda delle informazioni trasmesse dall’emittente su un determinato canale. La schermata viene
aggiornata automaticamente non appena sono disponibili le nuove informazioni.
• Guida Completa : Visualizza la informazioni sui programmi ordinate in segmenti di un’ora. Sono comprese due ore di
programmi che è possibile scorrere in avanti o indietro.
• Mini Guida : Su ogni riga della Mini Guida del canale corrente sono riportate le informazioni relative a ogni programma
partendo dal programma corrente in avanti in ordine di orario.
❑ Guida Predefinita
Mini Guida / Guida Completa
E’ possibile scegliere se visualizzare la Mini Guida o la Guida Completa premendo il
pulsante GUIDE del telecomando.
O È anche possibile visualizzare il menu della guida semplicemente premendo il
pulsante GUIDE.
Continua...
Canale
Guida Completa
Mini Guida
Guida Predefinita : Guida Completa►
Elenco canali
Mod. Canale : Canali aggiunti
Sintonia fine
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:50:37 PMItaliano - 13
Uso della Guida Completa / Mini Guida
▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►,
ENTER
Selezionare un programma premendo ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE.
ROSSO Alterna tra Guida Completa e Mini Guida.
VERDE Guida Completa : Scorrere velocemente in avanti. (-24 ore).
GIALLO Guida Completa : Scorrere velocemente in avanti. (+24 ore)
BLU Esce dalla guida.
INFO Tasto INFO per ottenere maggiori informazioni.
❑ Modalità Canale
Premendo il tasto P (), si passerà da un canale all’altro all’interno dell’elenco canali selezionato.
Can. Aggiunti : I canali verranno attivati secondo l’elenco canali memorizzato.
Can. Preferiti : I canali verranno attivati secondo l’elenco canali preferiti.
❑ Sintonia fine (solo canali analogici)
Se la ricezione è chiara, non è necessario sintonizzare il canale poiché questa operazione viene effettuata automaticamente
durante le operazioni di ricerca e memorizzazione. Se tuttavia il segnale risulta debole o distorto, può essere necessario
sintonizzare il canale manualmente.
N I canali sintonizzati manualmente e memorizzati sono evidenziati da un asterisco *alla destra del numero del canale nel relativo
riquadro.
N Se la sintonizzazione non viene memorizzata, le regolazioni andranno perse.
N Per reimpostare la sintonizzazione, selezionare Reset premendo ▼, quindi premere ENTERE.
Gestione dei canali
Usando questo menu è possibile aggiungere, eliminare o impostare i canali preferiti e
utilizzarela guida ai programmi per le trasmissioni digitali.
N Selezionare un canale nella schermata Tutti i Canali, Canali aggiunti, Preferiti o
Programmato premendo ▲ o ▼, quindi ENTERE. Ora è possibile guardare il canale
selezionato.
• Tutti i Canali : Mostra tutti i canali attualmente disponibili.
• Canali aggiunti : Mostra tutti i canali aggiunti.
• Preferiti : Mostra tutti i canali Preferiti.
• Programmato : Mostra tutti i canali prenotati.
O Premere il pulsante CH LIST sul telecomando per visualizzare l’elenco canali.
N Usare i tasti colorati nell’elenco canali
- Rosso (Tipo di canale) : Alterna tra TV, Radio, Dati / Altro e Tutti.
- Verde (Zoom) : Ingrandisce o riduce il numero di un canale.
- Giallo (Selezione) : Seleziona più elenchi di canali.
- T TOOLS (Strumenti) : Visualizza i menu Cancella (o Aggiungi), Aggiungi a
Preferiti (o Elimina da Preferiti), Blocco (o Sblocco), Timer per visione, Modifica
nome canale, Modifica numero canale, Ordina, Deseleziona tutto, (Seleziona
tutto), o Memorizzazione auto.
(Il menu Strumenti può essere diverso in base alla situazione).
N Icone sullo stato del canale
A Canale analogico. c Canale selezionato mediante il tasto
giallo.
♥ Canale impostato come preferito ( Programma attualmente trasmesso.
\ A locked channel. ) Programma prenotato
Canale
Mini Guida
Guida Predefinita : Guida Completa
Elenco canali
Mod. Canale : Canali aggiunti
Sintonia fine
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Tutti i Canali
Tutto Tipo canale Zoom Selezione Pagina Strumenti
Guida Completa
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
Dettagli non disponibili.
Oggi 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
900 f tn
901 ITV Play
902 Kerrang!
903 Kiss
903 oneword
▼ 903 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
Nessuna informazione.
Nessuna informazione.
Nessuna informazione.
Freshmen O..
Mini Guida DTV Cable 900 f tn
Street Hypnosis
Booze Britain
2:00
2:30
▼ 5:00
Freshmen On Campus
Guarda Informazioni Pagina Guida Completa Esci
Guarda Informazioni Pagina Mini Guida +24 ore Esci
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:50:39 PMItaliano - 14
❑ Strumenti Elenco canali (in Tutti i Canali / Canali aggiunti / Preferiti)
N Premere il tasto TOOLS per usare il menu Strumenti.
N Gli elementi del menu Strumenti possono differire in base allo stato del canale.
Aggiungi / Cancella
E’ possibile eliminare o aggiungere un canale per visualizzare i canali desiderati.
N Tutti i canali eliminati saranno visibili nel menu Tutti i Canali.
N Se il canale in elenco è evidenziato in grigio, significa che il canale è stato eliminato.
N Il menu Aggiungi viene visualizzato solo per i canali eliminati.
N E’ inoltre possibile eliminare un canale nel menu Canali aggiunti o Preferiti allo
stesso modo.
Aggiungi a Preferiti / Elimina da Preferiti
E’ possibile impostare i canali che si vedono più frequentemente come preferiti.
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile
impostare i canali Preferiti selezionando Strumenti → Aggiungi a Preferiti
(Elimina da Preferiti).
O Per selezionare i canali preferiti impostati, premere il pulsante FAV.CH sul
telecomando.
N Il simbolo "♥" verrà evidenziato e il canale verrà impostato come Preferito.
N Tutti i canali Preferiti saranno visibili nel menu Preferiti.
Blocco / Sblocco
E’ possibile bloccare un canale in modo che non possa essere selezionato e
visualizzato. Questa funzione è disponibile solo quando la funzione Blocco canali è impostata su On. (vedere pag. 24)
N Comparirà la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.
N Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è ‘0-0-0-0’. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Cambia PIN nel menu.
N Verrà visualizzato il simbolo “\“ e il canale verrà bloccato.
Timer per visione
Se si è effettuata la prenotazione di un canale, all’ora stabilita verrà visualizzato il canale prenotato nell’Elenco canali anche durante
la visione di un altro canale. Per prenotare un programma, impostare prima l’orario corrente. (vedere pag. 22)
N E’ possibile prenotare solo i canali memorizzati.
N È possibile impostare il canale, il mese, il giorno, l’anno, l’ora e i minuti premendo direttamente i tasti numerici del telecomando.
N Durante le prenotazione di un programma comparirà il menu Programmato.
N Guida ai programmi digitali e Visualizzazione delle prenotazioni
Selezionando un canale digitale e premendo il tasto ►,comparirà la Guida ai programmi. Per prenotare un programma seguire
le procedure descritte sopra.
Modifica nome canale (solo canali analogici)
I canali possono essere etichettati in modo che il nome compaia quando viene selezionato il canale.
N I nomi dei canali digitali trasmessi vengono automaticamente assegnati e non possono essere modificati.
Modifica numero canale (solo canali digitali)
E’ possibile modificare il numero dei canali premendo i pulsanti numerici sul telecomando.
Ordina (solo canali analogici)
Questa operazione consente di modificare i numeri di programma dei canali memorizzati. Questa operazione è spesso necessaria
dopo la memorizzazione automatica dei canali.
Seleziona tutto / Deseleziona tutto
E’ possibile deselezionare o selezionare tutti i canali contenuti nell’elenco dei canali.
N E’ possibile utilizzare contemporaneamente le funzioni Aggiungi / Cancella, Aggiungi a Preferiti / Elimina da Preferiti, o Blocco
/ Sblocco per più canali alla volta. Selezionare i canali desiderati e premere il tasto giallo per impostare tutti i canali selezionati
contemporaneamente.
N Il simbolo c compare a sinistra dei canali selezionati.
N E’ possibile selezionare Deseleziona tutto solo quando è stato selezionato almeno un canale.
Memorizzazione auto
N Per maggiori dettagli sull’impostazione delle opzioni, vedere a pag. 11.
N Se un canale è stato bloccato mediante le funzione Blocco canali, comparirà la schermata di inserimento del PIN.
❑ Strumenti Elenco canali (in Programmato)
E’ possibile visualizzare, modificare o annullare una prenotazione.
N Premere il tasto TOOLS per usare il menu Strumenti.
• Modifica info : Selezionare questa funzione per modificare una prenotazione.
• Annulla Programmazioni : Selezionare questa funzione per annullare una
prenotazione.
• Informazioni : Selezionare questa funzione per visualizzare una prenotazione
(E’ inoltre possibile modificare le informazioni relative alla prenotazione.)
• Seleziona tutto / Deseleziona tutto : Seleziona o deseleziona tutti i programmi
prenotati
Programmato
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer
Modifica info
Annulla Program
Informazioni
Seleziona tutto
Antenna Zoom Selezione Strumenti Informazioni
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Tutti i Canali
Tutto Tipo canale Zoom Selezione Pagina Strumenti
Cancella
Aggiungi a Preferiti
Blocco
Timer visione
Modifica nome canale
Ordina
▼
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:50:39 PMItaliano - 15
Modifica delle impostazioni delle immagini
❑ Modalità
È possibile selezionare il tipo di immagine che più corrisponde alle proprie preferenze.
Dinamica / Standard / Eco / Film
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ anche possibile
impostare la modalità dell’immagine selezionando Strumenti → Modalità
immagine.
❑ Luce cella / Contrasto / Luminosità / Nitidezza / Colore / Tinta (V/R)
Il televisore ha diverse opzioni di impostazione che permettono il controllo della qualità
dell’immagine.
• Luce cella : Regola la luminosità dei pixel.
• Contrasto : Regola il livello di contrasto dell’immagine.
• Luminosità : Regola il livello di luminosità dell’immagine.
• Nitidezza : Regola la definizione dei bordi dell’immagine.
• Colore : Regola la saturazione dei colori dell’immagine.
• Tinta (V/R) : Regola la tonalità delle tinte dell’immagine.
N Modificando Luce cella, Contrasto, Luminosità, Nitidezza, Colore o Tinta (V/R),
l’OSD verrà regolato di conseguenza.
N Per ogni modalità dell’immagine vengono memorizzati i valori modificati.
N In modalità TV, Est., AV analogica del sistema PAL, non è possibile utilizzare la funzione Tinta.
N In modalità PC, è possibile modificare solo i parametri Luce cella, Contrasto e Luminosità.
N Ogni impostazione regolata viene memorizzata separatamente in base alla sua modalità di ingresso.
N E’ possibile ridurre significativamente il consumo di energia, e i costi ad esso associati, diminuendo la luminosità dello schermo.
❑ Impostazioni avanzate
E’ possibile regolare le impostazioni avanzate dello schermo compresi il colore e il
contrasto.
N Impostazioni avanzate è disponibile in modalità Standard o Film.
N In modalità PC, è possibile modificare solo i parametri Contrasto dinamico,
Gamma Bilan bianco tra le opzioni della voce Impostazioni avanzate.
Tonalità nero → Off / Scuro / Più scura / Extra scura
E’ possibile migliorare la profondità dell’immagine regolando la densità del colore nero.
Contrasto dinamico → Off / Basso / Medio / Alta
E’ possibile regolare il contrasto dello schermo in modo da avere un contrasto ottimale.
Gamma
Consente di regolare l’intensità dei colori primari (rosso, verde, blu).
Spazio colore
Spazio colore è una matrice di colori composta dai colori rosso, verde e blu. Per scoprire lo straordinario mondo dei colori naturali
basta selezionare lo spazio colore preferito.
• Auto : Imposta automaticamente la gamma dei colori in base alla sorgente video di ingresso.
• Nativa : Imposta una gamma dei colori più ampia di quella della sorgente video di ingresso.
• Personalizza : Regola la gamma colore per adattarla alle proprie preferenze.
N Personalizzazione dello Spazio colore
- Regola la gamma colore per adattarla alle proprie preferenze. La funzione Colore è disponibile quando l’opzione Spazio
colore è impostata su Personalizza.
- Colore → Rosso / Verde / Blu / Giallo / Ciano / Magenta
- Rosso / Verde / Blu : Nella funzione Colore, è possibile regolare i valori RGB per il colore selezionato.
- Reset : Ripristina le impostazioni dello spazio colore ai valori predefiniti.
Controllo dell’immagine
Continua...
Modalità : Standard ►
Luce cella : 4
Contrast : 95
Luminosità : 45
Nitidezza : 50
Colore : 50
Tint (V/R) : V50/R50
Impostazioni avanzate
Immagine
Colore : 50
Tint (V/R) : V50/R50
Impostazioni avanzate ►
Opzioni immagine
Reset immagine
Immagine
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:50:40 PMItaliano - 16
Bilan bianco
Consente di regolare la temperatura del colore per ottenere immagini più naturali.
• R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain : Una volta modificato il valore, lo schermo viene automaticamente
regolato di conseguenza.
• Reset : Ripristina il bilanciamento predefinito del bianco.
Incarnato
E’ possibile regolare l’incarnato in modo da essere più o meno intenso.
N Una volta modificato il valore, lo schermo viene automaticamente regolato di conseguenza.
Migliora imm bordi → Off / On
E’ possibile enfatizzare i contorni degli oggetti della figura.
xvYCC → Off / On
Impostando la modalità xvYCC su On, si noterà un miglioramento nei dettagli e nel colore durante la visione di un film riprodotto da
un dispositivo esterno (per es. un lettore DVD).
N xvYCC è disponibile quando la modalità dell’immagine è impostata su Film,
e l’ingresso esterno è impostato su HDMI o Component.
N Questa funzione potrebbe non essere supportata dal dispositivo esterno in uso.
❑ Opzioni immagine
E’ possibile personalizzare altre impostazioni delle immagini in base alle proprie
preferenze.
N In modalità PC, è possibile modificare solo Toni colore, Dimensione e Protezione
bruciature tra le opzioni della voce Opzioni immagine.
Toni colore → Freddo / Normale / Caldo1 / Caldo2 / Caldo3
E’ possibile selezionare la tonalità dei colori più confortevole per la propria vista.
N Le regolazioni vengono memorizzate in base alla modalità Immagine selezionata.
N Caldo1, Caldo2 o Caldo3 vengono attivate solo quando la modalità Immagine è
Film.
Dimensione → Automatico / 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Adatta allo
schermo
E’ possibile selezionare la dimensione dell’immagine che più si adatta alle proprie preferenze.
• Automatico : Imposta l’immagine in formato Auto Wide.
• 16:9 : Regola la dimensione dell’immagine a 16:9, un valore appropriato per visualizzare DVD o trasmissioni panoramiche.
• Wide Zoom : Aumenta le dimensioni dell’immagine a più di 4:3.
• Zoom : Ingrandisce il formato 16:9 (in senso verticale) per adattarlo alle dimensioni dello schermo.
• 4:3 : Questa è l’impostazione predefinita per un filmato video o una trasmissione normale.
• Adatta allo schermo : Visualizza il segnale nativo pieno in HD non visualizzabile mediante un normale televisore.
N A seconda del tipo di sorgente di ingresso, le opzioni relative alla dimensione dell’immagine possono variare.
N Le voci disponibili variano in base alla modalità selezionata.
N In modalità PC, è possibile regolare solo i formati 16:9 e 4:3.
N Se la modalità PIP è stata impostata su Double ( , ) la dimensione dell’immagine non potrà essere impostata.
N Le impostazioni possono essere regolate e memorizzate per ogni dispositivo esterno connesso a un ingresso TV.
N Se si visualizza una immagine fissa per oltre due ore, sullo schermo potrebbe apparire una immagine residua temporanea.
N Wide Zoom : Premere ► per selezionare Posizione, quindi premere ENTERE.
Per spostare l’immagine in alto o in basso, premere ▲ o ▼. Quindi premere ENTERE.
N Zoom : Premere ► per selezionare Posizione, quindi premere ENTERE. Per spostare l’immagine in alto o in basso,
premere ▲ o ▼Quindi premere ENTERE. Premere ► per selezionare Dimensione, quindi premere ENTERE.
Premere ▲ o ▼ per aumentare o ridurre la dimensione dell’immagine in direzione verticale. Quindi premere ENTERE.
N Dopo aver selezionato l’opzione Adatta allo schermo in modalità HDMI (1080i / 1080p) o Component (1080i / 1080p) :
Selezionare Posizione premendo ◄ o ►. Premere .
N Reset : Premere ◄ o ► per selezionare Reset, quindi premere ENTERE.
E’ possibile azzerare l’impostazione.
N Usando la funzione Adatta allo schermo con un ingresso HDMI 720p, 1 riga verrà tagliata in alto, in basso, a sinistra e a
destra come nella funzione di overscan.
Mod schermo → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3
Impostando la dimensione dell’immagine su Automatico su un televisore 16:9,
è possibile determinare la dimensione dell’immagine da visualizzare in modo 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) o nessuna.
Ogni nazione europea richiede un formato dell’immagine diverso e questa funzione deve essere quindi selezionata dall’utente.
N Questa funzione è disponibile in modalità Automatico.
N Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità PC, Component o HDMI.
Continua...
Tinta (V/R) : V50/R50
Impostazioni avanzate
Opzioni immagine ►
Reset immagine
Immagine
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:50:40 PMItaliano - 17
Digital NR → Off / Bassa / Media / Alta / Auto
Se il segnale trasmesso dall’emittente ricevuto dal vostro televisore è debole, è possibile attivare la funzione Digital Noise
Reduction per facilitare la riduzione di qualsiasi effetto di ghosting statico che possa comparire sullo schermo.
N Se il segnale è debole, selezionare una delle altre opzioni disponibili fino a ottenere la migliore qualità visiva.
Livello di nero HDMI → Normale / Basso
E’ possibile selezionare direttamente il livello di nero sullo schermo per regolare la profondità delle immagini.
N Questa funzione si attiva solo quando l’ingresso esterno è collegato a HDMI
(segnali RGB).
Demo 1080 Full HD Motion → Off / On
La nuova generazione di pannelli PDP Samsung offre una straordinaria nitidezza delle immagini in movimento in Full HD durante la
visione di programmi sportivi, film e giochi.
N Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità PC, Giochi o Media Play.
Modalità Film
E’ possibile ottimizzare la modalità della immagini per la visione di film.
• Off : Disattiva la funzione Modalità Film.
• Auto1 : Regola automaticamente l’immagine alla migliore qualità possibile per la visione di un film.
• Auto2 : Ottimizza automaticamente il testo del video durante la visione di un film.
• Cinema Smooth : Offre la più straordinaria esperienza da cinema.
N La modalità Film è supportata in modalità TV, Video, Component (480i / 1080i) e HDMI (1080i).
Demo a 100Hz reali → Off / On
E’ possibile ottenere una chiara distinzione tra reali 100Hz e 50Hz, specialmente quando si guardano scene in movimento. Perciò,
quando si visualizzano scene caratterizzate da movimenti lenti, non è possibile distinguere tra reali 100Hz e 50Hz.Demo 100Hz
funziona solo con segnale a 50Hz. Real 100Hz demo è disponibile per dimostrazioni presso il punto vendita con immagini speciali.
Modalità Solo blu → Off / On
Questa funzione è riservata agli utenti esperti nella misurazione del dispositivo AV. Questa funzione visualizza solo il segnale blu
escludendo i segnali rosso e verde dal segnale video in modo da fornire un effetto Filtro Blu usato per regolare il colore e la tinta
delle apparecchiature video come lettori DVD, Home Theater, ecc.
N Modalità Solo blu è disponibile solo quando la modalità immagine è impostata su Film o Standard.
Protezione bruciatura schermo
Per ridurre l’eventualità di una bruciatura dello schermo, questo prodotto è dotato di una tecnologia per la prevenzione di bruciature
dello schermo. Questa tecnologia consente di impostare il movimento alto/basso (verticale) e sinistra/destra (orizzontale).
L’impostazione Ora permette di impostare i minuti dell’intervallo di spostamento da una immagine all’altra.
• Spostamento pixel : Mediante questa funzione è possibile spostare i pixel sul PDP in orizzontale o verticale, allo scopo di
ridurre al minimo la possibilità che permanga una immagine residua sullo schermo.
N Condizione ottimale per lo spostamento dei pixel
Voce TV/Ext/AV/Component/HDMI PC
Orizzontale 0~2 2
Verticale 0~4 4
Ora (minuti) 1~4 min 2 min
N Il valore della funzione Spostamento pixel può variare in base alle dimensioni del monitor (in pollici) e alla modalità.
N Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità Adatta allo schermo.
• Scorrimento : Questa funzione aiuta a eliminare l’immagine residua sullo schermo muovendo tutti i pixel del PDP secondo uno
schema prestabilito. Usare questa funzione quando si notano immagini residue o simboli residui sullo schermo, in particolare
dopo una visualizzazione prolungata di una immagine fissa sullo schermo.
• Lato grigio : Durante la visione del televisore con un formato 4:3, si prevengono eventuali danni allo schermo regolando il
bilanciamento del bianco su entrambe le estremità sinistra e destra.
- Chiaro : Impostando il formato dello schermo su 4:3, schiarisce le bande sinistra e destra.
- Scuro : Impostando il formato dello schermo su 4:3, scurisce le bande sinistra e destra.
Continua...
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:50:40 PMItaliano - 18
Configurazione del televisore con il PC
N Preimpostazione : Premere il tasto SOURCE per selezionare la modalità PC.
❑ Regolazione auto
La regolazione automatica consente allo schermo del PC di adattarsi automaticamente
al segnale video PC in ingresso. I valori delle opzioni Fine, Grossa e Posizione vengono
regolati automaticamente.
N Questa funzione non è disponibile in modalità DVI-HDMI.
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile
impostare Regolazione auto selezionando Strumenti → Regolazione auto.
❑ Schermo
Lo scopo della regolazione della qualità dell’immagine è quello di eliminare o ridurre eventuali disturbi di visualizzazione. Se non si
riesce a eliminare il disturbo cambiando sintonizzazione, regolare la frequenza nel modo migliore possibile (Grossa) ed eseguire
nuovamente la sintonizzazione fine. Una volta ridotto il disturbo, regolare l’immagine in modo che sia perfettamente centrata sullo
schermo.
Grossa
Regola la frequenza in caso di comparsa di disturbi verticali sullo schermo.
Fine
Regola lo schermo in modo da essere più nitido.
Posizione PC
Regola la posizione dello schermo del PC se non si adatta allo schermo del televisore.
Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per regolare la posizione verticale. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per regolare la posizione orizzontale.
Reset immagine
È possibile sostituire tutte le impostazioni dell’immagine ripristinando i valori di fabbrica.
❑ Reset immagine → Azzera modalità immagine / Cancella
Ripristina tutte le impostazioni delle immagini ai valori predefiniti.
N Seleziona una modalità dell’immagine da regolare. La funzione Reset viene eseguita
per ogni modalità dell’immagine.
Luminosità : 45
Nitidezza : 50
Regolazione auto ►
Schermo
Impostazioni avanzate
Opzioni immagine
Reset immagine
Immagine Picture
Impostazioni avanzate
Opzioni immagine
Reset immagine ►
Immagine
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:50:41 PMItaliano - 19
Schermo del PC
❑ Impostazione del software del PC (basato su Windows XP)
Di seguito vengono illustrate le impostazioni di visualizzazione di Windows per un
PC tipico. Le schermate visualizzate sul PC possono differire in base alla versione di
Windows e alla scheda video installate. Nel caso le schermate risultassero differenti,
le stesse informazioni di base per la configurazione sono applicabili in quasi tutti
i casi (in caso contrario, contattare la casa costruttrice del computer oppure un
rivenditore Samsung).
1. Fare clic su ‘Pannello di controllo’ nel menu Start di Windows.
2. Alla comparsa della finestra del pannello di controllo, cliccare su ‘Aspetto e temi’.
Verrà visualizzata una finestra di dialogo.
3. Alla comparsa della finestra del pannello di controllo, cliccare su ‘Schermo’. Verrà
visualizzata una finestra di dialogo.
4. Selezionare la scheda ‘Impostazioni’ nella finestra di dialogo.
La corretta impostazione delle dimensioni (risoluzione)
Ottimale : 1920 X 1080 pixel
Se la finestra di dialogo delle impostazioni contiene un’opzione relativa alla
frequenza verticale, il valore corretto è ‘60’ o ‘60 Hz’. In caso contrario, cliccare su
‘OK’ e uscire dalla finestra di dialogo.
❑ Modalità di visualizzazione
La posizione e la dimensione dello schermo variano in base al tipo di schermo del PC e alla relativa risoluzione.
Si consigliano le risoluzioni riportate in tabella.
N In caso di uso di un cavo di connessione HDMI/DVI è necessario usare la presa HDMI IN 2 (DVI).
N La modalità interlacciata non è supportata.
N Questo dispositivo potrebbe non funzionare correttamente se si seleziona un formato video non standard.
N Le modalità Separata e Composito sono supportate. Il formato SOG non è supportato.
N Se il cavo VGA è di scarsa qualità o troppo lungo, in alta risoluzione (1920x1080) le immagini possono risultare disturbate.
Ingresso D-Sub e HDMI/DVI
Modalità Risoluzione
Frequenza
orizzontale (kHz)
Frequenza
verticale (Hz)
Frequenza
pixel clock (MHz))
Polarità sync
(O / V)
IBM
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / -
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / +
MAC
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / -
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / -
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / +
VESA CVT
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / +
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / +
1280 x 720
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / +
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / +
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / +
VESA DMT
640 x 480
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / -
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / -
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / -
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / +
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / +
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / +
1024 x 768
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / -
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / -
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / +
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 800
49.702 59.810 83.500 - / +
62.795 74.934 106.500 - / +
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 1024
63.981 60.020 108.000 + / +
79.976 75.025 135.000 + / +
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / +
1440 x 900
55.935 59.887 106.500 - / +
70.635 74.984 136.750 - / +
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / +
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / +
VESA GTF
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / +
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / -
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:50:41 PMItaliano - 20
Modifica dello standard audio
❑ Modalità
È possibile selezionare il tipo di effetto audio da utilizzare durante la visione di una
trasmissione.
Standard / Musica / Film / Voce cristallina / Personalizza
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile
impostare la modalità audio selezionando Strumenti → Modalità Suono.
❑ Equalizzatore
Le impostazioni audio possono essere regolate in base alle proprie preferenze.
• Modalità : E’ possibile selezionare una modalità audio per soddisfare le proprie
preferenze.
• Bilanciamento : Controlla il bilanciamento degli altoparlanti sinistro e destro.
• 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Regolazione larghezza di banda) : Regolare il livello delle diverse frequenze di larghezza di
banda.
• Reset : Ripristina le impostazione predefinite dell’equalizzatore.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On
SRS TruSurround HD è la tecnologia combinata di TruSurround e FOCUS, TruBass.
SRS TruSurround HD permette di godere di un effetto audio virtuale 5.1 Surround attraverso i due altoparlanti del televisore.
Questa funzione non solo fornisce suoni bassi e ricchi ma migliora anche i toni alti.
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti.
E’ possibile impostare la funzione SRS TruSurround HD selezionando
Strumenti → SRS TS HD.
TruSurround HD, SRS e il simbolo sono marchi di SRS Labs, Inc.
La tecnologiaTruSurround HD è utilizzata su licenza di SRS Labs, Inc.
N Se durante la riproduzione di musica sul televisore l’audio è anomalo, regolare l’equalizzatore e SRS TruSurround HD
(Off/On).
❑ Lingua audio (solo canali digitali)
E’ possibile cambiare il valore predefinito della lingua audio. Visualizza le informazioni sulla lingua relative alla trasmissione in
corso.
N E’ possibile selezionare solo una delle lingue trasmesse.
❑ Formato audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (solo canali digitali)
Quando l’audio è generato sia dall’altoparlante principale sia dal ricevitore audio, potrebbe prodursi un effetto eco a causa della
diversa velocità di decodifica dei due dispositivi. In questo caso, attivare la funzione Altoparlante TV.
N E’ possibile selezionare solo una delle lingue trasmesse.
Prodotto su licenza di Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby e il simbolo della doppia D sono marchi registrati di Dolby Laboratories.
❑ Descrizione audio (solo canali digitali)
Questa funzione audio ausiliaria fornisce una traccia audio aggiuntiva per aiutare le persone con problemi visivi. Questa funzione
gestisce il flusso audio per la AD (Descrizione audio), quando viene inviato insieme all’audio Principale dall’emittente. Gli utenti
possono attivare o disattivare la Descrizione audio e regolare il volume.
O È possibile selezionare queste opzioni semplicemente premendo il tasto AD sul
telecomando.
Descrizione audio → Off / On
Attiva e disattiva la funzione di descrizione audio.
Volume
Regola il volume della descrizione audio.
N Volume è attivo quando la funzione Descrizione audio è impostata su On.
Controllo dell’audio
Modalità : Personalizza ►
Equalizzatore
SRS TruSurround HD : Off
Lingua audio : ----
Formato audio : ----
Descrizione audio
Volume auto : Off
Seleziona altoparlante : Altoparlante TV
Suono
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:50:42 PMItaliano - 21
❑ Volume auto → Off / On
Le condizioni del segnale variano a seconda dell’emittente, ma non è pratico regolare il volume ogni volta che si cambia canale.
Questa funzione consente di regolare automaticamente il volume del canale desiderato diminuendo il livello dell’uscita audio
quando il segnale di modulazione è alto, oppure aumentando il livello dell’uscita audio quando il segnale di modulazione è basso.
❑ Seleziona altoparlante → Altoparlante est / Altoparlante TV
Se si desidera ascoltare l’audio attraverso altoparlanti separati, annullare l’amplificatore interno.
N I tasti – +, M MUTE non sono attivi quando Seleziona altoparlante è impostato su Altoparlante est.
N Selezionando Altoparlante est nel menu Seleziona altoparlante, le impostazioni dell’audio saranno limitate.
Altoparlanti interni del
televisore
DA Audio Out (Ottica, L / R Out) a sistema audio
TV / Ext. (Est) / AV /
Component / PC / HDMI
TV / Ext. (Est) / AV /
Component / PC / HDMI
Altoparlante TV Uscita altoparlanti Uscita audio
Altoparlanti
esterni
Mute Uscita audio
Nessun segnale video Mute Mute
❑ Selezione audio
Durante l’uso della funzione PIP, è possibile ascoltare l’audio dell’immagine secondaria (PIP).
• Principale : Consente di ascoltare l’audio dell’immagine principale.
• Secondario : Consente di ascoltare l’audio dell’immagine secondaria.
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile
impostare l’audio dell’immagine secondaria selezionando Strumenti → PIP →
Selezione audio.
N E’ possibile selezionare questa opzione solo quando la funzione PIP è On.
❑ Reset impostazioni audio
Azzera tutto / Azz mod audio / Cancella : E’ possibile ripristinare le impostazioni
audio ai valori preimpostati in fabbrica.
Selezione della modalità audio
Quando si imposta la modalità Dual I II, la modalità audio corrente viene visualizzata sullo schermo.
Tipo di trasmissione Indicazioni a schermo
NICAM
Stereo
Trasmissione regolare
(Audio standard)
Mono (uso normale)
Regolare + NICAM Mono NICAM
Mono
(Normale)
NICAM-Stereo
NICAM
Stereo
Mono
(Normale)
NICAM Dual-I/II
NICAM
Dual-1
NICAM
Dual-2
Mono
(Normale)
A2
Stereo
Trasmissione regolare
(Audio standard)
Mono (uso normale)
Trasmissione regolare Dual I Dual II
Bilingue o DUAL-I/II Stereo
Mono
(Mono forzato)
N Se il segnale stereo è debole e si verifica un cambio automatico, passare alla modalità Mono.
N Questa funzione è attiva solo con un segnale audio stereo. Al contrario, non è attiva con un segnale audio mono.
N Questa funzione è disponibile solo in modalità TV.
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizza.re il menu Strumenti.
E’ inoltre possibile impostare la modalità audio selezionando Strumenti → Dual
l ll.
Seleziona altoparlante : Altoparlante TV
Selezione audio : Principale
Reset impostazioni audio ►
Suono
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:50:42 PMItaliano - 22
Descrizione delle funzioni
Impostazione dell’ora
❑ Orologio
L’impostazione dell’orologio è necessaria per utilizzare le varie funzioni timer del
televisore.
N L’ora corrente appare ogni qualvolta si preme il tasto INFO.
N Se il cavo di alimentazione viene scollegato,
è necessario impostare nuovamente l’orologio.
Modalità orologio
E’ possibile impostare manualmente o automaticamente l’orario corrente.
• Auto : Imposta automaticamente l’orario corrente utilizzando l’orario inviato dalla
trasmissione digitale.
• Manuale : Imposta manualmente l’ora corrente.
Imposta Ora
È possibile impostare manualmente l’ora corrente.
N Configurare questa voce una volta impostata la funzione Modalità orologio su
Manuale.
N E’ possibile impostare i valori Giorno, Mese, Anno, Ora, Minuto direttamente
premendo i tasti numerici del telecomando.
❑ Timer stand-by → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
Il timer di stand-by disattiva automaticamente il televisore dopo il tempo impostato
(30, 60, 90, 120, 150 e 180 minuti).
N Quando il timer raggiunge lo 0, il televisore passa automaticamente in modalità Standby.
N Per annullare la funzione Timer stand-by selezionare Off.
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile
impostare il timer stand-by selezionando Strumenti → Timer stand-by.
❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
E’ possibile impostare il televisore in modo da accendersi all’orario desiderato.
• Orario TV on : Imposta il timer per l’accensione automatica del televisore.
• Orario TV off : Imposta il timer per lo spegnimento automatico del televisore.
• Volume : Seleziona il livello del volume.
• Sorgente : Seleziona il dispositivo TV, USB.
N Selezionando TV, è poi possibile impostare l’Antenna e il Canale.
- Antenna : Seleziona Antenna o Cavo.
- Canale : Seleziona il canale desiderato.
N Selezionando USB è possibile impostare i Contenuti.
- Contenuti : Seleziona i contenuti desiderati da USB.
N Se sulla chiavetta USB non sono presenti file musicali, oppure la cartella contenente file musicali non è selezionata,
l’opzione Timer non funziona correttamente.
• Ripetizione : Selezionare Una volta, Ogni gg, Lun~Ven, Lun~Sab, Sab~Dom o Manuale.
N Quando viene selezionato Manuale, premere il tasto ► per impostare il giorno della settimana. Premere ENTERE sul giorno
desiderato per visualizzare un simbolo c.
N L’intera cartella del dispositivo USB supporta i caratteri English 64.
N E’ necessario prima impostare l’orologio.
N È possibile impostare l’ora, i minuti e il canale anche premendo i tasti numerici del telecomando.
N Auto Power Off
Quando il televisore si accende attraverso il timer impostato su On, si spegne automaticamente se per tre ore non viene premuto
alcun tasto di controllo. Questa funzione è disponibile solo se il timer è impostato su On e impedisce l’eventuale surriscaldamento
del televisore dovuto a un periodo di accensione troppo lungo.
Ora
Orologio : -- : -- ►
Timer stand-by : Off
Timer 1 : Disattivato
Timer 2 : Disattivato
Timer 3 : Disattivato
U Sposta E Conf. R Ritorno
Impostazione
Plug & Play
Lingua menu : Italiano
Ora ►
Trasmissione
Sicurezza
Rete
Generale
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:50:43 PMItaliano - 23
Configurazione del menu Impostazione
❑ Lingua menu
E’ possibile impostare la lingua dei menu.
❑ Trasmissione
Sottotitoli
È possibile attivare e disattivare i sottotitoli. Utilizzare questo menu per impostare la
modalità sottotitoli. Normale al di sotto del menu rappresenta il sottotitolo di base
mentre Non udenti è il sottotitolo per le persone con problemi uditivi.
• Sottotitolo → Off / On : Attiva e disattiva i sottotitoli.
• Modalità → Normale / Non udenti : Imposta la modalità dei sottotitoli.
• Lingua sottotitoli : Imposta la lingua dei sottotitoli.
N Se il programma che si sta guardando non supporta la funzione Non udenti, si
attiva automaticamente l’opzione Normale, anche se è selezionata la modalità
Non udenti.
N L’inglese è la lingua predefinita nel caso in cui la trasmissione non supporti la
lingua selezionata.
O È possibile selezionare queste opzioni semplicemente premendo il tasto SUBT.
sul telecomando.
Testo digitale → Disattiva / Attiva
Se il programma è trasmesso con testo digitale, questa funzione è attivata.
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Standard internazionale per i sistemi di codifica dei dati usati nei multimedia e hypermedia.
È un sistema più complesso rispetto al formato MPEG in quanto include collegamenti a dati ipermediali come immagini fisse,
servizi di caratteri, animazione, grafica e file video, oltre ai dati multimediali. MHEG è una tecnologia interattiva con vari campi di
applicazione, come sistemi VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV),
EC (Electronic Commerce), teleformazione, teleconferenza, librerie digitali e giochi di rete.
Lingua Teletext
E’ possibile impostare la lingua del Teletext selezionando il tipo di lingua.
N L’inglese è la lingua predefinita nel caso in cui la trasmissione non supporti la lingua selezionata.
Preferenze
• Lingua principale audio / Lingua secondaria audio / Lingua principale sottotitoli / Lingua secondaria sottotitoli / Lingua
principale Teletext / Lingua secondaria Teletext
Mediante questa funzione gli utenti possono selezionare una delle lingue disponibili. La lingua selezionata viene impostata
automaticamente durante la selezione di un canale.
Modificando l’impostazione della lingua, le opzioni Lingua sottotitoli, Lingua audio e Lingua Teletext del menu Lingua vengono
automaticamente impostate sulla lingua selezionata.
Le opzioni Lingua sottotitoli, Lingua audio, e Lingua Teletext del menu Lingua mostrano l’elenco delle lingue supportate dal
canale corrente, dove l’opzione corrente appare evidenziata. Se si modifica una di queste opzioni, la nuova lingua viene
applicata solo al canale corrente. La nuova impostazione non viene invece applicata alle opzioni Lingua principale sottotitoli,
Lingua principale audio o Lingua principale Teletext del menu Preferenze.
Common Interface
• Installazione della scheda CI(CI+)
1. Acquistare il modulo CI(CI+) CAM presso il rivenditore locale più vicino o via
telefono.
2. Inserire la scheda CI(CI+) CARD nel CAM nella direzione indicata dalla freccia.
3. Inserire il CAM con la scheda CI(CI+) CARD installata nello slot common
interface.
N Inserire completamente il CAM nella direzione indicata dalla freccia in modo che
risulti parallelo allo slot.
4. Verificare la visione dell’immagine su un canale a segnale criptato.
• Menu CI(CI+)
Permette all’utente di accedere al menu del modulo CAM.
Selezionare il Menu CI(CI+) in base alla scheda PC.
• Info sull’applicazione
Contiene informazioni sul modulo CAM inserito nello slot CI(CI+) e le visualizza.
Le informazioni sull’applicazione sono relative alla scheda CI(CI+) CARD. È possibile installare il modulo CAM in qualsiasi
momento, a televisore acceso o spento.
N La ‘SCHEDA CI (CI+)' non è supportata in alcune nazioni, regioni e da alcune stazioni emittenti; controllare con il rivenditore
autorizzato di zona.
Continua...
Impostazione
Plug & Play
Lingua menu : English ►
Ora
Trasmissione
Sicurezza
Rete
Generale
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:50:43 PMItaliano - 24
❑ Sicurezza
N Alcuni modelli richiedono la selezione del PIN impostato per la funzione Plug & Play.
Blocco canali → Off / On
Tramite questa funzione è possibile impedire agli utenti non autorizzati, ad esempio i bambini, di guardare programmi non adatti a
loro, annullando il video e azzerando l’audio.
N Prima della comparsa dell’immagine, compare la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.
N Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è ‘0-0-0-0’. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Cambia PIN nel menu.
N E’ possibile bloccare alcuni canali nell’elenco dei canali. (vedere a pag. 14)
N Blocco canali è disponibile solo in modalità TV.
Blocco canale
Questa funzione consente di immettere un codice PIN (Personal Identification Number) di identificazione personale a 4 cifre definito
dall’utente per impedire agli utenti non autorizzati, come ad esempio i bambini, di vedere programmi non adatti a loro.
N La voce Grado Blocco Canale può essere diversa in base al paese.
N Prima della comparsa dell’immagine, compare la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre.
N Il PIN predefinito di un nuovo apparecchio TV è ‘0-0-0-0’. E’ possibile modificare il PIN selezionando Cambia PIN nel menu.
N Una volta impostata la classificazione dei programmi, verrà visualizzato il simbolo “\”.
N Cons tutto / Bloc tutto : Premere per sbloccare o bloccare tutte le classificazioni dei canali TV.
Cambia PIN
E’ possibile modificare il numero ID necessario per configurare il televisore.
N Prima della comparsa dell’immagine, compare la richiesta del PIN. Digitare il PIN a quattro cifre. (Il PIN predefinito è: ‘0-0-0-0’).
N Qualora si sia dimenticato il codice PIN, premere i tasti del telecomando nella sequenza seguente per ripristinare il codice PIN
predefinito ‘0-0-0-0’: POWER (Off), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (On).
❑ Generale
Modalità gioco → Off / On
Durante la connessione a una console per videogiochi come PlayStation
TM
o Xbox
TM
, il gioco sarà più realistico selezionando il
relativo menu.
• Quando la Modalità gioco è On
- La modalità Immagine viene automaticamente impostata su Standard e non può essere modificata.
- La modalità Suono viene automaticamente impostata su Personalizza e non può essere modificata. Regolare l’audio
mediante l’equalizzatore.
- La funzione Reset nel menu Suono è attivata. La funzione Reset inizializza le impostazioni dell’Equalizzatore alle
impostazione predefinite in fabbrica.
N La Modalità gioco non è disponibile nella normale modalità TV o quando la Modalità gioco è Off.
N Se la qualità dell’immagine è scadente quando al televisore è collegato un dispositivo esterno, verificare se la Modalità
gioco è impostata su On.
N Visualizzando il menu TV in Modalità gioco si potrebbe verificare un leggero sfarfallio.
N Visualizzando il menu TV in Modalità gioco si potrebbe verificare un leggero sfarfallio.
N Questa funzione supporta solo la funzione giochi.
N La Modalità gioco non è disponibile in modalità PC.
BD Wise → Off / On
BD Wise è una funzione che consente di impostare automaticamente la configurazione ottimale per tutti i dispositivi Samsung
connessi che supportano questa funzione.
N Questa funzione è attiva solo quando un dispositivo esterno viene collegato al televisore mediante una porta HDMI.
N Impostando BD Wise su On, la modalità Immagine viene automaticamente cambiata in base alle condizioni.
Risp. energia → Spenta / Basso / Medio / Alta / Immagine off
Questa funzione regola la luminosità del televisore in modo da ridurre il consumo di energia. Durante la visione notturna del
televisore, impostare l’opzione della modalità Risp. energia su Alta in modo da ridurre l’affaticamento degli occhi oltre al consumo
energetico.
Selezionando Immagine off, lo schermo si spegne lasciando attivo solo l’audio. Premere un tasto qualsiasi per uscire dalla
modalità Immagine off.
N Nel menu Strumenti, la funzione Immagine off non è supportata.
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ inoltre possibile
impostare l’opzione Risp. energia selezionando Strumenti → Risp. energia.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:50:43 PMItaliano - 25
Trasparenza menu
E’ possibile impostare il livello di trasparenza del menu a video.
• Luminoso : imposta il menu a video su normale.
• Scuro : rende il menu a video opaco.
Melodia → Off / Basso / Medio / Alta
La melodia di accensione/spegnimento del televisore può essere regolata.
N La Melodia non viene riprodotta
- Se il televisore non emette alcun suono significa che è stato premuto il tasto M MUTE.
- Se il televisore non emette alcun suono significa che è stato premuto il tasto – (Volume).
- Se il televisore è stato spento mediante la funzione Timer stand-by.
Effetto luce (solo per i modelli PS58B680/PS63B680)
Consente di attivare/disattivare il LED blu sul pannello frontale del televisore in base alla situazione. Utilizzarlo per risparmiare
energia oppure se il LED infastidisce gli occhi.
• Off : Il LED blu è sempre spento.
• Mod StdBy ON : Il LED blu si accende in standby e si spegne all’accensione del televisore.
• Mod visione ON : Il LED blu si accende e si spegne in corrispondenza dell’accensione e dello spegnimento del televisore.
• Sempre : Il LED blu è sempre acceso.
N Impostare Effetto luce su Off per ridurre il consumo energetico.
Visione Picture-in-Picture (PIP)
Questa funzione consente di visualizzare un’immagine secondaria all’interno dell’immagine
principale del programma o della sorgente video impostata. In questo modo, è possibile
visualizzare l’immagine di un programma o di una sorgente video esterna mentre si guarda
l’immagine principale.
N L’immagine nella finestra PIP potrebbe apparire leggermente innaturale quando si usa la
schermata principale per visualizzare un videogame o il karaoke.
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti. E’ possibile regolare
le impostazioni relative alla funzione PIP selezionando Strumenti → PIP.
❑ PIP → Off / On
La funzione PIP può essere attivata e disattivata..
Immagine principale Immagine secondaria
Component
HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4
PC
TV
Dimensione → / / /
Consente di selezionare il formato dell’immagine secondaria.
N Se l’immagine principale è in modalità HDMI, l’opzione Dimensione è disponibile.
Posizione → / / /
Utilizzata per selezionare la posizione dell’immagine secondaria.
N In modalità Double ( , ), la voce Posizione non può essere selezionata.
Canale
E’ possibile selezionare un canale per l’immagine secondaria.
PIP
PIP : Off ►
Dimensione :
Posizione :
Canale : ATV 1
E Conf. R Ritorno
Generale
Modalità gioco : Off
BD Wise : Off
Risp. energia : Off
Trasparenza menu : Luminoso
Melodia : Medio
PIP ►
U Sposta E Conf. R Ritorno
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:50:44 PMItaliano - 26
Programmi supportati
❑ Legal Notice
E’ possibile visualizzare le note legali e la clausola di esclusione di responsabilità
riguardanti i contenuti e servizi di terze parti.
General Disclaimer
E’ un servizio di avvertenze legali riguardante l’uso di Internet@TV.
N Il General Disclaimer può essere diverso da paese a paese.
N E’ possibile passare alla pagina precedente o successiva premendo il tasto ◄ o ►.
❑ Guida Prodotto
Guida Prodotto fornisce le informazioni riguardanti le principali funzioni del televisore.
N Per maggiori informazioni selezionare la voce desiderata.
❑ Auto diagnosi
Test immagine
In caso di problemi di visualizzazione dell’immagine, eseguire il test pertinente. Verificare il color pattern sullo schermo per vedere
se il problema persiste.
N Il messaggio Il problema riscontrato con questa foto persiste? viene visualizzato sullo schermo.Se il test pattern non
compare oppure presenta disturbi, selezionare Sì. Se il test pattern è visualizzato correttamente, selezionare No.
• Sì : Potrebbe essersi verificato un problema con il televisore. Contattare il Call Center Samsung per richiedere assistenza.
• No : Potrebbe essersi verificato un problema con i dispositivi esterni. Controllare lo stato dei collegamenti. Se il problema
persiste, consultare il manuale dell’utente dei dispositivi esterni.
Test audio
In caso di problemi di audio, eseguire il test pertinente. Controllare l’audio riproducendo un test melodico attraverso le casse del
televisore.
N Il messaggio Il problema riscontrato con il test audio persiste? viene visualizzato sullo schermo. Se durante l’esecuzione
del test audio il suono proviene da un solo altoparlante, selezionare Sì. Se è possibile ascoltare il suono dagli altoparlanti,
selezionare No.
• Sì : Potrebbe essersi verificato un problema con il televisore. Contattare il Call Center Samsung per richiedere assistenza.
• No : Potrebbe essersi verificato un problema con i dispositivi esterni. Controllare lo stato dei collegamenti. Se il problema
persiste, consultare il manuale dell’utente dei dispositivi esterni.
N Se non c’è ritorno audio dagli altoparlanti del televisore, prima di eseguire il test verificare che Selezione altoparlante sia
impostato su Altoparlante TV nel menu Suono.
N E’ possibile ascoltare la melodia durante il test anche se Selezione altoparlante è impostato su Altoparlante est oppure
l’audio è stato disattivato mediante la pressione del tasto M MUTE.
Informazioni segnale (solo canali digitali)
E’ possibile migliorare la ricezione dei canali digitali disponibili regolando l’antenn
N Se il misuratore della potenza del segnale indica che il segnale è debole, regolare fisicamente l’antenna per aumentare il
segnale. Continuare a regolare l’antenna fino a trovare la posizione migliore per ricevere il segnale in modo ottimale.
Supporto / Ingressi
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:50:44 PMItaliano - 27
Elenco sorgenti / Modifica Nome
❑ Elenco sorgenti
Questa funzione viene usata per selezionare il televisore o un’altra sorgente di ingresso
come un lettore DVD o un decoder digitale / ricevitore satellitare (Set-Top Box) collegato
al televisore. Utilizzare la funzione per selezionare la sorgente di ingresso desiderata.
TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB.
N E’ possibile scegliere solo i dispositivi esterni collegati al televisore. Nell’Elenco
sorgenti, gli ingressi collegati verranno evidenziati e ordinati in cima all’elenco.
Gli ingressi non collegati verranno ordinati in fondo all’elenco.
N Uso dei tasti colorati del telecomando per l’elenco sorgenti
- Rosso (Aggiorna) : Aggiorna il collegamento ai
dispositivi esterni.
- T TOOLS (Strumenti) : Visualizza i menu Modifica Nome e Informazioni.
O Premere il tasto SOURCE sul telecomando per visualizzare una sorgente del
segnale esterna.
❑ Modifica Nome
Assegnare un nome al dispositivo collegato ai jack di ingresso per semplificare la selezione della sorgente di ingresso.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV /
Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Quando un PC con una risoluzione di 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz è collegato alla porta HDMI IN 2 (DVI), è necessario impostare la
modalità HDMI2/DVI su PC in Modifica Nome della modalità Ingressi.
❑ Aggiornamento software
Gli aggiornamenti del prodotto, contenenti le nuove funzionalità della televisione digitale, vengono trasmessi periodicamente
tramite il normale segnale televisivo. Il prodotto rileva automaticamente questi segnali e visualizza la finestra di aggiornamento del
software. E’ possibile avviare da questa finestra l’installazione degli aggiornamenti.
Tramite USB
Inserire un’unità USB contenente l’aggiornamento del firmware nel televisore. Fare attenzione a non disattivare l’alimentazione o
rimuovere l’unità USB mentre l’aggiornamento è in corso. Al termine dell’aggiornamento del firmware, il televisore si spegnerà e
riaccenderà automaticamente. Verificare la versione del firmware al termine dell’aggiornamento. Al termine dell’aggiornamento del
software, le impostazioni video e audio modificate torneranno alle impostazioni predefinite di fabbrica.
Tramite canale
Aggiorna il software mediante il segnale trasmesso.
N Se la funzione viene selezionata durante la trasmissione software, questa funzione
ricerca il software disponibile e ne scarica gli aggiornamenti.
N Il tempo necessario per scaricare il software è determinato dallo stato del segnale.
Aggiornamento mod Standby
Per continuare l’aggiornamento software anche quando l’alimentazione principale è attiva,
selezionare On premendo il tasto ▲ o ▼. 45 minuti dopo l’attivazione della modalità
Standby, viene effettuato un aggiornamento manuale. Poiché l’alimentazione dell’unità si
attiva internamente, lo schermo potrà attivarsi per breve tempo. Questo fenomeno può
continuare per più di un’ora, fino al termine dell’aggiornamento software.
Software alternativo
Sostituire il software attuale con uno alternativo.
N Se il software è stato cambiato, viene visualizzata la versione corrente.
N E’ possibile cambiare la versione del software corrente Selezionando Software alternativo.
❑ Guida alla connessione HD
Viene visualizzata una breve introduzione su come ottenere le migliori prestazioni dal vostro nuovo televisore ad alta risoluzione.
Sono disponibili vari metodi di connessione per i dispositivi HD.
N E’ possibile passare alla pagina precedente o successiva premendo il tasto ◄ o ►.
❑ Contattare Samsung
E’ possibile ottenere le informazioni riguardanti il prodotto, il Call Center Samsung e il sito web.
Pannello laterale del
televisore
Unità USB
Elenco sorgenti
Modifica Nome
Ingressi
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:50:44 PMItaliano - 28
Rete
Connessione di rete
Connessione di rete è per DLNA, Contents Library-Internet download, Internet@TV e Centro rete dom.
❑ Connessione di rete - Cavo
Connessione LAN via cavo per un ambiente DHCP
Di seguito è riportata la procedura per impostare una connessione di rete usando il protocollo DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol). Poiché alla selezione di DHCP vengono automaticamente impostati un indirizzo IP, una maschera di sottorete,
un gateway e un DNS, non è necessario inserirli manualmente.
1. Collegare la porta LAN sul retro del televisore al modem esterno mediante un cavo LAN.
2. Collegare la porta LAN a parete e il modem esterno mediante un cavo Modem.
N I terminali (la posizione della porta e il tipo) del dispositivo esterno variano in base alla marca del dispositivo.
N Se si è verificato un errore nell’allocazione dell’indirizzo IP da parte del server DHCP, spegnere il modem e riaccenderlo
dopo circa 10 secondi.
N Per i collegamenti tra il modem esterno e il Router, vedere il manuale dell’utente del prodotto utilizzato.
N E’ possibile collegare direttamente il televisore alla LAN senza collegarlo tramite un Router.
N Non è possibile usare un modem ADSL con connessione manuale poiché non supporta il protocollo DHCP. E’ necessario
pertanto utilizzare un modem ADSL con connessione automatica.
Pannello posteriore del televisore
Porta Modem
a parete
2 Cavo modem
Modem esterno
(ADSL/VDSL/TV via cavo)
1 Cavo LAN
E’ possibile collegare la porta LAN al televisore direttamente in base allo stato della rete
Pannello posteriore del televisore
Cavo LAN
Porta Modem a
parete
E’ possibile collegare il televisore a una LAN mediante un Router.
Pannello posteriore del televisore
Porta Modem a
parete
Modem esterno
(ADSL/VDSL/TV via
cavo)
Router IP
LAN Cable
Cavo modem
Cavo LA
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:50:47 PMItaliano - 29
Connessione via cavo per un ambiente IP statico
Di seguito è riportata la procedura per impostare una connessione di rete usando un indirizzo IP statico. L’indirizzo IP, la maschera
di sottorete, il gateway e il DNS devono essere inseriti manualmente così come forniti dall’ISP (Internet Service Provider).
1. Collegare la porta LAN sul retro del televisore alla porta LAN a parete mediante un cavo LAN.
N I terminali (la posizione della porta e il tipo) del dispositivo esterno variano in base alla marca del dispositivo.
N In caso di utilizzo di un indirizzo IP statico, l’ISP potrà fornire l’indirizzo IP,
la maschera di sottorete, il gateway e il DNS. E’ necessario inserire questi valori per completare le impostazioni della rete. Qualora
non si conoscano tali valori, richiederli all’amministratore di rete.
N Per maggiori informazioni sulla configurazione e sulla connessione a un router, vedere il manuale di riferimento del prodotto
corrispondente.
N E’ possibile collegare direttamente il televisore alla LAN senza collegarlo tramite un Router.
N Qualora si utilizzi un Router IP che supporta il protocollo DHCP, è possibile impostare il dispositivo sia come DHCP sia come IP
statico.
N Per conoscere le procedure necessarie per impostare un indirizzo di IP statico, rivolgersi al proprio Internet Service Provider.
❑ Connessione di rete - Wireless
E’ possibile collegarsi alla rete in modalità senza fili utilizzando un Router IP wireless
1. Collegare l’adattatore ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ alla porta USB1 (HDD) o USB2 del televisore.
N Per utilizzare una rete wireless è necessario utilizzare l’adattatore ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’.
N La scheda Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter è venduta separatamente. La scheda LAN wireless WIS09ABGN è in vendita presso
rivenditori autorizzati, siti di Ecommerce e Samsungparts.com.
N Per utilizzare una rete wireless, il televisore deve essere collegato a un Router IP wireless.
N Se il Router IP wireless supporta il protocollo DHCP, il televisore può utilizzare sia un indirizzo DHCP sia un indirizzo IP statico per
collegarsi alla rete in modalità wireless.
N La Samsung Wireless LAN adapter supporta i protocolli IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. Riproducendo
un video DLNA su una connessione IEEE 802.11B/G, il video potrebbe non essere riprodotto in modo fluido.
N Se il Router IP wireless permette di attivare/disattivare la funzione di connessione Ping, attivarla.
N Selezionare un canale per il Router IP wireless che non sia attualmente utilizzato. Se il canale impostato per il Router IP wireless è
attualmente utilizzato da un altro dispositivo vicino, ciò comporterà delle interferenze e le comunicazioni potrebbero cadere.
Continua...
Pannello posteriore del televisorec
1 Cavo LAN
Porta Modem a
parete
Pannello posteriore del televisore
Cavo LAN
Router IP
Cavo LAN
Porta Modem a parete
E’ possibile collegare il televisore a una LAN mediante un Router.
Pannello laterale del televisore
Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter
Cavo LAN
Router IP wireless
Porta Modem a
parete
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:50:50 PMItaliano - 30
N Sistema di sicurezza diversi da quelli sotto elencati non sono compatibili con il televisore.
- Durante l’applicazione della chiave di sicurezza per l’AP (Router IP wireless),
sono supportate solo le seguenti.
1) Modalità di autenticazione : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Tipo crittografia : WEP, TKIP, AES
- Durante l’applicazione della chiave di sicurezza per l’AP (Router IP wireless)
in modalità Ad-hoc, sono supportate solo le seguenti funzioni.
1) Modalità di autenticazione : SHARED, WPANONE
2) Tipo crittografia : WEP, TKIP, AES
N Se il proprio AP supporta WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), è possibile collegarsi alla rete mediante PBC (Push Button Configuration) o
un PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS configurerà automaticamente l’SSID e la chiave WPA in entrambe le modalità.
N Se il dispositivo non è certificato, potrebbe non connettersi al televisore mediante la scheda ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’.
Impostazione rete
❑ Tipo di rete
Selezionare Cavo o Wireless come metodo di collegamento alla rete.
N Il menu viene attivato solo se l’adattatore ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ è
collegato.
• Cavo : Collegamento alla rete mediante un cavo.
• Wireless : Collegamento alla rete in modalità wireless.
❑ Impostazione rete
Impostazione rete via cavo (quando Tipo di rete è impostato su Cavo)
N Verificare che il cavo LAN sia collegato.
• Impostazione IP → Auto / Manuale
• Test di rete : Mediante questa funzione è possibile testare o confermare lo stato del collegamento di rete dopo la sua
impostazione.
N Cosa fare se non si è in grado di collegarsi alla rete in modalità cablata
Se il proprio Internet Service Provider ha registrato il MAC address del dispositivo utilizzato per il collegamento a Internet la
prima volta ed esegue l’autenticazione a ogni accesso a Internet, il televisore potrebbe non essere in grado collegarsi a Internet
poiché il MAC address è diverso da quello utilizzato dal dispositivo (PC). In questo caso, chiedere all’Internet Service Provider
le procedure per collegare dispositivi diversi al PC (ad esempio il televisore) a Internet. Se l’Internet Service Provider richiede
un ID o una password per il collegamento a Internet (rete), il televisore potrebbe non essere in grado di collegarsi. In questo
caso, digitare la propria ID o password al collegamento a Internet usando un Router IP. La connessione internet potrebbe
cadere a causa di un problema di firewall. In questo caso, contattare il proprio Internet Service Provider. Se ancora non è
possibile collegarsi a Internet anche dopo aver seguito le procedure descritte dall’Internet Service Provider, contattare Samsung
Electronics.
Impostazione rete via cavo - Auto
Collegando un cavo LAN a una rete che supporta il protocollo DHCP, le impostazioni IP (Internet
Protocol) vengono automaticamente configurate. Verificare che il cavo LAN sia collegato.
1. Impostare Tipo di rete su Cavo.
2. Selezionare Impostazione rete via cavo.
3. Impostare Impostazione IP su Auto.
N Il protocollo Internet viene impostato automaticamente.
4. Selezionare Test di rete per verificare la connettività della rete.
Impostazione rete via cavo - Manuale
Per collegare il televisore alla LAN mediante un indirizzo IP statico, è necessario impostare l’indirizzo IP. Verificare che il cavo LAN
sia collegato.
N Verificare che il cavo LAN sia collegato. (vedere pag. 28)
1. Impostare Tipo di rete su Cavo.
2. Selezionare Rete via cavo.
3. Impostare Impostazione IP su Manuale.
4. Impostare Indirizzo IP, Maschera sottorete, Gateway e Server DNS.
N Premere i tasti numerici sul telecomando quando si desidera impostare manualmente la rete.
5. Selezionare Test di rete per verificare la connettività della rete.
Impostazione
Trasmissione
Sicurezza
Rete ►
Generale
Continua...
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:50:50 PMItaliano - 31
Impostazione rete (quando Tipo di rete è impostato su Wireless)
N Impostazione rete via cavo (quando Tipo di rete è impostato su Cavo). (vedere pag. 29)
- Impostazione IP → Auto / Manuale.
- Test di rete : Mediante questa funzione è possibile testare o confermare lo stato del collegamento di rete dopo la sua
impostazione.
N In caso sia impossibile collegarsi a un AP
Il televisore non riesce a individuare un AP configurato come SSID privato. In questo caso, cambiare le impostazioni dell’AP
e riprovare. Se il proprio Internet Service Provider ha registrato il MAC address del dispositivo utilizzato per il collegamento a
Internet la prima volta ed esegue l’autenticazione a ogni accesso a Internet, il TV potrebbe non essere in grado collegarsi a
Internet poiché il MAC address è diverso da quello utilizzato dal dispositivo (PC). In questo caso, chiedere all’Internet Service
Provider le procedure per collegare dispositivi diversi da un PC (ad esempio il televisore) a Internet. Se ancora non è possibile
collegarsi a Internet anche dopo aver seguito le procedure descritte dall’Internet Service Provider, contattare Samsung
Electronics al numero 1–800–SAMSUNG.
• Seleziona una rete
- Access Point : Con questa funzione è possibile selezionare il Router IP da
utilizzare in caso di uso di una rete wireless.
N Se l’Access Point wireless non è riportato nell’elenco dei dispositivi disponibili,
premere il tasto Rosso.
N Una volta stabilita la connessione, il sistema tornerà automaticamente alla
schermata.
N Una volta avuto accesso a un Access Point mediante autenticazione di
sicurezza : Comparirà la richiesta della Chiave di sicurezza.
Digitare la chiave di sicurezza e premere il tasto Blu sul telecomando.
N Se il tipo di crittografia è WEP, 0~9, A~F sarà disponibile durante la digitazione della chiave di sicurezza.
Tasto Operazioni
▲/▼/◄/► Sposta la selezione in direzione alto / basso / sinistra / destra.
ENTER Inserisce il carattere selezionato.
Tasto rosso Passa dal carattere maiuscolo al minuscolo e viceversa.
Tasto verde E’ possibile cancellare un carattere già inserito.
Tasto blu Premere questo tasto per terminare l’inserimento della chiave di sicurezza.
❑ Collegamento mediante WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
Se la chiave di sicurezza è già impostata : Nell’elenco degli access point
disponibili selezionare WPS.
N E’ possibile selezionare PBC, PIN, Chiave di sicurezza.
• Collegamento mediante PBC : Selezionare un PBC (Push Button Configuration).
Premere il tasto PBC sull’AP (access point) entro 2 minuti e attendere la
connessione.
• Collegamento mediante PIN : Selezionare un PIN (Personal Identification Number).
N Viene visualizzato il messaggio del Codice PIN. Inserire il PIN per il dispositivo
AP entro 2 minuti. Selezionare OK e attendere la connessione.
N Riprovare nuovamente se la connessione non ha successo.
N Se non è possibile stabilire la connessione, reimpostare l’access point. Vedere
le istruzioni relative all’access point.
• Collegamento mediante Chiave di sicurezza :
Selezionando Chiave di sicurezza, viene visualizzata la finestra per la
digitazione della chiave. Digitare la chiave di sicurezza e premere Blu.
N Riprovare nuovamente se la connessione non ha successo.
Imp rete wireless
Chiave sicur
n Sposta Numero EConf. R Ritorno
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Numero
Minusc
Cancella
Eseg
* *
Imp rete wireless
Seleziona una rete
n Sposta EConf. R Ritorno
Ricerca
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Chiave sicur
3/9
Premere il tasto PBC sull’AP.
Nome punto di accesso : AP_3
Cancella
Premere OK dopo aver immesso il pin del televisore
Nome punto di accesso : AP_3
Numero PIN : 123 45678
OK Cancella
Imp rete wireless
Chiave sicur
n Sposta Numero EConf. R Ritorno
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Numero
Minusc
Cancella
Eseg
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:50:52 PMItaliano - 32
Se la chiave di sicurezza non è già impostata : Quando l’impostazione di sicurezza
dell’AP che supporta la WPS è NONE, è possibile selezionare PBC, PIN, Nessuna
sicurezza. Nessuna sicurezza permette la connessione diretta all’AP senza l’uso
della funzione WPC.
N Il processo per PBC, PIN è uguale a quello descritto sopra. Fare riferimento ad
esso se la chiave di sicurezza è già impostata.
N Riprovare nuovamente se la connessione non ha successo.
Ad-hoc : E’ possibile collegarsi a un dispositivo mobile senza un Access Point
utilizzando un dongle USB wireless mediante rete peer-to-peer.
• Come collegarsi a un nuovo network Ad-hoc
1. Selezionare Seleziona una rete per visualizzare un elenco di dispositivi.
2. All’interno dell’elenco dei dispositivi, premere il tasto Blu sul telecomando o selezionare
Ad-hoc.
N Il messaggio Il sistema di rete esistente potrebbe avere funzioni limitate. Cambiare la connessione di rete? viene
visualizzato a schermo.
3. Digitare il Nome rete (SSID) generato e la Chiave di sicurezza nel dispositivo che si intende collegare..
• Come collegarsi a un dispositivo Ad-hoc esistente
1. Selezionare Seleziona una rete per visualizzare un elenco di dispositivi.
2. Selezionare il dispositivo desiderato nell’Elenco dei dispositivi.
3. Se la chiave di sicurezza è stata applicata, digitarla nuovamente.
N Se il network non funziona regolarmente, controllare nuovamente il Nome rete (SSID) e la Chiave di sicurezza. Se la
Chiave di sicurezza è errata, potrebbe essere la ragione del malfunzionamento.
Imp rete wireless - Auto
Per collegare un AP, questo deve supportare la modalità DHCP.
Solo i dispositivi che supportano la modalità Ad-hoc possono essere collegati senza DHCP.
1. Impostare Tipo di rete su Wireless.
2. Selezionare Imp rete wireless.
3. Impostare Impostazione IP su Auto.
N Il protocollo Internet viene impostato automaticamente.
4. Selezionare una rete mediante l’opzione Seleziona una rete.
5. Selezionare Test di rete per verificare la connettività della rete.
Imp rete wireless - Manuale
Per collegare la rete wireless mediante un indirizzo IP statico, è necessario impostare l'indirizzo IP. (Vedere pag. 29)
N Per maggiori informazioni sull'indirizzo IP statico, vedere il manuale dell'utente del Router IP wireless.
1. Impostare Tipo di rete su Wireless.
2. Selezionare Imp rete wireless.
3. Impostare Impostazione IP su Manuale.
4. Impostare Indirizzo IP, Maschera sottorete, Gateway e Server DNS.
N Premere i tasti numerici sul telecomando quando si desidera impostare manualmente la rete.
5. Selezionare una rete tramite Seleziona punto d’accesso.
6. Selezionare Test di rete per verificare la connettività della rete.
* *
Imp rete wireless
Seleziona una rete
n Sposta EConf. R Ritorno
Ricerca
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Chiave sicur
3/9
Il sistema di rete esistente potrebbe avere funzioni
limitate. Cambiare la connessione di rete?
Sì No
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:50:53 PMItaliano - 33
Collegamento di un dispositivo USB
1. Per accendere il televisore premere il tasto POWER.
2. Collegare un dispositivo USB contenente foto e file musicali alla porta USB posta sul lato
del televisore.
N Il jack USB 1 (HDD) è inoltre utilizzato come jack HDD. HDD (Hard Disk Drive) è un
dispositivo che memorizza digitalmente dati codificati.
N Media Play supporta solo il dispositivo USB MSC (Mass Storage Class).
MSC è un dispositivo di memorizzazione di massa Bulk-Only Transport. Esempi di MSC
sono le unità Thumb, i Flash Card Reader e le unità HDD USB (le unità HUB USB non
sono supportate.)
N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) non è supportato.
N Il file system supporta solo FAT16/32 (il file system NTFS non è supportato).
N Collegare un’unità HDD USB alla porta dedicata, USB1 (HDD). Tuttavia, se il dispositivo collegato è molto esigente in termini di
alimentazione, la porta USB1 (HDD) potrebbe non essere in grado di supportare il dispositivo.)
N Alcuni dispositivi audio e videocamere digitali USB possono non essere compatibili con questo televisore.
N Collegare direttamente alla porta USB del televisore. Se si utilizza un cavo separato, possono verificarsi problemi di compatibilità
USB.
N Prima di collegare il dispositivo al televisore, eseguire il backup dei file per prevenire danni o la perdita di dati. SAMSUNG non è
responsabile per eventuali danni ai file dati o perdite di dati.
N Non scollegare il dispositivo USB durante il caricamento.
N MSC supporta file MP3 e JPEG, mentre un dispositivo PTP supporta solo file JPEG.
N Il formato JPEG sequenziale è supportato.
N Maggiore è la risoluzione dell’immagine, più lungo è il tempo necessario per visualizzarla sullo schermo.
N La risoluzione massima supportata in JPEG è di 15360X8640 pixel.
N In caso di file non supportati o danneggiati, comparirà il messaggio Formato file non supportato.
N Se il numero di file eccede i 4000 (o il numero di file musicali eccede i 3000), tutti i file eccedenti tale limite non verranno visualizzati
nell’Elenco foto (o nell’Elenco musica).MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played.
N I file MP3 con DRM scaricati da un sito a pagamento non possono essere riprodotti.
N DRM (Digital Rights Management) impedisce l’uso illegale di contenuti digitali protetti da copyright.
N Passare da una foto all’altra potrebbe richiedere alcuni secondi. Ora, sullo schermo comparirà l’icona che indica il caricamento in
corso.
❑ Uso dei tasti del Telecomando nel menu Media Play
Tasto Operazioni
▲/▼/◄/► Sposta il cursore e seleziona una voce.
ENTERE
Seleziona la voce attualmente evidenziata.
Riproduce o interrompe temporaneamente i file durante la proiezione di diapositive o la riproduzione
di un file musicale.
Riproduce o arresta temporaneamente la proiezione di diapositive o la riproduzione di un brano
musicale.
RETURN Torna al menu precedente.
TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu Foto e Musica.
Interrompe la proiezione di diapositive o la riproduzione di un brano musicale.
Passa al gruppo precedente/successivo.
INFO Mostra le informazioni relative al file.
MEDIA.P Attiva/Disattiva la modalità Media Play.
DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays
DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com
with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Media Play
Pannello laterale del
televisore
Unità USB
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:50:53 PMItaliano - 34
Uso della funzione Media Play
Questa funzione consente di visualizzare e riprodurre file fotografici e musicali memorizzati su un dispositivo USB Mass Storage Class
(MSC).
Utilizzando file multimediali senza licenza, il prodotto potrebbe non funzionare correttamente.
❑ Accesso al menu Media Play
1. Premere il tasto MENU. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Applicazione, quindi
premere ENTERE.
2. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Media Play (USB & DLNA), quindi premere
ENTERE.
O Premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu Media
Play.
O Premere SOURCE ripetutamente sul telecomando per selezionare USB o
DLNA, quindi premere ENTERE.
3. Premere il tasto rosso, quindi il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare il dispositivo USB
corrispondente (ad es. se connesso tramite un hub). Premere ENTERE.
N Questa funzione può risultare diversa in base al dispositivo di memoria
collegato al televisore.
N Nella parte inferiore sinistra dello schermo comparirà il nome del dispositivo
USB selezionato.
4. Premere ◄ o ► er selezionare una icona (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup),
quindi premere ENTERE.
N Per uscire dalla modalità Media Play premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul
telecomando.
N In questa modalità, è possibile visualizzare clip video contenute in un gioco,
tuttavia non è possibile riprodurre il gioco stesso.
❑ Rimozione sicura di un dispositivo di memoria USB
E’ possibile rimuovere il dispositivo dal televisore in modo sicuro.
1. Premere il tasto TOOLS nella schermata di elenco dei file Media Play, o durante
la proiezione di diapositive o, la riproduzione di un brano , musicale o di un
filmato.
2. Premere ▲ o ▼per selezionare Rimozione sicura, quindi premere ENTERE.
3. Rimuovere il dispositivo USB dal televisore.
❑ Schermo
1. Ordinamento corrente : Questo campo mostra lo standard attuale per l’ordinamento dei file.
2. Visualizza gruppi : Il gruppo di ordinamento che comprende le foto selezionate viene evidenziato.
3. File attualmente selezionato : Viene evidenziato il file attualmente selezionato.
4. Informazioni sulla selezione degli elementi : Mostra il numero di fotografie selezionate premendo il tasto giallo.
5. Dispositivo attuale : Mostra il nome del dispositivo attualmente selezionato.
N Tasto Rosso (Dispositivo) : Seleziona un dispositivo connesso.
6. Voci della guida
• Tasto Verde (Impostazioni pref) : Modifica le impostazioni preferite per il file selezionato. Premere ripetutamente questo tasto
fino a visualizzare il valore desiderato.
• Tasto Giallo (Selezione) : Seleziona il file dall’elenco. I file selezionati vengono evidenziati con un simbolo c. Premere
nuovamente il tasto giallo per deselezionare il file.
• Tasto TOOLS (Strumenti) : Visualizza i menu delle opzioni. (Il menu Strumenti varia in base allo stato corrente.)
• R Tasto RETURN (Ritorno) : Ritorna al menu precedente.
Cartella Preferenze Visual base Timeline Colore
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349.
JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Slide Show
Riproduci gruppo corrente
Informazioni
Rimozione sicura
../ Nome cart/
Photo
USB Dispositivo Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Libero
Movie
USB Dispositivo RRitorno
Preferenze Visual base Orario Colore Cartella
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
3
1
2
1File selez
4
5 6
Photo
USB Dispositivo Impostazioni pref SelezioneT T Strumenti R Ritorno
c
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:50:58 PMItaliano - 35
Ordinamento Photo / Music / Movie List
Visual base
Visualizza le cartelle presenti sul dispositivo di memorizzazione USB. Se si
seleziona una cartella e si preme il tasto ENTERE, vengono visualizzati solo i file
(Photo / Music / Movie) contenuti nella cartella selezionata.
N Se i file sono ordinati secondo la Visual base, non sarà possibile impostare i file
preferiti.
Cartella
Ordina le foto per cartella. Se nel dispositivo USB sono presenti più cartelle, i file
fotografici vengono visualizzati in ordine in ogni cartella.I file nella cartella principale
vengono mostrati per primi, mentre gli altri vengono ordinati alfabeticamente per
nome.
Preferenze → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
Ordina i file per preferenza (Favourites).
N Modificare le impostazioni dei preferiti
Selezionare l’immagine nell’elenco foto e premere il tasto Verde ripetutamente
fino alla comparsa dell’impostazione desiderata.
N Le stelle sono utilizzate solo ai fini del raggruppamento. Ad esempio,
l’impostazione con 3 stelle non ha alcuna priorità rispetto all’impostazione con
una stella.
Orario (Photo / Movie)
Ordina e mostra i titoli dei filmati o dei brani musicali in ordine di simbolo / numerico
/ alfabetico / speciale.
Titolo (Music / Movie)
Ordina e mostra i titoli dei brani musicali in ordine di simbolo / numerico / alfabetico
/ speciale.
❑ Photo
Colore → Rosso / Giallo / Verde / Blu / Magenta / Nero / Grigio / Non classificato
Ordina le foto in base al colore. È possibile cambiare le informazioni relative al colore della foto.
N È necessario attivare la funzione Usare visualizz a colori nel menu Setup prima di ordinare le foto in base al colore.
❑ Music
Artista
Ordina i file musicali per artista in ordine di simbolo / numero / alfabeto / speciale.
Atmosfera → Energetico / Ritmico / Triste / Eccitante / Calmo / Non classif
Ordina i brani musicali in base all’atmosfera.È possibile cambiare le informazioni relative all’atmosfera musicale.
Genere
Ordina i brani musicali in base al genere.
Compos Preferenze Visual base Titolo Artista
1
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
usermanual Heaven
NPKI
▶
1
▶
▶
▶
▶
../ Nome cart/
Music
USB Dispositivo Selezione T StrumentiR Cartella superiore
▶
▶
Preferenze Visual base Orario Titolo Cartella
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
▶
▶ ◀
MOVIE_005
.avi
Preferenze Visual base Orario Colore Cartella
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
Photo
USB Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:51:04 PMItaliano - 36
Photo / Music / Movie List Option Menu
1. Premere il tasto MEDIA.P.
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare Photo, Music o Movie, quindi premere
ENTERE.
3. Per selezionare il file desiderato, premere il tasto ◄ o ►.
N Selezione di più file
- Per selezionare il file desiderato, premere il tasto ◄ o ►.Quindi premere il
tasto giallo.
- Ripetere l’operazione per selezionare più file.
- Il contrassegno c appare per il file selezionato.
4. Premere il tasto TOOLS.
N Il menu delle opzioni varia in base allo stato corrente.
Riproduci gruppo corrente
Questo menu consente di avviare una proiezione di diapositive solo delle foto
contenute nel gruppo di ordinamento selezionato.
Deselez tutto (se è selezionato almeno un file)
È possibile deselezionare tutti i file.
N Il contrassegno c che indica che il file corrispondente è selezionato è nascosto.
Informazioni
Vengono visualizzate le informazioni relative alla foto, al brano musicale o al filmato.
Usando le stesse procedure durante una proiezione di diapositive, è possibile
vedere le informazioni relative ai file fotografici.
O Premere il tasto INFO per visualizzare le informazioni.
Rimozione sicura
Il dispositivo può essere rimosso dal televisore in modo sicuro.
❑ Foto
Slide Show
Questo menu consente di avviare una proiezione di diapositive delle foto contenute
nel dispositivo USB.
Mod. gruppo (quando la chiave di ordinamento è Colore)
È possibile modificare le informazioni sul colore di un file, o un gruppo di file, di foto selezionato in modo da spostare il file in un
altro gruppo di colore.
N Il colore effettivo della foto non verrà modificato.
N Le informazioni del gruppo del file corrente vengono aggiornate e le foto vengono spostate nel nuovo gruppo di colore.
N Per modificare le informazioni di più file, selezionare i file desiderati premendo il tasto giallo.
❑ Music
Change Group (quando la chiave di ordinamento è Mood)
È possibile modificare le informazioni relative all’atmosfera del file musicale. Le informazioni del gruppo del file corrente vengono
aggiornate e il file viene spostato nel nuovo gruppo. Per modificare le informazioni di più file, selezionare i file desiderati premendo
il tasto giallo.
Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Compos Preferenze Visual base Titolo Artista
1
1
▶
▶
../ folder name/
Sky
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
NPKI
usermanual Heaven
▶
NPKI
Riproduci gruppo corrente
Informazioni
Rimozione sicura
Music
USB Dispositivo Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore
MOVIE_004
MOVIE_003 .avi
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_005
.avi
MOVIE_007
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_006
.avi
▶
▶
Preferenze Visual base Orario Titolo Cartella
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore
Riproduci gruppo corrente
Informazioni
Rimozione sicura
Visual base Orario Colore Cartella Preferenze
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Slide Show
Riproduci gruppo corrente
Mod. gruppo
Informazioni
Rimozione sicura
Photo
USB Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:51:09 PMItaliano - 37
Slide Show / Music Play / Movie Play Option Menu
1. Durante una proiezione di diapositive (o la visualizzazione di una foto) o durante
la riproduzione di un brano musicale o di un filmato, premere il tasto TOOLS per
impostare l’opzione.
2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare l’opzione, quindi premere ENTERE.
Impostazioni immagine / Impostazioni audio
È possibile selezionare le impostazioni delle immagini e dell’audio.
Informazioni
Vengono visualizzate le informazioni relative al file.
Rimozione sicura
Il dispositivo può essere rimosso dal televisore in modo sicuro.
❑ Menu opzioni di Slide Show
Arresta proiezione diapositive / Avvia proiezione diapositive
E’ possibile iniziare o interrompere la proiezione di diapositive.
Velocità slide show → Lenta / Normale / Veloce
Selezionare questa opzione per determinare la velocità di proiezione delle diapositive.
N La funzione è disponibile solo durante una proiezione.
N La velocità di proiezione delle diapositive può essere modificata premendo il
tasto π (REW) o μ (FF) durante le proiezione.
Effetto slide show
È possibile selezionare l’effetto di transizione dello schermo da utilizzare nella
proiezione di diapositive.
• Nessuno / Dissolv1 / Dissolv2 / Veneziana / Spirale / Scacchiera / Lineare /
Scale / A comparsa / Casuale
N La funzione è disponibile solo durante una proiezione.
Ruota
E’ possibile ruotare le foto memorizzate su un dispositivo USB.
N Premendo il tasto ◄, la foto verrà ruotata di 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ e 0˚.
N Premendo il tasto ►, la foto verrà ruotata di 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ e 0˚.
N Il file ruotato non viene memorizzato.
Zoom
E’ possibile ingrandire le foto memorizzate su un dispositivo USB. (x1 → x2 → x4)
N Per spostare l’immagine ingrandita, premere il tasto ENTERE , quindi i tasti ▲/▼/◄/►. Notare che se l’immagine ingrandita è
più piccola della dimensione dello schermo originale, la funzione di modifica della posizione non avrà alcun effetto.
N Il file ingrandito non può essere memorizzato.
Musica di sottofondo
Durante una proiezione di diapositive è possibile impostare la musica di sottofondo desiderata.
N Per usare questa funzione, la musica scelta deve essere memorizzata sul dispositivo USB.
N Per modificare la modalità Musica di sottofondo è necessario caricare i brani musicali. Riprodurre i brani musicali nella categoria
musica per caricarli.
❑ Menu Opzione della riproduzione di file musicali
Mod Ripetiz. → On / Off
E’ possibile riprodurre ripetutamente i brani musicali.
❑ Menu opzioni della riproduzione di filmati
Formato immagine → Adatta / Originale
Riproduce un video in dimensione originale o a tutto schermo.
Impostazione didascalie
È possibile impostare le didascalie per il filmato.
Tools
Strumenti
Arresta proiezione diapositive
Velocità slide show : Normale
Effetto slide show : Dissolv1
Ruota
Zoom
Musica di sottof
Impostazioni immagine
Impostazioni audio
Informazioni
U Sposta E Conf. eEsci
Strumenti
Modalità Ripeti ◄ On ►
Impostazioni immagine
Impostazioni audio
Informazioni
Rimozione sicura
U Sposta Regola eEsci
Strumenti
Impostazioni immagine
Impostazioni audio
Formato immagine : Adatta
Impostazione didascalia
Informazioni
Rimozione sicura
U Sposta Conf. eEsci
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:51:10 PMItaliano - 38
Visualizzazione di una foto o di una proiezione di diapositive
❑ Proiezione di diapositive
N Nella proiezione di diapositive verranno utilizzate tutte le foto contenute
nell’Elenco file.
N Durante la proiezione di diapositive, i file appaiono in sequenza a partire da
quello correntemente visualizzato.
N La proiezione di diapositive prosegue in base all’ordine specificato nell’Elenco
file.
N Impostando l’opzione Musica di sottofondo su Acceso durante la proiezione
delle diapositive i brani musicali vengono riprodotti automaticamente.
N Quando si visualizza un Elenco foto, per iniziare la proiezione di diapositive
premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci) / ENTERE sul telecomando.
N Tasti di controllo per la proiezione di diapositive
ENTERE Riproduci/Arresta la proiezione di diapositive.
Riproduci la proiezione di diapositive.
Arresta la proiezione di diapositive.
Esce dalla proiezione diapositive e torna all’elenco delle foto.
/ Varia la velocità di riproduzione della proiezione.
T TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu Photo..
❑ Riproduce il gruppo corrente
1. Premere il tasto ▲ per passare alla sezione tasti di ordinamento.
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare l’ordinamento.
3. Premere il tasto ▼ per passare alla sezione Elenco gruppi.
4. Selezionare un gruppo utilizzando i tasti ◄ e ►.
5. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci). Viene avviata una proiezione di diapositive con
i file del gruppo selezionato.
In alternativa
1. Selezionare un tasto di ordinamento e, nella sezione Elenco file, selezionare le foto contenute nel gruppo desiderato.
N Per passare al gruppo successivo/precedente, premere il tasto π (REW) o μ (FF).
2. Premere il tasto TOOLS.
3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Riproduci gruppo corrente, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.
N Per la proiezione verranno utilizzati solo i file contenuti nel gruppo di ordinamento.
❑ Per riprodurre una proiezione di diapositive dei soli file selezionati
1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file.
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare la foto desiderata nell’Elenco file.
3. Premere il tasto giallo.
4. Ripetere l’operazione per selezionare più foto.
N Il contrassegno c cappare a sinistra della foto selezionata.
N Selezionando un solo file, la proiezione di diapositive non avrà inizio.
N Per deselezionare tutti i file, premere il tasto TOOLS quindi selezionare Deselez tutto.
5. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE.
N I file selezionati verranno utilizzati per la proiezione di diapositive.
In alternativa
1. Nell’Elenco file, premere il tasto giallo per selezionare le foto desiderate.
2. Premere il tasto TOOLS.
3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Slide show, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE .
N I file selezionati verranno utilizzati per la proiezione di diapositive.
▶
▶
Preferenze Visual base Orario Titolo Cartella
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_005
.avi
USB Dispositivo
Visual base Orario Colore Cartella Preferenze
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Slide Show
Riproduci gruppo corrente
Mod. gruppo
Informazioni
Rimozione sicura
Photo
r Normale IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4
USB E Pausa lr Prec/succ T Strumenti R Ritorno
USB Dispositivo Impostazioni pref Selezione T Strumenti R Cartella superiore
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:51:15 PMItaliano - 39
Riproduzione di musica
❑ Riproduzione di un file musicale
1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file.
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare un file musicale da riprodurre.
3. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE.
N Questo menu mostra solo i file con estensione MP3. I file con altre
estensioni non vengono visualizzati, nemmeno se sono stati salvati sul
medesimo dispositivo USB.
N Il file selezionato appare in alto con il relativo tempo di riproduzione.
N Per regolare il volume della musica, premere il tasto del volume sul
telecomando.
Per azzerare il volume, premere il tasto M MUTE sul telecomando.
N Se l’audio risulta anomalo quando si riproducono file MP3, regolare le impostazioni Equalizzatore e SRS TruSurround HD
nel menu Sound. (Un file MP3 sovramodulato può causare problemi audio.)
N La durata di un filmato può essere visualizzata come ‘00:00:00’ se all’inizio della riproduzione non vengono reperite le
informazioni relative al tempo di riproduzione.
N I tasti π (REW) e μ (FF) non sono attivi durante la riproduzione.
N Tasti di controllo della riproduzione musicale
ENTERE Riproduce/Interrompe il brano musicale.
Esce dalla modalità di riproduzione e torna
all’Elenco musica.
Riproduce il brano musicale.
T TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu Music.
Interrompe il brano musicale.
N Icona informazioni sulla funzione Music
Quando tutti i brani musicali presenti nella cartella (o i file selezionati) sono stati ripetuti. La modalità Ripetizione è
impostata su Acceso.
Quando tutti i brani musicali presenti nella cartella (o i file selezionati) sono stati riprodotti una volta. La modalità
Ripetizione è impostata su Spento.
❑ Riproduzione di un gruppo di brani
1. Premere il tasto ▲ per passare alla sezione tasti di ordinamento.
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare l’ordinamento.
3. Premere il tasto ▼ o ENTERE per passare alla sezione Elenco gruppi.
4. Premere il tasto ∂ (Play). Viene avviata la riproduzione dei file del gruppo selezionato.
In alternativa
1. Selezionare un tasto di ordinamento e, nella sezione Elenco file, selezionare i file contenuti nel gruppo desiderato.
N Per passare al gruppo successivo/precedente, premere il tasto π (REW) o μ (FF).
2. Premere il tasto TOOLS.
3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Riproduci gruppo corrente, quindi premere il ENTERE.
N Vengono riprodotti i brani musicali inseriti nel gruppo di ordinamento, compresi i brani selezionati.
❑ Riproduzione dei brani musicali selezionati
1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file.
2. Per selezionare il brano musicale desiderato, premere il tasto ◄ o ►.
3. Premere il tasto giallo.
4. Ripetere l’operazione per selezionare più file musicali.
N Il contrassegno c appare a sinistra del brano musicale selezionato.
N Per deselezionare tutti i file, premere il tasto TOOLS quindi selezionare Deselez tutto.
5. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE.
N Vengono riprodotti i file selezionati.
r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55
r
1/3
When I Dream r
r
Geek In The Pink Heaven
USB E Pause lr Prec/succ T Strumenti R Ritorno
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:51:15 PMItaliano - 40
Riproduzione di un filmato
❑ Riproduzione di un filmato
1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file.
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare un filmato da riprodurre.
3. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE.
N Verrà visualizzato il file selezionato.
N Il file selezionato appare in alto con il relativo tempo di riproduzione.
N La durata di un filmato può essere visualizzata come ‘00:00:00’ se all’inizio
della riproduzione non vengono reperite le informazioni relative al tempo di
riproduzione.
N È possibile guardare giochi multimediali, ma la funzione gioco non è supportata.
N Formati didascalie supportati
Nome Estensione file Lingua programmazione
MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt string-based
SubViewer .sub string-based
Micro DVD .sub o .txt string-based
N Formati video supportati
Extension de fichier Conteneur Décodeur vidéo Codec audio Risoluzione
*.avi AVI
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.mkv MKV
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.asf ASF
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080
*.mp4 MP4 (SMP4)
H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
XVID 1920x1080
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
*.vro
VRO
VOB
MPEG2 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG1 1920x1080
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG2 1920x1080
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
H.264 1920x1080
VC1 1920x1080
N Tasti di controllo della riproduzione video
ENTERE Riproduci/ Arresta il filmato.
Riproduce il filmato.
Interrompe la riproduzione del filmato.
Esce dalla modalità di riproduzione e torna all’Elenco filmati.
T TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu dei filmati.
◄/► Salta in avanti o indietro all’interno del filmato.
▲/▼ Passa al primo/all’ultimo fotogramma del file.
▶
r
r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3
Film_000.avi
USB E Pausa lr Salta T Strumenti R Ritorno
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:51:16 PMItaliano - 41
❑ Riproduzione di un gruppo di filmati
1. Premere il tasto ▲ per passare alla sezione tasti di ordinamento.
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare l’ordinamento.
3. Premere il tasto ▼ o ENTERE per passare alla sezione Elenco gruppi.
4. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci). Viene avviata la riproduzione solo dei file del gruppo selezionato.
In alternativa
1. Selezionare un tasto di ordinamento e, nella sezione Elenco file, selezionare i file contenuti nel gruppo desiderato.
N Per passare al gruppo successivo/precedente, premere il tasto π (REW) o μ (FF).
2. Premere il tasto TOOLS.
3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Riproduci gruppo corrente, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE .
N Vengono riprodotti i filmati inseriti nel gruppo di ordinamento, compresi i file selezionati.
❑ Riproduzione dei filmati selezionati
1. Premere il tasto ▼ per selezionare la sezione Elenco file.
2. Per selezionare il brano musicale desiderato, premere il tasto ◄ o ►.
3. Premere il tasto giallo.
N Il simbolo c cappare a sinistra del filmato selezionato.
N Per deselezionare tutti i file, premere il tasto TOOLS quindi selezionare Deselez tutto.
4. Ripetere l’operazione per selezionare più filmati.
5. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE.
N Verrà riprodotto solo il file selezionato.
❑ Riproduzione continua dei filmati (Resume Play)
Uscendo dalla funzione di riproduzione di un filmato, la sua riproduzione può essere ripresa in seguito a partire dal punto nel quale
era stata interrotta.
1. Selezionare il filmato da riprodurre in modo continuo premendo il tasto ◄ o ► nella sezione elenco file.
2. Premere il tasto ∂ (Riproduci)/ENTERE.
3. Selezionare Ripr in continuo (ripristina riproduzione) premendo il tasto blu.
N La riproduzione del filmato inizierà dal punto di arresto precedente.
N Se la funzione Prom ripr cont di un film è impostata su On nel menu Setup comparirà un messaggio alla ripresa della
riproduzione del filmato.
Utilizzo del menu Impostazione
Il menu Impostazioni mostra le impostazioni utente del menu Media Play.
1. Premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu Media Play.
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare Setup, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.
3. Per selezionare l’opzione desiderata, premere il tasto ▲ o ▼.
4 . Per selezionare l’opzione desiderata, premere il tasto ◄ o ►.
N Per uscire dalla modalità Media Play premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando.
Usare visualizz a colori → On / Off
È possibile selezionare l’ordinamento delle foto in base al colore.
N Se l’opzione è impostata su Acceso, il tempo di caricamento può aumentare a
causa del reperimento delle informazioni relative alle foto.
Mod Ripetiz. → On / Off
Selezionare questa opzione per riprodurre ripetutamente i brani musicali.
Prom ripr cont di un film → On / Off
Selezionare questa opzione per visualizzare il messaggio a comparsa di aiuto per la
riproduzione continua del filmato.
Ottieni codice registrazione DivX® VOD
Mostra il codice di registrazione autorizzato per il televisore. Se si è connessi al
sito web DivX e si registra il codice di registrazione con un account personale,
è possibile scaricare il file di registrazione VOD. Se la registrazione VOD viene riprodotta con Media Play, la procedura di
registrazione viene completata. Per ulteriori informazioni su VOD DivX®, visitare il sito www.DivX.com.
Ottieni codice disattivazione DivX® VOD
Se VOD DivX® non è registrato, viene visualizzato il codice di disattivazione della registrazione. Se si esegue questa funzione con
il VOD DivX® registrato, la registrazione VOD DivX® corrente viene disattivata.
Durata salvaschermo → 10 ore / 20 ore / 1 ore
Selezionare questa opzione per impostare il tempo di attesa prima che lo screen saver entri in funzione.
Informazioni
Selezionare questa opzione per visualizzare le informazioni sul dispositivo collegato.
Rimozione sicura
Il dispositivo può essere rimosso dal televisore in modo sicuro.
Media Play
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Libero
SETUP
Photo Music Movie Setup
USB eEsci
Dispositivo
Setup
Sposta LRegola Ritorno
Usare visualizz a colori ◄ Off ►
Mod Ripetiz. On
Prom ripr cont di un film On
Ottieni codice registrazione DivX® VOD
Ottieni codice disattivazione DivX® VOD
Durata salvaschermo 10 min
Informazioni
Rimozione sicura
USB Dispositivo
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:51:16 PMItaliano - 42
Impostazione della rete DLNA
DLNA permette la visione di filmati e immagini memorizzati nel PC sul televisore mediante una connessione di rete in modalità Media
Play. Per utilizzare DLNA, il televisore deve essere collegato alla rete e l’applicazione DLNA deve essere installata sul PC.
❑ Schema connessioni di rete - Cavo
❑ Schema connessioni di rete - Wireless
1. Per ulteriori informazioni sulla configurazione della rete, vedere ‘Impostazione della rete’.
N È opportuno che il televisore e il PC siano nella stessa subnet. Le prime 3 parti dell’indirizzo subnet e IP del televisore e del PC
devono essere uguali e solo l’ultima parte (l’indirizzo host) deve variare. (per es. Indirizzo IP : 123.456.789.**)
2. Collegare il PC su cui verrà installato il programma Samsung PC Share Manager e il modem esterno mediante un cavo LAN.
N E’ possibile collegare direttamente il televisore al PC senza dover passare tramite uno Sharer (Router).
Installazione dell’applicazione DLNA
Per riprodurre il contenuto del PC sul televisore, è necessario prima installare l’applicazione. Per utilizzare la funzione DLNA senza
problemi, utilizzare il programma presente sul CD-ROM fornito con il televisore o il programma Samsung PC Share Manager
corrispondente al modello di televisore che può essere scaricato dal sito web Samsung.
TV
Modem esterno
(ADSL/VDSL/Cavo TV)
LAN
PC
LAN
Media Play-DLNA
TV
LAN
PC
o
1
Pannello laterale del
televisore
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:51:18 PMItaliano - 43
Uso dell’applicazion DLNA
La schermata del programma
1. Menu : Vengono forniti i seguenti menu
dell’applicazione : File, condividi, Server, e
Guida.
2. Fare clic per condividere la cartella del server
PC selezionata.
3. Fare clic per annullare la condivisione.
4. Fare clic per aggiornare la cartella del PC e i
file.
5. Fare clic per sincronizzare lo stato della
condivisione.
6. Vengono elencate le cartelle e i file del PC da
condividere.
7. Vengono elencate le cartelle condivise
dall’utente.
8. Nome server PC indicato nell’elenco
periferiche di Media Play.
Requisiti di sistema
1. Inserire nel PC il CD del programma fornito in dotazione con il televisore.
2. Per l’installazione del programma sono necessari 30MB di spazio libero sul disco rigido.
N Se si intende condividere file, è necessario disporre di 30MB di spazio libero sul disco rigido ogni 100 file.
N Annullando la condivisione dei file, lo spazio sul disco fisso utilizzato per le informazioni delle miniature verrà liberato.
Formati supportati
• Immagine : JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS container. Per informazioni dettagliate sui formati
video supportati, vedere la sezione ‘Riproduzione di un filmato’.
Installare l’applicazione
► ►
►
1. Eseguire il file Setup.exe contenuto del CD del programma fornito in dotazione con il prodotto.
N In alternativa, è possibile scaricare il file dal sito web www.samsung.com.
2. Installare SAMSUNG PC Share Manager come mostrato nelle figure sottostanti.
3. Una volta completata l’installazione, sul desktop verrà visualizzata l’icona PC Share Manager.
N Fare doppio clic sull’icona per avviare il programma.
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:51:19 PMItaliano - 44
❑ Condividi
Condivisione di una cartella
E’ possibile condividere una cartella del PC sul televisore.
Annullamento della condivisione di una cartella
E’ possibile annullare la condivisione di una cartella sul PC. Selezionare una cartella dal pannello Cartellacondivisa e selezionare
non condividere cartella.
Applicazione dwwelle impostazioni correnti
Eseguire questa operazione quando la sincronizzazione è necessaria a causa di una nuova cartella condivisa o dell’annullamento
di una condivisione. Il menu Imposta stato modificato applica i cambiamenti delle cartelle condivise ai dati memorizzati con il
programma di condivisione PC.
Dal momento che l’applicazione dei cambiamenti ai dati interni è un processo lungo, questa funzione permette agli utenti di
applicare le modifiche ai dati solo quando è necessario. Fino a quando il menu Imposta stato modificato non viene selezionato, le
modifiche alla cartella condivisa non verranno applicate al server. Le modifiche alle cartelle condivise non vengono
applicate al PC fino a quando non viene selezionato il menu Imposta stato modificato.
Impostazione dei permessi di accesso
Per abilitare il televisore a vedere il PC, il televisore deve essere impostato su Imposta politica dispositivo nella finestra Access
Permission Settings. Inoltre, il server del PC e il televisore devono appartenere alla stessa subnet.
• Metodo : Selezionare il menu condividi quindi selezionare Imposta politica dispositivo. Le voci rifiutate vengono rappresentate
in grigio. E’ possibile cambiare i permessi di accesso usando il tasto accetta / Nega. Per eliminare una voce, selezionarla e
selezionare elimina voce selezionata.
❑ Server
Server
E’ possibile eseguire o interrompere usando il PC come server.
Avviamento del server all’avvio di Windows
E’ possibile impostare il server del PC per essere eseguito automaticamente all’avvio di Windows.
Modifica nome server
È possibile rinominare il server del PC.
Uso della funzione DLNA
❑ Uso della funzione DLNA
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permette la riproduzione dei contenuti
memorizzati su un server DLNA (solitamente il PC) collegato al proprio televisore
tramite una rete. Media play permette la riproduzione di contenuti memorizzati su
un dispositivo USB collegato al televisore, mentre DLNA permette la riproduzione di
contenuti memorizzati su un server DLNA (PC) collegato al televisore tramite una rete.
Le procedure per l’uso dei contenuti sono uguali a quelle utilizzate con Media Play
(USB & DLNA).
1. Premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu DLNA.
2. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per selezionare una icona (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup),
quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.
N Per uscire dalla modalità DLNA, premere il tasto MEDIA.P sul telecomando.
N DLNA non supporta le seguenti funzioni.
- Le funzioni Musica di sottofondo e Impostazione musica di sottofondo.
- Ordinamento dei file in base alle preferenze nelle cartelle Foto, Musica e Film.
- La funzione Mod. gruppo.
- La funzione Copia / Elimina.
- La funzione Remove Safely.
- La funzioni dei tasti REW/FF (π/μ) durante la riproduzione di un filmato.
- Funzione Continua riproduzione filmato (Ripristina riproduzione).
N La funzione di passaggio a un altro fotogramma può non funzionare con alcuni container, ad esempio asf e mkv.
N Le didascalie incorporate, Divx DRM, Multi-audio, non sono supportate.
N Samsung PC Share Manager deve essere autorizzato dal programma firewall del PC.
N La funzione Skip (tasto ◄/►) o Pause potrebbe non funzionare durante la riproduzione di un filmato per DLNA di altri produttori,
in base al contenuto delle informazioni corrispondenti.
N Il tempo di riproduzione può non essere visualizzato durante la riproduzione di un filmato.
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Libero
Movie
USB Dispositivo Ritorno
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:51:20 PMItaliano - 45
Informazioni su Anynet+
Collegamento dei dispositivi Anynet
+
Anynet
+
è una funzione che permette di controllare mediante il telecomando del televisore Samsung tutti i dispositivi Samsung
collegati che supportano Anynet
+
. Il sistema Anynet
+
può essere usato solo con i dispositivi Samsung dotati della funzione Anynet
+
. Per
controllare se il dispositivo Samsung in uso è dotato di questa funzione, verificare la presenza del logo Anynet
+
.
❑ Per effettuare il collegamento a un televisore
1. Collegare il jack HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 o 4) del televisore al jack HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet
+
corrispondente tramite un cavo
HDMI.
❑ Per effettuare il collegamento a un sistema Home Theater
1. Collegare il jack [HDMI IN 1], [HDMI IN 2 (DVI)], [HDMI IN 3] o [HDMI IN 4] del televisore al jack HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet
+
corrispondente tramite un cavo HDMI.
2. Collegare il jack HDMI IN del sistema home theater al jack HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet
+
corrispondente tramite un cavo HDMI.
N Collegare il cavo ottico tra l’uscita Digital Audio Out (ottica) del televisore e l’ingresso Digital Audio Input del sistema Home Theater.
N Qualora si opti per una connessione di questo genere, la presa Ottica permette l’uscita di soli 2 canali audio. In questo modo non
sarà possibile sentire l’audio dall’altoparlante frontale sinistro e destro del sistema Home Theater e dal subwoofer. Per avere un
audio a 5.1 canali, collegare il jack Digital Audio Out (ottico) del lettore DVD o del decoder cavo/satellitare (es. Anynet Device 1 o 2)
direttamente a un amplificatore o all’Home Theater, non al televisore.
N Collegare solo un sistema Home Theater.
N E’ possibile collegare un dispositivo Anynet+ tramite un cavo HDMI 1.3. Alcuni cavi HDMI potrebbero non supportare le funzioni
Anynet .
N Anynet
+
si attiva solo quando il relativo dispositivo AV che supporta Anynet+ è acceso o in modalità Standby.
N Anynet
+
supporta fino a 12 dispositivi AV. Da notare che è possibile collegare fino a 3 dispositivi dello stesso tipo.
N Anynet
+
supporta fino a 3 dispositivi simultaneamente.
Dispositivo
Anynet
+
1
Dispositivo
Anynet
+
2
Dispositivo
Anynet
+
3
TV
Cavo HDMI 1.3
Cavo HDMI 1.3
Cavo HDMI 1.3
TV
Dispositivo Anynet
+
1
Dispositivo Anynet
+
2 Dispositivo Anynet
+
3
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Cavo HDMI 1.3
Cavo HDMI 1.3
Cavo HDMI 1.3
Home Theater
Cavo ottico
Dispositivo
Anynet
+
4
Cavo HDMI 1.3
Dispositivo Anynet
+
4
Cavo HDMI 1.3
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:51:21 PMItaliano - 46
Configurazione di Anynet
+
❑ Impostazione di Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
T Premere il tasto TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Strumenti.
E’ inoltre possibile visualizzare il menu Anynet+ selezionando Strumenti → Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) → Spento / Acceso
Per utilizzare la funzione Anynet
+
, Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) deve essere impostata su
Acceso.
N Quando la funzione Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) è disattivata, sono disattivate anche
tutte le funzioni relative a Anynet
+
.
Spegnimento auto → Acceso / Sì
Impostare lo spegnimento automatico di un dispositivo Anynet
+
allo spegnimento del
televisore.
N E’ necessario impostare la sorgente attiva sul telecomando del televisore in modo
che il televisore utilizzi la funzione Anynet
+
.
N Se si imposta Spegnimento auto su Sì, i dispositivi esterni collegati al televisore si
spengono ogniqualvolta si spegne il televisore. Se un dispositivo esterno è in fase di
registrazione, potrebbe non spegnersi automaticamente.
Passaggio da un dispositivo Anynet+ all’altro
1. Premere il tasto TOOLS. Premere il tasto ENTERE per selezionare Anynet
+
(HDMICEC).
2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Elenco dispositivi, quindi premere il tasto
ENTERE.
N Vengono elencati tutti i dispositivi Anynet
+
collegati al televisore. Se non si trova
il dispositivo desiderato, premere il tasto rosso per eseguire la scansione dei
dispositivi.
N Solo all’impostazione di Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) su Acceso nel menu Impostazione,
comparirà l’Elenco dispositivi.
3. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare un particolare dispositivo, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE. Il dispositivo selezionato
viene attivato.
N Il passaggio al dispositivo selezionato può richiedere fino a 2 minuti. Non è possibile annullare l’operazione durante il passaggio da
un dispositivo all’altro.
N Il tempo richiesto per la scansione dei dispositivi dipende dal numero di dispositivi collegati.
N Se si è selezionata una modalità di ingresso esterna tramite il tasto SOURCE, non sarà possibile utilizzare la funzione Anynet
+
.
Accertarsi di passare a un dispositivo esterno Anynet
+
utilizzando il tasto TOOLS.
❑ Menu Anynet
+
Il menu Anynet+ può variare a seconda del tipo e dello stato del dispositivo Anynet+ collegato al televisore.
Menu Anynet+ Descrizione
Visualizza TV La modalità Anynet
+
passa alla modalità di trasmissione TV.
Elenco dispositivi Visualizza l’elenco dei dispositivi Anynet
+
.
(nome_dispositivo) MENU Mostra i menu del dispositivo collegato. Ad esempio, se è collegato un registratore DVD, comparirà
il menu del disco del registratore DVD.
(nome_dispositivo)
INFO
Mostra i menu di riproduzione del dispositivo collegato. Ad esempio, se è collegato un registratore
DVD, comparirà il menu di riproduzione del registratore DVD.
Registrazione
(*registratore)
Avvia una registrazione (Questo menu è operativo solo per un dispositivo che supporta la
registrazione.)
(*registratore)
Prenota registrazione
Permette di prenotare una registrazione sul registratore
(Questa funzione è disponibile solo per i dispositivi che supportano la funzione di prenotazione.)
Interrompi registrazione:
(*registratore)
Interrompe la registrazione.
Ricevitore L’audio viene riprodotto attraverso il ricevitore.
Continua...
Applicazione
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)►
Content Library
Internet@TV
Centro rete dom
U Sposta EConf. R Ritorno
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) : On ▶
Spegnimento auto : Sì
U Sposta EConf. R Ritorno
Visualizza TV
Elenco dispositivi
Registrazione : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Ricevitore : On
Impostazione
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:51:22 PMItaliano - 47
❑ Tasti del telecomando disponibili in modalità Anynet
+
Tipo di dispositivo Stato operativo Tasti disponibili
Dispositivo Anynet+
Una volta attivato il dispositivo, quando
il menu del dispositivo corrispondente
appare sullo schermo.
Tasti numerici
▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE Tasti
colorati / tasto EXIT
Una volta attivato il dispositivo, quando
si riproduce un file
(Ricerca indietro) / (Ricerca avanti) (Interrompi) /
(Riproduci) / (Pausa)
Dispositivo con
sintonizzatore
incorporato
Una volta attivato il dispositivo, durante
la visione di un programma televisivo
Tasto P /
Dispositivo audio Una volta attivato il ricevitore
Tasto = /
Tasto M MUTE
N La funzione Anynet
+
è utilizzabile solo quando il telecomando è impostato su TV.
N Il tasto è attivo solo in fase di registrazione.
N Non è possibile gestire i dispositivi Anynet
+
utilizzando i pulsanti del televisore. I dispositivi Anynet
+
possono essere controllati solo
tramite il telecomando del televisore.
N In determinate condizioni, il telecomando del televisore potrebbe non funzionare. In questo caso, selezionare nuovamente il
dispositivo Anynet
+
.
N Le funzioni Anynet
+
non sono attive con prodotti di altre marche.
N Le operazioni , possono differire a seconda del dispositivo in uso.
N Se al sistema è collegato più di un dispositivo di registrazione, questi vengono visualizzati come (*registratore); in caso il dispositivo
collegato sia uno solo, verrà rappresentato come (*nome_dispositivo).
Registrazione
Con un videoregistratore Samsung è possibile registrare un programma televisivo.
1. Premere il tasto TOOLS. Premere il tasto ENTERE per selezionare Anynet+ (HDMICEC).
2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼per selezionare Registrazione, quindi premere il tasto
ENTERE. La registrazione ha inizio.
N Quando è presente più di un dispositivo di registrazione
Se sono collegati più dispositivi di registrazione, questi vengono elencati. Premere
il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare un particolare dispositivo, quindi premere il tasto
ENTERE. La registrazione ha inizio.
N Se un dispositivo di registrazione non è visualizzato
selezionare Elenco dispositivi e premere il tasto rosso per ricercarlo.
N Premendo il tasto si eseguirà la registrazione del programma attualmente visualizzato sul televisore. Se si sta guardando
l’immagine di un altro dispositivo, vengono registrate le immagini di quel dispositivo.
N Prima di registrare, controllare che il jack dell’antenna sia correttamente collegato al dispositivo di registrazione. Per collegare in
modo adeguato un’antenna a un dispositivo di registrazione, vedere il manuale dell’utente del dispositivo di registrazione in uso.
U Sposta EConf. R Ritorno
Visualizza TV
Elenco dispositivi
Registrazione : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Ricevitore : On
Impostazione
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:51:22 PMItaliano - 48
Ascolto tramite il ricevitore
È possibile ascoltare l’audio tramite un ricevitore anzichè dagli altoparlanti del televisore.
1. Premere il tasto TOOLS. Premere il tasto ENTERE per selezionare Anynet
+
(HDMICEC).
2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Ricevitore. Premere il tasto ◄ o ► per
selezionare On o Off.
N Se il ricevitore supporta solo l’audio, potrebbe non comparire nell’elenco dei dispositivi.
N Il ricevitore è operativo solo se è collegato in modo appropriato il jack Optical In del
ricevitore al jack Optical Out del televisore.
N Quando il ricevitore (home theater) è impostato su On, è possibile udire l’audio
proveniente dall’uscita ottica del televisore. Quando il televisore visualizza un segnale DTV (air), invia l’audio a 5.1 canali al
ricevitore Home Theater. Se la sorgente è un componente digitale, come per es. un DVD, ed è collegata al televisore mediante
HDMI, saranno udibili solo 2 canali audio dal ricevitore Home Theater.
N Utilizzando la funzione Media Play, l’audio potrebbe non essere emesso correttamente attraverso il ricevitore.
N Durante l’ascolto tramite il ricevitore, vi sono alcune restrizioni nell’uso dei menu relativi all’audio.
N Nel caso di una interruzione di corrente al televisore quando il menu Ricevitore è impostato su On la funzione Seleziona
altoparlante può essere impostata su Altoparlante esterno alla riaccensione del televisore. (vedere pag. 21)
Risoluzione dei problemi con Anynet
+
Sintomo Soluzione
Anynet
+
non funziona. • Controllare se si sta utilizzando un dispositivo Anynet
+
.
Il sistema Anynet
+
può essere utilizzato solo con dispositivi che supportano Anynet+.
• Collegare un solo ricevitore (home theater).
• Controllare che il cavo di alimentazione di Anynet+ sia correttamente collegato.
• Controllare i collegamenti dei cavi Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3 del dispositivo Anynet+.
• Verificare che Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) sia impostato su Acceso nel menu Impostazione di
Anynet
+
.
• Verificare che il telecomando del televisore sia in modalità TV.
• Verificare che sia Anynet
+
la modalità esclusiva del telecomando.
• In particolari condizioni, Anynet
+
non funziona.
(Ricerca canali, Media Play, Plug & Play, ecc.)
• Quando si collega o si rimuove il cavo HDMI 1.3, eseguire una nuova ricerca dei dispositivi
oppure spegnere e riaccendere il tel evisore.
• Verificare che la funzione Anynet
+
del dispositivo Anynet
+
sia impostata su Acceso.
Per avviare Anynet
+.
. • Verificare che il dispositivo Anynet
+
sia collegato correttamente al televisore e che Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) sia impostato su Acceso nel menu Impostazione di Anynet
+
.
• Premere il tasto TV sul telecomando per passare al controllo del televisore. Premere il tasto
TOOLS per visualizzare il menu Anynet+ e selezionare il menu desiderato.
Per uscire da Anynet
+
. • Selezionare Visualizza TV nel menu Anynet
+
.
• Premere il tasto SOURCE sul telecomando del televisore e selezionare un dispositivo non
Anynet
+
(Notare che il tasto dei canali funziona solo se non è collegato un dispositivo Anynet
+
con sintonizzatore incorporato.)
Sullo schermo viene
visualizzato il messaggio
Connecting to Anynet
+
device
• Non è possibile utilizzare il telecomando durante la configurazione di Anynet
+
o passare a
un’altra modalità di visualizzazione.
• Utilizzare il telecomando solo al termine dell’impostazione di Anynet
+
o del passaggio alla
nuova modalità di visualizzazione.
Non è possibile avviare la
riproduzione del dispositivo
Anynet
+
.
• Non è possibile utilizzare la funzione di riproduzione mentre è in corso la funzione Plug &
Play.
Lo schermo del dispositivo
esterno non appare.
• Controllare se il dispositivo supporta le funzioni Anynet
+
.
• Verificare che il cavo HDMI 1.3 sia collegato correttamente.
• Verificare che Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) sia impostato su On nel menu Impostazione di Anynet
+
.
• Cercare altri dispositivi Anynet
+
.
• E’ possibile collegare un dispositivo Anynet
+
solo tramite un cavo HDMI 1.3. Alcuni cavi HDMI
potrebbero non supportare le funzioni Anynet
+
.
• In caso di chiusura anomala, a causa di uno scollegamento del cavo HDMI, del cavo di
alimentazione oppure di una interruzione di corrente, ripetere la ricerca del dispositivo.
Il programma TV non può
essere registrato.
• Verificare che il jack dell’antenna sul dispositivo di registrazione sia correttamente collegato.
L’audio del televisore non
viene riprodotto attraverso il
ricevitore
• Collegare il televisore e il ricevitore mediante il cavo ottico.
U Sposta EConf. R Ritorno
Visualizza TV
Elenco dispositivi
Registrazione : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Ricevitore : On
Impostazione
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:51:23 PMItaliano - 49
Attivazione della modalità Content Library
Content Library permette di visualizzare o riprodurre contenuti già predisposti sul
televisore o memorizzati su un dispositivo USB.
1. Premere il tasto MENU. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Applicazione, quindi
premere ENTERE.
2. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Content Library, quindi premere ENTERE.
Viene visualizzato il menu principale Content Library.
O Premere CONTENT sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu principale Content
Library.
3. Premere ◄ o ► per selezionare una icona (Galleria, Cucina, Bambini, Benessere,
Altro, Gestione contenuti), quindi premere ENTERE.
N Vengono riprodotti gli elementi selezionati.
❑ Uso dei tasti del telecomando nel menu Content Library
Tasto Operazioni
▲/▼/◄/► Sposta il cursore e seleziona un elemento.
ENTERE Attiva la voce attualmente selezionata.
RETURN Torna al menu precedente.
EXIT Arresta la funzione corrente e torna al menu principale di Content Library.
Tasti Colorati I tasti che attivano le funzioni sono descritti nella pagina corrispondente.
Questa barra serve per regolare il volume del contenuto riprodotto.
CONTENT Attiva o disattiva la modalità Content Library.
N Premendo il tasto Volume o MMUTE, non verrà visualizzato alcun OSD, ma la funzione verrà regolarmente eseguita.
N Per tornare alla modalità TV, premere il tasto P del telecomando.
N CONTENT LIBRARY CONTIENE TESTO, GRAFICA, IMMAGINI, CONTENUTI MULTIMEDIALI E ALTRI MATERIALI
UNICAMENTE PER USO INFORMATIVO E PROMOZIONALE. I MATERIALI CONTENUTI IN CONTENT LIBRARY
SONO IN CONTINUO AGGIORNAMENTO. I MATERIALI CONTENUTI IN CONTENT LIBRARY POTREBBERO NON
ESSERE IDONEI AD ALCUNE FASCE DI PUBBLICO.
N LE INFORMAZIONI CONTENUTE IN CONTENT LIBRARY SONO FORNITE “COSÌ COME SONO”. NONOSTANTE
LE INFORMAZIONI FORNITE NELLA CONTENT LIBRARY SIANO STATE OTTENUTE O RICAVATE DA FONTI
RITENUTE AFFIDABILI, SAMSUNG NON GARANTISCE LA PRECISIONE, LA VALIDITA’, LA PUNTUALITA’ O LA
COMPLETEZZA DI QUALSIASI INFORMAZIONE O DATO FORNITO PER QUALSIASI SCOPO SPECIFICO.
IN NESSUNA CIRCOSTANZA, INCLUSA NEGLIGENZA, SAMSUNG POTRA’ ESSERE RITENUTA RESPONSABILE,
SIA PER CONTRATTO SIA PER ILLECITO, DI EVENTUALI DANNI DIRETTI, INCIDENTALI, SPECIALI
OCONSEQUENZIALI, PARCELLE LEGALI, SPESE O QUALSIASI ALTRO DANNO DI QUALSIVOGLIA NATURA
POSSA DERIVARE, O ESSERE ASSOCIATO, ALLE INFORMAZIONI CONTENUTE IN, O ALL’USO DELLA CONTENT
LIBRARY, ANCHE SE IL POSSIBILE VERIFICARSI DI TALI DANNI SIA STATO RESO NOTO.
Content Library
Applicazione
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Content Library
Internet@TV
Centro rete dom
< >
Cucina Bambini
Galleria
Galleria
Content Library
Benessere Altro
Ritorno Esci
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:51:24 PMItaliano - 50
Uso di Content Library
❑ Galleria
Questa funzione consente di riprodurre uno Slide Show con immagini ad alta risoluzione e musica di sottofondo.
Usando la funzione Galleria del televisore, è possibile cambiare l’atmosfera del proprio ambiente.
N Premere INFO per vedere il nome dell’artista e informazioni dettagliate in lingua inglese relative a ogni immagine visualizzata
(attualmente, le informazioni sono fornite solo in lingua inglese).
N E’ possibile interrompere temporaneamente la proiezione di diapositive premendo il tasto ENTERE.
N I copyright dei contenuti della sezione Galleria e tutte le informazioni ad essi relative sono di proprietà di Timespace / JoongAng
M&B, Inc.
❑ Cucina
Mediante questa funzione è possibile visualizzare diverse ricette da seguire passo passo. Questi contenuti potranno fornire agli
utenti ottime idee per pranzi e cene.
N Le ricette contenute nella sezione Cucina consultabili sul televisore Samsung si basano su ricette pubblicate da Anness
Publishing.
N I copyright dei contenuti della sezione Cucina e tutte le informazioni ad essi relative sono di proprietà di Practical Pictures.
❑ Bambini
Questo è un contenuto educativo e interattivo che i bambini possono vedere più volte. Con le storie, le canzoni, i giochi e i
personaggi Boowa e Kwala, il divertimento è assicurato.
N I copyright dei contenuti della sezione Bambini e tutte le informazioni ad essi relative sono di proprietà di UpToTen.
❑ Benessere
Questo contenuto è dedicato al mantenimento della forma fisica e mostra esercizi di stretching e relax che possono essere utilizzati
da tutta la famiglia.
❑ Gestione contenuti
Conten personali
L’uso dei contenuti è uguali a quello dei contenuti della memoria del televisore. Inoltre, i contenuti personali possono essere
cancellati.
USB
E’ possibile scaricare i contenuti su una memoria USB per poi riprodurli sul televisore. I contenuti del dispositivo USB esterno
vengono riprodotti direttamente.
N Content Library supporta dispositivi USB MSC (Mass Storage Class). MSC è un dispositivo di memorizzazione di massa BulkOnly Transport. Esempi di MSC sono le unità Thumb e i Flash Card Reader (le unità HDD USB e HUB non sono supportate).
N La riproduzione di alcuni giochi mediante un dispositivo di memorizzazione USB esterno consente di salvare i giochi (in base
al tipo di gioco utilizzato). Prestare attenzione quando si rimuove il dispositivo USB mentre si salvano i dati poiché ciò potrebbe
causare la perdita dei dati.
N Scaricamento di nuovi contenuti
Nuovi contenuti diversi da quelli inclusi nel prodotto possono essere scaricati dal sito web Samsung.com a titolo gratuito. Per
poter scaricare contenuti a pagamento, è necessario disporre del numero UDN. Verificare il numero UDN prima di scaricare un
nuovo contenuto.
1. Accedere al sito www.samsung.com.
2. Selezionare un contenuto nella pagina Content Download (Download contenuti).
3. Scaricare il contenuto sul dispositivo USB.
4. assare al menu principale Content Library premendo il tasto CONTENT o scegliendo (Menu → Application → Content
Library).
5. Collegare il dispositivo USB alla porta USB sul lato del televisore.
6. E’ possibile vedere le voci secondarie dei contenuti scaricati.
7. Selezionare un contenuto e premere il tasto ENTER.
8. E’ possibile riprodurre il contenuto selezionato.
Impostazione
• Durata salvaschermo → 10 min. / 20 min. / 40 min. / 1 ore
Selezionare questa opzione per impostare il tempo di attesa prima che il salvaschermo entri in funzione.
• Salva UDN (Unique Device Number)
Il numero di 18 cifre sullo schermo rappresenta il codice del prodotto.
E’ possibile salvare l’UDN sulla memoria USB.
N Un dispositivo USB in formato NTFS non supporta la memorizzazione UDN.
Si consiglia di usare un dispositivo USB formattato FAT.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:51:24 PMItaliano - 51
E’ possibile utilizzare vari servizi internet contenenti utili contenuti informativi e di intrattenimento.
In caso di problemi nell’uso di un servizio widget, contattare il fornitore del contenuto. In widget, premere il tasto verde per le
informazioni di contatto, oppure visitare la guida del sito web per reperire informazioni sul provider del servizio widget.
N In base alla regione, il servizio widget potrebbe essere supportato solo in lingua inglese.
N Questa funzione potrebbe non essere supportata dal paese di residenza.
Guida introduttiva di Internet@TV
Grazie a Yahoo!® Widget Engine, Internet@TV permette un’esperienza web e TV interattiva. E’ possibile controllare i titoli finanziari,
condividere fotografie con amici e parenti, apprendere notizie di cronache e consultare il meteo attraverso il servizio Internet@TV del
televisore.
N Se la condizione della rete non è stabile, questa funzione potrebbe non funzionare. In questo caso, il televisore si spegnerà
automaticamente. In caso contrario, spegnere il televisore premendo il tasto Power.
N Durante l’uso di questa funzione si potrebbe verificare una certa lentezza operativa a causa delle condizioni della rete.
Quando si esegue Internet@TV per la prima volta, le impostazioni di base vengono applicate automaticamente.
N Questo primo passaggio è relativo alla configurazione della rete. Per ulteriori informazioni sulla configurazione di rete, vedere
‘Impostazione della rete’.
N Una volta impostata la rete, attraverso il software Internet@TV sarà possibile procedere con l’installazione guidata.
Internet@TV
Tutti i contenuti e i servizi accessibili attraverso il presente apparecchio appartengono a terzi e sono protetti dalle leggi in materia di diritto d’autore,
brevetti, marchi e/o altre leggi in materia di proprietà intellettuale. Tali contenuti e servizi sono forniti esclusivamente per un Suo uso personale e
non commerciale. Lei non può utilizzare alcun contenuto o servizio in modi non autorizzati dal proprietario del contenuto o dal fornitore del servizio.
In particolare, Lei non potrà modificare, copiare, ripubblicare, caricare, pubblicare, trasmettere, tradurre, vendere, creare opere derivate, sfruttare o
distribuire in qualunque modo o con qualunque mezzo alcun contenuto o servizio visualizzato attraverso il presente apparecchio senza l’espressa
autorizzazione del relativo proprietario del contenuto o fornitore del sevizio.
IL CONTENUTO ED I SERVIZI DI TERZI SONO FORNITI “COSÌ COME SONO”. SAMSUNG NON GARANTISCE IL CONTENUTO O I SERVIZI
COSÌ FORNITI, NÉ ESPRESSAMENTE NE’ IMPLICITAMENTE, PER QUALSIASI SCOPO. SAMSUNG ESCLUDE ESPRESSAMENTE
QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA, INCLUSE, A TITOLO ESEMPLIFICATIVO, LE GARANZIE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ O IDONEITÀ PER
UNO SCOPO SPECIFICO. SAMSUNG NON GARANTISCE L’ACCURATEZZA, VALIDITÀ, TEMPESTIVITÀ, LEGALITÀ O COMPLETEZZA DI
QUALSIASI CONTENUTO O SERVIZIO RESO DISPONIBILE ATTRAVERSO IL PRESENTE APPARECCHIO, E IN NESSUN CASO, INCLUSO
IL CASO DI COLPA, FERMO RESTANDO QUANTO PREVISTO ALL’ART. 1229 DEL CODICE CIVILE, SAMSUNG SARÀ RESPONSABILE, SIA
PER RESPONSABILITÀ CONTRATTUALE CHE EXTRACONTRATTUALE, PER QUALSIASI DANNO DIRETTO, INDIRETTO, INCIDENTALE,
SPECIALE O CONSEQUENZIALE, PER GLI ONORARI DI AVVOCATO, SPESE, LUCRO CESSANTE O QUALUNQUE ALTRO DANNO
DERIVANTE DA, O RELATIVO A, QUALSIASI INFORMAZIONE CONTENUTA IN, O CONSEGUENZA DELL’UTILIZZO DI, QUALUNQUE
CONTENUTO O DEL SERVIZIO DA PARTE SUA O DA PARTE DI TERZI, ANCHE SE AL CORRENTE DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI..
I servizi di terzi possono essere terminati o interrotti in qualsiasi momento, e Samsung non dichiara né garantisce che qualsiasi contenuto o servizio
rimarrà disponibile per un certo periodo di tempo. I contenuti e i servizi sono trasmessi da terzi attraverso reti e apparecchiature di trasmissione sulle
quali Samsung non ha alcun controllo. Senza che ciò limiti quanto detto sopra, Samsung esclude espressamente ogni tipo di responsabilità per
qualsiasi interruzione o sospensione di qualsiasi contenuto o servizio reso disponibile attraverso il presente apparecchio. Samsung non è nemmeno
in alcun modo responsabile per il servizio assistenza clienti relativo ai contenuti e servizi. Qualsiasi domanda o richiesta di servizio relativa ai
contenuti o ai servizi dovrebbe essere fatta direttamente ai relativi fornitori di contenuti e servizi.
1. Premere il tasto MENU. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Application, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.
2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Internet@TV, quindi premere il tasto ENTERE.
N INTERNET@TV viene avviato.
O Premere il tasto Internet@ sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu
INTERNET@TV.
3. Viene visualizzata la schermata General Disclaimer. Selezionare I accept o I
do not accept.
N Per ulteriori informazioni sulla General Disclaimer, fare riferimento all ‘Legal
Notice’.
4. La ‘schermata di benvenuto’ rappresenta la pagina iniziale dell’impostazione
guidata di Internet@TV.
N Selezionando Exit Setup, questo passaggio viene ripreso alla pressione del
tasto INTERNET@.
N Selezionare Let’s get started!
5. La scelta del paese permette agli widget TV di utilizzare un contenuto localizzato
nella lingua locale.
N Selezionare il paese nell’elenco visualizzato.
6. L’accettazione della Privacy Policy di Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine è necessaria per utilizzare Internet@TV.
N Selezionare OK, I Accept.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:51:25 PMItaliano - 52
7. L’accettazione dei Terms of Service del servizio di Yahoo!® TV Widget System è necessaria per utilizzare Internet@TV.
N Selezionare OK, I Accept.
8. Digitare il proprio nome per impostare il profilo. Ogni profilo ha un elenco di widget.
E’ possibile creare un profilo per ogni persona che utilizza Internet@TV.
N Immettere il nome e selezionare Save this name.
N Per maggiori informazioni vedere a ‘Using the Profile Widget’.
9. Internet@TV testa la connessione di rete.
N Se il test della connessione di rete ha esito negativo, configurare di nuovo la
rete.
N Per maggiori informazioni vedere a ‘Network Setup.’
10. L’impostazione guidata è ora completa. Di seguito verrà visualizzato un tutorial
sull’uso di Internet@TV.
N Selezionare Continue per visualizzare il tutorial.
N Selezionare Exit setup per iniziare a usare Internet@TV.
N Per eseguire il tutorial di nuovo, selezionare Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial.
11. Premere INTERNET@ sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu Internet@TV.
❑ Schermo
Dock mode
1 Sullo schermo verrà visualizzato un banner di benvenuto con il nome del
proprio profilo nell’angolo in alto a destra.
N Questo banner scompare dopo pochi secondi.
2 Il banner evidenzia due tasti di scelta rapida sul telecomando.
N Premendo il tasto blu (Viewport) del telecomando, il display passa
dalla modalità ‘Viewport’ alla modalità ‘Overlay’ e viceversa.
In modalità Viewport, il televisore o il video viene visualizzato con
un’area in scala ridotta e con la grafica all’esterno. In modalità overlay,
la grafica viene visualizzata
al di sopra della visualizzazione del televisore o del video.
N Premendo il tasto giallo (Edit Snippet) del telecomando, verrà
visualizzata una finestra di guida e lo snippet selezionato potrà essere
modificato.
3 Premere il tasto INTERNET@ del telecomando per iniziare.
N L’elenco orizzontale in fondo alla schermata del televisore è denominato ‘dock’.
N Gli elementi dell’elenco sono denominati ‘snippet’.
N Uno snippet è un collegamento che attiva un widget del televisore.
N Un widget del televisore è un’applicazione internet da eseguire sul televisore.
N Scorrere da uno snippet all’altro premendo i tasti ◄ o ► del telecomando.
N L’elemento selezionato è situato nella zona più a sinistra (evidenziato in blu).
N Il dock scorre gli snippet sotto il punto focale.
N Avviare un widget TV premendo il tasto ENTERE sul telecomando quando lo snippet è in evidenza.
N Quando si aggiungono snippet, questi formano un insieme all’interno del quale è possibile navigare premendo il tasto ▲ o ▼.
N Nel dock vengono visualizzati due widget TV speciali : Profile Widget e Gallery Widget. Questi non possono essere
eliminati.
N Il dock scorrerà fuori della schermata dopo un determinato periodo di tempo.
Modalità Sidebar
1 Selezionare uno snippet e premere il tasto ENTERE per attivare la
barra laterale degli widget. Il logo TV Widget e Home ( ) sono situati
nella parte superiore della barra laterale.
2 Il menu corrente è visualizzato sotto il logo TV Widget.
N Per tornare alla schermata precedente, selezionarla e premere il tasto
ENTERE.
N E’ possibile inoltre premere il tasto RETURN del telecomando.
3 La selezione corrente è sempre evidenziata in blu. Il tasto evidenziato è
selezionato e viene attivato premendo ENTERE.
4 Qualora vi siano molti dati, viene utilizzata una suddivisione a pagine.
N Vengono visualizzate la pagina corrente e le pagine totali.
N Scorrere le pagine mediante il tasto ◄ o ►.
5 La barra degli strumenti inferiore comprende i tasti colorati corrispondenti ai tasti rosso, verde, giallo e blu del telecomando.
• Tasto rosso : Chiude il widget.
• Tasto verde : Cambia le impostazioni del widget.
• Tasto giallo : Gestisce gli snippet.
• Tasto blu : Dimensiona il video per adattarlo o renderlo a pieno schermo.
N Alcuni tasti potrebbero non essere disponibili a seconda del widget.
.@# áëí space
a b c d e f g h i
j k l m n o p q r
s t u v w x y z 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:51:26 PMItaliano - 53
Modificare gli snippet nel dock
1. Per modificare uno snippet selezionarlo nel dock e premere il tasto giallo.
2. Lo snippet si porta in seconda posizione e la sua immagine scorre per mostrare il testo di aiuto :
• Delete (tasto rosso) : Rimuove il widget.
N Gli widget eliminati possono essere ripristinati usando la Widget Gallery.
• Move (tasto blu) : Riordina lo snippet. Premere il tasto ◄ o ►per scorrere. Premere il tasto giallo per spostarlo in una nuova
posizione.
• Done (tasto giallo) : Esce dal menu Edit Snippet.
Uso del widget Profile
Il widget Profile configura il profilo dell’utente. E’ possibile impostare più profili, mantenendo per ognuno il
proprio elenco di widget.
Il menu Switch Profile permette di passare da un profilo utente all’altro.
N È necessario registrare almeno due profili. Se si desidera aggiungere un profilo, vedere
‘Administrative Controls’.
Il menu Profile Settings permette di personalizzare e proteggere i profili.
• I profili utenti possono essere personalizzati mediante un Name e un Avatar (una immagine usata
per rappresentare il profilo) univoci.
• Il Name e l’Avatar del profilo vengono visualizzati nello snippet del profilo del dock.
• I profili possono essere protetti mediante Create Profile PIN.
N Quando si imposta il PIN per la prima volta, è possibile impostare una domanda di sicurezza.
Il menu Profile Settings può limitare l’accesso agli widget.
• Nel caso si dimentichi il proprio Profile PIN è possibile rispondere a una Security Question
associata al profilo.
• Un profilo che abbia attivo il Limit Profile non permetterà l’installazione di nuovi widget.
N Per utilizzare questa funzione, è necessario impostare il PIN del titolare. Per impostare il PIN, vedere ‘Administrative Controls’.
Il menu System Settings permette di :
• Cambiare Location e impostare il proprio Zip Code (solo USA) per attivare il contenuto locale.
• Repeat Tutorial mostrato durante l’impostazione guidata.
• Restore Factory Settings per eliminare tutte le configurazioni degli widget e le informazioni.
Nel menu Administrative Controls è possibile :
• Impostare l’intervallo di Screen Saver per evitare le bruciature dello schermo.
• Selezionare Create Owner PIN e impostare la Security Question per controllare gli atri profili.
• Create crea un nuovo Profile che può essere configurato con diversi gruppi di widget.
• Rimuovere un profilo esistente.
Dal widget Profile è possibile eseguire Sign in to Yahoo!® usando il proprio ID di Yahoo!
• Se si possiede un ID di Yahoo!, è possibile accedere ai contenuti personalizzati mediante gli widget TV di Yahoo!.
• All Yahoo!® Gli widget TV installati vengono automaticamente attivati insieme all’ ID del profilo di Yahoo!.
• Se non si dispone di un account Yahoo!, visitare il sito www.yahoo.com e creare un account.
• Potrebbe non essere possibile accedere con un ID creato sul sito web di Yahoo! in un paese che non supporti Internet@TV.
❑ Informazioni sul widget Profile
Premere il tasto verde.
È possibile visualizzare una breve descrizione degli widget Profile, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service e Privacy Policy.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:51:26 PMItaliano - 54
Uso di Yahoo!® Widget Gallery
Utilizzare Yahoo!® Widget Gallery per aggiungere ulteriori widget al proprio televisore.
Visualizzare tutti gli widget TV disponibili nelle seguenti categorie :
• Latest Widgets : Visualizza gli widget aggiornati di recente.
• Yahoo!® Widgets : Visualizza gli widget forniti da Yahoo!®.
• Samsung Widgets : Visualizza gli widget forniti da Samsung.
• Altre categorie : Visualizza tutti gli Add Widget to My Profile per categoria.
N Per installare un widget, accedere alla schermata dei dettagli e selezionare Install Widget e
premere il tasto ENTERE. Il widget viene quindi installato e diventa disponibile nel dock.
❑ Impostazioni di Widget Gallery
Premere il tasto verde.
About Yahoo! Widget Gallery...
È possibile visualizzare brevi informazioni su Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of
Service, e Privacy Policy.
Nel menu Developer Settings è possibile creare i propri widget personali. Per maggiori
informazioni sulla creazione di widget personalizzati, visitare il sito web di sviluppo
http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/
Uso di Yahoo!® Weather Widget
Yahoo!® Weather Widget fornisce aggiornamenti sulla situazione meteo locale o preferita. Questo
contenuto cambia dinamicamente in base alle condizioni climatiche.
• Premere il tasto verde del telecomando per visualizzare il menu Yahoo!® Weather Widget Settings.
• Nel menu Settings è possibile aggiungere o eliminare una città per la quale si desidera visualizzare
la situazione meteo.
Nel menu Settings :
• Add New City digitando il nome di una città. Una volta visualizzati i risultati della ricerca,
selezionare la città desiderata e premere il tasto ENTERE.
• Delete City selezionando la città da eliminare dall’elenco delle città. Premere ENTERE per
confermare l’eliminazione.
• Modifica della modalità Temperature Indication.
È possibile modificare la modalità di indicazione della temperatura da Imperial a Metric e
viceversa. Ad esempio, Imperial mostrerà la temperatura in gradi Fahrenheit mentre Metric in gradi
Centigradi.
❑ Creare uno snippet per una città preferita
• Selezionare la città nella home page del widget Yahoo!® Weather e visualizzare le informazioni meteo.
• Premere il tasto giallo.
• Selezionare il menu Add Snippet e premere ENTERE per aggiungere la città come snippet.
❑ Delete elimina lo snippet di una città
• Avviare lo snippet.
• Premere il tasto giallo.
• Selezionare il menu Delete Snippet e premere il tasto ENTERE per eliminarlo.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:51:27 PMItaliano - 55
Uso del widget Yahoo!® News
Il widget Yahoo!® News fornisce le ultime notizie su economia, intrattenimenti, politica, sport,
avvenimenti di interesse generale e molte altre categorie.
Selezionare una categoria, un argomento all’interno di una categoria e visualizzare il riepilogo delle
notizie aggiornato dinamicamente.
Uso del widget Yahoo!® Flickr
Il widget Flickr fornisce un accesso alle fotografie preferite di amici e parenti durante la visione del
televisore. Ora è possibile condividere le immagini con la famiglia sullo schermo del televisore come
una proiezione di diapositive.
• Personalizzare il widget Flickr collegandosi al proprio ID di Yahoo!
• Per le procedure di accesso dettagliate, fare riferimento alle istruzioni ‘Uso del widget Profile’.
• Per ulteriori informazioni su Flickr, visitare il sito www.flickr.com.
N Your Photos mostra le fotografie registrate sul sito web con Flickr.
Per visualizzare le fotografie Flickr in una proiezione di diapositive :
• Selezionare una miniatura di una foto e premere il tasto ENTERE per visualizzare i dettagli
della fotografia.
• Selezionare Start Slideshow e premere il tasto ENTERE.
Per controllare la visualizzazione della proiezione di diapositive :
• Premere il tasto ENTERE durante la proiezione.
• Le miniature delle fotografie vengono visualizzate nella parte bassa dello schermo.
N Quando il controllo della proiezione di diapositive viene visualizzato, è possibile utilizzare i
comandi Pause, Play e Stop.
N Selezionando il menu e premendo il tasto ENTERE, è possibile visualizzare le informazioni della fotografia selezionata.
• Il menu Your Setspermette di visualizzare le fotografie classificate in Flickr.
• Il menu Explore permette di esplorare le fotografie presentate sul sito web Flickr. Si possono visualizzare le foto aggiornate ogni
giorno.
• Il menu Mark as Favorite o Remove From Favorite sposta le fotografie nella cartella Favorite Photos o le rimuove.
• Il menu Favorite Photos permette di visualizzare le fotografie classificate come preferite.
• Il menu Your Contacts permette di visualizzare gli aggiornamenti inseriti da parenti e amici.
Il menu Your Groups permette di selezionare i gruppi preferiti nel sito web Flickr per condividere le fotografie con la comunità di
utenti Flickr.
Per configurare le impostazioni del widget Yahoo!® Flickr premere il tasto verde del telecomando.
• Il menu Time Per Slide controlla la velocità di riproduzione della proiezione di diapositive.
• Il menu Repeat ripeterà la proiezione dall’inizio dopo l’ultima fotografia.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:51:28 PMItaliano - 56
Uso del widget Yahoo!® Finance
Con il widget Yahoo!® Finance è possibile visualizzare le ultime notizie di borsa. Premere il tasto verde
per impostare le proprie azioni.
Usare il menu Add New Symbol per inserire il nome di un nuovo titolo.
• Selezionare il titolo da aggiungere nei risultati di ricerca, quindi il menu Add Symbol e premere il
tasto ENTERE.
N Il titolo selezionato viene aggiunto all’elenco My Stocks
• Usare il menu Import Symbols From Yahoo!® per recuperare il proprio portfolio Yahoo!® Finance.
- Il menu Merge Symbols unisce i simboli del widget Yahoo!® Finance ai simboli presenti nel
proprio portfolio.
- Il menu Replace Symbols elimina i simboli del widget Yahoo!® Finance e li sostituisce con i
simboli presenti nel proprio portfolio.
• Usare il menu Display Format per modificare la transizione della fluttuazione delle quotazioni in
Value o Percentage.
• Creare uno snippet per un titolo preferito.
- Selezionare il simbolo del titolo nella home page del widget Yahoo!® Finance
e visualizzare le quotazioni dettagliate.
- Premere il tasto giallo.
- Selezionare il menu Add Snippet e premere ENTERE per aggiungere il titolo
come snippet.
• Delete elimina uno snippet
- Avviare lo snippet dal dock.
- Premere il tasto giallo.
- Selezionare il menu Delete Snippet e premere il tasto ENTERE per eliminarlo.
Risoluzione dei problemi con internet@TV
Problema Possibile soluzione
Alcuni servizi widget non
funzionano.
• Verificare il servizio con il fornitore.
• In widget, premere il tasto verde per le informazioni di contatto, oppure visitare la guida del
sito web per reperire informazioni sul provider del servizio.
• Vedere la guida sulla pagina del sito web.
Alcuni contenuti degli widget
sono solo in Inglese. Come
posso cambiare la lingua?
• La lingua del contenuto del widget può essere diversa dalla lingua di interfaccia utente del
widget. Ciò può dipendere dal fornitore del servizio.
Dopo un ripristino ai valori
preimpostati, il servizio Yahoo
Widget non funziona e compare
un messaggio di avviso.
• Dopo un ripristino ai valori preimpostati, il servizio Yahoo Widget non funziona e compare un
messaggio di avviso.
Nel widget Flickr, ho effettuato
l’accesso al mio account.
Tuttavia, non riesco a
visualizzare le mie foto.
• Visitare il sito web Yahoo e attivare l’account con il proprio ID Yahoo!.
Nel widget Profile ho cambiato
l’area, ma sono rimaste le
impostazioni precedenti.
• Spegnere e riaccendere il televisore. Quindi riavviare Internet@TV.
• Ora potrete usufruire dei servizi widget supportati nella nuova area..
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:51:28 PMItaliano - 57
Guida Sito web
Nazione Sito web
Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Belgium
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Switzerland www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N L’accesso potrebbe subire modifiche.
N Potrebbero esservi link diversi per determinati paesi.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:51:28 PMItaliano - 58
N Questa funzione potrebbe non essere supportata dal paese di residenza.
N In caso di problemi nell’uso di un servizio widget, contattare il fornitore del contenuto.
In widget, premere il tasto verde per le informazioni di contatto, oppure visitare la guida del sito web per reperire informazioni sul
provider del servizio widget.
N In base alla regione, il servizio widget potrebbe essere supportato solo in lingua inglese.
Guida introduttiva di Internet@TV
Internet@TV fornisce i servizi widget di SAMSUNG attraverso una connessione di rete. I contenuti Internet@TV potrebbero subire
modifiche da parte del provider del servizio. Grazie al servizio Internet@TV è possibile accedere a varie informazione fornite per es.
da YouTube.
N Se il televisore non supporta i caratteri di un contenuto fornito dal content provider, il contenuto potrebbe non essere visualizzato
correttamente.
N La configurazione dei widget e dei relativi servizi forniti può variare a seconda del paese. Dopo la modifica del paese, spegnere e
riaccendere il televisore.
A questo punto è possibile utilizzare il servizio widget supportato dal paese. Se il Paese è impostato su Altro, il televisore non può
riconoscere il paese. In questo caso, selezionarlo direttamente dall’elenco dei paesi del servizio.
N Per maggiori informazioni sulla configurazione del paese, vedere le istruzioni alla sezione ‘Funzioni Plug & Play’.
N Durante l’uso di questa funzione si potrebbe verificare una certa lentezza operativa
a causa delle condizioni della rete.
N Prima di utilizzare Internet@TV, impostare la rete. Per ulteriori informazioni sulla configurazione di rete, vedere ‘Impostazione rete’.
Quando si esegue Internet@TV per la prima volta, le impostazioni di base vengono applicate automaticamente. L’aggiornamento
potrebbe richiedere alcuni minuti.
1. Premere il tasto MENU. Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Applicazione,
quindi premere ENTERE.
2. Premere il tasto ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Internet@TV, quindi premere ENTERE.
O Premere il tasto INTERNET@ sul telecomando per visualizzare il menu
Internet@TV.
3. Viene visualizzata la sezione Accordo utente. Selezionare Accetto per accettare
i termini contenuti nell’accordo.
4. Viene visualizzata la sezione Statistiche e analisi. Selezionare Accetto per accettare
i termini contenuti nell’accordo.
Configurazione di Internet@TV
E’ possibile verificare e utilizzare i menu relativi a Single Sign On (SSO), gestione del sistema e proprietà.
Premere ▲ o ▼ per selezionare Impostazione, quindi premere ENTERE.
❑ Single Sign On
E’ possibile usare questo menu in fase di creazione o eliminazione di un account.
Mediante Single Sign On, è possibile controllare l’account e le informazioni ad esso relative sul sito del contenuto. Non è
necessario effettuare un nuovo login.
N L’account è valido solo per internet@TV.
Crea account
E’ possibile creare un account per il collegamento al sito del servizio desiderato.
N E’ possibile creare fino a 10 account.
N Il numero massimo di caratteri utilizzabili per l’account è 10.
N Se non vi sono servizi che richiedono di effettuare il login, non sarà necessario creare un account.
Gestione account
• Sito del servizio : E’ possibile memorizzare le informazioni per eseguire il login sul sito del servizio (per es. YouTube).
• Modifica password : Modifica la password dell’account.
• Elimina : Elimina l’account.
N Nel caso si sia dimenticata la password dell’account, resettare Internet@TV premendo in questa sequenza i seguenti tasti del
telecomando : POWER (off) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (On).
Questa sequenza elimina tutti gli account.
Internet@TV
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:51:28 PMItaliano - 59
❑ Impostazione del sistema
N Esecuzione automatica ticker e Durata ticker potrebbero non essere supportati
a seconda del paese.
Modifica la password per l’opzione Blocco servizio
N La password predefinita di un nuovo apparecchio TV è 0-0-0-0.
N Nel caso si sia dimenticata la password, premere i tasti del telecomando nella sequenza seguente per ripristinare il codice PIN
predefinito 0-0-0-0 : POWER (Off) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (On).
Durata servizio
Selezionare questa opzione per impostare il tempo di attesa del servizio prima che lo screensaver entri in funzione.
Esecuzione automatica ticker→ Off / On
Selezionare questa opzione per impostare o meno l’esecuzione automatica del ticker all’accensione del televisore.
Durata ticker
Selezionare questa opzione per impostare il tempo di attesa del servizio prima che lo screensaver entri in funzione.
❑ Proprietà
Visualizza le informazioni di Internet@TV.
E’ possibile misurare la velocità del servizio Internet TV mediante l’opzione Misurazione della velocità del servizio Internet TV.
Uso del servizio Internet@TV
In un widget che offre vari menu per categoria, è possibile visualizzare i contenuti dei vari menu premendo i tasti ◄ e ►.
Login account
1. Premere il tasto rosso.
2. Selezionare Account utente, quindi premere ENTERE.
3. Inserire password.
N Al termine del login, sullo schermo verrà visualizzato l’account utente.
N Prima del login, è necessario registrare almeno un account. Se si desidera creare un account, vedere la sezione
‘Configurazione di Internet@TV’.
Uso di Widget Gallery
E’ possibile utilizzare Esegui servizio, Blocca, Installa servizio per il widget esistente
e vedere le descrizioni del servizio widget che non è installato.
Su Internet@TV, è possibile aggiungere e usare vari widget forniti dal service provider. L’offerta può variare a seconda del fornitore
dei contenuti.
• Esegui servizio : Esegue il servizio widget.
• Blocca : Imposta il blocco del servizio.
• Installa servizio (o Elimina servizio) : Installa o elimina il servizio widget.
Uso del widget YouTube
E’ possibile guardare un filmato disponibile su YouTube.
Se si dispone di un account su YouTube, eseguire la registrazione delle
informazioni sull’account mediante Gestione account. Dopodiché sarà possibile
utilizzare la categoria My Favourites.
N Il menu può essere modificato dal provider del servizio.
N Il contenuto potrebbe non essere adatto ai minori. In questo caso, utilizzare la
funzione Blocca di Galleria widget.
Xz~*atppo
_z{*]lpo
Xz~*[z{wl}
Xz~*Ot~n~~po
_z{*Qlz}tp~
Xz~*Wtyvpo
Xz~*]p~{zxopo
Qpl}po
_zol <:B
^ppvtyr*U~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp}
atp~*E*C;
M}plvtyr*Yp~*Lwp}~*m*P8Xltw
atp~*E*C;
Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx
atp~*E*CE=A
Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:51:29 PMItaliano - 60
Risoluzione dei problemi di internet@TV
Problema Possibile soluzione
Alcuni servizi widget non funzionano. Controllare con il fornitore del servizio.
In widget, premere il tasto verde per le informazioni di contatto, oppure visitare
il sito per reperire informazioni sul provider del servizio widget.
Sul sito web consultare la pagina della Guida..
Quali sono i vantaggi offerti da single
sign on?
Se si crea un account e si registrano le informazioni di login per il servizio desiderato, è
possibile accedere a contenuti personalizzati senza dover effettuare un ulteriore login.
Quando si verifica un errore di rete,
posso utilizzare solo il menu di
impostazione.
Se la connessione di rete non è disponibile, il servizio potrebbe avere delle limitazioni.
Eccetto il menu di impostazione widget, tutte le altre funzioni widget (come Profile e
Gallery) richiedono la connessione Internet.
C’è qualche possibilità di visualizzare
film per adulti su YouTube?
Generalmente, questi contenuti sono filtrati dall’elenco menu. Tuttavia, utilizzando la
funzione di ricerca è possibile visualizzarli. In questo caso, utilizzare la funzione di blocco
del servizio della Galleria widget.
Guida Sito web
Nazione Sito web
Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Belgium
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Switzerland
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N L’accesso potrebbe subire modifiche.
N Potrebbero esservi link diversi per determinati paesi.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:51:29 PMItaliano - 61
Centro rete dom
Info su Centro rete dom
Centro rete dom collega dispositivi TV e telefoni cellulari tramite una rete. È possibile visualizzare sul televisore le chiamate in arrivo,
i contenuti dei messaggi di testo e i programmi impostati sul cellulare utilizzando la funzione Centro rete dom. Inoltre, è possibile
riprodurre i contenuti multimediali salvati sul cellulare, ad esempio video, foto e musica, importandoli sul televisore attraverso la rete.
N Se il dispositivo supporta la funzione DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller), la funzione Home Network Center è disponibile.
N Questa funzione è utile per la compatibilità del prodotto con i telefoni cellulari Samsung di prossima uscita. Per ulteriori informazioni
visitare il sito www.samsung.com o chiamare il call center Samsung. Il dispositivo mobile potrebbe necessitare di ulteriore software.
Per maggiori informazioni, vedere la guida dell’utente di ogni prodotto.
❑ Collegamento a Centro rete dom
Per ulteriori informazioni sulle impostazioni della rete, vedere ‘Configurazione della rete’.
Connessione tramite una rete Ad-hoc Wi-Fi
1. Collegare l’adattatore ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ alla porta USB1 (HDD) o USB2 del televisore.
2. Per ulteriori informazioni sulla configurazione della rete Ad-hoc, vedere ‘Configurazione della rete’.
N Per informazioni sulla configurazione delle impostazioni di rete per il telefono cellulare, consultare il manuale del cellulare.
3. Impostare indirizzo IP, SSID e password per il cellulare nelle impostazioni Ad-hoc del cellulare utilizzando Nome rete (SSID) e
Chiave di sicurezza (password) visualizzati sul televisore.
Collegamento tramite un Router IP wireless/cablato
1. Collegare la porta LAN del televisore e il router IP wireless/cablato mediante un cavo LAN, oppure collegare la porta USB1
(HDD) o USB2 del televisore con la scheda ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’.
N Per le procedure di impostazione del router wireless/cablato e del telefono cellulare, fare riferimento al manuale del
dispositivo corrispondente.
Centro rete dom
Pannello laterale
del televisore
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
Telefono cellulare
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
Router IP wireless
Pannello laterale del televisore
Telefono cellulare
o
o
Cavo LAN
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
Telefono cellulare Pannello laterale del televisore
o
Cavo LAN
Router IP wireless
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:51:34 PMItaliano - 62
Configurazione di Centro rete dom
❑ Message / Media
Mostra un elenco di telefoni cellulari configurati con questo televisore per utilizzare
le funzioni Message o Media.
N Mostra un elenco di telefoni cellulari configurati con questo televisore per
utilizzare le funzioni Message o Media.
Consent
Consente il collegamento del cellulare.
Negato
Blocca il collegamento del cellulare.
Elimina
Elimina il cellulare dall’elenco.
N Questa funzione cancella solo il nome dall’elenco. Se il dispositivo mobile eliminato viene acceso o tenta di collegarsi al
televisore, potrebbe comparire in elenco.
❑ Impostazione
Messag → On / Off
È possibile determinare se utilizzare le funzioni dei messaggi (chiamate in arrivo,
contenuti dei messaggi di testo e programmi impostati sul telefono cellulare).
Media → On / Off
E’ possibile indicare se utilizzare la funzione Media per la riproduzione dei contenuti
(video, foto, musica) dal cellulare.
Nome TV
E’ possibile impostare il nome del televisore in modo da trovarlo facilmente tramite
il dispositivo mobile.
N Selezionando Input utente, è possibile digitare il nome del televisore mediante OSK (On Screen Keyboard).
Ritorno Esci
Centro rete dom
111-1234-5671 : Consent
111-1234-5672 : Consent
111-1234-5673 : Negato
111-1234-5674 : Negato
Messag
Media
Impost
Ritorno Esci
Centro rete dom
Messag : On
Media : On
Nome TV : TV
Messag
Media
Impost
Uso della funzione Messaggio
Utilizzando questa funzione, è possibile visualizzare le chiamate in arrivo, i contenuti dei
messaggi di testo e i programmi impostati sul cellulare nella finestra degli allarmi mentre
si guarda la TV.
N Per disabilitare la finestra Messag, impostare Messag su Off alla voce Impost di
Centro rete dom.
N La finestra degli allarmi appare per 20 secondi. Se non si preme alcun tasto o è
selezionata l’opzione Annulla, la finestra appare tre volte a intervalli di 5 minuti.
N Se è selezionato OK o se OK non viene selezionato mentre il messaggio viene
visualizzato tre volte, il messaggio verrà eliminato. Il messaggio non viene eliminato
dal telefono cellulare.
N La sola finestra di allarme può essere visualizzata durante l’uso di alcune
applicazioni quali Media Play, Contents Library, ecc. In questo caso, per visualizzare
il contenuto di un messaggio passare alla modalità di visualizzazione TV.
N Quando viene visualizzato il messaggio proveniente da un cellulare sconosciuto, selezionare il cellulare alla voce Messag di
Centro rete dom e selezionare Negato per bloccare il cellulare.
❑ Visualizzazione messaggi
Se arriva un nuovo messaggio di testo (SMS) mentre si guarda il televisore, viene visualizzata la finestra degli allarmi. Facendo clic
su OK viene visualizzato il contenuto del messaggio.
N È possibile configurare le impostazioni di visualizzazione per il contenuto dei messaggi di testo (SMS) sul telefono cellulare. Per
le procedure, vedere il manuale del cellulare.
N Alcuni caratteri speciali possono essere visualizzati come caratteri vuoti o danneggiati.
❑ Allarme chiamata in arrivo
Se arriva una chiamata mentre si guarda il televisore, viene visualizzata la finestra degli allarmi.
❑ Allarme programma
Mentre si guarda il televisore, la finestra degli allarmi appare per visualizzare il programma registrato.
N È possibile configurare le impostazioni di visualizzazione per il contenuto dei programmi sul telefono cellulare.
Per le procedure, vedere il manuale del cellulare.
N Alcuni caratteri speciali possono essere visualizzati come caratteri vuoti o danneggiati.
husband
SMS
Nuovo messaggio
ricevuto
Visualizzare i dettagli?
OK Cancella
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:51:38 PMItaliano - 63
Uso della funzione Media
Viene visualizzata una finestra degli allarmi per informare l’utente che i contenuti
multimediali
(VCR, foto, musica) inviati dal cellulare verranno visualizzati sul televisore.
I contenuti vengono riprodotti automaticamente 3 secondi dopo la visualizzazione
della finestra degli allarmi.
Premendo RETURN o EXIT quando appare la finestra degli allarmi, i Contenuti
multimediali non vengono visualizzati.
N Per disattivare la trasmissione dei contenuti multimediali dal telefono cellulare,
impostare Media su Off nel menu Impost di Centro rete dom.
N I contenuti possono non essere riprodotti sul televisore in base alla risoluzione e
al formato.
❑ Tasti di controllo di Media Play
Tasto Operazioni
◄/►
• Sposta il cursore e seleziona una voce.
• Durante la riproduzione di un filmato : Scorre in avanti o indietro il filmato.
ENTER
• Premendo il tasto ENTERE durante una riproduzione, l’esecuzione si interrompe
temporaneamente.
• Premendo il tasto ENTERE durante una interruzione, la riproduzione viene ripresa.
RETURN Ritorna al menu precedente.
TOOLS Esegue varie funzioni nei menu Foto, Musica e Film.
INFO Mostra le informazioni relative al file.
EXIT Interrompe la modalità Media Play e torna alla modalità TV.
N I tasti ENTERE e ◄/► potrebbero non funzionare in base al tipo di contenuto multimediale riprodotto.
N Mediante il dispositivo mobile è possibile controllare la riproduzione del contenuto multimediale. Per maggiori informazioni,
vedere la guida dell’utente di ogni prodotto.
Il supporto verrà riprodotto da “Disp sconosciuto 13”
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:51:39 PMItaliano - 64
Continua...
Funzione Teletext
La maggior parte delle emittenti televisive fornisce servizi informativi tramite il servizio Teletext. La pagina dell’indice del servizio
Teletext contiene informazioni sull’uso del servizio. Inoltre, è possibile selezionare varie opzioni tramite i tasti del telecomando.
N Per ricevere correttamente le informazioni del servizio Teletext, è necessario che la ricezione del canale sia stabile. In caso
contrario, alcune informazioni potrebbero essere perse o alcune pagine potrebbero non essere visualizzate correttamente.
1 : (uscita)
Esce dalla schermata Teletext.
2 6 (indice)
In modalità Teletext, premere questo tasto in qualsiasi momento per visualizzare la
pagina dell’indice (contenuti).
3 5 (rivela)
Consente di visualizzare il testo nascosto (risposte a quiz, ad esempio). Per tornare
alla modalità di visualizzazione normale, premere di nuovo il tasto.
4 4 (dimensione)
Premere questo tasto per raddoppiare le dimensioni dei caratteri nella metà superiore
dello schermo. Premere di nuovo il tasto per ingrandire i caratteri nella metà inferiore
dello schermo. Per tornare alla modalità di visualizzazione normale, premere di
nuovo il tasto.
5 / (teletext on/mix)
Premere questo tasto per attivare la modalità Teletext dopo avere selezionato un
canale che fornisce questo tipo di servizio. Premere di nuovo il tasto per sovrapporre
le informazioni del servizio Teletext alla trasmissione corrente.
6 8 (memorizza)
Usato per memorizzare le pagine Teletext.
7 1 (pagina secondaria)
Usato per visualizzare la pagina secondaria disponibile.
8 2 (pagina su)
Usato per visualizzare la pagina Teletext successiva.
9 3 (pagina giù)
Usato per visualizzare la pagina Teletext precedente.
0 0 (modalità)
Premere questo tasto per selezionare la modalità Teletext (LIST/FLOF). Premendo
questo tasto in modalità LIST, si attiva la modalità di salvataggio Elenco.
In questa modalità è possibile memorizzare la pagina Teletext all’interno di un elenco
utilizzando il tasto 8 (memorizza).
! 9 (mantieni)
Consente di mantenere visualizzata una pagina, se la pagina è collegata a più pagine
secondarie che scorrono automaticamente. Premerlo nuovamente per riprendere la
visualizzazione.
@ 7 (annulla)
Utilizzato per visualizzare le stazioni emittenti durante la ricerca di una pagina.
# Tasti colorati (rosso/verde/giallo/blu)
Se una emittente usa il sistema FASTEXT, i vari argomenti trattati in una pagina
Teletext vengono codificati in base ai colori e possono essere selezionati premendo i
relativi tasti colorati. Premere il tasto il cui colore corrisponde a quello dell’argomento desiderato. La pagina viene visualizzata con
altre informazioni colorate che possono essere selezionate allo stesso modo. Per visualizzare la pagina successiva o precedente,
premere il tasto colorato corrispondente.
N E’ possibile cambiare le pagine teletext premendo i tasti numerici sul telecomando.
Consigli per l’uso
1
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:51:39 PMItaliano - 65
Le pagine teletext sono organizzate in base a sei categorie :
Parte Contenuti
A Numero della pagina selezionata.
B Identità della stazione emittente.
C CNumero della pagina corrente o stato della ricerca.
D Data e ora.
E Testo.
F Informazioni sullo stato.
Informazioni FASTE
N Le informazioni del servizio Teletext sono spesso suddivise su più pagine visualizzate in
sequenza alle quali è possibile accedere come segue :
- Digitando il numero di pagina
- Selezionando un titolo in un elenco
- Selezionando un’intestazione colorata (sistema FASTEXT)
O Premere il tasto TV per uscire dal servizio Teletext.
Specifiche del kit di supporto a parete (VESA)
Installare la staffa su una parete solida perpendicolare al pavimento.
Qualora si fissi la staffa ad altri materiali, contattare il rivenditore più vicino.Se installato a soffitto o su una parete inclinata, il prodotto
potrebbe cadere e causare gravi danni
Famiglia del
prodotto
pollici Spec. VESA (A * B) Viti Quantità
LCD-TV
Quantità 100 * 100
M4
4
23"~29" 200 * 100
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6
46"~55" 400 * 400
57"~70" 800 * 400 M8
80" ~ 1400 * 800
PDP-TV
42"~ 50" 400 * 400
M8 4
58"~ 63" 600 * 400
70" ~ 800 * 400
80" ~ 1400 * 800
N Nella tabella sopra sono fornite le dimensioni standard per un kit di montaggio a parete.
N In caso di acquisto di un kit di montaggio a parete, verrà fornita insieme una guida dettagliata all’installazione e tutte le parti
necessarie per montaggio.
N Non utilizzare viti diverse dalle dimensioni standard poiché potrebbero danneggiare l’interno del televisore.
N Per i montaggi a parete non conformi alle specifiche delle viti standard VESA, la lunghezza delle viti potrebbe differire in base alle
loro specifiche.
N Non utilizzare viti non conformi alle specifiche dello standard VESA. Non serrare le viti con troppa forza poiché ciò potrebbe
danneggiare il prodotto o causarne la caduta provocando gravi danni. Samsung non può essere ritenuta responsabile per questo
tipo di incidenti.
N Samsung non può essere ritenuta responsabile per eventuali danni a cose e persone qualora vengano usati kit di montaggio a
parete non conformi allo standard VESA o l’utente non segua le istruzioni di installazione fornite.
N I nostri modelli da 57 e 63 pollici non sono conformi alle specifiche VESA. Di conseguenza, per tali modelli è necessario utilizzare
gli appositi kit di montaggio a parete Samsung.
N Non superare i 15 gradi di inclinazione durante il montaggio del televisore.
Non installare il Kit di montaggio a parete con il televisore acceso.
Ciò potrebbe provocare lesioni personali causate da eventuali
scosse elettriche.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:51:39 PMItaliano - 66
Preparazione per l’installazione del kit di montaggio a parete
1. Installare il kit di montaggio a parete applicando una forza di serraggio di 15kgf·cm o inferiore. Le parti potrebbero danneggiarsi
applicando una forza di serraggio superiore.
2. Il kit degli accessori contiene un anello di ritenuta [②] per l’installazione del kit di montaggio a parete di terze parti su televisori
Samsung. (Caso B)
N Avvitare a fondo nel foro [①] durante l’installazione della staffa alla parete.
Come assemblare la base a piedistallo
Avvertenza
Fissare saldamente il piedistallo al televisore prima di spostarlo, poiché potrebbe
cadere e causare seri danni.
N In caso di spostamento, il televisore deve essere sorretto da due o più persone.
Non lasciare mai il televisore appoggiato al pavimento in quanto ciò potrebbe
danneggiare lo schermo. Mantenere sempre il televisore in posizione eretta.
Usando le viti in dotazione, fissare saldamente il televisore al piedistallo.
(L’aspetto dell’unità può variare rispetto all’immagine.)
In caso di installazione del televisore a
parete, chiudere la copertura (➊) sulla
connessione del piedistallo usando le due
viti in dotazione per nasconderlo.
(PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680)
Caso A. Installare il kit di montaggio a parete SAMSUNG Caso B. Installare un kit di montaggio a parete di altra marca
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:51:43 PMItaliano - 67
Tirare, spingere o arrampicarsi sul televisore sono azioni che possono provocarne la caduta. Si raccomanda
di non far giocare i bambini con il televisore poiché potrebbero appendersi ad esso destabilizzandolo; se ciò
dovesse verificarsi, il televisore potrebbe cadere provocando lesioni personali gravi e perfino mortali. Seguire tutte
le precauzioni di sicurezza descritte della documentazione allegata. Per una maggiore stabilità e sicurezza del
prodotto, installare il dispositivo anticaduta come segue.
❑ Per evitare una eventuale caduta del televisore
1. Avvitare a fondo le viti nei ganci e fissarli alla parete. Verificare che le viti siano state fissate saldamente alla parete.
N A seconda del tipo di parete, potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare un tassello.
N Poiché i ganci, le viti e il cavo di sicurezza non sono forniti in dotazione, è necessario acquistare tali materiali separatamente.
2. Rimuovere le viti dal centro del pannello posteriore del televisore, inserirle nei ganci, quindi avvitarle nuovamente al televisore.
N Le viti potrebbero non essere fornite insieme al prodotto.
3. Collegare i ganci fissati al televisore a quelli fissati alla parete utilizzando un cavo resistente, quindi legarlo con forza.
N Installare il televisore il più possibile vicino alla parete in modo che non possa cadere all’indietro.
N Collegare il cavo in modo che i ganci fissati alla parete si trovino allineati o leggermente più in basso di quelli fissati al televisore.
N Slegare il cavo prima di spostare il televisore.
4. Accertarsi che tutte le connessioni siano adeguatamente fissate.
Controllare periodicamente le connessioni per verificarne l’eventuale usura o rottura. Per qualsiasi dubbio relativo alla sicurezza
delle connessioni effettuate, contattare un installatore specializzato.
Fissaggio del televisore alla parete
Messa in sicurezza della posizione di installazione
Mantenere le distanze necessarie tra il prodotto e gli altri elementi presenti (per esempio le pareti) per garantire un’adeguata
ventilazione.
La mancata osservanza di tale precauzione può comportare un pericolo d’incendio o un malfunzionamento a causa del
surriscaldamento del prodotto.
Installare il prodotto mantenendo le distanze indicate in figura.
N Quando si usa un piedistallo o un sistema di montaggio a parete, utilizzare solo le parti fornite da Samsung Electronics
- L’uso di parti di altre marche può causare un malfunzionamento o lesioni provocate da una eventuale caduta del prodotto.
- L’uso di parti di altre marche può comportare un malfunzionamento o un pericolo di incendio per il surriscaldamento del prodotto
a causa di una ventilazione inadeguata.
N L’aspetto del prodotto può variare a seconda del modello.
Durante l’installazione del prodotto con un
piedistallo
Durante l’installazione del prodotto con un sistema
di montaggio a parete
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
경고 주의
경고 주의
parete parete
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:51:44 PMItaliano - 68
Risoluzione dei problemi
In caso di domande sul funzionamento del televisore, consultare per prima cosa l'elenco sottostante. Se nessuno dei consigli
sottoriportati si dimostra utile per risolvere il problema, visitare il sito ‘www.samsung.com’, quindi fare clic sulla voce Support
(Assistenza), oppure chiamare il numero del Call Center riportato in ultima pagina.
N L'aggiornamento del firmware potrebbe essere la prima soluzione possibile.
Problema Possibile soluzione
Qualità dell'immagine
Per prima cosa, eseguire il Test immagine per confermare che il televisore sia in grado di visualizzare correttamente l'immagine di
prova.
* Selezionare MENU → Supporto → Auto diagnosi → Test Immagine
Se l'immagine di prova viene visualizzata correttamente, la scarsa qualità dell'immagine potrebbe essere causata dalla sorgente o dal
segnale.
La qualità dell'immagine non sembra
all'altezza di quella vista in negozio.
• Se si dispone di un ricevitore via cavo analogico/Set top box, eseguire
l'aggiornamento all'STB.
Utilizzare cavi HDMI o Component per ottenere una qualità dell'immagine HD.
• Abbonato servizi cavo/satellite : Provare le stazioni HD (High Definition) disponibili
attraverso la griglia dei programmi (channel line up).
• Connessione antenna Antenna : Provare le stazioni HD dopo avere eseguito il
programma automatico.
N Molti canali HD trasmettono contenuti SD (Standard Definition) aggiornati.
• Impostare la risoluzione di uscita video del ricevitore via cavo/Set top box su 1080i o
720p.
L'immagine è distorta: sono visibili
blocchi grandi, blocchi piccoli, punti e
pixel.
• La compressione di contenuti video può causare la distorsione dell'immagine
specialmente nel caso di immagini caratterizzate da movimenti rapidi, come per
esempio eventi sportivi o film d'azione.
• Un segnale debole o di scarsa qualità può causare la distorsione dell'immagine.
Questo non è un problema del televisore.
Con una connessione Component il
colore risulta incongruo o mancante.
• Verificare che i cavi Component siano connessi ai rispettivi jack.
Connessioni allentate o non corrette possono causare problemi di colore o una
schermata vuota.
Colore o luminosità delle immagini
scadente.
• Regolare le opzioni Immagine nel menu TV (Modalità Immagine , Colore,
Luminosità, Nitidezza).
• Regolare l'opzione Risp. energia nel menu Impostazione.
• Provare a reimpostare l'immagine visualizzandola con le impostazioni predefinite.
(Selezionare MENU → Immagine → Reset immagine).
E' visibile una linea punteggiata sul
bordo dello schermo.
• Se la dimensione dell'immagine è impostata su Adatta allo schermo, modificarla
selezionando 16:9.
• Cambiare la risoluzione del ricevitore via cavo/Set top box.
L'immagine risulta in bianco e
nero solo in caso di ingresso AV
(Composite).
• Collegare un cavo video (giallo) al jack verde dell'ingresso component 1 del televisore.
Quando si cambiano i canali,
l'immagine risulta ferma, distorta o in
ritardo.
• Se il prodotto è connesso a un ricevitore via cavo, reimpostare il ricevitore.
(Riconnettere il cavo CA e attendere fino al riavvio del ricevitore. L'operazione
potrebbe richiedere fino a 20 minuti di tempo)
• Impostare la risoluzione di uscita del ricevitore via cavo su 1080i o 720p.
Qualità audio
Per prima cosa, eseguire il Test audio per confermare che l'impianto audio del televisore funzioni in modo appropriato.
* Selezionare MENU → Supporto → Auto diagnosi → Test audio
Se l'audio è OK, il problema potrebbe essere causato dalla sorgente o dal segnale.
L'audio non viene riprodotto oppure il
livello del volume risulta troppo basso
anche se impostato al valore massimo.
• Verificare il volume del dispositivo (ricevitore via cavo/satellitare, lettore DVD, Blu-ray,
ecc) collegato al televisore.
Quindi, regolare il volume del televisore di conseguenza.
L'immagine è buona ma senza audio.
• Impostare l'opzione Seleziona altoparlante su Altoparlante TV nel menu Suono.
• Verificare che i cavi audio provenienti dal dispositivo esterno siano connessi ai
rispettivi jack di ingresso audio sul televisore.
• Verificare l'opzione di uscita audio del dispositivo connesso.
Per es.) Potrebbe essere necessario cambiare l'opzione del ricevitore via cavo in
HDMI in caso di collegamento HDMI al TV.
• Se si usa un cavo DVI-HDMI, è necessario utilizzare un cavo audio separato.
• Disattivare la funzione SRS se è stato impostato il volume oltre il valore 30.
• Scollegare lo spinotto dal jack della cuffia (se disponibile sul televisore).
Rumore proveniente dall'altoparlante.
• Verificare le connessioni dei cavi. Verificare che i cavi video non siano connessi a un
ingresso audio.
• Per le connessioni Antenna/Cavo, verificare l'intensità del segnale. Un segnale basso
può causare la distorsione dell'audio.
Continua...
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:51:44 PMItaliano - 69
Problema Possibile soluzione
Nessuna immagine, video spento
Il televisore non si accende. • Verificare che la spina del cavo di alimentazione CA sia correttamente collegata a una
presa a muro e il televisore sia acceso.
• Accertarsi che la presa a muro sia funzionante.
• Premere il tasto Power sul televisore per verificare che il telecomando funzioni
correttamente.
Se il televisore si accende, il problema potrebbe essere causato dal telecomando.
Per risolvere il problema causato dal telecomando, consultare il paragrafo sottostante
‘Il telecomando non funziona’.
Il televisore si spegne
automaticamente.
• Verificare che l'opzione Timer stand-by sia impostata su On nel menu Impostazione.
• Se il televisore è collegato al PC, verificare le impostazioni di alimentazione del PC.
• Verificare che la spina del cavo di alimentazione CA sia correttamente collegata a una
presa a muro e il televisore sia acceso.
• Se il televisore non riceve segnale per circa 10 ~ 15 minuti con una connessione
Antenna/Cavo, il televisore si spegne.
Nessuna immagine/Video.
• Verificare le connessioni dei cavi. (scollegare e ricollegare tutti i cavi del televisore e
dei dispositivi esterni)
• Impostare l'uscita video del dispositivo esterno (ricevitore via cavo/STB, lettore DVD,
Blu-ray, ecc) in modo che le connessioni corrispondano all'ingresso del televisore. Per
esempio, uscita del dispositivo esterno: HDMI, ingresso TV: HDMI.
• Verificare che il dispositivo collegato sia acceso.
• Selezionare la corretta sorgente del televisore premendo il tasto SOURCE sul
telecomando TV.
• Riavviare il dispositivo dopo aver scollegato e ricollegato la spina di alimentazione.
Connessione RF (Cavo/Antenna)
Impossibile ricevere tutti i canali.
• Verificare che il cavo Antenna sia correttamente collegato.
• Provare a impostare Plug & Play per aggiungere i canali disponibili all'elenco canali.
Selezionare MENU → Impostazione → Plug & Play e attendere che tutti i canali
disponibili vengano memorizzati.
• Verificare che l'antenna sia posizionata correttamente.
L'immagine è distorta: sono visibili
blocchi grandi, blocchi piccoli, punti e
pixel.
• La compressione di contenuti video può causare la distorsione dell'immagine
specialmente nel caso di immagini caratterizzate da movimenti rapidi, come per
esempio eventi sportivi o film d'azione.
• Un segnale basso può causare la distorsione dell'immagine. Questo non è un
problema del televisore.
Connessione PC
Messaggio ‘Modo non supportato’.
• Impostare la risoluzione di uscita e la frequenza del PC in modo che corrispondano
alle risoluzioni supportate dal televisore.
Nell'elenco sorgenti, il PC è sempre
evidenziato anche se non è connesso.
• E' normale; nell'elenco sorgenti, il PC risulta sempre evidenziato anche quando non è
collegato.
La riproduzione del video è corretta ma
manca l'audio con una connessione
HDMI.
• Verificare l'impostazione di uscita audio sul PC.
Connessione di rete
Mancata connessione di rete wireless.
• Per la rete wireless, è necessario utilizzare il dongle USB wireless di Samsung.
• Verificare che l'opzione Tipo di rete sia impostata su Wireless.
• Il televisore deve essere collegato a un router IP wireless.
Altri
L'immagine non viene riprodotta a
pieno schermo.
• Quando si guardano contenuti SD (4:3) aggiornati per la trasmissione su canali HD,
appaiono barre nere su ogni lato dello schermo.
• Quando vengono trasmessi film con un rapporto d'immagine diverso da quello del
televisore, appaiono barre nere sui lati superiore e inferiore dello schermo.
• Regolare la dimensione dell'immagine sul dispositivo esterno o sul televisore per
visualizzare l'immagine a pieno schermo.
Il telecomando non funziona.
• Sostituire le batterie del telecomando rispettando la polarità (+ -).
• Pulire la finestra di trasmissione posizionata in cima al telecomando.
• Puntare il telecomando direttamente verso il televisore a una distanza di 1,5~2 metri.
Continua...
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:51:45 PMItaliano - 70
Problema Possibile soluzione
Il televisore al plasma emette un
rumore fastidioso.
• Tipicamente, i televisori al plasma emettono un leggero ronzio. Ciò è normale. Questo
rumore è causato dalle cariche elettriche utilizzate per creare le immagini sullo
schermo.
• Tuttavia, se il ronzio è intenso, è possibile che sia stata impostata una luminosità dello
schermo troppo elevata. Impostare un livello di luminosità inferiore.
• E’ inoltre possibile avvertire un ronzio intenso anche quando il pannello posteriore del
televisore al plasma si trova troppo vicino alla parete o a un’altra superficie solida.
Provare inoltre a posizionare diversamente i cavi di collegamento.
• Una installazione impropria del sistema di montaggio a parete può creare un rumore
eccessivo.
Ritenzione dell’immagine (bruciatura
dello schermo).
• Per ridurre il rischio di incorrere nella bruciatura dello schermo, questa unità è
dotata di una speciale tecnologia. La tecnologia di spostamento dei pixel permette
di impostare lo spostamento delle immagini verso l’alto e verso il basso (in linea
verticale) e lateralmente (punti orizzontali).
Impossibile controllare il volume o le
funzioni di accensione/spegnimento
del televisore con il telecomando del
ricevitore via cavo/STB.
• Programmare il telecomando del ricevitore via cavo/Set topbox in modo che possa
controllare le funzioni del televisore.
Consultare il manuale dell'utente del ricevitore via cavo/satellitare per il codice TV
SAMSUNG.
Messaggio ‘Modo non supportato’.
• Verificare la risoluzione del televisore supportata e regolare di conseguenza la
risoluzione di uscita del dispositivo esterno. Consultare la sezione di questo manuale
relativa all'impostazione della risoluzione.
Impossibile disattivare l’opzione Effetto
luce sulla cornice anteriore (sotto il
logo SAMSUNG)
• Regolare l’opzione Effetto luce nel menu Impostazione.
Le opzioni sono : Off, Mod StdBy ON, Mod visione ON e Sempre.
• Non tutti i modelli supportano l’opzione Effetto luce.
Il televisore emana odore di plastica. • Ciò è normale, tuttavia l'odore svanirà nel corso del tempo.
L'opzione Potenza del segnale del
televisore non è disponibile nel menu
Test di autodiagnosi.
• Questa funzione è disponibile solo con canali digitali e connessione antenna (RF/
Coax).
Il televisore è inclinato verso destra o
sinistra.
• Rimuovere il piedistallo dal televisore quindi rimontarlo.
Impossibile montare il piedistallo.
• Verificare che il televisore sia posizionato su una superficie piana.
Se non si riesce a rimuovere le viti dal televisore, utilizzare un cacciavite con punta
magnetica.
Il menu Canale è in colore grigio (non
disponibile).
• Il menu Canale è disponibile solo se è selezionata la sorgente del televisore.
Le impostazioni andranno perse dopo
30 minuti o a ogni spegnimento del
televisore.
• Se il televisore è in modalità Demo Negozio, ogni 30 minuti verranno azzerate le
impostazioni audio e immagine.
Commutare la modalità Demo Negozio in Uso dom. secondo la procedura
Plug & Play.
Premere il tasto SOURCE per selezionare la modalità TV , quindi selezionare MENU
→ Impostazione → Plug & Play → ENTER
Perdita intermittente di segnale audio o
video.
• Verificare le connessioni e ricollegare i cavi.
• Questo problema potrebbe essere causato dall'uso di cavi troppo grossi o rigidi.
Verificare che i cavi siano sufficientemente flessibili da consentire un uso prolungato
nel tempo.
In caso di montaggio a parete, si consiglia di utilizzare cavi con connettori da 90°.
Guardando da vicino il bordo della
cornice dello schermo del televisore è
possibile notare delle piccole particelle.
• Ciò non costituisce un difetto ma fa parte del design del prodotto.
Il menu PIP non è disponibile.
• La funzione PIP è disponibile solo quando il segnale proviene da una sorgente HDMI,
PC o component.
‘Segnale criptato’ o ‘Segnale debole o
assente’ con la scheda (CI/CI+) CAM
• Verificare che nel modulo CAM la SCHEDA CI (CI+) sia installata nell'alloggiamento
common interface.
• Ciò è normale, il televisore è dotato della funzione OTA (Over The Air) che permette di
aggiornare il firmware scaricato durante la visione del televisore.
Immagini/audio ricorrenti. • Verificare e modificare il segnale/la sorgente.
N Alcune delle immagini e funzioni sopra riportate sono disponibili solo per determinati modelli.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:51:45 PMItaliano - 71
Specifiche
Le descrizioni e le caratteristiche riportate in questa guida vengono fornite a puro scopo informativo e sono soggette a modifiche senza
preavviso.
Nome modello PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680
Dimensione schermo
(Diagonale)
50 pollici 58 pollici 63 pollici
Risoluzione PC (Ottimale) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Audio (Uscita) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2
Dimensioni (LxAxP)
Corpo
Senza piedistallo
1240 x 756 x 74 mm
1240 x 817 x 290 mm
1401 x 848 x 74 mm
1401 x 917 x 335 mm
1531 x 932 x 74 mm
1531 x 957 x 390 mm
Peso
Corpo
Con piedistallo
33 kg
38 kg
39 kg
46 kg
53 kg
61 kg
Considerazioni ambientali
Temperatura operativa
Umidità operativa
Temperatura di stoccaggio
Umidità di stoccaggio
50 °F a 104 °F (10 °C a 40 °C)
10% a 80%, senza condensa
-4 °F a 113 °F (-20 °C a 45 °C)
5% a 95%, senza condensa
N Questo prodotto è un’apparecchiatura digitale di Classe B.
N Design e specifiche sono soggetti a modifiche senza preavviso.
N Per l’alimentazione elettrica e il consumo di corrente, consultare l’etichetta apposta al prodotto.
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:51:45 PMItaliano - 72
Schema blocco
BN68-02333J-ITA.indb 72 10/20/2009 4:51:46 PMSpanish - 2
Instrucciones para el usuario
Retención de la imagen en pantalla
No visualice una imagen fija (como las de un videojuego o cuando la PDP está conectada a un PC) en el panel del monitor de
plasma durante más de 2 horas porque podría causar la retención de imagen en pantalla. Este fenómeno de retención de
imágenes también se denomina “quemadura de pantalla”. Para evitar que se produzca esa persistencia de la imagen, reduzca el
nivel de brillo y de contraste de la pantalla cuando muestre imágenes fijas.
Altitud
La PDP puede funcionar normalmente hasta altitudes de 2.000 metros. No la instale ni utilice en lugares que se encuentren a más
de 2.000 metros de altitud porque el funcionamiento podría ser irregular.
Calor en la parte superior del televisor PDP
La parte superior del aparato puede calentarse tras un uso prolongado ya que el calor se disipa desde el panel a través de los
orificios de ventilación de la sparte superior del aparato. Esto es normal y no indica ningún defecto ni fallo de funcionamiento del
aparato. No obstante, debe evitarse que los niños toquen la parte superior del aparato.
El aparato emite una especie de crujido.
Este ruido puede producirse cuando el aparato se contrae o se expande debido a un cambio ambiental de temperatura o
humedad. Este hecho es normal y no se trata de ningún defecto en la unidad.
Defectos de celda
La PDP utiliza un panel compuesto de 2.360.000 (nivel HD) a 6.221.000 (nivel FHD) píxeles que requieren una sofisticada
tecnología para su producción. No obstante, puede que existan unos cuantos píxeles brillantes u oscuros en la pantalla. Estos
píxeles no influirán en el rendimiento del aparato.
Evite que el TV funcione a temperaturas por debajo de 5°C(41°F)
La visualización prolongada de una imagen fija puede originar daños permanentes en el panel de la pantalla PDP.
Ver el televisor PDP en formato 4:3 durante un tiempo prolongado puede dejar rastros de bordes en las partes
izquierda, derecha o central de la pantalla causados por la diferencia de emisión de luz en la pantalla. La
reproducción de un DVD o el uso de una consola de videojuegos pueden provocar un efecto similar en la
pantalla. Los daños provocados por los efectos mencionados no quedan cubiertos por la garantía.
Restos de imágenes en pantalla.
Ver imágenes fijas de videojuegos y PC durante más tiempo del indicado puede producir restos de imágenes parciales. Para evitar
este efecto, reduzca el ‘brillo’ y el ‘contraste’ cuando vea imágenes fijas.
Garantía
- La garantía no cubre ningún daño causado por la retención de imágenes.
- La garantía no cubre el desgaste de la pantalla.
Instalación
Póngase en contacto con un centro de servicio técnico autorizado cuando instale el equipo en un lugar expuesto a gran
cantidad de polvo, temperaturas extremas, alto nivel de humedad y productos químicos, y en lugares donde se vaya a utilizar
continuamente, como aeropuertos, estaciones, etc. El incumplimiento de estas indicaciones puede causar serios desperfectos en
el equipo.
Nota sobre la TV digital
1. Las funciones relacionadas con la TV digital (DVB) sólo están disponibles en países o regiones donde se emitan
señales terrestres digitales DVB-T (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AVC) o donde se tenga acceso a servicios de televisión por cable
compatibles con DVB-C (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AAC). Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor para conocer si puede recibir
señales DVB-T o DVB-C.
2. DVB-T es una norma del consorcio europeo para la transmisión de la televisión digital terrestre y DVB-C lo es para la
transmisión de la televisión digital por cable. Sin embargo, en esta especificación no se incluyen algunas funciones
diferenciadas, como EPG (Guía electrónica de programas), VOD (Vídeo a la carta) y otras. Por ello, en estos momentos
aún no se admiten.
3. Este equipo de televisión cumple las más actuales normas de DVB-T y DVB-C [agosto de 2008], pero no se garantiza la
compatibilidad con futuras emisiones de televisión digital terrestre DVB-T y por cable DVB-C.
4. Algunos proveedores de la televisión por cable pueden cobrar un pago adicional por algunos servicios y pueden exigir al
usuario su aceptación de los términos y condiciones de su empresa.
5. Algunas funciones de televisión digital pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países o regiones; asimismo DVB-C puede
no funcionar correctamente con todos los proveedores.
6. Para obtener más información, póngase en contacto con su centro de atención al cliente de Samsung.
Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
Si tiene cualquier comentario o pregunta referentes a los productos Samsung, póngase en contacto con el Centro de atención
al cliente de SAMSUNG. (Consulte la cubierta posterior para obtener más información.)
N Las ilustraciones de este manual de usuario se proporcionan sólo como referencia y pueden ser diferentes del producto real.
El diseño y las especificaciones del producto se pueden cambiar sin previo aviso para mejorar el rendimiento del producto.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Reservados todos los derechos.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 2 10/20/2009 5:02:17 PMSpanish - 3
Spanish
N O T
Símbolos Pulse Nota Botón de una pulsación TOOLS
Contenido
Conexión y preparación del televisor
■ Comprobación de los componentes..........................................4
■ Uso del soporte .........................................................................4
■ Soporte de cables .....................................................................4
■ Aspecto general del panel de control........................................5
■ Aspecto general del panel de conexiones.................................6
■ Mando a distancia .....................................................................8
■ Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia .......................8
■ Uso de los botones con luz de fondo del mando a distancia ....9
■ Encendido y apagado................................................................9
■ Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera ............................9
■ Visualización de la pantalla .......................................................9
■ Visualización de los menús .....................................................10
■ Uso del botón TOOLS ............................................................10
■ Función Plug & Play ................................................................10
Control de los canales
■ Memorización de los canales ................................................ 11
■ Gestión de los canales ............................................................13
Control de la imagen
■ Cambio de la configuración de la imagen ...............................15
■ Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador ......................................18
■ Pantalla de PC ........................................................................19
Control del sonido
■ Cambio del estándar de sonido...............................................20
■ Selección del modo de sonido ................................................21
Descripción de las funciones
■ Configuración de la hora .........................................................22
■ Configuración del menú de configuración...............................23
■ Visualización PIP (Imagen en imagen)....................................25
Asistencia técnica / Entrada
■ Programa admitido ..................................................................26
■ Fuentes / Editar nombre..........................................................27
Red
■ Conexión de la red ..................................................................28
■ Configuración de la red ...........................................................30
Media Play
■ Conexión de un dispositivo USB.............................................33
■ Uso de la función Media Play..................................................34
■ Clasificación de la lista de fotos/música/películas...................35
■ Menús de opciones de la lista de fotos/música/películas........36
■ Menús de opciones de las presentaciones y la reproducción
de música y películas ..............................................................37
■ Visualización de una foto o una presentación.........................38
■ Reproducción de música.........................................................39
■ Reproducción de un archivo de película ................................40
■ Uso del menú de configuración...............................................41
Media Play-DLNA
■ Configuración de la red DLNA.................................................42
■ Instalación de la aplicación DLNA...........................................42
■ Uso de la aplicación DLNA......................................................43
■ Uso de la función DLNA..........................................................44
Acerca de Anynet+
■ Conexión de dispositivos Anynet+...........................................45
■ Configuración de Anynet+ ......................................................46
■ Conmutación entre dispositivos Anynet+ ................................46
■ Grabación................................................................................47
■ Escucha a través de un receptor.............................................48
■ Solución de problemas de Anynet+.........................................48
Content Library
■ Activación de la Content Library..............................................49
■ Uso de la Content Library........................................................50
Internet@TV
■ Primeros pasos con Internet@TV ...........................................51
■ Edición del extracto en el acoplamiento..................................53
■ Uso del widget de un perfil ......................................................53
■ Uso de la galería de widgets de Yahoo!® ...............................54
■ Uso del servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!®............................54
■ Uso del servicio de noticias de Yahoo!® .................................55
■ Uso del servicio Filckr de Yahoo!®..........................................55
■ Uso del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!®................................56
■ Solución de problemas de internet@TV..................................56
■ Help Website ...........................................................................57
Internet@TV
■ Primeros pasos con Internet@TV ...........................................58
■ Configuración de Internet@TV................................................58
■ Uso del servicio Internet@TV..................................................59
■ Solución de problemas con Internet@TV................................60
■ Página web de ayuda..............................................................60
Centro de red doméstica
■ Centro de red doméstica .........................................................61
■ Configuración del Centro de red doméstica ............................62
■ Uso de la función de mensajería.............................................62
■ Uso de la función multimedia ..................................................63
Recomendaciones de uso
■ Función de teletexto ................................................................64
■ Especificaciones del equipo de montaje en la pared (VESA)........65
■ Preparación para instalar el montaje mural.............................66
■ Cómo montar el soporte base .................................................66
■ Fijación del televisor a la pared...............................................67
■ Seguridad en el espacio de instalación...................................67
■ Identificación de problemas.....................................................68
■ Especificaciones......................................................................71
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 3 10/20/2009 5:02:18 PMSpanish - 4
Soporte de cables
Sujete los cables con el soporte de cables para que éstos no sean visibles a través del soporte
transparente.
Uso del soporte
N La PDP la deben transportar dos o más personas. No deje nunca la PDP en el
suelo, porque es posible que se dañe la pantalla. Mantenga siempre la PDP en
posición vertical.
N La PDP se puede girar 20 grados a derecha e izquierda.
-20° ~ 20°
Comprobación de los componentes
Manual de
instrucciones
Mando a distancia/
Pilas AAA (2 unid.)
Cable de alimentación Paño de limpieza Soporte de cables Soporte - Anilla
(4 unid.)
(Consulte la
página 66)
CD del programa
Tornillos (4 unid.)
(sólo PS50B650)
(Consulte la
página 66)
Cubierta inferior
(sólo PS50B650)
(Consulte la
página 66)
Cubierta inferior/ Tornillos
(2 unid.) (sólo PS58B680 /
PS63B680)
(Consulte la página 66)
Núcleo de ferrita
para el cable de
los auriculares
Núcleo de ferrita
para cable de
alimentación (sólo
PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680)
Núcleo de ferrita
para cable de
alimentación
Tarjeta de garantía/
Guía de seguridad
(no disponible en
todos los lugares)
N Núcleo de ferrita
El núcleo de ferrita se utiliza para proteger los cables de las
interferencias.
Cuando conecte un cable, abra el núcleo de ferrita y sujételo al cable
cerca del enchufe, tal como se muestra en la ilustración.
Conexión y preparación del televisor
(PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680 sólo)
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 4 10/20/2009 5:02:22 PMSpanish - 5
Aspecto general del panel de control
N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo.
Botones del panel frontal
Toque cada botón para
activar la función.
(PS58B680 / PS63B680)
(PS50B650)
1 SOURCE
Cambia entre todas las fuentes de entrada disponibles (TV,
Ext1, Ext2, AV, Componente, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI,
HDMI3, HDMI4, USB).
N En el menú en pantalla, utilice este botón como lo haría
con el botón ENTER del mando a distancia.
2 MENU
Púlselo para ver en pantalla un menú de las características
del televisor.
3 + –
Púlselos para subir o bajar el volumen. En el menú de la
pantalla, use los botones + – del mismo modo que los
botones ◄ y ► del mando a distancia.
4 CH
Permiten cambiar de canal. En el menú de la pantalla, use los
botones g CH f del mismo modo que los botones
▲ y ▼ del mando a distancia. Puede usar el botón g CH
f para encender el televisor sin el mando a distancia.
5 INDICADOR DE ENCENDIDO
Parpadea y se apaga cuando se enciende el aparato y se
ilumina en el modo en espera.
6 (POWER)
Púlselo para encender o apagar el TV.
7 SENSOR DEL MANDO A DISTANCIA
El mando a distancia debe dirigirse hacia este punto del
televisor.
8 ALTAVOCES
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 5 10/20/2009 5:02:22 PMSpanish - 6
Aspecto general del panel de conexiones
N Cuando conecte un dispositivo externo, debe hacer coincidir los colores del terminal de conexión y del cable.
N Al conectar un sistema de audio o vídeo al aparato, asegúrese de que todos los elementos están apagados.
N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo.
1 LAN
Conecte un cable LAN a este puerto para conectarse a la red.
2 POWER IN
Conexión al cable de alimentación suministrado.
3 COMPONENT IN
Entradas de audio (AUDIO L/R) y vídeo (Y/PB /PR) para
componentes.
4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC)
Conexión para el terminal de salida de vídeo y audio del PC.
5 EXT 1, EXT 2
Terminales de entrada o salida para dispositivos externos,
como aparatos de vídeo, reproductores de DVD, consolas de
videojuegos o reproductores de videodiscos. Especificación
de entrada/ salida
N En el modo EXT, DTV sólo admite Vídeo y Audio SD MPEG.
N En el modo EXT, Modo Juego no está disponible.
Especificación de entrada/salida
Conector
Entrada Salida
Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R)
EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔
Sólo está disponible la
salida de TV o DTV.
EXT 2 ✔ ✔
La salida que puede
elegir.
6 AURICULARES
Puede conectar unos auriculares si desea ver un programa
de televisión sin molestar a las personas que están en la
misma habitación.
N El uso continuado de auriculares a un volumen elevado
puede dañar la capacidad auditiva.
7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Se conecta al componente de audio digital.
8 SERVICE
Conector para servicio.
9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)
Puede conectar las señales de audio RCA desde el televisor
a una fuente externa, como un equipo de audio.
0 ANT IN
Conector coaxial de 75 Ω para antena o red por cable.
! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3
No se necesita conexión de audio adicional para una conexión
de HDMI a HDMI.
- Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe
conectar en el terminal HDMI IN 2(DVI).
N ¿Qué es HDMI?
- La interfaz multimedia de alta definición (HDMI según
sus siglas en inglés) permite la transmisión de los datos
de vídeo digital de alta definición y varios canales de
sonido digital.
- El terminal HDMI/DVI admite la conexión DVI con un
dispositivo ampliado mediante el cable apropiado
(no suministrado). La diferencia entre los dispositivos
HDMI y DVI es que el HDMI es más pequeño, tiene
instalada la función de codificación HDCP (protección
alta de la copia digital del ancho de banda) y es
compatible con el sonido digital de varios canales.
DVI AUDIO IN
Salidas de audio DVI para dispositivos externos.
Modos compatibles con HDMI/DVI y componentes
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O
Componente O O O O O O O
TV Panel posterior
Red de televisión
por cable
o
o
2
3 4 5 7 9 !
0
6 8
1
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 6 10/20/2009 5:02:25 PMSpanish - 7
1 Ranura COMMON INTERFACE
Inserte la tarjeta CI(CI+) (Interfaz común) en la ranura.
(Consulte la página 23)
- Si no se inserta una TARJETA CI(CI+) con algunos
canales, en la pantalla aparece Señal codificada.
- En 2 o 3 minutos aparecerá en la pantalla la información
del enlace que contiene un número telefónico, un
identificador de TARJETA CI(CI+), un identificador del
sistema y demás información. Si aparece un mensaje
de error, póngase en contacto con su proveedor de
servicios.
- Si ha terminado la configuración de la información del
canal, aparecerá el mensaje Actualiz. completa, que
indica que la lista de canales ya se ha actualizado.
- Según el modelo, puede que aparezca un mensaje
solicitándole la contraseña de Parental Lock al volver a
insertar la tarjeta CI.
- Según el modelo, aunque Parental Lock esté
configurado como Allow All, puede que aparezca un
mensaje solicitándole la contraseña para los programas
dirigidos a adultos (más de 18 años).
N Inserte la tarjeta CI(CI+) en la dirección marcada sobre
ella.
N La ‘TARJETA CI(CI+)’ no se admite en algunos países,
zonas o emisoras; consulte a su distribuidor local.
N La función CI(CI+) sólo se aplica al modelo PS********P.
Si tiene algún problema, póngase en contacto con el
proveedor del servicio.
2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2
Conexión para un dispositivo de almacenamiento masivo
USB para ver archivos de fotos (JPEG) y reproducir archivos
de audio (MP3) y de películas. Puede conectarse a la red
inalámbrica de SAMSUNG. El terminal USB 1 también se
usa como terminal HDD. HDD (unidad de disco duro) es un
dispositivo que almacena datos codificados digitalmente.
3 HDMI IN 4
Conexión para el terminal HDMI de un dispositivo que tenga
salida HDMI.
4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)
Se conecta a las entradas de vídeo y audio para dispositivos
externos, como una videocámara o un aparato de vídeo.
N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo.
TV Panel posterior
3
4
1
2
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 7 10/20/2009 5:02:27 PMSpanish - 8
Mando a distancia
Puede utilizar el mando a una distancia del televisor de hasta 23 metros.
N El exceso de luz puede influir en el rendimiento del mando a distancia.
Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia
1. Levante la tapa de la parte posterior del mando a distancia, como se muestra en la
ilustración.
2. Inserte dos pilas de tamaño AAA.
N Compruebe que los extremos ‘+’ y ‘–’ de las pilas concuerdan con el diagrama del
interior del compartimiento.
3. Cierre la tapa.
N Si no va a utilizar el mando a distancia durante mucho tiempo, quite las pilas y
guárdelas en un lugar fresco y seco.
N Si el mando a distancia no funciona, haga estas comprobaciones
1. ¿Está encendido el TV?
2. ¿Están intercambiados los polos positivos y negativos de las pilas?
3. ¿Se han agotado las pilas?
4. ¿Ha habido un corte de luz o el cable está desconectado?
5. ¿Hay un fluorescente o un neón a poca distancia?
1 Botón POWER
(enciende y apaga el televisor)
2 Selecciona directamente el modo TV.
3 Botones numéricos para acceso
directo a los canales.
4 Pulse este botón para sintonizar sus
canales favoritos.
5 Interrupción momentánea del sonido.
6 Subir el volumen
Bajar el volumen
7 Selección de fuente disponible.
8 Se utiliza para ver información sobre
la emisión actual.
9 Permite seleccionar rápidamente las
funciones que se usan con mayor
frecuencia.
0 Se usan para seleccionar los
elementos del menú en pantalla y
cambiar los valores del menú.
! Esta función permite ver Internet@TV.
@ Utilice estos botones en la Lista de
canales, Media Play, o Internet@TV etc.
$ Se usa para mostrar las listas de
canales en la pantalla.
% Use estos botones en la Lista de
canales, Media Play y Anynet
+
.
^ Esta función es útil cuando se usa
el mando a distancia de noche o en
una sala oscura. (El uso del mando
a distancia con los botones de
iluminación ON / OFF ( ) activados
reduce el tiempo de uso de las pilas.)
& Canal anterior
* Canal siguiente
Canal anteriorl.
( Muestra el menú de pantalla principal.
) Visualización de la Guía electrónica de
programas (EPG).
a Vuelve al menú anterior.
b Salir del menú en pantalla.
c Esta función permite ver Media Play.
d Esta función permite ver la Biblioteca
de contenidos.
e Visualización de subtítulos digitales.
f Selección de la descripción de audio.
Funciones del teletexto
2 Sale del teletexto
(según los modelos)
7 Selección del modo de teletexto
(LIST/FLOF)
8 Mostrar el teletexto
9 Tamaño del teletexto
@ Selección de tema de Fastext
# Visualización de teletexto/mezclar
información de teletexto y emisión
normal
$ Memorizar teletexto
& Página secundaria de teletexto
* P : Página siguiente del teletexto
P : Página de teletexto anterior
( Índice del teletexto
a Teletexto en espera
b Cancelar teletexto
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 8 10/20/2009 5:02:28 PMSpanish - 9
Visualización de la pantalla
La pantalla identifica el canal actual y el estado de algunos ajustes de audio-vídeo.
O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información.
Pulse el botón INFO del mando a distancia. El televisor mostrará el canal, el tipo de
sonido y el estado de ciertos ajustes de imagen y sonido.
• ▲, ▼ : Puede ver otra información del canal. Si desea ir al canal actualmente
seleccionado, pulse el botón ENTERE.
• ◄, ►: Puede ver la información de programas del canal actual.
N Pulse el botón INFO otra vez o espere unos 10 segundos; la información
desaparecerá automáticamente.
Uso de los botones con luz de fondo del mando a distancia
Use esta función en un entorno oscuro donde no sea posible ver los botones del mando a distancia con claridad.
1. Pulse el botón de iluminación ON/OFF( )
N Si está en ON, la iluminación del botón se enciende durante unos momentos.
N Si se pulsa un botón del mando a distancia cuando éste está activado, la iluminación del botón se enciende durante unos
momentos.
Encendido y apagado
El cable de alimentación se conecta a la parte trasera del televisor.
1. Enchufe el cable de alimentación en una toma eléctrica adecuada.
N El indicador del modo de espera se enciende en el equipo.
2. Pulse el botón POWER P del equipo.
N También puede pulsar el botón POWER P o el botón TV del mando a distancia para encender el televisor.
N El programa que estaba viendo por última vez se vuelve a seleccionar de forma automática.
3. Pulse los botones numéricos (0~9) o de canales arriba/abajo (< / >) del mando a distancia o el botón g < CH> f del equipo.
N Cuando encienda el equipo por primera vez, se le pedirá que elija el idioma en el que quiere que aparezcan los menús.
4. Para apagar el televisor, vuelva a pulsar el botón POWER P.
Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera
El aparato puede ponerse en modo de espera para reducir el consumo eléctrico. El modo de espera es muy útil si desea interrumpir la
visualización momentáneamente (durante la comida, por ejemplo).
1. Pulse el botón POWER P del mando a distancia.
N La pantalla se apaga y aparece un indicador de modo de espera rojo en el equipo.
2. Para volver a encender el equipo, pulse de nuevo los botones POWER P, numéricos (0~9), TV o de canal arriba/abajo (< / >).
N No deje el aparato en modo de espera durante períodos largos de tiempo (cuando está de vacaciones, por ejemplo). Lo más
conveniente es desenchufar el aparato de la red eléctrica y de la antena.
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information
E Watch
' Information
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 9 10/20/2009 5:02:29 PMSpanish - 10
Visualización de los menús
1. Con el aparato encendido, pulse el botón MENU. En la pantalla aparece el menú
principal. En el lado izquierdo del menú hay los iconos : Imagen, Sonido, Canal,
Configuración, Entrada, Aplicación, Asistencia técnica.
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar un icono. Después pulse el botón
ENTERE para acceder al submenú del icono.
3. Pulse el botón EXIT para salir.
N Pasado aproximadamente un minuto, los menús de la pantalla desaparecen.
Uso del botón TOOLS
Se puede usar el botón TOOLS para seleccionar rápida y fácilmente las funciones que se usan con más frecuencia.
El menú Herramientas cambia según el modo de entrada externo que se está viendo.
1. Pulse el botón TOOLS. Aparece el menú Herramientas.
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar un menú y, a continuación, pulse el botón
ENTERE.
3. Pulse los botones ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTEREpara mostrar, cambiar o activar los
elementos seleccionados. Para ver una descripción más detallada de cada función,
consulte la página correspondiente.
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), Consulte la página 46
• Tamaño de imagen, Consulte la página 16
• Modo imagen, Consulte la página 15
• Modo de sonido, Consulte la página 20
• Temp. desc., Consulte la página 22
• SRS TS HD, Consulte la página 20
• Ahorro energía, Consulte la página 24
• Dual l ll, Consulte la página 21
• Añadir a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos), Consulte la página 14
• PIP, Consulte la página 25
• Ajuste automático, Consulte la página 18
Función Plug & Play
Cuando el televisor se enciende por primera vez, los valores se inician correlativamente de forma automática.
N El salvapantallas se activa si durante más de 1 minuto no hay ninguna entrada desde el teclado del mando a distancia mientras Plug & Play
está en ejecución.
N El salvapantallas se activa si durante más de 15 minutos no se detecta ninguna señal de funcionamiento.
N Si accidentalmente selecciona un país erróneo para su televisor, puede que los caracteres de la pantalla se vean de manera incorrecta.
1. Pulse el botón POWER del mando a distancia. El menú Select the OSD Language se
muestra automáticamente. Seleccione el idioma con los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulse el botón
ENTERE para confirmar la elección.
2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Demo tienda o Uso doméstico y, a
continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Es recomendable configurar el televisor en el modo Uso doméstico para obtener la
mejor imagen en un entorno doméstico.
N El modo Demo tienda sólo es necesario en los entornos comerciales.
N Si la unidad accidentalmente se configura en el modo Demo tienda y se desea volver a Uso doméstico (estándar) : Pulse el botón del
volumen del televisor. Cuando se muestra la OSD del volumen, mantenga pulsado el botón MENU del televisor durante 5 segundos.
3. Pulse el botón ENTERE botón. Seleccione el país pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼. Pulsar el botón ENTERE para confirmar la selección.
N Después de seleccionar el país en el menú Country, algunos modelos pueden presentar una opción adicional para configurar el código PIN.
N Para introducir el código PIN, 0-0-0-0 no está disponible.
4. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para memorizar los canales de la conexión seleccionada y pulse el botón ENTERE.
• Aérea : Señal de antena aérea.
• Cable : Señal de antena del cable.
5. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la fuente de antena que desea memorizar. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Empezar.
• Digital y Analógico : Canales digitales y analógicos.
• Digital : Canales digitales.
• Analógico : Canales analógicos.
N La búsqueda de canales se iniciará y terminará automáticamente.
N Para ver una descripción más detallada sobre cómo seleccionar el modo Cable, consulte el capítulo Guardado automático. Consulte la
página 11
Plug & Play
Select the OSD Language.
Language :
U Move E Enter
▲
Nederlands
English
Eesti
▼
Modo : Estándar
Ilumin. celda : 4
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Tint (V/R) : V50/R50
Configuración avanzada
Imagen
Herramientas
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Tamaño de imagen : Ancho auto.
Modo imagen : Estándar
Modo de sonido : Personal
Temp. desc. : Des.
SRS TS HD : Des.
Ahorro energía : Des.
Dual l ll : Mono
Añadir a Favoritos
U Mover E Entrar e Salir
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 10 10/20/2009 5:02:31 PMSpanish - 11
6. Aparece automáticamente el mensaje Configurar el modo del reloj. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para
seleccionar Auto y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Si selecciona Manual, se muestra Configurar fecha y hora actuales. (Para ver una descripción más detallada de la opción
Manual, Consulte la página 22)
N Si ha recibido una señal digital, se ajustará la hora automáticamente.
7. Se muestran unas breves instrucciones en Cómo obtener el mejor rendimiento del nuevo HDTV. Pulse el botón ENTERE .
N Este menú está disponible en Guía de conexión HD en el menú Asistencia técnica.
N Puede ir a la página anterior o siguiente con los botones ◄ / ►.
8. Aparecerá el mensaje Que lo disfrute.
N Si desea ver la televisión inmediatamente, seleccione Ver TV.
N Si se desea ver Ver Guía producto, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Si desea reiniciar esta función...
1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el menú. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar
Configuración y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
2. Pulse de nuevo el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play.
3. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor
nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’.
N Si desea cambiar el número PIN, consulte el capítulo Cambiar PIN, Consulte la página 24.
N La función Plug & Play está disponible sólo en el modo TV.
Memorización de los canales
❑ País
Canal digital : Se puede cambiar el país de los canales digitales.
Canal analógico : Se puede cambiar el país de los canales analógicos.
N Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4
dígitos.
❑ Guardado automático
Busca todos los canales de las emisoras activas (la disponibilidad depende del país) y
los memoriza en el televisor.
Configure el televisor para memorizar los canales de la conexión seleccionada.
• Aérea : Señal de antena aérea.
• Cable : Señal de antena del cable.
Puede seleccionar la fuente de antena que desea memorizar.
• Digital y Analógico : Canales digitales y analógicos.
• Digital : Canales digital.
• Analógico : Canales analógicos.
N Al seleccionar Cable,
• Modo Búsqueda : Muestra el modo de búsqueda. (Rápida)
- ID red : Muestra el código de identificación de la red.
- Frecuencia : Muestra la frecuencia del canal.
- Modulación : Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles.
- Velocidad de símbolo : Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles.
• Modo Búsqueda : Muestra el modo de búsqueda.
(Completa, Red)
- Frecuencia de inicio : Muestra los valores de la frecuencia de inicio.
- Frecuencia de parada : Muestra los valores de la frecuencia de parada.
- Modulación : Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles.
- Velocidad de símbolo : Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles.
N Si desea detener el Guardado automático, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Aparece el mensaje ¿Detener programación automática?.
Seleccione Sí con los botones ◄ o ► y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Control de los canales
Canal
País ►
Guardado automático
Guardado manual
Opción de búsqueda de cable
Guía completa
Miniguía
Guía predeterminada : Guía completa
Lista de canales
Configuración
Plug & Play ►
Idioma de menú : Español
Hora
Emisión
Seguridad
Red
General
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 11 10/20/2009 5:02:31 PMSpanish - 12
❑ Guardado manual
Busca un canal manualmente y lo memoriza en el televisor.
Canal digital (Digital)
N Almacenamiento manual de canales digitales.
• Canal : Establezca el número del canal con los botones ▲, ▼ o numéricos (0~9).
• Frecuencia : Establezca la frecuencia con los botones numéricos (0~9).
• Ancho de banda : Establezca el ancho de banda con los botones ▲ o ▼.
N Una vez finalizada, la lista de canales se actualiza automáticamente.
Canal analógico
Almacenamiento manual de canales analógicos.
• Programa (número de programa que asignar a un canal) : Establezca el número del programa con los botones ▲, ▼ o
numéricos (0~9).
• Sistema de color → Automático / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : Establezca el valor del sistema del color con los botones ▲ o ▼.
• Sistema de sonido → BG / DK / I / L : Establezca el sistema del sonido con los botones ▲ o ▼
• Canal (si conoce el número de canal que desea guardar) : Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar C (canal aéreo) o S
(canal por cable). Pulse el botón ► y después ▲, ▼ o los botones numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar el número que desee.
N Si se produce un sonido anormal o no se produce sonido, vuelva a seleccionar el estándar de sonido adecuado.
• Buscar (si no conoce los números de los canales) : Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para iniciar la búsqueda. El sintonizador explora
el rango de frecuencia hasta que se recibe en la pantalla el primer canal o el canal que se ha seleccionado.
• Guardar (cuando guarde el canal y el número de programa asociado) : Ajústelo a Aceptar pulsando el botón ENTERE.
N Modo de canal
- C (Modo de canal aéreo) : Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada emisora aérea en este modo.
- S (Modo de canal por cable) : Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada canal por cable de este modo.
❑ Opción de búsqueda de cable
Puede establecer opciones adicionales, como la frecuencia y la velocidad de símbolo, para la búsqueda de la red por cable.
(Dependiendo del país)
• Frecuencia inicio : Muestra los valores de la frecuencia de inicio.
• Frecuencia parada : Muestra los valores de la frecuencia de parada.
• Modulación : Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles.
• Velocidad de símbolo : Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles.
N Si el valor de Frecuencia inicio es mayor que el de Frecuencia parada, se muestra un mensaje de advertencia.
❑ Guía completa / Miniguía
La información de la Guía electrónica de programas (EPG) la proporcionan las emisoras. Las entradas de los programas
pueden aparecer vacías u obsoletas, según la información proporcionada por un canal determinado. La pantalla se actualiza
dinámicamente tan pronto como hay nueva información disponible.
• Guía completa : Muestra la información de los programas ordenados por hora en segmentos de una hora. Muestra la
información de dos horas de programa que se puede desplazar adelante o atrás en el tiempo.
• Miniguía : La información de cada programa se muestra en una línea de la pantalla de la miniguía del canal actual desde el
programa actual en adelante según el orden de la hora de inicio del programa.
❑ Guía predeterminada
Miniguía / Guía completa
Puede decidir que se muestre la Miniguía o la Guía completa cuando se pulsa el botón
GUIDE del mando a distancia.
O También puede ver el menú de la guía pulsando el botón GUIDE.
Continúa…
Canal
Guía completa
Miniguía
Guía predeterminada : Guía completa ►
Lista de canales
Modo de canal : Canales añadidos.
Sintonización fina
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 12 10/20/2009 5:02:32 PMSpanish - 13
Uso de Guía completa / Miniguía
▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►,
ENTER
Seleccionar un programa con los botones ▲/▼/◄ / ► ENTERE Botón.
ROJO Intercambiar entre Guía completa o Miniguía.
VERDE Guía completa : Desplazarse rápidamente hacia atrás (-24 horas).
AMARILLO Guía completa : Desplazarse rápidamente hacia adelante. (+24 horas).
AZUL Salir de la guía.
INFO Botón INFO para obtener información detallada.
❑ Modo Canal
Cuando se pulsa el botón P () se cambian los canales en la lista de canales seleccionados.
Canales añadidos : Los canales se cambian en la lista de canales memorizados.
Canales favoritos : Los canales se cambian en la lista de canales favoritos.
❑ Sintonización fina (sólo canales analógicos)
Si la recepción es clara, no tendrá que ajustar la sintonización del canal porque esto se hace automáticamente cuando se ejecuta
la función de búsqueda y memorización. Si la señal es débil o está distorsionada, puede que deba realizar manualmente la
sintonización fina del canal.
N Los canales que se han ajustado con sintonización fina se marcan con un asterisco * a la derecha del número de canal en la
banda del canal.
N Si no almacena en la memoria el canal que ha ajustado con la sintonización fina, los ajustes no se guardan.
N Para reiniciar la sintonización fina, seleccione Rest. pulsando los botones ▼ y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
Gestión de los canales
Con este menú puede agregar y borrar los canales o configurarlos como favoritos y usar la
guía de programas de las emisoras digitales.
N Seleccione un canal en la pantalla Todos los canales, Canales añadidos, Favoritos
o Programado con los botones ▲ o ▼ y pulse el botón ENTERE. A continuación
puede ver el canal seleccionado.
• Todos los canales : Muestra todos los canales disponibles actualmente.
• Canales añadidos : Muestra todos los canales añadidos.
• Favoritos : Muestra todos los canales favoritos.
• Programado : Muestra todos los programas actualmente reservados.
O También puede pulsar el botón CH LIST del mando a distancia para mostrar las
listas de canales.
N Uso de los botones de colores en la lista de canales
- Rojo (Tipo de canal) : Conmuta entre TV, radio, datos/otros y todo.
- Verde (Zoom) : Amplía o disminuye el número del canal.
- Amarillo (Seleccionar) : Selecciona varias listas de canales.
- T TOOLS (Herramientas) : Muestra los menús Borrar (o Añadir), Añadir
a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos), Bloquear (o Desbloquear), Visualiz.
con temporiz., Editar nombre de canal, Modificac. número canal, Ordenar,
Seleccionar todos, Seleccionar todos o Guardado automático.
(Los menús de herramientas pueden cambiar, dependiendo de la situación.)
N Iconos de la pantalla de estado del canal
A Un canal analógico. c Canal seleccionado al pulsar el
botón amarillo.
♥
Un canal configurado como
favorito.
( Programa que se está emitiendo.
\ Un canal bloqueado. ) Programa reservado.
Canal
Miniguía
Guía predeterminada : Guía completa
Lista de canales
Modo Canal : Canales añadidos
Sintonización fina
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Todos los canales
Todos Tipo de canal Zoom Selecc. página Herramientas
Guía completa
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
Información no detallada.
Hoy 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
900 f tn
901 ITV Play
902 Kerrang!
903 Kiss
903 oneword
▼ 903 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
Sin información.
Sin información.
Sin información.
Freshmen O..
Miniguía DTV Cable 900 f tn
Street Hypnosis
Booze Britain
2:00
2:30
▼ 5:00
Freshmen On Campus
Ver Información página Guía completa Salir
Ver Información página Miniguía +24 horas Salir
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 13 10/20/2009 5:02:35 PMSpanish - 14
❑ Menús de herramientas de los canales (en Todos los canales / Canales añadidos / Favoritos)
N Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas.
N Los elementos del menú de Herramientas pueden variar según el estado del canal.
Añadir / Borrar
Puede suprimir o añadir un canal para que se muestren los canales que desee.
N Todos los canales borrados se mostrarán en el menú Todos los canales.
N Un canal de color gris quiere decir que se ha suprimido.
N El menú Añadir sólo aparece con los canales borrados.
N También puede borrar un canal en los menús Canales añadidos o Favoritos de la
misma manera.
Añadir a Favoritos / Borrar de Favoritos
Puede configurar como favoritos los canales que vea con más frecuencia.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede
establecer los canales favoritos seleccionando Herramientas → Añadir a
Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos).
O Si desea seleccionar los canales favoritos que ha configurado, pulse el botón FAV.
CH del mando a distancia.
N Se mostrará el símbolo “♥” y el canal se configurará como favorito..
N Todos los canales favoritos se mostrarán en el menú Favoritos.
Bloquear / Desbloquear
YPuede bloquear un canal para que no se pueda seleccionar ni visualizar. Está función está disponible sólo cuando Seguridad
niños está configurado como Act.. (página 24)
N Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos.
N El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN en el menú.
N Se muestra el símbolo “\” y el canal queda bloqueado.
Visualiz. con temporiz.
Si reserva un programa que desea ver, el canal se cambia automáticamente al canal reservado en la lista de canales aunque esté
viendo otro canal. Para reservar un programa, en primer lugar debe configurar la hora actual. (Página 22)
N Sólo se pueden reservar los canales memorizados.
N Puede ajustar el canal, el mes, el día, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a
distancia.
N La reserva de un programa se muestra en el menú Programado.
N Guía de programas digitales y reserva de visualización Si se ha seleccionado un canal digital y se pulsa el botón ►,
aparece la guía de programas del canal. Se puede reservar un programa mediante el procedimiento descrito anteriormente.
Editar nombre de canal (sólo canales analógicos)
Los canales se pueden etiquetar con el propósito de que cuando éstos se seleccionan se pueda ver su nombre.
N Los nombres de los canales digitales se asignan automáticamente y no se pueden etiquetar.
Modificac. número canal (sólo canales digitales)
También puede editar el número del canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia.
Ordenar (sólo canales analógicos)
Esta operación permite cambiar los números de programa de los canales memorizados. Puede que sea necesario realizarla
después de la memorización automática.
Seleccionar todos / Seleccionar todos
Puede seleccionar o deseleccionar todos los canales de la lista.
N Puede realizar las funciones de añadir, borrar, añadir a favoritos, borrar de favoritos, bloquear o desbloquear con varios canales al
mismo tiempo. Seleccione los canales que desee y pulse el botón amarillo para configurar los canales seleccionados al mismo tiempo.
N La marca caparece a la izquierda de los canales seleccionados.
N YSólo se puede seleccionar Seleccionar todos si hay canales seleccionados.
Guardado automático
N Si desea más detalles sobre las opciones de configuración, consulte el capítulo Memorización de los canales. Consulte la
página 11.
N Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Seguridad niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN.
❑ Menús de herramientas de la lista de canales (en Programado)
Se puede ver, cambiar o borrar una reserva..
N Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas.
• Cambiar información : Selecciónelo para cambiar la reserva de visualización.
• Cancelar programaciones : Selecciónelo para cancelar la reserva de visualización.
• Información : Selecciónelo para ver una reserva de visualización.
(También puede cambiar la información de la reserva.)
• Seleccionar todos / Seleccionar todos : Seleccionar o deseleccionar todos los
programas reservados..
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Todos los canales
Todo Tipo de canale Zoom Selecc página Herramientas
Borrar
Añadir a Favoritos
Bloquear
Visual. con temp
Modificac. nombre canal
Ordenar
▼
Programado
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer
Cambiar información
Cancelar progr.
Información
Seleccionar todos
Todo Zoom Selecc. Herramientas Información
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 14 10/20/2009 5:02:35 PMSpanish - 15
Cambio de la configuración de la imagen
❑ Modo
Puede seleccionar el tipo de imagen que mejor cumpla sus requisitos de visualización.
Dinámico / Estándar / Eco / Película
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede
configurar el modo de la imagen seleccionando Herramientas → Modo imagen.
❑ Ilumin. celda / Contraste / Brillo / Nitidez / Color / Matiz (V/R)
El televisor tiene varias opciones de configuración que permiten controlar la calidad de
la imagen.
• Ilumin. celda : Ajusta el brillo de los píxeles.
• Contraste : Ajusta el nivel de contraste. Cuanto más cerca de 100, mayor es ladiferencia.
• Brillo : Ajusta el nivel de brillo.
• Nitidez : Ajusta el nivel de nitidez.
• Color : Ajusta la saturación del color de la imagen mediante la barra de la pantalla.Cuanto más cerca de 100, más saturado
está el color.
• Matiz (V/R) : Ajusta el matiz del color de la imagen.
N Cuando se cambian Ilumin. celda, Contraste, Brillo, Nitidez, Color o Matiz (V/R), la presentación en la pantalla OSD se
ajusta consecuentemente.
N Los valores ajustados se guardan para cada modo de imagen.
N En los modos analógicos TV, Ext., AV del sistema PAL, no se puede usar la función Matiz.
N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden realizar cambios en las opciones Ilumin. celda, Contraste y Brillo.
N Cada valor ajustado se almacenará por separado según su modo de entrada.
N La energía consumida durante el uso se puede reducir significativamente si se disminuye el nivel del brillo de la imagen, ya que
así se reduce el coste total de funcionamiento.
❑ Configuración avanzada
Puede ajustar la configuración avanzada de la pantalla, incluidos el color y el
contraste.
N Configuración avanzada está disponible en los modos Estándar o Película.
N En el modo PC sólo se pueden cambiar Contraste dinám., Gamma y Balance de
blanco entre los elementos de Configuración avanzada.
Tono del negro → Des. / Oscuro / Más oscuro / El más oscuro
Puede mejorar la profundidad de la imagen ajustando la densidad del color negro.
Contraste dinám. → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto
Puede ajustar el contraste de la pantalla para conseguir un contraste óptimo.
Gamma
Puede ajustar la intensidad de los colores primarios (rojo, verde y azul).
Gama de colores
La gama de colores es una matriz compuesta por los colores rojo, verde y azul. Seleccione su gama favorita de colores y disfrute
de unos colores auténticamente naturales.
• Auto : Configura automáticamente la gama de color de acuerdo con la fuente del vídeo de entrada.
• Original : Configura la gama de color más amplia que la de la fuente del vídeo de entrada.
• Personal : Ajusta la gama del color según las preferencias del usuario.
N Personalización de la gama de colores
- Ajusta la gama del color según las preferencias del usuario. Color está disponible cuando Gama de colores está
configurado en Personal.
- Color → Rojo / Verde / Azul / Amarillo / Cián / Magenta
- Rojo / Verde / Azul : Puede ajustar los valores RGB del color seleccionado.
- Rest. : Restablece la gama de colores en los valores predeterminados.
Control de la imagen
Continúa…
Modo : Estándar ►
Ilumin. celda : 4
Contraste : 95
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Color : 50
Matiz (V/R) : V50/R50
Configuración avanzada
Imagen
Color : 50
Matiz (V/R) : V50 / R50
Configuración avanzada ►
Opciones de imagen
Reinicio de la imagen
Imagen
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 15 10/20/2009 5:02:36 PMSpanish - 16
Balance de blanco
Puede ajustar la temperatura del color para conseguir colores más naturales.
• Rojo - / Verde - / Azul - / Rojo + / Verde + / Azul + : Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada.
• Rest. : Restablece el balance de blancos predeterminado.
Tono piel
Puede ajustar el tono de piel para que sea más o menos rojo.
N Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada.
Mejora del borde → Des. / Act.
Puede acentuar los bordes de los objetos en las imágenes.
xvYCC → Des. / Act.
Si se activa el modo xvYCC, se aumenta el detalle y la gama de colores mientras se ven películas desde un dispositivo externo
(por ejemplo, un reproductor de DVD)
N xvYCC está disponible cuando el modo de imagen está configurado en Cine y la entrada externa está establecida en los
modos HDMI o Componente.
N Es posible que esta función no se admita, según el dispositivo externo.
❑ Opciones de imagen
Puede personalizar los parámetros de imagen adicionales según sus preferencias
personales.
N En el modo PC sólo se pueden cambiar Tono color, Tamaño y Screen
Protección de pantalla entre los elementos de Opciones de imagen.
Tono color → Frío / Normal / Cálido1 / Cálido2 / Cálido3
Puede seleccionar el tono de color que le resulte más cómodo para la vista.
N Los parámetros ajustados se almacenan de acuerdo con el modo Imagen
seleccionado.
N Cálido1, Cálido2 o Cálido3 sólo están disponibles cuando el modo de imagen
está configurado en Película.
Tamaño → Ancho auto. / 16:9 / Zoom ancho / Zoom / 4:3 / Ajuste pantalla Puede seleccionar el tamaño de imagen
que mejor se adapte a sus requisitos de visualización.
• Ancho auto. : Ajusta la imagen en formato de ancho automático 4:3 a 16:9.
• 16:9 : Ajusta la imagen al modo panorámico 16:9.
• Zoom ancho : Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más que 4:3.
• Zoom : Amplía la imagen ancha de 16:9 en sentido vertical.
• 4:3 : Ajusta la imagen al modo normal 4:3.
• Ajuste pantalla : Muestra la señal HD nativa completa que no se puede ver en un televisor normal.
N Según la fuente de entrada, las opciones de tamaño de la imagen pueden variar.
N Las opciones disponibles pueden diferir según el modelo seleccionado.
N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden ajustar los modos 16:9 y 4:3.
N Si se ha seleccionado el modo doble ( , ) men el menú PIP, el tamaño de la imagen no se puede definir.
N La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a la entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar.
N Puede producirse una retención temporal de imagen cuando se ve una imagen estática durante más de dos horas.
N Zoom ancho : Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones
▲ o ▼ para desplazar la pantalla hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Zoom : Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones
▲ o ▼ para desplazar la imagen hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse el botón ►
para seleccionar Tamaño y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Utilice los botones ▲ o ▼ para ampliar o reducir el
tamaño de la imagen en dirección vertical. A continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Después de seleccionar Ajuste pantalla en los modos HDMI (1080i / 1080p) o Componente (1080i / 1080p) : Seleccione
Posición con los botones ◄ o ►. Use los botones ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► para mover la imagen.
N Rest. : Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Rest. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Puede inicializar la
configuración.
N Si se usa la función Ajuste pantalla con la entrada HDMI 720p, en los laterales superior, inferior, derecho e izquierdo de la
pantalla se cortará 1 línea como en la función de sobreexploración.
Modo Pantalla → 16:9 / Zoom ancho / Zoom / 4:3
Cuando se configura el tamaño de la imagen como Ancho auto. en un televisor panorámico 16:9, se puede determinar el tamaño
de la imagen para ver una imagen en pantalla panorámica 4:3 WSS o ninguna. Cada país europeo exige un tamaño de imagen
diferente, de modo que esta función está concebida con la intención de que los usuarios la seleccionen.
N Esta función está disponible en el modo Ancho auto..
N Esta función no está disponible en los modos PC, Componente o HDMI.
Continúa…
Matiz (V/R) : V50/R50
Configuración avanzada
Opciones de imagen ►
Reinicio de la imagen
Imagen
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 16 10/20/2009 5:02:37 PMSpanish - 17
Digital NR → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Auto
Si la señal de emisión que recibe el televisor es débil, puede activarse la función de reducción digital del ruido para reducir la
estática y las imágenes superpuestas que pueden aparecer en la pantalla.
N Cuando la señal sea débil, seleccione alguna de las otras opciones hasta que se vea una imagen de mejor calidad.
N.neg HDMI → Normal / Bajo
Puede seleccionar directamente el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta.
N Esta función sólo está activa cuando se conecta la entrada externa a HDMI (señales RGB).
Demostración de movimiento Full HD 1080 → Des. / Act.
Los paneles PDP de nueva generación de Samsung’s proporcionan una asombrosa claridad de movimiento Full HD cuando se ven
deportes, películas y juegos muy dinámicos.
N Esta función no está disponible en los modos PC, Juego, o Media Play.
Modo de película
Puede optimizar el modo de imagen para ver películas.
• Des. : Desactiva la función del modo de película.
• Auto1 : Ajusta automáticamente la imagen con la mejor calidad cuando se ve una película.
• Auto2 : Mejora automáticamente el texto de vídeo cuando se ven películas.
• Cinema Smooth : Proporciona la sensación de cine definitiva.
N Film mode es compatible con los modos TV, Video, S-Video, Componente (480i / 1080i) y HDMI (1080i).
Real 100Hz Demo → Des. / Act.
Se puede ver una distinción clara entre Real 100Hz y 50 Hz, especialmente cuando se miran escenas de acción. Por ello, cuando
contemple escenas con escaso movimiento no podrá diferenciar Real 100Hz de 50 Hz. La demostración de 100 Hz funciona sólo
con la señal de 50 Hz. El modo de demostración de Real 100Hz se proporciona para demostraciones en comercios con imágenes
especiales.
Sólo modo azul → Des. / Act.
Esta función es para los expertos en mediciones de dispositivos AV. Esta función muestra sólo la señal azul ya que se eliminan las
señales rojas y verdes de la señal de vídeo a fin de proporcionar un efecto de filtro azul que se usa para ajustar el color y el matiz
de los equipos de vídeo, como reproductores DVD, sistemas Home Cinema, etc..
N Sólo modo azul está disponible cuando el modo de imagen está configurado como Película o Estándar.
Protección pantalla
Esta pantalla está equipada con tecnología de prevención para reducir la posibilidad de que se queme. Esta tecnología permite
definir el movimiento de la imagen arriba o abajo (vertical) y de lado a lado (horizontal). El ajuste del tiempo permite programar
intervalos temporales entre los movimientos de la imagen en minutos.
• Cambio de píxel : Con esta función podrá mover píxeles de forma detallada en la pantalla PDP, en sentido horizontal o vertical,
para minimizar restos de imágenes en la pantalla.
N Condición óptima para cambio de píxel
Elemento TV/Ext/AV/Componente/HDMI PC
Horizontal 0~2 2
Vertical 0~4 4
Tiempo (minutos) 1~4 min 2 min
N El valor del cambio de píxel puede variar según el tamaño (pulgadas) del monitor y el modo.
N Esta función no está disponible en el modo Ajuste pantalla.
• Desplazamiento : Esta función ayuda a suprimir los restos de imágenes en la pantalla moviendo todos los píxeles de la PDP
de acuerdo con un patrón. Utilice esta función si hay restos de imágenes o símbolos en la pantalla, especialmente después de
haber mostrado una imagen fija en la pantalla durante un largo tiempo.
• Lateral gris : Cuando se ve la televisión con una relación de pantalla de 4:3, ésta se puede proteger de un posible daño si se
ajusta el balance de blanco en ambos extremos, el izquierdo y el derecho.
- Claro : Cuando se establece una relación de pantalla de 4:3, con esta opción se aclaran ambos extremos, el izquierdo y el
derecho.
- Oscuro : Cuando se establece una relación de pantalla de 4:3, con esta opción se oscurecen ambos extremos, el izquierdo y
el derecho.
Continúa…
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 17 10/20/2009 5:02:37 PMSpanish - 18
Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador
N Preselección : Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar el modo PC.
❑ Ajuste automático
Esta función permite que la pantalla de PC del equipo se ajuste automáticamente a la
señal de vídeo del PC. Los valores fino, grueso y posición se ajustan automáticamente.
N Esta función no se puede utilizar en modo DVI-HDMI.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar
el Ajuste automático seleccionando Herramientas → Ajuste automático.
❑ Pantalla
El objetivo del ajuste de la calidad de imagen es eliminar o reducir las interferencias. Si el ruido no se elimina mediante la
sintonización fina, ajuste la frecuencia lo mejor que pueda (gruesa) y vuelva a realizar la sintonización fina. Después de reducir el
ruido, vuelva a ajustar la imagen para que quede alineada en el centro de la pantalla.
Grueso
Ajusta la frecuencia si hay distorsiones verticales en la pantalla.
Fino
Ajusta la pantalla para que sea más clara.
Posición de PC
Ajuste la posición de la pantalla del PC si no se acopla a la pantalla del TV.
Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para ajustar la posición vertical. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para ajustar posición horizontal.
Restablecer imagen
Puede recuperar todos los ajustes de imagen predeterminados de fábrica.
❑ Reinicio de la imagen → Rest. modo imagen / Cancelar
Restablece todos los ajustes predeterminados.
N Seleccione un modo de imagen que desee restaurar. La restauración se realiza en
cada modo de imagen.
Brillo : 45
Nitidez : 50
Ajuste automático ►
Pantalla
Configuración avanzada
Opciones de imagen
Reinicio de la imagen
Imagen Picture
Configuración avanzada
Opciones de imagen
Reinicio de la imagen ►
Imagen
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 18 10/20/2009 5:02:37 PMSpanish - 19
Pantalla de PC
❑ Configuración del software del PC (basado en Windows XP)
A continuación se muestra la configuración de pantalla de Windows para un
ordenador típico. Probablemente la pantalla real de su PC sea distinta, según
la versión concreta de Windows y de la tarjeta de vídeo que tenga. Aunque las
pantallas reales sean diferentes, la información de configuración básica que se
aplica en casi todos los casos es la misma. (En caso contrario, póngase en contacto
con el fabricante del ordenador o con el distribuidor de Samsung.)
1. Primero, haga clic en ‘Panel de control’ en el menú Inicio de Windows.
2. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Apariencia y temas’ y
aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo.
3. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Pantalla’ y aparecerá
un cuadro de diálogo.
4. Seleccione la ficha ‘Configuración’ en el cuadro de diálogo. Configuración correcta
del tamaño (resolución) : 1920 x 1080 píxeles
Si existe una opción de frecuencia vertical en el cuadro de diálogo de configuración
de la pantalla, el valor correcto es ‘60’ o ‘60 Hz’. En caso contrario, haga clic en
‘Aceptar’ y salga del cuadro de diálogo.
❑ Modos de pantalla
Tanto la posición en la pantalla como el tamaño varían dependiendo del tipo de monitor del PC y de su resolución.
Se recomiendan las resoluciones de la tabla.
N Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI IN 2(DVI).
N No se admite el modo entrelazado.
N TEl aparato puede funcionar incorrectamente si se selecciona un formato de vídeo que no sea estándar.
N Los modos Independiente y Compuesto no se admiten. SOG no se admite.
N Un cable VGA demasiado largo o de mala calidad puede provocar que se vea la imagen con ruido en los modos de resolución
alta (1920 x 1080).
Entradas D-Sub y HDMI/DVI
Modo Resolución
Frecuencia horizontal
(kHz)
Frecuencia vertical
(Hz)
Reloj de píxeles
Frecuencia
(MHz)
Polaridad de
sincronización
(H/V)
IBM
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / -
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / +
MAC
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / -
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / -
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / +
VESA CVT
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / +
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / +
1280 x 720
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / +
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / +
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / +
VESA DMT
640 x 480
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / -
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / -
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / -
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / +
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / +
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / +
1024 x 768
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / -
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / -
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / +
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 800
49.702 59.810 83.500 - / +
62.795 74.934 106.500 - / +
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 1024
63.981 60.020 108.000 + / +
79.976 75.025 135.000 + / +
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / +
1440 x 900
55.935 59.887 106.500 - / +
70.635 74.984 136.750 - / +
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / +
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / +
VESA GTF
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / +
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / -
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 19 10/20/2009 5:02:38 PMSpanish - 20
Cambio del estándar de sonido
❑ Modo
Puede seleccionar el tipo de efecto de sonido especial que se va a utilizar mientras ve
una emisión determinada.
Estándar / Música / Película / Voz clara / Personal
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede
configurar el modo de sonido seleccionando Herramientas → Modo de sonido.
❑ Ecualizador
Los parámetros de sonido pueden ajustarse para que se adapten a sus preferencias
personales.
• Modo : Puede seleccionar el modo de sonido que se ajuste a sus preferencias personales.
• Balance : Ajusta el balance entre los altavoces izquierdo y derecho.
• 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Ajuste ancho de banda) : Ajusta el nivel de las diferentes frecuencias de ancho de banda.
• Rest. : Restablece la configuración del ecualizador en los valores predeterminados.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Des./Act.
SRS TruSurround HD es una tecnología combinada de TruSurround y FOCUS, TruBass.
SRS TruSurround HD permite disfrutar de un sonido surround virtual de 5.1 canales en los dos altavoces del televisor. Esta
función proporciona no sólo bajos profundos sino que también mejora la resolución de las frecuencias altas.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También se puede
configurar SRS TruSurround HD seleccionando Herramientas → SRS TS HD.
TruSurround HD, SRS y el símbolo son marcas comerciales de SRS Labs, Inc. La tecnología
TruSurround HD está incorporada bajo licencia de SRS Labs, Inc.
N Si al reproducir música el sonido del televisor no se oye correctamente, ajuste el ecualizador y SRS TruSurround HD (Des./Act.).
❑ Idioma de audio (sólo canales digitales)
Puede cambiar los valores predeterminados para los idiomas del audio. Muestra la información del idioma para el flujo de entrada.
N Sólo se puede seleccionar uno de los idiomas que ofrece la emisora.
❑ Formato audio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (sólo canales digitales)
Cuando el sonido se emite desde un altavoz principal y un receptor de audio, se puede originar un sonido de eco debido a las diferencias
en la velocidad de decodificación entre el altavoz principal y el receptor de audio. En tales casos, use la función Altavoz de TV.
N Sólo se puede seleccionar uno de los idiomas que ofrece la emisora.
Fabricado bajo licencia de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby y el símbolo de la doble D son marcas
comerciales de Dolby Laboratories.
❑ Descripción de audio (sólo canales digitales)
Es una función auxiliar de audio que proporciona una pista de audio adicional para personas con problemas de vista. Esta función
maneja el flujo de audio de AD (Descripción de audio) cuando se envía desde el
emisor con el audio principal.Los usuarios pueden activar o desactivar la descripción
de audio y controlar el volumen.
O Puede seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón AD del mando a distancia.
Descripción de audio → Des. / Act.
Activa o desactiva la función de descripción del audio.
Volumen
Ajusta el volumen de la descripción del audio.
N Volumen está activo cuando Descripción de audio se configura como Act..
Control del sonido
Modo : Custom ►
Ecualizador
SRS TruSurround HD : Des.
Idioma de audio : ----
Formato audio : ----
Descripción de audio
Volumen automático : Des.
Seleccionar altavoz : Altavoz de TV
Sonido
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 20 10/20/2009 5:02:39 PMSpanish - 21
❑ Volumen automático → Des. / Act.
Cada emisora tiene sus propias condiciones de señal y resulta incómodo ajustar el volumen cada vez que se cambia de canal.
Esta función permite ajustar automáticamente el volumen de un canal disminuyendo la salida de sonido cuando la señal de
modulación es alta o aumentando la salida de sonido cuando la señal de modulación es baja.
❑ Seleccionar altavoz → Altavoz externo / Altavoz de TV
Si desea usar unos altavoces independientes, desactive el amplificador interno.
N Los botones – +, MMUTE no funcionan si Seleccionar altavoz está establecido en Altavoz externo.
N Si se selecciona Altavoz externo en el menú Seleccionar altavoz, se limita la configuración del sonido.
Altavoces internos del televisor
Salida de audio (Optical, R/L Out) para el sistema
de sonido
TV/Ext. /AV/Componente/ PC/HDMI TV/Ext. /AV/Componente/PC/ HDMI
Altavoz de TV Salida para altavoces Salida de sonido
Altavoz externo Silencio Salida de sonido
Sin señal del vídeo Silencio Silencio
❑ Selección de Sonido
Cuando la opción PIP está activada, se puede escuchar el sonido de la imagen secundaria (PIP).
• Principal : Se usa para escuchar el sonido de la imagen principal.
• Sub : Se usa para escuchar el sonido de la imagen secundaria.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas. También puede
configurar el sonido de la imagen secundaria seleccionando Herramientas →
PIP → Selección de sonido.
N Puede seleccionar esta opción cuando PIP está ajustado como Act.
❑ Reinicio del sonido
Restablecer todo / Rest. modo sonido / Cancelar : Puede restaurar la
configuración del sonido con los valores predeterminados de fábrica.
Selección del modo de sonido
Cuando se configura Dual l ll, el modo de sonido actual se muestra en la pantalla.
Tipo de emisión Indicación en pantalla
NICAM
Estéreo
Emisión normal
(Audio estándar)
Mono (Uso normal)
Normal + NICAM Mono NICAM
Mono
(Normal)
NICAM-Estéreo
NICAM
Stereo
Mono
(Normal)
NICAM Dual-I/II
NICAM
Dual-1
NICAM
Dual-2
Mono
(Normal)
A2
Estéreo
Emisión normal
(Audio estándar)
Mono (Uso normal)
Bilingüe o Dual-I/II Dual I Dual II
Estéreo Estéreo
Mono
(mono forzado)
N Si la señal de estéreo es débil y el modo cambia de forma automática, cambie a mono.
N Esta función sólo está activa en la señal de sonido estéreo. Está desactivada en la señal de sonido monoaural.
N Esta función sólo está disponible en el modo TV.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas. También se puede
seleccionar el modo de la imagen seleccionando Herramientas → Dual l ll.
Seleccionar altavoz : Altavoz de TV
Selección de sonido : Principal
Reinicio del sonido ►
Sonido
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 21 10/20/2009 5:02:39 PMSpanish - 22
Descripción de las funciones
Configuración de la hora
❑ Reloj
El ajuste del reloj es necesario para utilizar las distintas funciones de temporización del
televisor.
N La hora actual aparecerá siempre que se pulse el botón INFO.
N Si desconecta el cable de alimentación, debe configurar el reloj de nuevo.
Modo de reloj
Se puede configurar la hora actual manual o automáticamente.
• Auto : Configure la hora automáticamente mediante la información de la hora de la
emisión digital.
• Manual : Configure la hora actual manualmente.
Ajustar hora
Puede ajustar la hora actual manualmente.
N Establezca este elemento cuando configure Modo de reloj como Manual.
N Puede ajustar directamente Mes, Día, Año, Hora, Minuto con los botones numéricos
del mando a distancia.
❑ Temp. desc. → Des. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min / 180 min
El temporizador de desconexión apaga automáticamente el televisor después de un período prefijado
(30, 60, 90, 120, 150 y 180 minutos).
N Cuando el temporizador llega a 0, el televisor pasa al modo de espera de forma automática.
N Para cancelar la función Temp. desc. seleccione Des..
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede
configurar el temporizador seleccionando Herramientas → Temp. desc..
❑ Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3
Utilice esta función para que el televisor se encienda o apague a una hora concreta.
• Hora encendido : Establece la hora en que se encenderá el televisor.
• Hora apagado : Establece la hora en que se apagará el televisor.
• Volumen : Controla el nivel del volumen.
• Fuente : Seleccione el dispositivo TV, USB.
N Si selecciona el TV, puede configurar Antena y Canal.
- Antena : Selecciona aérea o de cable.
- Canal : Selecciona el canal deseado.
N Si selecciona USB, puede configurar el contenido.
- Contenido : Selecciona el contenido deseado de USB.
N Si no hay archivos de música en el USB o no se ha seleccionado la carpeta que contenga los archivos de música, el
temporizador no funciona correctamente.
• Repetir : Seleccione Una vez, Cada día, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sáb, Sáb~Dom o Manual.
N Con Manual seleccionado, pulse el botón ► para seleccionar el día de la semana. Pulse el botón ENTERE sobre el día
deseado; aparecerá la marca c.
N El nombre de la carpeta de USB admite 64 caracteres en inglés.
N Debe ajustar el reloj en primer lugar.
N Puede ajustar la hora, los minutos y el canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia.
N Apagado automático
Si activa el temporizador, el televisor se apagará si no se pulsa ningún botón durante 3 horas, después de que el temporizador lo
haya puesto en marcha. Esta función sólo está disponible con el temporizador activado y evita el recalentamiento que se puede
producir si el televisor está encendido durante demasiado tiempo.
Hora
Reloj : -- : -- ►
Temp. desc. : Des.
Temporizador 1 : Desactivado
Temporizador 2 : Desactivado
Temporizador 3 : Desactivado
U Mover E Entrar R Volver
Configuración
Plug & Play
Idioma de menú : Español
Hora ►
Emisión
Seguridad
Red
General
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 22 10/20/2009 5:02:39 PMSpanish - 23
Configuración del menú de configuración
❑ Idioma de menú
Puede configurar el idioma de los menús.
❑ Emisión
Subtítulos
Se pueden activar o desactivar los subtítulos. Use este menú para configurar el modo
de subtítulo. Normal es la opción básica y Duro de oído es la opción para personas
con problemas de audición.
• Subtítulos → Des. / Act. : Activa o desactiva los subtítulos.
• Modo → Normal / Duro de oído : Establece el modo de los subtítulos.
• Idioma de los subtítulos : Establece el idioma de los subtítulos.
N Si el programa que se está viendo no admite la opción Duro de oído,
automáticamente se activa Normal aunque se seleccione Duro de oído.
N El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible
la selección de idiomas.
O También puede seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón SUBT. del mando
a distancia.
Texto digital → Inhabilitar / Habilitar
Si el programa se emite con texto digital, esta opción está habilitada.
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group -Grupo de expertos para la codificación de la
información hipermedia y multimedia)
Es una norma internacional para los sistemas de codificación de datos que se utilizan en hipermedia y multimedia. Es un
nivel superior al sistema MPEG que incluye hipermedia vinculado a datos, como imágenes fijas, servicios de caracteres,
animaciones, gráficos y archivos de vídeo así como datos multimedia. MHEG es una tecnología de interacción de tiempo de
ejecución del usuario que se aplica en varios campos, como VOD (vídeo a la carta), ITV (televisión interactiva), EC (comercio
electrónico), educación a distancia, teleconferencias, bibliotecas digitales y juegos
Idioma del teletexto
Se puede configurar el idioma del teletexto seleccionando el tipo de idioma.
N El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas.
Transparencia
• Idioma principal audio / Idioma secundario audio / Idioma princ. subtítulos / Idioma sec. subtítulos / Idioma principal
del teletexto / Idioma secundario del teletexto
Con esta función los usuarios pueden seleccionar uno de los idiomas. El idioma seleccionado aquí se convierte en el
predeterminado cuando se selecciona un canal. Si se cambia la configuración del idioma, las opciones de idioma de los
subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto del menú Idioma se cambian automáticamente al idioma seleccionado. Las opciones
Idioma de los subtítulos, Idioma de audio e Idioma del teletexto, del menú Idioma, muestran una lista de los idiomas admitidos
en el canal actual y la selección se resalta. Si cambia la configuración del idioma, ésta sólo es válida en el canal actual. Los
cambios de configuración no afectan a las opciones de idioma principal de los subtítulos, del audio o del teletexto del menú de
preferencias.
Interfaz común
• Instalación de la tarjeta CI(CI+)
1. Puede adquirir el módulo del CAM de CI(CI+) por teléfono o en el distribuidor
más cercano a su domicilio.
2. Inserte la TARJETA CI(CI+) en el CAM siguiendo la dirección de la flecha hasta
que encaje.
3. Inserte el CAM con la TARJETA CI(CI+) instalada en la ranura para interfaz
común.
N Inserte el CAM, siguiendo la dirección de la flecha, hasta el fondo, de modo que
quede paralelo a la ranura.
4. Compruebe si se ven imágenes en un canal de señal codificada.
• Menú CI(CI+)
Permite al usuario realizar selecciones en el menú CAM proporcionado. Seleccione
el menú CI(CI+) según el menú de la tarjeta PC.
• Info. sobre la aplicación
La interfaz común contiene y muestra información acerca del CAM insertado en la ranura CI(CI+).
La información de la aplicación insertada se refiere a la TARJETA CI(CI+). La instalación del CAM puede efectuarse con el
televisor encendido o apagado.
N La ‘TARJETA CI(CI+)’ no se admite en algunos países, zonas o emisoras; consulte a su distribuidor local.
Continúa…
Configuración
Plug & Play
Idioma de menú : Español ►
Hora
Emisión
Seguridad
Red
General
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 23 10/20/2009 5:02:40 PMSpanish - 24
❑ Seguridad
N Algunos modelos requieren el código PIN cuando se utiliza Plug & Play.
Seguridad niños → Des. / Act.
Esta función permite bloquear el vídeo y el audio para evitar que los usuarios no autorizados (por ejemplo, los niños) puedan ver
programas poco recomendables.
N Antes de que se muestre la pantalla de configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción del código PIN. Escriba su
código PIN de 4 dígitos.
N El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN en el menú.
N Se pueden bloquear algunos canales en la lista de canales. (Consulte la página 14)
N Seguridad niños sólo está disponible en el modo TV.
Bloqueo paterno
Con esta función se puede impedir por medio de un código PIN (número de identificación personal) de 4 dígitos definido por el
usuario que personas no autorizadas, como los niños, vean programas inadecuados.
N El elemento de clasificación paterna difiere según el país.
N Antes de que se muestre la pantalla de configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción del código PIN. Escriba su
código PIN de 4 dígitos.
N El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’. Se puede cambiar el PIN seleccionando Cambiar PIN en el menú.
N Una vez establecida la clasificación, se muestra el símbolo “\” .
N Perm. todo / Bloq. todo : Se pulsa para desbloquear o bloquear todos los programas de televisión.
Cambiar PIN
Se puede cambiar el número ID personal necesario para configurar el televisor.
N Antes de que se muestre la pantalla de configuración, aparece la pantalla para la introducción del código PIN. Escriba su
código PIN de 4 dígitos. (Código PIN predeterminado: ‘0-0-0-0’)
N Si ha olvidado el código PIN, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en la siguiente secuencia para reiniciar el PIN a ‘0-0-0-0’:
POWER (apagar), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (encender).
❑ General
Modo Juego → Des. / Act
Si conecta una consola de videojuegos, como PlayStation
TM
o Xbox5
TM
, podrá disfrutar de sensaciones más realistas
seleccionando el menú de juegos.
• Si el Modo Juego está encendido
- El modo Imagen cambia automáticamente a Estándar y no se puede cambiar.
- El modo Sonido cambia automáticamente a Personal y no se puede cambiar. Ajuste el sonido con el ecualizador.
- El modo Rest. del menú Sonido se activa. La función Rest. inicializa la configuración del ecualizador con los valores
predeterminados de fábrica.
N Modo Juego no está disponible en el modo normal de TV o Modo Juego está establecido como Des.
N Si la calidad de la imagen es deficiente cuando un dispositivo externo está conectado a TV, compruebe si la opción Modo
Juego está configurada como Act.
N Si visualiza el menú de TV en el modo Juego, la pantalla tiembla ligeramente.
N La marca que aparece en la pantalla indica que la opción Modo Juego está activa con la fuente seleccionada.
N Esta función sólo admite la función de juegos.
N Modo Juego no está disponible en el modo PC.
BD Wise → Des. / Act.
BD Wise es una función que permite configurar automáticamente la condición óptima de todos los dispositivos Samsung
conectados compatibles con BD Wise.
N Esta función sólo está activa cuando un dispositivo externo está conectado al televisor a través de HDMI.
N Cuando BD Wise está configurado como Act., el modo de imagen se configura automáticamente según las mejores
condiciones.
Ahorro energía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Imagen desact.
Esta función ajusta el brillo del televisor, lo cual reduce el consumo de energía. Si desea ver la televisión por la noche, ajuste la
opción del modo Ahorro energía en Alto; sus ojos se lo agradecerán y, además, reducirá el consumo de energía.
Si se selecciona Imagen desact., la pantalla se apaga y sólo se puede oír el sonido. Pulse cualquier botón para salir de Imagen
desact..
N En el menú Herramientas, la función Imagen desact. no se admite.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 24 10/20/2009 5:02:40 PMSpanish - 25
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar la
opción Ahorro energía seleccionando Herramientas → Ahorro energía.
Transparencia de menú
Puede definir la transparencia de los menús.
• Brillo : Establece el menú en pantalla como normal.
• Oscuro : Establece el menú en pantalla como opaco.
Melodía → Des. / Bajo / Medio / Alto
El volumen del sonido de la melodía del encendido y del apagado del televisor se puede configurar.
N La melodía no se reproduce
- Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha activado el botón MMUTE.
- Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha pulsado el botón – (Volumen).
- Cuando la función Temp. desc. ha apagado el televisor.
Efecto de luz (PS58B680/PS63B680 sólo)
Se puede apagar o encender el LED azul del frontal del televisor según las circunstancias. Use esta función para ahorrar energía o
si el LED le molesta a la vista.
• Des. : El LED azul siempre está apagado.
• En espera : El LED azul se enciende cuando el TV está en modo de espera y se apaga cuando se enciende el televisor.
• Viendo TV : El LED azul se enciende cuando se ve la televisión y se apaga cuando se apaga el televisor.
• Siempre : El LED está siempre encendido.
N Configure la opción Efecto de luz en Des. para reducir el consumo de energía.
Visualización PIP (Imagen en imagen)
Puede mostrar una imagen secundaria dentro de la imagen principal de un programa de TV o
entrada de vídeo. De esta forma puede ver una imagen del programa de TV o de la entrada de
vídeo desde cualquier equipo conectado mientras ve la imagen principal.
N Puede notar que la imagen de la ventana PIP llega a ser ligeramente artificial cuando
utiliza la pantalla principal para visualizar juegos o karaoke.
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para usar el menú Herramientas. También puede
establecer la configuración PIP relacionada seleccionando Herramientas → PIP.
❑ PIP → Des. / Act.
Puede activar o desactivar la función PIP.
Imagen principal Imagen secundaria
Componente
HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3,HDMI4
PC
TV
Tamaño → / / /
Puede seleccionar el tamaño de la imagen secundaria.
N Si la imagen principal está en modo HDMI, la opción Tamaño está disponible.
Posición → / / /
Puede seleccionar la posición de la imagen secundaria.
N En el modo doble ( , ) mode, Posición no se puede seleccionar.
Canal
Puede seleccionar un canal para la imagen secundaria.
PIP
PIP : Des. ►
Tamaño :
Posición :
Canal : ATV 1
E Entrar R Volver
General
Modo Juego : Des.
BD Wise : Des.
Ahorro energía : Des.
Transpar. de menú : Brillo
Melodía : Medio
PIP ►
U Mover E Entrar R Volver
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 25 10/20/2009 5:02:41 PMSpanish - 26
Programa admitido
❑ Aviso legal
Puede ver el aviso legal y el descargo de responsabilidad general referentes al contenido y los servicios de terceros.
Descargo respons. gral.
Es el servicio de aviso legal completo referente a Internet@TV.
N El descargo de responsabilidad puede variar según el país.
N Puede desplazarse a la página anterior o siguiente con los botones ◄ o ►.
❑ Guía de producto
La guía del producto proporciona información sobre las características más importantes del televisor.
N Si desea más información, consulte el elemento deseado.
❑ Auto diagnostic
Prueba de imagen
Si cree que tiene un problema con la imagen, efectúe la prueba de imagen. Compruebe el patrón del color en la pantalla para ver si
persiste el problema.
N En la pantalla aparece el mensaje ¿El problema aún existe con esta foto?.
Si no se muestra el patrón de prueba o hay ruido en el patrón de prueba, seleccione Sí. Si el patrón de prueba se muestra
correctamente, seleccione No..
• Sí : Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el Centro de llamadas para obtener ayuda.
• No : Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si el problema continúa, consulte el
manual del usuario del dispositivo externo.
Prueba de sonido
Si cree que tiene un problema con el sonido, efectúe la prueba de sonido. Compruebe el sonido reproduciendo una melodía en el
televisor.
N En la pantalla aparece el mensaje ¿Continúa el problema con esta prueba de sonido?. Si durante la prueba de sonido sólo
se oye sonido de un altavoz o no se oye ningún sonido, seleccione Sí. Si desde los altavoces se oye sonido, seleccione No.
• Sí : Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el Centro de llamadas para obtener ayuda.
• No : Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si el problema continúa, consulte el
manual del usuario del dispositivo externo.
N Si no oye sonido a través de los altavoces del televisor, antes de realizar la prueba de sonido compruebe que Seleccionar
altavoz esté configurado como Altavoz de TV en el menú Sonido.
N La melodía se debe oír durante la prueba aunque Seleccionar altavoz esté establecido como Altavoz externo o se haya
silenciado el sonido con el botón M MUTE.
Información de señal (sólo canales digitales)
Se puede ajustar la antena para mejorar la recepción de los canales digitales disponibles.
N Si el medidor de la intensidad de la señal indica que ésta es débil, mueva la antenapara aumentar la intensidad de la señal.
Siga ajustando la antena hasta que encuentre la mejor posición para recibir la señal más fuerte.
Asistencia técnica / Entrada
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 26 10/20/2009 5:02:41 PMSpanish - 27
Fuentes / Editar nombre
❑ Fuentes
Utilice este menú para seleccionar TV u otras fuentes de entrada externas como
reproductores de DVD o receptores de cable y satélite (decodificadores) conectados al
televisor. Permite seleccionar la fuente de entrada que se prefiera.
TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Componente, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB.
N Sólo se puede elegir los dispositivos externos que estén conectados al televisor.
En Fuentes, las entradas conectadas se resaltan y se ordenan en la parte superior.
Las entradas que no están conectadas se ordenan en la parte inferior.
N Uso de los botones de colores del mando a distancia con la lista de fuentes
- Rojo (Actualizar) : Actualiza los dispositivos externos conectados.
- T TOOLS (Herramientas) : Muestra los menús Editar nombre e
Información.
O Pulse el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia para ver una fuente de señal
externa.
❑ Editar nombre
Puede dar un nombre al dispositivo conectado en los terminales de entrada; de esta manera será más fácil seleccionar el
dispositivo de entrada.
Vídeo / DVD / Cable STB / Satélite STB / PVR STB / Receptor AV / Juego / Videocámara / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV /
IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Cuando se conecta un ordenador con una resolución de 1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz al puerto HDMI IN 2 (DVI), se debe configurar el
modo HDMI2/DVI del PC en Editar nombre del modo Entrada.
❑ Software superior
Para mantener el producto actualizado con las nuevas funciones de la televisión digital se envían periódicamente actualizaciones
de software como parte de la señal normal de televisión. Automáticamente se detectan estas señales y se muestra una pantalla de
actualización del software. Se presenta la opción de instalar la actualización.
POR USB
Inserte una unidad USB que contenga la actualización del firmware en el televisor. No desconecte la alimentación ni extraiga la
unidad USB mientras se aplican las actualizaciones. El televisor se apagará y se encenderá automáticamente después de completar
la actualización del firmware. Después de realizar la actualización compruebe la versión del firmware. Cuando se actualiza el
software, la configuración del vídeo y audio que se haya efectuado vuelve a la configuración predeterminada (de fábrica).
Por canal
Actualiza el software a través de una señal de emisión.
N Si la función se selecciona durante el periodo de transmisión del software, busca el
software disponible y lo descarga.
N El tiempo necesario para la descarga del software lo determina el estado de la señal.
Modo suspensión
Para continuar con la actualización del software con el conmutador de encendido principal
activado, seleccione Act. pulsando los botones ▲ o ▼. 45 minutos después de haber
entrado en el modo de suspensión, se inicia automáticamente una actualización manual.
Dado que la alimentación de la unidad está activada internamente, la pantalla puede
encenderse ligeramente. Este fenómeno puede durar 1 hora mientras la actualización del software se completa.
Software alternativo
Reemplace el software actual por otro alternativo.
N Si se ha cambiado el software, se muestra el software existente.
N Puede cambiar el software actual a uno alternativo mediante Software alternativo.
❑ Guía de conexión HD
Se muestran unas breves instrucciones sobre cómo obtener el mejor rendimiento del nuevo HDTV. Se proporciona el método de
conexión de los dispositivos de alta definición.
N Puede desplazarse a la página anterior o siguiente con los botones ◄ o ►.
❑ Contacto con Samsung
Puede conocer los datos del centro de llamadas, la página web y obtener información de los productos de Samsung.
Panel lateral del TV
Unidad USB
Fuentes
Editar nombre
Entrada
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 27 10/20/2009 5:02:42 PMSpanish - 28
Red
Conexión de la red
Conexión de red para DLNA, descarga de Internet-Biblioteca de contenidos, Internet@TV y Centro red doméstica.
❑ Conexión con la red - Cable
Conexión LAN para un entorno DHCP
A continuación se describe el procedimiento para configurar la red mediante el protocolo de configuración dinámica de host
(DHCP). Dado que la dirección IP, la máscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS se asignan automáticamente cuando se
selecciona DHCP, no es necesario introducirlos manualmente.
1. Conecte el puerto LAN del panel posterior del televisor y el módem externo con un cable LAN.
2. Conecte el puerto LAN de la pared y el módem externo con un cable de módem.
N Los terminales (la posición del puerto y el tipo) del dispositivo externo pueden variar según el fabricante.
N Si falla la asignación de la dirección IP por el servidor DHCP, apague el módem externo, vuelva a encenderlo al menos después de
10 segundos e inténtelo de nuevo.
N Para la conexión entre el módem externo y el compartidor (enrutador), consulte el manual del usuario del producto
correspondiente.
N Puede conectar el televisor a la LAN directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador).
N No se puede usar un módem ADSL de tipo de conexión manual ya que no admite DHCP. Se debe usar un módem ADSL de
tipo de conexión automática.
Panel posterior del TV
Puerto de módem Panel posterior
del TV en la pared
2 Cable del módem
Módem externo (ADSL/
VDSL/TV por cable)
1 Cable LAN
Puede conectar el puerto LAN y el televisor directamente según el estado de la red.
Panel posterior del TV
Cable LAN
Puerto de módem
en la pared
Puede conectar la LAN con un compartidor (enrutador).
Panel posterior del TV
Puerto de módem en
la pared
Módem externo
(ADSL/VDSL/TV por
cable)
Compartidor IP
Cable LAN
Cable del módem
LAN Cable
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 28 10/20/2009 5:02:45 PMSpanish - 29
Conexión LAN para un entorno IP estático
A continuación se describe el procedimiento para configurar la red con una dirección IP estática. Se debe introducir manualmente
la dirección IP, la máscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS proporcionados por el proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP).
1. Conecte el puerto [LAN] del panel posterior del televisor y el puerto LAN de la pared con un cable LAN.
N Los terminales (la posición del puerto y el tipo) del dispositivo externo pueden variar según el fabricante.
N Si usa una dirección IP estática, su ISP le informará de la dirección IP, la máscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS. Debe
introducir estos valores para completar la configuración de la red. Si no los conoce, consulte a su administrador de la red.
N Para obtener información sobre cómo configurar y conectar un compartidor (enrutador), consulte el manual del usuario del
producto correspondiente.
N Puede conectar el televisor a la LAN directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador).
N Si usa un compartidor IP (enrutador IP) que admite DHCP, puede configurar el dispositivo como DHCP o IP estático.
N Para saber cómo usar una dirección IP estática, consulte a su proveedor de servicios de Internet.
❑ Conexión con la red - Inalámbrica
Es posible conectar a la red de manera inalámbrica a través de un compartidor IP inalámbrico.
1. Conecte el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’ en el terminal USB1(HDD) o USB2 del televisor.
N Para utilizar una red inalámbrica necesita el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’.
N El adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung se vende por separado. El adaptador de El adaptador de LAN inalámbrica
WIS09ABGN se ofrece a través de distribuidores seleccionados, sitios web de comercio electrónico y Samsungparts.com.
N Para utilizar una red inalámbrica, el televisor debe estar conectado a un compartidor IP inalámbrico.
N Si el compartidor IP inalámbrico admite DHCP, el televisor puede utilizar DHCP o una dirección IP estática para conectarse a la red
inalámbrica.
N El adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung es compatible con IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G e IEEE 802.11N. Si
reproduce el vídeo DLNA en una conexión IEEE 802.11B/G, es posible que el vídeo no se reproduzca correctamente.
N Si el compartidor IP inalámbrico permite activar o desactivar la función de conexión Ping, actívela.
N Seleccione un canal para el compartidor IP inalámbrico que no se esté usando en ese momento. Si el canal ajustado para el
compartidor IP inalámbrico lo está usando en ese momento otro dispositivo cercano, se producirán interferencias y es posible que
la comunicación falle.
Continúa…
Panel posterior del TV
1 Cable LAN
Puerto de módem en
la pared
Panel posterior del TV
Cable LAN
Compartidor IP
Cable LAN
Puerto de módem
en la pared
Puede conectar la LAN con un compartidor (enrutador).
Panel lateral del TV
Adaptador de LAN inalámbrica
de Samsung
Cable LAN
Compartidor
IP inalámbrico
Puerto de módem
en la pared
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 29 10/20/2009 5:02:48 PMSpanish - 30
N Si se aplica un sistema de seguridad distinto de los sistemas que se muestran a continuación, no funcionará con el televisor.
- Cuando se aplica la clave de seguridad para el punto de acceso (compartidor IP inalámbrico) sólo se admiten las opciones
siguientes.
1) Modo de autenticación : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2. Tipo de cifrado : WEP, TKIP, AES
- Cuando se aplica la clave de seguridad para el modo Ad-hoc, sólo se admiten las opciones siguientes.
1) Modo de autenticación : SHARED, WPANONE
2. Tipo de cifrado : WEP, TKIP, AES
N Si el punto de acceso admite WPS (Configuración protegida Wi-Fi), puede conectarse a la red vía PBC (Configuración del botón) o
PIN (Número de identificación personal). De cualquier modo, WPS configurará automáticamente las claves SSID y WPA.
N Si el dispositivo no está certificado, quizás no se conecte al televisor a través del ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’.
Configuración de la red
❑ Tipo de red
Seleccione Cable o Inalámbr. como método para conectar con la red.
N El menú sólo se activa si está conectado el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de
Samsung’.
• Cable : Conecte la red mediante un cable.
• Inalámbr. : Conecte la red de modo inalámbrico.
❑ Configuración de red
Configuración de red por cable (cuando Tipo de red está configurado como Cable)
N Compruebe si el cable LAN está conectado.
• Config. protocolo Internet → Auto / Manual
• Prueba de red : Puede comprobar o confirmar el estado de conexión de la red después de configurarla.
N Cuando no pueda conectarse a una red cableada
Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet ha registrado la dirección MAC del dispositivo utilizado para conectarse a Internet
por primera vez y autentifica la dirección MAC cada vez que se conecta a Internet, el televisor quizás no pueda conectarse a
Internet ya que la dirección MAC difiere de la del dispositivo (PC). En tal caso, solicite a su proveedor de servicios de Internet
que le explique el procedimiento para conectar dispositivos que no sean un ordenador (por ejemplo su televisor) a Internet.
Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet necesita un ID o una contraseña para conectarse a Internet (red), su televisor quizás
no pueda conectarse a Internet. En tal caso, debe introducir su ID o contraseña cuando se conecte a Internet mediante un
compartidor de Internet (enrutador). La conexión de Internet puede fallar por problemas del servidor de seguridad. En este
caso, póngase en contacto con el proveedor de servicios de Internet.
Si no puede conectarse a Internet aunque haya seguido el procedimiento de su proveedor de servicios de Internet, debe
ponerse en contacto con el centro de servicio técnico de Samsung Electronics.
Configuración de red por cable - Auto
Si se conecta el cable LAN y se admite DHCP, los ajustes del protocolo de Internet (IP) se configurarán automáticamente.
Compruebe si el cable LAN está conectado.
1. Establezca Tipo de red como Cable.
2. Seleccione Configuración de red por cable.
3. Establezca Config. protocolo Internet como Auto.
N El protocolo de Internet se configura automáticamente
4. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red.
Configuración de red por cable - Manual
Para conectar el televisor a la LAN mediante una dirección IP estática, se debe configurar el protocolo de Internet (IP).
N Compruebe si el cable LAN está conectado. (Página 28)
1. Establezca Tipo de red como Cable.
2. Seleccione Red de cable.
3. Establezca Config. protocolo Internet como Manual.
4. Configure Dirección IP, Máscara de subred, Puerta de enlace y Servidor DNS.
N Pulse los botones numéricos del mando a distancia para configurar la red manualmente.
5. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red.
Configuración
Emisión
Seguridad
Red ►
General
Continúa…
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 30 10/20/2009 5:02:49 PMSpanish - 31
Config. red inalámb. (cuando Tipo de red se establece como Inalámbr.)
N El menú sólo se activa si está conectado el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’. (Página 29)
- Config. protocolo Internet → Auto / Manual
- Prueba de red : Puede comprobar o confirmar el estado de conexión de la red después de configurarla.
N Cuando no pueda conectarse a un punto de acceso
Su televisor quizás no pueda encontrar un punto de acceso (PA) que esté configurado como un tipo SSID privado. En tal
caso, cambie la configuración del PA y vuelva a intentar la operación. Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet ha registrado
la dirección MAC del dispositivo utilizado para conectarse a Internet por primera vez y autentifica la dirección MAC cada vez
que Ud. se conecta a Internet, su televisor quizás no pueda conectarse a Internet ya que la dirección MAC difiere de la del
dispositivo (PC). En tal caso, solicite a su proveedor de servicios de Internet que le explique el procedimiento para conectar
dispositivos que no sean un ordenador (por ejemplo su televisor) a Internet. Si no puede conectarse a Internet aunque haya
seguido el procedimiento de su proveedor de servicios de Internet, debe ponerse en contacto con el centro de servicio técnico
de Samsung Electronics a través de 1-800-SAMSUNG.
• Seleccionar una red
- Punto de acceso : Se puede seleccionar el compartidor IP que utilizar cuando se
configura una red inalámbrica.
N Si algún punto de acceso no aparece en la lista de selección de redes, pulse el
botón rojo.
N Cuando se establezca la conexión, volverá a la pantalla automáticamente.
N Si ha seleccionado un punto de acceso con autenticación de seguridad: Aparece
la pantalla de la clave de seguridad. Especifique la clave de seguridad y pulse el
botón azul del mando a distancia.
N Si el tipo de cifrado de seguridad es WEP, podrá utilizar 0~9 y A~F cuando especifique
la clave de seguridad.
Botón Función
▲/▼/◄/► Mueve la selección arriba/abajo/izquierda/derecha.
ENTERE Introduce el carácter seleccionado.
Botón rojo Cambiar entre letras mayúsculas y minúsculas.
Botón verde Permite borrar un carácter introducido.
Botón azul Pulse este botón para terminar de introducir la clave de seguridad.
❑ Conexión WPS (Configuración protegida Wi-Fi)
Si la clave de seguridad ya está configurada : En la lista de puntos de acceso,
seleccione WPS.
N Puede seleccionar PBC, PIN, Clave seguridad.
• Conexión mediante PBC : Seleccione un PBC (Configuración del botón). Pulse
el botón PBC en el punto de acceso (PA) antes de 2 minutos y espere a que se
efectúe la conexión.
• Conexión mediante PIN : Seleccione un PIN (Número de identificación personal).
N Se muestra un mensaje con el código PIN. Escriba el código PIN en el
dispositivo del punto de acceso antes de 2 minutos. Seleccione Aceptar y
espere a que se efectúe la conexión.
N Si ésta no funciona correctamente, vuelva a intentarlo
N Cuando la conexión no se establece ni siquiera después de intentarlo de
nuevo, reinicie el punto de acceso. Consulte el manual de cada punto de
acceso.
• Conexión mediante Clave seguridad :
Al seleccionar Clave seguridad, se muestra la ventana de entrada. Escriba la
clave de seguridad y pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Si ésta no funciona correctamente, vuelva a intentarlo
Config. red inalámb.
Clave segur.
n Mover Número EEntrar R Volver
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Número
Minús
Borrar
Hecho
* *
Config. red inalámb.
Seleccionar una red
n Mover EEntrar R Volver
Buscar
Ad Hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Clave segur.
3/9
Pulse el botón PBC en el punto de acceso.
Nombre punto de acceso : AP_3
Cancelar
Pulse Aceptar después de escribir el código PIN del
TV mientras configura el punto de acceso.
Nombre punto de acceso : AP_3
Número PIN : 123 45678
Aceptar Cancelar
Config. red inalámb.
Clave segur.
n Mover Número EEntrar R Volver
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Número
Minús
Borrar
Hecho
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 31 10/20/2009 5:02:51 PMSpanish - 32
Si la clave de seguridad no está configurada: Cuando no se ha establecido la
configuración de seguridad de un punto de acceso que admita WPS, puede
seleccionar PBC, PIN, Sin seguridad. Sin seguridad permite la conexión directa al
punto de acceso sin utilizar la función WPC.
N El procedimiento de PBC, PIN es el mismo que el anterior. Consúltelo si la clave
de seguridad ya está configurada.
N Si ésta no funciona correctamente, vuelva a intentarlo
Ad Hoc : Puede conectarse a un dispositivo móvil sin punto de acceso a través de una
mochila USB inalámbrica mediante una red par a par.
• Cómo conectarse al nuevo Ad hoc
1. Elija Seleccionar una red para que se muestre una lista de dispositivos.
2. En la lista de dispositivos, pulse el botón azul del mando a distancia o
seleccione Ad Hoc.
N Se muestra el mensaje El sistema de red existente puede tener una funcionalidad limitada. ¿Desea cambiar la
conexión de la red?
3. Introduzca el Nombre de la red (SSID) y la Clave seguridad generados en el dispositivo con el que se desea conectar.
• Cómo conectarse a un dispositivo Ad Hoc existente
1. Elija Seleccionar una red para que se muestre la lista de dispositivos.
2. Seleccione el dispositivo que desee en la lista.
3. Si se ha aplicado la clave de seguridad, introdúzcala de nuevo.
N Si la red no funciona normalmente, compruebe de nuevo el Nombre de la red (SSID) y la Clave seguridad. El motivo del
funcionamiento incorrecto puede ser que la Clave seguridad no sea correcta.
Wireless Network Setup - Auto
Si desea conectar el punto de acceso, éste debe admitir DHCP.
Sólo los dispositivos compatibles con el modo Ad-hoc se pueden conectar sin DHCP.
1. Establezca Tipo de red como Inalámbr..
2. Seleccione Config. red inalámb..
3. Establezca Config. protocolo Internet como Auto.
N El protocolo de Internet se configura automáticamente.
4. Seleccione una red mediante Seleccionar una red.
5. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red.
Config. red inalámb. - Manual
Para conectar la red de modo inalámbrico mediante una dirección IP estática, se debe configurar el protocolo de Internet (IP).
(Consulte la página 29.)
N Para obtener información más detallada sobre la dirección IP estática, consulte el manual del usuario del compartidor IP
inalámbrico.
1. Establezca Tipo de red como Inalámbr..
2. Seleccione Config. red inalámb..
3. Establezca Config. protocolo Internet como Manual.
4. Configure Dirección IP, Máscara de subred, Puerta de enlace y Servidor DNS.
N Pulse los botones numéricos del mando a distancia para configurar la red manualmente.
5. Seleccione un punto de acceso mediante Seleccionar punto de acceso.
6. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red.
* *
Config. red inalámb.
Seleccionar una red
n Mover EEntrar R Volver
Buscar
Ad Hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Clave segur.
3/9
El sistema de red existente puede tener una
funcionalidad limitada. ¿Desea cambiar la conexión
de la red?
Sí No
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 32 10/20/2009 5:02:51 PMSpanish - 33
Conexión de un dispositivo USB
1. Pulse el botón POWER para encender el televisor.
2. Conecte un dispositivo USB que contenga archivos de fotos o música al terminal USB que
se encuentra en el lateral del televisor.
N El terminal USB 1(HDD) también se usa como terminal HDD. HDD (unidad de disco duro)
es un dispositivo que almacena datos codificados digitalmente.
N Media Play sólo admite dispositivos USB de clase de almacenamiento masivo (MSC).
MSC es un dispositivo de clase de almacenamiento masivo sólo de transporte de
gran capacidad. Ejemplos de MSC son las unidades de almacenamiento en miniatura,
los lectores de tarjetas Flash y las unidades de disco duro de USB (no se admiten
concentradores de USB).
N MTP (Protocolo de transferencia de recursos) no se admite.
N El sistema de archivos sólo admite FAT16/32 (el sistema de archivos NTFS no se admite).
N Conecte un disco duro de USB al puerto reservado, el puerto USB1 (HDD). Sin embargo, si el dispositivo conectado precisa una
gran potencia, es posible que el puerto USB1 (HDD) no admita el dispositivo.
N Ciertos tipos de cámara digital USB y dispositivos de audio quizás no sean compatibles con este televisor.
N Conecte directamente con el puerto USB del televisor. Si utiliza una conexión con un cable independiente, puede haber problemas
de compatibilidad con el USB.
N Antes de conectar el dispositivo al televisor, haga una copia de seguridad de sus archivos para evitar daños o pérdidas de datos.
SAMSUNG no se hace responsable por cualquier daño en los archivos o pérdida de datos.
N No desconecte el dispositivo USB mientras se esté cargando.
N MSC admite archivos MP3 y JPEG, mientras que un dispositivo PTP sólo admite archivos JPEG.
N Se admite el formato JPEG secuencial.
N Cuanto mayor sea la resolución de la imagen, más tiempo tardará en visualizarse en la pantalla.
N La resolución JPEG máxima admitida es 15360 x 8640 píxeles.
N Con archivos dañados o que no se admiten, se muestra el mensaje Formato de archivo no admitido.
N Si hay más de 4000 archivos de fotografías (o el número de archivos de música supera los 3000), es posible que no se muestre
ningún archivo que supere el límite de los 4000 en la Lista de fotos (o Lista de música).
N Los archivos MP3 con DRM descargados desde un sitio de pago no se pueden reproducir.
N DRM (Gestión de derechos digitales) impide los usos ilegales de recursos digitales para proteger el copyright.
N Cuando se desplaza a una foto, la carga puede tardar varios segundos. En este punto, el icono de carga aparecerá en la pantalla.
❑ Uso de los botones del mando a distancia en el menú Media Play
Botón Función
▲/▼/◄/► Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opción.
ENTERE
Seleccionar la opción marcada. Reproducir o hacer una pausa mientras se está reproduciendo una
presentación o un archivo de música.
Reproducir o hacer una pausa en la presentación o el archivo de música.
RETURN Volver al menú anterior..
TOOLS Ejecutar diversas funciones desde los menús de fotos y música.
Detener la presentación o el archivo de música.
Saltar al grupo anterior/Saltar al grupo siguiente.
INFO Mostrar información del archivo.
MEDIA.P Acceder al o salir del modo Media Play.
DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays
DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com
with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Media Play
Panel lateral del TV
Unidad USB
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 33 10/20/2009 5:02:52 PMSpanish - 34
Uso de la función Media Play
Permite ver y reproducir archivos de fotos o música guardados en un dispositivo de clase de almacenamiento masivo (MSC) USB.
Puede que no funcione correctamente con archivos multimedia sin licencia.
❑ Uso del menú Media Play
1. Pulse el botón MENU. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aplicación y,
a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Media Play (USB & DLNA) y, a
continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
O Pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú
Media Play.
O Pulse varias veces el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia para
seleccionar USB o DLNA y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
3. Pulse el botón rojo y, a continuación, los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar
el correspondiente dispositivo de memoria USB (si está conectado a un
concentrador). Pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Esta función puede variar según el dispositivo de memoria USB conectado al
televisor.
N El nombre del dispositivo USB seleccionado aparece en la parte inferior
izquierda de la pantalla.
4. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar un icono (Photo, Music, Movie,
Setup) y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Para salir del modo Media Play pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia.
N En este modo, se pueden ver clips de películas contenidos en un juego,
pero no se puede reproducir éste.
❑ Extracción segura del dispositivo de memoria USB
Puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad.
1. Pulse el botón TOOLS en la pantalla de la lista de archivos del reproductor
multimedia o mientras se reproduce una presentación, un archivo de música o
una película.
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Retirar con seguridad y, a
continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
3. Retire el dispositivo USB del televisor.
❑ Pantalla de visualización
1. Norma de clasificación actual : Este campo muestra la norma actual de la clasificación de archivos.
2. Ver grupos : El grupo de clasificación que incluye la foto seleccionada se resalta.
3. Archivo seleccionado actualmente : Se resalta el archivo seleccionado actualmente.
4. Información de selección del elemento : Muestra el número de fotos seleccionadas cuando se pulsa el botón amarillo.
5. Dispositivo actual : Muestra el nombre del dispositivo actualmente seleccionado.
N Botón rojo (Dispositivo) : Selecciona un dispositivo conectado.
6. Elementos de ayuda
• Botón verde (Conf. fav.) : Cambia la configuración de favorito del archivo seleccionado. Pulse este botón varias veces hasta
que se muestre el valor que desee.
• Botón amarillo (Selecc.) : Selecciona un archivo en la lista de archivos. Los archivos seleccionados se marcan con un
símbolo c. Vuelva a pulsar el botón amarillo para cancelar la selección del archivo.
• Botón TOOLS (Herramientas) : Muestra los menús de opciones. (El menú Herramientas cambia de acuerdo con el estado actual.)
• Botón R RETURN (Volver) : Volver al menú anterior.
Carpeta Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Color
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349.
JPG
▶
▶
Carpeta 2
1
Carpeta 1
1
Secuencia
Rep.gr. act.
Información
Retirar con seguridad
../ Nombre carpeta/
Photo
USB Dispositivo Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior
Media Play
PHOTO Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Libre
Movie
USB Dispositivo RVolver
Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Color Carpeta
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
3
1
2
1Archivos selecc.
4
5 6
Photo
USB Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Volver
c
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 34 10/20/2009 5:02:58 PMSpanish - 35
Clasificación de la lista de fotos/música/películas
Vista básica
Muestra las carpetas del dispositivo de memoria USB. Si selecciona una carpeta
y pulsa el botón ENTERE, sólo se muestran los archivos de fotos incluidos en la
carpeta seleccionada.
N Cuando se clasifican según la Vista básica, no se pueden configurar los
archivos favoritos.
Carpeta
Ordena los archivos por carpetas.Si hay varias carpetas en el USB, los archivos
de fotos se muestran ordenados en cada carpeta. El archivo de la carpeta raíz se
muestra primero y los otros se muestran ordenados alfabéticamente por nombre.
Preferencia → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
Ordena los archivos por preferencias (favoritos).
N Cambio de la configuración de favoritos Seleccione una foto en la lista de fotos y
pulse varias veces el botón verde hasta que aparezca la opción deseada.
N Las estrellas son para la agrupación solamente. Por ejemplo, la opción de 3
estrellas no tiene prioridad alguna sobre la opción de una estrella.
Cronología (Photo / Movie)
Ordena y muestra los títulos de películas según el símbolo, el número,
alfabéticamente y orden especial.
Título (Music / Movie)
Clasifica los títulos de música según el símbolo, el número, alfabéticamente y orden
especial, y muestra el archivo de música.
❑ Photo
Color → Rojo / Amarillo / Verde / Azul / Magenta / Negro / Gris / Sin
clasificar
Ordena las fotos por color. Puede cambiar la información del color de la foto.
N Debe activar Usar vista de color en el menú Configuración antes de ordenar las fotos por color.
❑ Music
Artista
Ordena los archivos de música por artista según el símbolo, el número, alfabéticamente y orden especial.
Ánimo → Enérgico / Rítmico / Triste / Excitante / Calm / Sin clasificar
Ordena los archivos de música por el estado de ánimo. Puede cambiar la información del tipo de música.
Género
Ordena los archivos de música por género.
Carpeta Preferencia Vista básica Título Artista
1
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
usermanual Heaven
NPKI
▶
1
▶
▶
▶
▶
../ Nombre carpeta/
Music
USB Dispositivo Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior
▶
▶
Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Título Carpeta
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior
Película_000.
avi
Película_000.
avi
Película_000.
avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
▶
▶ ◀
Película_000.
avi
Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Color Carpeta
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
Photo
US Dispositivo Conf. fav Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 35 10/20/2009 5:03:06 PMSpanish - 36
Menús de opciones de la lista de fotos/música/películas
1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P.
2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Photo, Music o Movie y, a continuación,
pulse el botón ENTERE.
3. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo que desee.
N Selección de varios archivos
- Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo que desee. A
continuación pulse el botón amarillo.
- Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos.
- Junto al archivo seleccionado aparece la marca c.
4. Pulse el botón TOOLS.
N El menú de opciones cambia de acuerdo con el estado actual.
Rep.gr. act.
Con este menú se puede realizar una presentación de diapositivas de los archivos
de fotos del grupo de clasificación actualmente seleccionado.
Deselecc. todos (Si hay, al menos, un archivo seleccionado)
Puede cancelar la selección de todos los archivos.
N La marca c indica que el archivo correspondiente seleccionado está oculto.
Información
Se muestra la información del archivo de fotos/música/películas. Se puede ver
la información de los archivos durante una presentación siguiendo el mismo
procedimiento.
O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información.
Retirar con seguridad
Se puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad.
❑ Photo
Secuencia
Con este menú puede realizar una presentación de diapositivas de los archivos de
fotos del dispositivo de memoria USB .
Cambiar info grupo (Si la tecla de clasificación es Color)
Se puede cambiar la información de color de un archivo (o grupo de archivos) de una foto seleccionada para mover ésta de un
grupo de color a otro.
N Esto no cambia el color real de la foto.
N La información del grupo del archivo actual se ha actualizado y las fotos se han movido al nuevo grupo de color.
N Para cambiar la información de varios archivos, seleccione los que desee cambiar con el botón amarillo.
❑ Music
Cambiar grupo (si la tecla de clasificación es Mood)
Puede cambiar la información del tipo de música. La información del grupo del archivo actual se ha actualizado y el archivo se ha
movido al nuevo grupo. Para cambiar la información de varios archivos, seleccione éstos con el botón amarillo.
Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Carpeta Preferencia Vista básica Título Artista
1
1
▶
▶
../ folder name/
Sky
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
NPKI
usermanual Heaven
▶
NPKI
Rep.gr. act.
Información
Retirar con seguridad
Music
USB Dispositivo Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior
MOVIE_004
MOVIE_003 .avi
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_005
.avi
MOVIE_007
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_006
.avi
▶
▶
Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Título Carpeta
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Dispositivo Conf. fav Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior
Rep.gr. act.
Información
Retirar con seguridad
Vista básica Cronología Color Carpeta Preferencia
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Secuencia
Rep.gr. act.
Cambiar grupo
Información
Retirar con seguridad
Photo
USB Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 36 10/20/2009 5:03:12 PMSpanish - 37
Menús de opciones de las presentaciones y la reproducción de música y películas
1. Durante una presentación (o la visualización de una foto) o la reproducción de
música o películas, pulse el botón TOOLS para establecer una opción.
2. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la opción deseada y, a continuación, pulse
el botón ENTERE.
Configuración de la imagen / Configuración del sonido
Puede seleccionar la configuración de la imagen y el sonido.
Información
Se muestra la información del archivo.
Retirar con seguridad
Se puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad.
❑ Menú de opciones de la presentación de diapositivas
Detener presentación / Iniciar visionado automático
Se puede iniciar o detener una presentación.
Vel. secuencia → Lenta / Normal / Rápida
Se puede seleccionar la velocidad de la presentación.
N Esta función está disponible sólo durante la presentación.
N Durante la presentación, también se puede cambiar la velocidad de ésta
pulsando el botón π π (REW) o μ μ (FF).
Efecto de secuencia
Puede seleccionar los efectos de transición de pantalla que se utilizan en la
presentación.
• Ninguno / Fundido 1 / Fundido 2 / Persiana / Espiral / Tablero / Lineal /
Escaleras / Cortinilla / Aleatorio
N Esta función está disponible sólo durante la presentación.
Girar
Puede girar las fotos guardadas en el dispositivo de memoria USB.
N Con cada pulsación del botón ◄ la imagen gira 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ y 0˚.
N Con cada pulsación del botón ► la imagen gira 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ y 0˚.
N El archivo girado no se guarda.
Zoom
Puede ampliar las fotos guardadas en el dispositivo de memoria USB. (x1 → x2 → x4)
N Para mover una foto ampliada, pulse el botón ENTERE y, a continuación, los botones ▲/▼/◄/►. Tenga en cuenta que si una
imagen ampliada es menor que el tamaño de la pantalla original, la función de cambio de ubicación no está operativa.
N El archivo ampliado no se guarda.
Música de fondo
Puede seleccionar una música de fondo para la presentación.
N Para usar esta función, en el dispositivo USB debe haber archivos de música y fotos almacenados.
N Se deben cargar archivos de música para acceder al modo BGM. Reproduzca los archivos de música en la categoría de
música para cargarlos.
❑ Menú de opciones de la reproducción de música
Modo de repetición → Act. / Des.
Puede reproducir archivos de música repetidamente.
❑ Menús de opciones de la reproducción de películas
Picture Size → Fit/Original
Reproducir vídeo al tamaño de la pantalla o al original.
Configuración del subtítulo
Puede configurar los subtítulos de la película.
Tools
Herramientas
Detener presentación
Vel. secuencia :Normal
Efecto de secuencia :Fundido 2
Girar
Zoom
Música de fondo
Configuración de la imagen
Configuración del sonido
Información
U Mover E Entrar eSalir
Herramientas
Modo de repetición ◄ Act. ►
Configuración de la imagen
Configuración del sonido
Información
Retirar con seguridad
U Mover Ajustar eSalir
Herramientas
Configuración de la imagen
Configuración del sonido
Tamaño de imagen : Ajustar
Configuración del subtítulo
Información
Retirar con seguridad
U Mover Entrar eSalir
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 37 10/20/2009 5:03:13 PMSpanish - 38
Visualización de una foto o una presentación
❑ Visualización de una presentación
N En la presentación se usan todos los archivos de la sección de la lista de
archivos.
N En la presentación, los archivos se muestran en orden a partir del archivo que
se muestra en este momento.
N La presentación se ejecuta según el orden de la clasificación de la sección de la
lista de archivos.
N Los archivos se música se pueden reproducir automáticamente durante la
presentación si Música de fondo está configurado como Act..
N Cuando se muestre una lista de fotos, pulse el botón ∂(Reproducir)/
ENTERE del mando a distancia para iniciar la presentación.
N Botones de control de la presentación
ENTERE Reproducir/hacer una pausa en la presentación.
Reproducir la presentación.
Hacer una pausa en la presentación.
Salir de la presentación y volver a la lista de fotos.
/ Cambiar la velocidad de la reproducción de la presentación.
T TOOLS Ejecutar varias funciones de los menús de fotos.
❑ Reproducción del grupo actual
1. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación.
2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación.
3. Pulse el botón ▼ para ir a la sección de la lista de grupos.
4. Seleccione un grupo con los botones ◄ y ►.
5. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir). Se inicia la presentación de diapositivas de los
archivos del grupo seleccionado.
Otra posibilidad
1. Seleccione una tecla de clasificación y, en la sección de la lista de archivos, seleccione las fotos del grupo que desee.
N Para ir al grupo anterior/siguiente, pulse los botones π π (REW) o µ μ (FF).
2. Pulse el botón TOOLS.
3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Rep.gr. act. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N En la presentación se usan sólo las fotos del grupo de clasificación que incluye los archivos seleccionados.
❑ Para ver una presentación sólo con los archivos seleccionados
1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos.
2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar la foto que desee en la sección de la lista de archivos.
3. Pulsar el botón amarillo.
4. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varias fotos.
N La marca c aparece a la izquierda de la foto seleccionada.
N Si selecciona sólo un archivo, la presentación no se efectuará.
N Para cancelar la selección de los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deselecc. todos.
5. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir)/ENTERE.
N Los archivos seleccionados se usan en la presentación.
Otra posibilidad
1. En la sección de la lista de archivos, pulse los botones amarillos para seleccionar las fotos deseadas.
2. Pulse el botón TOOLS.
3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Secuencia y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Los archivos seleccionados se usan en la presentación.
▶
▶
Preferencia Vista básica Cronología Título Carpeta
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior
Película_003.
avi
Película_003.
avi
Película_003.
avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
Película_003.
avi
Vista básica Cronología Colour Carpeta Preferencia
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Secuencia
Rep.gr. act.
Cambiar grupo
Información
Retirar con seguridad
Photo
r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4
USB E Pausa lr Ant./Sig T Herramientas R Volver
USB Dispositivo Conf. fav. Selecc T Herramientas R Carpeta superior
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 38 10/20/2009 5:03:19 PMSpanish - 39
Reproducción de música
❑ Reproducción de un archivo de música
1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos.
2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee.
3. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir)/ENTERE.
N Este menú sólo muestra archivos con la extensión MP3. Los archivos con
otras extensiones no se muestran, aunque se hayan guardado en el mismo
dispositivo USB.
N El archivo seleccionado se visualiza en la parte superior con su tiempo de
reproducción.
N Para ajustar el volumen de la música, pulse el botón del volumen del
mando a distancia.
Para silenciar el sonido, pulse el botón M MUTE del mando a distancia.
N Si, al reproducir archivos MP3, el sonido no se oye correctamente, ajuste Ecualizador y SRS TruSurround HD en el menú
Sonido. (Un archivo MP3 con una modulación excesiva puede causar problemas de sonido.)
N La duración de la reproducción de un archivo de música puede visualizarse como ‘00:00:00’ si la información del tiempo de
reproducción no se encuentra al inicio del archivo.
N π (REW) o μ μ (FF) no funcionan durante la reproducción.
N Botones de control de la reproducción de música
ENTERE Reproducir/hacer una pausa en el
archivo de música.
Salir del modo de reproducción y volver a la
lista de música.
Reproducir el archivo de música.
T TOOLS
Ejecutar varias funciones de los menús de
Hacer una pausa en el archivo de música.
música.
N Icono de información de la función de la música
Cuando todos los archivos de música de la carpeta (o el archivo seleccionado) se repiten. Modo de repetición
está Act..
Cuando todos los archivos de música de la carpeta (o el archivo seleccionado) se reproducen una vez Modo de
repetición está Des..
❑ Reproducción de un grupo de música
1. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación.
2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación.
3. Pulse el botón ▼ o ENTERE para ir a la sección de la lista de grupos.
4. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir). Se inicia la reproducción de los archivos del grupo seleccionado.
Otra posibilidad
1. Seleccione una tecla de clasificación y en la sección de la lista de archivos seleccione los archivos del grupo que desee.
N Para ir al grupo anterior/siguiente, pulse los botones π (REW) o µ μ (FF).
2. Pulse el botón TOOLS.
3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Rep.gr. act. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Se reproducen los archivos de música incluidos en el archivo seleccionado.
❑ Reproducción de archivos de música seleccionados
1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos.
2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee.
3. Pulsar el botón amarillo.
4. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos de música.
N La marca c aparece a la izquierda del archivo de música seleccionado.
N Para cancelar la selección de los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deselecc .
5. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir)/ENTERE.
N Se reproducen los archivos seleccionados.
r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55
r
1/3
When I Dream r
r
Geek In The Pink Heaven
USB E Pausa lr Ant./Sig T Herramientas R Volver
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 39 10/20/2009 5:03:20 PMSpanish - 40
Reproducción de un archivo de película
❑ Reproducción de un archivo de película
1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos.
2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de película que desee.
3. Pulse el botón ∂ (Reproducir)/ENTERE.
N El archivo seleccionado se reproduce.
N El archivo seleccionado se visualiza en la parte superior con su tiempo de
reproducción.
N La duración de la reproducción de un archivo de película puede visualizarse
como ‘00:00:00’ si la información del tiempo de reproducción no se encuentra
al inicio del archivo.
N Se pueden reproducir emocionantes archivos multimedia de juegos, pero la función de juego no se admite.
N Formatos de subtítulos admitidos
Nombre Extensión del archivo Lenguaje de programación
Texto basado en tiempo MPEG-4 .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt basado en cadenas
SubViewer .sub basado en cadenas
Micro DVD .sub o .txt basado en cadenas
N Formatos de vídeo admitidos
Extensión del archivo Contenedor Decodificador de vídeo Códec de audio Resolución
*.avi AVI
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.mkv MKV
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.asf ASF
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080
*.mp4 MP4 (SMP4)
H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
XVID 1920x1080
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
*.vro
VRO
VOB
MPEG2 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG1 1920x1080
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG2 1920x1080
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
H.264 1920x1080
VC1 1920x1080
N Botones de control de la reproducción de vídeo
ENTERE Reproducir/hacer una pausa en el archivo de película
Reproducir el archivo de película
Hacer una pausa en el archivo de película
Salir del modo de reproducción y volver a la lista de películas.
T TOOLS Ejecutar varias funciones de los menús de películas.
◄/► Saltar hacia adelante o hacia atrás en el archivo de película.
▲/▼ Ir al principio o al final del archivo.
▶
r
r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3
Película_000.avi
USB E Pausa lr Saltar T Herramientas R Volver
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 40 10/20/2009 5:03:21 PMSpanish - 41
❑ Reproducción de un grupo de películas
1. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación.
2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación.
3. Pulse el botón ▼ o ENTERE para ir a la sección de la lista de grupos.
4. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir). Sólo se inicia la reproducción de los archivos del grupo seleccionado.
Otra posibilidad
1. Seleccione una tecla de clasificación y en la sección de la lista de archivos seleccione los archivos del grupo que desee.
N Para ir al grupo anterior/siguiente, pulse los botones π π (REW) o µ μ (FF).
2. Pulse el botón TOOLS.
3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Rep.gr. act. y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Se reproducen los archivos de películas del grupo de ordenación, incluido el archivo seleccionado.
❑ Reproducción de archivos de películas seleccionados
1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos.
2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee.
3. Pulsar el botón amarillo.
N La marca c aparece a la izquierda del archivo de película seleccionado.
N Para cancelar la selección de los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deselecc. todos.
4. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos de película.
5. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE.
N Sólo se reproduce el archivo seleccionado.
❑ Continuación de la reproducción de una película (reanudar reproducción)
Si sale de la función de reproducción de la película, ésta se puede reproducir posteriormente desde el punto en que se detuvo.
1. Seleccione el archivo de la película que desee seguir reproduciendo pulsando los botones ◄ o ► en la sección de la lista de
archivos.
2. Pulse el botón ∂ (Play)/ENTERE.
3. Seleccione reanudar reproducción con el botón azul.
N La película se reproducirá desde el punto en que se detuvo.
N Si la función Cont. Movie Play Help está configurada como On en el menú Setup, aparecerá un mensaje emergente
cuando se reanude la reproducción de un archivo de película.
Uso del menú de configuración
Muestra la configuración del usuario del menú Media Play.
1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú Media
Play.
2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Setup, y, a continuación, pulse el botón
ENTERE.
3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la opción deseada.
4. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar la opción.
N Para salir del modo Media Play, pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia.
Usar vista de color → Act. / Des.
Seleccionar par ver la información de color en el menú Foto.
N Si está configurado como Act., se incrementa el tiempo de carga para reunir la
información del color
Modo de repetición → Act. / Des.
Puede seleccionar que los archivos de música se repitan continuamente.
Recordar contin. pelíc. → Act. / Apagado
Seleccionar para mostrar el mensaje de ayuda emergente para la reproducción de
una película desde el punto en que se dejó de ver anteriormente.
Obtener código de registro de DivX® VOD
Muestra el código de registro autorizado para el televisor. Si se conecta al sitio
Web DivX y registra el código de registro con una cuenta personal, puede descargar
el archivo de registro VOD. Si reproduce el registro VOD mediante el reproductor multimedia, el registro se ha terminado. Para
obtener más información sobre DivX® VOD, visite www.DivX.com
Obtener código desactivación DivX® VOD
Si DivX® VOD no está registrado, aparece el código de desactivación de registro. Si ejecuta esta función cuando DivX® VOD se
ha registrado, el registro actual de DivX® VOD se desactiva.
Tiempo ej. salvapantallas → 2 horas / 4 horas / 8 horas
Puede configurar el tiempo de espera necesario para que se ejecute el salvapantallas.
Información
Puede configurar que se muestre la información del dispositivo conectado.
Retirar con seguridad
Se puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad.
Media Play
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
SETUP
Photo Music Movie Setup
USB eSalir
Dispositivo
Setup
UMover Ajustar Volver
Usar vista de color ◄ Des. ►
Modo de repetición Act.
Recordar contin. pelíc. Act.
Obtener código de registro de DivX® VOD
Obtener código desactivación DivX® VOD
Tiempo ej. salvapantallas 10 min
Información
Retirar con seguridad
USB Dispositivo
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 41 10/20/2009 5:03:21 PMSpanish - 42
Configuración de la red DLNA
DLNA permite ver en el televisor vídeos e imágenes guardados en el ordenador a través de una conexión de red en modo Media Play.
De esta forma se elimina la necesidad de copiarlos en un dispositivo de almacenamiento USB y después conectar éste al televisor.
Para utilizar DLNA, es necesario conectar el televisor a la red e instalar la aplicación DLNA en el ordenador.
❑ Diagrama de conexión con la red - Cable
❑ Diagrama de conexión con la red - Inalámbrica
1. Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar la red, consulte ‘Configuración de la red’.
N Se le recomienda que ubique el televisor y el PC en la misma subred. Las 3 primeras partes de la dirección de la subred del
televisor y las direcciones IP del PC deben ser iguales; sólo la última parte (la dirección host) se debe cambiar. (Por ejemplo,
dirección IP: 123.456.789.**)
2. Conecte el ordenador en el que se instalará el programa Samsung PC Share Manager y el módem externo con un cable LAN.
N Se puede conectar el televisor al ordenador directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador).
Instalación de la aplicación DLNA
Para reproducir contenidos del ordenador en el televisor, primero hay que instalar la aplicación. Para usar la función DLNA sin
problemas, use el programa del CD-ROM suministrado con el televisor o use el programa PC Share Manager de Samsung que se
corresponda con el modelo de televisor que se puede descargar del sitio Web de Samsung.
TV
Módem externo
(ADSL/VDSL/TV por cable)
LAN
PC
LAN
Media Play-DLNA
TV
LAN
PC
o
1
Panel lateral del TV
Adaptador de
LAN inalámbrica
de Samsung
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 42 10/20/2009 5:03:23 PMSpanish - 43
Uso de la aplicación DLNA
Disposición de la pantalla del programa
1. Menús : La aplicación incluye los menús
siguientes : arch., compartir, Servidor y
Ayuda.
2. Haga clic para compartir la carpeta del
servidor PC seleccionado.
3. Haga clic para cancelar el acceso compartido.
4. Haga clic para actualizar la carpeta y los
archivos del ordenador.
5. Haga clic para sincronizar el estado de
acceso compartido.
6. Se mostrarán las carpetas y los archivos del
ordenador que se compartirán.
7. Se mostrarán las carpetas que comparte el
usuario.
8. El nombre del servidor PC que se muestra
en la lista de dispositivos del reproductor
multimedia.
Requisitos del sistema
1. Inserte en el ordenador el CD del programa suministrado con el televisor.
2. Se necesitan 20 MB de espacio en el disco para la instalación del programa.
N Si se comparten archivos, se necesitan hasta 20 MB de espacio en disco duro por cada 100 archivos.
N Si se cancela el acceso compartido a archivos, también se libera el espacio en disco duro utilizado para la información delas
miniaturas.
Formatos compatibles
• Imagen : JPEG (jpg, jpeg) : MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS otros. Con el fin de conocer de forma detallada los
formatos de vídeo admitidos, consulte las instrucciones de ‘Reproducción de un archivo de película’.
Instalación de la aplicación
► ►
►
1. Ejecute el archivo Setup.exe que se encuentra en el CD del programa suministrado con el producto.
N También puede descargar el archivo desde www.samsung.com.
2. Instale SAMSUNG PC Share Manager como se muestra en las figuras siguientes.
3. Cuando la instalación haya finalizado, se mostrará en el escritorio el icono de PC Share Manager.
N Haga doble clic sobre el icono para ejecutar el programa.
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 43 10/20/2009 5:03:25 PMSpanish - 44
❑ Compartir
Acceso compartido a una carpeta
Se pueden compartir carpetas entre el ordenador y el televisor.
Cancelación de una carpeta compartida
Se puede cancelar el acceso a una carpeta compartida en el ordenador. Seleccione una carpeta del panel compartir carpeta y
seleccione no compartir carpeta.
Aplicación de los ajustes actuales
Realice este procedimiento cuando sea necesario sincronizar debido a la creación de una nueva carpeta compartida o a la
cancelación de una carpeta compartida. El menú Configurar estado cambiado aplica los cambios a las carpetas compartidas
según los datos guardados con el programa de acceso compartido del ordenador.
Como aplicar los cambios a los datos internos es un proceso lento, esta función permite a los usuarios aplicar los cambios en los
datos sólo cuando resulta necesario. Los cambios en el estado de la carpeta compartida no se aplican al servidor hasta que se
selecciona el menú Configurar estado cambiado. Los cambios en las carpetas compartidas no se aplican al ordenador hasta que
se selecciona el menú Configurar estado cambiado.
Ajuste de los permisos de acceso
Para permitir que el televisor encuentre el ordenador, es necesario ajustar el televisor en Config. norma dispositivo en la ventana de
Ajuste de los permisos de acceso. Además, es necesario que el ordenador servidor y el televisor se encuentren en la misma subred.
• MetMétodo : Seleccione el menú compartir y seleccione Config. Los elementos rechazados se representan en color gris.
Puede cambiar los permisos de acceso con el botón Allow aceptar/Denegar. Para eliminar un elemento, selecciónelo y
después elija borrar elemento seleccionado.
❑ Servidor
Servidor
La función de servidor del ordenador se puede iniciar o detener.
Iniciar servidor al arrancar Windows
Puede determinar si desea que el servidor del ordenador se inicie automáticamente cuando Windows se inicie.
Change server name
Es posible cambiar el nombre del servidor del ordenador.
Uso de la función DLNA
❑ Uso del menú DLNA
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permite reproducir el contenido guardado en
un servidor DLNA (normalmente un ordenador) conectado al televisor o a través
de una red. El reproductor multimedia permite reproducir contenidos guardados en
un dispositivo de memoria USB conectado al televisor, mientras que DLNA permite
reproducir contenido guardado en un servidor DLNA (el ordenador) conectado al
televisor o a través de la red. Los procedimientos para usar los contenidos son los
mismos que los del reproductor multimedia.
1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú DLNA.
2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar icono (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) y,
a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Para salir del modo DLNA, pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia.
N DLNA no es compatible con las funciones siguientes.
- Las funciones de música de fondo y configuración de la música de fondo.
- La clasificación de archivos por preferencias en las carpetas de fotos, música y películas.
- La función del cambio de información del grupo.
- Las funciones de copiar / eliminar.
- La función de retirar con seguridad.
- Los botones REW/FF (π/μ) funcionan durante la reproducción de una película.
- Función de continuación de la reproducción de una película (reanudar reproducción).
N Es posible que la función Skip no funcione con algún contenedor como asf y mkv.
N No se admite el subtítulo incorporado, Multi-audio ni DivX DRM.
N Samsung PC Share Manager debe ser compatible con el programa cortafuegos del ordenador.
N Es posible que las funciones de omitir (◄/► teclas) y de pausa no funcionen mientras se reproduce una película para el DLNA
de otros fabricantes, dependiendo de la información de contenidos correspondiente.
N Es posible que no se muestre el tiempo de reproducción mientras se visualiza una película.
Media Play
PHOTO Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
Movie
USB Dispositivo Salir
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 44 10/20/2009 5:03:25 PMSpanish - 45
Conexión de dispositivos Anynet+
Anynet
+
es una función que permite controlar con el mando a distancia del televisor Samsung todos los dispositivos de Samsung
conectados que sean compatibles con Anynet
+
. El sistema Anynet
+
sólo se puede usar con dispositivos de Samsung que tengan la
función Anynet
+
. Para asegurarse de que el dispositivo de Samsung tenga dicha función, compruebe si lleva el logotipo Anynet
+
❑ Para conectar al televisor
1. Conecte los terminales [HDMI 1], [HDMI 2 (DVI)], [HDMI 3] o [HDMI 4] del televisor y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet
+
correspondiente mediante un cable HDMI.
❑ Para conectar al sistema Home Cinema
1. Conecte los terminales [HDMI 1], [HDMI 2 (DVI)], [HDMI 3] o [HDMI 4] del televisor y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet
+
correspondiente mediante un cable HDMI.
2. Conecte el terminal HDMI IN del sistema Home Cinema y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet
+
correspondiente mediante
un cable HDMI.
N Conecte el cable óptico entre el terminal Digital Audio Out (Optical) del televisor y el terminal Digital Audio Input del sistema Home Cinema.
N Si se sigue la conexión anterior, el terminal Optical sólo produce la salida de 2 canales de audio. Sólo oirá sonido de los altavoces
frontales izquierdo y derecho y del subwoofer del sistema Home Cinema. Para escuchar el canal de audio 5.1, conecte el terminal
Digital Audio Out (Optical) del reproductor de DVD o del decodificador de cable/satélite (dispositivo Anynet 1 o 2) directamente al
amplificador o al sistema Home Cinema, no al televisor.
N Conecte sólo un sistema Home Cinema.
N Puede conectar un dispositivo Anynet
+
mediante el cable HDMI 1.3. Algunos cables HDMI pueden no admitir las funciones Anynet
+
.
N Anynet
+
funciona cuando el dispositivo de AV que admite Anynet
+
se encuentra en estado de espera o de encendido.
N Anynet
+
admite hasta 12 dispositivos de AV en total. Tenga en cuenta que puede conectar hasta 3 dispositivos del mismo tipo.
N Anynet
+
admite hasta 3 dispositivos simultáneamente.
Acerca de Anynet+
Dispositivo 1
Anynet
+
Dispositivo
2 Anynet
+
Dispositivo
3 Anynet
+
TV
Cable HDMI 1.3
Cable HDMI 1.3
Cable HDMI 1.3
TV
Dispositivo 1 Anynet
+
Dispositivo 2 Anynet
+
Dispositivo 3 Anynet
+
Cable HDMI 1.3
Cable HDMI 1.3
Cable HDMI 1.3
Cable HDMI 1.3
Sistema Home Cinema
Cable óptico
Dispositivo
4 Anynet
+
Cable HDMI 1.3
Dispositivo 4 Anynet+
Cable HDMI 1.3
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 45 10/20/2009 5:03:27 PMSpanish - 46
Configuración de Anynet+
❑ Configuración de Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede mostrar el
menú Anynet+ seleccionando Herramientas → Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) → Desactivado / Activado
Para utilizar la función Anynet
+
, Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) debe estar configurado como
Activado.
N Cuando la función Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) está desactivada, todas las operaciones
relacionadas con Anynet
+
se desactivan.
Apagado automático → No / Sí
Configuración de Anynet
+
para que se desactive automáticamente cuando el televisor
se apaga.
N La fuente activa del televisor remoto se debe configurar como TV para usar la
función Anynet
+
.
N Si establece Apagado Automático como Sí, los dispositivos externos conectados
también se desactivan cuando se apaga el televisor. Si un dispositivo externo
todavía está grabando, puede apagarse o no.
Conmutación entre dispositivos Anynet+
1. Pulse el botón TOOLS. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Lista de dispositivos y, a continuación,
pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Se muestran todos los dispositivos Anynet
+
conectados al televisor. Si no encuentra
el dispositivo que desea, pulse el botón rojo para buscar los dispositivos.
N Sólo cuando la opción Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) está establecida como Activado en el
menú Configuración , se muestra el menú Lista de dispositivos.
3. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar un dispositivo determinado y pulse el botón
ENTERE. Se cambia al dispositivo seleccionado.
N El cambio a los dispositivos seleccionados puede tardar unos 2 minutos. No se puede cancelar la operación de cambio de
dispositivo mientras ésta se está efectuando.
N El tiempo necesario para la búsqueda de dispositivos depende de la cantidad de dispositivos conectados.
N Si ha seleccionado un dispositivo externo pulsando el botón SOURCE, no podrá usar la función Anynet
+
. Asegúrese de cambiar a
un dispositivo Anynet
+
externo mediante el botón TOOLS.
❑ Menú Anynet
+
El menú Anynet
+
cambia según el tipo y el estado de los dispositivos Anynet
+
conectados al televisor.
Menú Anynet
+
Descripción
Ver la televisión El modo Anynet
+
cambia al modo de emisión de TV.
Lista de dispositivos Muestra la lista de dispositivos de Anynet
+
.
MENU (nombre_dispositivo) Muestra los menús del dispositivo conectado. Por ejemplo, si se ha conectado un grabador de
DVD, se muestra el menú del disco del grabador de DVD.
INFO
(nombre_dispositivo)
Por ejemplo, si se ha conectado un grabador de DVD, se muestra el menú del disco del grabador
de DVD.
Grabar (*grabador) Comienza una grabación. (Este menú sólo funciona en un dispositivo que admita grabación.)
Reserve Recording
(Reservar grabación)
(*grabador)
Permite reservar una grabación en el grabador. (Sólo está disponible en los dispositivos que
admiten la función de reserva de la grabación.)
Detener la grabación :
(*grabador)
Detiene la grabación.
Receptor La reproducción del sonido se efectúa a través del receptor.
Continúa…
Aplicación
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) ►
Content Library
Internet@TV
Centro red doméstica
U Mover EEntrar R Volver
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) : No ▶
Apagado automático : Sí
U Mover EEntrar R Volver
Ver la televisión
Lista de dispositivos
Grabación : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receptor : Activado
Configuración
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 46 10/20/2009 5:03:28 PMSpanish - 47
❑ Botones del mando a distancia del televisor disponibles en el modo Anynet
+
Tipo de dispositivo Estado de funcionamiento Botones disponibles
Dispositivo Anynet
+
Después de cambiar al dispositivo,
cuando el menú de éste aparece en la
pantalla.
Botones numéricos
▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE Botones
de colores/botón EXIT
Después de cambiar al dispositivo,
mientras se reproduce un archivo
(Búsqueda atrás) /
(Búsqueda adelante) /
(Detener) /
(Reproducir)/ (Pausa)
Dispositivo con
sintonizador
incorporado
Después de cambiar al dispositivo,
mientras se ve un programa de TV
Botón P /
Dispositivo de audio Cuando el receptor está activado = / Botón M MUTE
N La función Anynet
+
sólo funciona cuando la fuente activa del mando a distancia del televisor está ajustada en TV.
N El botón sólo funciona cuando la grabación es posible.
N Los dispositivos Anynet
+
no se pueden controlar con los botones del TV.
Los dispositivos Anynet
+
sólo se pueden controlar mediante el mando a distancia del televisor.
N El mando a distancia del televisor puede no funcionar en determinadas circunstancias. En ese caso, vuelva a seleccionar el
dispositivo Anynet
+
.
N Las funciones Anynet
+
no están operativas con los productos de otros fabricantes.
N El funcionamiento de / puede variar según el dispositivo.
N Cuando hay conectados varios dispositivos de grabación, éstos se muestran como (*grabador), pero si sólo hay conectado un
dispositivo, éste se muestra como (*nombre_dispositivo).
Grabación
El grabador de Samsung permite efectuar una grabación de un programa de televisión.
1. Pulse el botón TOOLS. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Grabar (grabadora) y pulse el botón
ENTERE. Comienza la grabación.
N Cuando hay más de un dispositivo de grabación
Cuando hay varios dispositivos de grabación conectados, éstos se muestran en
una lista. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar el dispositivo de grabación que
desee y pulse el botón ENTERE. Comienza la grabación.
N Cuando no se muestra el dispositivo de grabación, seleccione Lista de dispositivos
y pulse el botón rojo para buscar los dispositivos.
N Si pulsa el botón grabará lo que está viendo en ese momento. Si está viendo un vídeo desde otro dispositivo, se graba el
vídeo de éste.
N Antes de grabar, compruebe si la toma de antena está conectada correctamente al dispositivo de grabación.
Para conectar correctamente una antena a un dispositivo de grabación, consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo de
grabación.
U Mover EEntrar R Volver
Ver la televisión
Lista de dispositivos
Grabación : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receptor : Act.
Configuración
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 47 10/20/2009 5:03:28 PMSpanish - 48
Escucha a través de un receptor
Se puede escuchar sonido a través de un receptor en lugar de hacerlo mediante el altavoz
del TV.
1. Pulse el botón TOOLS. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Receptor. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para
seleccionar Activado o Desactivado.
N Si el receptor sólo admite audio, quizás no se muestre la lista de dispositivos.
N El receptor no funcionará si no se ha conectado correctamente el terminal Optical IN
del receptor con el terminal Optical OUT del televisor.
N Cuando el receptor (sistema Home Cinema) está activado, se puede oír la salida de
sonido desde el terminal Optical del televisor. Cuando se ve la televisión a través de un DTV (aéreo), el televisor envía el sonido de
5.1 canales al receptor del sistema Home Cinema. Cuando la fuente es un componente digital, como un DVD, y está conectada al
televisor a través de HDMI, sólo se oye el sonido de 2 canales del receptor del sistema Home Cinema.
N Cuando se usa la función Media Play, el sonido puede no oírse adecuadamente a través del receptor.
N Cuando se escucha a través del receptor, hay restricciones para el uso de los menús relativos al audio.
N Si hay una interrupción en la alimentación del televisor con la opción Receptor configurada en Activado puede que la opción
Seleccionar altavoz esté configurada como Altavoz externo al volver a encender el televisor. (Consulte la página 21)
Solución de problemas de Anynet+
Síntoma Solución
Anynet
+
no funciona. • Compruebe si el dispositivo es un dispositivo Anynet
+
. El sistema Anynet
+
sólo admite
dispositivos Anynet
+
.
• Conecte sólo un receptor (sistema Home Cinema).
• Compruebe si el cable de alimentación del dispositivo Anynet
+
está debidamente conectado.
• Compruebe las conexiones de los cables de Vídeo/Audio/HDMI 1.3 del dispositivo Anynet
+
.
• Compruebe si Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) está configurado como Activado en el menú de
configuración de Anynet
+
.
• Compruebe si el mando a distancia del televisor está en modo TV.
• Compruebe si es un mando a distancia exclusivo para Anynet
+
• Anynet
+
no funciona en algunas situaciones. (Búsqueda de canales, funcionamiento de Media
Play, Plug & Play, etc.)
• Cuando se conecta o se desconecta el cable HDMI 1.3, se han de buscar de nuevo los
dispositivos o volver a apagar y encender el televisor.
• Compruebe si la función Anynet
+
del dispositivo Anynet
+
está activada.
Deseo iniciar Anynet
+
. • Compruebe si el dispositivo Anynet
+
está debidamente conectado al televisor y si la opción
Anynet
+
(HDMICEC) está establecida en Activado en el menú Configuración de Anynet
+
.
• Pulse el botón TV del mando a distancia del televisor para cambiar a TV. A continuación pulse
el botón TOOLS para visualizar el menú Anynet
+
y seleccione el menú que desee.
Deseo salir de Anynet
+
. • Seleccione Ver la televisión en el menú de Anynet
+
.
• Pulse el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia del televisor y seleccione un dispositivo que
no sea Anynet
+
. (Tenga en cuenta que el botón de canal sólo funciona cuando no hay ningún
dispositivo Anynet
+
con sintonizador incorporado conectado.)
En la pantalla aparece el
mensaje Conectando a un
dispositivo Anynet
+
.
• El mando a distancia no se puede utilizar cuando se está configurando Anynet
+
o cambiando
a un modo de visualización.
• Utilice el mando a distancia cuando haya terminado la configuración de Anynet
+
o el cambio al
modo de visualización.
El dispositivo Anynet
+
no
reproduce.
• No se puede usar la función de reproducción mientras se efectúa una conexión Plug & Play.
El dispositivo conectado no se
muestra.
• Compruebe si el dispositivo admite las funciones Anynet
+
.
• Compruebe si el cable HDMI 1.3 está debidamente conectado.
• Compruebe si Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) está configurado como Activado en el menú de
configuración de Anynet
+
.
• Vuelva a efectuar una búsqueda de dispositivos Anynet
+
.
• Sólo puede conectar un dispositivo Anynet
+
mediante el cable HDMI 1.3. Algunos cables
HDMI pueden no admitir las funciones Anynet
+
.
• Si se ha interrumpido por una situación anormal como la desconexión del cable HDMI o el de
alimentación o por un fallo en la corriente eléctrica, deberá repetir la búsqueda del dispositivo.
El programa de televisión no se
puede grabar.
• Compruebe la conexión de la toma de antena del dispositivo de grabación.
El sonido del televisor no sale a
través del receptor.
• Conecte el cable óptico entre el televisor y el receptor.
U Mover EEntrar R Volver
Ver la televisión
Lista de dispositivos
Grabación : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receptor : Act.
Configuración
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 48 10/20/2009 5:03:29 PMSpanish - 49
Activación de la Content Library
La Content Library permite ver o reproducir los contenidos incorporados en el TV o
almacenados en un dispositivo USB.
1. Pulse el botón MENU. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aplicación y, a
continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Content Library y, a continuación, pulse
el botón ENTERE. Aparece el menú principal de la biblioteca de contenidos.
O Pulse el botón CONTENT del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú
principal Content Library.
3. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar un icono (Galería, Cocina, Niños, Bien
estar, Otros, Gestión del contenido) y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Se ejecuta el elemento seleccionado.
❑ Uso de los botones del mando a distancia en el menú Content Library
Botón Función
▲/▼/◄/► Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opción.
ENTERE Seleccionar la opción marcada.
RETURN Volver al menú anterior.
EXIT Detener la función actual y volver al menú principal Content Library.
Botones de colores El botón de cada función se describe en su página correspondiente.
Puede controlar el volumen del contenido que se reproduce.
CONTENT Acceder a o salir del modo Content Library.
N Si pulsa los botones de volumen o M MUTE, no se mostrará la pantalla OSD, pero el volumen cambiará correctamente.
N Para volver al modo TV, pulse los botones P del mando a distancia.
N LA Content Library INCLUYE TEXTOS, GRÁFICOS, IMÁGENES, MULTIMEDIA Y OTROS MATERIALES CON FINES
SÓLO INFORMATIVOS Y PUBLICITARIOS. LOS MATERIALES DE LA Content Library SE HAN MODIFICADO Y
SE MANTIENEN REVISADOS Y ACTUALIZADOS. LOS MATERIALES DE LA Content Library PUEDEN NO SER
APROPIADOS PARA TODAS LAS AUDIENCIAS.
N LA INFORMACIÓN DE LA Content Library SE PROPORCIONA “TAL CUAL”. AUNQUE LA INFORMACIÓN
PROPORCIONADA EN LAContent Library SE HA OBTENIDO O RECOPILADO EN FUENTES QUE CONSIDERAMOS
FIABLES, SAMSUNG NO PUEDE GARANTIZAR NI GARANTIZA LA PRECISIÓN, VALIDEZ, VIGENCIA O
INTEGRIDAD DE CUALQUIER INFORMACIÓN O DATO DISPONIBLE PARA UN PROPÓSITO EN PARTICULAR.
BAJO NINGUNA CIRCUNSTANCIA, INCLUIDA NEGLIGENCIA, SAMSUNG SE HACE RESPONSABLE, YA SEA POR
CONTRATO YA SEA POR AGRAVIO, DE CUALQUIER DAÑO DIRECTO, INDIRECTO, INCIDENTAL, ESPECIALO
CONSECUENTE, GASTOS LEGALES, PAGOS Y CUALQUIER OTRO DAÑO DERIVADOS DE O RELACIONADOS
CON CUALQUIER INFORMACIÓN INCLUIDA, O COMO RESULTADO DEL USO DE LA Content Library, NI SIQUIERA
EN EL CASO DE QUE SE HAYA ADVERTIDO DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS.
Content Library
Aplicación
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Content Library
Internet@TV
Centro red doméstica
< >
Cocina Niños
Galería
Galería
Content Library
Bien estar Otros
Volver Salir
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 49 10/20/2009 5:03:30 PMSpanish - 50
Uso de la Content Library
❑ Galería
Esta función reproduce una presentación de fotos con imágenes en alta resolución y música de fondo.
Con la función Galería del televisor, se puede cambiar el ambiente de casa.
N Pulse el botón INFO para ver el nombre del artista e información detallada en inglés de las imágenes (actualmente esta
información sólo se proporciona en inglés).
N Puede hacer una pausa en la presentación pulsando el botón ENTERE.
N Los copyrights de los contenidos de Galería y todas las cuestiones relacionadas con ellos están reservados por Timespace/
JoongAng M&B, Inc.
❑ Cocina
Muestra varias recetas que después se pueden seguir fácilmente paso a paso. Disfrute de estos contenidos que le ofrecen
excelentes sugerencias para preparar comidas.
N Las recetas incluidas en el contenido de Cocina del televisor Samsung se basan en recetas publicadas por Anness Publishing.
N Los copyrights de los contenidos de Cocina y todas las cuestiones relacionadas con los mismos están reservados por Practical
Pictures.
❑ Niños
Incluye contenido educativo e interactivo que pueden ver los niños indefinidamente. Disfrute de las historias, las canciones y los
juegos incluidos con los personajes Boowa y Kwala.
N Los copyrights de los contenidos de Niños y todas las cuestiones relacionadas con los mismos están reservados por UpToTen.
❑ Bien estar
Incluye contenidos para un estilo de vida saludable, como ejercicios de estiramientos, y música, de los que puede disfrutar toda la
familia.
❑ Gestión del contenido
Mi contenido
Los contenidos se manejan de la misma forma que los incluidos en la memoria del televisor. También puede borrar o reproducir
cada contenido.
USB
Puede descargar los contenidos en un dispositivo de memoria USB y reproducirlos en el televisor. Los contenidos del dispositivo
USB externo se reproducen directamente.
N Content Library sólo admite dispositivos USB de clase de almacenamiento masivo (MSC). MSC es un dispositivo de clase
de almacenamiento masivo sólo de transporte de gran capacidad. Ejemplos de MSC son las unidades de almacenamiento en
miniatura, los lectores de tarjetas Flash y las unidades de disco duro de USB (no se admiten concentradores de USB).
N Jugar a un juego con un dispositivo de memoria USB externa le permitirá guardar el estado del juego (dependiendo del juego).
Tenga cuidado de no retirar el dispositivo de memoria USB mientras se están guardando datos en el mismo, ya que esto podría
provocar la pérdida de los datos.
N Descarga de contenidos nuevos
Además de los contenidos incorporados, se ofrecerán contenidos nuevos gratuitos a través del sitio web Samsung.com.
Para descargar contenidos de pago, se necesita un número UDN. Compruebe el número UDN antes de descargar un nuevo
elemento de contenido.
1. Visite el sitio web www.samsung.com
2. Seleccione un elemento de contenido en la página de descargas de contenidos.
3. Descargue los contenidos en el dispositivo de memoria USB.
4. Vaya al menú principal de la Content Library pulsando el botón CONTENT
o eligiendo Content Library (Menú → Aplicación → Content Library)
5. Enchufe la memoria USB en el puerto USB situado en el lateral del televisor.
6. Puede ver el subelemento del contenido que ha descargado.
7. Seleccione un elemento de contenido y pulse el botón Enter.
8. Puede reproducir el elemento de contenido seleccionado.
Configuración
• Tiempo ej. salvapantallas → 10 min / 20 min. / 40 min. / 1 hora
Configurar el tiempo de espera necesario para que se ejecute el salvapantallas.
• Guardar UDN (número de dispositivo exclusivo)
El código numérico de 18 dígitos que aparece en pantalla es el código del producto.
Puede guardarlo en la memoria USB.
N El dispositivo de almacenamiento USB de formato NTFS no admite que se guarde el UDN.
Recomendamos utilizar un dispositivo de almacenamiento USB de formato FAT.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 50 10/20/2009 5:03:31 PMSpanish - 51
Todos los contenidos y servicios accesibles a través de este dispositivo pertenecen a terceros y se encuentran protegidos por las leyes de derechos
de autor, patentes, marcas y demás legislación en materia de propiedad intelectual. Dichos contenidos y servicios se ofrecen únicamente para su uso
personal y no comercial. Los contenidos y servicios no podrán ser utilizados de ninguna forma no autorizada por el correspondiente propietario de
los contenidos o proveedor del servicio. Sin limitación de lo anteriormente dispuesto, salvo con la previa y expresa autorización del correspondiente
propietario de los contenidos o proveedor del servicio, no podrá Usted modificar, copiar, republicar, cargar, incluir, transmitir, traducir, vender, explotar
o distribuir de ninguna forma y en ningún medio los contenidos o servicios ofrecidos a través de este dispositivo, ni crear trabajos derivados de éstos.
LOS CONTENIDOS Y SERVICIOS DE TERCEROS SE PROPORCIONAN “TAL CUAL”. SAMSUNG NO GARANTIZA LOS CONTENIDOS
O SERVICIOS OFRECIDOS CONFORME A LO ANTERIORMENTE INDICADO, DE FORMA EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, PARA NINGÚN FIN
ESPECÍFICO. SAMSUNG EXCLUYE EXPRESAMENTE TODAS LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN ALGUNA,
LAS GARANTÍAS DE COMERCIABILIDAD O ADECUACIÓN A UN FIN CONCRETO. SAMSUNG NO GARANTIZA LA PRECISIÓN, VALIDEZ,
PUNTUALIDAD, LEGALIDAD O EXHAUSTIVIDAD DE LOS CONTENIDOS O SERVICIOS OFRECIDOS A TRAVÉS DE ESTE DISPOSITIVO Y
NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE EN NINGÚN CASO, INCLUYENDO EN CASO DE NEGLIGENCIA, CONTRACTUAL O EXTRACONTRACTUAL, POR
CUALESQUIERA DAÑOS DIRECTOS, INDIRECTOS, DERIVADOS, ESPECIALES O EMERGENTES, HONORARIOS DE ABOGADOS, GASTOS
U OTROS DAÑOS RELATIVOS A CUALQUIER INFORMACIÓN DERIVADA DEL USO DE LOS CONTENIDOS O SERVICIOS POR SU PARTE O
POR PARTE DE CUALQUIER TERCERO, AUN CUANDO HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDO DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE DICHOS DAÑOS.
LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE SAMSUNG NO QUEDARÁ EXCLUIDA EN CASO DE NEGLIGENCIA GRAVE, CONDUCTA ILÍCITA DOLOSA,
RESPONSABILIDAD CIVIL POR PRODUCTO DEFECTUOSO O CUALQUIER OTRO TIPO DE RESPONSABILIDAD QUE NO PUEDA SER
OBJETO DE EXCLUSIÓN O LIMITACIÓN EN VIRTUD DE LA LEGISLACIÓN APLICABLE.
Los servicios de terceros podrán ser suspendidos o interrumpidos en cualquier momento, y Samsung no realiza ninguna manifestación ni otorga
ninguna garantía en el sentido de que los contenidos o servicios estarán disponibles durante un periodo de tiempo determinado. Los contenidos y
servicios son transmitidos por terceros a través de redes e instalaciones de transmisión sobre las que Samsung no tiene ningún tipo de control. Sin
limitación del carácter general de esta exclusión de responsabilidad, Samsung excluye expresamente cualquier responsabilidad por la interrupción
o suspensión de cualquiera de los contenidos o servicios ofrecidos a través de este dispositivo. Samsung excluye cualquier tipo de responsabilidad
editorial por los contenidos accesibles a través de este dispositivo. Samsung no es responsable del servicio al cliente relativo a los contenidos y
servicios. Todas las dudas o cuestiones relativas a los contenidos o servicios deberán formularse directamente a los respectivos proveedores de
contenidos y servicios. Samsung considera que esta exclusión de responsabilidad es aceptada por una persona con capacidad legal suficiente
para entender sus términos y excluye cualquier responsabilidad por éstos.
Se pueden utilizar diferentes servicios de Internet que contengan información útil y contenidos de entretenimiento.
Si tiene problemas cuando utiliza algún servicio widget, póngase en contacto con el proveedor del servicio. En el widget, pulse el botón
verde para obtener información de contacto o consulte la página web de ayuda para obtener información del widget.
N Según la región, puede que en el servicio del widget sólo se admita el inglés.
N Es posible que esta función no se admita, según el país.
Primeros pasos con Internet@TV
Internet@TV proporciona contenido integrado de Internet y televisión de Yahoo!® Widget Engine. Puede supervisar la información
bursátil, compartir fotos con amigos y familiares y acceder a noticias e información meteorológica a través del servicio Internet@TV en
el televisor.
N Si la condición de la red no es estable, es posible que no esté operativa esta función. El televisor se apagará automáticamente. Si
no, apague el televisor con el botón de encendido.
N Puede que sufra un funcionamiento lento o titubeante cuando use esta función debido a las condiciones de la red.
Cuando se ejecuta Internet@TV por primera vez, la configuración básica se inicia automáticamente.
N El primer paso es configurar la red. Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar la red, consulte ‘Configuración de red’.
N Una vez que la red esté operativa, el software Internet@TV le guiará paso a paso con el asistente de configuración.
Internet@TV
1. Pulse el botón MENU. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la aplicación y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE
2. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Internet@TV y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
N Se inicia INTERNET@TV.
O Pulse el botón Internet@ del mando a distancia para que se muestre el
menú Internet@TV”.
3. Se muestra en la pantalla el General Disclaimer. Seleccione I accept o I do not
accept.
N Para obtener más información sobre el General Disclaimer, consulte el
‘Legal Notice’.
4. La pantalla de bienvenida es el punto de inicio de la guía de configuración de
Internet@TV.
N Si selecciona Exit Setup, se reanudará este paso cuando pulse el botón
INTERNET@.
N Seleccione Let’s get started!
5. La elección de la ubicación permite que los wi dgets de televisión utilicen contenido.
N Seleccione el país en la lista.
6. Se debe aceptar la política de privacidad de Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine para utilizar
Internet@TV.
N Seleccione OK, I Accept.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 51 10/20/2009 5:03:31 PMSpanish - 52
7. Se deben aceptar los términos de servicio de Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine para utilizar Internet@TV.
N Seleccione OK, I Accept.
8. Escriba su nombre para configurar su perfil. Cada perfil tiene su propia lista de
widgets. Puede crear un perfil para cada persona que utilice Internet@TV.
N Escriba su nombre y seleccione Save this name.
N Para obtener más información, consulte la página ‘Using the Profile Widget’.
9. Internet@TV comprueba la configuración de la red.
N Si esta prueba falla, vuelva a configurar la red.
N Para obtener más información, consulte la página ‘Network Setup.’
10. Se completa la configuración guiada. El siguiente paso es un tutorial para utilizar
Internet@TV.
N Seleccione Continue para ver el tutorial.
N Seleccione Exit setup si desea empezar a usar Internet@TV ahora.
N Para volver a ejecutar el tutorial, seleccione Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial.
11. Pulse el botón INTERNET@ del mando a distancia para que se muestre la interfaz del usuario de Internet@TV.
❑ Pantalla de visualización
Modo Dock
1 Se muestra una pancarta de bienvenida con el nombre del perfil en la
esquina superior derecha.
N Tras unos momentos desaparece la pancarta.
2 La pancarta resalta dos accesos directos del mando a distancia.
N Si pulsa el botón azul (Viewport) del mando a distancia, la pantalla
cambia entre ‘Viewport mode’ y ‘Overlay mode’. En el modo Viewport,
la televisión o el vídeo se reproduce en una área a escala reducida
con gráficos en el exterior. En el modo Overlay, los gráficos se
muestran sobre la televisión o el vídeo.
N Si pulsa el botón amarillo (Edit Snippet) del mando a distancia, se
muestra una ventana de ayuda y el extracto resaltado se puede editar.
3 Pulse el botón INTERNET@ del mando a distancia para comenzar.
N La lista horizontal en la parte inferior de la pantalla del televisor se denomina ‘el acoplamiento’.
N Los elementos de la lista se denominan ‘extractos’.
N Un extracto es un acceso directo que ejecuta un widget del televisor.
N Un widget del televisor es una aplicación de Internet diseñada para ejecutarse en el televisor.
N Con los botones ◄ o ► del mando a distancia puede desplazarse por los extractos.
N El enfoque se localiza en el área más a la izquierda (resaltado en azul).
N El acoplamiento desliza los extractos debajo de este punto focal.
N Ejecute el widget de TV pulsando el botón ENTERE del mando a distancia cuando se resalta el extracto.
N Cuando se añaden extractos, éstos forman una pila por la que es posible desplazarse con los botones ▲ o ▼.
N En el acoplamiento hay dos widgets de TV especiales : el Profile Widget y el Gallery Widget. No se pueden eliminar.
N El acoplamiento se desliza fuera de la pantalla tras un periodo de tiempo.
Modo Sidebar
1 Enfoque un extracto y pulse el botón ENTERE para ejecutar la barra
lateral del widget de TV. El logotipo del widget de TV y de inicio ( )
están en la parte superior de la barra lateral.
2 El menú actual se muestra debajo del logotipo del widget de TV.
N Para volver a la pantalla anterior, selecciónela y pulse el botón
ENTERE.
N También puede pulsar el botón RETURN del mando a distancia.
3 La selección actual siempre está resaltada en azul. El botón resaltado
tiene el enfoque y se activa cuando se pulsa el botón ENTERE.
4 Si hay muchos datos se utiliza un control de página.
N Se muestran todas las páginas junto con la actual.
N Desplácese entre las páginas con los botones ◄ o ►.
5 La barra de herramientas inferior incluye los botones de colores que se corresponden con los botones rojo, verde, amarillo y
azul del mando a distancia.
• Botón rojo : Cerrar el widget.
• Botón verde : Cambiar la configuración del widget.
• Botón amarillo : Administrar los extractos.
• Botón azul : Cambiar el tamaño del vídeo para ajustarlo o mostrarlo a pantalla completa.
N Según el widget algunos botones pueden no estar disponibles.
.@# áëí space
a b c d e f g h i
j k l m n o p q r
s t u v w x y z 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 52 10/20/2009 5:03:33 PMSpanish - 53
Edición del extracto en el acoplamiento
1. Edite un extracto : Selecciónelo en el acoplamiento y pulse el botón amarillo.
2. El extracto se desplaza a la segunda posición y su miniatura se desliza hacia arriba para mostrar el texto de ayuda siguiente
• Borrar (botón rojo) : Eliminar este widget de TV.
N Los widgets eliminados se puede volver a instalar con la Widget Gallery.
• Mover (botón azul) : Reordenar el extracto. Pulse los botones◄ o ► para desplazar. Pulse el botón amarillo para soltar el
extracto en la nueva posición.
• Finalizar (botón amarillo) : Salir del menú Edit Snippet .
Uso del widget de un perfil
El widget de un perfil configura el perfil del usuario. Se pueden establecer varios perfiles; cada uno
mantiene su propia lista de widgets.
El menú Switch Profile permite cambiar de perfil.
N Al menos se deben registrar dos perfiles. Si desea añadir un perfil, consulte ‘Controles
administrativos’.
El menú Profile Settings permite personalizar y proteger un perfil personal.
• Los perfiles de usuario se deben personalizar con un Name y un Avatar exclusivos (un avatar es una
imagen que se utiliza para representar el perfil del usuario).
• El Name y el Avatar del usuario se muestran en el extracto del perfil en el acoplamiento.
• Los perfiles se pueden proteger con Create Profile PIN..
N Cuando se configura el PIN por primera vez, se puede establecer una pregunta de seguridad.
El menú de configuración del perfil limita el acceso a los widgets.
• Si se olvida el Profile PIN se puede contestar a una Security Question que está asociada con dicho
perfil.
• Un perfil que tiene un Limit Profile activado no permitirá que se instalen nuevo widgets.
N Para esta función se debe utilizar el PIN propietario. Para establecer el PIN propietario, consulte ‘Controles administrativos’.
El menú System Settings permite :
• Cambiar la Location y establecer el Zip Code (sólo Estados Unidos) para que se ajuste el contenido a la zona del usuario.
• Repetir tutorial que se ha mostrado durante la configuración.
• Restaurar la configuración de fábrica para eliminar todas las configuraciones y la información de los widgets.
En el menú Administrative Controls se puede :
• Establecer la temporización del Screen Saver para prevenir daños en la pantalla.
• Create Owner PIN y establecer una Security Question para controlar otros perfiles.
• Create un nuevo Profile con el que se pueden configurar un conjunto diferentes de widgets.
• Borrar un perfil existente.
Desde el widget del perfil se puede Sign in to Yahoo!® mediante el ID del Yahoo! personal.
• Si dispone de un ID de Yahoo!, puede acceder a su contenido personalizado mediante los widgets de TV de Yahoo!.
• Todos los widgets de TV de Yahoo! que están instalados se registran automáticamente con el perfil del usuario del ID de Yahoo!.
• Si no tiene una cuenta Yahoo!, visite www.yahoo.com y créela.
• Es posible que no pueda iniciar la sesión con un ID creado en el sitio web de Yahoo en un país que no admita Internet@TV.
❑ Acerca del widget del perfil
Pulse el botón verde.
Puede ver una breve descripción de Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service y Privacy Policy.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 53 10/20/2009 5:03:34 PMSpanish - 54
Uso de la galería de widgets de Yahoo!®
Utilice de la galería de widgets de Yahoo!® para añadir más widgets a su televisor.
Puede ver los widgets de TV disponibles en las siguientes categorías :
• Latest Widgets: Muestra los widgets recientemente actualizados.
• Yahoo!® Widgets: Muestra los widgets proporcionados por Yahoo!®.
• Samsung Widgets: Muestra los widgets proporcionados por Samsung.
• Más categorías : Muestra todos los widgets por categorías.
N Para instalar un widget, acceda a la pantalla de detalles, seleccione Add Widget to My Profile y
pulse el botón ENTERE. Se instala el widget y queda disponible en el acoplamiento.
❑ Configuración de Widget Gallery
Pulsar el botón verde.
About Yahoo! Widget Gallery...
Puede ver una breve descripción de Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service y
Privacy Policy.
En el menú de configuración del desarrollador se puede construir un widget propio.
Para obtener más información sobre cómo construir un widget propio, visite nuestra sede del
desarrollador http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/.
Uso del servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!®
El servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!® proporciona actualizaciones de la información meteorológica de
las ciudades y regiones que se desee. El contenido cambia dinámicamente al mismo tiempo que las
condiciones climáticas.
• Pulse el botón verde del mando a distancia para mostrar el menú de configuración del servicio
meteorológico de Yahoo!®
• En este menú puede añadir o eliminar una ciudad cuya información meteorológica desee ver.
En el menú Settings puede :
• Add New City escribiendo el nombre de ésta. Cuando se muestren los resultados, seleccione la
ciudad que desee y pulse el botón ENTERE.
• Delete City seleccionando la ciudad que desee borrar de la lista de ciudades. Pulse el botón
ENTERE para confirmar la supresión.
• Cambiar el método de indicación de la temperatura. Puede cambiar el método de indicación de
la temperatura a Imperial o Metric. Por ejemplo, Imperial mostrará temperaturas en grados
Fahrenheit y Metric en grados Celsius.
❑ Creación del extracto de una ciudad
• Seleccione la ciudad en la página de inicio del servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!® y vea la información meteorológica detallada.
• Pulsar el botón amarillo.
• Seleccione el menú Add Snippet y pulse el botón ENTERE para añadir la ciudad a un extracto.
❑ Supresión del extracto de una ciudad
• Ejecute el extracto.
• Pulsar el botón amarillo.
• Seleccione el menú Delete Snippet y pulse ENTERE para eliminar el extracto.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 54 10/20/2009 5:03:35 PMSpanish - 55
Uso del servicio de noticias de Yahoo!®
El servicio News de Yahoo!® proporciona las últimas noticias económicas, de entretenimiento,
políticas, deportivas, actualidad y otras categorías.
Seleccione una categoría, seleccione un titular en la categoría y vea un resumen que se actualiza
dinámicamente.
Uso del servicio Filckr de Yahoo!®
El servicio Flickr permite acceder a las fotos favoritas de amigos y familiares mientras se ve la
televisión. Comparta sus fotos con su familia en la pantalla grande del televisor viéndolas en forma
de presentación.
• Personalice el widget Flickr registrándose con su ID de Yahoo!.
• Con el fin de conocer el procedimiento detallado para el inicio de sesión, consulte las
instrucciones ‘Uso del widget de un perfil’.
• Para obtener más información sobre Flickr, visite http://www.flickr.com.
N Your Photos muestra las fotos registradas en la página web de Flickr.
Para ver fotos de Flickr en una presentación :
• Seleccione una miniatura de una foto y pulse el botón ENTERE para ver los detalles de la foto.
• Seleccione Start Slideshow y pulse el botón ENTERE.
Para controlar la pantalla de la presentación :
• Pulse el botón ENTERE durante una presentación.
• Las miniaturas de las fotos se muestran en la parte inferior de la pantalla.
N Cuando se muestran los controles de la presentación, se puede Pause, Play y Stop la
presentación.
N Si selecciona el menú y pulsa ENTERE, puede ver información sobre la foto seleccionada.
• El menú Your Sets permite ver las fotos que haya clasificado en Flickr.
• El menú Explore permite examinar las fotos de la página web de Flickr. Puede ver la fotos actualizadas diariamente.
• Los menús Mark as Favorite o Remove From Favorite mueven las fotos a las listas de las fotos favoritas y las eliminan de las
listas.
• El menú Favorite Photos permite ver las fotos que haya clasificado como favoritas.
• El menú Your Contacts permite ver las fotos actualizadas de sus amigos y familiares.
El menú Your Groups permite seleccionar los grupos de favoritos de la página web de Flickr para compartirlos con la comunidad
de usuarios de Flickr.
Para configurar el servicio Flickr de Yahoo!® pulse el botón verde del mando a distancia.
• El menú Time Per Slide controla la velocidad de la presentación.
• El menú Repeat reinicia la presentación desde el principio.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 55 10/20/2009 5:03:35 PMSpanish - 56
Uso del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!®
Vea información bursátil y los últimos valores de las acciones con el servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!®.
Pulse el botón verde para configurar su mercado bursátil. Utilice el menú Add New Symbol para
escribir el nombre del mercado bursátil.
• Seleccione el mercado que desee añadir en los resultados encontrados, seleccione el menú Add
Symbol y pulse el botón ENTERE.
N El mercado seleccionado se añade a la lista My Stocks.
• Utilice el menú Import Symbols From Yahoo!® para recuperar la cartera de finanzas de Yahoo!®.
- El menú Merge Symbols agrupa los símbolos del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!® con los
símbolos de la cartera del usuario.
- El menú Merge Symbols borra los símbolos del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!® y los
reemplaza por los símbolos de la cartera del usuario.
• Utilice el menú Display Format para cambiar la transición de la fluctuación de los valores bursátiles
como Value o Percentage.
• Cree el extracto de un mercado favorito
- Seleccione el símbolo del mercado en la página de inicio del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!® y
vea la información financiera detallada.
- Pulsar el botón amarillo.
- Seleccione el menú Add Snippet y pulse el botón ENTERE para añadir el mercado a un extracto.
• Delete un extracto
- Ejecute el extracto en el acoplamiento.
- Pulsar el botón amarillo.
- Seleccione el menú Delete Snippet y pulse ENTERE para eliminar el extracto.
Solución de problemas de internet@TV
Problema Posible solución
Algunos servicios de widget no
funcionan.
• Compruebe con su proveedor del servicio.
• En el widget, pulse el botón verde para obtener información de contacto o consulte la página
web de ayuda para obtener información del widget.
• Consulte la página web de la ayuda.
Algunos contenidos de los
widgets sólo están en inglés.
¿Cómo puedo cambiar el
idioma?
• El idioma del contenido del widget puede ser deferente del idioma de la interfaz del usuario.
Esto depende del proveedor del servicio.
Con la configuración
predeterminada de fábrica
restablecida, el servicio del
widget de Yahoo! no funciona
y se muestra un mensaje de
advertencia.
• Después de restablecer la configuración predeterminada de fábrica, apague y encienda el
televisor. A continuación, reinicie Internet@TV.
He registrado mi cuenta en un
widget de Flickr. Pero no puedo
ver mis fotos.
• Vaya a la página web de Yahoo! y active su cuenta de Flickr en el ID de Yahoo!
En el widget del perfil, he
cambiado la ubicación pero
se mantiene la configuración
anterior.
• Apague y encienda el televisor. A continuación, reinicie Internet@TV.
• Ahora, podrá ver los servicios de widgets admitidos en la ubicación cambiada.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 56 10/20/2009 5:03:36 PMSpanish - 57
Página web de ayuda
País Página web
Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Bélgica
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
República Checa www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Dinamarca www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finlandia www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Francia www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Alemania www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Grecia www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungría www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Irlanda www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italia www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Países Bajos www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Noruega www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Polonia www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Eslovaquia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
España www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suecia www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suiza
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Reino Unido www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turquía www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Letonia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lituania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Rusia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ucrania www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N Los datos de contacto pueden cambiar posteriormente.
N Puede haber enlaces diferentes para algunos países..
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 57 10/20/2009 5:03:36 PMSpanish - 58
N Es posible que esta función no se admita, según el país.
N Si tiene problemas cuando utiliza algún servicio widget, póngase en contacto con el proveedor del servicio. En el widget, pulse el
botón verde para obtener información de contacto o consulte la página web de ayuda para obtener información del widget.
N Según la región, puede que en el servicio del widget sólo se admita el inglés.
Primeros pasos con Internet@TV
Internet@TV proporciona servicios widget de SAMSUNG a través de una conexión de red. Los contenidos de Internet@TV se pueden
cambiar según el proveedor del servicio. Puede acceder a información diversa, como YouTube, mediante el servicio Internet@TV.
N Si el televisor no admite alguna fuente del contenido proporcionado por el proveedor, puede que el contenido no se vea
adecuadamente.
N La configuración de los widgets y los servicios que éstos proporcionan pueden variar según el país seleccionado. Después de
cambiar de país, apague y encienda el televisor. A continuación puede utilizar el servicio de widget admitido por el país que ha
cambiado. Si Country está configurado como Others, el televisor no puede reconocer el país. En este caso, haga la selección
directamente en la lista de países del servicio.
N Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar el país, consulte las instrucciones de ‘Función Plug & Play’.
N Puede que sufra un funcionamiento lento o titubeante cuando use esta función debido a las condiciones de la red.
N Configure la red antes de usar Internet@TV. Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar la red, consulte ‘Configuración
de red’.
Cuando se ejecuta Internet@TV por primera vez, la configuración básica se inicia automáticamente. Puede tardar unos minutos en
actualizarse.
1. Pulse el botón MENU. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aplicación y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
2. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Internet@TV y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
O Pulse el botón Internet@ del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú
Internet@TV.
3. Se muestra el Acuerdo del usuario. Seleccione Acepto para aceptar el acuerdo.
4. Se muestra Estadísticas y análisis. Seleccione Acepto para aceptar el acuerdo.
Configuración de Internet@TV
Puede comprobar y utilizar los menús relacionados con Single Sign On (SSO), la gestión del sistema y las propiedades. Pulse los
botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Configuración y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
❑ Single Sign On (SSO)
Puede utilizar este menú para crear o borrar la cuenta.
Mediante Single Sign On (SSO), puede controlar su cuenta, incluida la información de la cuenta del sitio del contenido.
No es necesario iniciar un sesión adicional.
N La cuenta sólo es para internet@TV.
Create Account
Puede crear una cuenta y vincularla con el sitio de servicio que desee.
N Puede crear hasta 10 cuentas.
N El nombre de la cuenta no puede superar los 10 caracteres.
N Si no hay un servicio que necesite un inicio de sesión, no puede crear la cuenta.
Administración de cuentas
• Sitio del servicio : Puede registrar la información del registro del sitio de servicio (como YouTube).
• Cambiar contraseña : Cambiar la contraseña de la cuenta.
• Borrar : Borrar la cuenta.
N Si ha olvidado la contraseña de la cuenta, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en el orden siguiente para restablecer
Internet@TV :
POWER (apagar) → M MUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (encender).
Si utiliza esta función, se borrarán todas las cuentas.
Internet@TV
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 58 10/20/2009 5:03:37 PMSpanish - 59
❑ Configuración del sistema
N Ejecución automática teletipo, Duración teletipo puede que no se admitan según el país.
Cambiar la contraseña de bloqueo del servicio
N El número de la contraseña predeterminada para un televisor nuevo es “0-0-0-0”.
N Si olvida la contraseña, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en la siguiente secuencia para reiniciar la contraseña como
“0-0-0-0” : POWER (apagar) → M MUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (encender).
Duración del servicio
Seleccionar para configurar el tiempo de duración del servicio antes de que se ejecute el salvapantallas.
Ejecución automática teletipo → Desactivar / Activar
Seleccionar para establecer que el teletipo se ejecute automáticamente o no cuando se encienda el televisor..
Duración del teletipo
Seleccionar para configurar el tiempo de duración del servicio antes de que se ejecute el salvapantallas.
❑ Propiedades
Puede medir la velocidad del servicio Internet TV mediante
Puede medir la velocidad del servicio Internet TV mediante Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service.
Uso del servicio Internet@TV
En un widget que proporcione varios menús de categorías, se puede ver el contenido de éstos con los botones ◄ y ►.
Registro de la cuenta
1. Pulse el botón rojo.
2. Seleccione la Cuenta de usuario y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE.
3. Escriba la contraseña.
N Una vez registrada la cuenta del usuario, ésta se mostrará en la pantalla.
N Para iniciar una sesión, se deben haber registrado una o más cuentas. Si desea crear una cuenta, consulte ‘Configuración de
Internet@TV’.
Uso de la galería de widgets
Puede utilizar Ejecutar servicio, Bloquear, Instalar servicio en el widget existente y puede ver la descripción del servicio del
widget que no está instalado.
En Internet@TV, se pueden utilizar y añadir varios widgets proporcionados por el proveedor del servicio. Puede variar según el
proveedor.
• Ejecutar servicio : Ejecuta el servicio del widget.
• Bloquear : Establecer el bloqueo del servicio
• Instalar servicio (o Borrar servicio) : Instalar o borrar el servicio del widget.
Uso del widget YouTube
Puede ver películas proporcionadas por YouTube.
Si tiene una cuenta en YouTube, registre la información de la cuenta mediante la
Administración de la cuenta. A continuación, puede usar la categoría Mis favoritos.
N El servicio de la web puede cambiar el menú.
N Puede haber contenidos inapropiados para los niños. En tal caso, utilice la
función Bloquear en Galería de widgets.
Xz~*atppo
_z{*]lpo
Xz~*[z{wl}
Xz~*Ot~n~~po
_z{*Qlz}tp~
Xz~*Wtyvpo
Xz~*]p~{zxopo
Qpl}po
_zol <:B
^ppvtyr*U~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp}
atp~*E*C;
M}plvtyr*Yp~*Lwp}~*m*P8Xltw
atp~*E*C;
Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx
atp~*E*CE=A
Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 59 10/20/2009 5:03:37 PMSpanish - 60
Solución de problemas con Internet@TV
Problema Posible solución
Algunos servicios de widget no
funcionan.
Compruebe con su proveedor del servicio. En el widget, pulse el botón verde para
obtener información de contacto o consulte la página web de la ayuda para obtener
información del proveedor del servicio. Consulte la página web de la ayuda.
¿Qué ventajas tiene registrarse? Si crea una cuenta y registra la información de inicio de sesión del servicio deseado,
puede acceder al contenido personalizado sin un registro adicional.
Cuando hay un error de red, no puedo
utilizar otros menús que no sean el de
configuración.
Si no funciona la conexión de red, el servicio puede quedar limitado.
Porque todas las funciones excepto el menú de configuración necesitan la conexión a
Internet.
¿Se pueden mostrar películas para
adultos en YouTube?
Básicamente, en la lista del menú, éstas se filtran. Sin embargo, con la función de
búsqueda se pueden mostrar. En este caso, utilice la galería de widgets para bloquear el
servicio del widget.
Página web de ayuda
País Página web
Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Bélgica
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
República Checa www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Dinamarca www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finlandia www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Francia www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Alemania www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Grecia www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungría www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Irlanda www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italia www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Países Bajos www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Noruega www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Polonia www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Eslovaquia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
España www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suecia www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suiza
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Reino Unido www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turquía www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Letonia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lituania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Rusia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ucrania www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N Los datos de contacto pueden cambiar posteriormente.
N Puede haber enlaces diferentes para algunos países.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 60 10/20/2009 5:03:37 PMSpanish - 61
Centro de red doméstica
Acerca del Centro de red doméstica
El Centro de red doméstica se conecta a los televisores y a los móviles a través de una red. Puede ver en el televisor las llamadas
entrantes, el contenido de los mensajes de texto y las planificaciones programadas en el móvil mediante el Centro de red doméstica.
Asimismo, puede reproducir el contenido multimedia guardado en los móviles como vídeos, fotos y música importándolos al televisor a
través de la red.
N Si el dispositivo admite la función DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller), la función Centro red doméstica está disponible.
N Esta función permite la compatibilidad con teléfonos móviles de Samsung que estarán disponibles posteriormente. Para obtener
más información, visite www.samsung.com o póngase en contacto con el centro de llamadas de Samsung. Es posible que
el dispositivo móvil requiera la instalación de software adicional. Para obtener más información, consulte la guía del usuario
correspondiente.
❑ Conexión del Centro de red doméstica
Para obtener más información sobre la configuración de la red, consulte ‘Configuración de la red’.
Conexión mediante una red Wi-Fi Ad-hoc específica
1. Conecte el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’ en el puerto USB1(HDD) o USB2 del televisor.
2. Para obtener más información sobre cómo configurar la red Ad-hoc, consulte ‘Network Setup’.
N Para obtener información sobre la configuración de la red del móvil, consulte el manual del aparato.
3. Configure la dirección IP, el SSID y la contraseña del móvil y las configuraciones Ad-hoc del móvil mediante el Nombre de la
red (SSID) y la Clave seguridad (contraseña) que aparecen en el televisor.
Conexión a través de un compartidor IP cableado/inalámbrico
1. Conecte el puerto LAN del televisor y el compartidor IP cableado/inalámbrico mediante el cable LAN o conecte el puerto USB1
(HDD) o USB2 del televisor y el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’.
N Si desea conocer las instrucciones para configurar el compartidor cableado/inalámbrico y el teléfono móvil, consulte el
manual del dispositivo correspondiente..
Centro de red doméstica
Panel lateral del TV
Adaptador de
LAN inalámbrica
de Samsung
Teléfono móvil
o
Adaptador de
LAN inalámbrica
de Samsung
Compartidor IP inalámbricor
Panel lateral del TV
Teléfono móvil
o
Cable LAN
Adaptador de
LAN inalámbrica
de Samsung
Teléfono móvil TV Side Panel
o
Cable LAN
Compartidor IP inalámbricor
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 61 10/20/2009 5:03:44 PMSpanish - 62
Configuración del Centro de red doméstica
❑ Mensaje / Multim
Muestra una lista de teléfonos móviles que se han configurado con este televisor
para usar la función de mensajería o multimedia.
N La función multimedia está disponible en otros teléfonos móviles que admiten
DLNA DMC.
Permtdo
Admite el teléfono móvil.
Dnegado
Bloquea el teléfono móvil.
Borrar
Elimina el teléfono móvil de la lista.
N Esta función elimina el nombre de la lista. Si el dispositivo móvil borrado se enciende o intenta conectarse con el televisor,
puede que aparezca en la lista.
❑ Configuración
Mensaje → Act./Desact.
Puede determinar si usar la función de mensajería (las llamadas entrantes, el contenido
de mensajes de texto y las planificaciones programadas en el teléfono móvil).
Multim.→ Act./Desact.
Puede seleccionar si usar la función multimedia que reproduce el contenido
(vídeos, fotos o música) del teléfono móvil.
Nombre TV
Puede configurar el nombre del televisor para encontrarlo fácilmente en el
dispositivo móvil.
N Si selecciona Entr. usu., puede escribir el nombre del televisor mediante el teclado en pantalla (OSK).
Volver Salir
Centro red doméstica
111-1234-5671 : Permtdo
111-1234-5672 : Permtdo
111-1234-5673 : Dnegado
111-1234-5674 : Dnegado
Mensaje
Multim
Config
Volver Salir
Centro red doméstica
Mensaje : On
Multim. : On
Nombre TV : TV
Mensaje
Multim.
Config.
Página web de ayuda
Mediante esta función puede ver las llamadas entrantes, el contenido de los mensajes
de texto y las planificaciones programadas en el teléfono móvil a través de la ventana de
alarma mientras ve la televisión.
N Para desactivar esta ventana de alarma de Mensaje, configure Mensaje como
Desact. en Config. de Centro red doméstica.
N La ventana de alarma aparece durante 20 segundos. Si no se pulsa ninguna tecla o
si se selecciona Cancelar, aparece hasta tres veces en intervalos de 5 minutos.
N Si se selecciona Aceptar, o bien si no se selecciona Aceptar mientras el mensaje
aparecía tres veces, el mensaje se borrará. El mensaje no se elimina del teléfono
móvil.
N Puede aparecer la ventana de alarma simple mientras se usan algunas aplicaciones
como el Reproductor multimedia, la Biblioteca de contenidos, etc. En este caso,
para ver el contenido del mensaje, cambie al modo de visualización de televisión.
N Si aparece el mensaje de un móvil desconocido, seleccione el móvil en el elemento Mensaje de Centro red doméstica y
seleccione Dnegado para bloquear el teléfono.
❑ Visualización de mensajes
Si llega un nuevo mensaje de texto (SMS) mientras mira la televisión, aparece la ventana de alarma. Si hace clic en el botón
Aceptar, aparecerá el contenido del mensaje.
N Puede configurar las opciones de visualización del contenido de los mensajes de texto (SMS) en el teléfono móvil. Para
conocer el procedimiento, consulte el manual del teléfono móvil.
N Es posible que algunos caracteres especiales se muestren en blanco o dañados.
❑ Alarma de llamada entrante
Si se produce una llamada mientras ve la televisión, aparece la ventana de alarma.
❑ Alarma de planificación
Mientras ve la televisión, aparece la ventana de alarma para mostrar la planificación registrada.
N Puede configurar las opciones de visualización del contenido de la planificación en el teléfono móvil.
Para conocer el procedimiento, consulte el manual del teléfono móvil.
N Es posible que algunos caracteres especiales se muestren en blanco o dañados.
husband
SMS
Recibido nuevo mensaje
Desea ver los detalles?
Aceptar Cancelar
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 62 10/20/2009 5:03:49 PMSpanish - 63
Uso de la función multimedia
Aparece una ventana de alarma para informar al usuario de que el contenido
multimedia (vídeos, fotos, música) enviado desde el teléfono móvil aparecerá en el
televisor.
El contenido se reproduce automáticamente 3 segundos después de que aparezca la
ventana de alarma.
Si pulsa el botón RETURN o EXIT cuando aparece la ventana de alarma, no se
reproduce el contenido multimedia.
N Para desactivar la transmisión del contenido multimedia desde el teléfono móvil,
configure Multim. como Desact. en Config. de Centro red doméstica.
N Es posible que el contenido no se reproduzca en el televisor, según la resolución
y el formato.
❑ Botones de control de la reproducción multimedia
Botón Función
◄/►
• Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opción.
• Mientras se reproduce un archivo de película : Saltar hacia adelante o hacia atrás en el
archivo de película.
ENTER
• Pulsando el botón ENTERE durante la reproducción se hace una pausa.
• Pulsando el botón ENTERE durante la pausa se reanuda la reproducción.
RETURN Volver al menú anterior.
TOOLS Ejecutar diversas funciones desde los menús de fotos, música y película.
INFO Mostrar información del archivo.
EXIT Detener el modo Media Play y volver al modo TV.
N Los botones ENTERE y ◄/► puede que no funcionen, según el tipo de contenido multimedia.
N Mediante el dispositivo de móvil se puede controlar la reproducción de archivos multimedia. Para obtener más información,
consulte la guía del usuario correspondiente.
Reproducir multimedia desde “Dispos. desconocido 13”
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 63 10/20/2009 5:03:51 PMSpanish - 64
Continued...
Función de teletexto
La mayoría de los canales de televisión proporcionan servicios de información escrita mediante el teletexto. La página de índice de
dicho servicio proporciona información sobre el uso de éste. Asimismo, se pueden seleccionar diversas opciones mediante los botones
del mando a distancia para ajustar el servicio a las necesidades del usuario.
N Para que la información del teletexto se visualice correctamente, la recepción del canal debe ser estable. En caso contrario, puede
perderse información o algunas páginas pueden no visualizarse.
1 : (salir)
Salir de la pantalla de teletexto.
2 6 (índice)
Se utiliza para mostrar la página de índice (contenido) en cualquier momento durante
la visualización de teletexto..
3 5 (mostrar)
Se usa para mostrar el texto oculto (respuestas a juegos, por ejemplo). Púlselo de
nuevo para volver a la presentación normal.
4 4 (tamaño)
Se utiliza para mostrar caracteres de doble tamaño en la parte superior de la
pantalla. Si desea mostrarlos también en la parte inferior, vuelva a pulsar el botón.
Púlselo de nuevo una vez para volver a la presentación normal.
5 / (activar teletexto/mezcla)
Se utiliza para activar el modo de teletexto tras seleccionar el canal que proporciona
el servicio. Pulse dos veces para superponer el teletexto a la pantalla de emisión
actual.
6 8 (almacenar)
Se utiliza para guardar las páginas del teletexto.
7 1 (página secundaria)
Se utiliza para mostrar la página secundaria disponible.
8 2 (avanzar página)
Se utiliza para mostrar la siguiente página de teletexto.
9 3 (retroceder página)
Se utiliza para mostrar la página anterior de teletexto.
0 0 (modo)
Selección del modo de teletexto (LIST/FLOF).
Si lo pulsa en el modo LIST, cambia al modo de guardar lista. En dicho modo se
puede guardar la página de teletexto en la lista mediante el botón 8(almacenar).
! 9 (retener)
Se utiliza para retener la presentación en una página determinada si ésta está enlazada con varias páginas secundarias que se
muestran automáticamente. Para reanudar, vuelva a pulsar el botón.
@ 7 (cancelar)
Se utiliza para visualizar la emisión cuando se busca una página.
# Botones de colores (rojo/verde/amarillo/azul)
Si una emisora utiliza el sistema FASTEXT, los distintos temas cubiertos en una
página de teletexto se codificarán en color y podrá seleccionarlos pulsando los
botones de color.
Pulse el correspondiente al tema deseado. La página muestra otra información con
código de color que se puede seleccionar de la misma forma.
Pulse el botón del color correspondiente para ver la página anterior o la siguiente.
N Puede cambiar páginas de teletexto pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia.
Recomendaciones de uso
1
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 64 10/20/2009 5:03:51 PMSpanish - 65
Las páginas de teletexto se organizan en seis categorías :
Parte Contenido
A Número de página seleccionado.
B Identidad del canal de emisión.
C Número de página actual o indicaciones de la búsqueda.
D Fecha y hora.
E Texto.
F Información de estado.
Información FASTEXT.
N La información de teletexto se suele dividir en varias páginas que aparecen en
secuencia y a las que se puede acceder :
- Introduciendo el número de página.
- Seleccionando un título de la lista.
- Seleccionando un encabezado de color (sistema FASTEXT).
O Pulse el botón TV para salir de la visualización de teletexto.
Especificaciones del equipo de montaje en la pared (VESA)
Instale el montaje mural en una pared sólida, perpendicular al suelo.
Para colocarlo en otros materiales de construcción, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor más cercano.
Si se instala en el techo o en una pared inclinada, puede caerse y causar graves lesiones personales.
Familia de
producto
Pulgadas
Especificaciones
VESA (A * B)
estándar Cantidad
LCD-TV
19” ~22” 100 * 100
M4
4
23"~29" 200 * 100
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6
46"~55" 400 * 400
57"~70" 800 * 400 M8
80" ~ 1400 * 800
PDP-TV
42"~ 50" 400 * 400
M8 4
58"~ 63" 600 * 400
70" ~ 800 * 400
80" ~ 1400 * 800
N Se ofrecen las dimensiones estándar para los equipos de montaje mural, como se muestra en la tabla anterior.
N Al adquirir el equipo de montaje en la pared, también se distribuye un manual de instalación detallado y todas las piezas
necesarias para el montaje.
N No use tornillos con un tamaño superior al estándar, ya que pueden causar daños en el interior del televisor.
N Para montajes murales que no cumplen las especificaciones de tornillos estándar VESA, la longitud de éstos puede variar
dependiendo de las especificaciones.
N No use tornillos que no cumplan las especificaciones de tornillos estándar VESA.
No apriete excesivamente los tornillos, ya que podría dañar el producto o provocar la caída de éste con riesgo de causar lesiones
personales. Samsung no se hace responsable de este tipo de accidentes.
N Samsung no se hace responsable de daños o lesiones personales cuando se usa un montaje mural que no cumple las
especificaciones VESA o si el cliente no sigue las instrucciones de instalación del producto.
N Nuestros modelos de 57” y 63” no son compatibles con las especificaciones VESA.
Por ello, debe usar un equipo de montaje mural exclusivo para este modelo.
N No supere los 15 grados de inclinación cuando monte este televisor.
No instale el equipo de montaje mural mientras el televisor está
encendido. Se podría producir una descarga eléctrica con riesgo de
causar lesiones personales.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 65 10/20/2009 5:03:52 PMSpanish - 66
Preparación para instalar el montaje mural
1. Instale el montaje mural con un par de apriete de 15 kgf cm o menos. Tenga en cuenta que las piezas se pueden dañar si el par de
apriete es diferente del especificado.
2. El juego de accesorios incluye soporte y anilla [②] para la instalación de un televisor SAMSUNG en un montaje mural de otra
empresa. (Case B)
N Se ha de fijar en el orificio [①] cuando instale el montaje mural en la pared.
Cómo montar el soporte base
Advertencia
Sujete firmemente el soporte al televisor antes de moverlo, ya que el soporte puede
caer y causar lesiones graves.
N El televisor lo deben transportar dos o más personas. Nunca deje el televisor en el
suelo ya que la pantalla puede sufrir daños. Mantenga siempre el televisor en su
posición vertical.
Mediante los tornillos para asegurar el soporte y el televisor, fije firmemente el
televisor al soporte.
(Es posible que el exterior del equipo sea diferente del que se muestra en la imagen.)
Si va a instalar el televisor en la pared, fije
la tapa (➊) en la zona de conexión de la
base del soporte con los dos tornillos para
ocultar la ranura.
(PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680)
Caso A. Instalación del montaje mural de SAMSUNG Caso B. Instalación del montaje mural de otra empresa
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 66 10/20/2009 5:03:57 PMSpanish - 67
Tirar del televisor, empujarlo o colgarse de él puede provocar su caída. En especial, procure que los niños no se
cuelguen del televisor ni lo desestabilicen; éste podría caerse sobre ellos y causarles lesiones graves o incluso
la muerte. Siga las precauciones de seguridad del folleto de seguridad incluido con el producto. Para mejorar la
estabilidad instale un dispositivo antivuelco, como se explica a continuación.
❑ Para impedir que el televisor se caiga
1. Apriete firmemente las grapas sobre la pared con los tornillos. Asegúrese de que los tornillos estén bien afirmados en la pared.
N Según el tipo de pared quizás necesite algún material adicional para el anclaje.
N SLas grapas, los tornillos y la cadena no se suministran con el producto; deberá adquirirlos por separado.
2. Quite los tornillos de la parte central posterior del televisor y con ellos monte las grapas en el televisor.
N Quizás con el televisor no vayan incluidos los tornillos.
3. Monte una cadena fuerte entre las grapas del televisor y de la pared de manera que quede bien tensada.
N Instale el televisor cerca de la pared para evitar que caiga hacia atrás.
N Las grapas de la pared han de estar a la misma o a menor altura que las grapas del televisor.
N Cuando desee mover el televisor deberá aflojar la cadena.
4. Compruebe que todas las conexiones estén bien aseguradas. Compruébelas periódicamente para detectar cualquier signo de
fatiga o de fallo. Si tiene dudas sobre la seguridad de la instalación, póngase en contacto con un instalador profesional.
Fijación del televisor a la pared
Seguridad en el espacio de instalación
Mantenga la distancia requerida entre el producto y otros objetos (por ejemplo, paredes) para asegurar la ventilación adecuada.
En caso contrario, se podría producir un incendio por un incremento de la temperatura interna del producto.
Instale el producto a la distancia requerida como se muestra en la ilustración.
N Cuando utilice un soporte o un montaje mural, use sólo las piezas proporcionadas por Samsung Electronics.
- Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría caer con el
riesgo de cuasar lesiones personales.
- Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría incendiar por el
incremento de la temperatura interior debido a una mala ventilación.
N El aspecto puede variar según el producto.
Instalación del producto sobre un soporte Instalación del producto en un montaje mural
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
경고 주의
경고 주의
pared
pared
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 67 10/20/2009 5:03:58 PMSpanish - 68
Identificación de problemas
Si tiene algún problema con el televisor, consulte esta lista en primer lugar. Si ninguno de los consejos funciona, visite
‘www.samsung.com’ y haga clic en Support o llame al centro de atención al cliente que encontrará en la lista de la última página.
N La primera solución posible puede ser actualizar el firmware.
Problema Posible solución
Calidad de la imagen
En primer lugar, ejecute la Prueba de imagen para confirmar que el televisor muestra correctamente la imagen de prueba.
* Vaya a MENU → Asistencia técnica → Autodiagnóstico → Prueba DE imagen
Si la imagen de la prueba se muestra correctamente, la imagen deficiente puede provenir de la fuente o la señal.
La imagen del televisor no se ve tan
bien como en la tienda.
• Si tiene un receptor de cable/decodificador analógico, cambie a un decodificador.
Utilice cables HDMI o de componentes para conseguir la mejor calidad de imagen de
alta definición.
• Suscriptor de cable/satélite : Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (HD) de la oferta
de canales.
• Conexión antena : Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (HD) después de ejecutar
la programación automática.
N Muchos canales de alta definición (HD) mejoran los contenidos SD (definición
estándar).
• Ajuste la resolución de la salida de vídeo del receptor de cable/decodificador en 1080i
o 720p.
La imagen aparece distorsionada :
macrobloques, microbloques, puntos,
pixelización.
• La compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas
especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las
películas de acción.
• Un nivel de señal débil o de mala calidad puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No
es un problema del televisor.
Color de mala calidad o no hay color en
la conexión de componentes.
• Compruebe que los cables de los componentes estén conectados en los terminales
correctos.
Las conexiones incorrectas o sueltas pueden originar problemas en el color o que la
pantalla se quede en blanco.
Color deficiente o brillo.
• Ajuste las opciones de la imagen en el menú del televisor (Modo imagen, Color,
Brillo, Nitidez).
• Ajuste la opción Ahorro energía en el menú Configuración.
• Intente reiniciar la imagen para ver los ajustes predeterminados.
(Vaya a MENU → Imagen → Reinicio de la imagen)
Línea de puntos en el borde de la
pantalla.
• Si el tamaño de la imagen está configurado en Ajuste pantalla, cámbielo a 16:9.
• Cambie la resolución del receptor de cable/decodificador.
La imagen se ve sólo en blanco y negro
en la entrada AV (compuesto).
• Conecte el cable de vídeo (amarillo) al terminal verde de la entrada 1 de
componentes del televisor.
Imágenes congeladas o distorsionadas
al cambiar de canal o retraso en la
aparición de la imagen.
• Si está conectado al receptor de cable, reinicie éste (vuelva a conectar el cable CA y
espere a que el receptor de cable se reinicie. Puede tardar unos 20 minutos.)
• Configure la resolución de salida del receptor de cable en 1080i o 720p.
Calidad del sonido
En primer lugar, ejecute la Prueba de sonido para confirmar que el audio del televisor funciona correctamente.
* Vaya a MENU → Asistencia técnica → Autodiagnóstico → Prueba de sonido
Si el audio es correcto, el problema del sonido puede provenir de la fuente o la señal.
No se percibe ningún sonido, o muy
bajo, con el volumen al máximo.
• Compruebe el volumen del dispositivo (decodificador de cable/satélite, DVD, Blu-ray,
etc.) conectado al televisor.
A continuación, ajuste el volumen del televisor según corresponda.
La imagen es buena pero no hay
sonido.
• Configure la opción Seleccionar altavoz como Altavoz de TV en el menú de sonido.
• Compruebe que los cables de audio de un dispositivo externo estén conectados a los
terminales de entrada de audio correctos del televisor.
• Compruebe la opción de salida de audio del dispositivo conectado.
Ejemplo : quizás deba cambiar la opción de audio del receptor de cable a HDMI
sitiene conectado HDMI al televisor.
• Si se utiliza un cable DVI a HDMI, se necesita un cable de audio independiente.
• Desactive la función SRS si va a ajustar el volumen a un valor superior a 30.
• Retire el enchufe de la toma de auriculares (si está disponible en el televisor)
Se oye ruido en el altavoz.
• Compruebe las conexiones del cable. Compruebe que no haya un cable de vídeo
conectado a una entrada de audio.
• Para la conexión antena/cable, compruebe la potencia de señal. Un nivel de señal
débil puede causar distorsiones en el sonido.
Continúa...
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 68 10/20/2009 5:03:59 PMSpanish - 69
Problema Posible solución
No hay imagen, no hay vídeo
El televisor no se enciende. • Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared
y en el televisor.
• Compruebe que la toma de la pared funciona.
• Pulse el botón de encendido del televisor para asegurarse de que el mando a
distancia funciona adecuadamente.
Si el televisor se enciende, puede ser debido al mando a distancia.
Para solucionar el problema del mando a distancia, consulte "El mando a distancia no
funciona" a continuación.
El televisor se apaga automáticamente.
• Compruebe si la opción Temp. desc. está establecida en Act. en el menú
Configuración.
• Si el televisor está conectado al PC, compruebe la configuración de encendido de
éste.
• Compruebe que el cable de alimentación esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared
y en el televisor.
• Si no hay señal durante unos de 10~15 minutos en la conexión de antena/cable, el
televisor se apagará.
No hay imagen/vídeo.
• Compruebe las conexiones del cable (desconecte y vuelva a conectar todos los
cables del televisor y los dispositivos externos).
• Establezca la salida de vídeo de los dispositivos externos (receptor de cable/
decodificador, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) de modo que coincida con las conexiones de la
entrada de TV. Por ejemplo, salida del dispositivo externo : HDMI , entrada de TV :
HDMI.
• Compruebe que esté encendido el dispositivo conectado.
• Compruebe que esté seleccionada la fuente de TV correcta pulsando el botón
SOURCE del mando a distancia.
• Reinicie el dispositivo conectado volviendo a conectar el cable de alimentación del
dispositivo.
Conexión RF (Cable/Antena)
No se reciben todos los canales.
• Compruebe que el cable de la antena esté firmemente conectado.
• Use la opción Plug & Play para añadir los canales disponibles a la lista de canales.
Vaya a MENU → Configuración → Plug & Play y espere a que se guarden todos los
canales disponibles.
• Compruebe la posición de la antena.
La imagen aparece distorsionada :
macrobloques, microbloques, puntos,
pixelización.
• La compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas
especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las
películas de acción.
• Un nivel de señal débil puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No es un problema
del televisor.
Conexión del PC
Mensaje "Modo no compatible".
• Establezca la resolución y la frecuencia de salida del PC de modo que coincida con la
resolución admitida por el televisor.
El PC siempre aparece en la lista de
fuentes aunque no esté conectado.
• Esto es normal; el PC siempre aparece en la lista de fuentes aunque no haya ningún
PC conectado.
El vídeo es correcto pero no se oye el
audio con una conexión HDMI.
• Compruebe la configuración de la salida de audio del PC.
Conexión de la red
Fallo en la conexión de la red
inalámbrica.
• Para utilizar una red inalámbrica, es necesario usar la mochila USB inalámbrica de
Samsung.
• Asegúrese de que Tipo de red está configurado como Inalámbr..
• El televisor debe estar conectado a un compartidor (enrutador) IP inalámbrico.
Otros
La imagen no se ve a pantalla
completa.
• En cada lado se muestran barras negras en los canales de alta definición cuando se
muestran contenidos SD mejorados (4:3).
• Se muestran barras negras en las partes inferior y superior cuando se ven películas
que tienen diferente formato que el televisor.
• Ajuste la opción del tamaño de imagen del dispositivo externo o del televisor al modo
de pantalla completa.
El mando a distancia no funciona.
• Sustituya las pilas del mando a distancia de acuerdo con la polaridad correcta (+ -).
• Limpie la ventana de transmisión de la parte superior del mando a distancia.
• Apunte con el mando a distancia directamente al televisor desde una distancia de 1,5
-2 metros.
Continúa...
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 69 10/20/2009 5:03:59 PMSpanish - 70
Problema Posible solución
El televisor de plasma emite un
zumbido.
• Los televisores de plasma normalmente emiten un zumbido suave. Esto es normal.
Lo causan las cargas eléctricas que se utilizan para crear las imágenes en la pantalla.
• Si el zumbido es fuerte, quizás se haya configurado el brillo del televisor demasiado
alto. Pruebe a establecer un nivel de brillo menor.
• También se puede originar un zumbido fuerte si la parte posterior del televisor de
plasma está demasiado cerca de la pared o de otra superficie dura. También puede
probar a cambiar el recorrido de los cables de conexión.
• Una instalación inadecuada del montaje mural puede crear un ruido excesivo.
Problema de retención de imagen
(desgaste).
• Esta pantalla está equipada con tecnología de reducción de la "quemadura de
pantalla" para reducir la posibilidad de que se queme. La tecnología Cambio de píxel
permite definir el movimiento de la imagen arriba o abajo (línea vertical) y de lado a
lado (punto horizontal).
No se puede controlar el encendido/
apagado o el volumen del televisor con
el mando a distancia del receptor de
cable/decodificador.
• Programe el mando a distancia del receptor de cable/decodificador para que controle
el televisor.
Consulte el manual del decodificador de cable/satélite para conocer el código del
TV SAMSUNG.
Mensaje "Modo no compatible".
• Compruebe la resolución que admite el televisor y ajuste en consecuencia la
resolución de salida del dispositivo externo. Consulte los valores de resolución en
este manual.
No se puede desactivar el efecto de luz
en la zona biselada frontal (debajo del
logotipo de SAMSUNG).
• Ajuste la opción de efecto de luz en el menú Configuración.
Las opciones son: Des., En espera, In Watching (Viendo TV) y Siempre
• Efecto de luz no está disponible en todos los modelos
Olor a plástico en el televisor. • Este olor es normal y desaparece con el tiempo.
La potencia de señal del televisor no
está disponible en el menú de prueba
de autodiagnóstico.
• Esta función sólo está disponible en los canales digitales con las conexiones de
antena (RF/coaxial).
El televisor está inclinado hacia la
izquierda o hacia la derecha.
• Retire la base del soporte de televisor y vuelva a montarla.
No se puede montar la base del
soporte.
• Compruebe que el televisor esté instalado sobre una superficie plana.
Si no puede quitar los tornillos del televisor, utilice un destornillador magnetizado.
El menú del canal se ve de color gris
(no disponible).
• El menú del canal sólo está disponible cuando está seleccionada la fuente del
televisor.
La configuración se pierde después de
30 minutos o cada vez que se apaga el
televisor.
• Si el televisor está en el modo Demo tienda, reiniciará los ajustes de audio y de
imagen cada 30 minutos.
Debe cambiar el modo Demo tienda al modo Uso doméstico en el procedimiento
Plug & Play.
Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar el modo TV , vaya a MENU →
Configuración → Plug & Play → ENTER
Pérdida intermitente de audio o vídeo.
• Compruebe las conexiones de los cables y vuelva a conectarlos.
• Se puede deber a que los cables son demasiado rígidos o gruesos.
Debe asegurarse de que los cables sean lo suficientemente flexibles para un largo
periodo de uso.
En un montaje mural, es aconsejable utilizar cables con conectores de 90 grados.
Puede ver pequeñas partículas si
mira de cerca el borde biselado de la
pantalla del televisor.
• Esto es una particularidad del diseño del producto y no es un defecto.
El menú PIP no está disponible.
• La función PIP sólo está disponible cuando se ve una fuente HDMI, PC o de
componentes.
‘Señal codificada’ o ‘Sin señal/Señal
débil’ con TARJETA (CI/CI+) en CAM.
• Compruebe que el CAM tenga tarjeta CI(CI+) instalada en la ranura para interfaz
común.
• Esto es normal, ya que el televisor ejecuta la función OTA (en el aire) por sí solo a fin
de actualizar el firmware descargado mientras se veía la televisión.
Problema de imagen/sonido recurrente • Compruebe y cambie la señal/fuente.
N Algunas de las imágenes y funciones mostradas sólo están disponibles en unos modelos determinados.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 70 10/20/2009 5:04:00 PMSpanish - 71
Especificaciones
Las descripciones y las características de este folleto se facilitan con fines informativos solamente y están sujetas a modificación sin
previo aviso.
Nombre del modelo PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680
Tamaño de pantalla
(diagonal)
50 pulgadas 58 pulgadas 63 pulgadas
Resolución de PC (Óptima) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Salida de sonido 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2
Dimensiones (An x Pr x Al)
Cuerpo principal con
el soporte
1240 x 756 x 74 mm
1240 x 817 x 290 mm
1401 x 848 x 74 mm
1401 x 917 x 335 mm
1531 x 932 x 74 mm
1531 x 957 x 390 mm
Peso
cuerpo principal con
el soporte
33 kg
38 kg
39 kg
46 kg
53 kg
61 kg
Consideraciones
medioambientales
Temperatura de funcionamiento
Humedad de funcionamiento
Temperatura de
almacenamiento
Humedad de almacenamiento
50 °F a 104 °F (10 °C a 40 °C)
10% to 80%, sin condensación
-4 °F a 113 °F (-20 °C a 45 °C)
5% a 95%, sin condensación
N Este dispositivo es un aparato digital de la Clase B.
N El diseño y las especificaciones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso.
N Para conocer la fuente de alimentación y el consumo de energía, consulte la etiqueta adherida al producto.
BN68-02333J-Spa.indb 71 10/20/2009 5:04:00 PMPortuguês - 2
Instruções para o utilizador
Retenção de imagem no ecrã
Não visualize uma imagem fixa (como, por exemplo, um videojogo ou se ligar um PC a este plasma) no ecrã de plasma durante
mais de 2 horas, porque pode provocar a retenção de imagem no ecrã. Esta retenção de imagem também é conhecida como
“queimadura de ecrã”. Para evitar a retenção de imagem, reduza o grau do brilho e do contraste no ecrã quando surgir uma
imagem fixa.
Altitude
O plasma só funciona normalmente a uma altitude inferior a 2000 m. Pode não funcionar correctamente num local que esteja a
uma altitude superior a 2000 m, não sendo aconselhável instalá-lo nem utilizá-lo nesse local.
Calor na parte superior do televisor plasma
A parte superior do produto pode ficar quente se o utilizar durante muito tempo, pois o calor dissipa-se a partir do painel, através
das aberturas de ventilação que estão em cima. Esta situação é considerada normal e não indica que exista qualquer avaria ou
defeito no produto. No entanto, deve evitar que as crianças toquem na parte superiordo produto.
Ouvem-se estalidos no produto.
Os estalidos podem ocorrer quando o produto se contrair ou expandir devido a mudanças ambientais no espaço circundante,
como a nível de temperatura ou humidade. Isto é normal e não representa um defeito no aparelho.
Defeitos nas células
O plasma utiliza um painel constituído por 2 360 000 (nível HD) a 6 221 000 (nível FHD) pixels que necessitam de uma tecnologia
sofisticada para serem reproduzidos. No entanto, podem existir alguns pixels claros ou escuros no ecrã. Estes pixels não afectam
o desempenho do produto.
Evite utilizar o televisor com temperaturas inferiores a 5 °C.
Uma imagem fixa reproduzida durante um longo período de tempo pode danificar permanentemente o ecrã de
plasma. A utilização do televisor plasma no formato 4:3N durante um longo período de tempo pode deixar vestígios de margens
na parte esquerda, direita e central do ecrã, devido a diferenças de emissão de luz.
Se reproduzir um DVD ou um jogo, pode causar efeitos semelhantes no ecrã. Os danos causados pelo
efeito acima mencionado não estão cobertos pela garantia.
Imagem residual no ecrã.
A visualização prolongada de imagens fixas de videojogos e de um PC pode produzir imagens residuais parciais. Para evitar este
efeito, reduza o ‘brilho’ e o ‘contraste’ quando visualizar imagens fixas.
Garantia
- A garantia não cobre quaisquer danos causados por retenção de imagem.
- A garantia não cobre o efeito de imagem queimada.
Instalação
Contacte um centro de assistência autorizado quando instalar o televisor num local sujeito a poeiras excessivas, temperaturas
elevadas ou reduzidas, elevados índices de humidade, substâncias químicas, bem como em locais onde o produto seja utilizado
continuamente, como num aeroporto, estação de comboios, etc. Se não o fizer, pode danificá-lo seriamente.
Aviso sobre TV digital
1. As funcionalidades relacionadas com a TV digital (DVB) estão apenas disponíveis em países/regiões onde sinais terrestres
digitais DVB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AVC) são transmitidos ou onde tenha acesso a um serviço de televisão por cabo DVB-C
(MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC) compatível. Verifique com o revendedor local a possibilidade de receber sinais DVB-T ou DVB-C.
2. DVB-T é o consórcio padrão europeu para a transmissão de emissão de televisão digital terrestre enquanto o DVB-C
é o de transmissão de emissão de televisão digital por cabo. Contudo, algumas funcionalidades distintas, como o EPG
[Electric Program Guide (Guia de Programação Electrónico)], VOD [Video on Demand (Vídeo a pedido)], etc. não estão
incluídas nestas especificações. Deste modo, de momento não são suportadas.
3. Embora o televisor esteja de acordo com as normas DVB-T e DVB-C [Agosto de 2008], a compatibilidade com as futuras
transmissões digitais terrestres DVB-T e por cabo digital DVB-C não são garantidas.
4. Alguns fornecedores de TV por cabo podem cobrar uma taxa adicional para este tipo de serviço e podem também requerer
um acordo com os termos e condições do respectivo estabelecimento.
5. Algumas funções da TV digital podem não estar disponíveis em alguns países ou regiões e o DVB-C pode não funcionar
correctamente com todos os fornecedores.
6. Para mais informações, contacte o centro local de apoio ao cliente da SAMSUNG.
Contacte a SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
Se tiver algum comentário ou dúvida relacionados com produtos da Samsung, contacte o centro de assistência ao cliente da
SAMSUNG. (Consulte a contracapa para obter mais informações.)
N As imagens e ilustrações neste manual do utilizador servem apenas de referência e podem ser diferentes do produto real.
De forma a melhorar o desempenho do produto, o design e as características técnicas podem sofrer alterações.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Todos os direitos reservados.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:40:51 PMPortuguês - 3
N O T
Símbolo Carregue Nota Tecla rápida TOOLS
Índice
Ligar e preparar o televisor
■ Verificar as peças recebidas .....................................................4
■ Utilizar a base de suporte..........................................................4
■ Montar os cabos........................................................................4
■ Apresentação do painel de controlo..........................................5
■ Apresentação do painel de ligação ...........................................6
■ Telecomando .............................................................................8
■ Colocar pilhas no telecomando .................................................8
■ Utilizar os botões de retroiluminação do telecomando..............9
■ Ligar e desligar..........................................................................9
■ Definir o televisor para o modo de espera ................................9
■ Visualização no ecrã .................................................................9
■ Ver os menus ..........................................................................10
■ Utilizar o botão TOOLS ...........................................................10
■ Função Plug & Play.................................................................10
Controlo de canais
■ Memorizar canais .................................................................... 11
■ Gerir canais .............................................................................13
Controlo de imagem
■ Alterar as definições de imagem.............................................15
■ Configurar o televisor com o PC .............................................18
■ Monitor do PC .........................................................................19
Controlo de som
■ Alterar as Definições do Som..................................................20
■ Seleccionar o modo de som....................................................21
Descrição das funções
■ Definir a hora...........................................................................22
■ Definir o menu Configurar .......................................................23
■ Ver a imagem numa imagem (PIP) .........................................25
Assistência / Entrada
■ Programa suportado................................................................26
■ Lista de fontes / Editar nome...................................................27
Rede
■ Ligação à rede.........................................................................28
■ Configurar rede .......................................................................30
Media Play
■ Ligar um dispositivo USB ........................................................33
■ Utilizar a função Media Play....................................................34
■ Ordenar a lista de fotografias / músicas / filmes .....................35
■ Menu de opções da lista de fotografias / músicas / filmes ......36
■ Menu de opções de Apresentação de diapositivos /
Reprodução de música / Reprodução de filmes .....................37
■ Visualizar uma fotografia ou uma apresentação
de diapositivos.........................................................................38
■ Reproduzir música ..................................................................39
■ Reproduzir um ficheiro de filme ..............................................40
■ Utilizar o menu Configurar.......................................................41
Media Play-DLNA
■ Definir a Rede DLNA...............................................................42
■ Instalar a Aplicação DLNA.......................................................42
■ Utilizar a Aplicação DLNA........................................................43
■ Utilizar a Função DLNA...........................................................44
Sobre o Anynet+
■ Ligar dispositivos Anynet
+
........................................................45
■ Configurar a função Anynet
+
....................................................46
■ Alternar entre dispositivos Anynet
+
..........................................46
■ Gravação.................................................................................47
■ Ouvir através de um receptor..................................................48
■ Resolução de problemas para a função Anynet
+
....................48
Content Library
■ Activar a Content Library.........................................................49
■ Utilizar a Content Library.........................................................50
Internet@TV
■ Introdução à aplicação Internet@TV.......................................51
■ Editar Snippets na Ancoragem................................................53
■ Utilizar o widget Profile............................................................53
■ Utilizar a Yahoo!® Widget Gallery ...........................................54
■ Utilizar o Yahoo!® Weather Widget.........................................54
■ Utilizar o Yahoo!® News Widget..............................................55
■ Utilizar o Yahoo!® Flickr Widget..............................................55
■ Utilizar o Yahoo!® Finance Widget..........................................56
■ Resolução de problemas da aplicação Internet@TV..............56
■ Website de ajuda.....................................................................57
Internet@TV
■ Introdução à aplicação Internet@TV.......................................58
■ Configurar a aplicação Internet@TV.......................................58
■ Utilizar o serviço Internet@TV.................................................59
■ Resolução de problemas da aplicação Internet@TV..............60
■ Website de ajuda.....................................................................60
Centro rede domést.
■ Centro rede domést.................................................................61
■ Configurar a aplicação Centro rede domést............................62
■ Utilizar a função Mensag.........................................................62
■ Utilizar a função Média............................................................63
Recomendações para a utilização
■ Função de teletexto.................................................................64
■ Especificações do kit de montagem na parede.......................65
■ Preparação antes da instalação do suporte de montagem
na parede ................................................................................66
■ Como montar a base de suporte.............................................66
■ Fixar o televisor à parede........................................................67
■ Manter um espaço de instalação seguro ................................67
■ Resolução de problemas.........................................................68
■ Especificações ........................................................................71
Português
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:40:52 PMPortuguês - 4
Montar os cabos
Prenda os cabos no suporte de cabos para que estes não fiquem à vista na base transparente.
Utilizar a base de suporte
N O plasma deve ser transportado por duas ou mais pessoas. Nunca deite o
plasma no chão, porque pode danificar o ecrã. Mantenha sempre o plasma
na vertical.
N O plasma pode rodar 20 graus para a esquerda e para a direita.
-20° ~ 20°
Verificar as peças recebidas
Manual do utilizador Telecomando /
Pilhas AAA
(2 unidades)
Cabo de alimentação Pano de limpeza Suporte de cabos Anel de suporte
(4 unidades)
(Consulte a página 66)
CD do programa
Parafusos
(4 unidades)
(apenas PS50B650)
(Consulte a página 66)
Protecção inferior
(apenas PS50B650)
(Consulte a página 66)
Protecção inferior / Parafusos
(2 unidades) (apenas
PS58B680 / PS63B680)
(Consulte a página 66)
Núcleo de
ferrite para
auscultadores
Núcleo de
ferrite para cabo
dealimentação
(apenas
PS58B680T6P /
S63B680)
Núcleo de
ferrite paracabo
dealimentação
Cartão de garantia /
Manual de segurança
(Não disponível em
todos os locais)
N Núcleo de ferrite
Os núcleos de ferrite são utilizados para proteger os cabos de
interferências. Quando ligar um cabo, abra o núcleo de ferrite e prenda-o
à volta do cabo junto da ficha como ilustrado na figura.
Ligar e preparar o televisor
(apenas PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680)
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:40:55 PMPortuguês - 5
Apresentação do painel de controlo
N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo.
Botões do painel frontal
Toque em cada um dos
botões para utilizá-los.
(PS58B680 / PS63B680)
(PS50B650)
1 SOURCE
Alterna entre todas as fontes de entrada disponíveis
(TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Componente, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI,
HDMI3, HDMI4, USB).
N No menu no ecrã, utilize este botão tal como utiliza o
botão ENTERE no telecomando.
2 MENU
Carregue neste botão para ver o menu das funções do
televisor no ecrã.
3 + –
Carregue nestes botões para aumentar ou diminuir o volume.
No menu no ecrã, utilize os botões + – tal como utiliza
os botões ◄ ou ► do telecomando.
4 CH
Carregue nestes botões para mudar de canal. No menu no
ecrã, utilize os botões CH tal como utilizaos botões
▲ ou ▼ do telecomando. Pode utilizar o botão CH
para ligar o televisor sem o telecomando.
5 INDICADOR DE CORRENTE
Pisca e desliga-se quando o televisor está ligado;
acende-se quando está no modo de espera.
6 (ALIMENTAÇÃO)
Carregue para ligar e desligar o televisor.
7 SENSOR DO TELECOMANDO
Aponte o telecomando para este ponto do televisor.
8 ALTIFALANTES
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:40:55 PMPortuguês - 6
Apresentação do painel de ligação
N Sempre que ligar um sistema de áudio ou de vídeo ao televisor, certifique-se de que todos os elementos estão desligados.
N Quando ligar um dispositivo externo, faça a correspondência de cores entre o terminal e o respectivo cabo.
N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo.
1 LAN
Ligue um cabo LAN a esta porta para ligar à rede
2 POWER IN
Ligue o cabo de alimentação fornecido.
3 COMPONENT IN
Entradas de áudio (AUDIO L/R) e vídeo (Y / PB / PR) para
componentes.
4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC)
Ligue à tomada de saída de vídeo e de áudio do PC.
5 EXT 1, EXT 2
Entradas ou saídas para dispositivos externos, tais como
videogravadores, consolas de jogos ou leitores de DVD.
N No modo EXT, a saída DTV suporta apenas Vídeo MPEG
SD e Áudio.
N No modo EXT, Modo Jogo não está disponível.
Especificação de entradas/saídas
Connector
Entrada Saída
Video Audio(L/R) RGB Video + Audio(L/R)
EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔
Só está disponível a
saída TV ou DTV.
EXT 2 ✔ ✔
Saída que pode
escolher.
6 AUSCULTADORES
Ligue uns auscultadores se quiser ver um programa de
televisão sem incomodar as pessoas que o rodeiam.
N O uso prolongado dos auscultadores com o volume muito
alto pode provocar lesões auditivas.
7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Ligue a um componente de áudio digital.
8 SERVICE
Conector para assistência técnica.
9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)
Ligue sinais de áudio RCA entre o televisor e uma fonte
externa como, por exemplo, um equipamento de áudio.
0 ANT IN
Conector coaxial de 75 Ω para rede de televisão por cabo/
antena.
! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3
Não é necessária uma ligação áudio adicional numa ligação
de HDMI a HDMI.
- Quando utilizar uma ligação com cabo HDMI/DVI, tem de
utilizar a tomada HDMI IN 2(DVI).
N O que é HDMI?
- Interface multimédia de alta definição permite a
transmissão de dados de vídeo digital de alta definição
e de som digital multicanal.
- O terminal HDMI/DVI suporta uma ligação DVI a um
dispositivo alargado, com o cabo adequado
(não fornecido). HDMI e DVI diferem pois o dispositivo
HDMI é mais pequeno, tem a função de codificação
HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection
- Protecção de banda larga para conteúdos digitais)
instalada e suporta som digital multicanal.
DVI AUDIO IN
Saídas de áudio DVI para dispositivos externos.
Modos suportados para HDMI/DVI e componente
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O
Componente O O O O O O O
Painel posterior do televisor
Rede de televisão
por cabo
ou
ou
2
3 4 5 7 9 !
0
6 8
1
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:40:58 PMPortuguês - 7
1 Ranhura COMMON INTERFACE
Introduza o cartão CI(CI+) (Common Interface - Interface
comum) na ranhura. (Consulte a página 23)
- Se não introduzir o CI(CI+) CARD em determinados
canais, a mensagem Scramble Signal é apresentada no
ecrã.
- As informações de associação, incluindo um número de
telefone, ID do CI(CI+) CARD, ID do anfitrião e outras
informações, são apresentadas cerca de 2 a 3 minutos
depois. Se aparecer uma mensagem de erro, contacte o
seu fornecedor de serviços.
- Assim que concluir a configuração das informações
dos canais, a mensagem Updating Completed é
apresentada, indicando que a lista de canais já está
actualizada.
- Dependendo do modelo, quando o cartão CI for
novamente introduzido, pode aparecer uma mensagem a
solicitar a palavra-passe do Parental Lock.
- Dependendo do modelo, mesmo que o Parental Lock
esteja definido para Allow All pode aparecer uma
mensagem a solicitar a palavra-passe de programas para
adultos (18 anos ou mais).
N Introduza o CI(CI+) CARD na direcção indicada.
N Uma vez que o "CI(CI+) CARD" não é suportado nalguns
países, regiões, estações emissoras, verifique esta
situação junto do seu revendedor autorizado.
N A função CI+ apenas é aplicável ao modelo PS********P.
Se tiver problemas, contacte o fornecedor de serviços.
2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2
Ligue um dispositivo de armazenamento de massa USB
para visualizar ficheiros de fotografias (JPEG) e reproduzir
ficheiros de áudio (MP3) ou ficheiros de filme.
Pode estabelecer uma ligação sem fios à rede da Samsung.
A tomada USB 1 é também utilizada como tomada HDD.
HDD (Unidade de disco rígido) é o dispositivo para o
armazenamento de dados digitalmente codificados.
3 HDMI IN 4
Ligue à tomada HDMI de um dispositivo com saída HDMI.
4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)
Entradas de vídeo e áudio para dispositivos externos, como,
por exemplo, uma câmara de vídeo ou um videogravador.
N A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo.
Painel lateral do televisor
3
4
1
2
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:40:59 PMPortuguês - 8
Telecomando
Pode utilizar o telecomando até, aproximadamente, 7 metros de distância do televisor.
N O desempenho do telecomando pode ser afectado por luzes fortes.
1 Botão POWER
(liga e desliga o televisor).
2 Selecciona o modo TV directamente.
3 Botões numéricos para acesso directo
aos canais.
4 Carregue neste botão para aceder aos
seus canais favoritos.
5 Desligar o som temporariamente.
6 Aumento do volume
Diminuição do volume
7 Selecção de fontes disponíveis.
8 Utilize para ver informações sobre a
transmissão actual.
9 Utilize este botão para seleccionar
rapidamente as funções utilizadas com
frequência.
0 Utilize este botão para seleccionar
os itens do menu no ecrã e alterar os
valores dos menus.
! Esta função permite-lhe visualizar a
aplicação Internet@TV.
@ Utilize estes botões nos modos Lista
Canais, Media Play, e Internet@TV,
etc.
$ Utilize este botão para ver as listas de
canais no ecrã.
% Utilize estes botões na lista de canais,
Media Play e Anynet+.
^ Carregue neste botão para acender
a luz de fundo dos botões do
telecomando. Esta função é útil para
utilizar à noite ou quando a sala está
escura. (Se utilizar o telecomando com
o botão de iluminação ON/OFF ( )
definido para On, reduz o tempo de
carga disponível da pilha.)
& Canal anterior.
* Canal seguinte
Canal anterior
( Mostra o menu principal no ecrã.
) Visualização do guia de programação
electrónic o (EPG - Electronic Program
Guide).
a Volta ao menu anterior.
b Sai do menu no ecrã.
c Esta função permite-lhe visualizar a
aplicação Media Play.
d Esta função permite-lhe ver a
aplicação Content Library.
e Visualização de legendas digitais.
f selecção da descrição áudio.
Funções de teletexto
2 Sair do ecrã do teletexto
(consoante o modelo)
7 Selecção do modo do teletexto
(LIST/FLOF)
8 Mostrar teletexto
9 Tamanho do teletexto
@ Selecção de tópicos Fastext
# Apresentação do teletexto/combinar
informações do teletexto com a
transmissão normal
$ Memorizar teletexto
& Página secundária do teletexto
* P : Página seguinte do teletexto
P : Página anterior do teletexto
( Índice do teletexto
a Pausa do teletexto
b Cancelamento do teletexto
Colocar pilhas no telecomando
1. Levante a tampa na parte de trás do telecomando, como mostra a figura.
2. Coloque duas pilhas de tamanho AAA.
N Faça corresponder os pólos ‘+’ e ‘–’ das pilhas com o diagrama existente no
compartimento.
3. Feche a tampa.
N Se não tencionar utilizar o telecomando durante muito tempo, retire as pilhas e
guarde-as num local fresco e seco.
N Se o telecomando não funcionar, verifique o seguinte
1. O televisor está ligado?
2. Os pólos + e - das pilhas estão invertidos?
3. As pilhas estão gastas?
4. Houve um corte de energia ou o cabo de alimentação está desligado?
5. Há alguma lâmpada fluorescente especial ou luz de néon por perto?
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:41:01 PMPortuguês - 9
Utilizar os botões de retroiluminação do telecomando
Utilize esta função no escuro ou quando não conseguir ver claramente os botões do telecomando.
1. Carregue no botão de iluminação ON/OFF( )
N Na posição ON, a função de retroiluminação dos botões é activada por um instante.
N Ao carregar num botão do telecomando quando este estiver ligado, activa a retroiluminação dos botões por um instante.
Ligar e desligar
O cabo de ligação à corrente está ligado à parte traseira do televisor.
1. Ligue o cabo de alimentação a uma tomada adequada.
N O indicador de modo de espera do televisor acende-se.
2. Carregue no botão POWERP do televisor.
N Também pode carregar no botão POWERP ou no botão TV do telecomando para ligar o televisor.
N É automaticamente seleccionado o último canal a que assistiu.
3. Carregue no botão numérico (0~9) ou no botão de canal para cima / para baixo (< / >) do telecomando ou no botão < CH >
do televisor.
N Quando liga o televisor pela primeira vez, é-lhe pedido que escolha o idioma no qual os menus são apresentados.
4. Para desligar o televisor, carregue novamente no botão POWERP.
Definir o televisor para o modo de espera
Pode definir o seu televisor para o modo de espera, de forma a reduzir o consumo de energia. O modo de espera é útil quando precisa
de interromper a visualização temporariamente (por exemplo, durante a refeição).
1. Carregue no botão POWERP do telecomando.
N O ecrã apaga-se e aparece o indicador luminoso vermelho do modo de espera no televisor.
2. Para voltar a ligar o televisor, basta carregar novamente em POWERP, nos botões numéricos (0~9), no botão TV ou no botão de
canal para cima / para baixo (< / >).
N Não deixe o televisor em modo de espera durante longos períodos de tempo (por exemplo, quando vai de férias).
Aconselha-se que desligue o televisor da corrente eléctrica e da antena.
Visualização no ecrã
A visualização no ecrã identifica o canal actual e o estado de determinadas definições
de áudio-vídeo.
O Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar as informações.
Carregue no botão INFO no telecomando. O canal, o tipo de som e o estado
de determinadas definições de imagem e som são apresentados no televisor.
• ▲, ▼: Pode visualizar outras informações do canal. Se quer passar para o canal
actualmente seleccionado, carregue no botão ENTERE.
• ◄, ►: Pode visualizar as informações do programa pretendido no canal actual.
N Carregue novamente no botão INFO ou espere aproximadamente 10 segundos
e o ecrã desaparece automaticamente.
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information
E Watch
' Information
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:41:01 PMPortuguês - 10
Ver os menus
1. Com o televisor ligado, carregue no botão MENU. O menu principal aparece no ecrã.
No lado esquerdo do menu aparecem ícones : Imagem, Som, Canal, Configurar,
Entrada, Aplicação, Assistência.
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dos ícones. Em seguida, carregue no
botão ENTERE para aceder ao submenu do ícone.
3. Carregue no botão EXIT para sair.
N Os menus no ecrã desaparecem após cerca deum minuto.
Utilizar o botão TOOLS
Pode utilizar o botão TOOLS para seleccionar as funções que utiliza com frequência, de forma rápida e fácil. O menu Ferramentas
muda consoante o modo de entrada externa seleccionado.
1. Carregue no botão TOOLS. O menu Ferramentas aparece.
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um menu e, em seguida, carregue no
botão ENTERE.
3. Carregue nos botões ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE para ver, alterar ou utilizar os itens
seleccionados. Para obter uma descrição mais detalhada de cada função, consulte a
página correspondente.
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), consulte a página 46
• Taman. de imagem, consulte a página 16
• Modo Imagem, consulte a página 15
• Modo Som, consulte a página 20
• Temporizador, consulte a página 22
• SRS TS HD, consulte a página 20
• Poupança energ., consulte a página 24
• Dual l ll, consulte a página 21
• Adicionar aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos favoritos), consulte a página 14
• PIP, consulte a página 25
• Ajuste auto., consulte a página 18
Função Plug & Play
Quando ligar o televisor pela primeira vez, as definições básicas são utilizadas de forma automática e subsequente.
N A protecção de ecrã é activada se não utilizar as teclas do telecomando durante mais de 1 minuto, no modo Plug & Play.
N A protecção de ecrã é activada se não for detectada actividade durante mais de 15 minutos.
N Se seleccionar acidentalmente o país errado para o televisor, os caracteres podem
aparecer de forma incorrecta no ecrã.
1. Carregue no botão POWER do telecomando. O menu Select the OSD Language é
apresentado automaticamente. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Seleccione o idioma
apropriado carregando no botão ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão ENTERE para
confirmar a escolha.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Demo Loja ou Uso Doméstico e,
em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Recomendamos que configure o televisor para o modo Uso Doméstico,
de forma a usufruir da melhor imagem no seu ambiente em casa.
N O modo Demo Loja destina-se apenas a locais de venda a retalho.
N Se definir o televisor acidentalmente para o modo Demo Loja e quiser voltar para o modo Uso Doméstico (padrão) : Carregue
no botão de volume do televisor. Quando aparecer o OSD do volume, carregue sem soltar o botão MENU do televisor durante
5 segundos.
3. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Seleccione o país apropriado carregando no botão ▲ ou ▼. Carregue no botão ENTERE para
confirmar a escolha.
N Depois de seleccionar o país no menu Country alguns modelos permitem avançar para uma opção adicional para definir o pin.
N Quando introduz o número PIN, 0-0-0-0 não está disponível.
4. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para memorizar os canais da ligação seleccionada e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
• Antena : Sinal de antena.
• Cabo : Sinal de cabo.
Plug & Play
Select the OSD Language.
Language :
U Move E Enter
▲
Nederlands
English
Eesti
▼
Ferramentas
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Taman. de imagem : Wide Automático
Modo Imagem : Standard
Modo Som : Personal.
Temporizador : Deslig.
SRS TS HD : Deslig.
Poupança energ. : Deslig.
Dual l ll : Mono
Adicionar aos favoritos
U Mover E Enter e Sair
Modo : Standard
Lumin. Células : 4
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50
Definições avançadas
Imagem
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:41:02 PMPortuguês - 11
5. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a fonte de antena que pretende memorizar. Carregue no botão ENTERE para
seleccionar Iniciar.
• Digital e Analógico : Canais digitais e analógicos.
• Digital : Canais digitais.
• Analógico : Canais analógicos.
N A procura de canais começa e termina automaticamente.
N Para obter uma descrição mais detalhada de como seleccionar o modo Cabo, Consulte a página 11.
6. A mensagem Ajustar o Modo Relógio. é apresentada. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar
Auto. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Se seleccionar Manual, Ajustar data e hora actuais é apresentado. (Para obter uma descrição mais detalhada sobre a opção
Manual, Consulte a página 22)
N Se receber um sinal digital, a hora será definida automaticamente.
7. É apresentada uma breve descrição de Como obter o melhor desempenho do novo televisor HD. Carregue no botão
ENTERE.
N Este menu está disponível em Guia de ligação HD no menu Assistência.
N Pode ir para a página anterior ou seguinte, utilizando os botões ◄ / ►.
8. Aparece a mensagem Enjoy your TV (Divirta-se).
N Se quiser ver televisão, seleccione a opção Ver televisão.
N Se quiser aceder à opção Ver Manual produto, carregue no botão ENTERE.
Se quiser repor esta função...
1. Carregue no botão MENU para ver o menu. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para
seleccionar Configurar e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
2. Carregue novamente no botão ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play.
3. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. O número PIN predefinido de um televisor
novo é ‘0-0-0-0’.
N Se quiser mudar o número PIN (Personal Identification Number), Consulte a página 24.
N A função Plug & Play só está disponível no modo TV.
Memorizar canais
❑ País
Canal digital : Pode alterar o país nos canais digitais.
Canal analógico : Pode alterar o país nos canais analógicos.
N É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN.
Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos.
❑ Memor. auto.
Procura todos os canais com estações emissoras activas
(a disponibilidade depende do seu país) e guarda-os na memória do televisor.
Defina o televisor para memorizar os canais da ligação seleccionada.
• Antena : Sinal de antena.
• Cabo : Sinal de cabo.
Pode seleccionar a fonte de antena a memorizar.
• Digital e Analógico : Canais digitais e analógicos.
• Digital : Canais digitais.
• Analógico : Canais analógicos.
N Se seleccionar Cabo,
• Modo proc. : Mostra o modo de procura. (Rápida)
- ID de rede : Mostra o código de identificação de rede.
- Frequência : Mostra a frequência para o canal.
- Modulação : Mostra os valores de modulação disponíveis.
- Taxa de símbolos : Mostra as taxas de símbolos disponíveis.
• Modo de procura : Mostra o modo de procura. (Completa, Rede)
- Frequência inicial : Mostra os valores iniciais da frequência.
- Frequência final : Mostra os valores de paragem da frequência.
- Modulação : Mostra os valores de modulação disponíveis.
- Taxa de símbolos : Mostra as taxas de símbolos disponíveis.
N Se pretender parar a função Memor. auto., carregue no botão ENTERE.
A mensagem Parar a programação automática? será apresentada.
Seleccione Sim carregando no botão ◄ ou ► e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
Controlo de canais
Canal
País ►
Memor. auto.
Memor. manual
Opção de Procura por Cabo
Guia completo
Mini guia
Guia predef. : Guia completo
Lista canais
Configurar
Plug & Play ►
Idioma do menu : Português
Tempo
Transmissão
Segurança
Rede
Geral
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:41:03 PMPortuguês - 12
❑ Memor. manual
Procura o canal manualmente e guarda-o na memória do televisor.
Canal digital (só canais digitais)
N O Canal digital só está disponível no modo DTV.
• Canal : Defina o número do canal utilizando os botões ▲, ▼ ou os botões numéricos (0~9).
• Frequência : Defina a frequência utilizando os botões numéricos (0~9).
• Largura banda : Defina a largura da banda utilizando os botões ▲ ou ▼.
N Quando terminar, os canais são actualizados na lista de canais.
Canal analógico
Memorização manual para canais analógicos.
• Programa (Número do programa a ser atribuído a um canal) : Define o número do programa utilizando os botões ▲, ▼ ou os
botões numéricos (0~9).
• Sistema cores → Automático / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43 : Define o valor do sistema de cores utilizando o botão ▲ ou ▼.
• Sistema som → BG / DK / I / L : Define o valor do sistema de som utilizando o botão ▲ ou ▼
• Canal (Se souber o número do canal que pretende memorizar) : Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar
C (Canal de antena) ou S (Canal de cabo). Carregue no botão ► e, em seguida, nos botões ▲, ▼ ou nos botões
numéricos (0~9) para seleccionar o número pretendido.
N Se não ouvir som ou se este não estiver em condições, volte a seleccionar o padrão de som pretendido.
• Busca (Se não souber os números dos canais) : Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para iniciar a procura. O sintonizador pesquisa a
amplitude de frequências até aparecer no ecrã o primeiro canal ou o canal seleccionado.
• Memorizar (Quando memoriza o canal e o número do programa associado) : Defina para OK carregando no botão ENTERE.
N Modo de canal
- C (Modo de canal de antena) : Pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada estação emissora neste
modo.
- S (Modo de canal de cabo) : Pode seleccionar um canal, introduzindo o número atribuído a cada canal de cabo neste modo.
❑ Opção de Procura por Cabo
Pode definir opções de procura adicionais, como a frequência e a taxa de símbolos para a procura de rede por cabo.
(Consoante o país)
• Iniciar frequência : Mostra os valores iniciais da frequência.
• Parar frequência : Mostra os valores de paragem da frequência.
• Modulação : Mostra os valores de modulação disponíveis.
• Taxa de símbolos : Mostra as taxas de símbolos disponíveis.
N Se o valor de Iniciar frequência for superior ao valor de Parar frequência, é apresentada uma mensagem de aviso.
❑ Guia completo / Mini guia
As informações do EPG (Electronic Programme Guide - Guia de programação electrónico) são fornecidas pelas estações
emissoras. Pode haver entradas de programas em branco ou desactualizadas em consequência da transmissão de informações
de um determinado canal. O ecrã é actualizado de forma dinâmica à medida que ficam disponíveis novas informações.
• Guia completo : Mostra informações sobre os programas de hora em hora. Aparecem informações sobre duas horas de
programação que pode percorrer para a frente ou para trás no tempo.
• Mini guia : As informações sobre cada programa são apresentadas em cada linha do ecrã do miniguia do canal actual, a partir
do programa actual, de acordo com a ordem do início dos programas.
❑ Guia predef.
Mini guia / Guia completo
Pode escolher ver o miniguia ou o guia completo quando carregar no botão GUIDE
do telecomando.
O Também pode aceder ao menu do guia carregando no botão GUIDE.
Continua...
Canal
Guia completo
Mini guia
Guia predef. : Guia completo►
Lista canais
Modo de canal : Canais adicionados
Sintonia fina
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:41:03 PMPortuguês - 13
Utilizar o Guia completo / Mini guia
▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►,
ENTER
Seleccionar um programa carregando no botão ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE.
VERMELHO Alternar entre o Guia completo ou o Mini guia.
VERDE Guia completo : Deslocar-se para baixo rapidamente. (-24 horas)
AMARELO Guia completo : Avançar rapidamente. (+24 horas)
AzUL Sair do guia.
INFO Botão INFO para obter informações detalhadas.
❑ Modo de canal
Ao carregar no botão P (), A mudança de canal é feita de acordo com a lista de canais seleccionados.
Canais adicionados : A mudança de canal é feita de acordo com a lista de canais memorizados.
Canais favoritos : A mudança de canal é feita de acordo com a lista de canais favoritos.
❑ Sintonia fina (só canais analógicos)
Se a recepção for nítida, não precisa de fazer a sintonização fina do canal, uma vez que é feita automaticamente durante a
procura e memorização. Se, no entanto, o sinal estiver fraco ou distorcido, pode ser necessário fazer uma sintonização fina de
canais manualmente.
N Os canais memorizados onde foi efectuada a sintonização fina estão marcados com um asterisco * no lado direito do número
do canal na banda de canais.
N Se não guardar na memória o canal onde foi efectuada a sintonização fina, os ajustes não são gravados.
N Para repor a sintonização fina, seleccione Reiniciar carregando no botão ▼ e, em seguida, no botão ENTERE.
Gerir canais
Se utilizar este menu, pode adicionar / eliminar ou definir canais favoritos e utilizar o guia
de programas para transmissões digitais.
N Seleccione um canal no ecrã Todos os canais, Canais adicionados, Favoritos ou
Programado carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼ e no botão ENTERE. Pode então ver o
canal seleccionado.
• Todos os canais : Mostra todos os canais disponíveis.
• Canais adicionados : Mostra todos os canais adicionados.
• Favoritos : Mostra todos os canais favoritos.
• Programado : Mostra todos os programas actualmente reservados.
O Carregue no botão CH LIST do telecomando para ver as listas de canais.
N Utilizar os botões coloridos com a lista de canais
- Vermelho (Tipo de canal) : Alterna entre o televisor, rádio, dados / outros e tudo.
- Verde (zoom) : Aumenta ou diminui o número de um canal.
- Amarelo (Seleccionar) : Selecciona várias listas de canais.
- T TOOLS (Ferramentas) : Apresenta o menu Apagar (ou Adicionar), Adicionar
aos favoritos (ou Apagar dos favoritos), Bloquear (ou Desbloq.), Visual.
Temporizador, Edição do nome do canal, Edição do Canal nº, Ordenar, Anular
selecção ou Selec. Todos ou Memor. auto..(Os menus de Tools (Ferramentas)
podem variar consoante a situação.)
N Ícones do ecrã sobre o estado do canal
A Um canal analógico. c Um canal seleccionado carregando
no botão amarelo.
♥ Um canal definido como favorito. ( Um programa que está a ser
transmitido.
\ Um canal bloqueado. ) Um programa reservado.
Canal
Mini guia
Guia predef. : Guia completo
Lista canais
Modo Canal : Adicionar
Sintonia fina
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Todos os canais
Todas Tipo de canal Zoom Selec. Página Ferramentas
Guia completo
DTV Cabo 900 f tn 2:10 Ter 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
Informação não detalhada.
Hoje 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
900 f tn
901 ITV Play
902 Kerrang!
903 Kiss
903 oneword
▼ 903 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
Nenhuma informação.
Nenhuma informação.
Nenhuma informação.
Freshmen O..
Mini guia DTV Cabo 900 f tn
Street Hypnosis
Booze Britain
2:00
2:30
▼ 5:00
Freshmen On Campus
Ver Informação Página Guia completo Sair
Ver Informação Página Mini guia +24 horas Sair
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:41:05 PMPortuguês - 14
❑ Menu Ferramentas da lista de canais (em Todos os canais / Canais adicionados / Favoritos)
N Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu Ferramentas.
N Os itens do menu Tools (Ferramentas) podem variar consoante o estado do canal.
Adicionar / Apagar
Pode eliminar ou adicionar um canal para ver os canais pretendidos.
N Todos os canais eliminados são apresentados no menu Todos os canais.
N Um canal a cinzento indica que este foi eliminado.
N O menu Adicionar só é apresentado para canais eliminados.
N Também pode, do mesmo modo, eliminar um canal do menu Canais adicionados ou
Favoritos.
Adicionar aos favoritos / Apagar dos favoritos
Pode definir canais que vê frequentemente como favoritos.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir
o canal favorito seleccionando Ferramentas → Adicionar aos favoritos
(ou Apagar dos favoritos)
O Para seleccionar os canais configurados como favoritos, carregue no botão FAV.CH
do telecomando.
N O símbolo “♥” é apresentado e o canal é definido como favorito.
N Todos os canais favoritos são apresentados no menu Favoritos.
Bloquear / Desbloq.
Pode bloquear um canal para que este não possa ser seleccionado nem visto. Esta função só está disponível quando
Bloq. crianças está definido para Lig.. (Consulte a página 24)
N É apresentado o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos.
N O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é ‘0-0-0-0’. Pode alterar o PIN, seleccionando a opção Alterar PIN do menu.
N O símbolo “\” é apresentado e o canal é bloqueado.
Visual. Temporizador
Se reservar um programa a que queira assistir, o televisor muda automaticamente para o canal da lista onde tinha reservado o
programa, mesmo que esteja a ver outro canal. Para reservar um programa, defina primeiro a hora actual. (Consulte a página 22)
N Só pode reservar canais memorizados.
N Pode definir directamente o canal, o mês, o dia, o ano, a hora e o minuto, carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
N A reserva de um programa é apresentada no menu Programado.
N Guia de programas digitais e ver uma reserva
Se carregar no botão ► quando seleccionar um canal digital, aparece o guia de programas desse canal. Pode reservar um
programa seguindo os procedimentos descritos acima.
Edição do nome do canal (só canais analógicos)
Pode etiquetar os canais para que o respectivo indicativo apareça sempre que seleccionar o canal.
N Os nomes dos canais digitais são atribuídos automaticamente e não podem ser etiquetados.
Edição do Canal nº (só canais digitais)
Também pode editar o número do canal carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
Ordenar (só canais analógicos)
Esta operação permite alterar os números de programa dos canais memorizados. Esta operação pode ser necessária depois de
utilizar a memorização automática.
Selec. Todos / Anular selecção
Pode anular a selecção ou seleccionar todos os canais da lista de canais.
N Pode adicionar / eliminar, adicionar aos Favoritos / eliminar dos Favoritos ou bloquear / desbloquear vários canais ao mesmo
tempo. Seleccione os canais pretendidos e carregue no botão amarelo para definir todos os canais seleccionados ao mesmo
tempo.
N A marca c aparece à esquerda dos canais seleccionados.
N Só pode escolher Anular selecção se houver um canal seleccionado.
Memor. auto.
N Para obter mais informações sobre a configuração das opções, Consulte a página 11.
N Se o canal estiver bloqueado devido à activação da função Bloq. crianças, aparece a janela para a introdução do PIN.
❑ Menu Ferramentas da lista de canais (em Programado)
Pode ver, modificar ou eliminar uma reserva.
N Carregue no botão TOOLS para utilizar o menu Ferramentas.
• Alterar informações : Seleccione esta opção para alterar uma reserva em
visualização.
• Cancelar planos : Seleccione esta opção para cancelar uma reserva.
• Informação : Seleccione esta opção para ver uma reserva.
(Também pode alterar as informações de reserva.)
• Selec. Todos / Anular selecção : Seleccione ou anule a selecção de todos os
programas reservados.
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
Todos os canais
Apagar
Adicionar aos favoritos
Bloquear
Visual. temp.
Editar nome de canal
Ordenar
▼
Programado
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer
Alterar informações
Cancelar planos
Informação
Selec. Todos
Todas Zoom Selec. Ferramentas Informação
Todas Tipo de canal Zoom Selec. Página Ferramentas
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:41:06 PMPortuguês - 15
Alterar as definições de imagem
❑ Modo
Pode seleccionar o tipo de imagem que melhor corresponde aos seus requisitos de
visualização.
Dinâmico / Standard / Eco / Filme
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir
o modo de imagem seleccionando Ferramentas → Modo de imagem.
❑ Lumin. Células / Contraste / Brilho / Nitidez / Cor / Matiz (Vd/Vm)
O seu televisor dispõe de várias opções de definição que lhe permitem controlar a
qualidade da imagem.
• Lumin. Células : Regula o brilho dos pixels.
• Contraste : Regula o nível de contraste da imagem.
• Brilho : Regula o nível de brilho da imagem.
• Nitidez : Regula a definição das extremidades da imagem.
• Cor : Regula a saturação da cor da imagem.
• Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Regula o matiz da cor da imagem.
N Quando faz alterações às opções Lumin. Células, Contraste, Brilho, Nitidez, Cor ou Matiz (Vd/Vm), o OSD é regulado em
conformidade.
N Os valores de ajuste são gravados para cada modo de imagem.
N Nos modos TV, Ext., AV analógicos do sistema PAL, não pode utilizar a função Matiz.
N No modo PC, só pode fazer alterações às opções Lumin. Células, Contraste e Brilho.
N Cada definição regulada poderá ser memorizada separadamente de acordo com o seu modo de entrada.
N O consumo de energia durante a utilização pode ser reduzido de forma significativa se o nível de brilho da imagem for
reduzido. Assim, diminuirá o custo geral de funcionamento.
❑ Definições avançadas
Pode regular as definições avançadas do ecrã, incluindo a cor e o contraste.
N A opção Definições avançadas está disponível no modo Standard ou Filme.
N No modo PC, só pode fazer alterações às opções Contraste dinâm., Gama e
Equilíb. branco de entre os itens de Definições avançadas.
Tonalidade de preto → Deslig. / Escuro / Mais escuro / Muito escuro
Pode aumentar a profundidade da imagem regulando a densidade da cor preta.
Contraste dinâm. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto
Pode regular o contraste do ecrã de forma a obter o contraste ideal.
Gama
Pode regular a intensidade das cores primárias (vermelho, verde, azul).
Matriz de cores
A matriz de cores é um esquema de cores composto por vermelho, verde e azul. Seleccione a sua matriz de cores favorita para
obter uma cor mais natural.
• Auto. : Define automaticamente o intervalo de cores consoante a fonte de entrada de vídeo.
• Nativo : Aumenta o intervalo de cores relativamente ao da fonte de entrada de vídeo.
• Personal. : Regula o intervalo de cores de acordo com a sua preferência..
N Personalizar a matriz de cores
- Regula o intervalo de cores de acordo com a sua preferência. A opção Cor está disponível quando Matriz de cores está
definido para Personal.
- Cor → Vermelho / Verde / Azul / Amarelo / Ciano / Magenta.
- Vermelho / Verde / Azul : Pode regular os valores RGB da cor seleccionada.
- Reiniciar : Repõe os valores predefinidos da matriz de cores.
Controlo de imagem
Continua...
Modo : Standard ►
Lumin. Células : 4
Contraste : 95
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Cor : 50
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50/Vm50
Definições avançadas
Imagem
Cor : 50
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50/Vm50
Definições avançadas ►
Opções de imagem
Reposição de imagem
Imagem
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:41:06 PMPortuguês - 16
Equilíb. branco
Pode regular a temperatura da cor de forma a obter imagens com cores mais naturais.
• Vrm-Offset / Verde-Offset / Azul-Offset / Vrm-Gain / Verde-Gain / Azul-Gain : Se alterar os valores de ajuste, será efectuada
a actualização do ecrã.
• Reiniciar : Repõe o equilíbrio do branco predefinido.
Tom de pele
Pode regular o tom de pele para mais ou menos vermelho.
N Se alterar os valores de ajuste, será efectuada a actualização do ecrã.
Melhor. extremid. → Deslig. / Lig.
Pode realçar os limites dos objectos na imagem.
xvYCC → Deslig. / Lig.
Definir o modo xvYCC para Lig. aumenta o detalhe e o espaço de cores quando estiver a ver filmes a partir de um dispositivo
externo (por exemplo, um leitor de DVD).
N xvYCC está disponível quando o modo de imagem está definido para Filme e a entrada externa está definida para o modo
HDMI ou para o modo Componente.
N Dependendo do dispositivos externos, esta função pode não ser suportada.
❑ Opções de imagem
Pode personalizar as definições adicionais de imagem de acordo com a sua
preferência.
N No modo PC, só pode fazer alterações às opções Tonalidade, Tamanho e Screen
Burn Protection (Protecção contra queimadura de ecrã) de entre os itens de
Opções de imagem.
Tonalidade → CoresFr / Normal / C. quentes1 / C. quentes2 / C. quentes3
Pode seleccionar a tonalidade que considera mais agradável.
N Os valores regulados são guardados consoante o modo de imagem seleccionado.
N As opções C. quentes1, C. quentes2 ou C. quentes3 só são activadas quando o
modo de imagem está definido para Filme.
Tamanho → Wide Automático / 16:9 / Wide zoom / zoom / 4:3 / Ajustar ao ecrã
Pode seleccionar o tamanho de imagem que melhor corresponde aos seus requisitos de visualização.
• Wide Automático : Ajusta a imagem para o formato Wide Automático.
• 16:9 : Define a imagem para o modo panorâmico 16:9.
• Wide zoom : Aumenta ainda mais o tamanho da imagem do que 4:3.
• zoom : Aumenta o tamanho da imagem na vertical.
• 4:3 : Define a imagem para o modo normal 4:3.
• Ajustar ao ecrã : Mostra o sinal Full HD nativo que não pode ser visto utilizando um televisor normal.
N As opções de tamanho da imagem podem variar consoante a fonte de entrada.
N Os itens disponíveis podem variar consoante o modo seleccionado.
N No modo PC, só os modos 16:9 e 4:3 podem ser regulados.
N Se o modo Duplo ( , ) estiver definido para PIP, não é possível definir o Tamanho da imagem.
N As definições podem ser reguladas e guardadas para cada dispositivo externo que ligar a uma entrada do televisor.
N Pode ocorrer uma retenção temporária da imagem quando vir uma imagem fixa por um período superior a duas horas.
N Wide zoom : Carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no
botão ▲ ou ▼ para deslocar o ecrã para cima ou para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N zoom : Carregue no botão ► para seleccionar Posição e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão
▲ ou ▼ para deslocar a imagem para cima e para baixo. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão
► para seleccionar Tamanho e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para ampliar ou
reduzir o tamanho da imagem na vertical. Em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Depois de seleccionar Ajustar ao ecrã no modo HDMI (1080i / 1080p) ou Componente (1080i / 1080p) : Seleccione
Posição carregando no botão ◄ ou ►. Utilize o botão ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► para deslocar a imagem.
N Reini. : Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Reini. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
Pode inicializar a definição.
N Se utilizar a função Ajustar ao ecrã com uma entrada HDMI 720p, é cortada uma linha na parte superior, inferior, esquerda
e direita, tal como na função de procura.
Modo de ecrã → 16:9 / Wide zoom / zoom / 4:3
Se definir o tamanho da imagem para Wide Automático num televisor panorâmico 16:9, pode determinar o tamanho que pretende
ver: a imagem 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) ou nenhuma. Cada país europeu requer um tamanho de imagem diferente, pelo
que esta função permite aos utilizadores seleccionar o tamanho.
N Esta função está disponível no modo Wide Automático.
N Esta função não está disponível nos modos PC, Componente nem HDMI.
Continua...
Matiz (Vd/Vm) : Vd50 / Vm50
Definições avançadas
Opções de imagem ►
Reposição de imagem
Imagem
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:41:07 PMPortuguês - 17
NR Digital → Deslig. / Baixa / Média / Alta / Auto.
Se o sinal de transmissão recebido pelo seu televisor for fraco, pode activar a função Redução do ruído digital para ajudar a
diminuir os efeitos da electricidade estática ou de fantasma que possam aparecer no ecrã.
N Se o sinal for fraco, seleccione uma das outras opções até que apareça no ecrã a melhor imagem.
Nv.pr.HDMI → Normal / Baixa
Pode seleccionar o nível de preto directamente no ecrã para regular a intensidade do ecrã.
N Esta função só está activa quando ligar a entrada externa a HDMI (sinais RGB).
Demo 1080 Full HD Motion → Deslig. / Lig.
A nova geração de ecrãs de plasma da Samsung’s proporciona uma espantosa nitidez de movimentos em Full HD durante a
reprodução de desportos, filmes e jogos com movimentos rápidos.
N Esta função não está disponível nos modos PC, Jogos nem Media Play.
Modo Filme
Pode optimizar o modo da imagem especialmente para ver filmes.
• Deslig. : Desactiva a função Modo Filme.
• Auto.1 : Regula automaticamente a imagem para obter a melhor qualidade quando vê um filme.
• Auto.2 : Optimiza automaticamente o videotexto quando vê um filme.
• Cinema Smooth : Proporciona a derradeira experiência cinematográfica.
N O Modo Filme é suportado pelas opções TV, Vídeo, Componente(480i / 1080i) e HDMI(1080i).
Demo 100Hz Real → Deslig. / Lig.
É possível distinguir claramente entre 100 Hz Reais e 50 Hz, especialmente quando vê cenas em movimento rápido. Portanto,
quando vir cenas em movimento lento, não é possível distinguir entre 100Hz Reais e 50Hz.A demonstração 100 Hz funciona
apenas com sinal de 50 Hz. O modo de demonstração 100 Hz Reais é fornecido para demonstrações em lojas e fotografias
especiais.
Modo Apenas azul → Deslig. / Lig.
Esta função destina-se a especialistas de medição de dispositivos audiovisuais. Esta função apresenta apenas o sinal azul,
removendo os sinais vermelho e verde do sinal de vídeo para fornecer um efeito de filtro azul que é utilizado para regular a cor e a
matiz do equipamento de vídeo, como leitores de DVD, sistemas home theater, etc.
N O Modo Apenas azul está disponível quando o modo de imagem está definido para Filme ou Standard.
Protecção contra queimadura de ecrã
Este aparelho está equipado com tecnologia de prevenção contra queimadura de ecrã, o que reduz a possibilidade de ocorrência
deste efeito. Esta tecnologia permite regular o movimento da imagem para cima/baixo (Vertical) e lateralmente (Horizontal).
A definição Tempo permite programar, em minutos, o tempo entre movimentos da imagem.
• Mudar pixels : Esta função permite mover, de minuto a minuto, pixels no plasma, na horizontal ou na vertical, para minimizar a
imagem residual no ecrã.
N Condição óptima para a mudança de pixels
Item TV/Ext./AV/Componente/HDMI/PC
Horizontal 0~2 2
Vertical 0~4 4
Tempo (minutos) 1~4 min 2 min
N O valor de Mudar pixels pode ser diferente consoante o tamanho do monitor (polegadas) e do modo.
N Esta função não está disponível no modo Ajustar ao ecrã.
• Deslocamento : Esta função permite remover as imagens residuais do ecrã, movendo todos os pixels no plasma de acordo
com um padrão. Utilize esta função quando ainda houver imagens residuais ou símbolos no ecrã, especialmente depois de
uma imagem fixa ter sido exibida no ecrã durante muito tempo.
• Cinzento lateral : Quando vir televisão no formato 4:3, se regular o equilíbrio do branco nas extremidades esquerda e direita,
pode evitar danos no ecrã.
- Claro : Se definir o tamanho do ecrã para 4:3, aclara os lados esquerdo e direito.
- Escuro : Se definir o tamanho do ecrã para 4:3, escurece os lados esquerdo e direito.
Continua...
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:41:07 PMPortuguês - 18
Configurar o televisor com o PC
N Predefinição : Carregue no botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo PC.
❑ Ajuste auto.
A opção Ajuste auto. permite que o monitor do PC se ajuste automaticamente ao
sinal de vídeo recebido de um PC. Os valores Fino, Grosso e Posição são regulados
automaticamente.
N Esta função não está disponível no modo DVI-HDMI.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir
a opção Ajuste auto. seleccionando Ferramentas → Ajuste auto..
❑ Ecrã
O objectivo do ajuste da qualidade da imagem é o de remover ou reduzir o ruído da imagem. Se não conseguir retirar o ruído
fazendo apenas a sintonização fina, regule a frequência o melhor possível (Grosso) e volte a fazer a sintonização fina. Depois de
reduzido o ruído, volte a regular a imagem de forma a ficar alinhada no centro do ecrã.
Grosso
Regula a frequência quando surge ruído vertical no ecrã.
Fino
Regula o ecrã de forma a aumentar a nitidez.
Posição do PC
Regule a posição do ecrã do PC se esta não se ajustar por completo ao televisor. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para regular a
posição vertical. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para regular a posição horizontal.
Repor imagem
Pode substituir todas as definições de imagem pelos valores predefinidos.
❑ Reposição de imagem → Repor modo de imagem / Cancelar
Repõe os valores predefinidos.
N Seleccione o modo de imagem que pretende repor. A reposição é feita para
cada modo de imagem.
Brilho : 45
Nitidez : 50
Ajuste auto. ►
Ecrã
Definições avançadas
Opções de imagem
Reposição de imagem
Imagem Picture
Definições avançadas
Opções de imagem
Reposição de imagem ►
Imagem
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:41:07 PMPortuguês - 19
Monitor do PC
❑ Configurar o software do PC (com base no Windows XP)
Seguem-se as definições de visualização do Windows num computador normal.
Os ecrãs que aparecem no monitor do seu PC são provavelmente diferentes,
dependendo da sua versão do Windows e da placa de vídeo. Contudo, mesmo que
os ecrãs pareçam diferentes, são aplicadas, em quase todos os casos, as mesmas
informações de configuração básicas. (Se tal não acontecer, contacte o fabricante
do computador ou um revendedor Samsung.)
1. Em primeiro lugar, clique em ‘Painel de controlo’ no menu Iniciar do Windows.
2. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em ‘Aspecto e temas’
e surgirá uma caixa de diálogo.
3. Quando a janela do painel de controlo for apresentada, clique em ‘Visualização’ e
surgirá uma caixa de diálogo.
4. Navegue até ao separador ‘Definições’ na caixa de diálogo.
A definição de tamanho (resolução)
óptima : 1920 X 1080 pixels.
Se existir uma opção de frequência vertical na caixa de diálogo das definições da
visualização, o valor correcto é ‘60’ ou ‘60 Hz’. Senão for o caso, basta clicar em ‘OK’
e sair da caixa de diálogo.
❑ Modos de visualização
Tanto a posição como o tamanho do ecrã dependem do tipo de monitor do PC e da sua resolução.
Recomendam-se as resoluções da tabela.
N Quando utilizar uma ligação com cabo HDMI/DVI, tem de utilizar a tomada HDMI IN 2(DVI).
N O modo entrelaçado não é suportado.
N O televisor pode não funcionar correctamente se for seleccionado um formato de vídeo não padrão.
N São suportados os modos Separate (Separado) e Composite (Composto). SOG não é suportado.
N Cabos VGA muito longos ou de baixa qualidade podem causar ruídos na imagem em modos de resolução altos (1920 x 1080).
Entrada D-Sub e HDMI/DVI
Modo Resolução Frequência horizontal (kHz) Frequência vertical (Hz)
Frequência do relógio
em pixels(MHz)
Polaridade de
sincronização (H / V)
IBM
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / -
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / +
MAC
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / -
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / -
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / +
VESA CVT
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / +
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / +
1280 x 720
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / +
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / +
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / +
VESA DMT
640 x 480
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / -
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / -
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / -
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / +
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / +
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / +
1024 x 768
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / -
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / -
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / +
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 800
49.702 59.810 83.500 - / +
62.795 74.934 106.500 - / +
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 1024
63.981 60.020 108.000 + / +
79.976 75.025 135.000 + / +
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / +
1440 x 900
55.935 59.887 106.500 - / +
70.635 74.984 136.750 - / +
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / +
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / +
VESA GTF
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / +
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / -
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:41:08 PMPortuguês - 20
Alterar as Definições do Som
❑ Modo
Pode seleccionar o tipo de efeitos sonoros especiais a utilizar quando estiver a ver uma
determinada emissão.
Standard / Música / Filme / Voz nítida / Personal.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode
configurar o modo de som seleccionando Ferramentas → Modo de som.
❑ Equalizador
Pode regular as definições de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais.
• Modo : Pode seleccionar o modo de som de acordo com as suas preferências pessoais.
• Balanço : Controla o equilíbrio entre os altifalantes esquerdo e direito.
• 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Ajuste de banda larga) : Regula o nível de diferentes frequências de banda larga.
• Reiniciar : Repõe os valores predefinidos do equalizador.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Deslig. / Lig.
SRS TruSurround HD é a tecnologia combinada entre TruSurround e FOCUS, TruBass. A função SRS TruSurround HD
permite-lhe desfrutar de um efeito de som Surround 5.1 nos dois altifalantes do televisor. Para além de oferecer graves
intensos e ricos, esta função também melhora a resolução das frequências altas.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir
a opção SRS TruSurround HD seleccionando Ferramentas → SRS TS HD.
TruSurround HD, SRS e o símbolo são marcas comerciais da SRS Labs, Inc. A tecnologia
TruSurround HD está incorporada na licença da SRS Labs, Inc.
N Se o som não estiver normal durante a reprodução de música no televisor, regule o equalizador e SRS TruSurround HD
(Deslig./Lig.).
❑ Idioma de áudio (só canais digitais)
Pode alterar o valor predefinido dos idiomas de áudio. Apresenta a informação de idioma da transmissão a ser recebida.
N Só pode seleccionar de entre os idiomas disponibilizados pela transmissão.
❑ Formato áudio → MPEG / Dolby Digital (só canais digitais)
Se o som for emitido tanto pelo altifalante principal como pelo receptor de áudio, pode ouvir-se um eco devido à diferença na
velocidade de descodificação entre o altifalante principal e o receptor de áudio. Neste caso, utilize a função Altifalante do tv.
N Só pode seleccionar de entre os idiomas disponibilizados pela transmissão.
Fabricado sob a licença da Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby e o símbolo de duplo D são marcas comerciais da Dolby Laboratories.
❑ Descrição áudio (só canais digitais)
Esta é uma função auxiliar de áudio que fornece uma faixa de áudio adicional para pessoas com deficiências visuais. Esta função
gere o fluxo de áudio para AD (Descrição de áudio), quando é enviado pelo transmissor juntamente com o áudio principal.
Os utilizadores podem activar ou desactivar a descrição de áudio e regular o volume.
O Para seleccionar estas opções basta carregar no botão AD do telecomando.
Descrição áudio → Deslig. / Lig.
Activa ou desactiva a função de descrição de áudio.
Volume
Regula o volume da descrição de áudio.
N A função Volume é activada se Descrição áudio estiver definido para Lig..
Controlo de som
Modo : Personal. ►
Equalizador
SRS TruSurround HD : Off
Idioma de áudio : ----
Formato áudio : ----
Descrição áudio
Volume auto. : Deslig.
Seleccionar Altifalante : Altifalante do tv.
som
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:41:09 PMPortuguês - 21
❑ Volume auto. → Deslig. / Lig.
Cada estação emissora tem condições de sinal específicas e, por isso, não é fácil regular o volume sempre que muda de canal.
Esta função permite regular automaticamente o volume do canal pretendido, baixando o som quando o sinal de modulação está
alto, ou aumentando o som quando o sinal de modulação está baixo.
❑ Seleccionar Altifalante → Altifalante Exter. / Altifalante do tv.
Se pretender ouvir o som através de altifalantes separados, cancele o amplificador interno.
N Os botões – +, M MUTE não funcionam se Seleccionar Altifalante estiver definido para Altifalante Exter..
N Se seleccionar Altifalante Exter. no menu Seleccionar Altifalante, as definições de som são limitadas.
Altifalantes internos do televisor Audio Out (Optical, L / R) para o sistema de som
TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI TV / Ext. / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI
Altifalante do televisor Saída do altifalante Saída de som
Altifalante externo Silêncio Saída de som
Sem sinal de vídeo Silêncio Silêncio
❑ Selecção do Som
Se a função PIP estiver activada, pode ouvir o som da imagem secundária (PIP).
• Principal : Ouvir o som da imagem principal.
• Sub : Ouvir o som da imagem secundária.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas.
Também pode definir o som da imagem secundária seleccionando
Ferramentas → PIP → Selecção do Som.
N Pode seleccionar esta opção se PIP estiver definido para Lig..
❑ Reposição de som
Repor tudo / Repor modo de som / Cancelar : Pode repor as predefinições de Som.
Seleccionar o modo de som
Quando define para Dual l ll, o modo de som actual é apresentado no ecrã.
Tipo de transmissão Indicação no ecrã
Estéreo
NICAM
Transmissão normal
(Som standard)
Mono (Utilização normal)
Normal + Mono NICAM NICAM
Mono
(Normal)
Estéreo NICAM
NICAM
Estéreo
Mono
(Normal)
NICAM Dual-I/II
NICAM
Dual-1
NICAM
Dual-2
Mono
(Normal)
Estéreo
A2
Transmissão normal (Som standard) Mono (Normal use)
Bilingue ou DUAL-I/II Dual I Dual II
Estéreo Estéreo
Mono
(Mono forçado)
N Se o sinal de estéreo for fraco e ocorrer uma mudança automática, mude para o modo mono.
N Esta função só está activa no sinal de som estéreo. Está desactivada no sinal de som mono.
N Esta função só está disponível no modo TV.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas. É também
possível seleccionar o modo de som a partir de Ferramentas → Dual l ll
Seleccionar Altifalante : Altifalante do tv.
Seleção do Som : Principal
Reposição de som ►
som
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:41:10 PMPortuguês - 22
Descrição das funções
Definir a hora
❑ Relógio
Tem de acertar o relógio para poder utilizar todas as funções de temporizador do
televisor.
N A hora actual é apresentada sempre que carregar no botão INFO.
N Se desligar o cabo de alimentação, terá de acertar novamente o relógio.
Modo Relógio
Pode definir a hora actual de forma manual ou automática.
• Auto. : Defina automaticamente a hora actual, utilizando a hora da transmissão
digital.
• Manual : Defina manualmente a hora actual para uma hora específica.
Ajuste o Relógio
Pode definir manualmente a hora actual.
N Configure este item quando definir Modo Relógio para Manual.
N Pode acertar directamente o Dia, o Mês, o Ano, a Hora, o Minuto carregando nos
botões numéricos do telecomando.
❑ Temporizador → Deslig. / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min /
180 min
O temporizador desliga automaticamente o televisor após um período de tempo
predefinido (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 e 180 minutos).
N O televisor passa automaticamente para o modo de espera quando o temporizador atinge o 0.
N Para cancelar a função Temporizador, seleccione Deslig..
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir
o temporizador seleccionando Ferramentas → Temporizador.
❑ Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3
Pode definir o televisor para ligar ou desligar à hora pretendida.
• Ligar à hora definida : Define a hora para ligar o televisor.
• Desligar à hora definida : Define a hora para desligar o televisor.
• Volume : Selecciona o nível de volume.
• Fonte : Selecciona o dispositivo TV, USB.
N Se seleccionar o TV, pode definir as opções Antena e Canal.
- Antena : Selecciona Antena ou Cabo.
- Canal : Selecciona o canal pretendido.
N Ao seleccionar USB, pode definir os Conteúdos.
- Conteúdos : Selecciona os conteúdos pretendidos no USB.
N Se não existirem ficheiros de música no USB ou se a pasta que contém um ficheiro de música não estiver seleccionada,
a função Temporizador não funciona correctamente.
• Repetir : Seleccione, Uma vez, Diariamente, Seg~Sex, Seg~Sáb, Sáb~Dom ou Manual.
N Quando Manual está seleccionado, carregue no botão ► para seleccionar o dia da semana pretendido. Carregue no botão
ENTERE sobre o dia pretendido e aparece a marca c.
N A pasta do dispositivo USB suporta 64 caracteres (inglês).
N Deve acertar o relógio primeiro.
N Pode acertar as horas, os minutos e definir o canal carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
N Desligar automático
Quando definir o temporizador para Lig., o televisoracabará por se desligar se não carregar em nenhum comando durante
3 horasdepois de o temporizador ter ligado o televisor. Esta função só está disponível nomodo Lig. do temporizador e permite
evitar sobreaquecimentos, que podem ocorrer se o televisor permanecer ligado durante muito tempo.
Tempo
Relógio : -- : -- ►
Temporizador : Deslig.
Temporizador 1 : Desactivado
Temporizador 2 : Desactivado
Temporizador 3 : Desactivado
U Mover E Enter R Voltar
Configurar
Plug & Play
Idioma do menu : Português
Tempo ►
Transmissão
Segurança
Rede
Geral
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:41:10 PMPortuguês - 23
Definir o menu Configurar
❑ Idioma do menu
Pode definir o idioma do menu.
❑ Transmissão
Legenda
Pode activar e desactivar as legendas. Utilize este menu para definir o modo Legenda.
Normal, escrito por baixo do menu, refere-se às legendas normais, e Surdos inclui
legendas para pessoas com deficiências auditivas.
• Legenda → Deslig. / Lig. : Desactiva ou activa as legendas.
• Modo → Normal / Surdos : Define o modo Legenda.
• Idioma das legendas : Define o idioma da legenda.
O Se o programa que estiver a ver não suportar a função Surdos, a opção Normal é
automaticamente activada, mesmo que o modo Surdos esteja seleccionado.
O O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja
disponível na transmissão.
O Para seleccionar estas opções basta carregar no botão SUBT. do telecomando.
Texto digital → Desactivar / Activar
Se o programa for transmitido com texto digital,esta função é activada.
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Uma norma internacional de sistemas de codificação de dados utilizados em multimédia e hipermédia. Funciona a um nível
mais elevado do que o sistema MPEG, incluindo hipermédia de ligação de dados, como imagens fixas, serviço de caracteres,
animação, gráficos e ficheiros de vídeo, bem como dados multimédia. MHEG é uma tecnologia de interacção com o utilizador
em tempo de execução e está a ser aplicada a diversos campos, incluindo VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV),
EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-educação, teleconferência, bibliotecas digitais e jogos em rede.
Idioma do teletexto
Pode definir o idioma do teletexto seleccionando o tipo de idioma.
N O inglês é a predefinição para os casos em que o idioma seleccionado não esteja disponível na transmissão.
Preferência
• Idioma principal / Idioma secundário / Idioma princ. Legendas / Idioma secund. Legendas / Idioma principal do
teletexto / Idioma secund. Teletexto
Através desta função, os utilizadores podem seleccionar um dos idiomas. O idioma seleccionado aqui é o predefinido para
quando o utilizador selecciona um canal. Se alterar a definição do idioma, as opções Idioma das legendas, o Idioma de áudio e
o Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma mudam automaticamente para o idioma seleccionado.
As opções Idioma das legendas, Idioma de áudio e Idioma do teletexto do menu Idioma apresentam uma lista de idiomas
suportados pelo canal actual e a selecção é realçada. Se alterar esta definição de idioma, a nova selecção só é válida para
o canal actual. A definição alterada não muda a definição das opções Idioma princ. Legendas, Idioma principal nem Idioma
principal do teletexto no menu Preferência.
Interface comum
• Colocar o CI(CI+) CARD
1. Adquira o módulo CAM de CI(CI+) no revendedor mais próximo ou por telefone.
2. Introduza o CI(CI+) CARD no CAM na direcção da seta até ficar encaixado.
3. Introduza o CAM, com o CI(CI+) CARD colocado, na ranhura da interface comum.
N Introduza completamente o CAM na direcção da seta, de modo a ficar paralelo à
ranhura.
4. Verifique se consegue ver uma imagem num canal de sinal codificado.
• Menu CI(CI+)
Permite ao utilizador seleccionar a partir do menu fornecido pelo CAM. Seleccione o
Menu CI(CI+) com base na placa PC.
• Informação sobre aplicações
Contém informações sobre o CAM introduzido na ranhura CI(CI+) e apresenta-as
no ecrã. Os dados apresentados neste menu referem-se ao CI(CI+) CARD.
Pode instalar o CAM a qualquer altura, independentemente de o televisor estar
ligado ou desligado.
N Uma vez que o "CI(CI+) CARD" não é suportado nalguns países, regiões, estações emissoras, verifique esta situação junto
do seu revendedor autorizado.
Continua...
Configurar
Plug & Play
Idioma do menu : Português ►
Tempo
Transmissão
Segurança
Rede
Geral
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:41:11 PMPortuguês - 24
❑ Segurança
N Alguns modelos requerem que o número PIN definido seja seleccionado quando estiver a funcionar o Plug & Play.
Bloq. crianças → Deslig. / Lig.
Esta função impede que utilizadores não autorizados, como crianças, vejam programas não apropriados, cortando a imagem e o
áudio.
N Antes de a janela de configuração ser apresentada, surge o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de
4 dígitos.
N O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é ‘0-0-0-0’. Pode alterar o PIN seleccionando a opção Alterar PIN do menu.
N Pode bloquear canais da lista de canais. (Consulte a página 14)
N A opção Bloq. crianças só está disponível no modo TV.
Bloqueio para crianças
Esta função permite evitar que utilizadores não autorizados como, por exemplo, crianças, assistam a programas inadequados,
através de um código PIN (Número de identificação pessoal) de 4 dígitos definido pelo utilizador.
N A Classificação do bloqueio muda consoante o país.
N Antes de a janela de configuração ser apresentada, surge o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN. Introduza o número PIN de
4 dígitos.
N O número PIN predefinido de um televisor novo é ‘0-0-0-0’. Pode alterar o PIN seleccionando a opção Alterar PIN do menu.
N Quando as classificações de bloqueio estão definidas, o símbolo “\” é apresentado.
N Perm. Tudo / Bloq. Tudo : Carregue nesta opção para desbloquear ou bloquear todas as classificações do televisor.
Alterar PIN
Pode alterar o seu número de identificação pessoal, necessário para configurar o televisor.
N Antes de a janela de configuração ser apresentada, surge o ecrã para a introdução do número PIN.
Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. (O número PIN predefinido : ‘0-0-0-0’)
N Caso se esqueça do código PIN, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela seguinte sequência,
para repor o PIN para ‘0-0-0-0’: POWER (Desligar), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (Ligar).
❑ Geral
Modo Jogo → Deslig. / Lig.
Quando ligar uma consola de jogos, como a PlayStation
TM
ou Xbox
TM
, pode desfrutar de uma experiência de jogo mais realista
seleccionando o menu Jogos.
• Se o Modo Jogo estiver definido para Lig.
- O modo Imagem muda automaticamente para Standard e não pode ser alterado.
- O modo Som muda automaticamente para Personal. e não pode ser alterado. Regule o som utilizando o equalizador.
- A opção Reiniciar do menu Som é activada. A função Reiniciar repõe os valores predefinidos do Equalizador.
N O Modo Jogo não está disponível no modo TV normal ou está definido para Deslig..
N Se, depois de ligar o dispositivo externo ao televisor, a imagem não estiver em condições, verifique se Modo Jogo está
definido para Lig..
N Se visualizar o menu TV durante o Modo Jogo, o ecrã treme ligeiramente.
N A marca aparece no ecrã, o que significa que o Modo Jogo está activado na fonte seleccionada.
N Esta função só suporta a função Jogos.
N O Modo Jogo não está disponível no modo PC.
BD Wise → Deslig. / Lig.
A função Wise permite-lhe definir automaticamente a qualidade ideal para todos os dispositivos Samsung que suportam BD Wise.
N Esta função só está activa quando ligar um dispositivo externo ao televisor através de um cabo HDMI.
N Se a função BD Wise estiver definida para Lig., o modo imagem é automaticamente modificado de acordo com as condições.
Poupança energ. → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto / Imagem Desligada
Esta função regula o brilho do televisor para reduzir o consumo de energia. Quando estiver a ver televisão à noite, defina o modo
Poupança energ., de forma a reduzir a fadiga ocular, bem como o consumo de energia.
Se seleccionar Imagem Desligada, o ecrã desliga-se e apenas conseguirá ouvir o som. Carregue em qualquer botão para sair da
função Imagem Desligada.
N No menu Ferramentas, a função Imagem Desligada não é suportada.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:41:11 PMPortuguês - 25
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas. Também pode definir a
opção Poupança energ. seleccionando Ferramentas → Poupança energ..
Transparência de menu
Pode definir a transparência do menu no ecrã.
• Brilhante : Define o menu no ecrã para a visualização normal.
• Escuro : Muda o menu no ecrã para uma visualização opaca.
Melodia → Deslig. / Baixo / Médio / Alto
Pode regular a melodia que acompanha o ligar / desligar do televisor.
N A melodia não é reproduzida
- Quando o televisor não emite som porque alguém carregou no botão M MUTE.
- Quando o televisor não emite som porque alguém carregou no botão – (Volume).
- Quando o televisor é desligado pela função Temporizador.
Efeito de luz (apenas PS58B680/PS63B680)
Dependendo da situação, pode acender/apagar o LED azul existente na parte da frente do televisor. Utilize esta opção para poupar
energia ou se o LED fizer reflexo.
• Deslig. : O LED azul está sempre apagado.
• Modo Standby lig : O LED azul acende-se no modo de espera e apaga-se quando liga o televisor.
• Modo visual. lig : O LED azul acende-se quando está a ver televisão e apaga-se quando desliga o televisor.
• Sempre : O LED azul está sempre aceso.
N Para reduzir o consumo de energia, defina o Efeito de luz para Deslig..
Ver a imagem numa imagem (PIP)
Pode visualizar uma imagem secundária dentro da imagem principal do programa definido ou
entrada de vídeo. Desta forma, pode ver a imagem do programa definido ou entrada de vídeo,
a partir de qualquer equipamento ligado, enquanto vê a imagem principal.
N A imagem na janela PIP pode ficar pouco natural se utilizar o ecrã principal para ver um
jogo ou um programa de karaoke.
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para visualizar o menu Ferramentas.
Também pode configurar as definições relacionadas com a opção PIP
seleccionando Ferramentas → PIP.
❑ PIP → Deslig. / Lig.
Pode activar ou desactivar a função PIP.
Imagem principal Imagem secundária
Componente
HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4
PC
TV
Tamanho → / / /
Pode seleccionar o tamanho da imagem secundária.
N Se a imagem principal estiver no modo HDMI, a opção Tamanho está disponível.
Posição → / / /
Pode seleccionar a posição da imagem secundária.
N No modo Duplo ( , ) a opção Posição não pode ser seleccionada.
Canal
Pode seleccionar um canal da imagem secundária.
PIP
PIP : Deslig. ►
Tamanho :
Posição :
Canal : ATV 1
E Enter R Voltar
Geral
Modo Jogo : Deslig.
BD Wise : Deslig.
Poupança energ. : Deslig.
Transparência de menu : Brilhante
Melodia : Médio
PIP ►
U Mover E Enter R Voltar
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:41:11 PMPortuguês - 26
Programa suportado
❑ Aviso legal
Pode consultar o aviso legal e a exoneração de responsabilidade, no que respeita aos conteúdos e serviços de terceiros.
Exoneração de responsabilidade
Este é um aviso legal pormenorizado, relativamente à aplicação Internet@TV.
N O conteúdo da Exoneração de responsabilidade pode variar consoante o país.
N Pode ir para a página anterior ou seguinte, utilizando os botões ◄ ou ►.
❑ Guia de produto
A opção Guia de produto fornece informações sobre as funções mais importantes deste televisor.
N Para obter mais informações, seleccione o item pretendido.
❑ Auto-diagnóstico
Teste de imagem
Se achar que tem problemas de imagem, execute o teste de imagem. Verifique o padrão de cores no ecrã para ver se o problema
persiste.
N A mensagem : O problema da fotografia persiste? aparece no ecrã.
Se o padrão de teste não aparecer ou se houver ruído no mesmo, seleccione Sim.
Se o padrão de teste aparecer correctamente, seleccione Não.
• Sim : Pode haver um problema com o televisor. Contacte o Centro de atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência.
• Não : Pode haver um problema com o equipamento externo. Verifique as suas ligações. Se o problema persistir, consulte o
manual de utilizador dos dispositivos externos.
Teste de som
Se achar que tem problemas de som, execute o teste de som.
Pode verificar o som ao reproduzir uma melodia incluída através do televisor.
N A mensagem : O problema de teste de som persiste? aparece no ecrã. Se durante o teste de som, conseguir ouvir
apenas som de um dos altifalantes, ou se não conseguir ouvir nada, seleccione Sim. Se conseguir ouvir som dos altifalantes,
seleccione Não.
• Sim : Pode haver um problema com o televisor. Contacte o Centro de atendimento da Samsung para obter assistência.
• Não : Pode haver um problema com o equipamento externo. Verifique as suas ligações. Se o problema persistir, consulte o
manual de utilizador dos dispositivos externos.
N Se não ouvir som dos altifalantes do televisor, antes de executar o teste de som, certifique-se de que Seleccionar altifalante
está definido para Altifalante do tv. no menu de Som.
N A melodia é ouvida durante o teste, mesmo que Seleccionar altifalante esteja definido para Altifalante externo, ou se estiver
sem som por ter carregado no botão M MUTE.
Informações sobre o sinal (Apenas canais digitais)
Pode ajustar a antena para melhorar a recepção dos canais digitais disponíveis.
N Se o medidor da intensidade do sinal indicar que o sinal é fraco, ajuste manualmente a sua antena para aumentar a
intensidade do mesmo. Continue a ajustar a antena até encontrar a melhor posição com o sinal mais forte.
Assistência / Entrada
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:41:12 PMPortuguês - 27
Lista de fontes / Editar nome
❑ Lista de fontes
Utilize esta opção para seleccionar o televisor ou outras fontes de entrada externas,
como leitores de DVD ou caixa de televisão por cabo / receptores de satélite
(Set-Top Box) ligados ao televisor. Utilize esta opção para seleccionar a sua fonte de
entrada preferida.
TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Componente, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB.
N Só pode escolher os dispositivos externos que estão ligados ao televisor.
Em Lista de fontes, as entradas ligadas são realçadas e ordenadas no topo.
As entradas que não estejam ligadas serão ordenadas na parte inferior.
N Utilizar os botões coloridos do telecomando com a lista de fontes.
- Vermelho (Actualizar) : Actualiza os dispositivos externos ligados.
- T TOOLS (Ferramentas) : Mostra os menus Editar nome e Informação.
O Carregue no botão SOURCE do telecomando para ver uma fonte de sinal
externo.
❑ Editar nome
Pode atribuir um nome ao dispositivo ligado às tomadas de entrada para facilitar a selecção da fonte de entrada.
VCR / DVD / STB Cabo / Satélite STB / STB PVR / Receptor AV / Jogos / Câmara de Vídeo / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV /
IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Se houver um PC com uma resolução de 1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz ligado à porta HDMI IN 2(DVI), defina o modo HDMI2/DVI para
PC na opção Editar nome do modo Entrada.
❑ Actualização do software
Para manter o produto actualizado com novas funções da televisão digital, são transmitidas periodicamente actualizações de
software como parte do sinal de televisão normal. O televisor detecta automaticamente estes sinais e apresenta a faixa de
actualização do software. Tem a opção de instalar ou não a actualização.
Por USB
Introduza no televisor a unidade USB que contém a actualização do firmware. Tenha cuidado para não desligar a corrente
ou retirar a unidade USB enquanto as actualizações estiverem a ser executadas. O televisor desliga-se e volta a ligar-se
automaticamente após terminar a actualização do firmware. Verifique a versão de firmware depois de concluídas as actualizações.
Quando o software é actualizado, as definições de áudio e de vídeo que fez voltam às predefinições (de fábrica).
Por um canal
Actualiza o software através do sinal de transmissão.
N Se a função for seleccionada durante o período de transmissão do software,
esta função procura por software disponível e transfere-o.
N O tempo necessário para transferir o software é determinado pelo estado do sinal.
Actual. no Modo de Espera
Para continuar a actualizar o software com o interruptor de corrente principal ligado,
seleccione Lig. carregando no botão ▲ ou ▼. 45 minutos depois de entrar no modo de
espera, uma actualização manual é iniciada automaticamente. Dado que o aparelho está
ligado internamente, o ecrã pode ficar aceso durante algum tempo. Este fenómeno pode
persistir durante mais de 1 hora até a actualização do software ficar concluída.
Software Alternativo
Substitui o software actual com o alternativo.
N Se o software foi alterado, é apresentado o software existente.
N Pode alterar o software actual para alternativo através do Software Alternativo.
❑ Guia de ligação HD
É apresentada uma breve descrição de como obter o melhor desempenho do novo televisor HD. Mostramos o método de ligação
para dispositivos HD.
N Pode passar para a página anterior ou para a página seguinte carregando no botão ◄ ou ►.
❑ Contactar a Samsung
Pode contactar o centro de atendimento e consultar o website da Samsung para obter
Painel lateral do televisor
Unidade USB
Lista de fontes
Editar nome
Input
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:41:12 PMPortuguês - 28
Rede
Ligação à rede
A ligação à rede destina-se a DLNA, transferências da Internet para as aplicações Contents Library, Internet@TV e Centro rede domést.
❑ Ligação à rede - Cabo
Ligação por cabo para um ambiente DHCP
Seguem-se os procedimentos necessários para configurar a rede utilizando o protocolo de configuração dinâmica de anfitrião
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Uma vez que o endereço IP, máscara de sub-rede, gateway e DNS são
automaticamente atribuídos quando o DHCP é seleccionado, não é necessário introduzi-los manualmente.
1. Ligue a porta LAN no painel traseiro do televisor ao modem externo com um cabo LAN.
2. Ligue a porta LAN na parede ao modem externo com um cabo de modem.
N Os terminais (a posição da porta e o tipo) do dispositivo externo podem variar consoante o fabricante.
N Se a atribuição do endereço IP pelo servidor DHCP falhar, desligue o modem externo, volte a ligá-lo após, no mínimo,
10 segundos e, em seguida, tente novamente.
N Para saber qual a ligação entre o modem externo e o router, consulte o manual do utilizador do produto correspondente.
N Pode ligar o televisor directamente à LAN sem utilizar um router.
N Não pode utilizar um modem ADSL de ligação manual, porque este não suporta DHCP. Tem de utilizar um modem ADSL de
ligação automática.
Painel posterior do televisor
Porta do modem
na parede
2 Cabo do modem
Modem externo
(ADSL/VDSL/TV por cabo)
1 Cabo LAN
Dependendo do estado da rede, pode ligar a porta LAN directamente ao televisor.
Painel posterior do televisor
Cabo LAN
Porta do LAN
na parede
Pode ligar a LAN através de um router.
Painel posterior do televisor
Porta do modem
na parede
Modem externo
(ADSL/VDSL/TV por cabo)
Router IP
Cabo LAN
Cabo do modem
Cabo LAN
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:41:15 PMPortuguês - 29
Ligação LAN para um ambiente de IP estático
Seguem-se os procedimentos necessários para configurar a rede utilizando um endereço IP estático. Tem de introduzir
manualmente o endereço IP, máscara de sub-rede, gateway e DNS fornecidos pelo seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet
(ISP - Internet Service Provider).
1. Ligue a porta LAN no painel traseiro do televisor à porta LAN na parede utilizando o cabo LAN.
N Os terminais (a posição da porta e o tipo) do dispositivo externo podem variar consoante o fabricante.
N Se estiver a utilizar um endereço IP estático, o seu ISP informá-lo-á sobre o endereço IP, máscara de sub-rede, gateway e
DNS. Tem de introduzir estes valores para poder concluir as definições de rede. Se não souber os valores, pergunte ao seu
administrador de rede.
N Para obter informações sobre a configuração e ligação de um router, consulte o manual do utilizador do produto correspondente.
N Pode ligar o televisor directamente à LAN sem utilizar um router.
N Se utilizar um router IP que suporte DHCP, pode configurar o dispositivo como DHCP ou IP estático.
N Para saber quais os procedimentos necessários para utilizar um endereço IP estático, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços
de Internet.
❑ Ligação à rede - Sem fios
Pode estabelecer a ligação à rede sem fios através de um router IP sem fios.
1. Ligue o ‘Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’ ao terminal USB1(HDD) ou USB2 do televisor.
N Tem de utilizar o ‘Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’ para poder utilizar uma rede sem fios.
N O adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung é vendido separadamente. O adaptador de LAN sem fios WIS09ABGN da Samsung
é disponibilizado por revendedores seleccionados, sites de e-commerce e no site Samsungparts.com.
N Para utilizar uma rede sem fios, o seu televisor deve estar ligado a um router IP sem fios.
N Se o router IP sem fios suportar DHCP, o seu televisor pode utilizar DHCP ou um endereço IP estático para estabelecer a ligação
à rede sem fios.
N O adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung suporta as normas IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N.
Se reproduzir um vídeo DLNA com uma ligação IEEE 802.11B/G, o vídeo pode não ser reproduzido normalmente. PAGE 151
N Se o router IP sem fios permitir activar/desactivar a função de ligação Ping, active-a.
N Seleccione um canal para o router IP sem fios que não esteja a ser utilizado actualmente. Se o canal definido para o router IP
sem fios estiver a ser utilizado actualmente por outro dispositivo próximo, podem verificar-se interferências e as comunicações
podem falhar.
Continua...
Painel posterior do televisor
1 Cabo LAN
Porta do LAN
na parede
Painel posterior do televisor
Cabo LAN
Router IP
Cabo LAN
Porta do LAN
na parede
Pode ligar a LAN através de um router.
Painel lateral do televisor
Adaptador de
LAN sem fios da
Samsung
Cabo LAN
Router IP sem fios
Porta do LAN
na parede
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:41:18 PMPortuguês - 30
N Se aplicar um sistema de segurança diferente dos sistemas listados abaixo, este não funciona com o televisor.
- Quando aplicar a chave de segurança ao AP (router IP sem fios), só são disponibilizadas as seguintes opções.
1) Modo de autenticação : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Tipo de codificação : WEP, TKIP, AES
- Quando aplicar a chave de segurança ao modo Ad-hoc, só são disponibilizadas as seguintes opções.
1) Modo de autenticação : SHARED, WPANONE
2) Tipo de codificação: WEP, TKIP, AES
N Se o seu AP suportar WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup - Configuração Wi-Fi protegida), pode estabelecer a ligação à rede através de
PBC (Push Button Configuration) ou PIN (Personal Indentification Number - Número de identificação pessoal). O WPS configura
automaticamente a chave SSID e WPA em qualquer um dos modos.
N Se o dispositivo não estiver certificado, não pode estabelecer a ligação ao televisor através do ‘adaptador de LAN sem fios da
Samsung’.
Configurar rede
❑ Tipo de rede
Seleccione Cabo ou Sem fios como método de ligação à rede.
N O menu só é activado se tiver ligado um ‘Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’.
• Cabo : Estabelece a ligação à rede utilizando um cabo.
• Sem fios : Estabelece a ligação à rede sem fios.
❑ Configurar Rede
Configurar cabo de rede (se Tipo de rede estiver definido para Cabo)
N Verifique se o cabo LAN está ligado.
• Config. Protoc. Internet → Auto. / Manual
• Teste de rede : Pode testar ou confirmar o estado da ligação à rede depois de configurar a mesma.
N Se não conseguir estabelecer a ligação a uma rede com fios
Se o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet tiver registado o endereço MAC do dispositivo utilizado para estabelecer a ligação
à Internet pela primeira vez e autenticar o endereço MAC sempre que estabelecer a ligação à Internet, o seu televisor pode não
conseguir estabelecer a ligação à Internet, pois o endereço MAC é diferente do endereço MAC do dispositivo (PC).
Neste caso, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet para saber quais os procedimentos necessários para ligar outros
dispositivos diferentes do seu PC (como o seu televisor) à Internet. Se o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet solicitar uma
ID ou uma palavra-passe para estabelecer a ligação à Internet (rede), o seu televisor pode não conseguir estabelecer a ligação
à Internet. Neste caso, tem de introduzir a sua ID ou palavra-passe quando estabelecer a ligação à Internet utilizando um
router de Internet. A ligação à Internet pode falhar, devido a um problema na firewall. Neste caso, contacte o seu fornecedor de
serviços de Internet. Se não conseguir estabelecer a ligação à Internet, mesmo que tenha seguido os procedimentos indicados
pelo seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet, contacte a Samsung Electronics através.
Configurar cabo de rede - Auto.
Se ligar o cabo LAN e este suportar DHCP, as definições do protocolo de Internet (IP - Internet Protocol) são automaticamente
configuradas.
1. Defina Tipo de rede para Cabo.
2. Seleccione Configurar cabo de rede.
3. Defina Config. Protoc. Internet para Auto..
N O protocolo de Internet é definido automaticamente.
4. Seleccione Teste de rede para verificar a conectividade da rede.
Configurar cabo de rede - Manual
Para ligar o televisor à LAN utilizando um endereço IP estático, deve configurar o protocolo de Internet (IP - Internet Protocol).
N Verifique se o cabo LAN está ligado. (Consulte a página 28)
1. Defina Tipo de rede para Cabo.
2. Seleccione Rede por cabo.
3. Defina Config. Protoc. Internet para Manual.
4. Configure Endereço IP, Máscara de sub-rede, Gateway e Servidor DNS.
N Carregue nos botões numéricos do telecomando para definir a rede manualmente.
5. Seleccione Teste de rede para verificar a conectividade da rede.
Configurar
Transmissão
Segurança
Rede ►
Geral
Continua...
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:41:19 PMPortuguês - 31
Config. rede sem fios (quando Tipo de rede for definido para Sem fios)
N O menu só é activado se tiver ligado um ‘Adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’. (Consulte a página 29)
- Config. Protoc. Internet → Auto. / Manual
- Teste de rede : Pode testar ou confirmar o estado da ligação à rede depois de configurar a mesma.
N Se não conseguir estabelecer a ligação a um AP
O seu televisor pode não conseguir localizar um AP que esteja configurado como tipo SSID privado. Neste caso, altere as
definições do AP e volte a tentar. Se o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet tiver registado o endereço MAC do dispositivo
utilizado para estabelecer a ligação à Internet pela primeira vez e autenticar o endereço MAC sempre que estabelecer a ligação
à Internet, o seu televisor pode não conseguir estabelecer a ligação à Internet, pois o endereço MAC é diferente do endereço
MAC do dispositivo (PC). Neste caso, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet para saber quais os procedimentos
necessários para ligar outros dispositivos diferentes do seu PC (como o seu televisor) à Internet. Se não conseguir estabelecer
a ligação à Internet, mesmo que tenha seguido os procedimentos indicados pelo seu fornecedor de serviços de Internet,
contacte a Samsung Electronics através.
• Seleccionar uma rede
- Ponto de Acesso : Pode seleccionar o router IP que pretende utilizar com uma
rede sem fios.
N Se um ponto de acesso sem fios não aparecer na lista Seleccionar uma rede,
carregue no botão vermelho.
N Quando a ligação for estabelecida, será automaticamente redireccionado
para o ecrã.
N Se tiver seleccionado um Ponto de acesso com uma autenticação de segurança :
é apresentado o ecrã para a introdução da chave de segurança. Introduza a
chave de segurança e carregue no botão azul do telecomando.
N Se o tipo de codificação de segurança for WEP, 0~9, A~F ficam disponíveis quando introduz a chave de segurança.
Botão Operações
▲/▼/◄/► Desloca a selecção para cima/para baixo/para a esquerda/para a direita.
ENTER Introduz o carácter seleccionado.
Botão vermelho Alterna entre letras maiúsculas e minúsculas
Botão verde Pode eliminar um carácter introduzido anteriormente.
Botão azul Carregue neste botão para concluir a introdução da chave de segurança.
❑ Ligar WPS (Configuração Wi-Fi protegida)
Se a Chave de segurança já estiver definida : Na lista de pontos de acesso,
seleccione WPS.
N Pode seleccionar PBC, PIN, Chave segurana.
• Estabelecer a ligação utilizando a opção PBC : Seleccione um PBC (Push Button
Configuration). Carregue no botão PBC do AP (Access point - Ponto de acesso)
no espaço de 2 minutos e espere que a ligação seja estabelecida.
• Estabelecer a ligação utilizando a opção PIN : Seleccione um
PIN (Personal Identification Number - Número de identificação pessoal).
N É apresentada a mensagem com o código PIN. Introduza o código PIN no
dispositivo AP dentro de 2 minutos. Seleccione OK e aguarde pela ligação.
N Tente novamente se a ligação não funcionar.
N Se não conseguir estabelecer a ligação, mesmo depois de ter tentado uma
segunda vez, reinicie o ponto de acesso. Consulte o manual de cada ponto
de acesso.
• Estabelecer a ligação utilizando a opção Chave de segurança :
Se seleccionar Chave de segurança, a janela de introdução é apresentada.
Introduza a chave de segurança e carregue no botão azul.
N Tente novamente se a ligação não funcionar
Config. rede sem fios
Chave segur.
n Mover Número EEnter R Voltar
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Número
Minúsc.
Apagar
Conc.
* *
Config. rede sem fios
Seleccionar uma rede
n Mover EEnter R Voltar
Pesquisa
Ad-Hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Chave segur.
3/9
Prima o botão PBC no ponto de acesso.
Nome do Ponto de Acesso : AP_3
Cancelar
Prima OK depois de introduzir o código de TV
enquanto estiver a configurar o ponto de acesso.
Nome do Ponto de Acesso : AP_3
Número PIN : 123 45678
OK Cancelar
Config. rede sem fios
Chave segur.
n Mover Número EEnter R Voltar
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Número
Minúsc.
Apagar
Conc.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:41:21 PMPortuguês - 32
Se a Chave de segurança não estiver definida : Se o AP que suporta WPS não
tiver uma definição de segurança, pode seleccionar PBC, PIN, Sem segurança.
A opção Sem segurança permite estabelecer a ligação ao AP directamente sem
utilizar a função WPC.
N O procedimento para o PBC e para o PIN é igual ao descrito acima.
Consulte-o se a Chave de segurança já estiver definida.
N Tente novamente se a ligação não funcionar
Ad-hoc : Pode estabelecer a ligação a um dispositivo móvel sem um ponto de acesso
através de uma chave anticópia USB sem fios utilizando uma rede ponto a ponto.
• Como estabelecer a ligação a uma nova rede Ad-hoc
1. Escolha Seleccionar uma rede e, em seguida, é apresentada uma lista de
dispositivos.
2. Na lista de dispositivos, carregue no botão azul do telecomando ou seleccione Ad-hoc.
N A mensagem O sistema de rede existente pode ter uma funcionalidade limitada. Quer alterar a ligação de rede?
é apresentada.
3. Introduza o Nome de Rede (SSID) e a Chave de segurança gerados no dispositivo com o qual pretende estabelecer
a ligação.
• Como estabelecer a ligação a um dispositivo Ad-hoc existente
1. Escolha Seleccionar uma rede, é apresentada a lista de dispositivos.
2. Seleccione o dispositivo pretendido da lista de dispositivos.
3. Se a chave de segurança tiver sido aplicada, volte a introduzi-la.
N Se a rede não funcionar normalmente, confirme novamente o Nome de Rede (SSID) e a Chave de segurança.
se a Chave de segurança estiver incorrecta, pode ser essa a razão do mau funcionamento.
Config. rede sem fios. - Auto.
Se quiser estabelecer a ligação ao AP, este deve suportar DHCP.
Só os dispositivos que suportem o modo Ad-hoc podem ser ligados sem DHCP.
1. Defina Tipo de rede para Sem fios.
2. Seleccione Config. rede sem fios.
3. Defina Config. Protoc. Internet para Auto.
N O protocolo de Internet é definido automaticamente.
4. Seleccione uma rede através da opção Seleccionar uma rede.
5. Seleccione Teste de rede para verificar a conectividade da rede.
Config. rede sem fios. - Manual
Para ligar a rede sem fios utilizando um endereço IP estático, tem de configurar o protocolo de Internet (IP). (Consulte a página 29)
N Para obter informações detalhadas sobre o endereço IP estático, consulte o manual do utilizador do seu router IP sem fios.
1. Defina Tipo de rede para Sem fios.
2. Seleccione Config. rede sem fios.
3. Defina Config. Protoc. Internet para Manual.
4. Defina Endereço IP, Máscara de sub-rede, Gateway e Servidor DNS.
N Carregue nos botões numéricos do telecomando quando definir a rede manualmente.
5. Seleccione uma rede através de Seleccionar ponto de acesso.
6. Seleccione Teste de rede para verificar a conectividade da rede.
* *
Config. rede sem fios
Seleccionar uma rede
n Mover EEnter R Voltar
Pesquisa
Ad-Hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Chave segur.
3/9
O sistema de rede existente pode ter funcionalidade
limitada. Deseja alterar a ligação de rede?
sim Não
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:41:21 PMPortuguês - 33
Ligar um dispositivo USB
1. Carregue no botão POWER para ligar o televisor.
2. Ligue um dispositivo USB que contenha ficheiros de fotografia e de música à tomada USB
existente na parte lateral do televisor.
N A tomada USB 1(HDD) é também utilizada como tomada HDD. HDD (Unidade de disco
rígido) é o dispositivo para o armazenamento de dados digitalmente codificados.
N A função Media Play só suporta dispositivos de classe de armazenamento de massa
(MSC - Mass Storage Class) USB. MSC é um dispositivo de transporte em volume de
classe de armazenamento de massa. São exemplos de MSC as mini-unidades USB,
leitores de cartões flash e USB HDD (os USB HUB não são suportados).
N O MTP (Media Transfer Protocol - Protocolo de transferência multimédia) não é suportado.
N O sistema de ficheiros só suporta FAT16/32 (o sistema de ficheiros NTFS não é suportado).
N Ligue um USB HDD à porta dedicada, a porta USB1 (HDD). No entanto, se o dispositivo ligado necessitar de um nível elevado de
potência, a entrada USB1 (HDD) pode não suportar o dispositivo.
N Determinados tipos de câmaras digitais e dispositivos áudio USB podem não ser compatíveis com este televisor.
N Ligue-os directamente à porta USB do televisor. Se estiver a utilizar uma ligação por cabo em separado, pode ocorrer um problema
de compatibilidade USB.
N Antes de ligar o dispositivo ao televisor, efectue uma cópia de segurança dos seus ficheiros de modo a prevenir danos ou perda de
dados. A SAMSUNG não se responsabiliza por quaisquer danos ou perda de dados.
N Não desligue o dispositivo USB enquanto estiver a carregar.
N A MSC suporta ficheiros MP3 e JPEG, enquanto um dispositivo PTP só suporta ficheiros JPEG.
N O formato sequencial JPEG é suportado.
N Quanto maior for a resolução da imagem, mais tempo leva a ser apresentada no ecrã.
N A resolução JPEG máxima suportada é de 15 360 x 8640 pixels.
N Para ficheiros não suportados ou danificados, é apresentada a mensagem Formato de ficheiro não suportado.
N Se o número de ficheiros de fotografia exceder os 4000 (ou se o número de ficheiros de música exceder os 3000), quaisquer
ficheiros que excedam o limite de 4000 não podem ser apresentados na lista de fotografias (ou lista de músicas).
N Os ficheiros MP3 com DRM transferidos de sites pagos não são reproduzidos.
N A DRM (Digital Rights Management - Gestão de direitos digitais) impede a utilização ilegal de dados multimédia digitais,
protegendo os direitos de autor.
N Quando pretender ver uma fotografia, o carregamento da mesma pode levar alguns segundos.
❑ Utilizar os botões do telecomando no menu Media Play
Botão Operações
▲/▼/◄/► Deslocar o cursor e seleccionar um item.
ENTERE
Seleccionar o item actualmente seleccionado.Reproduzir ou interromper os ficheiros durante a
reprodução de uma apresentação de diapositivos ou de ficheiros de música.
Reproduzir ou interromper a apresentação de diapositivos ou o ficheiro de música.
RETURN Voltar ao menu anterior.
TOOLS Executar várias funções dos menus Fotografia e Música.
Parar a apresentação de diapositivos ou o ficheiro de música actual.
Saltar para o grupo anterior/seguinte.
INFO Mostrar as informações do ficheiro.
MEDIA.P Entrar/sair do modo Media Play.
DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays
DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com
with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Media Play
Painel lateral do televisor
Unidade USB
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:41:22 PMPortuguês - 34
Utilizar a função Media Play
Esta função permite ver fotografias e ouvir ficheiros de música guardados num dispositivo de classe de armazenamento de massa
(MSC - Mass Storage Class) USB. O equipamento pode não funcionar correctamente com ficheiros multimédia não licenciados.
❑ Aceder ao menu Media Play
1. Carregue no botão MENU. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar
Aplicação e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Media Play (USB & DLNA),
em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
O Carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando para ver o menu Media Play.
O Carregue várias vezes no botão SOURCE do telecomando para seleccionar
USB ou DLNA, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
3. Carregue no botão vermelho e, em seguida, no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar
o respectivo dispositivo de memória USB (isto é, se estiver ligado através de um
hub). Carregue no botão ENTERE.
O Esta função varia consoante o dispositivo de memória USB ligado ao
televisor.
O O nome do dispositivo USB seleccionado é apresentado no canto inferior
esquerdo do ecrã.
4. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um ícone
(Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Para sair do modo Media Play, carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando.
N A partir deste modo, tem acesso aos clips de filme de um jogo, mas não
pode jogar.
❑ Retirar um dispositivo de memória USB com segurança
Pode remover o dispositivo do televisor com segurança.
1. Carregue no botão TOOLS no ecrã da lista de ficheiros Media Play, ou durante a
reprodução de uma apresentação de diapositivos, de ficheiros de música ou de
filme.
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Remover em segurança e,
em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE
3. Retire o dispositivo USB do televisor.
❑ Descrição do ecrã
1. Padrão de ordenação actual : Este campo apresenta o padrão actual para a ordenação dos ficheiros.
2. Ver grupos : O grupo de ordenação que inclui a fotografia actualmente seleccionada é realçado.
3. Ficheiro actualmente seleccionado : O ficheiro actualmente seleccionado é realçado.
4. Informações sobre a selecção de itens : Mostra o número de fotografias seleccionadas carregando no botão amarelo.
5. Dispositivo actual : Mostra o nome do dispositivo actualmente seleccionado.
N Botão Vermelho (Dispos.) : Selecciona um dispositivo ligado.
6. Itens de ajuda
• Botão Verde (Definições dos favoritos) : Altera as definições de Definições dos favoritos para o ficheiro seleccionado.
Carregue várias vezes neste botão até os valores pretendidos serem apresentados
• Botão Amarelo (Selec.) : Selecciona ficheiros da lista de ficheiros. Os ficheiros seleccionados estão marcados com o
símbolo c. Carregue novamente no botão amarelo para cancelar a selecção de um ficheiro.
• Botão TOOLS (Ferramentas) : Mostra os menus de opções. (O menu Ferramentas muda consoante o estado actual.)
• Botão R RETURN (Voltar) : Volta ao menu anterior.
Pasta Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Cor
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349.
JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Apres. Diap.
Repr.Gr.Act.
Informação
Remover em segurança
../ No. pasta/
Photo
USB Dispos. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior.
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Livre
Movie
USB Dispos. RVoltar
Preferência Visual. básica
Lin.Tem. Cor Pasta
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
3
1
2
1Fic. sel.
4
5 6
Photo
USB Dispos.
Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Voltar
c
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:41:29 PMPortuguês - 35
Ordenar a lista de fotografias / músicas / filmes
Visual. básica
Mostra as pastas no dispositivo de memória USB. Se seleccionar uma pasta
e carregar no botão ENTERE, são apresentados os ficheiros correspondentes
(Photo / Music / Movie) que se encontram na pasta seleccionada.
N Quando ordenar de acordo com Visual. básica, não pode definir ficheiros
favoritos.
Pasta
Ordena os ficheiros por pasta. Se existirem muitas pastas no USB, os ficheiros
de fotografia são apresentados por ordem em cada pasta. O ficheiro na pasta de
raiz é apresentado em primeiro lugar e os restantes são apresentados por ordem
alfabética.
Preferência → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
Ordena os ficheiros por preferência (Favoritos).
N Alterar as definições dos Favoritos
Seleccione a fotografia pretendida na lista de ficheiros e, em seguida, carregue
várias vezes no botão verde até ser apresentada a definição pretendida.
N As estrelas servem apenas para agrupar os ficheiros. Por exemplo, um ficheiro
com 3 estrelas não tem qualquer prioridade sobre um ficheiro com uma estrela.
Lin.Tem. (Photo / Movie)
Ordena e apresenta os títulos das músicas ou dos filmes por símbolo/número/
ordem alfabética/ordem especial.
Título (Music / Movie)
Ordena os títulos dos ficheiros de música por símbolo/número/ordem alfabética/
ordem especial e apresenta o ficheiro de música.
❑ Photo
Cor → Vermelho / Amarelo / Verde / Azul / Magenta / Preto / Cinzento / Não classi.
Ordena as fotografias por cor. Pode alterar as informações relativas à cor da fotografia.
N Active Utilizar visualização a cores no menu Configurar antes de ordenar as fotografias por cor.
❑ Music
Artista
Ordena o ficheiro de música por artista, por símbolo/número/ordem alfabética/ordem especial.
Disposição → Energético / Rítmico / Triste / Alegre / Calmo / Não classi.
Ordena os ficheiros de música pela disposição. Pode alterar as informações de disposição da música.
Género
Ordena os ficheiros de música por género.
Folder Preferência Visual. básica Título Artista
1
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
usermanual Heaven
NPKI
▶
1
▶
▶
▶
▶
../ No. pasta/
Music
USB Dispos. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior
▶
▶
Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Título Pasta
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
▶
▶ ◀
MOVIE_005
.avi
Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Cor Pasta
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
Photo
USB Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Voltar
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:41:35 PMPortuguês - 36
fotografias / músicas / Menu de opções da lista de filmes
1. Carregue no botão MEDIA.P.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Photo, Music ou Movie e em seguida
carregue no botão ENTERE.
3. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro pretendido.
N Seleccionar vários ficheiros
- Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro pretendido.
Em seguida, carregue no botão amarelo.
- Repita a operação acima descrita para seleccionar vários ficheiros.
- A marca c aparece no ficheiro seleccionado.
4. Carregue no botão TOOLS.
N O menu de opções é alterado consoante o estado actual.
Repr.Gr.Act.
Neste menu, pode reproduzir uma apresentação de diapositivos utilizando apenas
os ficheiros de fotografia no grupo de ordenação actualmente seleccionado.
Anular selecção (Quando seleccionar, pelo menos, um ficheiro)
Pode anular a selecção de todos os ficheiros.
N A marca c indica que o ficheiro correspondente seleccionado está oculto.
Informação
A informação do ficheiro de fotografia/ música/ filme é apresentada. Pode ver as
informações de ficheiros durante uma apresentação de diapositivos seguindo o
mesmo procedimento.
O Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar as informações.
Remover em segurança
Pode remover o dispositivo do televisor com segurança.
❑ Photo
Apres. Diap.
Neste menu, pode reproduzir uma apresentação de diapositivos utilizando os
ficheiros de fotografia no dispositivo de memória USB.
Mudar grupo (Quando a tecla de ordenação for Cor)
Pode alterar as informações relativas à cor do ficheiro de fotografia seleccionado (ou grupo de ficheiros) e movê-lo de um grupo
de cores para outro.
N Este procedimento não altera a cor da fotografia.
N As informações de grupo do ficheiro actual são actualizadas e as fotografias são movidas para o novo grupo de cores.
N Para alterar as informações em vários ficheiros, seleccione os ficheiros pretendidos carregando no botão amarelo.
❑ Music
Change Group (Quando a tecla de ordenação for Disposição)
Pode alterar as informações de disposição dos ficheiros de música. As informações de grupo do ficheiro actual são actualizadas
e o ficheiro é movido para o novo grupo. Para alterar as informações de vários ficheiros, seleccione os ficheiros carregando no
botão amarelo.
Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Pasta Preferência Visual. básica Título Artista
1
1
▶
▶
../ No. pasta /
Sky
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
NPKI
usermanual Heaven
▶
NPKI
Repr.Gr.Act.
Informação
Remover em segurança
Music
USB Dispos. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior.
MOVIE_004
MOVIE_003 .avi
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_005
.avi
MOVIE_007
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_006
.avi
▶
▶
Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Título Pasta
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
Repr.Gr.Act.
Informação
Remover em segurança
USB Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior.
Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Cor Pasta Preferência
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Apres. Diap.
Repr.Gr.Act.
Mudar grupo
Informação
Remover em segurança
Photo
USB Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:41:41 PMPortuguês - 37
Menu de opções de Apresentação de diapositivos / Reprodução de música /
Reprodução de filmes
1. Durante uma apresentação de diapositivos (ou enquanto visualiza uma fotografia),
ou a reprodução de uma música ou filme, carregue no botão TOOLS para definir
a opção.
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a opção pretendida e, em seguida,
carregue no botão ENTERE.
Definição de Imagem / Definição de Imagem
Pode seleccionar as definições de imagem e de som.
Informação
Aparecem as informações do ficheiro.
Remover em segurança
Pode remover o dispositivo do televisor com segurança.
❑ Menu de opções da apresentação de diapositivos
Parar apresentação de slides / Iniciar apresentação de slides
Pode iniciar ou parar uma apresentação de diapositivos.
Vel. apr. diap. → Lenta / Normal / Rápida
Pode seleccionar a velocidade da apresentação de diapositivos.
N Esta função só está disponível durante uma apresentação de diapositivos.
N Também pode alterar a velocidade da apresentação de diapositivos carregando
no botão π (REW) ou μ (FF) durante a mesma.
Efe. apres. diap.
Pode seleccionar o efeito de transição do ecrã utilizado na apresentação de
diapositivos.
• Nenhum / Desvan. 1 / Desvan. 2 / Cortina / Espiral / Xadrez / Linear /
Escada / Limpar / Aleatório
N Esta função só está disponível durante uma apresentação de diapositivos.
Rodar
Pode rodar fotografias guardadas num dispositivo de memória USB.
N Sempre que carregar no botão ◄, a fotografia roda 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ e 0˚.
N Sempre que carregar no botão ►, a fotografia roda 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ e 0˚.
N O ficheiro rodado não é guardado.
zoom
Pode ampliar fotografias guardadas num dispositivo de memória USB. (x1 → x2 → x4)
N Para mover a fotografia ampliada, carregue no botão ENTERE e, em seguida, carregue nos botões ▲/▼/◄/►.
Quando a imagem ampliada é mais pequena do que o tamanho original do ecrã, a função de alteração do local não funciona.
N O ficheiro ampliado não é guardado.
Música de fundo
Pode seleccionar a música de fundo durante a visualização de uma apresentação de diapositivos.
N Para utilizar esta função, devem existir ficheiros de música e fotografia guardados no dispositivo USB.
N É necessário carregar ficheiros de música para alterar o modo BGM. Reproduza ficheiros de música por categoria de música
a carregar.
❑ Menu de opções de reprodução de músicas
Modo repetir → Lig. / Deslig.
Pode reproduzir ficheiros de música várias vezes.
❑ Menu de opções de reprodução de filmes
Taman. de imagem → Ajuste / Original
Reproduzir vídeo no tamanho do ecrã ou no tamanho original.
Configuração de legenda
Pode definir as legendas do filme.
Tools
Ferramentas
Parar apresentação de slides
Vel. apr. diap. : Normal
Efeito apresentação diapositivos : Desvan .1
Rodar
Zoom
Música de fundo
Definição de Imagem
Definições do Som
Informação
U Mover E Enter eSair
Ferramentas
Modo repetir ◄ Lig. ►
Definição de Imagem
Definições do Som
Informação
Remover em segurança
U Mover Adjust eSair
Ferramentas
Definição de Imagem
Definições do Som
Taman. de imagem : Ajuste
Configuração de legenda
Informação
Remover em segurança
U Mover Enter eSair
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:41:42 PMPortuguês - 38
Visualizar uma fotografia ou uma apresentação de diapositivos
❑ Visualizar uma apresentação de diapositivos
N Todos os ficheiros na secção da lista de ficheiros serão utilizados para
a apresentação de diapositivos.
N Durante a apresentação de diapositivos, os ficheiros são apresentados
por ordem a partir do ficheiro actualmente exibido.
N O progresso da apresentação de diapositivos é efectuado pela ordem definida
na secção da lista de ficheiros.
N Os ficheiros de música podem ser automaticamente reproduzidos durante
a apresentação de diapositivos se a opção Música de fundo estiver definida
para Lig..
N Enquanto uma fotografia é apresentada, carregue no botão ∂(Reproduzir)
/ENTERE no telecomando para iniciar a apresentação de diapositivos.
N Botões de controlo da apresentação de diapositivos
ENTERE Reproduz/interrompe a apresentação de diapositivos.
Reproduz a apresentação de diapositivos.
Interrompe a apresentação de diapositivos.
Sai da apresentação de diapositivos e volta à lista
|de fotografias.
/
Altera a velocidade de reprodução da apresentação
de diapositivos.
T TOOLS Executa várias funções a partir dos menus de fotografia.
❑ Reproduzir o grupo actual
1. Carregue no botão ▲ para passar à Secção de teclas de ordenação.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um padrão de ordenação.
3. Carregue no botão ▼ para passar à Secção da lista de grupos.
4. Seleccione um grupo utilizando os botões ◄ e ►.
5. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir). Inicia-se uma apresentação de diapositivos
com os ficheiros do grupo seleccionado.
Em alternativa
1. Seleccione uma tecla de ordenação e, em seguida, na secção da lista de ficheiros, seleccione as fotografias que se encontram
no grupo pretendido.
N Para ir para o grupo anterior/seguinte, carregue no botão π (REW) ou μ (FF).
2. Carregue no botão TOOLS.
3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Repr.Gr.Act. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Apenas as fotografias no grupo de ordenação, incluindo os ficheiros seleccionados, serão utilizados na apresentação
de diapositivos.
❑ Para reproduzir uma apresentação de diapositivos apenas com os ficheiros seleccionados
1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar a fotografia pretendida na secção da lista de ficheiros.
3. Carregue no botão amarelo.
4. Repita a operação acima descrita para seleccionar várias fotografias.
N A marca c aparece à esquerda da fotografia seleccionada.
N Se seleccionar um ficheiro, a apresentação de diapositivos não é reproduzida.
N Para anular a selecção de todos os ficheiros seleccionados, carregue no botão TOOLS e escolha Anular selecção.
5. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE.
N Os ficheiros seleccionados serão utilizados para a apresentação de diapositivos.
Em alternativa
1. Na secção da lista de ficheiros, carregue nos botões amarelos para seleccionar as fotografias pretendidas.
2. Carregue no botão TOOLS.
3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Apres. Diap. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Os ficheiros seleccionados serão utilizados para a apresentação de diapositivos.
▶
▶
Preferência Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Título Pasta
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_005
.avi
Visual. básica Lin.Tem. Cor Pasta Preferência
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Apres. Diap.
Repr.Gr.Act.
Mudar grupo
Informação
Remover em segurança
Photo
r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4
USB E Pausa lr Ant./Seg. T Ferramentas R Voltar
USB Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior.
USB Dispos. Def.fav. Selec. T Ferramentas R Mover para pasta superior.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:41:47 PMPortuguês - 39
Reproduzir música
❑ Reproduzir um ficheiro de música
1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro de música que
pretende reproduzir.
3. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE.
N Este menu só apresenta ficheiros com a extensão MP3. Os ficheiros com
outras extensões não são apresentados, mesmo que estejam guardados
no mesmo dispositivo USB.
N O ficheiro seleccionado é apresentado na parte superior, com o respectivo
tempo de reprodução.
N Para regular o volume da música, carregue no botão do volume do telecomando.
Para cortar o som, carregue no botão M MUTE do telecomando.
N Se o som se apresentar irregular durante a reprodução de ficheiros MP3, regule a opção Equalizador e SRS TruSurround
HD no menu Som. (Um ficheiro MP3 com muita modulação pode causar um problema no som.)
N A duração de reprodução de um ficheiro de música pode ser apresentada como ‘00:00:00’, se a informação de tempo de
reprodução não for encontrada no início do ficheiro.
N Os botões π (REW) ou μ (FF) não funcionam durante a reprodução.
N Botões de controlo de reprodução de música
ENTERE Reproduz/interrompe o ficheiro
de música.
Sai do modo de reprodução e volta à lista
de músicas.
Reproduz o ficheiro de música
T TOOLS
Executa várias funções a partir dos menus
de música.
Interrompe o ficheiro de música
N Ícone de informações da função de música
Quando todos os ficheiros de música da pasta (ou o ficheiro seleccionado) são repetidos.
Modo repetir está definido para Lig..
Quando todos os ficheiros de música da pasta (ou o ficheiro seleccionado) são reproduzidos uma vez.
Modo repetir está definido para Deslig..
❑ Reproduzir o grupo de música
1. Carregue no botão ▲ para passar à Secção de teclas de ordenação.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um padrão de ordenação.
3. Carregue no botão ▼ ou ENTERE para passar à secção da lista de grupos.
4. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir). Os ficheiros do grupo seleccionado começam a ser reproduzidos.
Em alternativa
1. Seleccione uma tecla de ordenação e, em seguida, na secção da lista de ficheiros, seleccione os ficheiros que se encontram
no grupo pretendido.
N Para ir para o grupo anterior/seguinte, carregue no botão π (REW) ou μ (FF).
2. Carregue no botão TOOLS.
3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Repr.Gr.Act. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Os ficheiros de música do grupo de ordenação, incluindo o ficheiro seleccionado, são reproduzidos.
❑ Reproduzir os ficheiros de música seleccionados
1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro de música pretendido.
3. Carregue no botão amarelo.
4. Repita a operação acima para seleccionar vários ficheiros de música.
N A marca c aparece à esquerda do ficheiro de música seleccionado.
N Para anular a selecção de todos os ficheiros seleccionados, carregue no botão TOOLS e escolha Anular selecção.
5. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE.
N Os ficheiros seleccionados são reproduzidos.
r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55
r
1/3
When I Dream r
r
Geek In The Pink Heaven
USB E Pausa lr Ant./Seg. T Ferramentas R Voltar
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:41:48 PMPortuguês - 40
Reproduzir um ficheiro de filme
❑ Reproduzir um ficheiro de filme
1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro de filme que
pretende reproduzir.
3. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE.
N O ficheiro seleccionado é reproduzido.
N O ficheiro seleccionado é apresentado na parte superior, com o respectivo
tempo de reprodução.
N A duração de um ficheiro de filme pode ser apresentada como ‘00:00:00’,
se as informações de tempo de reprodução não surgirem no início do ficheiro.
N Pode reproduzir emocionantes ficheiros multimédia de jogos, mas a função de jogo não é suportada.
N Formatos de legenda suportados
Nome Extensão do ficheiro Linguagem de programação
MPEG-4 (texto baseado no tempo) .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt baseado em cadeias de texto
SubViewer .sub baseado em cadeias de texto
Micro DVD .sub ou .txt baseado em cadeias de texto
N Formatos de vídeo suportados
Extensão do
ficheiro
Categoria Descodificador de vídeo Codec de áudio Resolução
*.avi AVI
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.mkv MKV
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.asf ASF
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080
*.mp4 MP4 (SMP4)
H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
XVID 1920x1080
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
*.vro
VRO
VOB
MPEG2 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG1 1920x1080
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG2 1920x1080
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
H.264 1920x1080
VC1 1920x1080
N Botões de controlo de reprodução de vídeo
ENTERE Reproduz/interrompe o ficheiro de filme.
Reproduz o ficheiro de filme.
Interrompe o ficheiro de filme.
Sai do modo de reprodução e volta à lista de filmes.
T TOOLS Executa várias funções a partir dos menus de filme.
◄/► Avança ou retrocede no ficheiro de filme.
▲/▼ Vai para o primeiro/último ficheiro.
Continua...
▶
r
r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3
MOVIE_000.avi
USB E Pausa lr Saltar T Ferramentas R Voltar
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:41:49 PMPortuguês - 41
❑ Reproduzir o grupo de filmes
1. Carregue no botão ▲ para passar à Secção de teclas de ordenação.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um padrão de ordenação.
3. Carregue no botão ▼ ou ENTERE para passar à secção da lista de grupos.
4. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir). Só os ficheiros do grupo seleccionado começam a ser reproduzidos.
Em alternativa
1. Seleccione uma tecla de ordenação e, em seguida, na secção da lista de ficheiros, seleccione os ficheiros que se encontram no
grupo pretendido.
N Para ir para o grupo anterior/seguinte, carregue no botão π (REW) ou μ (FF).
2. Carregue no botão TOOLS.
3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Repr.Gr.Act. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Os ficheiros de filme do grupo de ordenação, incluindo o ficheiro seleccionado, são reproduzidos.
❑ Reproduzir os ficheiros de filme seleccionados
1. Carregue no botão ▼ para seleccionar a secção da lista de ficheiros.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar o ficheiro de música pretendido.
3. Carregue no botão amarelo.
N A marca c aparece à esquerda do ficheiro de filme seleccionado.
N Para anular a selecção de todos os ficheiros seleccionados, carregue no botão TOOLS e escolha Anular selecção.
4. Repita a operação acima descrita para seleccionar vários ficheiros de filme.
5. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE.
N Só é reproduzido o ficheiro seleccionado.
❑ Reproduzir um filme de modo contínuo (Retomar reprodução)
Se sair da função de reprodução de filmes, pode reproduzir o filme posteriormente a partir do ponto em que parou.
1. Seleccione o ficheiro de filme que pretende reproduzir de modo contínuo carregando no botão ◄ ou ► a partir da Secção da
lista de ficheiros.
2. Carregue no botão ∂ (Reproduzir)/ENTERE.
3. Seleccione Rep.Cnt. (Retomar reprodução) carregando no botão azul.
N O filme irá iniciar a reprodução a partir do ponto no qual foi interrompido.
N Se a função Lemb. reprod. cont. filme estiver definida para Lig. no menu Setup, aparece uma mensagem de contexto
quando retoma a reprodução de um ficheiro de filme.
Utilizar o menu Configurar
A opção Configurar apresenta as definições do utilizador do menu Media Play.
1. Carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando para ver o menu Media Play.
2. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar Setup e, em seguida, carregue no
botão ENTERE.
3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar a opção pretendida.
4. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar a opção.
N Para sair do modo Media Play, carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando.
Utilizar visualização a cores → Lig. / Deslig.
Seleccione para ver a informação da cor no menu Fotografia.
N Quando definido para Lig., o tempo de carregamento aumenta para recolher a
informação da cor.
Modo repetir música → Lig. / Deslig.
Seleccione esta opção para reproduzir ficheiros de música várias vezes.
Lemb. reprod. cont. filme → Lig. / Deslig.
Seleccione para visualizar a mensagem de ajuda da reprodução contínua de filmes.
Obtenha o código de registo do DivX® VOD
Mostra o código de registo autorizado do televisor. Se aceder ao Website da DivX
e registar o código de registo com uma conta pessoal, pode transferir o ficheiro
de registo VOD. Se reproduzir o registo VOD utilizando a aplicação Media Play, o
registo é concluído. Para obter mais informações sobre o DivX® VOD, visite www.DivX.com.
Obtenha código desactivação do DivX® VOD
Quando o DivX® VOD não é registado, é apresentado o código de desactivação do registo. Se executar esta função com o DivX®
VOD registado, o registo do DivX® VOD actual é desactivado.
Tem.exec.prot.ecrã → 10 min / 20 min / 1 hora
Seleccione esta opção para definir o tempo de espera antes de ser apresentada a protecção de ecrã.
Informação
Seleccione esta opção para ver as informações do dispositivo ligado.
Remover em segurança
Pode remover o dispositivo do televisor com segurança.
Media Play
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Livre
SETUP
Photo Music Movie Setup
USB eSair
Dispos.
Setup
Mover Ajustar Voltar
Utilizar visual. a cores ◄ Deslig. ►
Modo repetir música Lig.
Lemb. reprod. cont. filme Lig.
Obtenha o código de registo do DivX® VOD
Obtenha código desactivação do DivX® VOD
Tempo exec. protec. ecrã 10 min
Informação
Remover em segurança
USB Dispos.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:41:49 PMPortuguês - 42
Definir a Rede DLNA
A DLNA permite visualizar filmes e imagens guardados no PC no televisor através de uma ligação de rede no modo Media Play. Isto
elimina a necessidade de copiá-los para um dispositivo de armazenamento USB e depois ligar o dispositivo ao televisor. Para utilizar a
DLNA, o televisor deve estar ligado à rede e a aplicação DLNA deve estar instalada no PC.
❑ Diagrama de ligação à rede - Cabo
❑ Diagrama de ligação à rede - Sem fios
1. Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar a rede, consulte ‘Definir a rede’.
N Recomenda-se que localize o televisor e o PC na mesma sub-rede. As 3 primeiras partes do endereço de sub-rede
do televisor e dos endereços IP do PC devem ser iguais e só a última parte (o endereço do anfitrião) deve ser alterada.
(p.ex., Endereço IP : 123.456.789.**)
2. Ligue o PC no qual o programa Samsung PC Share Manager será instalado e o modem externo utilizando um cabo LAN.
N Pode ligar o televisor directamente ao PC sem utilizar um router.
Instalar a Aplicação DLNA
Para reproduzir conteúdos do PC no televisor, tem de instalar a aplicação primeiro. Para utilizar a função DLNA sem problemas,
utilize o programa no CD-ROM fornecido com o televisor ou utilize o programa Samsung PC Share Manager correspondente ao
modelo de televisor, que pode ser transferido do web site da Samsung.
Continua...
TV
Modem externo
(ADSL/VDSL/TV por cabo)
LAN
PC
LAN
Media Play-DLNA
TV
LAN
PC
ou
1
Painel lateral do televisor
Adaptador de
LAN sem fios da
Samsung
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:41:51 PMPortuguês - 43
Utilizar a Aplicação DLNA
Programme Screen Display
1. Menus : São fornecidos os seguintes menus
da aplicação : Ficheiro, Partilhar, Servidor,
e Ajuda.
2. Clique para partilhar a pasta de servidor
do PC seleccionada.
3. Clique para cancelar a partilha.
4. Clique para actualizar as pastas e ficheiros
do PC.
5. Clique para sincronizar o estado de partilha.
6. As pastas e ficheiros do PC a serem
partilhados estão listados.
7. As pastas partilhadas pelos utilizadores
estão listadas.
8. Nome do servidor do computador
apresentado na lista de dispositivos do
Media Play.
Requisitos do Sistema
1. Introduza no PC o CD do Programa fornecido com este televisor.
2. São necessários 30MB de espaço livre no disco rígido para a instalação do programa.
N Se partilha ficheiros, é necessário um espaço livre no disco rígido até 30MB para cada 100 ficheiros.
N Se cancelar a partilha de ficheiros, o espaço do disco rígido utilizado para a informação das miniaturas é igualmente
libertado.
Formatos Suportados
• Imagem : JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS categoria. Para obter mais informações sobre quais
os formatos de vídeo suportados, consulte as instruções de ‘Reproduzir um ficheiro de filme’.
Instalar a aplicação
► ►
►
1. Execute o ficheiro Setup.exe do Programa do CD fornecido com o produto.
N Como alternativa, pode transferir o ficheiro em www.samsung.com.
2. Instale o SAMSUNG PC Share Manager com apresentado nas figuras.
3. Concluída a instalação, o ícone do PC Share Manager aparece no Ambiente de PC.
N Clique duas vezes no ícone para executar o programa.
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:41:53 PMPortuguês - 44
❑ Partilhar
Partilhar uma Pasta
Pode partilhar uma pasta do PC no televisor.
Cancelar uma Pasta Partilhada
Pode cancelar uma pasta partilhada no PC. Seleccione uma pasta no painel partilhar pasta e seleccione não partilhar pasta.
Aplicar as Definições Actuais
Efectue esta acção quando for necessário sincronizar devido a uma nova pasta partilhada ou ao cancelamento de uma pasta
partilhada. O menu Definir estado alterado aplica alterações em pastas partilhadas aos dados guardados com o programa de
partilha do PC. Uma vez que a aplicação de alterações aos dados internos é um processo que consome tempo, esta função
permite aos utilizadores aplicar alterações aos dados sempre que necessário. Até o menu Definir estado alterado ser seleccionado,
o estado alterado da pasta partilhada não é aplicado ao servidor. As alterações efectuadas em pastas partilhadas não são
aplicadas no PC até seleccionar o menu Definir estado alterado.
Definir a Permissão de Acesso
Para permitir que o televisor localize o PC, o televisor deve estar definido para Def. Política do Dispositivo na janela de
Definições da Permissão de Acesso. Adicionalmente, o servidor do PC e o televisor devem estar na mesma subrede.
• Método : Seleccione o menu partilhar e, em seguida, seleccione Def. Política do Dispositivo. Os itens rejeitados são
apresentados a cinzento. Pode alterar as permissões de acesso com o botão aceitar / Recusar. Para eliminar um item,
seleccione o item e seleccione Delete Item.
❑ Servidor
Servidor
Pode executar ou parar de utilizar o PC como servidor.
Iniciar servidor quando o Windows iniciar
Pode determinar se pretende iniciar automaticamente o servidor do PC quando o Windows arranca.
Mudar nome do servidor
Pode alterar o nome do servidor do PC.
Utilizar a Função DLNA
❑ Utilizar o Menu DLNA
A DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permite reproduzir o conteúdo guardado
no servidor DLNA (habitualmente no PC) ligado ao televisor ou em rede. A aplicação
Media Play permite reproduzir conteúdos guardados num dispositivo de memória
USB ligado ao televisor, enquanto a DLNA permite reproduzir conteúdos guardados
num servidor DLNA (o PC) ligado ao televisor ou em rede. O procedimento para
utilizar o conteúdo é o mesmo do Media Play (USB & DLNA).
1. Carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando para visualizar o menu DLNA.
2. Carregue no botão◄ ou ► para seleccionar um ícone
(Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) e, em seguida,
carregue no botão ENTERE.
N Para sair do modo DLNA, carregue no botão MEDIA.P do telecomando.
N A DLNA não suporta as seguintes funções.
- As funções Música de fundo e Definições da música de fundo.
- A ordenação de ficheiros por preferência nas pastas Fotografia, Música e Filme.
- A função Alterar a informação do grupo.
- A função Copy / Delete.
- A função Remove Safely.
- As funções dos botões REW/FF (π/μ) durante a reprodução de um filme.
- Função de reprodução de um filme de modo contínuo (Retomar reprodução).
N A função Skip pode não funcionar com alguns formatos, como o asf e mkv.
N Divx DRM, multi-áudio, legendas incorporadas não são suportados.
N O Samsung PC Share Manager deve ser autorizado pelo programa de firewall instalado no PC.
N As funções de avanço/retrocesso (teclas ◄/►) ou de pausa podem não funcionar durante a reprodução de um filme na DLNA
de outros fabricantes, dependendo das respectivas informações dos conteúdos.
N O tempo de reprodução pode não ser apresentado durante a reprodução de um filme.
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Livre
Movie
USB Dispos. Voltar
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:41:53 PMPortuguês - 45
Sobre o Anynet
+
Ligar dispositivos Anynet+
Anynet
+
é uma função que lhe permite controlar, com o telecomando do seu televisor Samsung, todos os dispositivos Samsung ligados
que suportem Anynet
+
. O sistema Anynet
+
pode ser utilizado com dispositivos Samsung que disponham da função Anynet
+
. Para se
certificar de que o dispositivo Samsung dispõe desta funcionalidade, verifique se existe um logótipo Anynet
+
no mesmo.
❑ Para ligar ao televisor
1. Ligue a tomada HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ou 4) do televisor e a tomada HDMI OUT do dispositivo Anynet
+
correspondente utilizando
um cabo HDMI.
❑ Para ligar ao sistema home theater
1. Ligue a tomada HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ou 4) do televisor e a tomada HDMI OUT do dispositivo Anynet
+
correspondente utilizando
um cabo HDMI.
2. Ligue a tomada HDMI IN do sistema home theater e a tomada HDMI OUT do dispositivo Anynet
+
correspondente utilizando um
cabo HDMI.
N Ligue o cabo óptico entre a tomada Digital Audio Out (Optical) do televisor e a entrada Digital Audio IN do sistema home theater.
N Se seguir a ligação anterior, a tomada óptica só tem saída para áudio de 2 canais. O som só é reproduzido no subwoofer e
nos altifalantes frontais esquerdo e direito do sistema home theater. Se quiser ouvir áudio de 5.1 canais, ligue a tomada Digital
Audio Out (Optical) do leitor de DVD ou caixa de televisão por cabo/satélite (ou seja, dispositivo Anynet 1 ou 2) directamente ao
amplificador ou ao sistema home theater e não ao televisor.
N Ligue apenas um sistema home theater.
N Pode ligar um dispositivo Anynet
+
utilizando o cabo HDMI 1.3. Alguns cabos HDMI podem não suportar funções Anynet
+
.
N A aplicação Anynet
+
funciona quando o dispositivo AV que suporta Anynet
+
está em espera ou ligado.
N O Anynet
+
suporta até 12 dispositivos AV, no total. Pode ligar até 3 dispositivos do mesmo tipo.
N O Anynet
+
suporta até 3 dispositivos em simultâneo
Dispositivo
Anynet
+
1
Dispositivo
Anynet
+
2
Dispositivo
Anynet
+
3
Televisor
Cabo HDMI 1.3
Cabo HDMI 1.3
Cabo HDMI 1.3
Televisor
Dispositivo Anynet
+
1
Dispositivo Anynet
+
2 Dispositivo Anynet
+
3
Cabo HDMI 1.3
Cabo HDMI 1.3
Cabo HDMI 1.3
Cabo HDMI 1.3
Sistema home theatre
Cabo óptico
Dispositivo
Anynet
+
4
Cabo HDMI 1.3
Dispositivo Anynet
+
4
Cabo HDMI 1.3
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:41:54 PMPortuguês - 46
Configurar a função Anynet
+
❑ Configuração da aplicação Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
T Carregue no botão TOOLS para ver o menu Ferramentas . Também pode ver o menu
Anynet
+
seleccionando Ferramentas → Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) → Deslig. / Lig.
Para utilizar a função Anynet
+
, tem de definir Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) para Lig..
N Quando a aplicação Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) está desactivada, todas as operações
relacionadas com a função Anynet
+
são desactivadas.
Desligar automat. → Não / Sim
Definir um dispositivo Anynet
+
para se desligar automaticamente quando o televisor for
desligado.
N A fonte activa no telecomando do televisor deve estar definida para TV, de forma a
poder utilizar a função Anynet
+
.
N Se definir Desligar automat. para Sim, os dispositivos externos ligados também
são desligados quando o televisor for desligado. Se um dispositivo externo ainda
estiver a gravar, este pode não se desligar.
Alternar entre dispositivos Anynet
+
1. Carregue no botão TOOLS. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Lista dispos. e, em seguida, carregue no
botão ENTERE.
N É apresentada uma lista dos dispositivos Anynet
+
ligados. Se não encontrar o
dispositivo que pretende, carregue no botão vermelho para procurar dispositivos.
N Só quando definir Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) para Lig. no menu Configurar,
é apresentado o menu Lista dispos..
3. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dispositivo específico e carregue no
botão ENTERE. Alterna para o dispositivo seleccionado.
N Alternar para os dispositivos seleccionados pode demorar até 2 minutos. Não pode cancelar a operação durante o processo
de comutação.
N O tempo necessário para a procura de dispositivos é determinado pelo número de dispositivos ligados.
N Se tiver seleccionado um dispositivo externo carregando no botão SOURCE, não pode utilizar a função Anynet
+
.
Mude para um dispositivo Anynet
+
externo utilizando o botão TOOLS.
❑ Menu Anynet
+
O menu Anynet
+
muda consoante o tipo e o estado dos dispositivos Anynet
+
ligados ao televisor TV.
Menu Anynet
+
Descrição
Ver TV O modo Anynet
+
muda para o modo de transmissão televisiva.
Lista dispos. Apresenta a lista de dispositivos Anynet
+
.
(nome_dispositivo) MENU Apresenta os menus dos dispositivos ligados. Por exemplo,
se estiver ligado um gravador de DVD, é apresentado o menu do disco do gravador de DVD.
(nome_dispositivo) INFO Apresenta o menu de reprodução do dispositivo ligado.
Por exemplo, se estiver ligado um gravador de DVD, é apresentado o menu de reprodução do
gravador de DVD.
Gravação (*gravador) Inicia uma gravação. (Este menu só funciona com um dispositivo que suporte gravação.)
(*gravador) Reserve Recording
(Reservar gravação)
Activa a função de reserva de gravação do gravador.
(Esta função só está disponível para dispositivos que suportem a função de reserva de gravação.)
Parar gravação: (*gravador) Pára a gravação.
Receptor O som é reproduzido através do receptor.
Continua...
Aplicação
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)►
Content Library
Internet@TV
Centro rede domést.
U Mover EEnter R Voltar
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) : Não ▶
Desligar automat. : Sim
U Mover EEnter R Voltar
Ver TV
Lista dispos.
Gravação : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receptor : Lig.
Configurar
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:41:55 PMPortuguês - 47
❑ Botões do telecomando do televisor disponíveis no modo Anynet
+
Tipo de dispositivos Estado de funcionamento Botões disponíveis
Dispositivo Anynet
+
Depois de mudar para o dispositivo,
quando for apresentado no ecrã o
menu do dispositivo correspondente.
Botões numéricos
▲/▼/Botões ◄/►/ENTERE Botões coloridos / botão EXIT
Depois de mudar para o dispositivo,
enquanto reproduz um ficheiro
(Retroceder) / (Avançar) (Parar) /
(Reproduzir) / (Pausa)
Dispositivo com
sintonizador
incorporado
Depois de mudar para o dispositivo,
quando estiver a ver um programa
televisivo
Botão P /
Dispositivo de áudio Quando o receptor está activado
Botão = /
Botão M MUTE
N A função Anynet
+
só funciona quando a fonte activa no telecomando está definida para TV.
N O botão só funciona no estado de gravação.
N Não é possível controlar os dispositivos Anynet
+
utilizando os botões do televisor.
Só consegue controlar os dispositivos Anynet
+
utilizando o telecomando do televisor.
N O telecomando do televisor pode não funcionar sob determinadas condições. Neste caso, volte a seleccionar o dispositivo Anynet
+
.
N As funções Anynet
+
não funcionam com produtos de outros fabricantes.
N As operações , podem variar consoante o dispositivo.
N Se mais do que um dispositivo estiver ligado, são apresentados como (*gravador),
e se só estiver ligado um dispositivo, é apresentado como (*nome_dispositivo).
Gravação
Pode gravar um programa televisivo utilizando um gravador Samsung.
1. Carregue no botão TOOLS. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Gravação(gravador) e, em seguida,
carregue no botão ENTERE. A gravação começa.
N Quando houver mais do que um dispositivo de gravação
Se estiverem ligados vários dispositivos de gravação, estes são listados. Carregue
no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar um dispositivo de gravação e carregue no botão
ENTERE. A gravação começa.
N Se o dispositivo de gravação não for apresentado
seleccione Lista dispos. e carregue no botão vermelho para procurar dispositivos.
N Se carregar no botão grava o que estiver a ver no momento. Se estiver a ver um vídeo de outro dispositivo, esse vídeo é
gravado.
N Antes de gravar, verifique se a tomada da antena está devidamente ligada ao dispositivo de gravação, Para ligar correctamente
uma antena a um dispositivo de gravação, consulte o respectivo manual do utilizador.
U Mover EEnter R Voltar
Ver TV
Lista dispos.
Gravação : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receptor : Lig.
Configurar
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:41:56 PMPortuguês - 48
Ouvir através de um receptor
Pode ouvir o som através de um receptor em vez do altifalante do televisor.
1. Carregue no botão TOOLS. Carregue no botão ENTERE para seleccionar
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Receptor. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para
seleccionar Lig. ou Deslig..
N Se o receptor só suportar áudio, pode não aparecer na lista de dispositivos.
N O receptor funciona quando tiver ligado a tomada óptica de entrada do receptor
à tomada óptica de saída do televisor.
N Se o receptor (sistema home theater) estiver definido para Lig., o som é reproduzido
a partir da tomada óptica do televisor. Se o televisor apresentar um sinal DTV (antena), este vai enviar som de 5.1 canais para o
receptor home theater. Se a fonte for um componente digital, como um leitor de DVD, e estiver ligada ao televisor através de um
cabo HDMI, só pode ouvir som de 2 canais a partir do receptor home theater.
N Quando utilizar a função Med ia Play, o som pode não ser reproduzido correctamente através do receptor.
N Quando estiver a ouvir através do receptor, há restrições à utilização dos menus de áudio.
N Se houver uma falha na alimentação do televisor, enquanto Receptor estiver definido para Lig. (devido a o cabo de alimentação
não estar ligado, ou por causa de uma falha na alimentação), a opção Seleccionar Altifalante pode ser configurada para
Altifalante Exter. quando voltar a ligar o televisor. (Consulte a página 21)
Resolução de problemas para a função Anynet
+
Sintoma Solução
O Anynet
+
não funciona. • Verifique se o dispositivo é um dispositivo Anynet
+
. O sistema Anynet
+
só suporta dispositivos
Anynet
+
.
• Ligue apenas um receptor (sistema home theater).
• Verifique se o cabo de alimentação do dispositivo Anynet
+
está ligado correctamente.
• Verifique as ligações dos cabos de vídeo/áudio/HDMI 1.3 do dispositivo Anynet
+
.
• Verifique se a aplicação Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) está definida para Lig. no menu de
configuração do Anynet
+
.
• Verifique se o telecomando do televisor está no modo TV.
• Verifique se é um telecomando exclusivo para Anynet
+
.
• A função Anynet
+
não funciona em algumas situações. (pesquisa de canais, utilização das
funções Media Play, Plug & Play, etc.)
• Quando ligar ou remover o cabo HDMI 1.3, certifique-se de que procura novamente
dispositivos ou que desliga e volta a ligar o televisor.
• Verifique se a função
+
do dispositivo Anynet
+
está activada.
Quero iniciar a função Anynet
+
. • Verifique se o dispositivo Anynet
+
está ligado correctamente ao televisor e se a aplicação
Anynet
+
(HDMICEC) está definida para Lig. no menu de configuração do Anynet
+
.
• Carregue no botão TV do telecomando para mudar para o televisor. Em seguida, carregue no
botão TOOLS para ver o menu Anynet
+
e seleccione o menu pretendido.
Quero sair da função Anynet
+
. • Seleccione Ver TV no menu Anynet
+
.
• Carregue no botão SOURCE do telecomando do televisor e seleccione um dispositivo que
não seja Anynet
+
. (O botão de canal só funciona quando não estiver ligado um dispositivo
Anynet
+
com o sintonizador incorporado.)
A mensagem Ligação ao
dispositivo Anynet
+
aparece no ecrã.
• Não pode utilizar o telecomando enquanto estiver a configurar a função Anynet
+
ou a mudar
para um modo de visualização.
• Utilize o telecomando quando tiver terminado a definição da função Anynet
+
ou a mudança
para o modo de visualização.
O dispositivo Anynet
+
não
reproduz dados.
• Não pode utilizar a função de reprodução enquanto a aplicação Plug & Play estiver em
execução.
O dispositivo ligado não é
apresentado.
• Verifique se o dispositivo suporta as funções Anynet
+
.
• Verifique se o cabo HDMI 1.3 está ligado correctamente.
• Verifique se a aplicação Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) está definida para Lig. no menu de
configuração do Anynet
+
.
• Procure novamente dispositivos Anynet
+
.
• Pode ligar um dispositivo Anynet
+
utilizando o cabo HDMI 1.3. Alguns cabos HDMI podem não
suportar funções Anynet
+
.
• Se for interrompido por uma situação anómala, tal como a desconexão do cabo HDMI ou do
cabo de alimentação, ou por uma falha na corrente, repita a procura de dispositivos.
Não consigo gravar o programa
televisivo.
• Verifique se a tomada da antena do dispositivo de gravação está ligada correctamente.
O som do televisor não é
reproduzido através do receptor.
• Ligue o cabo óptico entre o televisor e o receptor.
U Mover EEnter R Voltar
Ver TV
Lista dispos.
Gravação : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receptor : Lig.
Configurar
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 48 10/20/2009 4:41:56 PMPortuguês - 49
Activar a Content Library
A Content Library permite-lhe ver ou reproduzir os conteúdos incorporados no televisor
ou guardados no dispositivo USB.
1. Carregue no botão MENU. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Aplicação
e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Content Library e, em seguida,
carregue no botão ENTERE. Aparece o menu principal da aplicação
Content Library.
O Carregue no botão CONTENT do telecomando para ver o menu principal da
aplicação Content Library.
3. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► para seleccionar um ícone (Galeria, Culinária,
Crianças, Bem-estar, Outros, Gestão de conteúdos) e, em seguida, carregue
no botão ENTERE.
N O item seleccionado é executado.
❑ Utilizar os botões do telecomando no menu Content Library
Botão Operações
▲/▼/◄/► Desloca o cursor e selecciona um item.
ENTERE Escolhe o item actualmente seleccionado.
RETURN Volta ao menu anterior.
EXIT Pára a função actual e volta ao menu principal da aplicação Content Library.
Botões coloridos Botão que disponibiliza funções descritas na página correspondente.
Pode controlar o volume dos conteúdos reproduzidos.
CONTENT Entra ou sai do modo Content Library.
N Se carregar no botão de volume ou MMUTE não é apresentado qualquer OSD, mas a função funciona em conformidade.
N Para voltar ao modo TV, carregue no botão P do telecomando.
N A APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY CONTÉM TEXTO, GRÁFICOS, IMAGENS, MULTIMÉDIA E OUTROS MATERIAIS
PARA FINS MERAMENTE PROMOCIONAIS E INFORMATIVOS. OS MATERIAIS DA APLICAÇÃO CONTENT
LIBRARY FORAM MODIFICADOS E CONTINUAM A SER REVISTOS E ACTUALIzADOS. OS MATERIAIS DA
APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY PODEM NÃO SER ADEQUADOS PARA TODOS OS PÚBLICOS.
N AS INFORMAÇÕES DA APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY SÃO DISPONIBILIzADAS “SEM TRATAMENTO PRÉVIO”.
EMBORA AS INFORMAÇÕES DISPONIBILIzADAS AOS UTILIzADORES NA APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY
SEJAM OBTIDAS DE FONTES QUE ACREDITAMOS SEREM FIÁVEIS, A SAMSUNG NÃO PODE GARANTIR, NEM
GARANTE, A PRECISÃO, A VALIDADE, A PERTINÊNCIA OU A INTEGRIDADE DE QUAISQUER INFORMAÇÕES OU
DADOS DISPONIBILIzADOS AOS UTILIzADORES PARA UM FIM ESPECÍFICO.
EM NENHUMA CIRCUNSTÂNCIA, INCLUINDO NEGLIGÊNCIA, PODE A SAMSUNG SER RESPONSABILIzADA,
SEJA POR CONTRATO OU DELITO CIVIL, POR QUAISQUER DANOS DIRECTOS, INDIRECTOS, ACIDENTAIS,
ESPECIAIS OU CONSEQUENCIAIS, HONORÁRIOS DE ADVOGADOS, DESPESAS OU QUAISQUER OUTROS
DANOS RESULTANTES DE, OU RELACIONADOS COM, A UTILIzAÇÃO DA APLICAÇÃO CONTENT LIBRARY OU
QUALQUER INFORMAÇÃO CONTIDA NA MESMA, AINDA QUE AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE OCORRÊNCIA DE
TAIS DANOS.
Content Library
Aplicação
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
Content Library
Internet@TV
Centro rede domést.
< >
Culinária Crianças
Galeria
Galeria
Content Library
Bem-estar Outros
Voltar Sair
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 49 10/20/2009 4:41:57 PMPortuguês - 50
Utilizar a Content Library
❑ Galeria
Esta função reproduz uma apresentação de diapositivos com imagens de alta resolução e música de fundo.
Utilizando a função Galeria do televisor, pode alterar o ambiente.
N Carregue no botão INFO para visualizar o nome do artista e informações detalhadas em inglês para cada imagem
(actualmente, a informação está apenas disponível em inglês).
N Pode fazer uma pausa na apresentação de diapositivos carregando no botão ENTERE durante a mesma.
N Os direitos de autor dos conteúdos da opção Galeria e todos os assuntos relacionados com os mesmos são reservados pela
Timespace / JoongAng M&B, Inc.
❑ Culinária
Pode visualizar várias receitas que pode facilmente seguir passo a passo. Desfrute destes conteúdos que lhe oferecem ideias
fantásticas para refeições.
N As receitas apresentadas nos conteúdos da opção Culinária do televisor Samsung são baseadas em receitas publicadas pela
Anness Publishing.
N Os direitos de autor dos conteúdos da opção Culinária e todos os assuntos relacionados com os mesmos são reservados pela
Practical Pictures.
❑ Crianças
Inclui conteúdos educacionais e interactivos que as crianças podem ver várias vezes. Desfrute de histórias, músicas e jogos
existentes com as personagens Boowa e Kwala.
N Os direitos de autor dos conteúdos da opção Crianças e todos os assuntos relacionados com os mesmos são reservados pela
UpToTen.
❑ Bem-estar
Inclui conteúdos benéficos de gestão de saúde que fornecem exercícios de alongamento e sons que podem ser desfrutados por
toda a família.
❑ Gestão de conteúdos
Os meus conteúdos
A utilização dos conteúdos é igual à utilização dos conteúdos da memória do televisor. Além disso, pode eliminar e reproduzir
todos os conteúdos.
USB
Pode transferir os conteúdos para um dispositivo de memória USB e reproduzi-los no seu televisor. Os conteúdos do dispositivo
USB externo são reproduzidos directamente.
N A aplicação Content Library suporta dispositivos de classe de armazenamento de massa USB (MSC). MSC é um dispositivo
de transporte em volume de classe de armazenamento de massa. São exemplos de MSC as mini-unidades USB e os leitores
de cartões flash (os USB HDD e HUB não são suportados).
N Jogar utilizando um dispositivo de memória USB externo permite gravar o jogo (consoante o jogo). Tenha cuidado uma vez que
remover o dispositivo de memória USB durante a gravação dos dados no mesmo pode levar à perda dos dados.
N Transferir novos conteúdos
São disponibilizados novos conteúdos, diferentes dos conteúdos incorporados, através do website Samsung.com, de forma
gratuita. Quando transferir conteúdos pagos, precisa do número UDN para os transferir. Verifique o número UDN antes de
transferir um novo item de conteúdo.
1. Visite o website www.samsung.com
2. Seleccione um item de conteúdo na página de Transferência de conteúdos.
3. Transfira os conteúdos para o dispositivo de memória USB.
4. Vá para o menu principal da aplicação Content Library carregando no botão CONTENT ou escolhendo Content Library
(Menu → Aplicação → Content Library)
5. Introduza a memória USB na porta USB existente na parte lateral do televisor.
6. Pode ver o subitem de conteúdo que transferiu.
7. Seleccione um item de conteúdo e carregue no botão enter.
8. Pode reproduzir o item do conteúdo seleccionado.
Configurar
• Tempo exec. protec. ecrã → 10 min. / 20 min. / 40 min. / 1 hora
Seleccione esta opção para definir o tempo de espera antes de ser apresentada a protecção de ecrã.
• Guardar UDN (Número de Dispositivo Único)
O número de 18 dígitos no ecrã é o código do produto.
Pode guardar o UDN na sua memória USB.
N Um dispositivo de armazenamento USB de formato NTFS não suporta a opção Guardar UDN. Recomenda-se a utilização de
um dispositivo de armazenamento USB de formato FAT.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 50 10/20/2009 4:41:57 PMPortuguês - 51
Pode utilizar vários serviços da Internet que contêm informações úteis e conteúdos de entretenimento.
Se tiver algum problema ao utilizar o serviço widget, contacte o fornecedor de conteúdo. No widget, carregue no botão verde e obtenha
informação sobre o contacto ou consulte o website de ajuda para obter informações sobre o fornecedor do serviço widget.
N Consoante a região, pode ser suportado apenas o inglês no serviço widget.
N Dependendo do país, esta função pode não ser suportada.
Introdução à aplicação Internet@TV
Internet@TV oferece Internet integrada e a experiência televisiva fornecida pela Yahoo!® Widget Engine. Pode seguir as bolsas de
valores, partilhar fotografias com os amigos e a família e acompanhar as notícias e a meteorologia através do serviço Internet@TV no
seu televisor.
N Se as condições de rede forem instáveis, esta função pode não funcionar. Assim, o televisor desliga-se automaticamente.
Caso contrário, desligue o televisor utilizando o botão de alimentação.
N Quando utilizar esta função, o funcionamento pode ser lento ou ter interferências, devido às condições da rede.
Quando utilizar a função Internet@TV pela primeira vez, as definições básicas ocorrem automaticamente.
N O primeiro passo consiste em definir a sua rede. Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar a rede,
consulte ‘Configurar a rede’.
N Após a sua rede estar operacional, o software da aplicação Internet@TV guia-o através do assistente de configuração
passo a passo.
Internet@TV
All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or ther
intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content
or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly
authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create
derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY IS WITH YOU. THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND
SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE DEVICE AND ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER
EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG
DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE
MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE, CONTENT OR SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF THE DEVICE, OR ANY
CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access may be disabled at any time, without notice, and
Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are
transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of
this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption, disabling, removal of or suspension of any
content or service made available through this device. Samsung may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any
case and without notice or liability. Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question
or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers.
1. Carregue no botão MENU. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Application e, em seguida, carregue no botão
ENTERE.
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Internet@TV e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
O A aplicação INTERNET@TV é iniciada.
O Carregue no botão INTERNET@ do telecomando para visualizar o menu
Internet@TV.
3. O texto General Disclaimer é apresentado no ecrã. Seleccione I accept ou I do
not accept.
N Para obter mais informações sobre o texto General Disclaimer,
consulte ‘Legal Notice’.
4. O “ecrã de boas-vindas” é o ponto de partida da configuração guiada da aplicação
Internet@TV.
N Se seleccionar Exit Setup, este passo é retomado quando carregar no botão
INTERNET@.
N Seleccione Let’s get started!
5. A escolha da sua localização permite aos Widgets TV utilizar conteúdos no seu
idioma.
N Seleccione o país a partir da lista fornecida.
6. É necessário aceitar a Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine Política de privacidade de forma a poder utilizar a Internet@TV.
N Seleccione OK, I Accept.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 51 10/20/2009 4:41:58 PMPortuguês - 52
7. É necessário aceitar os Yahoo!® TV Widget System Terms of Service (Termos do serviço) de forma a poder utilizar a Internet@TV.
N Seleccione OK, I Accept.
8. Introduza o seu nome para configurar o seu perfil. Cada perfil tem a sua própria
lista de widgets. Pode criar um perfil para cada pessoa que utiliza a Internet@TV.
N Introduza o nome e seleccione Save this name.
N Para obter mais informações, consulte a ‘Utilizar o widget Profile’.
9. Internet@TV verifica a ligação à rede.
N Se o teste falhar, configure novamente a rede.
N Para obter mais informações, consulte as ‘Setting the Network.
10. A configuração guiada está concluída. Em seguida, é apresentado um tutorial
sobre como utilizar a Internet@TV.
N Seleccione Continue para visualizar o tutorial.
N Seleccione Exit setup para iniciar a utilização da Internet@TV.
N Para executar o tutorial novamente, seleccione Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial.
11. Carregue no botão INTERNET@ do telecomando para visualizar a interface de utilizador da Internet@TV.
❑ Descrição do ecrã
Modo de ancoragem
1 Uma faixa de boas-vindas é apresentada com o nome do seu perfil no
canto superior direito.
N Esta faixa desaparece após um curto espaço de tempo.
2 A faixa realça dois atalhos do telecomando.
N Se carregar no botão azul (Viewport) do telecomando, a visualização
alterna entre ‘modo Viewport’ e ‘modo Overlay’. No modo Viewport,
o televisor ou o vídeo reproduz imagens numa área reduzida
com gráficos fora dessa área. No modo Overlay, os gráficos são
sobrepostos no televisor ou vídeo.
N Se carregar no botão amarelo (Edit Snippet) do telecomando,
é apresentada uma janela de ajuda e o snippet realçado pode ser
editado.
3 Carregue no botão INTERNET@ do telecomando para começar.
N A lista horizontal no fundo do ecrã do televisor chama-se ‘ancoragem’.
N Os itens da lista chamam-se ‘snippets’.
N Um snippet é um atalho que inicia um Widget TV.
N Um Widget TV é uma aplicação da Internet concebida para ser executada no televisor.
N Desloque-se entre snippets carregando nos botões ◄ ou ► do telecomando.
N O destaque é feito no lado esquerdo (realçado a azul).
N A ancoragem faz deslizar snippets para debaixo deste ponto central.
N Inicie um Widget TV ao carregar no botão ENTERE do telecomando quando o snippet está focado.
N Quando adiciona snippets, estes formam uma lista pela qual pode navegar carregando nos botões ▲ ou ▼.
N Dois Widgets TV específicos aparecem na ancoragem : O Profile Widget e o Gallery Widget. Estes não podem ser
eliminados.
N A ancoragem desaparece do ecrã após um período de pausa.
Modo Barra lateral
1 Realce um snippet e carregue no botão ENTERE para iniciar a barra
lateral do Widget TV. O logótipo do Widget TV e Home ( ) encontramse no topo da barra lateral.
2 O menu actual é apresentado abaixo do logótipo do Widget TV.
N Para voltar ao ecrã anterior, seleccione-o e carregue no botão
ENTERE.
N Também pode carregar no botão RETURN do telecomando.
3 A selecção actual é sempre realçada a azul. O botão realçado fica em
destaque e é activado quando carrega no botão ENTERE.
4 Quando existem muito dados, é utilizado um controlo de página.
N A página actual e a totalidade das páginas são apresentadas.
N Desloque-se entre as páginas carregando nos botões ◄ ou ►.
5 A barra de ferramentas na parte inferior inclui botões coloridos que correspondem aos botões vermelho, verde, amarelo e azul
no telecomando.
• Botão vermelho : Fechar o widget.
• Botão verde : Alterar a definição do widget.
• Botão amarelo : Gerir os seus snippets.
• Botão azul : Dimensionar o vídeo de forma a ajustar-se ao ecrã ou expandi-lo até ocupar o ecrã inteiro.
N Alguns botões podem não estar disponíveis consoante o widget.
.@# áëí space
a b c d e f g h i
j k l m n o p q r
s t u v w x y z 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 52 10/20/2009 4:42:00 PMPortuguês - 53
Editar Snippets na Ancoragem
1. Edite um snippet realçando-o na ancoragem e carregando no botão amarelo.
2. O snippet move-se para a segunda posição e o mosaico respectivo desliza para cima de forma a apresentar o texto de ajuda
seguinte :
• Eliminar (botão vermelho) : Remover este Widget TV.
N Os widgets eliminados podem ser reinstalados utilizando a Widget Gallery.
• Mover (botão azul) : Encomendar novamente o snippet. Carregue nos botões ◄ ou ► para se deslocar. Carregue no botão
amarelo para largar o snippet na nova posição.
• Terminar (botão amarelo) : Sair do menu Edit Snippet.
Utilizar o widget Profile
O widget Profile configura o perfil de utilizador. Pode configurar vários perfis e cada perfil mantém a sua
própria lista de widgets.
O menu Switch Profile permite-lhe mudar para um perfil de utilizador diferente.
N Devem ser registados, no mínimo, dois perfis. Se pretender adicionar um perfil,
consulte ‘Administrative Controls’.
O menu Profile Settings permite-lhe personalizar e proteger o perfil.
• Os perfis dos utilizadores podem ser personalizados com um Name e um Avatar
(uma imagem utilizada para representar o perfil) únicos.
• O Name do perfil e o Avatar são apresentados no snippet do perfil na ancoragem.
• Os perfis podem ser protegidos com a opção Create Profile PIN.
N Quando definir o PIN pela primeira vez, pode definir uma pergunta de segurança.
O menu Profile Settings pode limitar o acesso a widgets.
• Caso se esqueça do Profile PIN pode responder a uma Security Question que está associada ao
seu perfil.
• Um perfil que tenha o indicador Limit Profile ligado não lhe permite instalar novos widgets.
Defina o PIN do proprietário para utilizar esta função.
N Para definir o PIN do proprietário, consulte ‘Administrative Controls’.
O menu System Settings permite-lhe :
• Modifique a Location e defina o zip Code (apenas EUA) para adaptar o conteúdo à sua região.
• Repeat Tutorial apresentado durante a configuração guiada.
• Restore Factory Settings para eliminar todas as configurações e informações dos widgets.
No menu Administrative Controls pode :
• Definir o intervalo de Screen Saver para evitar danificar o ecrã.
• Create Owner PIN e definir a Security Question para controlar outros perfis.
• Create um novo Profile que pode ser configurado com um conjunto diferente de widgets.
• Eliminar um perfil existente.
A partir do widget Profile pode Sign in to Yahoo!® utilizando a Yahoo! ID.
• Se tiver uma ID da Yahoo!, pode aceder ao seu conteúdo personalizado da Yahoo!® TV Widgets
• Todos os Widgets TV da Yahoo! que estão instalados são automaticamente registados no seu perfil da Yahoo! ID.
• Se não tiver uma conta Yahoo!, visite www.yahoo.com e crie uma.
• Pode não conseguir iniciar sessão com uma ID criada no website da Yahoo num país que não suporte a aplicação Internet@TV.
❑ O widget Profile
Carregar no botão verde.
Pode ver uma breve descrição das opções Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, e Privacy Policy.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 53 10/20/2009 4:42:00 PMPortuguês - 54
Utilizar a Yahoo!® Widget Gallery
Utilize a Yahoo!® Widget Gallery para adicionar mais widgets ao televisor.
Veja os Widgets TV disponíveis nas categorias seguintes :
• Latest Widgets : Mostra os widgets recentemente actualizados.
• Yahoo!® Widgets : Apresenta os widgets disponibilizados pela Yahoo!®.
• Samsung Widgets : Apresenta os widgets disponibilizados pela Samsung.
• Mais Categorias : Apresenta todos os widgets por categoria.
N Para instalar um widget, vá ao ecrã de detalhes, seleccione Add Widget to My Profile e carregue
no botão ENTERE. O widget é instalado e fica disponível na ancoragem.
❑ Definições da opção Widget Gallery
Carregue no botão verde.
About Yahoo! Widget Gallery...
Pode ver breves informações sobre Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service,
e Privacy Policy.
No menu Definições do programador pode criar o seu próprio widget. Para obter mais informações
sobre como criar o seu próprio widget, visite o nosso site para programadores no endereço http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/
Utilizar o Yahoo!® Weather Widget
O Yahoo!® Weather Widget fornece-lhe informações actualizadas sobre as suas localizações
meteorológicas favoritas. O conteúdo muda de forma dinâmica com as condições meteorológicas.
• Carregue no botão verde do telecomando para visualizar o menu das Settings do Yahoo!®
Weather Widget.
• A partir do menu das Settings pode adicionar ou eliminar uma localidade sobre a qual pretende
ver as informações meteorológicas.
No menu Settings :
• Add New City introduzindo o nome da localidade. Uma vez os resultados apresentados, seleccione
a localidade que pretende e carregue no botão ENTERE.
• Delete City seleccionando a localidade que pretende eliminar da lista de localidades. Carregue no
botão ENTERE e confirme a eliminação.
• Alterar o modo de indicação da temperatura.
Pode alterar o modo de indicação da temperatura para Imperial ou Metric. Por exemplo, a opção
Imperial mostra a temperatura em Fahrenheit e a opção Metric em Celsius.
❑ Crie um snippet para a localidade favorita.
• Seleccione a localidade na página inicial do Yahoo!® Weather Widget e visualize as informações meteorológicas detalhadas.
• Carregar no botão amarelo.
• Seleccione o menu Add Snippet e carregue em ENTERE para adicionar a localidade como um snippet.
❑ Delete um snippet de uma localidade.
• Iniciar o snippet.
• Carregar no botão amarelo.
• Seleccionar o menu Eliminar snippet e carregar em ENTERE para remover o snippet.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 54 10/20/2009 4:42:01 PMPortuguês - 55
Utilizar o Yahoo!® News Widget
O Yahoo!® News Widget fornece-lhe as últimas manchetes de notícias sobre negócios,
entretenimento, política, desporto, destaques e muitas outras categorias.
Seleccione uma categoria, seleccione uma manchete de acordo com a categoria e visualize de forma
dinâmica o sumário de notícias actualizado.
Utilizar o Yahoo!® Flickr Widget
O Flickr Widget pode disponibilizar-lhe o acesso às suas fotografias favoritas de amigos e família
enquanto vê televisão. Partilhe as suas fotografias com a sua família no grande ecrã do seu televisor
através de uma apresentação de diapositivos.
• Personalize o Flickr Widget registando-se na Yahoo! ID.
• Para obter informações detalhadas sobre os procedimentos de início de sessão, consulte as
instruções de ‘Utilizar o widget Profile’.
• Para obter mais informações sobre o Flickr, visite http://www.flickr.com.
N Your Photos apresenta fotografias que registou com o website do Flickr.
Para visualizar fotografias do Flickr numa apresentação de diapositivos :
• Seleccione uma fotografia em miniatura e carregue no botão ENTERE para visualizar
os detalhes da fotografia.
• Iniciar apresentação de dipositivos e carregue no botão ENTERE.
Para controlar a visualização da apresentação de diapositivos :
• Carregue no botão ENTERE durante a apresentação de diapositivos.
• As miniaturas das fotografias são apresentadas na parte inferior do ecrã.
N Quando o controlo da apresentação de diapositivos é apresentado, pode utilizar as opções Pause, Play e Stop durante
a apresentação.
N Se seleccionar o menu e carregar em ENTERE, pode visualizar as informações da fotografia seleccionada.
• O menu Your Sets permite-lhe visualizar fotografias que classificou no Flickr.
• O menu Explore permite-lhe explorar as fotografias incluídas no website do Flickr. Pode visualizar as fotografias actualizadas
diariamente.
• O menu Mark as Favorite ou Remove From Favorite move as fotografias para o conjunto de fotografias favoritas ou remove
as mesmas.
• O menu Favorite Photos permite-lhe visualizar fotografias que classificou como favoritas.
• O menu Your Contacts permite-lhe visualizar as actualizações efectuadas pela família e pelos amigos.
O menu Your Groups permite-lhe seleccionar os seus grupos favoritos do website do Flickr para partilhar e desfrutar fotografias
com os utilizadores da comunidade Flickr.
Para configurar as definições do Yahoo!® Flickr Widget carregue no botão verde do telecomando.
• O menu Time Per Slide controla a velocidade da apresentação de diapositivos.
• O menu Repeat reinicia a apresentação de diapositivos desde o início após a última fotografia ser apresentada.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 55 10/20/2009 4:42:02 PMPortuguês - 56
Utilizar o Yahoo!® Finance Widget
Apresenta informações sobre o mercado bolsista e as últimas notícias da bolsa com o Yahoo!® Finance
Widget. Carregue no botão verde para definir as suas acções. Utilize o menu Add New Symbol para
introduzir o nome de uma acção nova.
• Seleccione a acção que pretende adicionar a partir dos resultados da pesquisa, seleccione o menu
Adicionar símbolo e carregue no botão ENTERE.
N A acção seleccionada é adicionada à lista My Stocks.
• Utilize o menu Import Symbols From Yahoo!® para recuperar o portfólio do Yahoo!® Finance.
- O menu Merge Symbols combina os símbolos do Yahoo!® Finance Widget com os símbolos
do seu portfólio.
- O menu Replace Symbols elimina os símbolos do Yahoo!® Finance Widget e substitui os
mesmos por símbolos do seu portfólio.
• Utilize o menu Display Format para modificar a transição da flutuação do preço das acções para
Value ou Percentage.
• Crie um snippet para uma acção favorita.
- Seleccione o símbolo da acção na página inicial do Yahoo!® Weather Widget e visualize as
informações financeiras detalhadas.
- Carregar no botão amarelo.
- Seleccione o menu Add Snippet e carregue em ENTERE para adicionar a acção como um snippet.
• Delete um snippet
- Inicia o snippet da ancoragem
- Carregar no botão amarelo.
- Seleccione o menu Delete Snippet e carregue em ENTERE para remover o snippet.
Resolução de problemas da aplicação Internet@TV
Problema Solução possível
Alguns serviços widget não
funcionam.
• Fale com o fornecedor de serviço.
• No widget, carregue no botão verde e obtenha informação sobre contactos ou consulte o
website de ajuda para obter informações sobre o fornecedor de serviço widget.
• Consulte a página de Ajuda do website.
Alguns conteúdos de widgets
são apenas em inglês. Como
posso mudar o idioma?
• O idioma do conteúdo widget pode ser diferente do idioma da interface de utilizador do widget.
Depende do fornecedor de serviço.
Após a reposição dos valores
predefinidos, o serviço Yahoo
Widget não funciona e é
apresentada uma mensagem
de aviso.
• Desligue e volta a ligar o televisor após a reposição dos valores predefinidos. Em seguida,
reinicie a aplicação Internet@TV.
No widget Flickr, registo-me na
minha conta, mas não consigo
ver a minha fotografia.
• Visite o website Yahoo, e active a sua conta Flickr na Yahoo! ID.
No widget Profile, mudei a
localidade, mas aparecem as
definições anteriores.
• Desligue e volte a ligar o televisor. Em seguida reinicie a aplicação Internet@TV.
• Agora pode desfrutar dos serviços widget suportados na localidade alterada.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 56 10/20/2009 4:42:02 PMPortuguês - 57
Website de ajuda
País Website
Áustria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Bélgica
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
República Checa www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Dinamarca www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finlândia www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
França www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Alemanha www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Grécia www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungria www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Irlanda www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Itália www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Países Baixos www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Noruega www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Polónia www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Eslováquia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Espanha www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suécia www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suíça
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Reino Unido www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turquia www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estónia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Letónia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lituânia www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Rússia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ucrânia www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N O passo pode ser alterado posteriormente.
N As ligações podem ser diferentes para países com estatuto especial.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 57 10/20/2009 4:42:02 PMPortuguês - 58
N Consoante a região, pode ser suportado apenas o inglês no serviço widget.
N Se tiver algum problema ao utilizar o serviço widget, contacte o fornecedor de conteúdo. No widget, carregue no botão verde e
obtenha informação sobre o contacto ou consulte o website de ajuda para obter informações sobre o fornecedor do serviço widget.
N Consoante a região, pode ser suportado apenas o inglês no serviço widget.
Introdução à aplicação Internet@TV
O Internet@TV disponibiliza serviços widget da SAMSUNG através de uma ligação à rede. Pode alterar os conteúdos do Internet@TV
consoante o fornecedor dos conteúdos. Pode aceder a várias informações, como o YouTube, através do serviço Internet@TV.
N Se um determinado tipo de letra de um conteúdo fornecido pelo fornecedor de conteúdos não for suportado pelo televisor,
este pode não ser visualizado normalmente.
N A configuração dos widgets e dos serviços disponibilizados pode diferir consoante o país seleccionado. Após alterar o país,
desligue e volte a ligar o televisor. Em seguida, pode utilizar o serviço widget suportado no país seleccionado. Se País estiver
definido para Outros, o televisor não consegue reconhecer o seu país. Nesse caso, seleccione-o directamente a partir da lista de
países do serviço.
N Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar o seu país, consulte as instruções em ‘Função Plug & Play’.
N Quando utilizar esta função, o funcionamento pode ser lento ou ter interferências, devido às condições da rede.
N Antes de utilizar a aplicação Internet@TV, configure a rede. Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar a rede,
consulte ‘‘Configurar a rede’.
Quando executar o Internet@TV pela primeira vez, as definições básicas são utilizadas automaticamente. A actualização pode demorar
alguns minutos.
1. Carregue no botão MENU. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Application e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
2. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Internet@TV e, em seguida,
carregue no botão ENTERE.
O Carregue no botão INTERNET@ do telecomando para ver o menu
Internet@TV.
3. O Acordo do utilizador é apresentado. Seleccione Agree para aceitar o acordo.
4. A Estatística e análise é apresentada. Seleccione Agree para aceitar o acordo.
Configurar a aplicação Internet@TV
Pode verificar e utilizar os menus relativos a Single Sign On (SSO), à gestão do sistema e às propriedades.
Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Setup e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
❑ Single Sign On
Pode utilizar este menu quando criar ou eliminar a conta.
Se utilizar o Single Sign On, pode controlar a sua conta, incluindo as informações relativas à conta no site dos conteúdos.
Não é necessário um início de sessão adicional.
N A conta é apenas para o internet@TV.
Create Account
Pode criar uma conta e estabelecer a ligação ao site do serviço desejado.
N Poderá ter até 10 contas.
N A conta deverá ter até 10 caracteres.
N Se nenhum serviço necessitar de início de sessão, não é possível criar uma conta.
Account Management
• Service Site: Pode registar as informações de início de sessão do site do serviço (como o YouTube).
• Change Password: Altere a palavra-passe da sua conta.
• Delete: Elimine a conta.
N Se se esquecer da palavra-passe da conta, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela sequência seguinte, que reinicia a
aplicação Internet@TV : POWER (desligar) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (ligar).
Se utilizar esta função, todas as contas são eliminadas.
Internet@TV
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 58 10/20/2009 4:42:03 PMPortuguês - 59
❑ System Setup
N As funções Ticker Autorun, Ticker Duration podem não ser suportadas, consoante o país.
Change the Service Lock password
N A palavra-passe predefinida de um televisor novo é ‘0-0-0-0’.
N Caso se esqueça da palavra-passe, carregue nos botões do telecomando pela sequência seguinte, repondo a palavra-passe
para ‘0-0-0-0’ : POWER (desligar) → MMUTE → 9 → 4 → 8 → POWER (ligar).
Service Duration
Seleccione esta opção para definir o tempo de duração do serviço antes de ser apresentada a protecção de ecrã.
Ticker Autorun → Off / On
Seleccione esta opção para definir o ticker para ser ou não executado automaticamente quando liga o televisor.
Ticker Duration
Seleccione esta opção para definir o tempo de duração do serviço antes de ser apresentada a protecção de ecrã.
❑ Properties
Mostra as informações sobre a aplicação Internet@TV.
Pode medir a velocidade do seu serviço Internet TV utilizando a opção Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service.
Utilizar o serviço Internet@TV
Num widget que apresente vários menus de categoria, pode ver os conteúdos dos menus de categoria utilizando os botões ◄ e ►.
Início de sessão da conta
1. Carregue no botão vermelho.
2. Seleccione a User account desejada e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE.
3. Introduza a palavra-passe.
N Quando iniciar sessão, a conta de utilizador é apresentada no ecrã.
N Pelo menos uma ou mais contas devem estar registadas para iniciar sessão. Se pretender criar uma conta, consulte
‘Configurar a aplicação Internet@TV’.
Utilizar a opção Widget Gallery
Pode utilizar as opções Run Service, Lock, Install Service no widget existente e pode ver a descrição do serviço widget que não
está instalado.
Na aplicação Internet@TV, pode adicionar e utilizar vários widgets fornecidos pelo fornecedor do serviço. As condições podem
variar consoante o fornecedor do serviço.
• Run Service : Executa o serviço widget.
• Lock : Define o bloqueio do serviço.
• Install Service (ou Delete Service) : Instala ou elimina o serviço widget.
Utilizar o widget YouTube
Pode ver o filme fornecido pelo YouTube.
Se tiver uma conta no YouTube, registe as respectivas informações através da
gestão da conta. Em seguida, pode utilizar a categoria Os meus favoritos.
N O menu pode ser alterado pelo serviço web.
N Podem existir conteúdos inapropriados para crianças. Neste caso, utilize a
função Lock na aplicação Widget Gallery.
Xz~*atppo
_z{*]lpo
Xz~*[z{wl}
Xz~*Ot~n~~po
_z{*Qlz}tp~
Xz~*Wtyvpo
Xz~*]p~{zxopo
Qpl}po
_zol <:B
^ppvtyr*U~tnp*Opnlop~*Wlp}
atp~*E*C;
M}plvtyr*Yp~*Lwp}~*m*P8Xltw
atp~*E*C;
Mzz*Szz*ty*sp*Mzl}o}zzx
atp~*E*CE=A
Change Mode llrrChange page U Move EOK R Return
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 59 10/20/2009 4:42:03 PMPortuguês - 60
Resolução de problemas da aplicação Internet@TV
Problema Solução possível
Alguns serviços widget não funcionam. Consulte o fornecedor do serviço.
No widget, carregue no botão verde e obtenha as informações sobre os contactos ou
consulte o website de ajuda para obter informações do fornecedor do serviço widget.
Consulte a página do website de ajuda.
Qual é a vantagem de um único início
de sessão?
Se criar uma conta e registar as suas informações de início de sessão relativas ao
serviço desejado, pode aceder a conteúdos pessoais sem necessitar de um início de
sessão adicional.
Quando ocorre um erro na rede, não
posso utilizar outros menus para além
do menu de definição.
Se a ligação à rede não funcionar, o seu serviço pode ser limitado.
Porque todos os widgets, excepto o widget de definição (widget Profile, Widget Gallery)
necessitam de uma ligação à Internet.
É possível ver filmes para adultos no
YouTube?
Geralmente, estes encontram-se excluídos da lista do menu. Mas, se utilizar a função
de procura, pode vê-los. Nesse caso, se utilizar a aplicação Widget Gallery, bloqueia o
serviço widget.
Website de ajuda
País Website
Áustria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Bélgica
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
República Checa www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Dinamarca www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finlândia www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
França www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Alemanha www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Grécia www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungria www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Irlanda www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Itália www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Países Baixos www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Noruega www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Polónia www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Eslováquia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Espanha www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suécia www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Suíça
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Reino Unido www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turquia www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estónia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Letónia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lituânia www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Rússia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ucrânia www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
N O passo pode ser alterado posteriormente.
N As ligações podem ser diferentes para países com estatuto especial.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 60 10/20/2009 4:42:03 PMPortuguês - 61
Centro rede domést.
O Centro rede domést.
O Centro rede domést. liga televisores e telemóveis através de uma rede. Pode ver as chamadas recebidas, o conteúdo de
mensagens de texto e os compromissos definidos no telemóvel através do televisor utilizando a aplicação Centro rede domést..
Além disso, pode reproduzir os conteúdos multimédia guardados no telemóvel, como vídeos, fotografias e música importando-os
para o televisor através da rede.
N Se o dispositivo suportar a função DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller - Controlador multimédia digital), a função Centro rede
domést. fica disponível.
N Esta função é necessária para compatibilidade com o telemóvel da Samsung a ser, futuramente, lançado. Para mais informações,
vá a www.samsung.com ou contacte-nos através do centro de atendimento da Samsung. Pode ser necessário instalar software
adicional no dispositivo móvel. Para obter mais informações, consulte os respectivos manuais do utilizador.
❑ Ligar ao Centro rede domést.
Para obter mais informações sobre as definições de rede, consulte ‘Network Setup’.
Ligação através de uma rede Wi-Fi Ad-hoc
1. Ligue o ‘adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’ à porta USB1(HDD) ou USB2 do televisor.
2. Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar uma rede Ad-hoc, consulte ‘Configurar Rede’.
N Para obter mais informações sobre a configuração das definições de rede do telemóvel, consulte o manual do telemóvel.
3. Configure o endereço IP, o SSID e a palavra-passe do telemóvel na opção Definições Ad-hoc do mesmo, utilizando o Nome da
Rede (SSID) e a Chave de segurança (palavra-passe) apresentados no televisor.
Ligação através de um router IP com/sem fios
1. Ligue a porta LAN do televisor ao router IP com/sem fios utilizando o cabo LAN ou ligue as portas USB1 (HDD) ou USB2 do
televisor ao ‘adaptador de LAN sem fios da Samsung’.
N Para obter mais informações sobre os procedimentos de configuração do router com/sem fios e do telemóvel, consulte o
manual do dispositivo correspondente.
Centro rede domést.
Painel lateral do televisor
Adaptador de
LAN sem fios da
Samsung
Telemóvel
ou
Adaptador de
LAN sem fios da
Samsung
Router IP sem fios
Painel lateral do televisor
Telemóvel
ou
Cabo LAN
Adaptador de
LAN sem fios da
Samsung
Telemóvel Painel lateral do televisor
ou
Cabo LAN
Router IP sem fios
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 61 10/20/2009 4:42:09 PMPortuguês - 62
Configurar a aplicação Centro rede domést.
❑ Mensag. / Média
Mostra uma lista de telemóveis que foram configurados com este televisor para
utilizar a função Mensag ou Média.
N A função Media encontra-se disponível noutros dispositivos móveis que
suportem DLNA DMC.
Permit.
Autoriza o telemóvel.
Recus.
Bloqueia o telemóvel.
Elimin.
Elimina o telemóvel da lista.
N Esta função elimina apenas o nome da lista. Se o dispositivo móvel eliminado
for ligado ou tentar estabelecer uma ligação com o televisor, pode aparecer na lista.
❑ Config.
Mensag. → Ligado / Deslig.
Pode determinar se pretende utilizar a função Mensag. (as chamadas recebidas,
o conteúdos de mensagens de texto e os compromissos definidos no telemóvel).
Média → Ligado / Deslig.
Pode definir se pretende utilizar a função multimédia que reproduz os conteúdos
(vídeos, fotografias, música) a partir do telemóvel.
Nome de TV
Pode definir o nome do televisor para conseguir encontrar facilmente o televisor
no dispositivo móvel.
N Se seleccionar Ent. utiliz., pode escrever o nome do televisor com o teclado
no ecrã.
Voltar Sair
Centro rede domést.
111-1234-5671 : Permit.
111-1234-5672 : Permit.
111-1234-5673 : Recus.
111-1234-5674 : Recus.
Mensag.
Média
Configurar
Voltar Sair
Centro rede domést.
Mensag. : Lig.
Média : Lig.
Nome de TV : TV
Mensag.
Média
Configurar
Utilizar a função Mensag.
Com esta função, pode visualizar as chamadas recebidas, o conteúdo de mensagens de
texto e os compromissos definidos no telemóvel através da janela de alarme enquanto
vê televisão.
N Para desactivar esta janela de alarme da função Mensag. defina Mensag. para
Deslig. na opção Config. do Centro rede domést..
N A janela de alarme aparece durante 20 segundos. Se não carregar em qualquer
tecla ou se Cancelar estiver seleccionado, aparece até três vezes em intervalos
de 5 minutos.
N Se seleccionar OK, ou se OK não for seleccionado nas três vezes em que a
mensagem aparece, esta é eliminada. A mensagem não é eliminada do telemóvel.
N Pode ver a janela de alarme simples enquanto utiliza várias aplicações, como o
Media Play, Contents Library, etc. Neste caso, para ver os conteúdos da
mensagem, mude para o modo de visualização TV.
N Se for apresentada a mensagem de um telemóvel desconhecido, seleccione o telemóvel no item Mensag. do Centro rede domést.
e seleccione Recus. para bloquear o telefone.
❑ Visualizar mensagem
Se receber uma nova mensagem de texto (SMS) enquanto vê televisão, aparece a janela de alarme. Se clicar no botão OK,
o conteúdo da mensagem é apresentado.
N Pode configurar as definições de visualização dos conteúdos das mensagens de texto (SMS) no telemóvel. Para obter mais
informações sobre os procedimentos, consulte o manual do telemóvel.
N Alguns caracteres especiais podem aparecer em branco ou corrompidos.
❑ Alarme de chamada recebida
Se receber uma chamada enquanto vê televisão, aparece a janela de alarme.
❑ Alarme de compromisso
A janela de alarme aparece enquanto vê televisão e mostra os compromissos registados.
N Pode configurar as definições de visualização dos conteúdos de compromisso no telemóvel.
Para obter mais informações sobre os procedimentos, consulte o manual do telemóvel.
N Alguns caracteres especiais podem aparecer em branco ou corrompidos.
husband
SMS
Nova mensagem recebida
Quer ver os detalhes?
OK Canc.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 62 10/20/2009 4:42:13 PMPortuguês - 63
Utilizar a função Média
Aparece uma janela de alarme a informar o utilizador de que os conteúdos multimédia
(vídeos, fotografias, música) enviados do telemóvel serão apresentados no televisor.
Os conteúdos são reproduzidos automaticamente 3 segundos após a janela de
alarme aparecer.
Se carregar no botão RETURN ou EXIT quando a janela de alarme aparece, os
Conteúdos multimédia não são reproduzidos.
N Para desactivar a transmissão dos conteúdos multimédia do telemóvel, defina
Média para Desligado em Configurar do Centro rede domést..
N Os conteúdos podem não ser reproduzidos no televisor consoante a sua
resolução e formato.
❑ Botões de controlo da aplicação Media Play
Botão Operações
◄/►
• Move o cursor e selecciona um item.
• Enquanto reproduz um ficheiro de filme : Avança ou retrocede no ficheiro de filme.
ENTER
• Se carregar no botão ENTERE durante a reprodução, interrompe a mesma.
• Se carregar no botão ENTERE durante a pausa, retoma a reprodução.
RETURN Volta ao menu anterior.
TOOLS Executa várias funções a partir dos menus Fotografia, Música e Filme.
INFO Apresenta as informações do ficheiro.
EXIT Pára o modo Media Play e volta ao modo TV.
N Os botões ENTERE e ◄ / ► podem não funcionar consoante o tipo de conteúdos multimédia.
N Se utilizar o dispositivo móvel, pode controlar a reprodução dos dados multimédia. Para obter mais informações, consulte os
respectivos manuais do utilizador.
Fich. méd. s. repr. de “Dispositivo desconhecido 13”
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 63 10/20/2009 4:42:14 PMPortuguês - 64
Continua...
Função de teletexto
A maioria das estações de televisão fornece serviços de informação por escrito através da função de teletexto. A página de índice
remissivo do serviço de teletexto fornece informações sobre como utilizar o serviço. Além disso, pode seleccionar várias opções de
acordo com os seus requisitos, utilizando os botões do telecomando.
N Para que as informações de teletexto sejam apresentadas correctamente, é preciso que a recepção dos canais se processe em
boas condições. Caso contrário, podem faltar informações ou podem não aparecer algumas páginas.
1 : (sair)
Sair da visualização do teletexto.
2 6 (índice remissivo)
Botão utilizado para ver a página de índice remissivo (conteúdos) a qualquer
momento em que estiver a ver o teletexto.
3 5 (mostrar)
Botão utilizado para mostrar o texto oculto (respostas a questionários, por exemplo).
Para ver o ecrã normal, carregue novamente neste botão.
4 4 (tamanho)
Carregue neste botão para ver as letras com o dobro do tamanho na metade
superior do ecrã. Para ver a metade inferior do ecrã, carregue novamente neste
botão. Para ver o ecrã normal, carregue novamente neste botão.
5 / (apresentar/combinar teletexto)
Carregue neste botão para activar o modo de teletexto depois de seleccionar o
canal que disponibiliza o serviço de teletexto. Carregue duas vezes neste botão para
sobrepor o ecrã de transmissão actual ao teletexto.
6 8 (memorizar)
Botão utilizado para memorizar páginas de teletexto.
7 1 (página secundária)
Botão utilizado para ver a página secundária disponível.
8 2 (subir página)
Botão utilizado para ver a página de teletexto seguinte.
9 3 (descer página)
Botão utilizado para ver a página de teletexto anterior.
0 0 (modo)
Carregue neste botão para seleccionar o modo de teletexto (LIST/FLOF).
Se carregar neste botão no modo LIST, muda para o modo de memorização de
lista. No modo de lista de memorização, pode guardar a página de teletexto na lista
utilizando o botão 8(memorizar).
! 9 (parar)
Botão utilizado para manter o ecrã numa determinada página, se esta estiver ligada
a várias páginas secundárias que aparecem automaticamente de forma sequencial.
Para continuar, carregue novamente neste botão.
@ 7 (cancelar)
Botão utilizado para ver a emissão enquanto procura uma página.
# Botões coloridos (vermelho/verde/amarelo/azul)
Se a estação emissora utilizar o sistema FASTEXT, os diferentes tópicos
apresentados na página de teletexto aparecem codificados com cores e podem
ser seleccionados carregando nas teclas coloridas. Carregue num dos botões que
corresponda à cor pretendida. A página inclui outras informações a cores que podem
ser seleccionadas da mesma forma. Para ver a página anterior ou a página seguinte,
carregue no botão colorido correspondente.
N Pode mudar as páginas de teletexto carregando nos botões numéricos do telecomando.
Recomendações para a utilização
1
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 64 10/20/2009 4:42:14 PMPortuguês - 65
As páginas de teletexto estão divididas em seis categorias :
Parte Conteúdo
A Número da página seleccionada.
B Nome da estação emissora.
C Número da página actual ou indicações da procura.
D Data e hora.
E Texto.
F Informações sobre o estado. Informações FASTEXT.
N As informações do teletexto estão, muitas vezes, divididas em várias páginas
apresentadas de forma sequencial às quais pode aceder :
- Introduzindo o número da página
- Seleccionando um título numa lista
- Seleccionando um título a cores (sistema FASTEXT)
O Carregue no botão TV para sair do teletexto.
Especificações do kit de montagem na parede
Instale o suporte de montagem na parede numa parede sólida perpendicular ao chão.
Quando o fixar a outros materiais de construção, contacte o revendedor mais próximo.
Se o instalar no tecto ou numa parede inclinada, este pode cair e provocar ferimentos graves.
Família de produtos polegadas Espec. VESA (A * B) Parafuso padrão Quantidade
Televisor LCD
19" ~22" 100 * 100
M4
4
23"~29" 200 * 100
30"~40" 200 * 200 M6
46"~55" 400 * 400
57"~70" 800 * 400 M8
80" ~ 1400 * 800
Televisor plasma
42"~ 50" 400 * 400
M8 4
58"~ 63" 600 * 400
70" ~ 800 * 400
80" ~ 1400 * 800
N Fornecemos as medidas padrão para kits de montagem na parede, como mostra a tabela acima.
N Quando adquirir o nosso kit de montagem na parede, são fornecidos um manual de instalação detalhado e todas as peças
necessárias para a montagem.
N Não utilize parafusos com uma medida superior à padrão, pois podem danificar o interior do televisor.
N No que se refere aos suportes de montagem na parede que não respeitem as especificações VESA para parafusos padrão,
o comprimento dos parafusos pode variar consoante as respectivas especificações.
N Não utilize parafusos que não cumpram as especificações VESA para parafusos padrão. Não aperte demasiado os parafusos, pois
pode danificar o produto ou fazê-lo cair, provocando ferimentos. A Samsung não se responsabiliza por este tipo de acidentes.
N A Samsung não se responsabiliza por danos no produto ou ferimentos, no caso de ser utilizado um suporte de montagem na
parede que não seja VESA ou de um tipo não especificado, ou se o consumidor não respeitar as instruções de instalação do
produto.
N Os nossos modelos de 57” e 63” não estão em conformidade com as especificações VESA. Deste modo, deve utilizar o nosso kit
de montagem na parede dedicado para este modelo.
N Não exceda uma inclinação de 15 graus quando montar este televisor.
Não instale o seu kit de montagem na parede enquanto o televisor estiver ligado.
Pode provocar ferimentos resultantes de choques eléctricos.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 65 10/20/2009 4:42:14 PMPortuguês - 66
Preparação antes da instalação do suporte de montagem na parede
1. Instale o suporte de montagem na parede com um intervalo de torque de 15 kg/cm ou inferior. As peças podem danificar-se
se o torque não tiver o intervalo especificado.
2. O kit de acessórios inclui um anel de suporte [2] para instalar um suporte de montagem na parede de outro fabricante num
televisor Samsung. (Caso B)
N Introduza os parafusos no respectivo orifício [1] quando instalar o suporte de montagem na parede.
Como montar a base de suporte
Aviso
Prenda bem o suporte do televisor antes de o mover, porque o suporte pode cair e
causar lesões graves.
N O televisor deve ser transportado por duas ou mais pessoas. Nunca deite o
televisor no chão, porque pode danificar o ecrã. Mantenha sempre o televisor
na vertical.
Fixe bem o televisor à base com os parafusos fornecidos.
(A parte exterior do aparelho pode ser diferente da mostrada na imagem.)
Se quiser instalar o televisor na parede,
feche a tampa (➊) na parte de ligação da
base de suporte com dois parafusos para
a ocultar.
(PS50B650) (PS58B680/PS63B680)
Caso A. Instalar o suporte de montagem
na parede SAMSUNG
Caso B. Instalar o suporte de montagem na parede
de outro fabricante
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 66 10/20/2009 4:42:18 PMPortuguês - 67
Se puxar, empurrar ou subir para o televisor pode provocar a queda do mesmo. Em especial, certifique-se de
que as crianças não se penduram nem desestabilizam o televisor, o que poderia provocar a queda do mesmo
e resultar em acidentes graves ou morte. Siga todas as precauções de segurança fornecidas no folheto de
segurança incluído. Para uma maior estabilidade, instale o dispositivo antiqueda por razões de segurança,
como descrito em seguida.
❑ Para evitar a queda do televisor
1. Introduza os parafusos nos grampos e aparafuse-os com firmeza à parede. Verifique se os parafusos foram bem aparafusados
à parede.
N Pode necessitar de material adicional, tal como uma bucha, consoante o tipo de parede.
N Uma vez que os grampos, parafusos e fios necessários não são fornecidos, adquira-os em separado.
2. Retire os parafusos da parte central traseira do televisor, introduza-os nos grampos e, em seguida, aperte novamente os parafusos
no televisor .
N Os parafusos podem não ser fornecidos com o produto.
3. Ligue os grampos fixados ao televisor e os grampos fixados à parede com um fio forte e, em seguida, aperte bem o fio.
N Instale o televisor perto da parede para que este não caia para trás.
N É mais seguro ligar o fio de modo a que os grampos fixados à parede estejam ao mesmo nível ou abaixo dos grampos fixados
ao televisor.
N Desaperte o fio antes de transportar o televisor.
4. Verifique se todas as ligações estão devidamente presas. Verifique regularmente as ligações para evitar qualquer sinal de gasto ou
falha. Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre a segurança das suas ligações, contacte um instalador profissional.
Fixar o televisor à parede
Manter um espaço de instalação seguro
Mantenha as distâncias recomendadas, entre o produto e outros objectos (por exemplo, uma parede) para garantir a ventilação
adequada. Caso contrário, pode provocar um incêndio ou danificar o produto devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do mesmo.
Instale o produto de modo a que as distâncias recomendadas, assinaladas na figura seguinte, sejam respeitadas.
N Se utilizar uma base ou suporte para montagem na parede, utilize apenas as peças fornecidas pela Samsung Electronics.
- O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou ferimentos graves em caso de
queda do produto.
- O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou provocar um incêndio devido ao
aumento de temperatura no interior do produto por ventilação inadequada.
N O aspecto exterior pode ser diferente, dependendo do produto.
Se instalar o produto com uma base Se instalar o produto com um suporte para
montagem na parede
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
경고 주의
경고 주의
parede
parede
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 67 10/20/2009 4:42:19 PMPortuguês - 68
Resolução de problemas
Se tiver alguma dúvida sobre o televisor, consulte primeiro esta lista. Se nenhuma destas sugestões para resolução de problemas
se aplicar, consulte o site ‘www.samsung.com’ e, em seguida, clique em Assistência ou contacte o Centro de atendimento na lista da
última página.
N A actualização de firmware pode ser a primeira solução possível para os seus problemas.
Problema Solução possível
Qualidade de imagem
Primeiro, execute o Teste de imagem para confirmar se o televisor está a apresentar o teste de imagem correctamente.
* Vá para MENU → Assistência → Auto-diagnóstico → Teste de Imagem
Se a imagem de teste for apresentada correctamente, a imagem de má qualidade pode ser provocada pela fonte ou sinal.
A imagem do televisor não parece ser
de tão boa qualidade como na loja.
• Se tiver uma caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box analógica, actualize para uma
set top box.
Utilize cabos HDMI ou de Componente para obter uma qualidade de imagem HD.
• Subscritor de cabo/satélite : Tente estações HD (Alta Definição) a partir de canais
codificados.
• Ligação antena : Tente estações HD após executar a memorização automática
N Vários canais HD são actualizados a partir de conteúdos SD (Definição
standard).
• Ajuste a resolução de saída de vídeo da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para
1080i ou 720p.
A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, pequeno bloco, pontos,
pixelização.
• A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem,
especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de
acção.
• Um nível de sinal baixo ou uma má qualidade pode causar distorção de imagem. Isto
não é um problema do televisor.
Cor errada ou inexistente com a
ligação de Componente.
• Certifique-se de que os cabos de Componente estão ligados às tomadas correctas.
Ligações incorrectas ou soltas podem provocar problemas na cor ou o ecrã pode ficar
em branco.
Cor e brilho fracos.
• Ajuste as opções de Imagem no menu TV (Modo de imagem, Cor, Brilho, Nitidez).
• Ajuste a opção Poupança de energia no menu Configurar.
• Tente a reposição de imagem para visualizar as predefinições da imagem.
(Vá para MENU → Imagem → Reposição de imagem)
Linha pontilhada na extremidade do
ecrã.
• Se o tamanho da imagem estiver definido para Ajustar ao ecrã, altere para 16:9.
• Altere a resolução da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box.
A imagem é a preto e branco apenas
com entrada AV (Composto).
• Ligue o cabo de vídeo (amarelo) à tomada verde da entrada de componente 1 do
televisor.
A imagem fica bloqueada ou distorcida
quando muda de canais ou a imagem
está atrasada.
• Se estiver ligado a uma caixa de televisão por cabo, tente reiniciar a caixa de
televisão por cabo. (ligue novamente o cabo de CA e espere até que a caixa de
televisão por cabo reinicie. Pode demorar até 20 minutos)
• Defina a resolução de saída da caixa de televisão por cabo para 1080i ou 720p.
Qualidade do som
Primeiro, execute o Teste de som para confirmar se o áudio do televisor está a funcionar correctamente.
* Vá para MENU → Assistência → Auto-diagnóstico → Teste de som
Se o áudio estiver a funcionar correctamente, o problema de som pode ser provocado pela fonte ou sinal.
Não se ouve som ou o som é
demasiado baixo mesmo com o volume
no máximo.
• Verifique o volume do dispositivo (caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box, DVD,
Blu-ray, etc.) ligado ao televisor.
Em seguida, ajuste o volume do televisor.
A imagem é boa, mas não tem som.
• Defina a opção Seleccionar Altifalante para Altifalante do televisor no menu do
som.
• Certifique-se de que os cabos de áudio do dispositivo externo estão ligados às
tomadas de entrada de áudio correctas no televisor.
• Verifique a opção de saída de áudio do dispositivo ligado.
Ex) Pode ser necessário alterar a opção de áudio da caixa de televisão por cabo para
HDMI quando tiver o cabo HDMI ligado ao televisor.
• Se estiver a utilizar um cabo DVI para HDMI, é necessário um cabo de áudio
suplementar.
• Desactive a função SRS se definir o volume acima do valor 30.
• Remova a ficha da tomada dos auscultadores (se disponível no televisor).
Ruído nos auscultadores.
• Verifique as ligações dos cabos. Certifique-se de que um cabo de vídeo não está
ligado à entrada de áudio.
• Para ligações por antena/cabo, verifique a intensidade do sinal. Um nível de sinal
baixo pode causar distorção de imagem.
Continua...
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 68 10/20/2009 4:42:19 PMPortuguês - 69
Problema Solução possível
Sem imagem, sem vídeo
O televisor não liga. • Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada
de parede e ao televisor.
• Verifique se a tomada de parede está a funcionar devidamente.
• Tente carregar no botão de alimentação no televisor para ter a certeza de que o
telecomando está a funcionar correctamente.
Se o televisor ligar, o problema pode ser causado pelo telecomando.
Para resolver o problema do telecomando, consulte "O telecomando não funciona"
abaixo.
O televisor desliga-se
automaticamente.
• Verifique se o Temporizador está definido para Lig. no menu Configurar.
• Se ligar o televisor ao PC, verifique as definições de alimentação do PC.
• Certifique-se de que o cabo de alimentação CA está ligado correctamente à tomada
de parede e ao televisor.
• Se não houver qualquer sinal durante 10 a 15 minutos com a ligação por antena/
cabo, o televisor desliga-se.
Sem imagem/vídeo.
• Verifique as ligações dos cabos. (remova e ligue novamente todos os cabos do
televisor e dispositivos externos)
• Defina a saída de vídeo do dispositivo externo (cabo/set top box, DVD, Blu-ray,
etc.) para corresponder às ligações de entrada do televisor. Por exemplo, saída do
dispositivo externo : HDMI, entrada do televisor : HDMI.
• Certifique-se de que o dispositivo está ligado.
• Certifique-se de que selecciona a fonte correcta do televisor, carregando no botão
SOURCE do telecomando.
• Reinicie o dispositivo ao voltar a ligar o cabo de alimentação do dispositivo.
Ligação RF (cabo/antena)
Impossível receber todos os canais.
• Certifique-se de que o cabo de antena está correctamente ligado.
• Tente Plug & Play para adicionar canais disponíveis à lista de canais.
Vá para MENU → Configurar → Plug & Play e aguarde até que todos os canais
disponíveis sejam memorizados.
• Verifique se a antena está na posição correcta.
A imagem está distorcida: macrobloco, pequeno bloco, pontos,
pixelização.
• A compressão de conteúdos de vídeo pode causar uma distorção na imagem,
especialmente nas imagens de movimentos rápidos como no desporto e filmes de
acção.
• Um nível de sinal baixo pode causar distorção de imagem. Isto não é um problema do
televisor.
Ligação ao PC
Mensagem "Modo não suportado".
• Defina a resolução de saída e frequência do computador para que corresponda às
resoluções suportadas pelo televisor.
O computador é sempre apresentado
na lista de fontes mesmo que não
esteja ligado.
• Isto é normal; o computador é sempre apresentado na lista de fontes mesmo que um
computador não esteja ligado.
O vídeo está a funcionar
correctamente, mas não há áudio com
ligação HDMI.
• Verifique as definições da saída de áudio no seu computador.
Ligação de rede
Falha de ligação da rede sem fios.
• É necessária uma chave anticópia USB sem fios da Samsung para utilizar a rede
sem fios.
• Certifique-se de que a opção Tipo de rede está definida para Sem fios.
• O televisor deve estar ligado a um router IP sem fios.
Outros
A imagem não é apresentada em ecrã
inteiro.
• Serão apresentadas barras pretas em ambos os lados nos canais HD sempre que
forem apresentados conteúdos SD (4:3) actualizados.
• Serão apresentadas barras pretas na parte superior e inferior dos filmes que tenham
um formato diferente do seu televisor.
• Ajuste a opção de tamanho da imagem no seu dispositivo externo ou televisor para
ecrã inteiro.
O telecomando não funciona.
• Substitua as pilhas do telecomando com a polaridade correcta (+ -).
• Limpe a janela de transmissão localizada na parte superior do telecomando.
• Tente apontar o telecomando directamente para o televisor a uma distância de 1,5 m
a 1,8 m.
Continua...
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 69 10/20/2009 4:42:20 PMPortuguês - 70
Problema Solução possível
O televisor plasma está a emitir um
zumbido.
• Normalmente, os televisores plasma emitem um ligeiro zumbido. Isto é normal. Este
ruído deve-se às cargas eléctricas que são utilizadas para criar as imagens no ecrã.
• Se o zumbido for muito forte, a definição do brilho do televisor pode estar demasiado
elevada. Tente reduzir a definição do brilho.
• Também pode surgir um zumbido forte, se a parte traseira do televisor plasma
estiver demasiado perto de uma parede ou de qualquer outra superfície dura. Tente
igualmente redireccionar os cabos de ligação.
• Uma montagem incorrecta na parede pode provocar ruído excessivo.
Problemas de retenção de imagem
(Queimadura)
• Para minimizar a possibilidade de queimadura de ecrã, este aparelho está equipado
com tecnologia de redução de queimadura de ecrã. A tecnologia Pixel Shift permitelhe regular o movimento da imagem para cima/baixo (Linha vertical) e lateralmente
(Ponto horizontal).
Não é possível controlar o volume
nem ligar/desligar o televisor com o
telecomando da caixa de televisão por
cabo/set top box.
• Programe o telecomando da caixa de televisão por cabo/set top box para funcionar
com o televisor.
Consulte o manual do utilizador do dispositivo por cabo/satélite para identificar o
código do televisor SAMSUNG.
Mensagem “Modo não suportado”.
• Verifique a resolução suportada pelo televisor e ajuste a resolução de saída do
dispositivo externo em conformidade. Consulte as definições de resolução neste
manual.
Impossível desligar o Efeito de luz no
painel frontal (por baixo do logótipo da
SAMSUNG)
• Ajuste a opção de efeito de luz no menu configurar.
As opções são : Deslig., Modo Standby lig, Em visualização e Sempre.
• A função Efeito de luz não está disponível em todos os modelos.
Cheiro a plástico proveniente do
televisor.
• Este cheiro é normal e dissipa-se com o passar do tempo.
A intensidade do sinal do televisor está
indisponível no menu de Teste de Autodiagnóstico.
• Esta função encontra-se apenas disponível para canais digitais com uma ligação de
antena (RF/coaxial).
O televisor está inclinado para a
esquerda ou para a direita.
• Remova a base do suporte do televisor e monte novamente.
Não é possível montar a base do
suporte.
• Certifique-se de que o televisor se encontra sobre uma superfície plana.
Se não conseguir retirar os parafusos do televisor, utilize uma chave de parafusos
magnetizada.
O menu do canal está a cinzento
(indisponível).
• O menu Canal está apenas disponível quando a fonte de TV está seleccionada.
Perde as suas definições após 30
minutos ou sempre que o televisor for
desligado.
• Se o televisor estiver no modo Demo Loja, as definições de áudio e imagem são
repostas a cada 30 minutos.
Altere o modo Demo Loja para Uso Doméstico no procedimento Plug & Play.
Carregue no botão SOURCE para seleccionar o modo TV , vá para MENU →
Configurar → Plug & Play → ENTER
Perda descontínua de áudio ou vídeo.
• Verifique as ligações dos cabos e ligue novamente.
• Este problema pode ser devido à utilização de cabos excessivamente rígidos ou
finos.
Certifique-se de que os cabos são suficientemente flexíveis para uma utilização a
longo prazo.
Para montagem na parede, recomenda-se a utilização de cabos com conectores de
90 graus.
Pode ver pequenas partículas se
olhar de perto para a extremidade da
moldura em volta do ecrã do televisor.
• Faz parte do design do produto e não constitui um defeito.
O menu PIP não está disponível.
• A funcionalidade PIP está apenas disponível quando visualizar uma fonte HDMI, PC
ou componentes.
‘Sinal codificado’ ou ‘Sem sinal/Sinal
fraco’ com CAM CARD(CI/CI+)
• Verifique se o CAM tem o CI(CI+) Card colocado na ranhura da interface comum.
• É normal, o televisor utiliza a função OTA (Over The Air) para actualizar o firmware
transferido enquanto vê televisão.
Problema de imagem/som frequente. • Verifique e altere o sinal/fonte.
N Algumas das imagens e funções acima assinaladas estão disponíveis apenas em modelos específicos.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 70 10/20/2009 4:42:20 PMPortuguês - 71
Especificações
As descrições e características incluídas neste folheto destinam-se apenas a fins informativos e estão sujeitas a alterações sem
aviso prévio.
Nome do modelo PS50B650 PS58B680 PS63B680
Tamanho do ecrã (na diagonal) 50 polegadas 58 polegadas 63 polegadas
Resolução do PC (óptima) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Som (saída) 10 W x 2 15 W x 2 15 W x 2
Dimensões (W x H x D)
Corpo
Com base
1240 x 756 x 74 mm
1240 x 817 x 290 mm
1401 x 848 x 74 mm
1401 x 917 x 335 mm
1531 x 932 x 74 mm
1531 x 957 x 390 mm
Peso do
Corpo
Com base
33 kg
38 kg
39 kg
46 kg
53 kg
61 kg
Considerações ambientais
Temperatura de funcionamento
Humidade de funcionamento
Temperatura de armazenamento
Humidade de armazenamento
50 °F to 104 °F (10 °C to 40 °C)
10% to 80%, sem condensação
-4 °F to 113 °F (-20 °C to 45 °C)
5% to 95%, sem condensação
N Trata-se de um aparelho digital de classe B.
N O design e as especificações estão sujeitos a alterações sem aviso prévio.
N Para obter informações sobre a fonte de alimentação e o consumo de energia, consulte a etiqueta colada ao produto.
BN68-02333J-POR.indb 71 10/20/2009 4:42:20 PMSlovenščina - 2
Navodila za uporabnike
Zadrževanje slike na zaslonu
Na plazma monitorju ne prikazujte mirujoče slike (kot je video igra ali pri povezavi zaslona PDP z računalnikom) dlje kot 2 uri, saj
lahko to povzroči zadrževanje slike na zaslonu. Tako zadrževanje slike se imenuje tudi “ožig zaslona”. Da bi se izognili takemu
zadrževanju slike, pri prikazovanju mirujoče slike zmanjšajte stopnjo svetlosti in kontrasta zaslona.
Višina
Zaslon PDP lahko normalno deluje na nadmorski višini pod 2000 m. Ne uporabljajte ga na nadmorski višini nad 2000 m, saj lahko
pride do motenj v delovanju.
Segrevanje zgornjega dela televizorja PDP
Zgornji del izdelka se lahko pri dolgotrajni uporabi zelo segreje, ker se toplota iz izdelka odvaja skozi odprtino v zgornjem delu. To
je običajno in ni posledica okvare ali napake na izdelku. Vseeno pa morate otrokom preprečiti dotikanje zgornjega dela izdelka.
Izdelek ‘prasketa’.
Televizor se pri prilagajanju okolju (na primer temperaturi in vlažnosti zraka) lahko razširja ali krči in ob tem ‘prasketa’. To je
običajno in ni posledica napake na izdelku.
Poškodovane pike
Na zaslonu PDP je od 2.360.000 (slika visoke ločljivosti) do 6.221.000 (slika polne visoke ločljivosti) slikovnih pik, ki so izdelane z
zelo napredno tehnologijo. Kljub temu je lahko na zaslonu nekaj svetlih ali temnih slikovnih pik. Te svetlobne pike ne bodo vplivale
na delovanje izdelka.
Televizorja ne uporabljajte pri temperaturah pod 5 °C (41 F)
Če je na zaslonu PDP predolgo prikazana mirujoča slika, ga to lahko trajno poškoduje.
Dolgotrajno gledanje televizorja LCD v formatu slike 4:3 lahko na levi in desni strani ter na sredini zaslona
povzroči sledi okvirja zaradi različnega svetlobnega oddajanja na zaslonu. Predvajanje DVD-ja ali uporaba
igralne konzole ima lahko podobne učinke. Garancija ne zajema poškodb, ki so nastale na tak način.
Zakasnele slike na zaslonu.
Če je na zaslonu dlje časa prikazana mirujoča računalniška slika ali slika iz video igrice, to lahko povzroči delni prikaz zakasnele
slike. Ta učinek preprečite tako, da ob prikazu mirujočih slik zmanjšate ‘svetlost’ in ‘kontrast’.
Garancija
- Garancija ne zajema škode, ki jo povzroči zadrževanje slike.
- Garancija ne zajema poškodb zaradi vžgane slike.
Namestitev
Za namestitev izdelka v okolju z veliko prahu, visoko ali nizko temperaturo, visoko vlažnostjo, kemičnimi snovmi ali v okoljih, kjer
neprestano deluje (na primer letališče, železniška postaja), se obrnite na pooblaščeni servisni center. Če tega ne storite, lahko
pride do resne poškodbe naprave.
Obvestilo o digitalni televiziji
1. Funkcije, ki so povezane z digitalnim televizijskim signalom (DVB), so na voljo samo v državah/na območjih, kjer se
oddajajo digitalni prizemni signali (MPEG2 IN MPEG4 AVC), ali kjer je mogoč dostop do združljive storitve kabelske
televizije DVB-C (MPEG2 in MPEG4 AAC). Pri lokalnem trgovcu preverite, ali imate dostop do signala DVB-T ali DVB-C.
2. DVB-T je standard DVB evropskega konzorcija za oddajanje digitalne prizemne televizije, DVB-C pa je standard za
oddajanje digitalne televizije prek kabla.
V tej specifikaciji pa niso vključene nekatere funkcije, kot so EPG (elektronski programski vodnik), VOD (video na zahtevo)
itd. Torej zaenkrat še niso podprte.
3. Čeprav je televizor v skladu z najnovejšima standardoma DVB-T in DVB-C [avgust 2008], ni mogoče jamčiti združljivosti s
prihodnjimi sistemi digitalne prizemne televizije in digitalne kabelske televizij.
4. Nekateri ponudniki kabelske televizije morda takšno storitev dodatno zaračunavajo in se boste zato morda morali strinjati z
določbami in pogoji njihovega poslovanja.
5. V nekaterih državah ali regijah nekatere funkcije digitalne televizije morda niso na voljo in digitalna kabelska televizija
morda ne bo delovala pravilno pri vseh ponudnikih.
6. Za dodatne informacije se obrnite na lokalni Samsungov center za pomoč strankam.
Obrnite se na SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
Če imate kakršno koli vprašanje ali komentar glede Samsungovih izdelkov, se obrnite na center SAMSUNG za pomoč
strankam. (Za več informacij si oglejte hrbtno platnico.)
N Slike in ilustracije v tem uporabniškem priročniku so samo za referenco. Dejanski izdelek je lahko videti drugačen. Zasnova
in specifikacije izdelka se lahko spremenijo brez obvestila z namenom izboljšave delovanja izdelka.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Vse pravice pridržane.
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 2 10/20/2009 4:54:00 PMSlovenščina - 3
Slovenščina
N O T
Simbol Pritisnite Opomba Gumb na dotik TOOLS
Vsebina
Priključitev in priprava televizorja
■ Pregled delov ............................................................................4
■ Uporaba stojala .........................................................................4
■ Združitev kablov ........................................................................4
■ Ogled nadzorne plošče .............................................................5
■ Ogled plošče s priključki............................................................6
■ Daljinski upravljalnik ..................................................................8
■ Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik...................................8
■ Uporaba gumbov za osvetlitev daljinskega upravljalnika..........9
■ Vklop in izklop ...........................................................................9
■ Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti ................................9
■ Ogled prikaza ............................................................................9
■ Ogled menijev .........................................................................10
■ Uporaba gumba TOOLS .........................................................10
■ Funkcija Plug & Play ...............................................................10
Upravljanje kanalov
■ Shranjevanje kanalov ............................................................ 11
■ Upravljanje kanalov .................................................................13
Upravljanje slike
■ Spreminjanje slikovnih nastavitev ...........................................15
■ Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom .....................................18
■ Računalniški zaslon.................................................................19
Nadzor zvoka
■ Spreminjanje zvočnega standarda ..........................................20
■ Izbira zvočnega načina............................................................21
Opis funkcij
■ Nastavitev časa .......................................................................22
■ Konfiguriranje menija Setup ....................................................23
■ Ogled slike v sliki (PIP)............................................................25
Podprti / Vhod
■ Podprti program.......................................................................26
■ Seznam virov / urejanje imena ................................................27
Omrežna
■ Omrežna povezava .................................................................28
■ Nastavitev omrežja..................................................................30
Predvajanje predstavnosti
■ Priključitev naprave USB.........................................................33
■ Uporaba funkcije predvajanja predstavnosti ...........................34
■ Urejanje seznama fotografij / glasbe / filmov...........................35
■ Meni z možnostmi za seznam fotografij / filmov / glasbe ........36
■ Meni z možnostmi za diaprojekcije / predvajanje glasbe /
predvajanje filmov ...................................................................37
■ Ogled fotografije ali diaprojekcije ............................................38
■ Predvajanje glasbe..................................................................39
■ Predvajanje filmske datoteke .................................................40
■ Uporaba menija nastavitve......................................................41
Predvajanje predstavnosti DLNA
■ Nastavitev omrežja DLNA .......................................................42
■ Namestitev aplikacije DLNA....................................................42
■ Uporaba aplikacije DLNA ........................................................43
■ Uporaba funkcije DLNA...........................................................44
Anynet
+
■ Povezava naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet
+
...................................45
■ Nastavitev sistema Anynet
+
Anynet
+
.......................................46
■ Preklapljanje med napravami, ki podpirajo Anynet
+
................46
■ Snemanje ................................................................................47
■ Poslušanje prek sprejemnika ..................................................48
■ Odpravljanje težav s funkcijo Anynet
+
....................................48
Knjižnica vsebin
■ Aktiviranje knjižnice vsebin......................................................49
■ Uporaba možnosti knjižnice vsebin .........................................50
Internet@TV
■ Uvod v Internet@TV................................................................51
■ Urejanje delčkov v sidrišču......................................................53
■ Uporaba gradnika profila .........................................................53
■ Uporaba galerije gradnikov Yahoo!®.......................................54
■ Uporaba gradnika informacij o vremenu Yahoo!®...................54
■ Uporaba gradnika novic Yahoo!®............................................55
■ Uporaba gradnika storitve Flickr Yahoo!®...............................55
■ Uporaba gradnika finančnih informacij Yahoo!® .....................56
■ Odpravljanje težav s storitvijo internet@TV ...........................56
■ Spletno mesto s pomočjo ........................................................57
Internet@TV
■ Uvod v Internet@TV................................................................58
■ Nastavitev Internet@TV ..........................................................58
■ Uporaba storitve Internet@TV.................................................59
■ Odpravljanje težav s storitvijo internet@TV ............................60
■ Spletno mesto s pomočjo ........................................................60
Središče domačega omrežja
■ Središče domačega omrežja...................................................61
■ Nastavitev središča domačega omrežja..................................62
■ Uporaba funkcije sporočil ........................................................62
■ Uporaba funkcije predstavnosti ...............................................63
Priporočila za uporabo
■ Funkcija teleteksta...................................................................64
■ Specifikacije opreme za pritrditev na steno (VESA)................65
■ Priprava na namestitev opreme za pritrditev na steno............66
■ Navodila za sestavljanje stojala ..............................................66
■ Pritrditev televizorja na steno ..................................................67
■ Zaščita prostora za namestitev ...............................................67
■ Odpravljanje težav...................................................................68
■ Specifikacije ............................................................................71
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 3 10/20/2009 4:54:00 PMSlovenščina - 4
Združitev kablov
Kable ovijte z dralom za kable, tako da jih ni mogoe videti skozi prozorno stojalo.
Uporaba stojala
N PDP naj nosita vsaj dve osebi. PDP-ja nikoli ne postavite tako, da je zaslon
obrnjen navzdol, ker lahko tako poškodujete zaslon. PDP naj bo vedno pokonci.
N PDP je mogoče obračati v levo ali v desno pod kotom 20 stopinj.
-20° ~ 20°
Pregled delov
Uporabniška
navodila
Daljinski upravljalnik/
bateriji AAA (2ea)
Napajalni kabel Čistilna krpica Držalo za kable Držalni obroč (4ea)
(oglejte si stran 66)
CD s programom
Vijaka (4ea)
(samo PS50B650)
(oglejte si stran 66)
Spodnji pokrov
(samo PS50B650)
(oglejte si stran 66)
Spodnji pokrov/vijaka (2ea)
(samo PS58B680 /
PS63B680)
(oglejte si stran 66)
Feritni obroč za
kabel za slušalke
Feritni obroč za
napajalni kabel
(samo
PS58B680T6P /
PS63B680)
Feritni obroč za
napajalni kabel
Garancijska kartica/
Varnostni priročnik
(Ni na voljo povsod)
N Feritni obroč
Feritni obroči ščitijo kable pred motnjami.
Ko želite povezati kabel, odprite feritni obroč in ga namestite okoli kabla
blizu vtiča, kot je prikazano na sliki.
Priključitev in priprava televizorja
(samo PS58B680T6P/
PS63B680)
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 4 10/20/2009 4:54:03 PMSlovenščina - 5
Ogled nadzorne plošče
N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela.
Gumbi na sprednji plošči.
Za upravljanje se dotaknite
posameznega gumba.
(PS58B680 / PS63B680)
(PS50B650)
1 SOURCE
Za preklapljanje med vsemi razpololjivimi vhodnimi viri
(TV, Ext1, Ext2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI,
HDMI3, HDMI4, USB).
N Na meniju na zaslonu ta gumb uporabljajte kot gumb
ENTERE na daljinskem upravljalniku.
2 MENU
Pritisnite za ogled menija na zaslonu s funkcijami televizorja.
3 + –
Pritisnite za znižanje ali zvišanje glasnosti. Na meniju na
zaslonu uporabljajte gumba + – kot uporabljate gumba
◄ in ► na daljinskem upravljalniku.
4 CH
Pritisnite za menjavo kanalov. Na meniju na zaslonu
uporabljajte gumb CH , kot uporabljate gumba ▲ in ▼
na daljinskem upravljalniku. Z gumbom CH vklopite
televizor brez uporabe daljinskega upravljalnika.
5 INDIKATOR NAPAJANJA
Utripa in se izklopi, ko je napajanje vklopljeno, in začne svetiti
v stanju pripravljenosti.
6 (POWER)
Pritisnite za vklop in izklop televizorja.
7 SENZOR DALJINSKEGA UPRAVLJALNIKA
Daljinski upravljalnik usmerite proti tej točki na televizorju.
8 ZVOČNIKA
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 5 10/20/2009 4:54:03 PMSlovenščina - 6
Ogled plošče s priključki
N Kadarkoli na televizor priključite avdio ali video sistem, zagotovite, da so vsi elementi izklopljeni.
N Ko priključujete zunanjo napravo, mora biti barva priključka enaka barvi kabla.
N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela.
1 LAN
Na ta vrata povežite kabel LAN, da se povežete z omrežjem.
2 POWER IN
Priklopite priloženi napajalni kabel.
3 COMPONENT IN
Avdio (AUDIO L/R) in video (Y / PB / PR) vhodi za komponento.
4 PC IN (AUDIO / PC)
Za povezavo z vtičnico za video in avdio izhod na računalniku.
5 EXT 1, EXT 2
Vhodi oziroma izhodi za zunanje naprave, kot so
videorekorder, predvajalnik DVD, video igralna naprava ali
predvajalnik video plošč.
N V načinu zunanje naprave izhod digitalne televizije podpira
samo video in avdio MPEG SD.
N V načinu zunanje naprave Game mode ni na voljo.
Specifikacije za vhod/izhod
Spojnik
Vhod Izhod
Video Avdio(L/R) RGB Video + Avdio(L/R)
EXT 1 ✔ ✔ ✔
Na voljo je samo izhod
televizorja ali DTV.
EXT 2 ✔ ✔ Izhod lahko izberete.
6 SLUŠALKE
Na televizor lahko priključite slušalke, da televizijski program,
ki ga gledate, ne bi motil ostalih oseb v prostoru.
N Daljša uporaba slušalk pri večji glasnosti lahko poškoduje
sluh
7 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Za povezavo z digitalno avdio komponento.
8 SERVICE
Spojnik za servis.
9 AUDIO OUT(AUDIO R/L)
Zvočne signale RCA iz televizorja priklopite na zunanji vir, na
primer avdio sistem.
0 ANT IN
Koaksialni spojnik 75 Ω za anteno / kabelsko omrežje.
! HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3
Za povezavo HDMI-ja s HDMI-jem ne potrebujete dodatne
avdio povezave.
- Če uporabljate kabel HDMI/DVI, uporabite vtičnico HDMI
IN 2(DVI).
N Kaj je HDMI?
- Večpredstavnostni vmesnik z visoko razločljivostjo
omogoča prenos digitalnih video podatkov z visoko
razločljivostjo in večkanalni digitalni avdio.
- Spojnik HDMI/DVI podpira povezavo DVI do razširjene
naprave z ustreznim kablom (ni priložen). HDMI in DVI
se razlikujeta v tem, da je naprava HDMI manjša, da
ima vgrajeno funkcijo kodiranja HDCP (zaščita pred
kopiranjem za širokopasovno digitalno vsebino) in da
podpira večkanalni digitalni avdio.
DVI AUDIO IN
Avdio izhodi DVI za zunanje naprave
Podprti modeli za HDMI/DVI in komponento
480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p
HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O
HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O
Komponento O O O O O O O
TV Zadnja plošča
Kabelsko
televizijsko omrežje
ali
ali
2
3 4 5 7 9 !
0
6 8
1
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 6 10/20/2009 4:54:06 PMSlovenščina - 7
1 Reža COMMON INTERFACE
V režo vstavite CI(CI+) (Common Interface) kartico za
splošni vmesnik. (oglejte si stran 23)
- Če pri nekaterih kanalih ni vstavljena CI(CI+) kartico
za splošni vmesnik, se na zaslonu prikaže sporočilo
Scrambled Signal.
- V 2–3 minutah se prikažejo informacije o združitvi, tj.
telefonska številka, CI(CI+) kartico ID, za splošni vmesnik,
ID gostitelja, in druge informacije. Če se prikaže sporočilo
o napaki, se obrnite na ponudnika storitev.
- Ko je konfiguracija informacij o kanalih končana, se
prikaže sporočilo Updating Completed, kar pomeni, da
je seznam kanalov posodobljen.
- Pri nekaterih modelih se ob vstavitvi kartice za splošni
vmesnik prikaže poziv za geslo za Parental Lock.
- Pri nekaterih modelih se pri programih za odrasle (18
let in več) poziv za geslo prikaže tudi, če je možnost
Parental Lock nastavljena na Allow All.
N CI(CI+)-Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v smeri, ki je
označena na njej.
N Kartica za splošni vmesnik (CI+) ni podprta v nekaterih
državah, regijah in pri nekaterih oddajnih postajah.
Preverite pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu.
N Funkcija CI+ je na voljo samo pri modelu PS********P.
Če ste naleteli na težave, se obrnite na ponudnika
storitev.
2 USB 1(HDD), USB 2
Za ogled foto datotek (JPEG) in predvajanje zvočnih
datotek (MP3) in filmskih datotek priključite napravo za
množično shranjevanje USB. Z omrežjem SAMSUNG se
lahko povežete brezžično. Vtičnica USB 1 se uporablja tudi
kot vtičnica HDD. HDD (trdi disk) je naprava, ki shranjuje
digitalno šifrirane podatke.
3 HDMI IN 4
Za povezavo z vtičnico HDMI naprave z izhodom HDMI.
4 AV IN (VIDEO, AUDIO L/R)
Video in avdio vhodi za zunanje naprave, kot sta
videokamera ali videorekorder.
N Barva in oblika izdelka sta odvisni od modela.
TV Stranska plošča
3
4
1
2
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 7 10/20/2009 4:54:07 PMSlovenščina - 8
Daljinski upravljalnik
Daljinski upravljalnik lahko uporabljate do oddaljenosti približno 7 m od televizorja.
N Na delovanje daljinskega upravljalnika lahko vpliva močna svetloba.
Vstavljanje baterij v daljinski upravljalnik
1. Odprite pokrovček na hrbtni strani daljinskega upravljalnika, kot je prikazano na sliki.
2. Vstavite dve bateriji AAA.
N Poskrbite, da sta pola ‘+’ in ‘–’ baterije usmerjena skladno s prikazom v predelu
za baterije.
3. Zaprite pokrov.
N Če daljinskega upravljalnika ne boste uporabljali dalj časa, odstranite baterije in
jih shranite na hladnem in suhem mestu.
N Če daljinski upravljalnik ne deluje, preverite naslednje
1. Ali je televizor vklopljen?
2. Ali so poli baterij ‘plus’ in ‘minus’ zamenjani?
3. Ali sta bateriji prazni?
4. Ali je prišlo do izpada napajanja oziroma je napajalni kabel izključen?
5. Ali je v bližini posebna fluorescentna luč ali neonska tabla?
1 Gumb POWER
(za vklop in izklop televizorja).
2 Neposredna izbira načina televizorja.
3 Številski gumbi za neposreden dostop
do kanalov.
4 Pritisnite za preklop na priljubljene
kanale.
5 Začasen izklop zvoka.
6 Zvišanje
znižanje glasnosti
7 Izbira razpoložljivih virov.
8 Za ogled informacije o trenutnem
programu.
9 Za hitro izbiro pogosto uporabljenih
funkcij.
0 Za izbiro elementov menija na zaslonu
in spreminjanje vrednosti menija.
! Ta funkcija omogoča gledanje televizije
Internet@TV.
@ Te gumbe uporabite za Channel list,
Media Play, in Internet@TV, itd.
$ Za prikaz seznamov kanalov na
zaslonu.
% Te gumbe uporabite za Channel list,
Media Play in Anynet+, itd.
^ Pritisnite za osvetlitev gumbov na
daljinskem upravljalniku. Ta funkcija je
priročna ponoči in v temnem prostoru.
(Če je gumb osvetlitve ON/OFF( )
na daljinskem upravljalniku vklopljen,
se čas uporabe baterije skrajša.)
& Prejšnji kanal.
* Naslednji
prejšnji kana
( Prikaz glavnega menija na zaslonu.
) Prikaz elektronskega programskega
vodnika (EPG).
a Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni.
b Za izhod iz menija na zaslonu.
c Ta funkcija omogoča ogled
predstavnosti.
d Ta funkcija omogoča ogled možnosti
Content Library.
e Prikaz digitalnih podnapisov.
f Izbira zvočnega opisa.
Funkcije teleteksta
2 Izhod iz teleteksta (odvisno od modela)
7 Izbira načina teleteksta (LIST/FLOF)
8 Prikaz teleteksta
9 Velikost teleteksta
@ Izbira teme Fastext
# Prikaz teleteksta/hkraten prikaz
teleteksta in televizijskega programa
$ Shranjevanje teleteksta
& Podstran teleteksta
* P :naslednja stran teleteksta
P :prejšnja stran teleteksta
( Kazalo teleteksta
a Zadržanje strani teleteksta
b Preklic teleteksta
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 8 10/20/2009 4:54:08 PMSlovenščina - 9
Uporaba gumbov za osvetlitev daljinskega upravljalnika
To funkcijo uporabite v temnem okolju in ko ne morete jasno videti gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
1. Pritisnite gumb osvetlitve ON/OFF( ).
N Ko ga nastavite na ON, se za trenutek vklopi osvetlitev gumba.
N Če pritisnete gumb na daljinskem upravljalniku, ko je upravljalnik vklopljen, se za trenutek vklopi osvetlitev gumba.
Vklop in izklop
Kabel za napajanje se nahaja na hrbtni strani televizorja.
1. Napajalni kabel priključite na ustrezno vtičnico.
N Indikator stanja pripravljenosti na televizorju začne svetiti.
2. Pritisnite gumb POWER P na televizorju.
N Televizor lahko vklopite tudi tako, da pritisnete gumb POWER P ali TV na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Znova je izbran program, ki ste ga gledali nazadnje.
3. Pritisnite številski gumb (0–9) ali gumb za kanal navzgor/navzdol (< / >) na daljinskem upravljalniku ali pa gumb < CH> na
televizorju.
N Ob prvem vklopu televizorja boste pozvani, da izberete jezik, v katerem naj bodo prikazani meniji.
4. Za izklop televizorja znova pritisnite gumb POWER P.
Preklop televizorja v stanje pripravljenosti
Televizor lahko preklopite v stanje pripravljenosti in s tem zmanjšate porabo energije. Stanje pripravljenosti je uporabno, če želite
začasno prekiniti gledanje (na primer med jedjo).
1. Pritisnite gumb POWER P na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Zaslon se izklopi in na televizorju začne svetiti rdeči indikator stanja pripravljenosti.
2. Za ponoven vklop televizorja enostavno znova pritisnite gumb POWER P, številske gumbe (0~9), gumb TV ali gumb za kanal
navzgor/navzdol (< / >).
N Televizorja ne puščajte v stanju pripravljenosti dlje časa (na primer, ko greste na dopust). Priporočamo tudi, da izključite
napajanje in anteno.
Ogled prikaza
Prikaz označuje trenutni kanal in stanje določenih zvočnih in slikovnih nastavitev.
O Za ogled informacij pritisnite gumb INFO.
Pritisnite gumb INFO na daljinskem upravljalniku. Na televizorju se bodo prikazali kanal,
vrsta zvoka in stanje določenih slikovnih in zvočnih nastavitev.
• ▲, ▼: Za ogled drugih informacij o kanalu. Če se želite pomakniti na trenutno izbran
kanal, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
• ◄, ►: Ogledate si lahko informacije o želeni oddaji na trenutnem kanalu.
N Znova pritisnite gumb INFO ali počakajte približno 10 sekund, da prikaz
samodejno izgine.
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information
E Watch
' Information
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 9 10/20/2009 4:54:09 PMSlovenščina - 10
Ogled menijev
1. Ko je vklopljeno napajanje, pritisnite gumb MENU.
Na zaslonu se prikaže glavni meni. Na levi strani menija so ikone: Picture, Sound,
Channel, Setup, Input, Application, Support.
2. Za izbiro ene od ikon pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼. Za dostop do podmenija ikone pritisnite
gumb ENTERE.
3. Za izhod pritisnite gumb EXIT.
N Meniji na zaslonu izginejo z zaslona po približno eni minuti.
Uporaba gumba TOOLS
Gumb TOOLS lahko uporabljate za hitro in preprosto izbiro funkcij, ki jih pogosto uporabljate. Meni Tools se spreminja glede na
uporabljeni način zunanjega vhoda.
1. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. Prikazal se bo meni Tools.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite meni, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
3. Pritiskajte gumbe ▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ► / ENTERE, da prikažete, spremenite ali uporabite
izbrane elemente. Za podrobnejši opis posameznih funkcij si oglejte ustrezne strani.
• Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), oglejte si 46. stran
• Picture Size, oglejte si 16. stran
• Picture Mode, oglejte si 15. stran
• Sound Mode, oglejte si 20. stran
• Sleep Timer, oglejte si 22. stran
• SRS TS HD, oglejte si 20. stran
• Energy Saving, oglejte si 24. stran
• Dual l ll, oglejte si 21. stran
• Add to Favourite (ali Delete from Favourite), oglejte si 14. stran
• PIP, oglejte si 25. stran
• Auto Adjustment, oglejte si 18. stran
Funkcija Plug & Play
Pri prvem vklopu televizorja se samodejno prikažejo osnovne nastavitve.
N Ohranjevalnik zaslona se aktivira, če medtem ko je zagnan Plug & Play, več kot 1 minuto ne pritisnete nobenega gumba na
daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Ohranjevalnik zaslona se aktivira, če več kot 15 minut ni signala.
N Če pri nastavitvi države pomotoma izberete napačno, so lahko znaki na zaslonu narobe prikazani.
1. Pritisnite gumb POWER na daljinskem upravljalniku. Samodejno se prikaže meni
Select Language the OSD. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba
▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezen jezik. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Store Demo ali Home Use in nato pritisnite
gumb ENTERE.
N Priporočamo, da televizor nastavite na način Home Use, saj to zagotavlja
najboljšo sliko v domačem okolju.
N Način Store Demo je namenjen samo uporabi v trgovinah.
N Če je naprava po pomoti nastavljena na način Store Demo in se želite vrniti v način Home Use (Standard): na televizorju
pritisnite gumb za glasnost. Ko je na zaslonu prikaz glasnosti, pritisnite gumb MENU na televizorju in ga držite 5 sekund.
3. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezno državo. Za potrditev izbire pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Ko uporabnik izbere državo v meniju Country, se pri nekaterih modelih prikaže dodatna možnost za nastavitev številke PIN.
N Ko vnašate številko PIN, 0-0-0-0 ni na voljo.
4. Pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼, da shranite kanale izbrane povezave, in pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
• Air : Signal običajne antene.
• Cable : Signal kabelske antene.
Plug & Play
Select the OSD Language.
Language :
U Move E Enter
▲
Nederlands
English
Eesti
▼
Tools
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Picture Size : Auto Wide
Picture Mode : Standard
Sound Mode : Custom
Sleep Timer : Off
SRS TS HD : Off
Energy Saving : Off
Dual l ll : Mono
Add to Favourite
U Move E Enter e Exit
Mode : Standard
Cell Light : 4
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Advanced Settings
Picture
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 10 10/20/2009 4:54:10 PMSlovenščina - 11
5. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite vir antene, ki ga želite shraniti. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Start.
• Digital & Analogue : Digitalni in analogni kanali. channels.
• Digital : Digitalni kanali.
• Analogue : Analogni kanali.
N Iskanje kanalov se bo samodejno začelo in končalo.
N Za podrobnejši opis izbire načina Cable si oglejte poglavje, oglejte si stran 11.
6. Prikaže se sporočilo Set the Clock Mode. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Auto in nato
Pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Če izberete Manual, se prikaže Set current date and time. (Za podrobnejši opis možnosti Manual si oglejte poglavje, oglejte si
stran 22)
N Če ste prejeli digitalni signal, se bo čas samodejno nastavil.
7. Prikažejo se kratka navodila How to get the best performance from your new HDTV. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE .
N Ta meni je razpoložljivi HD Connection Guide v meniju Support.
N Za pomik na prejšnjo ali naslednjo stran pritisnite gumb ◄ / ►.
8. Prikaže se sporočilo Enjoy your TV.
N Za takojšnje gledanje televizije izberite Watch TV.
N Če si želite ogledati možnost See Product Guide, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Za ponastavitev te funkcije ...
1. Za prikaz menija pritisnite gumb MENU. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Setup
in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
2. Znova pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Plug & Play.
3. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je ‘0-0-0-0’.
N Če želite kodo PIN (Personal Identification Number) spremeniti, oglejte si stran 24.
N Funkcija Plug & Play je na voljo samo v načinu TV.
Shranjevanje kanalov
❑ Country
Digital Channel : Za spreminjanje države digitalnih kanalov.
Analogue Channel : Za spreminjanje države analognih kanalov.
N Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
❑ Auto Store
Poišče vse kanale aktivnih televizijskih postaj (odvisno od države) in jih shrani v
pomnilnik televizorja.
Televizor nastavite tako, da shrani kanale izbrane povezave.
• Air : Signal običajne antene.
• Cable : Signal kabelske antene.
Izberete lahko vir antene za shranjevanje.
• Digital & Analogue : Digitalni in analogni kanali.
• Digital : Digitalni kanali.
• Analogue : Analogni kanali.
N Če izberete Cable,
• Search Mode : Za prikaz načina iskanja. (Quick)
- Network ID : Za prikaz identifikacijske kode omrežja.
- Frequency : Za prikaz frekvence kanala.
- Modulation : Za prikaz razpoložljivih vrednosti modulacije.
- Symbol Rate : Za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.
• Search Mode : Za prikaz načina iskanja. (Full, Network)
- Start Frequency : Za prikaz začetnih frekvenčnih vrednosti.
- End Frequency : Za prikaz končnih frekvenčnih vrednosti.
- Modulation : Za prikaz razpoložljivih vrednosti modulacije.
- Symbol Rate : Za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.
N Če želite ustaviti izvajanje funkcije Auto Store, pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Prikaže se sporočilo Stop Auto Store?.
S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Yes in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Upravljanje kanalov
Channel
Country ►
Auto Store
Manual Store
Cable Search Option
Full Guide
Mini Guide
Default Guide : Full Guide
Channel List
Setup
Plug & Play ►
Menu Language : Slovenian
Time
Broadcast
Security
Network
General
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 11 10/20/2009 4:54:11 PMSlovenščina - 12
❑ Manual Store
Za ročno iskanje kanala in shranjevanje le-tega v pomnilnik televizorja.
Digital Channel (Digital)
N Digitalni kanal je na voljo samo v načinu DTV.
• Channel : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite številko kanala.
• Frequency : S številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite frekvenco.
• Bandwidth : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ nastavite pasovno širino.
N Ko se iskanje dokonča, so posodobljeni kanali na seznamu kanalov.
Analogue Channel
Za ročno shranjevanje analognih kanalov.
• Programme (Številka programa, ki naj bo dodeljena kanalu) : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲, ▼ ali številskimi gumbi (0~9) nastavite
številko programa.
• Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC 4.43 : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost barvnega sistema.
• Sound System → BG / DK / I / L : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ nastavite vrednost zvočnega sistema.
• Channel (če poznate številko kanala za shranjevanje) : S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite C (običajna antena) ali
S (kabelski kanal). S pritiskanjem gumba ► in nato s pritiskanjem gumbov ▲, ▼ ali številskih gumbov (0~9) izberite želeno
številko.
N Če ni zvoka ali le-ta ni normalen, znova izberite želeni zvočni standard.
• Search (če shranite kanal in z njim povezano številko programa) : Za začetek iskanja pritisnite gumb ▲ ali ▼. Kanalnik
pregleda frekvenčni razpon, dokler se na zaslonu ne prikaže prvi kanal ali izbrani kanal.
• Store (če shranite kanal in z njim povezano številko programa) : Nastavite na OK s pritiskom gumba ENTERE.
N Kanalni način
- C (način običajne antene) : Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom določene številke za posamezno oddajno postajo v tem načinu.
- S (način kabelskega kanala) : Kanal lahko izberete z vnosom določene številke za vsak kabelski kanal v tem načinu.
❑ Cable Search Option
Za iskanje kabelskega omrežja lahko nastavite dodatne možnosti iskanja, kot sta frekvenca in hitrost simbola. (Odvisno od države).
• Freq.Start : Za prikaz začetnih frekvenčnih vrednosti.
• Freq.Stop : Za prikaz končnih frekvenčnih vrednosti.
• Modulation : Za prikaz razpoložljivih vrednosti modulacije.
• Symbol Rate : Za prikaz razpoložljivih simbolnih hitrosti.
N Če je vrednost Freq.Start večja kot Freq.Stop, se prikaže opozorilo.
❑ Full Guide / Mini Guide
Informacije EPG (elektronski programski vodnik) posredujejo izdajatelji televizijskega programa. Informacije o programu so lahko
zastarele ali jih ni, kar je posledica oddajanja informacij določene televizijske postaje. Zaslon se bo dinamično posodobil takoj, ko
bodo na voljo nove informacije.
• Full Guide : Informacije o programu so prikazane za eno uro. Prikazane so informacije o dveh urah programa, po katerih se
lahko pomikate naprej ali nazaj glede na čas.
• Mini Guide : Informacije o posameznih oddajah so prikazane v ločenih vrsticah na zaslonu mini vodnika trenutnega kanala, od
trenutne oddaje navzgor, glede na vrstni red začetka oddaj.
❑ Default Guide
Mini Guide / Full Guide
Odločite se lahko, ali želite prikazati mini vodnik ali celotni vodnik, potem ko
pritisnete gumb GUIDE na daljinskem upravljalniku.
O Meni vodnika lahko prikažete tudi enostavno s pritiskom gumba GUIDE.
se nadaljuje …
Channel
Full Guide
Mini Guide
Default Guide : Full Guide ►
Channel List
Channel Mode : Added Ch.
Fine Tune
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 12 10/20/2009 4:54:11 PMSlovenščina - 13
Uporaba možnosti Full / Mini Guide
▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►,
ENTER
Z gumbi ▲/▼/◄/►/ENTERE izberite program.
RDEČI Preklapljanje med možnostma Full Guide in Mini Guide.
ZELENI Full Guide : Za hiter pomik nazaj (-24 hours).
RUMENI Full Guide : Za hiter pomik naprej (+24 hours).
MODRA Izhod iz vodnika.
INFO Gumb INFO za podrobne informacije.
❑ Channel Mode
Če pritisnete gumb P (), preklopite med kanali, ki so na izbranem seznamu kanalov.
Added Ch. : Preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu shranjenih kanalov.
Favourite Ch. : Preklop med kanali, ki so na seznamu priljubljenih kanalov.
❑ Fine Tune (samo analogni kanali)
Če je sprejem jasen, fina naravnava kanala ni potrebna, ker se samodejno izvede med iskanjem in shranjevanjem. Če je signal
šibak ali popačen, boste kanal mogoče morali ročno fino naravnati.
N Shranjeni fino naravnani kanali so označeni z zvezdico * na desni strani številke kanala na traku s kanalom.
N Če fino naravnanega kanala ne shranite v pomnilnik, se prilagoditve ne shranijo.
N Če želite ponastaviti fino naravnavo, izberite Reset s pritiskanjem gumba ▼ in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Upravljanje kanalov
S tem menijem lahko dodate / izbrišete ali nastavite priljubljene kanale in uporabljate
programski vodnik za digitalno oddajano vsebino.
N Izberite kanal na zaslonu All Channels, Added Channels, Favourites ali Programmed s
pritiskom gumbov ▲ ali ▼ in ENTERE. Nato lahko gledate izbrani kanal.
• All Channels : Prikaz vseh trenutno razpoložljivih kanalov.
• Added Channels : Prikaz vseh dodanih kanalov.
• Favourites : Prikaz vseh priljubljenih kanalov.
• Programmed : Prikaz trenutno rezerviranih oddaj.
O Za prikaz seznama kanalov pritisnite gumb CH LIST na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Uporaba barvnih gumbov skupaj z možnostjo Channel List
- Rdeči (Channel Type) : Preklapljanje med možnostmi TV, Radio, Data/Other in
All.
- Zeleni (Zoom) : Povečanje ali pomanjšanje številke kanala.
- Rumeni (Select) : Izbira več seznamov kanalov.
- TTOOLS (Tools) : Za prikaz menija Delete (ali Add), Add to Favourites
(ali Delete from Favourites), Lock (ali Unlock), Timer Viewing, Edit Channel
Name, Edit Channel Number, Sort, Select All, Deselect All ali Auto Store.
(Meniji Tools se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od okoliščin.)
N Ikone stanja kanala
A Analogni kanal. c Kanal, izbran s pritiskom rumenega
gumba.
♥
Kanal, ki je nastavljen kot
priljubljeni.
( Oddaja, ki se trenutno predvaja.
\ Zaklenjen kanal. ) Rezervirana oddaja.
Channel
Mini Guide
Default Guide : Full Guide
Channel List
Channel Mode : Added Ch.
Fine Tune
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 ♥ C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
All Channels
All Channel Type Zoom Select Page Tools
Full Guide
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
Fresh 40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
900 f tn
901 ITV Play
902 Kerrang!
903 Kiss
903 oneword
▼ 903 Smash Hits!
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
Mini Guide DTV Cable 900 f tn
Street Hypnosis
Booze Britain
2:00
2:30
▼ 5:00
Freshmen On Campus
Watch Information Page Full Guide Exit
Watch Information Page Mini Guide +24 Hours Exit
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 13 10/20/2009 4:54:12 PMSlovenščina - 14
❑ Meni z orodji seznama kanalov (v možnosti All Channels/Added Channels/Favourites)
N Za uporabo menija Tools pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
N Elementi menija Tools se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od stanja kanala.
Add / Delete
Lahko izbrišete ali dodate kanal, da prikažete želene kanale.
N Vsi izbrisani kanali bodo prikazani v meniju All Channels.
N Če je kanal obarvan sivo, to pomeni, da je bil izbrisan.
N Meni Add se prikaže samo pri izbrisanih kanalih.
N Na enak način lahko izbrišete kanal v meniju Added Channels ali Favourites.
Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite
Kanale, ki jih pogosto gledate, lahko nastavite kot priljubljene.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da se prikaže meni Tools. Priljubljeni kanal lahko
nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Add to Favorite (ali Delete from
Favourite)
O Če želite izbrati priljubljene kanale, ki ste jih nastavili, pritisnite gumb FAV.CH na
daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Prikazan bo simbol “♥” in kanal bo nastavljen kot priljubljeni.
N Vsi priljubljeni kanali bodo prikazani v meniju Favourites.
Lock / Unlock
Kanal lahko zaklenete, tako da ga ni mogoče izbrati in gledati.
Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, če je možnost Child Lock nastavljena na On. (oglejte si 24. stran)
N Prikaže se zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
N Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je ‘0-0-0-0’. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN.
N Prikazan bo simbol “\” in kanal bo zaklenjen.
Timer Viewing
Če rezervirate oddajo, ki si jo želite ogledati, se kanal na seznamu kanalov samodejno preklopi v rezerviranega, tudi če gledate
drug kanal. Če želite rezervirati oddajo, najprej nastavite trenutni čas. (oglejte si 22. stran)
N Rezervirati je mogoče samo shranjene kanale.
N Kanal, mesec, dan, leto, uro in minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskom številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Rezerviranje programa bo prikazano v meniju Programmed.
N Programski vodnik za digitalne kanale in rezerviranje oddaj
Če je izbran digitalni kanal in pritisnete gumb ►, se prikaže programski vodnik za ta kanal. Oddajo lahko rezervirate po zgoraj
opisanih postopkih.
Edit Channel Name (samo pri analognih kanalih)
Kanale lahko označite, tako da se vsakič, ko izberete določen kanal, prikaže njegovo ime.
N Digitalnim kanalom so imena samodejno dodeljena in jih ni mogoče določiti.
Edit Channel Number (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Urejate lahko tudi številke kanalov, in sicer s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
Sort (samo pri analognih kanalih)
Ta postopek omogoča spreminjanje številk programov shranjenih kanalov. To postopek boste mogoče morali izvesti po uporabi
funkcije samodejnega shranjevanja.
Deselect All / Select All
Prekličete lahko izbor vseh kanalov, ki so izbrani na seznamu kanalov.
N Istočasno lahko dodate / izbrišete več kanalov, jih dodate priljubljenim/izbrišete izmed priljubljenih ali jih zaklenete/odklenete.
Če želite istočasno nastaviti vse izbrane kanale, izberite želene kanale in pritisnite rumeni gumb.
N Levo od izbranih kanalov se prikaže znak c.
N Možnost Deselect All je mogoče izbrati samo, če je kateri od kanalov izbran.
Auto Store
N Za podrobnosti o nastavitvah možnosti si oglejte poglavje oglejte si stran11.
N Če je kanal zaklenjen s funkcijo Child Lock, se prikaže okno za vnos kode PIN.
❑ Meni z orodji seznama kanalov (v možnosti Programmed)
Rezervacijo si lahko ogledate, jo spremenite ali izbrišete.
N Za uporabo menija Tools pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
• Change Info : Za spreminjanje rezervacije oddaje.
• Cancel Schedules : Za preklic rezervacije oddaje.
• Information : Za ogled rezervacije oddaje.
(Lahko tudi spremenite podatke o rezervaciji.)
• Select All / Deselect All : Za izbiro ali preklic izbire vseh rezerviranih oddaj.
Programmed
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 Quincy, M.E
18:59 2 TV3 The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 McMillan & Wife
21:59 2 TV3 M.Spillane’s mike Hammer
Change Info
Cancel Schedules
Information
Select All
All Zoom Select Tools Information
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
All Channels
All Channel Type Zoom Select Page Tools
Delete
Add to Favourite
Lock
Timer Viewing
Edit Channel Name
Sort
▼
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 14 10/20/2009 4:54:13 PMSlovenščina - 15
Spreminjanje slikovnih nastavitev
❑ Mode
Izberete lahko vrsto slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam.
Dynamic / Standard / Eco / Movie
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Slikovni način lahko nastavite
tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Picture Mode.
❑ Cell Light / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)
Televizor ima več možnosti nastavitev za nadzor kakovosti slike.
• Cell Light : Nastavitev svetlosti slikovnih pik.
• Contrast : Prilagoditev ravni kontrasta slike.
• Brightness : Prilagoditev ravni svetlosti slike.
• Sharpness : Prilagoditev nastavitve robov slike.
• Colour : Prilagoditev nasičenosti barv slike.
• Tint(G/R) : Prilagoditev barvnega odtenka slike.
N Če spremenite možnosti Cell Light, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour ali Tint (G/R), se prikaz na zaslonu ustrezno
prilagodi.
N Prilagojene vrednosti se shranijo za vse slikovne načine.
N Funkcije Tint ni mogoče uporabiti v analognih načinih TV, Ext., AV sistema PAL.
N V načinu PC je mogoče spreminjati samo možnosti Cell Light, Contrast in Brightness.
N Vsaka prilagojena nastavitev se shrani ločeno glede na način vhoda.
N Količino porabljene energije lahko opazno zmanjšate, če znižate raven svetlosti slike, s čimer boste tudi znižali celotne tekoče
stroške.
❑ Advanced Settings
Lahko prilagodite napredne nastavitve zaslona, vključno z barvo in kontrastom.
N Advanced Settings je na voljo v načinih Standard in Movie.
N V načinu PC je med elementi Advanced Settings mogoče spreminjati samo
Dynamic Contrast, Gamma in White Balance.
Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest
Globino slike lahko povečate tako, da prilagodite gostoto črne barve.
Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High
Prilagodite lahko kontrast zaslona, tako da je optimalen.
Gamma
Nastavite lahko intenzivnost primarnih barv (rdeča, zelena, modra).
Colour Space
Barvni prostor je barvna matrika, ki je sestavljena iz rdeče, zelene in modre barve. Izberite najljubši barvni prostor za prikaz
najnaravnejših barv.
• Auto : Samodejna nastavitev barvnega razpona glede na vhodni video vir.
• Native : Nastavitev širšega barvnega razpona od vhodnega video vira.
• Custom : Prilagoditev barvnega razpona po vaših željah.
N Prilagajanje barvnega prostora
- Prilagodi barvni obseg po vaših željah. Možnost barve je na voljo, če je možnost Color Space nastavljena na Custom.
- Colour → Red / Green / Blue / Yellow / Cyan / Magenta
- Red / Green / Blue: Za prilagajanje vrednosti RGB za izbrano barvo.
- Reset: Za ponastavitev barvnega prostora na privzete nastavitve.
Upravljanje slike
se nadaljuje …
Mode : Standard ►
Cell Light : 4
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Advanced Settings
Picture
Colour : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Advanced Settings ►
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 15 10/20/2009 4:54:13 PMSlovenščina - 16
White Balance
Prilagodite lahko barvno temperaturo za naravnejše barve slike.
• R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset / R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain : Če spremenite vrednost nastavitve, se osveži prilagojeni zaslon.
• Reset : za ponastavitev privzete izravnave belin.
Flesh Tone
Prilagodite lahko rožnati ton, da je bolj ali manj rdeč.
N Če spremenite vrednost nastavitve, se osveži prilagojeni zaslon.
Edge Enhancement → Off / On
Poudarite lahko robove predmetov na sliki.
xvYCC → Off / On
Nastavitev načina xvYCC na On poveča količino podrobnosti in barvni prostor pri gledanju filmov iz zunanje naprave (npr.
predvajalnika DVD).
N xvYCC je na voljo, če je slikovni način nastavljen na Movie in če je zunanji vhod nastavljen na način HDMI ali Component.
N Funkcija morda ni podprta, odvisno od zunanje naprave.
❑ Picture Options
Prilagodite lahko dodatne slikovne nastavitve po vaših željah.
N V načinu PC je med elementi v Picture Options mogoče spreminjati samo
možnosti Colour Tone, Size in Screen Burn Protection.
Colour Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2 / Warm3
Izberete lahko barvni ton, ki je najudobnejši za vaše oči.
N Prilagojene vrednosti se shranijo v skladu z izbranim slikovnim načinom.
N Možnost Warm1, Warm2, ali Warm3 je aktivna samo, če je slikovni način filmski.
Size → Auto Wide / 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3 / Screen Fit
Izberete lahko velikost slike, ki najbolj ustreza vašim zahtevam.
• Auto Wide : Za nastavitev slike v samodejnem širokem formatu.
• 16:9 : Nastavi sliko na široki način 16:9.
• Wide Zoom : Povečava slike nad 4:3.
• Zoom : Navpična povečava slike na zaslonu.
• 4:3 : Sliko postavi v običajni način 4:3.
• Screen Fit : Za prikaz izvornega signala polne visoke ločljivosti, ki ga ni mogoče gledati na običajnem televizorju.
N Možnosti velikosti slike se lahko razlikujejo glede na vhodni vir.
N Razpoložljivi elementi se lahko razlikujejo glede na izbrani način.
N V načinu PC lahko prilagodite samo načina 16:9 in 4:3.
N Če ste v možnosti PIP nastavili dvojni način ( , ) velikosti slike ni mogoče nastaviti.
N Spreminjate in shranjujete lahko nastavitve vseh zunanjih naprav, ki so priključene na vhod televizorja.
N Če je na televizorju več kot dve uri prikazana negibna slika, se lahko pojavi začasno zadržanje slike.
N Wide Zoom : S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼
pomaknite zaslon navzgor ali navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Zoom : S pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite Position, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ pomaknite sliko navzgor ali navzdol. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. S pritiskanjem gumba
► izberite Size, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE. Pritiskajte gumb ▲ ali ▼, da povečate ali zmanjšate velikost slike v
navpični smeri. Nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Po izbiri možnosti Screen Fit v načinu HDMI (1080i/1080p) ali Component (1080i/1080p) :
s pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Position. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲, ▼, ◄ ali ► pomaknite sliko.
N Reset : Pritisnite gumb ◄ ali ►, da izberete Reset, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
Nastavitev lahko inicializirate.
N Če funkcijo Screen Fit uporabite pri vhodu HDMI 720p, bo odrezana po 1 vrstica zgoraj, spodaj, levo in desno, kot pri
funkciji zmanjšanja prevelike slike.
Screen Mode → 16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3
Ko pri širokozaslonskem televizorju 16:9 velikost slike nastavite na Auto Wide, lahko določite velikost za sliko 4:3 WSS ali pa ne
določite teh nastavitev. V posameznih evropskih državah so zahtevane različne velikosti slike, zato to funkcijo izbere uporabnik.
N Funkcija je na voljo v načinu Auto Wide.
N Funkcija ni na voljo v načinih PC, Component in HDMI.
se nadaljuje …
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Advanced Settings
Picture Options ►
Picture Reset
Picture
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 16 10/20/2009 4:54:14 PMSlovenščina - 17
Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto
Če je sprejeti televizijski signal šibak, lahko aktivirate funkcijo digitalnega odpravljanja šumov za zmanjšanje statičnih motenj in
odsevov na zaslonu.
N Če je signal šibak, izberite eno od ostalih možnosti, tako da je slika prikazana z največjo kakovostjo.
HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low
Na zaslonu lahko neposredno izberete raven črne in tako prilagodite globino zaslona.
N Funkcija je aktivna samo, kadar je zunanji vhod povezan s HDMI-jem (signali RGB).
1080 Full HD Motion Demo → Off / On
Nova generacija Samsungovih zaslonov PDP zagotavlja osupljivo jasnost posnetkov polne visoke ločljivosti med gledanjem športnih
oddaj, filmov in iger.
N Funkcija ni na voljo v načinu PC, Game ali Media Play.
Film Mode
Optimizirate lahko slikovni način za gledanje filmov.
• Off : Za izklop filmskega načina.
• Auto1 : Za samodejno prilagoditev slike na najboljšo kakovost, ko gledate film.
• Auto2 : Za samodejno optimiranje video besedila, ko gledate film.
• Cinema Smooth : Za najboljše kinematografsko doživetje.
N Možnost Film Mode je podprta v načinih TV, Video, Component (480i/1080i) in HDMI (1080i).
Real 100Hz Demo → Off / On
Razlika med možnostma dejanskih 100 Hz in 50 Hz je očitna, posebej pri gledanju hitrih prizorov. Zato pri gledanju počasnih
filmskih prizorov ne boste opazili razlike med možnostma dejanskih 100 Hz in 50 Hz. Predstavitveni način s 100 Hz deluje samo pri
50 Hz signalu. Predstavitveni način z dejanskimi 100 Hz je na voljo za predstavitve v trgovinah s posebnimi slikami.
Blue Only Mode → Off / On
Ta funkcija je namenjena strokovnjakom za merjenje naprav AV. Ta funkcija prikazuje modri signal samo, če iz video signala
odstranita rdeč in zelen signal, da ustvarite učinek modrega filtra, ki se uporablja za prilagajanje barve in obarvanosti video opreme,
kot je predvajalnik DVD, domači kino itd.
N Blue Only Mode je na voljo, če je slikovni način nastavljen na Movie ali Standard.
Screen Burn Protection
V napravo je vgrajena tehnologija za preprečevanje ožiga zaslona, ki zmanjša možnost ožiga. Ta tehnologija omogoča nastavitev
premikanja slike v smeri navzgor/navzdol (navpično) in od ene strani do druge (vodoravno). Časovne nastavitve vam omogočajo
določanje števila minut med premiki slike.
• Pixel Shift : Pri tej funkciji se slikovne pike na zaslonu PDP neznatno premikajo v vodoravni ali navpični smeri, kar zelo zmanjša
možnost pojava zakasnele slike.
N Optimalne razmere za pomikanje slikovnih pik.
Možnost TV/Ext./AV/Component/HDMI/PC
Vodoravno 0~2 2
Navpično 0~4 4
Čas (minuta) 1~4 min 2 min
N Vrednost pomika slikovne pike je odvisna od velikosti monitorja (palcev) in načina.
N Funkcija ni na voljo v načinu Screen Fit.
• Scrolling : Ta funkcija pomaga pri odstranjevanju zakasnele slike z zaslona, tako da vse slikovne pike na zaslonu PDP premika
po določenem vzorcu. Še posebej je uporabna, če je na zaslonu bila zelo dolgo prikazana mirujoča slika.
• Side Grey : Če televizor gledate v razmerju slike 4:3, se s prilagoditvijo izravnave belin na skrajnje levi in skrajnje desni strani
televizorja prepreči škoda.
- Light : Ko gledate televizor z razmerjem slike 4:3, s to možnostjo posvetlite levo in desno stran.
- Dark : Ko gledate televizor z razmerjem slike 4:3, s to možnostjo potemnite levo in desno stran.
se nadaljuje …
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 17 10/20/2009 4:54:14 PMSlovenščina - 18
Nastavitev televizorja z računalnikom
N Prednastavitev : Pritisnite gumb SOURCE, da izberete način računalnika.
❑ Auto Adjustment
Samodejna prilagoditev omogoča računalniškemu zaslonu, da se samodejno prilagodi
vhodnemu video signalu računalnika. Vrednosti za fino, grobo in položaj se samodejno
prilagodijo.
N Ta funkcija ne deluje v načinu DVI-HDMI.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da se prikaže meni Tools. Lahko pa nastavite tudi Auto
Adjustment tako, da izberete Tools → Auto Adjustment.
❑ Screen
S prilagajanjem kakovosti slike odstranite ali zmanjšate šum slike. Če šum ni odstranjen s fino naravnavo, čim bolje nastavite
frekvenco (grobo) in znova fino naravnajte. Po zmanjšanju šumov znova nastavite sliko tako, da bo poravnana na sredino zaslona.
Coarse
Za prilagoditev frekvence, ko se na zaslonu pojavi navpični šum.
Fine
Za prilagoditev jasnosti zaslona.
PC Position
Nastavite položaj računalniškega zaslona, če se ta ne prilega televizijskemu zaslonu.
S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ prilagodite navpični položaj. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► prilagodite vodoravni položaj.
Image Reset
Vse slikovne nastavitve lahko zamenjate s tovarniškimi vrednostmi.
❑ Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel
Ponastavitev vseh slikovnih nastavitev na privzete vrednosti.
N Izberite slikovni način, ki ga želite ponastaviti. Ponastavitev se izvede za vse
slikovne načine.
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Auto Adjustment ►
Screen
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset
Picture Picture
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture Reset ►
Picture
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 18 10/20/2009 4:54:14 PMSlovenščina - 19
Računalniški zaslon
❑ Nastavitev programske opreme računalnika (v okolju Windows XP)
Spodaj so prikazane nastavitve zaslona za tipični računalnik v operacijskem sistemu
Windows. Dejanski prikazi na računalniškem zaslonu bodo najbrž drugačni, odvisno
od različice operacijskega sistema Windows in grafične kartice. Četudi se dejanski
prikazi na zaslonu razlikujejo, v večini primerov veljajo iste osnovne nastavitvene
informacije. (Sicer se obrnite na proizvajalca računalnika ali Samsungovega trgovca.)
1. Najprej kliknite možnost ‘Nadzorna plošča’ v meniju Start v operacijskem sistemu
Windows.
2. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘Videz in teme’ in prikazalo se bo
pogovorno okno zaslona
3. Ko se prikaže okno nadzorne plošče, kliknite ‘Zaslon’ in prikazalo se bo pogovorno
okno zaslona.
4. Pomaknite se na zavihek ‘Nastavitve’ v pogovornem oknu zaslona.
Ustrezna nastavitev velikosti (ločljivost)
Optimalno: 1920 X 1080 slikovnih pik
Če je v pogovornem oknu nastavitev zaslona na voljo možnost za navpično
frekvenco, je njena ustrezna vrednost ‘60’ ali ‘60 Hz’. Sicer samo kliknite ‘V redu’ in
zaprite pogovorno okno.
❑ Načini zaslona
Položaj in velikost zaslona se razlikujeta glede na vrsto računalniškega monitorja in njegovo ločljivost.
Priporočene so ločljivosti v tabeli.
N Če uporabljate kabel HDMI/DVI, uporabite vtičnico HDMI IN 2(DVI).
N Način prepletanja ni podprt.
N Če izberete nestandardno obliko video zapisa, televizor morda ne bo deloval pravilno.
N Podprta sta načina za ločeno in kompozitno. SOG ni podrt.
N Če je kabel VGA predolg ali nizke kakovosti, lahko v načinih visoke ločljivosti (1920x1080) povzroči šum slike.
Vhod D-Sub in HDMI/DVI
Način Ločljivost
Vodoravno
Frekvenca (kHz)
Navpična
frekvenca
(Hz)
Točkovna ura
Frekvenca (MHz)
Polariteta sinhr.
(V/N)
IBM
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 + / -
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / +
MAC
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / -
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / -
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / +
VESA CVT
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 - / +
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 - / +
1280 x 720
44.772 59.855 74.500 - / +
56.456 74.777 95.750 - / +
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 - / +
VESA DMT
640 x 480
31.469 59.940 25.175 - / -
37.861 72.809 31.500 - / -
37.500 75.000 31.500 - / -
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / +
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / +
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / +
1024 x 768
48.363 60.004 65.000 - / -
56.476 70.069 75.000 - / -
60.023 75.029 78.750 + / +
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 800
49.702 59.810 83.500 - / +
62.795 74.934 106.500 - / +
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / +
1280 x 1024
63.981 60.020 108.000 + / +
79.976 75.025 135.000 + / +
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 + / +
1440 x 900
55.935 59.887 106.500 - / +
70.635 74.984 136.750 - / +
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / +
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / +
VESA GTF
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 - / +
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 - / -
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 19 10/20/2009 4:54:15 PMSlovenščina - 20
Spreminjanje zvočnega standarda
❑ Mode
Izberete lahko vrsto posebnih zvočnih učinkov, ki se uporabijo ob gledanju določene
oddaje.
Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da se prikaže meni Tools.
Zvočni način lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Sound Mode.
❑ Equalizer
Zvočne nastavitve lahko prilagodite, kot vam najbolj ustreza.
• Mode : Izberete lahko zvočni način, ki vam najbolj ustreza.
• Balance : Nadzor ravnovesja med desnim in levim zvočnikom.
• 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (nastavitev pasovne širine) : Za nastavitev stopnje frekvenc različnih pasovnih širin.
• Reset : Za ponastavitev nastavitev izenačevalnika na privzete vrednosti.
❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On
SRS TruSurround HD združuje tehnologije TruSurround, FOCUS in TruBass.
SRS TruSurround HD proizvaja zvočni učinek navideznega 5.1-kanalnega prostorskega zvoka, ki prihaja iz dveh zvočnikov
televizorja. Ta funkcija ne zagotavlja samo bogatih globokih nizkih tonov, ampak obenem izboljša tudi visoko frekvenčno ločljivost.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da se prikaže meni Tools. Funkcijo SRS TruSurround
HD lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → SRS TS HD.
TruSurround HD, SRS in simbol so blagovne znamke podjetja SRS Labs, Inc.
Tehnologija TruSurround HD je vgrajena pod licenco podjetja SRS Labs, Inc.
N Če med predvajanjem glasbe na televizorju zvok ni normalen, nastavite izenačevalnik in SRS TruSurround HD (Off/On).
❑ Audio Language (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Spremenite lahko privzeto vrednost za jezik avdia. Prikaže informacije o jeziku za dohodni tok.
N Izbirate lahko samo med jeziki, ki so dejansko oddajani.
❑ Audio Format → MPEG / Dolby Digital (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Pri istočasnem oddajanju zvoka iz glavnega zvočnika in avdio sprejemnika lahko pride do odmeva zaradi različne hitrosti
odkodiranja za glavni zvočnik in avdio sprejemnik. V tem primeru uporabite funkcijo zvočnika televizorja.
N Izbirate lahko samo med jeziki, ki so dejansko oddajani.
Izdelano pod licenco podjetja Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby in dvojni simbol D sta blagovni znamki podjetja Dolby Laboratories.
❑ Audio Description (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
To je dodatna funkcija za zvok, ki omogoča dodatne zvočne posnetke za slabovidne. Ta funkcija je namenjena zvočnemu toku za
AD (Audio Description), če jo oddajnik pošlje skupaj z glavnim zvokom. Uporabniki lahko možnost Audio Description vklopijo ali
izklopijo ter upravljajo glasnost.
O Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba AD na daljinskem
upravljalniku.
Audio Description → Off / On
Vklop ali izklop funkcije zvočnega opisa.
Volume
Za nastavitev glasnosti zvočnega opisa.
N Možnost Volume je aktivna, če je možnost Audio Description nastavljena na On.
Nadzor zvoka
Mode : Custom ►
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround HD : Off
Audio Language : ----
Audio Format : ----
Audio Description
Auto Volume : Off
Speaker Select : TV Speaker
Sound
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 20 10/20/2009 4:54:15 PMSlovenščina - 21
❑ Auto Volume → Off / On
Stanje signalov posameznih postaj se razlikuje, zato ni enostavno prilagajati glasnosti ob vsaki zamenjavi kanala. Ta funkcija
omogoča samodejno regulacijo glasnosti želenega kanala z znižanjem glasnosti v primeru visokega modulacijskega signala ali
zvišanjem glasnosti v primeru nizkega modulacijskega signala.
❑ Speaker Select → External Speaker / TV Speaker
Če želite slišati zvok iz ločenih zvočnikov, izklopite notranji ojačevalnik.
N Gumba – +, M MUTE ne delujeta, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker.
N Če izberete External Speaker v meniju Speaker Select, bodo zvočne nastavitve omejene.
Notranji zvočniki televizorja
Avdio izhod (optični, izhod L/D) v zvočnem
sistemu
TV/Ext. /AV/Component/PC/HDMI TV/Ext. /AV/Component/PC/HDMI
Zvočnik Televizorja Izhod zvočnikov Izhod Zvoka
Zunanji Zvočnik Nemo Izhod Zvoka
Ni Video Signala Nemo Nemo
❑ Sound Select
Ko je aktivirana funkcija PIP, lahko poslušate zvok podslike (PIP)
• Main : Za poslušanje zvoka glavne slike.
• Sub : Za poslušanje zvoka podslike.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Zvok podslike lahko nastavite
tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → PIP → Sound Select.
N To možnost lahko izberete, ko je možnost PIP nastavljena na On.
❑ Sound Reset
Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel : Zvočne nastavitve lahko obnovite na
tovarniške vrednosti.
Izbira zvočnega načina
Če nastavite na Dual l ll, se na zaslonu prikaže trenutni zvočni način.
Vrsta oddajanja Indikator na zaslonu
NICAM
Stereo
Običajno oddajanje
(standardni avdio)
Mono (normalna uporaba)
Običajno + NICAM Mono NICAM
Mono
(normalno)
NICAM-Stereo
NICAM
Stereo
Mono
(normalno)
NICAM Dual-I/II
NICAM
Dual-1
NICAM
Dual-2
Mono
(normalno)
A2
Stereo
Običajno oddajanje
(standardni avdio)
Mono (normalna uporaba)
Dvojezično ali
DUAL-I/II
Dual I Dual II
Stereo Stereo
Mono
(prisilni mono)
N Če je stereo signal šibak in pride do samodejnega preklopa, preklopite na Mono.
N Ta funkcija je aktivirana samo pri stereo zvočnem signalu. V mono zvočnem signalu je deaktivirana.
N Ta funkcija je na voljo samo v načinu TV.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools.
Zvočni način lahko izberete tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Dual l ll.
Speaker Select : TV Speaker
Sound Select : Main
Sound Reset ►
Sound
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 21 10/20/2009 4:54:16 PMSlovenščina - 22
Opis funkcij
Nastavitev časa
❑ Clock
Uro morate nastaviti, da lahko uporabljate različne funkcije časovnika televizorja.
N Ob vsakem pritisku gumba INFO se bo prikazal trenutni čas.
N Če izključite napajalni kabel, morate uro znova nastaviti.
Clock Mode
Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno ali samodejno.
• Auto : Za samodejno nastavitev trenutnega časa z uporabo digitalno oddajanega
časa.
• Manual : Za ročno nastavitev trenutnega časa.
Clock Set
Trenutni čas lahko nastavite ročno.
N Ta element nastavite, če ste možnost Clock Mode nastavili na Manual.
N Nastavitve Day, Month, Year, Hour, Minute lahko nastavite neposredno s pritiskanjem
številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
❑ Sleep Timer → Off / 30 min / 60 min / 90 min / 120 min / 150 min
/ 180 min
Izklopni časovnik samodejno izklopi televizor po prednastavljenem času
(30, 60, 90, 120, 150 in 180 minut).
N Ko časovnik doseže 0, se televizor samodejno preklopi v stanje pripravljenosti.
N Če želite preklicati delovanje funkcije Sleep Timer, izberite Off.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools.
Izklopni časovnik lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Sleep Timer.
❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
Televizor lahko nastavite tako, da se bo vklopil ali izklopil ob želenem času.
• On Time : Za nastavitev časa vklopa televizorja.
• Off Time : Za nastavitev časa izklopa televizorja.
• Volume : Za izbiro glasnosti.
• Source : Za izbiro naprave TV, USB.
N Če izberete TV, lahko nastavite možnosti Antenna in Channel.
- Antenna : Za izbiro običajnega ali kabelskega kanala.
- Channel : Za izbiro želenega kanala.
N Če izberete USB, lahko nastavite vsebino.
- Contents : Za izbiro želene vsebine v USB.
N Če na ključu USB ni glasbene datoteke ali mapa z glasbeno datoteko ni izbrana, funkcija časovnika ne deluje pravilno.
• Repeat : Izberite Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun ali Manual.
N Če je izbrana možnost Manual, s pritiskanjem gumba ► izberite želeni dan v tednu. Za želeni dan pritisnite gumb ENTERE in
prikazala se bo oznakac.
N Celotna mapa v USB-ju je podprta za angleških 64 znakov.
N Najprej morate nastaviti uro.
N Uro, minute in kanal lahko nastavite s pritiskanjem številskih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Auto Power Off
Če vklopite časovnik, se bo televizor izklopil, če tri ure potem, ko je časovnik vklopil televizor, ni bila pritisnjena nobena kontrola.
Ta funkcija je na voljo samo, ko je vklopljen časovnik, in preprečuje pregrevanje, do katerega lahko pride, če je televizor predolgo
vklopljen.
Time
Clock : -- : -- ►
Sleep Timer : Off
Timer 1 : Inactivated
Timer 2 : Inactivated
Timer 3 : Inactivated
U Move E Enter R Return
Setup
Plug & Play
Menu Language : Slovenian
Time ►
Broadcast
Security
Network
General
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 22 10/20/2009 4:54:16 PMSlovenščina - 23
Konfiguriranje menija Setup
❑ Menu Language
Za nastavitev jezika menija.
❑ Broadcast
Subtitle
Za aktiviranje in deaktiviranje podnapisov. S tem menijem nastavite način podnapisov.
Menijska možnost Normal predstavlja osnovne podnaslove, možnost Hard of hearing
pa podnapise za osebe z okvaro sluha.
• Subtitle → Off / On : Za izklop ali vklop podnapisov.
• Mode → Normal / Hard of hearing : Za nastavitev načina podnapisov.
• Subtitle Language : Za nastavitev jezika podnapisov.
N Če program, ki ga gledate, ne podpira funkcije Hard of hearing, se samodejno
vklopi način Normal, čeprav je izbran način Hard of hearing.
N Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina.
O Te možnosti lahko enostavno izberete s pritiskom gumba SUBT. na daljinskem
upravljalniku.
Digital Text → Disable / Enable
Ta funkcija je omogočena, če je program oddajan z digitalnim besedilom.
N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group)
Mednarodni standard za sisteme za kodiranje podatkov, ki se uporablja za večpredstavnost in hiperpredstavnost. Je na višjem
nivoju kot sistem MPEG in vključuje hiperpredstavnost s povezanimi podatki, kot so slike, znakovne storitve, animacije, grafike
in video datoteke ter večpredstavnostne podatke. MHEG je tehnologija, ki omogoča sodelovanje uporabnika med delovanjem,
in se uporablja na različnih področjih, kot so VOD (video na zahtevo), ITV (interaktivna televizija), EC (elektronsko poslovanje),
teleizobraževanje, telekonference, digitalne knjižnice in omrežne igre.
Teletext Language
Nastavite lahko jezik teleteksta, in sicer tako, da izberete vrsto jezika.
N Če program ne omogoča izbranega jezika, je privzeti jezik angleščina.
Preference
• Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language /
Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language
S to funkcijo lahko uporabnik izbere enega od jezikov. Tukaj izbrani jezik je privzeti jezik, ko uporabnik izbere kanal.
Če spremenite nastavitev jezika, se možnosti menija Language Subtitle Language, Audio Language in Teletext Language
samodejno spremenijo v izbrani jezik.
Možnosti menija Language Subtitle Language, Audio Language in Teletext Language prikazujejo seznam jezikov, ki jih podpira
trenutni kanal; izbor je označen. Če spremenite to nastavitev jezika, nov izbor velja samo za trenutni kanal. S spremembo
nastavitve se ne spremenijo nastavitve menija Preference: Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language in Primary
Teletext Language.
Common Interface
• Namestitev CI(CI+) kartice za splošni vmesnik
1. Modul CI(CI+) CAM kupite pri najbližjem prodajalcu ali po telefonu.
2. Kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v CI(CI+) CARD CAM v smeri puščici, da
se zaskoči na mestu.
3. CAM z nameščeno CI(CI+) kartico za splošni vmesnik vstavite v režo za splošni
vmesnik.
N CAM vstavite v smeri puščice do konca, tako da je vzporeden z režo.
4. Preverite, ali na kanalu z motenim signalom vidite sliko.
• CI(CI+) Menu
Uporabniku omogoča izbiro iz menija, ki ga omogoča CAM.
Meni splošnega vmesnika CI(CI+) izberite glede na računalniško kartico.
• Application Info.
Za prikaz informacij o CAM-u, ki je vstavljen v režo za splošni vmesnik CI(CI+).
Informacije o aplikaciji se nanašajo na CI(CI+) kartico splošnega vmesnika. CAM
lahko namestite kadar koli, ne glede na to, ali je televizor VKLOPLJEN ali IZKLOPLJEN.
N Kartica za splošni vmesnik (CI+) ni podprta v nekaterih državah, regijah in pri nekaterih oddajnih postajah. Preverite pri
pooblaščenem prodajalcu.
se nadaljuje …
Setup
Plug & Play
Menu Language : Slovenian ►
Time
Broadcast
Security
Network
General
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 23 10/20/2009 4:54:17 PMSlovenščina - 24
❑ Security
N Pri nekaterih modelih je potrebno za uporabo funkcije Plug & Play izbrati nastavljeno številko PIN.
Child Lock → Off / On
Ta funkcija preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa nepooblaščenim uporabnikom (na primer otrokom) tako, da prepreči
predvajanje slike in zvoka.
N Preden se prikaže nastavitveni zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
N Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je ‘0-0-0-0’. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN.
N Zaklenete lahko nekatere kanale na seznamu kanalov. (oglejte si 14. stran)
N Child Lock je na voljo samo v načinu TV.
Parental Lock
Ta funkcija nepooblaščenim uporabnikom, na primer otrokom, preprečuje gledanje neprimernega programa, in sicer s 4-mestno
kodo PIN (osebna identifikacijska številka), ki jo določi uporabnik.
N Oznaka starševskega nadzora se razlikuje od države do države.
N Preden se prikaže nastavitveni zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos kode PIN. Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN.
N Privzeta koda PIN novega televizorja je ‘0-0-0-0’. Kodo PIN lahko spremenite tako, da v meniju izberete Change PIN.
N Ko so oznake starševskega nadzora nastavljene, se prikaže simbol “\”.
N Allow All / Block All : Pritisnite, da odklenete ali zaklenete vse oznake televizorja.
Change PIN
Spremenite lahko osebno identifikacijsko številko, ki je potrebna za nastavitev televizorja.
N Preden se prikaže nastavitveni zaslon, se prikaže zaslon za vnos kode PIN.
Vnesite 4-mestno kodo PIN. (Privzeta koda : ‘0-0-0-0’).
N Če PIN pozabite, pritisnite gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku v naslednjem zaporedju, s čimer PIN ponastavite na ‘0-0-0-0’:
POWER (izklop), MMUTE, 8, 2, 4, POWER (vklop).
❑ General
Game Mode → Off / On
Pri povezavi z igralno konzolo, kot je PlayStation
TM
ali Xbox
TM
, lahko uživate v bolj realistični izkušnji tako, da izberete meni iger.
• Ko je možnost Game Mode nastavljena na On
- Picture Slikovni način se samodejno spremeni v način Standard in ga ni mogoče spremeniti.
- Zvočni način se samodejno spremeni v način Custom in ga ni mogoče spremeniti. Z izenačevalnikom prilagodite zvok.
- Aktivira se možnost Reset v meniju zvoka. Funkcija Reset inicializira nastavitve izenačevalnika na tovarniške nastavitve.
N Možnost Game Mode ni na voljo v običajnem načinu TV ali Game Mode nastavljen na Off.
N Če je ob priključeni zunanji napravi kakovost slike slaba, preverite, ali je možnost Game Mode nastavljena na On.
N Če meni televizorja prikazujete z možnostjo načina iger, zaslon rahlo miglja.
N Na zaslonu se prikaže oznaka , ki pomeni, da je za izbrani vir vklopljen način Game Mode.
N Ta funkcija podpira samo funkcijo igre.
N Način Game Mode ni na voljo v načinu računalnika.
BD Wise → Off / On
Wise je funkcija, ki omogoča samodejno nastavitev optimalnih pogojev za vse povezane Samsungove naprave, ki podpirajo
funkcijo BD Wise.
N Ta funkcija je aktivna samo, če je zunanja naprava na televizor priključena prek vhoda HDMI.
N Ko je možnost BD Wise nastavljena na On, se slikovni način samodejno spremeni glede na razmere.
Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off
Ta funkcija prilagodi svetlost televizorja, tako da se zmanjša poraba energije. Če televizor gledate ponoči, nastavite možnost načina
Energy Saving na High, da zmanjšate utrujanje oči in tudi porabo energije.
Če izberete Picture Off, se izklopi slika in predvaja se samo zvok. Za izklop funkcije Picture Off pritisnite kateri koli gumb.
N V meniju Tools funkcija Picture Off ni podprta.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools.
Možnost Energy Saving lahko nastavite tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → Energy
Saving.
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 24 10/20/2009 4:54:17 PMSlovenščina - 25
Menu Transparency
Nastavite lahko prosojnost menija na zaslonu.
• Bright: : Za nastavitev običajnega menija na zaslonu.
• Dark : Za preklop menija na zaslonu v neprosojnega.
Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High
Prilagodite lahko melodijo ob vklopu ali izklopu televizorja.
N Melodija se ne predvaja
- Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb M MUTE.
- Ko iz televizorja ne prihaja zvok, ker ste pritisnili gumb – (Glasnost).
- Ko se televizor izklopi s funkcijo Sleep Timer.
Light Effect (samo PS58B680/PS63B680)
Glede na okoliščine lahko vklopite ali izklopite modri indikator LED na sprednji strani televizorja. Uporabite ga za varčevanje z
energijo ali če indikator LED utruja vaše oči.
• Off : Modri indikator LED je vedno izklopljen.
• In Standby : Modri indikator LED sveti v načinu pripravljenosti, ob vklopu televizorja pa se.
• Watching TV : Modri indikator LED sveti, ko gledate televizijo, ob izklopu televizorja pa se izklopi.
• Always : Modri indikator LED vedno sveti.
N Nastavite Light Effect na Off da zmanjšate porabo energije.
Ogled slike v sliki (PIP)
V glavni sliki lahko prikažete podsliko televizijskega programa ali video vhoda. Tako lahko
gledate sliko televizijskega programa ali video vhoda iz katere koli priključene opreme, medtem
ko gledate glavno sliko.
N Ko na glavnem zaslonu gledate igro ali karaoke, lahko slika v oknu PIP postane malce
nenaravna.
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Nastavitve funkcije PIP lahko
konfigurirate tudi z izbiro možnosti Tools → PIP.
❑ PIP → Off / On
Za aktiviranje ali deaktiviranje funkcije PIP.
Glavna slika Podslika
Component
HDMI 1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI 3, HDMI 4
PC
TV
Size → / / /
Za izbiro velikosti podslike.
N Če je glavna slika v načinu HDMI, je na voljo možnost Size.
Position → / / /
Za izbiro položaja podslike.
N V dvojnem načinu ( , ) možnosti Position ni mogoče izbrati.
Channel
Izberete lahko kanal podslike.
PIP
PIP : Off ►
Size :
Position :
Channel : ATV 1
E Enter R Return
General
Game Mode : Off
BD Wise : Off
Energy Saving : Off
Menu Transparency : Bright
Melody : Medium
PIP ►
U Move E Enter R Return
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 25 10/20/2009 4:54:17 PMSlovenščina - 26
Podprti program
❑ Legal Notice
Ogledate si lahko pravno obvestilo in splošno izjavo o zavrnitvi odgovornosti glede vsebine in storitev tretje osebe.
General Disclaimer
To je celotna storitev pravnega obvestila za Internet@TV.
N Splošna izjava o zavrnitvi odgovornosti se lahko razlikuje, odvisno od države.
N S pritiskom gumba ◄ ali ► se lahko pomaknete na prejšnjo ali naslednjo stran.
❑ Product Guide
V navodilih za uporabo izdelka so opisane najpomembnejše funkcije televizorja.
N Za podrobnejše informacije izberite želeni element.
❑ Self Diagnosis
Picture Test
Če menite, da imate težave s sliko, izvedite preskus slike. Oglejte si barvni vzorec na zaslonu, da preverite, ali težava še vedno
obstaja.
N Na zaslonu se prikaže Does the problem still exist with this test photo?.
Če se poskusni vzorec ne prikaže ali pa je na njem šum, izberite Yes.
Če je poskusni vzorec pravilno prikazan, izberite No.
• Yes : Vzrok težave je morda televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center.
• No : Vzrok težave je morda zunanja oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik
za zunanjo napravo.
Sound Test
Če menite, da imate težave s sliko, izvedite preskus slike.
Oglejte si barvni vzorec na zaslonu, da preverite, ali težava še vedno obstaja.
N Na zaslonu se prikaže Does the problem still exist with this test photo?.
Če se poskusni vzorec ne prikaže ali pa je na njem šum, izberite Yes.
Če je poskusni vzorec pravilno prikazan, izberite No.
• Yes : Vzrok težave je morda televizor. Za pomoč pokličite Samsungov klicni center.
• No : Vzrok težave je morda zunanja oprema. Preverite povezave. Če težave niste odpravili, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik
za zunanjo napravo.
N Če iz zvočnikov televizorja ne prihaja zvok, pred izvedbo preskusa zvoka preverite, ali je možnost Speaker Select v meniju
zvoka nastavljena na TV speaker.
N Med preskusom se melodija predvaja tudi, če je možnost Speaker Select nastavljena na External Speaker ali če je bil zvok
izklopljen s pritiskom gumba M MUTE.
Signal Information (samo pri digitalnih kanalih)
Lahko prilagodite anteno, da izboljšate sprejem digitalnih kanalov, ki so na voljo.
N Če merilnik jakosti signalov kaže, da je signal šibek, fizično prilagodite anteno, da povečate jakost signalov. Nadaljujte s
prilagajanjem antene, dokler ne najdete najboljšega položaja z najmočnejšim signalom.
Podprti / Vhod
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 26 10/20/2009 4:54:17 PMSlovenščina - 27
Seznam virov / urejanje imena
❑ Source List
Za izbiro televizorja ali drugih zunanjih vhodnih virov, ki so povezani s televizorjem, na
primer predvajalnikov DVD ali kabelskih/satelitskih sprejemnikov. Uporabite za izbiro
želenega vhodnega vira.
TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2/DVI, HDMI3, HDMI4, USB.
N Izberete lahko samo zunanje naprave, ki so povezane s televizorjem. Na seznamu
virov se bodo povezani vhodi označili in pomaknili na vrh. Nepovezani vhodi pa se
bodo pomaknili na dno.
N Uporaba barvnih gumbov na daljinskem upravljalniku za seznam virov.
- Rdeči (Refresh) : Za osvežitev povezanih zunanjih naprav.
- T TOOLS (Tools) : Za prikaz menijev Edit Name in Information.
O Da si ogledate zunanji signalni vir, pritisnite gumb SOURCE na daljinskem
upravljalniku.
❑ Edit Name
Poimenujte lahko napravo, ki je priključena na vhodne vtičnice, da boste lažje izbrali vhodni vir.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV /
Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
N Če je na vrata HDMI IN 2(DVI) povezan računalnik z ločljivostjo 1920 x 1080 pri 60 Hz, nastavite način HDMI2/DVI na PC v
možnosti Edit Name načina Input.
❑ Software Upgrade
Da bi bil izdelek opremljen z najnovejšimi funkcijami digitalne televizije, so nadgradnje programske opreme redno oddajane kot del
običajnega televizijskega signala. Televizor samodejno zazna take signale in prikaže obvestilo o nadgradnji programske opreme.
Imate možnost namestitve nadgradnje.
By USB
Pogon USB, na katerem je nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme, vstavite v televizor. Pazite, da med posodobitvijo ne odklopite
napajanja ali odstranite pogona USB. Ko bo nadgradnja vdelane programske opreme končana, se bo televizor samodejno izklopil
in znova vklopil. Po končani nadgradnji preverite različico vdelane programske opreme. Ko je programska oprema nadgrajena, se
uporabniške nastavitve videa in zvoka vrnejo na privzete (tovarniške) vrednosti.
By Channel
Nadgradnja programske opreme z uporabo oddajnega signala.
N Če med časom prenosa programske opreme izberete to funkcijo, zaženete iskanje in
prenos razpoložljive programske opreme.
N Koliko časa se prenaša programska oprema, je odvisno od stanja signala.
Standby Mode Upgrade
Da nadaljujete nadgradnjo programske opreme z vklopljenim glavnim napajanjem,
s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite On. 45 minut po preklopu v stanje pripravljenosti se
samodejno izvede ročna nadgradnja. Ker je napajanje izdelka vklopljeno notranje, lahko
zaslon rahlo sveti. Ta pojav lahko traja več kot 1 uro, dokler se nadgradnja programske
opreme ne dokonča.
Alternative Software
Zamenjava trenutne programske opreme z novejšo.
N Če ste zamenjali programsko opremo, je prikazana trenutna.
N Trenutno programsko opremo lahko zamenjate z drugo z uporabo možnosti Alternative Software.
❑ HD Connection Guide
Prikažejo se kratka navodila, kako optimalno izkoristiti novi HDTV. Nudimo način povezave za naprave HD.
N S pritiskom gumba ◄ ali ► se lahko pomaknete na prejšnjo ali naslednjo stran.
❑ Contact Samsung
Na voljo vam je Samsungov klicni center, spletno mesto in informacije o izdelku.
Stranska plošča televizorja
Pogon USB
Source List
Edit Name
Input
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 27 10/20/2009 4:54:18 PMSlovenščina - 28
Omrežna
Omrežna povezava
Omrežna povezava se uporablja za DLNA, prenos knjižnice vsebin iz interneta, Internet@TV in središče domačega omrežja.
❑ Omrežna povezava – kabelska
Povezava LAN-a za omrežje DHCP-ja
Spodaj so opisani postopki za nastavitev omrežja z uporabo protokola za dinamično konfiguracijo gostitelja (DHCP). Naslov IP,
maska podomrežja, prehod in DNS se samodejno dodelijo, ko je izbran DHCP, zato jih ni treba ročno vnesti.
1. S kablom LAN povežite vrata LAN na hrbtni plošči televizorja in zunanji modem.
2. S kablom za modem priključite zunanji modem na vrata LAN na steni.
N Priključki (mesto in vrsta vrat) zunanje naprave se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od proizvajalca.
N Če strežnik DHCP ni uspel dodeliti naslova IP, izklopite zunanji modem, ga znova vklopite po vsaj 10 sekundah in poskusite
znova.
N Za povezavo med zunanjim modemom in delilnikom (usmerjevalnikom) si oglejte navodila za uporabo ustreznega izdelka.
N Televizor lahko z LAN-om povežete neposredno, brez povezave prek delilnika (usmerjevalnika).
N Modema ADSL za ročno povezavo ni mogoče uporabiti, ker ne podpira DHCP-ja. Uporabite modem ADSL za samodejno
povezavo.
Hrbtna plošča televizorja
Vrata za modem
na steni
2 Kabel za modem
Zunanji modem
(ADSL/VDSL/kabelska televizija)
1 Kabel LAN
Vrata LAN in televizor lahko povežete neposredno, odvisno od stanja omrežja.
Hrbtna plošča televizorja
Kabel LAN
Vrata za modem
na steni
LAN lahko povežete prek delilnika (usmerjevalnika).
Hrbtna plošča televizorja
Vrata za modem
na steni
unanji modem
(ADSL/VDSL/
kabelska televizija)
Delilnik IP
Kabel LAN
Kabel za modem
Kabel LAN
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 28 10/20/2009 4:54:20 PMSlovenščina - 29
Povezava LAN-a za okolje statičnega IP-ja
Spodaj so opisani postopki za nastavitev omrežja z uporabo statičnega naslova IP. Ročno vnesite naslov IP, masko podomrežja,
prehod in DNS, ki jih dobite pri vašem internetnem ponudniku (ISP-ju).
1. S kablom LAN povežite vrata LAN na hrbtni plošči televizorja in vrata LAN na steni.
N Priključki (mesto in vrsta vrat) zunanje naprave se lahko razlikujejo, odvisno od proizvajalca.
N Če uporabljate statični naslov IP, vas bo vaš ISP obvestil o naslovu IP, maski podomrežja, prehodu in DNS-ju. Te vrednosti morate
vnesti, ko določate omrežne nastavitve. Če ne poznate vrednosti, se obrnite na skrbnika omrežja.
N Za informacije o konfiguriranju in povezavi delilnika (usmerjevalnika) si oglejte navodila za uporabo ustreznega izdelka.
N Televizor lahko z LAN-om povežete neposredno, brez povezave prek delilnika.
N Če uporabljate delilnik IP (usmerjevalnik IP), ki podpira DHCP, lahko napravo nastavite kot DHCP ali statični IP.
N Za postopke uporabe statičnega naslova IP se obrnite na vašega internetnega ponudnika.
❑ Omrežna povezava – brezžična
V omrežje se lahko povežete brezžično prek brezžičnega delilnika IP.
1. Namestite ‘Samsungovo kartico za brezžični LAN‘ v priključek USB1(HDD) ali USB2 na televizorju.
N Če želite uporabljati brezžično omrežje, uporabite ‘Samsungovo kartico za brezžični LAN‘.
N Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN je naprodaj posebej. Kartica za brezžični LAN WIS09ABGN je na voljo pri izbranih trgovcih, v
spletnih trgovinah in na spletnem mestu Samsungparts.com.
N Da lahko uporabljate brezžično omrežje, mora biti televizor povezan z brezžičnim delilnikom IP.
N Če brezžični delilnik IP podpira DHCP, se lahko televizor poveže z brezžičnim omrežjem prek DHCP-ja ali statičnega naslova IP.
N Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN podpira IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B,
IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. Pri predvajanju videa DLNA prek povezave IEEE 802.11B/G lahko pride do motenj.
N Če brezžični delilnik IP omogoča vklop/izklop funkcije preverjanja dosegljivosti (ping), jo vklopite.
N Za brezžični delilnik IP izberite kanal, ki trenutno ni v uporabi. Če kanal, nastavljen za brezžični delilnik IP, uporablja druga naprava,
ki se nahaja v bližini, bo to povzročilo motnje in komunikacija morda ne bo uspešna.
se nadaljuje …
Hrbtna plošča televizorja
1 Kabel LAN
Vrata za modem
na steni
Hrbtna plošča televizorja
Kabel LAN
Delilnik IP
Kabel LAN
Vrata za LAN na steni
LAN lahko povežete prek delilnika (usmerjevalnika).
Stranska plošča televizorja
Samsungova kartica
za brezžični LAN
Kabel LAN
Brezžični delilnik IP
Vrata za LAN
na steni
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 29 10/20/2009 4:54:23 PMSlovenščina - 30
N Če uporabite varnostni sistem, ki ni naveden spodaj, ne bo deloval pri televizorju.
- Če za AP (brezžični usmerjevalnik IP) uporabite varnostni ključ, je podprto samo naslednje.
1) Način preverjanja pristnosti : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Vrsta šifriranja : WEP, TKIP, AES
- Če za začasni način uporabite varnostni ključ, je podprto samo naslednje.
1) Način preverjanja pristnosti : SHARED, WPANONE
2) Vrsta šifriranja : WEP, TKIP, AES
N Če AP podpira WPS (zaščiteno nastavitev omrežja Wi-Fi), se lahko v omrežje povežete prek PBC-ja (konfiguracije s pritiskom
gumba) ali PIN-a (osebne identifikacijske številke). WPS bo samodejno konfiguriral ključa SSID in WPA v ustreznem načinu.
N Če naprava ni potrjena, je s televizorjem ni mogoče povezati prek ‘Samsungove kartice za brezžični LAN‘.
Nastavitev omrežja
❑ Network Type
Za povezavo v omrežje izberite možnost kabelske ali brezžične povezave.
N Meni je aktiviran samo, če je nameščena ‘Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN’.
• Cable : V omrežje se povežite s kablom.
• Wireless : V omrežje se povežite brezžično.
❑ Network Setup
Cable Network Setup (če je možnost Network Type nastavljena na Cable)
N Preverite, ali je priključen kabel LAN.
• Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual
• Network Test : Ko nastavite omrežje, lahko preskusite ali potrdite stanje omrežne povezave.
N Če je internetni ponudnik registriral naslov MAC naprave
Če je internetni ponudnik registriral naslov MAC naprave, ki se uporabi pri prvi povezavi z internetom, in preverja naslov MAC
ob vsaki povezavi z internetom, se televizor morda ne bo mogel povezati z internetom, saj se njegov naslov MAC razlikuje od
naslova naprave (računalnika).
V tem primeru internetnega ponudnika povprašajte po postopkih povezave naprave, ki ni računalnik (na primer televizorja), z
internetom. Če internetni ponudnik za povezavo z internetom (omrežjem) zahteva ID ali geslo, se televizor morda ne bo mogel
povezati z internetom. V tem primeru pri povezavi z internetom prek internetnega delilnika (usmerjevalnika) vnesite ID ali geslo.
Internetna povezava morda ne bo uspela zaradi požarnega zida.
V tem primeru se obrnite na internetnega ponudnika. Če se z internetom ne uspete povezati, čeprav ste izvedli postopke, ki jih
je navedel internetni ponudnik, se obrnite na družbo Samsung Electronic
Cable Network Setup-Auto
Če povežete kabel LAN in ta podpira DHCP, se samodejno konfigurirajo nastavitve internetnega protokola (IP-ja).
1. Nastavite Network Type na Cable.
2. Izberite Cable Network Setup.
3. Nastavite Internet Protocol Setup na Auto.
N Internetni protokol se samodejno nastavi.
4. Izberite Network Test da preverite povezljivost omrežja.
Cable Network Setup-Manual
Da boste lahko povezali televizor in LAN prek statičnega naslova IP, nastavite internetni protokol (IP).
N Preverite, ali je priključen kabel LAN. (oglejte si 28. stran)
1. Nastavite Network Type na Cable.
2. Izberite Cable Network Setup.
3. Nastavite Internet Protocol Setup to Manual.
4. Nastavite možnosti IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway in DNS Server.
N Če omrežje nastavljate ročno, pritisnite številske gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku.
5. Izberite Network Test da preverite povezljivost omrežja.
Setup
Broadcast
Security
Network ►
General
se nadaljuje …
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 30 10/20/2009 4:54:24 PMSlovenščina - 31
Wireless Network Setup (če je možnost Network Type nastavljena na Wireless)
N Meni je aktiviran samo, če je nameščena ‘Samsungova kartica za brezžični LAN’. (oglejte si 29. stran)
- Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual
- Network Test: Ko nastavite omrežje, lahko preskusite ali potrdite stanje omrežne povezave.
N Ko povezava z AP-jem ni mogoča Televizor morda ne bo uspel najti AP-ja
ki je konfiguriran kot zasebni SSID. V tem primeru spremenite nastavitve AP-ja in poskusite znova. Če je internetni ponudnik
registriral naslov MAC naprave, ki se uporabi pri prvi povezavi z internetom, in preverja naslov MAC ob vsaki povezavi z
internetom, se televizor morda ne bo mogel povezati z internetom, saj se njegov naslov MAC razlikuje od naslova naprave
(računalnika).
V tem primeru internetnega ponudnika povprašajte po postopkih povezave naprave, ki ni računalnik (na primer televizorja), z
internetom. Če se z internetom ne uspete povezati, čeprav ste izvedli postopke, ki jih je navedel internetni ponudnik, se obrnite
na družbo Samsung Electronic, tel. 1-800-SAMSUNG.
• Select a network
- Dostopna točka : Izberete lahko delilnik IP, ki naj se uporabi, ko uporabljate
brezžično omrežje.
N Če brezžične vstopne točke ni na seznamu za izbiro omrežja, pritisnite rdeči
gumb.
N Ko je povezava vzpostavljena, se boste samodejno vrnili na zaslon.
N Če ste izbrali vstopno točko s preverjanjem varnosti :
Prikaže se zaslon za vnos varnostnega ključa. Vnesite varnostni ključ in pritisnite
modri gumb na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Če je varnostno šifriranje vrste WEP, bo ob vnosu varnostnega ključa na voljo 0–9, A–F.
Gumb Delovanje
▲/▼/◄/► Pomik izbora navzgor/navzdol/levo/desno.
ENTER Vnos izbranega znaka.
Rdeči gumb Preklop med velikimi in malimi črkami.
Zeleni gumb Brisanje vnesenega znaka.
Modri gumb Ta gumb pritisnite, da končate vnašanje varnostnega ključa.
❑ Povezava z uporabo WPS-ja (zaščitena nastavitev omrežja Wi-Fi)
Če je varnostni ključ že nastavljen : Na seznamu dostopnih točk izberite
WPS.
N Izberete lahko PBC, PIN, Security Key.
• Povezava z uporabo možnosti PBC : Izberite PBC (Konfiguracija s pritiskom
gumba). V dveh minutah pritisnite gumb PBC na AP-ju (dostopni točki) in počakajte,
da se vzpostavi povezava.
• Povezava z uporabo možnosti PIN : Izberite PIN (osebna identifikacijska številka).
N Prikaže se sporočilo s kodo PIN. V dveh minutah vnesite kodo PIN v napravo AP.
Izberite OK in počakajte, da se vzpostavi povezava.
N Če se povezava ne vzpostavi, poskusite znova.
N Če povezava ni vzpostavljena, čeprav ste znova poskusili, ponastavite
dostopno točko. Oglejte si priročnike za posamezne dostopne točke.
• Povezava z uporabo možnosti Security Key :
Če izberete Security Key, se prikaže okno za vnos. Vnesite varnostni ključ in
pritisnite Modri gumb.
N Če se povezava ne vzpostavi, poskusite znova.
Wireless Network Setup
Security Key
n Move Number EEnter R Return
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Number
Lowercase
Delete
Done
* *
Wireless Network Setup
Select a network
n Move EEnter R Return
Search
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Security Key
3/9
Press the PBC button on the access point.
Access Point Name : AP_3
Cancel
Press OK After input TV’s Pincode in the access
point’s setup.
Access Point Name : AP_3
PIN Code : 12345678
OK Cancel
Wireless Network Setup
Security Key
n Move Number EEnter R Return
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
0~9 Number
Lowercase
Delete
Done
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 31 10/20/2009 4:54:26 PMSlovenščina - 32
Če varnostni ključ ni nastavljen : Če je varnostna nastavitev AP-ja, ki podpira
WPS, NONE (BREZ), lahko izberete PBC, PIN, None Security. None Security
omogoča povezavo z AP-jem neposredno brez uporabe funkcije WPC.
N Postopek za PBC, PIN je enak zgornjemu. Oglejte si ga, če je varnostni ključ že
nastavljen.
N Če se povezava ne vzpostavi, poskusite znova.
Ad-hoc : Z mobilno napravo se lahko povežete brez dostopne točke prek brezžičnega
zaščitnega ključa USB z uporabo enakovrednega omrežja.
• Povezava z novo napravo Ad-hoc
1. Izberite Select a network in prikaže se seznam naprav.
2. Ko ste na seznamu naprav, pritisnite modri gumb na daljinskem upravljalniku ali izberite Ad-hoc.
N Prikaže se sporočilo The existing network system may have limited functionality. Do you want to change the network
connection?.
3. V napravo, ki jo želite povezati, vnesite generirani Network Name(SSID) in Security Key.
• Povezava obstoječe naprave Ad-hoc
1. Izberite Select a network, in prikaže se seznam naprav.
2. Na seznamu naprav izberite želeno napravo.
3. Če je bil uporabljen varnostni ključ, ga znova vnesite.
N Če omrežje ne deluje normalno, znova preverite Network Name(SSID) in Security Key.
Če je Security Key nepravilen, je morda vzrok za nepravilno delovanje.
Wireless Network Setup - Auto
Če želite povezati AP, mora podpirati DHCP.
Brez DHCP-ja je mogoče povezati samo naprave, ki podpirajo začasni način.
1. Nastavite Network Type na Wireless.
2. Izberite Wireless Network Setup.
3. Nastavite Internet Protocol Setup na Auto.
N Internetni protokol se samodejno nastavi.
4. uporabo možnosti Select a network izberite omrežje.
5. Izberite Network Test da preverite povezljivost omrežja.
Wireless Network Setup - Manual
Za brezžično povezavo z omrežjem z uporabo statičnega naslova IP morate nastaviti internetni protokol (IP). (Oglejte si 29. stran)
N Za podrobnejše informacije o statičnem naslovu IP si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za vaš brezžični delilnik IP.
1. Nastavite Network Type na Wireless.
2. Izberite Wireless Network Setup.
3. Nastavite Internet Protocol Setup na Manual.
4. Nastavite možnosti IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway in DNS Server.
N Če omrežje nastavljate ročno, pritisnite številske gumbe na daljinskem upravljalniku.
5. Z uporabo možnosti Select a network izberite omrežje.
6. Izberite Network Test da preverite povezljivost omrežja.
* *
Wireless Network Setup
Select a network
n Move EEnter R Return
Search
Ad-hoc
AP_1
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
PBC
PIN
Security Key
3/9
The existing network system may have limited
functionality. Do you want to change the network
connection?
Yes No
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 32 10/20/2009 4:54:26 PMSlovenščina - 33
Priključitev naprave USB
1. Za vklop televizorja pritisnite gumb POWER.
2. Napravo USB, v kateri so foto in glasbene datoteke, priključite na vtičnico USB ob strani
televizorja.
N Vtičnica USB 1(HDD) se uporablja tudi kot vtičnica HDD. HDD (trdi disk) je naprava, ki
shranjuje digitalno šifrirane podatke.
N Media Play podpira samo naprave USB MSC (Mass Storage Class). MSC je samo
masovna prenosna naprava. MSC-ji so ključi in bralniki pomnilniških kartic MSC-ji so ključi,
bralniki pomnilniških kartic, trdi diski USB itd. (zvezdišča USB niso podprta.)
N Protokol MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) ni podprt.
N Datotečni sistem podpira samo FAT16/32 (datotečni sistem NTFS ni podprt).
N Priključite trdi disk USB na namenska vrata USB1 (HDD). Če pa priključena naprava potrebuje visoko moč, je USB1 (HDD) morda
ne bo podpiral.
N Nekatere vrste digitalnih fotoaparatov in avdio naprav z USB-jem morda ne bodo združljive s tem televizorjem.
N Priključite neposredno na vrata USB na televizorju. Če uporabljate ločeno kabelsko povezavo, lahko pride do težav pri združljivosti
z USB-jem.
N Preden napravo priključite na televizor, naredite varnostno kopijo datotek, da se ne poškodujejo ali izgubijo. Podjetje SAMSUNG ne
odgovarja za poškodbe ali izgubo datotek.
N Med nalaganjem naprave USB ne izključite.
N Naprava MSC podpira datoteke MP3 in JPEG, naprava PTP pa samo datoteke JPEG.
N Zaporedna oblika zapisa JPEG je podprta.
N Višja kot je ločljivost slike, dalj časa se bo slika nalagala na zaslon.
N Največja podprta ločljivost datotek JPEG je 15360 x 8640 slikovnih pik.
N Pri nepodprtih ali poškodovanih datotekah se prikaže sporočilo Not Supported File Format.
N Če je foto datotek več kot 4000 (ali glasbenih datotek več kot 3000), datoteke, ki presegajo omejitev 4000, morda ne bodo
prikazane na seznamu fotografij (ali glasbe).
N Datotek MP3 z DRM-jem, prenesenih z mesta, ki ni brezplačno, ni mogoče predvajati.
N Upravljanje digitalnih pravic (DRM) preprečuje nezakonito uporabo digitalne predstavnosti zaradi zaščite avtorskih pravic.
N Ko se giblje na sliko, nakladanje, lahko traja nekaj sekund.
❑ Uporaba funkcije predvajanja predstavnosti
Gumb Delovanje
▲/▼/◄/► Za premikanje kazalca in izbiro elementa.
ENTERE
Za izbiro trenutno izbranega elementa.
Za predvajanje ali začasno ustavitev diaprojekcije ali glasbenih datotek.
Za predvajanje ali začasno ustavitev diaprojekcije ali glasbene datoteke.
RETURN Za vrnitev v prejšnji meni.
TOOLS Za izbiro različnih funkcij v menijih fotografij in glasbe.
Za zaustavitev trenutne diaprojekcije ali glasbene datoteke.
Za skok na prejšnjo/naslednjo skupino.
INFO Za prikaz informacij.
MEDIA.P Za preklop v način Media Play ali iz njega.
DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays
DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com
with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Predvajanje predstavnosti
Stranska plošča televizorja
Pogon USB
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 33 10/20/2009 4:54:27 PMSlovenščina - 34
Uporaba funkcije predvajanja predstavnosti
TTa funkcija omogoča ogled oziroma poslušanje foto in glasbenih datotek, ki so shranjene v napravi USB MSC (Mass Storage Class).
Morda ne bo mogoče predvajati večpredstavnostnih datotek brez veljavnih licenc.
❑ Odpiranje menija predvajanja predstavnosti
1. Pritisnite gumb MENU. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Application in
nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Media Play (USB & DLNA), in nato
pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
O Pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku, da prikažete meni
Media Play.
O S pritiskanjem gumba SOURCE na daljinskem upravljalniku izberite USB ali
DLNA in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
3. Pritisnite rdeči gumb in nato s pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite ustrezni
pomnilnik USB (v primeru priključitve prek zvezdišča). Pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Ta funkcija je odvisna od pomnilniške naprave USB ki je povezana s
televizorjem.
N Ime izbrane naprave USB se prikaže na spodnjem levem delu zaslona.
4. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite ikono (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) in
nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Za izhod iz načina Media Play pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem
upravljalniku.
N V tem načinu lahko uživate v filmskih izrezkih, ki so na voljo v možnosti igre,
ni pa mogoče predvajati same igre.
❑ Varno odstranjevanje pomnilniške naprave USB
Napravo lahko varno odstranite s televizorja.
1. Na zaslonu s seznamom datotek za predvajanje predstavnosti ali med
predvajanjem diaprojekcije, glasbene ali filmske datoteke pritisnite gumb
TOOLS.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Remove Safely in nato pritisnite gumb
ENTERE.
3. Odstranite napravo USB s televizorja.
❑ Screen Display
1. Trenutni standard razvrščanja : V tem polju je prikazan trenutni standard razvrščanja datotek.
2. Ogled skupin : Označeni sta razvrščena skupina in trenutno izbrana fotografija.
3. Trenutno izbrana datoteka : Označena je trenutno izbrana datoteka.
4. Informacije o izbiri elementov : Prikazuje število fotografij, ki ste jih izbrali z rumenim gumbom.
5. Trenutna naprava : Prikazuje ime trenutno izbrane naprave.
N Rdeči gumb (Device) : Za izbiro priključene naprave.
6. Elementi pomoči
• Zeleni (Favourites Setting) gumb : Za spremembo nastavitve priljubljenih za izbrano datoteko. Gumb pritiskajte, dokler se ne
prikaže želena vrednost.
• Rumeni gumb (Select) : Za izbiro datoteke s seznama datotek. Izbrane datoteke so označene s simbolom c. Če želite izbiro
datoteke preklicati, ponovno pritisnite rumeni gumb.
• Gumb TOOLS (Tools) : Za prikaz menijev z možnostmi. (Meni orodij se spremeni glede na trenutno stanje.)
• Gumb R RETURN (Return) : Za vrnitev na prejšnji meni.
Folder Preference Basic View Timeline Colour
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349.
JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
../ folder name/
Photo
USB Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
Movie
USB Device RReturn
Preference Basic View Timeline Color Folder
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
3
1
2
1File(s) Selected
4
5 6
Photo
USB Device Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return
c
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 34 10/20/2009 4:54:32 PMSlovenščina - 35
Urejanje seznama fotografij / glasbe / filmov
Basic View
Za prikaz map v pomnilniški napravi USB. Če izberete mapo in pritisnete gumb
ENTERE, se prikažejo samo foto datoteke v izbrani mapi.
N Če so datoteke razvrščene po standardu Basic View, datotek priljubljenih ni
mogoče nastaviti.
Folder
Za razvrstitev datotek po mapah. Če je v USB-ju več map, so foto datoteke
prikazane po posameznih mapah. Prva je prikazana datoteka v korenski mapi,
ostale pa so prikazane po abecednem redu.
Preference → ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★ , ★ ★ ★
Za razvrstitev datotek po pomembnosti (Priljubljene).
N Spreminjanje nastavitev priljubljenih
Na seznamu fotografij izberite želeno in pritiskajte zeleni gumb, dokler se ne
prikaže želena nastavitev.
N Zvezdice se uporabljajo samo za združevanje. Na primer nastavitev 3 zvezdic
nima prednosti pred nastavitvijo 1 zvezdice.
Timeline (Photo / Movie)
Za razvrstitev in prikaz naslovov glasbene ali filmske po simbolih/številkah/abecedi/v
posebnem zaporedju.
Title (Music / Movie)
Za razvrstitev naslovov glasbenih datotek po simbolih/številkah/abecedi/v posebnem
zaporedju ter prikaz glasbene datoteke.
❑ Photo
Colour → Red / Yellow / Green / Blue / Magenta / Black / Gray /
Unclassified
Za razvrstitev fotografij po barvi. Informacije o barvah fotografij lahko spremenite.
N Pred razvrščanjem fotografij po barvah nastavite Use Colour View na On v meniju Setup.
❑ Music
Artist
Za razvrstitev glasbenih datotek glede na izvajalca po simbolih/številkah/abecedi/v posebnem zaporedju.
Mood → Energetic / Rhythmical / Sad / Exciting / Calm / Unclassified
Za razvrstitev glasbenih datotek po vzdušju. Informacije o vzdušju glasbe lahko spremenite.
Genre
Za razvrstitev glasbenih datotek po žanru.
Folder Preference Basic View Title Artist
1
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
usermanual Heaven
NPKI
▶
1
▶
▶
▶
▶
../ folder name/
Music
USB Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder
▶
▶
Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
▶
▶ ◀
MOVIE_005
.avi
Preference Basic View Timeline Color Folder
Mar.01.2009
IMG_0343
.JPG
▶
▶
IMG_03496
.JPG
IMG_03496
.JPG
Mar Apr Jun Nov
IMG_0335.JPG
1/67
▶
▶
2009
◀
IMG_03496
.JPG
Photo
USB Device Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 35 10/20/2009 4:54:38 PMSlovenščina - 36
Meni z možnostmi za seznam fotografij / filmov / glasbe
1. Pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Photo, Music, Movie, nato pritisnite gumb
ENTERE.
3. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno datoteko.
N Izbiranje več datotek
- S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno datoteko. Nato pritisnite rumeni
gumb.
- Če želite izbrati več datotek, ponovite zgornji postopek.
- Poleg izbrane datoteke se prikaže oznaka c.
4. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
N Meni z možnostmi se spremeni glede na trenutno stanje.
Play Current Group
V tem meniju lahko predvajate diaprojekcijo, sestavljeno samo iz foto datotek v
trenutno izbrani skupini razvrščanja.
Deselect All (če je izbrana vsaj ena datoteka)
Za preklic izbire vseh datotek.
N Oznaka c ki pomeni, da je določena datoteka izbrana, se skrije.
Information
Prikaz informacij o foto/glasbeni/filmski datoteki. Na enak način si lahko ogledate
informacije o datotekah tudi med diaprojekcijo.
O Za ogled informacij pritisnite gumb INFO.
Remove Safely
Za varno odstranjevanje naprave s televizorja.
❑ Photo
Slide Show
V tem meniju lahko predvajate diaprojekcijo foto datotek, shranjenih v pomnilniški
napravi USB.
Change Group (če je ključ razvrščanja Colour)
Spremenite lahko informacije o barvah izbrane foto datoteke (ali skupine datotek), da jo premaknete iz ene barvne skupine v drugo.
N S tem ne spremenite dejanskih barv fotografije.
N Informacije o skupini trenutne datoteke se posodobijo in fotografije se premaknejo v novo barvno skupino.
N Če želite spremeniti informacije za več datotek, s pritiskom rumenega gumba izberite želene datoteke.
❑ Music
Change Group (če je ključ razvrščanja Mood)
Informacije o vzdušju glasbenih datotek lahko spremenite. Informacije o skupini trenutne datoteke se posodobijo in datoteka se
premakne v novo skupino. Če želite spremeniti informacije za več datotek, izberite datoteke s pritiskanjem rumenega gumba.
Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Folder Preference Basic View Title Artist
1
1
▶
▶
../ folder name/
Sky
When I Dream
3/4
Carol kidd
Mr A-Z
2009
Pop
NPKI
usermanual Heaven
▶
NPKI
Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
Music
USB Device Select T Tools R Upper Folder
MOVIE_004
MOVIE_003 .avi
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_005
.avi
MOVIE_007
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_006
.avi
▶
▶
Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
Basic View Timeline Colour Folder Preference
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Change Group
Information
Remove Safely
Photo
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 36 10/20/2009 4:54:43 PMSlovenščina - 37
Meni z možnostmi za diaprojekcije / predvajanje glasbe / predvajanje filmov
1. Med predvajanjem diaprojekcije (ali ogledom fotografije) ali glasbe ali filma pritisnite
gumb TOOLS, da nastavite možnost.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite želeno možnost, nato pritisnite gumb
ENTERE.
Picture Setting / Sound Setting
Za izbiro slikovnih in zvočnih nastavitev.
Information
Za prikaz informacij o datoteki.
Remove Safely
Za varno odstranjevanje naprave s televizorja.
❑ Meni z možnostmi za diaprojekcijo
Stop Slide Show / Start Slide Show
Diaprojekcijo lahko zaženete ali ustavite.
Slide Show Speed → Slow / Normal / Fast
Za izbiro hitrosti diaprojekcije.
N Ta funkcija je na voljo samo med diaprojekcijo.
N Med predvajanjem diaprojekcije lahko hitrost spremenite tudi s pritiskanjem
gumba π (REW) ali μ (FF).
Slide Show Effect
Za izbiro učinka prehoda zaslona, ki naj se uporabi v diaprojekciji.
• None / Fade1 / Fade2 / Blind / Spiral / Checker / Linear / Stairs / Wipe /
Random
N Ta funkcija je na voljo samo med diaprojekcijo.
Rotate
Fotografije, shranjene v pomnilniški napravi USB, lahko zasukate.
N Vsakič ko pritisnete gumb ◄, zasukate sliko za 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ ali 0˚.
N Vsakič ko pritisnete gumb ►, zasukate sliko za 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ ali 0˚.
N Zasukana fotografija se ne shrani.
Zoom
Fotografije, shranjene v pomnilniški napravi USB, lahko povečate. (x1 → x2 → x4)
N Če želite povečano fotografijo premakniti, najprej pritisnite gumb ENTERE, nato pa pritiskajte gumbe ▲/▼/◄/►. Če je
povečana slika manjša od originalne velikosti zaslona, slike ni mogoče premakniti na drugo mesto.
N Povečana fotografija se ne shrani.
Background Music
Med ogledom diaprojekcije lahko izberete glasbo za ozadje.
N To funkcijo je mogoče uporabiti samo, če so v napravi USB shranjene glasbene in foto datoteke.
N Za spremembo načina glasbe za ozadje morate naložiti glasbene datoteke. Za nalaganje predvajajte glasbene datoteke v
kategoriji glasbe.
❑ Meni z možnostmi za predvajanje glasbe
Repeat Mode → On / Off
Za ponavljajoče se predvajanje glasbenih datotek.
❑ Meni z možnostmi za predvajanje filmov
Picture Size → Fit / Original
Za predvajanje videa v velikosti zaslona ali v izvirni velikosti.
Caption Setting
Za nastavitev napisov za film.
Tools
Tools
Stop Slide Show
Slide Show Speed : Normal
Slide Show Effect : Fade1
Rotate
Zoom
Background Music
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
U Move E Enter eExit
Tools
Repeat Mode ◄ On ►
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Remove Safely
U Move Adjust eExit
Tools
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Picture Size : Fit
Caption Setting
Information
Remove Safely
U Move Enter eExit
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 37 10/20/2009 4:54:44 PMSlovenščina - 38
Ogled fotografije ali diaprojekcije
❑ Ogled diaprojekcije
N V diaprojekcijo bodo vključene vse datoteke iz razdelka s seznamom datotek.
N Med diaprojekcijo so datoteke prikazane v zaporedju od trenutno prikazane
datoteke naprej.
N Fotografije v diaprojekciji si sledijo tako, kot so razvrščene v razdelku s
seznamom datotek.
N Med diaprojekcijo se lahko samodejno predvajajo glasbene datoteke, če je
možnost Background Music nastavljena na On.
N Ko je prikazan seznam fotografij, za začetek diaprojekcije pritisnite gumb
∂(Predvajaj)/ENTERE na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Kontrolni gumbi za diaprojekcijo.
ENTERE Za predvajanje/začasno zaustavitev diaprojekcije.
Za predvajanje diaprojekcije.
Za začasno zaustavitev diaprojekcije.
Za ustavitev diaprojekcije in vrnitev na seznam fotografij.
/ Za spremembo hitrosti predvajanja diaprojekcije.
T TOOLS Za izbiro različnih funkcij v menijih za fotografije.
❑ Predvajanje trenutne skupine
1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ se pomaknite na razdelek s ključi razvrščanja.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite standard razvrščanja.
3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ se pomaknite na razdelek s seznamom skupin.
4. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite skupino.
5. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj). Zažene se diaprojekcija z datotekami izbrane
skupine.
Druga možnost
1. Izberite ključ razvrščanja in nato v razdelku s seznamom datotek izberite
fotografije, ki so v želeni skupini.
N Za pomik na prejšnjo/naslednjo skupino pritisnite gumb π (REW) ali μ (FF).
2. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali▼ izberite Play Current Group, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N V diaprojekciji se bodo predvajale samo fotografije iz izbrane skupine, vključno z izbranimi datotekami.
❑ Za predvajanje diaprojekcije, sestavljene samo iz izbranih datotek
1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno fotografijo v razdelku s seznamom datotek.
3. Pritisnite rumeni gumb.
4. Če želite izbrati več fotografij, ponovite zgornji postopek.
N Levo od izbrane fotografije se prikaže oznaka c.
N Če izberete eno datoteko, diaprojekcija ni mogoča.
N Če želite preklicati izbiro vseh izbranih datotek, pritisnite gumb TOOLS in izberite Deselect All.
5. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE.
N Izbrane datoteke se bodo predvajale v diaprojekciji.
Druga možnost
1. Ko se premaknete v razdelek s seznamom datotek, s pritiskanjem rumenim gumbov izberite želene fotografije.
2. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
3. Z gumbom ▲ ali ▼ izberite Slide Show, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Izbrane datoteke se bodo predvajale v diaprojekciji.
▶
▶
Preference Basic View Timeline Tiltle Folder
Apr
Apr.27.2009
Movie
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
MOVIE_003
.avi
MOVIE_000
.avi
MOVIE_004
.avi
MOVIE_001.avi
1/5
MOVIE_005
.avi
Basic View Timeline Colour Folder Preference
IMG_0335.JPG
4/6
IMG_0349
.JPG
▶
▶
Folder 2
1
Folder 1
1
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Change Group
Information
Remove Safely
Photo
r Normal IMG_0335.JPG 3648x2432 2009/3/15 1/4
USB E Pause lr Previous/Next T Tools R Return
USB Device Favorites Settings Select T Tools R Upper Folder
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 38 10/20/2009 4:54:49 PMSlovenščina - 39
Predvajanje glasbe
❑ Predvajanje glasbene datoteke
1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite glasbeno datoteko za predvajanje.
3. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE.
N Ta meni prikazuje samo datoteke s končnico za datoteke MP3. Datoteke z
drugimi končnicami niso prikazane, tudi če so shranjene v isti napravi USB.
N Izbrana datoteka je prikazana na vrhu, skupaj s časom predvajanja.
N Glasnost glasbe prilagodite z gumbom za glasnost na daljinskem
upravljalniku.
Za izklop zvoka pritisnite gumb M MUTE na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N Če zvok pri predvajanju datotek MP3 ni sprejemljiv, prilagodite Equalizer in SRS TruSurround v meniju zvoka. (Preveč
modulirana datoteka MP3 lahko povzroči težave z zvokom.)
N Trajanje predvajanja glasbene datoteke bo morda prikazano kot ‘00:00:00’, če na začetku datoteke ni informacij o času
predvajanja.
N Gumba π (REW) in μ (FF) med predvajanjem ne delujeta.
N Kontrolni gumbi za predvajanje glasbe
ENTERE Za predvajanje/začasno zaustavitev
filmske datoteke.
Za izhod iz načina predvajanja in vrnitev na
seznam glasbe.
Za predvajanje glasbene datoteke
T TOOLS Za izbiro različnih funkcij v menijih za glasbo.
Za začasno zaustavitev glasbene
datoteke
N Ikona za informacije o glasbenih funkcijah
Če se ponovijo vse glasbene datoteke v mapi (ali izbrani datoteki). Možnost Repeat Mode je nastavljena na On.
Če se vse glasbene datoteke v mapi (ali izbrani datoteki) predvajajo enkrat. Možnost Repeat Mode je nastavljena
na Off.
❑ Predvajanje glasbene skupine
1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ se pomaknite na razdelek s ključi razvrščanja.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite standard razvrščanja.
3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ ali ENTERE se pomaknite na razdelek s seznamom skupin.
4. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj). Datoteke izbrane skupine se bodo začele predvajati.
Druga možnost
1. Izberite ključ razvrščanja in nato v razdelku s seznamom datotek izberite datoteke, ki so v želeni skupini.
N Za pomik na prejšnjo/naslednjo skupino pritisnite gumb π (REW) ali μ (FF).
2. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali▼ izberite Play Current Group, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Predvajajo se glasbene datoteke v skupini razvrščanja, vključno z izbrano datoteko.
❑ Predvajanje izbranih glasbenih datotek
1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno glasbeno datoteko.
3. Pritisnite rumeni gumb.
4. Če želite izbrati več glasbenih datotek, ponovite zgornji postopek.
N Levo od izbrane glasbene datoteke se prikaže oznaka c.
N Če želite preklicati izbiro vseh izbranih datotek, pritisnite gumb TOOLS in izberite Deselect All.
5. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE.
N Predvajale se bodo izbrane datoteke.
r 00:00:02 / 00:04:55
r
1/3
When I Dream r
r
Geek In The Pink Heaven
USB E Pause lr Previous/Next T Tools R Return
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 39 10/20/2009 4:54:49 PMSlovenščina - 40
Predvajanje filmske datoteke
❑ Predvajanje filmske datoteke
1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite film, ki ga želite predvajati.
3. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE.
N Izbrana datoteka se začne predvajati.
N Izbrana datoteka je prikazana na vrhu, skupaj s časom predvajanja.
N Trajanje predvajanja filmske datoteke bo morda prikazano kot ‘00:00:00’, če
na začetku datoteke ni informacij o času predvajanja.
N Gledate lahko zanimive večpredstavnostne datoteke iger, funkcija igranja pa
ni podprta.
N Podprte oblike napisov
Ime Datotečna pripona Programski jezik
Besedilo na osnovi časa MPEG-4 .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt Na osnovi niza
SubViewer .sub Na osnovi niza
Micro DVD .sub ali .txt Na osnovi niza
N Podprte oblike video zapisa
N Kontrolni gumbi za predvajanje videov
ENTERE Za predvajanje/začasno zaustavitev filmske datoteke
Za predvajanje filmske datoteke
Za začasno zaustavitev filmske datoteke
Za izhod iz načina predvajanja in vrnitev na seznam filmov.
T TOOLS Za zagon različnih funkcij v menijih za filme.
◄/► Za preskok filma naprej ali nazaj.
▲/▼ Za pomik na prvo/zadnjo datoteko.
Datotečna
pripona
Vsebnik Video dekoder Zvočni kodek Največja ločljivost sti
*.avi AVI
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.mkv MKV
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.asf ASF
Divx 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
MP3
AC3
LPCM
ADPCM
WMA
720x576
XviD 1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP 1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
Motion JPEG 800x600
*.wmv (VC1) ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080
*.mp4 MP4 (SMP4)
H.264 BP/MP/HP MP3
ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
XVID 1920x1080
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP/MP/HP ADPCM
AAC
1920x1080
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080
*.vro
VRO
VOB
MPEG2 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG1 1920x1080
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG1 AC3
MPEG
LPCM
1920x1080
MPEG2 1920x1080
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
MPEG2
AAC
MP3
1920x1080
H.264 1920x1080
VC1 1920x1080
▶
r
r 00:00:02 / 00:01:55 1/3
MOVIE_000.avi
USB E Pause lr Jump T Tools R Return
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 40 10/20/2009 4:54:50 PMSlovenščina - 41
❑ Predvajanje skupine filmov
1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ se pomaknite na razdelek s ključi razvrščanja.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite standard razvrščanja.
3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ ali ENTERE se pomaknite na razdelek s seznamom skupin.
4. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj). Predvajati se bodo začele samo datoteke izbrane skupine.
Druga možnost
1. Izberite ključ razvrščanja in nato v razdelku s seznamom datotek izberite datoteke, ki so v želeni skupini.
N Za pomik na prejšnjo/naslednjo skupino pritisnite gumb π (REW) ali μ (FF).
2. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS.
3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali▼ izberite Play Current Group, nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Predvajajo se filmske datoteke v skupini razvrščanja, vključno z izbrano datoteko.
❑ Predvajanje izbranih filmskih datotek
1. S pritiskanjem gumba ▼ izberite razdelek s seznamom datotek.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite želeno glasbeno datoteko.
3. Pritisnite rumeni gumb.
N Levo od izbrane filmske datoteke se prikaže oznaka c.
N Če želite preklicati izbiro vseh izbranih datotek, pritisnite gumb TOOLS in izberite Deselect All.
4. Če želite izbrati več filmskih datotek, ponovite zgornji postopek.
5. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE.
N Predvaja se samo izbrana datoteka.
❑ Neprekinjeno predvajanje filma (nadaljevanje predvajanja)
Če zapustite funkcijo predvajanja filma, je film mogoče pozneje predvajati od mesta, kjer ste ga zaustavili.
1. Z gumbom ◄ ali ► v razdelku s seznamom datotek izberite film, ki ga želite predvajati neprekinjeno.
2. Pritisnite gumb ∂ (Predvajaj)/ENTERE.
3. S pritiskom modrega gumba izberite neprekinjeno predvajanje Play Continuously (nadaljevanje predvajanja).
N Film se začne predvajati na mestu, kjer ste ga zaustavili.
N Če je funkcija Cont. Movie Play Help (pomoč za neprekinjeno predvajanje filmov) nastavljena na On (vklop) v meniju Setup
(namestitev), se ob nadaljevanju predvajanja prikaže pojavno sporočilo.
Uporaba menija nastavitve
V meniju nastavitve so prikazane uporabniške nastavitve menija Media Play.
1. Pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku, da prikažete meni Media Play.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite Setup in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
3. S pritiskanjem ▲ ali ▼ izberite želeno možnost.
4. Z gumbom ◄ ali ► izberite možnost.
N Za izhod iz načina Media Play pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem
upravljalniku.
Use Color View → On / Off
Za izbiro razvrščanja fotografij po barvi.
N Če je ta možnost nastavljena na On, se lahko čas nalaganja podaljša zaradi
zbiranja informacij o fotografijah.
Music Repeat Mode → On / Off
Za ponavljajoče predvajanje glasbenih datotek.
Cont. movie play help → On / Off
Za prikaz pojavnih sporočil s pomočjo za neprekinjeno predvajanje filmov.
Get the DivX® VOD registration code
Za prikaz registracijske kode, ki je dodeljena televizorju. Če se povežete s spletnim
mestom podjetja DivX in prek osebnega računa registrirate registracijsko kodo,
lahko prenesete registracijsko datoteko za video na zahtevo. Če zaženete registracijo videa na zahtevo z uporabo funkcije
predajanja predstavnosti, se izvede registracija. Za več informacij o videu na zahtevo DivX® obiščite www.DivX.com.
Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code
Če video na zahtevo DivX® ni registriran, se prikaže koda za deaktiviranje registracije. Če to funkcijo izvedete, ko je video na
zahtevo DivX® registriran, se trenutna registracija videa na zahtevo DivX® deaktivira.
Screen Saver Run Time → 10 min / 20 min / 1 hour
Za nastavitev časa, po preteku katerega naj se prikaže ohranjevalnik zaslona.
Information
Za ogled informacij o priključeni napravi.
Remove Safely
Za varno odstranjevanje naprave s televizorja.
Media Play
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
SETUP
Photo Music Movie Setup
USB eExit
Device
Setup
Move Adjust Return
Use Color View ◄ Off ►
Music Repeat Mode On
Cont. movie play help On
Get the DivX® VOD registration code
Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code
Screen Saver Run Time 10 min
Information
Remove Safely
USB Device
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 41 10/20/2009 4:54:50 PMSlovenščina - 42
Nastavitev omrežja DLNA
Omrežje DLNA omogoča, da si videe in slike, shranjene v računalniku, ogledate prek omrežne povezave na televizorju v načinu Media
Play mode. Tako vam datotek ni treba več kopirati v pomnilnik USB in priključevati naprave na televizor. Če želite uporabiti DLNA,
morate televizor priključiti v omrežje in v računalnik namestiti aplikacijo DLNA.
❑ Diagram omrežne povezave – kabelske
❑ Diagram omrežne povezave – brezžične
1. Za več informacij o konfiguriranju omrežja si oglejte razdelek ‘Nastavitev omrežja’.
N Priporočamo, da televizor in računa. Prvi 3 deli naslova maske podomrežja televizorja in naslova IP računalnika morajo biti
enaki, spremenite samo zadnji del (naslov gostitelja. (npr. naslov IP : 123.456.789.**)
2. Računalnik, v katerega boste namestili program Samsung PC Share Manager, priključite na zunanji modem s kablom LAN.
N TV lahko z računalnikom povežete neposredno, brez povezave prek usmerjevalnika.
Namestitev aplikacije DLNA
Preden lahko predvajate vsebine v računalniku ali na televizorju, morate namestiti aplikacijo. Če želite funkcijo DLNA uporabljati brez
težav, uporabite program na CD-ROM-u, ki je priložen televizorju, ali program Samsung PC Share Manager, ki je primeren za vaš model
televizorja in ki ga lahko prenesete s spletnega mesta podjetja Samsung.
TV
Zunanji modem
(ADSL/VDSL/kabelska televizija)
LAN
PC
LAN
Media Play-DLNA
TV
LAN
PC
ali
1
Stranska plošča televizorja
Samsungova kartica
za brezžični LAN
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 42 10/20/2009 4:54:52 PMSlovenščina - 43
Uporaba aplikacije DLNA
Vsebina zaslona programa
1. Meniji : V aplikaciji so na voljo
naslednji : File, Share, Server, in Help.
2. Kliknite, če želite dati izbrano strežniško
mapo v skupno rabo.
3. Kliknite, če želite preklicati skupno rabo.
4. Kliknite, če želite osvežiti računalniško mapo
in datoteke.
5. Kliknite, če želite sinhronizirati status skupne
rabe.
6. Navedene so računalniške mape in datoteke
za skupno rabo.
7. Navedene so uporabnikove mape, ki so v
skupni rabi.
8. Ime strežnika osebnega računalnika,
prikazano na seznamu naprav funkcije
predvajanja predstavnosti.
Sistemske zahteve
1. V računalnik vstavite programski CD, ki ste ga dobili s televizorjem.
2. Namestitev programa zahteva 30MB prostora na trdem disku.
N Če imate datoteke v skupni rabi, je za 100 datotek potrebnega do 30 MB prostora na trdem disku.
N Če prekličete skupno rabo datotek, se na trdem disku sprosti tudi prostor, ki je bil prej napolnjen z informacijami o sličicah.
Podprte oblike zapisa
• Slika : JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS Vsebnik. Za podrobnosti o podprtih oblikah video zapisa
si oglejte navodila ‘Predvajanje filmske datoteke’.
Namestitev aplikacije
► ►
►
1. Zaženite datoteko Setup.exe na programskem CD-ju, ki ste ga prejeli z izdelkom.
N Sicer pa lahko datoteko prenesete tudi s spletnega mesta www.samsung.com.
2. Namestite program SAMSUNG PC Share Manager, kot prikazujejo spodnje slike.
3. Po končani namestitvi se na namizju prikaže ikona PC Share Manager.
N Za zagon programa dvokliknite ikono.
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 43 10/20/2009 4:54:53 PMSlovenščina - 44
❑ Share
Mapa v skupni rabi
Mapo, ki je shranjena v računalniku, lahko daste v skupno rabo za TV.
Preklic mape v skupni rabi
Skupno rabo mape v računalniku lahko prekličete. V podoknu Shared Folder izberite mapo, nato pa izberite Unshare Folder.
Uveljavitev trenutnih nastavitev
Ta postopek izvedite, kadar je potrebna sinhronizacija zaradi skupne rabe nove mape ali preklica skupne rabe. Meni Set Changed
State uveljavi spremembe za mape v skupni rabi, shranjene v računalniškem programu za skupno rabo.
Ker je uveljavljanje sprememb za notranje podatke zamudno, lahko s to funkcijo uporabnik uveljavi spremembe le, kadar je to zares
potrebno. Dokler ne izberete menija Set Changed State, se spremenjeno stanje za mapo v skupni
rabi ne posreduje v strežnik. Spremembe za mape v skupni rabi se ne posredujejo v računalnik, dokler ne izberete
menija Set Changed State.
Nastavitev dovoljenja za dostop
Da lahko najde računalnik, mora biti TV v oknu Access Permission Settings (Nastavitve dovoljenja za dostop) nastavljen na Set
Device Policy. Poleg tega morata biti računalniški strežnik in TV priključena v isto podomrežje.
• Način : Najprej izberite meni Share in nato Set Device Policy. Zavrnjeni elementi so obarvani sivo. Dovoljenja za dostop lahko
spreminjate z gumbom Allow Accept/Deny. Če želite element izbrisati, ga izberite in izbrišite z možnostjo Delete Item.
❑ Server
Server
Računalnik lahko uporabljate ali nehate uporabljati kot strežnik.
Avviamento del server all’avvio di Windows
Lahko določite, ali naj se računalniški strežnik samodejno zažene ob zagonu programa Windows.
Change server name
Raèunalniški strežnik lahko preimenujete.
Uporaba funkcije DLNA
❑ Uporaba menija DLNA
Standard DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) omogoča predvajanje vsebine,
shranjene v strežniku DLNA (običajno računalnik), ki je priključen na televizor, ali
prek omrežja.Predvajanje predstavnosti omogoča predvajanje vsebine, shranjene v
pomnilniški napravi USB, ki je priključena na televizor, DLNA pa omogoča predvajanje
vsebine, shranjene v strežniku DLNA (v računalniku), ki je povezan s televizorjem
ali prek omrežja. Postopki za uporabo vsebine so enaki kot pri predvajanju
predstavnosti.
1. Pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku, da prikažete meni DLNA.
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite ikono (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), in nato
pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Za izhod iz načina DLNA pritisnite gumb MEDIA.P na daljinskem upravljalniku.
N DLNA ne podpira naslednjih funkcij.
- Glasbe za ozadje in nastavitve glasbe za ozadje.
- Razvrščanja datotek po nastavitvah v mapah s fotografijami, glasbo in filmi.
- Spreminjanja informacij o skupinah.
- Kopiranje/brisanje.
- Varna odstranitev.
- Funkcije gumba REW/FF (π/μ) med predvajanjem filma.
- Playing Movie Continuously (Resume Play) function.
N Funkcija preskoka morda ne bo delovala pri nekaterih vsebnikih, kot sta asf in mkv.
N Divx DRM, večkanalni zvok in vdelani napisi niso podprti.
N Program Samsung PC Share manager mora biti dovoljen s strani požarnega zida računalnika.
N Pri DLNA drugih proizvajalcev funkcija preskoka (tipki ◄/►) ali začasne zaustavitve med predvajanjem filma morda ne bo
delovala; odvisno od informacij o vsebini.
N Čas predvajanja med samim predvajanjem filma morda ne bo prikazan.
Media Play
Photo Music Setup
PHOTO
USB : USB
851.98MB/995.00MB Free
Movie
USB Device Return
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 44 10/20/2009 4:54:54 PMSlovenščina - 45
Anynet
+
Povezava naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet
+
Anynet
+
je funkcija, ki omogoča upravljanje vseh povezanih Samsungovih naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet
+,
z daljinskim upravljalnikom
Samsungovega televizorja. Sistem Anynet
+
lahko uporabljate pri Samsungovih napravah, ki imajo funkcijo Anynet
+.
Prepričajte se, da
ima vaša Samsungova naprava to funkcijo, in sicer tako, da preverite, ali je na njej logotip Anynet
+
.
❑ Povezava s televizorjem
1. Vtičnico HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ali 4) na televizorju in vtičnico HDMI OUT na ustrezni napravi, ki podpira Anynet+, povežite s kablom
HDMI.
❑ Povezava z domačim kinom
1. Vtičnico HDMI IN (1, 2(DVI), 3 ali 4 na televizorju in vtičnico HDMI OUT na ustrezni napravi, ki podpira Anynet
+
, povežite s kablom
HDMI.
2. Vtičnico HDMI IN na domačem kinu in vtičnico HDMI OUT na ustrezni napravi v sistemu Anynet
+
povežite s kablom HDMI.
N Z optičnim kablom povežite (optično) vtičnico za digitalni avdio izhod na televizorju in digitalni avdio vhod na domačem kinu.
N Če uporabite zgornjo povezavo, omogoča optična vtičnica samo izhod 2-kanalnega zvoka. Slišali boste samo zvok iz sprednjega
levega in desnega zvočnika ter globokotonca domačega kina. Za 5.1-kanalni zvok povežite (optično) vtičnico za digitalni avdio
izhod na predvajalniku DVD ali kabelskem/satelitskem sprejemniku
(npr. naprava, ki podpira Anynet
+
, 1 ali 2) neposredno z ojačevalnikom ali domačim kinom in ne s televizorjem.
N Povežite samo en domači kino.
N Napravo, ki podpira Anynet
+
, lahko povežete s kablom HDMI 1.3. Nekateri kabli HDMI morda ne podpirajo funkcij Anynet
+
.
N Anynet
+
deluje, ko je naprava AV, ki je združljiva s sistemom Anynet
+
, v stanju pripravljenosti ali pa vklopljena.
N Anynet
+
podpira skupno največ 12 naprav AV. Povežete lahko do 3 naprave iste vrste.
N Anynet
+
istočasno podpira do 3 naprave.
Naprava,
ki podpira
Anynet
+,
1
Naprava,
ki podpira
Anynet
+,
2
Naprava,
ki podpira
Anynet
+,
3
Televizor
Kabel HDMI 1.3
Kabel HDMI 1.3
Kabel HDMI 1.3
Televizor
Naprava, ki podpira Anynet+, 1
Naprava, ki podpira Anynet
+,
2 Naprava, ki podpira Anynet
+,
3
Kabel HDMI 1.3
Kabel HDMI 1.3
Kabel HDMI 1.3
Kabel HDMI 1.3
Domači kino
Optični kabel
Naprava,
ki podpira
Anynet
+,
4
Kabel HDMI 1.3
Naprava, ki podpira Anynet
+,
4
Kabel HDMI 1.3
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 45 10/20/2009 4:54:55 PMSlovenščina - 46
Nastavitev sistema Anynet
+
❑ Nastavitev funkcije Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
T Pritisnite gumb TOOLS, da prikažete meni Tools. Meni Anynet
+
lahko prikažete tudi
tako, da izberete Tools → Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) → Off / On
Da lahko uporabite funkcijo Anynet
+
, mora biti možnost Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC)
nastavljena na On.
N Ko je funkcija Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) onemogočena, so deaktivirane vse operacije,
ki so povezane s sistemom Anynet
+
.
Auto Turn Off → No / Yes
Nastavitev samodejnega izklopa naprave, ki podpira Anynet+, ob izklopu televizorja.
N Da lahko uporabljate funkcijo Anynet+, mora biti aktivni vir na daljinskem
upravljalniku televizorja nastavljen na TV.
N Če nastavite Auto Turn Off na Yes, se bodo ob izklopu televizorja izklopile tudi
povezane zunanje naprave. Če zunanja naprava še snema, se morda ne bo
izklopila
Preklapljanje med napravami, ki podpirajo Anynet
+
1. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Device List, in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE.
N Prikaže se seznam naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet
+
in ki so povezane s televizorjem.
Če ne uspete najti želene naprave, pritisnite rdeči gumb za iskanje naprav.
N Samo če nastavite Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC) na On v meniju Setup se prikaže meni
Device List.
3. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite določeno napravo in nato pritisnite gumb
ENTERE Izvede se preklop na želeno napravo.
N Preklop na izbrane naprave traja največ 2 minuti. Operacije preklopa, ki poteka, ni mogoče preklicati.
N Čas, ki je potreben za iskanje naprav, je odvisen od števila povezanih naprav.
N Če ste zunanjo napravo izbrali s pritiskanjem gumba SOURCE, funkcije Anynet
+
ni mogoče uporabiti. Ne pozabite preklopiti na
zunanjo napravo v sistemu Anynet
+
z uporabo gumba TOOLS.
❑ Meni Anynet
+
Vsebina menija Anynet
+
je odvisna od vrste in stanja naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet
+
in ki so priključene na televizor.
Meni Anynet
+
Opis
View TV Način Anynet
+
se preklopi v način televizijskega oddajanja.
Device List Za prikaz seznama naprav, ki podpirajo Anynet
+.
(ime_naprave) MENU Za prikaz menijev povezane naprave. Npr. če je priključen snemalnik DVD, se prikaže meni diska
snemalnika DVD.
(ime_naprave) INFO Za prikaz menija predvajanja povezane naprave. Npr. če je priključen snemalnik DVD, se prikaže
meni predvajanja snemalnika DVD.
Recording: (*snemalnik) Za zagon snemanja. (Meni deluje samo za naprave, ki podpirajo snemanje.)
(*snemalnik) Reserve Recording Za omogočanje rezerviranja snemanja za snemalnik. (Na voljo samo za naprave, ki podpirajo
funkcijo rezerviranja snemanja.)
Stop Recording: (*snemalnik) Za ustavitev snemanja.
Receiver Zvok se predvaja prek sprejemnika.
se nadaljuje …
Application
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ►
Content Library
Internet@TV
Home Network Centre
U Move EEnter R Return
Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) : On ▶
Auto Turn Off : Yes
U Move EEnter R Return
View TV
Device List
Recording : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver : On
Setup
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 46 10/20/2009 4:54:56 PMSlovenščina - 47
❑ Gumbi na daljinskem upravljalniku televizorja, ki so na voljo v načinu Anynet+
Vrsta naprave Stanje delovanja Gumbi na voljo
Naprava, ki podpira
Anynet
+
Po preklopu na napravo, ko se na
zaslonu prikaže meni ustrezne naprave.
Številski gumbi
▲/▼/ Gumb ◄/►/ENTERE
Barvni gumbi/gumb EXIT
Po preklopu na napravo, medtem ko se
predvaja datoteka.
(previjanje nazaj) / (previjanje naprej) (ustavi) /
(predvajaj) / (začasno ustavi)
Naprava z vgrajenim
kanalnikom
Po preklopu na napravo, ko gledate
televizijski program
Gumb P /
Avdio naprava Ko je sprejemnik aktiviran
Gumb = /
Gumb M MUTE
N Funkcija Anynet
+
deluje samo, če je aktivni vir na daljinskem upravljalniku televizorja nastavljen naTV.
N Gumb deluje samo v stanju za snemanje.
N Naprav v sistemu Anynet
+
ni mogoče upravljati z gumbi na televizorju. Naprave, ki podpirajo Anynet
+
je mogoče upravljati samo z
daljinskim upravljalnikom televizorja.
N Daljinski upravljalnik televizorja v določenih razmerah morda ne bo deloval. V tem primeru znova izberite napravo, ki podpira
Anynet
+
.
N Funkcije sistema Anynet
+
niso združljive z izdelki drugih proizvajalcev.
N Delovanje , se lahko razlikuje, odvisno od naprave.
N Če je povezanih več snemalnih naprav, so prikazane kot (*snemalnik), če pa je povezana samo ena , pa je prikazana kot
(*ime_naprave).
Snemanje
S Samsungovim snemalnikom lahko posnamete televizijski program.
1. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Recording (snemalnik) in nato pritisnite gumb
ENTERE. Snemanje se začne.
N Če je več snemalnih naprav
Če je povezanih več snemalnih naprav, so navedene. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼
izberite snemalno napravo in nato pritisnite gumb ENTERE Snemanje se začne.
N Če snemalna naprava ni prikazana
izberite Device List in pritisnite rdeči gumb, da poiščete naprave.
N S pritiskom gumba posnamete, kar trenutno gledate. Če gledate video vsebino iz druge naprave, se posname ta vsebina.
N Pred snemanjem preverite, ali je vtičnica za anteno ustrezno povezana s snemalno napravo. Da anteno pravilno povežete s
snemalno napravo, si oglejte uporabniški priročnik za snemalno napravo.
U Move EEnter R Return
View TV
Device List
Recording : DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver : On
Setup
BN68-02333J-SLN.indb 47 10/20/2009 4:54:56 PMSlovenščina - 48
Poslušanje prek sprejemnika
Zvok lahko poslušate prek sprejemnika namesto prek zvočnikov televizorja.
1. Pritisnite gumb TOOLS. Pritisnite gumb ENTERE, da izberete Anynet
+
(HDMI-CEC).
2. S pritiskanjem gumba ▲ ali ▼ izberite Receiver. S pritiskanjem gumba ◄ ali ► izberite
On ali Off.
N Če snemalnik podpira samo zvok, morda ni prikazan na seznamu naprav.
N Sprejemnik bo deloval, če ste ustrezno povezali optično vhodno vtičnico sprejemnika in
optično izhodno vtičnico TV-ja.
N Če je sprejemnik (domači kino) nastavljen na On, zvok prihaja iz optične vtičnice na
televizorju. Kadar televizor prikazuje običajne signale (DTV), pošilja 5.1-kanalni zvok v
sprejemnik domačega kina. Če je vir digitalna komponenta, kot je predvajalnik DVD, in je s televizorjem povezan prek vhoda HDMI,
bo sprejemnik domačega kina predvajal samo 2-kanalni zvok.
N Pri uporabi funkcije Media Play fse zvok prek sprejemnika morda ne bo predvajal pravilno.
N Ko zvok poslušate prek sprejemnika, je uporaba menijev za zvok omejena.
N Če pride do prekinitve napajanja televizorja, ko je možnost Receiver nastavljena na On, je lahko možnost Speaker Select
nastavljena na External Speaker, ko znova vklopite televizor. (oglejte si 21. stran)
Odpravljanje težav s funkcijo Anynet
+
Težava Rešitev
Anynet
+
ne deluje. • Preverite, ali naprava podpira Anynet
+
. Sistem Anynet
+
podpira samo naprave, ki podpirajo
Anynet
+
.
• Povežite samo en sprejemnik (domači kino).
• Preverite, ali je napajalni kabel naprave, ki podpira Anynet
+
, pravilno povezan.
• Preverite, ali je video kabel/avdio kabel/kabel HDMI 1.3 za napravo, ki podpira Anynet
+
,
